JP2023074782A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To improve game properties in a game machine capable of shifting to a b-time-shortening game state.SOLUTION: A game machine 10 executes a loss display when occurrence of a big win game based on a small win game is disadvantageous in an opening of the small win game, and executes a gain display when occurrence of a big win game based on a small win game becomes advantageous instead of being disadvantageous. After switching from the loss display to the gain display, the loss display is not executed until a big win game occurs. In an intermediate period when advantage/disadvantage for generating a big win game on the basis of a small win game cannot be determined easily, a border display for reporting that advantage/disadvantage cannot be easily determined in an opening of a small win game is executed. The border display is a mode for alternately executing, for example the loss display and the gain display, and a mode in which a movable accessory member 39 is moved so as to overlap with a display surface of a pattern display part 341. The border display may be executed in a special pattern game executed during the intermediate period.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 358

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

As a gaming machine these days, when the number of special figure fluctuations reaches a specified number of times, there are those that shift to a time saving game state (so-called b time saving game state).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2021-74510

By the way, the b time-saving gaming state may be set to a state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state in terms of the expected value of profits that can be obtained when a big win occurs. In this case, during a certain period immediately before shifting to the b time-saving gaming state, the expected value of profit that the player can obtain is smaller than after the transition to the b time-saving gaming state.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to improve playability in a gaming machine capable of transitioning to a b time-saving gaming state.

The game machine according to the present invention is
A shooting means (32) capable of shooting a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (314, 315) provided in a game area where a game ball can flow down;
display means (362, 363, 341) for variably displaying a predetermined pattern (special pattern, decorative pattern) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry area;
variable ball entry means (316) provided in the game area and performing opening and closing operations a plurality of times;
A gaming machine comprising
Update means (41) for updating specific information (ceiling activation remaining counter) based on establishment of a predetermined update condition (execution of a special game) in the variable display;
In a specific game state (low-probability mode), a predetermined profit state (b time-saving game state) at a predetermined timing after the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (ceiling activation remaining counter = 0) Profit state generating means (41) to generate;
Notification control means (51) for performing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (gain display) or in a second notification mode (loss display) different from the first notification mode;
Determination means (41) for executing a predetermined determination (special figure jackpot lottery) based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry area;
When a predetermined game condition (V winning in a small winning game) is established based on a predetermined game operation by a player when the result of the predetermined determination executed by the determination means is a specific determination result. profit generation means (41) for generating a specific profit (jackpot game) in
with
The notification control means, when the result of the predetermined determination performed by the determination means is the result of the specific determination, is configured to perform the predetermined timing ( A switching means (51) for notifying that the specific determination result has been obtained in the first notification mode until the break-even point), and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing. It is characterized by having

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS The perspective view which shows an example of a structure of the gaming machine based on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; The front view which shows an example of the game board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The front view which shows an example of the game board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The front view which shows an example of the game board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main controller of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main controller. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main controller. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an example of a general map reserved storage area in the storage area of the main controller shown in FIG. 8; The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main controller. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of a game information storage area in a storage area of the main controller; The figure which shows typically an example of the performance information display apparatus of a main controller. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a display example on a performance display monitor of the performance information display device; FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of display on the set value display section of the performance information display device; 4 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of main timer interrupt processing executed by a main controller; FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of starting winning processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. 17; FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a first special figure pending command setting process executed in the starting winning process of FIG. 18; FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing an example of a through gate process procedure executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of main processing executed by a main controller; Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of normal figure game control processing executed in the main processing of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the general pattern data setting process executed in the general pattern game control process of FIG. 22 . Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal pattern fluctuation start process executed in the normal pattern game control process of FIG. 22 . Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game control process per normal figure executed in the main process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game control process executed in the main process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure data setting process executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure fluctuation start process executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 21; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 21; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game set value change processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 21; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the specific performance information update process executed in the main process of FIG. 21; FIG. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 36; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 21; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 21; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 21; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 21; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of sub timer interrupt processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of operation detection processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 42; FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of operation button operation detection processing executed in the operation detection processing of FIG. 43; FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of operation detection pattern determination processing executed in the operation detection processing of FIG. 43; FIG. A table showing the relationship between detection patterns and operation statuses. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 42; FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 42; FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table used for setting a variation type (effect pattern type) to be executed when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 47; FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table used for setting a variation type (effect pattern type) to be executed when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 47; FIG. 51(A) is a diagram showing an example of the color of the decorative design, and FIG. 51(B) shows an example of a first stop design selection table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. figure. FIG. 52(A) is a diagram showing an example of the first reserved image display section, the changing image display section and the already changed image display section which are set in the symbol display section in the normal game state, and FIG. 52(B) is a variable game state. And the figure which shows an example of the 2nd pending|holding image display part and the said variable image display part which are set to the pattern display part in a time saving game state. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a change in the reserved image on the first reserved image display section; Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect control process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a conventional production execution order for a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the performance execution order of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention; The figure which shows an example of the distribution table used when the main controller of the gaming machine which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention distributes a jackpot type. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of command determination processing; 4 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of command determination processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a screen in the symbol display section of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention; 60 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a pending continuous effect process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 59; 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of pending continuous effect processing; The figure which shows an example of the table used by the pending|holding continuous production|presentation process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the stop design combination of the decoration design which is variably displayed in the design display part. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the second special figure special effect processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of variation type (effect pattern) setting processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG. 60; 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for setting a variation type (effect pattern); 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for setting a variation type (effect pattern); 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for setting a variation type (effect pattern); 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for setting a variation type (effect pattern); 61 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of variation type (effect pattern) setting processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG. 60; FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a stop symbol combination setting process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 60; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a stop symbol combination setting process; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the performance execution order of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining differences in command determination processing according to the third embodiment of the present invention from the second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining differences in command determination processing according to the third embodiment of the present invention from the second embodiment; FIG. A flow chart for explaining the difference from the second embodiment in the second special figure special effect setting process of the third embodiment of the present invention. 14 is a flow chart for explaining the difference from the second embodiment in the variation type (effect pattern) setting process of the third embodiment of the present invention; 10 is a flowchart for explaining differences from the second embodiment in the variation type (effect pattern) setting process; 10 is a flowchart for explaining differences from the second embodiment in the variation type (effect pattern) setting process; The front view showing an example of the game board of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the feather accessory device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 82; Sectional drawing which shows the principal part of a feather accessory apparatus. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an example of a table or the like used in the main controller of the game machine shown in FIG. 82; The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main controller. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main controller. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of main processing executed by a main controller; Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of normal pattern fluctuation start processing executed in normal pattern game control processing in the main processing of FIG. 88 . Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure fluctuation start process executed in the special figure game control process in the main process of FIG. 88 . The time chart which shows an example of the game progress in the small winning game performed with the gaming machine shown in FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of small winning game control processing executed in the main processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of small hit game control processing. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of small hit game control processing. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of small hit game control processing. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an example of the game flow (transition of game state) in the gaming machine shown in FIG. 82; FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 88; A flow chart showing an example of a procedure of game state transition processing. A flow chart showing an example of a procedure of game state transition processing. A flow chart showing an example of a procedure of game state transition processing. A flow chart showing an example of a procedure of game state transition processing. A flow chart showing an example of a procedure of game state transition processing. A flow chart showing an example of a procedure of game state transition processing. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the game machine shown in FIG. 82; FIG. Flowchart showing an example. 105 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of variation type (effect pattern) setting processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG. 104; A figure showing an example of the production pattern (the 2nd time saving game state continuation production pattern and the 3rd time saving game state transition production pattern) in the special figure game executed in the 2nd time saving game state. The figure which shows the screen example of the design display part in the special figure game performed in the 2nd time saving game state. The figure which shows the screen example of the design display part in the special figure game performed in the 2nd time saving game state. The figure which shows the screen example of the design display part in the special figure game performed in the 2nd time saving game state. The figure which shows the screen example of the design display part in the special figure game performed in the 2nd time saving game state. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of stop symbol combination setting processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG. 104; FIG. The figure which shows an example of the relationship between the number of times of a time saving game, and the stop display combination of a decoration design. FIG. 105 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a time saving number counter process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 104; The figure which shows an example of the table used with the main controller of the game machine based on the 5th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of variation type (effect pattern) setting processing in the command determination processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the game machine shown in FIG. 82; A figure showing an example of the production pattern (the 1st production pattern and the 2nd production pattern) in the 2nd time saving game state. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a stop symbol combination setting process executed in the command determination process; The figure which shows the setting example of the time reduction game frequency|count at the time of 3rd time reduction game state transition in the gaming machine which concerns on the 6th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a game state transition process in the main process executed by the main controller of the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in a main controller of a gaming machine according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention; The figure which shows the screen example of the design display part in the special figure game performed in the 2nd time saving game state. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in a game machine sound lamp control device according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention; The figure which shows the screen example of the design display part in the special figure game performed in the 2nd time saving game state. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a game flow by a gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention; a Timing chart showing an example of the end timing of the first special game started in the time saving game state. The front view which shows an example of a game board. A block diagram showing an example of a special figure reservation storage area provided in the RAM of the main controller. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main controller. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main controller. Flowchart showing the procedure of the first special figure pending command setting process executed in the starting winning process of FIG. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the procedure of through gate processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. 17; FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of normal figure game control processing executed in the main processing of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the general pattern data setting process executed in the general pattern game control process of FIG. 132 . Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal pattern fluctuation start process executed in the normal pattern game control process of FIG. 132 . Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game control process per normal figure executed in the main process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game control process executed in the main process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the first special figure data setting process executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the first special figure game start process executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the first special figure game end processing executed in the special figure game control processing of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the second special figure data setting process executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the second special figure game start process executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the second special figure game end processing executed in the special figure game control processing of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 21; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 21; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 21; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 21; FIG. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 42; FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 42; Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of time-saving game number counter processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG. FIG. 149 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the first variation type (effect pattern) setting process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 149; The figure which shows the example of a screen in a pattern display part. The figure which shows the example of a screen in a pattern display part. 149 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the second variation type (effect pattern) setting process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 149; FIG. 155(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the first time attack effect ending process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 149, and FIG. 155(B) is executed in step S4432 of the command determination process of FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a second time attack effect ending process; FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main controller of the gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention; The front view showing an example of the game board of the gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention. The front view showing an example of the game board of the gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention. The front view showing an example of the game board of the gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention. The front view which shows the operation example of the 1st rotating accessory member provided in the game board. FIG. 4 is a partially broken side view showing the periphery of the first rotating accessory member; FIG. 11 is a view showing an example of visual recognition when the first rotating accessory member performs an effect alone; The front view showing an example of the game board of the gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention. The front view which shows the operation example of the left 2nd rotating accessory member and the right 2nd rotating accessory member which are provided in the game board. The front view showing an example of the game board of the gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention. A side view showing the periphery of the first rotating accessory member and the left second rotating accessory member (the right second rotating accessory member), with a part broken away. The front view which shows the operation example of the 1st rotating accessory member, the left 2nd rotating accessory member, and the right 2nd rotating accessory member. A table showing notification mode types by the first rotating accessory member, the second left rotating accessory member, and the second right rotating accessory member. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of a gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention; A time chart showing an operation example of a rotating accessory member in a special figure game. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 42; A flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the rotation accessory member operation effect setting process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 171 . Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game effect control process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game effect control process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a main part of a gaming machine system including a gaming machine according to an eleventh embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 21 is a time chart showing an output example of a jackpot signal output from the gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention to the hall computer; FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main controller. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of main processing executed by a main controller; Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game control process per normal figure executed in the main process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 178; 178 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 178; 178 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 178; 178 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a jackpot signal output process executed in the main process of FIG. 178; 178 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a jackpot signal output process executed in the main process of FIG. 178; FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 42; FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 42; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining image examples such as a background image on the symbol display section in various game states; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining image examples such as a background image on the symbol display section in various game states; The time chart which shows the other output example of the jackpot signal output to hall computer. The time chart which shows the other output example of the jackpot signal output to hall computer. The front view showing an example of the game board of the gaming machine according to the twelfth embodiment of the present invention. Sectional view showing the main part of the feather accessory device of the game machine shown in FIG. Sectional drawing which shows the principal part of a feather accessory apparatus. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main controller. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main controller. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main controller. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main controller. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main controller. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of starting winning processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. 17; FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the first special figure pending command setting process executed in the starting winning process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the second special figure pending command setting process executed in the starting winning process of Figure 200. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of main processing executed by a main controller; A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of normal pattern fluctuation start processing executed in normal pattern game control processing in the main processing of FIG. 203 . Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game control processing per normal figure executed in the main processing of FIG. 203 . Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game control processing per normal figure executed in the main processing of FIG. 203 . Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 203 . Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 203 . Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure data setting process executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure fluctuation start process executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the second special figure variation pattern setting process B executed in the special figure variation start process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the second special figure variation pattern setting process B executed in the special figure variation start process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the second special figure variation pattern setting process B executed in the special figure variation start process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of small winning game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 203. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of small winning game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 203. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of small winning game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 203. 204 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 203; 204 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 203; 204 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 203; 204 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 203; FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 42; FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 42; FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 42; 224 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of variation type (variation pattern) setting processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG. 223; The figure which shows the example of the screen of the design display part in various game states. The figure which shows an example of the one-shot notification production|presentation of RUSH production|presentation. The figure which shows an example of the battle production|presentation of RUSH production|presentation. The figure which shows an example of the battle production|presentation of RUSH production|presentation. A diagram showing an example of a result effect and a branch effect. FIG. 20 is a front view showing an example of a game board of a game machine according to a thirteenth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 20 is a front view showing an example of a game board of a game machine according to a thirteenth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 20 is a front view showing an example of a game board of a game machine according to a thirteenth embodiment of the present invention; The front view which shows the operation example of the movable rotary accessory member provided in the game board. FIG. 3 is a side view showing the periphery of the movable rotary accessory member with a part cut away. 230 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 230; FIG. 231 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of the main controller of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 230; The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main controller. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main controller. A block diagram showing an example of a general map reservation storage area in the storage area of the main controller. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main controller. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of main processing executed by a main controller; Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of normal game control processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 241 . Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the general pattern data setting process executed in the general pattern game control process of FIG. 242 . A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of normal pattern fluctuation start processing executed in normal pattern game control processing in FIG. 242 . Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game control process per normal figure executed in the main process of FIG. 241 . Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 241 . Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure data setting process executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure fluctuation start process executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. 246 . Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 241 . Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 241 . Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 241 . Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 241 . 4 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the sound lamp control device; FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of operation detection processing executed in the secondary timer interrupt processing of FIG. 243; FIG. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of operation button operation detection processing executed in the operation detection processing of FIG. 254; FIG. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation detection pattern determination process executed in the operation detection process of FIG. 254; FIG. A table showing the relationship between detection patterns and operation statuses. FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 243; FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 243; The figure which shows an example of the 1st stop design selection table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. FIG. 259 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the stop symbol combination setting process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 259; FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game effect setting process executed in the command determination process of FIG. A diagram showing an example of a variation type table used for setting a variation type (effect pattern type) to be executed when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 259. FIG. A diagram showing an example of a variation type table used for setting a variation type (effect pattern type) to be executed when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 259. FIG. A diagram for explaining the movable timing of the movable rotary accessory member. A diagram for explaining the movable mode of the movable rotary accessory member. A diagram for explaining the drive pattern of the movable rotary accessory member. A diagram for explaining the drive pattern of the movable rotary accessory member. A diagram for explaining drive data for driving the movable rotary accessory member. A diagram for explaining the drive pattern and drive data of the movable rotary accessory member. A diagram for explaining the drive pattern and drive data of the movable rotary accessory member. A diagram for explaining the drive pattern of the movable rotary accessory member. A diagram for explaining drive data for driving the movable rotary accessory member. A diagram for explaining the drive pattern and drive data of the movable rotary accessory member. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the role product operation effect setting process executed in the special figure game effect setting process of FIG. 262 . Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the button effect setting process executed in the special figure game effect setting process of FIG. A diagram for explaining button effects. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game effect control process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 243 . Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the movable rotary accessary control process executed in the special figure game effect control process of Figure 278. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the movable rotary accessary control process executed in the special figure game effect control process of Figure 278. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the movable rotary accessary control process executed in the special figure game effect control process of Figure 278. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the movable rotary accessary control process executed in the special figure game effect control process of Figure 278. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the movable rotary accessary control process executed in the special figure game effect control process of Figure 278. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the movable rotary accessary control process executed in the special figure game effect control process of Figure 278. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the movable rotary accessary control process executed in the special figure game effect control process of Figure 278. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the movable rotary accessary control process executed in the special figure game effect control process of Figure 278. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the button effect control process executed in the special figure game effect control process of Figure 278. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the button effect control process executed in the special figure game effect control process of Figure 278. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect control process executed in the secondary timer interrupt process of FIG. 243 . A diagram for explaining drive data for driving the movable rotary accessory member. The front view showing an example of the game board of the gaming machine according to the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 291 is a diagram for explaining the special electric prize winning device of the game machine shown in FIG. 291; FIG. 291 is a diagram for explaining the special electric prize winning device of the game machine shown in FIG. 291; FIG. 294(A) is a block diagram showing an example of part of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 291, FIG. The figure which shows the signal classification output externally. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing output forms of various signals output to the outside of the gaming machine; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing output forms of various signals output to the outside of the gaming machine; FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing an example of a through gate process procedure executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17; FIG. The figure which shows the transition example of a game state. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main controller. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of main processing executed by a main controller; Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of normal game control processing executed in the main processing of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the general pattern data setting process executed in the general pattern game control process of FIG. 301 . A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of normal pattern fluctuation start processing executed in normal pattern game control processing in FIG. 301 . Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game control process per normal figure that is executed in the main process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game control process executed in the main process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure data setting process executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure fluctuation start process executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of special figure game number management processing executed in the main processing of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of special figure game number management processing executed in the main processing of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. FIG. 301 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a special electric starting control process executed in the main process of FIG. 300; FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the V winning jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 300 . Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 300 . Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 300 . Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 300 . Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 300 . Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 300 . FIG. 300 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of signal output processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 300; FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 42; FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 42; FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 42; The figure which shows the example of a screen in a pattern display part. The figure which shows the example of a screen in a pattern display part. The figure which shows the example of a screen in a pattern display part. Flowchart showing . The front view showing an example of the game board of the gaming machine according to the fifteenth embodiment of the present invention. Sectional view showing the main part of the feather accessory device of the game machine shown in FIG. Sectional drawing which shows the principal part of a feather accessory apparatus. FIG. 328 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 328; FIG. 328 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the display control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 328; Explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surface A, and (B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surface B. FIG. Explanatory drawing explaining the back surface C. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an additional data table; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list; FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main controller. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main controller. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of a table used in the main controller of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 328, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of the production flow of special figure game production. The figure which shows an example of the re-lottery production of special figure game production. The figure which shows an example of the re-lottery production of special figure game production. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of starting winning processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. 17; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of main processing executed by a main controller; Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of normal game control processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 346 . Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the general pattern data setting process executed in the general pattern game control process of FIG. 347 . A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of normal pattern fluctuation start processing executed in normal pattern game control processing in FIG. 347 . Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game control process per normal figure that is executed in the main process of Figure 346. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game control process executed in the main process of Figure 346. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure data setting process executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure fluctuation start process executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of special figure game number management processing executed in the main processing of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of special figure game number management processing executed in the main processing of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning game control process executed in the main process of Figure 346. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning game control process executed in the main process of Figure 346. (A) is a diagram showing an example of calculation of the break-even point, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of opening effect of a small winning game. The figure which shows the image example of the opening production of a small hit game. (A) is a diagram showing a modification (border notification) of the opening effect of the small winning game, (B) and (C) are diagrams showing image examples of the modification (border notification) of the opening effect of the small winning game. (A) is an image example of border notification in a special game, and (B) is a diagram showing an image example of V winning display in a small winning game. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 346 . Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 346 . Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 346 . 329 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of main processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the game machine shown in FIG. 328; Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of vibration sensor input monitoring/effect processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 369 . FIG. 369 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 369; FIG. FIG. 369 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 369; FIG. FIG. 369 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 369; FIG. FIG. 369 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 369; FIG. FIG. 369 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 369; FIG. 328 is a flow chart showing an example of a sub timer interrupt process procedure executed by the sound lamp control device of the game machine shown in FIG. 328; 328 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of main processing executed by the display control device of the game machine shown in FIG. 328; (A) is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of command interrupt processing executed by the display control device, and (B) is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of V interrupt processing executed by the display control device. FIG. 378(B) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the V interrupt processing of FIG. 378(B). (A) is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the number of pending balls command process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 379, and (B) shows an example of the procedure of the confirmed command process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 379. FIG. 379 is a flowchart showing an example of a demonstration command processing procedure executed in the command determination processing of FIG. 379; (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of variation pattern command processing executed in the command judgment processing of FIG. 379, (B) shows an example of the procedure of stop type command processing executed in the command judgment processing of FIG. flowchart. 379A is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of continuous notice command processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG. 379, and FIG. flowchart to illustrate. 379(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the operation button operation command processing procedure executed in the command judgment processing of FIG. 379, and (B) shows an example of the error command processing procedure executed in the command judgment processing of FIG. flowchart. FIG. 378(B) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of display setting processing executed in the V interrupt processing of FIG. 378(B). FIG. 378(B) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of display setting processing executed in the V interrupt processing of FIG. 378(B). 385. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of pending image setting processing executed in the display setting processing of FIG. 385, and (B) shows an example of the procedure of warning image setting processing executed in the display setting processing of FIG. FIG. 385 is a flow chart showing an example of the operation button operation process executed in the display setting process of FIG. 385; FIG. 386 is a flow chart showing an example of a comparison process procedure executed in the display setting process of FIG. 385; FIG. FIG. 386 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of button update processing executed in the display setting processing of FIG. 385; FIG. 378(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the transfer setting process procedure executed in the V interrupt process of FIG. 378(B), and (B) is a resident image transfer setting executed in the transfer setting process of FIG. 389(A) 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of processing; FIG. 389A is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of normal image transfer setting processing executed in the transfer setting processing. FIG. 378B is a flow chart showing an example of the drawing process procedure executed in the V interrupt process of FIG. 378(B);

Hereinafter, each embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings for understanding of the present invention. Moreover, each of the following embodiments is an example that embodies the present invention, and does not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First embodiment]
First, a gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 55. FIG.

[Schematic Configuration of Gaming Machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are developed views of the gaming machine 10, and FIGS. Hereinafter, the expressions of front, back, left, right, and up and down used in this embodiment shall be defined by the front and back direction D1, the up and down direction D2, and the left and right direction D3 shown in FIGS.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine comprising a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14. It is installed in the game hall by fixing the outer frame 14.例文帳に追加In this embodiment, a pachinko game machine will be described as an example of a game machine. The present invention can also be applied to game machines.

[Configuration of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by being rotatably supported at its left end by the outer frame 14 . Further, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by being rotatably supported at the left end by the front frame 11 . Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by being rotatably supported by the inner frame 12 at its left end.

The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a selection determination section 21, a firing handle 22, an upper tray 23, a lower tray 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an illumination section 27, and the like.

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23 . The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 7) for switching an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later, depending on whether or not the operation button 20 is pressed. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the operating state (operated or not operated) of the operation button 20 . This operation button 20 is triggered by the operation of the operation button 20 by the player during a predetermined operation reception period in the special game effect executed in the special game that clearly indicates the lottery result of the big win lottery to the player. It is operated to execute the operation button effect etc. to be executed.

Note that the installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper tray 23, and may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as it is a position where the player can operate. Further, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one and may be two or more. Also, the operation button 20 may be provided with a jog dial. In this case, by operating the jog dial, when performing various game settings, selections (items) on various setting screens, such as production stages (background effects), characters, and music for jackpot games, selection frequency of predetermined effects, and jackpot expectations. A desired item can be provisionally selected from game settings such as degrees, and the provisionally selected option (item) can be selected by operating the operation button 20 .

Further, the number of operation means for receiving the operation by the player, such as the operation button 20, may be one, but may be plural. As the operation means, in addition to the operation button 20, for example, a rotatable handle, a rotatable lever, a push-in member that can advance and retreat (reciprocate) forward and backward, up and down, etc., a pattern display section 341 and a sub-movable display, which will be described later. A touch panel provided in the unit 38, or a combination of two or more of these operation means (for example, an operation means that can rotate and move back and forth), etc., and those provided with an operation button 20 on these operation means (for example, a handle or a lever It may be an operation means provided with an operation button 20 or a touch panel on the side.

The selection determining unit 21 is operated by the player, and is a push button that is used when the player performs various game settings by accepting the player's pressing operation in a standby state in which the game is not being executed, for example. be. The various game settings include, for example, settings of characters that appear in game effects, settings of execution frequencies of various effects such as button effects, and settings of the degree of expectation for big wins of various effects. The selection decision unit 21 includes a plurality of selection buttons 21A and decision buttons 21B.

A plurality of selection buttons 21A are operated by the player to provisionally select a desired item from choices (items) on various setting screens when performing various game settings, for example. It includes a select button 212 , a left select button 213 and a right select button 214 . Here, provisional selection means a state in which the content of the provisional selection is confirmed (stored in the RAM 512) by operating the enter button 21B. These selection buttons 211 to 214 are, as shown in FIG. 7, an upper selection operation switch 211a, a lower selection operation switch 211b, a left selection operation switch 211c, and a right selection operation switch for switching input signals to the sound lamp control device 5. 211d. These switches 211 a to 211 d are connected to the input/output I/F of the sound lamp control device 5 . Therefore, in the audio lamp control device 5, it is possible to determine whether or not each selection button 211-214 has been operated based on the input signal of each switch 211a-211d.

Further, in this embodiment, when it is detected that the selection buttons 211 to 214 have been operated, it is determined that the selection buttons 211 to 214 have been operated. Of course, it may be determined that the selection buttons 211 to 214 have been operated when it is detected that the selection buttons 211 to 214 are being operated continuously or the operation has ended. .

On the other hand, the decision button 21B is operated by the player to decide the provisionally selected item. The decision button 21B also includes a decision operation switch 21Ba for switching input signals to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later. The determination operation switch 21Ba is connected to the input/output I/F of the sound lamp control device 5. FIG. Therefore, in the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to determine whether or not the decision operation switch 21Ba has been operated based on the input signal of the decision operation switch 21Ba.

Further, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and decision button 21B, a pattern display section 341 and a sub-movable display section 38, which will be described later, are provided with a touch panel for accepting player's operation. It is also conceivable that it is set as It is also conceivable to provide a rotating member such as a jog dial instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211-214). Also, the selection switches 211a to 211d and the decision operation switch 21Ba (see FIG. 7) are contact type switches or the like, but if they can be used to detect the presence or absence of operation by the player, they can be, for example, piezoelectric elements. may be

The shooting handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by the player to shoot the game ball. In the gaming machine 10, a basic game is played by shooting a game ball from a game ball shooting mechanism 32 described later with a force corresponding to the amount of rotation of the shooting handle 22 by the player. In the game machine 10, when the player operates the shooting handle 22, the game ball shooting mechanism 32 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area every 0.6 seconds.

The upper tray 23 is arranged below the panel 25, stores game balls paid out from a payout device 132 of a payout mechanism 130 described later, and aligns the stored game balls in a row. It is used to lead to the game ball launching mechanism 32 . Further, the lower plate 24 is provided further below the upper plate 23 and is used to store surplus game balls on the upper plate 23 .

The panel 25 is a colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the gaming machine 10 . The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right sides of the upper end portion of the front frame 11, and perform an audio output effect of outputting audio. In addition, the installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end portion of the front frame 11 . In addition, the illumination section 27 incorporates a light source such as a display lamp and an LED, and performs lamp effects according to a lighting color and a blinking mode such as lighting or extinguishing.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launching mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. As shown in FIG. The inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by being rotatably supported at the left end by the front frame 11 as described above. Therefore, the game board 31 , the game ball shooting mechanism 32 and the control unit 33 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 . In FIG. 2, the board surface of the game board 31 is omitted for simplification of illustration.

The control unit 33 is provided on the back side of the game board 31 and has a main control unit 331 and a sub control unit 332 . In the game machine 10 , a command (control signal) for instructing control contents is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332 in one direction. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub-control unit 332 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 includes an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning port 313, a first winning port 314, a second winning port 315, a variable winning port 316, through gates 317L and 317R, an out A mouth 318, a variable display unit 34, a main display section 36, a sub movable display section 38, and a movable accessory member 39 are provided.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending out game balls shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 32 toward a game area on the board surface of the game board 31 . After being shot from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, game balls that do not enter the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315 or the variable winning port 316 are discharged from the out port 318. be done.

Here, the game ball shooting mechanism 32 includes a shooting rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323, as shown in FIG. The launching rail 321 is formed from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 is directed to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It guides. The ball feeding device 322 has driving means such as a solenoid, and feeds game balls stored in the upper tray 23 onto the launch rail 321 one by one. The solenoid 323 is driving means for shooting game balls supplied onto the shooting rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 . In the gaming machine 10 , the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled according to the operation of the shooting handle 22 by the player, and the game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 32 to the game board 31 . In addition, the game ball shooting mechanism 32 may be a mechanism for shooting game balls using other drive means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323 .

Returning to the description of FIG. 4 , the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, the variable winning port 316, and the out port 318 are formed with openings penetrating the game board 31 in the front-rear direction. ing. On the back side of the game board 31, it is possible to individually detect the entry of a game ball corresponding to each of a general winning port 313, a first winning port 314, a second winning port 315, and a variable winning port 316. Ball entering sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, 316a (see FIG. 7) are provided. In addition, the game balls that have passed through the openings of the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, and the out port 318 are collected on the back side of the game board 31, and are detected by an out ball sensor 318a, which will be described later. (see FIG. 7). The through gates 317L and 317R are vertically penetrating gates through which game balls can pass, and have incoming ball sensors 317La and 317Ra (see FIG. 7) capable of individually detecting game balls passing through the through gates 317L and 317R. . In the game board 31, there is a possibility that the game ball hit to the left side area of the game board 31 passes through the through gate 317L, and the possibility that the game ball hit to the right side area of the game board 31 passes through the through gate 317R. There is and. Triggered by the detection of the passage of game balls by the entering ball sensors 317La and 317Ra (see FIG. 7), a normal winning lottery is executed to determine whether or not the second winning opening 315 is to be opened. And, when the lottery result in the normal figure winning lottery is a hit, the game ball can enter the second winning hole 315 by opening the electric accessory 315b, which will be described later. That is, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the probability variable gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the time saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), the game ball can be launched to the left area of the game board 31. So, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning hole 315 even in the normal game state (low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode).

The high-probability mode has a high jackpot probability of winning a jackpot as a result of the jackpot lottery (see FIG. 9B), and is a mode that easily shifts to a jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is executed, whereas the low probability mode. The mode is a mode in which the jackpot probability of winning a jackpot as a result of the jackpot lottery is low (see FIG. 9A), and it is difficult to shift to a jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is executed. In addition, the high-frequency support mode has a high probability of hitting a general pattern that will be a general pattern per lottery result (see FIG. 12 (B)), and the second prize because the operation frequency of the electric accessory 315b described later is high. In contrast to the mode in which the entry of game balls to the mouth 315 is easy to allow, the low frequency support mode has a low probability of winning the general pattern as a result of the general pattern drawing (Fig. 12 (A) ), it is a mode in which it is difficult to allow game balls to enter the second winning hole 315 because the frequency of operation of the electric accessory 315b is low.

The incoming ball sensors 313a to 316a, 317La, 317Ra and the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 7) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331. The detection result of 318 a is input to the main control unit 331 . The main control unit 331 (MPU41) transmits a command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out game balls according to the detection results of the entering ball sensors 313a to 316a. Detecting the entry of a game ball by the entry sensors 313a to 316a is hereinafter sometimes referred to as winning. Also, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) counts the number of out balls based on the detection result of the out ball sensor 318a. The number of out balls counted here coincides with the number of shot game balls shot onto the game board 31 by the game ball shooting mechanism 32 .

The ball entry sensors 313a to 316a, 317La, 317Ra, and the out ball sensor 318a are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors. Any sensor may be used.

In addition, the second winning hole 315 is provided with an electric accessory (electrical role) 315b for switching presence/absence of restriction on entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 . The electric accessory 315b is opened and closed by driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. FIG. In the game board 31, the electric accessory 315b is opened to allow the game ball to enter the second winning port 315, and the electric accessory 315b is closed to allow the game ball to enter the second winning port 315. ball is restricted.

Further, the variable winning hole 316 is provided with an opening/closing door 319 for switching whether or not the entry of game balls into the variable winning hole 316 is restricted. The opening/closing door 319 is opened and closed by a drive means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31 . On the game board 31, opening the opening/closing door 319 enables game balls to enter the variable winning opening 316, and closing the opening/closing door 319 restricts entry of the game ball to the variable winning opening 316. be. The open/close door 319 is moved to a position to open the variable winning opening 316 in the round game in the opening/closing execution mode in the jackpot game, and otherwise waits at a position to close the variable winning opening 316 . As a result, a game ball launched into the right area of the game board 31 in the round game of the jackpot game can enter the variable winning hole 316 .

In the gaming machine 10, the main control unit 331 performs a jackpot lottery when the entry of a game ball into the first prize winning port 314 or the second prize winning port 315 is detected by the ball entering sensor 314a or the ball entering sensor 315a. Then, the main control unit 331 controls the display of the main display section 36 according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. Also, the lottery result by the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 332, and the sub-control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34 according to the lottery result.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, when the game ball entering the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, and the variable winning port 316 is detected by the ball entering sensors 313a to 316a, A preset number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of prize balls when entering the general prize opening 313 is 10, the number of prize balls when entering the first prize opening 314 or the second prize opening 315 is 3, and the ball enters the variable prize opening 316. The number of prize balls in this case is 10. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the result of the lottery performed by the main control unit 331 is a jackpot, the state shifts to a jackpot game state, and a round game described later in which the variable prize winning port 316 is opened is played a predetermined number of times (for example, five times or 16 times) By repeating this, a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

Also, when a game ball wins in the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315, a jackpot lottery is executed. When the result of the lottery is winning, the game shifts to a predetermined jackpot game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the present embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 5R jackpot gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state) and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state. In the 5R jackpot game state, the variable winning port 316 is opened until a predetermined time elapses or until the upper limit number (for example, 9) or more game balls enter the variable winning port 316. The round game is performed five times. It is a game state including run mode. The 16R probability variable jackpot game state is a game state including an open/close execution mode in which round games are performed 16 times, and a larger amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out than in the 5R jackpot game state, which is more advantageous to the player than in the 5R jackpot game state. It is a game state.

As shown in FIG. 4, the variable display unit 34 has a pattern display section 341 such as a liquid crystal display arranged so as to be visible through an opening 31A formed substantially in the center of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. The pattern display section 341 displays still images or moving images, and the display contents of the pattern display section 341 are controlled by the sub-control unit 332 . Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the variable display effect of decorative symbols according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 according to the entry of the ball into the first prize winning port 314 or the second prize winning port 315. , and various image effects such as a special figure game effect executed in conjunction with the variable display effect are performed. Further, the pattern display unit 341 may have a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display. It may further have a touch panel that accepts a touch operation by a person.

For example, the variable display effect of decorative patterns in the pattern display section 341 is achieved by scrolling a plurality of types of decorative patterns with numbers "1" to "9" in order in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the diagonal direction. done. In addition, sub-designs such as other characters or designs may be displayed between the decorative designs. In addition, in this embodiment, there are no sub-symbols, and there are 9 types of decorative patterns, ie, "1" to "9".

In the gaming machine 10, in the special game, the variation display of the decoration symbols is performed so that the variation of all the decoration symbols is stopped after a preset variation display time elapses from the start of the symbol variation display in the symbol display section 341. executed. More specifically, in the variable display of decorative patterns, first, all decorative patterns are changed along a preset variable direction (for example, horizontal direction, vertical direction, etc.), and the fluctuation of a plurality of decorative patterns is stopped in order. Then, when a predetermined time elapses after the variation of the decorative design on all lines is stopped, the variable display of the decorative design is finished.

When the variable display of the ornamental symbols in the symbol display portion 341 is completed, the symbol display portion 341 displays a state in which the ornamental symbols are lined up on one or a plurality of active lines. At this time, the stopped state of the decoration pattern indicates or suggests the lottery result of the big win lottery by the main control unit 331. - 特許庁For example, if the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", "16R probability variable jackpot" or "5R normal jackpot", a state in which decorative patterns of the same type are lined up on the effective line is displayed, clearly indicating that it is a jackpot. be done. In addition, although the jackpot type may be indicated by a combination of decorative symbols on the activated line, it is not necessarily indicated. Specifically, for example, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation big hit", the pattern combination of, for example, "777", which is set as a symbol combination indicating the 16R probability variation big hit among the decorative patterns, is lined up on the effective line. is displayed, or a state in which combinations of the same decorative symbols other than "777" are lined up on the active line. In addition, if the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", a state in which a pattern combination such as "333", for example, which is set in advance as a symbol combination indicating a 5R probability variable jackpot among the decorative patterns, is lined up on the effective line is displayed. Or, a state is displayed in which combinations of the same decorative symbols other than the combination of symbols indicating 16R probability variable jackpots or 5R probability variable jackpots such as "777" and "333" are lined up on the activated line. Also, if the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the decorative patterns other than the combination of decorative patterns indicating a variable jackpot, such as "222" and "444", are set in advance as a pattern combination indicating a normal jackpot. A combination of the same decorative patterns of , lined up on the active line is displayed. Also, if the lottery result is "lost", a state in which different combinations of decorative symbols are lined up on the activated line (for example, "323" or "723") is displayed.

In addition, in the symbol display part 341, a special symbol game performance indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the big winning lottery will be a big win is displayed together with the variable display of the decorative symbols in the special symbol game. In addition, when the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", when a state in which the jackpot pattern combination other than the combination of decorative patterns indicating the 16R probability variable jackpot is lined up on the effective line is displayed, 5R probability variable as a special game effect A suggestive effect suggesting a jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot is executed. In this case, in the jackpot game production, promotion production is executed to indicate that the lottery result for the special game is a 16R probability variable jackpot. Similarly, when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", when the state in which the jackpot pattern combination other than the decorative pattern combination indicating the probability variable jackpot is lined up on the effective line is displayed, as a special game production, 5R normal A suggestive effect that suggests a big win is executed. In this case, in the jackpot game production, a promotion production or the like is executed to indicate that the lottery result for the special game is a 5R probability variable jackpot.

Furthermore, when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state, the symbol display section 341 displays a jackpot game effect including an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode effect and an ending effect.

The sub-movable display section 38 includes a display device 381 such as a liquid crystal display, and is provided in the left area on the front side of the pattern display section 341 . This sub movable display unit 38 is connected to the MPU 61 via the input/output I/F 62 of the display control device 6 (see FIG. 7), and based on the display variation pattern command transmitted from the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 Then, under the control of the MPU 61, an image effect is executed on the display device 381 together with the symbol display unit 341 in the special symbol game or the jackpot game.

The display device 381 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or plasma display and an organic EL display. In addition to the display device 381, the sub-movable display section 38 may further have a touch panel for receiving touch operations by the player.

Further, the sub-movable display section 38 can move in the left-right direction D3 between a standby position (position shown in FIG. 4) indicated by a virtual line in FIG. 5 and an operating position indicated by a solid line in FIG.

Here, as shown in FIG. 7, the gaming machine 10 includes a motor 38a that supplies a driving force to the sub-movable display section 38, and a return signal for detecting that the sub-movable display section 38 has returned to the standby position. It has a detector 38b. The motor 38a is a stepping motor, a DC motor, or the like, and the return detection section 38b is an optical sensor, a contact sensor, or the like. The sub-movable display unit 38 and the motor 38a are connected via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear (not shown), and the sub-movable display unit 38 is moved to the standby position (see FIG. 4) according to the rotation direction of the motor 38a. from the operating position (solid line position in FIG. 5) to the right (operating direction), or from the operating position (solid line position in FIG. 5) to the standby position (see FIG. 4) in the left direction (return direction). . For example, the sub movable display unit 38 is moved from the standby position (see FIG. 4) to the operating position (solid line position in FIG. 5) by rotating the motor 38a in the forward direction. By rotating in the opposite direction, it moves from the operating position (solid line position in FIG. 5) to the standby position (see FIG. 4).

The gaming machine 10 also includes a motor driver 38c to which the motor 38a and the return detection section 38b are connected. The motor driver 38c is connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the sound lamp control device 5. FIG. Then, the motor driver 38c controls the motor 38a according to the control instruction from the sound lamp control device 5. FIG. In addition, the motor driver 38c can acquire the detection result of the recovery detection section 38b and transmit it to the sound lamp control device 5. FIG. Alternatively, the motor driver 38c may be omitted, and the motor 38a and return detection unit 38b may be directly connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5 and controlled by the audio lamp control device 5.

Such a sub-movable display unit 38 is operated in order to execute an effect related to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in a special game or a jackpot game. For example, the sub-movable display part 38 is operated as a big win confirmation effect indicating that the lottery result in the big win lottery is a big win in the special game, and also a chance to improve the expectation that the lottery result is a big win. It is operated as an up effect. In addition, the sub-movable display unit 38 provides a promotion effect (executed in the jackpot game) that clearly indicates that the actual lottery result is more advantageous to the player than the lottery result suggested by the special game effect in the jackpot game. In addition to the number of rounds promotion performance and promotion performance from normal jackpot to probability variable jackpot), while the right to execute the special game that is executed after the jackpot game is pending, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. It is also possible to operate as a reservation-reservation-fixing effect for notifying that a certain item is included.

The standby position and the operating position of the sub-movable display section 38 are not limited to the left area on the front side of the pattern display section 341, and may be other positions. Also, the number of sub movable display parts 38 is not limited to one, and may be plural, and the plural sub movable display parts 38 may cooperate, interlock, follow, or follow. Also, the sub-movable display section 38 may be movable in other directions in addition to or instead of the horizontal direction D3. For example, the sub-movable display section 38 may be movable in the vertical direction D2, oblique directions, or the like, and may be rotatable in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction. Further, the sub movable display section 38 can be omitted, and instead of the sub movable display section 38, one or more immovable display devices may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 4, the main display section 36 includes a normal symbol display section 361, a first special symbol display section 362, a second special symbol display section 363, a first special symbol display section 363, a first special symbol display section 363, and a first special symbol display section 363, which are arranged in the upper right portion of the game board 31. A number display unit 364 and a second special figure reservation number display unit 365 are provided.

The normal design display part 361 includes an LED pair as a normal design (general design), and is a normal design winning lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b, which is executed when the through gates 317L and 317R are won. lottery result is displayed by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the pair of LEDs. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) blinks the LED pair (variation display of normal symbols) triggered by the winning of the through gates 317L and 317R, and lights or extinguishes each LED after the elapse of the variable display time (stops the normal symbols) Display) to display the result of the lottery per normal figure. It should be noted that displaying the lottery result in the lottery per normal pattern by the variable display and stop display of the normal pattern (normal pattern) is called "normal design game" or "normal pattern game".

The first special symbol display unit 362 includes a 7-segment display device as a first special symbol (first special symbol), and whether or not to execute a jackpot game triggered by winning the first winning port 314. The lottery result of the first special symbol lottery (first special lottery, jackpot lottery) is displayed by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the seven segments in the seven-segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) blinks the seven segments of the 7-segment display device (variation display of the first special symbol) triggered by the winning of the first winning port 314, and after the variation display time has elapsed, each segment is displayed. The result of the jackpot lottery is displayed by turning on or off (the first special symbol is stopped and displayed). It should be noted that displaying the lottery result in the jackpot lottery by the variable display and stop display of the first special symbol (first special symbol) is referred to as "first special symbol game" or "first special symbol game".

The second special symbol display unit 363 includes a 7-segment display device as a second special symbol (second special symbol), and whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is executed when the second winning hole 315 is won. The lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (second special lottery, jackpot lottery) is displayed by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the seven segments in the seven segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) blinks the 7 segments of the 7-segment display device (variation display of the second special symbol) triggered by the winning to the second winning port 315, and after the lapse of the variation display time, each segment The result of the big win lottery is displayed by turning on or off (the second special symbol is stopped and displayed). It should be noted that displaying the lottery result in the jackpot lottery by the variable display and stop display of the second special symbol (second special symbol) is referred to as "second special symbol game" or "second special symbol game".

In the following, the first special symbol (first special symbol) and the second special symbol (second special symbol) may be referred to as "special symbol" or "special symbol", and the first special symbol game (second 1 special symbol game) and the second special symbol game (second special symbol game) may be referred to as "special symbol game" or "special symbol game".

The first special figure reservation number display unit 364 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and is the number of reservations for the right to execute the first special figure game caused by winning the first winning opening 314. First special figure The holding number N is displayed by the number of lighting of four LEDs.

The second special figure reserved number display unit 365 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and is the second special figure that is the reserved number of the right to execute the second special figure game generated by winning the second winning opening 315 The pending number M is displayed by the number of lighting of four LEDs.

The movable accessory member 39 has a predetermined standby position shown in FIG. It can move up and down along the surface of the pattern display portion 341 between the operating position indicated by the solid line. The operating position (see the solid line in FIG. 6) is closer to the center of the pattern display section 341 than the standby position (see FIG. 4). Further, when the movable accessory member 39 is at the operating position (see the solid line in FIG. 6), the coverage of the surface of the pattern display portion 341 is higher than when it is at the standby position (see FIG. 4). In addition, the movable accessory member 39 has a plurality of lamps 391 arranged in an annular shape on the periphery. In this embodiment, 15 lamps 391 are arranged on the movable accessory member 39, and each lamp 391 can be turned on and off individually. Also, each of the plurality of lamps 391 is, for example, an LED lamp, and can be lit in a plurality of colors including white, yellow, green, red, or a mixture of these colors. In this way, each lamp 391 can be turned on and off individually, and can be turned on in a plurality of colors. Depending on the number of lit lights, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery that triggered the special game will be a jackpot (jackpot expectation), or to clearly indicate that the lottery result is a jackpot. become. For example, with respect to lighting colors, it is possible to set the degree of expectation for a big win in the order of white, yellow, green, and red. By doing so, it is also possible to execute a definite effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result in the big win lottery is a big win. Further, in the present embodiment, the movable accessory member 39 is exposed from the opening 31A at the standby position (see FIG. 4). It is also conceivable to execute an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of a big win. For example, in the present embodiment, since the four lamps 391 located on the lower side are exposed from the opening 31A (see FIG. 4), a big win is expected depending on which lamp 391 among these lamps 391 is lit. It can be considered to suggest the degree of In addition to the four lamps 391 located on the lower side, it is also conceivable that an image displayed on the pattern display section 341 suggests the degree of expectation for a big win.

The movable accessory member 39 may be entirely hidden without being exposed from the opening 31A at the standby position. Also, the gaming machine 10 may include a plurality of movable accessory members 39 . Further, the movable accessory member 39 may be one in which a plurality of separated movable members are combined, one that can be transformed into two or more forms, or one that has a display such as a liquid crystal display device. Of course, the movable accessory member 39 is not limited to covering part of the display screen of the pattern display section 341, and may cover the entire display screen. Also, the central portion of the movable accessory member 39 may be configured as an illumination portion that can be turned on and off. In this case, by lighting or blinking the illumination part, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win or to execute an effect that clearly indicates a big win.

Such a movable accessory member 39 is operated in order to execute an effect related to the lottery result of a big win lottery in a special game or a big win game. For example, in a special game, the movable accessory member 39 is operated as a big win confirmation performance indicating that the lottery result in the big win lottery is a big win, and also a chance to improve the expectation that the lottery result is a big win. It is operated as an up effect. In addition, the movable accessory member 39 is a promotion effect (executed in the jackpot game) that clearly indicates that the actual lottery result is more advantageous to the player than the lottery result suggested by the special game effect in the jackpot game. In addition to the number of rounds promotion performance and promotion performance from normal jackpot to probability variable jackpot), while the right to execute the special game that is executed after the jackpot game is pending, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. It is also possible to operate as a reservation-reservation-fixing effect for notifying that a certain item is included.

As shown in FIG. 7, the gaming machine 10 includes a motor 39a that supplies driving force to the movable accessory member 39, and a return detection unit 39b for detecting that the movable accessory member 39 has returned to the standby position. have The motor 39a is a stepping motor, a DC motor, or the like, and the return detection section 39b is an optical sensor, a contact sensor, or the like. The movable accessory member 39 and the motor 39a are connected via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear (not shown), and move the movable accessory member 39 to the standby position (see FIG. 4) according to the rotation direction of the motor 39a. downward (operating direction) toward the operating position (see solid line in FIG. 6), or upward (return direction) from the operating position (see solid line in FIG. 6) toward the standby position (see FIG. 4) . For example, the movable accessory member 39 is moved from the standby position (see FIG. 4) to the operating position (see the solid line in FIG. 6) by rotating the motor 39a in the forward direction. By rotating in the opposite direction, it moves from the operating position (see solid line in FIG. 6) to the standby position (see FIG. 4).

The gaming machine 10 also includes a motor driver 39c to which the motor 39a and the return detection section 39b are connected. The motor driver 39c is connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the sound lamp control device 5. FIG. Then, the motor driver 39c controls the motor 39a according to the control instruction from the sound lamp control device 5. FIG. Further, the motor driver 39c can acquire the detection result of the recovery detection section 39b and transmit it to the sound lamp control device 5. FIG. Alternatively, the motor driver 39c may be omitted, and the motor 39a and return detection unit 39b may be directly connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5 and controlled by the audio lamp control device 5.

In addition, each lamp 391 of the movable accessory member 39 is individually connected to the input/output I / F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5, and each lamp 391 is individually turned on and off by the audio lamp control device 5, In addition, it can be illuminated in a plurality of colors.

Also, the game board 31 may be provided with a magnet sensor and a radio wave sensor (both not shown). The magnet sensors are provided around the first winning opening 314 and the variable winning opening 316, for example. The magnet sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit, and the detection result of the magnet sensor is input to the main control unit 331 . As a result, when a magnet is used to fraudulently guide a game ball to the first winning opening 314 or the variable winning opening 316, the fraud can be detected. On the other hand, radio wave sensors are provided around the first prize winning port 314 and the second prize winning port 315, for example. The radio wave sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit 331 , and the detection result of the radio wave sensor is input to the main control unit 331 . As a result, when an act of illegally inputting radio waves to the entering ball sensors 314a and 315a to erroneously detect the entering of a game ball is performed, it is possible to detect the illegal act. The radio wave sensor can detect radio waves of 50 MHz to 3 GHz, for example.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a dispensing mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140. As shown in FIG.

The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores ball game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) of the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out the game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23 . Incidentally, when the game balls on the upper tray 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower tray 24.例文帳に追加

The peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7 , a launch control device 8 and a power control device 9 . The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls paid out by the payout device 132 and the like. The shooting control device 8 controls the game ball shooting mechanism 32 according to the operation of the shooting handle 22 . The power control device 9 converts power supplied from an island facility (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level, and supplies the voltage to a control device and driving means provided in the gaming machine 10 .

[System Configuration of Gaming Machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 16. FIG.

[Main control unit 331]
As shown in FIG. 7 , the main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes main control of games in the gaming machine 10 . The main controller 4 executes a big win lottery as a lottery for shifting to a preset big win gaming state. The main control device 4 includes an MPU 41, an input/output I/F 42 and a performance information display device 4A.

The MPU 41 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Moreover, ROM411 and RAM412 are incorporated in MPU41. The MPU 41 executes processing according to control programs stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Also, part or all of the processing executed by main controller 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

The input/output I/F 42 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the main controller 4 and outputs control signals from the main controller 4 . Also, the input/output I/F 42 is connected with incoming ball sensors 313a to 316a, 317La and 317Ra, an out ball sensor 318a, and the like. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the game ball enters the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, and the variable winning port 316 based on the detection signals from the ball sensors 313a to 316a, 317La, and 317Ra. It is determined whether or not there is a ball and whether or not a game ball has passed through the through gates 317L and 317R. The MPU 41 also counts the number of out balls (the number of shot balls) based on the detection signal from the out ball sensor 318a. Furthermore, the input/output I/F 42 is connected with the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, the power control device 9, and the like.

Then, the MPU 41 gives the audio lamp control device 5 a normal figure fluctuation pattern command, an electric role product open command, an electric role product close command, a special figure fluctuation pattern command, a first special figure hold command, a second special figure hold command, Special figure shift command, jackpot game start command, opening start command, opening end command, open/close execution mode start command, round game start command, round game end command, interval start command, interval end command, open/close execution mode end command, ending start Commands such as command, ending end command, jackpot game end command, game set value change command, etc. are output.

The general pattern variation pattern command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of the variation display time of the normal pattern in the general pattern game (the general pattern variation pattern) and the lottery result in the general pattern per lottery. The general pattern variation pattern command is based on the information stored in the general pattern reservation storage area 412c (see FIG. 11), which will be described later, when starting the variation display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display unit 361 of the main display unit 36. It is set in step S1709 in the normal pattern fluctuation start process of FIG. 24 described later. In addition, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command may be a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of only the normal pattern fluctuation display time (normal pattern fluctuation pattern) in the normal pattern game. In this case, the command which notifies the lottery result in the lottery per normal pattern to the voice lamp control device 5 is set as a command different from the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command.

The electric accessory open command is a command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric accessory 315b is opened (actuated). The electric auditors release command is set in step S1809 in the normal figure per game control process of FIG.

The electric accessory closing command is a command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric accessory 315b is closed (returned). When closing (returning) the electric auditors 315b, the electric auditors close command is set in step S1816 in the normal figure per game control process of FIG. 25 described later.

The special figure variation pattern command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the variation display time of the special symbols in the special figure game and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, and when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Contains information about the jackpot type. The special figure variation pattern command, when starting the special symbol variation display in the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363 of the main display portion 36, special figure reservation storage area 412b (see FIG. 8 See) is set in step S2105 in the special figure fluctuation start processing of FIG. 28 described later based on the information stored in. In addition, the special figure variation pattern command includes information that can specify the type of special symbol when the variation is started, but the special figure variation pattern command when the variation of the first special symbol is started, and the second special symbol The special figure variation pattern command when variation is started may be set as another special figure variation command. Moreover, the special figure variation pattern command may be a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the special symbol variation display time and only in the special figure game. In this case, the command which notifies the lottery result in the jackpot lottery and the jackpot type to the sound lamp control device 5 is set as a command different from the special figure variation pattern command.

The first special figure reservation command and the second special figure reservation command are stored in the later-described special figure reservation storage area 412b (see FIG. 8) by entering the game ball into the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315. When the first special figure reservation number N or the second special figure reservation number M increases, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the increased reservation, the fluctuation display time of the special design (special figure fluctuation pattern), and the first It is a command to notify the special figure reservation number N or the second special figure reservation number M to the voice lamp control device 5. The first special figure reservation command and the second special figure reservation command, when there is an increase in the first special figure reservation number N or the second special figure reservation number M, special figure reservation storage area 412b described later (see FIG. 8 ), the first special figure pending command setting process of step S1105 in the start winning process of FIG. 18 described later (step S1207 of the first special figure pending command setting process of FIG. S1209) or is set in the second special figure pending command setting process of step S1110.

The special figure shift command is the first special figure reservation storage area REA when the first special figure reservation number N or the second special figure reservation number M decreases due to the start of the special figure game (variation display of the special figure) 1 Reservation area REA1 to 4th reservation area REA4, or 1st reservation area REB1 to 4th reservation area REB4 (see FIG. 8) in the 2nd special reservation storage area REB Special figure success or failure indicating the lottery result in the jackpot lottery This command notifies the audio lamp controller 5 that the information has shifted. The special figure shift command is set in step S2008 in the special figure data setting process of FIG. 27 described later.

The jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is started, that is, the game state shifts to the jackpot game state. It is set in step S2204 in the jackpot game control process.

The opening start command is a command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 of starting the opening of the jackpot game, and when starting the opening of the jackpot game, set in step S2208 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29 described later. be done. It should be noted that the opening start command can be omitted because it is possible to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the opening of the jackpot game is started by the jackpot game start command.

The opening end command is a command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 to end the opening of the jackpot game, and when the opening of the jackpot game is finished, it is set in step S2214 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 30 described later. be done.

The opening and closing execution mode start command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot game is started, and when starting the opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot game, the jackpot game control of FIG. It is set in step S2216 in the process.

The round game start command is a command to start each round game in the opening and closing execution mode in the jackpot game, and to notify the sound lamp control device 5 of round number information indicating what round the round game is. , When each round game is started, it is set in step S2217 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 30 to be described later. In addition to the round game start command, at the start of the round game, a command indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be started may be set and the command may be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 .

The round game end command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that this round game is to end in the opening and closing execution mode in the jackpot game. It is set in step S2229 in the control process.

Interval start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 to start the interval between round games in the opening and closing execution mode in the jackpot game, and when starting the interval, jackpot game control in FIG. 31 described later It is set in step S2233 in the process.

Interval end command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 to end the interval between round games in the opening and closing execution mode in the jackpot game, and when ending the interval, jackpot game control in FIG. 32 described later It is set in step S2239 in the process.

The opening and closing execution mode end command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot game is ended. It is set in S2241.

The ending start command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of starting the ending of the jackpot game, and is set in step S2242 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 31 described later when starting the ending.

The ending end command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of ending the ending of the jackpot game, and is set in step S2248 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 32 to be described later when ending the ending.

The jackpot game end command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is over, and is set in step S2250 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29 described later when the jackpot game is finished.

The game set value change command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the game set value has been changed and the changed game set value. is set in step S2408 in the game set value change process.

Commands other than the commands described above may be output from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5, but the description thereof will be omitted.

The main control unit 4 also includes an oscillator circuit, a frequency dividing circuit, and the like as means for supplying an operating clock to the MPU 41 . The oscillation circuit outputs a clock signal having a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillation circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41 . Specifically, the execution cycle of main timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, executed by the MPU 41 is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency dividing circuit.

In this embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 41 at preset intervals (for example, 4 msec), and the MPU 41 performs a main timer interrupt (to be described later) each time the clock signal rises (or falls). It is assumed that the loading process is activated and executed. The oscillator circuit and the frequency divider circuit are also installed in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as necessary, and supply the operating clocks of the main control units in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 . Also, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 .

A ROM 411 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit from which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 41 . For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting commands to be sent to the audio lamp control device 5 and the like. Note that the RAM 412 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 8, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a jackpot lottery or a normal figure winning lottery will be described. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the counter information stored in the lottery counter storage area 412a of the RAM 412, the special figure reservation storage area 412b and the normal figure reservation storage area 412c, and the variation display time of the jackpot lottery result and the special figure And the setting of the lottery result per normal pattern and the setting of the fluctuation display time of the normal pattern etc. are executed.

In the lottery counter storage area 412a, a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a reach random number counter C3 are stored as lottery counters. The big-hit random number counter C1 is used for a big-hit lottery to decide whether or not to execute a big-hit game. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when judging the jackpot type when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is used when judging the type of winning when the result of the jackpot lottery is losing. In addition, in the lottery counter storage area 412a, a jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and a special figure variation type counter CS1 are stored. The jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The special symbol variation type counter CS1 is used to determine the variation display time of the special symbol in the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363 of the main display portion 36. Further, in the lottery counter storage area 412a, as lottery counters, a normal winning random number counter C4, a normal winning type random number counter C5, a normal winning random number initial value counter CIN2, and a normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 are stored. The normal winning random number counter C4 is used for a normal winning lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 315b of the second winning opening 315 is to be in the electric role open state. Ordinary per type random number counter C5 is used when distributing the per normal pattern type (short open or long open) when the result of the lottery per normal pattern is per normal pattern. The normal win random number initial value counter CIN2 is used to set the initial value of the normal win random number counter C4. The normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 is used to determine the normal pattern fluctuation display time in the normal pattern display portion 361 of the main display portion 36.

The lottery counters C1 to C5, CIN1, CIN2, CS1 and CS2 are used as loop counters in which the MPU 41 adds 1 to the previous value at short time intervals and returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. be done. The updated values are recorded in each lottery counter C1 to C5, CIN1, CIN2, CS1, CS1, and the jackpot lottery result, the fluctuation display time of the special figure, the setting of the jackpot type and the outlier type, and the lottery result per normal figure. , It is referenced by the MPU 41 when setting the variable display time of the normal pattern and the type per normal pattern.

The special figure reservation storage area 412b includes a first special figure reservation storage area REA, a second special figure reservation storage area REB and a special figure execution area AE. The first special figure reservation storage area REA includes a first reservation area REA1, a second reservation area REA2, a third reservation area REA3, a fourth reservation area REA4, and a first special figure reservation number storage area NAA. The second special figure reservation storage area REB includes a first reservation area REB1, a second reservation area REB2, a third reservation area REB3, a fourth reservation area REB4, and a second special figure reservation number storage area NAB.

Then, when the game ball enters the first winning hole 314, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the special figure variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is Acquired as special figure win/loss information used in the jackpot lottery, and stored in one of the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA. Also, when the game ball enters the second winning hole 315, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the special figure variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is Acquired as special figure win/loss information used in the jackpot lottery, and stored in one of the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB. In addition, corresponding to each of the first special figure reservation storage area REA and the second special figure reservation storage area REB, the lottery counter storage area 412a (jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3 and special figure fluctuation type counter CS1, etc.) may be provided separately.

Thus, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3, the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1 is the first reservation area REA1 to the first special figure reservation storage area REA. 4 reserved area REA4, and stored in one of the first reserved area REB1 to fourth reserved area REB4 of the second special figure reserved storage area REB.

Therefore, the special features stored in the first reserved area REA1 to fourth reserved area REA4 of the first special figure reserved storage area REA and the first reserved area REB1 to fourth reserved area REB4 of the second special figure reserved storage area REB In addition to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game executed based on the figure success/failure information, the special symbol (symbol display part 341 It is possible to determine in advance the fluctuation display time (special figure fluctuation pattern) for the decoration pattern in).

Specifically, when the game ball enters the first winning hole 314, the special figure success/failure information is the first reservation area REA1, the second reservation area REA2, and the third reservation area REA3 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA. , is stored in an empty area in the priority order of the fourth reservation area REA4. In the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA, the number in which the special figure propriety information is stored among the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 is stored as the first special figure reservation number N.

Also, when the game ball enters the second winning hole 315, the special figure win/loss information is the first reservation area REB1, the second reservation area REB2, the third reservation area REB3, the third reservation area REB3 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB. 4 is stored in a vacant area in the order of priority of the reserved area REB4. In the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB, the number in which the special figure propriety information is stored among the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 is stored as the second special figure reservation number M.

That is, in the gaming machine 10, the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA, and the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB With a total of 8 storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of reservations, it is possible to reserve up to 4 special figure win/loss information as a winning history to the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315 respectively.

In addition, it is conceivable as another embodiment that the first winning port 314 and the second winning port 315 are provided with a holding area with a maximum number of holdings of eight, and even in this case, the maximum number of holdings is eight It is possible to reserve the special figure success/failure information as the winning history. The memory processing of the special figure propriety information is executed by the MPU 41 by executing the processing according to the control program.

The special figure execution area AE is the first special figure reservation storage area REA when the variable display of special symbols is started in the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363 of the main display portion 36. It is a storage area used to move the special figure propriety information stored in the first reserved area REB1 of the first reserved area REA1 or the second special figure reserved storage area REB. Specifically, the special figure validity information in the first reservation area REB1 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB is preferentially moved to the special figure execution area AE, and the first reservation area of the second special figure reservation storage area REB When the special figure validity information does not exist in REB1 and the second special figure reservation number M stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB is 0, the first reservation area of the first special figure reservation storage area REA The special figure propriety information of REA1 is moved to the special figure execution area AE. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the second special symbol game is executed with priority over the first special symbol game, and in the probability variable gaming state and the time saving gaming state which are the high frequency support modes, the game ball is placed in the right area of the game board 31. By executing the so-called right hitting, the second special symbol game is mainly executed.

In addition, the first special figure reservation number N stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA of the first special figure reservation storage area REA and the second special figure reservation number storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area REB When the difference from the second special figure reservation number M stored in NAB is 2 or more, the value of the area for reservation with a larger number may be preferentially moved to the special figure execution area AE Other embodiments are possible. In addition, the special figure propriety information of the first reservation area REA1 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA and the first reservation area REB1 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB may be alternately moved to the special figure execution area AE. Other embodiments are possible.

Then, the MPU 41 performs a jackpot lottery or the like based on the numerical information stored as the special figure propriety information in the special figure execution area AE at the start of one special figure game. At this time, when the first reserved area REA1 of the first special figure reserved storage area REA is moved to the special figure execution area AE, the special figure propriety information stored in the second reserved area REA2 is the first reserved area REA1 , the special figure validity information stored in the third reservation area REA3 is shifted to the second reservation area REA2, and the special figure validity information stored in the fourth reservation area REA4 is shifted to the third reservation area REA3.

Similarly, when the first reserved area REB1 of the second special figure reserved storage area REB is moved to the special figure execution area AE, the special figure propriety information stored in the second reserved area REB2 is stored in the first reserved area REB1 Shift, the special figure validity information stored in the third reservation area REB3 is shifted to the second reservation area REB2, the special figure validity information stored in the fourth reservation area REB4 is shifted to the third reservation area REB3.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated by adding 1 in order within the range of 0 to 637, for example, in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing in FIG. returned to Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated in the same manner as the jackpot random number counter C1. Then, in the first to fourth reservation areas REA1 to REA4, REB1 to REB4 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA1 or the second special figure reservation storage area REA2, the game ball is the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 at the timing of winning 315 is stored.

The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is two types corresponding to the low-probability mode that is the normal game state or the time-saving game state and the high-probability mode that is the probability variable game state, according to the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area in the ROM 411. is set. Here, FIG. 9A is a diagram showing an example of a low-probability mode validity table corresponding to the low-probability mode, and FIG. 9B is a diagram showing an example of a high-probability mode validity table corresponding to the high-probability mode.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 9(A) and 9(B), the low probability mode success/failure table and the high probability mode success/failure table each have a probability that the lottery results of the jackpot lottery will be a big hit (jackpot probability) as the game set value. A plurality of hit/fail tables are provided which are different depending on the situation. The low-probability mode success/failure table and the high-probability mode success/failure table each include six success/failure tables corresponding to game set values 1 to 6 in six stages. A game setting value of 6, a game setting value of 5, a game setting value of 4, a game setting value of 3, a game setting value of 2, and a game setting value of 1, in this order, the lottery result in the big winning lottery has a high jackpot probability and is advantageous to the player. becomes.

At the game set value 1, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers with which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 206 (0 to 205) for the low probability mode success/failure table, and 206 (0 to 205) for the high probability mode. There are 821 (0 to 820) probability mode propriety tables. That is, at the game setting value 1, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is about 1/318.1 (206/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode is about four times as high as in the low-probability mode, which is about 1/79. 9 (820/65536).

At the game setting value 2, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers with which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 212 (0 to 211) for the low probability mode success/failure table, and 212 (0 to 211) for the high probability mode. There are 845 (0 to 844) probability mode propriety tables. That is, at the game setting value 2, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is about 1/309.1 (212/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode is about four times as high as in the low-probability mode, which is about 1/77. 6 (845/65536).

At the game setting value 3, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers with which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 218 (0 to 217) for the low probability mode success/failure table, and 218 (0 to 217) for the high probability mode. There are 869 (0 to 868) probability mode propriety tables. That is, at the game setting value 3, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is about 1/300.6 (218/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode is about four times that in the low-probability mode, which is about 1/75. 4 (869/65536).

At the game setting value 4, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers with which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 224 (0 to 223) for the low probability mode success/failure table, and 224 (0 to 223) for the high probability mode. There are 893 (0 to 892) probability mode propriety tables. That is, at the game set value 4, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is about 1/292.6 (224/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode is about four times that in the low-probability mode, which is about 1/73. 4 (893/65536).

At the game setting value 5, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers with which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 230 (0 to 229) for the low probability mode success/failure table, and 230 (0 to 229) for the high probability mode. There are 917 (0 to 916) probability mode propriety tables. That is, at the game setting value 5, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is about 1/284.9 (230/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode is about four times as high as in the low-probability mode, which is about 1/71. 5 (917/65536).

At the game set value 6, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers with which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 236 (0 to 235) for the low probability mode success/failure table, and 236 (0 to 235) for the high probability mode. There are 941 (0 to 940) probability mode propriety tables. That is, at the game setting value 6, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is about 1/277.7 (236/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode is about four times as high as in the low-probability mode, which is about 1/69. 6 (941/65536).

Incidentally, if the value of the big win random number counter C1 is other than these random numbers for winning the big win, the result of the big win lottery is lost.

Here, in the low-probability mode success/failure table and the high-probability mode success/failure table, it is also considered that the random numbers that result in a big win are common to the lottery results of the jackpot lottery between the same game set values, but that the random numbers that result in a big win are not common. be done. Also, the random numbers for winning the jackpot may not be continuous values, but may be partially or wholly discrete values.

In addition, six low-probability mode success/failure tables and six high-probability mode success/failure tables are provided according to game setting values in six stages, but at least one success/failure table for each mode is sufficient. In other words, the game set values are not limited to six stages. It is also conceivable to provide a plurality of low-probability mode success/failure tables corresponding to game set values in multiple stages, and to provide one high-probability mode success/failure table. That is, it is conceivable to provide a plurality of stages of game setting values for the low probability mode, and not to provide stepwise game setting values for the high probability mode, thereby making the jackpot probability uniform. Of course, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode may be made uniform, and game set values in multiple stages may be provided for the high-probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 19, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315. In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of two jackpot types, ie, variable jackpot and normal jackpot, is set by the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area of the ROM 411.

Here, FIG. 9C is a diagram showing an example of the distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 9 (C), when the type of the special game is the first special game triggered by winning the first winning hole 314, the number of random numbers to be the 5R probability variable jackpot is 0 to 9 There are 10, the number of random numbers for 16R probability variable jackpot is 5, 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers for 5R normal jackpot is 5, 15 to 19. On the other hand, if the type of the special game is the second special game triggered by winning the second winning hole 315, the number of random numbers to be the 5R probability variable jackpot is five from 0 to 4, and the 16R probability variable jackpot The number of random numbers to be 5 to 14 is 10, and the number of random numbers to be a 5R normal jackpot is 5 from 15 to 19. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of the probability variable jackpot in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is set to be the same at 75%, but 16R in the second special symbol game compared to the first special symbol game The probability of a definite variable jackpot is set high. That is, in the variable probability game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric accessory 315b), and in the time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), the normal game state (low probability mode and electric Compared to the low frequency support mode in which the probability of opening the accessory 315b is low), the expected value of acquisition of the game ball is set high when the lottery result in the big win lottery is a big win.

Then, in both the first special game and the second special game, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a probability variable jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the probability variable game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode). Transition. In the gaming machine 10, the upper limit is not set to the number of times of the special figure game that can be executed in the probability variable gaming state, and the gaming machine 10 is configured as a so-called loop probability variable machine.

Further, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game is shifted to a time-saving game state (low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode). In the gaming machine 10, an upper limit value (100 times in this embodiment) is set to the number of times of the special figure game that can be executed in the time saving game state (the number of times of the time saving game), and the jackpot is set within the number of special figure games of this upper limit value. When the result of the lottery is not a big hit, the normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode, is entered after execution of the special game with the upper limit value. In addition, the special figure game frequency in the time saving game state is not limited to 100 times, and may be other times.

It should be noted that the transition from the probability variable gaming state to the normal gaming state is not limited to when the special figure game of the upper limit value is executed, for example, it may be executed when the state transition lottery (fall lottery) is won. . In this case, until the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed, from the probability variation gaming state to the normal game state (falling) so as not to move (fall), to the predetermined number of times as the minimum number of special figure games to be executed in the probability variation gaming state Guarantee is also possible. Thereby, it is prevented that the number of times of the special figure game executed in the probability variation game state is remarkably reduced.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first winning opening 314 that triggers the execution of the first special symbol game by winning, and the second winning opening 315 that triggers the execution of the second special symbol game by winning are individually shaken. A minute table is set, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the game ball wins in the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315, but the first special symbol game and the second special symbol. It is also conceivable that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same in the game. In addition, the game machine 10 is not limited to a loop variable machine, but may be configured as an ST machine including a V-ST machine, a one-two-kind mixed machine, or the like.

Then, the MPU 41, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the special figure execution area AE, the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are "5R probability variable jackpot", "16R probability variable jackpot", " It is determined whether it is a 5R normal big hit or a loss.

Here, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, an open/close execution mode is executed in which a round game in which the variable prize winning port 316 is opened in a predetermined manner is repeated five times in the jackpot game. Further, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot, an open/close execution mode is executed in which round games are repeated 16 times in the jackpot game. As an opening mode of the variable winning opening 316 in each round game, for example, opening the variable winning opening 316 once is conceivable. Of course, it is conceivable to open the variable winning opening 316 multiple times in part or all of the round game.

In the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot, after the jackpot game is over, the machine shifts to a probability variable game state which is a high probability mode with a high probability of winning a jackpot and a high frequency support mode with a high probability of opening an electric accessory 315b. In this embodiment, the variable probability gaming state continues until the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is "5R variable probability big win", "16R probability variable big win" or "5R normal big win".

On the other hand, in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to a time-saving game state which is a low-probability mode with a low jackpot winning probability and a high-frequency support mode with a high opening probability of the electric accessory 315b. In this embodiment, the time-saving gaming state (low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode) continues until the player is notified of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for a predetermined number of times, such as 100 times. Alternatively, the game ends when the player is informed that the lottery result of the big win lottery is a big win before the specified number of times has passed.

In addition, it is also possible to perform a falling lottery from the probability variation gaming state to the time saving gaming state or the normal gaming state in the special figure game as another embodiment. In addition, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out, the variable probability game state is not shifted to the jackpot game state and the time saving game state. In the present embodiment, the case where the gaming machine 10 has three kinds of jackpot types, 5R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot, and 5R normal jackpot, will be described as an example. It is also conceivable to have other jackpot types, such as Round Regular Jackpot, 16R Regular Jackpot.

Also, the reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated by being sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing in FIG. It will be reset to 0 later. Then, in the first to fourth reservation areas REA1 to REA4, REB1 to REB4 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA1 or the second special figure reservation storage area REA2, the game ball is the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 stores the value of the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of winning.

In the gaming machine 10, the reach random number counter C3 selects the type of stop result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display section 341 when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a loss. Specifically, according to the loss type table stored in the loss type table storage area in the ROM 411, after the occurrence of the reach, the final stop symbol shifts to the front and back of the reach symbol by one and stops, and the same reach occurs. The value of the ready-to-win random number counter C3 is set for each of the three kinds of loss types, namely, the ready-to-win except before and after the final stop pattern stops before and after the ready-to-win pattern, and the complete loss without the occurrence of the ready-to-win.

Here, FIG. 9D is a diagram showing an example of the exclusion type table. In the example shown in FIG. 9 (D), the value of the random number that becomes the front and back reach is 0 to 8, the value of the random number that becomes the reach other than the front and back is 9 to 38, and the value of the random number that becomes complete deviation is 39. ~238. In addition, the MPU 41 determines that the reach occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the special game in which the 5R variable probability jackpot, the 16R probability variable jackpot or the 5R normal jackpot is won, that is, the special game in which the state shifts to the jackpot game state. .

Here, the ready-to-win indicates a state in which a pattern combination of decorative patterns indicating that a jackpot has been won is likely to occur during the period from the start of the variable display of the patterns in the pattern display section 341 to the stop display of the patterns. It is a variable state that In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions of the decoration symbol on the active line in the symbol display section 341, and the display symbol corresponding to the remaining one stop position is changed. be. In addition, during the change state of the reach in the symbol display section 341, a story production process in which a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the degree of expectation, or a game in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the production. A person-participation type operation rendering process and the like are executed. It is conceivable that the variable display in the symbol display section 341 may be hidden, or may be displayed in a reduced or enlarged size during execution of these rendering processes.

The special figure variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 199, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the special symbol variation type counter CS1, according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, the special symbol (symbol display part It determines the special figure variation pattern type (variation display time of the special symbol) indicating the variation display time of the decoration symbol in 341). In this way, by determining the special figure fluctuation pattern type, the audio ramp control device 5 can perform rough special effects such as multi-reach production of high-speed fluctuation production (basic production, non-reach production), super reach production, and special reach production. The variation type (production pattern) in the figure game is determined according to the special figure variation pattern type (variation display time of the special symbol). Special figure variation type counter CS1 is updated at least once in step S1402 each time the main processing of FIG. . Then, in the first to fourth reservation areas REA1 to REA4, REB1 to REB4 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA1 or the second special figure reservation storage area REA2, the game ball is the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening The value of the special figure variation type counter CS1 at the timing of winning 315 is stored.

Then, the MPU 41 is based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the variation table (see FIGS. 10A to 10C) preset according to the result of the big winning lottery, and the variation display time of the special symbol To determine the special figure fluctuation pattern that shows. Specifically, the MPU 41 is a normal jackpot fluctuation table (see FIG. 10 (A)), a probability variable jackpot fluctuation table (see FIG. 10 (B)), or an outlier fluctuation table ( Refer to FIG. 10 (C)) to specify the special figure variation pattern type. Note that these variation tables may be separately provided for the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. Further, the probability variable jackpot variation table may be separately provided for each of the 5R probability variable jackpot and the 16R probability variable jackpot.

Here, FIGS. 10A, 10B, and 10C are diagrams showing examples of variation tables. In the normal jackpot fluctuation table shown in FIG. 10 (A), the probability variable jackpot fluctuation table shown in FIG. 10 (B), and the deviation fluctuation table shown in FIG. Patterns are associated in advance. Then, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is "5R normal jackpot", the normal jackpot fluctuation table shown in FIG. 10(B), and if the lottery result is "missing", refer to the losing variation table shown in FIG. 10(C), respectively, to specify the type of special figure variation pattern.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10(A) and 10(B), in the normal jackpot variation table and the probability variation jackpot variation table, the special figure variation pattern "01" according to the value of the special figure variation type counter CS1 to "03" is selected. Here, when the special figure variation pattern "01" is selected, the normal reach effect pattern whose variation display time is 30 s is determined as the variation type (effect pattern type) in the sound lamp control device 5, and in the symbol display unit 341 etc. A special game effect is executed according to the normal reach effect pattern. The normal reach production pattern is a production pattern in which the final individual production type in the special game production is the normal reach production. Further, when the special figure variation pattern "02" is selected, the super reach effect pattern whose variation display time is 60 s is determined as the variation type (effect pattern type) in the sound lamp control device 5, and in the symbol display unit 341 etc. A special game effect is executed according to the super ready-to-win effect pattern. The super reach production pattern is a production pattern in which the final individual production type in the special game production is the super reach production. Furthermore, when the special figure variation pattern "03" is selected, the special reach effect pattern with the longest variation display time of 90 seconds is determined as the variation type (effect pattern) in the sound lamp control device 5, and the symbol display unit 341 and the like are determined. A special game effect is executed according to the special ready-to-win effect pattern. The special reach production pattern is a production pattern in which the final individual production type in the special game production is the special reach production.

As shown in FIG. 10(C), the lost variation table corresponds to the stop display type of the decoration pattern at the time of loss determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3 (front-back off reach, reach other than front-back loss, complete loss). Then, the correspondence relationship between the special figure variation type counter CS1 and the special figure variation pattern is defined. More specifically, if the stop display type at the time of deviation is a reach other than the front-rear out reach or the front-rear out reach, any of the special figure fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" according to the value of the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected. On the other hand, when the stop display type at the time of deviation is completely out, either the special figure variation pattern "04" or "05" is selected according to the value of the special figure variation type counter CS1. In addition, when the special figure variation pattern "04" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach performance pattern (7 seconds non-reach performance pattern) with a variation display time of 7 seconds as a variation type (effect pattern type). Then, the special figure game effect is executed according to the 7-second non-reach effect pattern in the symbol display section 341 and the like. Further, when the special figure variation pattern "05" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach performance pattern (10 seconds non-reach performance pattern) with a variable display time of 10 seconds as a variation type (performance pattern type). Then, the special figure game effect is executed according to the non-reach effect pattern for 10 seconds in the symbol display section 341 and the like.

For example, in the game machine 10, as the variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the special figure variation pattern "04", the variation display of the decoration pattern is not accompanied by the advance notice effect such as the display of the character, the message, etc. Variation display of the stop-displayed outlier pattern is executed. In addition, in the game machine 10, as a variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the special figure variation pattern "05", the variation display of the decoration pattern is accompanied by an advance notice effect such as displaying a character, a message, etc. Variation display of the displayed outlier pattern is performed. In addition, when the variation display at the time of loss corresponding to the special figure variation pattern "05" is performed, a player participation type operation effect reflecting the operation of the operation button 20 by the player may be executed as a notice effect. be.

In addition, the type of special figure variation pattern is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 10(A), 10(B) and 10(C).

For example, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of normal reach effects with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as normal reach effects executed in the normal reach effect pattern corresponding to the special figure variation pattern "01", and a selection is made from among them. Any normal reach effect is executed.

Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of super ready-to-win effects with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as super ready-to-win effects to be executed in the super ready-to-win effect pattern corresponding to the special figure variation pattern "02". Any super reach effect selected from is executed. The super reach effect is a reach effect with a longer fluctuation time than the normal reach effect, and the probability (expectation) that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is higher than the normal reach effect, and the jackpot is won more than the special reach effect. Executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation) is low.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of special reach effects with different characters and stories are prepared as the special reach effects executed in the special reach effect pattern corresponding to the special figure variation pattern "03". Any special reach effect selected from is executed. The special ready-to-win effect is a ready-to-win effect with a longer fluctuation time than the normal ready-to-win effect, and is an effect developed from the normal ready-to-win effect or the super ready-to-win effect, for example. The special reach effect is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation) of winning the jackpot is higher than in the normal reach effect and the special reach effect.

In addition, the effect pattern corresponding to the special figure variation pattern includes an operation effect in which the operation status of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect, for example, a single operation effect in which a single operation is reflected in the effect, and an operation button by the player. A player-participation type operation effect such as a repeated hitting operation effect in which the continuous hitting operation of 20 is reflected in the effect, and a long-pressing operation effect in which the long-pressing operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect may be included.

Then, when the MPU 41 specifies the variable display time of the special symbol in the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363 of the main display portion 36 (the variable display time of the decorative symbol in the symbol display portion 341), A special figure variation pattern command indicating the special figure variation display time and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is input to the voice lamp control device 5.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the MPU 41 attaches "A" indicating that it is a 5R normal jackpot before the special figure variation patterns "01" to "03". Any one of the variation pattern commands "A01" to "A03" is output. In addition, MPU41, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", the special figure variation pattern with "B" indicating that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot before the special figure variation patterns "01" to "03" Output one of the commands “B01” to “B03”. Furthermore, MPU41, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", the special figure variation pattern with "C" indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot before the special figure variation patterns "01" to "03" Output one of the commands “C01” to “C03”. In addition, when the lottery result is "out", the MPU 41 is a special figure variation pattern command "D01" with "D" indicating that it is out before the special figure variation patterns "01" to "05". to output one of "D05". That is, the special figure variation pattern command includes not only the special figure variation pattern (time of the special figure game), which is the variation display time of the special symbol, but also information specifying the result of the big hit lottery. Then, in the voice lamp control device 5, based on the special figure variation pattern command, not only the special figure variation pattern (special figure game time), which is the variation display time of the special symbol, but also the result of the jackpot lottery can be determined. It is possible, and based on the variation display time of the special symbol (time of the special symbol game) and the result of the big hit lottery, the variation type (production pattern) displayed in the symbol display unit 341 etc., and the stop of the decorative symbol Determine details such as display combinations. Then, the audio lamp control device 5, based on the determined variation type (effect pattern) and other details, variably displays and stops displaying the decorative pattern in the pattern display section 341, and performs image effects in accordance with the variable display of the decorative pattern. In addition, a speaker 26 performs voice performance in accordance with the variable display of the decoration pattern, and an illumination part 27 performs illumination performance (lamp performance).

Thus, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 executes a simple process of determining the variable display time of the decorative symbols in the symbol display section 341 based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the variation table. It will be. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably execute the big winning lottery. In addition, since details of the variation mode of the decorative pattern actually displayed on the pattern display section 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute a wide variety of variation modes as the variation mode. is.

The variation tables shown in FIGS. 10(A) to 10(C) are commonly used in various gaming states (normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state and variable probability gaming state), but each variation table is individually used for each gaming state. may be set, and the variable table may be set separately for the high frequency support mode (time reduction gaming state and probability variable gaming state) and the low frequency support mode. Also, when setting the variable table individually for each game state and each support mode, the average value of the variable display time is, for example, normal game state (low frequency support mode) is better, time-saving game state and probability variable game state (high frequency support mode). In addition, when setting different variation tables in the time saving gaming state and the probability variation gaming state, the average value of the variation display time may be set longer in the time saving gaming state than in the probability variation gaming state, or in the probability variation gaming state It may be set longer than the time-saving game state.

Here, FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an example of the general map reserved storage area 412c of the memory area of the main controller 4 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 11, the general map reservation storage area 412c includes the general map first reservation area SE1, the general map second reservation area SE2, the general map third reservation area SE3, the general map fourth reservation area SE4, and the general map fluctuation. It includes a pending number storage area SNA and a normal figure execution area SAE.

Normal figure 1st reservation area SE1 ~ Normal figure 4th reservation area SE4 is a normal per random number counter C4 obtained as general figure success or failure information used in general figure per lottery when game balls pass through gates 317L and 317R. , It is a storage area for storing the normal per type random number counter C5 and the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2.

The general pattern fluctuation reservation number storage area SNA stores the number of the general pattern first reservation area SE1 to the general pattern fourth reservation area SE4 in which the general pattern correctness information is stored. That is, the normal pattern fluctuation reservation number storage area SNA is a storage area for storing the number of reservations of the right to execute the normal pattern game.

The general pattern execution area SAE is a memory used for moving the general pattern right/wrong information of the first general pattern reservation area SE1 when the variable display of the normal pattern is started in the normal pattern display section 361 of the main display section 36. area. Then, at the start of one normal game, the MPU 41 stores numerical information (normal per random number counter C4, normal per type random number counter C5 and normal per type random number counter C5) stored as normal pattern correctness information in the normal pattern execution area SAE Counter CS2 value), the general figure per right or wrong table (see FIGS. 12 (A) and 12 (B)) and the general figure per type distribution table (FIGS. 12 (C) and 12 (D) reference) is used to perform a lottery per normal pattern, and a normal pattern fluctuation table (not shown) is used to determine the normal pattern fluctuation display time for the normal pattern. At this time, when the general map correctness information stored in the general map first reservation area SE1 is moved to the general map execution area SAE, the general map correctness information stored in the general map second reservation area SE2 is transferred to the general map The general map correctness information that is shifted to the first reservation area SE1 and stored in the general map third reservation area SE3 is shifted to the general map second reservation area SE2 and is stored in the general map fourth reservation area SE4. The information is shifted to the general map third reservation area SE3.

The normal hit random number counter C4 is periodically updated by sequentially adding 1 within the range of 0 to 299, for example, in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing in FIG. set back to 0. Then, in the general pattern first reservation area SE1 to the general pattern fourth reservation area SE4 of the general pattern reservation storage area 412c, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gates 317L and 317R is stored. be done. In addition, at a predetermined timing, a general pattern winning lottery is performed to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b for a predetermined time based on the value of the normal random number counter C4 stored in the general pattern reservation storage area 412c.

Here, FIGS. 12(A) and 12(B) are diagrams showing an example of a normal-pattern success/failure table. In this embodiment, two types of the low-frequency support mode normal figure hit/failure table shown in FIG. 12(A) and the high frequency support mode general figure hit/failure table shown in FIG. is set. That is, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, the probability per normal pattern is different, the high frequency support mode is higher than the low frequency support mode. is set.

The low-frequency support mode normal figure hit/failure table shown in FIG. 12(A) is a table used in the normal game-per-lottery in the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 12 (A), in the low-frequency support mode normal per hit table, when the value of the random number counter C4 per normal per normal is 0, the value of the random number counter C4 per normal per normal is 1 to 299. If set to off. That is, in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), the normal pattern per probability is set to 1/300, and the operation frequency of the electric accessory 315b is low.

The high-frequency support mode general figure hit/failure table shown in FIG. 12(B) is a table used in the general figure per lottery in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state which are the high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 12 (B), in the high-frequency support mode general pattern hit/fail table, contrary to the low frequency support mode general pattern hit/failure table, when the value of the general pattern random number counter C4 is 0, When the value of the random number counter C4 per normal map is 1 to 299, it is set per normal map. That is, in the probability variation gaming state and the time saving gaming state (high frequency support mode), the normal pattern per probability is set to 299/300, and the normal pattern per probability is set higher than the normal game state (low frequency support mode) At the same time, the operation frequency of the electric accessory 315b is increased.

In addition, the low frequency support mode normal pattern per probability and the high frequency support mode normal pattern per probability are not limited to the examples shown in FIGS.

The normal hit type random number counter C5 is periodically updated by adding 1 in order within the range of 0 to 199, for example, in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing in FIG. 17 described later, and reaches the maximum value. It will be reset to 0 later. Then, in the general pattern first reservation area SE1 to the general pattern fourth reservation area SE4 of the general pattern reservation storage area 412c, the value of the normal per type random number counter C5 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gates 317L and 317R Stored. In addition, when the value of the normal per random number counter C4 stored in the general map 1st reservation area SE1 to the general map 4th reservation area SE4 is the general map per, the general map 1st reservation area SE1 to the general map 4th reservation According to the value of the normal per type random number counter C5 stored in the area SE4, the type per normal pattern (per short open normal pattern and per long open normal pattern), that is, the opening time of the electric accessary 315b is set.

Here, FIG.12(C) and FIG.12(D) are the figures which show an example of the classification distribution table per normal figure. In this embodiment, as a per-universal figure type distribution table, the low-frequency support mode per-universal type distribution table shown in FIG. Two types are set, one with the minute table. That is, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode have different distribution probabilities for the types per normal pattern (per short open normal pattern and per long open normal pattern).

Here, in the case of a short-open normal figure hit, the electric accessory 315b is opened for a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds), so that the game ball enters the second winning hole 315 for a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds). A game per short open normal figure that can enter is executed. In this short open normal game, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning port 315 because the opening time of the electric accessory 315b is short, and in many cases, the game ball does not enter the second winning port 315. .

On the other hand, in the case of the long open normal pattern, the electric accessory 315b is opened for a longer time (for example, 6 seconds) than the short open normal pattern per game, so that the second winning port 315 is opened rather than the short open normal pattern per game. A long open normal game per game in which the game ball can be entered for a long time (for example, 6 seconds) is executed. In this long open normal game, the electric accessory 315b has a long opening time, so the game ball easily enters the second winning port 315, and the right to execute the second special game is limited to the upper limit number (for example, 4) ).

The low-frequency support mode normal figure per type distribution table shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 12 (C), in the low-frequency support mode per normal map type distribution table, when the value of the per normal map type random number counter C5 is 0 to 99, the short open per normal map, per normal map type random number When the value of the counter C5 is 100 to 199, it is set per long open and wide map. In other words, in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), the distribution ratio between the short-open normal pattern and the long-open normal pattern is set to 1:1. Of course, in the normal game state (low frequency support mode), the allocation ratio between the short open normal figure and the long open normal figure per hit is not necessarily 1: 1 and can be changed as appropriate. The distribution rate per figure is zero (the value of the normal per type random number counter C5 per long open normal map is zero) or almost zero (the value of the normal per type random number counter C5 per long open normal map is 1 or 2 ) can also be set.

The high-frequency support mode normal figure per type distribution table shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 12 (D), in the high-frequency support mode per normal map type distribution table, when the value of the per normal map type random number counter C5 is 0, the short open per normal map, per normal map type random number counter C5 If the value of is 1 to 199, it is set per long open wide map. In other words, in the probability variation gaming state and the time-saving gaming state (high frequency support mode), it is set to be more easily distributed per long open normal figure than per short open normal figure. Of course, the allocation rate between short open normal figure per and long open normal figure per probability variation gaming state and time saving gaming state (high frequency support mode) is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 12 (D) as appropriate It can be changed, for example, it is also possible to set the distribution rate per short open normal figure to zero (the value of the normal per type random number counter C5 per short open normal figure is zero).

It should be noted that the opening of the electric accessory 315b is not limited to once per normal game, and may be multiple times. In this case, the opening time and the opening interval (interval between openings) of each opening of the electric accessary 315b in one normal game may be one type or a plurality of types.

Normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is, for example, by incrementing one by one within the range of 0 to 99, and is updated at least once in step S1402 each time the main processing of FIG. 21 described later is executed once, and the It is repeatedly updated in step S1414 even within the remaining time in the main processing. Then, in the general pattern first reservation area SE1 to the general pattern fourth reservation area SE4 of the general pattern reservation storage area 412c, the value of the general pattern variation type counter CS2 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gates 317L and 317R Stored. In addition, at a predetermined timing, based on the value of the general pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 stored in the general pattern reservation storage area 412c, the general pattern fluctuation display time is determined with reference to the general pattern fluctuation display table (not shown). be.

The normal map fluctuation display table (not shown) is, for example, a high frequency support mode normal map fluctuation table that is referred to in the case of high frequency support mode, and a low frequency support mode normal map that is referred to in the case of low frequency support mode and a variable display table. In the high frequency support mode general pattern fluctuation display table and the low frequency support mode general pattern fluctuation display table, for example, a plurality of general pattern fluctuation display times are set in correspondence with the value of the general pattern fluctuation type counter CS2. Also, normally, the high frequency support mode general pattern fluctuation display table is set so that the average time of the general pattern fluctuation display time is shorter than the low frequency support mode general pattern fluctuation display table. For example, the partial fluctuation display time set in the high frequency support mode general pattern fluctuation display table is set to be longer than the partial fluctuation display time set in the low frequency support mode general pattern fluctuation display table. However, all fluctuation display times set in the high-frequency support mode general figure fluctuation display table should be set to be longer than all fluctuation display times set in the low-frequency support mode general figure fluctuation display table. may

In addition, a common general figure fluctuation display table may be set for the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, and at least of the high frequency support mode general figure fluctuation display table and the low frequency support mode general figure fluctuation display table The normal pattern fluctuation display time set in one normal pattern fluctuation display table may be one type. In addition, the normal pattern fluctuation display time may be set according to the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X, for example, the normal pattern fluctuation display time may be set so that the larger the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is, the shorter the normal pattern fluctuation display time is. , It may be set so that the normal pattern fluctuation display time is longer as the normal pattern fluctuation retention number X is smaller.

Here, FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing an example of the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412 in the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The game information storage area 412d stores game information relating to game history, ball payout performance, and the like. In the present embodiment, the game information storage area 412d stores "out ball number", "general winning hole payout ball number", "first winning hole payout ball number", and "second winning hole payout ball number". ”, “Variable number of prize-winning balls paid out”, “Set value”, “Base information”, “Continuous role ratio information”, “Accessory ratio information”, “Accumulated jackpot lottery number”, “Unit jackpot lottery number”, "Big win count" and "Consecutive loss count" are stored. Among these game information, "game setting value", "base information", "consecutive role ratio information", "player ratio information", and "unit jackpot lottery number" ).

The "number of out balls" is an integrated value of the number of game balls shot to the game board 31 in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "number of out balls" is stored as a value obtained by counting the number of out balls detected by the out ball sensor 318a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17, which will be described later.

The "general winning hole payout ball number" is an integrated value of game balls paid out for winning to the general winning hole 313 in the normal game state (low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode). This "general winning hole payout ball number" is set by a winning ball command setting in step S1403 in the main processing of FIG. When setting a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning to the general prize opening 313 in the processing, the value is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of payout balls due to the current win. .

The "first winning hole payout ball number" is an integrated value of game balls paid out for winning to the first winning hole 314 in the normal game state (low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode). This "first winning hole payout number of balls" is determined by the number of winning balls in step S1403 in the main process of FIG. A value obtained by adding the number of payout balls due to the current win when setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning to the first winning hole 314 in the command setting process update to.

"Second winning hole payout ball number" is an integrated value of game balls paid out for winning to the second winning hole 315 in the time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode). This "number of balls to be paid out to the second winning opening" is determined by the winning balls in step S1403 in the main processing of FIG. A value obtained by adding the number of payout balls due to the current win when setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning to the second winning port 315 in the command setting process. update to

The “variable winning hole payout ball number” is an integrated value of game balls paid out for winning to the variable winning hole 316 in the jackpot game state. This "variable winning hole payout number of balls" is set by a winning ball command setting in step S1403 in the main processing of FIG. When setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning to the variable winning port 316 in the process, the value is updated by adding the number of payout balls due to the current win. .

The "game setting value" is for selecting the low probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 9(A)) and the high probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 9(B)) used in the jackpot lottery (determination of success/failure). . In other words, the "game set value" defines the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. In this embodiment, as will be described later, six levels of set values (six types of low-probability mode success/failure tables with different jackpot probabilities (see FIG. 9(A)) and high-probability mode success/failure tables (see FIG. 9(B))) is prepared. The "game set value" is updated in the game set value change process of FIG. 35, which will be described later.

"Base information" is information related to the "base" which is the payout rate (ball output rate) in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the "general winning opening payout ball number" and the "first winning opening payout ball number" to the total number of payout balls. If the "base" is represented by a mathematical formula, it is "base" = 100 x ("number of balls to be paid out to the general winning opening" + "number of balls to be paid out to the first winning opening") / "number of out balls". "Base information" includes information on the current base BL, the previous 60,000-ball base B1, and the two-previous 60,000-ball base B2. Here, the previous 60,000-ball base B1 and the second-last 60,000-ball base B2 are updated each time the number of out balls reaches 60,000 in the specific performance information update process in FIG. 36 (steps S2505 and S2506). Specifically, the "base" when the most recent number of out balls reaches 60,000 is the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the "base" when the previous number of out balls reaches 60,000 is It is stored as "base information" in the game information storage area of the RAM 412 as the 60,000-ball base B2 before the previous one. Further, until the counter value of the number of out balls reaches 60000 balls, the current base BL is calculated (step S1804), and the current base BL is stored as "base information" in the game information storage area of the RAM412. In addition, when the current base BL is calculated until the counter value of the number of out balls reaches 60000 balls, the "base information" includes the previously described "general winning slot payout ball number" and "first winning slot Separately from the "number of payout balls" and "number of out balls", the "number of balls paid out in general winning opening", "number of balls paid out in first winning opening" and "number of out balls" for base calculation are stored.

In this embodiment, the "base information" includes "current base BL", "previous 60,000 ball base B1", and "previous 60,000 ball base B2", and the past two 60,000 ball bases are included in the history. However, the past three or more 60,000 ball bases may be left as a history. Further, the "base information" may include a cumulative base from when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall up to the present.

"Continuous role ratio information" is the total number of balls paid out by winning to all the winning holes that pay out prize balls (general winning hole 313, first winning hole 314, second winning hole 315, and variable winning hole 316). , it is information related to the "continuous accessory ratio", which is the ratio of the number of payout balls to the variable winning opening. If the "continuous role ratio" is represented by a formula, it is "continuous role ratio"=100*"variable number of payout balls"/"total number of payout balls". "Continuous role product ratio information" is updated, for example, in specific performance information update processing in FIG. 36, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the "continuous role ratio information" is stored as the cumulative continuous role ratio from when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the game hall to the present. It should be noted that the "continuous role ratio information" is for a certain period of time (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), or for a period until a certain number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 1000 times) are executed in the normal game state. , a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls)). Of course, the "continuous role ratio information" may include both the cumulative continuous role ratio and the continuous role ratio over a certain number of periods.

"Character ratio information" is the total number of balls paid out by winning to all winning holes that pay out prize balls (general winning hole 313, first winning hole 314, second winning hole 315, and variable winning hole 316) , and "accessory ratio" which is the ratio of the total number of paid out balls of the number of paid out balls of the second winning opening and the number of paid out balls of the variable winning opening. Expressing the "role product ratio" as a mathematical formula, "role product ratio"=100×("number of balls to be paid out from the second winning opening"+"number of balls to be paid out from the variable winning opening")/"total number of balls to be paid out". The "accessory ratio information" is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 36, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the “accessory ratio information” is stored as the accumulated accessory ratio from the installation of the gaming machine 10 in the game hall up to the present. Note that the "accessory ratio information" is for a certain period of time (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), for a period until a certain number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 1000 times) are executed in the normal game state, It may be a role ratio to the number of out balls reaching a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, the "continuous role product ratio information" may include both the cumulative role product ratio and the role product ratio for a certain number of periods.

The "cumulative number of jackpot lotteries" is the number of jackpot lotteries performed in the normal game state (low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode) from the start of the gaming machine 10 to the present before the opening of the game hall. number of times. In other words, the "cumulative jackpot lottery count" is determined by the first special symbol display portion 362 of the main display portion 36 variably displaying the first special symbols triggered by the winning of the first winning port 314 in the normal game state. It is also the cumulative fluctuation display count that has been changed. The "cumulative jackpot lottery number" is the first special symbol or the second special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 at step S2106 in the special symbol variation start process of FIG. 28 described later. It is added by 1 each time the variable display of 2 special figures is started. In addition, the “cumulative jackpot lottery count” is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power source of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

“Number of unit jackpot lotteries” is the number of times a jackpot lottery has been received (main It is the number of times the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display portion of the display portion 36 has been executed). In this embodiment, the fixed number is "250 balls", and the difference ball is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the "general winning opening payout ball number" and the "first winning opening payout ball number" from the "out ball number". In other words, the "unit jackpot lottery number of times" is the number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 with an average of 1000 yen (jackpot number of times the lottery was received). The "unit jackpot lottery count" may be the number of times a jackpot lottery is received per a certain number of "out balls" in the normal game state. The “unit jackpot lottery count” is updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 36, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the “unit jackpot lottery count” is stored as the accumulated unit jackpot lottery count from the time the gaming machine 10 was installed in the game hall to the present. It should be noted that the "number of unit jackpot lotteries" is for a certain period of time (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), a period until a certain number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 1000 times) are executed in the normal game state, It may be for the period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, as the "unit jackpot lottery number", both the accumulated unit jackpot lottery number and the unit jackpot lottery number in a certain number of periods may be stored as game information.

The "number of big wins" is the number of times the lottery result of the big win lottery has been a big win since the game machine 10 was started before the opening of the game hall. The "number of jackpots" is incremented by 1 each time a jackpot game is started in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, which will be described later, for example. Also, the “number of times of big wins” is cleared from the game information storage area 412 d of the RAM 412 when the main power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

"Consecutive loss count" is the number of times the lottery results in the jackpot lottery have been lost continuously in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and when the lottery result is a jackpot, it is set to 0 times. cleared. The "number of times of consecutive omission" is the first special symbol or second When the variable display of the special figure is started, if the result of the success/failure determination based on the low probability mode success/failure table in step S2103 is off, 1 is added, and if the result of the success/failure determination is a jackpot, it is cleared to 0 times. be done. In this embodiment, the “number of consecutive losses” is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power source of the gaming machine 10 is turned off. Of course, the “number of consecutive failures” may not be cleared from the game information storage area 412d when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

Returning to the description of FIG. 14, the performance information display device 4A displays "base information" and "setting values" stored as game information (performance information) in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. . The performance information display device 4A includes a performance display monitor 43, a performance display switch 44, a set value display section 45, a set value change operation section 46 and a ROM 47. FIG. Here, FIG. 15 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the performance information display device 4A.

As shown in FIG. 15, the performance display monitor 43 displays the "base information" of the gaming machine 10, and is provided at a visible position when the inner frame 12 is unfolded (see FIG. 3). reference). The performance display monitor 43 is composed of a plurality (four in this embodiment) of 7-segment displays 431 to 434, which are called 4-digit 7-segment displays. The performance display monitor 43 is preferably provided in the main control device 4, but may be provided in a device other than the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331. may be provided in Also, it is conceivable to display the “base information” using the first special symbol display portion 362 and/or the second special symbol display portion 363 of the main display portion 36 .

The 7-segment displays 431-434 are capable of displaying numbers "0"-"9" and alphabets "A"-"F". In the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, when the alphabet "B" is displayed, a dot is lit to distinguish it from the number "8", and the alphabet "D" is displayed. When displaying, a dot is illuminated to display "0" to distinguish it from the number "0". Also, when displaying any of the alphabets "A" to "F", it is conceivable to light up the dots to clearly indicate that it is an alphabet.

The performance display monitor 43 has four 7-segment displays 431 to 434, of which the left two 7-segment displays 431 and 432 are identification segments in which the "base type" is displayed by an abbreviated symbol, and the right two 7-segment displays Indicators 433 and 434 are ratio segments displaying the base value (%) calculated by the MPU 41 . For example, when the current base BL is 31%, the abbreviation "BL" of the current base BL is "8." , and the base value "31" is displayed as "3" and "1" in the right two 7-segment displays 433 and 434, which are ratio segments. That is, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 display "8.", "L", "3" and "1" in order from the left.

The performance display switch 44 collectively switches the power of the performance display monitor 43 (four 7-segment displays 431 to 434) by pressing the switch, and is located at an easy-to-operate position when the inner frame 12 is unfolded. provided (see FIG. 3). In the illustrated example, the power is turned on by pressing the upper half of the performance display switch 44, and the power is turned off by pressing the lower half. When the performance display switch 44 is operated to turn on the power, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are energized, enabling the performance display monitor 43 to display the base information. On the other hand, when the performance display switch 44 is operated to turn off the power, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are de-energized and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden. . Note that the performance display switch 44 may be provided in a place other than the main controller 4 .

Here, FIG. 15A is an example of display on the performance display monitor 43. FIG. As shown in FIG. 15A, when the performance display switch 44 is off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are off, so the base information is not displayed. As shown in FIGS. 15(B) to 15(D), when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, as long as the performance display switch 44 is not turned off, the current base BL → the previous 60,000 is displayed as "base information". The ball base B1→the 60,000 ball base B2 the last time before→the current base BL is looped in order, and each base is repeatedly displayed at regular time intervals. The example shown in FIG. 15(B) indicates that the current base BL is 28%, the example shown in FIG. 15(C) indicates that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 34%, and the example shown in FIG. 15(D). 2 shows that the 60,000 ball base B2 of the game before last is 32%. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15A, when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are turned off and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden.

A program necessary for displaying the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43, e.g. A program for sequentially displaying the BL, the previous 60,000-ball base B1, and the second-last 60,000-ball base B2 at regular time intervals is stored in the ROM 47 provided in the main control unit 4 separately from the ROM 412 of the MPU 41 . Thereby, the load on the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 can be reduced. However, if the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 has sufficient capacity, the ROM 411 may store a program necessary for displaying the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43. FIG. Further, a storage means such as a ROM provided separately from the main controller 4 may store a program necessary for displaying the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43. FIG.

Further, in the performance display monitor 43, in place of the "base information" or in addition to the "base information", "continuous role ratio information" and "player ratio information" are stored in the game information storage area 412d. Other performance information may be displayed.

Also, the performance display monitor 43 is not limited to a 7-segment display, and may be configured by other forms of display such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, or an organic EL display.

Returning to the description of FIG. 14, the set value display unit 45 selects the low-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 9(A)) and the high-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 9(B)) to be referenced in the jackpot lottery. The above-mentioned game setting value is displayed, and is composed of a 7-segment display. Note that the setting value display unit 45 is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may be configured by other forms of display such as a dot matrix display, liquid crystal display, or organic EL display. A game set value may be displayed.

The setting value change operation unit 46 switches the power of the 7-segment display on and off by pressing, and allows setting values to be changed by rotating when the 7-segment display is powered on. The setting value change operation unit 46 has a function as a contact type switch that is turned on and off by a pressing operation, and a function as a rotary switch that switches the contact by a rotating operation (rotation of a predetermined angle). Here, FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a display example on the set value display section 45 of the main controller 4. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 16A, when the set value display unit 45 is in the off state and the set value change operation unit 46 is pressed, the 7-segment display is energized and the set value display unit is turned on. A number is displayed at 45. The number displayed at this time is the set value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and indicates the current set value. In the illustrated example, the set value is "1". On the other hand, when the set value change operation unit 46 is pressed while the set value display unit 45 is on, the power supply to the 7-segment display is interrupted, thereby turning the set value display unit 45 off. Become.

As shown in FIG. 16B, when the setting value display unit 45 is in the lighting state and the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated, the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is changed. . In the illustrated example, when the set value display section 45 is rotated clockwise, the number displayed on the set value display section 45 increases, and when the set value display section 45 is rotated counterclockwise, the number displayed on the set value display section 45 increases. The number displayed is smaller. When the number displayed on the setting value display section 45 is changed by rotating the setting value display section 45, the changed number is stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 as the setting value. Therefore, when the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed to turn off the power of the 7-segment display while the number corresponding to the target setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 45, the power is turned off. The number that was displayed immediately before is determined as the set value. As a result, the MPU 41 selects a low-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 9(A)) or a high-probability mode success/failure table (FIG. 9(B)) according to the setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. ), a jackpot lottery can be held.

The method for changing the set value is not limited to turning off the set value display unit 45 after rotating the set value change operation unit 46 . For example, a method in which the setting value is determined by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46 and then pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1), or a method in which the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1) is repeatedly pressed or pressed for a long time to set the value. A method of turning off the power of the set value display unit 45 after changing the number displayed on the value display unit 45, and a method of displaying the set value by inserting a key into a keyhole provided in the main control device 4 or the like and rotating the key. A method such as changing the number displayed on the unit 45 and then removing the key may be used.

Here, the performance information display device 4A having the set value display section 45 is provided in the main control device 4 of the main control unit 331 in the control unit 33. FIG. Also, the control unit 33 is provided on the back side of the game board 31 and can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 . Therefore, the set value display unit 45 is provided on the back side of the game board 31, and by opening and closing the control unit 33 together with the game board 31 with respect to the front frame 11, the external of the game machine 10 (front side of the front frame 11) is displayed. ), it is possible to select a visible state or an invisible state. That is, by closing the game board 31 (control unit 33) with respect to the front frame 11, the set value display section 45 cannot be visually recognized, while the game board 31 (control unit 33) is opened with respect to the front frame 11. , the setting value display section 45 can be visually recognized. As a result, when a player executes a game on the gaming machine 10, unless the game board 31 is opened, the setting value display portion 45 is not visually recognized. The value is prevented from being grasped by the player. When the set value display section 45 is in the lit state, the set value change operation section 46 is pressed to turn off the set value display section 45 . Therefore, by keeping the set value display portion 45 off during the business hours of the game hall, the set value display portion 45 can be visually recognized by opening the game board 31 due to jamming of balls in the game machine 10 or the like. Even in this state, the set value display section 45 can prevent the player from grasping the set value.

On the other hand, the set value display section 45 is turned on by pressing the set value change operation section 46 when it is in the off state, and the numbers corresponding to the game set values are hidden. Therefore, outside the business hours of the game hall, the game board 31 is opened with respect to the front frame 11, and the set value display unit 45 is turned on by performing a pressing operation on the set value change operation unit 46. The game set values can be confirmed based on the numbers displayed on the set value display section 45, and the game set values can be changed by rotating the set value change operation section 46. FIG. As a result, it is possible to change the setting value outside the business hours with a simple operation while ensuring the secrecy of the setting value during the business hours.

In this embodiment, the performance information display device 4A is provided in the main control device 4, but the performance information display device 4A may be provided separately from the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331, and the control unit 33 may be provided separately from the main control unit 331 .

[Sub-control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 7, the sub-control unit 332 includes a sound lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and based on the control signal input from the main control unit 331, the symbol display section 341 displays and Execute the presentation display.

[Audio lamp control device 5]
The audio lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input/output I/F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Moreover, ROM511 and RAM512 are incorporated in MPU51.

A ROM 511 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. In addition, the ROM 511 also stores information such as sounds used in special game effects, jackpot game effects, and the like, and lamp flashing patterns. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit from which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 51 . Note that the RAM 512 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

The audio lamp control device 5 executes the processing according to the control program stored in the ROM 511 by the MPU 51, thereby issuing a command to the display control device 6 based on the command (control signal) input from the main control device 4. (control signal) to control the display of the pattern display section 341 . In addition, the sound lamp control device 5 also controls the reproduction sound output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination part 27 in accordance with the display of the pattern display part 341 . For example, the MPU 51 controls image display on the symbol display unit 341, playback sound output from the speaker 26, and blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 when executing a special game effect and a jackpot game effect, which will be described later.

The input/output I/F 52 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the audio lamp control device 5 and outputs control signals from the audio lamp control device 5 . Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input/output I/F 52 . Then, commands such as a special figure variation pattern command, a first special figure reservation command, a second special figure reservation command, and a special figure shift command are input from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5 . Also, the audio lamp control device 5 outputs a display variation pattern command and the like to the display control device 6 . A configuration in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the audio lamp control device 5 is also conceivable as another embodiment. A configuration in which the sub-control unit 332 includes one control device having both the functions of the sound lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 is also conceivable as another embodiment.

Also, the input/output I/F 52 is connected to the speaker 26 and the illumination section 27 . In the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 controls the sound output from the speaker 26 and the flashing mode of the illumination portion 27 based on commands input from the main control device 4. FIG. Moreover, the operation switch 20a is connected to input-output I/F52. As a result, the MPU 51 detects that the operation button 20 has been operated, and based on the detection result, the image game effect executed by the symbol display section 341 and the sound are output from the speaker 26. It is also possible to control a sound output presentation, a lamp presentation by the flashing mode of the illumination part 27, and the like.

MPU51 is input from the main control device 4 general figure fluctuation pattern command, electric role product open command, electric role product close command, special figure fluctuation pattern command, first special figure reservation command, second special figure reservation command, special Figure shift command, jackpot game start command, opening start command, opening end command, open/close execution mode start command, round game start command, round game end command, interval start command, interval end command, open/close execution mode end command, ending start command , an ending end command, a jackpot game end command, a game set value change command, etc.

Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the special figure variation pattern based on the special figure variation pattern command when the special figure variation pattern command is input, and controls the display of the display variation pattern command corresponding to the special figure variation pattern. It is transmitted to the device 6 (see step S3107 in the command determination process of FIG. 47), and the symbol variation display in the symbol display section 341 is started. At this time, in the symbol display section 341, when the special figure variation pattern command indicates the loss, a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the loss is displayed.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the pattern display section 341 based on commands (control signals) input from the sound lamp control device 5 . Specifically, the display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display section 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the sound lamp control device 5 to execute the symbol variation display and effect display.

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61 and an input/output I/F 62 , and the input/output I/F 62 is connected to the sound lamp control device 5 and the pattern display section 341 . Bidirectional communication may be possible between the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 .

The MPU 61 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and has a built-in ROM 611 and RAM 612 . The display control device 6 also incorporates other circuits such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for accepting interrupts. The MPU 61 executes processing according to control programs stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Also, part or all of the processing performed by the display control device 6 may be performed by an electronic circuit.

In addition to the control program, the ROM 611 stores a plurality of types of images such as variable symbols such as decoration symbols used in the symbol variation display of the symbol display unit 341, advance notice effect images, ready-to-win effect images, jackpot effect images, and loss effect images. ing. The images displayed on the pattern display section 341 include still images and moving images. The ROM 611 also stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes the types of images to be used and the display timing, as well as the variable display time of the variable symbols. Then, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 causes the symbol display section 341 to display an image according to the display schedule corresponding to the variable display pattern command, thereby realizing the symbol variation display and effect display.

A RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit from which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 61 . Note that the RAM 612 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71, an input/output I/F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 71 also incorporates a ROM 711 and a RAM 712 .

A ROM 711 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit from which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 71 . Note that the RAM 712 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

The input/output I/F 72 is an input/output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7 . Specifically, the input/output I/F 72 is connected to the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 .

As described above, the payout device 132 pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23, and includes a drive unit 132a such as a motor for driving a ball stop member for switching whether or not game balls are paid out, A payout sensor 132b for individually detecting a game ball to be put out is provided. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the driving section 132a based on the detection result of the payout sensor 132b. Also, the payout control device 7 is provided with a state return switch 73 . The state recovery switch 73 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball jamming (return to normal state) when a payout error such as ball jamming of the payout device 132 occurs.

The ball lending device 100 is installed in an island facility together with the gaming machine 10.例文帳に追加The ball lending device 100 is stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 according to the operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to put out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount within the range of the amount set and lend them to the player. Specifically, when a control signal to the effect that a predetermined number of game balls are to be paid out is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 to release a predetermined number of game balls. be paid out. Note that the recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium containing an IC chip. Also, the ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending out a predetermined number of game balls corresponding to the amount of cash inserted.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls driving of the game ball launch mechanism 32 . Specifically, the shooting control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 of the game ball shooting mechanism 32 while the shooting handle 22 is being rotated, thereby moving the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 to the shooting rail 321. feed above. The shooting control IC 81 detects the amount of operation of the shooting handle 22 and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball shooting mechanism 32 according to the amount of operation, thereby directing the game ball on the shooting rail 321 toward the game board 31. to fire. At this time, the firing control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that switches ON/OFF at a preset cycle (for example, 0.6 sec) as a drive signal. As a result, the game machine 10 shoots one game ball toward the game area every 0.6 seconds.

Also, the shooting handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation by the player, and voltage is input to the shooting control IC 81 according to the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 22 . As a result, the shooting control IC 81, based on the voltage value input according to the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 22, increases the shooting intensity of the game ball from the game ball shooting mechanism 32 as the rotation operation amount of the shooting handle 22 increases. The voltage applied to the solenoid 323 is adjusted so that it becomes stronger.

Further, the shooting handle 22 has a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the shooting handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for the player to arbitrarily stop shooting the game ball. is provided. The shooting control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b, and when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the shooting handle 22, or the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player. When this is detected, the shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism 32 is stopped. As a result, for example, the firing handle 22 is fixed in a state of being rotated, preventing the game from being played in a situation where the player is not touching the firing handle 22 . In addition, the player can stop the shooting of the ball game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b with a thumb or the like at an arbitrary timing while rotating the shooting handle 22.例文帳に追加

[Power supply control device 9]
The power supply controller 9 generates a +12V voltage for driving various sensors, drivers, etc., a +5V voltage for logic used in the controller, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated voltage of +12V or +5V to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8 and the like.

The power supply control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning the game machine 10 on and off, and a RAM erase switch 91 operated when the game machine 10 is returned to its initial state. The game machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated with the RAM erase switch 91 turned on to turn on the power.

In addition, the power control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means charged with power supplied from the power supply equipment. As a result, in the game machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is interrupted, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is held for a predetermined period of time by the power discharged from the capacitor. Further, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is interrupted, the control device can be driven by the power discharged from the secondary battery for a predetermined period of time.

Furthermore, the power supply control device 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, etc., when it is determined that the power supply has been cut off. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset DC voltage of 24V based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, the power failure state occurs when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V. I judge. In addition, when the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, etc. receive a power failure signal from the power control device 9, they interrupt the control being executed and execute a predetermined NMI interrupt process.

[Processing of main controller 4]
Next, processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 41. FIG. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 includes a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, a main timer interrupt process that is started periodically, and a main timer interrupt process that is executed when a power failure occurs. Execute NMI interrupt processing and the like. Note that in the present embodiment, descriptions of start-up processing, NMI interrupt processing, etc. will be omitted, and main timer interrupt processing and main processing will be described. In the start-up process, it is confirmed whether or not the RAM 412 is operating normally, and execution of the main timer interrupt process is permitted on the condition that the RAM 412 is operating normally.

[Main Timer Interrupt Processing of Main Controller 4]
Here, FIG. 17 is a flow chart for explaining an example of the main timer interrupt processing procedure executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 . The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec. The main timer interrupt processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1001>
As shown in FIG. 17, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes sensor detection processing for determining the detection state of sensors connected to the main controller 4 and the like. For example, the detection states of the entering ball sensors 313a to 316a, 317La, 317Ra, the out ball sensor 318a, etc. are determined. At this time, the MPU 41 stores the information in the RAM 412 as winning detection information when the game ball entering any one of the entering ball sensors 313a to 316a, 317La, and 317Ra is detected. Further, when out balls are detected by the out ball sensor 318a, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of out balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to update the number of out balls in the game information storage area 412d. do.

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal random number initial value counter CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal winning random number initial value counter CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. do.

<Step S1003>
Subsequently, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the normal hit random number counter C4, and the normal hit type random number counter C5. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to each of the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the normal hit random number counter C4, and the normal hit type random number counter C5, and those counters When the value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
After that, the MPU 41 executes start-up winning processing associated with winning to the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315 (step S1004), and executes launch control processing (step S1005). Details of the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the shooting control process, the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the shooting handle 22, and the game ball is shot on condition that the ball stop switch 21b for stopping shooting is not operated. is a process to enable Further, the shooting control process disables the shooting of game balls when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the shooting handle 22, or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. It is a process to The MPU 41 instructs the shooting control device 8 to shoot the game ball when the shooting of the game ball is valid.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, MPU41, when the game ball has passed through gates 317L and 317R, by MPU41, by MPU41, to execute the through gate processing to update the information stored in the general pattern reservation storage area 412c of the RAM412, the main timer End interrupt processing. Details of the through gate processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Start winning process]
Here, FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the starting winning process executed by the MPU 41 at step S1004 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. The starting winning process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1101>
As shown in FIG. 18, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the first winning port 314 has won a prize. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that a prize has been won for the first prize winning port 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102, and if it determines that there is no prize for the first prize winning port 314 (step S1101: No ), and the process proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the first special figure reservation number N stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum number of reservations (4 in this embodiment). Here, if the number N of 1st special figure reservations is the maximum number of reservations (Step S1102: Yes), MPU41 will shift processing to Step S1106. On the other hand, if the first special figure reservation number N is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 performs a process of adding 1 to the first special figure reservation number N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2 and a reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17, and step S1402 in the main process of FIG. And acquire the counter value of the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in S1414, and store the counter value in the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth special figure reservation storage area REA of the special figure reservation storage area 412b in RAM412 Store in the first empty reservation area of the reservation area REA4.

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 determines whether the special figure propriety information for the first special figure hold acquired in step S1104 is a judgment target of the propriety of the jackpot in step S2102 or S2103 in the special figure fluctuation start processing of FIG. 28 described later. To confirm the contents of the special figure propriety information, execute the first special figure reservation command setting process of setting the first special figure reservation command in the RAM 412 based on this confirmation result. The details of the first special figure pending command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a prize for the second prize winning port 315. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that a prize has been won for the second prize winning port 315 (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107, and if it determines that there is no prize for the second prize winning port 315 (step S1106: No ), the starting winning process is terminated.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second special figure reservation number M stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum number of reservations (4 in this embodiment). Here, if the second special figure reservation number M is the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process. On the other hand, if the second special figure reservation number M is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: No), the MPU 41 performs a process of adding 1 to the second special figure reservation number M as update processing (step S1108). .

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2 and a reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17, and step S1402 in the main process of FIG. And acquire the counter value of the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in S1414, the counter value of the second special figure reservation storage area REB of the special figure reservation storage area 412b in the RAM412 1st reservation area REB1 to 4th Store in the first empty reservation area of the reservation area REB4.

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41, the special figure propriety information for the second special figure hold acquired in step S1109 is before the judgment target of the propriety of the jackpot in step S2102 or S2103 in the special figure fluctuation start processing of FIG. 28 described later. To confirm the contents of the special figure propriety information, the second special figure reservation command setting process for setting the second special figure reservation command in the RAM 412 based on this confirmation result is executed. Here, since the 2nd special figure reservation command setting processing is the same as the 1st special figure reservation command setting processing mentioned below with reference to Drawing 19, detailed explanation is omitted. In the second special figure pending command setting process, in the first special figure pending command setting process of FIG. Number N" should be read as "second special figure reservation number M".

[First special figure pending command setting process]
Here, FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special figure pending command setting process executed by the MPU 41 at step S1105 in the starting winning process of FIG. In addition, the 1st special figure pending command includes information indicating that the command is the 1st special figure pending command, the result of the jackpot lottery (jackpot type or out), the special figure fluctuation display time and the 1st special figure pending and information such as the number N. Hereinafter, the first special figure pending command setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1201>
As shown in FIG. 19, the MPU 41 reads out the first special figure reservation number N from the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA of the first special figure reservation storage area REA, and corresponds to each of the first special figure reservations. The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is read from the RAM 412 (step S1201).

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the mode is the high-probability mode, and if the mode is the high-probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1203. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 is not in the high-probability mode (step S1202: No), that is, when it is in the low-probability mode, the process proceeds to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the high probability mode based on the probability variation gaming state flag. The probability variation gaming state flag is a flag indicating whether or not the probability variation gaming state, that is, whether it is a high probability mode. This probability variation gaming state flag is set to ON in step S2317 of FIG. It is set to OFF in step S2309 of FIG. 33 when shifting to the probability variable jackpot game state or normal jackpot game state.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 reads the high probability mode right/wrong table (see FIG. 9B) stored according to the game setting value in step S2410 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. Based on the success/failure table, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the big hit random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to winning the big hit. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 reads the low probability mode right/wrong table (see FIG. 9A) stored according to the game setting value in step S2410 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. Based on the probability mode success/failure table, whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to winning the jackpot is determined.

In steps S1203 and S1204, the success/failure determination is executed based on the high-probability mode success/failure table or the low-probability mode success/failure table stored according to the game setting value in step S2410 in the game setting value change processing of FIG. 35 described later. However, in step S1203 or S1204, after reading out the game setting values stored in step S2408 in the game setting value change processing of FIG. Appropriateness determination may be performed by selecting the mode appropriateness table one by one.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to jackpot winning. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1206. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: No), that is, when it is out, the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, MPU41 reads out the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the special figure variation type counter CS1 from the RAM412. For example, when the special figure right or wrong information is stored in the third reservation area REA3 in step S1104 in the starting winning process of FIG. 18, the jackpot type counter included in the special figure right or wrong information stored in the third reservation area REA3 C2 and the counter value of special figure variation type counter CS1 are read. In addition, the reservation area in which the special figure propriety information is stored in step S1104 in the start winning process of FIG. 18 out of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 is stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA It can be determined by the value of the number N of pending.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the special figure variation type counter CS1 and the first special figure reservation number N to the first special figure reservation command. Thus, since the first special figure pending command includes the first special figure pending number N read in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 that receives the first special figure pending command is the first By referring to the number N of reservations included in the 1 special figure reservation command, the 1st special figure reservation command corresponds to the 1st special figure right or wrong information stored in any of the 1st reservation area REA1 to the 4th reservation area REA4 It is possible to recognize what

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
With step S1208, MPU41 reads out the counter value of special figure fluctuation classification counter CS1 from RAM412. Next, the MPU 41 sets the information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out, the special figure variation type counter CS1 and the first special figure reservation number N to the first special figure reservation command (step S1209).

It should be noted that the first special figure pending command set in step S1207 or S1209 of the first special figure pending command setting process is stored in the RAM412, and is executed by the MPU41 of the main control device 4, which will be described later in FIG. In step S1401 of the main processing, it is erased after being transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 together with other commands. Furthermore, the content of the first special figure pending command described here is only an example, and if it is possible to grasp the same content as the first special figure pending command in the audio lamp control device 5, it will be explained here. It is not limited to what you do. For example, it is conceivable that part or all of the information of the first special figure pending command is included in other commands.

[Through gate processing]
Here, FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the procedure of through gate processing executed by the MPU 41 at step S1006 in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. In the through gate process, when the game ball passes through the through gates 317L and 317R, the information stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 412c of the RAM412 is updated by the MPU41. The through gate processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1301>
As shown in FIG. 20, in the through gate process, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the left through gate 317L (step S1301). Whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 317L is determined based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412 in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has passed through the left through gate 317L (step S1301: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1303, and determines that the game ball has not passed through the left through gate 317L. (Step S1301: No), the process proceeds to step S1302.

<Step S1302>
When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has not passed through the left through gate 317L (step S1301: No), it determines whether the game ball has passed through the right through gate 317R (step S1302). Whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 317R is determined based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412 in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has passed through the right through gate 317R (step S1302: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1303, and determines that the game ball has not passed through the right through gate 317R. (Step S1302: No), the through gate process is terminated.

<Step S1303>
MPU41, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 317L on the left side (step S1301: Yes), or when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 317R on the right side (step S1302: Yes), It is determined whether the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X stored in the normal pattern fluctuation pending number storage area SNA set in the normal pattern pending storage area 412c is the maximum pending number (4 in this embodiment) (step S1303). MPU41, when normal pattern fluctuation reservation number X is the maximum number of reservations (step S1303: Yes), ends the through gate process, when normal pattern fluctuation reservation number X is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1303: No), The process proceeds to step S1304.

<Steps S1304 and S1305>
MPU41, when normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1303: No), adds 1 to normal pattern fluctuation pending number X (step S1304), in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. The counter values of the normal per random number counter C4 and normal per type random number counter C5 to be updated, and the value of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 to be updated in steps S1402 and S1414 of the main processing of FIG. 21 described later are obtained, and the counter The value is stored in the first empty reservation area out of the normal diagram first reservation area SE1 to the normal diagram fourth reservation area SE4 of the normal diagram reservation storage area 412c in the RAM412 (step S1305), and the through gate process is terminated.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 will be described with reference to FIG. In the main process, the main control process for the progress of the general game, the special game and the jackpot game is executed. In the main process, the processes of steps S1401 to S1411 are executed as periodic processes, for example, in a 4 msec cycle, and the counter update processes of steps S1413 and S1414 are executed in the remaining time from the end of the processes of steps S1401 to S1411 to the next cycle. be.

<Step S1401>
As shown in FIG. 21, in step S1401, the MPU 41 sends output data such as commands set in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. Execute external output processing to send to. For example, in the RAM 412, normal figure fluctuation pattern command, electric role product open command, electric role product close command, special figure fluctuation pattern command, first special figure reservation command, second special figure reservation command, special figure shift command, jackpot game start command, opening start command, opening end command, open/close execution mode start command, round game start command, round game end command, interval start command, interval end command, open/close execution mode end command, ending start command, ending end command, jackpot game When a command such as an end command or a game set value change command is set, the command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5.例文帳に追加In addition, when a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1403 described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, MPU41 updates the values of the special figure variation type counter CS1 and the normal figure variation type counter CS2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the special figure variation type counter CS1 and the normal figure variation type counter CS2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. .

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 sets the prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub-control unit 332 in the RAM412. Specifically, based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a winning has occurred in the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, the variable winning port 316, or the like. to judge. Then, when a prize has been won, a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the prize is set in the RAM 412. - 特許庁At this time, the MPU 41 stores the information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in the normal game state (low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode) when winning occurs in the general winning port 313 or the first winning port 314. The number of balls to be paid out from the general winning opening or the number of balls to be paid out from the first winning opening is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out due to the current winning. In addition, the MPU 41, in the time-saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) or variable probability gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), when the winning of the second winning opening 315 has occurred, the RAM 412 The number of balls to be paid out from the second winning opening stored in the game information storage area 412d is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out from the current winning. Further, in the jackpot game state, when a prize is won in the variable winning port 316, the MPU 41 changes the number of balls to be paid out from the variable winning port stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to the number of balls to be paid out due to the current winning. is added to the value.

<Step S1404>
In step S1404, the MPU 41 executes a normal game control process for controlling the progress of the normal game. In addition, the details of the normal figure game control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24. FIG.

<Step S1405>
In step S1405, the MPU 41 executes normal pattern per game control processing for controlling the progress of the normal pattern per game executed when the result of the normal pattern per lottery is winning. In addition, the details of the game control process per normal figure will be described later with reference to FIG. 25 .

<Step S1406>
In step S1406, the MPU 41 executes a special figure game control process for controlling the progress of the special figure game. Incidentally, details of the special figure game control processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. The special figure variation pattern command required for is set. At this time, the MPU41, the jackpot random number counter C1 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. Based on each value of the variation type counter CS1, a special figure variation pattern command indicating the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the variation display time is set in the RAM412.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the jackpot game executed when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot. Details of the jackpot game control process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process for controlling the transition of various game states (normal game state, time-saving game state, probability variable game state, probability variable jackpot game state and normal jackpot game state). Details of the game state transition processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34. FIG.

<Step S1409>
In step S1409, the MPU 41 executes game set value change processing. In this game set value change process, a process of displaying or not displaying the set values or controlling the change of the game set values stored in the game information storage area 412d according to the operation of the set value change operation unit 46 is executed. . Details of the game set value change process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the game setting value change process is executed in the main process, but the start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, or after the start-up process and before the game ball is started to be launched. A limited execution is also conceivable. As a result, after the game is started by the player, the game set values cannot be changed until the power is turned on next time. can be prevented.

<Step S1410>
In step S1410, the MPU 41 executes specific performance information update processing in the game information. In this embodiment, base information or the like is updated as the specific performance information. Details of the specific performance information update process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG.

<Step S1411>
In step S<b>1411 , the MPU 41 executes display control processing for the performance display monitor 43 . In the display control processing of the performance display monitor 43, processing for displaying the base information updated in the specific performance information update processing in step S1410 on the performance display monitor 43 is executed. Details of the display control processing of the performance display monitor 43 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 to 41. FIG.

<Step S1412>
In step S1412, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main process this time. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1412: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1401, and the processes after S1401 described above are executed. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived (step S1412: No), the MPU 41 waits until the execution timing of the next main process arrives, that is, at the execution timing of the next main process. During the remaining time until it is determined that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1412: Yes), steps S1413 and S1414 are repeatedly executed.

<Step S1413>
In step S1413, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal random number initial value counter CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal winning random number initial value counter CIN2, and sets the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. clear.

<Step S1414>
In step S1414, MPU41 updates the special figure variation type counter CS1 and the normal figure variation type counter CS2. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter values of the special figure variation type counter CS1 and the normal figure variation type counter CS2, and when those counter values reach the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. And, MPU41, after updating the special figure variation type counter CS1 and normal figure variation type counter CS2, returns the process to step S1412.

[Universal figure game control process]
Here, FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the general pattern game control process executed in step S1404 in the main process of FIG. In the general pattern game control process, a process for controlling the variable display and stop display of the general pattern in the normal pattern display section 361 of the main display section 36 is executed. Hereinafter, normal figure game control processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1501>
As shown in FIG. 22, in the general pattern game control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the normal pattern fluctuation display flag indicating that the normal pattern is being displayed in a variable display (during execution of the normal pattern game) is on. is determined (step S1501). The normal pattern fluctuation display flag is set to ON in step S1711 when the normal pattern fluctuation display (normal pattern game) is started in the normal pattern fluctuation start processing of FIG. 24 described later, and the normal pattern is displayed stopped ( When the general pattern game ends), it is set to OFF at step S1510 in the general pattern game control process.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1507 when the normal pattern fluctuation display flag is ON (step S1501: Yes), that is, when the normal pattern game is being executed. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1502 when the normal pattern fluctuation display flag is off (step S1501: No), that is, when the normal pattern game is not being executed.

<Step S1502>
When the normal pattern fluctuation display flag is off (step S1501: No), that is, when the normal pattern game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines that the electric auditors 315b are being opened (executing the normal pattern per game). (Step S1502). The electric auditors open flag is set to ON in step S1811 when opening the electric auditors 315b in the game control process per normal figure of FIG. set to off.

MPU41, when the electric accessary product opening flag is ON (step S1502: Yes), that is, when the general pattern per game is being executed, ends the general pattern game control process. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1503 when the electric auditors product open flag is off (step S1502: No), that is, when the normal figure per game is not being executed.

<Step S1503>
When the electric accessary product open flag is off (step S1502: No), that is, when the normal game is not being executed, the MPU 41 indicates that the jackpot game is being executed. (step S1503). The jackpot game flag is set to ON in step S2206 when the jackpot game is started in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29 described later, and is set to OFF in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends.

MPU41, when the jackpot playing flag is ON (step S1503: Yes), when the jackpot game is being executed, ends the normal game control process. That is, in the present embodiment, the regular game is not started during execution of the jackpot game.

Of course, the regular game may be started during execution of the jackpot game. In this case, according to the support mode type (high-frequency support mode and low-frequency support mode) before the jackpot game is started, that is, according to the game state before shifting to the jackpot game state, the general pattern reservation storage area 412c Based on the information (random number counter per general pattern C4, random number counter per general pattern C5 and value of the general pattern variation type counter CS2) moved from the general pattern first reservation area SE1 to the general pattern execution area SAE, the general pattern Winning lottery determination is executed. In other words, if the game state before the jackpot game is executed is the probability variable game state or the time-saving game state which is the high frequency support mode, the normal figure per success/failure table for the high frequency support mode (see FIG. 12 (B)), Based on the per-universal figure type table (see FIG. 12 (D)) and the per-universal figure fluctuation table (not shown), the per-universal lottery (per or out of the per-universal figure), the per-universal figure type (long open or short Per open normal map), and normal map fluctuation display time is set. On the other hand, when the game state before the jackpot game is executed is the normal game state which is the low frequency support mode, the general figure per success/failure table for the low frequency support mode (see FIG. 12 (A)), the general figure per type Based on the table (see FIG. 12 (C)) and the normal figure fluctuation table (not shown), per normal figure lottery (per normal figure or off), per normal figure type (per long open normal figure or short open normal figure per ), and the normal figure fluctuation display time is set.

On the other hand, when the jackpot playing flag is off (step S1503: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1504.

<Step S1504>
When the jackpot game flag is off (step S1503: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 is stored in the normal pattern fluctuation pending number storage area SNA set in the normal pattern pending storage area 412c of the RAM 412. It is determined whether or not the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is 0 (step S1504). MPU41, when the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is 0 (step S1504: Yes), ends the normal pattern game control process, and when the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is not 0 (step S1504: No), process to step S1505.

<Step S1505>
If the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is not 0 (step S1504: No), the MPU 41 executes normal pattern data setting processing for the normal pattern correctness information stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 412c (step S1505), The process moves to step S1506. The details of the normal map data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1506>
In step S1506, the MPU 41 executes a normal pattern fluctuation start process for causing the normal pattern display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 to display the normal pattern fluctuation based on the information stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 412c. , End the normal game control process. In addition, the details of the normal pattern fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 24 .

<Step S1507>
When the normal pattern fluctuation display flag is ON (step S1501: Yes), that is, when the normal pattern game is being executed, the MPU 41 indicates that the jackpot game is being executed. (step S1507). The jackpot game flag is set to ON in step S2206 when the jackpot game is started in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29 described later, and is set to OFF in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends.

When the jackpot playing flag is ON (step S1507: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1509. On the other hand, when the jackpot playing flag is off (step S1507: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
When the jackpot playing flag is off (step S1507: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal pattern fluctuation display time has elapsed from the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display ( step S1508). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to stop display (end the normal game) the normal symbols that are variably displayed in the normal symbol display portion 361 of the main display portion 36 .

MPU41, when the normal pattern fluctuation display time has passed (step S1508: Yes), that is, at the timing to stop display the normal pattern that is variably displayed in the normal pattern display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 (end the normal pattern game) If so, the process proceeds to step S1509. On the other hand, when the normal pattern fluctuation display time has not elapsed (step S1508: No), the MPU 41 stops displaying the normal pattern that is displayed in the normal pattern display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 (ends the normal pattern game). ), if it is not the timing to make, end the normal game control process.

<Steps S1509 to S1511>
If the normal pattern fluctuation display flag is on (step S1501: Yes) and the jackpot game flag is on (step S1507: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is started during execution of the normal pattern game, Or when the normal pattern fluctuation display time of the normal pattern has passed (step S1508: Yes), that is, when it is time to stop display the normal pattern displayed in fluctuation (end the normal pattern game), the MPU 41 is the normal pattern game The normal pattern is stopped and displayed in the pattern according to the result of the lottery for the normal pattern corresponding to (step S1509), and the normal pattern fluctuation display flag indicating that the normal pattern is being displayed (executing the normal pattern game) is turned off (step S1510). Furthermore, the MPU 41 turns on the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag indicating that the normal pattern is stop-displayed, that is, the end of the normal pattern game (step S1511), and ends the normal pattern game control process.

It should be noted that the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag determines whether or not it is time to start the normal pattern per game (open the electric auditors 315b) in step S1801 of the normal pattern per game control process of FIG. 25 described later. Referred to for

In addition, in the present embodiment, not only when it is time to stop display (finish the normal game) the normal symbol that is displayed in fluctuation due to the lapse of the normal pattern fluctuation display time of the normal symbol, but also the execution of the normal pattern game When the jackpot game is started during, the normal symbols that are variably displayed are stopped and displayed (the normal pattern game is ended). That is, when the jackpot game is started, the general pattern game is forcibly terminated before the general pattern fluctuation display time of the normal pattern elapses. Of course, the general pattern game may be continuously executed until the general pattern fluctuation display time of the normal pattern elapses even when the jackpot game is started.

[General map data setting process]
Here, FIG. 23 is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the normal figure data setting process performed by MPU41 in FIG.22 S1505. In the general pattern data setting process, the storage contents of the general pattern reservation storage area 412c in the storage area of the main controller 4 in FIG. 11 are updated. Hereinafter, the general pattern data setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 23 .

<Steps S1601 to S1603>
As shown in FIG. 23, in the general pattern data setting process, first, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the general pattern fluctuation reservation number X stored in the general pattern fluctuation reservation number storage area SNA (step S1601), The general pattern correctness information is moved from the reservation area SE1 to the general pattern execution area SAE (step S1602). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the general map correctness information stored in the general map second reservation area SE2 to the general map fourth reservation area SE4 one by one (step S1603). Specifically, in step S1603, the general map correctness information of the general map second reservation area SE2 is moved to the general map first reservation area SE1, and the general map correctness information of the general map third reservation area SE3 is transferred to the general map second reservation area SE1. It is moved to the area SE2, and the general map correctness information of the general map 4th reservation area SE4 is moved to the general map 3rd reservation area SE3.

[Normal pattern fluctuation start process]
Here, FIG. 24 is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of normal figure fluctuation start processing performed by MPU41 in FIG.22 S1506. In the normal pattern fluctuation start process, the normal pattern display unit 361 starts to display the normal pattern fluctuation, and various commands and flags are set based on the lottery result of the normal pattern per lottery. Hereinafter, normal figure fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1701>
As shown in FIG. 24, in normal figure fluctuation start processing, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the high frequency support mode flag indicating that the high frequency support mode (probability variation gaming state or time saving gaming state) is on. (Step S1701). The high-frequency support mode flag is set to ON in step S2313 of FIG. 34 when the jackpot game ends in the game state transition processing described later, and the game state changes from the probability variation game state or the time saving game state to the probability variation jackpot game state or normal It is set to OFF at step S2307 in FIG. 33 when shifting to the jackpot gaming state, or at step S2326 in FIG. 34 when the gaming state shifts from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state.

MPU41, when the high-frequency support mode flag is on (step S1701: Yes), ie, when the high-frequency support mode probability variable gaming state or time-saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step S1702, high-frequency support mode If the flag is off (step S1701: No), that is, if the normal game state is the low-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S1703.

<Steps S1702 and S1703>
When it is the probability variation gaming state or the time saving gaming state which is the high frequency support mode (step S1701: Yes), the MPU 41 performs the normal figure per right/wrong determination based on the high frequency support mode (step S1702). Specifically, the MPU 41 is based on the high-frequency support mode general figure per right or wrong table (see FIG. 12 (B)) and the high-frequency support mode general figure per classification table (see FIG. 12 (D)). Whether the values of the normal hit random number counter C4 and the normal hit type random number counter C5 included as numerical information in the normal pattern correctness information stored in the normal pattern execution area SAE of the reserved storage area 412c are values corresponding to the normal pattern per It determines whether or not it is appropriate.

On the other hand, when the normal game state is the low-frequency support mode (step S1701: No), the general pattern hit determination is performed based on the low-frequency support mode (step S1703). Specifically, the MPU 41 is based on the low frequency support mode general figure per right or wrong table (see FIG. 12 (A)) and the low frequency support mode general figure per type distribution table (see FIG. 12 (C)). Whether the normal per random number counter C4 and the normal per type random number counter C5 included as numerical information in the general pattern correctness information stored in the general pattern execution area SAE of the drawing reservation storage area 412c are values corresponding to the general pattern per election Make a right or wrong decision.

<Steps S1704 and S1705>
When the MPU 41 determines the success or failure of the general pattern (step S1702 or S1703), it determines whether the result of the success or failure determination is the long open general pattern in which the second winning opening 315 is long open ( step S1704). MPU41, if the result of the success/failure determination is per long open general pattern (step S1704: Yes), the long open general pattern per flag indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is per long open general pattern is set to ON ( Step S1705), and the process proceeds to step S1708. On the other hand, MPU41 transfers a process to step S1706, when the result of right or wrong determination is not per long open normal figure (step S1704: No).

<Steps S1706 and S1707>
If the result of the success/failure determination is not a long open/universal pattern hit (step S1704: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the success/failure determination is a short open/universal pattern in which the second winning hole 315 is short-opened. (step S1706). MPU 41, if the result of the success/failure determination is a short open normal map per (step S1706: Yes), the short open normal map per flag indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a short open normal map is set to ON ( Step S1707), the process proceeds to step S1708. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1708 when the result of the win-or-fail judgment is not a short-open normal figure hit (step S1706: No), that is, when the result of the win-or-fail judgment is out.

<Steps S1708 and S1709>
If the long open normal map per flag is set to ON (step S1705), if the short open normal map per flag is set to ON (step S1707), or if the result of the judgment is out (step S1706: No), the MPU 41 sets the normal pattern fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation display time of the normal pattern in the normal pattern display section 361 of the main display section 36 in the normal pattern game, with reference to the normal pattern fluctuation display table (not shown). Execute normal figure fluctuation pattern setting process. Normal figure fluctuation display table (not shown) is, as described above, a high frequency support mode general figure fluctuation table that is referenced when it is in high frequency support mode, and a low frequency that is referenced when it is in low frequency support mode Including support mode normal chart fluctuation display table. Therefore, in the general pattern fluctuation pattern setting process, the general pattern fluctuation pattern is set based on the general pattern fluctuation display table corresponding to the support mode type. In addition, since the high frequency support mode general figure fluctuation display table is set so that the average time of the fluctuation display time of the normal pattern is shorter than the low frequency support mode general figure fluctuation display table, the high frequency support mode Then, the time during which the normal figure game is executed is shorter than in the low frequency support mode.

Then, MPU41, in addition to the normal figure fluctuation pattern set in step S1708, the result of the success or failure determination in step S1702 or S1703 (the result of the lottery per normal figure), the type of support mode (high frequency support mode and low frequency Separate support mode) and to set the general figure fluctuation pattern command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 (step S1709), and the process proceeds to step S1710.

In addition, the normal figure fluctuation pattern command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. On the other hand, in the sound lamp control device 5, based on the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command, the effect corresponding to the normal pattern game for the pattern display unit 341 etc., for example, the effect indicating that the normal pattern game is being executed Execute the production showing the result of the lottery for the normal drawing.

In addition, the general pattern fluctuation pattern command may be at least a command that notifies the sound lamp control device 5 of the general pattern fluctuation pattern, and the result of the lottery per general pattern and the type of support mode are not necessarily the general pattern fluctuation pattern command. There is no need to notify the audio ramp controller 5 . For example, the result of the lottery per normal pattern is to set the lottery result command per normal pattern when the success or failure determination is performed in step S1702 or S1703, and the type of support mode is high frequency support mode or low frequency support mode. When the transition is made, the sound lamp control device 5 may be notified by setting a support mode type command that can identify the type of the support mode after the transition.

<Steps S1710 and S1711>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 starts variable display of normal symbols in the normal symbol display portion 361 of the main display portion 36 (step S1710). Then, the MPU 41 sets on the normal pattern fluctuation display flag indicating that the normal pattern is displayed in a variable manner, that is, the normal pattern game is being executed (step S1711), and starts the normal pattern fluctuation start process. finish.

It should be noted that the normal pattern fluctuation display flag is referred to in order to determine whether the normal pattern game is being executed (during normal pattern fluctuation display) in step S1501 in the normal pattern game control process of FIG. 22 .

[Universal figure per game control process]
Here, FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game control process per normal figure executed in step S1405 in the main process of FIG. In the game control process per normal pattern, when the result of the lottery per normal pattern is a win, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 315b is performed to allow the game ball to enter the second winning hole 315. A process of switching to and from a restrictive state is executed. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 25, the game control process per normal figure will be described.

<Step S1801>
As shown in FIG. 25, in the normal pattern per game control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag indicating that the normal pattern has been stopped and displayed (that the normal pattern game has ended) is on. (step S1801). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to start the game per normal pattern. It should be noted that the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is set to ON in step S1511 when the normal pattern is stopped and displayed in the normal pattern game control process of FIG.

When the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is ON (step S1801: Yes), that is, when it is time to start the normal pattern per game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1802. On the other hand, when the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S1801: No), that is, when the normal pattern per game can not be started, the process proceeds to step S1813.

<Step S1802>
When the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is ON (step S1801: Yes), that is, when the normal pattern per game can be started, the MPU 41 indicates that the jackpot game is being executed. It is determined whether or not it is on (step S1802). The jackpot game flag is set to ON in step S2206 when the jackpot game is started in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29 described later, and is set to OFF in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends.

When the jackpot playing flag is ON (step S1802: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the per-universal pattern game control process. That is, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is forcibly terminated by starting, even if the result of the lottery per normal pattern for the normal pattern game is per normal pattern, the game per normal pattern is not started. That is, in the present embodiment, the regular pattern per game is not started during execution of the jackpot game. Of course, a new normal game may be started during execution of the jackpot game.

On the other hand, when the jackpot playing flag is off (step S1802: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1803.

<Step S1803>
When the jackpot playing flag is off (step S1802: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the long open normal pattern hit flag is set to on (step S1803). . The long open general figure per flag is a flag indicating that the result of the lottery per general figure is the long open general figure, and when the result of the lottery per general figure is the long open general figure, the general of FIG. It is set to ON in step S1705 of the figure fluctuation start process. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the lottery per normal pattern for the ended normal pattern game is per long open normal pattern. MPU41, when the long open normal map per flag is set to ON (step S1803: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1804, when the long open normal map per flag is set to off (step S1803: No), the process proceeds to step S1806.

<Steps S1804 and S1805>
If the long open general pattern per flag is set to ON (step S1803: Yes), that is, if the result of the general general pattern per lottery for the finished general pattern game is a long open general pattern, the MPU 41 A value corresponding to 6 seconds, which is the opening time of the electric accessory 315b in the per-figure game (the time during which the game ball can enter the second winning hole 315), is set as the value of the opening time counter (step S1804). The opening time counter is referred to in step S1815 of the game control process per normal figure in order to determine the return timing of the electric auditors 315b. Then, the MPU 41 sets the long open normal map hit flag to OFF (step S1805), and shifts the process to step S1809.

<Step S1806>
If the long open general map per flag is set to off (step S1803: No), that is, if the result of the general general pattern per lottery for the finished general pattern game is not per long open general pattern, the MPU 41, short open general pattern It is determined whether or not the hit flag is set to ON (step S1806). Short open normal map per flag is a flag indicating that the result of the lottery per normal pattern is per short open normal map, and when the result of the lottery per normal pattern is per short open normal map, the normal of FIG. It is set to ON in step S1707 of the figure fluctuation start process. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the lottery per normal pattern for the ended normal pattern game is per short open normal pattern. MPU41, if the short open normal map per flag is set to ON (step S1806: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1807, if the short open normal map per flag is set to OFF (step S1806: No), that is, when the result of the lottery per normal pattern for the ended normal pattern game is out, the process proceeds to step S1812.

<Steps S1807 and S1808>
If the short open normal map per flag is set to ON (step S1806: Yes), that is, if the result of the general pattern per lottery for the finished normal game is per short open normal map, the MPU 41 A value corresponding to 0.1 seconds, which is the opening time of the electric accessory 315b in the per-figure game (the time allowed for the game ball to enter the second winning hole 315), is set as the value of the opening time counter (step S1807). . Then, the MPU 41 sets the short open normal map hit flag to OFF (step S1808), and shifts the process to step S1809.

<Steps S1809 to S1811>
If the result of the lottery per normal figure is a hit, the flag indicating the type per normal pattern (flag per long open normal map or flag per short open normal map) is set to off (step S1805 or S1808), MPU 41, The electric accessory 315b is operated (step S1809). As a result, the second winning hole 315 is opened, and a state of allowing game balls to enter the second winning hole 315 is established. Then, the MPU 41 sets an electric role product open command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric role product 315b is open (step S1810), and indicates that the electric role product 315b is open. The electric accessary product open flag is set to ON (step S1811), and the process proceeds to step S1812.

It should be noted that the electric accessory open command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU41. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 can start an effect indicating that the electric accessory 315b is open to the symbol display unit 341, for example, based on the electric accessory release command.

<Step S1812>
When the process of opening the electric accessory 315b is executed when the result of the lottery per normal drawing is a win (steps S1803 to S1811), or the long open normal map per flag and the short open normal map per flag are both turned off. If it is set (when the result of the lottery per normal pattern is out) (both step S1803 and step S1806 are No), the MPU 41 normally stops displaying the symbol (that the normal pattern game is finished). The normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag shown is set to OFF (step S1812), and the normal pattern per game control process is terminated.

<Step S1813>
When the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S1801: No), the MPU 41 is set to ON when the electric auditors 315b are released in step S1811 of the normal pattern per game control process. It is determined whether or not the open flag is set to ON (step S1813). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game per normal pattern is being executed. MPU41, when the electric accessary product during opening flag is set to ON (step S1813: Yes), that is, when the normal figure per game is being executed, the process proceeds to step S1814. On the other hand, the MPU 41, when the electric auditors product open flag is set to OFF (step S1813: No), that is, when the general pattern per game is not being executed, ends the general pattern per game control process.

<Steps S1814 and S1815>
When the electric accessary product opening flag is set to ON (step S1813: Yes), that is, when the game per general pattern is being executed, the MPU 41 is set in step S1804 or S1807 of the game control process per general pattern. 1 is subtracted from the open time counter value obtained (step S1814), and it is determined whether or not the open time counter value after the subtraction is 0 (step S1815). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to restore the electric accessory 315b. MPU41, when the value of the open time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to restore the electric accessory 315b, the process proceeds to step S1816. On the other hand, MPU41, when the value of the open time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1815: No), that is, when it is not the timing to return the electric auditors 315b, ends the game control process per normal figure.

<Steps S1816 to S1818>
If the value of the open time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, if it is time to restore the electric accessory 315b, the MPU 41 restores the electric accessory 315b (step S1816). As a result, the second winning hole 315 is closed, and entry of game balls into the second winning hole 315 is restricted. Then, the MPU 41 sets an electric role product closing command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric role product 315b is closed (step S1817), and an electric accessory indicating that the electric role product 315b is opened The flag during opening of the role product is set to OFF (step S1818), and the game control process per normal pattern is terminated.

In addition, the electric accessary product closing command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the effect indicating that the electric role product is open, which is executed in the symbol display unit 341, for example, based on the electric role product closing command.

[Special game control process]
Here, FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game control process executed in step S1406 in the main process of FIG. In the special figure game control process, the stored contents of the special figure reservation storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main controller 4 are updated, and the control of the progress of the first special figure game or the second special figure game, for example, the second The variable display and stop display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display portion 363 are controlled. Hereinafter, the special figure game control processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 26, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot playing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is ON. The jackpot game flag is set to ON in step S2206 when a jackpot game is started in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29 described later, and is set to OFF in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends. .

The MPU 41 ends the special figure game control process when the jackpot playing flag is ON (step S1901: Yes), ie when the jackpot game is being executed. That is, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game is being executed, the special figure game is not started. Of course, the special game may be started during execution of the jackpot game.

On the other hand, when the jackpot playing flag is off (step S1901: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
When the jackpot playing flag is off (step S1901: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is fluctuatingly displayed (the first special symbol game or the second It is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation display flag indicating that the special figure game is being executed is ON (step S1902). The special figure fluctuation display flag is set to ON in step S2107 when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the special figure variation start processing of FIG. 28 described later, and the special figure game control When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the process, it is set to OFF in step S1909.

MPU41, when the special figure fluctuation display flag is ON (step S1902: Yes), that is, when the special symbol is during the fluctuation display (during execution of the special figure game), the process proceeds to step S1906. On the other hand, the MPU 41, when the special figure fluctuation display flag is off (step S1902: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the special symbol is not being displayed while the fluctuation is being performed (the special figure game is being executed), the process to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
If the flag during special figure fluctuation display is off (step S1902: No), that is, if the special symbol is not during the fluctuation display (during execution of the special figure game) when the jackpot game is not being performed, the MPU 41 holds the special figure Both the first special figure reservation number N stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA of the storage area 412b and the second special figure reservation number M stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB is 0 (step S1903).

MPU41, when both the first special figure reservation number N and the second special figure reservation number M are 0 (step S1903: Yes), that is, the reservation of the right to execute the first special figure game, and the second special figure If there is no reservation of the right to execute the game, the special figure game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if one of the first special figure reservation number N and the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S1903: No), that is, the reservation of the right to execute the first special figure game, and When there is at least one of the reservation of the right to execute the second special figure game, the process proceeds to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
If either one of the first special figure reservation number N and the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S1903: No), that is, the reservation of the right to execute the first special figure game, and the second special figure game When there is at least one of the reservation of the right to execute, the MPU 41 executes the special figure data setting process related to the special figure propriety information data (special figure data) stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b ( Step S1904), and the process proceeds to step S1905. The details of the special figure data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1905>
In step S1905, the MPU 41 starts the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363 (first special symbol game or second special symbol Execute the special figure fluctuation start process for executing the figure game), and terminate the special figure game control process. The details of the special figure fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1906>
When the special figure fluctuation display flag is ON (step S1902: Yes), that is, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed in a variation (during execution of the special figure game), the MPU 41 is the first special From the start of the variation display of the symbol or the second special symbol game, the special symbol for the first special symbol or the second special symbol set in the special symbol variation pattern setting process of step S2104 in the special figure variation start process of FIG. 28 described later It is determined whether or not the figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (step S1906). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to stop and display the special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner and end the special symbol game.

When the special symbol variation display time has passed from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S1906: Yes), that is, the timing to end the special symbol game by stopping and displaying the special symbol during the variation display If so, the process proceeds to step S1907. On the other hand, when the variable display time has not passed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S1906: No), the MPU 41 stops and displays the special symbol during variable display. When it is not the timing to end the figure game, the special figure game control process is terminated.

<Steps S1907 to S1909>
When the variable display time has passed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S1906: Yes), that is, at the timing of stopping and displaying the special symbol during variable display and ending the special symbol game In some cases, the MPU 41 stops and displays the special symbols in the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363 of the main display portion 36 in a mode according to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the special symbol game. (Step S1907). Then, the MPU 41 sets the special symbol fluctuation stop flag indicating that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed to ON (step S1908), and the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. During the special figure fluctuation display flag indicating that it is during (the special figure game is being executed) is set to OFF (step S1909), and the special figure game control process is terminated.

[Special figure data setting process]
Here, FIG. 27 is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the special figure data setting process performed by MPU41 in FIG.26 S1904. In the special figure data setting process, the storage contents of the special figure reservation storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main controller 4 are updated. Hereinafter, the special figure data setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S2001>
As shown in FIG. 27, in step S2001, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second special figure reservation number M for the second special figure game is zero. MPU41, when the second special symbol reservation number M is 0 (step S2001: Yes), that is, when there is no second special symbol reservation for the second special symbol game and there is a first special symbol reservation for the first special symbol game (See step S1903 in the special figure game control process of FIG. 26), and the process proceeds to step S2002. On the other hand, when the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S2001: No), that is, when there is a second special figure reservation for the second special figure game, the process proceeds to step S2005. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation number M for the second special symbol game is 0, thereby starting the second special symbol game with priority over the first special symbol game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the second special symbol game is started with priority over the first special symbol game, but the first special symbol game is started with priority over the second special symbol game. Also, the special symbol game is started in the order of entry (reservation order) of the game ball to the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315, either the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game may be executed. Further, the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game are executed independently of each other without providing priority to the start of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game, and the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game are executed independently. The second special symbol game may be executed at the same time (so-called simultaneous variation of special symbols).

<Steps S2002 to S2004>
When the second special figure reservation number M is 0 (step S2001: Yes), the MPU 41 is the first special figure reservation stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA of the first special figure reservation storage area REA. The number N is subtracted by 1 (step S2002), and the special figure propriety information is moved from the first reservation area REA1 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA to the special figure execution area AE (step S2003). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the special figure propriety information of the second reservation area REA2 to the fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA one by one (step S2004). Specifically, in step S2004, the special figure validity information in the second reservation area REA2 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA is moved to the first reservation area REA1, and the special figure validity information in the third reservation area REA3 is transferred to the second reservation area REA3. It is moved to the reservation area REA2, and the special figure propriety information of the fourth reservation area REA4 is moved to the third reservation area REA3. MPU41 transfers a process to step S2008, when the process of step S2004 is complete|finished.

<Steps S2005 to S2007>
When the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S2001: No), the MPU 41 is the second special figure reservation number stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB of the second special figure reservation storage area REB M is subtracted by 1 (step S2005), and the special figure propriety information is moved from the first reservation area REB1 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB to the special figure execution area AE (step S2006). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the special figure propriety information of the second reservation area REB2 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB one by one (step S2007). Specifically, in step S2007, the special figure validity information of the second reservation area REB2 is moved to the first reservation area REB1, the special figure validity information of the third reservation area REB3 is moved to the second reservation area REB2, and the fourth The special figure propriety information in the reservation area REB4 is moved to the third reservation area REB3. MPU41 transfers a process to step S2008, when the process of step S2007 is complete|finished.

<Step S2008>
In step S2008, MPU41, the first reservation area REA1 ~ fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA, or the first reservation area REB1 ~ fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB A special figure shift command indicating that the special figure propriety information has been shifted is set in the RAM 412, and the special figure data setting process is terminated. This special figure shift command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process executed by the MPU 41 (see FIG. 21). As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 changes the display number of the hold display corresponding to the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold displayed on the pattern display unit 341 based on the special figure shift command. be able to.

[Special figure fluctuation start process]
Here, FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1905 of FIG. In the special figure variation start process, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display portion 363 starts to display the first special game or the second special figure. A game (special figure game) is started, and various processes associated with the start of the special figure game are executed. Hereinafter, the special figure fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S2101>
As shown in FIG. 28, in step S2101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game state is a probability variable game state which is a high probability mode. Whether or not the high probability mode is determined by whether or not the probability variation gaming state flag indicating that the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state which is the high probability mode is set to ON. The probability variation gaming state flag is set to ON when the gaming state is shifted from the probability variation jackpot gaming state to the probability variation gaming state in step S2317 of FIG. is set to OFF when shifting from the probability variable gaming state to the probability variable jackpot game state or the normal jackpot game state.

MPU41, when the game state is a high probability mode probability variation gaming state (step S2101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2102, if the gaming state is not a high probability mode probability variation gaming state (step S2101: No ), that is, if the gaming state is the low-probability mode, the time-saving gaming state or the normal gaming state, the process proceeds to step S2103.

<Steps S2102 and S2103>
When the game state is the probability variable game state which is the high probability mode (step S2101: Yes), the MPU 41 is a high probability stored according to the game set value in step S2410 in the game set value change process of FIG. 35 described later. The mode validity table (see FIG. 9B) is read, and the validity determination is executed based on the high-probability mode validity table (step S2102).

On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a high probability mode variable probability gaming state (step S2101: No), that is, if the gaming state is a low probability mode time-saving gaming state or normal gaming state, the MPU 41 of FIG. In step S2410 in the game set value change process, the low probability mode right/wrong table (see FIG. 9(A)) stored according to the game set value is read, and the right/wrong determination is executed based on the low probability mode right/wrong table. (Step S2103).

In steps S2102 and S2103, success/failure determination is executed based on a high-probability mode success/failure table or a low-probability mode success/failure table stored according to the game setting value in step S2410 in the game setting value change processing of FIG. 35 described later. However, in steps S2102 and S2103, after reading out the game setting values stored in step S2408 in the game setting value change processing of FIG. The success/failure determination may be performed by selecting the probability mode success/failure table one by one.

<Step S2104>
When the success or failure determination is performed in step S2102 or S2103, the MPU 41 is the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363 of the main display portion 36 in the special symbol game or the second special Design variation display time is set as a special figure variation pattern (step S2104).

In addition, the variation display time (special figure variation pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is the special figure variation type counter CS1 and the normal Set based on the jackpot variation table (see FIG. 10 (A)), and if the result of the success or failure determination in step S2102 or S2103 is a probability variation jackpot, the special figure variation type counter CS1 and the probability variation jackpot variation table (Figure 10 (B) reference) and is set based on, step S2102 or S2103 if the result of the decision is out, the special figure variation type counter CS1 and the off variation table (see FIG. 10 (C)) and set based on

<Step S2105>
In step S2105, MPU41, step S2102 or S2103 is the result of the winning determination in the jackpot lottery lottery result for the special figure game, and the special figure variation pattern command including the special figure variation pattern set in step S2104 is set in the RAM 412, and the process proceeds to step S2106. The special figure variation pattern command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU41. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can execute a special figure game effect in the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the special figure variation pattern command.

In addition, as described above, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "normal jackpot", the MPU 41 attaches "A" to the special figure variation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 5R normal jackpot " A01" ~ "A03" is set to RAM412 as a special figure variation pattern command. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "5R probability variable jackpot", the MPU41 adds "B" to the special figure variation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 5R probability variable jackpot. B03" is set in the RAM 412 as a special figure variation pattern command. Furthermore, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "16R probability variable jackpot", the MPU 41 adds "C" to the special figure variation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 16R probability variable jackpot "C01" to " C03" is set in the RAM 412 as a special figure variation pattern command. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "losing", the MPU 41 selects any of "D01" to "D08" with "D" added to the special figure variation patterns "01" to "08" to indicate that it is loosing. It is set in the RAM412 as a special figure variation pattern command. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "losing", the MPU 41 includes information indicating the type of loosing (outside reach, reach other than loosing before and after, complete loosing) in the special figure variation pattern command.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 41 starts the special symbol game by starting the variable display of the special symbols in the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363 of the main display portion 36, and the process proceeds to step S2107. transition to

In addition, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the “accumulated jackpot lottery count” stored in the game information storage area 412 d set in the RAM 412 when the variable display of the special symbol is started. Furthermore, when the result of the win/loss determination based on the low-probability mode win/fail table in step S2103 is a loss, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the "number of consecutive losses" stored in the game information storage area 412d, and the win/loss result is a jackpot. If there is, clear "Consecutive Loss Count" to 0 times.

<Step S2107>
In step S2107, the MPU 41 sets on a special figure variable display flag indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (a special figure game is being executed), and the process proceeds to step S2108. The special symbol fluctuating display flag indicates that the special symbol is being variably displayed (special It is referred to to determine whether the game is in progress).

<Step S2108>
In step S2108, the MPU 41 sets off the special symbol fluctuation stop flag indicating that the special symbol has been stopped from fluctuating (the special symbol game is ended), and the process proceeds to step S2109. The special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON when the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363 of the main display portion 36 is stopped and displayed in step S1908 in the special figure game control process of FIG. , It is referenced to determine whether or not it is time to start the jackpot game in step S2202 of the jackpot game control process in FIG. 29 to be described later.

<Step S2109>
In step S2109, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time saving game state flag indicating the time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) is on. The time saving game state flag is set to ON when the normal jackpot game ends in step S2321 of FIG. 34 in the game state transition processing described later, and the game state changes to the time saving game in step S2310 of FIG. 33 or step S2325 of FIG. It is set to OFF when transitioning from the state to the jackpot game state or the normal game state.

MPU41, when the time saving game state flag is ON (step S2109: Yes), that is, when it is in the time saving game state, the process proceeds to step S2110. On the other hand, when the time saving gaming state flag is off (step S2109: Yes), that is, when it is not the time saving gaming state, the MPU 41 ends the special figure fluctuation start processing.

<Step S2110>
When the time saving game state flag is ON (step S2109: Yes), that is, when the time saving game state, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed in the time saving game state. (Step S2110), and ends the special figure fluctuation start process. It should be noted that the time saving number counter is set when the game state is shifted from the jackpot game state to the time saving game state at step S2320 in the game state transition processing of FIG. 34 described later.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the time saving number counter is set when the game state shifts from the jackpot game state to the time saving game state, but the time saving number counter shifts the game state from the jackpot game state to the variable probability game state. It may also be set when it is set when it is set. That is, by setting the maximum number of special-figure games executed in the variable probability gaming state to a limited number of times, the gaming machine 10 can be configured as a so-called ST machine.

In addition, when the normal jackpot game executed based on the fact that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the normal jackpot, the game machine 10 enters the normal game state without shifting from the jackpot game state to the time-saving game state. It is also possible to set so as to shift, and in this case, the time saving number counter is not set after the end of the normal jackpot game.

[Jackpot game control process]
Here, FIGS. 29 to 32 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in step S1407 in the main process of FIG. In the jackpot game control process, a process for controlling the progress of the jackpot game such as opening/closing control of the opening/closing door 319 provided in the variable winning opening 316 is executed. Hereinafter, the jackpot game control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 32. FIG.

<Step S2201>
As shown in FIG. 29, in step S2201, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot playing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is ON. The jackpot playing flag is set to ON in step S2206 of the jackpot game control process when starting the jackpot game, and set to OFF in step S2252 of the jackpot game control process when the jackpot game is terminated.

When the jackpot playing flag is ON (step S2201: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2211. On the other hand, when the jackpot playing flag is off (step S2201: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2202.

<Step S2202>
When the jackpot playing flag is off (step S2201: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether the special figure fluctuation stop flag indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed is on. to judge. The special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON in step S1908 in the special figure game control process of FIG. 26 when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and when the special symbol variation display is started, It is set to off in step S2108 in the special figure fluctuation start process. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to start the jackpot game by determining whether or not the special figure game started when the jackpot game is not being executed has ended.

MPU41, when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is ON (step S2202: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game can be started because the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to step S2203. On the other hand, when the special symbol fluctuation stop flag is off (step S2202: No), that is, when the big winning game cannot be started because the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the MPU 41 ends the big winning game control process.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, when the special symbol is being variably displayed (during execution of the special symbol game), the jackpot game is not started (executed), but the special symbol is variably displayed (during the execution of the special symbol game). It may be possible to start (execute) a jackpot game. For example, the jackpot game may be started (executed) during the variable display of the first special symbol, and conversely, the jackpot game may be started (executed) during the variable display of the second special symbol. Specifically, by making it possible to change to the simultaneous fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol as described above, the second special symbol game is executed during the execution of the jackpot game for the first special symbol game , The first special symbol game may be executed during the execution of the jackpot game for the second special symbol game. Furthermore, the jackpot game for the first special pattern game and the jackpot game for the second special pattern game may be executed simultaneously, or the jackpot game for the first special pattern game and the jackpot game for the second special pattern game When the conditions for starting the other jackpot game are established during execution of one of the jackpot games, the other jackpot game may be started after one jackpot game ends.

<Step S2203>
When the special figure fluctuation stop flag is ON (step S2202: Yes), that is, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is a big hit. determine whether or not Whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed is a big hit is determined by the jackpot lottery stored in the special symbol execution area AE of the special symbol reservation storage area 412b set in the RAM 41, for example. It is judged based on the special figure propriety information.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2204 when the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is a jackpot (step S2203: Yes). On the other hand, the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot game control process when the jackpot lottery result for the special symbol game in which the special symbols are stopped is not a jackpot (step S2203: No), that is, when the jackpot lottery result is lost. .

<Step S2204>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special pattern game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is a jackpot (step S2203: Yes), the MPU 41 starts the jackpot game and determines the type of the jackpot game (definite variable jackpot game or normal jackpot game ) is set to the voice lamp control device 5 (step S2204), and the process proceeds to step S2205. The jackpot game start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process executed by the MPU 41 (see FIG. 21). Thereby, the sound ramp control device 5 can execute a jackpot game effect corresponding to the jackpot game type based on the jackpot game start command.

<Step S2205>
In step S2205, the MPU 41 sets on a jackpot game start flag indicating that a jackpot game is to be started, and shifts the process to step S2206. The jackpot game start flag is referred to in step S2301 in the game state transition process of FIG. 33 to be described later, when it is determined whether the game state is shifted to the probability variable jackpot game state or the normal jackpot game state.

<Step S2206>
In step S2206, the MPU 41 sets on a jackpot playing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed, and shifts the process to step S2207. During the jackpot game flag, in order to determine whether or not the jackpot game is being executed, in addition to step S2201 of the jackpot game control process, step S1503 of the normal game control process of FIG. 22 and the special figure of FIG. It is referred in step S1901 of game control processing.

<Step S2207>
In step S2207, the MPU 41 sets a round number counter indicating the number of remaining round games in the open/close execution mode, and shifts the process to step S2208. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the round number counter to "5" when the jackpot lottery result is the 5R probability variable jackpot and the 5R normal jackpot, and sets the round counter to "5" when the jackpot lottery result is the 16R probability variable jackpot. is set to "16".

<Step S2208>
In step S2208, the MPU 41 sets an opening start command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of starting the opening of the jackpot game, and the process proceeds to step S2209. The opening start command is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. FIG. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can start the opening effect in the pattern display section 341 or the like based on the opening start command.

<Step S2209>
In step S2209, the MPU 41 sets an opening time counter indicating the remaining time of the opening, and shifts the process to step S2210. The opening time counter is referenced in step S2213 of FIG. 30 of the jackpot game control process in order to determine whether or not it is time to end the opening.

<Step S2210>
In step S2210, the MPU 41 sets on an opening flag indicating that the opening is being executed, and ends the jackpot game control process. During opening, the flag is referred to in step S2211 in the big hit game control process in order to determine whether it is during opening.

<Step S2211>
When the jackpot game in-progress flag is ON (step S2201: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether the opening flag indicating that the opening is being executed is ON. (step S2211).

When the opening flag is ON (step S2211: Yes), that is, when the opening is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2212 in FIG. On the other hand, if the opening flag is off (step S2211: No), that is, if the opening is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S2222.

<Steps S2212 and S2213>
If the opening flag is ON (step S2211: Yes), that is, if the opening is being executed, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time counter indicating the remaining time of the opening ( Step S2212), it is determined whether or not the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2213). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to end the opening.

When the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2213: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the opening, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2214. On the other hand, MPU41, when the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2213: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the opening, ends the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S2214 and S2215>
When the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2213: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the opening, the MPU 41 notifies the sound lamp control device 5 that the opening of the jackpot game ends. The opening end command is set (step S2214), and the pning end command is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can end the opening effect executed in the pattern display section 341 or the like based on the opening end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the opening flag indicating that the opening is in progress to OFF (step S2215), and shifts the process to step S2216.

<Step S2216>
In step S2216, the MPU 41 sets an opening/closing execution mode start command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the opening/closing execution mode in which the round game is executed a plurality of times (5 times or 16 times) is started, and performs processing. to step S2217. The open/close execution mode start command is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. FIG. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can start the opening/closing execution mode effect executed in the pattern display section 341 or the like based on the opening/closing execution mode start command.

<Step S2217>
In step S2217, the MPU 41 sets a round game start command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the round game is started, and shifts the process to step S2218. The round game start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process executed by the MPU 41 (see FIG. 21). Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can start the round game effect corresponding to each round game including the number of rounds displayed in the pattern display section 341 or the like based on the round game start command.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the round game effect is executed individually in each round game, but the round game effect executes a series of one effect in the opening and closing execution mode, and the number of rounds of the round game in each round game may be displayed. In this case, the interval production may not be executed between the round games, and the production of displaying the number of rounds of the round game to be executed next time may be executed as the interval production.

<Steps S2218 and S2219>
In step S2218, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the round number counter indicating the number of remaining round games in the open/close execution mode, and further operates the open/close door 319 to open the variable winning opening 316 (step S2219), and the process to step S2220.

<Steps S2220 and S2221>
In step S2220, the MPU 41 sets on a round game in-progress flag indicating that the round game is being executed, further sets a round game time counter indicating the remaining time of the round game (step S2221), and sets the jackpot. End the game control process. The round game time counter determines whether it is time to end the round game (return the opening/closing door 319 and close the variable winning port 316) after the lapse of the specified time. It is referred to in S2224.

<Step S2222>
Returning to FIG. 29, when the opening flag is off (step S2211: No), that is, when the opening is not being executed, the MPU 41 sets the round game flag indicating that the round game is being executed to ON. (step S2222). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the round game is being executed.

MPU41 transfers a process to FIG.31 S2223, when a round game flag is ON (step S2222: Yes), ie, when a round game is being performed. On the other hand, when the round playing flag is off (step S2222: No), that is, when the round game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2226.

<Steps S2223 and S2224>
When the round game in progress flag is ON (step S2222: Yes), that is, when the round game is being executed, as shown in FIG. Subtract 1. And MPU41 judges whether the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2224). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to end the round game (close the variable winning opening by returning the opening/closing door 319) after the lapse of the specified time.

MPU41, when the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2224: Yes), that is, at the timing of ending the round game (closing the variable winning opening by returning the opening and closing door 319) with the passage of the specified time If so, the process proceeds to step S2228. On the other hand, when the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2224: No), the round game is terminated when the specified time elapses (closes the variable winning opening by returning the opening/closing door 319). Otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2225.

<Step S2225>
If the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2224: No), that is, if it is not the time to end the round game due to the passage of the specified time (close the variable winning opening by returning the open/close door 319), the MPU 41 , determines whether or not a game ball has entered the variable winning hole 316 (step S2225). Whether or not a game ball has entered the variable winning hole 316 is determined when the game ball has entered the ball sensor 316a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. The determination is made based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412 immediately.

MPU 41, if there is a game ball entering the variable winning opening 316 (step S2225: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2226, if there is no game ball entering the variable winning opening 316 (step S2225: No), end the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S2226 and S2227>
When there is a game ball entering the variable winning hole 316 (step S2225: Yes), the MPU 41 changes the value of the entering ball number counter indicating the number of entering balls into the variable winning hole 316 in the round game. 1 is added (step S2226). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the number-of-entered-balls counter after the addition has reached 10 (step S2227), that is, ends the round game by entering the upper limit number of game balls into the variable winning hole 316 (opening/closing door It is determined whether or not it is time to close the variable winning opening by returning to step 319.

The MPU 41 ends the round game when the value of the number-of-entered-balls counter after addition reaches 10 (step S2227: Yes), that is, by entering the upper limit number of game balls into the variable winning opening 316 (opening/closing door 319 If it is time to close the variable winning opening by the return of , the process proceeds to step S2228. On the other hand, the MPU 41 ends the round game (opens and closes When it is not the timing to close the variable winning opening by returning the door 319, the big hit game control process is terminated.

<Step S2228>
When the value of the round game time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2224: Yes), or when the value of the number-of-balls counter reaches 10 (step S2227: Yes), the MPU 41 restores the open/close door 319. By doing so, the variable winning opening is closed (step S2228), and the process proceeds to step S2229. That is, the MPU 41 closes the variable winning opening 316 to end the round game when it is time to end the round game due to the passage of the specified time or the entry of the upper limit number of game balls into the variable winning opening 316. .

<Steps S2229 to S2231>
In step S2229, the MPU 41 sets a round game end command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the round game ends. The round game end command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process executed by the MPU 41 (see FIG. 21). As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can terminate the round game effect executed in the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the round game end command.

Then, the MPU 41 clears a ball entry counter indicating the number of game balls entering the variable winning port 316 in the round game (step S2230), and indicates that the round game is being executed. The flag is set to off (step S2231), and the process proceeds to step S2232.

<Step S2232>
In step S2232, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the round number counter indicating the number of remaining round games in the opening/closing execution mode is 0 (step S2232), that is, the timing for ending the opening/closing execution mode (unexecuted round game there is).

When the round number counter is 0 (step S2232: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2241. On the other hand, when the round number counter is not 0 (step S2232: No), that is, when there is an unexecuted round game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2233.

<Step S2233>
If the round number counter is not 0 (step S2232: No), that is, if there is an unexecuted round game, the MPU 41 sets an interval start command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 to start the interval between round games. (step S2233), and the process proceeds to step S2234. The interval start command is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. FIG. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can start the interval production in the pattern display section 341 or the like based on the interval start command.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the interval production is executed in the interval between round games, but the interval production may be omitted, and the round game production for the previously executed round game may be continuously executed in the interval. Also, a round game effect may be executed for the round game to be executed next.

<Steps S2234 and S2235>
In step S2234, the MPU 41 sets on an interval flag indicating that the interval between round games is being executed. And MPU41 sets the interval time counter which shows the remaining time of an interval (step S2235), and complete|finishes the said jackpot game control processing. The interval time counter is referenced in step S2238 of FIG. 32 in the jackpot game control process in order to determine whether it is time to end the interval (start the round game).

<Step S2236>
Returning to FIG. 29, when the round playing flag is off (step S2222: No), that is, when the round game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines that the interval flag indicating that the interval between round games is being executed is It is determined whether or not it is on (step S2236). During the interval flag is set to ON in step S2234 of FIG. 31 in the jackpot game control process when the interval is started, and turned off in step S2240 of FIG. 32 in the jackpot game control process when the interval ends. set.

When the interval flag is ON (step S2236: Yes), that is, when the interval between rounds is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2237 in FIG. On the other hand, when the interval flag is off (step S2236: No), that is, when the interval between rounds is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2245.

<Steps S2237 and S2238>
If the interval flag is ON (step S2236: Yes), that is, if the interval between rounds is being executed, as shown in FIG. Subtract (step S2237). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2238), that is, whether or not it is time to end the interval (start the round game).

MPU41, when the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2238: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the interval and start the round game, the process proceeds to step S2239. On the other hand, MPU41, when the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2238: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the interval (start the round game), ends the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S2239 and S2240>
When the value of the interval time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2238: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the interval and start the round game, the MPU 41 notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the interval ends. Sets the interval end command to notify to. The interval end command is transmitted to the audio lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. FIG. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can end the interval effect executed in the pattern display section 341 or the like based on the interval end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets an interval flag indicating that the interval between round games is being executed to OFF (step S2240), and shifts the process to step S2217. By moving the process to step S2217 of FIG. 30 described above, the process of steps S2217 to S2221 relating to the start of the round game is executed, and the jackpot game control process is terminated.

<Step S2241>
Returning to FIG. 31, when the round number counter is 0 (step S2232: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 41 terminates the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game. 5 is set (step S2241), and the process proceeds to step S2242. The opening/closing execution mode end command is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. FIG. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can terminate the round game effect (opening/closing execution mode effect) executed in the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the opening/closing execution mode end command.

<Step S2242>
In step S2242, the MPU 41 sets an ending start command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of starting the ending of the jackpot game, and the process proceeds to step S2243. The ending start command is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. FIG. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can start the ending effect in the pattern display section 341 or the like based on the ending start command.

<Steps S2243 and S2244>
In step S2243, the MPU 41 turns on an ending flag indicating that the ending is being executed. And MPU41 sets the ending time counter which shows the remaining time of ending (step S2244), and complete|finishes the said jackpot game control processing. The ending time counter is referenced in step S2247 in FIG. 32 of the jackpot game control process in order to determine whether it is time to end the ending (jackpot game).

<Step S2245>
Returning to FIG. 29, if the during-interval flag is off (step S2236: No), that is, if the interval between rounds is not being executed, whether or not the during-ending flag indicating that the ending is being executed is on. is determined (step S2245).

When the ending flag is ON (step S2245: Yes), that is, when the ending is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2246 in FIG. On the other hand, when the ending flag is off (step S2245: No), that is, when the ending is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2250.

<Steps S2246 and S2247>
If the ending flag is ON (step S2245: Yes), that is, if the ending is being executed, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the ending time counter indicating the remaining time of the ending ( step S2246). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2247). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to end the ending (jackpot game).

MPU41, when the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2247: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the ending (jackpot game), the process proceeds to step S2248. On the other hand, when the value of the ending time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S2247: No), that is, when it is not the timing to finish the ending (jackpot game), the MPU 41 finishes the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S2248 and S2249>
When the value of the ending time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2247: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the ending (jackpot game), the MPU 41 terminates the ending of the jackpot game through the voice lamp control device. Set the ending end command to be notified to 5. The ending ending command is sent to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. FIG. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can end the ending effect executed in the pattern display section 341 or the like based on the ending end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the ending flag to OFF, which indicates that the ending is being executed (step S2249), and terminates the jackpot game control process.

<Step S2250>
Returning to FIG. 29, when the ending flag is off (step S2245: No), that is, when neither during the opening, during the round game, during the interval nor during the ending, the MPU 41 makes a sound that the jackpot game ends. A jackpot game end command to be notified to the lamp control device 5 is set (step S2250), and the process proceeds to step S2251. The jackpot game end command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process executed by the MPU 41 (see FIG. 21). Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can terminate the big winning game effect executed in the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the big winning game end command.

<Steps S2251 and S2252>
In step S2251, a jackpot game end flag indicating that the jackpot game ends is set to ON. The jackpot game end flag is referred to in step S2312 of the game state transition processing in FIG. be.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot playing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed to OFF (step S2252), and ends the jackpot game control process.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, FIGS. 33 and 34 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in step S1408 of the main process of FIG. In the game state transition process, a process for controlling the transition of various game states (normal game state, time saving game state, variable probability game state, variable probability jackpot game state and normal jackpot game state) is executed. The game state transition processing will be described below with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34. FIG.

<Step S2301>
As shown in FIG. 33, in step S2301, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game start flag indicating the start of the jackpot game is on. The jackpot game start flag is set to ON in step S2205 when the jackpot game is started in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, and is set to OFF in step S2252 when the jackpot game is ended.

When the jackpot game start flag is ON (step S2301: Yes), that is, when it is time to start the jackpot game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2302. On the other hand, when the jackpot game start flag is off (step S2301: No), that is, when it is not the time to start the jackpot game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2312 of FIG.

<Steps S2302 and S2303>
When the jackpot game start flag is ON (step S2301: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is started, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag to OFF (step S2302), and the jackpot game to be started is the probability variable jackpot game. It is determined whether or not there is (step S2303). Whether or not the jackpot game to be started is a variable probability jackpot game is determined based on the special figure right/wrong information stored in the special figure execution area AE (see FIG. 8) of the special figure reservation storage area 412b set in the RAM 412. be.

MPU41 moves a process to step S2304, when starting a probability variable jackpot game (step S2303: Yes). On the other hand, if the probability variable jackpot game is not started (step S2303: No), that is, if the normal jackpot game is started, the process proceeds to step S2305.

<Step S2304>
When starting the probability variation jackpot game (step S2303: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the probability variation jackpot game state flag indicating that the probability variation jackpot game is executed in the probability variation jackpot game state to ON (step S2304), and executes the process. The process moves to step S2305. The probability variation jackpot game state flag is used to determine whether the game state should be shifted to either the probability variation game state or the normal game state when the jackpot game is ended. Step S2315 in FIG. Referenced in

<Steps S2305 and S2306>
In step S2305, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state is on. The normal game state flag is set to ON in step S2324 of FIG. game state), it is set to OFF in step S2306 of the game state transition process.

When the normal game state flag is ON (step S2305: Yes), that is, when the game is in the normal game state, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag to OFF (step S2306), and terminates the game state transition process. On the other hand, MPU41, when the game state flag is off (step S2305: No), that is, when it is not the normal game state but the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state), the process proceeds to step S2307. do.

<Step S2307>
When the normal game state flag is off (step S2305: No), that is, when it is not the normal game state but the high frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time saving game state), the MPU 41 indicates that it is the high frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode flag shown is set to off (step S2307), and the process proceeds to step S2308.

<Steps S2308 and S2309>
In step S2308, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the probability variation gaming state flag indicating the probability variation gaming state is on. The probability variation gaming state flag is set to ON in step S2317 of FIG. 34 when shifting from the probability variation jackpot gaming state to the probability variation gaming state in the game state transition process, and the probability variation jackpot gaming state from the probability variation jackpot gaming state or It is set to OFF in step S2309 when shifting to normal jackpot game state).

When the probability variation gaming state flag is ON (step S2308: Yes), that is, when the probability variation gaming state is set, the MPU 41 sets the probability variation gaming state flag to OFF (step S2309), and ends the game state transition processing. On the other hand, when the probability variation gaming state flag is off (step S2308: No), that is, when it is neither the normal gaming state nor the probability variation gaming state but the time-saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step S2310.

<Steps S2310 and S2311>
When the variable probability gaming state flag is off (step S2308: No), that is, when it is in the time saving gaming state, the MPU 41 sets the time saving gaming state flag indicating the time saving gaming state to off (step S2310). Then, the MPU 41 clears the time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of time saving games that can be executed in the time saving game state (step S2311), and ends the game state transition processing.

<Step S2312>
When the jackpot game start flag is off (step S2301: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the jackpot game, the MPU 41 turns on the jackpot game end flag indicating that the jackpot game is to end, as shown in FIG. (step S2312). The jackpot game end flag is set to ON in step S2251 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29 when the jackpot game ends.

When the jackpot game end flag is ON (step S2312: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game ends, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2313. On the other hand, when the jackpot game end flag is off (step S2312: No), that is, when it is not the time to end the jackpot game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2322.

<Steps S2313 and S2314>
When the jackpot game end flag is ON (step S2312: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is ended, the MPU 41 sets the high-frequency support mode flag indicating the high-frequency support mode to ON (step S2313 ), the jackpot game end flag indicating the end of the jackpot game is set to OFF (step S2314), and the process proceeds to step S2315.

<Step S2315>
In step S2315, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the probability variable big winning game state flag indicating the probability variable big winning gaming state in which the probability variable big winning game is executed is ON. The probability variable jackpot game state flag is set to ON in step S2304 of FIG. It is set to OFF in step S2318 when it is shifted from the state to the probability variation gaming state.

When the probability variable jackpot gaming state flag is ON (step S2315: Yes), that is, when the probability variable jackpot gaming state is set, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2316. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2319 when the probability variable jackpot game state flag is off (step S2315: No), that is, when it is not the probability variable jackpot game state but the normal jackpot game state.

<Step S2316>
If the probability variation jackpot gaming state flag is ON (step S2315: Yes), that is, if the probability variation jackpot gaming state, the MPU 41 sets the probability variation gaming state command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the probability variation gaming state (step S2316), and the process proceeds to step S2317. The probability variation gaming state command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU41. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can execute a special figure effect corresponding to the probability variation gaming state in the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the probability variation gaming state command.

<Step S2317>
In step S2317, the MPU 41 sets the probability variation gaming state flag indicating the probability variation gaming state to ON, and shifts the process to step S2318. The probability variation game state flag is referred to in step S2308 of FIG. 33 in the game state transition process in order to specify the game state when starting the jackpot game.

<Step S2318>
In step S2318, the MPU 41 sets the probability variable big winning game state flag indicating that it is in the probability variable big winning game state to OFF, and ends the game state transition processing.

<Step S2319>
When the probability variable jackpot game state flag is off (step S2315: No), that is, when it is not the probability variable jackpot game state but the normal jackpot game state, the MPU 41 notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that it is in the time saving game state. A time saving game state command is set (step S2319), and the process proceeds to step S2320. The time-saving gaming state command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 5 can execute a special figure effect corresponding to the time saving game state in the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the time saving game state command.

<Steps S2320 and S2321>
In step S2320, the MPU 41 sets a time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of special figures that can be executed in the time saving gaming state. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the upper limit value (100 times in this embodiment) of the number of special figures that can be executed in the time saving gaming state to the time saving number counter. The time saving number counter is decremented by 1 in step S2110 in the special figure fluctuation start processing of FIG. In order to determine whether or not to transition to the state, it is referred to in step S2323 of the game state transition process.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the time saving game state flag indicating the time saving game state to ON (step S2321), and ends the game state transition processing.

<Step S2322>
When the jackpot game end flag is off (step S2312: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the jackpot game, the MPU 41 determines whether the time saving game state flag indicating the time saving game state is on. (step S2322).

MPU41, when the time saving game state flag is ON (step S2322: Yes), that is, when it is in the time saving game state, the process proceeds to step S2323. On the other hand, when the time saving game state flag is off (step S2322: No), that is, when it is not the time saving game state, the MPU 41 ends the game state transition process.

<Step S2323>
When the time saving game state flag is ON (step S2322: Yes), that is, when the time saving game state, MPU41, the value of the time saving number counter indicating the number of remaining special figures that can be executed in the time saving game state is 0 (step S2323). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to shift from the time-saving game state to the normal game state by executing the special figure game of the prescribed number of times.

MPU41, when the value of the time saving counter is 0 (step S2323: Yes), that is, when the special figure game of the specified number of times is executed to shift from the time saving game state to the normal game state, the process proceeds to step S2324. On the other hand, when the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (step S2323: No), that is, when not shifting from the time saving game state to the normal game state, the game state transition processing ends.

<Steps S2324 to S2326>
When the value of the time saving number counter is 0 (step S2323: Yes), that is, when shifting from the time saving game state to the normal game state by executing the special figure game of the specified number of times, the MPU 41 indicates that it is in the normal game state. The normal game state flag is set to ON (step S2324). Then, the MPU 41 sets off the time-saving gaming state flag indicating the time-saving gaming state (step S2325), and sets off the high-frequency support mode flag indicating the high-frequency support mode (step S2326 ), the game state transition process ends.

[Game setting value change processing]
Here, FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game set value change process executed in step S1409 of the main process of FIG. In the game set value change process, a process of displaying or not displaying the set values or controlling the change of the game set values stored in the game information storage area 412d according to the operation of the set value change operation unit 46 is executed. The setting value changing process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S2401>
As shown in FIG. 35, in step S2401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game set value display flag indicating that the game set value is being displayed on the set value display section 45 is on. The game setting value displaying flag is set when the game setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 45 by switching the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 from off to on. When the game setting value is hidden in the setting value display unit 45 by setting to ON in step S2405 and switching the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 from ON to OFF, in the game setting value change process It is set to off in step S2412 which will be described later.

When the game set value displaying flag is ON (step S2401: Yes), that is, when the game set value is displayed on the set value display section 45, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2406. On the other hand, when the game set value displaying flag is off (step S2401: No), that is, when the game set value is not displayed on the set value display section 45, the process proceeds to step S2402.

<Step S2402>
When the game set value display flag is off (step S2401: No), that is, when the game set value is not displayed in the set value display section 45, the MPU 41 turns the power of the set value display section 45 from off to on. It is determined whether or not the setting has been switched (step S2402), that is, whether or not the setting value changing operation section 46 has been operated to turn on the power of the setting value display section 45. FIG.

When the power of the setting value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S2402: Yes), the MPU 41 detects that the setting value change operation unit 46 is operated to turn on the power of the setting value display unit 45. If so, the process moves to step S2403. On the other hand, when the power of the setting value display unit 45 cannot be switched from off to on (step S2402: No), the MPU 41 performs an operation to turn on the power of the setting value display unit 45 to the setting value change operation unit 46. is not performed, the game set value change process is terminated.

<Steps S2403 to S2405>
When the power of the setting value display unit 45 is switched from OFF to ON (step S2402: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the game setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S2403), A number indicating the game set value is displayed on the set value display unit 45 (step S2404). Thereby, the current game set value can be confirmed. Then, the MPU 41 turns on the setting value display flag indicating that the game setting value is being displayed on the setting value display unit 45 (step S2405), and ends the setting value changing process.

<Step S2406>
When the set value display flag is set to ON (step S2401: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the set value change operation unit 46 has been rotated by a predetermined angle (step S2406). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a rotation operation for changing the game set value has been performed. If the setting value change operation unit 46 has been rotated by a predetermined angle (step S2406: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2407, and if the setting value change operation unit 46 has not been rotated (step S2406: No), The process moves to step S2409.

<Steps S2407 and S2408>
When the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by the predetermined angle (step S2406: Yes), the MPU 41 executes processing for changing the display on the set value display unit 45 (step S2407). For example, when the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated rightward by a predetermined angle, the MPU 41 displays a number one larger than the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 before the rotation, and vice versa. In addition, when the set value change operation section 46 is rotated leftward by a predetermined angle, a number one smaller than the number displayed on the set value display section 45 before the rotation is displayed.

When the number displayed on the set value display section 45 before rotation is "6" and the set value change operation section 46 is rotated rightward by a predetermined angle, the set value display section 45 displays is changed to "1", and when the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 before rotation is "1", the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle in the left direction. The number displayed on the value display section 45 is changed to "6". Further, when the number displayed on the setting value display section 45 is "6", it is prevented from rotating further to the right, and when the number displayed on the setting value display section 45 is "1". In addition, it may be prevented from rotating further to the left.

Then, the MPU 41 overwrites the game setting value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 with the number being displayed on the setting value display section 45 as the game setting value (step S2408), and ends the setting value change process. As a result, when the power of the set value change operation unit 46 is switched from on to off, the game set values stored in the RAM 412 immediately before the power is turned off are finally stored in the RAM 412 as valid game set values. It is stored in the game information storage area 412d. Therefore, by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46 to change the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45, the game setting values stored in the RAM 412 are changed. By turning off the power of the set value display unit 45 while the number corresponding to the desired game set value is displayed on the set value display unit 45, the game set value can be determined.

In step S2408, the MPU 41 sets a game set value change command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the game set value has been changed and the changed game set value.

<Step S2409>
If the set value change operation unit 46 has not been rotated by the predetermined angle (step S2406: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the power of the set value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S2409), i.e., changes the set value. It is determined whether or not an operation has been performed on the operation unit 46 to turn off the power of the set value display unit 45 . When the power of the setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S2409: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2410, and the power of the setting value display unit 45 is not switched from on to off. If so (step S2409: No), the set value change process is terminated.

<Steps S2410 to S2412>
When the power supply of the setting value display unit 45 is switched from ON to OFF (step S2409: Yes), the MPU 41 displays the low probability mode right/wrong table (Fig. 9(A)) and the high-probability mode propriety table (see FIG. 9(B)) are selected and stored in the RAM 412 (step S2410).

Here, in step S2410, a low-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 9A) and a high-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 9B) corresponding to the game setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 are displayed. ) is selected. That is, since the win/fail table with the same game set value is selected for the low-probability mode win/fail table and the high-probability mode win/fail table, it is easy to change the game set value. However, the setting value in the low probability mode and the game setting value in the high probability mode may be changed separately. In this case, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are set to different levels (numerical values), for example, the low probability mode setting value is set to "1" and the high probability mode setting value is set to "6". it becomes possible to

Then, the MPU 41 hides the numbers corresponding to the game set values on the set value display unit 45 (step S2411), sets the set value display flag to off (step S2412), and performs the set value change process. exit.

[Specific performance information update process]
Here, FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing an example of the specific performance information update process executed in step S1410 in the main process of FIG. In the specific performance information update process, specific performance information such as base information is updated. Also, FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. The specific performance information update process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG.

<Steps S2501 to S2503>
As shown in FIG. 36, in step S2501, the MPU 41 selects from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 various payout ball numbers for current base calculation, for example, "general prize winning" in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). "Number of balls paid out to the first winning mouth" and "Number of balls paid out to the first winning mouth" are read out, and "Number of out balls" in the normal game state for current base calculation is read out from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S2502). Then, the MPU 41 calculates the "number of out balls" in the normal game state based on the "number of balls to be paid out from the general winning opening", the "number of balls to be paid out from the first winning opening", and the "number of out balls" in the normal game state for current base calculation. , the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the “general winning opening payout ball number” and the “first winning opening payout ball number” to the “current base BL” is calculated and stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. "Current base BL" is updated (step S2503), and the process proceeds to step S2504.

<Step S2504>
In step S2504, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of out balls in the normal game state for current base calculation read out from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S2502 has reached 60000 balls. If the number of out balls in the normal game state for current base calculation has reached 60000 (step S2504: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2505, and if the number of out balls has not reached 60000 (Step S2504: No), the process proceeds to step S2509.

<Steps S2505 to S2508>
When the number of out balls in the normal game state for current base calculation has reached 60000 (step S2504: Yes), the MPU 41 updates various base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S2505). ~S2507). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 37(A) and 37(B), the MPU 41 shifts the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the 60,000 ball base two times before in the base information (step S2505). BL is shifted to the previous 60,000 ball base B1 (step S2506), and the current base BL is cleared to 0 (step S2507).

Then, the MPU 41 clears to 0 the number of general winning opening payout balls, the number of first winning opening payout balls and the number of out balls in the normal game state for base calculation, which are stored as the base information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. (step S2508), and the process proceeds to step S2509.

<Step S2509>
When the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is updated (steps S2505 to S2508), or when the number of out balls has not reached 60000 (step S2504: No), the MPU 51 stores information other than the base information. Other specific performance information (for example, the number of times a unit jackpot lottery is drawn, a continuous role ratio, a role ratio) is read from the game information storage area 412d, and other specific performance information is read based on the read information. The performance information is calculated, the values of other specific performance information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 are updated (step S2509), and the specific performance information update process is terminated.

[Display control processing of performance display monitor]
Here, FIGS. 38 to 41 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor 43 executed in step S1411 of the main processing of FIG. The display control processing of the performance display monitor 43 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 38 to 41. FIG.

<Step S2601>
As shown in FIG. 38, in step S2601, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the BL display flag indicating that the current base BL is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43 is set to ON. Here, when the display of the current base BL is started on the performance display monitor 43, the BL display flag is set to ON in step S2606 described later in the display control process or step S2630 in FIG.

When the BL display flag is set to ON (step S2601: Yes), that is, when the current base BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2608 in FIG. On the other hand, when the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S2601: No), that is, when the current base BL is not displayed on the performance display monitor 43, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2602.

<Step S2602>
If the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S2601: No), that is, if the current base BL is not displayed on the performance display monitor 43, the MPU 41 determines that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 was displayed on the performance display monitor 43. It is determined whether or not the B1 display flag indicating that the image is being displayed is set to ON (step S2602). Here, the B1 display flag is set to ON in step S2612 of FIG.

If the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S2602: Yes), that is, if the previous 60,000 ball base B1 was displayed on the performance display monitor 43, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2617 in FIG. do. On the other hand, when the B1 display flag is set to OFF (step S2602: No), that is, when the 60,000 ball base B1 was not displayed last time on the performance display monitor 43, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2603. .

<Step S2603>
When the B1 display flag is set to OFF (step S2602: No), that is, when the performance display monitor 43 does not display the previous 60,000 ball base B1, the MPU 41 displays the last 60,000 ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43. It is determined whether or not the B2 display flag indicating that the base B2 is being displayed is set to ON (step S2603). Here, the B2 display flag is set to ON in step S2621 of FIG.

When the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S2603: Yes), that is, when the performance display monitor 43 displays the 60,000 ball base B2 two times before, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2626 in FIG. do. On the other hand, when the B2 display flag is set to OFF (step S2603: No), that is, when the performance display monitor 43 does not display the 60,000 ball base B2 two times before, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2604. .

<Step S2604>
When the B2 display flag is set to off (step S2603: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S2604). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S2604: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2605, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from off to on (step S2604: No), the End the display control process.

<Steps S2605 to S2607>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from off to on (step S2604: Yes), the MPU 41 causes the performance display monitor 43 to display the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. (Step S2605). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. When "2" and "9" are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43 and the base information is the example shown in FIG. 37(B), the current base BL is 0%. “8.”, “L”, “0” and “0” indicating that the performance display monitor 43 is composed of four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are displayed. Then, the MPU 41 sets ON a flag indicating that the current base BL is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2606). Furthermore, in order to display the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time, the MPU 41 sets a BL display time counter indicating the remaining display time of the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2607), and controls the display. End the process.

<Steps S2608 and S2609>
When the BL display flag is set to ON (step S2601: Yes), that is, when the current base BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, as shown in FIG. 1 is subtracted from the value of the BL display time counter indicating the remaining display time of the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 set in (step S2608), and it is determined whether the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0. It judges (step S2609). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1.

If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2609: Yes), that is, if it is time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1, the MPU 41 processes to step S2610. On the other hand, if the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2609: No), that is, if it is not time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1, the MPU 41 processes to step S2614.

<Steps S2610 to S2613>
When the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2609: Yes), that is, when it is time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1, the MPU 41 The BL display flag indicating that the current base BL is displayed on the display monitor 43 is set to OFF (step S2610), and the previous 60,000 ball base included in the base information saved in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is displayed. B1 is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2611). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. , “3”, and “3” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and the base information is the example shown in FIG. "8.", "1", "2" and "9" indicating that the base B1 is 29% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431-434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. FIG. Then, the MPU 41 sets on the B1 display flag indicating that the 60,000 ball base B1 was displayed last time on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2612). Further, the MPU 41 sets a B1 display time counter indicating the remaining display time of the previous 60,000-ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 in order to display the previous 60,000-ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S2613), the display control process ends.

<Step S2614>
If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2609: No), that is, if it is not the timing to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1, the MPU 41 switches the performance display switch. 44 is switched from on to off (step S2614). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2614: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2615, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S2614: No). ) to terminate the display control process.

When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S2614: Yes), the power supply to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 is interrupted in the performance display monitor 43, thereby turning off the alphabet indicating the current base BL. and the numbers are extinguished.

<Steps S2615 and S2616>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S2614: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag indicating that the current base BL is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43 to OFF (step S2615). Further, the MPU 41 clears the value of the BL display time counter indicating the remaining display time of the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 to 0 (step S2616), and ends the display control process.

<Steps S2617 and S2618>
Returning to FIG. 38, when the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S2602: Yes), that is, when the previous 60,000 ball base B1 was displayed on the performance display monitor 43, as shown in FIG. The MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B1 display time counter indicating the remaining display time of the previous 60,000-ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 set in step S2613 of FIG. It is determined whether or not the counter value is 0 (step S2618). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the previous 60,000-ball base B1 to the second-last 60,000-ball base B2.

When the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2618: Yes), the MPU 41 is the timing to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the second previous 60,000 ball base B2. If so, the process proceeds to step S2619. On the other hand, if the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2618: No), the MPU 41 does not switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the previous 60,000-ball base B1 to the second-last 60,000-ball base B2. If so, the process proceeds to step S2623.

<Steps S2619 to S2622>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2618: Yes), that is, if it is time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the previous 60,000-ball base B1 to the second-last 60,000-ball base B2, the MPU 41 sets off the B1 display flag indicating that the 60,000-ball base B1 was displayed last time on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2619), and the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 includes The performance display monitor 43 displays the 60,000 ball base B2 two times before the game (step S2620). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. , “3”, and “2” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. "8.", "2", "3", and "3" indicating that the base B2 is 33% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431-434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. FIG. Then, the MPU 41 turns on the B2 display flag indicating that the 60,000 ball base B2 is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2621). Further, the MPU 41 sets a B2 display time counter indicating the remaining display time of the 60,000-ball base B2 of the 2-previous game on the performance display monitor 43 in order to display the 60,000-ball base B2 of the 2-previous game on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S2622), the display control process ends.

<Step S2623>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2618: No), that is, if it is not the timing to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the previous 60,000-ball base B1 to the second-last 60,000-ball base B2, the MPU 41 It is determined whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2623). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2623: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2624, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S2623: No), the End the display control process.

When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S2623: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the energization of the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, and the previous 60,000 ball base B1 Alphabets and numbers indicating are extinguished.

<Steps S2624 and S2625>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S2623: Yes), the MPU 41 sets off the B1 display flag indicating that the 60,000 ball base B1 was displayed last time on the performance display monitor 43. At the same time (step S2624), the value of the B1 display time counter is cleared to 0 (step S2625), and the display control process ends.

<Steps S2626 and S2627>
Returning to FIG. 38, when the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S2603: Yes), that is, when the performance display monitor 43 displays the 60,000 ball base B2 two times before, as shown in FIG. The MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B2 display time counter indicating the remaining display time of the 60,000-ball base B2 in the performance display monitor 43 set in step S2622 of FIG. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter is 0 (step S2627). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the 60,000 ball base B2 to the current base BL.

If the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2627: Yes), that is, if it is time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the 60,000 ball base B2 to the current base BL two times before, the MPU 41 processes to step S2628. On the other hand, if the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2627: No), that is, if it is not the time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the 60,000 ball base B2 to the current base BL two times before, the MPU 41 processes to step S2632.

<Steps S2628 to S2631>
When the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2627: Yes), that is, when it is time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the 60,000 ball base B2 to the current base BL two times before, the MPU 41 The B2 display flag indicating that the 60,000-ball base B2 is displayed on the display monitor 43 two times before is set to OFF (step S2628), and the current base included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is displayed. BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2629). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 2” and “9” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 37B, the current base BL is 0%. "8.", "L", "0", and "0" indicating that there is, are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. FIG. Then, the MPU 41 turns on the flag indicating that the current base BL is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S2630), and sets the current base BL to be displayed on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time. A BL display time counter is set (step S2631), and the display control process ends.

<Step S2632>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S2627: No), that is, if it is not the time to switch the display on the performance display monitor 43 from the 60,000 ball base B2 to the current base BL two times before, the MPU 41 switches the performance display switch. 44 is switched from on to off (step S2632). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S2632: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2633, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S2632: No), the End the display control process.

When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S2632: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the energization of the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, thereby Alphabets and numbers indicating are extinguished.

In this embodiment, the performance display monitor 43 displays the base information when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, and the performance display monitor 43 hides the base information when the performance display switch 44 is turned off. may be always displayed on the performance display monitor 43 while the gaming machine 10 is powered on, or may be displayed on the performance display monitor 43 while the front frame 11 is open. good.

<Steps S2633 and S2634>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S2632: Yes), the MPU 41 sets off the B2 display flag indicating that the 60,000 ball base B2 was displayed on the performance display monitor 43 two times before. (step S2633). Further, the MPU 41 clears the value of the B2 display time counter indicating the remaining display time of the 60,000 ball base B2 before the last to 0 (step S2634), and terminates the display control process.

[Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 in the audio lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 54. FIG.

It is also conceivable as another embodiment that part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 in this embodiment is executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 . In addition, in the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing for the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, startup processing when starting up the sound lamp control device 5, NMI interrupt processing at the time of power failure, and the like. Description of these processes is omitted.

[Secondary Timer Interrupt Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device 5]
Here, FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of sub timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5. As shown in FIG. The MPU 51 executes, for example, sub timer interrupt processing as regular processing with a period of 1 msec.

As shown in FIG. 42, the MPU 51 performs counter update processing (step S2701), operation detection processing (step S2702), command determination processing (step S2703), special figure game effect control processing (step S2704) in the sub timer interrupt processing. ), and a jackpot game effect control process (step S2705).

[Counter update process]
In the counter update process (step S2701), the MPU 51 updates the production pattern type counter, the first stop symbol type counter, the variation display counter, and the like. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values of the effect type counter and the first stop symbol type counter, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values. The effect pattern type counter is used to determine the variation type (effect pattern) based on the special figure variation pattern command received from the main controller 4. For example, the effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-109. Also, the first stop symbol type counter is used to determine the type of decoration symbol to be stopped first based on the special figure variation pattern command received from the main control device 4 . For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-99. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the variation display counter. This variable display counter is for measuring the variable display time of the pattern display section 341, and the counter value of the variable display counter is set to 0 when the remaining variable display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variation display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining variation display time, the fact that variation is in progress, the end of the variation display of the pattern display section 341, and the like.

[Operation detection processing]
Next, an example of the procedure of operation detection processing executed in step S2702 of the secondary timer interrupt processing in FIG. 42 will be described. Here, FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection process.

As shown in FIG. 43, in the operation detection process, the MPU 41 performs operation button operation detection processing (step S2801), operation detection pattern determination processing (step S2802), selection button operation detection processing (step S2803), selection operation detection pattern determination, Processing (step S2804), determination button operation detection processing (step S2805), and determination operation detection pattern determination processing (step S2806) are executed.

[Operation button operation detection process]
In the operation button operation detection process (step S2801 of the operation detection process), the operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and the operation history for the past three times is sequentially updated. In the game machine 10, the MPU 41 executes the operation button operation detection process, so that the operation button 20 is operated at predetermined intervals (1 msec intervals in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub timer interrupt process. The presence or absence of is determined. Here, FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process. The operation button operation detection processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Steps S2901 to S2903>
As shown in FIG. 44, in the operation button operation detection process, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second detection flag to the first detection flag (step S2901). Next, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third detection flag to the second detection flag (step S2902). Thereafter, the MPU 41 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a to the third detection flag (step S2903), and terminates the operation detection process.

As described above, in the operation button operation detection process, by executing the processes of steps S2901 to S2903, as the operation history of the operation button 20, the most recent three operation states at 1 msec intervals are set to the first detection flag to the third detection flag. It is stored in RAM 512 as a flag. Specifically, the most recent operation state is stored as the third detection flag, the operation state immediately before is stored as the second detection flag, and the operation state two times before is stored as the first detection flag.

[Operation Detection Pattern Judgment Processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 43, in the operation detection pattern determination process in step S2802 in the operation detection process, the operation of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. An operation pattern flag is set for determining the operation state of the operation button 20 from the history. The operation pattern flags are composed of first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by a combination of ON and OFF of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 is continued (see FIG. 46A). Further, when only the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has started (see FIG. 46(A)). Also, when only the third operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has ended (see FIG. 46A). Then, when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to OFF, it can be determined that the operation button 20 has not been operated (see FIG. 46A). Here, FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process. FIG. 46A is a table showing the relationship between detection patterns and operation states for the operation button 20. FIG. The operation button operation detection process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46(A).

<Step S3001>
As shown in FIG. 60, in the operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to ON (step S3001). . Here, when the first operation detection flag is on (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3002, and when the first operation detection flag is off (step S3001: No), the process proceeds. The process moves to step S3005.

<Step S3002>
If the first operation detection flag is ON (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is set to ON ( step S3002). Here, when the second operation detection flag is on (step S3002: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3003, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S3002: No), the process proceeds to step S3003. The process moves to step S3008.

<Step S3003>
If the second operation detection flag is ON (step S3002: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the latest operation state of the operation button 20 is set to ON (step S3003). ). Here, when the third operation detection flag is ON (step S3003: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3004, and when the third operation detection flag is OFF (step S3003: No), the process is performed. The process moves to step S3010.

<Step S3004>
When the third operation detection flag is ON (step S3003: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF (step S3004). The operation detection pattern determination processing ends. That is, when the operation pattern of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second operation pattern flag to ON. The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 46(A)). The first operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the operation button 20 continues. For example, when the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 may set an operation button operation continuation command in the RAM 412 and transmit this operation button operation continuation command to the sound lamp control device 5. . Accordingly, since the sound lamp control device 5 can determine that the operation of the operation button 20 continues, the operation button 20 is continuously operated based on the number of times the operation button operation continuation command is continuously transmitted. I can keep track of time. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not the operation button 20 has been long-pressed based on the time during which the operation button 20 has been continuously operated. can be executed.

<Step S3005>
When the first operation detection flag is off (step S3001: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is on (step S3005). ). Here, when the second operation detection flag is on (step S3005: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3006, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S3005: No), the process is continued. The process moves to step S3010.

<Step S3006>
When the second operation detection flag is on (step S3005: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the latest operation state of the operation button 20 is on (step S3006). Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3007, and when the third operation detection flag is off (step S3006: No), the process is performed. The process moves to step S3010.

<Step S3007>
When the third operation detection flag is ON (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first and third operation pattern flags to OFF (step S3007). That is, when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first operation pattern flag to ON. The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 46(A)), and the detected operation pattern determination process ends. The second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has been started). In this way, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state using the second operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times is reflected. Alternatively, erroneous detection of the start of operation of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the start of operation of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the performance display at a timing unintended by the player.

<Step S3008>
When the second operation detection flag is off (step S3002: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the latest operation state of the operation button 20 is on (step S3008). Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S3008: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3010, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S3008: No), the process proceeds to step S3010. The process moves to step S3009.

<Step S3009>
When the second operation detection flag is off (step S3008: No), the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to on, and sets the first and second operation pattern flags to off (step S3009). The operation detection pattern determination processing ends. That is, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times, and the first operation pattern flag is set to ON. The flag and the second operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 46(A)). The third operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has ended). can.

<Step S3010>
If the third operation detection flag is off (step S3003: No), if the second operation detection flag is off (step S3005: No), if the third operation detection flag is off (step S3006: No) , or if the third operation detection flag is ON (step S3008: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to OFF (step S3010), The operation detection pattern determination processing ends. That is, the MPU 41 turns off all the first to third operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times. (see FIG. 46(A)). Note that the MPU 41 determines that the operation button 20 is in the non-operating state when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off.

[Selection button operation detection process]
Returning to the description of FIG. 43, in the selection button operation detection process (step S2803), the MPU 41 executes an upper selection button operation process, a lower selection button operation process, a left selection button operation process, and a right selection button operation process.

<Upper selection button operation processing>
In the upper selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the upper selection button 211 and executes a process for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, since the upper selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 44, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in the upper selection button operation processing, in each step of the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 44, the "operation detection flag" may be replaced with the "up selection operation detection flag".

<Lower selection button operation processing>
In the down selection button operation processing, the MPU 41 detects the operating state of the down selection button 212 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the down selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 44, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in the down selection button operation processing, in each step of the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 44, the “operation detection flag” can be read as the “down selection operation detection flag”.

<Left selection button operation processing>
In the left selection button operation processing, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the left selection button 213 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the left selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 44, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in the left selection button operation processing, in each step of the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 44, the "operation detection flag" may be replaced with the "left selection operation detection flag".

<Right selection button operation processing>
In the right selection button operation processing, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the right selection button 214 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the right selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing of FIG. 44, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the right selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 44 should be replaced with the "right selection operation detection flag".

[Selection operation detection pattern determination process]
Returning to the description of FIG. 43, in selection operation detection pattern determination processing (step S2804), the MPU 41 performs up selection operation detection pattern determination processing, down selection operation detection pattern determination processing, left selection operation detection pattern determination processing, and right selection operation detection. Execute pattern determination processing.

<Upper selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the up-selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 detects an up-selection operation history from the operation history of the up-selection button 211 determined based on the first up-selection operation detection flag, the second up-selection operation detection flag, and the third up-selection operation detection flag. An up operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the selection button 211 is set. Here, since the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 45, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 45, the "operation detection flag" is changed to the "upper selection operation detection flag", You can read it as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 46B, in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" are the operation states of the upper selection button 211 three times. When it occurs, the first upper selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first upper selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the upper selection button 211 continues.

Further, when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times, the MPU 41 sets the second upper selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second upper selection operation pattern flag to ON. The 1st upper selection operation pattern flag and the 3rd upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has started). used.

Further, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operating state of the upper selection button 211 three times, the MPU 41 sets the third upper selection operation pattern flag to ON, The 1st upper selection operation pattern flag and the 2nd upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has ended). used.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times. to off. Note that the MPU 41 determines that the upper selection button 211 is in the non-operating state when all of the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Lower selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the bottom selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 selects the bottom selection button from the operation history of the bottom selection button 212 determined based on the first bottom selection operation detection flag, the second bottom selection operation detection flag, and the bottom selection operation detection flag. A lower operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 212 is set. Here, since the downward selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 45, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 45, the "operation detection flag" is changed to the "down selection operation detection flag", and the "operation pattern flag" is changed to the "down selection operation pattern". You can read it as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 46(C), in the down selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the operation pattern of "ON", "ON", and "ON" is set as the operation state of the down selection button 212 three times. When it occurs, the first bottom selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second bottom selection operation pattern flag and the third bottom selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first lower selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the lower selection button 212 continues.

Further, when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operating state of the lower selection button 212 three times, the MPU 41 sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag to ON, The first lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set to off. The second lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state (whether or not the lower selection button 212 has been operated). used.

Further, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operating state of the lower selection button 212 three times, the MPU 41 sets the third lower selection operation pattern flag to ON, The first lower selection operation pattern flag and the second lower selection operation pattern flag are set to off. The third lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has ended). used.

In addition, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the down selection button 212 three times, the MPU 41 sets the first to third down selection operation detection flags. to off. Note that the MPU 41 determines that the bottom selection button 212 is in the non-operating state when all of the first to third bottom selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Left selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 selects the left selection button from the operation history of the left selection button 213 determined based on the first left selection operation detection flag, the second left selection operation detection flag, and the left selection operation detection flag. A left operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 213 is set. Here, since the left selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 45, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that the left selection operation detection pattern determination process is such that in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. You can read it as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 46(D), in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the left selection button 213 has three operation states of "ON", "ON", and "ON". When it occurs, the first left selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first left selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the left selection button 213 continues.

Further, when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times, the MPU 41 sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON. The 1 left selection operation pattern flag and the 3rd left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the left selection button 213 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has started). used.

Further, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times, the MPU 41 sets the third left selection operation pattern flag to ON, The 1 left selection operation pattern flag and the 2nd left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the left selection button 213 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has ended). used.

In addition, the MPU 41 sets the first to third left selection operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times. to off. Note that the MPU 41 determines that the left selection button 213 is in a non-operating state when all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Right selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 selects the right selection button from the operation history of the right selection button 214 determined based on the first right selection operation detection flag, the second right selection operation detection flag, and the right selection operation detection flag. A right operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 214 is set. Here, since the right selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 45, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that the right selection operation detection pattern determination process is such that in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. You can read it as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 46(E), in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" are the operation states of the right selection button 214 three times. When it occurs, the first right selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. Then, the first right selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the right selection button 214 continues.

Further, when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times, the MPU 41 sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON. The 1 right selection operation pattern flag and the 3rd right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the right selection button 214 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has started). used.

Further, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times, the MPU 41 sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON, The 1 right selection operation pattern flag and the 2nd right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the right selection button 214 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has ended). used.

The MPU 41 also sets the first to third right selection operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times. to off. Note that the MPU 41 determines that the right selection button 214 is in a non-operating state when all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags are off.

[OK button operation detection process]
Returning to the description of FIG. 43, in the determination button operation detection process (step S2805), the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the determination button 21B, and executes processing for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, since the enter button operation detection process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. 44, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the enter button operation detection process, the "operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57 should be replaced with the "enter button operation detection flag".

[Determination operation detection pattern determination process]
In the determination operation detection pattern determination process (step S2806), the MPU 41 selects the determination button from the operation history of the determination button 21B determined based on the first determination operation detection flag, the second determination operation detection flag, and the third determination operation detection flag. 21B to set an operation pattern flag for determining the operation state. Here, since the determination operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 45, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the “operation detection flag” in each step of the operation detection pattern determination processing in FIG. 45 may be replaced with the “determination operation detection flag”.

Here, as shown in FIG. 46(F), in the enter operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that an operation pattern of "ON", "ON", and "ON" has occurred as the operating state of the enter button 21B three times. , the first determination operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second determination operation pattern flag and the third determination operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first decision operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the decision button 21B is being operated continuously.

Further, when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the enter button 21B three times, the MPU 41 sets the second enter operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first enter operation pattern flag to ON. The operation pattern flag and the third determined operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second enter operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the enter button 21B has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state (whether or not the enter button 21B has been operated). .

Furthermore, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the enter button 21B three times, the MPU 41 sets the third enter operation pattern flag to ON, The operation pattern flag and the second determined operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third enter operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the enter button 21B has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the enter button 21B has ended). .

Further, the MPU 41 sets all the first to third determination operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the determination button 21B three times. to off. Note that the MPU 41 determines that the enter button 21B is in a non-operating state when all of the first to third enter operation pattern flags are off.

[Command judgment processing]
Next, an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in step S2703 of the secondary timer interrupt processing in FIG. 42 will be described. Here, FIGS. 47 and 48 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing.

<Step S3101>
As shown in FIG. 47, in the command determination process, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not a command has been received from the main controller 4 (step S3101). Here, when the MPU 51 receives a command (step S3101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3102. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received a command (step S3101: No), it ends the command determination process.

Commands received from main controller 4 are stored in the unprocessed command storage area of RAM 512, and MPU 51 refers to the unprocessed command storage area to determine whether or not a command has been received. Also, the commands stored in the unprocessed command storage area are erased from the unprocessed command storage area when it is determined that the command has been received in step S3101 and is subject to processing. stored in

<Step S3102>
When a command is received (step S3101: Yes), MPU51 judges whether the received command is a special figure variation pattern command (step S3102). The special figure fluctuation pattern command is a command indicating the fluctuation display time of special symbols in the special figure game (special figure fluctuation pattern) and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery.

Here, MPU51, if the received command is a special figure variation pattern command (step S3102: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3103, if the received command is not a special figure variation pattern command (step S3102: No) , the process proceeds to step S3107.

<Steps S3103 and S3104>
If the received command is a special figure variation pattern command (step S3102: Yes), MPU51, based on the special figure variation pattern command received from the main control device 4, variation type (effect pattern) setting process (step S3103) And a stop symbol combination setting process (step S3104) is executed. Details of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process and the stop symbol combination setting process will be described below.

[Variation type (production pattern) setting process]
In the variation type (production pattern) setting process, various production means (symbol display unit 341, speaker 26, illumination unit 27, movable accessory member 39, sub-movable display unit 38) are executed in the special game. is set. Specifically, the MPU 51 refers to the variation type table (see FIG. 49) based on the special figure variation pattern command, the variation type (effect pattern) and the variation display time are set, and further the variation type (effect pattern ), the effect pattern type is set based on the effect pattern type selection table (see FIG. 50).

Here, FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table referred to by the MPU 51 when determining the variation type (effect pattern).

As shown in FIG. 49, in the variation type table, the contents of the variation display time and the variation type (effect pattern) corresponding to the special figure variation pattern command are defined. For example, the special figure variation pattern command "A01" in which the lottery result is "normal jackpot" and the special figure variation pattern is "01" is associated with the variation display time "30 s" and the variation type "normal reach effect pattern". ing. In addition, the special figure variation pattern command "B02" whose lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot" and the special figure variation pattern is "02" corresponds to the variation display time "60 s" and the variation type "super reach effect pattern". The special figure variation pattern command "C03", which has a lottery result of "16R probability variable jackpot" and a special figure variation pattern of "03", has a variation display time of "90s" and a variation type of "special reach production pattern". are associated. Furthermore, the special figure variation pattern command "D04" in which the lottery result is "out" and the special figure variation pattern is "04" is associated with the variation display time "7 s" and the variation type "non-reach effect pattern". The special figure variation pattern command "D05" with the lottery result "out" and the special figure variation pattern "05" is associated with the variation display time "10s" and the variation type "non-reach production pattern". It is

50(A) to 50(C) are diagrams showing an example of the effect pattern type selection table. The production pattern type selection table is set for each variation type (production pattern). Specifically, FIG. 50 (A) is a normal reach effect pattern type selection table that is referred to when the final individual effect type in the special game effect is the normal reach effect, and FIG. 50 (B) is the special game effect It is a super reach production pattern type selection table that is referred to when the final individual production type is a super reach production, and FIG. It is a special reach effect pattern type selection table to be referred to.

In addition, in this embodiment, the case where there are five kinds of effect types corresponding to each variation type will be described as an example, but the number of effect types may be six or more. Also, in FIG. 50, the effect type table when the variation type is no reach is omitted.

In the normal reach production pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 50 (A), the production pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the production pattern type counter according to the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot, and loss) "Production pattern X1" to "Production pattern X5" are defined. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the normal reach effect pattern, the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is selected from the normal reach effect pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. select. Here, the production pattern X1 to the production pattern X3 included in the normal ready-to-win production pattern type selection table are productions in which, for example, normal ready-to-win production is executed in which the decoration pattern is in the ready-to-win state after the high-speed fluctuation production in which the decoration pattern fluctuates at high speed. , The final individual effect type is a normal reach effect.

In addition, in the super ready-to-win production pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 50(B), "production pattern Y1" to "production pattern Y5" are defined as production pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the production pattern type counter according to the lottery result. It is When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the super ready-to-win effect pattern, the MPU 51 selects the super ready-to-win effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Select from a table. Here, the production pattern Y1 to production pattern Y3 included in the super ready-to-win production pattern type selection table, for example, the normal ready-to-win production is executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation production, and the final individual production type has a higher expected degree of jackpot than the normal ready-to-win production. It is a production that develops into a super reach production that is high and has a longer production execution time than the normal reach production. Note that the super ready-to-win effect pattern type selection table may include a super ready-to-win effect pattern that develops into a super ready-to-win effect after the high-speed fluctuation effect is completed without going through the normal ready-to-win effect.

Furthermore, in the special reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 50(C), "effect pattern Z1" to "effect pattern Z5" are defined as effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the result of the lottery. It is When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the special ready-to-win effect pattern, the MPU 51 selects the special ready-to-win effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Select from a table. Here, the production pattern Z1 to production pattern Z3 included in the special reach production pattern type selection table, for example, normal reach production and super reach production are executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation production, and normal reach production and super reach production are executed as the final individual production type. It is a production that develops into a special reach production with a higher expectation for a big hit than the ready-to-win production and a longer production execution time than the normal reach production. The special reach production pattern type selection table includes a special reach production pattern that develops into a special reach production after the end of the high-speed fluctuation production or the normal reach production without going through at least one of the normal reach production and the super reach production. You can

[Stop symbol combination setting process]
In the stop symbol combination setting process, a symbol combination is set when a plurality of decoration symbols (for example, three) variably displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the special symbol game are stopped and displayed on the active line. Specifically, based on the special figure variation pattern command, the MPU 51 refers to the first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 51(B)) to set the stop symbol combination.

Here, FIG. 51(A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the decorative design type and the decorative design color. As shown in FIG. 51(A), in this embodiment, numbers "1" to "9" are set as decorative patterns, and among these numbers, "3" and "7" are red. , '1', '5' and '9' are green and '2', '4', '6' and '8' are red. Then, in this embodiment, the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game is notified by a combination of decoration symbols stopped and displayed on one or more effective lines set in the symbol display section 341 . For example, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the decoration pattern of the same number is displayed on the active line in doubles, and when the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the decorative pattern is displayed in doubles on the effective line. It is displayed as stopped outside.

Also, it is conceivable to provide a difference in the advantage of the player in the type (number, color) of the decoration pattern. For example, odd numbers are more advantageous to the player than even numbers, and among the odd numbers, red "3" and "7" are more advantageous to the player than green "1", "5" and "9". can be considered. In this case, for example, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the jackpot type may be indicated or suggested by a combination of decorative symbols that are stop-displayed. For example, when the stop symbol combination is "777", it is clearly indicated that it is a 16R probability variable jackpot, when the stop symbol combination is "333", it is clearly indicated that it is a probability variable jackpot, and the stop symbol combination is an even number Zorro If it is a die, it may be suggested that the 5R normal jackpot. In addition, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, it is expected that the result of the jackpot lottery for a specific holding of the special game to be executed after the special game will be a big win, depending on the combination of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed. You may make it specify or suggest the degree (jackpot expectation degree). For example, in the special game until the special game for a specific hold is executed, the random eyes of the same color are stopped and displayed as so-called chance eyes, and the degree of expectation for the big hit is displayed according to the color of the random eyes (chance eyes), so-called look-ahead effect. may be specified or implied as Specifically, the expectation of a big hit in a special game for a specific hold is the highest for red loose eyes (chance eyes), the second highest for green loose eyes (chance eyes), and the lowest for blue loose eyes. It may be set so that the change pattern of the special game with respect to a specific hold or the random eyes (chance eyes) of the color according to the success/failure information are stopped and displayed.

In this embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols to be stopped is composed of a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is the decoration symbol that is stopped and displayed first in the symbol display section 341, the second stop symbol is the decoration symbol that is stopped and displayed second, and the final stop symbol is the decoration symbol that is stopped and displayed last. It is a design that

Here, FIG. 51B is a diagram showing an example of the first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 51(B), in the first stop symbol selection table, a decoration symbol (first stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed first in the symbol display section 341 is determined. In addition, FIG. 51(B) shows that the decorative patterns are “1” to “9”, and “333” is a pattern combination indicating that the probability variable jackpot (either the 5R probability variable jackpot or the 16R probability variable jackpot), “777” ” is a symbol combination that indicates that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, and that the double eyes other than “333” and “777” are either a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability variation jackpot and a 16R probability variation jackpot. It is assumed.

When the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", there is no sorting of "3" and "7" as the first stop symbols, and the first stop symbols are selected from decoration symbols other than "3" and "7" with a predetermined probability. It is determined. That is, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the symbol combination of "333" or "777" indicating the 5R probability variable jackpot or the 16R probability variable jackpot (variable probability jackpot) is not stopped and displayed.

Further, when the lottery result is ``5R probability variable jackpot'', ``7'' is not sorted as the first stop pattern, and the first stop pattern is determined with a predetermined probability from decoration patterns other than ``7''. That is, when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", the symbol combination of "777" indicating the 16R probability variable jackpot is not stop-displayed. On the other hand, even if the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", double symbol combinations other than the symbol combination "333" indicating the 5R probability variable jackpot can be stop-displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is ``5R probability variable big win'', the double symbol combination other than the ``333'' symbol combination whose decorative symbol stop display result suggests 5R normal big win can be stop-displayed. Then, when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", when a decorative pattern other than "3" excluding "7" is determined as the first stop pattern, the MPU 51 indicates that the jackpot game is a 5R probability variable jackpot. The specified 5R probability variation promotion performance is executed.

Furthermore, when the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", there is a distribution for all the decorative patterns of "1" to "9", and the first stop with a predetermined probability from the decorative patterns of "1" to "9" Design is determined. In other words, even if the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", double symbol combinations other than the "777" symbol combination indicating the 16R probability variable jackpot can be stop-displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", the stop display result of the decorative pattern indicates a 5R probability variable jackpot or 5R normal jackpot. can be When the lottery result is ``16R probability variable jackpot'' and ``7'' is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 executes the 16R probability variable promotion performance for indicating the 16R probability variable jackpot in the jackpot game. .

Then, when the lottery result is a big win and the first stop symbol is determined, the MPU 51 determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same symbols as the previously determined first stop symbol. Thereby, the stop symbol combination to be stopped and displayed on the active line of the symbol display section 341 in the special symbol game is determined.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is "missing", there is a distribution for all the decorative patterns "1" to "9", and the first stop pattern is determined with a predetermined probability from the decorative patterns "1" to "9". be done. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is "losing", the losing type selected based on the losing type table (see FIG. 9(D)) and the previously determined first stop symbol A second stop symbol is determined based on the stop symbol. For example, when the outlier type is front and rear outreach reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbol before and after the first stop symbol. In addition, when the out-of-order type is a ready-to-win other than front-to-rear out-of-order, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is different from the first stop symbol and the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. Determined by the design. Further, when the above-mentioned loss type is complete loss, the second stop symbol is determined as a symbol different from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined regardless of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. The combination of decorative symbols to be stopped may be determined by the display control device 6. Only the first stop symbol is determined by the sound lamp control device 5, and the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol are determined by the display control device 6. may decide.

<Step S3105>
Returning to the description of the command determination process in FIG. 47, in step S3105, the MPU 51 sets the variation display time corresponding to the received special figure variation pattern command to the variation display counter. Variation display time is determined according to the variation pattern information included in the special figure variation pattern command. Then, the variation display counter is decremented by one in the counter update processing of step S2701 in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. It is possible to determine the remaining time of the display time and the like. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display is finished when the variation display counter reaches zero.

<Step S3106>
In step S3106, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command for specifying the effect pattern type set in step S3103 of the command determination process and the content of the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols determined in step S3104 to the display control device. 6 to end the command determination process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop symbol combination of the effect pattern type and the decoration symbol. On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores a variation image of a decorative pattern and an effect image corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variable display and effect display in the symbol display section 341 according to the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the display variation pattern command, the variation type and the effect type.

Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 performs variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols (for example, three) until a preset variable display time elapses, and a plurality of The variation of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed in order. During the variable display of decorative patterns, various effects corresponding to the content of the variation type (effect pattern type) specified by the display variation pattern command are executed by the pattern display section 341, the speaker 26, the illumination section 27, and the like. .

In addition, when the MPU 51 outputs the display variation pattern command to the display control device 6, for example, the special figure game effecting flag is set to ON. This special figure game effect in progress flag is a flag indicating that the special figure game effect is being executed.

<Step S3107>
When the received command is not a special figure variation pattern command (step S3102: No), MPU51 judges whether the received command is a special figure shift command (step S3107). The special figure shift command is the first special figure reservation storage area REA when the first special figure reservation number N or the second special figure reservation number M decreases due to the start of the special figure game (variation display of the special figure) 1 Reservation area REA1 to 4th reservation area REA4, or 1st reservation area REB1 to 4th reservation area REB4 (see FIG. 8) in the 2nd special reservation storage area REB Special figure success or failure indicating the lottery result in the jackpot lottery This command indicates that the information has been shifted.

MPU51, when the received command is a special figure shift command (step S3107: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3108, and when the received command is not a special figure shift command (step S3107: No), the process proceeds to step S3110 transition to

<Steps S3108 and S3109>
If the received command is a special figure shift command (step S3107: Yes), the MPU 51 performs special figure data setting processing (step S3108) and special figure data image display processing (step S3109), and executes the command determination processing. finish.

Here, the special figure data setting process executed in step S3108 is the data of the special figure propriety information (special This is the process of shifting (updating) data. The special figure reservation storage area corresponding area (not shown) is an area corresponding to the special figure reservation storage area 412b (see FIG. 8) set in the RAM 412 of the main controller 4, and is equivalent to the special figure reservation storage area 412b. Special figure data is stored. The special figure reservation storage area corresponding area (not shown) is the first special figure reservation storage area REA of the special figure reservation storage area 412b, the second special figure reservation storage area REB, and the special figure execution area AE (see FIG. 8) It includes a first special figure reserved storage area corresponding area, a second special figure reserved storage area corresponding area, and a special figure execution area corresponding area corresponding to each. In addition, the first special figure reserved storage area corresponding area is the first special figure corresponding to the first to fourth reserved areas REA1 to REA4 (see FIG. 8) of the first special figure reserved storage area REA in the special figure reserved storage area 412b. FIG. 1st to 4th reservation area corresponding area (not shown), including the first special figure reservation number storage area corresponding area corresponding to the first special figure reservation number storage area (see FIG. 8). Furthermore, the second special figure reservation storage area corresponding area is the second special figure corresponding to the first to fourth reservation areas REB1 to REB4 (see FIG. 8) of the second special figure reservation storage area REB in the special figure reservation storage area 412b Including the second special figure reservation number storage area corresponding to the figure 1st to 4th reservation area corresponding area, the second special figure reservation number storage area (see FIG. 8).

On the other hand, the special figure data image display process executed in step S3109 is based on the special figure data stored in the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the RAM 512 shifted (updated) in step S3108. It is a process of shifting the image (special figure data image) (see FIGS. 52 and 53) related to the special figure data displayed on the display unit 341.

Here, FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of a special figure data image displayed on the symbol display section 341 before and after receiving the special figure shift command. Specifically, Figure 52 (A1) and Figure 52 (A2) is a diagram showing an example of the special figure data image before receiving the special figure shift command, Figure 52 (B1) is shown in Figure 52 (A1) It is an example of the special figure data image after receiving the special figure shift command for the first special figure game in the display state of the special figure data image shown, FIG. 52 (B2) is a special figure data image shown in FIG. 52 (A2) It is an example of the special figure data image after receiving the special figure shift command for the second special figure game in the display state of.

As shown in FIGS. 52(A1) and 52(A2), the special figure data image is displayed in the special figure data image display portions 75, 76 and 77 set in the symbol display portion 341. FIG. The special figure data image display units 75, 76, 77 are set in the RAM 512 as the special figure execution area corresponding area (not shown) of the special figure reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown), the first special figure reserved storage area Corresponding to the corresponding area and the second special figure reserved storage area corresponding area, the special figure fluctuation image display area 75, the first special figure reserved image display area 76 and the second special figure reserved image display area 77 are included.

The special figure fluctuation image display area 75 is set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4. Of the above-mentioned special figure reservation storage area corresponding area corresponding to the special figure execution area AE (see FIG. 8) of the special figure reservation storage area 412b Based on the special figure data stored in the special figure execution area corresponding area (not shown), it is an area for displaying the special figure game image for the special figure game. Then, in the special figure fluctuation image display area 75, when the special figure data is stored in the special figure execution area corresponding area, the special figure game image is displayed, while special figures are displayed in the special figure execution area corresponding area When the figure data is not stored, the special figure game image is not displayed. That is, the special symbol game image is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and is hidden by the stop display of the special symbol. In other words, by displaying the special figure game image, it is clearly indicated that the special figure game is being executed, and by hiding the special figure game image, the end of the special figure game is clearly indicated. .

In the example shown in FIGS. 52 (A1) and 52 (A2), the special figure data is stored in the special figure execution area corresponding area, and the special figure game image (cross A hatched circle portion) is displayed.

The first special figure pending image display area 76 is the above-mentioned special figure pending storage corresponding to the first special figure pending storage area REA (see FIG. 8) of the special figure pending storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main controller 4 An area for displaying a first special figure reserved image for a first special figure game based on special figure data stored in a first special figure reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the area corresponding area. This first special figure reserved image display area 76 is the first special figure 1st to 4th reserved area corresponding area (not shown) of the first special figure reserved storage area corresponding area in the above-mentioned special figure reserved storage area corresponding area Correspondingly, the first special figure first reserved image display area 761, the first special figure second reserved image display area 762, the first special figure third reserved image display area 763, and the first special figure fourth reserved image display Includes area 764 . Then, in the first special figure reserved image display area 76, when the special figure data is stored in any of the first special figure first to fourth reserved area corresponding areas (not shown), the first special figure reserved While the image is displayed, the first special figure reserved image is not displayed when the special figure data is not stored in any of the first special figure first to fourth reserved area corresponding regions (not shown). That is, the first special figure pending image is displayed by the number corresponding to the first special figure pending number N when there is a hold for the first special figure game, and when there is no hold for the first special figure game Do not show. In other words, the first special figure reservation number N for the first special figure game is specified based on the display number of the first special figure reservation images.

In the example shown in FIG. 52 (A1), the first special figure reserved image is displayed in the first special figure first to third reserved image display areas 761 to 763, and the first special figure fourth reserved image display area 764 The first special figure pending image is not displayed. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 52 (A1), the special figure data is in the first special figure 1st to 3rd reservation area corresponding area of the 1st special figure 1st to 4th reservation area corresponding area (not shown) Stored, no special figure data is stored in the first special figure fourth reservation area corresponding area, indicating that the first special figure reservation number N for the first special figure game is three.

The second special figure pending image display area 77 is the above-mentioned special figure pending storage corresponding to the second special figure pending storage area REB (see FIG. 8) of the special figure pending storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 Based on the special figure data stored in the second special figure reservation storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the area corresponding area, it is an area for displaying the second special figure reserved image for the second special figure game. This second special figure reserved image display area 77 is the second special figure first to fourth reserved area corresponding area (not shown) of the second special figure reserved storage area corresponding area in the above-mentioned special figure reserved storage area corresponding area Correspondingly, the second special figure first reserved image display area 771, the second special figure second reserved image display area 772, the second special figure third reserved image display area 773, and the second special figure fourth reserved image display Includes area 774 . Then, in the second special figure reserved image display area 77, when the special figure data is stored in any of the second special figure first to fourth reserved area corresponding areas (not shown), the second special figure reserved While the image is displayed, the second special figure reserved image is not displayed when the special figure data is not stored in any of the second special figure first to fourth reserved area corresponding regions (not shown). That is, the second special figure pending image is displayed by the number corresponding to the second special figure pending number M when there is a hold for the second special figure game, and when there is no hold for the second special figure game Do not show. In other words, the second special figure reservation number M for the second special figure game is specified based on the display number of the second special figure reservation images.

In the example shown in FIG. 52 (A2), the second special figure reserved image is displayed in the second special figure first to second reserved image display areas 771 to 772, the second special figure third to fourth reserved image The second special figure reserved image is not displayed in the display areas 773-774. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 52 (A2), special figure data is in the second special figure first to second reservation area corresponding area of the second special figure first to fourth reservation area corresponding area (not shown) Stored, no special figure data is stored in the second special figure third to fourth reservation area corresponding areas, indicating that the second special figure reservation number M for the second special figure game is two there is

Then, in the special figure data image display process, when the received special figure shift command is for the first special figure, that is, when the first special figure game is started, the special figure execution of the area corresponding to the special figure reservation storage area The special figure game image is displayed in the special figure fluctuation image display area 75 based on the special figure data stored in the area corresponding area (not shown), and the first special figure reservation of the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area The first special figure reserved image is displayed in the first special figure reserved image display area 76 based on the special figure data stored in the storage area corresponding area (not shown). For example, in a state where the first special figure reservation number N for the first special figure shown in FIG. 52 (A1) is 3 and the second special figure reservation number M for the second special figure is 0, the special figure game ends When a new first special figure game is started by doing, as shown in FIG. 52 (B1), the special figure game image is displayed in the special figure fluctuation image display area 75, and the first special figure The first special figure reserved image is displayed in the first special figure first to second reserved image display areas 761 to 762 of the reserved image display area 76 . That is, as shown in FIG. 52 (A1) and FIG. 52 (B1), by starting a new first special figure game, the first special figure reserved image display area before the start of the first special figure game The first special figure reserved image displayed in the first special figure first reserved image display area 761 of 76 is shifted to the special figure fluctuation image display area 75 as the special figure game image, and the first special figure game Each of the first special figure reserved images that were displayed in the first special figure second to third reserved image display areas 762 to 763 of the first special figure reserved image display area 76 before the start is the first special figure reserved image display The first special figure first and second reserved image display areas 761 and 762 of the area 76 are shifted.

On the other hand, in the special figure data image display process, when the received special figure shift command is for the second special figure, that is, when the second special figure game is started, the special figure execution of the area corresponding to the special figure reservation storage area The special figure game image is displayed in the special figure fluctuation image display area 75 based on the special figure data stored in the area corresponding area (not shown), and the second special figure reservation of the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area The second special figure reserved image is displayed in the second special figure reserved image display area 77 based on the special figure data stored in the storage area corresponding area (not shown). For example, in a state where the first special figure reservation number N for the second special figure shown in FIG. 52 (A2) is 1 and the second special figure reservation number M for the second special figure is 2, the special figure game ends When a new second special figure game is started by doing, as shown in FIG. 52 (B2), the special figure game image is displayed in the special figure fluctuation image display area 75, and the second special figure The second special figure reserved image is displayed in the second special figure first reserved image display area 771 of the reserved image display area 77 . That is, as shown in FIG. 52 (A2) and FIG. 52 (B2), by starting a new second special figure game, the second special figure reserved image display area before the start of the second special figure game The second special figure reserved image displayed in the second special figure first reserved image display area 771 of 77 is shifted to the special figure fluctuation image display area 75 as the special figure game image, and the second special figure game The second special figure reserved image that was displayed in the second special figure reserved image display area 772 of the second special figure reserved image display area 77 before the start is the second special figure of the second special figure reserved image display area 77 It is shifted to the first reserved image display area 771 .

In addition, the special figure data images in the special figure data image display units 75, 76, and 77 may be continuously displayed from the start of the special figure game to the end of the special figure game, but during the execution of the special figure game It may be in a non-display state for a part of the period. For example, when super reach production and special reach production are executed in the special game, while the super reach production and special reach production are being executed, the special data image is non-blocked so as not to hinder the visibility of these productions. It may be displayed. In this case, the special figure data image may be redisplayed before or after the end of the super reach effect or the special reach effect, or the non-display state may be continued as it is. Also, when the special figure data image is hidden, while the special figure data image is hidden, the first special figure reservation number N for the first special figure game and the second special figure for the second special figure game It is also conceivable to display an image such as a number clearly indicating the number M of reservations.

The special figure data images in the special figure data image display portions 75, 76, and 77 are, depending on the display mode, the degree of expectation (jackpot expectation degree) may be specified or suggested. For example, as a special figure data image, a plurality of display modes (colors, shapes, patterns, effects, forms such as combinations of two or more of these) are set corresponding to the degree of expectation of a big hit, and a plurality of display modes are set based on the results of the big win lottery. You may make it set the predetermined display mode with respect to a special figure data image from a display mode. Then, when specifying or suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit based on the display mode of the special figure data image, the display mode of the special figure data image is changed until the special figure game for the special figure data image is completed (so-called pending change ). In this case, the change of the display mode of the special figure data image is executed so that the degree of expectation for the big hit becomes equal or higher (promoted), and the degree of expectation for the big hit is lowered (demoted) is not executed. Of course, it is conceivable that when a change (demotion change) of the display mode of the special figure data image that lowers the jackpot expectation is executed, the jackpot expectation is made higher. In addition, the timing of changing the display mode of the special figure data image is not particularly limited, and at the start of the special figure game (the timing at which the special figure data image shifts), after a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of the special figure game ( For example, from the start of the special game to the start of the ready-to-win production, during the execution of the ready-to-win production, before and after the development to the ready-to-win production with a higher degree of expectation for the big hit).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 52, the special figure fluctuation image display area 75, the first special figure reserved image display area 76 and the second special figure reserved image display area 77 as the special figure data image display units 75, 76, 77 Although three types are set, it is also conceivable to change the display contents of the special figure data image display portions 75, 76, and 77 according to the game state. For example, in the normal game state, the second special figure reserved image display area 77 is not displayed, the special figure fluctuation image display area 75 and the first special figure reserved image display area 76 are displayed, and the probability variation game state and time saving game In the state, it is also conceivable to display the special figure fluctuation image display area 75 and the second special figure reservation image display area 77 without displaying the first special figure reservation image display area 76 .

<Step S3110>
Returning to the description of FIG. 47, when the received command is not a special figure shift command (step S3107: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the first special figure pending command (step S3110). The first special figure reservation command includes information indicating that the first special figure reservation number N for the first special figure game increases, information about the first special figure reservation number N after the increase, and the increasing first reservation Information on special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation display time) and the result of the big hit lottery is included.

MPU51, if the received command is the first special figure pending command (step S3110: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3111, if the received command is not the first special figure pending command (step S3110: No), The process proceeds to step S3113.

<Steps S3111 and S3112>
If the received command is the first special figure pending command (step S3110: Yes), MPU51 executes the first special figure pending information update process (step S3111) and the first special figure pending image display process (step S3112) and terminates the command determination process.

Here, the first special figure reservation information update process executed in step S3111 is data ( Toku-zu data) is a process to add (update). Specifically, in the first special figure reservation information update process, the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 ( 8), the special figure data corresponding to the special figure validity information stored in the first empty reservation area corresponds to the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 in which the special figure validity information is stored It is stored in the 1st special figure 1st to 4th reserved area corresponding area (not shown) set by. For example, when the special figure propriety information is stored in the second reserved area REA2 (see FIG. 8) of the first special figure reserved storage area REA in the special figure reserved storage area 412b, corresponding to the second reserved area REA2 Special figure data is stored in the first special figure second reservation area corresponding area (not shown) that is set. Also, in the first special figure reservation information update process, 1 is added to the first special figure reservation number N stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area .

On the other hand, the first special figure reserved image display process executed in step S3112 is based on the special figure data added (updated) to the first special figure reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) in step S3112. A process of adding the first special figure reserved image to the special figure reserved image display area 76 is executed.

Here, FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of a special figure data image displayed on the symbol display section 341 before and after receiving the first special figure reservation command or the second special figure reservation command. Specifically, FIG. 53 (A) is a diagram showing an example of the special figure data image before receiving the first special figure pending command or the second special figure pending command, FIG. 53 (B) is FIG. A) is an example of the special figure data image after receiving the first special figure hold command for the first special figure game in the display state of the special figure data image shown in FIG.

FIG. 53(A) shows a state in which the special figure fluctuation image is displayed, and one first special figure reservation image and two second special figure reservation images are displayed. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 53 (A), the special symbol game is being executed, the first special symbol reservation number N for the first special symbol game is 1, and the second special symbol reservation for the second special symbol game It shows that the number M is two.

And, in the first special figure pending image display process executed when the first special figure pending command is received in the display state of the special figure data shown in FIG. If it becomes two, based on the special figure data stored in the first special figure second reservation area corresponding area (not shown) of the first special figure reservation storage area corresponding area in the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area , As shown in FIG. 53(B), the first special figure reserved image is displayed in the first special figure second reserved image display area 762 of the first special figure reserved image display area 76 .

<Step S3113>
When the received command is not the first special figure pending command (step S3110: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the second special figure pending command (step S3113). The second special figure reservation command is information indicating that the second special figure reservation number M for the second special game game increases, information about the second special figure reservation number M after the increase, and the increasing second reservation Information on special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation display time) and the result of the big hit lottery is included.

MPU51, if the received command is the second special figure pending command (step S3113: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3114, if the received command is not the second special figure pending command (step S3113: No), The process proceeds to step S3116.

<Steps S3114 and S3115>
If the received command is the second special figure pending command (step S3113: Yes), MPU51 executes the second special figure pending information update process (step S3114) and the second special figure pending image display process (step S3115) and terminates the command determination process.

Here, the second special figure reservation information update process executed in step S3114 is data ( Toku-zu data) is a process to add (update). Specifically, in the second special figure reservation information update process, the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 ( 8), the special figure data corresponding to the special figure validity information stored in the first empty reservation area corresponds to the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 in which the special figure validity information is stored It is stored in the 2nd special figure 1st to 4th reservation area corresponding area (not shown) set by. For example, when the special figure propriety information is stored in the third reserved area REB3 (see FIG. 8) of the second special figure reserved storage area REB in the special figure reserved storage area 412b, corresponding to the third reserved area REB3 Special figure data is stored in the first special figure third reserved area corresponding area (not shown) that is set. Also, in the second special figure reservation information update process, 1 is added to the second special figure reservation number M stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area .

On the other hand, the second special figure reserved image display processing executed in step S3115 is based on the special figure data added (updated) to the second special figure reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) in step S3114. A process of adding a second special figure reserved image to the special figure reserved image display area 77 is executed.

Here, FIG. 53(C) is an example of the special figure data image after receiving the second special figure reserve command for the second special figure game in the display state of the special figure data image shown in FIG. 53(A).

In the second special figure pending image display process executed when the second special figure pending command is received in the display state of the special figure data shown in FIG. If there are three, based on the special figure data stored in the second special figure third reservation area corresponding area (not shown) of the second special figure reservation storage area corresponding area in the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area As shown in 53 (C), the second special figure reserved image is displayed in the second special figure third reserved image display area 773 of the second special figure reserved image display area 77 .

<Step S3116>
When the received command is not the second special figure pending command (step S3113: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is the jackpot game start command (step S3116). The jackpot game start command is a command indicating to start the jackpot game, and is set when the jackpot game is started in step S2204 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. .

If the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S3116: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3117, and if the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S3116: No), the process goes to step S3119. transition to

<Steps S3117 and S3118>
When the jackpot game start command is received (step S3116: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the jackpot game effect setting process (step S3117), sets the jackpot game flag to ON (step S3118), and executes the command determination process. exit.

In the jackpot game effect setting process, the process of setting the jackpot effect including the opening effect, opening/closing execution mode effect (round game effect and interval effect), and ending effect executed in the jackpot game is executed.

In addition, the flag during the jackpot game is a flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed, and in step S3201 in the jackpot game effect control processing of FIG. It is referred to determine whether or not to control the progress of the jackpot game effect.

<Step S3119>
When the received command is not the jackpot game start command (step S3116: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the opening start command (step S3119). The opening start command is a command indicating to start the opening of the jackpot game, and is set when starting the opening in step S2208 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 .

If the received command is the opening start command (step S3119: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3120, and if the received command is not the opening start command (step S3119: No), shifts the process to step S3121. do.

<Step S3120>
When the opening start command is received (step S3119: Yes), the MPU 52 sets the opening effect start flag to ON (step S3120), and terminates the command determination process. The opening effect start flag is a flag for starting the opening effect of the jackpot game, and is referred to in order to determine whether or not to start the opening effect in step S3202 in the jackpot game effect control process of FIG. 54 described later. .

<Step S3121>
If the received command is not the opening start command (step S3119: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the opening end command (step S3121). The opening end command is a command indicating to end the opening of the jackpot game, and is set when the opening is ended in step S2214 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 30 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 .

When the received command is the opening end command (step S3121: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3122, and when the received command is not the opening end command (step S3121: No), the process proceeds to the step of FIG. The process proceeds to S3123.

<Step S3122>
When the opening end command is received (step S3121: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the opening effect end flag to ON (step S3122), and ends the command determination process. The opening effect end flag is a flag for ending the opening effect of the jackpot game, and is referred to in order to determine whether or not to end the opening effect in step S3205 in the jackpot game effect control process of FIG. 54 described later. .

<Step S3123>
When the received command is not the opening end command (step S3121: No), as shown in FIG. 48, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the round game start command (step S3123). The round game start command is a command indicating the start of the round game in the opening/closing execution mode and indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be executed this time, and the jackpot game of FIG. It is set when starting the round game of opening and closing execution mode in step S2217 in control processing.

If the received command is the round game start command (step S3123: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3124, and if the received command is not the round game start command (step S3123: No), the process goes to step S3126. transition to

<Steps S3124 and S3125>
When the round game start command is received (step S3123: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect start flag to ON (step S3124), and stores the round number information indicating what round the round game is in the RAM 512. (step S3125), and the command determination process ends. The round game effect start flag is referenced in order to determine whether or not to start each round game effect of the open/close execution mode effect in step S3208 of the jackpot game effect control process in FIG. 54 described later.

<Step S3126>
When the received command is not the round game start command (step S3123: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the round game end command (step S3126). The round game end command is a command indicating to end the round game in the opening/closing execution mode, and when the round game is ended in step S2229 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. is set to

If the received command is the round game end command (step S3126: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3127, and if the received command is not the round game end command (step S3126: No), the process goes to step S3128. transition to

<Step S3127>
When the round game end command is received (step S3126: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect end flag to ON (step S3127), and ends the command determination process. The round game end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to end the round game effect in step S3211 in the jackpot game effect control process of FIG. 54 described later.

<Step S3128>
When the received command is not the round game end command (step S3126: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the interval start command (step S3128). The interval start command is a command indicating to start the interval between round games in the opening/closing execution mode, and the interval is started in step S2233 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. set if

Here, if the received command is the interval start command (step S3128: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3129; Move to S3130.

<Step S3129>
When the received command is the interval start command (step S3128: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the interval effect start flag to ON (step S3129), and terminates the command determination process. The interval production start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start the interval production in step S3214 in the jackpot game production control process of FIG. 54 described later.

<Step S3130>
If the received command is not the interval start command (step S3128: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the interval end command (step S3130). The interval end command is a command indicating to end the interval between round games in the opening/closing execution mode, and ends the interval in step S2239 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. set if

Here, if the received command is the interval end command (step S3130: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3131, and if the received command is not the interval end command (step S3130: No), the process proceeds to step S3131. The process proceeds to S3132.

<Step S3131>
When the received command is the interval end command (step S3130: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the interval effect end flag to ON (step S3131), and ends the command determination process. The interval production end flag is referred to when it is determined whether or not the interval production is ended in step S3217 in the jackpot game production control process of FIG. 54 which will be described later.

<Step S3132>
If the received command is not the interval end command (step S3130: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the ending start command (step S3132). The ending start command is a command indicating to start the ending in the jackpot game, and is set when starting the ending in step S2242 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. .

Here, if the received command is the ending start command (step S3132: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3133, and if the received command is not the ending start command (step S3132: No), the process proceeds to step S3133. The process proceeds to S3134.

<Step S3133>
When the received command is the ending start command (step S3132: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending effect start flag to ON (step S3133), and terminates the command determination process. The ending effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start the ending effect in step S3220 of the jackpot game effect control process in FIG. 54 which will be described later.

<Step S3134>
If the received command is not the ending start command (step S3132: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the ending end command (step S3134). The ending end command is a command indicating that the ending of the jackpot game ends, and is set when the ending is ended in step S2248 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 32 executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 .

Here, if the received command is the ending end command (step S3134: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3135, and if the received command is not the ending end command (step S3134: No), the process proceeds to step S3135. The process proceeds to S3136.

<Step S3135>
When the received command is the ending ending command (step S3134: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending effect end flag to ON (step S3135), and ends the command determination process. The ending effect end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to end the ending effect in step S3223 of the jackpot game effect control process in FIG. 54 which will be described later.

<Step S3136>
When the received command is not the ending end command (step S3134: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the jackpot game end command (step S3136). The jackpot game end command is a command indicating to end the jackpot game, and is set when the jackpot game is finished in step S2250 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 .

Here, if the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S3136: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3137, and if the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S3136: No), the process to step S3139.

<Step S3137>
When the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S3136: Yes), the MPU 51 sets off the jackpot game flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed (step S3137), and executes the command determination process. finish.

<Step S3138>
If the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S3136: No), the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands received from the main control device 4 (step S3138), and terminates the command determination processing.

[Jackpot game production control process]
Next, an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect control process executed in step S2705 of the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 42 will be described. In the jackpot game effect control process, based on the jackpot game effect set in the jackpot game effect setting process of step S3117 in the command determination process of FIG. be done. Here, FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect control process. Hereinafter, the jackpot game effect control processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S3201>
As shown in FIG. 54, in the jackpot game effect control process, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the jackpot game flag is set to ON (step S3201). The jackpot playing flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed, and is set to ON when the jackpot game start command is received in step S3118 in the command determination process of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game is being executed.

When the jackpot playing flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3202. On the other hand, the MPU 51 ends the jackpot game effect control process when the jackpot game flag is set to OFF (step S3201: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed.

<Step S3202>
When the jackpot playing flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 51 determines whether the opening effect start flag is set to ON (step S3202) punning production start flag is a flag for starting the opening production of the jackpot game, in step S3120 in the command determination process of FIG. 47, is set to ON when the opening start command is received. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the opening effect.

When the opening effect start flag is set to ON (step S3202: Yes), that is, when it is time to start the opening effect, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3203. On the other hand, when the opening effect start flag is set to OFF (step S3202: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the opening effect, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3205.

<Steps S3203 and S3204>
When the opening effect start flag is set to ON (step S3202: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to start the opening effect, the MPU 51 performs the jackpot game effect setting process of step S3117 in the command determination process of FIG. A process for starting the set opening effect is executed (step S3203). And MPU51 sets an opening production|presentation start flag to OFF (step S3204), and complete|finishes the said jackpot game production|presentation control processing.

<Step S3205>
If the opening effect start flag is set to off (step S3202: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start the opening effect, the MPU 51 determines whether the opening effect end flag is set to on (step S3205) punning effect end flag is a flag to end the opening effect of the jackpot game, in step S3122 in the command determination process of FIG. 47, is set to ON when the opening end command is received. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to end the opening effect.

When the opening effect end flag is set to ON (step S3205: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the opening effect, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3206. On the other hand, when the opening effect end flag is set to OFF (step S3205: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the opening effect, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3208.

<Steps S3206 and S3207>
When the opening effect end flag is set to ON (step S3205: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the opening effect, the MPU 51 executes processing for ending the opening effect (step S3206). Then, the MPU 51 sets the opening effect end flag to OFF (step S3207), and ends the jackpot game effect control process.

<Step S3208>
If the opening effect end flag is set to OFF (step S3205: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the opening effect, the MPU 51 determines whether the round game effect start flag is set to ON ( step S3208). The round game effect start flag is a flag for starting the round game effect of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when the round game start command is received in step S3124 in the command determination process of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the round game effect.

When the round game effect start flag is set to ON (step S3208: Yes), that is, when it is time to start the round game effect, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3209. On the other hand, when the round game effect start flag is set to OFF (step S3208: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the round game effect, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3211.

<Steps S3209 and S3210>
When the round game effect start flag is set to ON (step S3208: Yes), that is, when it is time to start the round game effect, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect in step S3117 in the command determination process of FIG. A process for starting the round game effect of the jackpot game effect set in the process is executed (step S3209). And MPU51 sets a round game production|presentation start flag to OFF (step S3210), and complete|finishes the said jackpot game production|presentation control processing.

<Step S3211>
When the round game effect start flag is set to OFF (step S3208: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the round game effect, the MPU 51 determines whether the round game effect end flag is set to ON. (step S3211). The round game effect end flag is a flag for ending the round game effect of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when the round game end command is received in step S3127 in the command determination process of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to end the round game effect.

When the round game effect end flag is set to ON (step S3211: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the round game effect, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3212. On the other hand, when the round game effect end flag is set to OFF (step S3211: No), that is, when it is not the time to end the round game effect, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3214.

<Steps S3212 and S3213>
When the round game effect end flag is set to ON (step S3211: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the round game effect, the MPU 51 executes processing for ending the round game effect (step S3212). Then, the MPU 51 sets the round game effect end flag to OFF (step S3213), and ends the big hit game effect control process.

<Step S3214>
When the round game effect end flag is set to OFF (step S3211: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the round game effect, the MPU 51 determines whether the interval effect start flag is set to ON. (Step S3214). The interval production start flag is a flag for starting the interval production of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when an interval start command is received in step S3129 in the command determination processing of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the round game effect.

When the interval effect start flag is set to ON (step S3214: Yes), that is, when it is time to start the interval effect, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3215. On the other hand, when the interval production start flag is set to OFF (step S3214: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the interval production, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3217.

<Steps S3215 and S3216>
If the interval production start flag is set to ON (step S3214: Yes), that is, if it is time to start the interval production, the MPU 51 determines that in the jackpot game production setting process of step S3117 in the command determination process of FIG. A process for starting the interval production of the set jackpot game production is executed (step S3215). And MPU51 sets an interval production|presentation start flag to OFF (step S3216), and complete|finishes the said jackpot game production|presentation control processing.

<Step S3217>
If the interval production start flag is set to OFF (step S3214: No), that is, if it is not the time to start the interval production, the MPU 51 determines whether the interval production end flag is set to ON (step S3217). The interval effect end flag is a flag for ending the interval effect of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when an interval end command is received in step S3131 in the command determination process of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to end the interval effect.

When the interval effect end flag is set to ON (step S3217: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the interval effect, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3218. On the other hand, when the interval production end flag is set to OFF (step S3217: No), that is, when it is not the time to end the interval production, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3220.

<Steps S3218 and S3219>
When the interval production end flag is set to ON (step S3217: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the interval production, the MPU 51 executes processing for ending the interval production (step S3218). Then, the MPU 51 sets the interval effect end flag to OFF (step S3219), and ends the big hit game effect control process.

<Step S3220>
If the interval production end flag is set to OFF (step S3217: No), that is, if it is not the time to end the interval production, the MPU 51 determines whether the ending production start flag is set to ON (step S3220). The ending effect start flag is a flag for starting the ending effect of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when an ending start command is received in step S3133 in the command determination process of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the ending effect.

When the ending effect start flag is set to ON (step S3220: Yes), that is, when it is time to start the ending effect, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3221. On the other hand, when the ending effect start flag is set to OFF (step S3220: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the ending effect, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3223.

<Steps S3221 and S3222>
When the ending effect start flag is set to ON (step S3220: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to start the ending effect, the MPU 51 performs the jackpot game effect setting process of step S3117 in the command determination process of FIG. A process for starting the ending effect of the set jackpot game effect is executed (step S3221). Then, the MPU 51 sets the ending effect start flag to OFF (step S3222), and ends the jackpot game effect control process.

<Step S3223>
If the ending effect start flag is set to OFF (step S3220: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start the ending effect, the MPU 51 determines whether the ending effect end flag is set to ON (step S3223). The ending effect end flag is a flag for ending the ending effect of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when an ending end command is received in step S3135 in the command determination process of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to end the ending effect.

When the ending effect end flag is set to ON (step S3223: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the ending effect, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3224. On the other hand, when the ending effect end flag is set to OFF (step S3223: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the ending effect, the MPU 51 ends the big hit game effect control process.

<Steps S3224 and S3225>
When the ending effect end flag is set to ON (step S3223: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the ending effect, the MPU 51 executes processing for ending the ending effect (step S3224). Then, the MPU 51 sets the ending effect end flag to OFF (step S3225), and ends the jackpot game effect control process.

[Other embodiments]
Another embodiment of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described below. Further, in the following other embodiments, the description of the same configuration as the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment and the same steps as the processing procedure will be omitted. It should be noted that it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function of the first embodiment described above and other embodiments described below.

[Second embodiment]
As described above, some gaming machines reserve the right to execute a game with a first special figure (first special figure game) triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole. In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined hold (for example, a hold where the jackpot lottery result is a big win or a hold where the variation display time is long) occurs, the jackpot lottery result for the predetermined hold is a big win. The same, the same type, or the same type of production (holding continuous production) that expresses or suggests the degree of expectation (expectation for big hit) is the predetermined number of the first special game for the predetermined number of holds at the time of occurrence of the predetermined hold are executed continuously.

In addition, as described above, the game machine is equipped with a second prize winning opening into which a game ball can enter by opening an electric accessory such as an electric tulip, and the game ball enters the second prize winning opening. A game (second special game) triggered by the second special game may be executed with priority over the first special game for entering the game ball into the first winning hole. Here, the second special symbol game is executed with priority over the first special symbol game because the second special symbol game has a greater profit for the player than the first special symbol game (for example, the variable probability is On the other hand, in the first special game, a disadvantage (eg, falling to the normal game state) that is not in the second special game may occur. be.

In such a gaming machine, when the jackpot pattern stops in the second special game or when reach occurs, a privilege (for example, the execution of the probability variable jackpot game after the second special game is finished) is given. There is one in which an explicit or suggested production (second special special production) is executed.

However, in a gaming machine in which the second special symbol game is executed with priority over the first special symbol game and the second special symbol special effect is executed in the second special symbol game, as shown in FIG. When it is scheduled that the pending continuous effect is continuously executed in a plurality of first special figure games (special 1 relevant variation + special 1 suspension 1 + special 1 suspension 2), as shown in FIG. 55 (B) In addition, when a game ball enters the second winning hole during execution of the special 1 variation, the variation in which the pending continuous effect is being executed as shown in FIG. ), the second special symbol game is executed, and the second special symbol special effect is executed in the second special symbol game, so that the pending continuous effect is interrupted in the middle.

Then, as shown in FIG. 55(D), when the first special game is executed after the end of the second special game, it is assumed that the reserved continuous effect for the first special game that has been scheduled is not performed. (Pattern 1), when the player remembers that the pending continuous effect was executed before the execution of the second special effect, the player feels uncomfortable that the pending continuous effect is not executed, and the game is stopped. There is concern that interest will decline. In particular, when the number of executions of the second special pattern game (second special pattern special effect) is small, the player remembers that the pending continuous effect was executed before the execution of the second special pattern special effect. Since there is a high possibility that the second special symbol game (second special symbol special effect) is finished, there is a high possibility that the user will feel uncomfortable with the fact that the pending continuous effect is not executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 55 (E), when the first special game is executed after the end of the second special game, when the pending continuous effect is resumed (pattern 2), the second special special effect If the player forgets that the pending continuous performance has been executed before execution, the player feels uncomfortable with the performance of the pending continuous performance, and there is concern that the interest in the game will be reduced. In particular, when the number of executions of the second special pattern game (second special pattern special effect) is large, the time until the suspended continuous effect is resumed becomes long, so the second special pattern special effect is suspended before the execution. There is a high possibility that the player forgets that the continuous performance has been executed, and the suspended continuous performance is restarted after the second special pattern game (second special pattern special performance) is finished. People are more likely to feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as the opening mode of the second winning hole by the electric accessory, the first opening (short opening in which the game ball is difficult to enter the second winning hole) which is the first time ), and a second opening (a long opening that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second winning opening), which is a second time that is longer than the first time when the second winning opening is opened by the electric accessory. ing.

Then, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the pending continuous performance is being executed in the first special symbol game as the variation, the pending continuous performance is continued to the next first special symbol game that is suspended. is scheduled to be executed (for example, special 1 relevant change + special 1 reservation 1 + special 1 reservation 2 (see FIG. 55 (A))), the short opening of the second winning opening to the second winning opening When the game ball enters, as shown in FIG. 56 (A), in the second special game executed after the end of the first special game as the variation, the suspension that has been executed in the first special game A continuous production is continuously executed. That is, in the present embodiment, when the pending continuous effect is being executed in the first special symbol game as the variation, the pending continuous effect is executed continuously to the next first special symbol game that is being suspended. If it is planned, even if the game ball enters the second winning opening due to the short opening of the second winning opening, the second winning opening when the second winning opening is short opening In the second special figure game by the entry of the game ball into the second special figure, the second special figure special presentation is not performed, and the pending continuous presentation is continuously performed. Therefore, when the player is executing the suspended continuous performance in the first special game as the variation, the suspended continuous performance is executed continuously in the next first special game that is suspended. is scheduled, the pending continuous effect is not executed after the second special game executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole when the second winning hole is briefly opened. I never feel uncomfortable with it. As a result, the decline in interest in the game due to the non-execution of the pending continuous effect in the first special symbol game executed after the second special symbol game is prevented.

In particular, when the second winning opening is short-opened, it is difficult for game balls to enter the second winning opening (the number of balls entering the second winning opening is small) compared to when the second winning opening is long-opened, and before the execution of the second special game. Since there is a high possibility that the player remembers that the pending continuous effect was executed, the second special due to the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole when the second winning hole is short open The effect of continuously executing the pending continuous production without executing the second special figure special production in the figure game is high.

In addition, it is assumed that the number of game balls entering the second winning port is small in the short opening where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning port, so when the second winning port is short open Even if the pending continuous effect is continuously executed in the second special game by the game ball entering the second winning hole, the number of continuous executions of the pending continuous effect does not increase greatly, so the second special It is less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable with the continued execution of the pending continuous performance in the figure game. On the contrary, by continuously executing the pending continuous effect in the second special game, it is possible to effectively utilize the pending continuous effect in the second special game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the second special symbol special effect is not executed in the second special symbol game due to the entry of the game ball into the second winning port when the second winning port is short open. is continuously executed, the holding continuous production is resumed in the first special game executed after the end of the second special game, but it is not necessary to restart the holding continuous production in the first special game. .

By the way, the pending continuous effect may be executed as an effect that clearly indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. For example, when a predetermined holding continuous effect is continuously executed for a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times) of the special game, it is clearly indicated that the jackpot lottery result for the predetermined number of times of the special game is a big win. There is On the other hand, when the second winning hole is short-open, in the second special symbol game due to the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole, the second special symbol special performance is not executed, and the suspended continuous performance is continuously executed. If it is done, there is a possibility that the pending continuous effect will be executed in a special figure game of a predetermined number of times or more. Therefore, in the second special symbol game by the game ball entering the second winning port when the second winning port is short open, the second special symbol special performance is not executed and the pending continuous performance is continuously executed. In the case where the suspension continuous effect corresponds to a predetermined suspension continuous effect, the predetermined suspension continuous effect is executed more than a predetermined number of times. That is, when a predetermined pending continuous effect is scheduled to be continuously executed in a plurality of first special game, and a predetermined pending continuous effect is continuously executed in the second special game, There is a possibility that a contradiction may occur between the result of the big win lottery (that it is a big win) indicated by the predetermined pending continuous performance and the actual result of the big win lottery.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, there is a situation in which a contradiction occurs between the result of the jackpot lottery indicated by the predetermined pending continuous effect (that it is a jackpot) and the actual result of the jackpot lottery. , A process is executed in which the number of consecutive special game games in which a predetermined pending continuous effect is executed does not reach a predetermined number of times. For example, in the special game before the number of consecutive times of the special game in which the predetermined pending continuous effect is executed reaches the predetermined number, or in the special game that has reached the predetermined number, the predetermined pending continuous effect is not executed, It is executed after being changed to a holding continuous performance other than a predetermined holding continuous performance.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery indicated by the predetermined pending continuous effect (that it is a jackpot) and the actual jackpot lottery result are inconsistent, By changing the type of the reserved continuous performance so that the number of consecutive times of the special game in which the predetermined reserved continuous performance is executed does not reach the predetermined number of times, the jackpot lottery indicated by the predetermined suspended continuous performance is performed. To prevent a contradiction between the result (that it is a big win) and the actual result of the big win lottery.

Also, in this embodiment, when it is scheduled that the pending continuous effect is executed continuously in a plurality of first special game games (for example, special 1 relevant fluctuation + special 1 hold 1 + special 1 hold 2 (Fig. 55 (A) reference)), when the game ball enters the second winning opening due to the length opening of the second winning opening, as shown in FIG. In the second special game executed after the end, the second special special performance is performed, but when the second special special performance is performed, the pending continuous performance is performed before the second special special performance is performed. stated or implied. For example, in the image display means for displaying the second special figure special effect as an image, the type of pending continuous effect executed before the execution of the second special figure special effect is displayed as a captured image or the like. Of course, when the second special figure special effect is executed, the explicit or suggested that the pending continuous effect has been executed before the execution of the second special figure special effect is the display of the captured image of the pending continuous effect on the image display means However, other methods may be used as described later.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the second special figure special effect is executed, it is specified or suggested that the pending continuous effect has been executed before the second special figure special effect is executed. To prevent a player from forgetting that a pending continuous performance has been executed before execution of a special symbol special performance, and to prevent a player from resuming the pending continuous performance after the end of a second special symbol special performance. can be grasped. Therefore, even if the pending continuous performance is resumed after the end of the second special performance, it is uncomfortable to execute the continuous pending performance after the end of the second special performance. is significantly reduced. As a result, after the second special figure special performance is finished, it is possible to prevent the decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the pending continuous performance executed before the execution of the second special figure special performance.

In particular, when the second winning opening is long opened in the long open normal game, compared to the case where the second winning opening is opened short in the short open normal game, the player can open the second winning opening. For a long time, I am absorbed in whether or not a game ball will be entered. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the player will forget that the pending continuous effect has been executed before the execution of the second special symbol game. Also, when the second winning opening is long opened in the long open normal game, compared to the case where the second winning opening is short opened in the short open normal game, the game ball is placed in the second winning opening. However, the number of second special symbol games in which the second special symbol effect is executed is large (the execution time of the second special symbol special effect is long). Therefore, the time from the end of the pending continuous effect before the execution of the 2nd special special effect (start of the 2nd special special effect) to the restart of the pending continuous effect due to the end of the 2nd special special effect In addition to being longer, compared to the case where the first special game is executed, the result of the jackpot lottery of the second special game in which the second special game is executed is a big win. Highly focused. Thus, when the second winning opening 315 is long opened in the long open normal game per game, compared to the case where the second winning opening 315 is opened short in the short open normal game per game, the second special Since there is a higher possibility that the player will forget that the pending continuous effect was executed before the execution of the figure game, during the execution of the second special symbol special effect The effect of specifying or suggesting that the pending continuous effect was executed in the first special symbol game is high.

Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 81, focusing on differences from the first embodiment.

[System Configuration of Gaming Machine 10]
Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment will be described, focusing on differences from the first embodiment described above.

[Sort table]
The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above is configured as a so-called loop variable machine, but the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as an ST machine. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the distribution table used by the main controller 4 to distribute the types of jackpots when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is different. Here, FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of a distribution table used in the main controller 4 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment.

In the example shown in FIG. 57, when the type of the special game is the first special game triggered by winning the first winning opening 314, the number of random numbers to be the 5R probability variable jackpot is 10 of 0 to 9. There are five random numbers of 10 to 14 for 16R probability variable jackpots, and five random numbers for 5R normal jackpots of 15 to 19. On the other hand, if the type of the special game is the second special game triggered by winning the second winning port 315, the number of random numbers to be the 5R probability variable jackpot is 10 from 0 to 9, and the 16R probability variable jackpot The number of random numbers that will be 10 to 19 is 10, and there is no random number that will be a 5R normal jackpot. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of the probability variable jackpot in the first special symbol game is 75%, whereas the probability of the probability variable jackpot in the second special symbol game is 100%. Therefore, in the second special game for the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 when the second winning opening 315 is long opened due to the long open normal hit, when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot is a 100% probability variable jackpot. In other words, when the jackpot is notified during the hold charge release (see FIGS. 61 (B) and 61 (C)) in which the hold for the second special game for the long open normal figure hit is released, the probability variable jackpot becomes.

Then, in both the first special game and the second special game, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a probability variable jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the probability variable game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode). Transition. In this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, the upper limit (100 times in the present embodiment) is set to the number of special figure games that can be executed in the probability variation gaming state (ST number), and this When the result of the jackpot lottery does not result in a big win within the number of times of special figure games of the upper limit value, the state is shifted to the normal game state after the special figure game of the upper limit value is executed. In addition, the number of special-figure games in the variable probability gaming state is not limited to 100 times, and may be another number of times.

Further, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game is shifted to a time-saving game state (low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode). In the present embodiment, the upper limit (100 times in this embodiment) is set to the number of special figure games that can be executed in the time saving game state (time saving number of times), and the jackpot lottery within the number of special figure games of this upper limit If the result of (1) does not result in a big hit, the state is shifted to the normal game state after execution of the special game of the upper limit value. In addition, the special figure game frequency in the time saving game state is not limited to 100 times, and may be other times.

It should be noted that the transition from the probability variable gaming state to the normal gaming state is not limited to when the special figure game of the upper limit value is executed, for example, it may be executed when the state transition lottery (fall lottery) is won. .

[Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device 5]
In this embodiment, the audio lamp control device 5 executes sub timer interrupt processing and the like in the same manner as in the above-described first embodiment. Some steps are different. In the following, with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60, the command determination processing of this embodiment will be described, focusing on differences from the command determination processing of the first embodiment.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process of the present embodiment, a process of controlling an effect to be executed in the symbol display section 341 or the like is executed according to the type of the received command.

Here, FIGS. 58 to 60 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing according to this embodiment.

<Step S3301>
As shown in FIG. 58, in the command determination process, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not a command has been received (step S3301). If the MPU 51 has received a command (step S3301: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3302, and if it has not received a command (step S3301: No), the command determination process ends.

<Step S3302>
When the command is received (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is the general pattern variation pattern command (step S3302). MPU51, when the normal figure fluctuation pattern command is received (step S3302: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3303, and when the received command is not the normal figure fluctuation pattern command (step S3302: No), the process proceeds to step S3307 Transition.

In addition, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command is the normal pattern fluctuation display time in the normal pattern display unit 361, the lottery result in the normal pattern per lottery, and the type of support mode (high frequency support mode, low frequency support mode). include.

<Step S3303>
When the normal figure fluctuation pattern command is received (step S3302: Yes), MPU51 is based on the information on the type of support mode included in the received normal figure fluctuation pattern command (different from high frequency support mode and low frequency support mode) to determine whether or not it is the high frequency support mode (step S3303).

If the MPU 51 is in the high frequency support mode (step S3303: Yes), the command determination process ends. If the MPU 51 is in the high-frequency support mode (step S3303: Yes), the MPU 51 may turn on the high-frequency support mode flag indicating the high-frequency support mode, and then terminate the command determination process. good.

On the other hand, if the MPU 41 is not in the high-frequency support mode (step S3303: No), that is, if it is in the low-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S3304. If the low-frequency support mode is set (step S3303: No) and the high-frequency support mode flag is set to ON, the MPU 51 sets the high-frequency support mode flag to OFF before executing the command. The determination process may end.

<Step S3304>
If it is not in the high frequency support mode (step S3303: No), that is, if it is in the low frequency support mode, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot playing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is set to ON. (step S3304). The jackpot playing flag is set to ON in step S2206 when the jackpot game is started in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, and is set to OFF in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends.

The MPU 51 ends the command determination process when the jackpot playing flag is set to ON (step S3304: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed. On the other hand, the MPU 51, when the jackpot playing flag is set to OFF (step S3304: No), moves the process of not executing the jackpot game to step S3305.

<Step S3305>
If the jackpot playing flag is set to off (step S3304: No), the MPU51 is based on the information on the result of the general pattern per lottery included in the received general pattern variation pattern command, the general pattern to be started this time. It is determined whether or not the result of the lottery per normal pattern for the game is a long open per (step S3305).

MPU51, when the result of the lottery per normal pattern for the normal pattern game to be started this time is per long open (step S3305: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3306. On the other hand, MPU51, if the result of the lottery per normal pattern for the normal pattern game to be started this time is not a long open per (step S3305: No), that is, if the result of the lottery per normal pattern is a short open per or off, the End the command determination process.

<Step S3306>
If the result of the lottery per normal pattern for the normal pattern game to be started this time is a long open per (step S3305: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the long open flag to ON (S3306), and ends the command determination process. . That is, the long open flag is not even in the jackpot game, the high frequency support mode (probability variation game state, time reduction game state) is not normal game state (low frequency support mode) for the normal game, the result of the lottery for the normal game is electric It is a flag indicating that it is a long open hit in which a long open normal figure game that allows the entry of the game ball 99 to the second winning hole 315 is executed by the long open of the accessory 315b. This long open flag is referred to when determining whether or not the open mode of the second winning opening 315 in the game per normal game in the normal game state is long open in step S3308 described later.

<Step S3307>
When the received command is not the normal pattern variation pattern command (step S3302: No), the MPU 51 accepts the received command as the game ball 99 entering the second winning hole 315 by opening the electric accessory 315b. It is determined whether or not it is an electric accessary product release command indicating that (the game is started per normal figure) (step S3307).

MPU51, if the received command is the normal figure fluctuation pattern command (step S3307: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3308, if the received command is not the normal figure fluctuation pattern command (step S3307: No), the process The process moves to step S3312 in FIG.

<Step S3308>
If the received command is a general pattern variation pattern command (step S3307: Yes), MPU51 is whether the long open flag indicating that the lottery result in the general pattern per lottery is per long open is set to ON (step S3308).

MPU51, when the long open flag is set to ON (step S3308: Yes), that is, when the lottery result in the lottery per normal pattern is per long open, the process proceeds to step S3309. On the other hand, MPU51, when the long open flag is set to off (step S3308: No), that is, when the lottery result in the lottery per normal pattern is per short open, the command determination process ends.

<Steps S3309 and S3310>
When the long open flag is set to ON (step S3308: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the long open flag to OFF (step S3309), and executes processing for starting the effect during opening of the electric character length. (Step S3310), the process proceeds to step S3311.

The effect of opening the length of the electric accessory is an effect that indicates to the player in the symbol display section 341 or the like that the electric accessory 315b is long open. Here, FIG. 61(A) is a diagram showing an example of the screen in the symbol display section 341 during execution of the electric role length opening effect. In the example of FIG. 61(A), during the execution of the electric role length opening effect, the character image of "holding charge chance" indicating that the second prize winning opening 315 is long open in the symbol display section 341 , and a text image of "Put the ball in the tulip below" prompting the player to launch the game ball 99 toward the second winning hole 315 are displayed. Of course, the effect during opening of the electric accessory length is not limited to the example of FIG. For example, the effect during the opening of the electric character object length may be a display of another image such as a character image instead of or in addition to the character image, and instead of or in addition to the effect in the pattern display section 341 , the speaker 26 may perform voice production.

It should be noted that the electric role length open production start process is executed when the long open flag is set to ON, but as described above, the long open flag is a jackpot game state, a probability variable game state and a short time It is not set to ON in the game state (high-frequency support mode). That is, the effect during the opening of the electric accessory length is executed when the second winning opening 315 is long opened in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency When the second winning opening 315 is opened for a short time in the support mode), it is not executed in the jackpot game state, the probability variable game state or the time reduction game state which are the high frequency support mode. Of course, the effect during the opening of the electric role length is executed in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) when the second winning port 315 is briefly opened, as well as in the probability variable game state and the time reduction game state. good too.

<Step S3311>
Returning to the description of FIG. 58, in step S3311, the MPU 51 sets the electric role product length open flag indicating that the electric role product 315b is long open to ON, and ends the command determination process. It should be noted that, when the game ball 99 enters the second winning hole 315, the flag during the opening of the electric accessory length determines whether the ball enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315. Therefore, it is referred to in step S3319 of FIG. 59 to be described later.

<Step S3312>
When the received command is not a normal figure fluctuation pattern command (step S3307: No), MPU51 judges whether the received command is a special figure shift command, as shown in FIG. 59 (step S3312). As described above, the special figure shift command stores the first special figure reservation when the first special figure reservation number N or the second special figure reservation number M decreases due to the start of the special figure game (variation display of the special figure) 1st reservation area REA1 to 4th reservation area REA4 of area REA, or 1st reservation area REB1 to 4th reservation area REB4 of 2nd special reservation storage area REB (see FIG. 8). It is a command indicating that the special figure propriety information shown has been shifted.

MPU51, when the received command is a special figure shift command (step S3312: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3313, and when the received command is not a special figure shift command (step S3312: No), the process proceeds to step S3317 transition to

<Steps S3313 and S3314>
If the received command is a special figure shift command (step S3312: Yes), MPU51 performs special figure data setting processing (step S3313) and special figure data image display processing (step S3314), the process to step S3315 Transition. It should be noted that the special figure data setting process (step S3313) and the special figure data image display process (step S3314) of the present embodiment are the special figure data setting process ( Step S3108) and the special figure data image display processing (step S3109) are executed in the same way.

<Steps S3315 and S3316>
At step S3315, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the long open winning counter is zero. In addition, the value of the long open winning counter is triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 while the second winning opening 315 is long open (during the execution of the long open normal game). It shows the number of times of the second special symbol game that has not been executed among the second special symbol games to be played.

MPU51, when the value of the long open winning prize counter is 0 (step S3315: Yes), that is, while the second winning port 315 is long open (during execution of the game per long open general pattern), the second winning port If there is no unexecuted second special symbol game among the second special symbol games triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 to 315, the process proceeds to step S3317. On the other hand, the MPU 51 determines that the value of the long open winning counter is not 0 (step S3315: No), that is, the second winning while the second winning port 315 is long open (during execution of the long open general game) Among the second special game triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the mouth 315, if there is an unexecuted second special game, 1 is subtracted from the value of the long open winning counter (step S3316), End the command determination process.

<Steps S3317 and S3318>
If the value of the long open winning counter is 0 (step S3315: Yes), that is, while the second winning opening 315 is long open (during execution of the game per long open general pattern), the second winning opening 315 If there is no unexecuted second special game among the second special games triggered by the entry of the game ball 99, the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the short opening winning counter is 0 ( step S3317). In addition, the value of the short opening winning counter is triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 while the second winning opening 315 is short opened (during execution of the short open normal game). It shows the number of times of the second special symbol game that has not been executed among the second special symbol games to be played.

MPU51, when the value of the short opening winning prize counter is 0 (step S3317: Yes), that is, while the second winning prize port 315 is short open (during execution of the game per short open normal figure), the second winning prize opening When there is no unexecuted second special figure game among the second special figure games triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 to 315, the command determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the short opening winning counter is not 0 (step S3317: No), that is, while the second winning opening 315 is short opened (during execution of the game per short open normal pattern), the second winning Among the second special game triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the mouth 315, if there is an unexecuted second special game, 1 is subtracted from the value of the short opening winning counter (step S3318), End the command determination process.

<Step S3319>
If the received command is not a special figure shift command (step S3312: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the first special figure pending command (step S3319). As described above, the first special figure reservation command includes information indicating that the first special figure reservation number N for the first special figure increases, information about the number of reservations N after the increase, and a variation pattern for the increasing reservation ( and information regarding variable display times and jackpot lottery results).

MPU51, if the received command is the first special figure pending command (step S3319: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3320, if the received command is not the first special figure pending command (step S3319: No), The process proceeds to step S3323.

<Steps S3320 to S3322>
When the received command is the first special figure pending command (step S3319: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the first special figure pending information update process (step S3320) and the first special figure pending image display process (step S3321) do. It should be noted that the first special figure pending information update process (step S3320) and the first special figure pending image display process (step S3321) in this embodiment are the command determination processes in FIG. 47 in the first embodiment described above. It is executed in the same manner as the first special figure reservation information update process (step S3111) and the first special figure reservation image display process (step S3112).

Furthermore, the MPU 51 executes a pending continuous effect setting process (step S3322), and terminates the command determination process.

Here, the reservation continuous effect setting process is the same, the same type, or the same system that indicates or suggests the expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot for the predetermined reservation in the first special reservation. The production is performed in a predetermined number of first special game until the first special game in which the predetermined reservation becomes the change, or in a second special game for a predetermined number of reservations executed before the predetermined reservation. , It is a process of setting a pending continuous effect to be executed continuously. Details of the pending continuous effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 62 to 65. FIG.

Further, in the present embodiment, the production executed in each first special game when the reserved continuous production is executed continuously for the predetermined number of first special games is executed before the predetermined reservation. For the case where it is executed in one first special game for one hold, it does not correspond to "continuous production" exactly, but for the sake of convenience, it shall be included in the holding continuous production.

<Step S3323>
When the received command is not the first special figure pending command (step S3319: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the second special figure pending command (step S3323). As described above, the second special figure reservation command is information indicating that the second special figure reservation number M for the second special figure game increases, information about the number of reservations M after the increase, and fluctuations for the increasing reservation and information on patterns (variable display times and jackpot lottery results).

MPU51, if the received command is the second special figure pending command (step S3323: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3324, if the received command is not the second special figure pending command (step S3323: No), The process proceeds to step S3330 in FIG.

<Steps S3324 and S3325>
If the received command is the second special figure pending command (step S3323: Yes), MPU51 executes the second special figure pending information update process (step S3324) and the second special figure pending image display process (step S3325) and the process proceeds to S3326. It should be noted that the second special figure pending information update process (step S3324) and the second special figure pending image display process (step S3325) in the present embodiment is the command determination process of FIG. 47 in the first embodiment described above. It is executed in the same manner as the second special figure reservation information update process (step S3114) and the second special figure reservation image display process (step S3115).

<Step S3326>
In step S3326, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the electric role length opening flag is set to ON. The electric accessory length open flag is a flag that indicates that the second winning opening 315 is long open (long open general figure per game is executed). Therefore, when the MPU 51 receives the second special figure hold command and the flag during opening of the electric role object length is set to ON, the entry of the game ball 99 to the second winning hole 315 is the second It can be determined that it is triggered by the long opening of the 2 winning opening 315 (execution of the game per long open normal pattern). On the other hand, when the MPU 51 receives the second special figure hold command and the flag during opening of the electric role object length is set to OFF, the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 is the second It is not triggered by the long opening of the 2 winning opening 315 (execution of the game per long open normal pattern), that is, it is triggered by the short opening of the second winning opening 315 (execution of the game per short open normal pattern) can be judged.

If the electric role length open flag is set to ON (step S3326: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3327, and if the electric role length open flag is set to OFF (step S3326: No), the process proceeds to step S3329.

<Step S3327>
When the electric role length open flag is set to ON (step S3326: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the long open prize counter (step S3327), and shifts the process to step S3328. In this way, the value of the long open winning counter is such that when the second winning opening 315 is long open (a long open normal game is executed), the number M of reservations for the second special game reaches the upper limit number. 1 is added when the game ball 99 is entered into the second winning hole 315 in a state where the game ball 99 is not closed. On the other hand, the value of the long open winning counter is, as described above, triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 when the second winning port 315 is long open, and the second special figure game is started. When executed, 1 is subtracted (step S3316). That is, the value of the long open winning counter is triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 while the second winning opening 315 is long open (during execution of the long open normal game). It shows the number of times of the second special symbol game that has not been executed among the second special symbol games to be played.

<Step S3328>
In step S3328, the MPU 51 executes a second special figure special effect setting process for executing a second special figure special effect in the second special figure game.

Here, the second special figure special effect is executed on the condition that the electric role length open flag is set to ON. On the other hand, the electric role length open flag is not set to on in the jackpot game state, the probability variable game state and the time saving game state (high frequency support mode), as described above, and the normal game state (low probability mode and low Frequency support mode) is set to ON when the result of the lottery per normal pattern is a long open per. That is, the second special figure special effect is a long open general figure per game that is executed based on the fact that the result of the general figure per lottery in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) is a long open per game , the game ball 99 enters the second winning hole 315 as a trigger.

Of course, the effect during the opening of the electric role length is the short opening of the second winning port 315 in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), the second winning port 315 in the variable probability game state and the short time game state It may be executed based on the game ball 99 entering the second winning hole 315 while the is open.

Here, FIGS. 61(B) and 61(C) are diagrams showing screen examples in the symbol display section 341 during execution of the second special symbol special effect. Specifically, FIG. 61 (B) is a screen example of the symbol display unit 341 during execution of the second special figure special effect when the pending continuous effect is not executed after the second special figure special effect is executed. C) is the second special figure special effect when the pending continuous effect is executed before the second special figure special effect is executed, and the pending continuous effect is executed after the second special figure special effect is executed (see FIG. 56 (B)). It is an example of a screen in the symbol display section 341 during execution of the effect.

In the example of FIGS. 61(B) and 61(C), during the execution of the second special symbol special effect, the symbol display unit 341 displays a character image of "Releasing pending charge" and "If you hit a jackpot while releasing pending charge" A character image of “Probable change rush!” is displayed.

The character image "Releasing pending charge" indicates that the game ball 99 entered the second winning port 315 when the second winning port 315 was long opened in the long open normal game in the normal game state. It clearly indicates to the player that the variable display is being executed as a trigger. This character image of "Releasing reserved charge" inhibits the variable display of decorative patterns adjacent above the above-mentioned special figure fluctuation image display area 75 and the second special figure reservation image display area 77 in the symbol display unit 341. displayed in areas that do not As a result, the special figure data image displayed in the special figure fluctuation image display area 75 and the second special figure reserved image display area 77 (the special figure game image and the second special figure The second special symbol game corresponding to the figure reserved image) is the second special symbol game for the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 at the time of long opening. becomes possible.

The text image of "If you hit a jackpot while the hold charge is open, you will enter a certainty!" is a condition that the decorative pattern is stopped with a jackpot pattern (for example, double eyes) in the special game, and the jackpot when the conditions are met. This clearly indicates to the player that the type is the probability variable jackpot. This character image of "If you hit a jackpot while the reserved charge is released, you will enter a probability variable rush!"

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the jackpot lottery that is executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning hole 315, when the lottery result is a jackpot, there is no normal jackpot distribution. , always becomes a probability variable jackpot (see FIG. 57). Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the second special figure special effect executed triggered by the entry of the game ball to the second winning opening 315 in the long open normal game in the normal game state, the lottery in the jackpot game When the result is a jackpot, it is possible to clearly indicate that the jackpot type is a variable probability jackpot without obstructing the variable display of the decoration pattern.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 61 (B) and FIG. 61 (C), when the second special figure special effect is executed, the special figure fluctuation image display area 75 and the second special figure pending image display in the symbol display unit 341 A special figure data image (the special figure game image and the second special figure reserved image) is displayed in the area 77 . The special figure game image displayed in the special figure variation image display area 75 of the special figure data image indicates that it is a variation display for the second special figure game, and the first of the special figure data images The second special figure reserved image displayed in the 2 special figure reserved image display area 77 indicates that the right to execute the second special figure game is reserved. The special figure data image displayed in the special figure fluctuation image display area 75 and the second special figure reserved image display area 77 is displayed in a different manner from the special figure data image when the second special figure special effect is not executed. can be considered. That is, the special figure data image when the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 during the long opening differs from the special figure data image when the gaming ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 during the short opening. It is conceivable to display in a mode. In this case, not only the second special figure special effect is executed, but also the display mode of the special figure data image is the variation display for the game ball 99 entering the second winning hole 315 at the time of long opening. And since it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that it is on hold, it becomes easy to distinguish the change display and the hold on the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 at the time of short opening. .

In addition, unlike the second special symbol special effect shown in FIG. 61(B), the second special symbol special effect shown in FIG. 61(C) is different from the second special symbol special effect shown in FIG. A capture image 78 is displayed in (an area adjacent to the variable display area of the decoration pattern).

The capture image 78 is an effect screen of the pending continuous effect executed in the symbol display unit 341 in the first special game before the execution of the second special effect, which will be described later. The effect screen is displayed as a reduced image (image whose size is changed) while maintaining the aspect. In this captured image 78, the pending continuous effect is executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special effect, and the suspended continuous effect is executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special effect. is displayed (see FIG. 56(B)). That is, the capture image 78 shows that the continuous pending effect was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special effect, and the continuous suspended effect in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special effect. The execution of the performance is specified or suggested during execution of the second special symbol performance.

Thus, in this embodiment, the capture image 78 shows that the pending continuous effect was executed in the first special game before the second special effect was executed, and the second special effect after the second special effect was executed. Since it is specified or suggested that the pending continuous performance is executed in the 1 special game, the player forgets that the pending continuous performance was executed in the 1st special pattern game before the execution of the 2nd special pattern special performance. It is possible to grasp that the holding continuous performance is executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special performance. Therefore, even if the pending continuous effect is resumed in the first special game after the execution of the second special special effect, the continuous continuous effect is executed in the first special game after the second special special effect is executed. It is possible to remarkably reduce the player's sense of incongruity. As a result, after the second special figure special performance is finished, it is possible to prevent the decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the pending continuous performance executed before the execution of the second special figure special performance.

In particular, when the second winning opening 315 is opened long in the long open normal game, compared to the case where the second winning opening 315 is opened short in the short open normal game, the player is the second For a long time, the player becomes preoccupied with whether or not the game ball 99 enters the winning hole 315. - 特許庁Therefore, there is a high possibility that the player will forget that the pending continuous effect has been executed before the execution of the second special symbol game. In addition, when the second winning opening 315 is opened long in the long open normal game, compared to the case where the second winning opening 315 is opened short in the short open normal game, the second winning opening 315 Since the game ball 99 is easy to enter (the number of entering balls is large), the number of second special symbol games in which the second special symbol special effect is executed is large (the execution time of the second special symbol special effect is long). Therefore, the time from the end of the pending continuous effect before the execution of the 2nd special special effect (start of the 2nd special special effect) to the restart of the pending continuous effect due to the end of the 2nd special special effect In addition to being longer, compared to the case where the first special game is executed, the result of the jackpot lottery of the second special game in which the second special game is executed is a big win. Highly focused. Thus, when the second winning opening 315 is long opened in the long open normal game per game, compared to the case where the second winning opening 315 is opened short in the short open normal game per game, the second special Since there is a higher possibility that the player will forget that the pending continuous effect was executed before the execution of the figure game, during the execution of the second special symbol special effect The effect of specifying or suggesting that the pending continuous effect was executed in the first special symbol game is high.

In addition, by being a reduced image of the screen of the pending continuous effect that has been executed in the symbol display unit 341 in the first special game before the execution of the second special special effect, the The type of the pending continuous effect executed in the first special pattern game is specified or suggested, and the type of the suspended continuous effect executed in the first special pattern game after the end of the second special pattern special effect is specified or suggested. be. For example, although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, as the types of pending continuous effects, four types of the same color pattern effect, chance eye effect, mini character effect, and zone effect (mode effect) are set (Fig. 64). and FIG. 65), in the captured image 78 shown in FIG. 61(C), the decoration symbol is a chance eye "113" ( (see FIG. 65) indicates or suggests that the chance game effect stopped and displayed was being executed. As a result, the player can confirm that the pending continuous effect has been executed in the first special symbol game before executing the second special symbol special effect, and the continuous pending effect in the first special symbol game after executing the second special symbol special effect Not only can it be grasped that the production is executed, but also the type of the pending continuous production can be grasped. Therefore, it is further reduced that the player feels uncomfortable with the resumption of the pending continuous performance in the first special game after the execution of the second special performance, and after the second special performance is completed. , the decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the suspended continuous performance executed before execution of the second special figure special performance is further prevented.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the capture image 78 is displayed in a reduced size in the lower left area of the pattern display unit 341, but at the end of the second special figure special effect and after the second special figure special effect is completed. It is preferable to display the captured image over the entire symbol display section 341 for a certain period of time at the start of the effect or both. For example, the captured image may be displayed as a so-called stage change effect in which the stage effect (background effect) in the previous special game is changed in the current special game. In this way, during a certain period of one or both of the end of the second special figure special effect and the start of the pending continuous effect executed after the end of the second special figure special effect, the captured image is displayed on the entire pattern display unit 341. is displayed, the execution of the second special symbol special effect in the second special symbol game to the execution of the pending continuous effect in the first special symbol game can be performed smoothly without discomfort.

In the present embodiment, the capture image 78 is reduced and displayed in the lower left area of the pattern display section 341 as a reduced image. may be displayed. In this way, the captured image 78 is displayed as a reduced image outside the area where the decorative pattern is variably displayed, so that the display of the captured image 78 prevents the variable display of the decorative pattern from being obstructed.

In addition, the captured image 78 may be displayed as it is without being displayed as a reduced image as long as the variable display of the decoration pattern is not hindered. For example, as will be described later, when the pending continuous effect is executed by the stop display of a specific completely lost eye (same color pattern) or a predetermined completely lost eye (chance eye), a specific completely lost eye (same color pattern ) or a predetermined complete failure (chance) on the back side of the decorative pattern, even if the captured image 78 is displayed as it is without reducing it, the variable display of the decorative pattern is hindered. is prevented. When the capture image 78 is displayed as it is without being reduced, the size of the capture image 78 is set large, so that the player can easily understand that the capture image 78 is being displayed. be possible.

Also, the captured image 78 is preferably captured as an image with a lower density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) than the image of the first special symbol continuous effect, for example, as a lower image with a lower density than the decorative pattern. It may be displayed in the pattern display section 341 in the second special figure game as an image with a density that allows the image of the layer below the image 78 to be visible, or an image with a density that allows the back side of the capture image 78 to be visible. That is, the capture image 78 may be displayed on the symbol display section 341 as a variation of the image of the pending continuous effect being executed in the first special symbol game, as in the case of being displayed as a reduced image. Thus, the capture image 78 is displayed as an image with a lower density than the image of the first special symbol continuous effect, that is, the image of the pending continuous effect executed in the first special symbol game is changed. By being displayed as an object, it is possible to display the captured image 78 without being restricted by the variable display area of the decorative design in the design display section 341 . As a result, the decoration patterns variably displayed on the pattern display section 341 and the capture image 78 can be superimposed and displayed not only outside the variation area of the decorative designs variably displayed on the design display section 341 in the second special symbol game. becomes possible. By superimposing and displaying the decorative symbols variably displayed on the pattern display unit 341 and the captured image 78, the player can see the captured image 78 even when the player is watching the variable display of the decorative symbols. It becomes possible to make it visually recognized easily.

In addition, the capture image 78 is set as an image with a density that allows the image of the lower layer to be visible from the capture image 78, or an image with a density that allows the back side of the capture image 78 to be visible, and in the second special game, the pattern display unit 341 By displaying, even if the capture image 78 is displayed on the front side or the back side of the decoration design, it is possible to visually recognize the variable display of the decoration design. This allows the player to easily visually recognize the captured image 78 even when the player is watching the variable display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, since the captured image 78 can be displayed without being restricted by the variable display area of the decorative pattern in the pattern display section 341, the variable display of the decorative pattern can be performed even if the reduction ratio of the captured image 78 is set high. In addition, even when the captured image 78 is displayed as it is without being reduced, the variable display of the decoration pattern can be visually recognized. As a result, even when the captured image 78 is displayed as an image with a lower density than the image of the first special continuous effect, the size of the captured image 78 can be set larger, thereby improving the visibility of the captured image 78. can be sufficiently secured.

The captured image 78 is displayed on the pattern display section 341 in the second special game as an image having a density such that an image in a lower layer than the captured image 78 can be visually recognized or a density such that the back side of the captured image 78 can be visually recognized. In some cases, it is also possible to display only the outline of the captured image 78 . For example, when the first special figure continuous effect is displayed by a combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed, such as a chance eye effect or a same color pattern effect (see FIG. 65), the type of the decorative symbol can be recognized from the captured image 78. Only outlines (only outlines of numbers) may be displayed. In this way, when the captured image 78 is displayed as an outline that allows recognition of the type of decorative pattern, even if the captured image 78 is displayed on the front side or the back side of the decorative pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern can be visually recognized. becomes possible. This allows the player to easily visually recognize the captured image 78 even when the player is watching the variable display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, the capture image 78 shows that the pending continuous effect was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special effect, and that the continuous suspended effect was executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special effect. There is no particular limitation on the capture timing in the pending continuous effect as long as it can clearly indicate or suggest that the effect will be executed. For example, the capture timing in the pending continuous production is at the start of the pending continuous production (at the start of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern), during execution (during the display of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern), or at the end (when the fluctuation of the decorative pattern is stopped) may

In addition, the pending continuous performance was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special effect, and the pending continuous performance was executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special effect. The indication or suggestion is not limited to the display of the captured image 78, and other methods may be used as long as the variable display of the decoration pattern can be visually recognized. For example, the manifestation or suggestion is that the suspended continuous effect was executed in the first special game before the second special special effect was executed, and the first special game after the second special special effect was executed. A specific image different from the captured image 78, such as a character image, an icon image, a character image, or an image combining two or more of these, may be displayed to indicate that the continuous effect is to be executed. That is, the indication or suggestion may be displayed as an image that is different from the effect image of the pending continuous effect being executed in the first special game. In this way, the indication or suggestion is displayed as an image changed to an image different from the effect image of the pending continuous effect that has been executed in the first special symbol game, so that the decorative symbol in the symbol display unit 341 can be displayed at various positions in the pattern display section 341 without impeding visual recognition of the variable display.

Further, the type of the specific image may be associated with the type of the pending continuous effect. Thus, by making the type of the specific image correspond to the type of the pending continuous effect, not only the pending continuous effect was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special effect. By the type of the displayed specific image, it becomes possible to grasp the type of the pending continuous effect executed in the first special symbol game before execution of the second special symbol special effect.

In addition, the pending continuous performance was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special effect, and the pending continuous performance was executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special effect. Even when the specific image is displayed to indicate or suggest that the Alternatively, the back side of the captured image 78 may be displayed as an image with a visible density or as an image with only an outline. It may be displayed on the front surface or the rear surface of the decorative pattern superimposed on the decorative pattern that is variably displayed in the special symbol game, or may be displayed outside the variable area of the decorative pattern.

In addition, the capture image 78 and the specific image may be displayed during the entire period during execution of the second special symbol game, but a part of the period during execution of the second special symbol game, for example, the second special symbol game Only a certain period from the start, only a certain period before the end of the second special game, may be displayed both for a certain period from the start of the second special game and for a certain period before the end of the second special game , the display period of the captured image 78 and the specific image is not particularly limited. Further, the capture image 78 and the specific image do not need to be displayed in all the second special symbol games when the second special symbol games are continuously executed a plurality of times. Only the second special symbol game executed first of the game, only the second special symbol game executed last, may be displayed in both the first and last second special symbol games, and the capture The number of times of the second special symbol game in which the image 78 or the specific image is displayed and the number of times of the second special symbol game in which the second special symbol effect is executed may be different.

Also, the second special figure special effect is not limited to the examples of FIGS. 61(B) and 61(C), and other modes may be used. For example, the second special figure special effect may display another image such as a character image instead of or in addition to the character image. A predetermined sound presentation may be performed by the speaker 26 .

In addition, the second special figure special effect may be any effect that clearly indicates or suggests that a privilege is given to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the decorative pattern is not necessarily a jackpot pattern (for example, double eyes). It is not necessary to provide an effect in which the type of jackpot is a variable probability jackpot when the condition is satisfied under the condition that the game is stopped and displayed. Predetermined conditions include, for example, that the decoration pattern becomes a reach, that a specific effect is executed, and the like. In other words, the present invention is applicable to gaming machines other than gaming machines in which the jackpot type is always a variable jackpot when the jackpot lottery result triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second prize winning port 315 is a jackpot. can. For example, the present invention, in addition to the loop probability variable machine like the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above, is a probability variable jackpot as a result of a jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315. It can also be applied to ST machines such as V-ST machines and 1 type 2 type mixed machines including hits other than.

<Step S3329>
Returning to the description of FIG. 59, when the electric accessory length open flag is set to OFF (step S3326: No), that is, the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 is short open (short open If the trigger is the execution of the game per normal pattern, 1 is added to the value of the short open winning counter (step S3329), and the command determination process is terminated. In this way, the value of the short-open winning prize counter is such that when the second winning port 315 is short-opened (the short-open normal game is executed), the number M of reservations for the second special game reaches the upper limit number. 1 is added when the game ball 99 is entered into the second winning hole 315 in a state where the game ball 99 is not closed. On the other hand, the value of the short-open winning prize counter, which will be described in detail later, is inconvenient due to the continuous execution of the chance effect as a pending continuous effect in the special game of 4 or more times (the result of the jackpot lottery is lost). In order to avoid the occurrence of the execution of the big hit confirmation effect in some cases), the number of special game games in which the pending continuous effect is executed by entering the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 at the time of short opening. is increased, it is used in the variation type (effect pattern) for setting the variation type (effect pattern) to be executed in the special figure game (see step S3655 in FIG. 71 and step S3664 in FIG. 72).

<Step S3330>
If the received command is not the second special figure pending command (step S3323: No), the MPU 51, as shown in FIG. 60, determines whether the received command is the electric accessary product closing command. The electric role product closing command is a command indicating that the electric role product 315b is closed, and when the electric role product 315b is closed, the game control process per normal figure of FIG. 25 executed by the main controller 4 is set in step S1817.

If the received command is an electric accessory closing command (step S3330: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3331, and if the received command is not an electric accessory closing command (step S3330: No), the process starts. The process moves to step S3335.

<Step S3331>
If the received command is an electric role product closing command (step S3330: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the electric role object length opening flag is set to ON (step S3331). It is an electric role length open flag indicating that the electric role product 315b is long open by executing the game per long open normal figure, and when the electric role product opening command is received, in step S3311 of the command determination process set to on.

If the electric role length open flag is set to ON (step S3331: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3332, and if the electric role length open flag is set to OFF (step S3331: No), the process proceeds to step S3334.

<Steps S3332 and S3333>
When the electric role length open flag is set to ON (step S3331: Yes), the MPU 51 clearly indicates to the player that the electric role item 315b is long open by executing the long open general figure per game. Alternatively, along with executing a process to end the suggested electric character length opening effect (see FIG. 61 (A)) (step S3332), set the electric character length open flag to off (step S3333), and determine the command End the process.

<Step S3334>
When the electric accessory length open flag is set to off (step S3331: No), the MPU 51 sets the short open/close flag to on (step S3334) and terminates the command determination process. The short open/closed flag is a flag indicating that the electric accessory 315b that has been short opened in the short open/normal figure per game has been closed. This short open/close flag is set four times in step S3652 of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process in FIG. It is used to determine whether or not the chance eye effect is executed in succession to the above special game.

<Step S3335>
If the received command is not an electric accessary product closing command (step S3330: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special figure variation pattern command. MPU51 moves a process to step S3336, when the received command is a special figure variation pattern command (step S3335: Yes). On the other hand, when the received command is not a special figure variation pattern command (step S3335: No), the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands (step S3340), and terminates the command determination processing.

<Step S3335>
If the received command is a special figure variation pattern command (step S3335: Yes), the MPU 51 executes variation type (effect pattern) setting processing for setting the variation type (effect pattern) to be executed in the special figure game ( Step S3336), and the process proceeds to step S3337. The details of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 67 to 72. FIG.

<Step S3337>
In step S3337, the MPU 51 executes stop symbol combination setting processing for setting a stop display combination of decoration symbols in the special symbol game, and shifts the processing to step S3338. The details of the stop symbol combination setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. FIG.

<Step S3338>
In step S3338, the MPU 51 sets the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command to the variation display counter, and proceeds to step S3339. The variation display time is determined according to variation pattern information included in the variation pattern command. Then, the variation display counter is decremented by one in the counter update processing of step S2701 in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. It is possible to determine the remaining time of the display time and the like. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display is finished when the variation display counter reaches zero.

<Step S3339>
In step S3339, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command for specifying the variation type (effect pattern type) in the symbol display section 341 and the contents of the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols to the display control device 6, and determines the command. End the process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the variation type (effect pattern type) set in step S3336 and the stop design combination of the decoration design set in step S3337. On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores effect images corresponding to display variation pattern commands, variation images of decoration symbols, and the like. Thereby, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the effect display and the variable display in the symbol display section 341 according to the variation type (effect pattern) corresponding to the display variation pattern command and the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols.

Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 performs variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols (for example, three) until a preset variable display time elapses, and a plurality of Stop and display the variation of the decoration pattern in order. During the variable display of decorative patterns, various effects corresponding to the content of the variation type (effect pattern type) specified by the display variation pattern command are executed by the pattern display section 341, the speaker 26, the illumination section 27, and the like. .

[Holding continuous effect setting process]
Next, an example of the procedure of the pending continuous effect setting process executed in step S3322 of the command determination process of FIG. 59 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 65. FIG. The pending continuous effect setting process is a process of setting the type of pending continuous effect in a situation where the continuous pending effect can be started. Here, FIGS. 62 and 63 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the pending continuous effect setting process.

<Step S3401>
In the pending continuous effect setting process, in step S3401, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the jackpot playing flag, that is, whether or not the first special figure game is executable. The flag during jackpot game is set to ON when it is determined that the jackpot game start command is received in the command determination process (step S3118 in FIG. 47), and is turned OFF when it is determined that the jackpot game end command is received. (step S3137 in FIG. 48).

The MPU 51 ends the pending continuous effect setting process when the jackpot playing flag is set to ON (step S3401: Yes). On the other hand, when the jackpot playing flag is set to OFF (step S3401: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3402.

<Step S3402>
When the jackpot game is not in progress (step S3401: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the high frequency support mode flag indicating the high frequency support mode is set to ON (step S3402). That is, in this step S3402, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the high frequency support mode is set.

In addition, the high-frequency support mode flag is set to ON in step S2313 of FIG. 34 when the jackpot game ends in the game state transition process, and the game state changes from the probability variation game state or the time saving game state to the probability variation jackpot game state or normal It is set to OFF at step S2307 in FIG. 33 when shifting to the jackpot gaming state, or at step S2326 in FIG. 34 when the gaming state shifts from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state.

Here, in this step S3402 it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is that the pending continuous effect is executed in the normal game state which is the low frequency support mode, and the probability variable game state which is the high frequency support mode and This is for setting so as not to be executed in the time-saving game state. Of course, the pending continuous effect may be executed in one or both of the variable probability game state and the time reduction game state, which are the high-frequency support mode.

When the high-frequency support mode flag is set to ON (step S3402: Yes), that is, when the high-frequency support mode is set, the MPU 51 ends the pending continuous effect setting process. On the other hand, if the high frequency support mode flag is set to off (step S3402: No), that is, if the low frequency support mode is selected instead of the high frequency support mode, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3403.

<Step S3403>
If the frequency support mode flag is set to OFF (step S3402: No), that is, if it is the low frequency support mode instead of the high frequency support mode, the MPU 51 determines whether the pending continuous effect execution flag is set to ON. (step S3403). The pending continuous effect execution flag is a flag indicating that the pending continuous effect is started, and is suspended in the first special game to be executed continuously after the first special game in which the pending continuous effect is started. When it is scheduled that continuous production is executed, it is set to ON in step S3611 of the variation type (production pattern) setting process in FIG. 68 described later.

When the pending continuous effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3403: Yes), the MPU 51 does not need to set the pending continuous effect because the pending continuous effect is being executed. exit. On the other hand, MPU51 transfers a process to step S3404, when the pending|holding continuous production execution flag is set to OFF (step S3403: No).

<Step S3404>
When the pending continuous effect execution flag is set to OFF (step S3403: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second special figure special effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3404). The second special figure special effect execution flag is a flag indicating that the second special figure special effect has been started, and is continuously executed after the second special figure game in which the second special figure special effect is started. When it is scheduled that the second special figure special effect is executed in the second special figure game to be executed, it is set to ON in step S3636 of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process of FIG. 68 of FIG. 70 described later be.

MPU51, when the second special figure special effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3404: Yes), since the second special figure special effect is being executed there is no need to set the pending continuous effect, The pending continuous effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, MPU51 transfers a process to step S3405, when the 2nd special figure special production execution flag is set to OFF (step S3404: No).

<Step S3405>
When the second special symbol special effect execution flag is set to OFF (step S3404: No), the MPU 51 is the right to execute the first special symbol game by entering the game ball 99 into the first winning hole 314 It is determined whether or not the first special figure reservation number N after the increase is 2 or more when the reservation increases. That is, the MPU 51 sets the pending continuous effect as one of the conditions that there is a hold for at least one first special symbol game when the game ball 99 enters the first winning hole 314 .

MPU51 moves a process to step S3406, when the 1st special figure reservation number N after an increase is two or more (step S3405: Yes). That is, the pending continuous effect can be started with the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning hole 314 in the state where the first special figure pending number N is 1-3.

On the other hand, the MPU 51 ends the pending continuous effect setting process when the first special figure pending number N after the increase due to the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning hole 314 is not 2 or more (step S3405: No). . That is, the pending continuous effect is not started when the game ball 99 enters the first winning hole 314 in a state where the number N of pending is 0.

<Step S3406>
If the number N of the first special figure pending after the increase is 2 or more (step S3405: Yes), the MPU 51 is the variation pattern for the increasing hold included in the first special figure pending command (variation display time and jackpot lottery result ), it is determined whether or not the variable display time of the suspended first special symbol game is 30 seconds or more. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the suspension that can trigger the start of the continuous suspension performance is the first special game in which the performance with reach should be executed.

MPU51, if the variable display time of the first special game corresponding to the increased hold is 30 seconds or more (step S3406: Yes), that is, the first special game corresponding to the increased hold, production with reach is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S3407.

On the other hand, MPU51, if the variable display time of the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased suspension is not 30 seconds or more (step S3406: No), that is, the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased suspension does not involve reach If the effect of complete failure should be executed, the process proceeds to step S3410.

<Steps S3407 to S3409>
If the variable display time of the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased suspension is 30 seconds or more (step S3406: Yes), that is, the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased suspension is executed with a reach effect If it should be, the MPU 51 is based on the information on the variation pattern (variation display time and jackpot lottery result) for the increasing hold included in the first special figure hold command, the first special corresponding to the hold that has increased It is determined whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery in the figure game is a jackpot (step S3407).

If the result of the jackpot lottery of the first special figure game corresponding to the increased reservation is a big hit (step S3407: Yes), the MPU 51 is, according to the first special figure reservation number N, continuous holding for the jackpot effect described later A pending continuous effect setting process is executed based on the effect pattern type setting table (see FIG. 64) (step S3408), and the process proceeds to step S3411 in FIG.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery of the first special figure game corresponding to the increased hold is not a big hit (step S3407: No), that is, if the out reach production should be executed, the MPU 51 is the first special figure According to the number of reservations N, a reservation continuous effect setting process is executed based on a reservation continuous effect pattern type setting table (see FIG. 64) for out-reach, which will be described later (step S3409), and the process proceeds to step S3411 in FIG. .

<Step S3410>
If the fluctuation display time of the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased suspension is not 30 seconds or more (step S3406: No), that is, the first special symbol game corresponding to the increased suspension is completely off without reach. If it should be executed, the MPU 51 performs a pending continuous effect setting process based on a pending continuous effect pattern type setting table (see FIG. 64) for complete off reach, which will be described later, according to the first special figure pending number N. 63 (step S3410), and the process proceeds to step S3411 in FIG.

Here, FIGS. 64(A) to 64(C) are diagrams showing an example of the pending continuous effect pattern type setting table. Specifically, FIG. 64(A) is a reservation continuous effect pattern type setting table used when the number N of the first special figure reservations after the increase is 4, and FIG. is a reservation continuous effect pattern type setting table used when the first special figure reservation number N is 3, and FIG. 64 (C) is when the first special figure reservation number N after the increase is 2 It is a pending continuous effect pattern type setting table to be used.

As shown in FIGS. 64(A) to 64(C), as the types of pending continuous effect patterns, four types of same-color pattern effect, chance eye effect, mini character effect and zone effect (mode effect) are set. . In addition, in FIGS. 64(A) to 64(C), "same color pattern 3 times" means that the same color pattern effect is executed continuously in the first special symbol game three times, and "same color pattern 2 times” means that the same color pattern effect is executed consecutively in the first special game twice, and “same color pattern once” means that the same color pattern effect is performed once in the first special game. means that only Similarly, "X times of chance" (X is an integer of 1 to 4), "X times of mini character effect" (X is an integer of 1 to 3) and "X times of zone effect" (X is an integer of 1 to 3) means that the chance eye effect, mini character effect or zone effect is executed in X times of the first special symbol game. In other words, "○○ X times" means that a single kind of pending continuous effect is continuously executed in the first special figure game for a predetermined number of times. Of course, the pending continuous effect is not limited to the case where a single type of pending continuous effect is continuously executed in the first special game of the predetermined number of times. In the figure game, multiple types of pending continuous effects (for example, mini character effects and zone effects) may be executed at the same time.

And, as the pending continuous effect, regardless of the first special figure pending number N, the chance effect is set to be most likely to be set as compared with other pending continuous effects such as the same color pattern effect. On the other hand, the zone effect (mode effect) is set to be the most difficult to set among the pending continuous effects.

In addition, in FIGS. 64(A) to 64(C), "-" means that the pending continuous effect is not set. "-" where the pending continuous effect is not set, regardless of the first special figure pending number N, occupies the majority of the distribution of random numbers. Therefore, the frequency (probability) of executing the continuous pending effect is lower than the frequency (probability) of not executing the continuous pending effect. Furthermore, "-" where the pending continuous effect is not set, the smaller the first special figure pending number N, the more the random number distribution is set. That is, the smaller the first special figure pending number N, the lower the frequency (probability) of executing the pending continuous effect, and the larger the first special figure pending number N, the more the frequency (probability) of executing the pending continuous effect. expensive.

Here, the same color pattern effect, the chance effect, the mini character effect, and the zone effect (mode effect) are the results of the jackpot lottery in the first special game for the suspension that triggered the start of the continuous suspension effect. It is a production that expresses or suggests the degree of expectation of things. For example, "fourth chance", in which the second chance effect is executed four times in succession to the first special game, when the number N of the first special reservation is four, the result of the jackpot lottery is a big win. It can be set only in certain cases (see FIG. 64 (A)), and it is not set when the result of the jackpot lottery is out (missing reach or complete loss), so "4th chance ” is a jackpot determination production that clearly indicates that the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot. On the other hand, all of the pending continuous effects other than "fourth chance" are effects suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win. That is, even if the same-color pattern presentation, mini-character presentation, and zone presentation (mode presentation), which are reserved continuous presentations other than the "fourth chance", are executed four times or more than four times, the result of the jackpot lottery will not be a big win. It is not a big hit confirmation production that clearly indicates that there is something.

In this way, the result of the jackpot lottery in the first special game for the hold that triggered the start of the hold continuous production is a production that expresses or suggests the expectation that the result will be a big hit. You can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting to be displayed, and when the pending continuous effect is displayed, pay attention to whether the result of the jackpot lottery will shift to the special game state. Since the progress can be enjoyed, the amusement of the game is improved.

In addition, except for the "fourth chance" that indicates a big hit, the degree of expectation for a big hit is the highest for a mini character effect when the number of times of the first special game in which the pending continuous effect is executed is the same. It is set low, the same color pattern effect and the chance eye effect are set to the same degree (the same or substantially the same), and the zone effect (mode effect) is set to the highest.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the game to the second winning opening 315 by executing the short open normal per game when it is scheduled that the holding continuous effect is continuously executed in a plurality of first special game In the second special symbol game executed based on the entry of the ball 99, the pending continuous performance is continuously executed without executing the second special symbol special effect. In this case, when the number of times of the first special game in which the pending continuous effect is executed and the number of times of the second special game in which the continuous pending effect is executed are added, the number of times of the special game in which the continuous pending effect is executed may be 4 or more times.

Here, when the chance eye effect is executed as the pending continuous effect, when the number of times of the special game in which the pending continuous effect is executed becomes 4 or more, as described above, the pending continuous effect is the result of the jackpot lottery. It becomes a jackpot confirmation production that clearly indicates that it is a jackpot. Therefore, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game executed for the fourth time or later after the start of the chance performance as the predetermined reserved continuous performance is not included in the result of the jackpot lottery, the chance performance is continued. If it is executed four times or more in succession, inconsistency occurs between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content indicated by the continuous pending performance.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the number of times of the special figure game in which the pending continuous production is executed when the chance eye production is executed as the pending continuous production is 4 times or more, the chance eye production is 4 times of the special game. Before the game is continuously executed, even if the suspended continuous performance is executed other than the chance performance, for example, 4 times or more than 4 times, the result of the big win lottery is determined to be the big win. Change to the same color pattern production that is not a production. This prevents the occurrence of inconsistency between the result of the big win lottery and the content indicated by the continuous pending performance.

In addition, as described above, even if the performance other than the chance eye performance as the pending continuous performance is continuously executed in the first special game 4 times or more, it does not become the big hit fixed performance, suggesting the degree of expectation of the big win. It is executed as a production to do. Therefore, even if the number of times of the special game in which the pending continuous performance is executed is 4 or more, if the performance other than the chance performance is executed as the pending continuous performance, the type of the pending continuous performance The same type of pending continuous effect is continuously executed without any change. Of course, even if it is a type of pending continuous production that does not cause any inconvenience even if it is continuously executed in a special game of a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times or more), before the special game of the scheduled number of times is executed In addition, the type of pending continuous production may be changed.

Here, the big hit expectation degree of the chance eye effect which is the predetermined pending continuous effect before the change and the same color symbol effect which is the specific pending continuous effect after the change is set to be the same or substantially the same. For example, the difference between the chance eye effect and the same color pattern effect is set to -5% or more and +5% or less, and the difference between the chance eye effect and the same color pattern effect is -2.5%. Above +2,5% or less. That is, in the present embodiment, the same or substantially the same jackpot expectation is set for the predetermined pending continuous effect before the change and the specific pending continuous effect after the change.

In this way, when the type of the pending continuous performance is changed by setting the jackpot expectations of the predetermined pending continuous performance before the change and the specific pending continuous performance after the change to be the same or substantially the same. , For example, when changing from the chance eye production to the same color pattern production, the jackpot expectation level of the pending continuous production after the change does not decrease significantly, so the change in the pending continuous production to the jackpot expectation level will reduce the jackpot expectation level. The player's interest is prevented from being lowered, and the interest in the game is prevented from being lowered.

Here, as described above, the selection rate of the chance eye effect, which is the predetermined reserved continuous effect, is set higher than the selection rate of the same color symbol effect, which is the specific reserved continuous effect. That is, in this embodiment, the selection rate of the predetermined pending continuous effect before change is set higher than the selection rate of the specific pending continuous effect after change. In this way, by setting the selection rate of the predetermined pending continuous effect before the change to be higher than the selection rate of the specific pending continuous effect after the change, the predetermined pending continuous effect with a high probability of causing inconvenience ( For example, it is possible to appropriately avoid the inconvenience caused by continuous display of a chance effect.

In addition, not only when changing the type of pending continuous performance to prevent inconsistency between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content indicated by the continuous pending performance, but also changing the type of continuous pending performance When performing, if the fluctuation display time for the hold of the first special game that triggered the start of the hold continuous production is long, that is, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the hold is a big hit, or the big hit expectation is high. When the ready-to-win production is executed, the type of the pending continuous production is set so that the expectation of the jackpot is higher in the type of the specific pending continuous production after the change compared to the type of the predetermined continuous production pending production before the change. You may make changes. For example, if the predetermined pending continuous effect before the change is a mini character effect with the lowest jackpot expectation, the specific pending continuous effect after the change is a chance effect with a higher jackpot expectation than the mini character effect, a same color pattern effect, or Zone production (mode production) may be set, and if the predetermined pending continuous production before change is a chance eye production or same color pattern production, as a specific pending continuous production after change, chance eye production and same color pattern production A zone effect (mode effect) with a higher degree of expectation for a big hit may be set. In this case, the difference in the expected degree of jackpot between the specific pending continuous effect after the change and the predetermined continuous pending effect before the change is set to, for example, 10% or more, preferably 25% or more.

In this way, by changing the type of the pending continuous performance so that the expected degree of jackpot is higher in the specific pending continuous performance after the change than in the predetermined pending continuous performance before the change, the type of the pending continuous performance is changed. is changed, the degree of expectation for a big win suggested to the player is improved. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that the type of the specific pending continuous performance will be changed when the predetermined pending continuous performance is displayed, and at the same time, can enjoy the predetermined pending continuous performance. If the type of pending continuous effect is changed from to a specific pending continuous effect, the result of the jackpot lottery will be a big hit in the special game in which the specific pending continuous effect after the change is executed. Since the progress of the special-design game can be enjoyed while hugging, the amusement of the game is improved.

Here, in the present embodiment, the zone effect (mode effect) with the highest jackpot expectation has the lowest selection rate among the pending continuous effects. That is, in the present embodiment, the type of pending continuous effect is changed from the chance effect or the same color pattern effect, which is a predetermined continuous continuous effect, to the zone effect (mode effect), which is a specific continuous continuous effect. , When the type of pending continuous effect is changed to a specific pending continuous effect with a high jackpot expectation, the selection rate of the predetermined pending continuous effect with a low jackpot expectation before the change is high, and the jackpot expectation after the change. It is conceivable to set a high selection rate for a high specific pending continuous effect.

The selection rate of the predetermined pending continuous performance with low jackpot expectation before change is high, and the selection rate of the specific pending continuous performance with high jackpot expectation after change is set high, so that the predetermined pending continuous performance before change By setting the selection rate of the performance to be high, the frequency of execution of the predetermined pending continuous performance before change increases, so that the pending continuous performance is changed to a specific pending continuous performance with a high expectation of a big hit. The interest in the game is further improved because the player has more chances to expect, and the selection rate of the specific pending continuous performance after the change is set low, so that the specific pending continuous performance with high expectation for the big win. is executed less frequently, the player's pleasure is enhanced when the performance is changed to the specific reserved continuous performance with a high expectation for a big win, and the amusement of the game is further improved.

The timing of changing the type of the continuous pending performance may be any timing at which there is no inconsistency between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content specified by the predetermined continuous continuous performance, for example, the result of the big winning lottery and the continuous continuous performance. From the special game that is executed next to the special game that is being executed at the stage where it is found that there may be inconsistency between the contents specified by, the results of the jackpot lottery and the pending continuous performance It is sufficient if it is between the special game (for example, the start of the predetermined holding continuous effect and the special game executed for the fourth time) that causes inconsistency between the contents. That is, the change timing of the type of pending continuous effect is the first special game and the second special game if there is no mismatch between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content indicated by the pending continuous effect. may be either.

Here, when the change timing of the type of the pending continuous production is the first special game, by continuously executing the pending continuous production, in the first special game that is restarted after the second special game is finished. When inconvenience occurs, the occurrence of the inconvenience is avoided.

In addition, when the type of the pending continuous effect is changed in the first special game restarted after the end of the second special game, the continuous execution of the pending continuous effect before the change causes inconvenience. , the maximum number of times of the special game in which the pending continuous performance before the change is continuously displayed is ensured. In this way, the maximum number of special game games in which the pre-change pending continuous effect is continuously displayed is ensured, so that the continuous execution of the pre-change pending continuous effect may cause inconvenience. Even so, the player can enjoy the pending continuous effect before the change to the maximum.

On the other hand, if the change timing of the type of pending continuous effect is the second special game, if inconvenience occurs due to the continuous execution of the predetermined pending continuous effect before the change, the inconvenience occurs in the second special game Even if inconvenience occurs in the first special game that is restarted after the end of the second special game, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience when it occurs, and in advance before the first special game is restarted. Inconvenience is avoided.

In addition, the timing of changing the type of the pending continuous effect is next to the special game being executed at the stage when it is found that the result of the jackpot lottery and the content displayed by the predetermined pending continuous effect may be inconsistent. In the case of a special game to be executed at 12:00, the occurrence of inconvenience is avoided immediately after it is grasped that the inconvenience will occur due to the continuous execution of the predetermined reserved continuous performance.

On the other hand, when the change timing of the type of pending continuous effect is a special game in which there is a mismatch between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content displayed by the predetermined pending continuous effect, the predetermined pending continuous effect is continued. It is possible to maintain the player's expectation for display to the maximum. Therefore, the decrease in the player's interest in the game due to the change of the predetermined pending continuous effect to the specific pending continuous effect is reduced, thereby preventing the decrease in interest in the game.

Of course, even if the number of special game games in which the pending continuous effect is executed when the continuous continuous effect other than the chance effect is executed is a predetermined number (for example, 4 times) or more, the type of continuous continuous effect You may make changes. That is, even if no inconvenience occurs even if a single type of suspended continuous effect is continuously executed for a predetermined number of times or more, the type of the suspended continuous effect may be changed. In this way, by changing the type of the pending continuous performance when no inconvenience occurs even if the single type of pending continuous performance is continuously executed for a predetermined number of times or more, the single type of pending continuous performance can be used as a special feature. To prevent a player from feeling bored when the game is continuously executed, the game is interesting due to the continuous execution of a single type of reserved continuous performance in many special-design games. is prevented from decreasing.

In addition, there is no limit to the combination of the type of pending continuous effect before change and the type of continuous pending effect after change, but as long as it is determined within a range that does not cause inconsistency between the result of the jackpot lottery and the continuous pending effect For example, when the same color pattern effect is set as the pending continuous effect, the number of special game games in which the pending continuous effect is executed is a predetermined number or more (for example, 4 times or more). A production other than the same color pattern production, for example, may be changed to a chance eye production.

Further, the change of the pending continuous effect is not limited to one time, and may be performed multiple times.

Here, in the same color pattern effect, all the decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed have the same color, and the combination of the decorative patterns is a combination of jackpot patterns (for example, all the decorative patterns are the same) and a winning reach. (For example, a pattern combination in which the right and left patterns are the same and only the middle pattern is different) This is an effect in which a specific complete missing dot other than the eye is stopped and displayed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 51(A) described above, the decorative patterns of "3" and "7" are colored red, and odd-numbered decorative patterns other than "3" and "7" of "1" and "5" are displayed. and "9" decorative patterns are set to green, and even-numbered decorative patterns "2", "4", "6" and "8" are set to blue. Although there are many possible combinations, it is preferable that the combination of same-color symbols as a specific complete misalignment to be stop-displayed in the same-color symbol presentation be a characteristic symbol combination. For example, as shown in FIG. 65, as a combination of the same color symbols as a specific complete misalignment that is stopped and displayed in the same color symbol production, the left symbol and the middle symbol have the same number, and the right symbol is the left symbol and the middle symbol. A pattern combination different from the pattern is conceivable. In this way, the player can easily grasp that the same-color pattern effect is executed by the combination of the specific complete misses as the combination of the same-color pattern stopped and displayed in the same-color pattern effect. can be done. Further, in the same-color pattern effect, when the combination of the same-color patterns as a specific complete misalignment is stopped and displayed, the speaker 26 may output a specific special sound peculiar to the execution of the same-color pattern effect. . This also allows the player to easily grasp that the same-color symbol effect has been executed.

The chance eye effect is an effect in which a chance eye, which is a predetermined complete misalignment in which decorative symbols to be stop-displayed are not of the same color, is stop-displayed. For the same reason as in the case of the same-color symbol rendering, it is preferable that the predetermined complete missing symbols (chance symbols) to be stop-displayed in the chance symbol rendering be a characteristic symbol combination. For example, as shown in FIG. 65, as a predetermined complete missing eye (chance eye) to be stopped and displayed in the chance eye presentation, all decorative symbols are odd numbers, and the left and middle symbols are the same number. , a pattern combination in which the right pattern is different from the left pattern and the middle pattern is conceivable. Also, in the chance eye presentation, the chance eye presentation is output from the speaker 26 when a predetermined complete missing eye (chance eye) is stop-displayed so that the player can easily grasp that the chance eye presentation has been executed. A specific, predetermined special sound may be output when the is executed.

The mini character effect is a effect in which a mini character (mini character) is displayed on the pattern display section 341 . A mini-character is, for example, a character that appears in the performance of the game machine 10, which is represented by miniaturizing it, or a character whose head is enlarged by making the character two-headed. In the mini character effect, there is no particular limitation on the display mode of the mini character, but when the mini character effect is executed in the effect other than the continuous pending effect, it is preferable to display it in a mode distinguishable from other mini character effects. As the mini character effect of the pending continuous effect, for example, a effect in which the mini character crosses the pattern display section 341 to the left, right, up and down, or diagonally, and a hold display image is displayed for the first hold of the first special game. In this case, by displaying a mini character in the vicinity of the reserved display image, it may be suggested that the mini character effect is the effect related to the first suspension for the first special figure game.

The zone production (mode production) is a special background production (for example, "○○ Zone" (background effect including a character image such as "○○ mode") is performed.

Here, in this embodiment, the pending continuous effect includes the same color pattern effect and the chance eye effect. The same color pattern effect and the chance eye effect are effects in which a decorative pattern (for example, a number) is stopped and displayed at a specific complete loss as the same color pattern or a predetermined loss as a chance eye, and the stop display decoration. Since the player can easily grasp that the continuous pending performance is being executed by the combination of the symbols, the player expects that the continuous continuous performance is continuously executed when the continuous continuous performance is executed. Since the progress of the game can be enjoyed, the amusement of the game is improved.

Also, when the pending continuous effect is executed by stopping and displaying a specific complete loss or a predetermined complete loss, as described above, in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special effect When the display of the capture image 78 indicates or suggests that the pending continuous performance has been executed, the capture image 78 is displayed in various modes without obstructing the visibility of the variation of the decoration pattern in the second special symbol game. becomes possible. For example, as the capture image 78, the image of the pending continuous effect in the first special game can be displayed as it is, and the image of the suspended continuous effect in the first special game is reduced. It can be displayed as a degraded image, a contour image, etc. As a result, since it is possible to express or suggest that the pending continuous performance has been executed in the first special symbol game before the second special symbol performance is executed by various performances, the player's interest in the game is improved. As a result, the amusement of the game is improved.

<Step S3411>
Returning to the description of the procedure of the pending continuous effect setting process, when one of the setting processes of steps S3408 to S3410 ends, the MPU 51 sets execution of the pending continuous effect in the setting process as shown in FIG. is performed (step S3411). MPU51, when the setting of executing the pending continuous effect is made (step S3411: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3412, and when the setting of executing the pending continuous effect is not made (step S3411: No) , terminates the pending continuous effect setting process.

<Step S3412>
When the setting of executing the pending continuous effect is made (step S3411: Yes), the MPU 51 sets on the pending continuous effect setting flag indicating that the setting of executing the pending continuous effect is made (step S3412), and the process proceeds to step S3413. The pending continuous effect setting flag is referenced in order to determine whether or not it is the first special figure game for starting the pending continuous effect in step S3602 of the variation type (production pattern) setting process in FIG.

<Step S3413>
In step S3413, the MPU 51 sets a pending continuous effect execution count counter indicating the number of remaining first special figure games for executing the pending continuous effect. For example, the MPU 51 sets "X" as the value of the counter for the number of executions of the pending continuous effect when "X chances" (where X is a positive integer of 1 to 4) is set as the pending continuous effect.

<Steps S3414 and S3415>
When the pending continuous effect execution count counter is set, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the chance effect is set as the pending continuous effect (step S3414). When the chance effect is set as the pending continuous effect (step S3414: Yes), the MPU 51 sets on the chance flag indicating that the chance effect is set as the pending continuous effect (step S3415). , terminates the pending continuous effect setting process. On the other hand, when the chance eye effect is not set as the pending continuous effect (step S3414: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3416.

<Steps S3416 and S3417>
When the chance eye effect is not set as the pending continuous effect (step S3414: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the same color pattern effect is set as the pending continuous effect (step S3416). When the same color pattern effect is set as the pending continuous effect (step S3416: Yes), the MPU 51 turns on the same color pattern flag indicating that the same color pattern effect is set as the pending continuous effect (step S3417). , terminates the pending continuous effect setting process. On the other hand, if the same color pattern effect is not set as the pending continuous effect (step S3416: No), that is, if the mini character effect or zone effect (mode effect) is set as the pending continuous effect, the pending continuous effect End the setting process.

[Second special figure special effect setting process]
Next, an example of the procedure of the second special figure special effect setting process executed in step S3228 of the command determination process of FIG. 59 will be described with reference to FIG. In the second special figure special effect setting process, the game ball 99 entered the second winning hole 315 by the long opening of the electric accessory 315b in the long open normal figure game in the normal game state which is the low frequency support mode. In the second special figure game executed in the case, it is a process for making it possible to start the second special figure special effect. Here, FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the second special figure special effect setting process.

<Step S4201>
As shown in FIG. 66, in the second special figure special effect setting process, in step S3501, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the second special figure special effect setting flag is set to ON. The second special figure special effect setting flag is a flag for enabling the second special figure special effect to be started in the second special figure game, and is set to ON in step S3503 described later. Also, the second special figure special effect setting flag determines whether or not to start the second special figure special effect in the second special figure game in step S3635 of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process in FIG. 70 described later. to be referenced.

When the second special figure special effect setting flag is set to ON (step S3501: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the second special figure special effect setting process, and turns off the second special figure special effect setting flag. If set (step S3501: No), the process proceeds to step S3502.

<Steps S3502 and S3503>
When the second special figure special effect setting flag is set to off (step S3501: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second special figure special effect execution flag is set to on (step S3502). . The second special figure special effect execution flag is a flag indicating that the second special figure special effect is started, and when the second special figure special effect is executed in the next second special figure game, it will be described later. It is set to ON in step S3636 of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process in FIG.

When the second special figure special effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3502: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the second special figure special effect setting process. On the other hand, when the second special figure special effect execution flag is set to off (step S3502: No), the MPU 51 sets the second special figure special effect setting flag to on (step S3503), and the second special effect The figure special effect setting process is terminated. Thus, by setting the second special figure special effect setting flag to ON, in step S3642 in the variation type (effect pattern) setting process of FIG. The second special figure special performance can be set for the second special figure game executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 by the long opening of the electric accessory 315b. be possible.

[Variation type (production pattern) setting process]
Next, an example of the procedure of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process executed in step S3336 of the command determination process of FIG. 60 will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 72. FIG. The variation type (production pattern) setting process is a process of setting the variation type (production pattern) for the first special figure game or the second special figure game executed when a variation pattern command is received. Here, FIGS. 67 to 72 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of the variation type (effect pattern).

<Step S3601>
As shown in FIG. 67, in the variation type (effect pattern) setting process, in step S3601, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the second special figure reservation number M for the second special figure game is zero. Here, in this embodiment, as described above, when there is a hold for the second special symbol game, the second special symbol game is executed with priority over the first special symbol game. That is, by determining whether or not the second special symbol reservation number M for the second special symbol game is 0, it is determined whether to execute the second special symbol game or to execute the first special symbol. Then, when the second special figure reservation number M for the second special figure game is 0 (step S3601: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3602, and sets the effect for the first special figure game. to run. On the other hand, when the second special symbol reservation number M for the second special symbol game is not 0 (step S3601: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3635 of FIG. 70 and sets the effect for the second special symbol game. Execute the process.

<Step S3602>
When the second special figure reservation number M for the second special figure game is 0 (step S3601: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the reservation continuous effect setting flag is set to ON (step S3602). The pending continuous effect setting flag is a flag indicating that the setting of executing the pending continuous effect is made, and is suspended in the pending continuous effect setting process of FIG. 63 executed when the first special figure pending command is received. It is set to ON in step S3412 when the setting for executing the continuous effect is made.

And, MPU51, when the pending continuous effect setting flag is set to ON (step S3602: Yes), that is, when the first pending continuous effect is executed in the first special figure game, the processing in step S3605 of FIG. transition to On the other hand, when the pending continuous effect setting flag is set to OFF (step S3602: No), that is, when the first pending continuous effect is not executed in the first special figure game, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3603.

<Step S3603>
When the pending continuous effect setting flag is set to OFF (step S3602: No), that is, when the first pending continuous effect is not executed in the first special figure game, the MPU 51 sets the pending continuous effect execution flag to ON. (step S3603). The pending continuous effect execution flag is a flag indicating that the pending continuous effect is started, and is suspended in the first special game to be executed continuously after the first special game in which the pending continuous effect is started. When it is scheduled that a continuous effect is to be executed, it is set to ON in step S3611 described later in the variation (effect pattern) type setting process of FIG.

Then, the MPU 51, when the pending continuous effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3603: Yes), that is, when the pending continuous effect is executed in the first special figure game executed as the variation, the process is started. 69 goes to step S3620. On the other hand, when the pending continuous effect execution flag is set to OFF (step S3603: No), that is, when the pending continuous effect is not executed in the first special figure game, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3604.

<Step S3604>
When the pending continuous effect execution flag is set to OFF (step S3603: No), that is, when the pending continuous effect is executed in the first special figure game, the setting of the normal effect, that is, the above-described first embodiment and A similar variation type (effect pattern type) is set, and the variation type (effect pattern) setting process ends.

<Steps S3605 to S3608>
When the pending continuous effect setting flag is set to ON (step S3602: Yes), that is, when the first pending continuous effect is executed in the first special figure game, as shown in FIG. The production setting flag is set to OFF (step S3605), and the holding continuous production set in any of steps S3408 to S3410 in FIG. 62 as the holding continuous production for the first special game executed as the special game Set (step S3606). Then, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the pending continuous effect execution count counter indicating the remaining execution count of the pending continuous effect (step S3607), and determines whether the value of the pending continuous effect execution count counter after the subtraction is 0. is determined (step S3608). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is the last first special symbol game in which the pending continuous effect is executed.

Then, the MPU 51, when the value of the pending continuous effect execution count counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3608: Yes), that is, the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game, the pending continuous effect is executed. If it is the last first special figure game, the process proceeds to step S3614. On the other hand, the MPU 51, if the value of the pending continuous effect execution count counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S3608: No), that is, the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game, the pending continuous effect is executed If it is not the last first special figure game, the process proceeds to step S3609.

<Steps S3609 and S3610>
If the value of the pending continuous effect execution count counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3608: No), that is, the first special figure game executed as the special symbol game is the last first special in which the pending continuous effect is executed If it is not a figure game, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special game executed as the special game is a jackpot (step S3609). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot game is executed after the end of the special symbol game, or whether the suspended first special symbol game is executed.

Then, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special game executed as the special game is a jackpot (step S3609: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is executed after the end of the special game , In order to make the first special game executed as the special game the last first special game in which the pending continuous production is executed, the number of pending continuous production executions indicating the remaining number of executions of the holding continuous production. The counter is cleared (step S3610), and the process proceeds to step S3614. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special game executed as the special game is not a big hit (step S3609: No), that is, the first special game suspended after the end of the special game is executed, the process proceeds to step S3611.

<Step S3611>
When the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special game executed as the special game is not a big hit (step S3609: No), that is, when the first special game held after the end of the special game is executed , MPU 51 sets on a pending continuous effect execution flag indicating that the continuous pending effect has been started (step S3611), and shifts the process to step S3612.

<Steps S3612 and S3613>
When the pending continuous effect execution flag indicating that the pending continuous effect is started is set to ON, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second chance flag is set to ON (step S3612). The chance eye flag is a flag indicating that the chance eye effect is set as the pending continuous effect, and in step S3415 of the pending continuous effect setting process in FIG. It is set to ON when the chance eye effect is set as the pending continuous effect.

Then, when the second chance flag is set to ON (step S3612: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the value of the second chance counter indicating the number of times of the first special game of the second chance effect executed as the pending continuous effect. 1 is added (step S3613), and the change type (effect pattern) setting process ends.

Here, in the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of times of the first special game of the chance eye production to be executed in succession is the holding jackpot lottery for the first special game that triggered the execution of the holding continuous production 4 times when the result is a jackpot, and 3 times when it is a loss (see FIG. 64). Therefore, by referring to the value of the chance number counter, the result of the pending jackpot lottery for the first special game that triggered the execution of the pending continuous production, and the second chance production that is executed as the pending continuous production. To prevent inconsistency in the number of times of one special figure game.

On the other hand, when the second chance flag is set to OFF (step S3612: No), the MPU 51 ends the variation type (effect pattern) setting process.

<Steps S3614 to S3616>
If the first special game executed as the special game is the last first special game in which the pending continuous effect is executed (step S3608 or step S3610), that is, the remaining execution count of the pending continuous effect is 0, it is determined whether or not the chance flag indicating that the chance effect is set as the pending continuous effect is set to ON (step S3614). .

When the chance flag is set to ON (step S3614: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the chance flag to OFF (step S3615), and the chance target effect to be executed as the pending continuous effect in the special game is A final chance flag indicating that it is the final chance effect is set to ON (step S3616), and the variation type (effect pattern) setting process is terminated. The final chance eye flag is referenced in step S3702 in the stop symbol combination setting process of FIG. 73 to be described later to determine whether or not to set a chance eye as a stop symbol combination.

On the other hand, when the second chance flag is set to OFF (step S3614: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3617.

<Steps S3617 to S3619>
If the chance eye flag is set to OFF (step S3614: No), it is determined whether or not the same color pattern flag indicating that the same color pattern effect is set as the pending continuous effect is set to ON (step S3617). When the same color design flag is set to ON (step S3617: Yes), MPU51 sets the same color design flag to OFF (step S3618), and the same color design effect executed as a pending continuous effect in the special symbol game is A final same-color pattern flag indicating that it is the last same-color pattern effect is set to ON (step S3619), and the variation type (effect pattern) setting process is terminated. The final same-color symbol flag is referenced in step S3706 in the stop symbol combination setting process of FIG. 73 to be described later to determine whether or not to set the same-color symbol as the stop symbol combination.

On the other hand, MPU51, when the same color pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3617: No), that is, when the last pending continuous effect executed in the special symbol game is not the chance eye effect and the same color pattern effect, The variation type (effect pattern) setting process is ended.

<Step S3620>
If the pending continuous effect execution flag indicating that the pending continuous effect has been started is set to ON (step S3603: Yes), that is, in the first special game executed as the special game, the pending continuous effect is When executed, as shown in FIG. 69, the MPU 51 sets a pending continuous effect for the special figure game (step S3620), and shifts the process to step S3621.

As the reserved continuous effect for the special figure game, the reserved continuous effect set in any one of steps S3408 to S3410 of the reserved continuous effect setting process of FIG. 62 is set. However, as will be described later, in spite of the fact that the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game is out, if the fourth chance effect to be executed as the jackpot fixed effect can be set, the result of the jackpot lottery In order to prevent inconsistency between and the pending continuous effect, a process of changing the pending continuous effect executed in the special symbol game from the chance eye effect to the same color symbol effect is executed (Fig. 72 step S3662).

<Step S3621>
When the pending continuous effect for the special game is set (step S3620), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the chance flag indicating that the chance effect is set as the pending continuous effect is set to ON. Then (step S3621), if the second chance flag is set to ON (step S3621: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3622, and if the second chance flag is set to OFF (step S3621: No), The process proceeds to step S3625.

<Steps S3622 to S3624>
If the chance flag indicating that the chance effect is set as the pending continuous effect is set to ON (step S3621: Yes), the MPU 51 selects the first special effect in which the chance effect is executed as the pending continuous effect. 1 is added to the value of the number-of-chance number counter that indicates the number of times the game has been played (step S3622), and it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-chance number counter after the addition is 4 (step S3623). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the special game is the first special game in which the fourth chance effect is executed as the pending continuous effect.

If the value of the chance number counter after addition is 4 (step S3623: Yes), the chance number temporary stop flag is set to ON (step S3624), and the process proceeds to step S3628. On the other hand, if the value of the chance number counter after addition is not 4 (step S3623: No), the process proceeds to step S3625.

Here, as described above, the upper limit of the value of the chance number counter (the number of times of the first special game in which the chance number production is continuously executed as the pending continuous production) is the chance number production as the pending continuous production. 4 times when the result of the pending jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game that triggered the execution is a jackpot. On the other hand, the upper limit value of the suspension for the first special symbol game is 4, and the number of the first special symbol games in which the suspension continuous effect is continuously executed is also 4. Then, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed with the same number of doubles, and cannot be stopped and displayed with a chance number. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to continuously execute the chance eyes in the first special game of the fourth time, in the fourth first special game that notifies that the result of the jackpot lottery is a big hit, for example A chance eye is temporarily stopped and displayed in a high-speed variation game before execution of a ready-to-win performance, and then stop-displayed by double eyes via a ready-to-win performance. Thus, in the present embodiment, the result of the holding jackpot lottery for the first special game that triggered the execution of the holding continuous production is a big hit, and the second chance production as the holding continuous production is four times. When one special symbol game is continuously executed, in the first special symbol game of the fourth time, the chance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed before the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed with double eyes. Therefore, in this step S3624, the chance eye temporary stop flag is set to ON in order to temporarily stop and display the chance eye before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as double eyes. This chance eye temporary stop flag indicates a stop display combination of decorative symbols for the fourth first special symbol game when the chance eye performance as the pending continuous performance is continuously executed in the first special symbol game four times. When setting, it is referred to in step S3709 of FIG.

<Step S3625>
If the second chance flag is set to OFF (step S3621: No), or if the value of the second chance number counter after addition is not 4 (step S3623: No), the MPU 51 is the first It is determined whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game is a jackpot (step S3625). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot game is executed after the end of the special symbol game or the suspended first special symbol game is executed in the same manner as in step S3609 of FIG. 68 described above.

Then, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special game executed as the special game is a jackpot (step S3625: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is executed after the end of the special game , the process proceeds to step S3628. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special game executed as the special game is not a big hit (step S3625: No), that is, the first special game suspended after the end of the special game is executed, the process proceeds to step S3626.

<Steps S3626 and S3627>
When the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special game executed as the special game is not a big win (step S3625: No), that is, when the first special game held after the end of the special game is executed , the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the pending continuous effect execution number counter indicating the remaining number of times of execution of the pending continuous effect (step S3626). Then, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the pending continuous effect execution count counter after the subtraction is 0, that is, the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is the last number in which the pending continuous effect is executed. It is judged whether it is 1 special figure game (step S3627).

And, MPU51, when the value of the pending continuous effect execution count counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3627: Yes), that is, the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game, the pending continuous effect is executed If it is the last first special figure game, the process proceeds to step S3629. On the other hand, the MPU 51 determines that the value of the pending continuous effect execution count counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3627: No), that is, the first special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is executed as the pending continuous effect. When it is not the last first special figure game, the variation type (production pattern) setting process is terminated.

<Step S3628>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special game executed as the special game is a big hit (step S3625: Yes), that is, if the jackpot game is executed after the end of the special game, the MPU 51 In order to make the first special game executed as a special game the last first special game in which the pending continuous performance is executed, a pending continuous performance execution count counter indicating the remaining number of executions of the pending continuous performance is set. It is cleared (step S3628), and the process proceeds to step S3629.

<Step S3629>
If the value of the pending continuous performance execution count counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3627: Yes), or if the pending continuous performance execution count counter indicating the remaining execution count of the pending continuous performance is cleared (step S3628), that is, When the first special game executed as the special game is the last first special game in which the pending continuous performance is executed, the MPU 51 displays the pending continuous performance indicating that the pending continuous performance is started. The execution flag is set to off (step S3629), and the process proceeds to step S3630.

<Step S3630>
In step S3630, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the chance flag indicating that the chance effect is set as the pending continuous effect is set to ON. If the chance flag is set to ON (step S3630: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3631, and if the chance flag is set to OFF (step S3630: No), the process proceeds to step Move to S3633.

<Steps S3631 and S3632>
When the chance flag is set to ON (step S3630: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the chance flag to OFF (step S3631), clears the chance counter (step S3632), and determines the variation type. (Production pattern) The setting process is ended.

<Steps S3633 and S3634>
When the chance flag is set to OFF (step S3630: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the same color pattern flag indicating that the same color pattern effect is set as the pending continuous effect is set to ON. (step S3633). When the same color pattern flag is set to ON (step S3633: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the same color pattern flag to OFF (step S3634), and ends the variation type (effect pattern) setting process.

On the other hand, when the same color pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3633: No), that is, when the pending continuous effect is not the chance eye effect and the same color pattern effect, but the mini character effect or zone effect (mode effect). , the variation type (effect pattern) setting process ends.

<Step S3635>
When it is determined that the second special symbol reservation number M for the second special symbol game is not 0 (step S3601: No) in step S3601 of FIG. Thus, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second special figure special effect setting flag is set to ON (step S3635). The second special figure special effect setting flag is a flag for starting the second special figure special effect (see FIGS. 61(B) and 61(C)) in the second special figure executed as the special figure game. be. This second special figure special effect setting flag is transmitted when the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 by long opening the second winning opening 315 in the long open normal game. When the second special figure reservation command is received, it is set to ON in step S3503 of the second special figure special effect setting process of FIG.

When the second special figure special effect setting flag is set to ON (step S3635: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3636, and when the second special figure special effect setting flag is set to OFF (Step S3635: No), the process proceeds to step S3641.

<Steps S3636 and S3637>
When the second special figure special effect setting flag is set to ON (step S3635: Yes), the MPU 51 turns on the second special figure special effect execution flag indicating that the second special figure special effect is started. (step S3636), the second special figure special effect setting flag is set to OFF (step S3637), and the process proceeds to step S3638.

<Step S3638>
In step S3638, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the electric auditors length opening flag indicating that the second winning opening 315 is long open (long open general game per game is executed) is set to ON. . If the electric role length open flag is set to ON (step S3638: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3639, and if the electric role length open flag is set to OFF (step S3638: No), the process proceeds to step S3642.

<Steps S3639 and S3640>
When the electric character length opening flag is set to ON (step S3638: Yes), the MPU 51 executes processing for terminating the electric character length opening effect (see FIG. 87 (A)) (step S3639 ), set the electric accessory length open flag to OFF (step S3640), and proceed to step S3642. That is, in the electric role object length opening effect (see FIG. 87(A)), either condition of the start of the second special figure special effect (see FIG. 61(A)) or the chain of the electric role object 315b is satisfied. is terminated if That is, the second special figure special effect is executed with priority over the electric role material length opening effect.

<Step S3641>
When it is determined that the second special figure special effect setting flag is set to off in step S3635 (step S3635: No), the MPU 51 turns on in step S3636 when the second special figure special effect is started. It is determined whether or not the second special figure special effect execution flag to be set is set to ON (step S3641).

Then, when the second special figure special effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3641: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3642, and the second special figure special effect execution flag is set to OFF. If there is (step S3641: No), the process proceeds to step S3652 in FIG.

<Steps S3642 and S3643>
In step S3642, the MPU 51 sets the second special game effect for the second special game executed as the special game. Then, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the pending continuous effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3643). The pending continuous effect execution flag is a flag indicating that the pending continuous effect is started, and the pending continuous effect is executed in the first special game executed next to the first special game in which the pending continuous effect is executed. If it is scheduled to be executed, it is set to ON in step S3611 of FIG. 68 described above. That is, in this step S3643, it is determined whether or not the pending continuous effect is restarted in the first special game executed after the end of all the second special game in which the second special effect is executed. .

Then, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3644 when the pending continuous effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3643: Yes), and when the pending continuous effect execution flag is set to OFF (step S3643: No), the process proceeds to step S3645.

<Step S3644>
When the pending continuous effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3643: Yes), the MPU 51 displays all the second In order to display the capture image 78 (see FIG. 61 (C)) clearly indicating or suggesting that the pending continuous effect is restarted in the first special game executed after the end of the special game, the sound lamp control device Captured image display information is set in the display variation pattern command sent from 5 to the display control device 6 (step S3644), and the process proceeds to step S3645. As a result, the capture image 78 is displayed in the symbol display section 341 in the second special game effect (see FIG. 61(C)).

In addition, when the pending continuous effect execution flag is set to OFF (step S3643: No), the first special figure executed after the end of all the second special figure games in which the second special figure special effect is executed In the game, when the pending continuous effect is not executed, the process of step S3644 is skipped. Therefore, in the first special symbol game executed after the end of all second special symbol games in which the second special symbol special effect is executed, if the pending continuous effect is not executed, the pattern in the second special symbol game effect The captured image 78 is not displayed on the display section 341 (see FIG. 61(B)).

Here, the captured image is displayed as a reduced image of the screen of the pending continuous effect executed in the symbol display section 341 in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special effect. In this captured image 78, the pending continuous effect is executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special effect, and the suspended continuous effect is executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special effect. is displayed (see FIG. 61(B)). That is, the capture image 78 shows that the continuous pending effect was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special effect, and the continuous suspended effect in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special effect. The execution of the performance is specified or suggested during execution of the second special symbol performance.

Thus, in this embodiment, the capture image 78 shows that the pending continuous effect was executed in the first special game before the second special effect was executed, and the second special effect after the second special effect was executed. Since it is specified or suggested that the pending continuous performance is executed in the 1 special game, the player forgets that the pending continuous performance was executed in the 1st special pattern game before the execution of the 2nd special pattern special performance. It is possible to grasp that the holding continuous performance is executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special performance. Therefore, even if the pending continuous effect is resumed in the first special game after the execution of the second special special effect, the continuous continuous effect is executed in the first special game after the second special special effect is executed. It is possible to remarkably reduce the player's sense of incongruity. As a result, after the second special figure special performance is finished, it is possible to prevent the decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the pending continuous performance executed before the execution of the second special figure special performance.

In particular, when the second winning opening 315 is opened long in the long open normal game, compared to the case where the second winning opening 315 is opened short in the short open normal game, the player is the second For a long time, the player is preoccupied with whether or not the game ball 99 is entered into the prize winning opening 315. - 特許庁Therefore, there is a high possibility that the player will forget that the pending continuous effect has been executed before the execution of the second special symbol game. In addition, when the second winning opening 315 is opened long in the long open normal game, compared to the case where the second winning opening 315 is opened short in the short open normal game, the second winning opening 315 Since the game ball 99 is easy to enter (the number of entering balls is large), the number of second special symbol games in which the second special symbol special effect is executed is large (the execution time of the second special symbol special effect is long). Therefore, the time from the end of the pending continuous effect before the execution of the 2nd special special effect (start of the 2nd special special effect) to the restart of the pending continuous effect due to the end of the 2nd special special effect In addition to being longer, compared to the case where the first special game is executed, the result of the jackpot lottery of the second special game in which the second special game is executed is a big win. Highly focused. Thus, when the second winning opening 315 is long opened in the long open normal game per game, compared to the case where the second winning opening 315 is opened short in the short open normal game per game, the second special Since there is a higher possibility that the player will forget that the pending continuous effect was executed before the execution of the figure game, during the execution of the second special symbol special effect The effect of specifying or suggesting that the pending continuous effect was executed in the first special symbol game is high.

In addition, the captured image 78 is displayed as a reduced image of the screen of the pending continuous effect executed in the symbol display unit 341 in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special effect. The type of the pending continuous effect executed in the first special game before the execution of the special effect is specified or suggested, and the type of the pending continuous effect executed in the first special game after the end of the second special effect The type is specified or implied. For example, in the present embodiment, as the types of pending continuous effects, four types of same color pattern effect, chance eye effect, mini character effect, and zone effect (mode effect) are set (see FIG. 64), FIG. In the captured image 78 shown in C), the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed at "113" (see FIG. 65), which is the chance eye, as a suspended continuous effect in the first special game before the execution of the second special game. It is specified or suggested that the chance presentation has been executed. As a result, the player can confirm that the pending continuous effect has been executed in the first special symbol game before executing the second special symbol special effect, and the continuous pending effect in the first special symbol game after executing the second special symbol special effect Not only can it be grasped that the production is executed, but also the type of the pending continuous production can be grasped. Therefore, it is further reduced that the player feels uncomfortable with the resumption of the pending continuous performance in the first special game after the execution of the second special performance, and after the second special performance is completed. , the decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the suspended continuous performance executed before execution of the second special figure special performance is further prevented.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the capture image 78 is displayed in a reduced size in the lower left area of the pattern display unit 341, but at the end of the second special figure special effect and after the second special figure special effect is completed. The capture image may be displayed on the entire symbol display section 341 for a certain period of time at the start of the effect or both. For example, the captured image may be displayed as a so-called stage change effect in which the stage effect (background effect) in the previous special game is changed in the current special game. In this way, during a certain period of one or both of the end of the second special figure special effect and the start of the pending continuous effect executed after the end of the second special figure special effect, the captured image is displayed on the entire pattern display unit 341. is displayed, the execution of the second special symbol special effect in the second special symbol game to the execution of the pending continuous effect in the first special symbol game can be performed smoothly without discomfort.

<Step S3645>
If the pending continuous effect execution flag is set to OFF (step S3643: No), or if the pending continuous effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3643: Yes), the MPU 51 changes to the display variation pattern command When the capture image display information is set (step S3644), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special game executed as the special game is a jackpot (step S3645). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game is executed after the execution of the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game.

Then, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special game executed as the special game is a jackpot (step S3645: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the jackpot game after the end of the second special game. If so, the process proceeds to step S3646. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special game executed as the special game is not a jackpot (step S3645: No), that is, if the jackpot game is not executed after the end of the second special game , the process proceeds to step S3649.

<Step S3646>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special game executed as the special game is a big hit (step S3645: Yes), the MPU 51 clears the long open prize counter (step S3646) and advances the process to step S3647. Transition. Here, the value of the long open winning counter is triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 while the second winning opening 315 is long open (during execution of the long open normal game). It indicates the number of times of the second special symbol game that has not been executed among the second special symbol games. That is, the MPU 51 sets the number of unexecuted second special symbol games to 0 when the jackpot game is executed after the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is finished.

<Steps S3647 and S3648>
In step S3647, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the pending continuous effect execution flag indicating that the continuous pending effect has been started is set to ON (step S3647). Then, when the pending continuous effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3647: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the pending continuous effect execution flag to OFF (step S3648), shifts the process to step S3651, If the effect execution flag is set to OFF (step S3648: No), the process proceeds to step S3651.

<Steps S3649 and S3650>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special game executed as the special game is not a big hit (step S3645: No), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the long open winning counter (step S3649), and after subtraction It is determined whether or not the value of the long open winning counter is 0 (step S3650). If the value of the long open winning counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3650: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3651, and if the value of the long open winning counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3650: No ), the effect setting process ends.

Here, if the value of the long open winning counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3650: Yes), that is, the second special game as the special game is the last time the second special special effect is executed. In the case of the second special figure game, the processing of steps S3647 and S3648 is not executed, and the processing is shifted to step S3651, so that the pending continuous effect execution flag is set to ON Suspension continuous effect execution flag is not set to off. As a result, the suspended continuous effect is restarted in the first special symbol game executed after the last second special symbol game in which the second special symbol special effect is executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the first special game executed next to the last second special game in which the second special special effect is executed, the pending continuous effect is resumed, but the length after the subtraction When the value of the open winning counter is 0 (step S3650: Yes), by moving the process to step S3647, the second special figure special effect is executed next to the last second special figure game In the first special game, the suspended continuous effect may not be restarted.

<Step S3651>
In step S3651, the MPU 51 turns off the special effect execution flag indicating that the second special figure special effect is started, and ends the variation type (effect pattern) setting process. Thereby, the second special symbol special effect executed in the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game is executed as the last second special symbol special effect.

<Steps S3652 and S3653>
When it is determined that the second special figure special effect execution flag is set to off in step S3641 (step S3641: No), the MPU 51, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the short open/close flag indicating that the electric accessory 315b that has been closed is set to ON (step S3652). That is, the MPU 51 is in a state in which the number of game balls 99 entering the second winning port 315 is restricted due to the end of the short-open normal game, and the number of the game balls 99 entering the second winning port 315 does not increase. determine whether it happened or not.

Then, when the short open/close flag is set to ON (step S3652: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the short open/close flag to OFF (step S3653), and shifts the process to step S3654. On the other hand, when the short open/close flag is set to OFF (step S3652: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3658 in FIG.

<Step S3654>
When the short open/closed flag is set to ON (step S3652: Yes), when the short open/closed flag is set to OFF (step S3653), the MPU 51 determines whether the second chance flag is set to ON. is determined (step S3654). The chance eye flag is a flag indicating that the chance eye effect is set as the pending continuous effect. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the chance eye effect is set as the pending continuous effect at the time when the electric accessory 315b that has been short-opened in the short-open normal game per game is closed. It is determined whether or not the chance performance is executed as the pending continuous performance in the second special symbol game executed with the entry of the game ball 99 into the second prize winning port 315 in the normal per game.

Then, when the chance flag is set to ON (step S3654: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3655, and when the chance flag is set to OFF (step S3654: No), the process to step S3658 in FIG.

<Steps S3655 and S3656>
If the second chance flag is set to ON (step S3654: Yes), the MPU 51 adds the value of the second chance number counter, the value of the pending continuous effect number counter, and the value of the short opening prize counter ( Step S3655), it is determined whether or not the added value is 4 or more (step S3656).

Here, the value of the number-of-chance counter is the number of times of the first special game in which the number-of-chance performance is executed as the pending continuous performance, and the value of the number of pending continuous performance counter is the remaining first number of times the pending continuous performance is executed. It is the number of times of the special figure game. Therefore, the sum of the value of the second chance counter and the value of the pending continuous effect counter is the number of times of the first special game in which the initially set pending continuous effect is executed. In addition, the value of the short open winning prize counter is the number of times of the second special game executed triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 in the short open normal game per game, and the continuous holding It is the number of times of the second special figure game in which the production is executed. Therefore, the sum of the value of the chance number counter, the value of the pending continuous production number counter, and the value of the short opening winning counter is the maximum characteristic that the chance production as the pending continuous production is continuously executed. It is the number of times of the figure game (first special game, second special game).

On the other hand, as described above, when the chance eye effect is continuously executed in the special game as the pending continuous effect four times or more, it becomes a big win fixed effect that clearly indicates the big win. Therefore, when the chance eye effect is set as the pending continuous effect, the second special game is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 in the short open normal game. In this case, if the result of the jackpot lottery for each special game in which the chance performance is executed is a loss, the result is clearly indicated by the continuous execution of the chance performance as a pending continuous performance; Inconsistency may occur with the result of the jackpot lottery.

Therefore, when the chance performance is set as the pending continuous performance, the value of the chance number counter, the value of the pending continuous performance frequency counter, and the value of the short opening winning counter are added to 4 or more. By judging whether or not, it is judged in advance whether or not a mismatch can occur between the result clearly indicated by the continuous execution of the chance eye presentation as the pending continuous presentation and the result of the jackpot lottery. becomes possible.

Then, the MPU 51 advances the process to step S3657 when the sum of the value of the second chance number counter, the value of the pending continuous effect number counter, and the value of the short opening prize counter is 4 or more (step S3656: Yes). If the added value is not 4 or more (step S3656: No), the process proceeds to step S3658 in FIG.

<Step S3657>
If the sum of the value of the chance number counter, the value of the pending continuous effect number counter, and the value of the short opening winning counter is 4 or more (step S3656: Yes), the MPU 51 is executed as the special symbol game It is determined whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery for all the special symbols games to be executed thereafter is out (step S3657). In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a big win is included in the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game to be executed thereafter, including the second special game to be executed as the special game. .

Then, the MPU 51, including the second special game to be executed as the special game, when the result of the jackpot lottery for all the special game to be executed thereafter is out (step S3657: Yes), the process The process moves to step S3660 in FIG. On the other hand, the MPU 51 includes the second special game executed as the special game, if the result of the jackpot lottery for all the special games to be executed thereafter is not out (step S3657: No), the special game If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game to be executed after that, including the second special game to be executed as a game, contains a big hit, the process proceeds to step S3658 in FIG.

<Steps S3658 and S3659>
If the short open/close flag is set to OFF (step S3652: No), if the chance flag is set to OFF (step S3654: No), the value of the chance number counter and the pending continuous effect number counter If the added value of the value of and the value of the short open winning counter is not 4 or more (step S3656: No), or including the second special game that is executed as the special game, all that will be executed later When the jackpot is included in the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game (step S3657: No), as shown in FIG. 72, the MPU 51 executes the process of step S3658. That is, when there is no inconvenience that the chance eye effect is continuously executed in the special figure game four or more times as the suspended continuous effect, the MPU 51 determines in step S3658 that the suspended continuous effect has been started. It is determined whether or not the holding continuous effect execution flag shown is set to ON. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to set the pending continuous effect as the effect for the second special figure game executed as the variation.

Then, the MPU 51, when the pending continuous effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3658: Yes), sets the pending continuous effect as the effect for the second special game executed as the special game (step S3659 ), the processing of steps S3625 to S3634 in FIG. 69 is executed.

On the other hand, MPU51, if the pending continuous effect execution flag is set to OFF (step S3658: No), that is, if the pending continuous effect is not set as the effect for the second special game executed as the special game, The processing is shifted to step S3604 in FIG. 67 described above, and the normal effect is set as the effect for the second special game executed as the special game (set the effect in the same manner as in the above-described first embodiment). Then, the change type (effect pattern) setting ends.

Thus, when the pending continuous production execution flag is set to ON (step S3658: Yes), by setting the pending continuous production as production for the second special game executed as the special game (step S3659), when the pending continuous production is being executed in the first special game as the special game, it is planned that the holding continuous production will be executed in succession to the next first special game that is held. Even if the game ball 99 enters the second winning hole 315 due to the short opening of the second winning hole 315, the second winning hole when the second winning hole 315 is short open. In the second special figure game by the ball entry of the game ball 99 to 315, the pending continuous presentation is continuously performed without performing the second special figure special presentation. Therefore, when the player is executing the suspended continuous performance in the first special game as the variation, the suspended continuous performance is executed continuously in the next first special game that is suspended. is scheduled, after the second special figure game executed triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 when the second winning port 315 is short-opened, the pending continuous effect is executed. I don't feel uncomfortable with what I don't do. As a result, the decline in interest in the game due to the non-execution of the pending continuous effect in the first special symbol game executed after the second special symbol game is prevented.

In particular, when the second winning hole 5 is short-opened, it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the second winning hole 315 (the number of balls entering the second winning hole 315 is small) compared to when the second winning hole 315 is long-opened, and the second special figure Since there is a high possibility that the player remembers that the pending continuous performance was executed before the execution of the game, the game ball 99 to the second winning port 315 when the second winning port 315 is short open. It is highly effective that the second special symbol game is not executed and the pending continuous performance is continuously executed in the second special symbol game by entering the ball.

Also, in the short opening where the game ball 99 is difficult to enter the second winning hole 315, it is assumed that the number of game balls 99 entering the second winning hole 315 is small, so the second winning hole 315 is short. Even if the suspension continuous performance is continuously executed in the second special symbol game by the ball entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 in the case of being open, the number of continuous execution times of the suspension continuous performance is also greatly increased. Therefore, there is a low possibility that the player will feel uncomfortable with the continuous execution of the pending continuous effect in the second special game. On the contrary, by continuously executing the pending continuous effect in the second special game, it is possible to effectively utilize the pending continuous effect in the second special game.

<Steps S3660 and S3661>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for all the special games to be executed after that including the second special game to be executed as the special game is out (step S3657 in FIG. 71: Yes), that is, the pending continuous production , the MPU 51 sets the chance flag to OFF (step S3660). , by clearing the value of the number-of-chance counter (step S3661), the continuous execution of the number-of-chance effect is restricted.

<Steps S3662 and S3663>
When the process for restricting the continuous execution of the chance eye production is executed (steps S3660 and S3661), the MPU 51 performs the same color as the pending continuous production for the second special game executed as the special game. Along with setting the symbol effect (step S3662), the same color symbol indicating that the same color symbol is set as the pending continuous effect is set to ON (step S3663), and the process proceeds to step S3664. That is, the MPU 51 changes the pending continuous effect for the second special symbol game executed as the special symbol game from the chance eye effect to the same color symbol effect.

Here, the chance eye effect becomes a big hit fixed effect when it is continuously executed in four or more special game as described above. Therefore, when the pending continuous production for the second special game executed as the special game is changed from the chance eye production to the same color pattern production, the chance eye production is continuously executed in the special game of four times or more. is avoided. As a result, it is possible to prevent mismatch between the result clearly indicated by the continuous execution of the chance eye performance as the pending continuous performance and the result of the jackpot lottery. On the other hand, the same-color symbol effect is, as described above, an effect suggesting a degree of expectation for a big win, and even if it is continuously executed in four or more special-design games, it does not become a finalized big-hit effect. Therefore, by changing the pending continuous production for the second special game executed as the special game from the chance eye production to the same color design production, the same color design production is continuously executed in the special game of 4 times or more. Even if it is done, since the result of the jackpot lottery is not clearly indicated by the continuous suspension performance and the result of the jackpot lottery, there is no inconsistency between the suspension continuous performance and the result of the jackpot lottery.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, when the pending continuous effect is changed from the chance eye effect to the same color pattern effect, the pending continuous effect is continuously executed in a plurality of special figure games, but the chance eye effect is changed to the same color pattern effect. Until the change is made, the holding continuous effect may be interrupted by executing a special symbol game in which images of the chance eye and the completely lost eye other than the symbols of the same color are displayed. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity with regard to continuous execution of the reserved continuous effect in four or more special game games. In addition, by interrupting the continuous pending performance, the player can be given the illusion that the same color pattern performance as a new continuous continuous performance is started after the chance performance as the continuous continuous performance is finished. As a result, the change from the chance eye presentation to the same color pattern presentation can be smoothly carried out without a sense of incongruity, and the change from the chance eye presentation to the same color pattern presentation can be camouflaged. By camouflaging as if the change from the chance presentation to the same color pattern presentation was not performed, the occurrence of inconvenience caused by the continuous execution of the chance presentation is avoided without being noticed by the player. can. By the way, in order to avoid the inconvenience when the chance eye presentation is continuously executed in the special game of 4 times or more, when the chance eye presentation is changed to the same color pattern presentation, the same color after the change is performed. The result of the jackpot lottery for the special game in which the symbol production is executed is out. Therefore, when the change from the chance eye effect to the same color pattern effect is performed, there is a concern that the player will realize that the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game in which the same color pattern effect after the change is executed is a loss. be. Therefore, by camouflaging as if the change from the chance eye production to the same color pattern production was not performed, the player can tell that the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game in which the same color pattern production after the change is executed is out. is prevented from being realized.

<Step S3664>
When the pending continuous production for the second special game executed as the special game is changed from the chance eye production to the same color pattern production, the MPU 51 adds the value of the short opening winning counter to the value of the counter of the number of times of holding continuous production execution. (step S3664).

Here, the value of the pending continuous effect execution count counter indicates the number of remaining special game games in which the pending continuous effect is executed. In addition, the value of the short opening winning prize counter is such that when the second winning opening 315 is short opened (short open normal game is executed), the number M of reservations for the second special game does not reach the upper limit. It is the number of game balls 99 entering the second winning hole 315 in the state. Therefore, the MPU 51 adds the value of the short-open winning counter to the value of the pending continuous performance execution count counter, and the value of the pending continuous performance execution count counter indicating the number of remaining special game games in which the pending continuous performance is executed. is reset to a value including the number of times of the pending continuous performance executed in the second special game.

<Steps S3665 and S3666>
When the value of the pending continuous effect execution count counter is reset (step S3664), the MPU 51 clears the value of the short opening winning counter (step S3665), sets the short opening closed flag to off (step S3666), The processing of steps S3625 to S3634 in FIG. 69 described above is executed, and the effect type setting processing ends.

[Stop symbol combination setting process]
Next, an example of the procedure of the stop symbol combination setting process executed in step S3337 of the command determination process of FIG. 60 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. FIG. The stop symbol combination setting process is a process of setting a symbol combination when the decorative symbols that are variably displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game are stopped and displayed. Here, FIGS. 73 and 74 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of the stop symbol combination setting process.

<Step S3701>
As shown in FIG. 73, in the stop symbol combination setting process, in step S3701, the MPU 51 first checks whether or not the chance flag indicating that the chance eye effect is set as the pending continuous effect is set to ON. to decide. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to set the chance number (see FIG. 65) as the stop symbol combination.

Then, when the chance flag is set to ON (step S3701: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3704, and when the chance flag is set to OFF (step S3701: No), the process to step S3702.

<Steps S3702 and S3703>
When the chance flag is set to OFF (step S3701: No), the MPU 51 sets the final chance flag indicating that the chance performance to be executed as the pending continuous performance in the special game is the last chance performance. is set to ON (step S3702).

Then, when the final chance flag is set to ON (step S3702: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the final chance flag to OFF (step S3703), and shifts the process to step S3704. On the other hand, when the final chance flag is set to OFF (step S3702: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3705.

<Step S3704>
If the second chance flag is set to ON (step S3701: Yes), or if the final chance flag that has been set to ON is set to OFF (step S3703), the MPU 51 stops displaying the combination of decoration symbols. , and the stop symbol combination setting process is terminated.

In addition, the type of the chance type to be stopped and displayed in the special game is, for example, a chance type selection table in which the type of chance type counter and the individual type of chance are associated with each other. Based on the value of the chance type counter, it is conceivable to set the chance type from the chance type selection table.

<Step S3705>
When the second chance flag and the final chance flag are set to OFF (step S3702: No), the MPU 51 sets the same color design flag indicating that the same color design effect is set as the pending continuous effect. It is determined whether or not there is (step S3705). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to set the same color symbol (see FIG. 65) as the stop symbol combination.

Then, when the same color pattern flag is set to ON (step S3705: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3708, and when the same color pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3705: No), the process to step S3706.

<Steps S3706 and S3707>
When the same color pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3705: No), the MPU 51 is the final same color pattern flag indicating that the same color pattern effect executed as the pending continuous effect in the special symbol game is the last same color pattern effect. is set to ON (step S3706).

And, when the final same color design flag is set to ON (step S3706: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the final same color design flag to OFF (step S3707), and shifts the process to step S3708. On the other hand, MPU51 transfers a process to FIG.74 S3709, when the last same color design flag is set to OFF (step S3706: Yes).

<Step S3708>
If the same color pattern flag is set to ON (step S3705: Yes), or if the final same color pattern flag that has been set to ON is set to OFF (step S3707), the MPU 51 stops and displays a combination of decorative patterns is set (step S3708), and the stop symbol combination setting process is terminated.

As for the type of the same color pattern to be stopped and displayed in the variation, for example, a same color pattern type selection table that associates the same color pattern type counter with the individual same color pattern is set, and the same color pattern at the time of setting the stop pattern combination is set. It is conceivable to set the same color pattern from the same color pattern type selection table based on the value of the type counter.

<Step S3709>
If a chance eye and a same color symbol are not set as a combination of decoration symbols to be stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 74, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a chance eye temporary stop flag is set to ON (step S3709). A chance eye temporary stop flag indicates that the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed when the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game is a big win and the fourth chance eye performance is executed as the pending continuous performance in the special game. It is a flag for temporarily stopping and displaying the chance eye before (for example, at the time of high-speed fluctuation of the decoration pattern before reach).

Then, when the chance eye temporary stop flag is set to ON (step S3709: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3710, and when the chance eye temporary stop flag is set to OFF (step S3709: No), the process proceeds to step S3713.

<Steps S3710 to S3712>
When the chance eye temporary stop flag is set to ON (step S3709: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the chance eye as a combination of decoration symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed (step S3710), and the combination of decoration symbols to be stopped and displayed. (step S3711). Then, the MPU 51 sets the chance eye temporary stop flag to OFF (step S3712), and ends the stop symbol combination setting process.

The chance number for the temporary stop display can be set in the same manner as in step S3704 described above. The double eyes to be stopped and displayed can be set in the same manner as in step S3104 of the command determination processing in FIG. 47 in the first embodiment.

<Step S3713>
If the chance number and the same color symbol are not set as the combination of decoration symbols to be stopped and the chance number is not set as the combination of decoration symbols to be temporarily stopped, the MPU 51 normally sets the combination of decoration symbols to be stopped and displayed (as described above). A combination of decorative symbols is set in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and the stop symbol combination setting process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, as the opening mode of the second winning opening 315 by the electric accessory 315b, the short opening that makes it difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the second winning opening 315, and the A long opening is set in which the opening time of the second winning opening 315 is longer than the short opening, and the game ball 99 easily enters the second winning opening 315. - 特許庁Further, in the present embodiment, the second special symbol for the second suspension is preferentially executed over the first special symbol game for the first suspension.

And, in the present embodiment, when the suspended continuous performance is being executed in the first special symbol game as the variation, the suspended continuous performance is executed continuously to the next first special symbol game that is suspended. is scheduled, when the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 due to the short opening of the second winning opening 315, the second special figure executed after the end of the first special figure game as the variation In the game, the pending continuous effect that has been executed in the first special figure game is continuously executed. That is, in the present embodiment, when the suspended continuous production is being executed in the first special game as the variation, the suspended continuous production is executed continuously to the next first special game that is held. is scheduled, even if the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 due to the short opening of the second winning opening 315, the second opening when the second winning opening 315 is short opening In the second special symbol game by the ball entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315, the pending continuous performance is continuously executed without executing the second special symbol special effect. Therefore, when the player is executing the suspended continuous performance in the first special game as the variation, the suspended continuous performance is executed continuously in the next first special game that is suspended. is scheduled, after the second special figure game executed triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 when the second winning port 315 is short-opened, the pending continuous effect is executed. I don't feel uncomfortable with what I don't do. As a result, the decline in interest in the game due to the non-execution of the pending continuous effect in the first special symbol game executed after the second special symbol game is prevented.

In particular, when the second winning hole 5 is short-opened, it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the second winning hole 315 compared to when the second winning hole 315 is long-opened (the number of balls entering is less), and the second special figure Since there is a high possibility that the player remembers that the pending continuous performance was executed before the execution of the game, the game ball 99 to the second winning port 315 when the second winning port 315 is short open. It is highly effective that the second special symbol game is not executed and the pending continuous performance is continuously executed in the second special symbol game by entering the ball.

Also, in the short opening where the game ball 99 is difficult to enter the second winning hole 315, it is assumed that the number of game balls 99 entering the second winning hole 315 is small, so the second winning hole 315 is short. Even if the suspension continuous performance is continuously executed in the second special symbol game by the ball entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 in the case of being open, the number of continuous execution times of the suspension continuous performance is also greatly increased. Therefore, there is a low possibility that the player will feel uncomfortable with the continuous execution of the pending continuous effect in the second special game. On the contrary, by continuously executing the pending continuous effect in the second special game, it is possible to effectively utilize the pending continuous effect in the second special game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the chance eye production, which becomes a jackpot fixed production when executed continuously in the special game of 4 times or more, is continuously executed in the special game of 4 times or more. In this case, if the results of the jackpot lottery for the special game after the 4th special game from the first special game where the chance performance is started are all out, the number of special games in which the chance performance is executed is 4 times. Before that, the pending continuous performance is changed from the chance eye performance to the same color pattern performance that does not result in a big win fixed performance even if it is continuously executed in four or more special symbol games. As a result, the continuous execution of the chance performance is avoided in four or more special games, so that the result is clearly indicated by the continuous execution of the chance performance as the pending continuous performance; It is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconsistency with the result of the jackpot lottery.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the suspended continuous production is being executed in the first special game as the variation, the suspended continuous production is executed continuously to the next first special game that is held. is scheduled, when the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 due to the long opening of the second winning opening 315, the second special figure executed after the end of the first special figure game as the variation While the second special symbol special effect is executed in the game, the capture image 78 of the pending continuous effect executed in the first special symbol game is displayed. That is, according to the capture image 78, the pending continuous effect was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special effect, and the continuous pending effect in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special effect It is specified or implied that the performance is executed. As a result, the possibility of the player forgetting that the pending continuous effect was being executed in the first special game before the execution of the second special effect is remarkably reduced, and after the second special effect is executed. It can be grasped that the pending continuous effect is executed in the first special figure game. Therefore, even if the pending continuous effect is resumed in the first special game after the execution of the second special special effect, the continuous continuous effect is executed in the first special game after the second special special effect is executed. It is possible to remarkably reduce the player's sense of incongruity. As a result, after the end of the second special symbol performance, the decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the suspended continuous performance executed before the execution of the second special symbol performance is prevented.

In particular, when the second winning opening 315 is opened long in the long open normal game, compared to the case where the second winning opening 315 is opened short in the short open normal game, the player is the second For a long time, the player becomes preoccupied with whether or not the game ball 99 enters the winning hole 315. - 特許庁Therefore, there is a high possibility that the player will forget that the pending continuous effect has been executed before the execution of the second special symbol game. In addition, when the second winning opening 315 is opened long in the long open normal game, compared to the case where the second winning opening 315 is opened short in the short open normal game, the second winning opening 315 Since the game ball 99 is easy to enter (the number of entering balls is large), the number of second special symbol games in which the second special symbol special effect is executed is large (the execution time of the second special symbol special effect is long). Therefore, the time from the end of the pending continuous effect before the execution of the 2nd special special effect (start of the 2nd special special effect) to the restart of the pending continuous effect due to the end of the 2nd special special effect In addition to being longer, compared to the case where the first special game is executed, the result of the jackpot lottery of the second special game in which the second special game is executed is a big win. Highly focused. Thus, when the second winning opening 315 is long opened in the long open normal game per game, compared to the case where the second winning opening 315 is opened short in the short open normal game per game, the second special Since there is a higher possibility that the player will forget that the pending continuous effect was executed before the execution of the figure game, during the execution of the second special symbol special effect The effect of specifying or suggesting that the pending continuous effect was executed in the first special symbol game is high.

In addition, in the present embodiment, design changes similar to those in the above-described first embodiment are possible within the applicable range.

[Third Embodiment]
In the above-described second embodiment, as the opening mode of the second winning opening by the electric accessory, the first opening (short opening), which is the first time, and the opening time of the second winning opening by the electric accessory is the first time. In a gaming machine in which a second opening (long opening), which is a second time longer than the time, is set, it is planned that the pending continuous effect is continuously executed for a predetermined number of first special symbol games. When the game ball enters the second winning port when it is open, in the second special game due to the game ball entering the second winning port when it is short open, the pending continuous effect is continuously executed. , On the other hand, in the second special symbol game by entering the game ball into the second winning hole in the case of long opening, the second special symbol special effect is executed, and at the time of execution of the second special symbol special effect It is specified or suggested that the pending continuous performance was executed before the execution of the second special symbol special performance.

However, there are various opening modes other than short opening and long opening as the opening mode of the second prize winning port by the electric accessory in the game machine. For example, as the opening mode of the second winning opening, there is an opening mode in which the opening time of the second winning opening is one type, an opening mode in which the second winning opening is opened multiple times for one normal game, and a low opening mode. There is an opening mode in which the opening time of the second prize winning port differs between the frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, and short opening and long opening are not necessarily set as the opening mode of the second prize winning port.

In addition, in the gaming machine, the opening mode of the second winning hole generally includes a mode in which the game ball easily enters the second winning hole, such as the long opening of the second embodiment described above. be. On the other hand, even during a game, there may be a situation where game balls do not flow down the game area of the game board. For example, if the player is interrupting the launch of the game ball when the reach effect is being executed or the hold for the first special figure has reached the upper limit, etc. When the game ball does not reach the game area of the board, the game ball does not flow down the game area of the game board. Therefore, even if the second winning hole is open in a manner that allows the game ball to easily enter, the second winning hole may be delayed due to a delay in launching the game ball by the player or a failure in launching the game ball. There are times when the number of balls entering the game ball is reduced. For example, even if the second winning port is opened so that the hold for the second special game can reach the upper limit, the second special game can be held without reaching the upper limit. The number of game balls entering the winning hole may be a small number of 2 or less, which is the same as the number of entering balls into the second winning hole at the time of short opening.

Here, in the above-described second embodiment, when the opening mode of the second winning opening is long opening, the opening mode of the second winning opening is long regardless of the number of balls entering the second winning opening. Corresponding to being open, the second special symbol special effect is executed in the second special symbol game by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole. On the other hand, as described above, even if the opening mode of the second winning hole is long open, the number of game balls entering the second winning hole without reaching the upper limit number of holding the second special game However, it may be a small number of 2 or less, which is about the same as the number of balls entering the second winning hole at the time of short opening. Therefore, although the opening mode of the second prize winning opening is short opening, the situation is the same as that when the opening mode of the second prize winning opening is long opening is executed. That is, substantially, a mismatch occurs between the opening mode of the second winning hole and the effect.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the holding continuous production is executed in the first special game as the special game, the holding continuous production is continued to the next first special game that is held. is scheduled to be executed (for example, special 1 change + special 1 suspension 1 + special 1 suspension 2 (see FIG. 55 (A))), regardless of the opening mode of the electric role, the second prize When the game ball enters the second winning hole by opening the mouth, the number of balls entering the second winning hole exceeds 0 and is a predetermined number or less (for example, 1 or 2), and the second winning hole The effect in the second special game executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole differs depending on whether the number of balls entering the slot exceeds a predetermined number (three or more). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 75(A), when the number of balls entering the second winning hole exceeds 0 and is equal to or less than a predetermined number (for example, 1 or 2), the above-mentioned second Similar to the short opening of the second winning opening of the embodiment, the pending continuous effect is continuously executed in the second special figure game. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 75(B), when the number of balls entering the second winning hole exceeds a predetermined number (three or more), the length of the second winning hole of the second embodiment is extended. At the same time, the second special symbol special effect is executed in the second special symbol game, and the pending continuous effect is executed before the second special symbol special effect is executed when the second special symbol special effect is executed. stated or implied.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when it is scheduled that the pending continuous effect is continuously executed in a predetermined number of first special game games, the opening of the second winning opening causes the game to enter the second winning opening. When the ball enters, the second special figure is given when the number of balls entering the second winning opening is more than 0 and is equal to or less than a predetermined number, and when the number of balls entering the second winning opening exceeds the predetermined number. Since the effects executed in the game are different, as the opening mode of the second winning hole by the electric accessory, a short opening that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning hole, and a short opening that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning hole. Even in a game machine other than a game machine set with a long opening that is easy to open, that is, regardless of the opening and closing mode of the second winning port, the suspended continuous effect is executed in the first special symbol game executed after the second special symbol game is finished. A decrease in interest in the game due to the fact that it is not played is prevented, and after the second special symbol special performance is finished, the suspended continuous performance executed before the execution of the second special symbol special performance is restarted. A decrease in interest in the game caused by this is prevented.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pending continuous performance is being executed in the first special game as the variation, the continuous pending performance is executed continuously to the next first special game that is held. is scheduled, if the game ball enters the second winning hole due to the opening of the second winning hole, if the number of balls entering the second winning hole is less than or equal to a predetermined number exceeding 0, When the number of balls entered into the second winning hole exceeds a predetermined number, the second winning hole is opened in an opening/closing mode in which the game balls can easily enter due to the fact that the performance executed in the second special game is different. Even when the number of game balls entering the second winning hole is small in some cases, it is possible to cope with the situation.

Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81, focusing on differences from the above-described second embodiment.

In this embodiment, when the holding continuous production is being executed in the first special game as the special game, the holding continuous production is executed continuously to the next first special game that is held. is scheduled, regardless of the opening mode, if a game ball enters the second winning hole due to the opening of the second winning hole, the number of balls entering the second winning hole exceeds 0 and is a predetermined number or less (for example, 1 or 2), and when the number of balls entering the second winning hole exceeds a predetermined number (3 or more), the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole is triggered. It differs from the above-described second embodiment in that the effect in the second special game to be executed is set differently. Therefore, in this embodiment, part of the procedure of the command determination process, the second special figure special effect setting process, and the effect type setting process differs from that of the above-described second embodiment.

[Command judgment processing]
The command determination process of this embodiment differs from the above-described second embodiment in the process when the second special figure pending command and the electric accessary product closing command are received.

Here, FIGS. 76 and 77 are flow charts for explaining differences in command determination processing from the above-described second embodiment.

<Step S3801>
As shown in Figure 76, in the command determination process of the present embodiment, when the second special figure pending command is received (step S3323: Yes), the second special figure pending information as in the second embodiment described above When the update process (step S3324) and the second special figure pending image display process (step S3325) are executed, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the electric role open prize counter (step S3801), and ends the command determination process do. That is, in the command determination process of the present embodiment, the number of balls entering the second winning hole 315 is counted by distinguishing between the case of the short opening and the case of the long opening as in the second embodiment. Instead, the number of balls entering the second winning opening 315 is counted by the electric opening winning counter without distinguishing between short opening and long opening. Further, in this embodiment, unlike the second embodiment described above, even if the second special figure pending command is received, the second special figure special effect setting process is not executed, and the electric accessary product closing command is received (step S3330: Yes), it is executed in step S3802 of FIG. 77 described later.

It should be noted that the electric role open winning counter is referenced in order to determine whether or not to execute the second special figure special effect in step S3901 of the second special figure special effect setting process in FIG. 78 described later.

<Step S3802>
As shown in FIG. 77, in the command determination process of the present embodiment, when the MPU 51 receives the electric accessory closing command (step S3330: Yes), it distinguishes between short opening and long opening. Without, when the electric accessary is closed, the second special figure special effect setting process is executed (step S3802). That is, in the present embodiment, when the second special figure special effect setting process that has been executed when the second special figure reservation command is received in the second embodiment described above receives the electric role product closing command set.

[Second special figure special effect setting process]
In the second special figure special effect setting process of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not to execute the second special figure special effect based on the number of balls entering the second winning opening 315 until the electric accessory 315b is closed. In terms of determination, it is different from the above-described second embodiment in which whether or not to execute the second special figure special effect is determined depending on whether it is short opening or long opening.

Here, FIG. 78 is a flow chart for explaining the difference between the second special figure special effect setting process of this embodiment and the above-described second embodiment.

<Steps S3901 to S3903>
As shown in FIG. 78, when the electric accessory 315b is closed, both the second special figure special effect setting flag and the second special figure special effect execution flag are set to OFF (steps S3501 and S3502 Both are No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the electric opening winning counter indicating the number of balls entering the second winning hole 315 is 3 or more (step S3901).

If the value of the electric role open winning prize counter is 3 or more (step S3901: Yes), the second special figure special effect setting flag is set to ON in order to start the second special figure special effect (step S3902), The second special figure special effect setting process is terminated.

If the value of the electric role opening winning counter is not 3 or more (step S3901: No), that is, if the value of the electric opening winning prize counter is 2 or less, the second special figure indicating that the second special figure special effect is not started A special effect non-setting flag is set to ON (step S3903), and the second special figure special effect setting process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, the second special effect is executed when the value of the electric role opening winning counter is 3 or more. The second special figure special effect may be executed when the value of the winning counter is 2 or more.

[Variation type (production pattern) setting process]
Variation type (effect pattern) setting processing of the present embodiment, regardless of the opening and closing form of the electric accessary 315b, when the number of game balls 99 entering the second winning opening 315 is three or more, the special In that the second special symbol effect is set for the second special symbol game as a figure game, regardless of the number of game balls 99 entering the second winning hole 315, the electric accessory 315b is long. It is different from the above-described second embodiment in which the second special figure special effect is set for the second special figure game as the special figure when it is released.

Here, FIGS. 79 to 81 are flowcharts for explaining differences in the variation type (effect pattern) setting process of this embodiment from the above-described second embodiment.

<Steps S4001 to S4003>
As shown in FIG. 79, when the second special symbol special effect is set for the second special symbol game as the special symbol game, the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game as the special symbol is If it is a jackpot (step S3645: YES), the MPU 51 clears the value of the electrical opening winning counter (step S4001). On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special game as the special game is not a big hit (step S3645: No), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the electric role opening winning counter (step S4002), and after subtraction is 0 (step S4003).

That is, in this embodiment, instead of the short-open winning counter and the long-open winning counter of the second embodiment, an electric opening winning counter common to the short opening and long opening is provided. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the processing of steps S4001 to S4003 regarding the electric opening winning counter is executed instead of the processing regarding the long opening winning counter in the second embodiment.

<Step S4004>
When it is determined that the second special figure special effect setting flag is set to OFF in step S3641 (step S3641: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4004 of FIG. It is determined whether or not the second special figure special effect non-setting flag indicating that is not started is set to ON. That is, the MPU 51 is the second special game to be executed first when the second special game as the special game is two or less game balls 99 entering the second winning hole 315. determine whether there is

And, MPU51, when the second special figure special effect setting flag is set to ON (step S4004: Yes), that is, the second special figure game as the special figure game, the game to the second winning opening 315 In the case of the second special symbol game to be executed first when the number of balls 99 entered is two or less, the second special symbol special effect setting flag is set to OFF (step S4005), and the process proceeds to step S3654. Transition.

On the other hand, when the second special symbol special effect setting flag is set to OFF (step S4004: No), the MPU 51 determines that the second special symbol game as the special symbol game is a game to the second winning opening 315. If it is not the second special symbol game that is executed first when the number of balls 99 entering is two or less, the process proceeds to step S3658 of FIG. to run.

<Steps S4005 to S4008>
When the second special figure special effect non-setting flag indicating that the second special figure special effect is not started is set to ON (step S4004: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off the second special figure special effect setting flag. By setting (step S4005) and moving the process to step S3654, the same process as in the above-described second embodiment is executed.

However, in this embodiment, as described above, instead of the short opening winning counter and the long opening winning counter of the second embodiment, an electric opening winning counter common to short opening and long opening is provided. there is Therefore, in the present embodiment, instead of the processing related to the long open winning counter in the second embodiment, the processing of step S4006 related to the electric opening winning counter and the processing of steps S4007 and S4008 of FIG. 81 are executed. be.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of balls entering the second winning hole 315 exceeds 0 and is equal to or less than a predetermined number (for example, 1 or 2), As with the short opening of the second winning opening 315, the pending continuous effect is continuously executed in the second special symbol game. On the other hand, when the number of balls entering the second winning hole 315 exceeds a predetermined number (three or more), the second special A second special figure special effect is executed in the figure game. Therefore, as the opening mode of the second prize winning port 315 by the electric accessory 315b, there is a short opening that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second prize winning port 315, and a long opening that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second prize winning port 315. is set, that is, regardless of the opening/closing mode of the second winning port 315, the suspension continuous effect is not executed in the first special symbol game executed after the second special symbol game is completed. In addition, after the end of the second special symbol special performance, the suspension continuous performance executed before the execution of the second special symbol special performance is resumed. A decline in interest is prevented.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the holding continuous effect is being executed in the first special game as the special game, the game ball 99 enters the second winning opening 315 by opening the second winning opening 315. When the number of balls entering the second winning port 315 exceeds a predetermined number exceeding 0, and when the number of balls entering the second winning port 315 exceeds a predetermined number, in the second special game Since the effect to be executed is different, even if the number of game balls entering the second prize winning port 315 is small when the second prize winning port 315 is opened in an opening/closing mode in which the game balls are likely to enter. be possible.

In addition, in the present embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first and second embodiments described above are possible within the applicable range.

Also, various modifications are possible in the above-described second and third embodiments. For example, in the above-described second and third embodiments, in the lower left area of the pattern display unit 341 as the capture image 78, a reduced image of the image of the pending continuous effect being executed in the first special figure game is displayed. However, the capture image 78 may be displayed by other methods as long as the variable display of the decoration pattern can be visually recognized. For example, the captured image 78 may be displayed on the back side of the decorative pattern as a background effect on the entire pattern display section 341, or may be displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern with a density (transparency) that allows the decorative pattern to be seen. Alternatively, only the outline may be displayed on the front side or the back side of the decorative pattern.

In addition, the pending continuous performance was executed in the first special symbol game before the execution of the second special symbol special effect, and the pending continuous performance was executed in the first special symbol game after the execution of the second special symbol special effect. The indication or suggestion is not limited to the display of the captured image 78, and other methods may be used as long as the variable display of the decoration pattern can be visually recognized. For example, the manifestation or suggestion is that the suspended continuous effect was executed in the first special game before the second special special effect was executed, and the first special game after the second special special effect was executed. A specific image different from the captured image 78, such as an icon image, a character image, or an image combining two or more of these, may be displayed to indicate that the continuous effect is to be executed.

In addition, the capture image 78 may be displayed during the entire period during execution of the second special symbol game, but during a part of the period during the execution of the second special symbol game, for example, from the start of the second special symbol game Only the period, only a certain period before the end of the second special game, may be displayed both for a certain period from the start of the second special game and for a certain period before the end of the second special game, and the capture image 78 display period is not particularly limited. In addition, the capture image 78 does not need to be displayed in all the second special symbol games when the second special symbol game is continuously performed a plurality of times. Only the second special game executed first, only the second special game executed last, may be displayed in the second special game executed first and last, and the capture image 78 is displayed. The number of times of the second special symbol game to be played and the number of times of the second special symbol game in which the second special symbol effect is executed may be different.

In addition, the holding continuous production was executed in the first special game before the execution of the second special special production such as the capture image, and the holding continuous production in the first special game after the execution of the second special special production The indication or suggestion that is executed may be displayed on display means other than the symbol display section 341 in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed. For example, the indication or suggestion may be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 that displays non-set values, which are game set values other than set values, which are game set values set in the gaming machine 10, or may be displayed as decoration. If there is provided a display means for executing image effects such as a sub liquid crystal display part other than the symbol display part 341 for executing variable display of patterns and image effects, the sub liquid crystal display part may be displayed on the display means. . In this way, the pending continuous effect was executed in the first special game before the second special special effect was executed, and the pending continuous effect was executed in the first special game after the second special special effect was executed. The indication or suggestion that the image effect is executed is displayed by another display means such as a sub liquid crystal display unit separate from the pattern display unit 341 where the image effect is executed, so that the variable display of the decorative pattern in the pattern display unit 341 or the image The manifestation or suggestion can be displayed on other display means without interfering with the display of the effect. As a result, it is possible to reliably and appropriately display both the variable display or image effect and the explicit or suggestive indication without impeding mutual visibility.

Also, the second special figure special effect is not limited to the examples of FIGS. For example, the second special figure special effect may display another image such as a character image instead of or in addition to the character image. The speaker 26 may execute a predetermined sound effect.

In addition, the second special figure special effect may be any effect that clearly indicates or suggests that a privilege is given to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the decorative pattern is not necessarily a jackpot pattern (for example, double eyes). It is not necessary to have an effect that the jackpot type is a probability variable jackpot when the condition is satisfied, provided that the jackpot is stopped and displayed. Predetermined conditions include, for example, that the decoration pattern becomes a reach, that a specific effect is executed, and the like. In other words, the present invention is applicable to gaming machines other than gaming machines in which the type of jackpot when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second prize winning port 315 is always a variable jackpot. Applicable. For example, the present invention, in addition to the loop probability variable machine like the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above, is a probability variable jackpot as a result of a jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315. It can also be applied to ST machines such as V-ST machines and 1 type 2 type mixed machines including hits other than.

Further, in the above-described second and third embodiments, the holding continuous effect and the second special figure special effect are executed in the normal game state which is the low frequency support mode, and the probability variation game state and the time saving game which are the high frequency support mode Although it was set so that the pending continuous effect and the second special special effect were not executed in the state, in both or one of the high frequency support mode, the probability variable game state and the time saving game state, the pending continuous effect and the second A special figure special effect may be executed.

Further, in the above-described second and third embodiments, when the holding continuous effect is executed continuously in the first special game of a predetermined number of times, the chance eye effect is continuous in the special game of 4 times or more Except for exceptions that avoid the occurrence of inconsistencies in execution, a single type of pending continuous effect is executed in each first special game, but different pending continuous effects are executed in each first special game It may be executed, and if it is a combination that can be executed as an effect, a plurality of types of pending continuous effects (for example, a mini character effect and a zone effect) may be executed at the same time in one first special game.

Further, in the above-described second and third embodiments, the timing of changing the type of the pending continuous effect is the timing at which inconsistency does not occur between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content specified by the predetermined pending continuous effect. For example, the special game that is executed next to the special game that is executed at the stage where it is found that there may be a mismatch between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content that is specified by the pending continuous effect. , to a special game in which there is a mismatch between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content indicated by the continuous pending performance (for example, a special game executed for the fourth time from the start of a predetermined continuous continuous performance). I wish I had. That is, the change timing of the type of pending continuous effect is the first special game and the second special game if there is no mismatch between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content indicated by the pending continuous effect. It may be any of

Of course, even if the number of special game games in which the pending continuous effect is executed when the continuous continuous effect other than the chance effect is executed is a predetermined number (for example, 4 times) or more, the type of continuous continuous effect You may make changes. That is, even if no inconvenience occurs even if a single type of suspended continuous effect is continuously executed for a predetermined number of times or more, the type of the suspended continuous effect may be changed. In this way, by changing the type of the pending continuous performance when no inconvenience occurs even if the single type of pending continuous performance is continuously executed for a predetermined number of times or more, the single type of pending continuous performance can be used as a special feature. To prevent a player from feeling bored when the game is continuously performed, the interest of the game caused by the continuous execution of a single type of reserved continuous performance in many special-design games. is prevented from decreasing.

In addition, not only when changing the type of pending continuous performance to prevent inconsistency between the result of the jackpot lottery and the content indicated by the continuous pending performance, but also changing the type of continuous pending performance When performing, if the fluctuation display time for the hold of the first special game that triggered the start of the hold continuous production is long, that is, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the hold is a big hit, or the big hit expectation is high. When the ready-to-win production is executed, the type of the pending continuous production is set so that the expectation of the jackpot is higher in the type of the specific pending continuous production after the change compared to the type of the predetermined continuous production pending production before the change. You may make changes. For example, if the predetermined pending continuous effect before the change is a mini character effect with the lowest jackpot expectation, the specific pending continuous effect after the change is a chance effect with a higher jackpot expectation than the mini character effect, a same color pattern effect, or Zone production (mode production) may be set, and if the predetermined pending continuous production before change is a chance eye production or same color pattern production, as a specific pending continuous production after change, chance eye production and same color pattern production A zone effect (mode effect) with a higher degree of expectation for a big hit may be set. In this case, the difference in the expected degree of jackpot between the specific pending continuous effect after the change and the predetermined continuous pending effect before the change is set to, for example, 10% or more, preferably 25% or more.

Further, the change of the pending continuous effect is not limited to one time, and may be performed multiple times.

Moreover, in each embodiment, it is also possible to apply the matters described in other embodiments within the applicable range.

[Other Modifications]
In each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the outer frame 14 included in the gaming machine 10 is generally made of wood, but may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, or may be made of steel (carbon steel). ), cast iron, cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, alloy steel, and other metals. In addition, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the inner frame 12 provided in the game machine 10 may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc., and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, It may be made of metal such as cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the front frame 11 included in the game machine 10 may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, It may be made of metal such as cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11, and the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12. The inner frame 12 may be locked unopenable with respect to the front frame 11 and the back pack unit 13 may be locked unopenable with respect to the inner frame 12 by locking means such as two cylinder locks. Locking means for making the frame 11 unopenable and locking means for making the back pack unit 13 unopenable to the inner frame 12 may be separately provided. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the inner frame 12 is configured to be openable and closable with respect to the front frame 11 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the inner frame 12 in a front view on the front frame 11. However, a configuration in which the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 may be adopted by rotatably supporting the right end portion of the inner frame 12 in the front view on the front frame 11 . Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the left end portion of the back pack unit 13 in the front view is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12, so that the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12. However, a configuration in which the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 is adopted by rotatably supporting the right end of the back pack unit 13 in front view on the inner frame 12. may Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the game board 31 included in the game machine 10 may be made of resin such as ABS resin, polycarbonate resin, or acrylic resin, and may be made of steel (carbon steel), cast iron, It may be made of metal such as cast steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloy, copper alloy, or alloy steel. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modified examples, the gaming machine 10 employs a configuration in which the upper tray 23 and the lower tray 24 are provided. good. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, a configuration in which the firing handle 22 is provided on the right side in front view is adopted, but a configuration in which the firing handle 22 is provided in another part such as the left side in front view is adopted. good too. Also, a configuration in which a plurality of firing handles 22 are provided, such as a configuration in which firing handles 22 are provided on both the right side and the left side in front view, may be adopted. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the touch sensor 21a capable of detecting whether or not the player is touching the firing handle 22 (whether or not the player's hand is in contact with the firing handle 22) fires. Although the configuration provided in the handle 22 has been adopted, a configuration in which the touch sensor 21a is omitted as the firing handle 22 may be adopted. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the shooting means capable of shooting game balls. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball is shot using the wind pressure generated when the compressed gas is ejected. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, when the shooting handle 22 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, for example, one game ball is released every 0.6 sec (100 game balls per minute). Although it is configured to be shot, it may be configured to shoot less than 100 (eg, 60) game balls per minute, or 100 or more (eg, 200) per minute. A game ball may be launched. Also, the configuration may be such that the game ball is shot in a state in which the shooting handle 22 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount. Alternatively, the game balls may be shot one by one by flipping the lever. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, a configuration including the speaker 26 as a means capable of outputting sound was adopted, but a configuration including an earphone jack in addition to the speaker 26 or instead of the speaker 26 may be adopted. good. According to this configuration, by connecting the earphone or headphone brought by the game ball to the earphone jack, the sound of the game machine 10 being played is not disturbed by the sound of the game machine 10 around the game ball. You can fully enjoy yourself. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the first special symbol or the second special symbol that starts the variable display based on the game ball entering the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 is displayed. Although a configuration including a 7-segment display device was adopted as a possible means, other configurations can be adopted as a means capable of displaying the first special symbol and / or the second special symbol, for example, a plurality of LED lamps arranged in a row or A configuration in which they are arranged in a matrix, a configuration including a display device such as a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display device, a configuration including a halogen lamp, or the like may be employed. In the second and third embodiments described above, the predetermined suggestive information is the capture image 78 displayed in the pattern display section 341 in which decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner. It may be displayed on display means other than the unit 341 . In this case, although it is conceivable to set a dedicated display means for displaying the predetermined suggestive information as the display means, it is conceivable to use the display means already provided in the game machine 10 . That is, the predetermined suggestive information is, for example, the 7-segment display section 39 that displays non-set values, which are game set values other than the set values that are game set values set in the gaming machine 10, or the main display section 36 (normal It may be displayed on the symbol display portion 361, the first special symbol display portion 362, the second special symbol display portion 363, the first special symbol reservation number display portion 364 and the second special symbol reservation number display portion 365). Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, a configuration including two LED lamps is employed as means capable of displaying normal symbols that start variable display based on the passage of game balls through the through gates 317L and 317R. However, other configurations can be adopted as means for displaying normal patterns, such as a configuration in which three or more LED lamps are arranged in a row or matrix, a 7-segment display device, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display device. A configuration including a display device such as a display device or a configuration including a halogen lamp may be employed. In addition, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, various configurations can be adopted as display means such as the pattern display unit 341 capable of displaying decorative patterns. An LED display device, a plasma display device, a rotating drum display device, a light guide plate, a three-dimensional hologram display device, or a combination of two or more of these may be employed. Further, in the above-described second and third embodiments, when the predetermined suggested information is continuously displayed, the predetermined suggested information is continued by continuing to display the capture image 78 displayed on the pattern display section 341. However, the suggested information to be displayed is not limited to the captured image 78, and may be other information. For example, it may be displayed in the first special symbol game immediately before the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game in which the chance eye effect is continuously displayed, and the first special symbol game It may be a text description of the entire screen or an image displayed on the screen. In that case, regardless of the performance that was displayed continuously, the type of performance that was continuously displayed at that time, the number of jackpots, the number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot, the number of held balls, the number of fired balls, etc. There may be, a combination of a plurality of them, or one of them. In addition, in the above-described second and third embodiments, a combination of stop symbols such as a chance eye effect is used as the pending continuous effect. Anything is fine. For example, the display object displayed on the back side of the changing pattern may be displayed continuously in the first special game a plurality of times, for example, a specific character, which is displayed continuously It may be characters suggesting that, a display body displayed in a part of the background image, or the background itself. Also, the effect to be changed is the same as long as the player can visually recognize that the continuous effect has been changed. For example, the effect may be changed to display a specific character. In addition, in each of the above-described embodiments and modified examples, decorative patterns are not limited to numerals, and various characters, graphics, symbols, patterns, combinations of two or more of these, and the like can be employed. For example, as the decorative pattern, alphabets, Greek letters, hiragana, katakana, kanji, various characters, combinations of two or more of these, and the like may be employed. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the number of symbol rows in which decorative symbols are scrolled is not limited to three, and may be, for example, two or less, or four or more. In the case of adopting a configuration in which there is only one decorative pattern row, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is won when a specific decorative pattern (for example, "7") stops. In addition, in the case of adopting a configuration in which there are two or more columns of decorative patterns, for example, when the same decorative pattern stops on a specific line (effective line), a jackpot is won. good too. In addition, in the second and third embodiments described above, zone production (mode production) with a high degree of expectation for a big hit was set as the pending continuous production, but as the pending continuous production, zone production (mode production) It may include background effects. That is, a plurality of background effects may be set as the pending continuous effects, and in this case, it is conceivable to set different degrees of expectation for big wins for the plurality of background effects. Then, when setting a plurality of background effects with different jackpot expectations as a pending continuous effect, when a low-expectation background effect with a low jackpot expectation is executed as a pending continuous effect, from the low-expectation background effect, more jackpots It is also conceivable to change to a high-expectation background production with high expectations. Of course, it is also possible to set a plurality of background effects with similar degrees of expectation for big wins, for example, a plurality of low-expectation background effects with low expectations for big wins, and change the background effects among the low-expectation background effects. In addition, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, various configurations can be adopted as the special electric accessory such as the opening/closing door 319 that opens and closes the big winning opening such as the variable winning opening 316. A rotating shaft extending in a substantially horizontal direction is provided, and the plate-shaped member rotates forward about the rotating shaft to open the big winning opening, or a plate that can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board 31. A configuration in which the large prize opening is opened and closed by the shaped member, a configuration in which the large prize opening is opened and closed by rotating the feather member in the left-right direction (clockwise direction and counterclockwise direction), or the like may be employed. In addition, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the so-called loop probability variable machine was described, but for example, on the condition of V winning in a jackpot game such as a V-ST machine, after the end of the jackpot game A player such as a probability variable gaming state In a gaming machine that shifts to a game state that is more advantageous, a V winning opening is provided in a large winning opening such as the variable winning opening 316.例文帳に追加The V winning opening may always be able to win a prize when the big winning opening is opened, but it may be opened when a specific condition is met. Specific conditions include, for example, execution of a specific round game (eg, first round game, final round game). In addition, when the V winning opening is configured to be opened when a specific condition is satisfied, a movable member capable of opening and closing the V winning opening is provided in the V winning opening, and the operation of the movable member is controlled. A configuration in which the winning opening is opened and closed can be adopted. In addition, when a V winning opening is opened when a specific condition is satisfied, a configuration may be adopted in which the V winning opening is closed when a game ball enters the V winning opening or after a certain period of time has elapsed. . In addition, as the effect to be changed (suspended continuous effect), it may be the type of decoration pattern used in the first special game, the first

It may be the color tone of the background of the special symbol game, it may be a part of the background of the first special symbol game, or it may be the entire background of the first special symbol game. In addition, the timing to be changed may be at the start of the fluctuation of the first special game, or may be in the middle of the fluctuation, and a specific event in the fluctuation (for example reach establishment, super reach development, special reach development) It may be at the timing when is generated or at the time when the symbol is stopped. For example, part or all of the background before the occurrence of a specific event (specific effect image) is a different type of background at the timing when a specific event (e.g. reach establishment, super reach development, special reach development) occurred (predetermined effect image) may be used. Also, a plurality of the big winning openings may be provided. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a large winning opening having a V winning opening and a large winning opening not having a V winning opening are separately provided. In addition, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, there are various types of normal electric accessories such as the electric accessory 315b that switches whether or not there is a restriction on entry of the game ball into the start winning opening such as the second winning opening 315. For example, a tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory (so-called electric chew) that can open a pair of movable valves (feather members) to the left and right, or a rotating shaft that extends in a substantially horizontal direction below the plate-shaped member. A configuration in which the starting prize winning opening can be opened by rotating the plate-shaped member forward about the rotation axis, and a configuration in which the starting winning opening is opened and closed by a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front and back direction of the game board 31 , a configuration in which the starting prize opening is opened and closed by rotating the feather member in the left-right direction (clockwise direction and counterclockwise direction) may be adopted. Also, in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the number of prize balls set in each winning opening (general winning opening 313, first winning opening 314, second winning opening 315, variable winning opening 316, etc.) is an example. It is possible to realize a plurality of types of gaming machines 10 with different specifications by appropriately changing the number of prize balls set in each winning hole.

[Fourth embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a so-called loop probability variable machine, which is a type 1 game machine, has been described. By the way, as a gaming machine, there is a 1 type 2 type mixing machine in addition to the loop variable machine. In the 1 type 2 type mixing machine, 2 types of jackpot games, ie, a type 1 jackpot game and a type 2 jackpot game can be executed. For example, when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, the first jackpot game is executed after the end of a special game indicating that the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot. Further, after the end of the type 1 jackpot game, the profit state is shifted to a time-saving game state in which the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole is facilitated. On the other hand, in the two types of jackpot games, when the jackpot lottery result triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole in the time-saving game state is a small hit, a predetermined amount in the small hit game based on the small hit It is executed on the condition that the game ball enters the winning hole.

In addition, in gaming machines of various specifications, it is conceivable to shift to a time-saving gaming state on condition that the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss. For example, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out, the type of loss is a time-saving pattern stop-off in which the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed, or a predetermined number of times in the low probability mode (for example, the denominator of the jackpot probability of 2.5 It is conceivable that the lottery results are consecutively lost (so-called ceiling) in the jackpot lottery of double to triple).

In gaming machines, it is important to raise the level of attention and interest in the game to increase the player's willingness to play the game. That is, when adopting a configuration in which the conditions for the time-saving game are established and the state is shifted to the time-saving game state when the time-saving pattern is not stopped, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play by increasing the degree of attention and interest in the game. It is important to provide new playability that is possible.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, the gaming machine is provided with "gaming condition fulfillment" as the first trigger or second trigger, and is provided with a "profit state" as a predetermined state executed by the predetermined state executing means. Also, it has a "low-profit state" as a first state and a "high-profit state" as a second state that can be executed by the state execution means, and a "high-profit condition satisfied state" as a specific state.

The first trigger and the second trigger may be those that satisfy the game conditions at different timings. As the first and second triggers, for example, a predetermined result in a predetermined lottery, a game ball entering a predetermined area, and a game ball entering a predetermined area are detected by a detector. A lottery is held as a result, a trigger for a predetermined lottery is established, a predetermined game state is established, a specific game state occurs due to the establishment of the predetermined game state, and a specific game state is established. terminating, any combination thereof, and the like.

The predetermined state may be a profit state in which a profit is given in a predetermined period, or a profit state in which there is a high possibility of giving a profit. As the predetermined state, for example, a predetermined number of time-saving gaming states, a predetermined number of probability variable gaming states, a predetermined period of time-saving gaming states, a predetermined period of probability variable gaming states, a specific jackpot state of a predetermined period, a small hit state of a predetermined period, etc. Any combination of

The first state and the second state are at least high or low between a state in which a predetermined event is controlled in a manner advantageous to the player and a state in which the predetermined event is controlled in a manner more advantageous to the player than this state. It is acceptable if it is controlled in two profit states so that there is a relative difference in profit to the player. As the first state and the second state, for example, a predetermined movable object is caused to perform a predetermined action, a probability of causing a predetermined movable object to perform a predetermined action is increased, and a probability of causing a predetermined movable object to perform a predetermined action is set to 100. , executing a lottery to cause a predetermined movable object to perform a predetermined motion with a predetermined probability, improving the time for causing a predetermined movable object to perform a predetermined motion, and any combination thereof.

Further, in this game machine, the specific value is determined when the second opportunity is established in a predetermined state. The specific value may be any numerical value that allows the execution period to be determined by the specific value. Specific values include, for example, the number of times a predetermined game state is executed, a reference value, specific time data, a specific random number value, or any combination thereof that is the basis for executing the game state.

The specific state may be a state in which a high profit condition is established in which it can be determined that a high profit is given when a predetermined profit is given. High-profit conditions include exceeding or falling below a threshold for a predetermined number of times, exceeding or falling below a threshold for a predetermined period of time, obtaining a predetermined judgment result, and storing predetermined information. etc. Further, as long as the method for determining whether or not the high-profit condition is satisfied is realizable, any method such as determination by software, determination by a hardware circuit, or a combination thereof may be used.

The execution period may be determined based on a specific value. As the execution period, for example, the number of special games, the execution period of the game, the number of winnings of game balls to various winning openings, the number of passing through gates of game balls, the number of openings of variable winning openings, the fluctuation time of various variable symbols , the display time of the stop result of various variable symbols, the time of giving profit as the stop result of various variable symbols, any combination thereof, and the like.

Here, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as a result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second prize winning opening that can be won by the support of the electric accessory, the result includes a jackpot, a small win and a loss. . In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as the time-saving gaming state, the short-opening time-saving gaming state (second time-saving gaming state) as a low-profit state in which the time to open the electric role is short, and the time to open the electric role is long. It includes a long open time saving game state (third time saving game state) as a high profit state.

The short-open time-saving game state (second time-saving game state) is shifted to the condition of the second time-saving game after the end of the type 1 jackpot game in the normal game state (non-time-saving game state), and the profit state is the second. The opening time of the second winning hole is set to a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds) that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning hole. In this way, in the short-open time-saving gaming state (second time-saving gaming state), it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second winning port, so it is difficult to receive the second special jackpot lottery, so the small winning game It is a low-profit state in which it is difficult or impossible to enter a game ball into a V winning opening that not only is difficult to be executed but also provides an opportunity to execute a second type big winning game in a small winning game. As a result, in the short open time short game state, the two types of jackpot games are difficult to be executed or are not substantially executed.

On the other hand, the long open time short gaming state (third time short gaming state) is transferred when the predetermined conditions described later are satisfied in the short open time short gaming state (second time short gaming state), and the opening time of the second winning opening A long time (for example, 3 seconds) is set so that the game ball can easily enter the second winning hole. In this way, in the long open time short game state, it is easy to enter the game ball into the second winning hole, so that it is easy to receive the second special jackpot lottery. A game ball can be entered into a V winning opening that provides an opportunity to execute a second type big winning game in a small winning game. Therefore, the long open time short game state is a high profit state that is more advantageous to the player than the short open time short game state because the two types of jackpot games are easily executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole includes the big hit, the small hit and the loss as described above. A time saving pattern stop off is set in which a time saving pattern that can be shifted to a long working time short game state after the end of the second special game is stopped and displayed. When this time saving pattern stop off is set, there is a possibility that the conditions for the time saving game are established and the game moves to the time saving game state.

Here, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned predetermined that is shifted from the short-open short gaming state (second short-time gaming state) as a low-profit state to the long open short-time gaming state (third short-time gaming state) that is a high-profit state The conditions are, first, that the result of the jackpot lottery in the short-open time-saving game state is out of time-saving design stoppage, and secondly, the number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state set for the time-saving design stoppage ( specific value) is greater than the number of remaining time-saving games (predetermined unexecuted value) in the short open time-saving game state (establishment of specific conditions). In this case, the high-profit condition is established and the game is shifted to a high-profit state, namely, a long-open short-time game state (third short-time game state). For example, if the number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state set for the time-saving symbol stoppage is 50 times, if the remaining number of time-saving games in the short open time-saving game state is 49 times or less, the high profit condition In contrast to the establishment state and transition to the long time reduction game state (second state) which is a high profit state, if the number of remaining time reduction games in the short open time reduction game state is 50 times or more, the high profit condition is not established, the state is not shifted to the long working hours game state, and the short working hours playing state (second working hours short game state) is continued as a low profit state.

Thus, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the time-saving gaming state (in this embodiment, the third time-saving gaming state, which is a long open time-saving gaming state) is a high-profit state in which two types of jackpot games can be executed In order to shift to the game state), the time-saving game state as a low-profit state that shifts to the conditions for the time-saving game after the end of the type 1 jackpot game (in this embodiment, the second time-saving game state, which is a short-open time-saving game state game state) is a condition, and the result of the jackpot lottery in the short-open time-saving gaming state (second time-saving gaming state) as a low-profit state is out of time-saving design stop, and the time-saving design is out of stop When the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games to be set is greater than the number of remaining time-saving games in the relevant time-saving game state (second time-saving game state), the conditions for a high-profit state are established and the transition is made. . In other words, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has stricter conditions for shifting to the long-open, short-time gaming state, which is a high-profit state in which two types of jackpot games can be executed, than conventional one-type and two-type mixing machines. Further, a new game property using the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of times of time saving games set for the time saving pattern stop deviation is provided. As a result, in the present embodiment, the game is expected that the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the short open time saving game state as a low profit state that is shifted to the condition of the time saving game after the end of the type 1 jackpot game. progress of the game can be enjoyed, and the progress of the game is focused on whether or not it shifts to a long-open short-time game state, which is a high-profit state in which two types of jackpot games can be executed when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed. can enjoy As a result, in the one-kind and two-kind mixed machine, it is possible to increase the degree of attention and interest in the game, and improve the willingness of the player to play the game.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the short-open short gaming state (second short-time gaming state) as a low-profit state is shifted to the long-open short-time gaming state (third short-time gaming state), which is a high-profit state. The condition is that the result of the jackpot lottery in the short-open time-saving gaming state as a low-profit state is out of time-saving design stoppage, and the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving design stoppage is The conditions for a high-profit state greater than the number of remaining time-saving games in the short-open time-saving game state are established. In this way, the result of the jackpot lottery in the short-open time-saving game state as a low-profit state is the time-saving symbol stop off, and the upper limit value (regulation number of times) is greater than the number of remaining time-saving games in the short-open time-saving game state, the conditions for the high-profit state are satisfied, and the state changes from the short-open time-saving game state as the low-profit state to the high-profit state. When moving to a certain long open short gaming state, the less the remaining number of short open time games in the short open short gaming state as a low profit state (the higher the number of special game executions in the short open short gaming state), A game property is imparted in which it is easy to shift to a long-open, short-time game state, which is a high-profit state. As a result, as the number of remaining time-saving games in the short-open time-saving game state as a low-profit state decreases (as the number of times the special game is executed in the second time-saving game increases), the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed. Since the expectation of the game and whether it will be shifted to the long-open, short-time game state, which is a high-profit state, the attention will be further increased, so that the degree of attention and interest in the game will be further increased, and the player's willingness to play will be further improved. be able to.

The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 82 to 113, focusing on differences from the first embodiment described above. However, important matters in this embodiment may be explained again even if they have already been explained in the first embodiment.

[Configuration of Gaming Machine 10]
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. FIG. Here, FIG. 82 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the game machine 10 according to this embodiment, and FIGS. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view showing a main part;

As shown in FIG. 82, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment is provided with two through gates 317L and 317R as in the first embodiment. The through gate 317L is provided in the left area of the game board 31, and a game ball launched to the left area of the game board 31 can pass through. This left through gate 317L has an entering ball sensor 317La (see FIG. 7), and the presence or absence of passage of a game ball to the through gate 317L is determined by the entering ball sensor 317La. The through gate 317R is provided in the right side area of the game board 31, and a game ball launched to the right side area of the game board 31 can pass through. The right through gate 317R has a ball entering sensor 317Ra (see FIG. 7), and whether or not a game ball has passed through the through gate 317R is determined by the entering ball sensor 317Ra.

By providing the through gates 317L and 317R in the left side area and the right side area of the game board 31 in this manner, the game ball can be launched to either the left side area of the game board 31 or the right side area of the game board 31. Also, based on the passing of the game ball through the through gates 317L and 317R, the conditions for the game of the general pattern lottery are satisfied, and the general pattern per lottery is executed. And, when the lottery result in the general pattern per lottery is a win, the general pattern per game is executed, and the electric accessory 315b is opened in the general pattern per game, so that the game ball enters the second winning port 315. 99 is allowed to enter. That is, in the present embodiment, not only the time-saving game state, which is the high-frequency support mode, but also the second winning opening in the normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode, by launching the game ball 99 in the left region of the game board 31 It is possible to enter a game ball into 315 .

In addition, unlike the above-described first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured as a one-type two-type mixing machine instead of a loop variable machine, and is provided on the right side area of the game board 31. A feather accessory device 83 is provided. The feather accessory device 83 is operated in a small winning game that is executed when the result of the big winning lottery in the second special game is a small winning, and to the V winning opening 833 described later in the small winning game. It gives an opportunity to execute the second type jackpot game by entering the game ball.

The feather accessory device 83 is provided above the variable winning opening 316 and on the right side of the pattern display section 341 . As shown in FIG. 83, the feather accessory device 83 has an introduction port 831 for introducing the game ball 99 into the interior of the feather accessory device 83, and a closed position (solid line position in FIG. 83) for closing the introduction port 831. and an open position (position indicated by a dashed line in FIG. 83) for opening the introduction port 831 by a driving means such as a solenoid (not shown). In a state where the inlet 831 is closed by the movable feather portion 832 due to the movable feather portion 832 being in the standby position, the game ball 99 is not introduced into the feather accessory device 83 . On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 84(A) and 84(B), when the inlet 831 is opened by the movable feather 832 being in the open position, the game ball 99 can be received by the movable feather 832. It is possible. The game ball 99 received by the movable wing portion 832 can be introduced into the wing accessory device 83 through the inlet 831 . The movable feather portion 832 is operated to the open position when the lottery result in the big winning lottery triggered by the winning of the second winning port 315 is a small winning (see FIGS. 87(A) and 87(B)), The introduction port 831 is opened for a predetermined time, for example, for a time (1.8 seconds or less) for one to three game balls 99 to enter the feather accessory device 83 . Of course, the opening time of the introduction port 831 at the time of the small win may be appropriately set, and is not limited to the time shown above.

Inside the feather accessory device 83, a V winning opening 833, a normal winning opening 834, and a V winning opening opening/closing section 835 are provided. The V winning opening 833 and the normal winning opening 834 are respectively provided with ball entry sensors (not shown), and these ball entry sensors detect that a game ball has entered the V winning opening 833 or the normal winning opening 834. be done. Between the closed position (see FIG. 84(A)) in which the V winning port 833 is closed and the open position (see FIG. 84(B)) in which the V winning port 833 is opened, It is rotated by driving means such as a solenoid (not shown). The V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 normally waits at a closed position to close the V winning opening 833, and is operated at a predetermined timing when the lottery result in the big winning lottery is a small winning, thereby opening the V A winning opening 833 is opened.

Here, the predetermined timing at which the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 is operated is set according to the game state in which a big winning lottery with a small winning lottery result is executed, as will be described later. Specifically, the predetermined timing is, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the short-open time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state and second time-saving gaming state) to be described later is a small hit (Fig. 87 (A) See), it is set to the opening (first opening) of the first small winning game executed by the small winning (see FIGS. 91(A) and 91(C)). The first opening of the first small winning game is executed before execution of the movable feather portion operating game in which the introduction port 831 is opened by operating the movable feather portion 832 . Therefore, when the predetermined timing for operating the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 in the first small winning game is set to the first opening, the game ball 99 does not enter the V winning opening 833 . Therefore, in the first small winning game executed when the result of the big winning lottery in the first time saving game state and the second time saving game state is a small win, the game ball 99 is not entered into the V winning opening 833, In the short-open time-saving game state (the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state), the later-described two-type jackpot game is not executed based on the result of the jackpot lottery being a small hit.

On the other hand, the predetermined timing at which the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 is operated is when the result of the big winning lottery in the long open short gaming state (third short gaming state) is a small winning (Fig. 87 (B) See), is set to the movable feather portion operating game of the second small winning game executed by the small winning (see Figure 91 (B) and Figure 91 (C)). In the movable wing actuation game, the introduction port 831 is opened by actuating the movable wing portion 832 , and the game ball 99 can enter the interior of the feather accessory device 83 through the introduction port 831 . Therefore, when the predetermined timing at which the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 is operated is set to the movable feather operation game, the game ball 99 entering the inside of the feather accessory device 83 can enter the V winning opening 833. becomes. Therefore, in the second small winning game executed when the result of the big winning lottery in the long open short gaming state (third short gaming state) is a small winning, the game ball 99 can enter the V winning opening 833. Yes, in the third time-saving game state, a two-type jackpot game, which will be described later, can be executed based on the fact that the result of the jackpot lottery is a small hit.

[System Configuration of Gaming Machine 10]
Next, various tables and the like used in the main controller 4 of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 87. FIG.

[Performance table for normal figures, etc.]
Here, FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example of a general-purpose hit/failure table and the like. In this embodiment, two types of the normal game state normal pattern hit/failure table shown in FIG. 85(A) and the time-saving game state normal pattern hit/failure table shown in FIG. 85(B) are set as the normal pattern hit/failure table. It is That is, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the normal game state and the time-saving game state, the normal pattern per probability is different, the time-saving game state than the normal game state normal pattern per probability is set higher .

The normal game state normal figure per hit/fail table shown in FIG. 85(A) is a table used in the normal game per lottery in the normal game state which is the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 85(A), in the normal game state general pattern per hit/fail table, when the value of the general pattern random number counter C4 is 0, the general pattern per normal pattern random number counter C4 has a value of 1 to 299. If set to off. In other words, the normal game state (low-frequency support mode) is a low-profit state in which the probability of winning a normal drawing in the normal drawing is set to 1/300, and the second winning port 315 is difficult to open.

Figure 85 (B) shown in the time-saving game state general figure per right or wrong table is a table used in the general figure per lottery in the time-saving game state which is the high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 85 (B), in the time-saving game state general pattern hit/failure table, contrary to the normal game state general pattern hit/failure table, when the value of the general pattern random number counter C4 is 0, the normal pattern When the value of the per random number counter C4 is 1 to 299, it is set per normal pattern. In other words, in the time-saving game state (high frequency support mode), the probability per normal pattern in the lottery per normal pattern is set to 299/300, and the probability per normal pattern is set higher than the normal game state (low frequency support mode). It is in a high-profit state in which the second winning opening 315 is easily opened.

Thus, in the low-frequency support mode gaming state, the second winning port 315 is less likely to be opened, and the player is less likely to obtain a particular profit by opening the second winning port 315 .

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state are set as the time-saving game state as described later, but any of the first to third time-saving game states Also in, the probability per normal pattern is set to be the same. Of course, the normal pattern per probability may be set differently depending on the type of the time-saving gaming state. In addition, normal game state (low frequency support mode) normal pattern per probability, and normal pattern per probability in time-saving game state (high frequency support mode) is shown in Figure 85 (A) and Figure 85 (B) It is not limited to the examples and can be changed as appropriate. In addition, as a game state that refers to the short game state normal figure per hit or miss table, it may be referred to when it is a special figure probability fluctuation state or when it is a time reduction game state.

Here, FIG. 85 (C) shows the type of game state and the opening mode (open FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a relationship with time).

As shown in FIG. 85 (C), when the lottery result per normal pattern is per normal pattern, the electric accessory 315b is opened in the game per normal pattern as described above to the second winning opening 315 The game ball 99 can be entered, but the opening form (opening time) of the electric accessory 315b in the game per normal pattern is set according to the game state in which the lottery per normal pattern is executed.

Specifically, the normal game state, which is a low-frequency support mode, the first time-saving game state (see FIG. 96) that shifts as a result of the time-saving design stoppage in the normal game state, and the first time-saving game state that shifts as a result of one kind of jackpot In the 2 o'clock short game state (see FIG. 96), the opening time of the electric accessory 315b is set to 0.6 seconds (short opening) which is the same as the shooting interval of the game ball 99. In this short opening, the expected number of balls entered when the game ball 99 is continuously hit is set to 1 ball or less. A game ball 99 about the size of a ball is entered.

On the other hand, the third time-saving game state (see FIG. 96) that can be shifted in the case of the second time-saving game state is 3 seconds (long opening), which is five times the opening time of the electric accessory 315b as the shooting interval of the game ball 99 It is a high-profit state set to In this long opening, the expected number of entering balls when the game ball 99 is continuously hit is set to 1 or more. A game ball 99 about the size of a ball is entered.

Further, even if the game state when the game ball 99 enters the through gates 317L and 317R is the normal game state (low frequency support mode), the game state when starting the variable display of normal symbols is various time saving. In the game state, the variable time and the opening time of the electric accessory 315b are determined under the conditions of the time-saving game state. Also, even if the game state when the game ball 99 enters the through gates 317L and 317R is various time-saving game states, the game state when starting the variable display of normal symbols is the normal game state (low frequency support mode), the fluctuation time and the opening time of the electric accessory 315b are determined under the conditions of the normal game state.

For example, when the game ball 99 enters the through gates 317L and 317R during the variation of the normal symbols during the time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode) and one ball is held, when the normal symbols that are already fluctuating are stopped. If the game state is still in the time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode), the variation of the normal pattern corresponding to the game ball that was on hold will be various lotteries under the conditions of the time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode) is performed and the fluctuation is started. However, if the game state is switched to the normal game state (low frequency support mode) before the normal symbols during fluctuation are stopped, the change of the normal symbols corresponding to the suspended game ball is normal game. Various lotteries are held under the conditions of the state (low-frequency support mode) and fluctuations are started.

In addition, when the game ball 99 enters the through gates 317L and 317R while the normal symbols are fluctuating during the normal game state (low frequency support mode) and one ball is held, when the normal symbols during fluctuation are stopped. If the game state is still the normal game state (low frequency support mode), the fluctuation of the normal symbol corresponding to the game ball that has been withheld is a low profit state Normal game state (low frequency support mode) Various lotteries are held under certain conditions, and fluctuations are started. However, if the game state is switched to the time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode) until the normal symbols that are fluctuating are stopped, and the high-profit condition is established, it corresponds to the game ball that was on hold. Various lottery is performed under the conditions of the time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode), which is a high-profit state, and the fluctuation of the normal symbols is started.

In addition, the opening time of the electric role product 315b in the normal figure per game in the normal game state, the first time saving game state, the second time saving game state and the third time saving game state is limited to the example shown in FIG. 85 (C) is not used and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 85 (C), for each game state, only one type of opening time of the electric auditors 315b is set as a normal game, but the normal game state and the first time reduction game state , For at least one game state of the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state, multiple types of opening times of the electric auditors 315b in the game per normal figure may be set.

[1st special figure jackpot success/failure table]
The first special figure jackpot success/failure table is used for the first special figure jackpot lottery which is executed when the game condition of the special figure lottery is satisfied when the game ball 99 enters the first winning hole 314.例文帳に追加Here, FIG. 86(A) is a diagram showing an example of the first special figure jackpot success/failure table.

As shown in FIG. 86(A), the first special figure big hit right/wrong table includes six big hit right/wrong tables corresponding to game set values 1 to 6 in six stages. In each jackpot success/failure table, as the lottery result of the first special jackpot lottery, either a jackpot or a loss is selected according to the value (random number) of the jackpot random number counter C1. In addition, in the first special figure jackpot success/failure table, the game setting value 6, the game setting value 5, the game setting value 4, the game setting value 3, the game setting value 2, and the game setting value 1 (the value of the game setting value is large) sequentially), the probability that the lottery result of the first special jackpot lottery will be a big win is high, which is advantageous to the player.

In the first special figure jackpot success/failure table of the game setting value 1, 206 random numbers of 0 to 205 out of 65536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random numbers) of 0 to 65535 correspond to jackpots, and other corresponds to an error, and the jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/318.1 (206/65536).

In the first special figure jackpot success/failure table of the game setting value 2, 202 random numbers of 0 to 211 out of 65536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random numbers) of 0 to 65535 correspond to jackpots, and other corresponds to an error, and the jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/309.1 (212/65536).

In the first special figure jackpot success/failure table of the game setting value 3, 218 random numbers of 0 to 217 out of 65536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random numbers) of 0 to 65535 correspond to jackpots, and others of random numbers corresponds to a loss, and the probability of a big win is set to approximately 1/300.6 (218/65536).

In the first special figure jackpot success/failure table of the game setting value 4, 224 random numbers of 0 to 223 out of 65536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random numbers) of 0 to 65535 correspond to jackpots, and other corresponds to an error, and the jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/292.6 (224/65536).

In the first special figure jackpot success/failure table of the game setting value 5, 230 random numbers of 0 to 229 out of 65536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random numbers) of 0 to 65535 correspond to jackpots, and others corresponds to an error, and the jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/284.9 (230/65536).

In the first special figure jackpot success/failure table of the game setting value 6, 236 random numbers of 0 to 235 out of 65536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random numbers) of 0 to 65535 correspond to jackpots, and other corresponds to an error, and the jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/277.7 (236/65536).

When the first special jackpot lottery is performed based on the jackpot success/failure table selected according to the game set value, the jackpot game is executed when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 indicates a jackpot.

In the first special figure jackpot success/failure table of the present embodiment, the jackpot random numbers are continuous values, but the jackpot random numbers may not be continuous values but may be partially or wholly discrete values.

In addition, although six first special figure jackpot success/failure tables are provided according to six stages of game setting values, there should be at least one first special figure jackpot success/failure table, and the game setting values are set in six stages. Not limited.

[1st Special Figure 1 Type Jackpot Type Distribution Table]
The 1st special figure 1 kind jackpot type distribution table is used to distribute the kind of the 1st special figure 1 kind jackpot when the lottery result in the 1st special figure jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Here, FIG. 86(B) is a diagram showing an example of the 1st special figure 1 type jackpot type allocation table.

As shown in FIG. 86 (B), in the 1st special figure 1 type jackpot type distribution table, 19 values of 0 to 18 out of 20 jackpot type counter C2 values (random numbers) of 0 to 19 The random value is the 2R short open time short jackpot, and one random value of 19 is the 16R short open time short jackpot. That is, in the present embodiment, two types of 2R short-open short-time jackpot and 16R short-open short-time jackpot are set as the first special figure 1 type jackpot, and the distribution rate of the 2R short-open short-time jackpot is set to 95%. , The distribution rate of the 16R short open time short jackpot is set to 5%.

Here, when the lottery result of the first special jackpot lottery is the 2R short open time short jackpot, the condition of the jackpot game is established, and the round game in which the variable winning port 316 is opened as the profit state for the jackpot win is performed twice. The repeated opening and closing execution mode is executed, and when the lottery result in the first special jackpot lottery is the 16R short open time short jackpot, the condition of the jackpot game is established, and the variable winning port 316 is opened as the profit state for the jackpot winning. An open/close execution mode is executed in which the round game is repeated 16 times. Then, in both the 2R short open time short jackpot and the 16R short open time short jackpot, after the jackpot game executed based on these jackpots is finished, the second time short game, which is one of the high-frequency support modes, is played as a profit state. state. Also, during any jackpot, the execution period such as the variable display time of normal symbols, the fixed display time, or the opening time of the electric accessory 315b is controlled in the low frequency support mode. In this second time-saving game state, the electric accessary 315b is opened because there is a high probability that the result of the normal pattern winning lottery executed when the game ball 99 passes through the through gates 317L and 317R is the normal pattern winning. (See FIG. 85(B)), but because the electric accessory 315b is opened for a short time (0.6 seconds), many game balls 99 enter the second winning hole 315. is a short-open time-saving gaming state that cannot be expected (see FIG. 85(C)).

In addition, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state, which is shifted after the end of the jackpot game based on the first special figure 1 type jackpot, is acquired by the player by, for example, the 2R short-open time-saving jackpot game. It is set to the number of times that can be executed by possible game balls (expected ball output value or expected ball difference value). As a result, the player can execute a prescribed number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state with the game balls acquired by the player in the 2R short-open time-saving jackpot game without greatly reducing the number of balls held. Therefore, while preventing the player from being greatly disadvantaged by the transition to the second time-saving gaming state, it is possible to move to the two types of jackpot gaming state via the small winning gaming state. It becomes possible to give a chance to shift to a game state.

In addition, when the upper limit of the winning number of game balls to the variable winning opening 316 in each round game is set to 10, and the number of winning balls due to the winning of the game balls to the variable winning opening 316 is set to 10. , the expected ball output value in the 2R short open time short jackpot game is 200. Therefore, in this embodiment, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is set to 100 times, which is the number of times that can be executed by launching about 150 to 200 game balls. there is

In this way, when the result of the first special jackpot lottery executed with the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning port 314 is a jackpot, a predetermined number of profits are given to the jackpot winning. 1 type jackpot game in which the round game is executed is executed, and a second time saving game state occurs after the end of the 1st type jackpot game.

[First Special Figure Fluctuation Table]
In the first special figure variation table, when the lottery result in the first special figure jackpot lottery is a big win, the first special figure in the first special figure game executed for the first special figure jackpot lottery. Used to set the figure fluctuation pattern (variation display time). Here, FIG. 86(C) is a diagram showing an example of the first special figure variation table.

As shown in FIG. 86(C), in the first special figure variation table, a special figure variation pattern is associated in advance according to the value of the special figure variation type counter CS1. In this first special figure variation table, one of the special figure variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value (random number) of the special figure variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the first special figure fluctuation table, among the 200 special figure fluctuation type counter CS1 values of 0 to 199, 10 random numbers of 0 to 9 have a fluctuation display time of 30 seconds. Special figure fluctuation pattern "01" corresponds, 110 random numbers of 10 to 119 correspond to special figure fluctuation pattern "02" whose fluctuation display time is 60 seconds, 80 random numbers of 120 to 199 corresponds to the special figure variation pattern "03" whose variation display time is 90 seconds.

Here, when the special figure variation pattern "01" is selected, the sound ramp control device 5 determines a normal ready-to-win production pattern with a special figure variation display time of 30 s as the variation type (production pattern type), and the symbol display section 341 In such a case, the normal reach effect pattern is executed. The normal reach production pattern is a production pattern in which the final individual production type in the special game production is the normal reach production. Further, when the special figure variation pattern "02" is selected, the sound ramp control device 5 determines a super ready-to-win production pattern with a special figure variation display time of 60 s as the variation type (production pattern type), and the symbol display unit 341 In such a case, the super reach effect pattern is executed. The super reach production pattern is a production pattern in which the final individual production type in the special game production is the super reach production. Furthermore, when the special figure variation pattern "03" is selected, the special reach effect pattern with the longest special figure variation display time of 90 s is determined as the variation type (effect pattern) in the sound lamp control device 5, and the symbol display unit At 341 or the like, a special ready-to-win effect pattern is executed. The special reach production pattern is a production pattern in which the final individual production type in the special game production is the special reach production.

[1st special figure off type distribution table]
The first special figure loss type distribution table is used for distributing the loss type when the lottery result in the first special figure jackpot lottery is a loss. Here, FIG. 86(D) is a diagram showing an example of the first special figure exclusion classification table.

As shown in FIG. 86 (D), in the first special figure off type distribution table, the off type is defined according to the value (random number) of the reach random number counter C3. Specifically, in the first special figure off type sorting table, out of the 239 reach random number counter C3 values of 0 to 238, 9 random numbers of 0 to 8 are front and rear off reach, 9 to Thirty random numbers of 38 are reach other than before and after, 199 random numbers of 39 to 237 are completely out, and one random number of 238 is out of time saving pattern stop.

Here, the ready-to-win state is a state in which a combination of decorative patterns indicating that a big win is likely to occur during the period from when the variable display of the decorative patterns in the pattern display section 341 is started until the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed. is the state of change where is indicated. In one example, the same decoration pattern is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions on the active line in the pattern display section 341, and the decoration pattern corresponding to the remaining one stop position fluctuates. In addition, during the change state of the reach in the symbol display section 341, a story production process in which a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the degree of expectation, or a game in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the production. A person-participation type operation rendering process and the like are executed. It is also conceivable that the variable display of the decorative pattern in the pattern display section 341 may be hidden or displayed in a reduced or enlarged size during execution of these effect processing.

Then, the front-rear out reach is a loss in which the final stop symbol is shifted forward or backward of the reach symbol by one after the reach due to the decorative pattern occurs, and the reach other than front-rear failure is the final after the reach due to the decorative symbol occurs. The stop symbol is a misalignment that stops other than before and after the ready-to-win symbol. In addition, the complete deviation and the time saving symbol stop deviation are deviations (non-reach deviation) in which the reach due to the decoration symbol does not occur. In addition, the time-saving pattern stop off is a deviation in which a specific pattern combination (time-saving pattern combination) (see FIG. 112) of the non-reach pattern combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific pattern combination (time-saving pattern combination) is stopped. After being displayed, it is shifted to a first time-saving game state, which will be described later. This first time-saving game state is one of the high-frequency support modes, but is a short open time-saving game state in which the opening time of the electric accessory 315b is short (see FIGS. 85(B) and 85(C)). In addition, the complete deviation is a deviation in which a symbol combination other than a specific symbol combination (time-saving symbol combination) among the non-reach symbol combinations is stopped and displayed.

[1st special figure off fluctuation table]
The first special figure loss variation table is for the first special figure in the first special figure game executed for the first special figure jackpot lottery when the lottery result in the first special figure jackpot lottery is a loss. Used to set the special figure fluctuation pattern (variation display time). Here, FIG. 86(E) is a diagram showing an example of the first special figure loss variation table.

As shown in FIG. 86 (E), in the first special figure deviation fluctuation table, the special figure variation pattern of the first special figure (variation display time ) are stipulated. This first special figure deviation variation table is the first special figure deviation variation table for deviation reach (reach other than front and rear deviation reach and front and rear deviation reach), the first special deviation variation table for complete deviation, and the second for time saving pattern stop deviation 1 Includes a special figure off fluctuation table.

In the first special figure deviation fluctuation table for out reach (reach other than front and rear out reach and front and rear out reach), special figure variation patterns "01" to "03" according to the value (random number) of the special figure variation type counter CS1 Either is selected. Specifically, in the first special figure out variation table for out reach (outside reach and reach other than front and back out), 0 to 99 out of 200 special figure variation type counter CS1 values of 0 to 199 The 100 random numbers correspond to the special figure fluctuation pattern "01" with a special figure fluctuation display time of 30 seconds, and the 50 random numbers from 100 to 149 have a special figure fluctuation display time of 60 seconds. The figure fluctuation pattern "02" corresponds, and the special figure fluctuation pattern "03" with a special figure fluctuation display time of 90 seconds corresponds to the 50 random numbers of 150 to 199.

In the first special figure deviation variation table for complete loss, one of the special figure variation patterns "04" and "05" is selected according to the value (random number) of the special figure variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the first special figure deviation variation table for complete loss, of the 200 special figure variation type counter CS1 values of 0 to 199, 150 random values of 0 to 149 special figure variation display The special figure fluctuation pattern "04" whose time is 7 seconds corresponds, and the special figure fluctuation pattern "05" whose special figure fluctuation display time is 10 seconds corresponds to 50 random numbers of 150 to 199. .

In the first special figure deviation variation table for time saving symbol stop deviation, one of the special figure variation patterns "04" to "07" is selected according to the value (random number) of the special figure variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the first special figure deviation variation table for time saving symbol stop deviation, 100 random values of 0 to 99 out of 200 values of special figure variation type counter CS1 of 0 to 199 are special symbols The special figure fluctuation pattern "04" whose fluctuation display time is 7 seconds corresponds, and the special figure fluctuation pattern "05" whose special figure fluctuation display time is 10 seconds corresponds to 50 random values 100 to 149. , 30 random numbers of 150 to 179 correspond to the special figure fluctuation pattern "06" with a special figure fluctuation display time of 15 seconds, and 20 random numbers of 180 to 199 have a special figure fluctuation display time Special figure fluctuation pattern "05" which is 20 seconds corresponds. That is, in the time saving symbol stop off, the special figure variation pattern with a shorter special figure variation display time is more likely to be selected.

Here, after the end of the first special figure game in which the lottery result in the first special figure jackpot lottery is out of time saving pattern stoppage, the normal game state shifts to the first time saving game state (see FIG. 96). And, in the first special figure deviation fluctuation table for time saving design stop deviation, corresponding to the special figure variation pattern (special figure variation display time) set according to the value (random number) of the special figure variation type counter CS1, The upper limit value (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the first time-saving game state, which is the short open time-saving game state, is defined. Specifically, in the first special figure deviation fluctuation table for time reduction symbol stop deviation, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time reduction games in the first time reduction game state is 5 for the special figure variation pattern "04" The times correspond, 10 times correspond to the special figure fluctuation pattern "05", 20 times correspond to the special figure fluctuation pattern "06", and the special figure fluctuation pattern "07" 30 times correspond. And, as described above, in the time saving pattern stop off, the special figure fluctuation pattern with a short special figure fluctuation display time is likely to be selected, so the upper limit value of the number of time saving games in the first time saving game state (specified number of times) As a time saving game The smaller the number of times, the easier it is to be selected. In addition, by including the time saving pattern stop off as a result of the lottery result in the first special jackpot lottery, from the normal game state which is a low frequency support mode, the first time saving game state (short time) which is a high frequency support mode It is possible to shift to the open time reduction game state). In this way, it is possible to shift from the normal game state to the first time-saving game state (short-open time-saving game state), which is a high-frequency support mode, so that the progress of the game tends to be monotonous. Since it is possible to reduce the monotony, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In this way, when the result of the first special figure jackpot lottery executed with the entry of the game ball 99 to the first winning port 314 as a trigger is the time reduction symbol stop off, the lottery result in the first special figure jackpot lottery After the end of the first special figure game in which the time saving symbol is out of stoppage, the first time saving game state is generated.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the first time-saving game state is specified by the first special figure deviation fluctuation table for time-saving symbol stop deviation, but the upper limit value (specified number of times ) may be set by a sorting table provided separately from the first special symbol deviation variation table for time saving symbol stop deviation. In addition, in the present embodiment, the type of special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation display time) in the time saving pattern stop off and the prescribed number of times of the number of times of time saving games correspond, but the special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation display You may set the specified number of times of the time-saving game regardless of the time). In addition, time saving design stop loss may be excluded as the loss as the result of the lottery in the first special figure jackpot lottery.

[Short opening 2nd special figure jackpot hit table]
The short-open second special figure jackpot success/failure table is used for the second special figure jackpot lottery that is executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning hole 315 by short-opening the electric accessory 315b. be done. That is, the short-open second special figure jackpot success or failure table is the second winning prize based on the fact that the lottery result in the general figure per lottery in the normal game state, the first time reduction game state and the second time reduction game state is a normal game. It is used for the second special figure jackpot lottery executed when the game ball 99 enters the mouth 315 as a trigger. Here, FIG. 87(A) is a diagram showing an example of a short open second special figure jackpot success/failure table.

As shown in FIG. 87(A), the short-open second special figure jackpot success/failure table is commonly set for game setting values 1 to 6 in six stages. In the short-open second special figure jackpot success/failure table, as the lottery result of the second special figure jackpot lottery, one of the big win, the small win, and the loss is selected according to the value (random number) of the jackpot random number counter C1. . That is, in the second special jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 in short opening, the first winning lottery triggered by the entry of the gaming ball 99 into the first winning opening 314 Unlike the special figure jackpot lottery, the lottery result includes a small hit in which the feather accessory device 83 (see FIGS. 83 and 84) is operated. Specifically, in the short-open second special figure jackpot propriety table, 0 to 65535 of 65536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random numbers), 0 to 205 correspond to jackpots, and 206 to 58980 are small. It corresponds to hit, and 58981 to 65535 correspond to miss. That is, in the second special jackpot lottery, which is executed when the game ball 99 enters the second prize winning port 315 as a result of the short opening of the electric accessory 315b, the jackpot probability is about 1/318.1. , the small win probability is set to about 1/1.15, and the out probability is set to about 1/10.

[Long open 2nd special figure jackpot hit table]
The long open second special figure jackpot success/failure table is used for the second special figure jackpot lottery that is executed when the game ball 99 enters the second prize winning port 315 as a result of the long opening of the electric accessory 315b. be done. That is, in the long open second special figure jackpot success/failure table, the game ball 99 enters the second winning hole 315 based on the fact that the lottery result in the general figure winning lottery in the third time reduction game state is a general figure winning. It is used for the second special figure jackpot lottery that is executed with this as an opportunity. Here, FIG. 87(B) is a diagram showing an example of a long open second special figure jackpot success/failure table.

As shown in FIG. 87(B), the long open second special figure jackpot success/failure table is commonly set for game setting values 1 to 6 in six stages. In the long open second special jackpot success/failure table, one of the jackpot, the small hit and the loss is selected as the lottery result of the second special jackpot lottery according to the value (random value) of the jackpot random number counter C1. . That is, in the second special jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 in the long opening, the first winning lottery triggered by the entry of the gaming ball 99 into the first winning opening 314 Unlike the special figure jackpot lottery, the lottery result includes a small hit in which the feather accessory device 83 (see FIGS. 83 and 84) is operated. Specifically, in the long open second special figure jackpot success/failure table, among the values (random numbers) of 65536 jackpot random number counters C1 from 0 to 65535, 0 to 205 correspond to jackpots, and 206 to 65529 are small. It corresponds to hit, and 65530 to 65535 correspond to miss. That is, in the second special jackpot lottery that is executed when the game ball 99 enters the second prize winning port 315 as a result of the long opening of the electric accessory 315b, the jackpot probability is about 1/318.1. , the small hit probability is set to about 1/1.003, and the off probability is set to about 1/318.1. It is set, and the small hit probability is set high accordingly.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the short-open second special figure jackpot success/failure table and the long-open second special figure jackpot success/failure table were provided with one common to the six game setting values, but the short-open second special figure One or both of the special figure big hit success/failure table and the long open second special figure success/failure table may be set for each game setting value. It is also conceivable to set one second special figure jackpot success/failure table by commonalizing the short open second special figure jackpot success/failure table and the long open second special figure success/failure table.

[Second Special Figure Per Fluctuation Table]
The second special figure per fluctuation table, when the lottery result in the second special figure jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 is a win (big win or small win), It is used to set the special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation display time) of the second special figure in the second special figure game executed for the second special figure jackpot lottery. Here, FIG. 87(C) is a diagram showing an example of the variation table per second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 87 (C), the second special figure per variation table is provided according to the type of hit (big hit and small hit), and the second special figure per variation table for big hit and the second per special figure for big hit 2 Includes a variation table per special figure.

As for the 2nd special figure per fluctuation table for big hit, the special figure fluctuation pattern is beforehand matched according to the value of the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1. In this jackpot second special figure per variation table, either the special figure variation pattern "01" or "06" is selected according to the value (random number) of the special figure variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the second special figure per fluctuation table for big hits, among the values of 200 special figure fluctuation type counters CS1 from 0 to 199, 100 random numbers from 0 to 99 have special figure fluctuation display time is 30 seconds, the special figure fluctuation pattern "01" corresponds, and the special figure fluctuation pattern "06", which has a special figure fluctuation display time of 15 seconds, corresponds to 100 random numbers of 100 to 199.

In the small per second special figure per variation table, the special figure variation pattern "05" is selected regardless of the value (random number) of the special figure variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the second special figure per variation table for small hits, all the values of 200 special figure variation type counters CS1 from 0 to 199 are special figure variation patterns with a special figure variation display time of 10 seconds "05" corresponds.

In addition, in the second special figure per variation table of the present embodiment, the special figure variation pattern (special figure variation display time) of the second special figure when the lottery result in the second special figure jackpot lottery is a small hit is 1 Although the type is set, the special figure variation pattern (special figure variation display time) may be set in multiple types.

[Second Special Figure Out Fluctuation Table]
The second special figure loss fluctuation table, when the lottery result of the second special figure jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 is lost, the second special figure jackpot lottery. It is used to set the special figure variation pattern (special figure variation display time) of the second special figure in the second special figure game executed for. Here, FIG. 87(D) is a diagram showing an example of the second special figure loss variation table.

As shown in FIG. 87 (D), in the second special figure deviation variation table, the special figure variation pattern (special figure variation display time) is associated according to the value (random number) of the special figure variation type counter CS1. There, one of the special figure variation patterns "04" to "07" is selected according to the value (random number) of the special figure variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the second special figure deviation variation table, among the values of 239 special figure variation type counters CS1 from 0 to 238, 167 random numbers from 0 to 166 have a special figure variation display time of 7 Seconds correspond to special figure fluctuation pattern "04", 36 random numbers of 167 to 202 correspond to special figure fluctuation pattern "05" whose special figure fluctuation display time is 10 seconds, 203 to 226 The 24 random numbers correspond to the special figure fluctuation pattern "06" with a special figure fluctuation display time of 15 seconds, and the 12 random numbers from 227 to 238 have a special figure fluctuation display time of 20 seconds. The figure fluctuation pattern "07" corresponds.

In addition, in the second special figure loss variation table of the present embodiment, there are four types of special figure variation patterns (special figure variation display time) for the second special figure when the lottery result in the second special figure jackpot lottery is out. Although it was set, the special figure variation pattern (special figure variation display time) may be set to one type other than four types, for example.

[Time-saving game number distribution table]
As will be described later, the time-saving game number distribution table is triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 in the second time-saving game state. In the case, it is used to determine whether to shift to the third time-saving game state after the second special game executed for the second special-time jackpot lottery ends, and in the third time-saving game state It is used to set the upper limit (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games. Here, FIG. 87(E) is a diagram showing an example of the time saving game number apportionment table.

As shown in FIG. 87 (E), in the time-saving game frequency distribution table, the upper limit value (prescribed number of times) of the time-saving game frequency is associated with the value (random number) of the special figure variation type counter CS1, Either 10 times, 30 times, 50 times and 100 times is selected according to the value (random number) of the special figure variation type counter CS1. Then, in the time-saving game number distribution table, a special figure variation type counter CS1 for setting a special figure variation pattern (special figure variation display time) is used in order to set the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games. , The upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games is associated with the type of special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation display time).

Specifically, in the time-saving game number distribution table, among the 239 special figure fluctuation type counter CS1 values of 0 to 238, 167 random numbers of 0 to 166 have a special figure fluctuation display time of 7 seconds 10 times corresponds to the special figure fluctuation pattern "04" as the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time saving games, and the special figure fluctuation display time is 10 seconds for 36 random numbers of 167 to 202. 30 times corresponds to the special figure fluctuation pattern "05" as the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of times of time saving games, and the special figure fluctuation display time is 15 seconds for 24 random numbers 203 to 226. 50 times corresponds to the fluctuation pattern "06" as the upper limit value (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games, and the special figure fluctuation display time is 20 seconds for the 12 random numbers 227 to 238. 100 times corresponds to "07" as the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games. In other words, the upper limit of the number of time-saving games (specified number of times) is set to about 70% for 10 times, about 15% for 30 times, about 10% for 50 times, and about 5% for 100 times. It is set so that the larger the number, the harder it is to be selected.

It should be noted that, in the time-saving game number distribution table of the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of time-saving games (specified number of times) was set corresponding to the type of the special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation display time), but the time-saving game The upper limit of the number of times (specified number of times) may not correspond to the type of special figure variation pattern (special figure variation display time). In addition, in the time-saving game number distribution table of the present embodiment, when the result of the second special figure jackpot lottery is out, the time-saving design stop is always out, but when the result of the second special figure jackpot lottery is out A part of the time saving pattern may be stopped off.

In addition, in the time-saving game number distribution table of the present embodiment, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games is set according to the value (random number) of the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1. The upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of games may be set to one type other than four types, for example.

In addition, in the time-saving game number distribution table of this embodiment, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games is associated according to the value (random number) of the special figure variation type counter CS1, and the variation type counter The upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games is set by using it, but a distribution counter for distributing the number of times of time-saving games is set, and this distribution counter is used to set the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games. may be set.

[Third time-saving game state jackpot type distribution table]
The third time-saving game state jackpot type distribution table is used to distribute the jackpot type in the third time-saving game state. The jackpot in the third time-saving game state is executed when the lottery result in the second special jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and when the lottery result in the second special jackpot lottery is a small hit. In the small winning game, the game ball 99 enters the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83, and the two types of jackpots are included. A common third time-saving game state jackpot type distribution table is used for the distribution of types (number of rounds). Here, FIG.87(F) is a figure which shows an example of a 3rd time saving game state jackpot classification table.

As shown in FIG. 87 (F), in the third time-saving gaming state per type distribution table, 0 to 19 of 20 jackpot type counter C2 values (random numbers), 0 to 4 five random The numerical value is the 16R long open short time jackpot, and the 15 random numbers from 5 to 19 are the 5R long open short time jackpot. That is, in the present embodiment, two types of 16R long open time short jackpot and 5R long open time short jackpot are set for both the 1st kind jackpot and the 2nd kind jackpot as the jackpot in the third time saving game state, and the 16R long open time short time The distribution rate of the jackpot is set to 25%, and the distribution rate of the 5R long open time short jackpot is set to 75%.

Here, when the jackpot type is the 16R long open time short jackpot, an open/close execution mode is executed in which the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened is repeated 16 times in the jackpot game, and the jackpot type is 5R long open time short. In the case of a jackpot, an opening/closing execution mode is executed in which a round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened is repeated five times in the jackpot game. Then, in both the 16R long open time short jackpot and the 5R long open time short jackpot, after the jackpot game executed based on these jackpots is completed, the third time saving game state, which is one of the high-frequency support modes, is restored. do. In this third time-saving game state, the electric accessary 315b is opened because there is a high probability that the result of the normal pattern winning lottery executed when the game ball 99 passes through the through gates 317L and 317R is the normal pattern winning. (See FIG. 85(B)), and the electric accessory 315b is opened for a long time (3 seconds). It is a long open time short game state (see FIG. 85 (C)).

Thus, when the result of the second special jackpot lottery executed with the entry of the game ball 99 to the second winning port 315 in the third time-saving game state is a jackpot, a predetermined number of round games are executed The first kind of jackpot game is executed, and a third time-saving game state occurs after the end of the first kind of jackpot game.

In addition, as a jackpot type distribution table in the third time-saving game state, a common distribution table is used for the 1st type jackpot and the 2nd type jackpot, but different distributions are used for the 1st type jackpot and the 2nd type jackpot. You can use a table.

[2nd special figure 1 type jackpot type distribution table]
The 2nd special figure 1 type jackpot type distribution table is the 2nd special figure 1 type jackpot when the lottery result in the 2nd special figure jackpot lottery in the 1st time reduction game state and the 2nd time reduction game state is a jackpot Used for classifying. Here, FIG. 87(G) is a diagram showing an example of the second special figure 1 type jackpot type distribution table.

As shown in FIG. 87 (G), in the second special figure 1 type jackpot type distribution table, 19 values of 0 to 18 out of 20 jackpot type counter C2 values (random values) of 0 to 19 The random value is the 2R short open time short jackpot, and one random value of 19 is the 16R short open time short jackpot. That is, in the present embodiment, two types of the 2R short open time short jackpot and 16R short open time short jackpot are set as the second special figure 1 type jackpot, and the distribution rate of the 2R short open short time jackpot is set to 95%. , The distribution rate of the 16R short open time short jackpot is set to 5%.

Here, when the lottery result of the second special figure jackpot lottery in the first time reduction game state and the second time reduction game state is the 2R short open time short jackpot, the variable winning opening 316 is opened in the jackpot game. An open/close execution mode in which the round game is repeated twice is executed, and when the lottery result of the second special figure jackpot lottery in the first time reduction game state and the second time reduction game state is a 16R short open time short jackpot, a big win. In the game, an open/close execution mode is executed in which a round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened is repeated 16 times. Then, in both the 2R short open time short jackpot and the 16R short open time short jackpot, after the jackpot game executed based on these jackpots is completed, the state is shifted to the second short time game state which is one of the high frequency support modes. be done. In this second time-saving game state, the electric accessary 315b is opened because there is a high probability that the result of the normal pattern winning lottery executed when the game ball 99 passes through the through gates 317L and 317R is the normal pattern winning. (See FIG. 85(B)), but because the electric accessory 315b is opened for a short time (0.6 seconds), many game balls 99 enter the second winning hole 315. is a short-open time-saving gaming state that cannot be expected (see FIG. 85(C)).

In this way, when the result of the second special jackpot lottery executed with the entry of the game ball 99 to the second winning port 315 in the first time-saving gaming state or the second time-saving gaming state is a jackpot, the jackpot As a profit state for winning, a 1st kind jackpot game in which a predetermined number of round games are executed is executed, and a second time saving game state is generated after the end of the 1st kind jackpot game.

[Processing of main controller 4]
Next, referring to FIGS. 88 to 103, the processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. In this embodiment, the main timer interrupt processing is the same as in the first embodiment described above, but a part of the main processing is different from the main processing (see FIG. 21) of the first embodiment described above. different. Here, FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the main processing of the main controller 4 of this embodiment.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
As shown in FIG. 88, the main processing of the main control device 4 of the present embodiment is one of normal game control processing (step S1404), special game control processing (step S1406) and game state transition processing (step S1408). The process of the part is different from the above-described first embodiment, and differs from the first embodiment in that the small winning game control process (step S1407-1) is executed. Hereinafter, different procedures (steps) from the above-described first embodiment in the normal figure game control process (step S1404) and the special figure game control process (step S1406) will be described, and the small hit game control process (step S1407-1) And all procedures of the game state transition processing (step S1408) will be described.

[Universal figure game control process]
The general pattern game control processing executed in step S1404 in the main processing of FIG. 88 of this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the general pattern variation start processing. Hereinafter, normal figure fluctuation start processing of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 89 .

[Normal pattern fluctuation start process]
In the normal pattern fluctuation start processing of the present embodiment, the normal pattern fluctuation in the normal pattern display unit 361 is started, and various flags are set based on the lottery result in the normal pattern per lottery.

<Step S3301>
As shown in FIG. 89, in the normal figure fluctuation start process of the present embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state is set to ON (step S3301). . That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game state in the case of starting the variable display of normal symbols (normal game) is the normal game state. In other words, it is determined whether it is a normal game state that is a low frequency support mode or a short game state that is a high frequency support mode at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation, and the normal pattern is based on the support mode at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation. Judge whether the hit is right or wrong.

It should be noted that the normal game state flag is set at step S3629 in FIG. 98, step S3649 in FIG. 99, step S3667 in FIG. While it is set to ON in step S3701 of 102, it is set to OFF in step S3608, S3612 or S3616 of FIG. 97 when shifting from the normal game state to another game state.

When the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3302. On the other hand, the MPU 41, when the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S3301: No), that is, when it is one of the first to third time-saving game states, shifts the process to step S3305.

<Steps S3302 to S3304>
If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S3301: Yes), that is, if the low-frequency support mode, the MPU 41, the normal game state general figure per success/failure table (see FIG. 85 (A)) based on It is determined whether or not the lottery per general pattern is determined (step S3302), and the result of the judgment is per general pattern (step S3303).

It should be noted that whether or not the result of the winning/failure determination is a normal game hit is obtained by entering the game ball 99 into the through gates 317L and 317R, and is stored as a specific value in the normal game reservation storage area 412c (see FIG. 11). It is determined based on the random number counter C4 per normal figure.

MPU41, when the result of the success/failure determination based on the normal game state normal figure per success/failure table is the normal figure per (step S3303: Yes), sets the short open normal figure per flag to ON (step S3304), and step processing Move to S3309. Short open general pattern per flag is a flag indicating that the result of the general pattern per lottery is a short open per general pattern, in step S1806 in the general pattern per game control process of FIG. It is referred to when determining whether or not to set the value of the opening counter to the time corresponding to the short opening as the opening time of the electric accessory 315b.

On the other hand, the MPU 41, when the result of the success/failure determination based on the normal game state normal/universal figure per success/failure table is not per the general/universal pattern (step S3303: No), that is, when the result of the success/failure determination is off, the process proceeds to step S3309. .

<Steps S3305 and S3306>
When the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S3301: No), that is, when it is one of the first to third time-saving game state which is the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 41 per the time-saving game state normal figure Based on the success/failure table (see FIG. 85(B)), the success/failure determination for the lottery per general pattern is performed (step S3305), and it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination is per general pattern (step S3306).

It should be noted that whether or not the result of the success/failure determination is a normal game hit is obtained by entering the game ball 99 into the through gates 317L and 317R in the same manner as in step S3302 described above. 11) is determined based on the value of the random number counter C4 per normal pattern stored as a specific value.

MPU41, if the result of the success/failure determination based on the time-saving game state general pattern hit/failure table is a general pattern hit (step S3306: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3307, and if the result of the success/failure determination is not a general pattern hit ( Step S3306: No), that is, if the result of the right/wrong determination is out, the process proceeds to step S3309.

<Steps S3307 and S3308>
If the result of the success/failure determination based on the time-saving game state normal figure per success/failure table is a normal game (step S3306: Yes), the MPU 41 turns on the third time-saving game state flag indicating that it is the third time-saving game state. It is determined whether or not it is set (step S3307). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game state in the case of starting the variable display of normal symbols (normal game) is the third time-saving game state.

It should be noted that the third time-saving gaming state flag, in the later-described game state transition processing, step S3644 in FIG. 99, step S3694 in FIG. 101, or step in FIG. While it is set to ON in S3723, it is set to OFF in steps S3657, S3661 or S3668 of FIG. 100 when shifting from the third time-saving game state to another game state.

MPU41, when the third time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3307: Yes), MPU41 sets the long open normal figure hit flag to ON (step S3308), and shifts the process to step S3309 . Long open normal figure per flag is a flag indicating that the result of the lottery per normal figure is per long open, in step S1803 in the game control process per normal figure of FIG. 25 of the first embodiment described above, It is referred to when determining whether or not to set the value of the opening counter to the time corresponding to the long opening as the opening time of the electric accessory 315b.

On the other hand, the MPU 41, when the third time-saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3307: No), that is, when it is the first time-saving gaming state or the second time-saving gaming state, proceeds to step S3304 described above. The flag per short open normal figure is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S3309.

<Steps S3309 and S3310>
If the result in the lottery per normal pattern is out (step S3303 or S3306: No), if the short open normal pattern per flag is set to ON (step S3304) or if the long open normal pattern per flag is set to ON (Step S3308), the MPU 41 starts variable display of normal symbols in the normal symbol display portion 361 of the main display portion 36 (step S3309). Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal pattern fluctuation display flag to ON, which indicates that the normal pattern is displayed in a variable manner, that is, the normal pattern game is being executed (step S3310), and starts the normal pattern fluctuation start process. finish.

The execution period such as the variable display time of the normal symbols, the fixed display time, or the opening time of the electric accessory 315b when starting the variable display of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display section 361 will be described in the first embodiment. As described above, a random number counter C4 per general pattern or a general pattern as a specific value that is acquired by entering the game ball 99 into each of the winning openings 314 and 315 and is stored in the general pattern reservation storage area 412c (see FIG. 11) It is set based on the variation type counter CS2 and various time saving game state flags. In addition, the variable display time of the normal symbols in the normal symbol display unit 361 when starting the variable display of the normal symbols is determined by referring to the game state in the case of starting the variable display of the normal symbols, that is, various time-saving game state flags. be done.

[Special game control process]
The special figure game control process executed in step S1406 in the main process of FIG. 88 of this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the special figure fluctuation start process. Here, FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure variation start process. Hereinafter, the special figure fluctuation start processing of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

[Special figure fluctuation start process]
In the special symbol fluctuation start processing of the present embodiment, the first special symbol of the first special symbol display unit 362 in the first special symbol game, or the second special symbol of the second special symbol display unit 363 in the second special symbol game Floating and stationary displays are controlled.

<Step S3401>
As shown in FIG. 90, in step S3401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special figure game to be started is the first special figure game. Whether or not the special figure game to be started is the first special figure game is, for example, in step S2003 or S2006 in the special figure data setting process of FIG. It is determined based on the success/failure information moved to the special figure execution area AE (see FIG. 8) of the reserved storage area 412b.

When the special symbol game to be started is the first special symbol game (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3402. On the other hand, when the special symbol game to be started is not the first special symbol game (step S3401: No), that is, when the special symbol game to be started is the second special symbol game, the process proceeds to step S3403. .

<Step S3402>
When the special figure game which should be started is the 1st special figure game (step S3401: Yes), MPU41, the 1st special figure jackpot success or failure table (refer to figure 86 (A)), and special figure reservation storage area 412b Based on the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as the success/failure information (numerical information) stored in the figure execution area AE, the success/failure determination is performed (step S3402), and the process proceeds to step S3406. It should be noted that the result of the suitability determination in the step S3402 is stored in the RAM413.

<Steps S3403 to S3405>
If the special figure game to be started is not the first special figure game (step S3401: No), that is, if the special figure game to be started is the second special figure game, the MPU 41 indicates that it is in the third time saving gaming state. It is determined whether or not the indicated third time-saving gaming state flag is ON (step S3403). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game state when starting the second special game is the third time-saving game state.

It should be noted that the third time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON in step S3644 of FIG. 99 or step S3694 of FIG. On the other hand, it is set to OFF in step S3657, S3661 or S3668 of FIG.

MPU41, when the third time-saving gaming state flag is on (step S3403: Yes), that is, when the gaming state in the case of starting the second special figure game is the third time-saving gaming state, long open second special figure Jackpot propriety table (see FIG. 87 (B)) and propriety determination based on the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as the propriety information (numerical information) stored in the special figure execution area AE of the special figure reservation storage area 412b (step S3404), and the process proceeds to step S3406. It should be noted that the result of the suitability determination in the step S3404 is stored in the RAM413.

On the other hand, MPU41, when the third time-saving gaming state flag is off (step S3403: No), that is, the gaming state when starting the second special figure game is the first time-saving gaming state or the second time-saving gaming state In the case, the short-open second special figure jackpot right or wrong table (see FIG. 87 (A)) and the jackpot random number counter C1 included as the right or wrong information (numerical information) stored in the special figure execution area AE of the special figure reservation storage area 412b A decision is made based on the counter value (step S3405), and the process proceeds to step S3406. It should be noted that the result of the suitability determination in the step S3405 is stored in the RAM413.

<Step S3406>
MPU41 judges whether the normal game state flag which shows that it is a normal game state is ON, when success determination is performed in step S3402, S3404 or S3405 (step S3406). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the game state in the case of starting the special figure game is either the normal game state or the first to third time-saving game states.

It should be noted that the normal game state flag is set to step S3629 in FIG. 98, step S3650 in FIG. 99, step S3667 in FIG. 100, or step S3667 in FIG. While it is set to ON in step S3701 of FIG. 97, it is set to OFF in step S3608, S3612 or S3616 of FIG. 97 when shifting from the normal game state to another game state.

When the normal game state flag is ON (step S3406: Yes), that is, when the game state when starting the special figure game is the normal game state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3413. On the other hand, MPU41, if the normal game state flag is off (step S3406: No), that is, if the game state in the case of starting the special figure game is any of the first to third time-saving game state, the process The process moves to step S3407.

<Step S3407>
If the normal game state flag is off (step S3406: No), that is, if the game state when the special figure game is started is one of the first to third time-saving game states, the MPU 41 is in the time-saving game state ( 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of time saving games in the first time saving game state, second time saving game state or third time saving game state (step S3407), and the process proceeds to step S3408.

Time saving number counter, from the normal game state and various jackpot game states, in the case of shifting to any of the first to third time saving game states in step S3605 in FIG. 97, steps S3672, S3679, S3686, and S3693 in FIG. , While set in step S3643 in FIG. 101 when transitioning from the second time-saving gaming state to the third gaming state, when starting the special figure game in any of the first to third time-saving gaming states, the It is subtracted by 1 in the step S3407 of the special figure fluctuation start process.

<Step S3408>
In step S3408, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second time-saving gaming state flag indicating the second time-saving gaming state is on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game state in the case of starting the special figure game is the second time-saving game state.

It should be noted that the second time-saving gaming state flag, in the later-described game state transition processing, in the case of transition from another game state to the second time-saving gaming state, steps S3673, S3680, S3687 of FIG. 101, or step of FIG. While it is set to ON in S3711, it is set to OFF in steps S3636, S3640, S3647 or S3651 of FIG.

MPU41, when the second time-saving gaming state flag is ON (step S3408: Yes), ie, when the game state in the case of starting the special figure game is the second time-saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step S3409. On the other hand, MPU41, when the second time-saving gaming state flag is off (step S3408: No), that is, when the gaming state when the special figure game is started is not the second time-saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step S3413 .

<Step S3409>
If the second time-saving gaming state flag is on (step S3408: Yes), that is, if the gaming state when the special figure game is started is the second time-saving gaming state, the MPU41 determines whether the step S3402 or step S3405 Based on the result of , it is determined whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game is out of time saving design stoppage (step S3409).

MPU41, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game is out of the time saving pattern stop off (step S3409: Yes), the process moves to step S3410, the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game is out of the time saving pattern stop off If not (step S3409: No), the process proceeds to step S3413.

<Steps S3410 and S3411>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game is the time saving pattern stop off (step S3409: Yes), the MPU 41 is set for the time saving pattern stop off (Figure 86 (E) and figure 87 (E) reference) subtract the value of the time saving number counter (the number of remaining time saving games in the second time saving game state) (step S3410), and determine whether the subtraction value at this time exceeds 0 (Step S3411). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop deviation is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state. The MPU 41 shifts the process to S3412 when the subtraction value exceeds 0 (S3411: Yes), and shifts the process to S3413 when the subtraction value is 0 or less (S3411: No).

That is, in this embodiment, the value of the time saving number counter from the time saving game number (see FIGS. 86 (E) and 87 (E)) set for the time saving symbol stop off (the second time saving game state When the subtraction value obtained by subtracting the number of remaining time-saving games) is larger than 0, the second time-saving game state is shifted to the third time-saving game state, and when the subtraction value is smaller than 0, the third time-saving game state is entered. It is not shifted, and the number of remaining time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is maintained without being changed.

In the present embodiment, when the subtraction value exceeds 0, the game state is shifted from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state. Even when the value is 0, the game state may be shifted from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state. That is, when the subtraction value is 0 or more, the game state may be shifted from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the subtraction value is 0 or less, the number of remaining time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is maintained without being changed, but when the subtraction value is 0 or less Alternatively, the number of remaining time-saving games in the second time-saving game state may be changed. For example, the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state may be changed to the addition of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving design stop deviation, or for the time-saving design stop deviation It may be changed to the number of time-saving games set (may be replaced).

In addition, in the present embodiment, even if the special figure game started in the second time saving game state is either the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the result of the jackpot lottery is the time saving pattern stop off. In some cases, the second time-saving game state is transferred to the third time-saving game state after the end of the special game on the condition that the subtraction value exceeds 0, but the special game started in the second time-saving game state Only when is the second special game, it may be possible to shift from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state after the end of the special game. In other words, even if the result of the jackpot lottery is out of time saving pattern stoppage, if the jackpot lottery is for the first special game, the second time saving game state is not shifted to the third time saving game state. You may do so. Also, from the type when the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special game is out, the time saving pattern stop off may be omitted, in that case, the special game started in the second time saving game state In the case of the first special game, there is no transition from the second time saving game state to the third time saving game state after the end of the first special game.

The first special symbol of the first special symbol display unit 362 in the first special symbol game, or the second special symbol of the second special symbol display unit 363 in the second special symbol game Fluctuating display time, fixed display time or variable winning opening The execution period such as the opening period (number of rounds) of 316 is obtained by entering the game ball 99 into the first winning hole 314 and the second winning hole 315, as described in the first embodiment, It is set based on the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 as a specific value stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and various time-saving gaming state flags. In addition, the variable display time of each special symbol when starting the variable display of the first special symbol of the first special symbol display portion 362 and the second special symbol of the second special symbol display portion 363 is the variable display of each special symbol. It is determined by referring to the game state when starting , that is, various time-saving game state flags. Even if the game state when the game ball 99 enters each winning hole 314, 315 is the normal game state (low frequency support mode), the game state when starting the variable display of each special symbol is various time saving. When it is in the game state, the execution period such as the variable time of the special symbols and the opening period (the number of rounds) of the variable winning opening 316 is determined under the conditions of the time-saving game state. In addition, even if the game state when the game ball 99 enters each winning hole 314, 315 is the various time-saving game state, the game state when starting the variable display of each special symbol is the normal game state (low frequency support mode), the execution period such as the variable time of the special symbols and the open period (number of rounds) of the variable winning opening 316 is determined under the conditions of the normal game state.

For example, when the game ball 99 enters each of the winning openings 314 and 315 during the fluctuation of the special symbols during the time-saving gaming state (high-frequency support mode) and one ball corresponding to the holding occurs, the special symbols that are already fluctuating If the game state at the time of stopping is still in the time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode), the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the game ball that was on hold is the condition of the time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode). Various lotteries will be held and the fluctuation will start. However, if the game state is switched to the normal game state (low-frequency support mode) before the special symbols that are fluctuating are stopped, the fluctuation of the special symbols corresponding to the suspended game ball is normal game. Various lotteries are held under the conditions of the state (low-frequency support mode) and fluctuations are started.

In addition, when the game ball 99 enters each of the winning openings 314 and 315 during the variation of the special symbols during the normal game state (low frequency support mode) and one ball is held, the special symbols during variation are stopped. If the game state at that time is still the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the game ball that has been withheld is normal game state (low-frequency support mode). is performed and the fluctuation is started. However, if the game state is switched to the time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode) before the special symbols that are fluctuating are stopped, the high-profit condition is established, and the game balls that have been suspended are handled. Variation of the special symbol becomes a high-profit condition establishment state, various lotteries are performed under the condition of the time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode), and the variation is started.

In addition, in the present embodiment, every time the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is the time-saving pattern stop off, the upper limit value (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving pattern stop-off The subtraction value is calculated in the relationship, but in the second time-saving gaming state, prior to the time-saving design stop-off, the subtraction value at that time is 0 or less, and the time-saving design stop-off is 1. If there are more than one, the upper limit of the number of time-saving games set for the one or more time-saving symbol stop deviations (specified number of times) is set for the time-saving symbol stop deviation (specified number of times), it may be determined whether to shift to the third time-saving game state based on whether the value obtained by subtracting the value of the time-saving counter exceeds 0 or not. That is, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving gaming state is out of time-saving design stop, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving design stop-out is set in the second time-saving gaming state Third time saving based on whether the value obtained by subtracting the value of the time saving number counter from the value added to the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time saving games set for the previous time saving pattern stop deviation exceeds 0 You may make it judge whether it transfers to a game state. In other words, it is possible to determine whether or not the high-profit condition is satisfied, including not only the time-saving pattern stoppage result in the jackpot lottery, but also the result of the previous jackpot lottery. In this case, the larger the number of times that the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving gaming state is out of the time-saving design stop, the greater the possibility that the subtraction value will exceed 0 and the third time-saving gaming state will be entered. The player's attention to stop-display of the time-saving patterns in the time-saving game state can be heightened, and the amusement of the game is further improved.

<Step S3412>
When the subtraction value exceeds 0 (S3411: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the third time-saving gaming state transition flag for shifting the game state from the second time-saving gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state (step S3412). This third time-saving game state transition flag is referred to in order to determine whether or not to shift the game state from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state in step S3641 in the game state transition processing of FIG. 99 described later. be done.

<Step S3413>
In step S3413, MPU41, based on the result of the success or failure determination in step S3402, S3404 or S3405, the first special symbol display portion 362 of the main display portion 36 corresponding to the special figure variation pattern of the special figure game or the second special The special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation display time) of the symbol display section 363 is set to the special figure fluctuation display time counter. Specifically, MPU41, if the result of the success determination in step S3402 is a jackpot, based on the first special figure 1 type jackpot variation table (see FIG. 86 (C)), of the success determination in step S3402 If the result is out, based on the first special figure out variation table (see FIG. 86 (E)) corresponding to the outlier type, the special figure variation pattern of the first special symbol display unit 362 (special figure variation display time ) is set to the special figure fluctuation display time counter. In addition, MPU41, step S3404 or step S3405 if the result of the success or failure determination is a big hit or a small hit per the second special figure per variation table (see FIG. 87 (C)) according to the type of hit Based on, If the result of the right or wrong determination in step S3404 or step S3405 is out, based on the second special figure deviation variation table (see FIG. 87 (D)), the special figure variation pattern of the second special symbol display unit 363 ( Toku-zu fluctuation display time) is set to Toku-zu fluctuation display time counter.

<Step S3414>
In step S3414, MPU41, step S3402, S3404 or S3405 lottery results in the jackpot lottery for the special figure game, and the special figure including the special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation display time) set in step S3413 A variation pattern command is set in the RAM 412 . Thereby, the special figure variation pattern command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in step S1401 of the external output process in the next main process (see FIG. 88) executed by the MPU41. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can execute a special figure game effect in the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the special figure variation pattern command.

In addition, if the lottery result is "2R short open time short jackpot", the MPU 41 attaches "A" to the special figure variation patterns "01" to "03" or "06" to indicate that it is a 2R short open time short jackpot. Either "A01" ~ "A03" and "A06" is set in the RAM412 as a special figure variation pattern command. In addition, if the lottery result is "16R short open time short jackpot", the MPU 41 attaches "B" to the special figure variation patterns "01" to "03" or "06" to indicate that it is a 16R short open time short jackpot. Either "B01" ~ "B03" and "B06" is set in the RAM412 as a special figure variation pattern command. Furthermore, when the lottery result is a "small hit", the MPU 41 sets "C05" obtained by adding "C" indicating a small hit to the special figure fluctuation pattern "05" in the RAM 412 as a special figure fluctuation pattern command. do. In addition, MPU41, if the lottery result is "off", any of "D01" to "D07" with "D" indicating that the special figure variation patterns "01" to "07" are off It sets to RAM412 as a special figure fluctuation pattern command. In addition, when the lottery result is "missing", the MPU 41 includes the information of any of front-rear out-of-reach reach, front-rear out-of-rear reach, complete loss, and time-saving design stop loss in the special figure variation pattern command.

<Steps S3415 and S3416>
In step S3405, the MPU 41 starts the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display portion 362 of the main display portion 36 or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display portion 363, and further special symbols ( 1st special figure or 2nd special figure) is set to ON (step S3416) to indicate that the special figure fluctuation display flag indicating that the fluctuation display is in progress (special figure game is being executed), and the fluctuation start process is ended .

It should be noted that the flag during special symbol fluctuation display is that the special symbol is being displayed in the special symbol display portions 362 and 363 of the main display portion 36 in step S1902 in the special symbol game control process of FIG. 26 of the first embodiment. It is referred to determine whether or not (a special figure game is in progress).

[Small hit game control process]
In the small hit game control process executed in step S1407-1 in the main process of FIG. A process for controlling the operation of the feather accessory device 83 is executed in the small winning game executed based on the fact that the result is a small winning. In addition, the small winning game of this embodiment is the first small winning game executed when the lottery result in the second special figure jackpot lottery in the first time saving game state and the second time saving game state is a small win. , and a second small winning game executed when the lottery result of the second special big winning lottery in the third time saving game state is a small winning. Here, FIG. 91 is a time chart showing an example of the progress of the small winning game.

As shown in FIGS. 91 (A) and 91 (B), the small winning game (first small winning game or second small winning game) maintains the state where the introduction port 831 of the feather accessory device 83 is closed. opening (first opening or second opening), and a movable wing portion operation game in which the introduction port 831 is opened by operating the movable wing portion 832 of the wing accessory device 83. Then, the first opening time of the first small winning game (eg 3 seconds to 10 seconds) is set longer than the second opening time of the second small winning game (eg 2 seconds to 9 seconds). Also, the difference between the first opening time of the first small winning game and the second opening time of the second small winning game (for example, 1 second to 3 seconds) is the operating time of the V winning opening opening and closing unit 835 described later. (for example, 0.1 seconds to 1 second).

Also, as shown in FIG. 91 (C), in the small winning game, the operating timing and operating time (opening time) of the V winning opening opening and closing unit 835 are the types of time-saving gaming state in which the second special figure jackpot lottery is executed. are set the same regardless of Of course, one or both of the operation timing and operation time (opening time) of the V winning opening opening and closing unit 835 may be set based on the type of the time-saving gaming state in which the second special figure jackpot lottery is executed. Well, it is not always necessary to set the same regardless of the type of time-saving gaming state. For example, the operation timing and operation time (open time) of the V winning opening opening and closing part 835 in the first small winning game executed based on the second special figure jackpot lottery in the first time saving game state and the second time saving game state It is conceivable to set one or both of them as being different from the second small winning game executed based on the second special figure big winning lottery in the third time saving game state.

In addition, in the small winning game, the execution time of the movable feather portion operating game (operating time of the movable feather portion 832) is set to be the same regardless of the type of the time-saving game state in which the second special figure jackpot lottery is executed. . Of course, the execution time of the movable feather portion operating game (operating time of the movable feather portion 832) can be different according to the type of the time-saving game state in which the second special figure jackpot lottery is performed. For example, the execution time of the movable feather portion operation game of the first small winning game executed based on the second special figure jackpot lottery in the first time saving game state and the second time saving game state, in the third time saving game state It is conceivable to set the execution time shorter than the execution time of the movable feather portion operation game of the second small winning game executed based on the second special figure jackpot lottery.

In addition, in this embodiment, the movable feather operation game in the small winning game is executed as a fixed time (fixed time) regardless of whether the game ball 99 enters the V winning opening 833, but the movable The feather actuation game may be terminated before the fixed time elapses when the game ball 99 enters the V winning hole 833 .

Also, in the small winning game of the present embodiment, the ending is not set, but the ending may be executed after the movable feather portion operating game is finished. In this case, in the ending, it is conceivable that the symbol display section 341 or the like informs whether or not the game ball 99 has entered the V winning hole 833 .

Also, as shown in FIGS. 91(A) and 91(C), the lottery result in the second special figure jackpot lottery in the first time-saving gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state is a small hit. In the first small winning game, the operation timing of the V winning opening opening/closing portion 835 of the feather accessory device 83 is set to the first opening. In the first opening, the introduction port 831 of the wing accessory device 83 is kept closed as described above, so the game ball 99 is not introduced into the wing accessory device 83 . Therefore, in the first small winning game, the game ball 99 is not entered into the V winning opening 833, and the second type big winning game is not generated. As a result, in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, even if the first small winning game is executed because the lottery result in the big winning lottery is a small winning, the two types of big winning games are executed. will not be

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 91 (B) and 91 (C), the second small winning game executed when the lottery result in the second special figure jackpot lottery in the third time-saving gaming state is a small winning , the operation timing of the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 of the wing accessory device 83 is set to the movable wing portion operation game. In the movable wing actuation game, the introduction port 831 is opened by activating the movable wing 832 as described above, so that the game ball 99 can be introduced into the wing accessory device 83 . Therefore, in the second small winning game, when the game ball 99 enters the V winning opening 833, a second kind of big winning game can be generated. As a result, in the third time-saving game state, the second small winning game can be executed based on the execution of the second small winning game when the lottery result of the big winning lottery becomes a small winning. In other words, in any of the first to third time-saving game states, a small winning is included as a lottery result in the big winning lottery, but only the third time-saving game state can generate a two-kind big winning game. As a result, although the details will be described later, it is said that it is transferred to the third time-saving gaming state in which it is possible to generate the two-kind jackpot game via the second time-saving gaming state that is shifted after the end of the type 1 jackpot game. Since new playability is imparted, the attention and interest in the game are improved, and the amusement of the game is improved.

In addition, in the first small winning game of the present embodiment, the operation timing of the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 of the feather accessory device 83 is set to the first opening, so that the game ball 99 is not entered into the V winning opening 833. However, part or all of the operation timing of the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 may be set to the movable feather operation game. Specifically, in the first small winning game, by setting the operation timing of the V winning opening opening and closing part 835 of the feather accessory device 83 so as to extend from the first opening to the movable feather operation game, the V winning opening 833 It may be impossible or difficult to enter the game ball 99 into. In addition, in the first small winning game, all the operation timings of the V winning opening opening and closing part 835 of the feather accessory device 83 are set to the movable feather part operation game, and the operation time of the V winning opening opening and closing part 835 (for example, 0. 02 seconds to 0.1 seconds) may be set short to make it impossible or difficult to enter the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 833. Here, when the game ball 99 cannot enter the V winning opening 833 in the first small winning game, the effect is as described above. If the game ball 99 cannot enter the game ball 99, there is a concern that the player's attention and interest in the small winning game will decrease. On the other hand, if it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the V winning opening 833 in the first small winning game, it is possible for the game ball 99 to enter the V winning opening 833 in the first small winning game. Therefore, the player's attention and interest in the small winning game is suppressed.

Next, a specific processing procedure of the small winning game control processing of the present embodiment will be described. Here, FIGS. 92 to 95 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of the small winning game control process.

<Step S3501>
As shown in FIG. 92, in the small hit game control process of the present embodiment, the MPU 41 first sets the special figure fluctuation stop flag indicating that the first special figure or the second special figure is stopped and displayed to ON. It is determined whether or not there is (step S3501). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to start the small winning game by stop-displaying the first special figure or the second special figure. It should be noted that the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON when stopping and displaying the first special figure or the second special figure in step S1908 in the special figure game control process of FIG.

MPU41, when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S3501: Yes), that is, when it is the timing at which the small winning game can be started, the process proceeds to step S3502. On the other hand, when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S3501: No), that is, when it is not the timing at which the small winning game can be started, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3510 of FIG.

<Step S3502>
If the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S3501: Yes), that is, if it is the timing at which the small winning game can be started, the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the big winning lottery for the special figure game is a small winning (step S3502). Whether or not the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a small hit is determined in step S3402, S3404 or S3405 in the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. Judgment is based on results.

MPU41, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the special game is a small hit (step S3502: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3503, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is not a small hit (step S3502: No), end the small winning game control process.

<Steps S3503 and S3504>
When the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the special figure game is a small hit (step S3502: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the V winning opening opening/closing section operation standby flag to ON (step S3503). The V winning opening opening/closing unit operation standby flag is a flag indicating that the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 of the feather accessory device 83 has not been operated and is waiting for the operation of the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 . This V winning opening opening/closing section operation standby flag is referred to in step S3510 of FIG. 93 in the small winning game control process in order to determine whether or not the V winning opening opening/closing section 835 is not in operation. Then, the MPU 41 sets a V winning opening opening/closing section operation standby time counter indicating the remaining time until the operation of the V winning opening opening/closing section 835 is started (step S3504), and the process proceeds to step S3505.

It should be noted that the V winning opening opening/closing unit operation waiting time counter is decremented by one in step S3511 of FIG. In order to determine whether or not, it is referred to in step S3512 of FIG. 93 in the small hitting game control process.

<Step S3505>
In step S3505, MPU41 judges whether the 3rd time saving game state flag which shows that it is the 3rd time saving game state is set to ON (step S3505). Here, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a small hit, the first small winning game is executed in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state (see FIG. 93 (A)), and the third time-saving game state Then, the second small winning game is executed (see FIG. 93(B)). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the small winning game starts the first small winning game or the second small winning game for the small winning.

It should be noted that the third time-saving gaming state flag, in the later-described game state transition processing, step S3644 in FIG. 99, step S3694 in FIG. 101, step S3694 in FIG. While it is set to ON in S3719 or S3723, it is set to OFF in steps S3657, S3661 or S3668 of FIG. 100 when shifting from the third time-saving game state to another game state.

MPU41, when the third time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3505: Yes), that is, when starting the second small winning game for the third time-saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step S3506 do. On the other hand, MPU41, when the third time-saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3505: No), that is, because it is the first time-saving gaming state or the second time-saving gaming state, starts the first small winning game If so, the process moves to step S3508.

<Steps S3506 and S3507>
When the third time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3505: Yes), that is, when starting the second small winning game for the third time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 of the second small winning game The second opening flag indicating that the second opening (see FIG. 93 (B)) is being executed is set to ON (step S3506), and the remaining time of the second opening time (the movable wings of the second small winning game A second opening time counter indicating the time until the start of the partial operation game (see FIG. 93(B)) is set (step S3507), and the small winning game control process is terminated.

It should be noted that the second opening flag is referenced in step S3526 of FIG. 94 in order to determine whether or not the second opening of the second small winning game is being executed. In addition, the second opening time counter is decremented by one in step S3527 of FIG. 94 each time the small winning game control process is executed, and the second opening is ended (the movable feather portion operating game of the second small winning game is started ) is referred to in step S3528 of FIG.

<Steps S3508 and S3509>
When the third time-saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3505: No), that is, when starting the first small winning game for the first time-saving gaming state or the second time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 The first opening flag indicating that the first opening (see FIG. 93 (A)) of the first small winning game is being executed is set to ON (step S3508), and the remaining time of the first opening time (the first Set the first opening time counter indicating the time until the start of the small winning game movable feather operation game (see FIG. 93 (A)) (step S3509), and terminate the small winning game control process.

It should be noted that the first opening flag is referenced in step S3522 of FIG. 94 in order to determine whether or not the first opening of the first small winning game is being executed. In addition, the first opening time counter is decremented by one in step S3523 of FIG. 94 each time the small winning game control process is executed, and the first opening is ended (the movable feather portion operating game of the first small winning game is started ) is referred to in step S3524 of FIG.

<Step S3510>
If the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S3501: No), that is, if it is not the timing at which the small winning game can be started, the MPU 41, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the V winning opening opening/closing unit operation standby flag indicating that the opening opening/closing unit 835 is not operated and is waiting for the operation of the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 is set to ON (step S3510). . When the V winning opening opening/closing section operation standby flag is set to ON (step S3510: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3511, and when the V winning opening opening/closing section operation standby flag is set to OFF. (Step S3510: No), the process proceeds to step S3517.

<Steps S3511 and S3512>
When the V winning opening opening/closing unit operation standby flag is set to ON (step S3510: Yes), the MPU 41 sets V 1 is subtracted from the winning opening opening/closing section operation waiting time counter (step S3511), and it is determined whether or not the value of the V winning opening opening/closing section operation waiting time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3512). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to start operating the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 and open the V winning opening 833 .

When the value of the V winning opening opening/closing unit operation standby time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3512: Yes), the MPU 41 starts the operation of the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 of the feather accessory device 83 to win a V prize. If it is time to open the mouth 833, the process proceeds to step S3513. On the other hand, when the value of the V winning opening opening/closing unit operation waiting time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3512: No), the MPU 41 starts operating the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 (opens the V winning opening 833). If it is not the timing, the process moves to step S3522 in FIG.

<Steps S3513 to S3516>
If the value of the V winning opening opening/closing unit operation standby time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3512: Yes), that is, the operation of the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 of the feather accessory device 83 is started and the V winning opening 833 is opened. When it is time to open, the MPU 41 operates the V winning opening opening/closing section 835 (step S3513), and sets ON the V winning opening opening/closing section operation flag indicating that the V winning opening opening/closing section 835 is being operated. (Step S3514).

It should be noted that the V winning opening opening/closing section operation flag is referred to in order to determine whether or not the V winning opening opening/closing section 835 is operating in step S3517 described later in the small winning game control process.

Then, the MPU 41 sets a V winning opening opening/closing section operation time counter indicating the remaining operation time of the V winning opening opening/closing section 835 (step S3515), and sets the V winning opening opening/closing section operation standby flag to OFF (step S3516), and the process proceeds to step S3522 in FIG.

It should be noted that the V winning opening opening/closing section operation time counter is decremented by 1 in step S3518 described later in the small winning game control process each time the small winning game control process is executed, and the V winning opening opening/closing section 835 is restored. In order to determine whether or not it is time to (close the V winning opening 833), it is referred to in step S3519 described later in the small hit game control process.

<Step S3517>
When the V winning opening opening/closing section operation standby flag is set to OFF (step S3510: No), the MPU 41 opens and closes the V winning opening opening/closing indicating that the V winning opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather accessory device 83 is being operated. It is determined whether or not the partial operation flag is set to ON (step S3517). If the V winning opening opening/closing unit operation flag is set to ON (step S3517: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2018, and if the V winning opening opening/closing unit operation flag is set to OFF (step S3517: No), the process proceeds to step S3522 in FIG.

<Steps S3518 and S3519>
When the V winning opening opening/closing section operation flag is set to ON (step S3517: Yes), the MPU 41 operates the V winning opening opening/closing section indicating the remaining operating time of the V winning opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather accessory device 83. 1 is subtracted from the time counter (step S3518), and it is determined whether or not the value of the V winning opening opening/closing section operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3519). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to restore the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 of the feather accessory device 83 (close the V winning opening 833).

When the value of the V winning opening opening/closing unit operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3519: Yes), the MPU 41 restores the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 of the feather accessory device 83 (closes the V winning opening 833 ), the process proceeds to step S3520. On the other hand, if the value of the V winning opening opening/closing unit operation time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3519: No), the MPU 41 restores the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 of the feather accessory device 83 (the V winning opening 833 If it is not the time to close), the process proceeds to step S3522 in FIG.

<Steps S3520 and S3521>
If the value of the V winning opening opening/closing unit operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3519: Yes), that is, the timing to restore the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 of the feather accessory device 83 (close the V winning opening 833) , the MPU 41 restores the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 (step S3520), and sets the V winning opening opening/closing unit operation flag indicating that the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 is being operated to OFF (step S3521), the process proceeds to step S3522 in FIG.

<Step S3522>
As shown in FIG. 94, in step S3522, the MPU 41 determines whether the first opening flag indicating that the first opening of the first small winning game (see FIG. 91(A)) is being executed is set to ON. determine whether or not In addition, the first opening flag is set to ON in step S3509 of FIG. 92 in the small winning game control process when the first opening of the first small winning game is started.

MPU41, when the 1st opening flag is set to ON (step S3522: Yes), ie, when the 1st opening of the 1st small hit game is performed, transfers a process to step S3523. On the other hand, when the first opening flag is set to OFF (step S3522: No), that is, when the first opening of the first small winning game is not executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3526.

<Steps S3523 to S3525>
When the first opening flag is set to ON (step S3522: Yes), that is, when the first opening of the first small winning game is executed, the MPU 41 determines the remaining time of the first opening time (the first small 1 is subtracted from the value of the first opening time counter (step S3523), and the first opening time counter after the subtraction is It is determined whether or not it is 0 (step S3524). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to end the first opening and start the movable feather portion operating game (see FIG. 91(A)) in the first small winning game.

MPU41, when the first opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3525: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the first opening and start the movable feather portion operation game in the first small winning game , the first opening flag indicating that the first opening is being executed is set to OFF (step S3525), and the process proceeds to step S3530. On the other hand, when the subtracted first opening time counter is not 0 (step S3524: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the first opening is finished or the movable feather operation game is started in the first small winning game. If not, the small winning game control process is terminated.

<Step S3526>
When the first opening flag of the first small winning game is set to OFF (step S3522: No), the MPU 41 performs the second opening of the second small winning game (see FIG. 91 (B)). It is determined whether or not the second opening flag indicating that is set to ON. It should be noted that the second opening flag is set to ON in step S3507 of FIG. 92 in the small winning game control process when the second opening of the second small winning game (see FIG. 91 (B)) is started. be.

MPU41, when the 2nd opening flag is set to ON (step S3526: Yes), ie, when the 2nd opening of the 2nd small hit game is performed, transfers a process to step S3527. On the other hand, when the second opening flag is set to OFF (step S3526: No), that is, when the second opening of the second small winning game is not executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3533 of FIG. do.

<Steps S3527 to S3529>
When the second opening flag is set to ON (step S3526: Yes), that is, when the second opening of the second small winning game is executed, the MPU 41 determines the remaining time of the second opening time (the second small 1 is subtracted from the value of the second opening time counter (step S3527), and the second opening time counter after the subtraction is It is determined whether or not it is 0 (step S3528). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to end the second opening and start the movable feather portion operating game (see FIG. 91(B)) in the second small winning game.

When the second opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3528: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the second opening and start the movable feather portion operation game in the second small winning game. , the second opening flag indicating that the second opening is being executed is set to OFF (step S3529), and the process proceeds to step S3530. On the other hand, when the second opening time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S3529: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the second opening is finished or the movable feather operation game is started in the second small winning game. If not, the small winning game control process is terminated.

<Step S3530>
When the first opening flag of the first small winning game or the second opening flag of the second small winning game is turned off (step S3525 or S3529), that is, the opening is finished in the first small winning game or the second small winning game When it is time to start the movable wing actuation game, the MPU 41 starts the movable wing actuation game by actuating the movable wing 832 of the wing accessory device 83 (step S3530), and advances the process to step S3531. Transition.

In the movable wing portion operating game, by operating the movable wing portion 832 of the wing accessory device 83, the introduction port 831 of the wing accessory device 83 is opened, and the game ball 99 into the inside of the wing accessory device 83. can enter the ball.

<Steps S3531 and S3532>
At step S3531, the MPU 41 sets on a movable wing actuation flag indicating that the movable wing 832 is actuated (that the movable wing actuation game is being executed) (step S3531). Then, the MPU 41 sets a movable feather operation time counter indicating the remaining operation time of the movable feather 832 (remaining time of the movable feather operation game) (step S3532), and ends the small winning game control process.

It should be noted that the movable feather portion operation flag is referred to in step S3533 of FIG. 95 in the small winning game control process in order to determine whether or not the movable feather portion 832 is operated (the movable feather portion operation game is executed). be done. In addition, the movable feather portion operating time counter is decremented by 1 in step S3534 of FIG. In order to determine whether or not it is time to end the partial operation game, reference is made in step S3535 of FIG. 95 in the small winning game control process.

<Step S3533>
When the second opening flag is set to OFF (step S3522: No), that is, when neither the first opening nor the second opening is performed, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not a movable wing actuation flag indicating that (the movable wing actuation game is being executed) is set to ON (step S3533). When the movable feather actuation flag is set to ON (step S3533: Yes), that is, when the movable feather actuation game is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3534. On the other hand, when the movable feather operation flag is set to OFF (step S3533: No), that is, when the movable feather operation game is not executed, the MPU 41 ends the small winning game control process.

<Steps S3534 and S3535>
If the movable wing actuation flag is set to ON (step S3533: Yes), that is, if the movable wing actuation game is being executed, the MPU 41 determines the remaining actuation time of the movable wing 832 (movable wing actuation 1 is subtracted from the value of the movable feather operation time counter indicating the remaining time of the game (step S3534). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the movable feather portion operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3535). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to return the movable feather 832 and close the introduction port 831 to end the movable feather operating game (small winning game).

When the value of the movable feather operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3533: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the timing of returning the movable feather 832 (movable feather operation game (small winning game)). If it is the timing, the process proceeds to step S3536. On the other hand, when the value of the movable wing portion operating time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3533: No), the MPU 41 terminates the timing of returning the movable wing portion 832 (movable wing portion operating game (small winning game)). When it is not the timing to make it, the small hit game control process is terminated.

<Steps S3536 and S3537>
If the value of the movable wing portion operating time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3533: Yes), that is, the timing for returning the movable wing portion 832 (movable wing portion operating game (small winning game)) is finished. In this case, the MPU 41 ends the movable wing portion operating game (small winning game) by returning the movable wing portion 832 (step S3536). Then, the MPU 41 sets the movable wing portion operation flag indicating that the movable wing portion 832 is being operated (that the movable wing portion operation game is being executed) to OFF (step S3536), and controls the small winning game. End the process.

[Game state transition processing]
In the game state transition processing executed in step S1408 in the main processing of FIG. 88 of this embodiment, processing for shifting various game states is executed. Here, FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an example of game state transition (game flow) in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 96, in this embodiment, as the game state, the normal game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state, 1 kind jackpot game state, 2 kinds jackpot game state, And includes a small winning gaming state.

In the normal game state, the short-time operation of the electric accessory 315b is performed at a low frequency (see FIGS. 85A and 85C), and when the game ball 99 enters the first winning hole 314, The first special figure jackpot lottery is executed based on the first special figure jackpot success or failure table (see FIG. 86 (A)), and the second special figure triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 It is a game state in which the jackpot lottery is executed based on the short-open second special figure jackpot success/failure table (see FIG. 87(A)).

The state is shifted to the normal game state when the lottery result for the jackpot lottery of the prescribed number of times is notified (executing the special figure game of the prescribed number of times) without shifting from the first to third time-saving game states to the big win game state. In addition, in the normal game state, when the transition to the small winning game state is made based on the fact that the result of the big winning lottery in the normal game state is a small win, the V of the feather accessory device 83 in the small winning game state. When the game ball 99 is not entered into the winning opening 833 (V non-winning), the game state is returned from the small winning game state.

On the other hand, from the normal game state, when it is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery is a big win, it shifts to a type 1 jackpot game state, and when it is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win, it is a small win game state. , and when it is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery is out of stopping the time saving pattern (stopping the time saving pattern), the game state is changed to the first time saving game state. In addition, from the normal game state, it does not shift to the second time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state, and the two types of jackpot game state.

In the first time-saving game state, the second winning opening 315 is opened with high frequency by executing the short-time operation of the electric role product 315b with high frequency (see FIGS. 85(B) and 85(C)), The first special figure jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the gaming ball 99 into the first prize opening 314 is executed based on the first special figure jackpot success/failure table (see FIG. 86(A)), and the second prize opening 315 It is a gaming state in which the second special figure jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 to is executed based on the short open second special figure jackpot success/failure table (see FIG. 87(A)).

To the first time-saving game state, in the normal game state, when it is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery is out of time-saving design stoppage (time-saving design stoppage). In addition, to the first time-saving gaming state, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the first time-saving gaming state is a small winning, when the state is shifted to a small winning game state, the feather role is performed in the small winning gaming state. When the game ball 99 is not entered into the V winning opening 833 of the object device 83 (V non-winning), the game state is returned from the small winning game state.

On the other hand, from the first time-saving game state, when it is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, it shifts to a type 1 jackpot game state, and when it is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win. When the game state is shifted to the game state and the lottery result for the jackpot lottery of the prescribed number of times is reported (the special figure game of the prescribed number of times is executed) without shifting to the jackpot game state, the game state is shifted to the normal game state. It should be noted that, from the first time-saving game state, it does not shift to the second time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state, and the two types of jackpot game state.

The first time-saving game state may be omitted, and at least two types of time-saving game states, the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state, may be set. In addition, when omitting the first time-saving gaming state, the first special figure off distribution table used for the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 to the first winning opening 314 (see FIG. 86 (D)) The time saving pattern stop off is omitted from the off type in.

In the second time-saving game state, similarly to the second time-saving game state, the short-time operation of the electric accessory 315b is performed with high frequency, so that the second winning opening 315 is opened with high frequency (Fig. 85 (B) and FIG. 85 (C)), the first special figure jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning hole 314 is based on the first special figure jackpot success/failure table (see FIG. 86 (A)) , and the second special figure jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 is executed based on the short-open second special figure jackpot success/failure table (see FIG. 87 (A)). It is a game state.

To the second short game state which is a profit state, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game state or the first time-saving game state is a big win, the first kind jackpot game is entered. After the end, the conditions for the time-saving game are met and the game shifts. In addition, to the second short game state, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is a small hit, when the state is shifted to the small win game state, the feather role is in the small win game state. When the game ball 99 is not entered into the V winning opening 833 of the object device 83 (V non-winning), the game state is returned from the small winning game state.

On the other hand, from the second time-saving game state, details will be described later, but when it is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery is the time-saving symbol stoppage that satisfies a predetermined condition, the state shifts to the third time-saving game state. In addition, from the second time-saving game state, when it is notified that the result of the big winning lottery is a big win, it shifts to a type 1 big winning game state, and when it is notified that the result of the big winning lottery is a small win. Move to game state. Also, from the second time-saving gaming state, when the lottery result for the specified number of jackpot lotteries is notified without transitioning to either the jackpot gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state (executing the specified number of special figure games), Switch to the normal game state. It should be noted that, from the second time-saving game state, it does not shift to the first time-saving game state and the two types of jackpot game state.

In the third time-saving game state, unlike the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, the second winning port 315 is opened with high frequency by frequently executing the long-time operation of the electric accessory 315b. (See FIGS. 85(B) and 85(C)), the first special figure jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the first winning hole 314 is the first special figure jackpot success/failure table (FIG. 86 ( (See A)), and the second special figure jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 is a short-open second special figure jackpot success or failure table (see FIG. 87 (B)) ) is a game state executed based on. In the third time-saving game state, the electric accessory 315b is operated for a long time compared to the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state. It is a time-saving game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state in which the action time of the accessory 315b is short.

The transition to the third time-saving game state is made when the result of the second special figure jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state informs that the time-saving design is out of stoppage that satisfies a predetermined condition. In addition, to the third time-saving gaming state, if the result of the big winning lottery in the third time-saving gaming state is a small winning, and the transition to the small winning gaming state is performed, the feather accessory is in the small winning gaming state. When the game ball 99 is not entered into the V winning opening 833 of the device 83 (V non-winning), the game state is returned from the small winning game state. Here, the predetermined condition is that the number of time-saving games (see FIG. 87 (E)) set for the time-saving design stop deviation, which is the result of the second special figure jackpot lottery in the second time-saving gaming state, is the second time-saving It is to exceed the number of remaining time-saving games in the gaming state (see steps S3409 to S3412 in the special figure fluctuation start processing in FIG. 90).

On the other hand, from the third time-saving game state, when it is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery is a big win, it shifts to the type 1 jackpot game state, and when it is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win. Move to game state. In addition, from the third time-saving game state, the lottery result for the specified number of jackpot lotteries is notified without transitioning to either the 1st kind jackpot game state or the 2nd kind jackpot game state via the small hit game state ( When the specified number of special game games are executed), the normal game state is entered. It should be noted that, from the third time-saving game state, it does not shift to the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the two types of jackpot game state.

Next, a specific processing procedure of the game state transition processing of this embodiment will be described. Here, FIGS. 97 to 103 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of the game state transition processing.

<Step S3601>
As shown in FIG. 97, in the game state transition process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state is set to ON (step S3601). 98, step S3650 in FIG. 99, step S3667 in FIG. 100 or step S3701 in FIG. On the other hand, it is set to OFF in steps S3608, S3612 or S3616 of FIG. 97 when the normal game state is shifted to another game state.

When the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S3601: Yes), that is, when the game state is normal, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3602. On the other hand, when the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S3601: No), that is, when the game state is other than the normal game state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3617 of FIG.

<Step S3602>
When the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S3601: Yes), that is, when the normal game state, the MPU 41 stops the variably displayed special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol). It is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop display flag indicating that (the special figure game has ended) is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 shifts from the normal game state to another game state (1 type jackpot game state, small hit game state or first time-saving game state) by the special symbol being stopped and displayed (the special game is finished). Determine whether it is possible timing.

In addition, the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is the special figure game control of the above-described first embodiment of FIG. It is set to ON in step S1908 in the process.

MPU41, when the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is set to ON (step S3602: Yes), that is, when it is the timing when it is possible to shift from the normal game state to another game state, the process proceeds to step S3603. On the other hand, when the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is set to OFF (step S3602: No), that is, when it is not the timing at which it is possible to shift from the normal game state to another game state, the MPU 41 terminates the game state transition process. do.

<Step S3603>
When the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is set to ON (step S3602: Yes), that is, when the timing is such that it is possible to shift from the normal game state to another game state, the MPU 41 ends with the special symbol stop display. It is determined whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game is the time saving pattern stop off (step S3603).

MPU41, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is out of the time saving symbol stop (step S3603: Yes), the process moves to step S3604, the result of the jackpot lottery is the time saving symbol If it is not out of stop (step S3603: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3609.

<Steps S3604 to S3608>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is out of the time saving symbol stop (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the normal game state to the first time saving game state ( step S3604). Then, the MPU 41 sets the upper limit value (prescribed number of times) (see FIG. 86 (E)) of the special figure game executed in the first time saving gaming state to the time saving number counter (step S3605), and in the first time saving gaming state The first time-saving gaming state flag indicating that there is is set to ON (step S3606). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the first time-saving game state transition command (step S3607), sets the normal game state flag indicating that it is in the normal game state to off (step S3608), and ends the game state transition process. do.

The first time-saving game state transition command is a command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 that the game state is shifted from the normal game state to the first time-saving game state, and is a step in the external output process of the main process of FIG. It is sent to the audio lamp controller 5 in S1401. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 5 can execute an effect corresponding to the first time-saving game state in the special figure game based on the first time-saving game state transition command.

<Step S3609>
When the result of the jackpot lottery for the special pattern game terminated by the stop display of the special pattern is not out of stoppage of the time saving pattern (step S3603: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a type 1 jackpot. (Step S3609). MPU41, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is a type 1 jackpot (step S3609: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3610, and the result of the jackpot lottery is a type 1 jackpot If not (step S3609: No), the process proceeds to step S3613.

<Steps S3610 to S3612>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is the 1st jackpot (step S3609: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the normal game state to the 1st jackpot game state (step S3610). Then, the MPU 41 sets on the normal 1-type jackpot game state flag indicating that it is in the 1-type jackpot game state transferred from the normal game state (step S3611), and the normal game indicating that it is in the normal game state. The state flag is set to OFF (step S3612), and the game state transition processing ends.

<Step S3613>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is not a one-type jackpot (step S3609: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a small hit (step S3613). The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3614 when the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is a small hit (step S3613: Yes). On the other hand, MPU41, if the result of the jackpot lottery is not a small hit (step S3613: No), that is, if the result of the jackpot lottery is out (reach out or complete out) other than time saving pattern stop off, the gaming state End the migration process.

<Steps S3614 to S3616>
When the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is a small hit (step S3613: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the normal game state to the small hit game state (step S3614). . Then, the MPU 41 sets on the normal small winning game state flag indicating that it is a small winning game state transferred from the normal game state (step S3615), and the normal game state flag indicating that it is a normal game state. is set to OFF (step S3616), and the game state transition process is terminated.

<Step S3617>
When the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S3601: No), that is, when the game state is other than the normal game state, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the indicated first time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON, that is, whether it is the first time-saving gaming state (step S3617).

It should be noted that the first time saving game state flag is set to ON in step S3606 of FIG. 97 when the game state is shifted from the normal game state to the first time saving game state in the game state transition process.

MPU41, when the 1st time saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3617: Yes), ie, when it is the 1st time saving game state, transfers processing to step S3618. On the other hand, when the first time-saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3617: No), that is, when it is not the first time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3631 of FIG.

<Step S3618>
When the first time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3617: Yes), that is, when it is the first time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 is a special symbol (first special figure or second special figure ) has been stopped (the special figure game has ended), it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 shifts from the first time-saving game state to another game state (1 kind jackpot game state, small hit game state or normal game state) by the special symbol being stopped and displayed (the special symbol game is finished). Determine whether it is possible timing.

In addition, the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is the special figure game control of the above-described first embodiment of FIG. It is set to ON in step S1908 in the process.

MPU41, when the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is set to ON (step S3618: Yes), when it is the timing that can be shifted from the first time-saving game state to another game state, the process proceeds to step S3619 . On the other hand, the MPU 41 ends the game state transition process when the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is set to OFF, that is, when it is not the timing at which it is possible to shift from the first time-saving game state to another game state.

<Step S3619>
If the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is set to ON (step S3618: Yes), if it is a timing that can be shifted from the first time-saving game state to another game state, the MPU 41 ends by the stop display of the special symbol It is determined whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game is the first jackpot (step S3619).

MPU41, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is a type 1 jackpot (step S3619: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3620, and the result of the jackpot lottery is a type 1 jackpot If not (step S3619: No), the process proceeds to step S3623.

<Steps S3620 to S3622>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special pattern game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is a jackpot (step S3619: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the first time-saving game state to the jackpot game state. (Step S3620). Then, the MPU 41 sets the first time saving one kind jackpot game state flag indicating that it is a one kind jackpot game state transferred from the first time saving game state to ON (step S3621), and in the first time saving game state The first time-saving game state flag indicating that there is is set to OFF (step S3622), and the game state transition process is terminated.

<Step S3623>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is not a one-type jackpot (step S3619: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a small hit (step S3623). MPU41, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is a small hit (step S3623: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3624, and when the result of the jackpot lottery is not a small hit (Step S3623: No), the process proceeds to step S3627.

<Steps S3624 to S3626>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is a small hit (step S3623: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the first time-saving game state to the small hit game state (step S3624). Then, the MPU 41 sets the first time saving small winning game state flag indicating that it is a small winning game state transferred from the first time saving game state to ON (step S3625), and that it is the first time saving game state is set to OFF (step S3616), and the game state transition process is terminated.

<Step S3627>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is not a small hit (step S3623: No), the MPU 41 is the value of the time saving number counter indicating the remaining time saving game number in the first time saving game state is 0 (step S3627). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to shift from the first time-saving game state to the normal game state based on the time-saving number counter for the first time-saving game state.

It should be noted that the time saving number counter for the first time saving game state is set in step S3605 of FIG. It is subtracted each time a special figure game (first special figure game or second special figure game) is started in step S3407 in the start process.

MPU41, when the value of the time saving number counter for the first time saving game state is 0 (step S3627: Yes), that is, in the first time saving game state the upper limit value of the time saving game number (prescribed number of times) special figure game was executed If so, the process proceeds to step S3628. On the other hand, MPU41, if the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (step S3627: No), that is, in the first time saving game state upper limit of the time saving game number (prescribed number of times) If the special game is not executed, The game state transition processing is ended.

<Steps S3628 to S3630>
When the value of the time saving number counter for the first time saving game state is 0 (step S3627: Yes), that is, when the special game of the upper limit value (prescribed number of times) of the time saving game number is executed in the first time saving game state, the MPU 41 , the game state is shifted from the first time-saving game state to the normal game state (step S3628). Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag indicating that it is in the normal game state to ON (step S3629), and sets the first time saving game state flag indicating that it is in the first time saving game state to OFF ( Step S3630), the game state transition processing ends.

<Step S3631>
When the first time-saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3617: No), that is, when it is not the first time-saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. 99, the MPU 41 indicates that it is in the second time-saving gaming state. It is determined whether or not the second time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3631).

It should be noted that the second time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON in step S3673 of FIG. be.

MPU41, when the second time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3631: Yes), that is, when it is the second time-saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step S3632. On the other hand, when the second time-saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3631: No), that is, when it is not the second time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3652 in FIG.

<Step S3632>
If the second time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3631: Yes), that is, if it is the second time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 is a special symbol (first special figure or second special figure ) has been stopped (the special figure game has ended), it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 changes from the second time-saving game state to another game state (one type jackpot game state, small game state, third time-saving game state or It is determined whether or not it is time to shift to the normal game state.

In addition, the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is the special figure game control of the above-described first embodiment of FIG. It is set to ON in step S1908 in the process.

MPU41, when the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is set to ON (step S3602: Yes), that is, when it is the timing when it is possible to shift from the second game state to another game state, the process proceeds to step S3633 . On the other hand, MPU41, when the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is set to OFF (step S3602: No), that is, when it is not the timing when it is possible to shift from the second game state to another game state, the game state transition processing finish.

<Step S3633>
If the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is set to ON (step S3602: Yes), that is, if the timing is such that it is possible to shift from the second game state to another game state, the MPU 41 ends with a special symbol stop display. It is determined whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game is the first jackpot (step S3633).

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3634 when the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is the first jackpot (step S3633: Yes). On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot (step S3633: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3637.

<Steps S3634 to S3636>
When the result of the jackpot lottery for the special pattern game ended by the stop display of the special pattern is the first jackpot (step S3633: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the second time-saving game state to the first jackpot game state. (Step S3634). Then, the MPU 41 sets on the second time saving one kind jackpot game state flag indicating that it is the one kind jackpot game state transferred from the second time saving game state (step S3635), and in the second time saving game state The second time-saving game state flag indicating that there is is set to OFF (step S3636), and the game state transition process is terminated.

<Step S3637>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is not a one-type jackpot (step S3633: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a small hit (step S3637).

MPU41, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is a small hit (step S3637: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3638, and when the result of the jackpot lottery is not a small hit (Step S3637: No), the process proceeds to step S3641.

<Steps S3638 to S3640>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is a small hit (step S3637: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the second time-saving game state to the small hit game state (step S3638). Then, the MPU 41 sets the second time saving small winning game state flag indicating that it is a small hitting game state transferred from the second time saving game state to ON (step S3639), and is in the second time saving game state is set to OFF (step S3640), and the game state transition process is terminated.

<Step S3641>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is not a small hit (step S3637: No), the MPU 41 moves the game state from the second time saving game state to the third time saving game state. It is determined whether or not the time saving gaming state transition flag is set to ON (step S3641). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to shift the game state from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state.

The third time-saving game state transition flag is the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving design stoppage ( From FIG. 87 (E)), if the subtraction value obtained by subtracting the value of the time saving number counter indicating the remaining time saving game number in the second time saving game state is greater than 0 If the number of time-saving games performed is greater than the number of remaining time-saving games in the second time-saving game state), it is set to ON in step S3412 in the fluctuation start process of FIG.

MPU41, when the third time-saving game state transition flag is set to ON (step S3641: Yes), that is, when the game state is shifted from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state, the process proceeds to step S3642 Transition. On the other hand, MPU41, when the third time-saving gaming state transition flag is set to OFF (step S3641: No), that is, when not shifting the game state from the second time-saving gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state, step the process Move to S3648.

<Steps S3642 and S3643>
When the third time-saving gaming state transition flag is set to ON (step S3641: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the second time-saving gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state (step S3642), and the third The upper limit value (specified number of times) of the special figure game executed in the time saving game state is set to the time saving number counter (step S3643), and the process proceeds to step S3644.

Here, the value of the time saving number counter is set as a value corresponding to the time saving game number selected when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time saving game state is out of time saving symbol stoppage. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 87(E), the MPU 41 sets the value of the time saving number counter to "10" when 10 times is selected as the number of time saving games, and 30 as the number of time saving games. When the number of times is selected, it is set to "30", when 50 times is selected as the number of time-saving games, it is set to "50", and when 100 times is selected as the number of time-saving games, it is set to "100" ” is set. In other words, the number of time-saving games when the second time-saving gaming state is shifted to the third time-saving gaming state is the number of time-saving games selected when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving gaming state is out of the time-saving design stop. Updated.

Here, in the third time-saving game state, as described above, the electric accessory 315b is operated for a longer time than in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state. is easy to enter, it is a time-saving game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state in which the operation time of the electric accessory 315b is short. In addition, in the small winning game executed when the result of the big winning lottery in the first time saving game state and the second time saving game state is a small win, the game ball 99 to the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 While it is impossible to enter the ball, in the third time-saving game state, in the small winning game executed when the result of the big winning lottery is a small winning, the game to the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 Entry of ball 99 is possible. Therefore, unlike the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game, the third time-saving game state is a two-type jackpot based on the entry of the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 in the small winning game. This game state is more advantageous to the player than the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game in that the game can be executed.

In this way, the number of time-saving games in the case of shifting from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state is the time-saving game selected when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is out of time-saving symbol stop. By updating to the number of times, it is possible to effectively utilize the value for the number of times of time-saving games determined for the time-saving symbol stop off.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving gaming state is time-saving design stop-off, the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving design stop-off is set in the second time-saving gaming state. By shifting to the third time-saving game state when the number of remaining time-saving games is greater than the number of remaining time-saving games, the less the number of remaining time-saving games in the second time-saving game state, the more likely it is to shift to the third time-saving game state. Granted. As a result, since attention and interest in the game can be improved, the amusement of the game is improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving gaming state is the time-saving design stop-off, the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving design stop-off is the second time-saving gaming state. If it is less than the remaining time-saving game count, the time-saving game count in the second time-saving game state is not changed, but for example, as the time-saving game count in the second time-saving game state, the remaining time in the second time-saving game state The number of time-saving games set for the time-saving design stop deviation may be added to the number of time-saving games. As a result, the number of jackpot lotteries for determining whether to shift from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state increases, so the possibility of shifting to the third time-saving game state advantageous to the player is reduced. Since it is maintained for a longer period of time, attention and interest in the game can be enhanced, and the amusement of the game is enhanced.

<Steps S3644 and S3645>
In step S3644, the MPU 41 sets on the third time-saving game state flag indicating that it is the third time-saving game state, and furthermore, moves from the second time-saving game to the third time-saving game state by voice lamp control. A third time-saving game state A transition command to be notified to the device 5 is set (step S3645), and the process proceeds to step S3646.

In addition, the 3rd time saving game state A transition command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in step S1401 in the main process of FIG. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can execute an effect corresponding to the third time-saving game state.

<Steps S3646 and S3647>
In step S3646, the MPU 41 sets off the third time-saving gaming state transition flag for shifting to the third time-saving gaming state, and further sets off the second time-saving gaming state flag indicating that it is the second time-saving gaming state. (step S3647), and the game state transition process ends.

<Step S3648>
If the third time-saving gaming state transition flag is set to OFF (step S3641: No), that is, if the game state is not shifted from the second time-saving gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 is in the second time-saving gaming state. It is determined whether the value of the time saving number counter indicating the number of remaining time saving games is 0 (step S3627).

In addition, the time saving number counter for the second time saving game state is set in steps S3672, S3679 or S3686 of FIG. Each time the special figure game (first special figure game or second special figure game) is started in step S3407 in the special figure fluctuation start processing of FIG. 90, it is subtracted.

MPU41, when the value of the time saving number counter for the second time saving game state is 0 (step S3648: Yes), that is, in the second time saving game state upper limit value of the time saving game number (prescribed number of times) special figure game was executed If so, the process proceeds to step S3649. On the other hand, MPU41, if the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (step S3649: No), that is, in the second time saving game state upper limit of the time saving game number (prescribed number of times) If the special game is not executed, The game state transition processing is ended.

<Steps S3649 to S3651>
When the value of the time saving number counter for the second time saving game state is 0 (step S3648: Yes), that is, when the special game of the upper limit value (prescribed number of times) of the time saving game number is executed in the second time saving game state, MPU 41 , the game state is shifted from the second time-saving game state to the normal game state (step S3648). Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag indicating that it is in the normal game state to ON (step S3650), and sets the second time saving game state flag indicating that it is in the second time saving game state to OFF ( Step S3651), the game state transition processing ends.

<Step S3652>
When the second time-saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3631: No), that is, when it is not the second time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 indicates that it is in the third time-saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the third time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3652).

It should be noted that the third time-saving gaming state flag is, in the game state transition process, step S3644 in FIG. 99, step S3694 in FIG. 101, step S3719 in FIG. Or it is set to ON in S3723.

MPU41, when the 3rd time saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3652: Yes), ie, when it is the 3rd time saving game state, transfers processing to step S3653. On the other hand, when the third time-saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3652: No), ie, when it is not the third time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3669 of FIG.

<Step S3653>
When the third time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3652: Yes), that is, when it is the third time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 is a variable display special symbol (first special figure or second special figure ) has been stopped (the special figure game has ended), it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 shifts from the third time-saving game state to another game state (1 type jackpot game state, small hit game state, normal game state) by the special symbol being stopped and displayed (the special symbol game is finished). Determine whether it is possible timing.

In addition, the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is the special figure game control of the above-described first embodiment of FIG. It is set to ON in step S1908 in the process.

MPU41, when the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is set to ON (step S3653: Yes), that is, when it is the timing when it is possible to shift from the third game state to another game state, the process proceeds to step S3654 . On the other hand, MPU41, when the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is set to OFF (step S3653: No), that is, when it is not the timing when it is possible to shift from the third game state to another game state, the game state transition processing finish.

<Step S3654>
When the special figure fluctuation stop display flag is set to ON (step S3653: Yes), that is, when the timing is such that it is possible to shift from the third game state to another game state, the MPU 41 ends with the special symbol stop display. It is determined whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game is a 1st jackpot (step S3654).

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3655 when the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is the first jackpot (step S3654: Yes). On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot (step S3654: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3658.

<Steps S3655 to S3657>
When the result of the jackpot lottery for the special pattern game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is the first jackpot (step S3655: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the third time-saving game state to the first jackpot game state. (Step S3655). Then, the MPU 41 sets on the third time saving one kind jackpot game state flag indicating that it is the one kind jackpot game state transferred from the third time saving game state (step S3656), and in the third time saving game state The third time-saving game state flag indicating that there is is set to OFF (step S3657), and the game state transition process is terminated.

<Step S3658>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is not a one-type jackpot (step S3654: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a small hit (step S3658). The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3659 when the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is a small hit (step S3658: Yes). On the other hand, when the result of the big winning lottery is not a small winning (step S3658: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3662.

<Steps S3659 to S3661>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is a small hit (step S3658: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the third time-saving game state to the small hit game state (step S3659). Then, the MPU 41 sets the third time saving small winning game state flag indicating that it is a small winning game state transferred from the third time saving game state to ON (step S3660), and is in the third time saving game state is set to OFF (step S3661), and the game state transition process is terminated.

<Step S3662>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is not a small hit (step S3658: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery is the time reduction symbol stop off ( step S3662).

MPU41, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is out of time saving symbol stoppage (step S3662: Yes), moves the process to step S3663. On the other hand, MPU41 transfers a process to step S3665, when the result of the said jackpot lottery is not time saving design stop deviation (step S3662: No).

<Step S3663>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is the time saving symbol stop off (step S3662: Yes), the MPU 41 executes the resetting process of the time saving number counter for the third time saving game state. (Step S3663), the process proceeds to step S3664. In this resetting process, the MPU 41, for example, than the remaining time-saving game number in the third time-saving game state, the number of time-saving games selected for the time-saving design stop deviation (prescribed number of times) (see FIG. 87 (E)) When there is more, the value of the time saving number counter for the third time saving game state is reset to the time saving game number (specified number of times).

Thus, than the remaining time-saving game number in the third time-saving game state, when the number of time-saving games selected for the time-saving symbol stop deviation (specified number of times) (see FIG. 87 (E)) is more, By resetting the value of the time-saving counter to the number of time-saving games (specified number of times), the number of jackpot lottery numbers (number of special game games) executed in the 3rd time-saving game state increases, so the 3rd time-saving game state , that is, the profit that the second type jackpot game based on the entry of the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 in the small win game can be enjoyed more greatly.

In addition, the processing for the time saving number counter when the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time saving game state is out of time saving pattern stop is the first when the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time saving game state is out of time saving pattern stop. It may be reset regardless of the number of remaining time-saving games in the three-hour-saving game state. For example, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving gaming state is the time-saving design stop off, the number of time-saving games selected for the time-saving design stop-off (specified number of times) (see FIG. 87 (E)) is relevant Regardless of whether it is larger or smaller than the remaining number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state, it may be changed to the number of time-saving games (prescribed number of times) selected for the time-saving symbol stoppage. Of course, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving gaming state is the time-saving design stop off, the number of time-saving games selected for the time-saving design stop-off (specified number of times) (see FIG. 87 (E)) is the relevant Regardless of whether it is greater or less than the remaining number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state, the remaining number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state may be maintained without resetting.

<Step S3664>
In step S3664, the MPU 41 sets a time saving number counter reset command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the time saving number counter resetting process has been executed (step S3664), and ends the game state transition process. . In addition, in the time saving number counter reset command, in addition to the fact that the resetting process of the time saving number counter is executed, when the value of the time saving number counter is changed, information about the number of time saving games after the change is included. . Then, the time saving number counter reset command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. 76, and the audio lamp control device 5 receives the time saving number counter reset command , reset the value of the time-saving counter.

<Step S3665>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is not out of the time saving symbol stop (step S3662: No), the MPU 41 is a time saving number counter indicating the remaining time saving game number in the third time saving game state is 0 (step S3665).

The time saving number counter for the third time saving game state is the second time saving game state, the 1st kind jackpot game state or the 2nd kind jackpot game state in the game state transition process. Step S3643, step S3693 in FIG. 101, or step S3724 in FIG. 103 is set, and in step S3407 in the special figure fluctuation start process in FIG. It is decremented each time it is started.

MPU41, when the value of the time-saving counter for the third time-saving gaming state is 0 (step S3665: Yes), that is, in the third time-saving gaming state, the special figure game of the upper limit of the number of time-saving games (prescribed number of times) was executed. If so, the process proceeds to step S3666. On the other hand, MPU41, if the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (step S3649: No), that is, in the third time saving game state upper limit value of the time saving game number (prescribed number of times) If the special game is not executed, The game state transition processing is ended.

<Steps S3666 to S3668>
When the value of the time saving number counter for the third time saving game state is 0 (step S3665: Yes), that is, when the special game of the upper limit value (prescribed number of times) of the time saving game number is executed in the third time saving game state, the MPU 41 , the game state is shifted from the third time-saving game state to the normal game state (step S3666). Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag indicating that it is in the normal game state to ON (step S3667), and sets the third time saving game state flag indicating that it is in the third time saving game state to OFF ( Step S3668), the game state transition processing ends.

<Step S3669>
When the third time-saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3652: No), that is, when it is not the third time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it is set (step S3669).

In addition, the normal 1 type jackpot game state flag is a flag indicating that it is a 1 type jackpot game state transferred from the normal game state, and when the game state is shifted from the normal game state to the 1 type jackpot game state , is set to ON in step S3611 of FIG. 97 of the game state transition process.

MPU41, when the type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to ON (step S3669: Yes), that is, when it is the type 1 jackpot game state transferred from the normal game state, the process proceeds to step S3670. On the other hand, when the normal type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to OFF (step S3669: No), that is, when it is not the type 1 jackpot game state transferred from the normal game state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3676. .

<Step S3670>
When the normal type 1 jackpot game state flag is set to ON (step S3669: Yes), that is, when the type 1 jackpot game state is transferred from the normal game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the type 1 jackpot game has ended. It is determined whether or not (step S3670). Whether or not the type 1 jackpot game has ended is determined based on the jackpot game end flag which is set to ON when the jackpot game is finished in the jackpot game control process of step S1407 in the main process of FIG. 88, for example. (See step S2251 of the jackpot control process in FIG. 29 of the first embodiment described above).

When the type 1 jackpot game ends (step S3670: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3671, and when the type 1 jackpot game does not end (step S3670: No), ends the game state transition process. do.

<Steps S3671 and S3672>
When the type 1 jackpot game ends (step S3670: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the type 1 jackpot game state to the second time saving game state (step S3671), and is executed in the second time saving game state. The upper limit value (specified number of times) of the special figure game is set to the time saving counter (step S3672), and the process proceeds to step S3673.

Here, the value of the time saving number counter is set as a value corresponding to the number of time saving games selected when the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game state is a jackpot. Specifically, when the MPU 41 shifts from the 1st type jackpot game state to the second time-saving game state, which is shifted based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game state, the value of the time-saving number counter is "100". is set (see FIGS. 86(B) and 87(G)).

<Steps S3673 to S3675>
In step S3673, the MPU 41 sets on the second time-saving gaming state flag indicating that it is the second time-saving gaming state, and the voice lamp control device 5 that the game state is shifted to the second time-saving gaming state. Set the second time-saving game state transition command to be notified (step S3674). This second time-saving gaming state transition command includes information indicating that the game state is shifted to the second time-saving gaming state, as well as information on the number of time-saving games (specified number of times) in the second time-saving gaming state. It is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of S88. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the number of time-saving games (prescribed number of times) based on the second time-saving game state transition command, and can execute an effect corresponding to the second time-saving game state.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal 1-type jackpot game state flag indicating that the game state is the 1-type jackpot game state shifted from the normal game state to OFF (step S3675), and ends the game state transition processing.

<Step S3676>
When the normal 1 type jackpot game state flag is set to OFF (step S3669: No), that is, when it is not the 1 type jackpot game state transferred from the normal game state, the MPU 41 sets the 1st time reduction 1 type jackpot game state flag is set to ON (step S3676).

In addition, the 1st time saving 1 type jackpot game state flag is a flag indicating that it is a 1 type jackpot game state transferred from the 1st time saving game state, and the game state is 1 type jackpot game state from the 1st time saving game state , it is set to ON in step S3621 of FIG. 98 of the game state transition process.

MPU41, when the first time-saving one-kind jackpot game state flag is set to ON (step S3676: Yes), that is, when the game state is the one-kind jackpot game state transferred from the first time-saving game state, process to step S3677. On the other hand, the MPU 41, if the first time-saving one-type jackpot game state flag is set to OFF (step S3676: No), that is, if it is not the one-kind jackpot game state transferred from the first time-saving game state, step the process Move to S3683.

<Step S3677>
When the first time-saving one-type jackpot game state flag is set to ON (step S3676: Yes), that is, when the game state is the one-kind jackpot game state shifted from the first time-saving game state, the MPU 41 is 1 It is determined whether or not the seed jackpot game has ended (step S3677). Whether or not the type 1 jackpot game has ended is determined based on the jackpot game end flag which is set to ON when executing the process of ending the jackpot game in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 88, for example. (See step S2251 of the jackpot control process in FIG. 29 of the first embodiment described above).

When the type 1 jackpot game has ended (step S3677: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3678, and when the type 1 jackpot game has not ended (step S3677: No), ends the game state transition process. do.

<Steps S3678 and S3679>
When the type 1 jackpot game ends (step S3677: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the type 1 jackpot game state to the second time saving game state (step S3678), and is executed in the second time saving game state. The upper limit value (specified number of times) of the special figure game is set in the time saving number counter (step S3679), and the process proceeds to step S3680.

Here, the value of the time saving number counter is set as a value corresponding to the number of time saving games selected when the result of the jackpot lottery in the first time saving game state is a big hit. Specifically, when the MPU 41 shifts from the first type jackpot game state to the second time-saving gaming state based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the first time-saving gaming state, the value of the time-saving number counter is " 100” (see FIGS. 86(B) and 87(G)).

<Steps S3680 to S3682>
In step S3680, the MPU 41 sets on the second time-saving gaming state flag indicating that it is the second time-saving gaming state, and furthermore, the voice lamp control device 5 that the game state is shifted to the second time-saving gaming state. Set the second time-saving game state transition command to be notified to (step S3681). This second time-saving gaming state transition command includes information indicating that the game state is shifted to the second time-saving gaming state, as well as information on the number of time-saving games (specified number of times) in the second time-saving gaming state. It is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of 88. FIG. Thereby, when the voice lamp control device 5 receives the second time saving game state shift command, it can grasp the number of times of the time saving game (specified number of times) and can execute the performance corresponding to the second time saving game state.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the first time reduction one kind jackpot game state flag indicating that it is a one kind jackpot game state shifted from the first time reduction game state to OFF (step S3682), and ends the game state transition processing do.

<Step S3683>
When the 1st time saving 1 type jackpot game state flag is set to OFF (step S3676: No), that is, when it is not the 1st time saving game state transferred from the 1st time saving game state, the MPU 41 is the 2nd time saving 1 type It is determined whether or not the jackpot gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3683).

In addition, the second time saving one kind jackpot game state flag is a flag indicating that it is a one kind jackpot game state transferred from the second time saving game state, and the game state is a one kind jackpot game state from the second time saving game state , it is set to ON in step S3636 of FIG.

MPU41, when the second time saving one kind jackpot game state flag is set to ON (step S3683: Yes), that is, when it is a one kind jackpot game state transferred from the second time saving game state, the processing is step S3684 transition to On the other hand, the MPU 41, when the second time saving one kind jackpot game state flag is set to OFF (step S3683: No), that is, when it is not the one kind jackpot game state transferred from the second time saving game state, step processing Go to S3690.

<Step S3684>
When the second time saving 1 type jackpot game state flag is set to ON (step S3684: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the 1 type jackpot game has ended (step S3684). Whether or not the type 1 jackpot game has ended is determined based on the jackpot game end flag which is set to ON when executing the process of ending the jackpot game in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 88, for example. (See step S2251 of the jackpot control process in FIG. 29 of the first embodiment described above).

When the type 1 jackpot game has ended (step S3684: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3685, and when the type 1 jackpot game has not ended (step S3684: No), ends the game state transition process. do.

<Steps S3685 and S3686>
When the type 1 jackpot game ends (step S3684: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the type 1 jackpot game state to the second time saving game state (step S3685), and is executed in the second time saving game state. The upper limit value (specified number of times) of the special figure game is set to the time saving counter (step S3686), and the process proceeds to step S3687.

Here, the value of the time saving number counter is set as a value corresponding to the number of time saving games selected when the result of the big win lottery in the second time saving game state is a big win. Specifically, when the MPU 41 shifts from the type 1 jackpot game state to the second time-saving gaming state based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving gaming state, the value of the time-saving number counter is " 100” (see FIGS. 86(B) and 87(G)).

<Steps S3687 to S3689>
In step S3687, the MPU 41 sets on the second time-saving gaming state flag indicating that it is the second time-saving gaming state, and furthermore, the game state is shifted to the second time-saving gaming state. Set the second time-saving game state transition command to be notified (step S3688). This second time-saving gaming state transition command includes information indicating that the game state is shifted to the second time-saving gaming state, as well as information on the number of time-saving games (prescribed number of times) in the second time-saving gaming state. It is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of S88. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the number of time-saving games (specified number of times) based on the second time-saving game state transition command, and can execute an effect corresponding to the second time-saving game state.

Then, the MPU 41 sets off the second time saving one kind jackpot game state flag indicating that it is the one kind jackpot game state transferred from the second time saving game state (step S3689), and ends the game state transition processing. do.

<Step S3690>
When the second time saving one type jackpot game state flag is set to OFF (step S3683: No), that is, when it is not the one kind jackpot game state transferred from the second time saving game state, the MPU 41 is the third time saving one type It is determined whether or not the jackpot gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3690).

In addition, the 3rd time reduction 1 type jackpot game state flag is a flag indicating that it is a 1st type jackpot game state transferred from the 3rd time reduction game state, and the game state is 1 type jackpot game state from the 3rd time reduction game state is set to ON in step S3656 of FIG.

MPU41, when the 3rd time saving 1 type jackpot game state flag is set to ON (step S3690: Yes), that is, when it is 1 type jackpot game state transferred from the 3rd time saving game state, the processing is step S3691 transition to On the other hand, the MPU 41, when the second time saving one kind jackpot gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3690: No), if it is not the one kind jackpot gaming state transferred from the third time saving gaming state, the processing is shown in FIG. to step S3697.

<Step S3691>
If the third time-saving one-type jackpot gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3691: Yes), that is, if it is a one-kind jackpot gaming state transferred from the third time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 is one kind jackpot game is completed (step S3691). Whether or not the type 1 jackpot game has ended is determined based on the jackpot game end flag which is set to ON when executing the process of ending the jackpot game in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 88, for example. (See step S2251 of the jackpot control process in FIG. 29 of the first embodiment described above).

MPU41, when the type 1 jackpot game ends (step S3691: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3692, when the type 1 jackpot game has not ended (step S3691: No), that is, from the third time-saving gaming state If the game state is not the one type jackpot game state that has been transferred, the game state transition processing is terminated.

<Steps S3692 and S3693>
When the type 1 jackpot game ends (step S3691: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the type 1 jackpot game state to the 3rd time saving game state (step S3692), and is executed in the 3rd time saving game state. The upper limit value (specified number of times) of the special figure game is set to the time saving number counter (step S3693), and the process proceeds to step S3694.

Here, the value of the time saving number counter is set as a value corresponding to the number of time saving games selected when the result of the big win lottery in the third time saving game state is a big win. Specifically, when the MPU 41 shifts from the type 1 jackpot game state to the third time-saving gaming state based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving gaming state, the value of the time-saving number counter is " 50” is set (see FIG. 87(F)).

<Steps S3694 to S3696>
In step S3694, the MPU 41 sets the third time-saving gaming state flag, which indicates that it is the third time-saving gaming state, to ON, and furthermore, voices that the game state is shifted from the jackpot gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state. The third time-saving game state B transition command to be notified to the lamp control device 5 is set (step S3695). This third time-saving gaming state B transition command is related to information indicating that the game state is shifted from the jackpot game state to the third time-saving gaming state, and the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving gaming state (prescribed number of times) It includes information and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the number of time-saving games (specified number of times) based on the third time-saving game state B transition command, and can execute an effect corresponding to the third time-saving game state.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the 3rd time reduction 1 type jackpot game state flag indicating that it is a 1 type jackpot game state transferred from the 3rd time reduction game state to OFF (step S3696), and ends the game state transition processing do.

<Step S3697>
When the second time saving one kind jackpot gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3690: No), when it is not the one kind jackpot gaming state transferred from the third time saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. 102, the MPU 41 , It is determined whether or not the normal small winning game state flag is set to ON (step S3697).

It should be noted that the normal small winning game state flag is a flag indicating that the game state is a small winning game state transferred from the normal game state, and when the game state is shifted from the normal game state to the small hitting game state , is set to ON at step S3615 in FIG. 97 in the game state transition process.

When the small hit game state flag is set to ON (step S3697: Yes), that is, when the game state is a small hit game state shifted from the normal game state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3698. . On the other hand, when the small hit game state flag is set to OFF normally (step S3697: No), that is, when the game state is not a small hit game state shifted from the normal game state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3702. do.

<Step S3698>
If the normal small winning game state flag is set to ON (step S3697: Yes), that is, if the game state is a small winning game state shifted from the normal game state, the MPU 41 determines whether the small winning game has ended. It is determined whether or not (step S3698). Whether or not the small winning game has ended is, for example, in step S3536 in the small winning game control process of FIG. determined on the basis of

When the small winning game ends (step S3698: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S3699, and when the small winning game does not end (step S3698: No), ends the game state transition processing.

<Steps S3699 to S3701>
When the small hit game ends (step S3698: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal small hit game state flag to OFF (step S3699), and shifts the game state from the small hit game state to the normal game state (step S3700). Then, the MPU 41 turns on the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state (step S3701), and terminates the game state transition processing.

<Step S3702>
If the normal small hit game state flag is set to OFF (step S3697: No), that is, if the game state is not a small hit game state that has been transferred from the normal game state, MPU41, the first time saving small hit game state flag is set to ON (step S3702).

It should be noted that the first time-saving game state flag is a flag indicating that the game state is a small-hit game state shifted from the first time-saving game state, and the game state is the first time-saving game state to the small game state. , it is set to ON in step S3625 of FIG. 98 in the game state transition process.

MPU41, when the first time-saving small winning game state flag is set to ON (step S3702: Yes), that is, when the game state is a small winning game state shifted from the first time-saving game state, step the process Move to S3703. on the other hand. MPU41, when the first time-saving small winning game state flag is set to OFF (step S3702: No), that is, when the game state is not the small winning game state transferred from the first time-saving game state, the processing is step S3707 transition to

<Step S3703>
When the 1st time saving small hitting game state flag is set to ON (step S3702: No), MPU41 judges whether or not the small hitting game ended (step S3703). Whether or not the small winning game has ended is, for example, in step S3036 in the small winning game control process of FIG. determined on the basis of

When the small winning game ends (step S3703: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S3704, and when the small winning game does not end (step S3703: No), ends the game state transition processing.

<Steps S3704 to S3706>
When the small hit game ends (step S3703: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first time saving small hitting game state flag to OFF (step S3704), and changes the game state from the small hitting game state to the first time saving game state. Move (step S3705). Then, the MPU 41 sets ON the first time-saving gaming state flag indicating that it is the first time-saving gaming state (step S3706), and terminates the game state transition processing.

<Step S3707>
If the first time-saving small winning game state flag is set to OFF (step S3702: No), that is, if the game state is not a small winning game state that has been transferred from the first time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 is the second time-saving small It is determined whether or not the winning game state flag is set to ON (step S3707).

It should be noted that the second time-saving small winning game state flag is a flag indicating that the game state is a small winning game state shifted from the second time-saving gaming state, and the game state is a small winning game state from the second time-saving gaming state , it is set to ON in step S3639 of FIG. 99 in the game state transition process.

MPU41, when the second time-saving small winning game state flag is set to ON (step S3707: Yes), that is, when the game state is a small winning game state shifted from the second time-saving game state, step the process Move to S3708. On the other hand, MPU41, when the second time-saving small winning game state flag is set to OFF (step S3707: No), that is, when the game state is not the small winning game state transferred from the second time-saving game state, the processing is performed. The process moves to step S3712 in FIG.

<Step S3708>
If the second time-saving small winning game state flag is set to ON (step S3707: Yes), that is, if the game state is a small winning game state shifted from the second time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 is a small winning game is completed (step S3708). Whether or not the small winning game has ended is, for example, in step S3036 in the small winning game control process of FIG. determined on the basis of

When the small winning game ends (step S3708: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S3709, and when the small winning game does not end (step S3708: No), ends the game state transition processing.

<Steps S3709 to S3711>
When the small hit game ends (step S3708: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the second time saving small hitting game state flag to OFF (step S3709), and changes the game state from the small hitting game state to the second time saving game state. Transition (step S3710). Then, the MPU 41 sets ON the second time saving gaming state flag indicating that it is the second time saving gaming state (step S3711), and terminates the game state transition processing.

<Step S3712>
If the second time-saving small hit game state flag is set to OFF (step S3707: No), that is, if the game state is not a small-hit game state transferred from the second time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. The MPU 41 determines whether or not the third time-saving small winning game state flag is set to ON (step S3712).

It should be noted that the third time-saving small winning game state flag is a flag indicating that the game state is a small winning game state shifted from the third time-saving gaming state, and the game state is a small winning game state from the third time-saving gaming state , it is set to ON at step S3660 in FIG. 100 in the game state transition process.

MPU41, when the third time-saving small winning game state flag is set to ON (step S3712: Yes), that is, when the game state is a small winning game state shifted from the third time-saving game state, step processing The process proceeds to S3713. On the other hand, MPU41, when the third time-saving small winning game state flag is set to OFF (step S3712: No), that is, when the game state is not the small winning game state transferred from the third time-saving game state, the processing is performed. The process moves to step S3720.

<Step S3713>
If the third time-saving small winning game state flag is set to ON (step S3712: Yes), that is, if the game state is a small winning game state shifted from the third time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 is a small winning game is completed (step S3713). Whether or not the small winning game has ended is, for example, in step S3036 in the small winning game control process of FIG. determined on the basis of

When the small winning game ends (step S3713: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3714, and when the small winning game does not end (step S3713: No), ends the game state transition processing.

<Steps S3714 and S3715>
When the small hit game ends (step S3713: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the third time saving small hit game state flag to OFF (step S3714). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game ball 99 has entered the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 (step S3715). Whether or not the game ball 99 has entered the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 can be determined, for example, in the winning ball command setting process of step S1403 in the main processing of FIG. A determination is made based on the V winning flag which is set to ON when a ball entry sensor (not shown) detects that the ball has been entered.

When the game ball 99 enters the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 (step S3715: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3716, and moves the game to the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83. If the ball 99 is not entered (step S3715: No), the process proceeds to step S3718.

<Steps S3716 and S3717>
When the game ball 99 is entered into the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 (step S3715: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the small winning game state to the two-kind big winning game state (step S3716 ), the second type jackpot game state flag indicating the second type jackpot game state is set to ON (step S3717), and the game state transition processing is terminated.

<Steps S3718 and S3719>
When the game ball 99 is not entered into the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 (step S3715: No), the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the small winning game state to the third time-saving game state (step S3718). , The third time-saving gaming state flag indicating that it is the third time-saving gaming state is set to ON (step S3719), and the game state transition processing is terminated.

<Step S3720>
If the third time-saving small winning game state flag is set to OFF (step S3712: No), that is, if the game state is not a small winning game state transferred from the third time-saving game state, the MPU 41 is a two-type jackpot game It is determined whether or not the two-kind jackpot gaming state flag indicating the state is set to ON (step S3720). The 2-kind jackpot game state flag is set to ON in step S3717 when the game state is shifted from the 3rd time-saving game state to the 2-kind jackpot game state.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3721 when the 2-type jackpot game state flag is set to ON (step S3720: Yes), that is, when the 2-type jackpot game state is set. On the other hand, the MPU 41 ends the game state transition process when the 2-type jackpot game state flag is set to OFF (step S3720: No), that is, when the 2-type jackpot game state is not set.

<Step S3721>
When the 2-kind jackpot game state flag is set to ON (step S3720: Yes), that is, when it is in the 2-kind jackpot game state, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the 2-kind jackpot game has ended (step S3721 ). Whether or not the second kind of jackpot game has ended is determined based on the jackpot game end flag which is set to ON when executing the process of ending the jackpot game in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 88, for example. (See step S2251 of the jackpot control process in FIG. 29 of the first embodiment described above).

MPU 41, when the type 2 jackpot game has ended (step S3721: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3722, and when the type 2 jackpot game has not ended (step S3721: No), the game state transition processing is executed. finish.

<Steps S3722 to S3724>
When the 2 types of jackpot game ends (step S3721: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the 2 types of jackpot game state to the 3rd time saving game state (step S3722), and confirms that it is the 3rd time saving game state. The third time-saving gaming state flag shown is set to ON (step S3723). And MPU41 sets a time saving frequency counter (step S3724), and transfers a process to step S3725.

Here, the value of the time saving number counter is set as a value corresponding to the time saving game number selected when the jackpot game is executed in the third time saving game state. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets "50" as the value of the time saving number counter when the second type jackpot game state is shifted to the third time saving game state (see FIG. 87(F)).

<Steps S3725 and S3726>
In step S3725, the MPU 41 sets the third time-saving game state B transition command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the game state is shifted from the jackpot game state to the third time-saving game state, and further two kinds of jackpot game A two-type jackpot game state flag indicating a state is set to OFF (step S3726), and the game state transition processing is terminated.

Here, the third time-saving game state B transition command includes information indicating that the game state is shifted from the jackpot game state to the third time-saving game state, and the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state (specified number of times ), and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the number of time-saving games (specified number of times) based on the third time-saving game state B transition command, and can execute an effect corresponding to the third time-saving game state.

[Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device 5]
Next, referring to FIGS. 104 to 113, the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 will be described, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the processes of the sound lamp control device 5, part of the command determination process is different from that of the above-described first embodiment.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process of the present embodiment, the command received from the main control device 4 is determined, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. is executed, which is different from the command determination process of the first embodiment. Here, FIG. 104 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S2703 of the secondary timer interrupt process in the above-described first embodiment shown in FIG.

<Step S3801>
As shown in FIG. 104, in the command determination process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a command has been received (step S3801). If the MPU 51 has received a command (step S3801: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3802, and if it has not received a command (step S3801: No), the command determination process ends.

<Step S3802>
When the command is received (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the first time-saving gaming state transition command (step S3802). The first time-saving game state transition command is a command indicating that the game state shifts from the normal game state to the first time-saving game state based on the fact that the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game state is the time-saving symbol stop off. be. This first time-saving game state transition command is set when the game state is shifted from the normal game state to the first time-saving game state in step S3607 of FIG. 97 in the game state transition process.

MPU51, if the received command is the first time-saving gaming state transition command (step S3802: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3803, if the received command is not the first time-saving gaming state transition command (step S3802: No ), and the process proceeds to step S3805.

<Steps S3803 and S3804>
When the received command is the first time-saving gaming state transition command (step S3802: Yes), the MPU 51 sets on the first time-saving gaming state flag indicating the first time-saving gaming state (step S3803). Then, the MPU 51 sets the time saving game number counter based on the information about the time saving game number included in the first time saving game state transition command (step S3804), and ends the command determination process.

<Step S3805>
If the received command is not the first time-saving gaming state transition command (step S3802: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the second time-saving gaming state transition command (step S3805). The second time-saving game state transition command is a command indicating that the game state moves from the one kind jackpot game state to the second time-saving game state. This second time-saving game state transition command is set when the game state is shifted from the one kind jackpot game state to the second time-saving game state in steps S3674, S3681 or S3688 of FIG. 101 in the game state transition process.

MPU51, if the received command is the second time-saving gaming state transition command (step S3805: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3806, if the received command is not the second time-saving gaming state transition command (step S3805: No ), and the process proceeds to step S3808.

<Steps S3806 and S3807>
When the received command is the second time-saving gaming state transition command (step S3805: Yes), the MPU 51 sets on the second time-saving gaming state flag indicating the second time-saving gaming state (step S3806). Then, the MPU 51 sets the time saving game number counter based on the information about the time saving game number included in the second time saving game state transition command (step S3807), and terminates the command determination process.

<Step S3808>
If the received command is not the second time-saving gaming state transition command (step S3805: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the third time-saving gaming state A transition command (step S3808). The 3rd time saving game state A shift command is a command which shows that the game state shifts from the 2nd time saving game state to the 3rd time saving game state. This third time saving game state A transition command is set when the game state is shifted from the second time saving game state to the third time saving game state in step S3645 of FIG. 99 in the game state transition processing.

MPU51, if the received command is the third time-saving gaming state A transition command (step S3808: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3809, if the received command is not the third time-saving gaming state A transition command (step S3808 : No), the process proceeds to step S3812.

<Steps S3809 to S3811>
When the received command is the 3rd time saving game state A transition command (step S3808: Yes), the MPU 51 sets ON the 3rd time saving game state flag indicating that it is the 3rd time saving game state (step S3809) . And MPU51 sets a time saving game frequency counter based on the information regarding the time saving game frequency contained in the 3rd time saving game state A transition command (step S3810).

Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the third time-saving gaming state transition flag, which indicates that the game state is shifted from the second time-saving gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state, to ON (step S3811), and ends the command determination process. . The third time-saving game state transition flag is a third time-saving game state transition effect ( 106(B) and 110(D)) is referred to determine whether or not to set.

<Step S3812>
When the received command is not the 3rd time saving game state A transition command (step S3808: No), it is determined whether the received command is the 3rd time saving game state B transition command (step S3812). The 3rd time saving game state B shift command is a command which shows that the game state shifts from the jackpot game state to the 3rd time saving game state. This 3rd time saving game state B transition command, in step S3695 in Figure 101 in game state transition processing, is set when the game state is shifted from the jackpot game state to the 3rd time saving game state.

MPU51, if the received command is the third time-saving gaming state B transition command (step S3812: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3813, if the received command is not the third time-saving gaming state B transition command (step S3812 : No), the process proceeds to step S3815.

<Steps S3813 and S3814>
When the received command is the 3rd time saving game state B transition command (step S3812: Yes), the MPU 51 sets ON the 3rd time saving game state flag indicating that it is the 3rd time saving game state (step S3813) . And MPU51 sets a time saving game frequency counter based on the information regarding the time saving game frequency contained in the 3rd time saving game state B transition command (step S3814), and complete|finishes the said command determination processing.

<Step S3815>
If the received command is not the third time saving game state B transition command (step S3812: No), it is determined whether the received command is the time saving number counter reset command (step S3815). The time saving number counter reset command is a command to notify that it is determined whether or not to reset the number of time saving games in the third time saving game state, and the number of time saving games in the third time saving game state When resetting, information on the number of time-saving games after the change is included. This time saving number counter reset command is set when resetting the number of time saving games in the third time saving game state in step S3664 of FIG. 100 in the game state transition process.

If the received command is a time saving number counter reset command (step S3815: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3816, and if the received command is not a time saving number counter reset command (step S3815: No), The process proceeds to step S3817.

<Step S3816>
If the received command is a time saving number counter reset command (step S3815: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a time saving number counter resetting process (step S3816). In this time-saving number counter resetting process, if the time-saving number counter reset command includes information about the number of time-saving games after change, the value of the time-saving game number counter is changed, and the time-saving number counter reset command does not include information about the number of time-saving games after the change, the value of the time-saving game number counter is not changed.

<Step S3817>
When the received command is not a time saving counter reset command (step S3815: No), MPU51 judges whether the received command is a special figure variation pattern command (step S3817). The special figure fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game and the special figure fluctuation pattern (variation display time). This special figure fluctuation pattern command is set when setting the special figure fluctuation display time (special figure fluctuation pattern) in step S3414 of FIG. 90 in the special figure fluctuation start process.

MPU51, if the received command is a special figure variation pattern command (step S3817: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3818, if the received command is not a special figure variation pattern command (step S3817: No), the process The process moves to step S3823.

<Steps S3818 to S3820>
If the received command is a special figure variation pattern command (step S3817: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the effect type setting process (step S3818) and the stop symbol combination setting process (step S3819), and the process proceeds to step S3820. Transition.

Details of the procedure of the effect type setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. and so on. Further, the details of the procedure of the stop symbol combination setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. It is set based on the results, etc.

<Steps S3820 and S3821>
In step S3820, the MPU 51 sets the variation display time of the decorative design based on the special figure variation pattern (variation display time) included in the special figure variation pattern command (step S3820). Then, the MPU 51 controls display of the display variation pattern command for specifying the variation type (effect pattern) set in step S3818 and the content of the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols in the symbol display section 341 set in step S3819. It is transmitted to the device 6 (step S3821), and the process proceeds to step S3822.

The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the variation type (effect pattern) set in step S3818 and the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols in the symbol display section 341 set in step S3819. On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores effect images corresponding to display variation pattern commands, variation images of decoration symbols, and the like. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 performs variable display and effect display in the symbol display section 341 in accordance with the stop pattern combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the display variation pattern command and the variation type (effect pattern).

<Step S3822>
In step S3822, the MPU 51 executes time-saving counter processing, and terminates the command determination processing. Details of the procedure of the time saving number counter process will be described later with reference to FIG. 113, but in this time saving number counter process, a time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of time saving games in the time saving game state is managed.

<Step S3823>
If the received command is not a special figure variation pattern command (step S3817: No), the MPU51 includes the processing of steps S3107 to S3134 in the command determination processing shown in FIGS. 47 and 48 in the first embodiment described above. , and other commands are executed (step S3823), and the command determination process ends.

[Variation type (production pattern) setting process]
In the variation type (effect pattern) setting process executed in step S3818 when a special figure variation pattern is received in the command determination process of FIG. It is set according to the game state. Here, FIG. 105 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process.

<Steps S3901 and S3902>
In the variation type (production pattern) setting process of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 105, the MPU 51 first determines whether the first time-saving gaming state flag indicating that it is the first time-saving gaming state is set to ON. is determined (step S3901). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is in the first time-saving gaming state. It should be noted that the first time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON in step S3803 when the first time-saving gaming state transition command is received in the command determination processing of FIG.

MPU51, when the first time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3901: Yes), that is, when the first time-saving gaming state, information included in the special figure variation pattern command (variation display time, jackpot lottery result), set the first time-saving gaming state production preset for the first time-saving gaming state (step S3902), and end the variation type (production pattern) setting process. On the other hand, when the first time-saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3901: No), that is, when it is not the first time-saving gaming state, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3903.

<Step S3903>
When the first time-saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3901: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the second time-saving gaming state flag indicating the second time-saving gaming state is set to ON. It judges (step S3903). The second time-saving gaming state flag, that is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is in the second time-saving gaming state. It should be noted that the second time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON in step S3806 when the second time-saving gaming state transition command is received in the command determination processing of FIG.

MPU51, when the second time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3903: Yes), that is, when it is the second time-saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step S3904. On the other hand, when the second time-saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3903: No), that is, when it is not the second time-saving gaming state, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3907.

<Step S3904>
When the second time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3903: Yes), that is, when it is in the second time-saving gaming state, the MPU 51 determines that the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving design stop-off that satisfies a predetermined condition. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the third time-saving game state transition flag indicating that the game state is shifted from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state is set to ON (step S3904). It should be noted that the third time-saving gaming state transition flag receives the third time-saving gaming state A transition command indicating that the game state is shifted from the second time-saving gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state in the command determination process of FIG. If so, it is set to ON in step S3811.

If the third time-saving game state transition flag is set to ON (step S3904: Yes), that is, if the game state is shifted from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state, the process proceeds to step S3906. . On the other hand, if the third time-saving gaming state transition flag is set to OFF (step S3904: No), that is, if the game state is not shifted from the second time-saving gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state (the second time-saving gaming state is If continued), the process moves to step S3905.

<Steps S3905 and S3906>
If the third time-saving gaming state transition flag is set to OFF (step S3904: No), that is, if the game state is not shifted from the second time-saving gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state (the second time-saving gaming state continues ), the MPU 51 sets a second time-saving game state continuation effect that clearly indicates that the second time-saving game state continues as the second time-saving game state effect (step S3905), and ends the effect type setting process. .

On the other hand, if the third time-saving gaming state transition flag is set to ON (step S3904: Yes), that is, if the game state is shifted from the second time-saving gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state, the MPU51 is the second As the time-saving game state effect, set the third time-saving game state transition effect that indicates that the game state is shifted from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state (step S3906), and end the effect type setting process. do.

Here, FIG. 106(A) is a diagram showing an example of the second time saving game state continuation effect pattern which is the second time saving game state effect, and FIG. 106(B) is a third time saving game state effect which is the second time saving game state effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a game state transition production|presentation pattern.

As shown in Figure 106 (A) and Figure 106 (B), the second time-saving game state production (second time-saving game state continuation production and third time-saving game state transition production) is a battle production between the main character and the enemy character. executed. Of course, the second time-saving game state production (second time-saving game state continuation production and third time-saving game state transition production) does not have to be a battle production, for example, a mission production (for example, a jackpot lottery depending on the success or failure of a mission given to a character) It may be a production that expresses or suggests the result of

Moreover, FIG. 107 is a figure which shows the example of a screen of the design display part 341 for demonstrating the 2nd time saving game state production|presentation. Specifically, FIG. 107(A) is a diagram showing an example of the screen at the start of battle, FIG. 107(B) is an enlarged diagram of the HP display section 75 on the screen at the start of battle, and FIG. 107(C). 107(E) is a diagram showing an image example of the gauge display section 75. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 107(A), the screen of the pattern display section 341 at the start of the battle includes a character image of "battle start" indicating that the battle is about to start, and hit points representing the damage that the enemy character can withstand. (HP) Contains the HP image shown. The enemy character's HP ranges from 0 to 100, and 0 in the enemy character's HP means that the enemy character is defeated, that is, the ally character's victory. In addition, the screen of the pattern display unit 341 at the start of the battle changes to a third time-saving game state (RUSH) that can shift to a two-type jackpot game state via a small win game when the HP of the enemy character becomes 0. It contains a character image of "If the enemy's HP becomes 0, rush into RUSH", which indicates rushing.

The HP image is displayed on the HP display portion 75 set to the upper right of the pattern display portion 341 . The HP display section 75 displays an HP gauge 76 and an HP counter 77 indicating the HP of the enemy character.

As shown in FIG. 107B, the HP gauge 76 indicates the HP of the enemy character as a gauge, and includes a large gauge 761 and a small gauge 762 . The large gauge 761 has 10 HP per gauge. The small gauge 762 is 1 HP per gauge. In the example shown in FIG. 107B, the large gauge 761 is 9 gauge and the small gauge 762 is 9 gauge, which means that the HP of the enemy character is 99. In the example shown in FIG. 107C, the large gauge 761 is 3 gauge and the small gauge 762 is 1 gauge, so the HP of the enemy character is 31. In the example shown in FIG. Since the gauge 761 is 1 gauge and the small gauge 762 is 0 gauge, the HP of the enemy character is 1. Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 107(E), since both the large gauge 761 and the small gauge 762 are 0 gauge, the HP of the enemy character is 0, and the friendly character has defeated the enemy character. It shows that it is transferred from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state.

On the other hand, the HP counter 77 numerically indicates the HP of the enemy character. In the example shown in FIG. 107B, the HP counter 77 shows the number "99", which means that the HP of the enemy character is 99. In the example shown in FIG. 107(C), the HP counter 77 shows the number "31", the enemy character's HP is 31, and in the example shown in FIG. 107(D), the HP counter 77 shows The number "1" is shown, and the HP of the enemy character is one. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 107(E), the HP counter 77 indicates the number "0", the HP of the enemy character is 0, and the friendly character has defeated the enemy character. It shows that it is transferred from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, the value displayed at the start of the battle for the HP of the enemy character corresponds to the maximum number of remaining time-saving games including the variation in the second time-saving game state. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 107 (A), it means that the maximum value of the number of remaining time-saving games including the special figure game in the second time-saving game state is 99. In this way, the HP value of the enemy character displayed at the start of the battle corresponds to the maximum number of remaining time-saving games including the variation in the second time-saving game state, From the HP of the enemy character displayed at the start, the maximum value of the number of remaining time-saving games including the variation in the second time-saving game state can be grasped.

Returning to the description of FIG. 106(A), the second time-saving game state continuation effect is an effect indicating that the second time-saving game state continues. In the example shown in FIG. 106(A), eight production patterns of patterns A1 to A8 are set as the second time-saving game state continuation production pattern. In each of the patterns A1 to A8, since the second time-saving gaming state continuation effect is an effect indicating the continuation of the second time-saving game state, the final result of the battle between the ally character and the enemy character is the victory of the ally character. Instead, it becomes a draw (tie). After the battle ends, the HP of the enemy character does not become 0, and the value at the start of the battle is maintained.

Also, in patterns A1 to A4, the ally character makes a preemptive attack in battle (see FIG. 96(A)). Then, in patterns A1 and A2, the enemy character defends the attack of the ally character (see FIG. 108(A)). At this time, the HP of the enemy character does not change. On the other hand, in patterns A3 and A4, the ally character's attack hits the enemy character (see FIG. 108(C)). At this time, the HP of the enemy character is halved (pattern A3) or left to 1 (pattern A4).

In patterns A5 to A8, the enemy character makes a preemptive attack in battle (see FIG. 109(A)). Then, in patterns A5 and A6, the ally character defends against the enemy character's attack (see FIG. 109B). On the other hand, in patterns A7 and A9, the attack of the enemy character hits the friend character (see FIG. 109(C)). In patterns A5 to A8, the HP of the enemy character does not change because of the preemptive attack of the enemy character.

In patterns A2 to A8 excluding pattern A1, button effects are executed. As this button effect, for example, the player is prompted to perform a long press operation on the operation button 20, and a long press effect that reduces the HP of the enemy character based on the player's long press operation on the operation button 20 (see FIG. 110(A)). 110(B)), etc. are executed to urge the player to continuously press the operation button 20 and reduce the HP of the enemy character based on the player's continuous pressing operation to the operation button 20. Of course, the button effect prompts the player to perform a single-hit operation (one-hit operation) on the operation button 20, and based on the player's single-hit operation (one-hit operation) on the operation button 20, the result of the battle with the enemy character is a draw ( It may be a single-hit effect (one-hit effect) that indicates that it is a draw).

Note that in pattern A1, the HP of the enemy character is displayed as it was at the start of the battle along with an image indicating that the final result of the battle is a draw (Fig. 110(C)). reference).

On the other hand, the third time-saving game state transition effect shown in FIG. 106(B) is an effect indicating that the game state shifts from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state. In the example shown in FIG. 106(B), eight production patterns of patterns B1 to B8 are set as the third time-saving game state transition production pattern. In each pattern B1 to B8, the third time-saving game state transition effect is an effect indicating that the game state can be shifted from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state. The final result of the battle is that the ally character wins, and the HP of the enemy character after the battle is finally set to 0 (see FIG. 110(D)).

Patterns B1 to B8 correspond to patterns A1 to A8, and the final result of the battle between the friendly character and the enemy character is the victory of the friendly character and the HP of the enemy character after the battle is finally finished. It differs from the patterns A1 to A8 in that it is 0.

In addition, as a production in the case where the special figure game is the last special figure game in the second time saving game state, as the final screen in patterns A1 to A8 (or patterns B1 to B8), the ally character is defeated by the enemy character. An image indicating that the second time-saving gaming state ends is displayed together with an image displayed (see FIG. 110(E)).

<Step S3907>
Returning to the description of the variation type (production pattern) setting process of FIG. 105, if the second time-saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3903: No), that is, if it is not the second time-saving gaming state, the third time-saving game It is determined whether or not the third time-saving gaming state flag indicating the state is set to ON (step S3907). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is in the third time-saving gaming state. It should be noted that the third time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON in step S3809 when the third time-saving gaming state A transition command is received in the command determination processing of FIG.

MPU51, when the 3rd time saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3907: Yes), that is, when it is the 3rd time saving game state, the process proceeds to step S3908. On the other hand, when the third time-saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3907: No), that is, when the game state is not the third time-saving gaming state but the normal gaming state, the process proceeds to step S3909.

<Step S3908>
If the third time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3907: Yes), that is, if the third time-saving gaming state, the MPU51, the information included in the special figure variation pattern command (special figure variation pattern (special Based on the figure fluctuation display time), the result of the jackpot lottery), set the 3rd time reduction game state production preset for the 3rd time reduction game state (step S3908), and end the production type setting process. .

<Step S3909>
If the third time-saving gaming state flag is set to off (step S3907: No), that is, if the normal gaming state instead of the third time-saving gaming state, the MPU51, the information included in the special figure variation pattern command (special Based on the figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation display time), the result of the jackpot lottery), the normal game state production (see FIG. 50) that is preset for the normal game state is set (step S3909), and the production End the type setting process.

[Stop symbol combination setting process]
In the stop design combination setting process executed in step S3819 when the special figure fluctuation pattern is received in the command determination process of FIG. set. Here, FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the stop symbol combination setting process.

<Steps S4001 and S4002>
In the stop symbol combination setting process of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game is out of time saving symbol stop (step S4001). . Whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the special figure game is out of the time saving pattern stop is determined based on the result of the success or failure determination included in the special figure variation pattern command, for example.

MPU51, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the special game is out of time saving pattern stop (step S4001: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4003, the time saving design set to the time saving design out of stop It is set as a stop symbol combination (see FIG. 112). On the other hand, MPU51, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the special game is not out of time saving pattern stop (step S4001: No), based on the special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation display time) and the result of the jackpot lottery, A stop symbol combination other than the time saving symbol is set (step S4002), and the stop symbol combination setting process is terminated.

Here, FIG. 112 is a diagram showing the relationship between the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of times of time-saving games set for the time-saving design stop failure and the stop symbol combination (time-saving design) for the time-saving design stop failure. As shown in FIG. 112, in the present embodiment, 5 times, 10 times, 20 times, 30 times, 50 times and 100 times are set as the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games (FIG. 86 ( E) and FIG. 87(E)). Then, as a stop pattern combination (time saving pattern) for the time saving pattern stop off, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time saving games is 5 times to "443" and "445", and 10 times to "665" and "667". , 20 times to "998" and "991", 30 times to "554" and "556", 50 times to "332" and "334", 100 times to "775" and "778", respectively. Yes.

In addition, as a stop pattern combination (time saving pattern) for the time saving pattern stop off, the left pattern and the middle pattern have the same number, and the right pattern is a pattern combination that is one position behind the left pattern and the middle pattern. , is a characteristic combination with a certain regularity. As described above, the combination of the time-saving symbols is characteristic, so that the player can easily grasp that the time-saving symbols have been stop-displayed. Further, when the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed, a specific special sound peculiar to the time of the time saving pattern being stopped and displayed may be output. This also allows the player to easily grasp that the time saving pattern has been stop-displayed.

Of course, the time saving pattern is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 112, and may be another characteristic combination, and does not necessarily have to be a characteristic combination. In addition, the time saving pattern does not need to correspond to the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of times of one time saving game, and may be one or may be three or more, and all the number of time saving games. There is no need to correspond the same number of time-saving symbols to the upper limit value (prescribed number of times).

<Steps S4003 and S4004>
Returning to the explanation of the stop symbol combination setting process in FIG. It is determined whether or not the upper limit value (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games to be set is 5 (step S4003). Whether the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of times of time-saving games set for the time-saving design stoppage is 5 times is determined by, for example, the special figure variation pattern (special figure variation display time) included in the special figure variation pattern command ) and the results of the jackpot lottery.

MPU51, when the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of times of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop deviation is 5 times (step S4003: Yes), the number of times of time-saving games corresponds to 5 times "443" or "445" (see FIG. 112) is set as the stop symbol combination (step S4004), and the stop symbol combination setting process is terminated. On the other hand, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4005 when the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of times of time saving games set for the time saving symbol stop deviation is not 5 times (step S4003: No).

<Steps S4005 and S4006>
When the upper limit value (prescribed number of times) of the number of times of time saving games set for the time saving pattern stop deviation is not 5 times (step S4003: No), the MPU 51 is the number of time saving games set for the time saving pattern stop deviation is 10 times (step S4005).

MPU51, when the upper limit value (prescribed number of times) of the number of times of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop deviation is 10 times (step S4005: Yes), the number of times of time-saving games is "665" corresponding to 10 times or "667" (see FIG. 112) is set as the stop symbol combination (step S4006), and the stop symbol combination setting process is terminated. On the other hand, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4007 when the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of times of time saving games set for the time saving symbol stop deviation is not 10 times (step S4005: No).

<Steps S4007 and 3508>
When the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of times of time saving games set for the time saving pattern stop deviation is not 10 times (step S4005: No), the MPU 51 is the number of time saving games set for the time saving design stop deviation is 20 (step S4007).

MPU51, when the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of times of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop deviation is 20 times (step S4007: Yes), the number of times of time-saving games corresponds to 20 times "998" or "991" (see FIG. 112) is set as the stop symbol combination (step S4008), and the stop symbol combination setting process is terminated. On the other hand, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4009 when the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of times of time saving games set for the time saving symbol stop deviation is not 20 times (step S4007: No).

<Steps S4009 and S4010>
When the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of times of time saving games set for the time saving symbol stop deviation is not 20 times (step S4007: No), the MPU 51 is the number of time saving games set for the time saving symbol stop deviation is 30 (step S4009).

MPU51, when the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of times of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop deviation is 30 times (step S4009: Yes), the number of times of time-saving games is "554" corresponding to 30 times or "556" (see FIG. 112) is set as the stop symbol combination (step S4010), and the stop symbol combination setting process is terminated. On the other hand, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4011 when the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of times of time saving games set for the time saving symbol stop deviation is not 30 times (step S4009: No).

<Steps S4011 and S4012>
When the upper limit value (prescribed number of times) of the number of times of time saving games set for the time saving symbol stop deviation is not 30 times (step S4009: No), the MPU 51 is the number of time saving games set for the time saving symbol stop deviation is 50 (step S4011).

MPU51, when the upper limit value (prescribed number of times) of the number of times of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop deviation is 50 times (step S4011: Yes), the number of times of time-saving games corresponds to 50 times "332" or "334" (see FIG. 112) is set as the stop symbol combination (step S4012), and the stop symbol combination setting process is terminated. On the other hand, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4013 when the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of times of time saving games set for the time saving symbol stop deviation is not 50 times (step S4011: No).

<Step S4013>
When the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of times of time saving games set for the time saving pattern stop deviation is not 50 times (step S4011: No), the MPU 51 determines that the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of times of time saving games is 100 times. Since it can be determined, "775" or "778" (see FIG. 112) corresponding to the number of time-saving games of 100 is set as a stop symbol combination (step S4013), and the stop symbol combination setting process is terminated.

[Time-saving counter processing]
In the time saving number counter process executed in step S3822 when the special figure fluctuation pattern is received in the command determination process of FIG. 104, the process of managing the time saving number counter is executed. Here, FIG. 113 is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a time saving frequency counter process.

<Step S4101>
In the time saving number counter processing of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the first time saving gaming state flag indicating the first time saving gaming state is set to ON ( step S4101). The first time-saving gaming state flag, that is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is in the first time-saving gaming state. It should be noted that the first time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON in step S3803 when the first time-saving gaming state transition command is received in the command determination processing of FIG.

MPU51, when the first time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4101: Yes), that is, when it is the first time-saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step S4102. On the other hand, when the first time-saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S4101: No), that is, when it is not the first time-saving gaming state, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4105.

<Steps S4102 to S4104>
If the first time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4101: Yes), that is, if it is the first time-saving gaming state, the MPU 51 is a time-saving number counter indicating the number of remaining special figure games in the time-saving gaming state. is subtracted by 1 (step S4102), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4103). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the last special figure game in the first time saving game state.

MPU51, when the value of the time saving number counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4103: Yes), that is, when it is the last special figure game in the first time saving game state, the first time saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S4104), and ends the time saving counter process. On the other hand, MPU51, when the value of the time saving number counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4103: No), that is, when it is not the last special figure game in the first time saving game state, ends the time saving number counter process.

<Step S4105>
If the first time-saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S4101: No), that is, if it is not the first time-saving gaming state, the second time-saving gaming state flag indicating the second time-saving gaming state is set to ON It is determined whether or not it is set (step S4105). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is in the second time-saving gaming state. It should be noted that the second time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON in step S3806 when the second time-saving gaming state transition command is received in the command determination processing of FIG.

MPU51, when the second time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4105: Yes), that is, when it is the second time-saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step S4106. On the other hand, when the second time saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S4105: No), that is, when it is not the second time saving gaming state, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4109.

<Steps S4106 to S4108>
If the second time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4105: Yes), that is, if it is the second time-saving gaming state, the MPU 51 is a time-saving number counter indicating the number of remaining special figure games in the time-saving gaming state. is subtracted by 1 (step S4106), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4107). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the last special figure game in the second time saving game state.

MPU51, when the value of the time saving number counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4107: Yes), that is, when it is the last special figure game in the second time saving game state, sets the second time saving game state flag to OFF (step S4108), and ends the time saving counter process. On the other hand, MPU51, when the value of the time saving number counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4107: No), that is, when it is not the last special figure game in the second time saving game state, ends the time saving number counter processing.

<Step S4109>
If the second time-saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S4105: No), that is, if it is not the second time-saving gaming state, the third time-saving gaming state flag indicating that it is the third time-saving gaming state is set to ON It is determined whether or not it is set (step S4109). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is in the third time-saving gaming state. It should be noted that the third time-saving gaming state transition flag receives the third time-saving gaming state A transition command indicating that the game state is shifted from the second time-saving gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state in the command determination process of FIG. If so, it is set to ON in step S3811.

MPU51, when the third time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4109: Yes), that is, when it is the third time-saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step S4110. On the other hand, MPU51, when the third time-saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S4109: No), that is, when it is not the third time-saving gaming state, ends the time-saving number counter processing.

<Steps S4110 to S4112>
When the third time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4109: Yes), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-saving number counter indicating the number of remaining special figure games in the time-saving gaming state (step S4110) , It is determined whether or not the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4111). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the last special figure game in the third time saving game state.

MPU51, when the value of the time saving number counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4111: Yes), that is, when it is the last special figure game in the third time saving game state, sets the third time saving game state flag to OFF (step S4112), and ends the time saving counter process. On the other hand, MPU51, when the value of the time saving number counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4111: No), that is, when it is not the last special figure game in the third time saving game state, ends the time saving number counter processing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to shift to the third time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state in which it is possible to execute the two-type jackpot game via the small winning game, the time-saving game after the end of the one-type jackpot game The condition is satisfied and the transition to the second time-saving gaming state as a low-profit state is a condition, and the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving gaming state as a low-profit state is the upper limit of the number of time-saving games. As the (specified number of times), the high-profit condition establishment state is established when the number of time-saving games is larger than the number of remaining time-saving games in the second time-saving game state. That is, in the present embodiment, the conditions are stricter than the conventional one-kind and two-kind mixing machine in order to shift to the third time-saving gaming state, which is a high-profit state capable of executing the two-kind jackpot game, and further, As a condition for shifting to the third open time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state, new playability using the upper limit value (prescribed number of times) of the number of times of time-saving games set for time-saving symbol stoppage is provided. As a result, in this embodiment, in the second time-saving game state as a low-profit state that is shifted to the time-saving game condition establishment after the end of the type 1 jackpot game, the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed while expecting the game , and when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed, attention is paid to whether or not the game is shifted to the third time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state in which two types of jackpot games can be executed. You can enjoy progress. As a result, it is possible to raise the level of attention and interest in the game, thereby increasing the player's desire to play the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the high-profit condition to be shifted from the second time-saving gaming state (short open time short gaming state) as a low-profit state to the third time-saving gaming state (long open short gaming state) which is a high profit state , The result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state as a low-profit state is the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of times of time-saving games, and the number of times of time-saving games remaining in the second time-saving game state. It is to be in a state where In this way, the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state as a low-profit state is the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games, and the remaining time-saving game number in the second time-saving game state. In the case of being out of stop, when shifting from the second time-saving gaming state as a low-profit state to the third time-saving gaming state as a high-profit state, the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving gaming state as a low-profit state (The number of executions of the special game in the second time-saving game state increases), the game property that it is easy to shift to the third time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state, is imparted. As a result, as the number of remaining time-saving games in the second time-saving game state as a low-profit state decreases (as the number of special game executions in the second time-saving game increases), the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed. Since the expectation of the game and whether or not it will be shifted to the third time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state, the attention is further increased, so that the degree of attention and interest in the game is further increased, and the player's willingness to play is further improved. be able to.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state as a low-profit state that is shifted to the condition of time-saving games after the end of the jackpot game based on the first special figure 1 jackpot The (prescribed number of times) is set to the number of times (the number of times the player's balls do not decrease) that can be executed by the game balls (expected ball output value) that the player can acquire in the 2R short open time short jackpot game, for example. As a result, the player can execute the prescribed number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state without greatly reducing the number of balls in his/her possession, so that the second time-saving game state as a low-profit state is greatly disadvantaged. It is possible to provide a chance to shift to the third time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state capable of shifting to the second kind of jackpot game state via the small winning game state, while preventing the giving.

In this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to third embodiments are possible within the applicable range.

[Fifth embodiment]
In the above-described fourth embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state, which is shifted to the condition of the time-saving game after the end of the type 1 jackpot game, is out of the time-saving design stop, the time-saving game If the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for symbol stoppage is greater than the number of remaining time-saving games in the second time-saving game state, two types of jackpot game states via the small winning game state A case has been described in which the transition to the third time-saving game state is more advantageous to the player than the second time-saving game state in terms of being able to shift to the second time-saving game state.

Further, in the above-described fourth embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 to the first winning hole 314 is the time saving pattern stop off, and the second to third time saving gaming state , the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games set when the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 is out of the stoppage of the time-saving design. ) is set.

Furthermore, in the above-described fourth embodiment, as the second time-saving gaming state production executed in the second time-saving gaming state, the second time-saving gaming state continuation production or game A case has been described where the third time-saving game state transition effect that clearly indicates that the state is shifted from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state is executed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving gaming state is the time-saving design stop-off, the upper limit value of the time-saving game count set for the time-saving design stop-off (specified number of times ) is greater than the number of remaining time-saving games in the second time-saving gaming state, the above-mentioned fourth embodiment in that it is shifted to a third time-saving gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second time-saving gaming state common with

In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of time-saving games set when the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 in the second time-saving game state is out of the time-saving design stop. The difference from the above-described fourth embodiment is that the upper limit value (specified number of times) is one type of N times (50 times in this embodiment).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as the second time-saving game state production, the first effect is executed from the transition to the second time-saving game state to the special figure game of a predetermined number of times, and after moving to the second time-saving game state It differs from the above-described fourth embodiment in that a second effect different from the first effect is executed from the special game that exceeds the predetermined number of times.

By the way, as described above, to the second time-saving game state, the time-saving game is performed after the end of the 1st kind jackpot game that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game state (or the first time-saving game state) is a jackpot. (see FIG. 96), and the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is set to a fixed number M times (100 times in this embodiment) (See FIG. 86(B)). Therefore, in the second time-saving game state, the upper limit of the number of time-saving games set when the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning port 315 is out of the time-saving design stop (specified number of times ) is one type (N times), until the special figure game of "MN" times is executed after shifting to the second time saving game state, the time saving pattern stop off in the second time saving game state The upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the second time-saving game state does not exceed the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state, and the state does not shift to the third time-saving game state. On the other hand, when the special figure game exceeding "MN" times is executed after shifting to the second time saving game state, the number of time saving games set for the time saving pattern stop off in the second time saving game state Since the upper limit (specified number of times) can be greater than the remaining number of times of time saving in the second time saving game state, it can be shifted to the third time saving game state.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in the time-saving gaming state, whether the result of the jackpot lottery will be the time-saving design stoppage or not until the special game is executed "MN" times after shifting to the second time-saving gaming state Rather than whether or not, it is more important whether the result of the jackpot lottery will be out of the time saving pattern stoppage after the special game is executed more than "MN" times after shifting to the second time saving game state. Since the new game property is given, the player's attention and interest in the special figure game in the second time saving game state are improved, and the interest in the game is improved.

In addition, in the second time-saving game state, even in the second time-saving game state production executed in the symbol display unit 341, etc., the special game exceeding "MN" times after shifting to the second time-saving game state is executed. It is more important after being done. That is, from the transition to the second time-saving gaming state until the special figure game of a predetermined number of times (for example, "MN" times) is performed, different effects after the special figure game exceeding the predetermined number of times is performed is executed, an unimportant period and an important period in the second time-saving gaming state can be specified or suggested to the player. For example, during all or part of an unimportant period in the second time-saving gaming state, a pinch effect is executed as to whether the second time-saving gaming state is maintained as the first effect, while important in the second time-saving gaming state It is also possible to execute a chance effect as to whether or not to shift to the third time-saving game state as the second effect during all or part of the period. As a result, the player's attention and interest in the special game in the second time-saving game state are improved, and the amusement of the game is improved.

Here, in the present embodiment, the number of executions of the special figure game after shifting to the second time-saving game state in which the first effect and the second effect are switched as the second time-saving game state effect "predetermined number of times ” coincides with “MN” times that it is possible to shift to the third time-saving game state due to the time-saving symbol stop deviation. Thus, when the "predetermined number of times" and the "MN" times match, the player can shift to the third time-saving game state in the second time-saving game state. It is possible to comprehend based on the fact that the second time-saving game state effect is changed from the first effect to the second effect. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game while paying attention to the fact that the second time-saving game state effect is changed from the first effect to the second effect, and when it is changed to the second effect, the Since the progress of the game can be enjoyed while paying attention to the second effect, the interest in the game is improved.

Although the "predetermined number of times" and the "MN" times may not match, it is preferable that the difference between the "predetermined number of times" and the "MN" times is small. The absolute value is set, for example, to 20% or less, preferably 10% or less, more preferably 5% or less of the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state. Thus, if the "predetermined number of times" and the "MN" times do not match, the player, the special figure game that can be shifted to the third time-saving gaming state in the second time-saving gaming state can't figure it out exactly. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on at what stage the special figure game that can be shifted to the third time saving game state in the second time saving game state is executed. Interest is enhanced.

Of course, the feature of this embodiment is that the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 to the second winning opening 315 in the second time-saving game state is the time-saving game set when the time-saving symbol is off. This embodiment can also be applied to the above-described fourth embodiment in which the upper limit value of the number of times (specified number of times) is plural. In this way, in the second time-saving game state, the upper limit of the number of time-saving games set when the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 is out of the time-saving design stop ( By applying the features of the present embodiment when a plurality of types of specified number of times are set, it is not possible to accurately grasp the special game that can be shifted to the third time-saving game state from the second time-saving game state. Therefore, the "predetermined number of times" and the "MN" times do not match, at which stage the player can shift from the second time-saving gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state. Since it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether the special game is executed, the amusement of the game is improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, to the second time-saving game state, the time-saving game is performed after the end of the 1st kind jackpot game that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game state (or the first time-saving game state) is a jackpot. The upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of times of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state, which is shifted when the condition is established, is set to a fixed number M times (100 times in this embodiment) (Fig. B) See), you may set a plurality of upper limits (prescribed number of times) of the number of times of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state. In this way, by setting a plurality of upper limits (specified number of times) of the number of times of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state, the result of the jackpot lottery after shifting to the second time-saving game state until the time-saving pattern is stopped Not only the number of special-figure games executed in the second time-saving game state, but also the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is important.

Furthermore, when setting multiple upper limit values (specified number of times) of the number of time saving games in the second time saving game state, all of the multiple set upper limits (specified number of times) M are set to the second in the second time saving game state When the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the prize winning opening 315 is out of stoppage of the time saving pattern, the number of times is set to be larger than the upper limit value (prescribed number of times) N of the number of time saving games of one type. It is also conceivable to set As a result, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of times of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is large or small without impairing the playability in which the timing at which the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is out of the time-saving pattern stoppage is important. is imparted with a playability that is important.

The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 114 to 117, focusing on differences from the fourth embodiment.

[System Configuration of Gaming Machine 10]
As described above, in the second time-saving gaming state, the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 is time-saving set when the time-saving symbol is not stopped. This embodiment differs from the above-described fourth embodiment in that there is only one upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of times played (50 times in this embodiment). Specifically, in this embodiment, the second special figure loss variation table when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving gaming state is out is different from the above-described fourth embodiment. Here, FIG. 114 is a diagram showing an example of the second special figure loss variation table when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving gaming state is a loss.

[Second Special Figure Out Fluctuation Table]
As shown in FIG. 114, in the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is out, all the time-saving symbols stop out. Then, when the time saving pattern stop is out, the upper limit value (prescribed number of times) of the number of time saving games is set to 50 times.

[Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device 5]
In this embodiment, as described above, as the second time-saving game state production, the first effect is executed from the transition to the second time-saving game state to the special figure game of a predetermined number of times, and the transition to the second time-saving game state It is different from the above-described fourth embodiment in that the second effect different from the first effect is executed from the special game that has exceeded the predetermined number of times. Specifically, in this embodiment, the variation type (effect pattern) setting process of step S3318 executed when the special figure variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. Processing is different from that of the above-described fourth embodiment.

[Variation type (production pattern) setting process]
In the variation type (production pattern) setting process of the present embodiment, as the second time-saving game state production, the first production is set when the number of unexecuted time-saving games is 50 times or more, and the number of unexecuted time-saving games is set. A second effect different from the first effect is set when it is less than 50 times. Here, FIG. 115 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process executed in step S3318 of the command determination process of FIG.

<Steps S4201 and S4202>
In the variation type (production pattern) setting process of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 115, the MPU 51 first determines whether the second time-saving gaming state flag indicating the second time-saving gaming state is set to ON. is determined (step S4201). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is in the second time-saving gaming state.

MPU51, when the second time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4201: Yes), that is, when the second time-saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step S4202, the second time-saving gaming state Either the first performance or the second performance is set as the second time-saving game state performance based on the number of remaining time-saving games.

On the other hand, MPU51, if the second time-saving gaming state flag is set to off (step S4201: No), that is, if it is not the second time-saving gaming state, the game state and jackpot lottery result, special figure variation pattern (special figure Variation display time) etc., other effects other than the second time-saving game state effect are set (step S4202), and the variation type (effect pattern) setting process is terminated.

Here, FIG. 116(A) is a diagram showing an example of the pattern of the first effect as the second time-saving game state effect, and FIG. 116(B) is a pattern of the second effect as the second time-saving game state effect. It is a figure which shows an example.

As shown in FIGS. 116A and 116B, the second time-saving game state effects (first effect and second effect) are executed as a battle effect between the main character and the enemy character. In the second time-saving game state production (first production and second production), one character of the ally character and the enemy character attacks, and the other character defends against the attack of the other character, or the other character defends against the attack of the other character. attack hits the other character, and finally the result of the battle is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 116(A), the first production as the second time-saving gaming state production is executed when the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving gaming state is 50 times or more as described later. It is a production that In this first effect, even if the result of the big hit lottery is the time saving pattern stop off (when the symbol combination corresponding to the time saving pattern stop off is stopped and displayed), the second time saving after the end of the special game It is specified or suggested that the game state does not shift to the third time-saving game state. In the example shown in FIG. 116(A), the first production includes eight production patterns of patterns C1 to C8, and in each of the patterns C1 to C8, if the result of the jackpot lottery is the time saving pattern stop off, the battle The result is a draw (draw), so even if the pattern combination corresponds to the time saving pattern stop off, the game state does not shift from the second time saving game state to the third time saving game state. . In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a win (big win or small win), the result of the battle is that the teammate character wins, thereby indicating or suggesting the win. Of course, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a win (big win or small win), the result of the battle may be a draw (draw). In this case, the result of the jackpot lottery is indicated or suggested by the combination of stop symbols instead of the result of the battle.

Further, in patterns C2, C4, C6 to C8, button effects such as a long-press effect and a repeated-press effect (see FIGS. 110A and 110B) are executed after the offense and defense between the ally character and the enemy character. , then the results of the battle will be displayed.

Also, in patterns C7 and C8, after the enemy character's preemptive attack hits the ally character, a display is made indicating that the ally character is in a pinch (see FIG. 116(C)). This pinch display is a display peculiar to the first performance executed when the number of remaining time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is 50 times or more, which is a predetermined number of times, and is not displayed in the second performance. Of course, pinch display may be performed in the second effect.

Incidentally, the patterns C1 to C8 of the first effect are set based on the result of the jackpot lottery, for example. In addition, the patterns C7 and C8 in which the pinch display is performed are likely to be set, for example, when the result of the jackpot lottery is not the stoppage of the time-reduction pattern (when it is a jackpot or a small hit), and the result of the jackpot lottery is the stoppage of the time-reduction pattern. It is conceivable to make it difficult to be selected in some cases. As a result, when the pinch display is performed, the player can grasp that the degree of expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery is the time saving symbol stop failure is low.

In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a win (big win or small win) that is not out of time saving symbol stoppage, an effect other than the patterns C1 to C8 may be executed. In other words, the patterns C1 to C8 may be set as exclusive effects when the result of the jackpot lottery is the time-saving symbol stop-off.

As shown in FIG. 116(B), the second effect as the second time saving game state effect is executed when the number of remaining time saving games in the second time saving game state is less than 50 times as described later. It is a production that In this second effect, if the result of the jackpot lottery is the time saving pattern stop off (when the symbol combination corresponding to the time saving pattern stop off is stopped and displayed), the second time saving game state will be changed to the second time saving game state after the end of the special game. It is specified or suggested to shift to the 3 o'clock short game state. In the example shown in FIG. 116(B), the second effect includes eight effect patterns of patterns D1 to D8, and in each of the patterns D1 to D8, if the result of the jackpot lottery is the time saving pattern stop off, the battle As a result of the victory of the teammate character, it is specified or suggested that the game state shifts from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a win (big win or small win), the result of the battle is a draw (draw), thereby indicating or suggesting a win. Of course, if the result of the big win lottery is a win (big win or small win), the result of the battle may be a win for the teammate character. In this case, the result of the jackpot lottery is indicated or suggested by the combination of stop symbols instead of the result of the battle.

Further, in patterns D2, D4, D6 to D8, button effects such as a long-press effect and a repeated-press effect (see FIGS. 110A and 110B) are executed after the offense and defense between the ally character and the enemy character. , then the results of the battle will be displayed.

Also, in patterns D7 and D8, after the ally character's preemptive attack hits the enemy character, a display is made indicating that the ally character has a chance (see FIG. 116(D)). This chance display is a display peculiar to the second performance executed when the number of remaining time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is less than a predetermined number of 50 times, and is not displayed in the first performance. Of course, the chance display may be performed in the first effect.

Incidentally, the patterns D1 to D8 of the second effect are set based on the result of the jackpot lottery, for example. In addition, patterns D7 and D8 in which the chance display is performed are likely to be set, for example, when the result of the jackpot lottery is the time saving pattern stop off, and when the jackpot lottery result is not the time saving pattern stop off (when it is a big hit or a small hit) ) can be considered to make it difficult to be selected. As a result, when the chance display is performed, the player can grasp that the degree of expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery is the failure to stop the time-saving symbols is high.

In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a win (big win or small win) that is not the time-saving symbol stoppage failure, an effect other than the patterns D1 to D8 may be executed. In other words, the patterns D1 to D8 may be set as a dedicated effect when the result of the jackpot lottery is the time saving symbol stop failure.

<Steps S4203 to S4205>
Returning to the explanation of the procedure of the variation type (production pattern) setting process in FIG. specifies the number of unexecuted time saving games excluding the special game in the second time saving game state based on the value of the time saving number counter (step S4203), and the remaining time saving in the second time saving game state It is determined whether or not the number of games played is 50 or more (step S4204).

MPU51, if the number of remaining time-saving games in the second time-saving gaming state is 50 times or more (step S4204: Yes), based on the result of the jackpot lottery, patterns C1 to C8 to the first production (FIG. 116 ( A)) is set (step S4205), and the variation type (effect pattern) setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is not 50 times or more (step S4204: No), that is, if the number of remaining time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is less than 50 times, The MPU 51 sets the second effect (see FIG. 116(B)) from the patterns D1 to D8 based on the result of the jackpot lottery (step S4206), and ends the variation type (effect pattern) setting process.

[Stop symbol combination setting process]
In the stop symbol combination setting process of the present embodiment, as the stop symbol combination, if the result of the jackpot lottery is the time reduction symbol stop off, the time reduction symbol is set, and if the jackpot lottery result is not the time reduction symbol stop off (jackpot or small If it is a hit), other than the time saving pattern is set. Here, FIG. 117 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the stop symbol combination setting process executed in step S3819 of the command determination process of FIG.

<Step S4301>
In the stop symbol combination setting process of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117, first, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is time saving symbol stop off (step S4301). MPU51 transfers a process to step S4302, when the result of big hit lottery is time saving design stop loss (step S4301: Yes). On the other hand, MPU51, if the result of the jackpot lottery is not time saving pattern stop off (step S4301: No), that is, if the jackpot lottery result is off other than time saving pattern stop off, big hit or small hit, the process goes to step S4303 Transition.

<Step S4302>
When the result of the jackpot lottery is the time saving design stop off (step S4301: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the time saving design as the stop design combination. Here, in the present embodiment, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games set when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state is out of the time-saving pattern stop is one kind of 50 times. . Therefore, at least one type of time saving pattern to be stop-displayed in the second time saving game state may be used, and one type or a plurality of types may be used.

<Step S4303>
If the result of the jackpot lottery is not the stoppage of the time-saving pattern (step S4301: No), if the result of the jackpot lottery is a hit other than the stoppage of the time-saving pattern, or a big hit or a small hit, a combination of symbols other than the time-saving pattern is used as the stop pattern combination. It is set according to the result of the jackpot lottery. For example, if the result of the jackpot lottery is an off other than the time-saving symbol stop off, set the stop symbol combination according to the type of the off, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, set the stop symbol combination as a double. On the other hand, when the result of the big win lottery is a small win, a combination of stop symbols other than the winning symbols and doubles is set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the time-saving gaming state, after the shift to the second time-saving gaming state, which is a low-profit state, the result of the jackpot lottery before the special figure game of the specific number of times (50 times) is executed The result of the jackpot lottery after the special figure game exceeding a specific number of times (50 times) is executed after shifting to the second time-saving game state which is a low-profit state rather than whether or not the time-saving pattern is stopped. Since the new playability that whether or not the pattern is stopped is more important is given, the player's attention and interest in the special figure game in the second time-saving game state are improved, and the interest in the game is improved. be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, the second time-saving gaming state, which is a low-profit state, transitions to the second time-saving gaming state, which is a low-profit state, even in the second time-saving gaming state production executed by the symbol display unit 341 or the like. After that, it is more important after the special figure game exceeding the specific number of times (50 times) is executed. That is, from the transition to the second time-saving gaming state which is a low profit state until the special figure game of the specific number of times (50 times) is executed, and after the special figure game exceeding the specific number of times is executed Different production is executed, it is possible to indicate or suggest to the player the unimportant period and the important period in the second time-saving gaming state, which is the low-profit state. In an unimportant period in the low-profit state second time-saving game state, a pinch performance is executed as the first performance to determine whether the low-profit state second time-saving game state is maintained, while the low-profit state second time-saving game state is executed. During an important period in the time-saving game state, it is also possible to execute a chance effect as the second effect as to whether or not to shift to the third time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state. As a result, the player's attention and interest in the special game in the second time-saving game state are improved, and the amusement of the game is improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of executions of the special figure game after shifting to the second time-saving game state in which the first effect and the second effect are switched as the second time-saving game state effect is the time-saving symbol stop off It matches the number of times that it is possible to shift to the third time-saving game state by. In this way, by matching the switching timing of the second time-saving game state production and the timing at which it is possible to shift to the third time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state, from the first production in the second time-saving game state production Based on the change to the second effect, it is possible to grasp that it is possible to shift to the third time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game while paying attention to the fact that the second time-saving game state effect is changed from the first effect to the second effect, and when it is changed to the second effect, the second effect is obtained. Since the progress of the game can be enjoyed while paying attention to the performance, the interest in the game is improved.

In this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to fourth embodiments are possible within the applicable range.

[Sixth embodiment]
In the above-described fourth embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state, which is shifted to the condition of the time-saving game after the end of the type 1 jackpot game, is out of the time-saving design stop, the time-saving game If the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for symbol stoppage is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state (if a predetermined condition is established), a small winning game state A case of shifting to the third time-saving game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the second time-saving game state in that it is possible to shift to the second kind of jackpot game state via , has been described.

Further, in the above-described fourth embodiment, the transition from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state is executed after the predetermined condition is finished with the special figure game.

Furthermore, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state is set to the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving pattern stop deviation. .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving gaming state is the time-saving design stop-off, the upper limit value of the time-saving game count set for the time-saving design stop-off (specified number of times ) is greater than the number of remaining time-saving games in the second time-saving gaming state, the above-mentioned fourth embodiment in that it is shifted to a third time-saving gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second time-saving gaming state common with

Here, FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a setting example of the third time-saving gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 118 (A), in the present embodiment, the transition from the second time-saving gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state is the number of executions of the special figure game in the second time-saving gaming state. executed later. In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit value K (prescribed number of times K) of the number of times of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state is the upper limit of the number of times of time-saving games set for the time-saving pattern stoppage when the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is set to a value (JL) obtained by subtracting the remaining number of time saving times L in the second time saving game state from the value J (prescribed number of times J). For example, as shown in FIG. 118 (B), the upper limit value K (prescribed number of times K) of the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state is set for the time-saving symbol stop deviation when the predetermined condition is satisfied. When the upper limit value J (prescribed number of times J) of the number of time-saving games is 50 times, and the remaining number of times of time-saving L in the second time-saving game state is 20 times, K = JL = 50-20 = 30 Therefore, it is set to 30 times.

In this embodiment, the transition from the second time-saving gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state is executed after the execution count of the special figure game in the second time-saving gaming state reaches a specified number of times. Here, as described above, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state is, for example, a game ball (expected ball output value) that a player can acquire by a 2R short-open time-shortening jackpot game. It is set to the number of times that can be executed (the number of times that the number of balls held by the player does not decrease). Therefore, the transition from the second time-saving gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state is executed after the number of executions of the special figure game in the second time-saving gaming state reaches the specified number of times, so that the second time-saving gaming state Since it is possible to ensure a large number of games up to the two-kind jackpot game that is first executed based on the small win in the third time-saving game state after the shift, after the shift to the second time-saving game state. It is possible to suppress the sudden increase in the number of balls that are put out and held. This makes it possible to suppress gambling in the gaming machine 10 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state (specified number of times) is the upper limit of the number of times of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop deviation when the predetermined condition is satisfied ( It is set to a value obtained by subtracting the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state from the prescribed number of times). Therefore, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of times of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state is set for the time-saving pattern stop deviation when the predetermined condition is satisfied. The smaller the number of remaining time-saving games at the time of execution of the special game that satisfies the predetermined condition, the more, and the situation in the third time-saving game state is advantageous to the player. That is, in the present embodiment, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop deviation when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the game in which the timing when the predetermined condition is satisfied is important. This can increase the attention and interest in the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the initial setting value of the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving gaming state in the case of shifting from the second time-saving gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state is the time-saving design stop when the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is set to a value obtained by subtracting the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state from the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the deviation, but the initial setting value is the predetermined value. It may be set to the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving pattern stoppage when the condition is satisfied, or set to the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state. good too.

Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 119, focusing on differences from the above-described fourth embodiment.

[Processing of main controller 4]
This embodiment differs from the above-described fourth embodiment in the procedure for shifting to the third time-saving gaming state in the game state transition process and the procedure for setting the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving gaming state. Here, FIG. 119 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of part of the game state transition processing of this embodiment.

[Game state transition processing]
In the game state transition processing of the present embodiment, when the number of executions of the special figure game in the second time saving game state reaches the specified number of times, the state is shifted to the third time saving game state, and the number of time saving games in the third time saving game state is set to a value obtained by subtracting the remaining number of times of time saving L in the second time saving game state from the upper limit of the number of times of time saving games set for the time saving pattern stop deviation when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Processing is performed.

<Step S4401>
In the game state transition processing of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119, when the game state is the second time-saving game state, the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game ended by the stop display of the special symbol is one type jackpot. However, if it is not a small hit (step S3637: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third time-saving gaming state transition flag is set to ON (step S4401). The third time-saving gaming state transition flag is a flag indicating that a predetermined condition for shifting from the second time-saving gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state is satisfied, and is turned on in step S3412 in the special figure fluctuation start processing of FIG. is set to

MPU51, when the third time-saving gaming state transition flag is set to ON (step S4401: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4402, and when the third time-saving gaming state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4401: No), the game state transition processing ends.

<Steps S4402 and S4403>
When the third time-saving gaming state transition flag is set to ON (step S4401: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the third time-saving gaming state transition flag to off (step S4402), and in the second time-saving gaming state It is determined whether or not the value of the time saving number counter indicating the number of remaining time saving games is 0 (step S4403).

MPU51, if the value of the time saving number counter is 0 (step S4403: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4404, if the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (step S4403: No), the game state transition processing finish.

<Steps S4404 to S4406>
When the value of the time saving number counter is 0 (step S4403: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the game state from the second time saving game state to the third time saving game state (step S4404). Then, the MPU 51 turns on the third time-saving gaming state flag indicating that it is the third time-saving gaming state (step S4405), and turns off the second time-saving gaming state flag indicating that it is the second time-saving gaming state. (step S4406), and the process proceeds to step S4407.

<Step S4407>
In step S4407, the MPU 51 sets the upper limit value (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state. Specifically, the MPU 51 is the upper limit value (prescribed number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving gaming state, and the time-saving design stop that triggered the transition from the second time-saving gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state. It is set to a value obtained by subtracting the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state (the value of the time-saving number counter) from the upper limit value of the number of time-saving games set for the deviation (prescribed number of times).

In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games when shifting to the third time-saving game state after the end of the two types of jackpots is fixed at 50 times, as in the fourth embodiment described above. number (see FIG. 87(F)). However, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the case of shifting to the third time-saving game state after the end of the two types of jackpots is set when moving from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state. The initial setting value may be the same, or may be set from the number of time-saving games that are set in a plurality of types.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the transition from the second time-saving gaming state as a low-profit state to the third time-saving gaming state, which is a high-profit state, is a special figure in the second time-saving gaming state as a low-profit state. It is executed after the number of game executions reaches a specified number of times. Here, as described above, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state as a low-profit state is, for example, a game ball (outgoing It is set to the number of times that can be executed (the number of times that the number of balls held by the player does not decrease) by the ball expectation value). Therefore, the transition from the second time-saving gaming state as a low-profit state to the third time-saving gaming state, which is a high-profit state, is the number of executions of the special figure game in the second time-saving gaming state as a low-profit state. By being executed after reaching, after being transferred to the second time-saving game state as a low-profit state, the two types of jackpots are first executed based on the small win in the third time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state. Since it is possible to ensure a large number of games until the game is played, it is possible to suppress a rapid increase in the number of balls put out and held after the transition to the second time-saving game state. This makes it possible to suppress gambling in the gaming machine 10 .

In addition, in this embodiment, when the conditions for transition to the third time-saving gaming state, which is a high-profit state, are satisfied, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving gaming state is out of the time-saving design stop. It is set to a value obtained by subtracting the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state from the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games that is set. Therefore, the upper limit of the number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state (specified number of number of times), the smaller the number of remaining time-saving games at the time of execution of the special game in which the transition condition is established, the more the situation in the third time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state, is advantageous to the player. Become. That is, in the present embodiment, the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving symbol stop deviation when the transition condition is satisfied, and the timing when the predetermined condition is satisfied are important. is given, and thereby the attention and interest in the game can be improved, so the interest in the game is improved.

In this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the above-described first to fifth embodiments are possible within the applicable range.

[Seventh embodiment]
In the above-described fourth embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving game state, which is shifted to the condition of the time-saving game after the end of the type 1 jackpot game, is out of the time-saving design stop, the time-saving game If the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for symbol stoppage is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state (if a predetermined condition is established), a small winning game state A case of shifting to the third time-saving game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the second time-saving game state in that it is possible to shift to the second kind of jackpot game state via , has been described.

Further, in the above-described fourth embodiment, the small winning probability (approximately 1/1) in the big winning lottery executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning hole 315 is set higher than the losing probability. The case has been described (see FIGS. 87(A) and 87(B)).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving gaming state is the time-saving design stop-off, the upper limit value of the time-saving game count set for the time-saving design stop-off (specified number of times ) is greater than the number of remaining time-saving games in the second time-saving gaming state, the above-mentioned fourth embodiment in that it is shifted to a third time-saving gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second time-saving gaming state common with

In addition, in this embodiment, contrary to the fourth embodiment described above, the jackpot that is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 in the second time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state The probability of losing the lottery is set higher than the probability of a small win, for example, the probability of losing is set to about 1/1.

In the present embodiment, the probability of losing the big hit lottery executed with the entry of the game ball 99 to the second winning hole 315 in the second time-saving gaming state as a trigger is set higher than the probability of the small hit. It is easier to shift to the third time-saving gaming state than the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment. On the other hand, the probability of losing in the big hit lottery executed with the entry of the game ball 99 to the second winning hole 315 in the third time-saving game state as a trigger is set higher than the probability of the small hit, so that the above-mentioned second 2 types of jackpot games are more difficult to execute than the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, after the transition to the third time-saving gaming state, a game feature is imparted in which a small win is won in the big win lottery. As a result, since attention and interest in the game can be improved, the amusement of the game is improved.

The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 120 to 123, focusing on differences from the above-described fourth embodiment.

[Processing of main controller 4]
This embodiment differs from the above-described fourth embodiment in the distribution of the jackpot lottery executed when the game ball 99 enters the second winning hole 315 as a trigger. Here, FIG. 120 is a diagram showing an example of the second special figure jackpot success/failure table of the present embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 120 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a short open second special figure jackpot hit table other than the third time saving game state (normal game state, first time saving game state and second time saving game state) FIG. 120(B) is a diagram showing an example of the second special figure jackpot success/failure table in the long open third time-saving gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 120(A), the short-open second special-figure jackpot success/failure table of the present embodiment is commonly set for game setting values 1 to 6 in six stages. In the short-open second special figure jackpot success/failure table, one of jackpot, small win and loss is selected as the lottery result of the jackpot lottery according to the value (random number) of the jackpot random number counter C1. That is, in the second special jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 in short opening, the first winning lottery triggered by the entry of the gaming ball 99 into the first winning opening 314 Unlike the special figure jackpot lottery, the lottery result includes a small hit in which the feather accessory device 83 (see FIGS. 82 to 84) is operated. Specifically, in the short-open second special figure jackpot success/failure table, among the values (random numbers) of 65536 jackpot random number counters C1 from 0 to 65535, 0 to 205 correspond to jackpots, and 206 to 207 are small. It corresponds to a hit, and other random values correspond to a loss. That is, in the jackpot lottery that is executed when the game ball 99 enters the second prize winning hole 315 by short-opening the electric accessory 315b, the jackpot probability is set to about 1/318.1. The small win probability is set to about 1/32768, and the loss probability is set to about 1/1.003, and most of the results of the big win lottery result in loss.

As shown in FIG. 120(B), the long open second special figure jackpot success/failure table is set in common for game setting values 1 to 6 in six stages. In the long open second special figure jackpot success/failure table, one of jackpot, small win and miss is selected as the lottery result of the jackpot lottery according to the value (random number) of the jackpot random number counter C1. That is, in the second special jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning opening 315 in the long opening, the first winning lottery triggered by the entry of the gaming ball 99 into the first winning opening 314 Unlike the special figure jackpot lottery, the lottery result includes a small hit in which the feather accessory device 83 (see FIGS. 82 to 84) is operated. Specifically, in the long open second special figure jackpot success/failure table, among the values (random numbers) of 65536 jackpot random number counters C1 from 0 to 65535, 0 to 205 correspond to jackpots, and 206 to 65529 are small. It corresponds to a hit, and other random values correspond to a loss. That is, in the second special jackpot lottery that is executed when the game ball 99 enters the second prize winning port 315 as a result of the long opening of the electric accessory 315b, the jackpot probability is about 1/318.1. , the small win probability is set to about 1/30, and the loss probability is set to about 1/1.038, and most of the results of the big win lottery result in failure.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the short-open second special figure jackpot success/failure table and the long-open second special figure jackpot success/failure table were provided with one common to the six game setting values, but the short-open second special figure One or both of the special figure big hit success/failure table and the long open second special figure success/failure table may be set for each game setting value. It is also conceivable to set one second special figure jackpot success/failure table by commonalizing the short open second special figure jackpot success/failure table and the long open second special figure success/failure table.

[Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device 5]
The processing of the audio lamp control device 5 in this embodiment is the same as in the above-described fourth embodiment, but the second time-saving game state effect and the third time-saving game state effect are different from those in the above-described fourth embodiment. different.

<Second time reduction game state production>
The second time-saving game state presentation is executed as a mission presentation for the ally character to acquire a special move, and clearly indicates that the ally character acquires the special move to shift to the third time-saving game state. Here, FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a screen example of the symbol display section 341 in the second time-saving game state production. Specifically, FIG. 121(A) is an example of a start screen for a mission to acquire a special move, FIG. 121(B) is an example of a screen during a mission challenge, and FIG. ), and FIG. 121(D) is an example of a screen for failing to obtain a special move (mission failure).

As shown in FIG. 121(A), at the start of the special move acquiring mission, a character image of "destroy the big rock and acquire the special move", which is the contents of the mission, and "special move", which is the contents of the success of the mission, are displayed. A character image of "rush into RUSH with skill acquisition" is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 121(B), during the mission challenge, an image of a friendly character punching a large rock and characters of "Special Punch!" are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 121(C), the successful acquisition of the special move (mission success) consists of a character image of "acquiring the special move" indicating that the special move has been acquired and a character image of "rush into RUSH" indicating that the special move has been acquired. A character image and an image of a friendly character smiling after acquiring a special move are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 121(D), the failure to acquire the special move (mission failure) includes a character image of "Failed" and "Cannot acquire the special move" indicating that the acquisition of the special move has failed, and the failure to acquire the special move. Therefore, an image in which the friendly character is sad is displayed.

<Third time reduction game state production>
The third time-saving game state presentation is executed as a battle presentation between an ally character and an enemy character, and the fact that the ally character wins over the enemy character clearly indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win. Furthermore, in the third time-saving game state presentation, it is determined that the result of the big win lottery is a small win when the ally character attacks with a special move.

Here, FIG. 122(A) is a diagram showing an example of the pattern of the third time-saving gaming state effect when the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, and FIG. Or a small hit) is a diagram showing an example of the pattern of the third time-saving game state effect.

As shown in FIGS. 122(A) and 122(B), the third time-saving game state production (loss third time-saving game state production and winning third time-saving game state production) is a battle production between the main character and the enemy character. executed. 3rd time-saving game state production (disappearance 3rd time-saving game state production and small hit 3rd time-saving game state production) One character of a friend character and an enemy character attacks, and one character attacks the other character. The result of the battle is displayed as to whether the character defends or the attack of one character hits the other character, and finally the third time-saving game state continues.

As shown in FIG. 122 (A), the third time-saving game state effect is an effect that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state effect is off, and the end of the special figure game. It is specified or suggested that the small winning game is not executed later and the third time-saving game state is maintained. Here, in the third time-saving game state, most of the results of the jackpot lottery are off (1/1.038) (see FIG. 120(B)). Therefore, in most of the third time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state production is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 122 (A), the third time-saving game state production includes eight production patterns of patterns E1 to E8, and in each pattern E1-E8, finally, the third time-saving game state continues. Whether or not the result of the battle is displayed as "continued", it is specified or suggested that the third time-saving gaming state is maintained without shifting to the small winning gaming state (Fig. 123 (B) reference).

Further, in patterns E2, E4, E6 to E8, button effects such as a long-press effect and a repeated-press effect (see FIG. 123A) are executed after the offense and defense between the ally character and the enemy character, and then the battle results. is displayed as "Continued".

As shown in FIG. 122 (B), the winning third time-saving gaming state effect is an effect that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving gaming state effect is a win (big win or small win), It is specified or suggested that a big winning game or a small winning game is executed after the end of the special game. In the example shown in FIG. 122 (B), the winning third time-saving game state production includes eight production patterns of patterns F1 to F8, and in each pattern F1-F8, finally, the third time-saving game state continues. Whether or not the result of the battle is displayed as "victory" indicates or suggests that the game state is shifted to the big winning game state or the small winning game state (see FIG. 123(C)).

Further, in patterns F2, F4, F6 to F8, button effects such as a long-press effect and a repeated-press effect (see FIG. 123A) are executed after the offense and defense between the ally character and the enemy character, and then the battle results. is displayed as "win".

As described above, in the present embodiment, the probability of being out of the big hit lottery executed with the entry of the game ball 99 to the second winning hole 315 in the second time-saving gaming state as a low-profit state is less than the small winning probability. is set high, it is easier to shift to the third time-saving gaming state, which is a high-profit state, than the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment. On the other hand, the loss probability in the big win lottery executed with the entry of the game ball 99 into the second winning hole 315 in the third time-saving game state, which is a high-profit state, is set higher than the small win probability. Therefore, it is more difficult to execute the two-type jackpot game than in the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, after the transition to the third time-saving gaming state, a game feature is imparted in which a small win is won in the big win lottery. As a result, since attention and interest in the game can be improved, the amusement of the game is improved.

In this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the above-described first to sixth embodiments are possible within the applicable range.

Further, in the above-described fourth to seventh embodiments, the normal pattern per probability is set to be the same in any of the first to third time-saving gaming states, but the normal pattern per probability is the type of time-saving gaming state may be set differently depending on

In addition, in the above-mentioned fourth to seventh embodiments, the time saving pattern stop off is included as the type of the jackpot lottery result in the normal game state, but the time saving as the type of the jackpot lottery result in the normal game state. Symbol stop deviation may be omitted. In this case, the first time-saving game state is omitted as the time-saving game state.

Further, in the above-described fourth to seventh embodiments, the short-open second special figure jackpot success/failure table and the long-open second special figure jackpot success/failure table are provided in common for six game setting values. However, one or both of the short opening second special figure jackpot success/failure table and the long opening second special figure jackpot success/failure table may be set for each game setting value. It is also conceivable to set one second special figure jackpot success/failure table by commonalizing the short open second special figure jackpot success/failure table and the long open second special figure success/failure table.

In addition, in the above-described fourth to seventh embodiments, the upper limit value of the number of time-saving games (specified number of times) was set corresponding to the type of special figure fluctuation pattern (variation display time), but the number of time-saving games The upper limit (specified number of times) may not correspond to the type of special figure variation pattern (variation display time). In addition, in the time saving pattern stop off type distribution table of the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is off, the time saving pattern stop is always off, but if the result of the jackpot lottery is off, part of the time saving pattern It may be set to be out of stop.

Further, in the above-mentioned fourth to seventh embodiments, from the upper limit value (specified number of times) of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving design stoppage in the second time-saving gaming state, in the second time-saving gaming state When the subtraction value of the remaining time-saving game count is smaller than 0, the remaining time-saving game count in the second time-saving game state is maintained without being changed, but when the subtraction value is smaller than 0, the The number of remaining time-saving games in the second time-saving game state may be changed. For example, the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state may be changed to the addition of the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving design stop deviation, or for the time-saving design stop deviation It may be changed to the number of time-saving games set (may be replaced).

In addition, in the small winning game of the fourth to seventh embodiments described above, the execution time of the movable feather portion operating game (operating time of the movable feather portion 832) is the time-saving game state in which the second special figure jackpot lottery is executed. are set to be the same regardless of the type of Of course, the execution time of the movable feather portion operating game (operating time of the movable feather portion 832) can be different according to the type of the time-saving game state in which the second special figure jackpot lottery is performed. For example, the execution time of the movable feather portion operating game of the small winning game executed based on the second special figure jackpot lottery in the first time saving game state and the second time saving game state is set to the second time in the third time saving game state. It is conceivable to set the execution time shorter than the execution time of the movable feather portion operation game of the small winning game executed based on the special figure jackpot lottery.

Further, in the first small winning game of the above-described fourth to seventh embodiments, the operation timing of the V winning opening opening and closing part 835 of the feather accessory device 83 is set to the first opening, so that the V winning opening 833 Although the game ball 99 is prevented from entering, part or all of the operation timing of the V winning opening opening/closing part 835 may be set to the movable feather part operation game. Specifically, in the first small winning game, by setting the operation timing of the V winning opening opening and closing part 835 of the feather accessory device 83 so as to extend from the first opening to the movable feather operation game, the V winning opening 833 It may be impossible or difficult to enter the game ball 99 into. In addition, in the first small winning game, all the operation timings of the V winning opening opening and closing part 835 of the feather accessory device 83 are set to the movable feather part operation game, and the operation time of the V winning opening opening and closing part 835 (for example, 0. 02 seconds to 0.1 seconds) may be set short to make it impossible or difficult to enter the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 833. Here, when the game ball 99 cannot enter the V winning opening 833 in the first small winning game, the effect is as described above. If the game ball 99 cannot enter the game ball 99, there is a concern that the player's attention and interest in the small winning game will decrease. On the other hand, if it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the V winning opening 833 in the first small winning game, it is possible for the game ball 99 to enter the V winning opening 833 in the first small winning game. Therefore, the player's attention and interest in the small winning game is suppressed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned fourth to seventh embodiments, the number of time-saving games set for the time-saving design stop-off when the result of the jackpot lottery in the second time-saving gaming state is the time-saving design stop-off is If it is less than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving gaming state, the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving gaming state is not changed, but for example, as the number of time-saving games in the second time-saving gaming state, the second The number of time-saving games set for the time-saving off may be added to the remaining number of time-saving games in the two-hour-saving game state. As a result, the number of jackpot lotteries for determining whether to shift from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state increases, so the possibility of shifting to the third time-saving game state advantageous to the player is reduced. Since it is maintained for a longer period of time, attention and interest in the game can be enhanced, and the amusement of the game is enhanced.

Further, in the above-described fourth to seventh embodiments, when the number of times of time-saving games selected for the time-saving pattern stop deviation (prescribed number of times) is larger than the number of times of time-saving games remaining in the third time-saving game state In addition, the number of times of time-saving games is reset to the number of times of time-saving games (specified number of times), but if the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state is out of time-saving design stop, the number of time-savings is in the third time-saving game state. It may be reset regardless of the number of remaining time-saving games in the third time-saving game state when the result of the jackpot lottery is the time-saving symbol stop failure. For example, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving game state is the time-saving design stop off, the number of time-saving games selected for the time-saving design stop-off is more than the remaining number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state. Regardless of whether it is large or small, it may be changed to the number of time-saving games (prescribed number of times) selected for the time-saving symbol stop off. Of course, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the third time-saving gaming state is out of the time-saving design stop, the number of time-saving games selected for the time-saving design stop-out (the specified number of times) is the remaining number in the third time-saving gaming state. Regardless of whether it is larger or smaller than the number of time-saving games, the remaining number of time-saving games in the third time-saving game state may be maintained without resetting.

[Eighth embodiment]
As a specific configuration of the present invention, the game machine includes a "starting ball entry" as a starting condition, a "variable game" as a game rotation operation, and a "game control unit" as a game means. A "display device" is provided as a predetermined display means, a "profitable game state" is provided as a predetermined game state, and a "value given to a game result" is provided as a game value.

The starting condition may be a trigger for starting a game executed by various actions. The start condition includes, for example, a trigger for execution of variable display for notifying the result of a predetermined lottery. Specifically, if the gist of the present invention can be realized, the starting conditions include: winning a game ball into various winning holes, executing a predetermined lottery by entering a game ball into a predetermined winning hole, Execution of a predetermined lottery by passing a game ball through a region (entering a ball), passing a game ball through a predetermined region (entering a ball), entering a game ball into the first prize winning port 314, and playing a game into the first prize winning port 314 Execution of a jackpot lottery by entering a ball, entry of a game ball into the second prize winning port 315, execution of a jackpot lottery by entering a game ball into the second prize winning port 315, passage of the game ball through the through gate 317, Execution of lottery per normal figure by passage of game ball through gate 317, arbitrary combination thereof, and the like.

The game rotation motion may be a game executed by various motions. As the game rotation operation, if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, a big winning game or a small winning game in which a predetermined winning opening such as the variable winning opening 316 is opened, a normal symbol fluctuation in the normal symbol display section 361 A normal pattern game executed by display, a normal pattern winning game in which the electric accessory 315b provided in the second winning port 315 is operated, and a first special pattern display unit 362 . The first special symbol game, the second special symbol game executed by the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display section 363, and any combination thereof are included.

The game means may be any device that can control actions necessary for various games. As the game means, if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, the normal symbol display unit 361 can display the normal symbols, the first special symbol display unit 362 can display the first special symbols, and the second special symbol can be displayed. Variation display of the second special symbol in the symbol display section 363, display of the first special figure reservation number N in the first special figure reservation number display section 364, second special figure in the second special figure reservation number display section 365 MPU 41 that controls the display of the number of reservations M, the operation of the electric accessory 315b, the operation of the opening and closing door 319 of the variable winning opening 316, etc. Variable display of the second decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern, pattern display section 341, MPU 51 that controls various effects executed by speaker 26 and electrical decoration section 27, and any combination thereof.

The predetermined display means may be any device capable of performing a predetermined display such as a variable display of symbols in various games. As the predetermined display means, if it is possible to realize the purpose of the present invention, for example, a main display unit 36 including a normal symbol display unit 361, a first special symbol display unit 362, a second special symbol display unit 363, etc., a decorative symbol A symbol display portion 341 in which variable display is performed, an arbitrary combination thereof, and the like.

The predetermined game state may be any game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state in some respects. As the predetermined game state, as long as the gist of the present invention can be realized, a large winning game state in which a movable member such as the opening and closing door 319 that is not operated in the normal game state is operated, a small winning game state, a low frequency support mode Normal A time-saving game state (a time-saving game state, b time-saving game state, which will be described later), which is a high-frequency support mode in which the game ball can easily enter the second winning hole 315 because the electric accessory 315b is easier to operate than the game state and c time-saving gaming state), a probability variable gaming state with a higher jackpot probability than the normal gaming state, and any combination thereof.

The game value may be any value that is significant in the progress of the game. The game value includes, for example, a direct or indirect value related to acquisition of a game ball or a predetermined lottery, a value related to an effect executed by the symbol display section 341 or the like, any combination thereof, and the like. Specifically, as the game value, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, execution of a jackpot game that can be expected to win a large number of balls (opening of the variable winning port 316), whether to execute a jackpot game Execution of the jackpot lottery whether or not, execution of the normal game in the time-saving game state (a time-saving game state, b time-saving game state and c time-saving game state described later) (long opening of the second winning opening 315), normal game Execution of the general pattern per game in the state (short opening of the second winning opening 315), execution of the general pattern per game in the time saving game state (a time saving game state, b time saving game state and c time saving game state described later) Execution of lottery per normal pattern whether or not, execution of lottery per normal pattern in normal game state, transition to time saving game state (a time saving game state, b time saving game state and c time saving game state described later), symbol display Execution of a high expectation of a big hit in the part 341 or the like, a finalized big hit effect, a premium effect, any combination thereof, and the like can be mentioned.

Here, in the above-described first embodiment, the first special figure game as a variation game that is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball to the first winning hole 314 as the start entry ball, and the start entry ball The second special symbol game is executed in parallel with the second special symbol game as a variable game that is executed with the entry of the game ball to the second winning hole 315 as a trigger, and the second special symbol game is the first The game machine configured as a loop probability variable machine that is executed with priority over the special game has been described.

In addition, since the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above is configured as a loop variable machine, after the end of the jackpot game, a time-saving gaming state (so-called a By shifting to the time-saving game state), a big hit in the time-saving game state is guaranteed.

In addition, the gaming machine is triggered by the fact that the specific pattern (so-called time saving pattern) is stopped and displayed on the display such as the main display unit 36 and the pattern display unit 341, and the value given to the special game result It is also conceivable to configure it to be shifted to a time-saving game state (so-called c time-saving game state).

In gaming machines, it is important to raise the level of attention and interest in the game to increase the player's willingness to play the game. That is, when adopting a configuration that shifts to the c time saving game state as the value given to the special game result triggered by the fact that the time saving pattern is not stopped, the player's willingness to play is improved by increasing the degree of attention and interest in the game. It is important to provide new playability that can be played.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first special figure as a variable game in which the first special figure is varied based on the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole 314 as the starting ball The game and the second special figure game as a variable game in which the second special figure is varied based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 as the starting entry ball are controlled by the MPU 41 as the game control unit. It is a simultaneous variator that can be executed in parallel (in parallel) on the main display section 36 as a display by . In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment shifts to a time-saving gaming state (a time-saving gaming state) as a profit gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, but a variable game in the a time-saving gaming state An upper limit value (maximum a number of times of time-saving games) is set for the number of times of special figure games, and when a special figure game of maximum a number of times of time-saving games is executed in a time-saving game state ST machine that shifts to the normal game state is configured as In addition, in this embodiment, as described later, the probability of a big hit in the time-saving game state as a profit game state is set to 1/150, and the maximum number of times of time-saving games is set to 200 times. degree is 73.8%.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game as a variable game is triggered by the fact that the specific symbol (time-saving symbol) is stopped and displayed in the main display unit 36 as a display device and the time-saving symbol is out of stop. As, it can be shifted to the c time-saving gaming state as a given value for the special figure game result. In the c time reduction game state, the upper limit value (maximum c time reduction game number) is set to the number of special figure games like the a time reduction game state, but the maximum c time reduction game number is a jackpot in the c time reduction game state It is set to the number of times that is practically guaranteed. That is, the c time-saving gaming state is a profitable gaming state that is more advantageous than the a-time-saving gaming state in which a big win is not guaranteed in that the big win is substantially guaranteed. In addition, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the jackpot probability in the c time saving game state as the profit gaming state is set to 1/150, the maximum a time saving game number is set to 2000 times, and the jackpot expectation in the c time saving game state degree is 99.9998%.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the main display unit 36 as a display device in the normal game state, the given value for the special figure game result is transferred to the c time saving game state, When the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed on the main display unit 36 as a display device in the time saving game state a, the time saving game state a is maintained without shifting to the time saving game state c. In addition, even when the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed on the main display unit 36 as a display device in the b time saving game state or c time saving game state described later, the b time saving game state or c time saving game state, which is the current game state, is displayed. maintained.

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution of the first special game when the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special game as a variable game started in the time saving game state a as the profit game state is out of time saving design stop As the time (variation display time of the first special figure in the main display unit 36 as a display), the second special figure game as a variable game with a maximum number of times of reduced working hours can be executed. That is, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment notifies that the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special figure game as a variable game started in the time saving game state a as the profit game state is out of time saving symbol stop During execution of one special game, a second special game can be executed as a variable game with a maximum number of time-saving games. Then, during the execution of the first special game for notifying that the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special game as a variable game started in the time saving game state a as the profit game state is out of the time saving pattern stop, When the second special game as a variable game with the maximum number of time-saving games is executed, the game state is shifted from the time-saving game state to the normal game state. As a result, the first special figure game as a variable game started in the time-saving game state a as the profit game state ends in the normal game state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as a given value for the first special figure game result started in the time-saving gaming state a as the profit gaming state, it can be shifted to the time-saving gaming state c in which the jackpot is substantially guaranteed.

Thus, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the a time-reduction gaming state as the profit gaming state that is shifted to the normal gaming state by executing the special figure game as the variation game of the upper limit number (a time-reduction game number) When 1 special figure game is started, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the 1st special figure game is out of the time saving pattern stop, the 1st special figure game has been shifted from the a time saving game state to the normal game state. On the condition that the game ends later, the game is shifted to a c time saving game state in which a big win which is more advantageous than the normal game state and the a time saving game state is substantially guaranteed. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first special figure game in which the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed as a variable game in the time saving game state a as the profit game state that is shifted after the end of the jackpot game is started. You can enjoy the progress of the game while anticipating it. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the first special figure game in which the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed is started in the a time saving game state, the a time saving game state ends before the first special figure game ends. By executing the second special game of the upper limit number of times which is a condition, the game state is shifted from the a time saving game state to the normal game state during the execution of the first special game, that is, the a time saving game state A game ball is entered into the second winning port 315 in order to execute the second special symbol game so that the first special symbol for the first special symbol game is stopped and displayed after the transition to the normal game state. A new game property is realized.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game as a variable game started in the time-saving game state a as the profit game state is a big hit, the grant to the special figure game result A jackpot game is executed as a value. That is, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the a time-saving gaming state as the profit gaming state, the jackpot lottery for the second special game as the variable game started during the execution of the first special game as the variable game It can also be expected that a jackpot game will be executed when the result of is a jackpot. That is, in the time-saving game state a as the profit game state, the interest similar to the time-saving game state a of the conventional gaming machine is maintained in that the result of the second special figure jackpot lottery can be expected to be a big win. And, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the second special symbol game as the variable game is performed during the execution of the first special symbol game as the variable game in the a time saving gaming state as the profit gaming state, When the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special game is a loss, the player can continue to expect the transition to a c-time-saving game state in which the jackpot is substantially guaranteed, and the jackpot lottery for the second special game. If the result of (2) is a jackpot, the user can enjoy the benefit of the execution of the jackpot game as the added value for the second special symbol game result. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the second special symbol game as a variable game is executed during the execution of the first special symbol game as a variable game in the time saving gaming state a as a profitable gaming state , Even if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special game is a big hit or a loss, the result of the second special jackpot lottery is a big hit in the same way as the time-saving game state a of the conventional game machine. can be expected, a new game property is realized in which a profit corresponding to the result of the lottery can be enjoyed.

As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, a time-saving gaming state as a profit gaming state in which the maximum number of time-saving games that are shifted after the end of the jackpot game can be executed, and the stop display of the time-saving symbol stop off The c time-saving gaming state in which a big win is substantially guaranteed to be transferred, and the characteristic of the simultaneous variation machine that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be varied simultaneously in the main display section 36 as a display device. A of the conventional gaming machine expected to execute a jackpot game based on the result of the jackpot lottery being a jackpot while realizing the above-mentioned new game characteristics that improve the interest of the game by using a. It is possible to maintain the playability in the time-saving game state.

The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 124 to 155, focusing on differences from the first embodiment described above.

[Playability of gaming machine 10]
In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display portion 362 (see FIG. 126) of the main display portion 36 and the second special symbol of the main display portion 36 The symbol display unit 363 (see FIG. 126) is configured as a so-called simultaneous variation machine in which the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game can be executed in parallel at the same time. In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, although the details will be described later, a novel and improved game amusement utilizing the characteristics of the simultaneous variation machine is realized.

Here, FIG. 124 is a diagram showing a game flow by the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment. The game flow of the gaming machine 10 will be described below with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 124, the gaming machine 10 can execute a normal game state, a jackpot game state, and a time-saving game state.

The normal game state is a low frequency support mode in which the frequency of support for the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 by the electric accessory 315b is low. Compared to the high-frequency support mode, this low-frequency support mode has a lower operating frequency (operation probability) of the electric accessory 315b (see FIG. 12(A)) and a shorter operating time when the electric accessory 315b operates. (see FIG. 12(C)). That is, the normal game state is a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning hole 315 .

The jackpot game state is a game in which the jackpot game is executed after the special game in which the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot in the normal game state or the time-saving game state is completed (after the special symbol is stopped and displayed). state. In the jackpot game, a large number of game balls can be obtained by executing a predetermined number of round games in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened by operating the opening/closing door 319 . Therefore, the jackpot game state is an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state and the time-saving game state in that a large amount of game balls can be acquired.

The time-saving gaming state is a high-frequency support mode in which the electric accessory 315b supports a game ball entering the second winning hole 315 at a high frequency. Compared to the low-frequency support mode, this high-frequency support mode has a higher operating frequency (operation probability) of the electric accessory 315b (see FIG. 12(B)), and a longer operating time when the electric accessory 315b operates. (see FIG. 12(D)). That is, the time-saving gaming state is a state in which the game ball easily enters the second winning hole 315 . Therefore, the time-saving gaming state is a gaming state more advantageous than the normal gaming state in that the opportunity for the big winning lottery increases.

In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to the number of times of the special figure game (time saving game) that can be executed in the time saving game state (time saving game number of times). And, in this embodiment, as the time saving game state, a time saving game state, b time saving game state and c time saving game state with different transition triggers are set.

The a time-saving gaming state is a gaming state that shifts after the jackpot game ends. In the time-saving game state, the upper limit of the number of executable time-saving games (special figure games) (the number of time-saving games) is set to 200 times. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the jackpot probability is set to 1/150 (see FIG. 128 (A)), the probability of winning the jackpot in the a time-saving game state is about 73.8%, and the a time-saving game It can be expected with a high probability that the jackpot will be won in the state. On the other hand, in the time-saving gaming state, the probability of not winning the jackpot is about 26.2%, and winning the jackpot in the time-saving gaming state is not guaranteed. And, when the special figure game of the upper limit number of times (200 times in this embodiment) is executed without winning the jackpot in the a time saving game state, it is shifted to the normal game state which is the low frequency support mode.

The b time-saving gaming state is a gaming state that shifts when a special figure game of a specified number of times is executed without winning a jackpot in the normal gaming state. The prescribed number of times for shifting to the b time-saving gaming state is selected, for example, from a range of 2.5 times to 3.0 times the denominator of the jackpot probability. In this embodiment, since the jackpot probability is 1/150, the prescribed number of times for transition to the b time-saving gaming state is selected from the range of 375 times to 450 times, and is set to 400 times in one example.

On the other hand, in the b time-saving gaming state, the upper limit of the number of executable time-saving games (special game) (the number of time-saving games) is set to the number of times that is substantially guaranteed to win the jackpot in the b time-saving gaming state. ing. And, in this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of time-saving games (special figure games) that can be executed in the b time-saving gaming state (the number of time-saving games) is set to 2000 times. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the jackpot probability is set to 1/150 (see FIG. 128 (A)), the probability of winning the jackpot in the b time-saving gaming state is about 99.9998%, and the b time-saving gaming state A big win is virtually guaranteed.

In addition, when the special figure game of the upper limit number of times (2000 times in the present embodiment) is executed without winning the jackpot in the b time-saving gaming state, in the low frequency support mode as in the case of the a time-saving gaming state It is shifted to a certain normal game state. However, since a big hit is substantially guaranteed in the b time saving game state, the transition from the b time saving game state to the normal game state cannot substantially occur.

In addition, if the upper limit of the number of time-saving games (special figure games) that can be executed in the b time-saving gaming state (the number of time-saving games) is set to the number of times that is substantially guaranteed to win the jackpot in the b time-saving gaming state Well, it's not limited to 2000 times. Of course, the upper limit of the number of time-saving games (special figure games) that can be executed in the b time-saving gaming state (the number of time-saving games) is set to the number of times that there is no substantial guarantee of winning the jackpot in the b time-saving gaming state. is also conceivable.

The c time-saving game state is a game state that shifts to when the time-saving design is stop-displayed in the first special design display section 362 (see FIG. 126) of the main display section 36 in the normal game state. That is, in the c time-saving gaming state, regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot lottery announced as the game result of the first special game or the game state at the start of the first special game, the result of the jackpot lottery as the game result The game state at the end of the first special figure game that informs that it is a kind of off (see FIGS. 128 (C) and 128 (D)), which is a kind of off (see FIGS. 128 (C) and 128 (D)). It is shifted when it is in the game state. In other words, the transition to the c time-saving gaming state is the profit given in the normal gaming state with the lowest profit.

In addition, in the c time-saving gaming state, the upper limit of the number of executable time-saving games (special figure games) (the number of time-saving games) is substantially the same as the b time-saving gaming state. is set to the guaranteed number of times. Then, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of time-saving games (special figure games) that can be executed in the c time-saving gaming state (the number of time-saving games) is set to 2000 times in the same way as the b time-saving gaming state, and the c time-saving gaming state , the probability of winning the jackpot is about 99.9998% as in the time-saving game state b, and the jackpot is substantially guaranteed in the time-saving game state c.

In addition, when the special figure game of the upper limit number of times (2000 times in this embodiment) is executed without winning the big hit in the c time saving gaming state, in the same way as in the a time saving gaming state and b time saving gaming state, low frequency It is shifted to the normal game state which is the support mode. Since a big hit is substantially guaranteed in the c time-saving game state, the transition from the c time-saving game state to the normal game state cannot substantially occur.

On the other hand, even if the time-saving design is stopped and displayed in the first special design display unit 362 (see FIG. 126), the game state in which the time-saving design is stop-displayed is a jackpot game state or a game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the time-saving game state (a time-saving game state, b time-saving game state, and c time-saving game state), the state is not shifted to the c time-saving game state, and the game state in which the time-saving symbols are stopped is maintained. For example, when the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the jackpot game state, the jackpot game state is maintained, and when the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the a time saving game state, the a time saving game state is maintained, and the time saving pattern is b. When the symbol is stop-displayed in the time-saving game state, the b-time-saving game state is maintained, and when the time-saving symbol is stop-displayed in the c-time-saving game state, the c-time-saving game state is maintained.

As described above, in the gaming machine 10, the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display portion 362 (see FIG. 126) and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display portion 363 (see FIG. 126) can be performed at the same time. Therefore, the game state may differ between when the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 is started and when the fluctuation is stopped.

Here, FIGS. 125(A) and 125(B) are timing charts showing an example of the end timing of the first special game started in the time-saving game state a. In addition, in FIG. 125 (A) and FIG. 125 (B), the square wave described in the pulse shape corresponds to one special figure game, and for the second special figure game that is executed in the a reduced working hours game state Square waves are described with abbreviated numbers. Then, as shown in FIG. 125 (A), when the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 (see FIG. 126) is started in the a time-saving gaming state, the first special symbol in the variable display If the fluctuation display time of 1 special figure (execution time of the 1st special figure game) is shorter than the total time in which the 2nd special figure game of the number of remaining time-saving games is performed, the 1st special figure game is a It ends in a time-saving game state. Therefore, even if the first special symbol game informs that the time saving pattern is not stopped as a result of the big winning lottery, the a time saving game state is maintained even after the first special symbol game is finished. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 125 (B), when the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 (see FIG. 126) is started in the a time-saving gaming state, the variation If the variable display time of the first special figure in the display (execution time of the first special figure game) is longer than the total time in which the second special figure game of the number of remaining time-saving games up to the upper limit is executed, the game state Since is shifted from the a time-saving game state to the normal game state, the first special figure game ends in the normal game state. Therefore, when the 1st special figure game informs that the time saving pattern is not stopped as a result of the jackpot lottery, the c time saving game state is shifted after the 1st special figure game ends.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display of the first special figure is started in the a time saving game state, and the first special figure game in which the first special figure is stopped and displayed in the a time saving game state is the first When the result of the special figure jackpot lottery is that the time saving pattern is not stopped, the a time saving game state is maintained, but in this case, a profit may be given to the player. As a result, the first special game for the time saving pattern stop deviation ends in the time saving game state a, so that the a time saving game state is maintained without shifting to the c time saving game state, so that the player feels uncomfortable. Even in such a case, it is possible to reduce such discomfort by giving benefits and to improve the interest in the game, thereby preventing the decline in interest in the game.

Here, in the case of the time saving symbol stop off, the benefits given to the player when the a time saving game state is maintained include, for example, the opening of the variable winning opening 316 by the operation of the opening and closing door 319, the operation of the electric accessory 315b opening of the second winning port 315, execution of the small winning game, display of the premium image on the pattern display unit 341, opening of the premium music as music that can be output from the speaker 26 in the big winning game, and a game set value that defines the probability of the big winning. (See FIGS. 9(A) and 9(B)) may be explicitly stated or suggested.

Thus, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the first special figure game is started in the a time-saving gaming state that is shifted to the normal game state by executing the upper limit number of special figure games, the first If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game is out of the time saving pattern stop, on the condition that the first special figure game ends after shifting from the a time saving game state to the normal game state, the normal game state and a time saving A transition is made to a c time-saving game state in which a big win, which is more advantageous than the game state, is substantially guaranteed. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the progress of the game is expected to start the first special game in which the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the a time saving game state that is shifted after the end of the jackpot game. can enjoy. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the first special figure game in which the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the a time saving game state is started, the end condition of the a time saving game state before the first special figure game ends By executing the second special game of the upper limit number of times, the game state is shifted from the time saving game state to the normal game state during the execution of the first special game, that is, from the time saving game state A game ball is entered into the second winning hole 315 to execute the second special symbol game so that the first special symbol for the first special symbol game is stopped and displayed after the transition to the normal game state. A new game property is realized in which a game is played like this.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a jackpot game is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game started in the a time saving game state is a jackpot. That is, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in the time-saving gaming state, the jackpot game is executed because the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special game started during the execution of the first special game is a jackpot. It can be expected that That is, in the time-saving gaming state, it is possible to expect that the result of the second special jackpot lottery will be a big win, which is similar to the time-saving gaming state of the conventional gaming machine. And, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the second special game is executed during the execution of the first special game in the time-saving gaming state, the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special game is out. In that case, you can continue to expect that the jackpot will be shifted to the c time-saving gaming state in which the jackpot is substantially guaranteed, and if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special game is a jackpot, the jackpot game You can enjoy the benefits of being implemented. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the second special game is executed during the execution of the first special game in the a time saving game state, the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special game Whether it is a big hit or a loss, the result of the second special jackpot lottery can be expected to be a big hit, just like the time-saving game state of the conventional gaming machine, and the profit according to the lottery result. A new game property that you can enjoy is realized.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a time-saving gaming state in which the maximum number of time-saving games that are transferred after the end of the jackpot game can be executed, and a time-saving game state that can be shifted by the stop display of the time-saving symbol stop off are substantially The above-mentioned new novelty that enhances the amusement of the game by utilizing the time-saving gaming state in which a big win is guaranteed at the same time and the characteristic of the simultaneous variation machine that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be varied at the same time. To maintain game performance in the time-saving game state a of a conventional game machine expected to execute a jackpot game based on the fact that the result of a jackpot lottery is a jackpot, while realizing game performance. .

In addition, if the upper limit of the number of times of time-saving games (special figure games) that can be executed in the c time-saving gaming state (the number of time-saving games) is set to the number of times that is substantially guaranteed to win the jackpot in the c time-saving gaming state Well, it is not limited to 2000 times, and does not necessarily need to be set to the same number as in the b time-saving game state. Of course, the upper limit of the number of time-saving games (special figure games) that can be executed in the c time-saving gaming state (the number of time-saving games) is set to the number of times that there is no substantial guarantee of winning the jackpot in the c time-saving gaming state. is also conceivable.

In addition, in this embodiment, the time saving symbol stop off is set for the first special figure game, but is not set for the second special figure game (Fig. 128 (C) ~ Fig. 128 (E)), the second special symbol display portion 363 (see FIG. 126) of the main display portion 36 does not stop displaying the time saving symbol as a result of the second special symbol game. Of course, the time-saving design stop-off is set for the second special symbol game, and the time-saving design can be stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display unit 363 (see FIG. 126) as a result of the second special symbol game. good too. Then, when the time-saving design is stopped and displayed as a result of the second special design game on the second special design display unit 363 (see FIG. 126), there is some benefit to the player, for example, variable winning due to the operation of the opening and closing door 319. Opening of the opening 316, opening of the second winning opening 315 by operating the electric accessory 315b, execution of the small winning game, display of the premium image on the pattern display unit 341, premium music as music that can be output from the speaker 26 in the big winning game. , a game set value (see FIGS. 9(A) and 9(B)) that defines the probability of a big win, or the like.

Also, in the present embodiment, the normal gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are set, and the gaming state corresponding to the variable probability gaming state in the first embodiment described above is not set. Probability variation gaming state may be set. That is, the gaming machine 10 does not keep the jackpot probability constant between the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, but sets the jackpot probability in a part of the high-frequency support mode at least higher than in the low-frequency support mode. can be considered. In this case, whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot or a time-saving design stoppage is determined at the time of execution of the jackpot lottery or at the start of a special game that notifies the result of the jackpot lottery (when special symbols start to fluctuate) Although it is possible to determine with reference to the game state, it is preferable to determine with reference to the game state at the end of the special symbol game (at the time of stop display of the special symbol). Here, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes the first special symbol variation start and stop display (execution of the first special symbol game), the second special symbol variation start and stop display (second special symbol game ) are performed independently of each other simultaneously and in parallel. Therefore, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed (one special game ends), while the other special symbol is displayed fluctuating (while the other special game is being executed), when the other special symbol starts to fluctuate ( At the start of the other special game), it is assumed that the game state will be different. Therefore, when determining the result of the jackpot lottery with reference to the game state at the end of the special symbol game (at the time of stop display of the special symbol), the game state differs between the start and end of the special symbol game. Even in such a case, the timing for judging the result of the big winning lottery is only one, so the process of judging the result of the big winning lottery can be easily executed and the certainty of the process is improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, three types of time saving game state, a time saving game state, b time saving game state and c time saving game state are set, but b time saving game state is omitted, a time saving game state and c It is also conceivable to set two types of time saving game state.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
Here, FIG. 126 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the game machine 10 according to this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 126, the game board 31 is provided with an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, an outlet 318, and a variable display unit 34 (symbol display portion 341) similar to those of the first embodiment. there is Also, the game board 31 is common to the above-described first embodiment in that it is provided with a main display portion 36, a first winning port 314, a second winning port 315, a variable winning port 316, and a through gate 317. However, these have differences from the first embodiment described above.

Although the game board 31 of FIG. 126 is driven with a large number of nails, they are omitted in the drawing. Further, in the game board 31 of FIG. 126, the sub movable display section 38 and the movable accessory member 39 provided in the game board 31 of the first embodiment are omitted. Both may be provided on the game board 31 .

The main display portion 36 is provided on the lower right side of the game board 31, and includes a normal symbol display portion 361, a first special symbol display portion 362, a second special symbol display portion 363, a first special symbol reservation number display portion 364, and a A second special figure reservation number display unit 365 is provided.

The normal symbol display unit 361 includes an LED pair as a normal symbol (normal symbol), and each LED is turned on and off in a normal symbol game that is executed when a game ball passes through the through gate 317 as a trigger. The general pattern game is executed in order to notify the result of the general pattern per lottery executed with the passage of the game ball through the through gate 317 as a trigger. In addition, when the result of the lottery per normal pattern is per normal pattern, the normal pattern per game in which the second winning opening 315 is opened by the operation of the electric accessory 315b is executed.

Lighting and extinguishing of the LED pair (normal symbol) in the normal symbol display section 361 is controlled by the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) based on the result of the normal symbol winning lottery. Specifically, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) blinks the LED pair with the passing of the game ball through the through gate 317 (displays the normal pattern fluctuating), and the general pattern set at the time of the general pattern per lottery. After the fluctuation display time elapses, the normal pattern game is executed by lighting or extinguishing each LED according to the result of the normal pattern per lottery (the normal pattern is stopped and displayed).

The first special symbol display section 362 includes a 7-segment display device capable of displaying numbers, alphabets, and other symbols as first special symbols (first special symbols). The 7-segment display device includes 7 segments, and each segment is turned on and off in the first special game executed with the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole 314 as a trigger. The first special figure game is executed in order to notify the result of the first special figure jackpot lottery which is executed when the game ball enters the first winning hole 314 as a trigger. In addition, when the result of the first special figure jackpot lottery is a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed in which the opening/closing door 319 is operated to open the variable prize winning port 316 .

Lighting/lighting of each segment of the 7-segment display device in the first special symbol display section 362 is controlled by the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) based on the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery. Specifically, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) causes the seven segments of the seven-segment display device to blink (variably display the first special symbol) with the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole 314 as a trigger, After the first special figure fluctuation display time set at the time of the first special figure jackpot lottery has elapsed, each segment is lit or extinguished (the first special symbol is stopped and displayed) according to the result of the first special figure jackpot lottery. Execute the first special figure game.

Here, in this embodiment, the results of the first special figure jackpot lottery include jackpots and misses (see FIG. 128(A)), as will be described later. The jackpot is a 5R jackpot and a 16R jackpot (see FIG. 128(A)). Loss as a result of the first special figure jackpot lottery includes front and back out reach, reach other than front and back out and complete loss reach, and further includes time saving pattern stop loss (Fig. 128 ( C) and FIG. 128(D)). Then, in the first special symbol display unit 362, the first special symbol game is started by starting the variable display of the symbol (first special symbol) based on the execution of the first special symbol jackpot lottery, After the lapse of the first special figure fluctuation display time set for the first special figure game, the first special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special figure jackpot lottery is stop-displayed. For example, when the result of the first special drawing jackpot lottery is the 5R jackpot, the numbers "1", "5" or "9" are displayed, and when the result of the jackpot lottery is the 5R jackpot, the numbers '3' or '7' is displayed, and if the result of the first special jackpot lottery is front and back reach, the number '2' or '4' is displayed, and the first special jackpot lottery If the result is reach other than front and back, the number "6" or "8" will be displayed, and if the result of the first special jackpot lottery is out of the time saving pattern stop, the number "0" will be displayed. is displayed, and when the result of the first special figure jackpot lottery is completely lost, other than numbers are displayed. That is, in this embodiment, the number "0" corresponds to the time saving pattern.

In addition, the correspondence relationship between the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery and the type of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 is not limited to the above example. For example, when the result of the first special jackpot lottery is completely out, numbers may be displayed, the result of the first special jackpot lottery may be displayed in alphabet, and the result of the first special jackpot lottery may be displayed. The number (type) of special symbols corresponding to the type of is not limited to the above example, and multiple types of time saving symbols may be set.

The second special symbol display unit 363 includes a 7-segment display device capable of displaying numbers, alphabets, and other symbols as second special symbols (second special symbols). The 7-segment display device includes 7 segments, and each segment is turned on and off in the second special game executed with the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 as a trigger. The second special figure game is executed in order to notify the result of the second special figure jackpot lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 as a trigger. In addition, when the result of the second special figure jackpot lottery is a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed in which the opening/closing door 319 is operated to open the variable prize winning port 316 .

Lighting/lighting of each segment of the 7-segment display device in the second special symbol display section 363 is controlled by the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) based on the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery. Specifically, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) causes the seven segments of the seven-segment display device to flash (variably display the second special symbol) with the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 as a trigger, After the second special figure fluctuation display time set at the time of the second special figure jackpot lottery has elapsed, each segment is lit or extinguished (the second special symbol is stopped and displayed) according to the result of the second special figure jackpot lottery. 2nd special figure game is executed.

Here, in the present embodiment, as a result of the second special jackpot lottery, 5R jackpot and 16R jackpot (see FIG. 128 (A)) are included in the same manner as the result of the first special jackpot lottery. The pattern stop off is not set, and like the first embodiment described above, it includes a front-back off reach, a reach other than front-back off, and a complete off reach (see FIG. 128 (E)). Then, in the second special symbol display unit 363, the second special symbol game is started by starting the variable display of the symbol (second special symbol) based on the execution of the second special symbol jackpot lottery, After the second special symbol fluctuation display time has elapsed after being set for the second special symbol game, the second special symbol corresponding to the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery is stop-displayed. For example, when the result of the second special jackpot lottery is the 5R jackpot, the numbers "1", "5" or "9" are displayed, and the result of the second special jackpot lottery is the 5R jackpot. In this case, the number "3" or "7" is displayed, and if the result of the second special jackpot lottery is the front and back reach, the number "2" or "4" is displayed, and the second If the result of the special jackpot lottery is a reach other than front and back, the number "6" or "8" will be displayed, and if the result of the second special jackpot lottery is completely lost, a number other than the number will be displayed. be done.

In addition, the correspondence relationship between the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery and the type of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display section 363 is not limited to the above example. For example, when the result of the second special jackpot lottery is completely out, numbers may be displayed, the result of the second special jackpot lottery may be displayed in alphabet, and the result of the second special jackpot lottery may be displayed. The number of special symbols corresponding to the result type is also not limited to the above example.

Here, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 362 is the same as that of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 363. It is executed regardless of whether or not the variable display is being executed. It is executed regardless of whether or not variable display is being executed. That is, the first special game and the second special game can be executed simultaneously and in parallel independently of each other.

In addition, the normal pattern (normal pattern) fluctuation display in the normal pattern display unit 361 is executed to notify the result of the normal pattern per lottery different from the jackpot lottery, so the first special symbol display unit 362 The variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363 can be performed independently and simultaneously and in parallel.

The first special figure reservation number display unit 364 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and is the number of reservations for the right to execute the first special figure game caused by winning the first winning opening 314. First special figure The holding number N is displayed by the number of lighting of four LEDs.

The second special figure reserved number display unit 365 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and is the second special figure that is the reserved number of the right to execute the second special figure game generated by winning the second winning opening 315 The pending number M is displayed by the number of lighting of four LEDs.

Note that the main display section 36 of the present embodiment may be provided on the upper right side of the game board 31 or may be provided at another position, similarly to the main display section 36 of the first embodiment.

The first prize winning port 314 provides an opportunity for a first special jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball. In this embodiment, as the first winning openings 314, a central first winning opening 314C and a right first winning opening 314R are provided.

The central first winning hole 314C is provided below the symbol display section 341 (lower center of the game board 31), like the first winning hole 314 of the first embodiment. A ball entry sensor (not shown) is provided in the central first prize winning port 314C, and the entry of a game ball into the central first prize winning port 314C is detected by the ball entering sensor.

In the present embodiment, although not clearly shown in the drawing, a game ball that has been launched in the left area of the game board 31 and flowed down the left side of the symbol display portion 341 is placed in the central first winning hole 314C. A game ball that is allowed to enter the game board 31 and has flowed down the right side of the pattern display portion 341 is impossible or difficult to enter. That is, in order to execute the first special jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the central first winning hole 314C, the so-called left-handed hitting, which is to hit the game ball to the left area of the game board 31, is encouraged. .

The right first winning hole 314R is provided on the right side of the symbol display portion 341 (the center of the right side of the game board 31). A ball entry sensor (not shown) is provided in the right first prize winning opening 314R, and the entry of a game ball into the right first winning opening 314R is detected by this ball entry sensor.

In the present embodiment, although not clearly shown in the drawing, a game ball that has been launched in the right area of the game board 31 and flowed down the right side of the symbol display portion 341 is placed in the right first winning hole 314R. It is possible to enter the ball. However, the frequency (probability) that the game ball hit to the right side area of the game board 31 enters the right first winning hole 314R is adjusted by adjusting the arrangement of the nails driven around the right first winning hole 314R. By doing so, the frequency (probability) of the game ball hit to the left side area of the game board 31 entering the central first winning hole 314C is made lower. For example, the frequency (possibility) that the game ball launched to the right side area of the game board 31 enters the right first winning hole 314R is the second It is set to about one or two during the period until the special game is executed. This is because if the game ball is likely to enter the right first winning hole 314R, one or more first special figure reservations are made by entering the game ball into the right first winning hole 314R during the time saving game state a. By accumulating, it is prevented that the first special figure game is continuously executed in the a time saving game state. This can reduce the possibility that the first special game started in the time saving game state ends in the normal game state, and prevents easy transition to the time saving game state c. In addition, in order to prevent easy transition to the c time-saving gaming state, in the a time-saving gaming state, the time of the first special game triggered by the entry of the game ball into the central first winning opening 314C It is also conceivable to set the (first special figure fluctuation display time) short. As a result, it is possible to take countermeasures against strategy shots by using both right shots and left shots during the time-saving game state a. Specifically, by appropriately hitting the left in the a time-saving game state, while it is possible to continuously execute the first special figure game while maintaining the state in which the first special figure reservation is accumulated, It is possible to reduce the number of remaining time-saving games in the a time-saving game state by executing the second special game by hitting right, but with the entry of the game ball to the central first winning hole 314C as a trigger. To prevent the accumulation of the first special figure reservation by setting the time of the first special figure game (first special figure fluctuation display time) short, for example, to 1 second or less such as 0.5 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first special game from being continuously executed, and it is possible to take countermeasures against capture strikes by using both right and left shots during the time-saving game state a.

On the other hand, it is impossible or difficult for a game ball that has been hit in the left area of the game board 31 and flowed down the left side of the symbol display portion 341 to enter the right first winning hole 314R. That is, in order to execute the first special jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the right first winning hole 314R, so-called right-handed hitting is encouraged, in which the game ball is hit to the right side area of the game board 31. .

In this way, in order to enter the game ball into the central first winning hole 314C, it is recommended to hit the game ball to the left side area of the game board 31, that is, the so-called left-handed hitting, while the game ball enters the right first winning hole 314R. In order to make the ball enter the game board 31, so-called right-handed hitting is encouraged.

Here, in the present embodiment, as the game state, there is provided a normal game state, which is a low-frequency support mode in which the probability of winning a normal pattern is low (see FIG. 12A) and the electric accessory 315b is difficult to operate. A game ball is less likely to enter the right first winning hole 314R than the central first winning hole 314C. Therefore, in the normal game state in which the electric accessory 315b is difficult to operate, the game board 31 is operated in order to enter the game ball into the central first prize winning port 314C where the game ball is more likely to enter than the right first prize winning port 314R. So-called left-handed hitting is encouraged, in which a game ball is hit in the left area of the .

The second prize winning port 315 provides an opportunity for a second special jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball. In this embodiment, the second winning opening 315 is provided on the right side of the symbol display section 341 and directly above the right first winning opening 314R. A game ball that has flowed down is allowed to enter.

In addition, a ball entry sensor (not shown) is provided in the second winning hole 315, and this ball entering sensor detects the entry of a game ball into the right first winning hole 314R. Further, the second winning hole 315 is provided with an electric accessory 315b that switches between a state in which entry of game balls into the second winning hole 315 is restricted and a state in which entry of game balls is permitted. there is The electric accessory 315b is operated in the normal pattern per game executed when the result of the general pattern per lottery executed with the passing of the game ball through the through gate 317 is the normal pattern per. That is, the electric accessory 315b is in a state in which the entry of the game ball to the second winning opening 315 is restricted except when executing the normal drawing winning game, and when executing the normal drawing winning game, the second winning opening is set. Entry of a game ball into 315 is permitted.

Here, in the present embodiment, as the game state, the probability of hitting a normal figure is high (see FIG. 12(B)), and the time-saving game state, which is a high-frequency support mode in which the electric accessory 315b is easily operated, is set. A winning hole 315 is struck in the right area of the game board 31, and a game ball flowing down the right side of the symbol display portion 341 can enter. Therefore, in the time-saving gaming state, in order to enjoy the benefit of being in the high-frequency support mode, hitting the game ball to the right side area of the game board 31, so-called hitting to the right, is encouraged.

The variable winning opening 316 allows a game ball to enter in a jackpot game executed when the result of the first special jackpot lottery or the second special jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The variable winning opening 316 is provided with an opening/closing door 319, and the variable winning opening 316 is opened by operating the opening/closing door 319 in the jackpot game, so that the game ball can enter the variable winning opening 316. be done.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable winning opening 316 is provided on the lower side of the right side area of the game board 31 . Then, when the variable winning opening 316 is opened in the jackpot game, although not clearly shown in the drawing, the game ball launched to the right side area of the game board 31 can enter the variable winning opening 316. , and the game ball hit to the left area of the game board 31 cannot enter. Therefore, in the jackpot game, so-called right-handed hitting is encouraged, in which the game ball is hit to the right side area of the game board 31 .

Note that the variable winning hole 316 is not limited to the right side area of the game board 31, and may be provided, for example, in the left side area of the game board 31 or below the central first winning hole 314C. In this case, when the variable winning opening 316 is opened in the jackpot game, the game ball launched to the left area of the game board 31 can enter the variable winning opening 316 . Also, the variable winning hole 316 may be provided so that both the game ball hit to the left side area of the game board 31 and the game ball hit to the right side area of the game board 31 can enter.

The through gate 317 determines whether or not to operate the electric accessory 315b (whether or not to execute a game per normal pattern) based on the passage of the game ball. is. In the first embodiment described above, the through gate 317L is provided in the left area of the game board 31, and the through gate 317R is provided in the right area of the game board 31, thereby providing two through gates 317L and 317R. However, in this embodiment, only one through gate 317 is provided directly above the second winning port 315 on the right side of the symbol display portion 341, and is projected on the right side area of the game board 31 to display the symbol display portion. A game ball flowing down the right side of 341 can pass through. In addition, a ball entry sensor (not shown) is provided in the second winning hole 315 , and passage of a game ball through the through gate 317 is detected by this ball entry sensor.

Here, as described above, in the time-saving game state, in order to enjoy the benefit of being in the high-frequency support mode in which the electric accessory 315b operates at high frequency, the game ball is launched in the right area of the game board 31. So-called right-handed hitting is encouraged. The through gate 317 can pass the game ball that has been struck in the right area of the game board 31 and flowed down the right side of the symbol display portion 341. A normal drawing lottery is executed as to whether or not to operate the object 315b (open the second winning opening 315). Therefore, in the time-saving game state, by hitting the game ball to the right side area of the game board 31, that is, hitting the right side, not only can the game ball pass through the through gate 317, but also the game ball can enter the second winning hole 315. can be entered, the benefit of the time-saving game state can be enjoyed to the maximum by continuously hitting the right side without properly using the right side and the left side.

Thus, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is encouraged in order to enter the game ball into the central first winning hole 314C, and in the time-saving game state, the game ball is allowed to pass through the through gate 317. When the electric accessory 315b is activated, right-handed hitting is encouraged in order to enter the game ball into the second winning hole 315, and in the jackpot game state, when the open/close door 319 is activated, the game ball is entered into the variable winning hole 316. Right-handed hitting is encouraged.

[System Configuration of Gaming Machine 10]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 127 to 129, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment will be described, focusing on differences from the first embodiment described above.

[Special figure reservation storage area 412b]
The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above was configured as a so-called loop probability variable machine, but the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is a simultaneous variable machine capable of simultaneously varying the first special figure and the second special figure. is configured as Therefore, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in the configuration of the special figure reservation storage area 412b. Here, FIG. 127 is a block diagram showing an example of a special figure reservation storage area 412b provided in the RAM412 of the main controller 4 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIGS. 128 and 129 are the main controller 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in 4. FIG.

Since the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a simultaneous variation machine, unlike the above-described first embodiment, the special figure execution areas AEA and AEB are individually set for each special figure reservation storage area REA and REB. is provided. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127, the first special figure execution area AEA is provided for the first special figure reservation storage area REA, and the second special figure execution for the second special figure reservation storage area REB An area AEB is provided. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started in the first special symbol display portion 362 of the main display portion 36, the first symbol stored in the first reservation area REA1 of the first special symbol reservation storage area REA Special figure propriety information is moved to the first special figure execution area AEA. Also, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started in the second special symbol display portion 363 of the main display portion 36, the second symbol stored in the first reservation area REB1 of the second special symbol reservation storage area REB Special figure propriety information is moved to the second special figure execution area AEB.

[Jackpot success table]
In this embodiment, the game state (probability variable game state) corresponding to the high probability mode of the first embodiment is not set, and the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot (jackpot probability) is the same. A normal game state and a time-saving game state are set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 128(A), in the present embodiment, there is one jackpot success/failure table used in the jackpot lottery, and this jackpot success/failure table has a normal game state and a time-saving game state. commonly used in In the jackpot success/failure table, out of 65536 jackpot random number counter values (random numbers) from 0 to 65535, 437 random numbers from 0 to 436 are defined as jackpots, and the remaining random numbers are defined as losers. . That is, the jackpot probability in this embodiment is unified at about 1/150.

[Jackpot classification table]
In this embodiment, no jackpot corresponding to the variable probability jackpot of the first embodiment is set, and only a jackpot corresponding to the normal jackpot of the first embodiment is set. That is, in the present embodiment, only the jackpot that shifts to the a time-saving game state after the jackpot game is completed is set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 128(B), in this embodiment, two types of 5R jackpot and 16R jackpot are set as jackpot types. In the jackpot type allocation table, among the 20 jackpot type counter values of 0 to 19, 10 of 0 to 9 are defined as 5R jackpots, and 10 of 10 to 19 are defined as 16R jackpots. That is, in this embodiment, the distribution ratio between the 5R jackpot and the 16R jackpot is 1:1.

Then, when the result of the jackpot lottery is the 5R jackpot, the 5R jackpot game is executed in which the open/close door 319 is operated to open and close the variable prize winning port 316 five times, and the 5R jackpot game ends. Later, it is shifted to the a time saving game state. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot lottery is the 16R jackpot, the 16R jackpot game is executed in which the opening and closing door 319 opens and closes the variable winning port 316 round game 16 times, and the 16R jackpot game ends. Later, it is shifted to the a time saving game state.

In the time-saving game state a, as described above, the frequency of support for the game ball entering the second winning hole 315 by the electric role product 315b is high (see FIG. 12(B)), and the electric role product 315b operates. The operating time is set long in the case of (see FIG. 12(D)), and the game ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 315 . Therefore, the time-saving game state a is a game state more advantageous than the normal game state in that the opportunity for the big winning lottery increases. In addition, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times of the time saving game (special figure game) that can be executed in the a time saving game state (time saving game number of times) is set to 200 times.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the result of the first special jackpot lottery is a jackpot and when the result of the second special jackpot lottery is a jackpot, a common jackpot type table is used. Different jackpot type tables may be provided depending on whether the result of the special jackpot lottery is a jackpot or when the result of the second special jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

[Outlier classification table]
In this embodiment, the normal game state 1st special figure loss type distribution table (Fig. 128 (C) See), and the time-saving game state first special figure loss type distribution table (see FIG. 128 (D)) used for the loss in the first special figure jackpot lottery in the time-saving gaming state, and the second special figure Three types are set, namely, the second special figure loss type distribution table (see FIG. 128 (E)) used for the loss in the jackpot lottery.

As shown in FIGS. 128 (C) and 128 (D), in this embodiment, as the type of loss in the first special figure jackpot lottery, as in the first embodiment described above, the front and rear out reach, the front and rear out In addition, reach and complete deviation are set, and further, time-saving symbol stop deviation, which is not set in the above-described first embodiment, is set. Here, the time-saving design stop failure means that the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery is lost, and the specific design set as the time-saving design is stopped and displayed in the first special design display section 362 of the main display section 36. is notified by Then, in the present embodiment, as described above, when it is notified in the normal game state that the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery is out of the time reduction symbol stop (normally in the game state, the first special symbol display unit 362 When the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed), the game state is shifted to the c time saving game state.

In addition, in the normal game state first special figure off type distribution table shown in FIG. ) shown in the time saving game state 1st special figure deviation type distribution table, the distribution rate of the time saving design stop deviation is set to 50.21%. That is, in the first special figure jackpot lottery in the normal game state, the probability of failure to stop the time-saving symbols is low, and in the first special figure jackpot lottery in the time-saving game status, the probability of failure to stop the time-saving symbols is set high. In other words, when the first special figure jackpot lottery is in the normal game state, the lottery result is unlikely to be out of the time saving pattern stop, and when the first special figure jackpot lottery is in the time saving game state, the lottery result Is easy to become out of time saving pattern stop. As a result, based on the first special figure jackpot lottery in the normal game state, it is difficult to shift to the c time saving game state.

In addition, the result of the first special figure jackpot lottery in the time saving game state is likely to be out of the time saving symbol stop as described above, but in order to shift to the c time saving game state, the main display unit 36 in the normal game state It is a condition that the time saving design is stopped and displayed in the 1 special design display section 362 . On the other hand, in the b time-saving gaming state, the number of time-saving games is set to 2000 times (see FIG. 124), and since a big hit is substantially guaranteed, the special game of the upper limit number of times is executed in the b time-saving gaming state. , and as a result, there is substantially no transition from the b time-saving game state to the normal game state. Therefore, even if the result of the first special figure jackpot lottery in the b time saving game state is out of the time saving pattern stop, the first started in the b time saving game state to notify the result of the first special figure jackpot lottery The special figure game does not end in the normal game state, that is, the first special figure whose variable display is started for the first special figure jackpot lottery is not stopped and displayed in the normal game condition. As a result, based on the first special figure jackpot lottery in the b time saving game state, there is substantially no transition to the c time saving game state.

Of course, the number of time-saving games that can be executed in the b time-saving gaming state is set to a range in which the jackpot in the b time-saving gaming state is not guaranteed in the same way as the a time-saving gaming state, and based on the first special jackpot lottery in the b time-saving gaming state. , it may be possible to shift to c time-saving game state. That is, even when the game state is shifted to the b time saving game state, it is conceivable to provide the same game characteristics as when the game state is changed to the a time saving game state.

In addition, the distribution rate of the time-saving symbol stop off when the result of the first special figure jackpot lottery is out is an example of the first special figure off type distribution table shown in FIGS. 128 (C) and 128 (D) is not limited to, and can be changed in various ways. For example, if the result of the first special jackpot lottery executed in the normal game state is a loss, the distribution rate of the time-saving symbol stop loss is set to be about the same as the jackpot probability (1/150 = 0.67%). It is also conceivable to In this case, in the normal game state, the playability is imparted as to whether the lottery result of the big win or the short-time symbol stoppage failure, which has the same degree of probability, is obtained first. Also, it is conceivable to set the distribution rate of the time saving pattern stop loss when the result of the first special figure jackpot lottery executed in the time saving game state is lost to 100% or to approach 100%. In this case, when the first special figure game is started in the time saving game state, the probability that the result of the first special figure jackpot lottery notified by the first special figure game is out of the time saving pattern stop is Since it is 100% or approximately 100%, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game in the time-saving game state by paying attention only to the timing at which the first special figure is stop-displayed.

Also, in the present embodiment, a common time-saving game state first special figure off type distribution table is set in all time-saving gaming states (a time-saving gaming state, b time-saving gaming state and c time-saving gaming state), The setting may be set by the first special figure sorting table for each time saving game state. In addition, a common first special figure deviation type distribution table is set for two of the three time reduction gaming conditions, and a different first special figure deviation classification is set for the remaining one time reduction gaming condition. A distribution table may be set. For example, for the time saving game state, a time saving game state first special figure removal type distribution table shown in FIG. 128 (D) is set. For the b time saving game state and the c time saving game state, the normal game state first special figure loss type distribution table shown in FIG. May be set.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 128 (E), as the type of loss in the second special jackpot lottery, as in the first embodiment described above, front-rear out reach, reach other than front-rear out, and complete loss are set. , and the time saving pattern stop off is not set. That is, in the present embodiment, the time saving symbol stop off is set as the result of the first special figure jackpot lottery, and is not set as the result of the second special figure jackpot lottery. Therefore, when the game ball enters the second winning hole 315, it is not shifted to the c time-saving gaming state.

[Jackpot fluctuation table]
In this embodiment, one type of jackpot variation table shown in FIG. 129 (A) is set, and two types of jackpot variation tables (FIG. 10 (A) and FIG. 10(B)). That is, in the present embodiment, only the jackpot corresponding to the normal jackpot of the first embodiment described above is set, and the jackpot corresponding to the probability variable jackpot of the first embodiment described above is not set. Therefore, the jackpot variation table is considered one. And, in this embodiment, the jackpot variation table is shared between the 5R jackpot and the 12R jackpot.

In addition, in the jackpot variation table of this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, as the special figure variation pattern, the special figure variation display time is 30 seconds, the special figure variation pattern "01", the special figure variation display Three types of special figure fluctuation pattern "02" whose time is 60 seconds and special figure fluctuation pattern "03" whose special figure fluctuation display time is 90 seconds are set. And, in the jackpot variation table of the present embodiment, the longer the special figure variation display time, the more likely the special figure variation pattern is to be selected. Specifically, in the jackpot variation table, the distribution rate of each special figure variation pattern is 5% for the special figure variation pattern "01", 25% for the special figure variation pattern "02", and 25% for the special figure variation pattern "03". ” is set to 70%. Thus, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the longer the special-figure fluctuation display time, the more easily the special-figure fluctuation pattern is selected. Expectations are higher.

[Outlier variation table]
In this embodiment, there are 4 types of loss fluctuation tables shown in FIGS. It is different from the above-described first embodiment in which there is only one (see FIG. 10(C)). Specifically, in this embodiment, as a deviation fluctuation table, when the result of the first special figure jackpot lottery in the normal game state, b time reduction game state and c time reduction game state shown in FIG. 128 (B) is out The first special figure deviation variation table A used for the first special figure deviation variation table used when the result of the first special figure jackpot lottery in the a time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 128 (C) is out B, a normal game state second special figure loss variation table used when the result of the second special figure jackpot lottery in the normal game condition shown in FIG. 128 (D) is lost, and shown in FIG. Four kinds of time-saving game state second special figure loss variation table used when the result of the second special figure jackpot lottery in the time-saving game condition is lost are set. Then, in the deviation variation table of this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the special figure variation display time for reach and complete deviation other than front and rear deviation reach, front and rear deviation is set as a special figure variation pattern, The special figure variation pattern for the reach other than the front-rear off reach and the front-rear off reach is the same as in the above-described first embodiment (see FIG. 10(C)).

129(B) and 129(C), the first special figure deviation variation table A and the first special figure deviation variation table B are different from the above-described first embodiment, and the time saving symbol stop deviation The special figure fluctuation display time for is set as a special figure fluctuation pattern. However, in the first special figure deviation variation table A and the first special figure deviation variation table B, the special figure variation pattern for time saving symbol stop deviation is made common to complete deviation. As a result, from the special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation display time), it is not possible to determine whether the off type is completely off or the time saving symbol stop off.

In addition, in the first special figure deviation variation table A shown in FIG. 129 (B), the special figure variation display time for the complete deviation and the time saving pattern stop deviation is shorter than the reach other than the reach and the deviation before and after the deviation. Figure fluctuation pattern is set. Specifically, for complete out and time saving pattern stop out, special figure fluctuation pattern "04" with special figure fluctuation display time of 7 seconds, special figure fluctuation pattern with special figure fluctuation display time of 10 seconds " 05 ”, and a special figure fluctuation pattern “06” with a special figure fluctuation display time of 15 seconds are set, and the special figure fluctuation display time of any special figure fluctuation pattern “04” to “06” is also out of reach And it is set shorter than the special figure fluctuation display time of reach other than front and back.

On the other hand, in the first special figure deviation fluctuation table B shown in FIG. A special figure variation pattern is set so that it is longer than it is. Specifically, the special figure fluctuation pattern "07" with a special figure fluctuation display time of 50 seconds and the special figure fluctuation pattern with a special figure fluctuation display time of 100 seconds " 08 ”, and a special figure variation pattern “09” with a special figure variation display time of 150 seconds is set, and the special figure variation display time of any special figure variation pattern “07” to “09” is also shown in FIG. It is set longer than the special figure fluctuation display time for complete deviation and time saving pattern stop deviation in the first special figure deviation fluctuation table A shown in (B).

Here, as described above, it is difficult to shift to the c time reduction game state based on the first special figure jackpot lottery in the normal game state, and based on the first special figure jackpot lottery in the b time reduction game state c time reduction It does not substantially shift to the game state. Further, based on the first special figure jackpot lottery in the c time saving game state, it is not shifted to the c time saving game state. And, when it is completely off, it is grasped that it is not a big hit early from the execution of the first special symbol game. Therefore, in the first special figure deviation variation table A used when the result of the first special figure jackpot lottery in the normal game state, b time reduction game state and c time reduction game state shown in FIG. 129 (B) is out , c Special figure fluctuation display time special figure fluctuation pattern with short special figure fluctuation display time in order to end the first special figure game early for complete off and time saving pattern stop off where it is difficult to expect the transition to the c time saving game state and the big hit "04" to "06" are set.

On the other hand, in the first special figure jackpot lottery in the time saving game state a, as described above, compared to the first special figure jackpot lottery in the normal game state and b time saving game state, the result of the first special figure jackpot lottery There is a high expectation that c will be shifted to the time saving game state based on the fact that is out of time saving. Therefore, in the first special figure deviation variation table B used in the a time saving game state shown in FIG. 129 (C), the first special figure is Special figure variation patterns "07" to "09" with long special figure variation display time are set in order to improve expectations during variation display in the game. Then, when the result of the first special jackpot lottery in the time-saving game state is out, it is completely out in order to prevent it from being possible to determine whether the out-of-time type is out of the time-saving design stop or completely out. Toku-zu fluctuation pattern "07" to "09" with a long toku-zu fluctuation display time is set.

Furthermore, in the first special figure deviation variation table B, the special figure variation pattern "07" to "09" with a long special figure variation display time is set, as described later, it is started in the a time saving game state The possibility that the first special figure game ends in the normal game state that is shifted after the end of the a reduced working hours game state is improved.

In addition, the second special figure deviation variation table used for the second special figure jackpot lottery shown in FIGS. 2 special figure off fluctuation table), because the time saving pattern stop off is not set as the type of loss when the second special figure jackpot lottery is off (see FIG. 128 (E)), special for time saving pattern stop off The figure fluctuation pattern is not set, and as in the first embodiment, the special figure fluctuation display time for the front and back off reach, the reach other than the front and back off, and the complete off is set as the special figure fluctuation pattern.

In the normal game state second special figure loss fluctuation table shown in FIG. It is the same as the outlier variation table (see FIG. 10C) of the first embodiment described above, except that three types of variation patterns "06" are set.

By the way, as described above, in the present embodiment, the second winning opening 315 is provided in the right area of the game board 31, and the right first winning opening 314R is provided in the right area of the game board 31. In the game state, the electric accessory 315b does not support the entry of the game ball into the second prize winning port 315 at a low frequency and the operation time of the electric accessory 315b is short, so that the game ball hardly enters the second prize winning port 315. In addition, since it is difficult to enter the right first prize winning port 314R compared to the central first prize winning port 314C, in the normal game state, the game progresses by entering the game ball into the central first prize winning port 314C. In order to do so, left-handed hitting in which a game ball is hit to the left area of the game board 31 is encouraged. As described above, in the present embodiment, by enlarging the disadvantage of right-handed hitting in which the game ball is hit to the right side area of the game board 31 in the normal game state, countermeasures against right-handed hitting in the normal game state are taken. However, by setting a part or all of the variable display time of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game in the normal game state longer to increase the disadvantage of right-handed hitting, countermeasures against right-handed hitting in the normal game state can also be considered.

On the other hand, the time-saving gaming state second special figure deviation variation table shown in FIG. The normal game state second special figure deviation variation table shown in FIG. ) is different.

In addition, in the time-saving gaming state second special figure deviation fluctuation table, as in the first embodiment described above, as a special figure variation pattern, the special figure variation display time is 30 for reach other than front and rear deviation reach and front and rear deviation. Three types of special figure fluctuation pattern "01" which is seconds, special figure fluctuation pattern "02" whose special figure fluctuation display time is 60 seconds, and special figure fluctuation pattern "03" whose special figure fluctuation display time is 90 seconds is set. And, in the time-saving gaming state second special figure deviation fluctuation table of the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is the reach other than the front and rear deviation reach and the reach other than the front and rear deviation, the special figure variation pattern with a shorter special figure variation display time is more likely to be selected. , Toku-zu fluctuation display time is longer Toku-zu fluctuation pattern is less likely to be selected. Specifically, in the time-saving gaming state second special figure deviation variation table, the distribution rate of each special figure variation pattern is 50% for the special figure variation pattern "01" and 30% for the special figure variation pattern "02". , Special figure variation pattern "03" is set to 20%.

Here, in the jackpot variation table described above with reference to FIG. 129(A), the longer the special figure variation display time, the easier the special figure variation pattern is to be selected. That is, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the longer the special-figure fluctuation display time, the more easily the special-figure fluctuation pattern is selected. higher expectations. On the other hand, in the time-saving gaming state second special figure deviation variation table described earlier with reference to FIG. It is easy to be selected as the special figure fluctuation pattern with a short display time, and it is difficult to be selected as a special figure fluctuation pattern with a long special figure fluctuation display time. Therefore, in the second special symbol game started in the time-saving game state, the longer the variation display time of the second special symbol, the higher the expectation that the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery will be a big win.

By the way, as described above, the time-saving gaming state includes the a time-saving gaming state that is shifted after the end of the jackpot game, but is started in this a time-saving gaming state, and the first special game in which the time-saving design is stopped and displayed However, if it is stopped and displayed in the normal game state that shifts after the end of the a time-saving game state due to the execution of the upper limit number of special game games, it is more advantageous than the normal game state and the a time-saving game state, and the jackpot is substantially guaranteed. It is shifted to the c time saving game state. Then, when the first special figure game in which the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the a time saving game state is started, the fluctuation display time of the second special figure game started during the execution of the first special figure game is long. , the number of times of the second special game that can be executed during the execution of the first special game is reduced. As a result, the longer the variation display time of the second special game in the second special game started during the execution of the first special game in the a time saving game state, the longer the first special game is being executed In addition, the possibility of executing the second special figure game of the remaining number of times of time saving up to the upper limit number of times in the time saving game state and shifting to the normal game state is reduced. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the longer the variation display time of the second special figure, the higher the expectation that the result of the second special figure jackpot lottery will be a big hit. In this way, the longer the variation display time of the second special game started during the execution of the first special game, the higher the expectation that the result of the second special big win lottery will be a big win. By being set, the game property in the a time saving game state is to execute the second special game of the remaining number of time saving times up to the upper limit number of time a time saving game state during the execution of the first special game state. (When the first special figure game in which the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the a time saving game state is started, the a time saving game state is transferred to the normal game state. From the game characteristic that the timing is important), the game characteristic that obtains the profit of executing the jackpot game based on the fact that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, similar to the time-saving gaming state of a conventional gaming machine A new game property is realized in which the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the 2 special game is important.

Further, in the present embodiment, the longer the fluctuation display time of the second special figure in the second special figure game started during the execution of the first special figure game in the a time saving game state, the more advantageous c time saving gaming state It is set so that the expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot is increased, although the possibility of shifting to . Therefore, in the present embodiment, the longer the fluctuation display time of the second special figure in the second special figure game started during the execution of the first special figure game in the a time saving game state, the more advantageous c time saving gaming state It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game in the c time-saving gaming state due to the decrease in the possibility of shifting to , by increasing the degree of expectation for a big win. As a result, the decrease in the interest in the game in the c time saving game state is suppressed, and the decrease in the interest in the game is suppressed.

Furthermore, in the time-saving gaming state second special figure deviation fluctuation table, only special figure variation pattern "10", which is 0.5 seconds which is remarkably short special figure variation display time with respect to complete deviation, is set. On the other hand, as described above, when the result of the second special figure jackpot lottery is lost, the distribution rate of completely lost is high as the lost type (see FIG. 128 (E)). Therefore, in the time-saving game state (a time-saving game state, b time-saving game state and c time-saving game state) in which the game ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 315 with the support of the electric accessory 315b, many second games are played in a short time. A special figure game can be executed. As a result, for example, in b time-saving game state and c time-saving game state in which the upper limit of the number of times of time-saving games is as large as 2000 times, the time required from the transition to these time-saving game states until the result of the jackpot lottery becomes a big hit is shortened. it becomes possible to As a result, even if the number of games required for the result of the special jackpot lottery to become a jackpot increases, the player can proceed with the game without feeling a great deal of stress until the jackpot game is executed. can do.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol display portion 362 of the main display portion 36 in the normal game state shifted from the time-saving game state by executing the special figure game for the specified number of times (200 times) in the time-saving game state. When the symbols are stopped and displayed, the state is shifted to a c time saving game state which is more advantageous than the a time saving game state and the normal game state. That is, in the present embodiment, when the first special game in which the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the a time saving game state is started, the timing of shifting from the a time saving game state to the normal game state is important. Therefore, when the variable display of the first special figure in which the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 362 in the a time saving game state is started, during the variation display of the first special figure in the a time saving game state It is important to execute the second special symbol game until the upper limit number of times is reached, and to shift from the time reduction game state to the normal game state before the time reduction symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display part 362. - 特許庁Specifically, in the a time saving game state, regarding the first special game in which the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed, the longer the variation display time of the first special figure, the second special figure game executed during the variation display The number of times increases, and the possibility that the game state has been shifted to the normal game state when the first special figure is stopped increases, so the longer the variable display time, the better. On the other hand, with respect to the second special figure in which the variable display is started in the a time saving gaming state, the shorter the variation display time, the time until the special figure game of the upper limit number of the a time saving gaming state is executed, that is, the normal Since the time until the transition to the game state is shortened, it is preferable that the variation display time of the second special figure is short.

And, in this embodiment, in the first special figure deviation variation table B used in the a time saving gaming state shown in FIG. While the variable display time of the first special figure in the case is set to be long (50 seconds, 100 seconds or 150 seconds), the time saving game state including a time saving game state shown in FIG. 129 (E) In the time-saving gaming state second special figure loss fluctuation table used in , the second special figure fluctuation display time is set remarkably short when the result of the second special figure jackpot lottery is completely lost (0.5 seconds). Therefore, in the present embodiment, a long first special figure variable display time is selected for the first special figure whose variable display is started in the a reduced working hours gaming state, while the variable display is started in the a reduced working hours gaming state A short variable display time is selected for the second special figure. As a result, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special figure started in the time-saving game state is shifted from the time-saving game state by executing the special figure game for the specified number of times (200 times) in the time-saving game state. The possibility of being stopped and displayed in the normal game state is realistic.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the result of the first special figure jackpot lottery notified by the first special figure game started in the a time saving game state is completely off or the time saving pattern stop off, the most first special figure fluctuation The longest display time is 150 seconds of the special figure fluctuation pattern "09", while the result of the second special figure jackpot lottery notified by the second special figure game started in the a reduced time gaming state is complete. The second special figure fluctuation display time in the case of being out is 0.5 seconds (special figure fluctuation pattern "10"). And, provisionally, 0.5 seconds is selected as the second special figure fluctuation display time for all the second special figure games in the time saving game state, and the second special figure games of the specified number of times are continuously executed In the case, that is, the shortest time of the time-saving gaming state is 100 seconds (= 0.5 seconds × 200 times), and the special figure fluctuation pattern that can be set for the first special figure game started in the time-saving gaming state 09” is shorter than 150 seconds. Therefore, in this embodiment, when 150 seconds is selected as the variable display time of the first special figure game that is started in the a reduced working hours game state, at that time, the first special figure game is in the normal game state may end. In this way, a plurality of variable display times for the first special game to be started in the a time saving game state are set, and by including those longer than the shortest time of the a time saving game state, in the a time saving game state When the first special figure game is started, the user can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting the longest special figure fluctuation display time to be selected, so that the amusement of the game in the reduced working hours game state is improved. .

Here, the details of the time attack effect will be described later, but the time attack effect is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the first special game started in the time saving game state is out of time saving symbol stop. In this time attack effect, in the symbol display unit 341, the first decorative symbol 78 is variably displayed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game started in the a reduced working hours game state, and the first special symbol In the second special symbol game started during execution of the figure game, the second decorative symbol 79 is variably displayed corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, and further, the first special symbol in the first special symbol game. Remaining time image corresponding to the remaining variable display time (remaining time) of and the remaining number of time-saving games until reaching the number of time-saving games of the upper limit number of times of the a time-saving game state (remaining rotation number) Remaining rotation corresponding to Several images are displayed (see FIGS. 153(A) to 153(F)).

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the result of the first special figure jackpot lottery informed by the first special figure game started in the a time saving game state is out of the time saving pattern stop, the time attack effect is executed. In the time attack effect, the player pays attention to the remaining time image, the remaining rotation number image, the variable display and stop display of the first decorative pattern 78, and the variable display and stop display of the second decorative pattern 79. , the progress of the game can be enjoyed by paying attention to the time attack effect executed in the time saving game state a.

Specifically, first, when the time attack effect is executed, by checking the remaining time image for the remaining time, the first special figure (first decoration pattern 78) in the first special figure game is displayed in a variable manner. Since the time can be grasped, the player enjoys guessing the degree of possibility that the game state can be shifted from the time-saving game state to the normal game state by the time the first special game ends. be able to. For example, based on the remaining time image at the start of the time attack effect, it can be confirmed that the special figure fluctuation pattern "09", which is the longest 150 seconds as the fluctuation display time for the first special figure game, has been set, Since it can be determined that the degree of expectation that the game state can be shifted from the reduced working hours game state to the normal game state by the end of the first special game is high, at the start of the time attack production, focus on the remaining time image. You can enjoy the progress of the game.

Further, after the time attack effect is executed, it can be confirmed that the first special symbol game is not finished by focusing on the first decorative pattern 78, for example, and the first special symbol game can be played by confirming the remaining time image. You can check how long it will take to finish. On the other hand, by paying attention to the second decoration pattern 79, it can be confirmed that the second special symbol game has started or ended, and by confirming the remaining number of rotations image, the game state is shifted from the time-saving game state to the normal game state. You can check the number of times of the second special figure game required for this. Therefore, while confirming that the first decorative pattern 78 is not stopped and displayed, the player pays attention to the second decorative pattern 79 and confirms that the second special pattern game has started or ended. During the execution of the figure game (during the variable display of the first special figure), the second special figure game ends, and it can be confirmed that the remaining number of points has decreased by the remaining number of rotations image. As a result, the player can see that the second decorative pattern 79 will be variably displayed during the variably displaying of the first decorative pattern 78, and that the second decorative pattern 79 whose variability is started will be stopped and displayed in a short period of time. You can enjoy the progress of the game while anticipating it.

Furthermore, after the time attack effect is started, the remaining variable display time of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game can be confirmed based on the remaining time image, and the normal game state is shifted to based on the remaining rotation number image. You can check the number of times of the second special symbol game required until it is played. Therefore, based on the remaining time image and the remaining number of rotations image, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that the speed of decrease of the number of remaining rotations will be higher than the speed of decrease of the remaining time. Also, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game by estimating the possibility of shifting to the normal game state during the execution of the first special symbol game. In particular, as the remaining time checked based on the remaining time image and the remaining rotation number checked based on the remaining rotation number image decrease and approach 0, whichever of the remaining time and the remaining rotation number reaches 0 first. You can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether it will be.

Further, when a long one is set as the variable display time of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game after the start of the time attack effect, focusing on the second decorative symbol 79, the second decorative symbol Since 79 is not stopped and displayed for a long time, the player feels disgusted that the remaining number of rotations is not subtracted, and furthermore, the longer the second decorative pattern 79 is, the lower the possibility of shifting to the normal game state. However, it is feared that the player's interest in the game during execution of the time attack effect may decrease due to the feeling of disgust for this. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the longer the fluctuation display time of the second special figure in the second special figure game started during the execution of the first special figure game in the a time saving game state, the second special figure It is set so that the expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the figure game is a jackpot is high. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game during execution of the time attack effect due to the fact that the second decoration pattern 79 is not stopped and displayed for a long time.

[Processing of main controller 4]
The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment differs from the gaming machine 10 of the above-described first embodiment configured as a loop probability variable machine, the probability variable gaming state is not set, and the first special figure and the second special figure can be varied simultaneously, and as described above, part of the configuration of the game board 31 is different from that of the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in part of the processing executed by the main controller 4 . Specifically, the processing of the main controller 4 in the present embodiment includes the first special figure pending command setting process, through gate process, general figure game control process, general figure per game control process, special figure game control process, jackpot The game control process and the game state transition process are different. These processes will be described below with reference to FIGS. 130 to 147. FIG.

[First special figure pending command setting process]
Here, FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special figure pending command setting process executed by the MPU 41 at step S1105 in the starting winning process of FIG. In addition, the 1st special figure pending command includes information indicating that the command is the 1st special figure pending command, the result of the jackpot lottery (jackpot type or out), the special figure fluctuation display time and the 1st special figure pending and information such as the number N. Hereinafter, the first special figure pending command setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S3301>
As shown in FIG. 130, the MPU 41 reads out the first special figure reservation number N from the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA of the first special figure reservation storage area REA, and corresponds to each of the first special figure reservations. The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is read from the RAM 412 (step S3301).

<Step S3302>
In step S3302, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the first special figure jackpot lottery for the first special figure reservation is a jackpot based on whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning. determine whether or not Here, when the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3303. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3305 when the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S3302: No), that is, when it is out.

<Step S3303>
When the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the special figure variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. (Step S3303). For example, when the first special figure validity information is stored in the third reservation area REA3 in step S1104 in the starting winning process of FIG. The counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the special figure variation type counter CS1 are read. In addition, among the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4, the reservation area in which the first special figure propriety information is stored in step S1104 in the start winning process of FIG. 18 is stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA. It can be determined by the value of the pending number N that is set.

<Step S3304>
In step S3304, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the special figure variation type counter CS1 and the first special figure reservation number N to the first special figure reservation command, and ends the first special figure reservation command setting process. Thus, since the first special figure pending command includes the first special figure pending number N read in step S3301, the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 that receives the first special figure pending command is the first By referring to the number N of reservations included in the 1 special figure reservation command, the 1st special figure reservation command corresponds to the 1st special figure right or wrong information stored in any of the 1st reservation area REA1 to the 4th reservation area REA4 It is possible to recognize what

<Steps S3305 and S3306>
If the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S3302: No), that is, if it is out, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the special figure variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412 ( step S3305). Next, the MPU 41 sets the information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out, the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1 and the first special figure reservation number N to the first special figure reservation command (step S3306), End the first special figure pending command setting process.

In addition, the first special figure pending command set in step S3304 or S3306 of the first special figure pending command setting process is stored in the RAM412, and is executed by the MPU41 of the main control device 4, which will be described later in FIG. In step S1401 of the main processing, it is erased after being transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 together with other commands. Furthermore, the content of the first special figure pending command described here is only an example, and if it is possible to grasp the same content as the first special figure pending command in the audio lamp control device 5, it will be explained here. It is not limited to what you do. For example, it is conceivable that part or all of the information of the first special figure pending command is included in other commands.

In addition, the second special figure pending command setting process is the same as the first special figure pending command setting process, so detailed description will be omitted, but the second special figure pending command setting process is the first special figure pending command In the setting process, the "first special figure reservation command" should be read as the "second special figure reservation command", and the "first special figure reservation number N" may be read as the "second special figure reservation number M".

[Through gate processing]
This embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in which two through gates 317L and 317R are provided in that only one through gate 317 is provided. is different from the embodiment of Here, FIG. 131 is a flow chart showing the procedure of through gate processing. In the through gate process of the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the through gate 317, the MPU 41 updates the information stored in the general pattern reservation storage area 412c of the RAM 412. FIG. Through gate processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S3401>
As shown in FIG. 131, in the through gate process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 317 (step S3401). Whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 317 is determined based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412 in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has passed through the through gate 317 (step S3401: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3402, and when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the through gate 317 (step S3401: No), the through gate process is terminated.

<Step S3402>
When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has passed through the through gate 317 (step S3401: Yes), the normal pattern stored in the normal pattern variation pending number storage area SNA set in the normal pattern pending storage area 412c of the RAM 412 It is determined whether or not the variable pending number X is the maximum pending number (4 in this embodiment) (step S3402). MPU41, when normal pattern fluctuation reservation number X is the maximum number of reservations (step S3402: Yes), ends the through gate process, when normal pattern fluctuation reservation number X is not the maximum number of reservations (step S3402: No), The process moves to step S3403.

<Steps S3403 and S3404>
MPU41, when normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is not the maximum number of reservations (step S3402: No), adds 1 to normal pattern fluctuation pending number X (step S3403), in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. The counter values of the normal per random number counter C4 and normal per type random number counter C5 to be updated, and the value of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 to be updated in steps S1402 and S1414 of the main processing of FIG. 21 described later are obtained, and the counter The value is stored in the first empty reservation area out of the normal diagram first reservation area SE1 to the normal diagram fourth reservation area SE4 of the general diagram reservation storage area 412c in the RAM412 (step S3404), and the through gate process is terminated.

[Universal figure game control process]
Here, FIG. 132 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of normal game control processing executed in step S1404 in the main processing of FIG. In the general pattern game control process, a process for controlling the variable display and stop display of the general pattern in the normal pattern display section 361 of the main display section 36 is executed. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 132, normal figure game control processing will be described.

<Step S1501>
As shown in FIG. 132, in the general pattern game control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the general pattern fluctuation display flag indicating that the normal pattern is being displayed in fluctuation (during execution of the general pattern game) is on. is determined (step S1501). The normal pattern fluctuation display flag is set to ON in step S1711 when the normal pattern fluctuation display (normal pattern game) is started in the normal pattern fluctuation start processing of FIG. When the general pattern game ends), it is set to OFF at step S1510 in the general pattern game control process.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1507 when the normal pattern fluctuation display flag is ON (step S1501: Yes), that is, when the normal pattern game is being executed. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1502 when the normal pattern fluctuation display flag is off (step S1501: No), that is, when the normal pattern game is not being executed.

<Step S1502>
When the normal pattern fluctuation display flag is off (step S1501: No), that is, when the normal pattern game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines that the electric auditors 315b are being opened (executing the normal pattern per game). (Step S1502). The electric auditors opening flag is set to ON in step S1811 when opening the electric auditors 315b in the normal figure per game control process of FIG. set to off.

MPU41, when the electric accessary product during opening flag is ON (step S1502: Yes), that is, when the general pattern per game is being executed, ends the general pattern game control process. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1503 when the electric auditors product open flag is off (step S1502: No), that is, when the game per normal pattern is not being executed.

<Step S1503>
When the electric accessary product open flag is off (step S1502: No), that is, when the normal game is not being executed, the MPU 41 indicates that the jackpot game is being executed. (step S1503). The jackpot playing flag is set to ON in step S2206 when the jackpot game is started in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, and is set to OFF in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends.

MPU41, when the jackpot playing flag is ON (step S1503: Yes), when the jackpot game is being executed, ends the normal game control process. That is, in this embodiment, the regular game is not started during the execution of the jackpot game.

Of course, the regular game may be started during execution of the jackpot game. In this case, according to the support mode type (high-frequency support mode and low-frequency support mode) before the jackpot game is started, that is, according to the game state before shifting to the jackpot game state, the general pattern reservation storage area 412c Based on the information (random number counter per general pattern C4, random number counter per general pattern C5 and value of the general pattern variation type counter CS2) moved from the general pattern first reservation area SE1 to the general pattern execution area SAE, the general pattern Winning lottery determination is executed. In other words, if the game state before the jackpot game is executed is the probability variable game state or the time-saving game state which is the high frequency support mode, the normal figure per success/failure table for the high frequency support mode (see FIG. 12 (B)), Based on the per-universal figure type table (see FIG. 12 (D)) and the per-universal figure fluctuation table (not shown), the per-universal lottery (per or out of the per-universal figure), the per-universal figure type (long open or short Per open normal map), and normal map fluctuation display time is set. On the other hand, when the game state before the jackpot game is executed is the normal game state which is the low frequency support mode, the general figure per success/failure table for the low frequency support mode (see FIG. 12 (A)), the general figure per type Based on the table (see FIG. 12 (C)) and the normal figure fluctuation table (not shown), per normal figure lottery (per normal figure or off), per normal figure type (per long open normal figure or short open normal figure per ), and the normal figure fluctuation display time is set.

On the other hand, when the jackpot playing flag is off (step S1503: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1504.

<Step S1504>
When the electric auditors product open flag is off (step S1503: No), that is, when the normal pattern per game is not being executed, the MPU 41 stores the normal pattern fluctuation pending number set in the normal pattern pending storage area 412c of the RAM 412 It is determined whether or not the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X stored in the area SNA is 0 (step S1504). MPU41, when the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is 0 (step S1504: Yes), ends the normal pattern game control process, and when the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is not 0 (step S1504: No), process to step S1505.

<Step S1505>
If the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is not 0 (step S1504: No), the MPU 41 executes normal pattern data setting processing for the normal pattern correctness information stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 412c (step S1505), The process moves to step S1506. In addition, the details of the normal map data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 133 .

<Step S1506>
In step S1506, the MPU 41 executes a normal pattern fluctuation start process for causing the normal pattern display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 to display the normal pattern fluctuation based on the information stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 412c. , End the normal game control process. In addition, the details of the normal pattern fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 134 .

<Step S1507>
When the normal pattern fluctuation display flag is ON (step S1501: Yes), that is, when the normal pattern game is being executed, the MPU 41 indicates that the jackpot game is being executed. (step S1507). The jackpot playing flag is set to ON in step S2206 when the jackpot game is started in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, and is set to OFF in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends.

When the jackpot playing flag is ON (step S1507: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1509. On the other hand, when the jackpot playing flag is off (step S1507: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
When the jackpot playing flag is off (step S1507: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal pattern fluctuation display time has elapsed from the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display ( step S1508). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to stop display (end the normal game) the normal symbols that are variably displayed in the normal symbol display portion 361 of the main display portion 36 .

MPU41, when the normal pattern fluctuation display time has passed (step S1508: Yes), that is, at the timing to stop display the normal pattern that is variably displayed in the normal pattern display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 (end the normal pattern game) If so, the process proceeds to step S1509. On the other hand, when the normal pattern fluctuation display time has not elapsed (step S1508: No), the MPU 41 stops displaying the normal pattern that is displayed in the normal pattern display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 (ends the normal pattern game). ), if it is not the timing to make, end the normal game control process.

<Steps S1509 to S1511>
If the normal pattern fluctuation display flag is on (step S1501: Yes) and the jackpot game flag is on (step S1507: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is started during execution of the normal pattern game, Or when the normal pattern fluctuation display time of the normal pattern has passed (step S1508: Yes), that is, when it is time to stop display the normal pattern displayed in fluctuation (end the normal pattern game), the MPU 41 is the normal pattern game The normal pattern is stopped and displayed in the pattern according to the result of the lottery for the normal pattern corresponding to (step S1509), and the normal pattern fluctuation display flag indicating that the normal pattern is being displayed (executing the normal pattern game) is turned off (step S1510). Furthermore, the MPU 41 turns on the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag indicating that the normal pattern is stop-displayed, that is, the end of the normal pattern game (step S1511), and ends the normal pattern game control process.

In addition, the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is, in step S1801 of the normal pattern per game control process of FIG. Referenced.

In addition, in the present embodiment, not only when it is time to stop display (finish the normal game) the normal symbol that is displayed in fluctuation due to the lapse of the normal pattern fluctuation display time of the normal symbol, but also the execution of the normal pattern game When the jackpot game is started during, the normal symbols that are variably displayed are stopped and displayed (the normal pattern game is terminated). That is, when the jackpot game is started, the general pattern game is forcibly terminated before the general pattern fluctuation display time of the normal pattern elapses. Of course, the general pattern game may be continuously executed until the general pattern fluctuation display time of the normal pattern elapses even when the jackpot game is started.

[General map data setting process]
Here, FIG. 133 is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the normal figure data setting process performed by MPU41 in FIG.132 S1505. In the general pattern data setting process, the storage contents of the general pattern reservation storage area 412c in the storage area of the main controller 4 in FIG. 11 are updated. Hereinafter, normal figure data setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. 133 .

<Steps S1601 to S1603>
As shown in FIG. 133, in the normal pattern data setting process, first, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X stored in the normal pattern fluctuation pending number storage area SNA (step S1601), and the normal pattern first The general pattern correctness information is moved from the reservation area SE1 to the general pattern execution area SAE (step S1602). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the general map correctness information stored in the general map second reservation area SE2 to the general map fourth reservation area SE4 one by one (step S1603). Specifically, in step S1603, the general map correctness information of the general map second reservation area SE2 is moved to the general map first reservation area SE1, and the general map correctness information of the general map third reservation area SE3 is transferred to the general map second reservation area SE1. It is moved to the area SE2, and the general map correctness information of the general map 4th reservation area SE4 is moved to the general map 3rd reservation area SE3.

[Normal pattern fluctuation start process]
Here, FIG. 134 is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of normal figure fluctuation start processing performed by MPU41 in FIG.132 S1506. In the normal pattern fluctuation start process, the normal pattern display unit 361 starts to display the normal pattern fluctuation, and various commands and flags are set based on the lottery result of the normal pattern per lottery. Hereinafter, normal figure fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1701>
As shown in FIG. 134 , in the normal figure fluctuation start process, the MPU 41 is a time saving game state (a time saving game state, b time saving game state or c time saving game state) which is a high frequency support mode. It is determined whether the flag is on (step S1701). Here, the time saving game state flag is a time saving game state flag indicating that it is a time saving game state, b time saving game state flag indicating that it is b time saving game state, and c indicating that it is c time saving game state Includes a time-saving gaming state flag. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not any one of the time saving game state flag a, the time saving game state flag b and the time saving game state flag c is set to ON. In addition, the a time saving gaming state flag is set to ON when the game state is shifted to the a time saving gaming state in step S4319 in the game state transition processing of FIG. 144, and the b time saving gaming state flag is set to the game In step S4303 in the state transition process, the game state is set to ON when the game state is shifted to the b time reduction game state, and the c time reduction game state flag is set to the c time reduction game state flag in step S4308 in the game state transition process of FIG. It is set to ON when transitioning to the game state.

MPU41, when the time saving gaming state flag is on (step S1701: Yes), that is, when it is in the time saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step S1702, and when the time saving gaming state flag is off (step S1701: No) That is, if the normal game state is the low-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S1703.

<Steps S1702 and S1703>
When the time-saving gaming state flag is ON (step S1701: Yes), that is, when it is in the time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 performs a normal figure hit determination based on the high-frequency support mode (step S1702). Specifically, the MPU 41 is based on the high-frequency support mode general figure per right or wrong table (see FIG. 12 (B)) and the high-frequency support mode general figure per classification table (see FIG. 12 (D)). Whether the values of the normal hit random number counter C4 and the normal hit type random number counter C5 included as numerical information in the normal pattern correctness information stored in the normal pattern execution area SAE of the reserved storage area 412c are values corresponding to the normal pattern per It determines whether or not it is appropriate.

On the other hand, if the time-saving game state flag is off (step S1701: No), that is, if the normal game state is the low-frequency support mode, the normal game hit determination is performed based on the low-frequency support mode (step S1703). Specifically, the MPU 41 is based on the low frequency support mode general figure per right or wrong table (see FIG. 12 (A)) and the low frequency support mode general figure per type distribution table (see FIG. 12 (C)). Whether the normal hit random number counter C4 and the normal hit type random number counter C5 included as numerical information in the normal pattern correctness information stored in the normal pattern execution area SAE of the drawing reservation storage area 412c are values corresponding to the normal pattern winning Make a right or wrong decision.

<Steps S1704 and S1705>
When the MPU 41 determines the success or failure of the general pattern (step S1702 or S1703), it determines whether the result of the success or failure determination is the long open general pattern in which the second winning opening 315 is long open ( step S1704). MPU41, if the result of the success/failure determination is per long open general pattern (step S1704: Yes), the long open general pattern per flag indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is per long open general pattern is set to ON ( Step S1705), and the process proceeds to step S1708. On the other hand, MPU41 transfers a process to step S1706, when the result of right or wrong determination is not per long open normal figure (step S1704: No).

<Steps S1706 and S1707>
If the result of the success/failure determination is not a long open/universal pattern hit (step S1704: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the success/failure determination is a short open/universal pattern in which the second winning hole 315 is short-opened. (step S1706). MPU 41, if the result of the success/failure determination is a short open normal map per (step S1706: Yes), the short open normal map per flag indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a short open normal map is set to ON ( Step S1707), the process proceeds to step S1708. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1708 when the result of the win-or-fail judgment is not a short-open normal figure hit (step S1706: No), that is, when the result of the win-or-fail judgment is out.

<Steps S1708 and S1709>
If the long open normal map per flag is set to ON (step S1705), if the short open normal map per flag is set to ON (step S1707), or if the result of the judgment is out (step S1706: No), the MPU 41 sets the normal pattern fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation display time of the normal pattern in the normal pattern display section 361 of the main display section 36 in the normal pattern game, with reference to the normal pattern fluctuation display table (not shown). Execute normal figure fluctuation pattern setting process. Normal figure fluctuation display table (not shown) is, as described above, a high frequency support mode general figure fluctuation table that is referenced when it is in high frequency support mode, and a low frequency that is referenced when it is in low frequency support mode Including support mode normal chart fluctuation display table. Therefore, in the general pattern fluctuation pattern setting process, the general pattern fluctuation pattern is set based on the general pattern fluctuation display table corresponding to the support mode type. In addition, since the high frequency support mode general figure fluctuation display table is set so that the average time of the fluctuation display time of the normal pattern is shorter than the low frequency support mode general figure fluctuation display table, the high frequency support mode Then, the time during which the normal figure game is executed is shorter than in the low frequency support mode.

Then, MPU41, in addition to the normal figure fluctuation pattern set in step S1708, the result of the success or failure determination in step S1702 or S1703 (the result of the lottery per normal figure), the type of support mode (high frequency support mode and low frequency Separate support mode) to set the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 (step S1709), and the process proceeds to step S1710.

In addition, the normal figure fluctuation pattern command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. On the other hand, in the sound lamp control device 5, based on the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command, the effect corresponding to the normal pattern game for the pattern display unit 341 etc., for example, the effect indicating that the normal pattern game is being executed Execute the production showing the result of the lottery for the normal drawing.

In addition, the general pattern fluctuation pattern command may be at least a command that notifies the sound lamp control device 5 of the general pattern fluctuation pattern, and the result of the general pattern per lottery and the type of support mode are not necessarily the general pattern fluctuation pattern command. There is no need to notify the audio ramp controller 5 . For example, the result of the lottery per normal pattern is to set the lottery result command per normal pattern when the decision is made in step S1702 or S1703, and the type of support mode is high frequency support mode or low frequency support mode. When the transition is made, the sound lamp control device 5 may be notified by setting a support mode type command that can identify the type of the support mode after the transition.

<Steps S1710 and S1711>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 starts variable display of normal symbols in the normal symbol display portion 361 of the main display portion 36 (step S1710). Then, the MPU 41 sets on the normal pattern fluctuation display flag indicating that the normal pattern is displayed in a variable manner, that is, the normal pattern game is being executed (step S1711), and starts the normal pattern fluctuation start process. finish.

It should be noted that the flag during the normal pattern fluctuation display is referred to in order to determine whether the normal pattern game is being executed (during the normal pattern fluctuation display) in step S1501 in the normal pattern game control process of FIG. 22 .

[Universal figure per game control process]
Here, FIG. 135 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game control process per normal figure executed in step S1405 in the main process of FIG. In the game control process per normal pattern, when the result of the lottery per normal pattern is a win, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 315b is performed to allow the game ball to enter the second winning hole 315. A process of switching to and from a restrictive state is executed. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 135, the game control process per normal figure will be described.

<Step S1801>
As shown in FIG. 135, in the normal pattern per game control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag indicating that the normal pattern has been stopped and displayed (that the normal pattern game has ended) is on. (step S1801). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to start the game per normal pattern. It should be noted that the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is set to ON in step S1511 when the normal pattern is stopped and displayed in the normal pattern game control process of FIG.

When the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is ON (step S1801: Yes), that is, when it is time to start the normal pattern per game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1802. On the other hand, when the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S1801: No), that is, when it is not the timing at which the normal pattern per game can be started, the process proceeds to step S1812.

<Step S1802>
When the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is ON (step S1801: Yes), that is, when the normal pattern per game can be started, the MPU 41 indicates that the jackpot game is being executed. It is determined whether or not it is on (step S1802). The jackpot playing flag is set to ON in step S2206 when the jackpot game is started in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, and is set to OFF in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends.

When the jackpot playing flag is ON (step S1802: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the per-universal pattern game control process. That is, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is forcibly terminated by starting, even if the result of the lottery per normal pattern for the normal pattern game is per normal pattern, the game per normal pattern is not started. That is, in the present embodiment, the regular pattern per game is not started during execution of the jackpot game. Of course, a new normal game may be started during execution of the jackpot game.

On the other hand, when the jackpot playing flag is off (step S1802: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1803.

<Step S1803>
When the jackpot playing flag is off (step S1802: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the long open normal pattern hit flag is set to on (step S1803). . The long open general figure per flag is a flag indicating that the result of the lottery per general figure is the long open general figure per figure, and when the result of the lottery per general figure is the long open general figure per normal figure 134 It is set to ON in step S1705 of the figure fluctuation start process. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the lottery per normal pattern for the ended normal pattern game is per long open normal pattern. MPU41, when the long open normal map per flag is set to ON (step S1803: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1804, when the long open normal map per flag is set to off (step S1803: No), the process proceeds to step S1806.

<Steps S1804 and S1805>
If the long open general pattern per flag is set to ON (step S1803: Yes), that is, if the result of the general general pattern per lottery for the finished general pattern game is a long open general pattern, the MPU 41 A value corresponding to 6 seconds, which is the opening time of the electric accessory 315b in the per-figure game (the time during which the game ball can enter the second winning hole 315), is set as the value of the opening time counter (step S1804). The opening time counter is referred to in step S1815 of the game control process per normal figure in order to determine the return timing of the electric auditors 315b. Then, the MPU 41 sets the long open normal map hit flag to OFF (step S1805), and shifts the process to step S1809.

<Step S1806>
If the long open general map per flag is set to off (step S1803: No), that is, if the result of the general general pattern per lottery for the finished general pattern game is not per long open general pattern, the MPU 41, short open general pattern It is determined whether or not the hit flag is set to ON (step S1806). Short open normal map per flag is a flag indicating that the result of the lottery per normal pattern is per short open normal map, and when the result of the lottery per normal pattern is per short open normal map, the normal of FIG. It is set to ON in step S1707 of the figure fluctuation start process. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the lottery per normal pattern for the ended normal pattern game is per short open normal pattern. MPU41, if the short open normal map per flag is set to ON (step S1806: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1807, if the short open normal map per flag is set to OFF (step S1806: No), that is, when the result of the lottery per normal pattern for the ended normal pattern game is out, the process proceeds to step S1812.

<Steps S1807 and S1808>
If the short open normal map per flag is set to ON (step S1806: Yes), that is, if the result of the general pattern per lottery for the finished normal game is per short open normal map, the MPU 41 A value corresponding to 0.1 seconds, which is the opening time of the electric accessory 315b in the per-figure game (the time allowed for the game ball to enter the second winning hole 315), is set as the value of the opening time counter (step S1807). . Then, the MPU 41 sets the short open normal map hit flag to OFF (step S1808), and shifts the process to step S1809.

<Steps S1809 to S1811>
If the result of the lottery per normal figure is a hit, the flag indicating the type per normal pattern (flag per long open normal map or flag per short open normal map) is set to off (step S1805 or S1808), MPU 41, The electric accessory 315b is operated (step S1809). As a result, the second winning hole 315 is opened, and a state of allowing game balls to enter the second winning hole 315 is established. Then, the MPU 41 sets an electric role product open command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric role product 315b is open (step S1810), and indicates that the electric role product 315b is open. The electric accessary product open flag is set to ON (step S1811), and the process proceeds to step S1812.

It should be noted that the electric accessory open command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU41. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 can start an effect indicating that the electric accessory 315b is open to the symbol display unit 341, for example, based on the electric accessory release command.

<Step S1812>
When the process of opening the electric accessory 315b is executed when the result of the lottery per normal drawing is a win (steps S1803 to S1811), or the long open normal map per flag and the short open normal map per flag are both turned off. If it is set (when the result of the lottery per normal pattern is out) (both step S1803 and step S1806 are No), the MPU 41 normally stops displaying the symbol (that the normal pattern game is finished). The normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag shown is set to OFF (step S1812), and the normal pattern per game control process is terminated.

<Step S1813>
When the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S1801: No), the MPU 41 is set to ON when the electric auditors 315b are released in step S1811 of the normal pattern per game control process. It is determined whether or not the open flag is set to ON (step S1813). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game per normal pattern is being executed. MPU41, when the electric accessary product during opening flag is set to ON (step S1813: Yes), that is, when the normal figure per game is being executed, the process proceeds to step S1814. On the other hand, the MPU 41, when the electric auditors product open flag is set to OFF (step S1813: No), that is, when the general pattern per game is not being executed, ends the general pattern per game control process.

<Steps S1814 and S1815>
When the electric accessary product opening flag is set to ON (step S1813: Yes), that is, when the game per general pattern is being executed, the MPU 41 is set in step S1804 or S1807 of the game control process per general pattern. 1 is subtracted from the open time counter value obtained (step S1814), and it is determined whether or not the open time counter value after the subtraction is 0 (step S1815). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to restore the electric accessory 315b. MPU41, when the value of the open time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to restore the electric accessory 315b, the process proceeds to step S1816. On the other hand, MPU41, when the value of the open time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1815: No), that is, when it is not the timing to return the electric auditors 315b, ends the game control process per normal figure.

<Steps S1816 to S1818>
If the value of the open time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, if it is time to restore the electric accessory 315b, the MPU 41 restores the electric accessory 315b (step S1816). As a result, the second winning hole 315 is closed, and entry of game balls into the second winning hole 315 is restricted. Then, the MPU 41 sets an electric role product closing command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric role product 315b is closed (step S1817), and an electric accessory indicating that the electric role product 315b is opened The flag during opening of the role product is set to OFF (step S1818), and the game control process per normal pattern is terminated.

In addition, the electric accessory closing command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU41. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the effect indicating that the electric role product is open, which is executed in the symbol display unit 341, for example, based on the electric role product closing command.

[Special game control process]
In the special figure game control process of the present embodiment, since the gaming machine 10 is configured as a simultaneous variation machine in which the first special figure and the second special figure can fluctuate at the same time, the control processing for the first special figure game and It differs from the special figure game control process of the above-mentioned first embodiment in that the control process for the second special figure game is executed separately. Here, FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game control process of the present embodiment.

<Step S3501>
As shown in FIG. 136, in step S3501, the MPU 41 determines whether the first special symbol variable display flag indicating that the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (during execution of the first special symbol game) is on. determine whether or not The first special figure variable display flag is set to ON in step S3706 when the variable display of the first special figure is started in the first special figure game start processing of FIG. When the first special figure is stopped and displayed in the 1 special figure game ending process, it is set to OFF in step S3823.

MPU41, when the flag during the first special figure fluctuation display is ON (step S3501: Yes), that is, when the first special figure is in the fluctuation display (during execution of the first special figure game), the process step S3507 transition to On the other hand, the MPU 41, when the first special figure fluctuation display flag is off (step S3501: No), that is, when the first special figure is not in the fluctuation display (during execution of the first special figure game), step processing Move to S3502.

<Step S3502>
When the first special figure fluctuation display flag is off (step S3501: No), that is, when the first special figure is not in the fluctuation display (during execution of the first special figure game), the MPU 41 is a special figure reservation storage area It is determined whether or not the first special figure reservation number N stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA (see FIG. 127) of 412b is 0 (step S3502).

MPU41, when the first special figure reservation number N is 0 (step S3502: Yes), that is, when there is no reservation of the right to execute the first special figure game, the process proceeds to step S3508. On the other hand, when the first special figure reservation number N is not 0 (step S3502: No), that is, when there is a reservation of the right to execute the first special figure game, the process proceeds to step S3503.

<Step S3503>
If the first special figure reservation number N is not 0 (step S3502: No), that is, if there is a reservation of the right to execute the first special figure game, the MPU 41 stores the special figure reservation storage area 412b (see FIG. 127) 1st special figure data setting processing regarding the data (1st special figure data) of the 1st special figure propriety information which is remembered is executed (step S3503), processing moves to step S3504. The details of the first special figure data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3504>
In step S3504, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot playing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is set to ON. The jackpot game flag is set to ON when the jackpot game is started in step S2206 of the jackpot game control process in FIG. 29, and is set to OFF when the jackpot game is ended in step S2252 of the jackpot game control process in FIG. be done.

When the jackpot playing flag is set to ON (step S3504: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3505. On the other hand, when the jackpot playing flag is set to OFF (step S3504: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3506.

<Step S3505>
When the jackpot playing flag is set to ON (step S3504: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 executes the first special figure execution area data rewriting process, and the process proceeds to step S3506. Move to execute the first special figure start process.

Here, in the first special figure execution area data rewriting process, the first special figure of the first special figure data stored in the first special figure execution area AEA (see FIG. 127) of the special figure reservation storage area 412b The variable display time is rewritten to the shortest 7 seconds (see FIG. 129) among the variable display times set in the first special figure. Of course, in the first special figure execution area data rewriting process, it is conceivable to rewrite the first special figure fluctuation display time to a time other than 7 seconds, for example, a very short time of 1 second or less.

In addition, when the first special figure execution area data rewriting process is executed, the first special figure start processing of step S3506 is executed, so that even if the jackpot game is being executed, the first special figure A game is executed. This is, as described above, when the transition to a time-saving game state after the end of the big hit game, the hold for the first special figure game is carried over to the a time-saving game state, and the second continuous in the a time-saving game state 1 special figure game is prevented from being executed. In addition, by shortening the first special figure fluctuation display time by the first special figure execution area data rewriting process, it is possible to more reliably prevent the holding of the first special figure game from being carried over to the time saving game state a. . As a result, by intentionally reserving the right to execute the first special game before the start of the jackpot game or during execution, the first special game ends in the normal game state that shifts to the end of the time-saving game state a. It is prevented that the attack attack to make it easier is made. In addition, as a countermeasure against capture hitting, as described above, when the first special figure game is started in the time-saving gaming state triggered by the entry of the game ball into the central first winning opening 314C, the first special figure It is also conceivable to set the variable display time of the game to a short time.

<Step S3506>
When the first special symbol execution area data rewriting process is executed during execution of the jackpot game (step S3506), or when the jackpot game is not executed (step S3504: No), the MPU 41 displays the first special symbol display unit 362 First special figure game start processing for starting the variable display of the first special figure (starting the first special figure game) is executed (step S3506), and the process proceeds to step S3508. The details of the first special figure game start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3507>
When the flag during the first special figure fluctuation display is ON (step S3501: Yes), that is, when the first special figure is in the fluctuation display (during execution of the first special figure game), the MPU 41 is the first special symbol. 1st special figure game ending processing is executed in order to make the 1st special figure stop display (finish the 1st special figure game) in indicatory department 362 (step S3507), processing moves to step S3508. The details of the first special figure game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3508>
When the first special symbol game start processing of step S3506 or the first special symbol game end processing of step S3507 is executed, the MPU 41 determines that the second special symbol is being displayed while the second special symbol is being displayed (during execution of the second special symbol game). It is determined whether or not the flag during the second special figure fluctuation display indicating is ON (step S3508). The second special figure fluctuation display flag is set to ON in step S4005 when the second special figure fluctuation display is started in the second special figure game start processing of FIG. 141 described later, and the second special figure of FIG. When the second special figure is stopped and displayed in the 1 special figure game ending process, it is set to OFF in step S4116.

MPU41, when the flag during the second special figure fluctuation display is ON (step S3508: Yes), that is, when the second special figure is in the fluctuation display (during execution of the second special figure game), the process step S3513 transition to On the other hand, the MPU 41 steps the process when the second special figure variable display flag is off (step S3508: No), that is, when the second special figure is not in the variable display (the second special figure game is being executed). Move to S3509.

<Step S3509>
When the second special figure fluctuation display flag is off (step S3508: No), that is, when the second special figure is not in the fluctuation display (during execution of the second special figure game), the MPU 41 is a special figure reservation storage area It is determined whether or not the second special figure reservation number M stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB (see FIG. 127) of 412b is 0 (step S3509).

MPU41, when the second special figure reservation number M is 0 (step S3509: Yes), that is, when there is no reservation of the right to execute the second special figure game, ends the special figure game control process. On the other hand, when the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S3509: No), that is, when there is a reservation of the right to execute the second special figure game, the process proceeds to step S3510.

<Step S3510>
When the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S3509: No), that is, when there is a reservation of the right to execute the second special figure game, the MPU 41 is a jackpot game indicating that the jackpot game is being executed. It is determined whether or not the middle flag is set to ON (step S3510). The jackpot game flag is set to ON when the jackpot game is started in step S2206 of the jackpot game control process in FIG. 29, and is set to OFF when the jackpot game is ended in step S2252 of the jackpot game control process in FIG. be done.

When the jackpot playing flag is set to ON (step S3510: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the special figure game control process. That is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the second special symbol game is not started. Therefore, the reservation of the right to execute the second special game is carried over to the a time-saving game state that is shifted after the end of the jackpot game. This is a strategy such as when the reservation of the right to execute the second special game is carried over to the reduced working hours gaming state, but the reservation of the right to execute the first special game is carried over to the reduced working hours gaming state. because it cannot. Rather, the reservation of the right to execute the second special game is carried over to the time-saving gaming state, and when the state is shifted to the time-saving gaming state, the game ball is first entered into the second winning hole 315. Since the second special figure game will be started before, it is possible to give the player the benefit of being able to end the a reduced working hours game state at an early stage.

On the other hand, when the jackpot playing flag is set to OFF (step S3510: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3511.

<Step S3511>
If the jackpot playing flag is set to OFF (step S3510: No), that is, if the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 is stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b (see FIG. 127). 2nd special figure data setting processing regarding the data of figure propriety information (2nd special figure data) is executed (step S3511), processing moves to step S3512. The details of the second special figure data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3512>
In step S3512, the MPU 41 executes the second special symbol game start processing for starting the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363 (starting the second special symbol game) (step S3512 ), to end the special figure game control process. The details of the second special figure game start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3513>
When the flag during the second special figure fluctuation display is ON (step S3508: Yes), that is, when the second special figure is in the course of fluctuation display (during execution of the second special figure game), the MPU 41 is the second special symbol. 2nd special figure game ending processing in order to make the 2nd special figure of indicatory department 363 stop display (the 1st special figure game ends) is executed (step S3513), it ends particular special figure game control processing. The details of the second special figure game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[First special figure data setting process]
Here, FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the first special figure data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3503 in the special figure game control process of FIG. In the first special figure data setting process, the storage contents of the special figure reservation storage area 412b (see FIG. 127) set in the RAM412 of the main controller 4 are updated. Hereinafter, the first special figure data setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Steps S3601 to S3604>
As shown in FIG. 137, in step S3601, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the first special figure reservation number N stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA of the first special figure reservation storage area REA, and further , Move the first special figure propriety information from the first reservation area REA1 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA to the first special figure execution area AEA (step S3602). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the first special figure propriety information of the second reservation area REA2 to the fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA one by one (step S3603). Specifically, in step S3603, the first special figure validity information of the second reservation area REA2 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA is moved to the first reservation area REA1, and the first special figure validity of the third reservation area REA3 The information is moved to the second reservation area REA2, and the first special figure propriety information in the fourth reservation area REA4 is moved to the third reservation area REA3. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the first special figure shift command indicating that the first special figure propriety information of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA has been shifted in the RAM 412, The first special figure data setting process is terminated. This first special figure shift command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process executed by the MPU 41 (see FIG. 21). Thereby, the voice lamp control device 5 can change the display number of the pending display corresponding to the first special Figure pending displayed on the pattern display unit 341 based on the first special Figure shift command.

[1st Special Figure Game Start Processing]
Here, FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the first special figure game start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3506 in the special figure game control process of FIG. In the first special symbol game start process, a process for starting the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 (starting the first special symbol game) is executed. Hereinafter, the first special figure game start processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Steps S3701 and S3702>
As shown in FIG. 138, in step S3701, the MPU 41 reads the big hit right/wrong table (see FIG. 128(A)) and executes the right/wrong determination based on the big hit right/wrong table. Furthermore, MPU41 judges whether the result of the said right/wrong determination is time saving design stop deviation (step S3702).

MPU41, if the result of the appropriateness determination is out of time saving design stop (step S3702: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3703, if the result of the appropriateness determination is not out of time saving design stop (step S3702: No), The process moves to step S3704.

<Step S3703>
If the result of the corresponding judgment is the time saving pattern stop off (step S3702: Yes), the MPU 41 turns on the time saving pattern stop off flag indicating that the result of the propriety judgment is the time saving pattern stop off (step S3703), and the process proceeds to step S3704. The time saving pattern stop off flag is referenced in order to determine whether or not to shift to the a time saving game state in step S3806 of FIG. 139 described later.

<Step S3704>
When the time saving pattern stop off flag is set to ON (step S3703), or when the result of the determination is not time saving pattern stop off (step S3702: No), the MPU 41 is the main display unit 36 in the first special figure game The fluctuation display time of the first special figure in the first special symbol display unit 362 is set as the first special figure variation pattern (step S3704), and the process proceeds to step S3705.

It should be noted that the variation display time of the first special figure (first special figure variation pattern), if the result of the success or failure determination in step S3701 is a jackpot, the special figure variation type counter CS1 and the jackpot variation table (Fig. 129 ( A) refer) and is set based on, if the result of the success or failure determination in step S3701 is out, and the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1, according to the game state at the start of the first special figure game It is set based on the selected first special figure deviation variation table A (see FIG. 129(B)) or first special figure deviation variation table B (see FIG. 129(C)).

<Step S3705>
In step S3705, MPU41, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the first special figure game, which is the result of the determination in step S3701, and the first special figure including the first special figure variation pattern set in step S3704 A figure variation pattern command is set in the RAM 412, and the process proceeds to step S3706. The first special figure variation pattern command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU41. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can execute a special figure game effect in the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the first special figure variation pattern command.

<Step S3706>
In step S3706, the MPU 41 starts the first special symbol game by starting the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display portion 362 of the main display portion 36, and shifts the processing to step S3707.

<Step S3707>
In step S3707, the MPU 41 sets on the first special figure variable display flag indicating that the first special figure is being displayed in a variable manner (the first special figure game is being executed), and the process proceeds to step S3708. do. 136 in the special symbol game control processing, the first special symbol is displayed in the first special symbol display unit 362 of the main display unit 36 while the first special symbol is being displayed (the first special symbol game is being executed).

<Step S3708>
In step S3708, the MPU 41 turns off the first special figure fluctuation stop flag indicating that the first special figure has been stopped from fluctuating (the first special figure game has ended), and starts the first special figure fluctuation start processing. finish.

[First special game end processing]
Here, FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the first special figure game ending process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3507 in the special figure game control process of FIG. In the first special symbol game ending process, a process for stopping and displaying the first special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 (ending the first special symbol game) is executed. Hereinafter, the first special figure game end processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S3801>
As shown in FIG. 139, in step S3801, the MPU 41 is set as the first special figure variation pattern set in the first special figure variation pattern setting process of step S3704 in the first special figure game start process of FIG. It is determined whether or not the first special figure fluctuation display time has elapsed, that is, whether or not it is time to end the first special figure game.

MPU41, when the first special figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (step S3801: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the first special figure game, the process proceeds to step S3802. On the other hand, when the first special figure fluctuation display time has not passed (step S3801: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the first special figure game, the MPU 41 ends the first special figure game end processing. .

<Step S3802>
When the first special figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (step S3801: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the first special figure game, the MPU 41 is the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the first special figure game. is a jackpot (step S3802). Whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the first special figure game is a jackpot is stored in the first special figure execution area AEA (see FIG. 127) of the special figure reservation storage area 412b, for example. It is judged based on the propriety judgment information of the special figure data.

If the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the first special game is a jackpot (step S3802: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3803, and the jackpot lottery notified by the first special game If the result is not a jackpot (step S3802: No), the process proceeds to step S3805.

<Steps S3803 and S3804>
When the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the first special game is a jackpot (step S3802: Yes), the MPU 41 determines that the result of the first special jackpot lottery notified by the first special game to be started is The first special figure jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot is set to ON (step S3803). The first special figure jackpot flag is referenced to determine whether or not to start a jackpot game in step S4201 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 143 described later.

Furthermore, the MPU 41 clears the ceiling number counter indicating the number of executions of the special figure game in the normal game state (step S3804), and shifts the process to step S3820. It should be noted that the ceiling number counter is specified number of times (450 times in this embodiment) in step S3911 in the first special figure game end process or step S4109 in the second special figure game end process of FIG. Based on the fact that the figure game is executed, it is referred to determine whether or not to shift to the b time saving game state.

<Step S3805>
When the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the first special game is not a jackpot (step S3802: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state is set to ON. It judges (step S3805). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game state at the end of the first special figure game is the normal game state.

When the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S3805: Yes), that is, when the game state at the end of the first special figure game is the normal game state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3806. . On the other hand, when the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S3805: No), that is, when the game state at the end of the first special figure game is not the normal game state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3813. do.

<Step S3806>
If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S3805: Yes), that is, when the game state at the end of the first special figure game (at the time of stop display of the first special figure) is the normal game state, The MPU 41 determines whether or not the time saving pattern stop off flag indicating that the result of the jackpot lottery is the time saving pattern stop off is set to ON (step S3806). That is, when the game state when the first special game ends (stop display of the first special game) is the normal game state, it is determined whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is the time-saving pattern stoppage. That is, in the present embodiment, the game state is not at the start of the first special symbol game (at the start of variation of the first special symbol), but at the end of the first special symbol game (when the variation of the first special symbol is stopped). Based on this, it is determined whether or not to shift to the c time saving gaming state.

MPU41, if the time saving pattern stop off flag is set to ON (step S3806: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3807, if the time saving pattern stop off flag is set to off (step S3806: No) , the process proceeds to step S3810.

<Steps S3807 to S3809>
When the time saving pattern stop off flag is set to ON (step S3805: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the c time saving game state transition flag for shifting the game state from the normal game state to the c time saving game state to ON. Along with (step S3807), the time saving pattern stop off flag is set to OFF (steps S3807 and S3808). Then, the MPU 41 sets the time saving symbol stop deviation flag to OFF (step S3809), and ends the first special figure game end processing.

<Steps S3810 to S3812>
When the time saving pattern stop off flag is set to OFF (step S3806: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the value of the ceiling number counter (step S3810). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ceiling number counter value after addition is 450 (step S3811), that is, whether or not the number of executions of the special figure game in the normal game state has reached the specified number of times (450 times). to judge.

MPU41, when the value of the ceiling counter after the addition is 450 (step S3811: Yes), that is, when the number of executions of the special figure game in the normal game state reaches the specified number of times (450 times), the game state The b time saving game state flag for shifting from the normal game state to the b time saving game state is set to ON (step S3812), and the process proceeds to step S3820. The b time saving game state flag is referenced in step S4302 in the game state transition processing in FIG. 144 to determine whether the game state is to be shifted from the normal game state to the b time saving game state.

On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3820 when the value of the ceiling number counter after addition is not 450 (step S3811: No).

<Steps S3813 and S3814>
When the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S3805: No), that is, when the game state at the end of the first special symbol game is not the normal game state, the MPU 41 determines that the result of the jackpot lottery is time saving symbol stop. It is determined whether or not the time saving pattern stop deviation flag indicating that it is out is set to ON (step S3813).

When the time saving pattern stop off flag is set to ON (step S3813: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the time saving pattern stop off flag to off (step S3814), and shifts the process to step S3815. On the other hand, MPU41 skips step S3814 and transfers a process to step S3815, when the time saving design stop deviation flag is set to OFF (step S3813: No).

<Step S3815>
When the time saving pattern stop off flag is set to OFF (step S3814), or when the time saving pattern stop off flag is set to off (step S3813: No), the MPU 41 is time saving indicating that it is in the time saving gaming state It is determined whether or not the game state flag is set to ON (step S3815). Here, the time saving game state flag is a time saving game state flag indicating that it is a time saving game state, b time saving game state flag indicating that it is b time saving game state, and c indicating that it is c time saving game state Includes a time-saving gaming state flag. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not any one of the time saving game state flag a, the time saving game state flag b and the time saving game state flag c is set to ON. In addition, the a time saving gaming state flag is set to ON when the game state is shifted to the a time saving gaming state in step S4319 in the game state transition processing of FIG. 144, and the b time saving gaming state flag is set to the game of FIG. In step S4303 in the state transition process, the game state is set to ON when the game state is shifted to the b time reduction game state, and the c time reduction game state flag is set to the c time reduction game state flag in step S4308 in the game state transition process of FIG. It is set to ON when transitioning to the game state.

MPU41, when the time saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3815: Yes), that is, when it is a time saving game state, b time saving game state or c time saving game state, the process proceeds to step S3816. When the time saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3815: No), that is, when it is not the time saving gaming state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3820.

<Steps S3816 and S3817>
If the time saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3815: Yes), that is, if it is a time saving game state, b time saving game state or c time saving game state, the MPU 41 is the number of remaining games in the time saving game state 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving counter indicating (step S3816). Furthermore, MPU41 judges whether the value of the time saving counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3817). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to shift the game state from the time-saving game state to the normal game state based on the execution of the special figure game of the prescribed number of times.

MPU41, when the value of the time saving counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3817: Yes), that is, when the game state is shifted from the time saving game state to the normal game state based on the execution of the special figure game of the specified number of times, processing to step S3818. On the other hand, MPU41 transfers a process to step S3820, when the value of the time saving counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3817: No).

<Steps S3818 and S3819>
If the value of the time saving counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3817: Yes), that is, when the game state is shifted from the time saving game state to the normal game state based on the execution of the special figure game of the specified number of times, the MPU 41 is the time saving The time saving game state flag indicating that it is in the game state is set to OFF (step S3818). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets on the normal game state transition flag for shifting the game state from the time saving game state to the normal game state (step S3819), and shifts the process to step S3820.

<Steps S3820 to S3823>
In step S3820, the MPU 41 stops and displays the first special symbol in the first special symbol display portion 362 of the main display portion 36 in a mode according to the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery corresponding to the first special symbol game. (step S3820). Then, the MPU 41 sets on the first special figure fluctuation stop flag indicating that the first special figure has been stopped and displayed (step S3821), and the voice lamp control device that the first special figure has been stopped and displayed Set the first special figure fluctuation stop command to be notified to 5 (step S3822), and further, the first special figure fluctuation display indicating that the first special figure is fluctuating display (the first special figure game is being executed) The medium flag is set to OFF (step S3823), and the first special figure game control process is terminated.

[Second special figure data setting process]
Here, FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the second special figure data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3511 in the special figure game control process of FIG. In the second special figure data setting process, the storage contents of the special figure reservation storage area 412b (see FIG. 127) set in the RAM412 of the main controller 4 are updated. Hereinafter, the first special figure data setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Steps S3901 to S3904>
As shown in FIG. 140, in step S3901, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the second special figure reservation number M stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB of the second special figure reservation storage area REB, and further , Move the second special figure propriety information from the first reservation area REB1 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB to the second special figure execution area AEB (step S3902). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the second special figure propriety information of the second reservation area REB2 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB one by one (step S3903). Specifically, in step S3903, the second special figure validity information of the second reservation area REB2 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB is moved to the first reservation area REB1, and the second special figure validity of the third reservation area REB3 The information is moved to the second reservation area REB2, and the second special figure propriety information of the fourth reservation area REB4 is moved to the third reservation area REB3. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets a second special figure shift command indicating that the second special figure propriety information of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB has been shifted in the RAM 412, The second special figure data setting process is ended. This second special figure shift command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process executed by the MPU 41 (see FIG. 21). Thereby, the voice lamp control device 5 can change the display number of the pending display corresponding to the second special Figure pending displayed on the pattern display section 341 based on the second special Figure shift command.

[Second Special Game Start Processing]
Here, FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the second special figure game start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3512 in the special figure game control process of FIG. In the second special symbol game start process, a process for starting the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363 (starting the second special symbol game) is executed. Hereinafter, the second special figure game start processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Steps S4001 and S4002>
As shown in FIG. 141, in step S4001, the MPU 41 reads out the big hit right/wrong table (see FIG. 128(A)) and executes the right/wrong determination based on the big hit right/wrong table. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the variation display time of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 in the second special symbol game as the second special symbol variation pattern (step S4002), and processes to step S4003.

In addition, the variation display time of the second special figure (second special figure variation pattern), if the result of the success or failure determination in step S4001 is a jackpot, the special figure variation type counter CS1 and the jackpot variation table (Fig. 129 ( A) See) and is set based on, if the result of the success or failure determination in step S4001 is out, and the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1, according to the game state at the start of the second special figure game It is set based on the selected normal game state second special figure deviation table (see FIG. 129 (D)) or the time saving game state second special figure deviation table (see FIG. 129 (E)).

<Step S4003>
In step S4003, MPU41, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the second special figure game, which is the result of the determination in step S4001, and the second special figure including the second special figure variation pattern set in step S4002 A figure fluctuation pattern command is set in the RAM 412, and the process proceeds to step S4004. The second special figure variation pattern command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU41. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can execute a special figure game effect in the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the second special figure variation pattern command.

<Step S4004>
In step S4004, the MPU 41 starts the second special symbol game by starting the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display portion 363 of the main display portion 36, and shifts the process to step S4005.

<Step S4005>
In step S4005, the MPU 41 sets on the second special figure variable display flag indicating that the second special figure is being displayed in a variable manner (the second special figure game is being executed), and the process proceeds to step S4006. do. 136 in the special symbol game control processing, the second special symbol is displayed in the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 while the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable display (the second special symbol game is being executed).

<Step S4006>
In step S4006, the MPU 41 turns off the second special figure fluctuation stop flag indicating that the second special figure has been stopped from fluctuating (the second special figure game has ended), and starts the second special figure fluctuation start processing. finish.

[Second special game end processing]
Here, FIG. 142 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the second special figure game ending process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3513 in the special figure game control process of FIG. In the second special symbol game ending process, a process for stopping and displaying the second special symbol in the second special symbol display section 363 (ending the second special symbol game) is executed. Hereinafter, the second special figure game end processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S4101>
As shown in FIG. 142, in step S4101, the MPU 41 is set as the second special figure variation pattern set in the second special figure variation pattern setting process of step S4102 in the second special figure game start process of FIG. It is determined whether or not the second special figure fluctuation display time has elapsed, that is, whether or not it is time to end the second special figure game.

MPU41, when the second special figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (step S4101: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the second special figure game, the process proceeds to step S4102. On the other hand, when the second special figure fluctuation display time has not elapsed (step S4101: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the second special figure game, the MPU 41 ends the second special figure game end processing. .

<Step S4102>
When the second special figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (step S4101: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the second special figure game, the MPU 41 is the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the second special figure game is a big hit (step S4102). Whether or not the result of the big hit lottery notified by the second special game is a big hit is stored in the second special figure execution area AEB (see FIG. 127) of the special figure reservation storage area 412b, for example. It is judged based on the propriety judgment information of the special figure data.

When the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the second special game is a jackpot (step S4102: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4103, and the jackpot lottery notified by the second special game If the result is not a big hit (step S4102: No), the process proceeds to step S4105.

<Steps S4103 and S4104>
When the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the second special game is a jackpot (step S4102: Yes), the MPU 41 determines that the result of the second special jackpot lottery notified by the second special game to be started is A second special figure jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot is set to ON (step S4103). The second special figure jackpot flag is referenced to determine whether or not to start a jackpot game in step S4204 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 143 described later.

Furthermore, the MPU 41 clears the ceiling number counter indicating the number of executions of the special figure game in the normal game state (step S4104), and shifts the process to step S4117. It should be noted that the ceiling number of times counter, in step S3911 in the first special figure game end processing of FIG. is referred to determine whether or not to shift to the b time-saving game state based on the execution.

<Steps S4105 and S4106>
If the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the second special game is not a big hit (step S4102: No), the MPU 41 turns on the time saving pattern stop off flag indicating that the jackpot lottery result is time saving pattern stop off. It is determined whether or not it is set (step S4105).

MPU41, when the time saving design stop off flag is set to ON (step S4105: Yes), sets the time saving design stop off flag to off (step S4106), and shifts the processing to step S4107. On the other hand, MPU41 skips step S4106 and transfers a process to step S4107, when the time saving design stop deviation flag is set to OFF (step S4105: No).

<Step S4107>
If the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the second special game is not a jackpot (step S4102: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state is set to ON. It judges (step S4107). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game state at the end of the second special figure game is the normal game state.

When the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S4107: Yes), that is, when the game state at the end of the second special figure game is the normal game state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4108. . On the other hand, when the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S4107: No), that is, when the game state at the end of the second special figure game is not the normal game state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4112. do.

<Steps S4108 to S4111>
If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S4107: Yes), that is, when the game state at the end of the second special figure game (at the time of stop display of the second special figure) is the normal game state, The MPU 41 adds 1 to the value of the ceiling number counter (step S4108). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ceiling number counter value after the addition is 450 (step S4109), that is, whether or not the number of executions of the special figure game in the normal game state has reached the specified number of times (450 times). to judge.

MPU41, when the value of the ceiling number counter after the addition is 450 (step S4109: Yes), that is, when the number of executions of the special figure game in the normal game state reaches the specified number of times (450 times), the game state The b time-saving game state flag that shifts from the normal game state to the b time-saving game state is set to ON (step S4110), the ceiling number counter is cleared (step S4111), and the process proceeds to step S4117. The b time saving game state flag is referenced in step S4302 in the game state transition processing in FIG. 144 to determine whether the game state is to be shifted from the normal game state to the b time saving game state.

On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4117 when the value of the ceiling number counter after addition is not 450 (step S4107: No).

<Step S4112>
When the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S4107: No), that is, when the game state at the end of the second special figure game is not the normal game state, the MPU 41 indicates that it is the time saving game state. It is determined whether or not the time saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4112). Here, the time saving game state flag is a time saving game state flag indicating that it is a time saving game state, b time saving game state flag indicating that it is b time saving game state, and c indicating that it is c time saving game state Includes a time-saving gaming state flag. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not any one of the time saving game state flag a, the time saving game state flag b and the time saving game state flag c is set to ON. In addition, the a time saving gaming state flag is set to ON when the game state is shifted to the a time saving gaming state in step S4319 in the game state transition processing of FIG. 144, and the b time saving gaming state flag is set to the game of FIG. In step S4303 in the state transition process, the game state is set to ON when the game state is shifted to the b time reduction game state, and the c time reduction game state flag is set to the c time reduction game state flag in step S4308 in the game state transition process of FIG. It is set to ON when transitioning to the game state.

MPU41, when the time saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4112: Yes), that is, when it is a time saving game state, b time saving game state or c time saving game state, the process proceeds to step S4113. MPU41, when the time saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S4112: No), that is, when it is not the time saving game state, the process proceeds to step S4117.

<Steps S4113 and S4114>
When the time saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4112: Yes), that is, when it is a time saving game state, b time saving game state or c time saving game state, the MPU 41 determines the number of remaining games in the time saving game state. 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving counter indicating (step S4113). Furthermore, MPU41 judges whether the value of the time saving counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4114). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to shift the game state from the time-saving game state to the normal game state based on the execution of the special figure game of the prescribed number of times.

MPU41, when the value of the time saving counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4114: Yes), that is, when the game state is shifted from the time saving game state to the normal game state based on the execution of the special figure game of the specified number of times, processing to step S4115. On the other hand, MPU41 transfers a process to step S4117, when the value of the time saving counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4114: No).

<Steps S4115 and S4116>
If the value of the time saving counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4114: Yes), that is, when the game state is shifted from the time saving game state to the normal game state based on the execution of the special figure game of the specified number of times, the MPU 41 is the time saving The time saving game state flag indicating that it is in the game state is set to OFF (step S4115). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets on the normal game state transition flag for shifting the game state from the time saving game state to the normal game state (step S4116), and shifts the process to step S4116.

<Steps S4117 to S4120>
In step S4117, the MPU 41 stops and displays the second special symbol in the second special symbol display portion 363 of the main display portion 36 in a manner according to the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery corresponding to the second special symbol game. (step S4117). Then, the MPU 41 sets on the second special figure fluctuation stop flag indicating that the second special figure has been stopped and displayed (step S4118), and the voice lamp control device that the second special figure has been stopped and displayed Set the second special figure fluctuation stop command to be notified to 5 (step S4119), further second special figure fluctuation display indicating that the second special figure is fluctuating display (second special figure game is being executed) The middle flag is set to OFF (step S4120), and the second special figure game control process is ended.

[Jackpot game control process]
Here, FIG. 143 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in step S1407 in the main process of FIG. In the jackpot game control process, a process for controlling the progress of the jackpot game such as opening/closing control of the opening/closing door 319 provided in the variable winning opening 316 is executed. Hereinafter, the jackpot game control process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S4201>
As shown in FIG. 143, in step S4201, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the first special figure jackpot flag is set to ON. The first special figure jackpot flag is a flag indicating that the result of the first special figure jackpot lottery for the finished first special figure game is a jackpot, and in step S3803 in the first special figure game end processing of FIG. , is set to ON when the result of the first special jackpot lottery for the finished first special game is a jackpot.

When the first special figure jackpot flag is set to ON (step S4201: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4202, and when the first special figure jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S4201: No), the process proceeds to step S4203.

<Step S4202>
When the first special figure jackpot flag is set to ON (step S4201: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first special figure jackpot flag to OFF (step S4102), and shifts the process to step S4205.

<Step S4203>
When the first special figure jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S4201: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second special figure jackpot flag is set to ON (step S4203). The second special figure jackpot flag is a flag indicating that the result of the second special figure jackpot lottery for the finished second special figure game is a jackpot, and in step S4103 in the second special figure game end processing of FIG. , is set to ON when the result of the second special jackpot lottery for the finished second special game is a jackpot.

When the second special figure jackpot flag is set to ON (step S4203: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4204, and when the second special figure jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S4203: No), the process proceeds to step S4208.

<Step S4204>
When the second special figure jackpot flag is set to ON (step S4203: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the second special figure jackpot flag to OFF (step S4104), and shifts the process to step S4205.

<Step S4205>
In step S4205, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot playing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is ON (step S4205). The MPU 41 moves the process to step S4206 when the jackpot playing flag is on (step S4205: Yes), and moves to step S2204 in FIG. 29 when the jackpot playing flag is off (step S4205: No). Then, a process for starting a jackpot game is executed.

<Steps S4206 and S4207>
When the jackpot playing flag is ON (step S4205: Yes), the jackpot game based on the fact that the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special game or the second special game ended during the execution of the jackpot game is a jackpot. , set the jackpot game pending flag for execution after the end of the jackpot game currently being executed to ON (step S4206), and add 1 to the value of the jackpot pending counter indicating the number of pending jackpot games (step S4207) . It should be noted that the jackpot game suspension flag is referenced to determine whether or not there is an unexecuted jackpot game in step S4209 of the jackpot game control process in FIG. It is subtracted when the jackpot game held in is started. And MPU41 transfers to FIG.29 S2211 and performs the process which continues a jackpot game.

If the result of the first special jackpot lottery for the first special game started during execution of the jackpot game is a jackpot, it is conceivable to rewrite the result of the first special jackpot lottery as a loss.

<Step S4208>
When the second special figure jackpot flag is set to off (step S4203: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot playing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is on (step S4208). When the jackpot playing flag is ON (step S4208: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2211 in FIG. 29 and executes the process of continuing the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the jackpot playing flag is off (step S4208: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4209.

<Step S4209>
When the jackpot playing flag is off (step S4208: No), the MPU 41 is based on the fact that the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special game or the second special game ended during the execution of the jackpot game is a jackpot. It is determined whether or not the jackpot game suspension flag for executing the jackpot game after the end of the jackpot game currently being executed is set to ON (step S4209).

MPU41, when the jackpot game suspension flag is set to ON (step S4209: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4210, when the jackpot game suspension flag is set to OFF (step S4209: No), the The jackpot game control process is terminated.

<Steps S4210 to S4212>
When the jackpot game pending flag is set to ON (step S4209: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot pending counter indicating the number of jackpot games pending (step S4210), and the value of the jackpot pending counter after the subtraction. It is determined whether the value is 0 (step S4211).

When the value of the jackpot pending counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4210: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot pending flag to OFF (step S4212), proceeds to step S2204 in FIG. 29, and starts the jackpot game. Execute the process. On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot holding counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4210: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2204 in FIG. 29 and executes the process of starting the jackpot game.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, FIGS. 144 to 147 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in step S1408 of the main process of FIG. In the game state transition process, a process for controlling the transition of various game states (normal game state, time-saving game state, and jackpot game state) is executed. The game state transition processing will be described below with reference to FIGS. 144 to 147. FIG.

<Step S4301>
As shown in FIG. 144, in step S4301, first, it is determined whether or not the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state is set to ON. MPU41, when the gaming state flag is set to ON normally (step S4301: Yes), the processing proceeds to step S4302, and when the gaming state flag is set to OFF normally (step S4301: No), processing to step S4317.

<Step S4302>
When the normal gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4301: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the b time saving gaming state shift flag for shifting to the b time saving gaming state is set to ON (step S4302 ). MPU41, when the b time-saving gaming state transition flag is set to ON (step S4302: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4303, and when the b time-saving gaming state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4302: No), the process proceeds to step S4307.

<Steps S4303 to S4306>
When the b time saving gaming state transition flag is set to ON (step S4302: Yes), the MPU 41 sets on the b time saving gaming state flag indicating the b time saving gaming state (step S4303), b Set the b time-saving game state command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that it has been shifted to the time-saving game state (step S4304). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the b time saving game state transition flag to OFF (step S4305), sets the normal game state flag to OFF indicating that it is a normal game state (step S4306), and performs the game state transition process. finish.

<Step S4307>
When the b time saving gaming state transition flag is set to off (step S4302: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the c time saving gaming state transition flag for shifting to the c time saving gaming state is set to on ( step S4307). MPU41, when the c time reduction gaming state transition flag is set to ON (step S4307: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4308, when the c time reduction gaming state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4307: No), the process proceeds to step S4312.

<Steps S4308 to S4311>
When the c time saving gaming state transition flag is set to ON (step S4307: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the c time saving gaming state flag indicating that it is in the c time saving gaming state to ON (step S4308), c A c time-saving game state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the game state has been shifted to the time-saving game state is set (step S4309). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the c time saving game state transition flag to OFF (step S4310), sets the normal game state flag to OFF indicating that it is in the normal game state (step S4311), and performs the game state transition process. finish.

<Step S4312>
When the c time saving game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4307: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game start flag indicating that the jackpot game is started is set to ON ( step S4312). When the jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S4312: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4313, and when the jackpot game start flag is set to OFF (step S4312: No), the End the game state transition process.

<Steps S4313 to S4316>
When the jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S4312: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag indicating the jackpot game state to ON (step S4313), and shifts to the jackpot game state. A jackpot game state transition command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that it has been done (step S4314). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag to OFF (step S4315), sets the normal game state flag to OFF (step S4316), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S4317>
When the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S4301: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game state flag indicating the jackpot game state is set to ON (step S4317). . When the jackpot game state flag is set to ON (step S4317: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4318, and when the jackpot game state flag is set to OFF (step S4317: No), the process to step S4322 in FIG.

<Step S4318>
When the jackpot game state flag is set to ON (step S4317: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game end flag indicating that the jackpot game ends is set to ON (step S4318). . When the jackpot game end flag is set to ON (step S4318: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4319, and when the jackpot game end flag is set to OFF (step S4318: No), the End the game state transition process.

<Steps S4319 to S4321>
When the jackpot game end flag is set to ON (step S4318: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the a time saving game state flag indicating that it is a time saving game state to ON (step S4319), a time saving game A time-saving game state command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the state has been changed (step S4320). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag to OFF (step S4321), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S4322>
When the jackpot gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S4317: No), MPU 41, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S4322). MPU41, when a time saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4322: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4323, when a time saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S4322: No) , the process proceeds to step S4333 in FIG.

<Step S4323>
When the time-saving game state flag a is set to ON (step S4322: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal game state transition flag for shifting to the normal game state is set to ON (step S4323). . When the normal game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4323: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4324, and when the normal game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4323: No). , the process proceeds to step S4328.

<Steps S4324 to S4327>
When the normal game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4323: Yes), the MPU 41 sets ON the normal game state flag indicating that it is in the normal game state (step S4324), and enters the normal game state. A normal game state transition command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the transition is set (step S4325). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag to OFF (step S4326), sets the time saving game state flag to OFF (step S4327), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S4328>
When the normal game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4323: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game start flag indicating that the jackpot game is started is set to ON (step S4328). When the jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S4328: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4329, and when the jackpot game start flag is set to OFF (step S4328: No), the End the game state transition process.

<Steps S4329 to S4332>
When the jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S4328: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag indicating the jackpot game state to ON (step S4329), and shifts to the jackpot game state. A jackpot game state transition command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that it has been done (step S4330). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag to OFF (step S4331), sets the time saving game state flag to OFF (step S4332), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S4333>
When the a time saving gaming state flag is set to off (step S4322: No), the MPU 41, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is (step S4333). If the b time saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4333: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4334, and if the b time saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S4333: No) , the process proceeds to step S4344 in FIG.

<Step S4334>
When the b time saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4333: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal game state transition flag for shifting to the normal game state is set to ON (step S4334). . When the normal game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4334: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4335, and when the normal game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4334: No). , the process proceeds to step S4339.

<Steps S4335 to S4338>
When the normal game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4334: Yes), the MPU 41 sets ON the normal game state flag indicating that it is in the normal game state (step S4335), and enters the normal game state. A normal game state transition command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the transition is set (step S4336). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag to OFF (step S4337), sets the b time saving game state flag to OFF (step S4338), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S4339>
When the normal game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4334: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game start flag indicating that the jackpot game is started is set to ON (step S4339). When the jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S4339: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4340, and when the jackpot game start flag is set to OFF (step S4339: No), the End the game state transition process.

<Steps S4340 to S4343>
When the jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S4339: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag indicating the jackpot game state to ON (step S4340), and shifts to the jackpot game state. A jackpot game state transition command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that it has been done (step S4341). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag to OFF (step S4342), sets the b time saving game state flag to OFF (step S4343), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S4344>
When the b time saving gaming state flag is set to off (step S4333: No), the MPU 41, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is (step S4344). MPU41, when the c time reduction gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4344: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4345, when the c time reduction gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S4344: No) , the game state transition process ends.

<Step S4345>
When the c time saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4344: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal game state transition flag for shifting to the normal game state is set to ON (step S4345). . When the normal game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4345: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4346, and when the normal game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4345: No). , the process proceeds to step S4350.

<Steps S4346 to S4349>
When the normal game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4345: Yes), the MPU 41 sets ON the normal game state flag indicating that it is in the normal game state (step S4346), and enters the normal game state. A normal game state transition command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the transition is set (step S4347). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag to OFF (step S4348), sets the c time saving game state flag to OFF (step S4349), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S4350>
When the normal game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4345: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game start flag indicating that the jackpot game is started is set to ON (step S4350). When the jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S4350: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4351, and when the jackpot game start flag is set to OFF (step S4350: No), the End the game state transition process.

<Steps S4351 to S4354>
When the jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S4350: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag indicating the jackpot game state to ON (step S4351), and shifts to the jackpot game state. A jackpot game state transition command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that it has been done (step S4352). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag to OFF (step S4353), sets the c time saving game state flag to OFF (step S4354), and ends the game state transition process.

[Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device 5]
The processing of the audio ramp control device 5 in this embodiment is one of the procedures of the command determination processing because the gaming machine 10 is a simultaneous variation machine in which the first special figure and the second special figure can be varied at the same time. part is different from that of the first embodiment described above.

[Command judgment processing]
Here, FIGS. 148 and 149 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in step S2703 of the secondary timer interrupt processing of FIG. The game state transition processing will be described below with reference to FIGS. 148 and 149. FIG.

<Step S4401>
In the command determination process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not a command has been received in step S4401. If the MPU 51 has received a command (step S4401: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4402, and if it has not received a command (step S4401: No), the command determination process ends.

<Steps S4402 and S4403>
When the command is received (step S4401: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a normal game state transition command indicating that the game state has transitioned to the normal game state (step S4402). When the received command is the normal game state transition command (step S4402: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state to ON (step S4403), and terminates the command determination process. do. It should be noted that the normal game state flag is referenced in step S4901 of the first variation type (production pattern) setting process in FIG. 151 in order to determine whether or not the game state is the normal game state. On the other hand, when the received command is not the normal game state transition command (step S4402: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4404.

<Steps S4404 and S4405>
When the received command is not the normal game state transition command (step S4402: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game state transition command indicating that the received command has shifted to the jackpot game state (step S4404 ). When the received command is a jackpot game state transition command (step S4404: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a jackpot game state flag indicating a jackpot game state to ON (step S4405), and ends the command determination process. do. On the other hand, when the received command is not a jackpot game state transition command (step S4404: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4406.

<Steps S4406 to S4408>
If the received command is not a jackpot game state transition command (step S4404: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an a time-reduction game state transition command indicating that the a time-reduction game state has transitioned ( step S4406). MPU51, when the received command is a time-saving game state transition command (step S4406: Yes), sets the a time-saving game state flag indicating that it is a time-saving game state to ON (step S4407). It should be noted that the a time-saving gaming state flag, in order to determine whether or not the a time-saving gaming state, step S4501 of the time-saving game number counter processing of FIG. 150, or the first variation type (production pattern) setting processing of FIG. is referred to in step S4603. Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets an a time-reduction game number counter indicating the remaining time-reduction game number in the a time-reduction game state (step S4408), and ends the command determination process. On the other hand, MPU51 transfers a process to step S4409, when the received command is not a time saving game state transition command (step S4406: No).

<Steps S4409 to S4411>
If the received command is not a time-saving gaming state transition command (step S4406: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a b time-saving gaming state transition command indicating that the b time-saving gaming state has transitioned. (Step S4409). MPU51, when the received command is b time-saving gaming state transition command (step S4409: Yes), sets the b time-saving gaming state flag indicating that it is b time-saving gaming state to ON (step S4410). It should be noted that the b time-reduction gaming state flag, in order to determine whether it is in the b time-reduction gaming state, step S4505 of the time-reduction game number counter processing in FIG. 150, or the first variation type (production pattern) setting processing in FIG. is referred to in step S4605. Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets a b time saving game number counter indicating the remaining time saving game number in the b time saving game state (step S4411), and ends the command determination process. On the other hand, MPU51 transfers a process to step S4412, when the received command is not b time saving game state transition command (step S4409: No).

<Steps S4412 to S4414>
When the received command is not the b time saving gaming state transition command (step S4409: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the c time saving gaming state transition command indicating that the c time saving gaming state has been entered. (Step S4412). When the received command is the c time saving game state transition command (step S4412: Yes), the MPU 51 sets on the c time saving game state flag indicating that it is in the c time saving game state (step S4413). In addition, the c time saving game state flag is referred to in step S4509 of the time saving game number counter processing in FIG. 150 in order to determine whether or not the c time saving game state. Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets a c time-saving game number counter indicating the remaining time-saving game number in the c time-saving game state (step S4414), and terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, MPU51 transfers a process to FIG.149 S4415, when the received command is not c time saving game state transition command (step S4412: No).

<Step S4415>
If the received command is not the c time-saving gaming state transition command (step S4412: No), as shown in FIG. 149, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the first special figure variation pattern command (step S4415). MPU51, if the received command is the first special figure variation pattern command (step S4415: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4416, if the received command is not the first special figure variation pattern command (step S4415: No ), and the process proceeds to step S4421.

<Step S4416>
When the received command is the first special figure variation pattern command (step S4415: Yes), the MPU 51 executes time saving game number counter processing for managing the time saving game number counter (step S4416), and shifts the process to step S4417. do. Hereinafter, the time-saving game number counter processing will be described with reference to FIG.

[Time-saving game number counter processing]
Here, FIG. 150 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the time-saving game number counter process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 149 .

<Step S4501>
In the time saving game number counter processing of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 150, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the a time saving game state flag indicating that it is in the a time saving game state is set to ON (step S4501). It should be noted that the a time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON in step S4407 when the a time-saving gaming state transition command is received in the command determination process of FIG.

MPU51, when a time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4501: Yes), that is, when it is a time-saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step S4502. On the other hand, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4505 when the a time saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S4501: No), that is, when it is not a time saving game state.

<Steps S4502 to S4504>
If the a time-reduction gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4501: Yes), that is, if it is in the a time-reduction gaming state, the MPU 51 indicates the number of remaining special figure games in the a time-reduction gaming state. The value of the counter is subtracted by 1 (step S4502), and it is determined whether or not the value of the a time-saving game number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4503). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the last special figure game in the a reduced working hours gaming state.

MPU51, when the value of a time-saving game number counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4503: Yes), that is, when it is the last special figure game in a time-saving game state, a time-saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S4504), and ends the time-saving game counter process. On the other hand, MPU51, if the value of the time-saving game number counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4503: No), that is, if it is not the last special figure game in the time-saving gaming state, the time-saving game number counter processing is terminated. .

<Step S4505>
If the time-saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S4501: No), that is, if it is not a time-saving gaming state, whether the b time-saving gaming state flag indicating that it is in the b time-saving gaming state is set to ON. (step S4505). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is in the b time-saving gaming state. It should be noted that the b time saving game state flag is set to ON in step S4410 when the b time saving game state transition command is received in the command determination process of FIG.

MPU51, when b time saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4505: Yes), namely, when it is b time saving game state, moves processing to step S4506. On the other hand, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4509 when the b time saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S4505: No), that is, when it is not the b time saving gaming state.

<Steps S4506 to S4508>
If the b time-reduction gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4505: Yes), that is, if it is in the b time-reduction gaming state, the MPU 51 indicates the number of remaining special figure games in the b time-reduction gaming state. The value of the counter is subtracted by 1 (step S4506), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time-saving game number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4507). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the last special figure game in the b time saving game state.

MPU51, when the value of the b time-saving game number counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4507: Yes), that is, when it is the last special figure game in the b time-saving gaming state, sets the b time-saving gaming state flag to OFF (step S4508), and ends the time-saving game number counter processing. On the other hand, MPU51, if the value of the b time-saving game number counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4507: No), that is, if it is not the last special figure game in the b time-saving game state, ends the time-saving game number counter processing .

<Step S4509>
If the b time-reduction gaming state flag is set to off (step S4505: No), that is, if it is not the b time-reduction gaming state, whether the c time-reduction gaming state flag indicating that it is in the c time-reduction gaming state is set to on (step S4509). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is in the c time saving gaming state. It should be noted that the c time reduction gaming state transition flag is set in step S4413 when a c time reduction gaming state transition command indicating that the gaming state is shifted from the a time reduction gaming state to the c time reduction gaming state is received in the command determination process of FIG. is set to on.

The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4510 when the c time saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4509: Yes), that is, when it is in the c time saving gaming state. On the other hand, when the c time saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S4509: No), that is, when it is not in the c time saving game state, the MPU 51 ends the time saving game counter processing.

<Steps S4510 to S4512>
When the c time reduction gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4509: Yes), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the c time reduction game number counter indicating the number of remaining special figure games in the c time reduction gaming state (step S4510), it is determined whether or not the value of the c time-saving game number counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4511). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the last special figure game in the c time saving game state.

MPU51, when the value of the c time-saving game number counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4511: Yes), that is, when it is the last special figure game in the c time-saving gaming state, sets the c time-saving gaming state flag to OFF (step S4512), and ends the time-saving game counter process. On the other hand, MPU51, if the value of the c time-saving game number counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4511: No), that is, if it is not the last special figure game in the c time-saving gaming state, ends the time-saving game number counter processing .

<Steps S4417 and S4418>
Returning to the description of FIG. 149, in step S4417, the MPU 51 executes the first variation type (effect pattern) setting process for setting the effect to be executed by the symbol display unit 341 and the like for the first special figure game. Details of the first variation type (effect pattern) setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the MPU 51 is variably displayed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game, and the first decoration pattern 78 (Fig. 152 (see step S4418). For example, as the stop symbol combination of the first decorative symbol 78, when the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery notified by the first special symbol is a big hit, doubles are set, and when it is out of reach. is a combination with the same numbers for the left and right patterns and different numbers for the middle pattern, and if the time-saving pattern is out of stoppage, a specific combination of loose eyes (ascending order such as "123" or "321", etc.) is set, and if the combination is completely out of order, a separate stitch other than the specific combination is set.

Here, FIGS. 152 and 153 are diagrams showing screen examples in the pattern display section 341. FIG. Specifically, FIG. 152 (A) is a diagram showing a screen example of the symbol display unit 341 in the normal game state, FIG. 152 (B) is a time saving game state (a time saving game state, b time saving game state and c It is a figure which shows the example of a screen in the pattern display part 341 in time saving game state).

In the normal game state, left-handed hitting to hit the game ball to the left area of the game board 31 is encouraged, and when left-handed hitting is performed, the second special game is not executed, and the first special game is executed. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 152 (A), in the normal game state, it is variably displayed in response to the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game, and is stopped in response to the stop display of the first special symbol. The displayed first decorative pattern 78 is displayed in a large size in the center of the pattern display portion 341 . However, when the second special symbol game is executed in the normal game state, it is variably displayed corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game, and corresponds to the stop display of the second special symbol. Then, the second decorative pattern 79 stopped and displayed is displayed on the upper right side of the pattern display section 341 in a smaller size than the first decorative pattern 78 .

On the other hand, in the time-saving gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, b time-saving gaming state, and c time-saving gaming state), right-handed hitting that hits the game ball to the right side area of the game board 31 is encouraged, and when right-handed hitting is performed in the time-saving gaming state In this case, the second special figure game is easily executed because the game ball is easily entered into the second winning hole 315 by the support of the electric accessory 315b. On the other hand, the right first winning hole 314R provided in the right side area of the game board 31 is difficult for the game ball to enter, so the first special symbol game is difficult to be executed when hitting to the right. Therefore, in the time-saving gaming state, by hitting to the right, the second special game is mainly executed, and the first special game is executed with a lower frequency than the second special game, so FIG. 152 (B ), in principle, in the time-saving gaming state including the a time-saving gaming state, except during the execution of the time attack production described later that is executed in the a time-saving gaming state, fluctuations in the second special game that is mainly executed The variable display and stop display of the second decorative symbol 79 corresponding to the second special symbol displayed and stopped are conspicuously displayed in the central part of the symbol display unit 341, and in the first special symbol game with low execution frequency The variable display and static display of the first decorative pattern 78 corresponding to the first special symbol that is variable and statically displayed are more conspicuous than the variable display and static display of the first decorative pattern 78 in the upper right part of the pattern display section 341. appear as if they weren't.

In addition, in the time saving game state (a time saving game state, b time saving game state and c time saving game state), an image showing the remaining number of times of time saving games up to the upper limit number of times of time saving games in the time saving game state is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 152 (B), the character image of "remaining 120 times" displayed in the upper right part of the pattern display unit 341 indicates the remaining number of times of time-saving games up to the number of times of time-saving games of the upper limit number of times in the time-saving game state. there is The image showing the remaining number of times of time-saving games up to the number of times of time-saving games of the upper limit number of times in the time-saving game state is not limited to the example shown in FIG. For example, it may be "remaining 120 times", "LAST 120 times", "ST 120 times", "120 times", "120 times", and the like.

In addition, in the time-saving gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, b time-saving gaming state and c time-saving gaming state), the second decorative design 79 is displayed larger than the first decorative design 78 at the central position where the design display unit 341 is easy to see. However, the display positions of the first decorative pattern 78 and the second decorative pattern 79 may be reversed, and the first decorative pattern 78 is displayed larger than the second decorative pattern 79 so that the first decorative pattern 78 stands out. You may do so. Further, the first decorative pattern 78 and the second decorative pattern 79 may be displayed side by side in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, the diagonal direction, etc., and the size of the first decorative pattern 78 and the second decorative pattern 79 may be the same. It may be expressed as a degree.

<Steps S4419 and S4420>
Returning to the description of FIG. 149, in step S4419, the MPU 51, based on the first special figure variation pattern information included in the received first special figure variation pattern command, displays the variation display time of the first special figure as the first special figure. Set to variable display counter. Then, the first special figure variation display counter is decremented by 1 in the counter update processing of step S2701 in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. It is possible to determine whether it is in the middle or not, the remaining time of the variable display time, and the like. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display is finished when the first special figure variation display counter becomes 0.

Then, the MPU 51 controls display of the display variation pattern command for specifying the effect pattern type set in step S4417 of the command determination process and the content of the stop design combination of the first decorative design 78 set in step S4418. It is output to the device 6 (step S4420), and the command determination process ends. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the effect pattern type and the stop design combination of the first decoration design 78 . On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores the variation image and effect image of the first decoration pattern 78 corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variable display and effect display in the symbol display section 341 in accordance with the stop pattern combination, the variation type and the effect type of the first decoration pattern 78 corresponding to the display variation pattern command. .

<Step S4421>
When the received command is not the first special figure variation pattern command (step S4415: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the second special figure variation pattern command (step S4421). MPU51, if the received command is the second special figure variation pattern command (step S4421: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4422, if the received command is not the second special figure variation pattern command (step S4421: No ), and the process proceeds to step S4427.

<Step S4422>
When the received command is the second special figure variation pattern command (step S4421: Yes), the MPU 51 executes time saving game number counter processing for managing the time saving game number counter (step S4422), and shifts the process to step S4423. do. Since the time-saving game number counter processing in this step S4422 is the same as the time-saving game number counter processing in step S4416 described with reference to FIG. 150, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Steps S4423 and S4424>
In step S4423, the MPU 51 executes a second variation type (effect pattern) setting process for setting the effect to be executed by the symbol display unit 341 or the like for the second special game. The details of the second variation type (effect pattern) setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the MPU 51 selects a stop symbol combination of the second decoration symbol 79 (see FIG. 152) which is variably displayed corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol and which is stop-displayed corresponding to the stop display of the second special symbol. Setting processing is executed (step S4425). For example, as the stop symbol combination of the second decorative symbol 79, when the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery notified by the second special symbol is a big hit, doubles are set, and when it is out of reach. , a combination of the left pattern and the right pattern having the same number and the middle pattern having a different number is set.

<Steps S4425 and S4426>
In step S4425, the MPU 51 sets the second special figure variation display time to the second special figure variation display counter based on the second special figure variation pattern information included in the received second special figure variation pattern command. Then, the second special figure fluctuation display counter is decremented by one in the counter update process of step S2701 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. It is possible to determine whether it is in the middle or not, the remaining time of the variable display time, and the like. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display is finished when the second special figure variation display counter becomes 0.

Then, the MPU 51 controls the display of the display variation pattern command for specifying the effect pattern type set in step S4423 of the command determination process and the content of the stop design combination of the second decorative design 79 set in step S4424. It outputs to the device 6 (step S4426), and terminates the command determination process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the effect pattern type and the stop symbol combination of the second decorative symbol 79 . On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores the variation image and effect image of the second decorative pattern 79 corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variable display and effect display in the symbol display section 341 according to the stop pattern combination, the variable type and the effect type of the second decorative pattern 79 corresponding to the display change pattern command. .

<Step S4427>
When the received command is not the second special figure variation pattern command (step S4421: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the first special figure variation stop command (step S4427). The first special figure fluctuation stop command is set when the first special figure is stopped and displayed in step S3822 in the first special figure fluctuation end processing of FIG.

MPU51, if the received command is the first special figure fluctuation stop command (step S4421: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4428, if the received command is not the first special figure fluctuation stop command (step S4427: No ), and the process proceeds to step S4430.

<Step S4428>
If the received command is the first special figure fluctuation stop command (step S4427: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the time attack effect flag indicating that the time attack effect described later is being executed is on ( step S4428). The time attack production flag is the first variation type (production pattern) setting process in step S4607 of FIG. When it is set to ON and the time attack effect ends, it is set to OFF in step S4803 of the first time attack effect of FIG. 155(A) or step S4903 of the second time attack effect of FIG. 155(B).

When the time attack effect flag is on (step S4428: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4429, and when the time attack effect flag is off (step S4428: No), ends the command determination process.

<Step S4429>
When the time attack effect flag is ON (step S4428: Yes), the MPU 51 performs the first time attack effect end processing for ending the time attack effect based on the stop display of the first special figure (the end of the first special figure game). is executed (step S4429), and the command determination process ends. The details of the first time attack effect ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 155(A).

<Step S4430>
When the received command is not the first special figure fluctuation stop command (step S4427: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the second special figure fluctuation stop command (step S4430). The second special figure fluctuation stop command is set when the second special figure is stopped and displayed in step S4119 in the second special figure fluctuation end processing of FIG.

MPU51, if the received command is the second special figure fluctuation stop command (step S4430: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4431, if the received command is not the second special figure fluctuation stop command (step S4430: No ), and the process proceeds to step S4433.

<Step S4431>
If the received command is the second special figure fluctuation stop command (step S4430: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the time attack effect flag indicating that the time attack effect described later is being executed is on ( step S4431). The time attack effect is set to ON at step S4607 in the first variation type (effect pattern) setting process in FIG. 151 when the time attack effect is started.

When the time attack effect flag is on (step S4431: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4432, and when the time attack effect flag is off (step S4431: No), ends the command determination process.

<Steps S4432 and S4433>
When the time attack effect flag is ON (step S4431: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the time-saving game count counter indicating the remaining number of times of time-saving games that can be executed in the time-saving game state is 0. (Step S4432). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second special figure game to be finished this time is the last special figure game in the a reduced working hours gaming state.

MPU51, when the value of a time-saving game number counter is 0 (step S4432: Yes), that is, when the second special figure game to end this time is the last special figure game in a time-saving gaming state, the second special A second time attack effect ending process for ending the time attack effect is executed (step S4433) based on the stop display (end of the time saving game state a) shown in the figure, and the command determination process ends. Details of the second time attack effect ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 155(B). On the other hand, MPU51, if the value of the a time-saving game number counter is not 0 (step S4432: Yes), that is, the second special figure game that ends this time is not the last special figure game in the a time-saving gaming state but the a time-saving gaming state is continued, the command determination process is terminated.

<Step S4434>
When the received command is not the second special figure fluctuation stop command (step S4430: No), the MPU 51 executes processing for other commands (step S4433), and terminates the command determination processing.

[First variation type (production pattern) setting process]
Here, FIG. 151 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the first variation type (effect pattern) setting process executed in step S4417 in the command determination process of FIG.

<Step S4601>
As shown in FIG. 151, in the first variation type (effect pattern) setting process of the present embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state is set to ON. (step S4601). MPU51, when the gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4601: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4602, and when the gaming state flag is set to OFF normally (step S4601: No), the process to step S4603.

<Step S4602>
When the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S4601: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the normal game state effect (step S4602), and terminates the first variation type (effect pattern) setting process. The normal game state effect is the same effect as in the first embodiment described above.

<Step S4603>
When the normal gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S4601: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the a time saving gaming state flag indicating the a time saving gaming state is set to ON (step S4603). MPU51, when a time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4603: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4604, and when a time-saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S4603: No) , the process proceeds to step S4609.

<Step S4604>
When the a time saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4603: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the a time saving game state effect (step S4604), and the process proceeds to step S4605. In the time-saving game state effect processing, for example, when it is a time-saving game state, the setting of the background effect unique to the time-saving game state, the setting regarding the display of the remaining time-saving game number, the setting regarding the display of the remaining time of the first special figure game, the first decoration Settings related to the variable display position of the pattern 78 are executed. The display of the remaining number of time-saving games is set by referring to the value of the number-of-time-saving games counter indicating the number of times of remaining time-saving games in the a-time-saving gaming state managed by the number of time-saving games counter processing in FIG. 150, for example. Also, the display of the remaining time of the first special figure game is set with reference to the first special figure variation display counter set for the variation display time in step S4419 in the command determination process of FIG.

<Step S4605>
In step S4605, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game to be started is out of time saving design stoppage. Whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special game is out of the time saving pattern stop is determined based on the information on the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special game included in the first special figure variation pattern command. be done.

MPU51, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special game to be started is out of time saving pattern stop (step S4605: Yes), moves the process to step S4606, the jackpot lottery for the first special game to be started If the result is not out of time saving symbol stop (step S4605: No), the first variation type (production pattern) setting process is terminated.

It should be noted that, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special game to be started is a jackpot, a reach outside the front and back or a reach other than the reach outside the front and back, the reach production (see FIG. 50) is executed in the same manner as the normal game state production. may

<Steps S4606 and S4607>
When the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special game to be started is out of time saving pattern stop (step S4605: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the time attack effect (see FIG. 153) (step S4606), and the time attack effect is A time attack effect flag indicating that it has been set is set to ON (step S4607), and the process proceeds to step S4608.

In this way, when the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the first special game started in the a time-saving game state is out of time reduction, the time attack performance is executed, and when the result of the big win lottery is not out of time reduction, the time attack is performed. Performance is not executed. Therefore, the player can grasp that the situation is expected to shift to the c time saving game state, which is more advantageous than the time saving game state a, by starting the time attack effect. Thus, when the time attack effect is started, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting to be shifted to the c time saving game state.

On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the first special game started in the a time saving game state is out of time reduction, the time attack performance is executed, and when the result of the big win lottery is not out of time reduction, the time attack performance is performed. By not being executed, if the player does not start the time attack effect when the first special symbol game is started in the a time saving game state, the launch of the game ball is stopped until the first special symbol game is completed. can choose to do so. As a result, during the execution of the first special game with no possibility of shifting to the c time saving game state, the second special game up to the upper limit number in the a time saving game state is executed. It is possible to avoid the end and leave the possibility of shifting to the c time saving game state. In addition, if the player does not start the time attack effect when the first special game is started in the a time saving game state, the second special game of a certain number of times before the first special game is finished. By executing it, after adjusting the number of remaining time-saving games up to the upper limit number in the a time-saving game state, it is also possible to select to stop launching the game ball until the first special figure game ends. . As a result, the player, when a new first special game is started in the a time-saving game state that is maintained even after the first special game is finished, until the new first special game is finished In addition, it is possible to increase the possibility of executing the remaining number of time-saving games up to the upper limit number in the time-saving game state a.

Here, FIG. 153 is a diagram showing a screen example of the symbol display section 341 when the time attack effect is executed in the time saving game state a. Specifically, FIGS. 153(A) and 153(B) are screen examples at the start of the time attack presentation, FIG. 153(C) is a screen example during the time attack presentation, and FIG. 153(E) and 153(F) are screen examples when the time attack is unsuccessful.

As shown in FIGS. 153(A) to 153(F), the time attack production is the second special to the upper limit number of times in the a reduced working hours gaming state during the execution of the first special figure game started in the reduced working hours gaming state. This is an effect of executing in a time attack format whether or not the figure game has been executed. In this time attack effect, a success effect is executed when the second special game is executed up to the upper limit number of times in the a reduced working hours game state during the execution of the first special game started in the reduced working hours game state (Fig. 153 (A) to FIG. 153 (D)), when the second special game up to the upper limit number of times in the a time saving game state is not executed during the execution of the first special game started in the a time saving game state 153(A) to 153(C), 153(E) and 153(F).

As shown in FIGS. 153(A) to 153(F), in the time attack production, the remaining variation display of the first special figure in the first special figure game started in the time-saving gaming state is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. A remaining time image corresponding to the time (remaining time) and a remaining rotation number image corresponding to the number of time reduction games (remaining rotation number) that can be executed in the a time reduction game state at the time the first special figure game is started is displayed. The remaining time image is displayed from the upper central portion to the right portion of the pattern display portion 341 . The remaining rotation number image is displayed directly below the remaining time image in the pattern display section 341 . This makes it easy to visually recognize the remaining time image and the remaining rotation speed image at the same time.

In the remaining time image, the remaining time is displayed by a remaining time seconds counter and a remaining time gauge. Game length is shortened. In the remaining time image, when the remaining time becomes 0 before the remaining number of rotations, the number of seconds displayed on the remaining time seconds counter and the length of the remaining time gauge are displayed as 0 ( Figures 153(E) and 153(F)).

On the other hand, in the remaining rotation number image, the remaining rotation number is displayed by the remaining rotation number display by the remaining rotation number counter and the remaining rotation number gauge. As the number displayed decreases, the length of the remaining rpm gauge shortens. In the remaining rotation number image, when the remaining rotation number becomes 0 before the remaining time, the remaining rotation number display value of the remaining rotation number counter and the length of the remaining rotation number gauge are displayed as 0. (See FIG. 153(D)).

Here, the time attack effect includes a success effect and a failure effect. The display of progress is similar (see FIGS. 153(A) to 153(C)).

As shown in FIG. 153(A), in the time attack presentation, a time attack explanatory image is displayed in the center of the pattern display section 341 along with a remaining time image and a remaining rotation number image as the start screen. In the example shown in FIG. 153(A), the explanation image of the time attack is displayed as a text image of "Reduce the number of remaining revolutions to 0 before the remaining time gauge reaches 0." Note that the explanation image of the time attack is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 153(A), and may be other.

As shown in FIG. 153(B), in the time attack presentation, after an explanation image of the time attack is displayed as the start screen, a time attack start image indicating that the time attack is to start is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 153B, the time attack start image is displayed as a character image of "TIME ATTACK START". Note that the time attack start image is not limited to the form shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 153(C), in the time attack effect, an image prompting the player to hit to the right or an image prompting the player to enter the game ball into the second winning hole 315 is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 153 (C), a character image of "Right shot" is displayed directly below the remaining number of rotations image, and a character image of "Put the ball in quickly!" is displayed. The image prompting the player to hit right or the image prompting the game ball to enter the second winning hole 315 may be displayed in another manner or may be omitted.

In addition, the first decorative pattern 78, which is variably displayed and statically displayed corresponding to the variable display and static display of the first special symbol, is displayed in a large size in the central portion of the symbol display section 341, and the variable display and static display of the second special symbol. A second decorative pattern 79 that is variably displayed and stop-displayed corresponding to the display is displayed in the lower left part of the design display portion 341 in a size smaller than the variably displayed first decorative pattern 78 . Thereby, in the time attack performance, the variable display of the first decorative pattern 78 corresponding to the first special figure is displayed more conspicuously than the variable display of the second decorative pattern 79 corresponding to the second special figure. Here, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the first special figure game in which the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the a time saving game state is started, the timing of shifting from the a time saving game state to the normal game state is important. That is, in the present embodiment, when the first special symbol game in which the time saving design is stop-displayed in the a time-saving game state is started, the timing at which the first decoration design 78 is stop-displayed is important. Therefore, in the time attack effect, the fluctuation display of the first decoration pattern 78 is the fluctuation of the second decoration pattern 79, contrary to the display of the first decoration pattern 78 and the second decoration pattern 79 in the above-described time-saving game state. Displayed more prominently than displayed.

As shown in FIG. 153 (D), when the remaining number of rotations becomes 0 earlier than the remaining time, that is, during execution of the first special figure game started in the a time saving game state, in the a time saving game state When the second special pattern game is executed up to the upper limit number of times, a success performance for notifying that the time attack is successful is executed. Specifically, in this success effect, the second decorative pattern 79 is stopped and displayed based on the end of the second special symbol game, and the remaining rotation number image is displayed, and the remaining rotation number display value 0 of the remaining rotation number counter is displayed. It is displayed as 0 and the length of the remaining rpm gauge is displayed as 0.

Furthermore, in the success effect, a success notification image is displayed in the central portion of the symbol display portion 341 to notify the player that the time attack was successful. In the example shown in FIG. 153(D), the success notification image is displayed as a character image of "success long time reduction acquisition!". Here, the “long time saving” means a c time saving game state in which the maximum number of times is higher than the time saving game state and the jackpot is substantially guaranteed, and by displaying “long time saving acquisition”, a It is reported that it is determined that the game state is shifted to a game state in which the number of times of time saving is greater than that in the time saving game state. In addition, the notification that the game state is shifted to the c time-saving game state is not limited to the character image of "long time-saving acquisition", but may be a character image of another aspect, or another method such as voice notification. good.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 153 (E) and FIG. 153 (F), when the remaining time becomes 0 before the remaining number of rotations, that is, the execution of the first special figure game started in the a time-saving game state When the second special game is not executed up to the upper limit number of times in the time saving game state a, a failure presentation is executed to inform that the time attack has failed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 153(E), in this failure effect, the first decorative pattern 78 is a time-saving pattern (“123” in the example shown in FIG. 153(E)) based on the end of the first special game. ), the remaining time image is displayed with 0 as the number of seconds displayed on the remaining time seconds counter, and the length of the remaining time gauge is displayed as 0.

Further, as shown in FIG. 153(F), in the failure presentation, after the first decorative symbol 78 is stopped and displayed, a failure notification image for notifying the player that the time attack has failed is displayed in the central portion of the symbol display section 341. Is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 153(F), the failure notification image is displayed as a character image of "failure, time saving continuation!". Here, "time saving continuation" means that the a time saving game state is maintained. Note that the notification that the time-saving gaming state is continued is not limited to the character image of “time-saving continuation”, but may be a character image of another mode, or may be another method such as voice notification. .

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the result of the first special figure jackpot lottery informed by the first special figure game started in the a time saving game state is out of the time saving pattern stop, the time attack effect is executed. In the time attack effect, the player pays attention to the remaining time image, the remaining rotation number image, the variable display and stop display of the first decorative pattern 78, and the variable display and stop display of the second decorative pattern 79. , the progress of the game can be enjoyed by paying attention to the time attack effect executed in the time-saving game state a.

Specifically, first, when the time attack effect is executed, by checking the remaining time image for the remaining time, the first special figure (first decoration pattern 78) in the first special figure game is displayed in a variable manner. Since the time can be grasped, the player enjoys guessing the degree of possibility that the game state can be shifted from the time-saving game state to the normal game state by the time the first special game ends. be able to. For example, based on the remaining time image at the start of the time attack effect, it can be confirmed that the special figure fluctuation pattern "09", which is the longest 150 seconds as the fluctuation display time for the first special figure game, has been set, Since it can be determined that the degree of expectation that the game state can be shifted from the reduced working hours game state to the normal game state by the end of the first special game is high, at the start of the time attack production, focus on the remaining time image. You can enjoy the progress of the game.

Further, after the time attack effect is executed, it can be confirmed that the first special symbol game is not finished by focusing on the first decorative pattern 78, for example, and the first special symbol game can be played by confirming the remaining time image. You can check how long it will take to finish. On the other hand, by paying attention to the second decoration pattern 79, it can be confirmed that the second special symbol game has started or ended, and by confirming the remaining number of rotations image, the game state is shifted from the time-saving game state to the normal game state. You can check the number of times of the second special figure game required for this. Therefore, while confirming that the first decorative pattern 78 is not stopped and displayed, the player pays attention to the second decorative pattern 79 and confirms that the second special pattern game has started or ended. During the execution of the figure game (during the variable display of the first special figure), the second special figure game ends, and it can be confirmed that the remaining number of points has decreased by the remaining number of rotations image. As a result, the player can see that the second decorative pattern 79 will be variably displayed during the variably displaying of the first decorative pattern 78, and that the second decorative pattern 79 whose variability is started will be stopped and displayed in a short period of time. You can enjoy the progress of the game while anticipating it.

Furthermore, after the time attack effect is started, the remaining variable display time of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game can be confirmed based on the remaining time image, and the normal game state is shifted to based on the remaining rotation number image. You can check the number of times of the second special symbol game required until it is played. Therefore, based on the remaining time image and the remaining number of rotations image, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that the speed of decrease of the number of remaining rotations will be higher than the speed of decrease of the remaining time. Also, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game by estimating the possibility of shifting to the normal game state during the execution of the first special symbol game. In particular, as the remaining time checked based on the remaining time image and the remaining rotation number checked based on the remaining rotation number image decrease and approach 0, whichever of the remaining time and the remaining rotation number reaches 0 first. You can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether it will be.

Further, when a long one is set as the variable display time of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game after the start of the time attack effect, focusing on the second decorative symbol 79, the second decorative symbol Since 79 is not stopped and displayed for a long time, the player feels disgusted that the remaining number of rotations is not subtracted, and furthermore, the longer the second decorative pattern 79 is, the lower the possibility of shifting to the normal game state. However, it is feared that the player's interest in the game during execution of the time attack effect may decrease due to the feeling of disgust for this. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the longer the fluctuation display time of the second special figure in the second special figure game started during the execution of the first special figure game in the a time saving game state, the second special figure It is set so that the expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the figure game is a jackpot is high. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game during execution of the time attack effect due to the fact that the second decoration pattern 79 is not stopped and displayed for a long time.

In this embodiment, in the time attack effect, the first decorative pattern 78 is displayed larger than the second decorative pattern 79 at the central position of the pattern display section 341 where it is easy to see, but the first decorative pattern 78 and the second decorative pattern are displayed. The display position of the pattern 79 may be reversed, or the second decorative pattern 79 may be displayed larger than the first decorative pattern 78 so that the second decorative pattern 79 stands out. Also, the first decorative pattern 78 and the second decorative pattern 79 may be displayed side by side in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, the diagonal direction, etc., and the size of the first decorative pattern 78 and the second decorative pattern 79 may be the same. It may be expressed as a degree.

Also, in the time attack effect, in the same way that the time attack effect is not executed in the time saving game state including the a time saving game state, an image showing the remaining number of time saving games up to the upper limit number of time saving games in the time saving game state (Fig. 152 (B ) of “Remaining 120 times”) may be displayed together. In this case, in the time attack effect, an image (remaining rotation number image (remaining rotation (number display, remaining rotation number gauge) (see FIG. 153)) can be displayed in a manner that is emphasized more than the image showing the number of remaining time-saving games (the character image of “remaining 120 times” in FIG. 152 (B)). Conceivable. For example, the remaining number of rotations image, the image indicating the number of remaining time-saving games (character image of "remaining 120 times" in Figure 152 (B)) to display in a larger character, the remaining number of rotations image such as red or gold It can be considered to display in a conspicuous color, to add an effect to the remaining rotation number image, and the like. In this way, the remaining number of rotations image is displayed in a more emphasized manner than the image indicating the number of remaining time-saving games (the character image of "remaining 120 times" in FIG. 152 (B)), so that the number of remaining rotations Since the image is easy to see, the player can visually obtain the number of remaining games of the second special game to be finished during the execution of the first special game necessary for shifting to the c time saving game state. Since it becomes easier to predict based on the above, the amusement of the game is improved.

In the time attack effect, a remaining rotation number image showing the remaining number of time reduction games (remaining number of rotations) until reaching the number of time reduction games of the upper limit number of times of the a reduced time game state is a remaining time image showing the remaining time of the first special figure game. It is also conceivable to display in a more emphasized manner than (remaining time seconds counter, remaining time gauge). For example, it is conceivable to display the remaining rotation number image in larger characters than the remaining time image, display the remaining rotation number image in a conspicuous color such as red or gold, and add an effect to the remaining rotation number image. In this way, by displaying the remaining rotation number image in a manner that emphasizes it more than the remaining time image, the remaining rotation number image becomes easy to see, so that the player reaches the time saving game number of the upper limit number of time saving game state a. Since it becomes easy to predict the remaining number of time-saving games (remaining number of rotations) based on visually obtained information, interest in the game is improved.

Conversely, in the time attack production, the remaining time image (remaining time seconds counter, remaining time gauge) indicating the remaining time of the first special game reaches the number of times of shortening games, which is the upper limit number of times of the shortening of working hours game state. It is also conceivable to display in a mode emphasized more than the remaining number of rotations image showing the number of remaining time-saving games (number of remaining rotations). For example, it is conceivable to display the remaining time image in characters larger than the remaining rotation number image, display the remaining time image in a conspicuous color such as red or gold, and add effects to the remaining time image. In this way, by displaying the remaining time image in a manner that is emphasized more than the remaining rotation number image, the remaining time image becomes easier to see, so that the player can visually obtain the remaining time of the first special game. Since it becomes easy to make a prediction based on the information provided, the interest in the game is improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the first special figure game that notifies that the result of the jackpot lottery is out of the time saving pattern stop is started in the time saving game state, the time attack effect is executed, but the time attack effect is executed. In part or all of the time when the first special symbol game is started to inform that the result of the jackpot lottery is a complete loss, the time attack effect may be executed. In this way, in a part or all of the case where the first special game that informs that the result of the jackpot lottery is completely lost in the a time saving game state is started, the time attack effect is executed. , At the stage when the number of remaining time-saving games until reaching the upper limit number of time-saving games that can be executed in the time-saving game state is reduced, the game ball is not intentionally entered into the second winning hole 315, and the first special By actively entering the game ball into the second winning hole 315 at the stage when the game is started, by executing the second special game of the number of remaining time-saving games during the execution of the first special game. It is possible to take countermeasures against strategy shots that increase the possibility that the first special figure game ends after being shifted to the normal game state.

In addition, when the time attack effect is to be executed in part or all of the case where the first special game that informs that the result of the jackpot lottery is completely lost in the a time saving game state is started, in the time attack effect , You may specify or suggest the degree of expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the first special symbol game is out of stoppage of time saving symbols. The degree of expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the first special game is out of the time saving pattern stop is various images displayed in the time attack production, for example, the remaining time image (remaining time seconds counter, remaining time gauge ), remaining rotation number image (remaining rotation number display, remaining rotation number gauge), first decorative pattern 78, second decorative pattern 79, character image of "Right shot", and character image of "Throw more balls!" It is conceivable to express or suggest by the display mode of one or more of the images (for example, color, presence/absence of effect, magnitude of effect, color of effect). In addition, the display mode of various images when indicating or suggesting the degree of expectation can be changed at a predetermined timing, for example, at the timing when the number of remaining time-saving games that can be executed in the a time-saving game state reaches a specific number. It is also conceivable to In addition, the expression or suggestion of the degree of expectation is performed at a predetermined timing, for example, when the number of remaining time-saving games that can be executed in the time-saving game state a reaches a specific number of times, a specific effect such as a cut-in effect or a mini character effect is executed. , it is conceivable to specify or suggest by the type of this specific effect. In this way, by specifying or suggesting the expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the first special game is out of the time saving pattern stop, based on the specification or suggestion of the expectation, the second The enjoyment of the game is improved because the player can enjoy the progress of the time attack performance while expecting that the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the 1 special game is out of stopping the time saving pattern.

Also, the display of the remaining time of the first special game may correspond to the actual remaining time, but it is also possible to display the remaining time of the first special game shorter than the actual remaining time. be done. In this case, even if the display of the remaining time of the first special symbol game becomes 0, the first special symbol game is continued, and it is difficult to recognize when the first special symbol game ends, so the remaining time of the first special symbol game becomes 0, the progress of the game can be enjoyed while expecting that the first special symbol game will continue as long as possible.

Furthermore, the remaining time of the first special symbol game does not necessarily have to be displayed on the symbol display section 341, and for example, a display device other than the symbol display section 341 may be provided and displayed on this display device.

Also, the time attack effect is not limited to the example described with reference to FIG. 153, and other forms may be used. For example, a subtraction timer such as [○○:○○:○○] may be displayed as the remaining time image. In addition, as a time attack effect, for example, the remaining time of the first special game that is started in the a reduced working hours game state may be specified or suggested by means other than numbers and gauges as battle effects and mission effects. Specifically, for example, in the case of a battle production, a friendly character and an enemy character battle, and the remaining time of the first special figure game may be displayed as hit points (HP) of the friendly character. Then, it is possible to suggest the variable display time set for the first special game depending on the size of the initial value of the HP of the ally, and when the ally character is damaged by the attack of the enemy character, the ally It is also conceivable to end the first special symbol game (the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol 78 are stopped and displayed) when the HP of the friend is reduced and the HP of the ally becomes 0 finally.

<Step S4608>
Returning to the description of FIG. 151, in step S4608, the MPU 51 shifts the variable display position of the first decorative pattern 78 set in step S4604 from the upper right area of the pattern display section 341 (see FIG. 152(B)) to the pattern display position. 153 (C)) of the central area of the part 341 (see FIG. 153 (C)), and at the same time, the variable display position of the second decorative pattern 79 is changed to the central area of the pattern display part 341 (see FIG. 152 ( B)) to the lower left area of the pattern display portion 341 (see FIG. 153(C)) is executed, and the first variation type (effect pattern) setting process ends. As a result, the variable display positions of the first decorative pattern 78 and the second decorative pattern 79 are changed from the position shown in FIG. 152(B) to the display position in the time attack effect shown in FIG. The pattern 78 is displayed more conspicuously than the second decorative pattern 79. - 特許庁That is, in the time attack effect, the stop timing of the first decorative pattern 78 is important as described above, so the first decorative pattern 78 is displayed more conspicuously than the second decorative pattern 79. - 特許庁

<Step S4609>
When the a time saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S4603: No), it is determined whether or not the b time saving gaming state flag indicating the b time saving gaming state is set to ON (step S4609). . MPU51, when the b time saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4605: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4610, and when the b time saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S4605: No) , the process proceeds to step S4611.

<Step S4610>
When b time saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4609: Yes), MPU51 sets b time saving game state production. In the b time-saving game state effect processing, for example, when the b time-saving game state is set, a setting of a background effect peculiar to the b time-saving game state, a setting regarding the display of the remaining time-saving game number, a setting regarding the display position of the first decoration pattern 78, and the like are executed. The display of the remaining number of time-saving games is set by referring to the value of the b time-saving game number counter indicating the remaining number of time-saving games in the b time-saving gaming state managed by the time-saving game number counter processing in FIG. 150, for example.

<Step S4611>
If the b time saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S4609: No), that is, it is not in the normal game state, it is not in the a time saving game state, and it is not in the b time saving game state, so it is determined that it is in the c time saving game state. can. Therefore, the MPU 51 sets the c time-saving gaming state effect. In the c time-saving game state effect processing, for example, when the c time-saving game state is set, the setting of the background effect unique to the c time-saving game state, the setting regarding the display of the remaining time-saving game number, the setting regarding the display position of the first decoration pattern 78, etc. are executed. The display of the remaining time-saving game times is set by referring to the value of the c time-saving game times counter indicating the remaining time-saving times in the c time-saving game state managed by the time-saving game times counter process of FIG. 150, for example.

[Second variation type (production pattern) setting process]
Here, FIG. 154 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the second variation type (effect pattern) setting process executed in step S4423 in the command determination process of FIG.

<Step S4701>
As shown in FIG. 154, in the second variation type (effect pattern) setting process of the present embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state is set to ON. (step S4701). When the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S4701: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4702. On the other hand, when the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S4601: No), that is, when it is the time-saving game state, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4703.

<Step S4702>
When the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S4701: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the normal game state effect (step S4702), and ends the second variation type (effect pattern) setting process. In the normal game state effect setting process, setting related to the display position of the second decoration pattern 79 and the like are executed.

<Step S4703>
When the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S4701: No), that is, when it is the time saving game state, the MPU 51 sets the time saving game state effect (step S4703), and shifts the processing to step S4704. In the time-saving game state effect processing, for example, when the time-saving game state is set, the setting of the background effect unique to the time-saving game state, the setting regarding the display of the remaining time-saving game number, the setting regarding the display position of the second decoration pattern 79, and the like are executed. The display of the remaining number of time-saving games is set with reference to the value of the time-saving game number counter managed by the time-saving game number counter processing of FIG. 150, for example.

<Step S4704>
In step S4704, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the time attack effect flag indicating that the time attack effect is being executed is set to ON. The time attack production flag is the first variation type (production pattern) setting process in step S4607 of FIG. When it is set to ON and the time attack effect ends, it is set to OFF in step S4803 of the first time attack effect of FIG. 155(A) or step S4903 of the second time attack effect of FIG. 155(B).

When the time attack effect flag is set to ON (step S4704: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4705, and when the time attack effect flag is set to OFF (step S4704: No), the second The variation type (effect pattern) setting process is terminated.

<Step S4705>
When the time attack effect flag is set to ON (step S4704: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the variable display position of the second decorative symbol 79 in the second special symbol game to the symbol display unit 341 set in step S4703. From the central area (see FIG. 152 (B)), the process of changing and setting to the lower left area (see FIG. 153 (C)) of the pattern display unit 341 is executed (step S4705), and the second variation type (effect pattern) setting End the process. As a result, in the time attack effect, the variable display of the second decorative pattern 79 is set in the lower left area of the pattern display section 341 (see FIG. 153(C)).

In addition, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special game to be started is a jackpot, a front-rear out-of-reach reach or a reach other than front-rear out-of-order, the reach production (see FIG. 50) is executed in the same manner as the normal game state production. may

[First time attack effect end processing]
Here, FIG. 155(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the first time attack effect ending process executed in step S4429 in the command determination process of FIG.

The first time attack effect end process is a process for performing a time attack effect, and is executed when the time attack effect flag is set to ON when the first special figure fluctuation stop command is received (in the command determination process of FIG. 149 Yes in both steps S4427 and S4428). That is, the first time attack effect end processing is executed when the first special symbol is stop-displayed in the first special symbol game when the time attack effect is being executed in the reduced working hours game state. That is, the second special game up to the upper limit number of times in the a time saving game state was not executed until the first special game (variation display of the first special game) ended in the time saving game state In this case, the time attack presentation is terminated due to failure of the time attack.

<Step S4801>
As shown in FIG. 155(A), in the first time attack effect ending process, the MPU 51 first displays a time attack failure image (“Failure, short time continuation!” ) is displayed (step S4801), and the process proceeds to step S4802.

<Step S4802 and Step S4803>
In step S4802, the MPU 51 executes time attack effect setting end processing (step S4802), further sets the time attack effect flag indicating that the time attack effect is being executed to ON (step S4803), and ends the first time attack effect. End the process.

In the time attack effect end setting process, the time until the time attack failure image is erased in the pattern display portion 341 is set, and the display positions of the first decorative pattern 78 and the second decorative pattern 79 in the pattern display portion 341 are changed according to the time attack effect. Change to the position where it is not executed (see FIG. 152(B)).

[Second time attack effect ending process]
Here, FIG. 155(B) is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the second time attack effect ending process executed in step S4432 in the command determination process of FIG.

The second time attack effect end processing is a process for performing a time attack effect, and when the second special figure fluctuation stop command is received, the time attack effect flag is set to ON, and the a time saving game number counter is 0. Executed. (Yes in all steps S4430 to S4432 in the command determination process of FIG. 149). That is, the second time attack effect end processing is executed when the time attack effect is executed in the time saving game state and the second special game to be ended this time is the last special game in the time saving game state. be done. That is, when the second special game is executed up to the upper limit number of times in the a time saving game state by the time the second special game (variation display of the second special game) started in the a time saving game state ends Then, the time attack presentation is terminated due to the success of the time attack.

<Step S4901>
As shown in FIG. 155(B), in the second time attack effect ending process, the MPU 51 displays a time attack success image (“successful long working hours acquisition! ) is displayed (step S4901), and the process proceeds to step S4902.

<Step S4902 and Step S4903>
In step S4902, the MPU 51 executes a time attack effect end setting process, further sets a time attack effect flag indicating that the time attack effect is being executed to ON (step S4903), and ends the second time attack effect end process. .

In the time attack effect end setting process, the time until the time attack success image is erased in the symbol display section 341 is set (see FIG. 153(A)).

As described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the first special figure as a variable game in which the first special figure is varied based on the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole 314 as the start entry ball. The figure game and the second special figure game as a variation game in which the second special figure is varied based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 as the starting entry ball are performed by the MPU 41 as the game control unit. It is configured as a simultaneous variator that can be executed in parallel (in parallel) on the main display section 36 as a display device by control. In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, an upper limit value (maximum number of times of reduced working hours) is set to the number of times of special figure games as variable games in a reduced working hours gaming state as profit gaming state to be shifted after the end of the jackpot game. And it is configured as an ST machine that shifts to the normal game state when the special figure game of the maximum a time saving game number is executed in the a time saving game state. Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol game as a variation game is stopped and displayed in the main display unit 36 as a display device. Triggered by that, it can be shifted to the c time-saving gaming state as a given value for the special figure game result.

Thus, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the a time-reduction gaming state as the profit gaming state that is shifted to the normal gaming state by executing the special figure game as the variation game of the upper limit number (a time-reduction game number) When 1 special figure game is started, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the 1st special figure game is out of the time saving pattern stop, the 1st special figure game has been shifted from the a time saving game state to the normal game state. On the condition that the game ends later, the game is shifted to a c time saving game state in which a big win which is more advantageous than the normal game state and the a time saving game state is substantially guaranteed. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first special figure game in which the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed as a variable game in the time saving game state a as the profit game state that is shifted after the end of the jackpot game is started. You can enjoy the progress of the game while anticipating it. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the first special figure game in which the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the a time saving game state is started, the end condition of the a time saving game state before the first special figure game ends By executing the second special game of the upper limit number of times, the game state is shifted from the time saving game state to the normal game state during the execution of the first special game, that is, from the time saving game state A game ball is entered into the second winning hole 315 to execute the second special symbol game so that the first special symbol for the first special symbol game is stopped and displayed after the transition to the normal game state. A new game property is realized in which a game is played like this.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game as a variable game started in the time-saving game state a as the profit game state is a big hit, the grant to the special figure game result A jackpot game is executed as a value. That is, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the a time-saving gaming state as the profit gaming state, the jackpot lottery for the second special game as the variable game started during the execution of the first special game as the variable game It can also be expected that a jackpot game will be executed when the result of is a jackpot. That is, in the time-saving game state a as the profit game state, the interest similar to the time-saving game state a of the conventional gaming machine is maintained in that the result of the second special figure jackpot lottery can be expected to be a big win. And, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the second special symbol game as the variable game is performed during the execution of the first special symbol game as the variable game in the a time saving gaming state as the profit gaming state, When the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special game is a loss, the player can continue to expect the transition to a c-time-saving game state in which the jackpot is substantially guaranteed, and the jackpot lottery for the second special game. If the result of (2) is a jackpot, the user can enjoy the benefit of the execution of the jackpot game as the added value for the second special symbol game result. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the second special symbol game as a variable game is executed during the execution of the first special symbol game as a variable game in the time saving gaming state a as a profitable gaming state , Even if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special game is a big hit or a loss, the result of the second special jackpot lottery is a big hit in the same way as the time-saving game state a of the conventional game machine. can be expected, a new game property is realized in which a profit corresponding to the result of the lottery can be enjoyed.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, transition is made by a time-saving gaming state as a profit gaming state in which the maximum number of time-saving games that are shifted after the end of the jackpot game can be executed, and by the stop display of the time-saving symbol stop off. It utilizes the c time-saving gaming state in which a big win is substantially guaranteed and the characteristic of the simultaneous variation machine that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be varied simultaneously in the main display part 36 as a display device. , A time-saving game of a conventional gaming machine that is expected to execute a jackpot game based on the result of the jackpot lottery being a jackpot while realizing the above-mentioned new game characteristics that improve the interest of the game. It is possible to maintain the playability in the state.

In this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to seventh embodiments are possible within the applicable range.

[Ninth Embodiment]
In this embodiment, part of the variation display time set in the jackpot variation table and the time-saving gaming state second special figure deviation variation table is different from the above-described eighth embodiment.

[Jackpot fluctuation table]
As shown in FIG. 156(A), in the jackpot variation table of the present embodiment, the special figure variation display time is the variation display time that can be selected when the result of the jackpot lottery notified in the special figure game is a jackpot. Special figure fluctuation pattern "01" which is 30 seconds, special figure fluctuation pattern "02" whose special figure fluctuation display time is 60 seconds, and special figure fluctuation pattern "03" whose special figure fluctuation display time is 90 seconds Other , special figure variation pattern "11" is set. The special figure fluctuation pattern "11" has a special figure fluctuation display time of 200 seconds, and the maximum fluctuation set when notifying that the result of the jackpot lottery is lost by the first special figure game in the time saving game state a. The display time, that is, the special figure variation display time of the special figure variation pattern "09" is longer than 150 seconds (see FIG. 129 (C)). That is, it is longer than any special figure fluctuation display time set in the first special figure game that notifies the deviation in the a time saving game state. Also, in the jackpot variation table of the present embodiment, the distribution rate of the special figure variation pattern "11" is set to 10%.

[Time-saving game state 2nd special figure deviation fluctuation table]
As shown in FIG. 156 (B), in the time-saving game state second special figure deviation variation table of the present embodiment, as a variation display time that can be selected when the result of the jackpot lottery notified in the special figure game is out , Similar to the jackpot variation table shown in FIG. 156(A), a special figure variation pattern "11" with a special figure variation display time of 200 seconds is set. Further, in the time-saving gaming state second special figure deviation variation table of the present embodiment, the distribution rate of the special figure variation pattern "11" is set to a very low value of 0.5%.

By the way, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the first special figure game started in the a time saving game state is to notify that the result of the jackpot lottery is the time saving symbol stop off, the first special When the figure game ends after the time-saving game state a ends and shifts to the normal game state, the game is shifted to the time-saving game state c, which is more advantageous than the normal game state and the time-saving game state a. Also, when the first special symbol game started in the a time-saving game state is to notify that the result of the jackpot lottery is the time-saving symbol stop off, a time attack effect (see FIG. 153) is executed. Therefore, if the variable display time set for the second special figure in the second special figure game started during the execution of the time attack production is long, the result of the jackpot lottery started in the time saving game state is the time saving symbol It is disadvantageous to terminate the first special symbol game that is out of stop in the normal game state. In particular, as the variation display time of the second special figure in the second special figure game started during the execution of the first special figure game, it is the longest variation display time of the second special figure in the time saving game state. When 200 seconds of the special figure fluctuation pattern "11" is set, the second special figure game cannot end during the execution of the first special figure game whose longest fluctuation display time is 150 seconds, It becomes impossible to end the first special figure game in the normal game state. That is, in the present embodiment, as the variable display time of the second special figure in the second special figure game in the time saving game state including the a time saving game state, the second to be started during the execution of the first special figure game A variable display time is included in which the special figure game cannot be terminated during execution of the first special figure game.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, while the distribution rate of the special figure variation pattern "11" in the jackpot variation table is set to 10%, in the time saving game state second special figure deviation table The distribution rate of the special figure fluctuation pattern "11" is set to a very low value of 0.5%. Therefore, in the a time-saving game state, when the special figure variation pattern "11" which is 200 seconds is selected as the special figure variation display time for the second special figure game, the jackpot lottery notified by the second special figure game The expectation that the result of is a jackpot will be high. That is, when the longest variable display time in the time-saving game state is set as the variable display time of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game that is started during the execution of the time attack production, it is notified by the second special symbol game. The degree of expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery to be performed is a jackpot increases.

Thus, in the a time-saving game state, the second special game is started during execution of the time attack production based on the start of the first special game that informs that the result of the jackpot lottery is the time-saving symbol stop off. In that case, if the variable display time of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is long, the first special symbol game is terminated in the normal game state and shifted to the advantageous c time-saving game state. Although it is disadvantageous, the degree of expectation for a big hit increases when the special figure variation pattern "11" is selected. Therefore, during the execution of the time attack effect, in a situation where the fluctuation display time of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is long and the interest in the game may decrease due to the disadvantage to the player, the expectation of a big hit for the second special symbol game By increasing the degree, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game during execution of the time attack presentation, and rather, to promote the progress of the game while expecting a big win in a disadvantageous situation during execution of the time attack presentation. Since it can be enjoyed, the amusement of the game is improved.

In this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the above-described first to eighth embodiments are possible within the applicable range.

[Tenth embodiment]
As a specific configuration of the present invention, the game machine includes a "light emitter" as light emitting means, an "information acquisition process" as information acquisition means, and a "determination process" as determination means. , a "rotating body" as rotating means, which is the first rotating means or the second rotating means, and a "visible state" as a state that is the first state or the second state.

The light emitting means may emit light that can be seen when viewed from the front of the game board. It may be capable of emitting light in a direction along the surface of the substrate (for example, a horizontal direction such as a horizontal direction, a vertical direction such as a vertical direction, or an oblique direction). As the light emitting means, as long as the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, liquid crystal displays, dot matrix displays, plasma displays, organic EL displays, pixels (dots) of these displays, various lamps such as LED lamps, and any of them and the like.

The information acquisition means may be any process that acquires information for executing some process. As the information acquisition means, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, processing for acquiring commands transmitted from the main control device, processing for acquiring commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device, various sensors and various switches Processing to acquire detection information, processing to acquire random number counters per general pattern, processing to acquire type counters per general pattern, processing to acquire random number initial value counters per general pattern, processing to acquire normal pattern variation type counters, Processing to acquire a jackpot random number counter, processing to acquire a jackpot type counter, processing to acquire a reach random number counter, processing to acquire a jackpot random number initial value counter, processing to acquire a special figure fluctuation type counter, any combination thereof, etc. is mentioned.

The judging means may be judging processing executed based on various kinds of information. As the determination means, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, processing to determine the command type sent from the sound lamp control device, processing to determine the detection contents of various sensors and various switches, random number counter per general pattern Processing to determine the value of (processing to determine whether it is per normal pattern), processing to determine the value of the type counter per normal pattern (processing to determine the type per normal pattern), random number initial value per normal pattern Processing for determining the value of the counter (process for determining the initial value of the random number counter per normal pattern), processing for determining the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter (processing for determining the normal pattern fluctuation display time), value of the jackpot random number counter Processing to determine (processing to determine whether it is a jackpot), processing to determine the value of the jackpot type counter (processing to determine the jackpot type), processing to determine the value of the reach random number counter (whether to execute reach Whether or not, processing to determine the type of reach when executing reach), processing to determine the value of the jackpot random number initial value counter (processing to determine the initial value of the jackpot random number counter), the value of the special figure variation type counter Processing to determine (processing to determine the special figure fluctuation display time), such as any combination thereof.

The rotating means should be rotatable. As the rotating means, as long as the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, one that can rotate at one fixed position, one that can rotate at a plurality of positions, one that rotates at a constant speed, one that rotates at a non-constant speed, rotatable in one direction, rotatable in multiple directions, movable, immovable, movable in one path, movable in multiple paths, linearly movable Things that can move non-linearly, things that can rotate while moving, things that can rotate while moving, things that can be deformed such as expansion and contraction, things that can change form by connecting, combining, separating, etc. , wholly translucent, partially translucent, non-translucent, rotated by control means such as MPU, game balls, etc. Examples include those that are rotated, those that are rotated by interference of game balls such as pinwheels, and any combination thereof.

The state may be anything as long as it can be visually recognized by the player. As long as the gist of the present invention can be realized, the state may be, for example, a state in which the shape of the rotating means is changed, a light emitting state of one or more light emitting means, a rotating state of one or more rotating means, or one or more a moving state of the rotating means, a light emitting state of the light emitting means viewed through the rotating means, a state in which the rotating means blocks the light emitted from the light emitting means, a state in which the other rotating means is visible through one rotating means, one or more A moving state of the rotating means, a state in which one rotating means is close to the other rotating means, a state in which one rotating means is separated from the other rotating means, any combination thereof, and the like.

By the way, in a conventional gaming machine, a rotating body or the like is provided as a decorative accessory on the game board, and this rotating body is used as needed during the variable display of special symbols (decorative symbols) in the special symbol game or during the jackpot game. is rotated.

However, many rotating bodies have a luminous body integrated on the back side, and when the rotating body is in operation, it rotates with the luminous body emitting light, but in this state, the back side of the rotating body is visible. Impossible. For this reason, the conventional decoration using the rotating body is performed only by the rotating body, and the decorativeness is not sufficiently improved.

On the other hand, in the present invention, there is a first visual recognition state in which the light from the light emitter can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating body, and a state in which the second rotating body moves to the back side of the rotating plate portion. and a second visual recognition state in which the second rotating body that blocks the light through the rotating plate portion can be visually recognized, and two rotations of the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be generated. It is possible to create high decorativeness using the body.

In this embodiment, the light of the specific area of the pattern display section 341 constituted by a liquid crystal display or the like as a light emitter is emitted through the plate member 370 of the first rotating accessory member 37 as the first rotating body. A first visible state as a visible state, a left second rotating accessory as a second rotating body on the back side of the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating accessory member 37 as the first rotating body By moving the member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R, the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R as the second rotating body becomes a light emitting body The light of the specific area of the pattern display part 341 is blocked, and the left second rotating body or the right second rotating body as the second rotating body is the first rotating accessory member 37 as the first rotating body and a second visible state as a second state visible through the plate member 370 . In this way, the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R as the second rotating body is attached to the back side of the first rotating accessory member 37 as the first rotating body. is movable, the first rotating accessory member 37 as the first rotating body and the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member as the second rotating body By the operation with 38R, the first rotating accessory member 37 as the first rotating body can be in two modes of the first visible state and the second visible state as the state that the player can visually recognize. , and the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R acting as the second rotating body diversifies the decoration performed.

For example, in the present embodiment, light in a specific area of the pattern display section 341 configured by a liquid crystal display as a light emitter is emitted through the plate member 370 of the first rotating accessory member 37 as the first rotating body. In the first visible state as a visible state, it is possible to perform an effect according to the visible state of the light in the specific area of the pattern display section 341 that is visually recognized through the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating accessory member 37. Become. Specifically, the player can see the light in the specific area of the pattern display portion 341 as a light emitting body that is visually recognized through the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating accessory member 37 as the first rotating body. It is possible to execute decorations that give information about the game, for example, decorations that notify that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (one-shot notification effect), and also the expectation that the jackpot lottery result will be a jackpot. It becomes possible to execute a decoration that indicates or suggests the degree of the winning, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a big win, it becomes possible to execute a decoration that indicates or suggests the type of the jackpot. It is possible to execute decorations that indicate or suggest the type of decoration that is to be used, and during the suspension of the right to execute the special game that is executed after the end of the jackpot game, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. It becomes possible to execute a decoration (reservation renso finalization effect) that informs that an object is included.

In addition, on the back side of the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating accessory member 37 as the first rotating body, the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member as the second rotating body As the member 38R moves, the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R emits light in a specific area of the pattern display section 341 configured by a liquid crystal display or the like as a light emitter. In the second visual state as a state in which the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R is visible through the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating accessory member 37, An effect according to the visual recognition mode of the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R visually recognized through the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating accessory member 37 can be executed. Specifically, the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R visually recognized through the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating accessory member 37 as the first rotating body Depending on the mode, it is possible to execute decorations that give information about the game to the player, decorations that give the information about the game to the player, for example, decoration that informs that the result of the big win lottery is a big win (one-shot announcement effect). In addition, it is possible to execute an effect that expresses or suggests the degree of expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is indicated or indicated. It is possible to execute a suggestive decoration, furthermore, to execute a decoration that specifies or suggests the type of decoration to be executed later, and to execute a special game that is executed after the end of the jackpot game. During the reservation of the right to play, it is possible to execute a reservation-reservation-fixing performance for notifying that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery includes a jackpot.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the specific area of the pattern display section 341 configured by a liquid crystal display or the like as a light emitter is passed through the plate member 370 of the first rotating accessory member 37 as the first rotating body. A first visible state as a state in which the light can be visually recognized, and a left second By moving the rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R, the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R is a liquid crystal display as a light emitter The plate-like member 370 of the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R is the first rotating accessory member 37 by blocking the light in the specific area of the pattern display part 341 configured by such as By having a second visible state as a state visible through, the first rotating accessory member 37 as the first rotating body and the left second rotating accessory as the second rotating body Since the decoration executed by the operation with the member 38L or the right second rotary accessory member 38R is diversified, the amusement of the game is improved.

The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 157 to 173, focusing on differences from the first embodiment described above.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
FIG. 157 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the game machine 10 according to this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 157, the game board 31 has a plurality of nails (reference numerals omitted), a windmill 310, an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning port 313, a first winning port 314, a second winning port 315, variable Winning port 316, through gates 317L, 317R, out port 318, variable display unit 34, main display section 36, first rotating accessory member 37, left second rotating accessory member 38L, and right second rotating role A material member 38R is provided.

A plurality of nails are driven around the variable display unit 34 on the game board 31 molded of transparent resin, and define the movement path of the game ball that is struck on the game board 31 and flows down along the game board 31. do. Since the game balls are shot by the shooting device at intervals of 0.6 seconds, a plurality of game balls flow down on the game board 31 when the player plays a continuous hitting game. A game ball hit to the left side area of the game board 31 collides with a nail or the like driven in the left side area of the game board 31, and has a path that can pass through the through gate 317L, a path that interferes with the windmill 310, and a general prize. It moves down while rotating various paths such as a path that allows a ball to enter the opening 313 and a path that allows a ball to enter the first prize winning opening 314 . Here, the game ball hit to the left side area of the game board 31 flows down on the game board 31 without or passes through the through gate 317, and the game ball entering the general prize winning opening 313 and the windmill 310 face each other. It branches into a game ball that flows down. When game balls enter the general winning hole 313, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls by a payout device. A game ball flowing down toward the windmill 310 flows down toward the windmill 310 from a plurality of positions above the windmill 310 . The game balls distributed through the flow path by the windmill 310 branch into game balls flowing down toward the first prize winning port 314 and game balls flowing down toward the second prize winning port 315 . A game ball flowing down toward the first prize winning port 314 flows down along a random trajectory by a plurality of hammered nails and enters the first prize winning port 314 or flows downward. The game ball flowing down toward the second prize winning port 315 flows down toward the second prize winning port 315 through a random trajectory by a plurality of hammered nails, and when the electric accessory 315b is operated, the The ball enters the second winning hole 315, and when the electric accessory 315b is not operated, the ball flows down without entering the second winning hole 315 and enters the out hole 318.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the game ball hit to the right side area of the game board 31 collides with a nail or the like driven in the right side area of the game board 31, and the opening/closing door 319 is operated to pass through the through gate 317R. When the electric accessory 315b is activated, it flows down various paths such as a path that allows a ball to enter the variable winning hole 316 and a path that allows a ball to enter the second winning hole 315 while rotating. When the ball enters the first winning hole 314 and the second winning hole 315, a jackpot lottery is executed according to the game state. That is, in the present embodiment, the plurality of nails are driven so that the left-handed hitting that hits the game ball to the left side area of the game board 31 is advantageous in the normal game state in the low-frequency support mode, and in the high-frequency support mode. In a certain probability variable game state and a time-saving game state, the game balls are placed in the right area of the game board 31 so that the right-handed hitting that hits the game ball is advantageous. Therefore, in the present embodiment, left-handed hitting is encouraged in the normal game state, and right-handed hitting is encouraged in the variable probability game state and the time-saving game state.

In the windmill 310, a bearing portion (not shown), a front rotating plate portion arranged on the front side of the game machine when attached, and a plurality of contact plate portions with which game balls come into contact are integrally molded with a transparent resin. One is provided in the central part of the left side area of . Since the windmill 310 is molded from a transparent resin, the back side of the front rotating plate portion (not shown) can be visually recognized when viewed from the front side. Switching of light from decorative light emitters provided on the game board and light emitters (not shown) for lighting the game board provided on the back side of the game board can be visually recognized through the front rotating plate portion of the windmill 310. there is That is, when the windmill 310 is viewed from the front side of the game machine, the luminous state on the back side of the front rotary plate portion can be visually recognized when nothing exists on the back side of the front rotary plate portion. The front rotating plate portion (not shown) is partly painted or decorated with notches, and is integrally molded with a transparent resin, but is configured to have different light transmittances. The pinwheel 310 can rotate clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from the front by interference with the game ball. A game ball flowing down toward the windmill 310 from above the windmill 310 passes through random trajectories by nails driven into the game board 31 and comes into contact with any of the contact plate portions of the windmill 310 from a plurality of directions. . At this time, depending on the timing, a plurality of game balls may simultaneously flow down toward the windmill 310 and come into contact with the contact plate portion. When the game ball contacts the contact plate portion, the kinetic energy of the game ball is transmitted to the windmill 310, and the transmitted kinetic energy causes the entire windmill 310 to rotate around the axis. A plurality of contact plate portions (not shown) of the windmill 310 are arranged so that a game ball flowing down from the upper left side of the game board 31 and coming into contact with any of the contact plate portions of the windmill 310 is placed on the left side of the rotation shaft of the windmill 310 or Distribute to the right. At this time, since the windmill 310 is formed of transparent resin, the game ball flows down from the area outside the front rotating plate portion, flows down to the back surface side of the front rotating plate portion, and contacts the contact plate portion, thereby The windmill 310 rotated by the kinetic energy of the balls distributes the game balls from the front side of the game machine. The game ball distributed to the left side by the windmill 310 moves along a path that cannot enter the first winning hole 314 . On the other hand, the game ball distributed to the right side by the windmill 310 can move along a path that allows the ball to enter the first winning hole 314 . That is, the windmill 310 moves the game ball that flows down from the upper left of the game board 31 and interferes with the windmill 310 to the left path that is disadvantageous to the player in that the ball cannot enter the first winning hole 314. , the right path including the path advantageous to the player in that the ball can be entered into the first winning hole 314 . Then, when the kinetic energy transmitted from the game ball becomes zero, it stops rotating and enters a stopped state. As described above, since the windmill 310 is molded with transparent resin, the light emission state on the game board side can be visually recognized through the front rotating plate portion from which the back side can be seen, and the light emission state on the game board side has been extinguished. , and a state in which a game ball moves to the back side of the front rotating plate portion can be visually recognized.

Note that the arrangement of the plurality of nails is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 157, and can be changed as appropriate. Also, the number and arrangement of the windmills 310 are not limited to the example shown in FIG. 157 and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a plurality of windmills 310 may be provided, and in addition to or instead of being provided in the left side area of the game board 31 , they may be provided in the right side area of the game board 31 . Moreover, the windmill 310 is always rotatable. Therefore, when the game ball comes into contact with the game ball, it can be rotated at any time. may rotate.

The variable display unit 34 is controlled by the sub-control unit 332 and includes a pattern display section 341 that displays visible still images and moving images when viewed from the front. The pattern display section 341 is configured to have, for example, a liquid crystal display, a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like. That is, the pattern display unit 341 may be any device that can display a still image or a moving image by emitting light toward the front side.

In this embodiment, the light emitting means of the present invention is configured as the pattern display portion 341 capable of emitting light to the front side. In addition to being able to emit light toward the front side, directions other than the front side (for example, directions along the surface of the game board (for example, left and right directions) It may be capable of emitting light in a horizontal direction, a vertical direction such as a vertical direction, or an oblique direction)).

Here, FIGS. 158 to 161 are drawings to be referred to for explaining the first rotating accessory member 37. FIG. Specifically, FIG. 158 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 when the first rotary accessory member 37 is in the contracted state and at the operating position, and FIG. 159 is an enlarged state of the first rotary accessory member 37. 160 is a front view showing an example of the operation of the first rotating accessory member 37, and FIG. , a partially cutaway side view; FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 158 to 161, the first rotating accessory member 37 is vertically moved, rotated, and scaled by the first rotating accessory member drive mechanism 37a (see FIG. 169), although the details will be described later. It is possible, and in a special figure game or a jackpot game, alone or in cooperation with the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R, which will be described later, predetermined information about the game is displayed. It is operated to execute the effect given to the person. Here, as the predetermined information about the game, the information indicating or suggesting that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special game is a jackpot, and the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is a jackpot. In some cases, there is information that specifies or suggests the type of jackpot, information that specifies or suggests the degree of expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special game will be a jackpot, and the right to execute the special game. Information indicating or suggesting that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the reserved special game executed after the end of the special game is a jackpot (reserved look-ahead information), executing the special game Information indicating or suggesting that the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the reserved special game that is executed after the end of the jackpot game when there is a reservation of rights is a jackpot information), etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first rotating accessory member 37 cooperates with the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R in the special game, and the jackpot type ( 5R normal jackpot, 5R variable variable jackpot, 16R variable variable jackpot), and the presence or absence of reservation Renso is used to indicate or suggest.

The first rotary accessory member 37 has a flower-like shape in front view in a reduced state, and is arranged on the front side of the pattern display section 341 . The installation location of the first rotary accessory member 37 is not limited to the front side of the pattern display section 341, and can be changed, for example, it may be installed on the flow path of the game balls. In this case, it is conceivable to protect the first rotary accessory member 37 with a nail so that the game ball does not collide with it. Of course, when the first rotating accessory member 37 is arranged on the flow path of the game ball, the protection from the game ball may be performed by a member made of resin or the like instead of the nail. Further, when the first rotary accessory member 37 is arranged on the flow path of the game ball, it may be subjected to the action of the game ball. That is, the first rotating accessory member 37 may or may not be affected by the game ball. The first rotating accessory member 37 includes a plurality of plate-like members 370 and 371, a rotating shaft 372, and a plurality of enlargement/reduction guide mechanisms 373.

The plurality of plate-like members 370 and 371 have petal-like shapes and include a first plate-like member 370 and a second plate-like member 371 . Each of the plate members 370 and 371 is entirely made of resin, for example.

The first plate-like member 370 includes a translucent region 370A that is circular in front view and has translucency that allows the back side to be visually recognized. The translucent area 370A is formed to have higher translucency than other areas of the first plate member 370. As shown in FIG. When the entire first plate member 370 is made of resin, the translucent region 370A is made of transparent resin or translucent resin, for example. In addition, the area other than the translucent area 370A in the first plate-like member 370 may be formed so that the rear side thereof can be visually recognized or the rear side thereof may be formed so as to be invisible or difficult to see.

Such a translucent region 370A is, for example, a region that is to become the translucent region 370A in the resin molding after forming a transparent resin molding that is a preprocessed product of the first plate member 370 by resin molding. In addition, it can be formed by coating. Further, the translucent region 370A can also be formed by insert-molding a circular member formed of, for example, a transparent resin or a translucent resin.

Note that the translucent region 370A has higher translucency than other regions of the first plate-like member 370, and may be colored transparent or colorless transparent as long as it has translucency that allows the back side to be visually recognized. There may be. Further, the front view shape of the translucent region 370A is not limited to a circular shape, and may be another shape. Also, the translucent region 370A may be formed as a through hole. When the translucent region 370A is formed as a through hole in this manner, the translucent region 370A can be formed more easily than when the translucent region 370A is formed by insert molding.

Also, the translucent region 370A may be formed as a magnifying lens. Thus, when the translucent area 370A is formed as a magnifying lens, the display of predetermined information visually recognized through the translucent area 370A is enlarged and displayed, so that the player can easily grasp the predetermined information. For example, if the information display portions 383L and 384L of the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the information displaying portions 383R and 384R of the right second rotating accessory member 38R are visible through the translucent region 370A, Information presented by the information display units 383L, 384L, 383R, and 384R (for example, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of a reserved villa) is displayed in an enlarged manner. In addition, when the predetermined area of the pattern display portion 341 is visible through the translucent area 370A, the information presented in the predetermined area (for example, the result of the jackpot lottery) is enlarged and displayed. As a result, in the special game, it is possible to execute a so-called one-shot notification performance that clearly indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first plate member 370 is provided with the translucent area 370A having higher translucency than the surrounding area. 1 Plate-shaped member 370 may be formed so as to have uniform or substantially uniform translucency as a whole.

On the other hand, the second plate-like member 371 basically has the same appearance as the first plate-like member 370, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. It is different from the shaped member 370 . Also, the second plate-like member 371 can be changed in design in the same manner as the first plate-like member 370 within the applicable range.

The rotating shaft 372 is a portion to which a rotational driving force is input from a first rotating accessory member driving mechanism 37a (see FIG. 169), which will be described later, and extends in the front-rear direction of the game board 31 toward the symbol display portion 341. there is The rotating shaft 372 is brought into a predetermined rotating state by inputting a rotational force from the first rotating accessory member driving mechanism 37a under the control of the MPU 51, and is rotated from the first rotating accessory member driving mechanism 37a under the control of the MPU 51. A non-rotating state (predetermined stopped state) is established by stopping the input of the rotational force.

The rotational speed of the rotating shaft 372 (plurality of plate members 370 and 371) in a predetermined rotational state, that is, the rotational speed of the first rotary accessory member 37 is not particularly limited, and even if it is constant It may be indefinite, or the rotation speed and rotation direction may be changed.

A plurality of expansion/reduction guide mechanisms 373 are radially fixed to the rotating shaft 372 in a front view. Therefore, the plurality of expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373 can rotate about the rotating shaft 372 as the rotating shaft 372 rotates. The rotary shaft 372 is rotatably supported by a support ring 375 fixed to the elevating shaft 374 , and restricted from moving forward and backward by a restriction ring 376 . Here, the lifting shaft 374 moves the rotating shaft 372 in the vertical direction, and the rotating shaft 372 moves up and down by driving force input from a first rotating accessory member driving mechanism 37a (see FIG. 169), which will be described later. move in the direction As a result, the first rotating accessory member 37 can move vertically as a whole by moving the rotating shaft 372 vertically. That is, the first rotating accessory member 37 can approach the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R by moving downward, and by moving upward It is possible to separate from the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R.

Each expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373 supports one plate-like member 370 , 371 , and can slide the supported plate-like members 370 , 371 along the radial direction of the rotating shaft 372 . Each expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373 rotates the supported plate-like members 370 and 371 by converting a rotational force input from, for example, a first rotating accessory member driving mechanism 37a (see FIG. 169) to be described later into a linear force. It is slid along the radial direction of the shaft 372 . As each expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373, a known mechanism that converts a rotational force into a rectilinear force can be employed. Specifically, each expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373 includes an actuator including one or more components such as racks, screw shafts, ball screws, endless belts, wires, chains, various gears such as spur gears and bevel gears, and rollers. be done. Further, each expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373 may use magnetic force or electromagnetic force.

Thus, in the first rotary accessory member 37, the rotating shaft 372 is rotatably supported by the lifting shaft 374, and a plurality of expansion/contracting guide mechanisms 373 arranged radially from the rotating shaft 372 are provided with plate-like members. 370 and 371 are slidably supported. Therefore, the first rotary accessory member 37 can move vertically on the front side of the pattern display part 341, can rotate around the rotation axis 372, and can be expanded and contracted around the rotation axis 372. .

Here, FIG. 169 is a block diagram showing an example of the main part of the system configuration of the gaming machine 10. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 169, the first rotary accessory member 37 is controlled in vertical movement, rotation and expansion/contraction via the first rotary accessory member drive mechanism 37a controlled by the MPU51. The first rotary accessory member drive mechanism 37a is connected to the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 via the input/output I/F 52. The first rotating accessory member drive mechanism 37a has, for example, a plurality of motors, a return detection section for detecting that the first rotating accessory member 37 has returned to the standby position, and a motor driver.

The plurality of motors are, for example, stepping motors, DC motors, etc., and the return detection unit is, for example, an optical sensor, a contact sensor, or the like. Each motor is connected to the rotating shaft 372 of the first rotating accessory member 37, the plurality of expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373, and the lifting shaft 374 via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear. A driving force is input to the expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373 and the elevation shaft 374 . The driving force of the lifting shaft 374 is input to the first rotating accessory member 37, so that the first rotating accessory member 37 is exposed from the opening 31A at a predetermined standby position (FIG. 158) shown in FIG. ) and the operating position shown by the solid line in FIG. It is possible to move up and down on the side. In addition, as shown in FIG. 160, the first rotary accessory member 37 can be rotated counterclockwise on the front side of the pattern display section 341 by inputting a rotational force to the rotating shaft 372 . The rotational position of the first rotating accessory member 37 may be any position between the standby position and the operating position, but in this embodiment, the first rotating accessory member 37 is rotated at the operating position. be. Further, the first rotating accessory member 37 is driven by inputting a driving force to the enlarging/reducing guide mechanism 373 , so that the plate-like members 370 and 371 move in the radial direction of the rotating shaft 372 on the front side of the pattern display section 341 . It can be scaled by being slid. The first rotary accessory member 37 is rotatable on the front side of the pattern display part 341 in both the reduced state (see FIG. 160(A)) and the enlarged state (see FIG. 160(B)). .

In addition, the motor driver of the first rotating accessory member driving mechanism 37 a is connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5 . The motor driver then controls each motor according to control instructions from the audio lamp controller 5 . Further, the motor driver can acquire the detection result of the recovery detection unit and transmit it to the sound lamp control device 5 . Note that the motor driver may be omitted, and each motor and return detection unit may be directly connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5 and controlled by the audio lamp control device 5 .

The configuration of the first rotating accessory member driving mechanism 37a is not particularly limited, and similarly, the configuration of the first rotating accessory member driving mechanism 37a is not particularly limited. That is, there is no particular limitation on the configuration for vertically moving, rotating, and expanding/contracting the first rotary accessory member 37 .

Further, in the present embodiment, the driving force for rotating, enlarging and contracting the first rotary accessory member 37 is not limited to that applied by a motor, but may be obtained by the action of a game ball in addition to a solenoid. good too. Specifically, the driving force for rotating, enlarging and contracting the first rotary accessory member 37 includes the power obtained by the out ball discharged to the back side of the game board 31 through the out port 318 or the like, Power obtained from a game ball other than an out ball that flows down can be considered. As an example, a rotating body such as a gear is always rotated by the action of a game ball moving on the front side or the back side of the game board 31, and if necessary, the rotating body and the first rotating accessory member 37 are connected. By doing so, it is conceivable that the first rotating accessory member 37 is rotated and scaled by transmitting the rotational force of the rotating body to the first rotating accessory member 37 . As another example, the driving force for rotating and expanding/contracting the first rotary accessory member 37 can be electric power obtained by the action of a game ball moving on the front side or the back side of the game board 31 . For example, electric power can be generated by the rotation of a rotating body caused by the action of a game ball, or by the deformation of a piezoelectric element caused by the collision of a game ball against a piezoelectric element. Moreover, the electric power obtained by the action of the game ball may be stored or used. Specifically, it is conceivable to store the electric power obtained by the action of the game ball in a storage battery, and use the stored power in the storage battery to rotate and expand/contract the first rotary accessory member 37. be done.

Further, in this embodiment, although the details will be described later, when the first rotating accessory member 37 is in the expanded state at the operating position, the back side of the first rotating accessory member 37 and the front side of the pattern display section 341 By moving the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R to the operating position, the plurality of plate-like members 370 of the first rotating accessory member 37 , 371 (see FIGS. 165-167). Therefore, when the first rotating accessory member 37 is in the expanded state at the operating position, the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R are the plurality of first rotating accessory members 37. By moving behind the plate-shaped members 370 and 371, the light of the specific area emitted from the pattern display part 341 to the front side is blocked, and the first plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotary accessory member 37 is transparent. Through the optical region 370A, the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R are made visible (see FIG. 167). On the other hand, when the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R are not behind the plurality of plate members 370 and 371 of the first rotating accessory member 37, the first rotating role Light in a specific area emitted from the pattern display portion 341 toward the front side is visible through the translucent area 370A of the first plate member 370 of the material member 37 .

As described above, in the present embodiment, the light in the specific area emitted from the pattern display section 341 to the front side can be visually recognized through the translucent area 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotary accessory member 37. state, the light of the specific area emitted from the pattern display unit 341 to the front side is blocked, and the left second rotating role is passed through the translucent area 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating role member 37. and a state in which the article member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R is visible. As a result, the first rotating accessory member 37 and the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R can be in two types of states, so the first rotating accessory member 37 and the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R. For example, in a state where light in a specific area emitted from the pattern display section 341 to the front side can be visually recognized through the translucent area 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotary accessory member 37, the translucent area It becomes possible to execute an effect according to the visual recognition mode of the light of the specific area visually recognized through 370A. Specifically, according to the visual recognition mode of the light of the specific area visually recognized through the translucent area 370A, for example, the player is given predetermined information on the game (for example, the special game or the reserved special game jackpot lottery It is possible to execute an effect that gives information about the result of On the other hand, the light in the specific area emitted from the pattern display portion 341 to the front side is blocked, and the left second rotating accessory passes through the translucent region 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating accessory member 37. In the state where the member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R is visible, the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R viewed through the translucent region 370A is viewed. Depending on, for example, it is possible to execute an effect that gives the player predetermined information on the game (for example, information on the result of the big hit lottery of the special symbol game or the reserved special symbol game).

In addition, in two types of states realized by the first rotating accessory member 37 and the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R, the player is provided with predetermined information about the game. As the effect to be given, for example, an effect that indicates or suggests that the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is a jackpot, and a jackpot when the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is a jackpot If there is a production that specifies or suggests the type, a production that specifies or suggests the expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game will be a jackpot, or a reservation of the right to execute the special game A performance that indicates or suggests that the result of the jackpot lottery reported by the reserved special game that is executed after the end of the figure game is a big win (holding prefetch effect), reservation of the right to execute the special game In some cases, the result of the jackpot lottery reported by the suspended special game that is executed after the end of the jackpot game is a production that indicates or suggests that the result is a jackpot (a production that indicates or suggests a so-called reservation renso), etc. is mentioned. Thus, by having two types of states realized by the first rotating accessory member 37 and the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R, the rotating accessory member Since the effects executed by the actions of 37, 38L and 38R are diversified, the interest in the game is improved.

Also, the first rotary accessory member 37 alone can execute an effect of providing the aforementioned player with predetermined information on the game. For example, an image corresponding to predetermined information is displayed on the pattern display section 341, and the image is made visible through the translucent region 370A of the first plate-like member 370 of the first rotating accessory member 37. By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect that provides the player with predetermined information about the game. In this case, by displaying a plurality of images corresponding to predetermined information for the game to the player, and making one of these images visible through the translucent area 370A, the player is provided with the predetermined information for the game. It is also conceivable to execute an effect that gives the information of.

Here, FIGS. 162(A) to 162(C) execute a roulette effect for informing whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot by the first rotating accessory member 37 alone in the special figure game. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of visual recognition in this case; Specifically, FIG. 162(A) is an image example of the pattern display section 341 in the roulette effect, and FIG. 162(B) is a visual example in the case of notifying that the result of the big win lottery is the big win in the roulette effect. FIG. 162(C) is a visual recognition example in the case of notifying that the result of the big winning lottery is a loss in the roulette effect.

As shown in FIG. 162(A), in the special game, when the first rotating accessory member 37 alone executes a roulette effect for informing the player whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the pattern The display unit 341 displays a plurality of notification images 40A to 40E (five in the illustrated example). The plurality of notification images 40A to 40E include two jackpot notification images 40A and 40B for notification of a big win and three loss notification images 40C to 40E for notification of a loss. The big hit notification images 40A and 40B and the loss notification images 40C to 40E are displayed in a distinguishable manner. In the example shown in FIG. 162(A), the big win notification images 40A and 40B are displayed in black circles, and the loss notification images 40C to 40E are displayed in white circles so that they can be distinguished.

Note that the jackpot notification images 40A and 40B and the loss notification images 40C to 40E only need to be displayed in a distinguishable manner, and may be displayed in other shapes other than circles, and are limited to black and white. may be displayed in any other color. Further, the big hit notification images 40A and 40B and the loss notification images 40C to 40E may be displayed in a distinguishable manner by characters or symbols. For example, while the jackpot notification images 40A and 40B are displayed as images indicating or suggesting a jackpot such as “win”, “WIN”, “○”, etc., the loss notification images 40C to 40E are displayed as “outside”, “LOSE ”, “×”, etc., may be displayed as an image that indicates or suggests the deviation. Also, instead of or in addition to the plurality of notification images 40A to 40E, an image suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win may be displayed. For example, in addition to character images such as "chance", "great chance", "very hot", and "iron plate" (indicating a big win), the degree of expectation for a big win may be displayed as "XX%".

In addition, a plurality of notification images 40A to 40E are displayed on the rotation trajectory of the translucent area 370A of the first plate member 370 when the first rotary accessory member 37 is in the contracted state. In the example shown in FIG. 162(A), a plurality of notification images 40A to 40E are displayed at equal intervals on the lower half circular arc of the rotation trajectory. As a result, by stopping the first rotary accessory member 37 that rotates in a reduced state at a position corresponding to one of the plurality of notification images 40A to 40E, the translucent area 370A of the first plate member 370 Any one of the jackpot notification images 40A and 40B and the loss notification images 40C to 40E can be made visible through the player. In other words, as the stop position of the first rotary accessory member 37 in the roulette performance, five positions are set where one of the plurality of notification images 40A to 40E can be visually recognized through the translucent area 370A.

For example, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the first rotary accessory member 37 rotating in a reduced state allows the jackpot notification images 40A and 40B to be visually recognized through the translucent region 370A of the first plate member 370. It is stopped at a possible position (see FIG. 162(B)). On the other hand, the first rotary accessory member 37 that rotates in a contracted state, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the loss notification images 40C to 40E are visually recognized through the translucent region 370A of the first plate member 370. It is stopped at a possible position (see FIG. 162(C)).

In addition, in the present embodiment, a plurality of notification images 40A to 40E are displayed on the rotation trajectory of the translucent area 370A of the first plate member 370 when the first rotating accessory member 37 is in the contracted state. However, a plurality of notification images 40A to 40E may be displayed on the rotation trajectory of the translucent area 370A of the first plate member 370 when the first rotary accessory member 37 is in the enlarged state. . In this case, by controlling the stop position of the first rotary accessory member 37 that rotates in the enlarged state, the big hit notification images 40A and 40B and the loss notification image 40C are displayed through the translucent area 370A of the first plate member 370. ~40E can be visible.

Further, in the present embodiment, the five notification images 40A to 40E are arranged at equal intervals in the lower half of the rotation locus of the translucent region 370A of the first plate member 370, but the number of the notification images 40A to 40E is not particularly limited as long as it includes two or more types that can notify different information such as the jackpot notification images 40A and 40B and the loss notification images 40C to 40E, and a plurality of notification images 40A to 40E. are not necessarily arranged at equal intervals, and the plurality of notification images 40A to 40E are not limited to the lower half of the rotation trajectory of the translucent area 370A, but the upper half, the left half, and the right half of the rotation trajectory. , or the entire circumference, and may be displayed in a range different from the example shown in FIG. 162(A).

Here, FIG. 162(D) shows the first rotating accessory member 37 in a roulette effect in which the first rotating accessory member 37 alone in a special game notifies whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a rotation pattern of (viewing order of notification images 40A to 40E viewed through translucent region 370A). In addition, "40A", "40B", etc. in FIG. 162(D) indicate that the notification images 40A to 40E corresponding to the code can be visually recognized through the translucent region 370A. It means to stop or be stopped. Also, FIG. 162(E) is a diagram showing an example of a stop pattern in the roulette effect.

As shown in FIG. 162(D), in this embodiment, six types A to F are set as the rotation pattern of the first rotating accessory member 37 in the roulette performance. Details of the rotation patterns A to F will be described later. Which of the rotation patterns A to F is to be executed is randomly determined, for example, based on a predetermined lottery. Also, which notification image 40A to 40E out of the plurality of notification images 40A to 40E is finally visible through the translucent area 370A, that is, the final stop position of the first rotary accessory member 37 is , for example, is determined by a predetermined lottery based on the jackpot lottery result.

Further, as shown in FIG. 162(E), in this embodiment, four types A to D are set as stop patterns in the roulette effect. That is, in the roulette effect, after any one of the rotation patterns A to F is executed, one of the stop patterns A to D is executed, so that the first rotary accessory member 37 is placed in a predetermined final position. is stopped, and depending on the type of the notification images 40A to 40E visible through the translucent area 370A, it is notified whether the result of the big win lottery is a big win or a loss.

In the rotation pattern A shown in FIG. 162(D), the initial stop position of the first rotating accessory member 37 is a position where the jackpot notification image 40A is visible through the translucent region 370A (see FIG. 162(B)). After that, the first rotating accessory member 37 is intermittently rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 45 °), so that the jackpot notification image 40B, the loss notification image 40C, the loss notification image 40D, the loss The notification image 40E is sequentially made visible through the translucent area 370A. Furthermore, in the rotation pattern A, the first rotary accessory member 37 is rotated clockwise by a specific angle (for example, 180°), so that the jackpot notification image 40A is again visible through the translucent area 370A. After that, it is intermittently rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 45°) as necessary, so that one of the notification images 40A to 40E is changed to the translucent area 370A according to the result of the big winning lottery. is stopped or temporarily stopped in a state visible through the

In the rotation pattern B, similarly to the rotation pattern A, the initial stop position of the first rotary accessory member 37 is a position where the jackpot notification image 40A can be visually recognized through the translucent region 370A (see FIG. 162(B)). After that, the first rotating accessory member 37 is intermittently rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 45 °), so that the jackpot notification image 40B, the loss notification image 40C, the loss notification image 40D, the loss The notification image 40E is sequentially made visible through the translucent area 370A. Further, in the rotation pattern B, contrary to the rotation pattern A, by intermittently rotating in the counterclockwise direction by a predetermined angle (for example, 45°) as necessary, the result of the big winning lottery is announced. Any one of the images 40A-40E is stopped or temporarily stopped while being visible through the translucent area 370A.

In the rotation pattern C, the initial stop position of the first rotating accessory member 37 is a position where the deviation notification image 40E is visible through the translucent region 370A (see FIG. 162(C)), and then the first By rotating the rotating accessory member 37 intermittently in the counterclockwise direction by a predetermined angle (for example, 45°), the loss notification image 40D, the loss notification image 40C, the jackpot notification image 40B, and the jackpot notification image 40A are sequentially displayed. , is visible through translucent region 370A. Furthermore, in the rotation pattern C, the first rotary accessory member 37 is rotated counterclockwise by a specific angle (for example, 180°), so that the deviation notification image 40E can be visually recognized again through the translucent region 370A. After that, it is intermittently rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 45°) as necessary, so that one of the notification images 40A to 40E becomes translucent according to the result of the jackpot lottery. Stopped or temporarily stopped while visible through area 370A.

In rotation pattern D, similarly to rotation pattern C, the initial stop position of the first rotary accessory member 37 is a position where the deviation notification image 40E is visible through the translucent region 370A (see FIG. 162(C)). After that, the first rotating accessory member 37 is intermittently rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 45°), so that the loss notification image 40D, the loss notification image 40C, the jackpot notification image 40B, The jackpot notification images 40A are sequentially made visible through the translucent area 370A. Further, in the rotation pattern D, contrary to the rotation pattern C, by intermittently rotating in the clockwise direction by a predetermined angle (for example, 45 °) as necessary, the notification image is displayed according to the result of the big winning lottery. Any one of 40A to 40E is stopped or temporarily stopped while being visible through translucent region 370A.

In the rotation pattern E, after the first rotary accessory member 37 is rotated clockwise at high speed, it is stopped or temporarily stopped while any of the notification images 40A to 40E is visible through the translucent area 370A. .

In the rotation pattern F, in contrast to the rotation pattern E, after the first rotary accessory member 37 is rotated counterclockwise at high speed, one of the notification images 40A to 40E is visible through the translucent area 370A. is stopped or temporarily stopped in the state of

Stop pattern A shown in FIG. 162(E) is a pattern in which the first rotating accessory member 37 stops directly at a predetermined final stop position, and then the first rotating accessory member 37 does not rotate again. is.

The stop pattern B is set between the position where the big win notification image 40B is visible through the translucent region 370A and the position where the loss notification image 40C is visible through the translucent region 370A before the final stop. The rotary accessory member 37 is alternately rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 45°), and after that, the jackpot notification image 40B, which is the predetermined final stop position, appears in the translucent area 370A. It is a pattern in which it stops at a position where it can be seen through, or a position where the deviation notification image 40C can be seen through the translucent region 370A. This stop pattern B is executed when the final stop position is determined to be a position where the jackpot notification image 40B can be seen through the translucent area 370A, or a position where the deviation notification image 40C can be seen through the translucent area 370A. be done.

Stop pattern C and stop pattern D can be executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot and a position where the jackpot notification image 40B can be visually recognized through the translucent area 370A is determined as the final stop position. be. Specifically, in the stop pattern C, after the first rotating accessory member 37 is temporarily stopped at a position where the deviation notification image 40C can be visually recognized through the translucent area 370A, the first rotating accessory member 37 is By rotating counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 45°), the first rotating accessory member 37 is stopped at a position where the jackpot notification image 40B can be seen through the translucent area 370A. On the other hand, in the stop pattern D, similarly to the stop pattern C, after the first rotating accessory member 37 is temporarily stopped at a position where the deviation notification image 40C can be visually recognized through the translucent area 370A, the first rotating role By rotating the material member 37 clockwise by a specific angle (for example, 135°), the first rotating accessory member 37 is stopped at a position where the jackpot notification image 40B can be viewed through the translucent area 370A. .

In this way, in the roulette performance by the first rotating accessory member 37, the combination of the rotation patterns A to F and the stop patterns A to D of the first rotating accessory member 37 further diversifies the presentation and decoration. diversified. In addition, the player progresses the game by paying attention to the notification images 40A to 40E that are finally visible through the translucent area 370A of the first rotary accessory member 37 when the roulette effect is executed. can be enjoyed, the amusement of the game is improved.

It should be noted that the rotation pattern and stop pattern in the roulette performance by the first rotary accessory member 37 are not limited to the examples shown in FIGS.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the roulette effect in which the first rotating accessory member 37 alone informs whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot or a loss in the special game has been described. The roulette performance by the object member 37 may be executed as a performance for informing whether the special game is a probability variable jackpot or a normal jackpot, and when it is notified that the special game is a normal jackpot, In the jackpot game, it may be executed as a promotion effect for notifying that the probability variable jackpot is won.

In addition, in the roulette effect of the present embodiment, the notification images 40A to 40E displayed on the pattern display section 341 are visible through the translucent area 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotary accessory member 37. However, instead of making the notification images 40A to 40E displayed on the pattern display unit 341 visible, a plurality of various lamps such as LEDs are arranged on the back side of the first rotary accessory member 37, and transparent. Whether or not it is a big win and the type of big win may be notified by the light emission mode of the lamp that is visible through the optical region 370A, such as color, lighting, extinguishing, blinking, and the like.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first rotating accessory member 37 is movable along a linear path in the vertical direction, but it is possible to move in directions other than the vertical direction, for example, in the horizontal direction or diagonal direction. Alternatively, it may be able to move along a nonlinear path such as a meandering path or an arcuate path, or it may be able to move along a plurality of different paths. Also, the first rotating accessory member 37 may be immovable.

In addition, in this embodiment, the standby position of the first rotating accessory member 37 is set to a position where a part of the rotating accessory member 37 is exposed from the opening 31A, and the operating position of the first rotating accessory member 37 is the center of the pattern display portion 341. However, the standby position and the operating position are not particularly limited. It may be set in the surroundings. Also, at least one of the standby position and the operating position of the first rotary accessory member 37 may be set in plurality.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first rotating accessory member 37 can be expanded and contracted by sliding movement of the plurality of plate-like members 370 and 371, but the first rotating accessory member 37 is configured not to expand and contract. , or there may be one plate-like member.

Here, FIGS. 163 to 167 are drawings for explaining the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R. Specifically, FIG. 163 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 when the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R are in the operating position, and FIG. FIG. 165 is a front view showing a rotation example of the rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R, and FIG. A front view showing an example of the game board 31 when the accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R are at the operating position, FIG. 166 shows the first rotating accessory member 37 and the left second rotating accessory member A side view showing the periphery of the member 38L (right second rotating accessory member 38R) with a part cut away, FIG. 167 shows the first rotating accessory member 37, the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right It is a front view of the game board 31 showing an operation example of the second rotary accessory member 38R.

As shown in FIGS. 163 to 167, the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R are arranged on the front side of the pattern display unit 341, and the details will be described later. By the left second rotating accessory member driving mechanism 38La or the right second rotating accessory member driving mechanism 38Ra (see FIG. 169), it is possible to vertically move and rotate independently on the front side of the pattern display unit 341. , in a special figure game or a jackpot game, in cooperation with the first rotary accessory member 37, it is operated to execute an effect of providing the player with predetermined game information regarding the game.

The installation locations of the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R are not limited to the front side of the symbol display section 341, and can be changed. good too. In this case, it is conceivable to protect the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R with a nail so that the game ball does not collide. Of course, when the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R are arranged on the flow path of the game ball, the protection from the game ball is not limited to the nail but is performed by a member made of resin or the like. may Also, when the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R are arranged on the flow path of the game ball, they may be affected by the game ball. That is, the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R may or may not be affected by the game ball.

The left second rotating accessory member 38L cooperates with the first rotating accessory member 37, and presents predetermined game information regarding games in a special figure game or a jackpot game. Specifically, in this embodiment, in a special game, it is used when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R jackpot, and is used to clearly indicate the type of the 5R jackpot (5R variable jackpot or 5R normal jackpot). be done. The left second rotating accessory member 38L includes a rotating main body 381L and a rotating shaft 382L.

The main rotating portion 381</b>L is formed in a plate shape having an oblong shape when viewed from the front, and is arranged on the front side of the pattern display portion 341 . An information display section 383L is provided at one end of the rotation main section 381L, and an information display section 384L is provided at the other end thereof. At least an information display portion 383L at one end and an information display portion 384L at the other end of the main rotating portion 381L are formed such that the rear side thereof is invisible or difficult to see. Thereby, the information display portions 383L and 384L can block the light emitted to the front side of the pattern display portion 341. FIG. Note that the main rotating portion 381L may be formed so that the rear side thereof is invisible or difficult to see as a whole, or only the information display portions 383L and 384L are formed so that the rear side thereof is invisible or difficult to see, and the other portions are translucent. may have.

In this embodiment, "SMALL" is displayed on the information display section 383L at one end, and "small" is displayed on the information display section 384L at the other end. Then, although the details will be described later, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot, through the translucent area 370A of the first rotating accessory member 37 which is in a predetermined stopped state at a predetermined position. A first rotating accessory member in which the character "SMALL" on the information display part 383L is visible, and when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R normal jackpot, it is in a predetermined stop state at a predetermined position. The characters "small" of the information display portion 384L can be visually recognized through the translucent area 370A of 37 (see FIG. 168).

That is, in the present embodiment, the 5R jackpot is notified when the characters visible through the translucent area 370A are the alphabets "SMALL" and "small", It is possible to distinguish whether it is a probability variable jackpot or a normal jackpot depending on whether it is.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to distinguish between a variable jackpot and a normal jackpot depending on whether the characters visible through the translucent area 370A are uppercase letters or lowercase letters. , Kanji characters, hiragana characters, numbers, symbols, and the like, it may be possible to distinguish whether it is a probability variable jackpot or a normal jackpot. Further, it may be possible to distinguish between a variable probability jackpot and a normal jackpot by the color of characters and symbols that are visible through the translucent area 370A. For example, when the colors of characters and symbols that are visible through the translucent area 370A are rainbow colors, the probability variable jackpot is notified, and the colors of the characters and symbols that are visible through the translucent area 370A. When is a color other than rainbow color (for example, black), it may be notified that it is a normal jackpot.

In addition, the information display portions 383L and 384L of the rotating main body portion 381L in the left second rotating accessory member 38L can be easily formed by painting or the like. It may be formed by a display device. In this case, since the display modes of the information display portions 383L and 384L are diversified, it becomes possible to provide the player with more diverse information on the game using the left second rotary accessory member 38L. . As a result, it is possible to further diversify the effects executed using the left second rotary accessory member 38L, thereby improving the interest of the game.

The rotating shaft 382L is a portion to which a rotational driving force is input from a left second rotating accessory member driving mechanism 38La (see FIG. 169), which will be described later. The rotary shaft 382L is fixed to the central portion of the back side of the rotating main portion 381L so as to extend in the front-rear direction toward the pattern display portion 341 on the front side of the pattern display portion 341 . The rotating shaft 382L is rotated by inputting a rotational force from the left second rotating accessory member driving mechanism 38La under the control of the MPU 51, and is rotated from the left second rotating accessory member driving mechanism 38La under the control of the MPU 51. A non-rotating state is set by stopping the input of the rotational force. As a result, the main rotating part 381L is rotatable about the rotating shaft 382L together with the rotating shaft 382L, and the entire left second rotating accessory member 38L is rotatable. That is, the left second rotating accessory member 38L can approach the first rotating accessory member 37 by moving upward, and is separated from the first rotating accessory member 37 by moving downward. It is possible to

The rotation speed of the rotating shaft 382L (rotation main body 381L) in a predetermined rotation state, that is, the rotation speed of the left second rotating accessory member 38L, is not particularly limited, and even if it is constant, it is indefinite. Further, the rotation speed and rotation direction may be changed.

The rotating shaft 382L is rotatably supported by a support ring 386L fixed to the lifting shaft 385L, and its longitudinal movement is restricted by a restriction ring 387L. Here, the elevation shaft 385L can raise and lower the rotating shaft 382L on the front side of the pattern display section 341 by a driving force input from a left second rotating accessory member driving mechanism 38La (see FIG. 169), which will be described later. It is possible. As a result, the second left rotary accessory member 38L is placed in the standby position (see FIGS. 157 and 158 ) and an actuated position (see FIG. 163) partially visible through translucent region 370A.

As shown in FIG. 169, the left second rotating accessory member 38L is controlled in vertical movement and rotation via the left second rotating accessory member drive mechanism 38La controlled by the MPU51. The second left rotary accessory member drive mechanism 38La is connected to the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 via the input/output I/F 52 . This left second rotating accessory member drive mechanism 38La includes, for example, a plurality of motors, a return detection unit for detecting that the left second rotating accessory member 38L has returned to the standby position, and a motor driver. have.

The plurality of motors are, for example, stepping motors, DC motors, etc., and the return detection unit is, for example, an optical sensor, a contact sensor, or the like. Each motor is connected to the rotating shaft 382L and the lifting shaft 385L of the left second rotating accessory member 38L via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear, and driving force is input to the rotating shaft 382L and the lifting shaft 385L. be done. The left second rotating accessory member 38L can move vertically between a standby position (see FIG. 158) and an operating position (see FIG. 163) by inputting a driving force from a motor to the elevating shaft 385L. It is said that In addition, the left second rotating accessory member 38L rotates in the counterclockwise direction on the front side of the pattern display portion 341 by rotating the rotating shaft 382L by inputting the driving force from the motor to the rotating shaft 382L. Rotatable. The rotational position of the left second rotating accessory member 38L may be any position between the standby position and the operating position. rotated.

In addition, the motor driver of the second left rotary accessory member drive mechanism 38La is connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5. The motor driver then controls each motor according to control instructions from the audio lamp controller 5 . Further, the motor driver can acquire the detection result of the recovery detection unit and transmit it to the sound lamp control device 5 . Note that the motor driver may be omitted, and each motor and return detection unit may be directly connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5 and controlled by the audio lamp control device 5 .

In addition, the configuration of the left second rotating accessory member driving mechanism 38La is not particularly limited. That is, the configuration for vertically moving and rotating the left second rotary accessory member drive mechanism 38La is not particularly limited.

In addition, the main rotating portion 381L is arranged on the front side of the pattern display portion 341 at a position closer to the pattern display portion 341 than the plate members 370 and 371 of the first rotating accessory member 37 are. Therefore, as will be described later, in the expanded state when the first rotating accessory member 37 is moved downward to the operating position (see FIG. 159), the left second rotating accessory member 38L is When moved up to the operating position (see FIG. 163), the information display portion 383L at one end and the information display portion 384L at the other end are positioned on the front side of the pattern display portion 341 on the first rotating accessory member 37. It can be located on the rear side of the translucent region 370A of the plate member 370 (see FIGS. 165 and 166). That is, when the first rotating accessory member 37 rotates in the expanded state at the operating position and the main rotating part 381L rotates at the operating position (see FIGS. 165 and 166), the first rotating accessory member 37 Since the rotation trajectory of the translucent region 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 and the rotation trajectory of the information display portions 383L and 384L of the rotation main portion 381L in the left second rotating accessory member 38L intersect, the special figure game Or at a predetermined timing of the jackpot game, the first rotating accessory member 37 and the left second rotating accessory member 38L are stopped at a position where the translucent area 370A and the information display portions 383L and 384L intersect. By setting the state, the light emitted to the front side of the pattern display portion 341 is blocked by the left second rotating accessory member 38L, and the light emitted to the front side of the pattern display portion 341 is blocked through the light-transmitting region 370A. The display of the information display portions 383L and 384L of the rotary accessory member 38L of No. 2 can be visually recognized (see FIG. 167(A)).

The right second rotating accessory member 38R cooperates with the first rotating accessory member 37, and presents predetermined game information related to games in a special figure game or a jackpot game. Specifically, in the present embodiment, in the special game, it is used when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R jackpot. The right second rotating accessory member 38R includes a rotating main body 381R and a rotating shaft 382R.

The main rotation portion 381R is formed in a plate shape having an oblong shape when viewed from the front, and is arranged on the front side of the pattern display portion 341 . An information display section 383R is provided at one end of the rotation main section 381R, and an information display section 384R is provided at the other end thereof. At least an information display portion 383R at one end portion and an information display portion 384R at the other end portion of the rotation main portion 381R are formed such that the rear side thereof is invisible or difficult to see. Thereby, the information display portions 383R and 384R can block the light emitted to the front side of the pattern display portion 341. FIG. Note that the main rotating portion 381R may be formed so that the rear side thereof is invisible or difficult to see as a whole, or only the information display portions 383R and 384R are formed so that the rear side thereof is invisible or difficult to see, and the other portions are translucent. may have.

In this embodiment, "BIG" is displayed on the information display section 383R at one end, and "big" is displayed on the information display section 384R at the other end. Then, although details will be described later, in the case where the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot, if the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot in the reservation of the right to execute the special game, a predetermined The character "BIG" of the information display portion 383R can be visually recognized through the translucent area 370A of the first rotary accessory member 37 which is in a predetermined stopped state at the position of (see FIG. 168). That is, the characters "BIG" in the information display portion 383R are used to clearly indicate or suggest that there is a 16R jackpot and a reserved renso. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is the 16R normal jackpot, and the reservation of the right to execute the special game does not include the jackpot lottery result of the jackpot, the game machine is stopped at a predetermined position. The character "big" of the information display portion 384R is visible through the translucent region 370A of the first rotary accessory member 37 (see FIG. 168). That is, the characters "big" in the information display portion 384R are used to indicate or suggest that there is no 16R jackpot and no pending renso.

That is, in the present embodiment, the 16R jackpot is notified when the letters visible through the translucent area 370A are the letters "BIG" and "big," It is said that it is possible to distinguish whether or not there is a reserve renso depending on whether it exists or not.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to distinguish between the presence or absence of the reserved Renso depending on whether the characters that are visible through the translucent area 370A are uppercase letters or lowercase letters of the alphabet. It may be made possible to distinguish whether or not there is a reserved renso according to the type of number, symbol, or the like. Further, it may be possible to distinguish between the presence or absence of the reserved renso by the color of characters and symbols that are visible through the translucent area 370A. For example, when the colors of characters and symbols that are visible through translucent area 370A are rainbow colors, the reservation is executed, and the colors of characters and symbols that are visible through translucent area 370A are rainbow colors. If it is a color other than color (for example, black), it may be notified that the reservation is not executed.

The information display portions 383R and 384R of the rotating main body portion 381R of the right second rotating accessory member 38R can be easily formed by painting or the like. It may be formed by a display device. In this case, since the display modes of the information display portions 383R and 384R are diversified, it becomes possible to provide the player with more diverse information on the game using the right second rotary accessory member 38R. . As a result, the effects executed using the right second rotary accessory member 38R can be further diversified, so that the interest in the game is improved.

The rotating shaft 382R is a portion to which a rotational driving force is input from a right second rotating accessory member driving mechanism 38La (see FIG. 169), which will be described later. The rotating shaft 382R is fixed to the central portion of the back side of the rotating main portion 381R so as to extend in the front-rear direction toward the pattern display portion 341 on the front side of the pattern display portion 341. As shown in FIG. The rotating shaft 382R is brought into a predetermined rotational state by inputting a rotational force from the right second rotating accessory member driving mechanism 38Ra under the control of the MPU 51, and is driven by the right second rotating accessory member driving mechanism under the control of the MPU 51. A non-rotating state (predetermined stopped state) is established by stopping the input of rotational force from 38Ra. As a result, the main rotating portion 381R is rotatable about the rotating shaft 382R together with the rotating shaft 382R, and the entire right second rotating accessory member 38R is rotatable.

The rotation speed of the rotating shaft 382R (rotation main body 381R) in a predetermined rotation state, that is, the rotation speed of the right second rotating accessory member 38R, is not particularly limited, and even if it is constant, it is indefinite. Further, the rotation speed and rotation direction may be changed.

The rotary shaft 382R is rotatably supported by a support ring 386R fixed to the elevation shaft 385R, and its longitudinal movement is restricted by a restriction ring 387R. Here, the elevation shaft 385R can raise and lower the rotating shaft 382R on the front side of the pattern display section 341 by a driving force input from a right second rotating accessory member driving mechanism 38Ra (see FIG. 169), which will be described later. It is possible. As a result, the right second rotary accessory member 38R is placed in a visible standby position (see FIGS. 157 and 158 ) and an actuated position (see FIG. 163) partially visible through the translucent region 370A. That is, the right second rotating accessory member 38R can approach the first rotating accessory member 37 by moving upward, and is separated from the first rotating accessory member 37 by moving downward. It is possible to

As shown in FIG. 169, the right second rotary accessory member 38R is controlled in vertical movement and rotation via the right second rotary accessory member drive mechanism 38Ra controlled by the MPU51. The right second rotary accessory member drive mechanism 38Ra is connected to the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 via the input/output I/F 52 . This right second rotating accessory member drive mechanism 38Ra includes, for example, a plurality of motors, a return detection unit for detecting that the right second rotating accessory member 38R has returned to the standby position, and a motor driver. have.

The plurality of motors are, for example, stepping motors, DC motors, etc., and the return detection unit is, for example, an optical sensor, a contact sensor, or the like. Each motor is connected to the rotation shaft 382R and the elevation shaft 385R of the right second rotary accessory member 38R via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear, and driving force is input to the rotation shaft 382R and the elevation shaft 385R. be done. The right second rotating accessory member 38R can move vertically between a standby position (see FIG. 158) and an operating position (see FIG. 163) by inputting a driving force from a motor to the lifting shaft 385R. It is said that In addition, the right second rotating accessory member 38R rotates in the counterclockwise direction on the front side of the pattern display section 341 by rotating the rotating shaft 382R by inputting a driving force from the motor to the rotating shaft 382R. Rotatable. The rotation position of the right second rotating accessory member 38R may be any position between the standby position and the operating position. rotated.

In addition, the motor driver of the right second rotary accessory member drive mechanism 38Ra is connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5. The motor driver then controls each motor according to control instructions from the audio lamp controller 5 . Also, the motor driver can acquire the detection result of the recovery detection unit and transmit it to the sound lamp control device 5 . Note that the motor driver may be omitted, and each motor and return detection unit may be directly connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5 and controlled by the audio lamp control device 5 .

The configuration of the right second rotary accessory member drive mechanism 38Ra is not particularly limited. That is, the configuration for vertically moving and rotating the right second rotary accessory member drive mechanism 38Ra is not particularly limited.

In addition, the main rotating portion 381R is arranged on the front side of the pattern display portion 341 at a position closer to the pattern display portion 341 than the plurality of plate-like members 370 and 371 of the first rotary accessory member 37 are. Therefore, as will be described later, in the enlarged state when the first rotating accessory member 37 is moved downward to the operating position (see FIG. 159), the right second rotating accessory member 38R is When moved up to the operating position (see FIG. 163), the information display portion 383R at one end and the information display portion 384R at the other end are positioned on the front side of the pattern display portion 341 on the first rotating accessory member 37. It can be located on the rear side of the translucent region 370A of the plate member 370 (see FIGS. 165 and 166). That is, when the first rotating accessory member 37 rotates in the expanded state at the operating position and the main rotating part 381R rotates at the operating position (see FIGS. 165 and 166), the first rotating accessory member 37 Since the rotation trajectory of the translucent region 370A of the first plate-shaped member 370 and the rotation trajectory of the information display portions 383R and 384R of the rotation main portion 381R in the right second rotating accessory member 38R intersect, the special figure game Or at a predetermined timing of the jackpot game, the first rotating accessory member 37 and the right second rotating accessory member 38R are stopped at a position where the translucent area 370A and the information display portions 383R and 384R intersect. By setting the state, the light emitted to the front side of the pattern display portion 341 is blocked by the right second rotating accessory member 38R, and the light emitted to the front side of the pattern display portion 341 is blocked through the light-transmitting region 370A. The display of the information display portions 383R and 384R of the rotary accessory member 38R of No. 2 can be visually recognized (see FIG. 167(B)).

Thus, in the present embodiment, at a predetermined timing of a special game or a jackpot game, while the first rotating accessory member 37 rotating at the operating position is set to a predetermined stop state, the left rotating at the operating position By setting the second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R in a predetermined stopped state, the left rotating accessory member 37 passes through the translucent region 370A of the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating accessory member 37. The display of the information display portions 383L, 384L of the second rotating accessory member 38L or the information displaying portions 383R, 384R of the right second rotating accessory member 38R is made visible (see FIG. 167(B)). Therefore, in the present embodiment, predetermined information on the game (information on the type of jackpot and whether or not there is a reservation series) is displayed by the type of the information display portions 383L, 384L, 383R, and 384R that are visible through the translucent area 370A. It can be presented and understood by the player. Therefore, when the first rotating accessory member 37, the left second rotating accessory member 38L, and the right second rotating accessory member 38R are operated in a special game or a jackpot game, the player can transmit light. Since the user can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the types of the information display portions 383L, 384L, 383R, and 384R that are visible through the sexual area 370A, the interest in the game is improved.

In the present embodiment, the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R are movable in the vertical direction. However, it may be movable in a direction other than the vertical direction, for example, in the horizontal direction or diagonal direction, or it may be movable along a non-linear path such as a meandering path or an arc-shaped path. different routes.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R can rotate in one direction in the counterclockwise direction, but the left second rotating accessory member 38L And the right second rotary accessory member 38R may be rotatable in one clockwise direction in addition to the counterclockwise direction, or the rotation direction may change during rotation.

Here, FIG. 168 is a table showing notification mode types by the first rotating accessory member 37, the left second rotating accessory member 38L, and the right second rotating accessory member 38R.

In this embodiment, as described above, the first rotating accessory member 37, the left second rotating accessory member 38L, and the right second rotating accessory member 38R are in a predetermined stopped state at a predetermined position. By doing so, through the translucent region 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating accessory member 37, the information display portions 383L and 384L of the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R information display portions 383R and 384R are visible (see FIG. 167). Two information display portions 383L and 384L are provided on the left second rotating accessory member 38L, and two information display portions 383R and 384R are provided on the right second rotating accessory member 38R. , there are four modes that can be visually recognized through the translucent region 370A of the plate-like member 370 in the first rotating accessory member 37 . Therefore, in this embodiment, there are four types of notification modes of predetermined information for games.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 168, the types of notification modes of predetermined information for a game include notification mode A, notification mode B, notification mode C, and notification mode D.

In the notification mode A, the information display portion 383R of the right second rotating accessory member 38R is visible through the translucent region 370A of the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating accessory member 37. The letters "BIG" are visible through the optical region 370A. In this notification mode A, by making the player visually recognize the character "BIG" in the special game, the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is a 16R probability variable jackpot, and when the special game is started. It is notified that the reservation of the right to execute the special game includes a jackpot lottery result.

In the notification mode B, the information display portion 384R of the right second rotating accessory member 38R is visible through the translucent region 370A of the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating accessory member 37, The letters "big" are visible through optical area 370A. In this notification mode B, by making the player visually recognize the character "big" in the special game, it is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is a 16R probability variable jackpot.

In the notification mode C, the information display portion 383L of the left second rotating accessory member 38L is visible through the translucent region 370A of the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating accessory member 37, so that the transparent The letters "SMALL" are visible through optical area 370A. In this notification mode C, by making the player visually recognize the characters "SMALL" in the special game, it is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is a 5R probability variable jackpot.

In the notification mode D, the information display portion 384L of the left second rotating accessory member 38L is visible through the translucent region 370A of the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating accessory member 37, The letters "small" are visible through optical area 370A. In this notification mode C, by making the player visually recognize the characters "small" in the special game, it is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is the 5R normal jackpot.

In this embodiment, the first rotating accessory member 37, the second left rotating accessory member 38L, and the second right rotating accessory member 38R are driven by drive mechanisms 37a, 38La, and 38Ra controlled by the MPU 51. Although it is rotatable, the game ball may interfere with at least one of the first rotating accessory member 37, the left second rotating accessory member 38L, and the right second rotating accessory member 38R. It is also conceivable to set the rotation state to a predetermined state with the . In this way, a predetermined By being in a rotating state, the player can see that at least one of the first rotating accessory member 37, the left second rotating accessory member 38L, and the right second rotating accessory member 38R is in a predetermined rotating state. It is possible to grasp the timing to be assumed. As a result, the player can focus on the movement of the game ball and at least one of the first rotating accessory member 37, the second left rotating accessory member 38L, and the second right rotating accessory member 38R. Then, through the translucent region 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating accessory member 37, the information display portions 383L and 384L of the left second rotating accessory member 38L, or the right second rotating accessory member 38R It is possible to grasp the timing at which the information display portions 383R and 384R of the display become visible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the movement of the game ball and at least one of the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R. is improved.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the rotating accessory members 37, 38L, 38R are executed when a game ball as a rotating body enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315. It is operated in a special game that notifies the result of the jackpot lottery. Here, in the special figure game, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed (a state in which the decorative pattern is slightly moved without being completely stopped), it is stopped and displayed (a state in which the decorative pattern is completely stopped). By doing so, the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game is notified. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 170, which is a timing chart showing an example of operation of the rotary accessory members 37, 38L, and 38R in the special figure game, an example of operation of the rotary accessory members 37, 38L, and 38R will be described.

As shown in FIG. 170 (A), when the special figure game is started with the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, and the When the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game is a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 170(B), after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed with double eyes, as shown in FIG. 170(F), the decoration. The symbol is stopped and displayed with double eyes. In such a special figure game, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 170(C) to 170(E), after the decorative pattern shown in FIG. The rotary accessory members 37, 38L and 38R are operated at the timing until the decorative pattern shown in FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, after once notifying that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot in the special game, the type of jackpot is notified by operating the rotary accessory members 37, 38L, and 38R, and then The result of the big winning lottery is definitely notified by the stationary display of the decoration pattern.

Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game started with the entry of the game ball to the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 is a jackpot, FIG. 170 (B) and FIG. As shown in 170 (C), after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed with double eyes, at the timing when the waiting time T1 has passed after the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the first rotary accessory member 37 is moved. While being moved downward from the standby position to the operating position (see FIG. 158), the left rotation accessory member 38L and the right rotation accessory member 38R are moved upward from the standby position to the operating position (see FIG. 163) . Then, as shown in FIG. 170(C), the first rotating accessory member 37 is enlarged at the operating position, and the first rotating accessory member 37 in the enlarged state, the left rotating accessory member 38L and the right rotating accessory member 38L The rotating accessory member 38R rotates in the operating position (see FIG. 165). Further, as shown in FIG. 170(C), after the rotation time T2 has elapsed from the start of operation of each rotating accessory member 37, 38L, 38R, the first rotating accessory member 37 in the enlarged state and the left The rotation of the rotating accessory member 38L and the right rotating accessory member 38R is stopped (see FIG. 165 (D)). Then, after the return standby time T3 has elapsed after the rotation of the rotating accessory members 37, 38L, and 38R has stopped, the first rotating accessory member 37 is reduced and returned to the standby position, and the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotary accessory member 38R are returned to the standby position (see FIG. 165 (E)).

Here, the stop position of the first rotary accessory member 37 is determined by the jackpot type notified by the special figure game. For example, the stop position of the first rotating accessory member 37 when the jackpot type notified by the special game is a 5R jackpot (5R variable jackpot or 5R normal jackpot) is The light-transmitting region 370A is stopped at a position where the rotation trajectory of the light-transmitting region 370A of the plate-like member 370 and the rotation trajectory of the information display portions 383L and 384L of the left second rotating accessory member 38L intersect, and announcing It is set at a position where mode C or D can be realized (see FIGS. 167(B) and 168). That is, the stop position of the first rotating accessory member 37 when the jackpot type notified by the special game is the 5R jackpot (5R variable jackpot or 5R normal jackpot) is A position where the information display portion 383L (“SMALL” characters) or the information display portion 384L (“small” characters) of the left second rotary accessory member 38L can be viewed through the translucent area 370A of the plate-like member 370. is set to

On the other hand, the stop position of the first rotating accessory member 37 when the jackpot type notified by the special game is the 16R probability variable jackpot is the translucent property of the plate member 370 in the first rotating accessory member 37. The translucent area 370A is stopped at a position where the rotation trajectory of the area 370A and the rotation trajectory of the information display parts 383R and 384R of the right second rotary accessory member 38R intersect, and the notification mode A or B can be realized. position (see FIGS. 167(A) and 168). That is, the stop position of the first rotating accessory member 37 when the jackpot type notified by the special game is the 16R probability variable jackpot is determined by the translucency of the plate-like member 370 in the first rotating accessory member 37. Through the area 370A, the information display portion 383R (“BIG” characters) or the information display portion 384R (“big” characters) of the right second rotating accessory member 38R is set at a visible position.

In addition, the stop position of the left second rotary accessory member 38L is determined by the jackpot type notified by the special figure game. For example, the stop position of the left second rotating accessory member 38L when the jackpot type notified by the special game is the 5R probability variable jackpot is the rotation of the information display part 383L of the left second rotating accessory member 38L. The information display unit 383L is stopped at a position where the trajectory and the rotation trajectory of the translucent region 370A of the plate-like member 370 in the first rotary accessory member 37 intersect, and the information display section 383L is set at a position where the notification mode C can be realized. (See FIGS. 167(B) and 168). That is, the stop position of the left second rotating accessory member 38L when the jackpot type notified by the special game is the 5R probability variable jackpot is the translucent plate member 370 of the first rotating accessory member 37. An information display portion 383L (characters of "SMALL") is set at a position so as to be visible through the information area 370A.

On the other hand, the stop position of the left second rotating accessory member 38L when the jackpot type notified by the special game is the 5R normal jackpot is the rotation of the information display part 384L of the left second rotating accessory member 38L. The information display unit 384L is stopped at the position where the trajectory and the rotation trajectory of the translucent area 370A of the plate-like member 370 in the first rotary accessory member 37 intersect, and the information display section 384L is set at a position where the notification mode D can be realized. (See FIGS. 167(B) and 168). That is, the stop position of the left second rotating accessory member 38L when the jackpot type notified by the special game is the 5R normal jackpot is the translucent plate member 370 of the first rotating accessory member 37. An information display portion 384L (characters of "small") is set at a position so as to be visible through the information area 370A.

In addition, when the jackpot type reported by the special figure game is the 16R probability variable jackpot, the stop position of the left second rotary accessory member 38L is not particularly limited, and may be determined as appropriate.

In addition, the stop position of the right second rotary accessory member 38R is determined by the presence or absence of the jackpot type and the reserved renso informed by the special figure game. For example, when the jackpot type notified by the special game is the 16R probability variable jackpot and the holding series is executed, the stop position of the right second rotating accessory member 38R is the right second rotating accessory The information display portion 383L is stopped at a position where the rotation trajectory of the information display portion 383R of the member 38R and the rotation trajectory of the translucent region 370A of the plate-like member 370 in the first rotating accessory member 37 intersect, and the information mode A is set to a feasible position (see FIGS. 167(A) and 168). That is, the stop position of the right second rotating accessory member 38R in the case where the jackpot type reported by the special game is 16R probability variable jackpot and the reservation consecutive house is executed is the first rotating accessory member 37 Through the translucent area 370A of the plate-like member 370, the information display portion 383R (characters of "BIG") is set at a position so as to be visible.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type notified by the special game is the 16R probability variable jackpot and the reservation series is not executed, the stop position of the right second rotating accessory member 38R is the right second rotating accessory member. The information display unit 383R is stopped at a position where the rotation trajectory of the information display unit 384R of 38R and the rotation trajectory of the translucent region 370A of the plate-like member 370 in the first rotating accessory member 37 intersect, and the information mode B is set at a feasible position (see FIGS. 167(A) and 168). That is, the stop position of the right second rotating accessory member 38R when the jackpot type notified by the special game is a 16R probability variable jackpot and the reservation consecutive house is not executed is the board on the first rotating accessory member 37 Through the translucent area 370A of the shaped member 370, the information display portion 384R (characters of "big") is set at a position so as to be visible.

In addition, when the jackpot type notified by the special game is a 5R jackpot (5R variable jackpot or 5R normal jackpot), there is no particular restriction on the stop position of the right second rotary accessory member 38R, and it is determined as appropriate. good.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the case where the rotary accessory members 37, 38L, 38R are actuated to notify the type of jackpot and the presence or absence of a reservation group has been described. Even if it is operated to notify (specify or suggest) the effect to be executed later (execution of super reach effect or special reach effect, type of super reach effect or special reach effect), jackpot expectation level good.

In addition, in this embodiment, the rotating accessory members 37, 38L, and 38R explained the case where they were operated between the temporary stop display and the stop display of the decorative symbols in the special game, but other You may make it operate|move by timing. For example, the rotating accessory members 37, 38L, 38R are used at the start of a special game, during the execution of high-speed fluctuation effects (basic effects, non-reach effects) until the start of the reach effect, at the start of various reach effects and It may be activated during execution. That is, the notification of the jackpot type by the rotary accessory members 37, 38L, and 38R is executed not only after the jackpot is notified by the temporary stop display of the decoration pattern, but also before the jackpot is notified. You may do so.

Also, in the present embodiment, the case where the rotating accessory members 37, 38L, 38R are operated in the special game has been described, but the rotating accessory members 37, 38L, 38R are operated in the jackpot game. may In this case, through the translucent region 370A of the plate-shaped member 370 in the first rotating accessory member 37, the information display portions 383L and 384L of the left second rotating accessory member 38L, or the right second rotating accessory member By making the information display portions 383R and 384R of 38R visible, it is clearly indicated to the player in the special game that, for example, after the jackpot game is over, a so-called reserve consecutive house will be executed as predetermined information for the game. For example, the jackpot type is more advantageous to the player. That is, it becomes possible to execute a reservation revolving house confirmation effect and a jackpot type promotion effect from a normal jackpot to a probability variable jackpot by the rotary accessory members 37, 38L, and 38R. Also, the timing at which the rotary accessory members 37, 38L, 38R are operated in the jackpot game is not particularly limited, and may be any of the opening, round game, and ending of the jackpot game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the cooperation between the first rotating accessory member 37 and the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R provides four notification modes (see FIG. 168 ) can be executed, but as described above, the first rotary accessory member 37 alone can execute effects such as roulette effects (see FIG. 162). Therefore, the game machine 10 can be configured only with the first rotating accessory member 37 by omitting the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R.

In addition, in this embodiment, both the first rotating accessory member 37 and the second left rotating accessory member 38L or the second right rotating accessory member 38R move from the standby position to the operating position. Although production based on four notification modes (see FIG. 168) can be executed, the first rotating accessory member 37 and either the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R It is also possible to execute effects based on four notification modes (see FIG. 168) by moving from the standby position to the operating position. That is, the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R moves relatively to the back side of the first rotating accessory member 37, and the specific area emitted from the pattern display unit 341 may exist anywhere as long as it can block the light of

[Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 in the sound lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 171 to 174. FIG.

In this embodiment, the first rotating accessory member 37, the second left rotating accessory member 38L, and the second right rotating accessory member 38R are provided as the accessory for production, so that the sub-movable accessory is provided as the accessory for production. It is different from the above-described first embodiment having the display section 38 and the movable accessory member 39 . Therefore, the processing related to the operation control of the first rotating accessory member 37, the second left rotating accessory member 38L, and the second right rotating accessory member 38R as the performance accessory is different from that of the first embodiment. different. Specifically, in this embodiment, part of the command determination processing and special figure game effect control processing in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 42 executed by the sound lamp control device 5 is the first embodiment different from Hereinafter, the command determination processing and the special figure game effect control processing of this embodiment will be described, focusing on differences from the above-described first embodiment.

[Command judgment processing]
First, an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in step S2703 of the secondary timer interrupt processing in FIG. 42 will be described. Here, FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing.

As shown in FIG. 171, in the command determination process of this embodiment, when receiving a special figure variation pattern command, the processes of steps S3101 to S3106 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, and further, the first Rotating accessory member operation effect setting for setting the rotating accessory member operation effect executed by operating the rotating accessory member 37, the left second rotating accessory member 38L, and the right second rotating accessory member 38R Processing is executed (step S3301).

[Rotating Accessory Member Operation Effect Setting Processing]
Next, an example of the procedure of the rotating accessory member operation effect setting process executed in step S3301 of the command determination process of FIG. 171 will be described. Here, FIG. 172 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the rotating accessory member actuation effect setting process.

<Step S3401>
As shown in FIG. 172, in the rotating accessory member operation effect setting process of the present embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is a 16R probability variable jackpot ( step S3401). Whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is the 16R probability variable jackpot is determined based on the success/failure information for the jackpot lottery included in the special figure variation pattern command.

When the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is the 16R probability variable jackpot (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3402, and the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is If it is not a 16R probability variable jackpot (step S3401: No), the process proceeds to step S3405.

<Step S3402>
If the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is a 16R probability variable jackpot (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 51 is a jackpot in the reservation of the right to execute the special game at the start of the special game It is determined whether or not the result of the lottery includes a jackpot, that is, whether or not so-called reserved consecutive houses are executed (step S3402). Whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is included in the reservation of the right to execute the special game at the start of the special game is set in the RAM 512 of the voice lamp control device 5. It is determined based on the data (special figure data) of the special figure propriety information stored in the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area (not shown).

MPU 51, when the reservation of the right to execute the special game at the start of the special game includes that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (step S3402: Yes), that is, the so-called reservation consecutive house is executed If so, the process proceeds to step S3403. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 does not include the jackpot lottery result being a jackpot in the reservation of the right to execute the special game at the start of the special game (step S3402: No), that is, the so-called reserved series If so is not executed, the process proceeds to step S3404.

<Step S3403>
If the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot in the reservation of the right to execute the special game at the start of the special game (step S3402: Yes), that is, the jackpot notified by the special game When the result of the lottery is the 16R probability variable jackpot and the so-called reservation consecutive house is executed, the MPU 51 sets the notification mode A as the rotating accessory member operation effect (step S3403), and shifts the process to step S3409. . As described above, in the notification mode A, the information display portion 383R ("BIG" character) is visible, the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is a 16R probability variable jackpot, and the jackpot is in the reserve of the right to execute the special game at the start of the special game. It is notified that the results of the lottery include the jackpot (see FIG. 168).

<Step S3404>
If the result of the jackpot lottery is not included in the reservation of the right to execute the special game at the start of the special game (step S3402: No), that is, it is notified by the special game When the result of the jackpot lottery is the 16R probability variable jackpot and the so-called reservation consecutive house is not executed, the MPU 51 sets the notification mode B as the rotating accessory member operation effect (step S3404), and shifts the process to step S3409. . As described above, in the notification mode B, the information display portion 384R ("big" character) is visible, and it is reported that the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is a 16R probability variable jackpot (see FIG. 168).

<Step S3405>
If the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is not a 16R probability variable jackpot (step S3401: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is a 5R probability variable jackpot. It judges (step S3405). Whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is the 5R probability variable jackpot is determined based on the success/failure information for the jackpot lottery included in the special figure variation pattern command.

MPU51, when the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is 5R probability variable jackpot (step S3405: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3406, the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game If it is not a 5R probability variable jackpot (step S3405: No), the process proceeds to step S3407.

<Step S3406>
If the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special figure game is a 5R probability variable jackpot (step S3405: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the notification mode C as the rotating accessory member operation effect (step S3406), and step processing Move to S3409. As described above, in the notification mode C, the information display portion 383L ("SMALL" character) is a visible aspect, and it is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is a 5R probability variable jackpot (see FIG. 168).

<Step S3407>
If the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is not a 5R probability variable jackpot (step S3405: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is a 5R normal jackpot. It judges (step S3407). Whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is the 5R normal jackpot is determined based on the success/failure information for the jackpot lottery included in the special figure variation pattern command.

The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3408 when the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is the 5R normal jackpot (step S3407: Yes). On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is not the 5R normal jackpot (step S3407: No), that is, when the result of the jackpot lottery is lost, the MPU 51 sets the rotating accessory member operation effect. Without doing so, the rotating accessory member actuation effect setting process is terminated.

<Step S3408>
When the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is the 5R normal jackpot (step S3407: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the notification mode D as the rotating accessory member operation effect (step S3408), and the process is stepped. Move to S3409. As described above, in the notification mode D, the information display portion 384L ("small" character) is visible, and it is reported that the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is a 5R normal jackpot (see FIG. 168).

<Step S3409>
When one of the notification modes A to D is set as the rotating accessory member operation effect (steps S3403, S3404, S3406 or S3408), the MPU 51 rotates the rotating accessory member indicating that the rotating accessory member operating effect has been set. The operation effect setting flag is set to ON (step S3409), and the process proceeds to step S3410. In order to determine whether or not the rotating accessory member operation effect setting flag is in a standby state for the operation of each rotating accessory member 37, 38L, 38R, a step in the special figure game effect control process of FIG. 173 described later It is referred to in S3501.

<Steps S3410 and S3411>
In step S3410, the MPU 51 is executed when the special figure variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. The type (production pattern) is specified, and an operation standby counter is set according to the specified variation type (production pattern) (step S3410), and the rotation accessory member operation production setting process ends. The operation standby counter indicates the remaining time until the operation of each rotary accessory member 37, 38L, 38R is started, and the decoration according to the variation type (production pattern) set for the special figure game It is set to a value corresponding to the standby time T1 (see FIG. 170) from the pattern fluctuation start timing.

[Special game production control process]
Next, an example of the procedure of the special figure game effect control process executed in step S2704 of the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 42 will be described. Here, FIGS. 173 and 174 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the special game effect control process.

<Step S3501>
As shown in FIG. 173, in the special figure game effect control process of the present embodiment, the MPU 51 first turns on the rotating accessory member operation effect setting flag indicating that the rotating accessory member operation effect has been set. determine whether there is That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the rotary accessory members 37, 38L, 38R are in a standby state.

MPU51, when the rotating accessory operation effect setting flag is set to ON (step S3501: Yes), that is, when the rotating accessory members 37, 38L, and 38R are in a standby state for operation, the process proceeds to step S3502 Transition. On the other hand, the MPU 51, when the rotating accessory operation effect setting flag is set to OFF (step S3501: No), that is, when the rotating accessory members 37, 38L, and 38R are not in a standby state for operation, the process is executed as shown in FIG. to step S3509.

<Steps S3502 to S3504>
When the rotating accessory member operation effect setting flag is set to ON (step S3501: Yes), that is, when each rotating accessory member 37, 38L, 38R is in a standby state, the MPU 51 rotates in FIG. 1 is subtracted from the value of the operation standby counter set in step S3411 in the accessory member operation effect setting process (step S3502), and it is determined whether or not the value of the operation standby counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3503 ). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start operating the rotary accessory members 37, 38L, and 38R.

MPU51, when the value of the operation standby counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3503: Yes), that is, when it is the operation start timing of each rotary accessory member 37, 38L, 38R, the process proceeds to step S3505. On the other hand, if the value of the operation standby counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3503: No), that is, if it is not the operation start timing of each rotating accessory member 37, 38L, 38R, each rotating accessory member 37, 38L , 38R other than the control related to the operation of the special game effect is executed (step S3504), and the special game effect control process ends.

<Steps S3505 to S3508>
If the value of the operation standby counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3503: Yes), that is, if it is the operation start timing of each rotating accessory member 37, 38L, 38R, the MPU 51 detects each rotating accessory member 37, 38L , 38R (step S3505). Specifically, the MPU 51 moves the first rotating accessory member 37 from the standby position to the operating position and expands the first rotating accessory member 37 (see FIGS. 158 and 159), and further moves the first The rotary accessory member 37 is rotated counterclockwise (see FIGS. 160 and 165). In addition, the MPU 51 moves the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R from the standby position to the operating position, and rotates the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38L. The accessory member 38R is rotated counterclockwise.

The first rotating accessory member 37, the left second rotating accessory member 38L, and the right second rotating accessory member 38R may start operating at the same time, but they start operating with a time lag. may For example, the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R may start to move upward after the first rotating accessory member 37 is expanded at the operating position. Further, the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R may start rotating at the same time or may have a time difference.

Then, the MPU 51 sets on a role product rotation operation flag indicating that each of the rotating role product members 37, 38L, and 38R is being rotated (step S3506), and rotates each of the rotating role product members 37, 38L, and 38R. (step S3507). Incidentally, the role product rotation operation flag is referred to in order to determine whether or not each of the rotary role product members 37, 38L, 38R is rotated in step S3509 of FIG. 174 described later.

In addition, the MPU 51 sets the rotating accessory member operation effect setting flag to OFF (step S3508), and executes other processing for the special figure game effect other than the control related to the operation of each rotating accessory member 37, 38L, 38R. (Step S3504), the special figure game effect control processing ends.

<Step S3509>
If the rotating role product member operation effect setting flag is set to OFF (step S3501: No), that is, if it is not in the standby state for the operation of each rotating role product member 37, 38L, 38R, as shown in FIG. 174, MPU 51 determines whether or not the role product rotation operation flag is set to ON (step S3509). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not each rotating accessory member 37, 38L, 38R is rotated.

MPU51, when the role product rotation operation flag is set to ON (step S3509: Yes), that is, when each of the rotating role product members 37, 38L, 38R is rotated, the process proceeds to step S3510. On the other hand, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3516 when the accessory rotation operation flag is set to OFF (step S3509: No), that is, when the rotating accessory members 37, 38L, and 38R are not rotated. .

<Steps S3510 and S3511>
When the role product rotation operation flag is set to ON (step S3509: Yes), that is, when each rotating role product member 37, 38L, 38R is rotated, the MPU 51 is set in step S3507 of FIG. The value of the role product rotation operation counter is subtracted by 1 (step S3510), and it is determined whether or not the value of the role product rotation operation counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3511). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to stop rotating the rotary accessory members 37, 38L, 38R.

If the value of the accessory rotation operation counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3511: Yes), that is, if it is time to stop the rotation of the rotating accessory members 37, 38L, and 38R, the process proceeds to step S3512. transition to On the other hand, if the value of the accessory rotation operation counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3511: No), that is, if it is not the timing to stop the rotation of each rotating accessory member 37, 38L, 38R, each rotating accessory Other processing for the special figure game effect other than the control related to the operation of the members 37, 38L, 38R is executed (step S3504 in FIG. 173), and the special figure game effect control process ends.

<Steps S3512 to S3514>
When the value of the accessory rotation operation counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3511: Yes), that is, when it is time to stop the rotation of each rotating accessory member 37, 38L, 38R, the MPU 51 rotates each rotating accessory The rotation of the members 37, 38L, 38R is stopped (step S3512). That is, the MPU 51 is set in steps S3403, S3404, S3406 or S3408 in the rotating accessory member actuation effect setting process in FIG. The rotation of the accessory members 37, 38L, 38R is stopped.

The rotation stop timings of the first rotating accessory member 37, the left second rotating accessory member 38L, and the right second rotating accessory member 38R may be the same, or there may be a time lag. However, it is preferable to stop the rotation at the same time. This is because, when the rotation is stopped with a time difference, the information visually recognized through the translucent region 370A of the first rotating accessory member 37 depends on the stop positions of the previously stopped rotating accessory members 37, 38L, and 38R. This is because it becomes easy to guess.

In addition, when stopping the rotation of the first rotating accessory member 37, the second left rotating accessory member 38L, and the second right rotating accessory member 38R with a time lag, the second left rotating accessory member is first rotated. It is preferable to stop the rotation of the accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R. This is because when the rotation of the first rotating accessory member 37 is stopped first, what is visually recognized through the translucent region 370A of the first rotating accessory member 37 is the second rotating accessory member on the left. This is because it is easy to grasp which one of 38L and right second rotary accessory member 38R.

Then, the MPU 51 sets on the role rotation stop flag indicating that the rotation of each of the rotating accessory members 37, 38L, and 38R is stopped at the operating position (step S3513), and each of the rotating accessory members 37, Set a rotating accessory return counter indicating the remaining return waiting time T3 (see FIG. 170) until returning to the waiting positions of 38L and 38R (step S3514), and the process proceeds to step S3515.

Incidentally, the role product rotation stop flag is referenced in step S3516 to be described later in order to determine whether or not the rotation of each of the rotating role product members 37, 38L, 38R is stopped at the operating position. Further, each rotating accessory member 37, 38L, 38R is stopped rotating at the operating position until the return waiting time T3 (see FIG. 170) elapses, that is, until the value of the rotating accessory return counter becomes 0. located in the state. As a result, the notification modes A to D (see FIG. 168) realized at the stop positions of the rotating accessory members 37, 38L, and 38R are maintained until the return standby time T3 (see FIG. 170) elapses, that is, the rotating accessory This is maintained until the return counter value reaches zero. Therefore, during the period from when the rotary accessory members 37, 38L, and 38R are stopped until the return standby time T3 (see FIG. 170) elapses, the plate-like member 370 of the first rotary accessory member 37 is transparent. Information display portion 383L ("SMALL" characters), information display portion 384L ("small" characters), and information on the right second rotating accessory member 38R are displayed through the property area 370A. Either the display portion 383R (characters of "BIG") or the information display portion 384R (characters of "big") can be visually recognized. As a result, the player can grasp the jackpot type as a result of the jackpot lottery for the special game by stopping the rotation of each of the rotating accessory members 37, 38L, and 38R that have started to rotate. If it is a 16R probability variable jackpot, it can be determined whether or not the reservation is executed. Therefore, when the rotation of each rotating accessory member 37, 38L, 38R is started, the player can determine at which position each rotating accessory member 37, 38L, 38R is stopped and the first rotating accessory member 37 It is possible to enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to what characters are visually recognized through the translucent area 370A of the plate-like member 370 in .

<Step S3515>
In step S3515, the MPU 51 sets the role product rotation operation flag to OFF. Then, the MPU 51 executes other processing for the special figure game effect other than the control related to the operation of each rotary accessory member 37, 38L, 38R (step S3504 in FIG. 173), and ends the special figure game effect control process. .

<Step S3516>
When the role product rotation operation flag is set to OFF (step S3509: No), that is, when the rotating role product members 37, 38L, 38R are not rotated, the MPU 51 sets the role product rotation stop flag to ON. It is determined whether or not it is set (step S3516). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the rotation of each rotary accessory member 37, 38L, 38R is stopped at the operating position.

MPU51, when the role product rotation stop flag is set to ON (step S3516: Yes), that is, when the rotation of each of the rotating role product members 37, 38L, 38R is stopped at the operating position, the process proceeds to step S3517 transition to On the other hand, the MPU 51, if the accessory rotation stop flag is set to OFF (step S3516: No), that is, if the rotation of each rotating accessory member 37, 38L, 38R is not stopped at the operating position, each rotation Other processing for the special figure game effect other than the control related to the operation of the accessory members 37, 38L, 38R is executed (step S3504 in FIG. 173), and the special figure game effect control process ends.

<Steps S3517 and S3518>
If the role product rotation stop flag is set to ON (step S3516: Yes), that is, if the rotation of each rotating role product member 37, 38L, 38R is stopped at the operating position, the MPU 51 sets in step S3514 The value of the rotating accessory return counter is subtracted by 1 (step S3517), and it is determined whether or not the value of the rotating accessory return counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3518). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to return the rotary accessory members 37, 38L, 38R to their standby positions.

If the value of the rotating accessory return counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3518: Yes), that is, when it is time to return the rotating accessory members 37, 38L, and 38R to their standby positions, the process proceeds to step S3519. transition to On the other hand, the MPU 51 determines that the value of the rotating accessory return counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3518: No), that is, if it is not the timing to return the rotating accessory members 37, 38L, and 38R to the standby position, each rotating accessory Other processing for the special figure game effect other than the control related to the operation of the members 37, 38L, 38R is executed (step S3504 in FIG. 173), and the special figure game effect control process ends.

<Steps S3519 and S3520>
When the value of the rotating accessory return counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3518: Yes), that is, when it is time to return the rotating accessory members 37, 38L, and 38R to the standby position, the MPU 51 performs the first rotation After shrinking the accessory member 37, it is returned to the standby position, and the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R are returned to the standby position (step S3519).

The first rotating accessory member 37, the left second rotating accessory member 38L, and the right second rotating accessory member 38R may start returning at the same time, but they start returning with a time difference. may

Then, the MPU 51 sets off the role rotation stop flag indicating that the rotation of each of the rotating accessory members 37, 38L, and 38R is stopped at the operating position (step S3520), and further, each rotating accessory member 37, 38L, other processing for the special figure game effect other than the control related to the operation of 38R is executed (step S3504 in FIG. 173), and the special figure game effect control process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the specific area of the pattern display section 341 configured by a liquid crystal display or the like as a light emitter is displayed through the plate member 370 of the first rotating accessory member 37 as the first rotating body. A first visual recognition state as a state in which light can be visually recognized, a left second rotation as a second rotation body on the back side of the plate-like member 370 of the first rotation accessory member 37 as the first rotation body When the accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R moves, the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R as the second rotating body emits light. The light in the specific area of the symbol display part 341 as the body is blocked, and the left second rotating body or the right second rotating body as the second rotating body is the first rotating accessory as the first rotating body. and a second visible state as a second state visible through the plate member 370 of the member 37 . In this way, the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R as the second rotating body is attached to the back side of the first rotating accessory member 37 as the first rotating body. is movable, the first rotating accessory member 37 as the first rotating body and the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member as the second rotating body By the operation with 38R, since it can be in two modes of the first visual recognition state and the second visual recognition state as the state that the player can visually recognize, the first rotating accessory member 37 as the first rotating body , and the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R acting as the second rotating body diversifies the decoration performed.

For example, in the present embodiment, light in a specific area of the pattern display section 341 configured by a liquid crystal display as a light emitter is emitted through the plate member 370 of the first rotating accessory member 37 as the first rotating body. In the first visible state as a visible state, it is possible to perform an effect according to the visible state of the light in the specific area of the pattern display section 341 that is visually recognized through the plate-shaped member 370 of the first rotating accessory member 37. Become. Specifically, the player can see the light in the specific area of the pattern display portion 341 as a light emitter that is visually recognized through the plate member 370 of the first rotating accessory member 37 as the first rotating body. It is possible to execute a decoration that gives information about the game, for example, a decoration that notifies that the result of the big win lottery is a big win (one-shot announcement effect), and also the expectation that the result of the big win lottery will be a big win. It becomes possible to execute a decoration that indicates or suggests the degree of the winning, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a big win, it becomes possible to execute a decoration that indicates or suggests the type of the jackpot. It is possible to execute decorations that indicate or suggest the type of decoration that is to be used, and during the suspension of the right to execute the special game that is executed after the end of the jackpot game, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. It becomes possible to execute a decoration (reservation Renso finalization effect) that informs that an object is included.

In addition, on the back side of the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating accessory member 37 as the first rotating body, the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member as the second rotating body As the member 38R moves, the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R emits light in a specific area of the pattern display section 341 configured by a liquid crystal display or the like as a light emitter. In the second visible state as a state in which the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R is visible through the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating accessory member 37, An effect according to the visual recognition mode of the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R visually recognized through the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating accessory member 37 can be executed. Specifically, the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R visually recognized through the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating accessory member 37 as the first rotating body Depending on the mode, it is possible to execute an effect for giving information about the game to the player, an effect for giving information about the game to the player, for example, an effect for notifying that the result of the jackpot lottery is a big win (one-shot notification effect). In addition, it is possible to execute an effect that expresses or suggests the degree of expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is indicated or indicated. It becomes possible to execute a suggesting performance, furthermore, to execute a performance specifying or suggesting the performance type to be executed later, and to execute a special game to be executed after the end of the jackpot game. During the reservation of the right to play, it is possible to execute a reserved consecutive house fixing performance for notifying that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery includes a jackpot.

As described above, in the present embodiment, light from the pattern display section 341 constituted by a liquid crystal display or the like as a light emitter is emitted through the plate member 370 of the first rotating accessory member 37 as the first rotating body. A first visible state as a visible state, and a left second rotating role as a second rotating body on the back side of the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating accessory member 37 as the first rotating body By moving the material member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R, the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R is configured by a liquid crystal display as a light emitter. The left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R is visible through the plate-like member 370 of the first rotating accessory member 37 by blocking the light of the pattern display part 341. By having the second visual recognition state, the first rotating accessory member 37 as the first rotating body and the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating body as the second rotating body Since the decoration executed by the operation with the rotating accessory member 38R is diversified, the amusement of the game is improved.

The first rotating body and the second rotating body are movable so as to approach and separate from each other. , or conversely, the second rotating body may be rendered immovable while the first rotating body is movable, thereby enabling the approaching and separating. That is, one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body may be immovable as long as the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be moved toward and away from each other.

Specifically, in this embodiment, the first rotating accessory member 37, the left second rotating accessory member 38L, and the right second rotating accessory member 38R are movable so as to approach and separate. However, while the first rotating accessory member 37 is immovable, the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R can be moved so that they can be close and separated. , Conversely, while making the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R immovable, the first rotating accessory member 37 is made movable, so that the proximity Separation may be possible. That is, if the first rotating accessory member 37, the left second rotating accessory member 38L, and the right second rotating accessory member 38R can be close and separated, the first rotating accessory member 37, One of the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R may be immovable.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the special game, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are operated to block the light of the specific area emitted from the light emitting body to the front side, and the first A visible state in which the second rotating body behind the rotating body can be visually recognized is realized, but in a state where a game ball other than a special game such as a jackpot game is hit on the game board 31, it is emitted from the light emitting body to the front side. A visible state in which the second rotator behind the first rotator can be visually recognized may be realized by blocking the light in the specific area where the second rotator is visible. Then, for example, by making the second rotating body behind the first rotating body visible in the big winning game, the big winning lottery notified in the special game that triggered the execution of the big winning game It is possible to execute a promotion effect that informs the player that the actual jackpot lottery result is more advantageous to the player than the result of , and the right to execute a special game that is executed after the jackpot game ends. It is possible to execute a reservation-reserved-residence-fixing performance for notifying that the reservation includes a jackpot as a result of the jackpot lottery.

Specifically, in this embodiment, in the special figure game, the first rotating accessory member 37, the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R are operated. Then, the light of the specific area emitted from the pattern display part 341 to the front side is blocked, and the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R behind the first rotating accessory member 37 is displayed. However, in the state where game balls other than special game such as jackpot games are launched onto the game board 31, the light of the specific area emitted from the pattern display unit 341 to the front side is blocked, A state in which the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R behind the first rotating accessory member 37 can be visually recognized may be realized. Then, for example, in the jackpot game, by making the left second rotating role product member 38L or the right second rotating role product member 38R behind the first rotating role product member 37 visible, the jackpot game can be performed. It is possible to execute a promotion effect for notifying that the actual jackpot lottery result is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot lottery result notified in the special game that triggered the execution, and It is possible to execute a reserved consecutive house fixing performance for informing that the reservation of the right to execute the special game executed after the end of the big winning game includes the big winning lottery result.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the special figure game and the jackpot game, by making the light of the specific region emitted from the light emitting body to the front side through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating body visible to the front side, the specific region Depending on the display contents in , it is possible to execute a promotion effect or a reservation confirmation effect, and in the special game, a specific area emitted from the light emitter to the front side through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating body By making the light visible, depending on the display content in the specific area, a one-shot announcement effect to notify that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, a performance notice effect to notify the effect to be executed later, etc. It is possible to perform a production stock production.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, in the special game and the jackpot game, the light in the specific area emitted from the pattern display section 341 to the front side through the translucent area 370A of the first rotating accessory member 37 can be visually recognized. state, depending on the display content in the specific area, it is possible to execute a promotion effect or a reserved Renso confirmation effect. By making the light in the specific area emitted from the pattern display part 341 to the front side through the character area 370A visible, the result of the big win lottery is notified by the display contents in the specific area. It is possible to execute an announcement effect, an effect announcement effect for notifying the effect to be executed later, and an effect stock effect.

Further, in this embodiment, the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is controlled by the MPU 51. At least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body is The rotation may be started with the interference of others as a trigger. For example, the first rotating body interferes with the second rotating body that has moved toward the first rotating body, or the game ball that has moved toward the first rotating body interferes. Triggered by this, the rotation may be started.

Specifically, in this embodiment, the rotation of the first rotating accessory member 37, the left second rotating accessory member 38L and the right second rotating accessory member 38R is controlled by the MPU 51. At least one of the first rotating accessory member 37, the left second rotating accessory member 38L, and the right second rotating accessory member 38R starts rotating triggered by the interference of others. You may do so. For example, the first rotating accessory member 37 prevents the left second rotating accessory member 38L or the right second rotating accessory member 38R moving toward the first rotating accessory member 37 from interfering with each other. As a trigger, or when a game ball moving toward the first rotating accessory member 37 interferes, the rotation may be started.

Further, in the present embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to ninth embodiments described above are possible within the applicable range.

Moreover, in each embodiment, it is also possible to apply the items described in other embodiments within the applicable range.

[Eleventh embodiment]
As a specific configuration of the present invention, the game machine comprises "determination processing" as determination means, "display control" as variable display means, and "holding storage processing" as holding means. , Also, it has a "starting ball entering section" as the first starting ball entering means or the second starting ball entering means, has "unfavorable state control" as a disadvantageous state, and "advantageous state control" as an advantageous state. ``output information'' as predetermined identification information; ``information output unit'' or ``information output processing'' as first output means; and ``information stop processing'' as output stop means , Also includes a "holding number storage area" or "holding number storage processing" as a storage means, and "output information" as specific identification information, and an "information output unit" or ""Information output processing" and "output method" as an output mode.

The determination means may be a process for performing various determinations. As a determination means, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, determination processing of whether to shift the game state, determination processing of whether to shift to the jackpot game state, whether to shift to the variable probability game state Judgment processing whether to shift to the time saving game state, judgment processing whether to shift to the normal game state, jackpot judgment processing whether to execute the jackpot game, game to the first winning opening A jackpot determination process for determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game when a ball enters, and a jackpot game at the start of variation of the first special symbol triggered by the game ball entering the first winning hole is executed. Jackpot determination processing whether or not, jackpot determination processing whether or not to execute a jackpot game when a game ball enters the second winning port, triggered by the game ball entering the second winning port Big hit determination processing of whether or not to execute the jackpot game at the start of the variation of the second special symbol, determination processing of whether or not to execute the jackpot determination processing, normal pattern hit determination of whether or not to execute the normal pattern winning game Processing, normal pattern hit determination processing of whether or not to execute a game per normal pattern when the game ball passes through the through gate, normal pattern fluctuation start when the game ball passes through the through gate Ordinary figure hit determination processing of whether or not to execute a game per figure, arbitrary combinations thereof, and the like.

The variable display means may be display control for variable display of patterns on various display devices. As the variable display means, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, display control for variable display of patterns on a liquid crystal display, display control for variable display of patterns on an organic EL display, or dot matrix display. display control for the variable display of the pattern, display control for the variable display of the pattern on the plasma display, display control for the variable display of the pattern on the 7-segment display, display control for turning on/off the LED lamp, the first special Display control for variably displaying the first special symbol in the symbol display unit, display control for variably displaying the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit, display control for variably displaying the normal symbol in the normal symbol display unit, Display control for variably displaying decorative patterns in the pattern display section, arbitrary combinations thereof, and the like are included.

The holding means may be storage processing for various kinds of holding. As a holding means, if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, a storage process of the first special figure reservation number, which is the number of reservations for the right to execute the first special figure game, and a game ball entering the first winning hole Storage processing of the 1st special figure reservation number after the increase when the 1st special figure reservation number increases triggered by the ball, decrease when the 1st special figure reservation number decreases due to the start of fluctuation of the 1st special symbol Later memory processing of the first special figure reservation number, memory processing of the second special figure reservation number which is the reservation number of the right to execute the second special game, triggered by the game ball entering the second winning hole As the storage processing of the second special figure reservation number after the increase when the second special figure reservation number increases, the second special figure after the decrease when the second special figure reservation number decreases due to the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol Storage processing of the number of figure holdings, storage processing of the number of holdings of normal figure fluctuations, which is the number of reservations for the right to execute the normal figure game, processing of the number of holdings of normal figure fluctuations, triggered by the passing of the game ball through the through gate Memory processing of the number of normal pattern fluctuations after the increase, memory processing of the number of normal pattern fluctuations after the decrease when the number of normal pattern fluctuations decreases due to the start of normal pattern fluctuation, and any combination thereof.

The first starting ball-entering means or the second starting ball-entering means may be a ball-entering section that provides an opportunity to start the variable display of symbols by the entering of a game ball. As the first start-up ball entry means or the second start-up ball entry means, various displays (liquid crystal display, dot matrix display, plasma display) can be used as long as the gist of the present invention can be realized. , 7-segment display, etc.), the first prize opening that gives the opportunity to start the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit, the first 2 A second winning opening that gives an opportunity to start the variable display of the second special design in the special design display section, a through gate that provides an opportunity to start the variable display of the normal design in the normal design display section, and a design display section , an arbitrary combination thereof, etc., that gives an opportunity to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The disadvantageous state may be any control that puts the player in a disadvantageous state with respect to various games. As the disadvantageous state, if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, control to make the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot is low, control to limit the execution of the jackpot game. , Control to limit the execution of the game per normal pattern, control to limit the entry of game balls into the winning opening to give the opportunity to execute the special game, second to give the opportunity to execute the second special game Control that restricts the entry of game balls into the winning opening by means of an electric accessory, and the time allowed for entry of a game ball into the winning opening that gives an opportunity to execute a special game is set to a short time. Control to shorten the operation time (allowable ball entry time) of the electric role that restricts the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole that gives the opportunity to execute the second special game, Control to reduce the frequency of allowing game balls to enter the winning opening that gives the opportunity to execute the figure game, entry of the game ball to the second winning opening that gives the opportunity to execute the second special game Control to reduce the frequency of operation of electric accessories that limit the Control to reduce the probability of winning, and whether or not to operate the electric accessory that restricts the entry of game balls into the second winning port that gives the opportunity to execute the first special game. Control to reduce the probability that the result of is per normal pattern, control to increase the execution time of the game per normal pattern that informs the result of the lottery per normal pattern, and any combination thereof.

The advantageous state may be any control that provides an advantageous state for the player regarding various games. As the advantageous state, if the purport of the present invention can be realized, for example, a control in which the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery results in whether or not to execute the jackpot game is a jackpot is high, or a control that allows the execution of the jackpot game. , Control to allow the execution of a game per normal figure, control to allow the entry of game balls into the winning opening that gives the opportunity to perform the special figure game, second to give the opportunity to perform the second special figure game Control to allow game balls to enter the winning hole by electric accessories, give the opportunity to execute a special game, and allow a ball entry time when the game ball is allowed to enter the winning hole control, control to lengthen the operation time (permissible ball entry time) of the electric role that restricts the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole that gives the opportunity to execute the second special game, Control to increase the frequency of allowing game balls to enter the winning opening that gives the opportunity to execute the figure game, and the entry of the game ball to the second winning opening that gives the opportunity to execute the second special game Control to increase the frequency of operation of electric accessories that limit the Control to increase the probability of winning, and whether or not to operate the electric accessory that restricts the entry of game balls into the second winning port that gives the opportunity to execute the second special game. Control to increase the probability that the result of is per normal pattern, control to shorten the execution time of the game per normal pattern that informs the result of the lottery per normal pattern, and any combination thereof.

The predetermined identification information may be output information corresponding to a special game state (for example, a jackpot game state) or an advantageous state (for example, a probability variable game state, a time-saving game state, which is a high-frequency support mode). As the predetermined identification information, if it is possible to realize the purpose of the present invention, for example, output information corresponding to the type of special game executed in the special game state, corresponding to the type of game state to be shifted after the special game is finished output information, output information corresponding to the type of advantageous state, output information corresponding to the start of the special game state, output information corresponding to the special game state, output information corresponding to the end of the special game state Output information, information corresponding to the start of the advantageous state, output information corresponding to being in the advantageous state, output information corresponding to the end of the advantageous state, output information corresponding to the start of the variable gaming state , Output information corresponding to being in the probability variation gaming state, Output information corresponding to the end of the probability variation gaming state, Output information corresponding to the start of the time saving gaming state, Corresponding to being in the time saving gaming state Output information, output information corresponding to the end of the time-saving game state, output information output in response to the change in the game state when the variable display of symbols is started when the game state is changed, Arbitrary combination etc. are mentioned.

The first output means may be an output unit that outputs predetermined identification information or a process that outputs predetermined identification information. As the first output means, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, an external output terminal board, an output terminal section provided on the external output terminal board, an input/output interface connected to a processing device such as an MPU or a CPU, Processing for outputting predetermined identification information to an information output display unit provided for information output, processing for outputting predetermined identification information by processing devices such as MPU and CPU, special game executed in special game state Processing for outputting predetermined identification information corresponding to the type of, Processing for outputting predetermined identification information corresponding to the type of game state to be shifted after the end of the special game, Predetermined identification information corresponding to the type of advantageous state Output processing, processing of outputting predetermined identification information corresponding to the start of the special game state, processing of outputting predetermined identification information corresponding to the special game state, and termination of the special game state Processing to output corresponding predetermined identification information, processing to output predetermined identification information corresponding to the start of an advantageous state, processing to output predetermined identification information corresponding to being in an advantageous state, processing to output predetermined identification information corresponding to an advantageous state Processing to output predetermined identification information corresponding to the end, processing to output predetermined identification information corresponding to the start of the probability variation gaming state, output predetermined identification information corresponding to being in the probability variation gaming state Processing to output predetermined identification information corresponding to the end of the probability variable gaming state, processing to output predetermined identification information corresponding to the start of the time saving gaming state, corresponding to being in the time saving gaming state A process of outputting predetermined identification information, a process of outputting predetermined identification information corresponding to the end of the time-saving gaming state, an arbitrary combination thereof, and the like.

The output stopping means may be a process for stopping the output of the predetermined identification information. As the output stopping means, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, processing for stopping output of predetermined identification information to an information output display unit provided for information output, processing by MPU, CPU, etc. Processing to stop outputting information by the device, processing to stop outputting information corresponding to the type of special game executed in the special game state, outputting information corresponding to the type of game state to be shifted after the special game ends , processing to stop outputting information corresponding to the type of advantageous state, processing to stop outputting information corresponding to the start of the special game state, information corresponding to being in the special game state Processing to stop output, processing to stop outputting information corresponding to the end of the special game state, processing to stop outputting information corresponding to the start of an advantageous state, processing to correspond to being in an advantageous state Processing to stop outputting information, processing to stop outputting information corresponding to the end of the advantageous state, processing to stop outputting information corresponding to the start of the probability variation gaming state, being in the probability variation gaming state Processing to stop outputting information corresponding to , Processing to stop outputting information corresponding to the end of the variable probability gaming state, Processing to stop outputting information corresponding to the start of the time saving gaming state, Time saving gaming state A process of stopping the output of information corresponding to being in the middle, a process of stopping the output of information corresponding to the end of the time-saving gaming state, an arbitrary combination thereof, and the like.

The storage means may be anything as long as it can store information on various types of reservations. As the storage means, if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, a storage area set in a memory such as a RAM, or set in a memory such as a RAM of the main control device A storage area set in a memory such as a memory such as a voice lamp control device or a display control device RAM, a storage area set in a memory such as a RAM of a main control device Special number of rights to execute special game set in memory Storage area for storing the number of figure reservations, storage area set in the memory such as RAM of the main control unit for storing the number of special figure reservations after the increase when the number of special figure reservations increases, and the number of special figure reservations decreases A storage area set in a memory such as a RAM of the main control device that stores the special figure reservation number after the decrease in the case, and stores the first special figure reservation number that is the reservation number of the right to execute the first special figure game Storage area, memory such as RAM of the main control device that stores the first special reservation number after the increase when the first special reservation number, which is the reservation of the right to execute the first special game, increases A storage area set in a memory such as a RAM of the main control device that stores the first special figure reservation number after the decrease when the first special figure reservation number is reduced, and a second special figure game is executed A storage area set in a memory such as a RAM of the main controller that stores the second special reservation number, which is the number of rights reserved, and the second special reservation number after the increase when the second special reservation number increases A storage area set in memory such as RAM of the main controller that stores the second special figure reservation number after the reduction when the second special figure reservation number is reduced In memory such as RAM of the main controller that stores Storage area to be set, storage area set in memory such as RAM of the main control device that stores the number of reservations for the right to play the normal pattern game, and the number of normal pattern fluctuations to be reserved Storage area for storing the number of normal pattern fluctuations set in the memory such as RAM of the main control device after the increase, Main control that stores the number of normal pattern fluctuations after the decrease when the number of normal pattern fluctuations is reduced A storage area set in a memory such as a RAM of the device, a memory such as a RAM of a voice lamp control device or a display control device that stores the first special figure reservation number, which is the number of reservations for the right to execute the first special game Storage area set, storage area set in memory such as RAM of voice lamp control device or display control device that stores the first special figure reservation number after the increase when the first special figure reservation number increases, 1 A storage area for storing the first special figure reservation number set in the memory such as the RAM of the audio lamp control device or the display control device after the decrease when the number of special figure reservations is reduced, and the second special figure game is executed. A storage area set in a memory such as a RAM of a voice lamp control device or a display control device that stores the second special figure reservation number, which is the number of rights reserved, the second after the increase when the second special figure reservation number increases Storage area set in memory such as RAM of voice lamp control device and display control device that stores 2 special figure pending number, 2nd special figure pending number after reduction when the second special figure pending number is reduced A storage area set in a memory such as a RAM of a voice lamp control device or a display control device, and a voice ramp control device or a display control device that stores the number of reserved fluctuations in the normal pattern, which is the number of reservations for the right to execute the normal pattern game Storage area set in memory such as RAM, storage set in memory such as RAM of voice lamp control device or display control device that stores normal pattern fluctuation pending number after increase when normal pattern fluctuation pending number increases Area, storage area set in memory such as RAM of voice lamp control device and display control device that stores the number of normal pattern fluctuations after the decrease when the number of normal pattern fluctuations is reduced, high frequency support mode (variable game State, advantageous state such as time-saving game state) storage area for storing the number of reserved special figures, which is the number of reservations for the right to execute special-games at the end of the end, high-frequency support mode (variable game state, time-saving game state, etc. Advantageous state) Storage area for storing the number of remaining reserved special symbols, which is the number of reserved remaining special symbols, which is the number of reservations for the right to execute the special game at the end of A storage area set in a memory such as a RAM of the main control device that stores the special figure remaining reservation number, which is the number of reservations for the right to execute the special figure game at the end of the game state, advantageous state such as time saving game state), Special figure remaining reservation after reduction when the number of special figure remaining reservations, which is the number of reservations for the right to execute special figure games at the end of high-frequency support mode (advantageous state such as variable gaming state, time saving gaming state) decreases Storage area set in memory such as RAM of the main control device that stores the number, number of reserved rights to execute special game at the end of high frequency support mode (advantageous state such as probability variable game state, time saving game state) Storage area set in memory such as RAM of voice lamp control device and display control device that stores special figure remaining pending number, high frequency support mode It is set in a memory such as a RAM of a voice lamp control device or a display control device that stores the special figure remaining reservation number after the decrease when the special figure remaining reservation number, which is the number of reservations for the right to execute the special figure game, is reduced. storage area, high frequency support mode (advantageous state such as probability variable gaming state, time saving gaming state) is the first special figure reservation number of the right to execute the first special figure game at the end of the first special figure remaining reservation number A storage area for storing the first special figure remaining reservation number, a storage area for storing the first special figure remaining reservation number after the decrease when the first special figure remaining reservation number is reduced, the first special figure reservation number of the right to execute the first special figure game A storage area set in a memory such as a RAM of the main control device that stores the first special figure remaining reservation number, and the first special figure remaining reservation number after the decrease when the first special figure remaining reservation number decreases Storage area set in memory such as RAM of main control device to store, storage area set in memory such as RAM of voice lamp control device or display control device for storing first special figure remaining reservation number, first special Storage area set in memory such as RAM of voice lamp control device or display control device that stores the first special figure remaining number after the decrease when the figure remaining number is reduced, high frequency support mode (probability variation gaming state , Advantageous state such as time-saving game state) storage area for storing the second special figure remaining reservation number, which is the second special figure reservation number of the right to execute the second special figure game at the end of the second special figure reservation, the second special figure remaining reservation A storage area for storing the second special symbol remaining reservation number after the decrease when the number is reduced, and a second special symbol remaining reservation number which is the second special symbol reservation number of the right to execute the second special symbol game. Storage area set in memory such as RAM of the main control device, setting in memory such as RAM of the main control device for storing the second special figure remaining reservation number after the decrease when the second special figure remaining reservation number decreases storage area, storage area set in memory such as RAM of voice lamp control device or display control device that stores the second special figure remaining reservation number, after reduction when the second special figure remaining reservation number decreases A storage area set in a memory such as a RAM of a voice lamp control device or a display control device that stores the second special figure remaining pending number, and any combination thereof.

The specific identification information may be information that is output in response to a change in the game state when the variable display of symbols corresponding to various holds stored in the storage means is started. As the specific identification information, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, output information related to the first special figure reservation number, which is the number of reservations for the right to execute the first special figure game, game balls in the first winning opening Output information on the 1st special figure reservation number after the increase when the 1st special figure reservation number increases with the entry of the ball, when the 1st special figure reservation number decreases due to the start of fluctuation of the 1st special design Output information on the first special figure reservation number after the decrease, output information on the second special figure reservation number which is the number of reservations for the right to run the second special figure game, second by the right to run the second special figure game Output information related to the period in which the special figure game is executed, advantageous information (for example, high-frequency support mode probability variable game state, time-saving game state) to disadvantageous state (low-frequency support mode normal game state) Output information on the second special figure reservation number, which is the number of reservations for the right to execute the second special game in the case, advantageous information (for example, high frequency support mode probability variable gaming state, time saving gaming state) to disadvantageous state (low frequency Output corresponding to the change of the game state when at least a predetermined number of the second special game is executed by the right to execute the second special game when shifting to the support mode (normal game state) output information, output information about the second special figure reservation number after the increase when the second special figure reservation number increases with the game ball entering the second winning hole, start of fluctuation of the second special design Output information on the second special figure reservation number after the decrease when the second special figure reservation number is reduced, output information on the number of normal figure fluctuation reservations that is the number of reservations for the right to execute the normal game, play through gate Output information on the normal pattern fluctuation pending number after the increase when the normal pattern fluctuation pending number increases with the passage of the ball, normal pattern after the decrease when the normal pattern fluctuation pending number decreases output information regarding the number of pending figure fluctuations, any combination thereof, and the like.

The second output means may be an output unit that outputs specific identification information or a process that outputs specific identification information. As the second output means, if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, an external output terminal board, an output terminal section provided on the external output terminal board, an input/output interface connected to a processing device such as an MPU or a CPU, Processing to output predetermined identification information to an information output display unit provided for information output, processing to output specific identification information by processing devices such as MPU and CPU, right to execute the first special game Processing to output specific identification information related to the first special reservation number, which is the number of reservations in Processing to output specific identification information about the first special figure reservation number, specific identification information about the first special figure reservation number after the decrease when the first special figure reservation number decreases due to the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol Processing to output, processing to output specific identification information related to the second special figure reservation number, which is the number of reservations for the right to execute the second special figure game, the second special figure game by the right to perform the second special figure game Processing to output specific identification information about the period to be executed, advantageous information (for example, high-frequency support mode probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) to disadvantageous state (low-frequency support mode normal gaming state) Processing to output specific identification information on the second special figure reservation number, which is the number of reservations for the right to execute the second special game when transitioning, advantageous information (for example, high frequency support mode probability variable gaming state, time saving game state) to a disadvantageous state (normal game state that is a low frequency support mode) Specific identification information regarding the period in which the second special game is executed by the right to execute the second special game Processing to output, processing to display information on the information output display unit, second special reserve number after the increase in the case where the second special reserve number is increased triggered by the game ball entering the second winning hole Processing to output specific identification information about, processing to output specific identification information about the second special reservation number after the decrease when the second special reservation number decreases due to the start of fluctuation of the second special design, normal figure Processing to output specific identification information related to the number of reserves for normal pattern fluctuations, which is the number of reservations for the right to execute a game, after the increase in the case where the number of reserves for normal pattern fluctuations increases as a result of the game ball passing through the through gate Processing to output specific identification information related to the normal pattern fluctuation pending number, processing to output specific identification information related to the normal pattern fluctuation pending number after the decrease when the normal pattern fluctuation pending number decreases due to the start of normal pattern fluctuation, Any combination of

Any output mode may be used as long as the output of different information is identifiable. As output modes, if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, sound information and light information, sound information and image information, sound information and signal information, light information and image information, light information and signal information, image information and Signal information, output period, signal type such as level signal and pulse signal, output interval (output pitch), output level, continuous output period of high level signal, continuous output period of low level signal, output start interval of high level signal, Low-level signal output start interval, level difference between high-level signal and low-level signal, ON signal continuous output period, OFF signal continuous output period, ON signal output start interval, OFF signal output start interval, ON signal and the off signal, any combination thereof, and the like.

By the way, in recent game machines, various game states are set for each game specification of the game machine. In addition, in order to make the player understand various game states, various devices provided in game machines and game arcades are used to notify the players. Therefore, it is necessary to more preferably perform notification corresponding to each game state. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention was invented in response to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that more preferably performs notification according to each game state. Specifically, for example, the game machine outputs various signals such as a jackpot signal to the outside of the game machine through the external output terminal plate. Various signals output to the outside of the game machine are used, for example, to manage game data in a hall computer installed in the game hall, and are used by a data display installed in the game machine to indicate the number of jackpots and the number of consecutive jackpots. It is used to display various data such as the number of trips.

Here, as a game machine, there is a machine that shifts to a high frequency support mode such as a variable probability game state or a short time game state after the end of the jackpot game. As a signal output from the gaming machine to the outside, from the start of the so-called jackpot game for the first win, which is executed based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game state, to the high-frequency support mode. There is a jackpot signal that is continuously output until the normal game state is entered based on the end of the game. That is, the output of the jackpot signal from the game machine is stopped at the stage of transition to the normal game state, and the count of the number of consecutive jackpot wins displayed on the data display is at the step of stopping the output of the jackpot signal. finish.

On the other hand, the hall computer of the game hall manages the so-called number of consecutive jackpot games, which is the number of jackpot games played from the first jackpot game to the normal game state, based on the jackpot signal. Further, when receiving a jackpot signal, the hall computer of the game hall outputs a signal corresponding to the jackpot signal to a data display installed in the game machine. As a result, the data display can display the number of consecutive jackpots by receiving a signal corresponding to the jackpot signal.

In this way, by displaying the number of consecutive big wins on the data display, the player can enjoy the progress of the game with the motivation of increasing the number of consecutive big wins. For example, the progress of the game can be enjoyed with the motivation of whether the number of consecutive jackpots exceeds the expected number of jackpots or whether the number of consecutive jackpots can be renewed.

In addition, as a gaming machine, at the stage of transition from the high-frequency support mode to the normal game state, the second special figure reservation, which is the reservation of the right to execute the second special figure game, may remain. It is possible that the result of the jackpot lottery for the 2 special figure reservation is a jackpot. Then, when a jackpot game executed based on the fact that the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special figure reservation is a jackpot, the jackpot signal is output to the outside of the gaming machine before the jackpot game is started. is stopped upon transition to the normal game state, the hall computer and the data display in the game hall start counting the number of consecutive jackpots from once again.

However, the second special figure reservation is the profit obtained by shifting to the high-frequency support mode triggered by the execution of the jackpot game, and the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special figure reservation. A jackpot that is executed based on the fact that is a jackpot is also called a pullback or a reservation series, and the player perceives that the series of jackpots is continuing. Therefore, when the jackpot game is executed based on the second special figure reservation, when the count of the number of consecutive jackpots is restarted from 1, the player's feeling and the jackpot consecutive displayed on the data display There is a discrepancy between the number of times As a result, the motivation for increasing the number of consecutive jackpots displayed on the data display decreases, and there is concern about a decrease in interest in games.

On the other hand, in the present invention, the predetermined special game state and the advantageous state can be grasped based on the predetermined identification information output to the outside by the first output means, and the predetermined identification information is output by the second output means. Based on the specific identification information that is output to the outside in a different output mode, it can be grasped that it is a period in which the predetermined variable display can be executed by holding at the end of the advantageous state. Therefore, for example, in a data display device installed in a game machine, it is possible to display a special game that is executed based on a predetermined variable display by holding at the end of an advantageous state, including the number of consecutive special games. Become. As a result, when the transition to the predetermined special game state is triggered by the suspension at the end of the advantageous state, the number of consecutive games of the special game displayed on the data display and the number of consecutive games of the special game recognized by the player This prevents a divergence from occurring between As a result, the player's motivation to increase the number of consecutive games displayed on the data display device is prevented from being lowered, so that the player's interest in the game is prevented from being lowered.

Furthermore, it is possible to grasp that it is a predetermined fluctuation display due to suspension at the end of the advantageous state based on the specific identification information output to the outside in an output mode different from the predetermined identification information by the second output means. During the execution period of the predetermined variable display due to the suspension at the end of the state, for example, it is possible to cause the data display device attached to the game machine to execute an effect indicating the execution period. With this effect, even after the advantageous state ends, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that it is a period in which it is possible to add the number of consecutive games in the special game, so that the number of consecutive games can be increased. The player's motivation to do more can be improved, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, in the jackpot gaming state and the high-frequency support mode (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) as advantageous state control, the information output unit by the jackpot signal output processing by the MPU 41 as the information output processing By continuously outputting the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information capable of identifying the state through the external output terminal plate 101 as the output information Based on the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2, it can be grasped that it is a jackpot game state and a high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) as advantageous state control. As a result, the hole computer 102 can grasp the number of continuous jackpot games from the start of the first jackpot game to the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) as advantageous state control. On the other hand, in the data display device 103 provided together with the gaming machine 10, the information (signal) generated and output based on the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 as the output information output from the hall computer 102 is used to display the first jackpot game. From the start to the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) as advantageous state control, it is possible to display the number of consecutive games of the jackpot game.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, after the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) as advantageous state control, by the jackpot signal output processing by the MPU41 as information output processing, the external output terminal as an information output unit Through the plate 101, at least in the second special figure reservation storage area NAB of the second special figure reservation storage area REB set in the RAM412 as the reservation number storage area or in the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area set in the RAM512 By continuously outputting an extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information capable of identifying that it is a period during which variable display of the decoration pattern corresponding to the reserved right can be executed for a predetermined period, For example, in the hall computer 102 of the game hall, based on the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information, a predetermined It can be understood that the variable display is being executed. As a result, in the hall computer 102, when the result of the jackpot lottery by the MPU 41 as the determination processing is to execute the jackpot game, the predetermined variation display is based on the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 as the output information. It can be understood that it is a predetermined variable display due to suspension at the end of the high frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state, time saving gaming state) as state control. Therefore, in the hall computer 102, the jackpot game executed based on the predetermined fluctuation display by holding at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) as advantageous state control is displayed as output information. It is possible to include and count the number of continuous jackpot games from the start of the first jackpot game grasped based on the basic signal of the signal 2.例文帳に追加As a result, in the data display device 103 installed in the gaming machine 10, it is executed based on a predetermined variable display by holding at the end of the high frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state, time saving gaming state) as advantageous state control It is possible to display the jackpot game by including it in the number of consecutive games of the jackpot game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 as the output information is continuously output for a predetermined period. It is possible to execute an effect indicating that it is a period in which variable display of decoration symbols corresponding to suspension at the end of the support mode (probability variable game state, time reduction game state) can be executed. Specifically, after the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) as advantageous state control, the data display 103 displays “Renso Challenge”, “Renso Chance”, “ It is possible to display a character image or the like that indicates or suggests to the player that the number of consecutive jackpots can be increased, such as "jackpot challenge" or "variable jackpot chance". As a result, even after the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) as advantageous state control for the player, it is possible to add the number of consecutive games of the jackpot to the player. Since it is possible to clearly indicate that there is something, the player's motivation for increasing the number of consecutive games can be improved, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Thus, in this embodiment, according to the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 as the output information output via the external output terminal plate 101 as the information output section by the jackpot signal output processing by the MPU 41 as the information output processing , It is possible to grasp that it is a high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) as a jackpot game state and advantageous state control, and is output by the MPU 41 and the external output terminal board 101 as an information output unit or information output processing Based on the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information, by being able to grasp that it is a predetermined fluctuation display by holding at the end of the high frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time reduction game state) as advantageous state control, the game In the data display device 103 attached to the machine 10, the jackpot game executed based on the predetermined fluctuation display by holding at the end of the high frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time reduction game state) as advantageous state control, It is possible to include and display the number of consecutive games of the jackpot game. Therefore, when the jackpot game is executed triggered by the suspension at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) as advantageous state control, the number of consecutive games of the jackpot game displayed on the data display 103 , and the number of consecutive games of jackpot games recognized by the player. As a result, since the player's motivation to increase the number of consecutive games of the big win game displayed on the data display 103 is prevented from being lowered, the player's interest in the game is prevented from being lowered.

The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 175 to 189, focusing on differences from the first embodiment described above.

[Game system]
First, a gaming system including the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 175 is a diagram showing an example of a main part of a gaming system including the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 175, the gaming system according to this embodiment includes a gaming machine 10, a hall computer 102 and a data display 103. FIG.

The gaming machine 10 is provided with an external output terminal board 101 as an information output section for signal-outputting game information of the gaming machine 10 to the outside such as the hall computer 102 . This external output terminal board 101 has, for example, a plurality of output terminal units (not shown), and each output terminal unit (not shown) is an input/output interface for data communication with the MPU 41 of the main control unit 4. It is connected to F42 by wiring (not shown) so as to be able to communicate (receive) data. As a result, game information of the gaming machine 10 is output to the outside of the gaming machine 10 as various signals through corresponding output terminal portions (not shown) of the external output terminal board 101 . Also, each output terminal section (not shown) can output one type of predetermined signal to the outside. That is, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the type of the output terminal section (not shown) and the type of signal that can be output to the outside. For example, the first terminal of a plurality of output terminal units (not shown) can output a jackpot signal 1 described later, and the second terminal of a plurality of output terminal units (not shown) is a jackpot that will be described later. Signal 2 can be output.

A plurality of output terminals (not shown) are connected to the hall computer 102 on the game hall side by wiring or the like so as to be capable of data communication (transmission). As a result, the hall computer 102 can obtain the game information of the gaming machine 10 that is signal-output from each output terminal section (not shown) of the gaming machine 10 . As a result, it is possible for the game hall side to grasp the game situation, game state, and the like of each game machine 10 . Also, on the game hall side, it is possible to select a necessary output terminal portion from a plurality of output terminal portions (not shown) and connect it to the hall computer 102 via wiring or the like. As a result, the game hall side can selectively obtain the game information managed by the game hall side by selecting the output terminal unit (not shown) connected to the hall computer 102, so that the necessary game information can be obtained. It is possible to efficiently manage and display necessary game information on the data display device 103. - 特許庁

Here, the game information signal output from the gaming machine 10 to the hall computer 102 includes, for example, that the game is in progress, that a jackpot game has started (that a jackpot game is in progress), a high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time-saving game state), low-frequency support mode (normal game state), special game started (during special game), number of game balls fired (out ball number), the number of balls played, the number of difference balls, and the like. Therefore, on the gaming hall side, based on the gaming information signal-output from the gaming machine 10 to the hall computer 102, the hall computer outputs, for example, the number of jackpots for the current day and the past few days, and the number of jackpot wins for the current day and the past few days. Number of times, past highest number of jackpots, past highest number of consecutive jackpots, current number of consecutive jackpots, total number of variable games for the current day and the past few days, number of special game games between the jackpots for the current day and the past few days, It is possible to manage the number of special game games from the previous big hit of the day to the current variable game, the number of balls released and difference balls for the current day and the past several days, and the game status and game status of each gaming machine 10. For example, being in a game, being in a jackpot game, being in a high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time-saving game state), being in a low-frequency support mode (normal game state), etc. can.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as the game information signal output from the gaming machine 10 to the hall computer 102, as described later, from the high frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time reduction game state) to the low frequency support mode (normal game state), information indicating that the special symbol game in the low frequency support mode is the second special symbol game due to the second special symbol reservation at the end of the high frequency support mode. Thereby, in the hall computer 102, it is possible to manage the jackpot game to be executed with the second special game by holding the second special game at the end of the high-frequency support mode as the number of consecutive jackpot games. Become.

The data display 103 displays, for example, the game status of the gaming machine 10, and is provided, for example, above each gaming machine 10 in the island facility of the gaming hall. The data display device 103 is connected to the hall computer 102 by wiring or the like so as to be capable of data communication (receiving). and game status can be displayed. Specifically, on the data display 103, for example, the number of jackpots for the current day and the past few days, the number of consecutive jackpots for the current day and the past several days, the highest number of jackpots in the past, the highest number of consecutive jackpots in the past, the current The number of jackpot consecutive games, the total number of variable games for the current day and the past few days, the number of special game games between the jackpots for the current day and the past few days, the number of special game games from the previous jackpot of the day to the current variable game, the current day And the past few days' worth of balls and difference balls, being in the game, being in the jackpot game, being in the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, short-time game state), low-frequency support mode (normal game state) can be displayed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the game information signal output from the hall computer 102 to the data display 103 includes, as described later, a low frequency support mode (normal game state), information indicating that the special symbol game in the low frequency support mode is the second special symbol game by the second special symbol reservation at the end of the high frequency support mode. As a result, the data display device 103 can display the jackpot game executed triggered by the second special game by holding the second special game at the end of the high-frequency support mode in the number of consecutive jackpot games. become.

Then, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game information that can be specified that the jackpot game is in progress is output to the outside such as the hall computer 102 as the jackpot signal 1, and the high-frequency support mode (variable probability game state/time reduction game state) is output to the outside such as the hall computer 102 as the jackpot signal 2 .

Here, FIG. 176 is a time chart showing an output example of the jackpot signal output from the gaming machine 10 to the hall computer 102 or the like. Specifically, FIG. 176A is a time chart showing an output example of the jackpot signal 1, and FIGS. 176B and 176C are time charts showing an output example of the jackpot signal 2. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 176(A), the jackpot signal 1 outputs information indicating that a jackpot game (jackpot game state) is in progress to the hall computer 102 or the like. It is output from the first terminal of the plurality of output terminal sections. The jackpot signal 1 starts to be output as a high level signal at the start of the jackpot game (at the time of transition to the jackpot game state). Also, the jackpot signal 1 continues to be output during the jackpot game (jackpot game state). Furthermore, the jackpot signal 1 is turned to a low level signal at the end of the jackpot (at the time of shifting to the high frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time reduction game state)), so that the output is stopped. Therefore, the hall computer 102 can determine that the jackpot game is being executed during the period in which the jackpot signal 1 is received. Also, the hall computer 102 outputs a signal corresponding to the jackpot signal 1 to the data display 103 while the jackpot signal 1 is being received. As a result, the data display 103 can display that the jackpot game is in progress based on the signal corresponding to the jackpot signal 1 output from the hall computer 102, and count the number of jackpot games played and the number of consecutive jackpot games. can be up. The data display 103 indicates that a jackpot game is in progress. A rainbow color display of numbers indicating the number of games played or the number of consecutive jackpots can be considered.

As shown in FIG. 176 (B), the jackpot signal 2 includes at least a basic signal, and is a reservation of the right to execute the second special figure game at the end of the high frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time saving game state). It includes an extension signal that is continuously output after the output of the basic signal is stopped when there is a second special figure suspension (remaining suspension of the second special figure suspension). This jackpot signal 2 is output from the second terminal of the plurality of output terminal portions of the external output terminal plate 101, for example, together with the basic signal and the extension signal.

The basic signal is output information for outputting information indicating that the jackpot game is in progress (jackpot game state) or the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state) to the outside such as the hall computer 102. , a level signal is output as an information output method. This basic signal is continuously output as a high level signal during the jackpot game (jackpot game state) and the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state). Specifically, the basic signal starts to be output as a high level signal at the start of the jackpot game, and is temporarily stopped by being changed to a low level signal at the end of the jackpot game, and is high at the start of the high frequency support mode. The output of the level signal is restarted and becomes a low level signal at the end of the high frequency support mode. That is, the basic signal is continuously output during the jackpot game (jackpot game state) and the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time saving game state), and the game between the jackpot game state and the probability change game state or the time saving game state The output is temporarily stopped for a short period of time when the state transitions, but as a whole, the output continues.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the case of continuous output of the jackpot signal 2, the output stop period of the jackpot signal 2 is a specific period or less (for example, 1 second or less), and the jackpot signal 2 is re-output within the specific period. case is also included. For example, in the present embodiment, when the output of the jackpot signal 2 is temporarily stopped at the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot signal 2 is re-output by shifting to the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state). However, since the output stop period of the jackpot signal 2 in this case is short (below a specific period), it corresponds to the case where the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output. Further, in the present embodiment, when the output of the jackpot signal 2 is temporarily stopped at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state), the jackpot signal 2 is re-output by the start of the jackpot game. However, since the output stop period of the jackpot signal 2 in this case is short (below a specific period), it corresponds to the case where the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the normal game state is shifted to the execution of the special figure game of the upper limit number of times (specified number of times) that can be stayed in the high frequency support mode, the second special figure at the end of the high frequency support mode Even when there is a second special figure reservation (second special figure remaining reservation) that is a reservation of the right to execute the game, the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output as an extension signal. The extended signal is output as a pulse signal or an on/off signal in which the output period and the output stop period are alternately set, unlike the basic signal output as the level signal. However, the extension signal is set such that the output stop period is equal to or less than the aforementioned specific period. Therefore, although the extension signal is output including the output stop period, it corresponds to the case where it is continuously output, and the jackpot signal 2 corresponds to the case where it is continuously output even during the output of the extension signal. That is, the stop of the jackpot signal 2 as the output information means that the jackpot signal is stopped for a predetermined period exceeding a specific period.

The extension signal is, when the second special symbol game of the number of times corresponding to the number of the second special symbol reservations ends without the big winning game being executed, the output of the big winning signal 2 is within the above-mentioned specific period Stopped (completely) without re-output. As a result, the output of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped.

In addition, when there is no second special figure reservation (second special figure remaining reservation) that is the reservation of the right to execute the second special figure game at the end of the extension signal high frequency support mode, it is not output, and the jackpot signal 2 Only the basic signal is output.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 176 (C), if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot in the second special drawing reservation, the second special game to notify the jackpot When the second special figure game ends due to the passage of the fixed display time after the variable display of the second special figure is stopped, the output of the jackpot signal 2 output as an extension signal is stopped, and the second special figure The basic signal is re-output at the start of the jackpot game which is started after the end of the figure game. And, the output suspension period from the end of the second special figure game (stop of the extension signal) to the start of the jackpot game (output of the basic signal) is short (below the specific period). Therefore, the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output in the pattern of basic signal→extended signal→basic signal.

Thus, in this embodiment, the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output to the outside such as the hall computer 102 in the jackpot gaming state and the high-frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state). For example, in the hall computer 102 of the game hall, based on the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2, it can be grasped that it is a jackpot game state and a high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time-saving game state). As a result, the hole computer 102 can grasp the number of continuous jackpot games from the start of the first jackpot game to the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time-saving game state). On the other hand, in the data display device 103 attached to the gaming machine 10, the information (signal) generated and output based on the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 output from the hall computer 102 causes a high level from the start of the first jackpot game. It is possible to display the number of consecutive jackpot games until the end of the frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time reduction game state).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when there is a reservation of the right to execute the second special figure game at the end of the high frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state, time saving gaming state), the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 continues for a predetermined period By being output, for example, in the hall computer 102 of the game hall, based on the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2, the second feature It can be grasped that the figure game is being executed. As a result, in the hall computer 102, when the jackpot game is executed after the end of the second special game, based on the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2, the high frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time reduction game state) It can be grasped that it is the second special figure game by the second special figure reservation at the end. Therefore, in the hall computer 102, the jackpot game executed based on the second special figure game by the second special figure reservation at the end of the high frequency support mode (variable probability game state, time saving game state) is the basis of the jackpot signal 2 It is possible to include and count the number of consecutive jackpot games from the start of the first jackpot game grasped based on the signal. As a result, in the data display device 103 attached to the gaming machine 10, it is executed based on the second special figure game by the second special figure reservation at the end of the high frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time saving game state) It is possible to display the jackpot game by including it in the number of consecutive games of the jackpot game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a deviation between the number of consecutive games of the big winning game displayed on the data display 103 and the number of consecutive games of the big winning game recognized by the player. As a result, since the player's motivation to increase the number of consecutive games of the big win game displayed on the data display 103 is prevented from being lowered, the player's interest in the game is prevented from being lowered.

In this embodiment, the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 is output as a level signal, and the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 is output as a pulse signal or an on/off signal. may be identifiably different in output mode. For example, the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 may be output as a pulse signal or an on/off signal, and the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2 may be output as a level signal. Further, the basic signal and the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 may be output as level signals with different levels, and the basic signal and the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 may be output as pulse signals or on/off signals with different output periods or output stop periods. may be output.

In addition, it is the second special game execution period for the reservation of the right to execute the second special game at the end of the advantageous state (probability variable game state or time saving game state) (remaining reservation of the second special game) The indicated signal does not necessarily need to be output to the hall computer 102 or the like as the jackpot signal 2 . The signal indicating that it is the execution period of the second special symbol game for the remaining hold of the second special symbol, as long as it can be distinguished from other signals by color, for example, as a jackpot signal 1, an external output terminal as an information output unit Of the plurality of output terminal portions (not shown) of the plate 101, the jackpot signal 1 may be output from the output terminal portion (first terminal) to the outside, and the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 may be output to the outside. As a signal, an output terminal (terminal 1) from which the jackpot signal 1 is output among a plurality of output terminal portions (not shown) of the external output terminal plate 101 as an information output portion and an output from which the jackpot signal 2 is output It may be output to the outside from an output terminal section (the first terminal and other than the first terminal) different from the terminal section (the second terminal).

[Jackpot classification table]
Here, FIG. 177(A) is a diagram showing an example of a sorting table used by main controller 4 for sorting the jackpot types. As shown in FIG. 177 (A), if the type of the special game is the first special game triggered by winning the first winning hole 314, the number of random numbers to be the 5R probability variable jackpot is 0 to 9 There are 10, the number of random numbers for 16R probability variable jackpot is 5, 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers for 5R normal jackpot is 5, 15 to 19. On the other hand, if the type of the special game is the second special game triggered by winning the second winning port 315, the number of random numbers to be the 5R probability variable jackpot is 10 from 0 to 9, and the 16R probability variable jackpot The number of random numbers that will be 10 to 19 is 10, and there is no random number that will be a 5R normal jackpot. In addition, in this embodiment, after the end of the probability variable jackpot game executed when the jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot, the state is shifted to the probability variable game state which is the high frequency support mode and the high probability mode, and the jackpot type is the normal jackpot. After the end of the normal jackpot game executed in the case, it is shifted to a high-frequency support mode and a low-probability time-saving game state. That is, after the end of the jackpot game executed with the first special game as a trigger, it is shifted to the probability variable game state with a probability of 75%, and is shifted to the time saving game state with a probability of 25%. On the other hand, after the end of the jackpot game executed with the second special game as a trigger, it is shifted to the probability variable game state with a probability of 100%, and is not shifted to the time saving game state. And, in this embodiment, the probability variable gaming state ends when the special figure game of the specified number of times (for example, 100 times) in which the result of the jackpot lottery is out is continuously executed, and the low frequency support mode and low probability It is shifted to the normal game state which is the mode. That is, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is a probability variation machine, but unlike the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment configured as a loop probability variation machine, a special figure game that can be executed in the probability variation gaming state is configured as a so-called ST machine in which an upper limit is set for the number of times of In addition, in this embodiment, the time-saving gaming state ends when the special figure game of the specified number of times (for example, 100 times) where the result of the jackpot lottery is out is continuously executed, and the low frequency support mode and low probability mode is shifted to the normal game state.

[Normal figure per hit/fail table]
Here, FIG. 177(B) and FIG. 177(C) are diagrams showing an example of a normal-pattern success/failure table. In this embodiment, two types of low frequency support mode normal per hit/fail table shown in FIG. 177(B) and high frequency support mode normal per hit/fail table shown in FIG. is set. That is, in the present embodiment, the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability per normal pattern is different, and the probability per normal pattern is set higher in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode.

The low-frequency support mode normal figure hit/failure table shown in FIG. 177(B) is a table used in the normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode, in the normal game state. As shown in FIG. 177 (B), in the low-frequency support mode general pattern per suitability table, when the value of the general pattern random number counter C4 is 0, the general pattern per general pattern random number counter C4 value is 1 to 299 If set to off. That is, in the low-frequency support mode (normal game state), the normal pattern per probability is set to 1/300, and the operation frequency of the electric accessory 315b is low.

The high-frequency support mode general figure per hit/fail table shown in FIG. 177(C) is a table used in the general figure per lottery in the probability variation gaming state and the time saving gaming state which are the high-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 177 (C), in the high-frequency support mode general figure hit/failure table, contrary to the low frequency support mode general figure hit/failure table, the value of the general figure per random number counter C4 is 0. When the value of the random number counter C4 per normal map is 1 to 299, it is set per normal map. That is, in the high-frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state and time-saving gaming state), the normal pattern per probability is set to 299/300, and the normal pattern per probability is set higher than the low frequency support mode (normal game state). At the same time, the operation frequency of the electric accessory 315b is increased.

In addition, the low frequency support mode normal pattern per probability and the high frequency support mode normal pattern per probability are not limited to the examples shown in FIGS.

[Type distribution table per normal figure]
Here, FIG.177(D) and FIG.177(E) are figures which show an example of the classification table per normal figure. In this embodiment, as per general figure type distribution table, low frequency support mode per general pattern type distribution table shown in FIG. 177 (D) and high frequency support mode shown in FIG. Two types are set, one with the minute table. That is, in the present embodiment, the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode have different distribution probabilities of types per normal pattern (per short open normal pattern and per long open normal pattern).

Here, in the case of a short-open normal figure hit, the electric accessory 315b is opened for a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds), so that the game ball enters the second winning hole 315 for a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds). A game per short open normal figure that can enter is executed. In this short open normal game, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning port 315 because the opening time of the electric accessory 315b is short, and in many cases, the game ball does not enter the second winning port 315. .

On the other hand, in the case of the long open normal pattern, the electric accessory 315b is opened for a longer time (for example, 6 seconds) than the short open normal pattern per game, so that the second winning port 315 is opened rather than the short open normal pattern per game. A long open normal game per game in which the game ball can be entered for a long time (for example, 6 seconds) is executed. In this long open normal game, the electric accessory 315b has a long opening time, so the game ball easily enters the second winning port 315, and the right to execute the second special game is limited to the upper limit number (for example, 4) ).

The low-frequency support mode normal figure per type distribution table shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 177 (D), in the low-frequency support mode per normal map type distribution table, when the value of the per normal map type random number counter C5 is 0 to 99, per short open normal map, per normal map type random number When the value of the counter C5 is 100 to 199, it is set per long open and wide map. That is, in the low-frequency support mode (normal game state), the distribution ratio between the short-open normal pattern and the long-open normal pattern is set to 1:1. Of course, in the low-frequency support mode (normal game state), the allocation ratio between the short-open normal pattern and the long-open normal pattern does not necessarily have to be 1:1 and can be changed as appropriate. The distribution rate per figure is zero (the value of the normal per type random number counter C5 per long open normal map is zero) or almost zero (the value of the normal per type random number counter C5 per long open normal map is 1 or 2 ) can also be set.

Figure 177 (E) per type distribution table per high-frequency support mode normal figure is a table used in the lottery per normal figure in the high-frequency support mode probability variation gaming state and reduced working hours gaming state. As shown in FIG. 177 (E), in the high-frequency support mode normal map per type distribution table, when the value of the normal map per type random number counter C5 is 0, the short open normal map per normal map type random number counter C5 If the value of is 1 to 199, it is set per long open wide map. In other words, in the high-frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state and time-saving gaming state), it is set to be more easily distributed per long open normal figure than per short open normal figure. Of course, the distribution rate between the short open normal figure per and the long open normal figure per high frequency support mode (variable probability game state and time saving game state) is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 177 (E) as appropriate It can be changed, for example, it is also possible to set the distribution rate per short open normal figure to zero (the value of the normal per type random number counter C5 per short open normal figure is zero).

It should be noted that the opening of the electric accessory 315b is not limited to once per normal game, and may be multiple times. In this case, the opening time and the opening interval (interval between openings) of each opening of the electric accessary 315b in one normal game may be one type or a plurality of types.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
The main processing of main controller 4 in this embodiment is basically the same as the main processing of main controller 4 in the above-described first embodiment, but as shown in FIG. A part of the procedure of some processes is different in that the processes are executed. In the following, the main processing of the main controller 4 in this embodiment will focus on the differences from the main processing of the main controller 4 in the above-described first embodiment, and the processing necessary for explaining this embodiment. to explain.

[Universal figure per game control process]
Here, FIG. 179 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game control process per normal figure executed at step S1405 in the main process of the main controller 4 of FIG. 178 in this embodiment. In the normal figure per game control process of the present embodiment, during the execution of the normal figure per game, high frequency support mode (probability variation game state or reduced working hours game state) to low frequency support mode (normal game state) when it is shifted , By closing the second winning opening 315 due to the return of the electric role product 315b, including a step in which the normal per game is immediately forcibly terminated.

<Step S3401>
As shown in FIG. 179, in the normal pattern per game control process of the present embodiment, the MPU 41 is on the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag indicating that the normal pattern has been stopped and displayed (that the normal pattern game has ended). If there is (step S1801: Yes), that is, if it is the timing that can start the game per normal pattern, as in the first embodiment described above, when the result of the lottery per normal pattern is winning, the electric auditors 315b is executed (steps S1801 to S1812).

On the other hand, if the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag indicating that the normal pattern has been stopped and displayed (that the normal pattern game has ended) is off (step S1801: No), that is, it is not the timing at which the normal pattern per game can be started. In this case, the MPU 41 determines whether the electric auditors product open flag set to ON when the electric auditors product 315b is opened in step S1811 of the game control process per normal figure is set to ON ( step S3401). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game per normal pattern is being executed. MPU41, when the electric accessary product opening flag is set to ON (step S3401: Yes), that is, when the normal figure per game is being executed, the process proceeds to step S3402. On the other hand, the MPU 41 ends the game control process per normal pattern when the electric auditors product open flag is set to OFF (step S3401: No), that is, when the normal pattern per game is not being executed.

<Steps S3402 and S3403>
When the electric accessary product opening flag is set to ON (step S3401: Yes), that is, when the game per general pattern is being executed, the MPU 41 is set in step S1804 or S1807 of the game control process per general pattern. 1 is subtracted from the open time counter value obtained (step S3402), and it is determined whether or not the open time counter value after the subtraction is 0 (step S3403). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to restore the electric accessory 315b based on the elapse of the operation time of the electric accessory 315b. If the value of the open time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3403: Yes), that is, if it is time to restore the electric accessory 315b due to the passage of the operation time of the electric accessory 315b, the process proceeds to step S3406. transition to On the other hand, if the value of the open time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3403: No), that is, if it is not the time to restore the electric accessory 315b due to the passage of the operating time of the electric accessory 315b, the process proceeds to step S3404. transition to

<Steps S3404 and S3405>
If the value of the open time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3403: No), that is, if it is not the time to restore the electric accessory 315b due to the passage of the operating time of the electric accessory 315b, the MPU 41 switches to the high frequency support mode (probability variable It is determined whether or not the normal game state transition flag indicating that the game state or time saving game state is shifted to the low frequency support mode (normal game state) is set to ON (step S3404). That is, the MPU 41 returns the electric accessary 315b and closes the second winning opening 315 by shifting from the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state) to the low-frequency support mode (normal game state). Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to forcibly end the game per normal pattern. It should be noted that the normal game state transition flag, at step S3635 in the game state transition process of FIG. set to on if

MPU41, when the normal game state transition flag is set to ON (step S3404: Yes), i.e. high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state) is shifted to low-frequency support mode (normal game state) If so, the normal game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S3405), and the process proceeds to step S3408. On the other hand, when the normal game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S3404: No), the MPU 41 shifts from the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state) to the low-frequency support mode (normal game state). When it is time to forcibly end the game per normal pattern by the transition, the game control process per normal pattern is terminated.

<Steps S3406 to S3408>
When the value of the open time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3403: Yes), or when the normal game state transition flag is set to ON (step S3404: Yes), the normal game state transition flag is set to OFF. If so (step S3405), that is, if it is time to restore the electric accessory 315b, the MPU 41 restores the electric accessory 315b (step S3406). As a result, the second winning hole 315 is closed, and entry of game balls into the second winning hole 315 is restricted. Then, the MPU 41 sets an electric role product closing command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the electric role product 315b is closed (step S3407), and an electric role product indicating that the electric role product 315b is opened The flag during opening of the role product is set to OFF (step S3408), and the game control process per normal pattern is terminated.

In addition, the electric accessory closing command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU41. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5, based on the electric role product closing command, indicates that the electric role product to be executed in the symbol display unit 341 as an information output unit for outputting, for example, moving image information is open. You can end the shown production.

[Special game control process]
Here, Figure 180 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game control process executed at step S1406 in the main process of the main controller 4 of Figure 178 in this embodiment. In the special figure game control process of the present embodiment, the special figure game does not end after the elapse of the special figure fluctuation display time, but a certain time (determined display time) after the fluctuation display of the special figure is stopped, the special figure is maintained. That is, in the present embodiment, the special figure game does not end immediately by stopping the variable display of the special figure, but ends after the fixed display time has elapsed since the variable display of the special figure is stopped. . Thus, when the jackpot game is started after the end of the special game, the jackpot signal 1 starts to be output after the definite display time has elapsed. Also, if the special figure game is the last second special figure game (last remaining reserved game) executed by the second special figure reservation at the end of the high frequency support mode (variable probability game state or time saving game state), The output of the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped after the definite display time, which is the termination condition of the second special symbol game, has elapsed.

<Step S3501>
As shown in FIG. 180, in the special figure game control process of the present embodiment, the MPU 41 is off during the jackpot game flag (step S1901: No), and when the special figure fluctuation display flag is off (step S1902 : No), that is, when it is the timing at which the special symbol game can be started, the reservation of the right to execute the special symbol game is in the special symbol reservation storage area set in the RAM 41 of the main control device 4 as the reservation number storage area. Under the condition (step S1903: Yes), similar to the above-described first embodiment, a process for starting a special figure game is executed (steps S1904 and S1905). That is, in the special figure game control process of the present embodiment, the reservation of the right to execute the second special figure game by the reservation number storage process triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 is stored as the reservation number storage area. When stored in the second special figure reservation storage area set in the RAM 41 of the main controller 4, the right is reserved by the reservation number storage processing triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening 314. The second special symbol game is preferentially started over the special symbol game. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state or time-saving gaming state), by hitting the right side to launch the game in the right area of the game board 31, while maintaining the right to execute the second special figure game, It is possible to continuously execute the second special figure game.

On the other hand, MPU41, when the flag during special figure fluctuation display is ON (step S1902: Yes), that is, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed in fluctuation (during execution of special figure game), MPU41 , from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol game, the first special symbol set in the special figure variation pattern setting process of step S2104 in the special figure variation start process of FIG. 28 or the second special It is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation display time for the design has elapsed (step S3501). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to stop display the special symbols that are being displayed in a variable manner.

When the special symbol variation display time has elapsed from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S3501: Yes), that is, when it is time to stop and display the special symbol during the variation display, the process is stepped. Move to S3502. On the other hand, the MPU 41, when the variable display time has not elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S3501: No), that is, it is not the timing to stop and display the special symbol during the variable display. If so, the process moves to step S3505.

<Steps S3502 to S3504>
When the variable display time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S3501: Yes), that is, when it is time to stop and display the special symbol during variable display, the MPU 41 is the main In the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363 of the display portion 36, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode according to the result of the big hit lottery corresponding to the special symbol game (step S3502). Then, the MPU 41 sets on the fixed display flag indicating that the fixed display state of the special symbol is maintained for a certain period of time (fixed display time) (step S3503), and furthermore, the fixed display time A fixed display counter indicating the remaining time is set (step S3504), and the special figure game control process is terminated.

<Step S3505>
When the variable display time has not passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S3501: No), that is, when it is not the timing to stop and display the special symbol during variable display, the MPU 41 It is determined whether or not the fixed display in-progress flag, which is set to ON in step S3503 and indicates that the fixed display is in progress, is set to ON (step S3505).

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3506 when the confirmed display flag indicating that the confirmed display is in progress is set to ON (step S3505: Yes). On the other hand, the MPU 41 terminates the special figure game control process when the flag is set to OFF (step S3505: No), that is, when the determination display is not in progress.

<Steps S3506 and S3507>
When the fixed display flag indicating that the fixed display is in progress is set to ON (step S3505: Yes), the MPU 41 calculates the value of the fixed display counter indicating the remaining time of the fixed display time set in step S3504. 1 is subtracted (step S3506), and it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation display counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3507). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to end the special figure game.

MPU41, when the value of the fixed display counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3507: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the special figure game, the process proceeds to step S3508. On the other hand, MPU41, when the value of the fixed display counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3507: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the special figure game, ends the special figure game control process.

<Steps S3508 and S3509>
, If the value of the fixed display counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3507: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the special symbol game, the MPU 41 stops and displays the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Along with setting the special figure fluctuation stop flag indicating that it is ON (step S3508), the special figure fluctuation display indicating that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed in fluctuation (the special figure game is being executed) The medium flag is set to OFF (step S3509), and the special figure game control process is terminated.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, FIGS. 181 to 183 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed at step S1408 in the main processing of main controller 4 of FIG. 178 in this embodiment. The game state transition processing of this embodiment includes a step of setting various flags necessary for outputting the jackpot signal 1 or the jackpot signal 2 in the jackpot signal output processing of FIG. 184 described later.

<Step S3601>
As shown in FIG. 181, in the game state transition process of the present embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the jackpot game start flag indicating the start of the jackpot game is ON (step S3601). The jackpot game start flag is set to ON in step S2205 when the jackpot game is started in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, and is set to OFF in step S2252 when the jackpot game is ended.

When the jackpot game start flag is ON (step S3601: Yes), that is, when it is time to start the jackpot game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3602. On the other hand, when the jackpot game start flag is off (step S3601: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the jackpot game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3615 in FIG.

<Steps S3602 to S3604>
When the jackpot game start flag is ON (step S3601: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is started, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag to OFF (step S3602), and indicates that the normal game state is normal. It is determined whether or not the game state flag is set to ON (step S3603). The normal game state flag is set to ON when the game state is shifted from the variable probability game state or the time saving game state to the normal game state in step S3634 of FIG. 183 of the game state transition process.

When the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state is set to ON (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag to OFF (step S3604), and shifts the process to step S3613. do. On the other hand, when the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S3603: No), that is, when the game state is not normal, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3605.

<Steps S3605 to S3607>
When the normal gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3603: No), that is, when it is not in the normal gaming state, the MPU 41 determines whether the probability varying gaming state flag indicating the probability varying gaming state is set to ON. is determined (step S3605). The probability variation gaming state flag is set to ON in step S3624 of FIG. 182 of the game state transition process, when the probability variation big winning game is shifted to the probability variation gaming state.

When the probability variation gaming state flag indicating the probability variation gaming state is set to ON (step S3605: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the probability variation gaming state flag to OFF (step S3606), and shifts the processing to step S3608. do.

On the other hand, if the probability variation gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3605: No), that is, if it is not in the probability variation gaming state, the MPU 41 can determine that it is in the time saving gaming state, so time saving indicating that it is in the time saving gaming state The game state flag is set to OFF (step S3607), and the process proceeds to step S3608. It should be noted that the time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON when transitioning to the time-saving gaming state due to the end of the normal jackpot game in step S3627 of FIG. 182 of the game state transition processing.

<Steps S3608 to S3610>
In step S3608, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 2A output stop A flag to ON. The jackpot signal 2A output stop A flag is a flag indicating that the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped by the start of the jackpot game.

In addition, the MPU 41 sets off the high frequency support mode indicating that it is a high frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state or time saving gaming state) (step S3609), and the remaining special figures that can be executed in the high frequency support mode The value of the support number counter indicating the number of games played is cleared (step S3610), and the process proceeds to step S3611.

<Steps S3611 and S3612>
In step S3611, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game to be started is the probability variable jackpot game (step S3611). Whether or not the jackpot game to be started is a variable probability jackpot game is determined based on the special figure success/failure information stored in the special figure execution area AE (see FIG. 8) of the special figure reservation storage area 412b set in the RAM 412. be done.

When the jackpot game to be started is the probability variable jackpot game (step S3611: Yes), the probability variable jackpot game state flag indicating that the probability variable jackpot game is executed is set to ON (step S3612), and the process proceeds to step S3613. The probability variation jackpot game state flag, when ending the jackpot game, in order to determine whether to shift the game state to either the probability variation game state or the normal game state, step S3621 in FIG. 182 of the game state transition process Referenced in On the other hand, when the jackpot game to be started is not the variable probability jackpot game (step S3611: No), that is, when the jackpot game to be started is the normal jackpot game, the process proceeds to step S3613.

<Steps S3613 and S3614>
When the processing of steps S3602 to S3612 is completed when the jackpot game is started, the MPU 41 turns on the jackpot signal 1 output start flag for starting the output of the jackpot signal 1 to the outside such as the hall computer 102 ( Step S3613), the process proceeds to step S3614. The jackpot signal 1 output start flag is referred to for determining whether or not to start outputting the jackpot signal 1 in step S3701 of the jackpot signal output processing in FIG. 184 described later.

Further, the MPU 41 turns on the jackpot signal 2A output start flag for starting the output of the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 to the outside such as the hall computer 102 (step S3614), and ends the game state transition processing. The jackpot signal 2A output start flag is referred to for determining whether or not to start outputting the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 in step S3707 of the jackpot signal output processing in FIG. 184 described later.

<Step S3615>
When the jackpot game start flag is off (step S3601: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the jackpot game, the MPU 41 turns on the jackpot game end flag indicating that the jackpot game is over, as shown in FIG. (step S3615). The jackpot game end flag is set to ON in step S2251 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29 when the jackpot game ends.

When the jackpot game end flag is ON (step S3615: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game ends, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3616. On the other hand, when the jackpot game end flag is off (step S3615: No), that is, when it is not the time to end the jackpot game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3628 in FIG.

<Steps S3616 to S3620>
When the jackpot game end flag is ON (step S3615: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game ends, the MPU 41 is a high frequency support mode flag indicating that it is a high frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time saving game state) is turned on (step S3616).

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets a support number counter indicating the number of remaining special figure games that can be executed in the high-frequency support mode (step S3617). The support number counter is subtracted by 1 in step S2110 in the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. In order to determine whether to shift from the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state) to the normal game state by executing the game, step S3629 in FIG. 183 in the game state transition process is referred to.

Then, the MPU 41 turns on the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag for stopping the output of the jackpot signal 1 to the outside such as the hall computer 102 (step S3618), and the jackpot signal 2 to the outside such as the hall computer 102. A jackpot signal 2A output stop flag for stopping the output of the basic signal is set to ON (step S3619). It should be noted that the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is referenced in step S3704 of jackpot signal output processing in FIG. . In addition, the jackpot signal 2A output stop flag is used to determine whether or not to stop outputting the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 to the outside such as the hall computer 102 in step S3710 of the jackpot signal output processing in FIG. 184 described later. Referenced.

Further, the MPU 41 sets off the jackpot game end flag indicating that the jackpot game is over (step S3620), and sets on the jackpot signal 2A output start flag for starting the output of the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2. (Step S3621), the process proceeds to step S3622.

<Step S3622>
In step S3622, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the probability variable big winning game state flag indicating the probability variable big winning gaming state in which the probability variable big winning game is executed is ON. The probability variable jackpot game state flag is set to ON in step S3612 of FIG. 181 when shifting from the probability variable game state, the normal game state, or the time-saving game state to the probability variable jackpot game state in the game state transition process.

MPU41, when the probability variable jackpot gaming state flag is ON (step S3622: Yes), that is, when the probability variable jackpot gaming state, the process proceeds to step S3623. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3626 when the probability variable jackpot game state flag is off (step S3622: No), that is, when it is not the probability variable jackpot game state but the normal jackpot game state.

<Step S3623>
If the probability variation jackpot gaming state flag is ON (step S3622: Yes), that is, if the probability variation jackpot gaming state, the MPU 41 sets the probability variation gaming state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the probability variation gaming state. (step S3623), and the process proceeds to step S3624. The probability variation gaming state command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU41. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5, based on the probability variation gaming state command, in the symbol display unit 341 or the like corresponding to the probability variation gaming state (see FIG. 189 (B1)) to execute a special figure performance including can.

<Step S3624>
In step S3624, the MPU 41 sets the probability variation gaming state flag indicating the probability variation gaming state to ON, and shifts the process to step S3625. The probability variation game state flag is referred to in step S3605 of FIG. 181 in the game state transition process in order to specify the game state when starting the jackpot game.

<Step S3625>
In step S3625, the MPU 41 sets the probability variable big winning game state flag indicating that it is in the probability variable big winning game state to OFF, and ends the game state transition processing.

<Step S3626>
When the probability variable jackpot game state flag is off (step S3622: No), that is, when it is not the probability variable jackpot game state but the normal jackpot game state, the MPU 41 notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that it is in the time saving game state. A time saving game state command is set (step S3626), and the process proceeds to step S3627. The time-saving gaming state command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 executes a special figure effect including a background effect (see FIG. 189 (B2)) corresponding to the time saving game state in the symbol display unit 341 or the like based on the time saving game state command. can.

<Step S3627>
In step S3627, the MPU 41 sets the time saving game state flag indicating the time saving game state to ON, and ends the game state transition processing.

<Step S3628>
If the jackpot game end flag is off (step S3616: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode flag indicating that there is one is on (step S3628).

MPU41, when the high-frequency support mode flag is ON (step S3628: Yes), that is, when the high-frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state or time-saving gaming state), the process proceeds to step S3629. On the other hand, when the high-frequency support mode flag is off (step S3628: No), that is, when it is not the high-frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state or time-saving gaming state), the MPU 41 ends the game state transition processing.

<Step S3629>
If the high-frequency support mode flag is on (step S3628: Yes), that is, if the high-frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state or time-saving gaming state), the MPU41, high-frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state or time-saving gaming state ) It is determined whether the value of the support number counter indicating the remaining number of special figures that can be executed is 0 (step S3629). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to shift from the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state) to the normal game state by executing the special figure game of the prescribed number of times.

When the value of the support number counter is 0 (step S3629: Yes), the MPU 41 can shift from the high frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time reduction game state) to the normal game state by executing the special figure game of the specified number of times. timing, the process proceeds to step S3630. On the other hand, MPU41, if the value of the support number counter is not 0 (step S3629: No), that is, if it is not the timing at which it is possible to shift from the high-frequency support mode (variable probability game state or reduced working hours game state) to the normal game state, the game state End the migration process.

<Step S3630>
If the value of the support number counter is 0 (step S3629: Yes), that is, at the timing that can be shifted to the normal game state from the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state) by executing the special figure game of the specified number of times If there is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop flag indicating that the special figure game has ended is set to ON (step S3630). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to shift from the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state) to the normal game state by the end of the special figure game.

MPU41, when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S3630: Yes), that is, by the end of the special figure game high frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time reduction game state) to normal game state If it is the timing to start the process, the process proceeds to step S3631. On the other hand, MPU41, if the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to off (step S3630: No), that is, because the special figure game has not ended high frequency support mode (probability variation gaming state or time saving gaming state) If it is not the timing to shift to the normal game state from , the game state transition processing is terminated.

<Steps S3631 to S3633>
If the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S3630: Yes), that is, at the timing of shifting from the high frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time saving game state) to the normal game state due to the end of the special figure game If there is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the probability variation gaming state flag indicating the probability variation gaming state is set to ON (step S3631).

When the probability variation gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3631: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the probability variation gaming state flag to OFF (step S3632), and shifts the process to step S3634. On the other hand, when the variable probability gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3631: No), the time saving gaming state flag indicating the time saving gaming state is set to OFF (step S3633), and the process proceeds to step S3634. .

<Steps S3634 to S3638>
In step S3634, the MPU 41 sets on the normal game state flag indicating that it is in the normal game state (step S3634), and sets on the normal game state transition flag indicating that the normal game state is shifted to. (Step S3635). The normal game state transition flag is forcibly ending the game per normal pattern based on the transition to the normal game state in step S3404 in the game control process per normal pattern in FIG. It is referenced to determine whether or not to close).

Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state command for notifying the normal game state to the sound lamp control device 5 (step S3636), and the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state). The high-frequency support mode flag shown is set to off (step S3637).

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets on the jackpot signal 2A output stop B flag that stops the output of the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 based on the transition to the normal game state (step S3638), and performs the game state transition processing. finish.

[Jackpot signal output processing]
Here, FIGS. 184 and 185 are flowcharts showing an example of the jackpot signal output process executed at step S3301 in the main process of main controller 4 of FIG. 178 in this embodiment.

<Step S3701>
As shown in FIG. 184, in the jackpot signal output process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the jackpot signal 1 output start flag is ON (step S3701). The jackpot signal 1 output start flag is a flag for starting the output of the jackpot signal 1 indicating that the hall computer 102 is in the jackpot game state (during execution of the jackpot game). , it is set to ON when a jackpot game is started.

MPU41 shifts a process to step S3702, when a jackpot signal 1 output start flag is ON (step S3701: Yes). On the other hand, when the jackpot signal 1 output start flag is off (step S3701: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3704.

<Steps S3702 and S3703>
When the jackpot signal 1 output start flag is ON (step S3701: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 1 indicating that the jackpot game state (during execution of the jackpot game) as a high level signal, and the external output terminal board 101 output from the first terminal of the plurality of output terminals (step S3702). Thus, the hall computer 102 can recognize that the gaming machine 10 is in the jackpot game state (executing the jackpot game) by receiving the jackpot signal 1 . When the hall computer 102 outputs a signal corresponding to the jackpot signal 1 to the data display 103, the data display 103 displays that the jackpot game state (the jackpot game is being executed) is displayed. The number of jackpot games including games can be displayed. In addition, when the hall computer 102 receives the jackpot signal 1 while receiving the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2, the jackpot is in the special game started in the high frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time reduction game state) It can be grasped that it is started based on. Then, the hall computer 102 is a signal indicating that it is a jackpot started based on the special figure game started in the high frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time reduction game state) on the data display 103 (or the number of jackpot consecutive games by outputting a signal for counting up the number of consecutive jackpots on the data display 103 .

Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 1 output start flag to OFF (step S3703), and ends the jackpot signal output process.

<Step S3704>
When the jackpot signal 1 output start flag is off (step S3701: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is on (step S3704). The jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is a flag for stopping the output of the jackpot signal 1 indicating that the hall computer 102 is in the jackpot game state (during execution of the jackpot game), and is a step in the game state transition process of FIG. At S3618, it is set to ON when the jackpot game is terminated.

MPU41 shifts a process to step S3705, when a jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is ON (step S3704: Yes). On the other hand, MPU41 transfers a process to step S3707, when a jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is OFF (step S3704: No).

<Steps S3705 and S3706>
When the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is ON (step S3704: Yes), the MPU 41 stops the output by setting the jackpot signal 1 indicating that the jackpot game state (during execution of the jackpot game) to low level. (Step S3702). As a result, the hall computer 102 can grasp that the jackpot game state (jackpot game) in the gaming machine 10 has ended by stopping the output of the jackpot signal 1 . When the hall computer 102 outputs a signal indicating that the output of the jackpot signal 1 is stopped to the data display 103, the data display 103 indicates that the jackpot game state (during execution of the jackpot game). display can be terminated.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag to OFF (step S3706), and ends the jackpot signal output process.

<Step S3707>
When the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is off (step S3704: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot signal 2A output start flag is on (step S3707). The jackpot signal 2A output start flag causes the hall computer 102 to output the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 indicating the jackpot game state (during execution of the jackpot game) or the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state). It is a flag to start, and in step S3614 in the game state transition process of FIG. game state) is set to ON.

MPU41 shifts a process to step S3708, when a jackpot signal 2A output start flag is ON (step S3707: Yes). On the other hand, when the jackpot signal 2A output start flag is off (step S3707: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3710.

<Steps S3708 and S3709>
When the jackpot signal 2A output start flag is ON (step S3707: Yes), the MPU 41 is a high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state) as the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 as a high level signal For example, output is performed from the second terminal of a plurality of output terminal sections in the external output terminal board 101 as an information output section by information output processing (step S3702). As a result, the hall computer 102 receives the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2, thereby grasping that the gaming machine 10 is in the jackpot game state or the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state). can. Then, the hall computer 102 outputs a signal corresponding to the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 to the data display device 103, so that the data display device 103 displays the jackpot game state (during execution of the jackpot game) or the high-frequency support mode ( It is possible to display that it is a probability variation gaming state or a time saving gaming state).

Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 2A output start flag to OFF (step S3709), and ends the jackpot signal output process.

<Step S3710>
When the jackpot signal 2A output start flag is off (step S3707: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot signal 2A output stop A flag is on (step S3710). The jackpot signal 2A output stop A flag is the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 indicating that the hole computer 102 is in the jackpot game state (during execution of the jackpot game) or the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state). A flag for stopping the output based on the start or end of the jackpot game, and when the jackpot game is started in step S3608 in the game state transition process of FIG. 181, or step S3619 in the game state transition process of FIG. is set to ON when the jackpot game is terminated at .

When the jackpot signal 2A output stop A flag is ON (step S3704: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3705. On the other hand, when the jackpot signal 2A output stop A flag is off (step S3704: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3707.

<Steps S3711 and S3712>
When the jackpot signal 2A output stop A flag is ON (step S3710: Yes), the MPU 41 indicates that the jackpot game state (during execution of the jackpot game) or the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state) The basic signal of the shown jackpot signal 2 is set to a low level to stop the output of the jackpot signal (step S3711). As a result, the hall computer 102, when the output of the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped and the output stop period exceeds the specific period, the high-frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state) in the gaming machine 10 Or it can be grasped that the time saving game state) has ended. Then, the hall computer 102 outputs a signal indicating that the high frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state or time saving gaming state) has ended to the data display device 103, so that the data display device 103 is in the high frequency support mode. can be terminated.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 2A output stop A flag to OFF (step S3712), and ends the jackpot signal output process.

<Step S3713>
When the jackpot signal 2A output stop A flag is off (step S3710: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot signal 2A output stop B flag is on (step S3713). The jackpot signal 2A output stop B flag is the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 indicating that the hall computer 102 is in a jackpot game state (during execution of a jackpot game) or a high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state). A flag that stops the output based on the end of the high-frequency support mode (variable probability game state or reduced working time game state), and in step S3638 in the game state transition process in FIG. is set to ON when the game state) is terminated.

When the jackpot signal 2A output stop B flag is ON (step S3713: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3714. On the other hand, when the jackpot signal 2A output stop B flag is off (step S3713: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3722 in FIG.

<Steps S3714 and S3715>
When the jackpot signal 2A output stop B flag is ON (step S3713: Yes), the MPU 41 is the jackpot game state (during execution of the jackpot game) or the high-frequency support mode (probability variation game state or time-saving game state). By setting the basic signal of the indicated jackpot signal 2 to the low level, the output is stopped by information stop processing (step S3714). As a result, the hall computer 102, when the output of the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped and the output stop period exceeds the specific period, the high-frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state) in the gaming machine 10 Or it can be grasped that the time saving game state) has ended. Then, the hall computer 102 outputs a signal indicating that the high frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state or time saving gaming state) has ended to the data display device 103, so that the data display device 103 is in the high frequency support mode. can be terminated.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 2A output stop B flag to OFF (step S3715), and shifts the processing to step S3716.

<Steps S3716 and S3717>
In step S3716, the MPU 41 identifies the second special figure pending number M. The second special figure reservation number M can be specified by referring to the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB (see FIG. 8) of the second special figure reservation storage area REB set in the RAM 41 of the main controller 4.

Furthermore, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the identified second special figure pending number M is 0 (step S3717). That is, the MPU 41 is whether there is a second special figure reservation (second special figure remaining reservation) that is a reservation of the right to execute the second special figure game at the end of the high frequency support mode (variable probability game state or time saving game state) determine whether or not

MPU41, when the second special figure reservation number M is 0 (step S3717: Yes), that is, reservation of the right to execute the second special figure game at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state) If there is no second special figure reservation (second special figure remaining reservation), the jackpot signal output process is terminated. In other words, if there is no second special figure reservation (second special figure remaining reservation) which is the reservation of the right to execute the second special figure game at the end of the high frequency support mode (variable probability game state or time saving game state), An extension signal (see FIG. 175) of the jackpot signal 2, which will be described later, is not output, and the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 is set to a low level in step S3715, thereby maintaining the state in which the output is stopped. Therefore, the output of the jackpot signal 2 is completely stopped by maintaining the jackpot signal 2 at the low level over a specific period. As a result, in the hall computer 102, since it is possible to grasp that the high-frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state or time-saving gaming state) has ended, it is possible to terminate the display indicating the high-frequency support mode on the data display 103. can.

On the other hand, if the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S3717: No), that is, the right to execute the second special figure game at the end of the high frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time saving game state) is reserved If there is a second special figure reservation (second special figure remaining reservation), the process proceeds to step S3718.

<Step S3718>
If the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S3717: No), that is, the second reservation of the right to execute the second special figure game at the end of the high frequency support mode (variable probability game state or time saving game state) If there is a special figure reservation (second special figure remaining reservation), the MPU 41 sends an extension signal (see FIG. 175) of the jackpot signal 2, for example, from the second terminal of the plurality of output terminal units in the external output terminal plate 101 output (step S3718), and the process proceeds to step S3719. That is, the extended signal is output from the same output terminal portion as the basic signal in the external output terminal plate 101 .

In this way, by outputting the extension signal from the same output terminal as the basic signal in the external output terminal board 101 as the information output section, the hall computer 102 outputs the extension signal as the jackpot signal 2 in the same manner as the basic signal. can grasp. Further, since the extension signal is output from the same output terminal section as the basic signal in the external output terminal board 101, there is no need to provide a new output terminal section or wiring for outputting the extension signal.

In addition, as will be described later, the extension signal is an unexecuted second special figure out of the number of reservations for the right to execute the second special figure when the high-frequency support mode ends (remaining number of reservations of the second special figure). Until the value of the second special figure reservation number counter indicating the number of games becomes 0, or until the jackpot game is started before the value of the second special figure reservation number counter becomes 0 ( See steps S3727 to S3730 in FIG. 185). In addition, as will be described later, the second special figure pending number counter is set in the RAM 412 and set in the storage area, for example, when there is a remaining number of second special figures pending at the end of the high-frequency support mode (step S3719 reference).

Here, the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 differs in output method from the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 . Specifically, while the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 is output as a level signal, the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2 is output as a pulse signal or an on/off signal, thereby combining the basic signal and the extended signal. are different output methods (see FIG. 175). Therefore, a hole computer 102 that can identify the difference in the output mode between the basic signal and the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2, for example, a program that can identify the difference in the output mode between the basic signal and the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 is stored. When receiving the jackpot signal 2, the hall computer 102 capable of executing this program can distinguish and recognize whether it is the basic signal or the extended signal. As a result, when the hall computer 102 receives the jackpot signal 1 indicating that the jackpot game state (execution of the jackpot game) is received while the jackpot signal 2 is being received, the jackpot game is in the high-frequency support mode. It is started based on the special game executed in the mode (probability variable game state or time saving game state), or the reservation of the right to execute the second special game at the end of the high frequency support mode It can be specified whether it is started based on the special figure game executed by 2 special figure reservation (second special figure remaining reservation). Therefore, the game hall side, in the hall computer 102, is executed by the second special figure reservation (second special figure remaining reservation), which is the reservation of the right to execute the second special game at the end of the high-frequency support mode. It is possible to select whether or not to include the jackpot game started based on the special game in the number of consecutive jackpot games, and to select whether or not to include it in the number of consecutive jackpot games and display it on the data display 103. becomes possible.

In addition, by outputting the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 to the hall computer 102 in a manner identifiable from the basic signal, the hall computer 102 is the second feature at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state or time-saving gaming state). While the second special game for the reservation of the right to execute the figure game is being executed, as described above, the data display 103 displays "Renso Challenge", "Renso Chance", "Jackpot Challenge", " It is possible to display a character image or the like indicating or suggesting to the player that the number of consecutive jackpots can be added, such as "probable variable jackpot chance".

In this embodiment, since the basic signal and the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2 are output from the same output terminal portion of the external output terminal plate 101 as the information output portion, the hall computer 102 on the store side can If the basic signal and the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2 are not configured to be distinguishable, such a hole computer 102 grasps the extended signal simply as the jackpot signal 2 without distinguishing it from the basic signal. Therefore, in the hall computer 102, even if the hall computer 102 on the store side is not configured to distinguish between the basic signal and the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2, the jackpot signal 2 is output while the jackpot signal 2 is being received. When it is received, the jackpot is included in the number of jackpot consecutive games, and the right to execute the second special game at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state) is reserved (second It is possible to count the jackpot game executed with the second special game as a trigger for the second special game remaining reserved) in the number of consecutive jackpot games. Therefore, the hall computer 102 displays the data display device 103 as the reservation of the right to execute the second special figure game at the end of the high frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state or time saving gaming state) (remaining reservation of the second special figure) The jackpot game executed triggered by the second special game for is included in the number of consecutive jackpots and can be displayed. In this case, in the data display 103, the second special for the reservation of the right to execute the second special figure game (remaining reservation of the second special figure) at the end of the high frequency support mode (probability variation gaming state or time saving gaming state) It is not possible to display that it is the execution period of the figure game, for example, the effect indicating that it is a special figure game that can add the number of jackpot consecutive games after the end of the high frequency support mode, but the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 Data processing can be simplified as much as the distinction between the extension signal and the extension signal is unnecessary.

In this embodiment, the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 is output as a level signal, and the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 is output as a pulse signal or an on/off signal. , the output method may be different. For example, the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 may be output as a pulse signal or an on/off signal, and the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2 may be output as a level signal. Further, the basic signal and the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 may be output as level signals with different levels, and the basic signal and the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 may be output as pulse signals or on/off signals with different output periods or output stop periods. may be output.

Further, in this embodiment, it is conceivable to output the basic signal and the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2 in the same output mode. That is, from the start of the first jackpot game, the reservation of the right to execute the second special game at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game state) (remaining reservation of the second special game) second Until the execution of the special game is completed, the jackpot signal 2 may be continuously output in the same output mode to the outside such as the hall computer 102 on the store side. Even in this case, in the hall computer 102 on the store side, simplification based on the jackpot signal 2 is performed in the same way as when the hall computer 102 is not configured to distinguish between the basic signal and the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2. By the data processing performed, it is possible to count the number of jackpot games executed triggered by the remaining reservation of the second special pattern in the number of consecutive jackpots, so the jackpot game executed triggered by the remaining reservation of the second special pattern is included. The number of consecutive jackpot wins can be displayed on the data display 103 by simple data processing.

<Steps S3719 to S3721>
In step S3719, MPU41 sets the 2nd special figure reservation number counter corresponding to the 2nd special figure reservation at the time of the end of high frequency support mode to the storage area which is set to RAM412. Then, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot signal 2B output command indicating that the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 is being output (step S3720) and a jackpot signal indicating that the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 is being output. The 2B output flag is set to ON (step S3721), and the jackpot signal output process is terminated.

<Step S3722>
When the jackpot signal 2A output stop B flag is off (step S3713: No), as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it is set to ON (step S3722).

MPU41, when the jackpot signal 2B output flag is set to ON (step S3722: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3723, when the jackpot signal 2B output flag is set to OFF (step S3722: No), end the jackpot signal output process.

<Step S3723>
When the jackpot signal 2B output flag is set to ON (step S3722: Yes), the MPU 41 indicates that the first special figure or the second special figure is being displayed while the special figure fluctuation display flag is on is set (step S3723). The special figure fluctuation displaying flag is set to ON in step S2107 when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the special figure variation start processing of FIG. 28, and in the special figure game control processing When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, it is set to OFF in step S1909.

MPU41, if the flag during special figure fluctuation display is set to ON (step S3723: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3724, if the flag during special figure fluctuation display is set to OFF (step S3723: No), the process proceeds to step S3727.

<Step S3724>
When the special figure fluctuation display flag is set to ON (step S3723: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the subtraction stop flag is set to ON (step S3724). The subtraction stop flag is the second special figure reservation (second special figure remaining reservation) that is the reservation of the right to execute the second special figure game at the end of the high frequency support mode (variable probability game state or time saving game state) It is a flag for stopping the subtraction of the value of the second special figure reservation number counter indicating the number of times of the second special figure game that has not been executed, and the value of the second special figure reservation number counter by executing the second special figure game is subtracted, it is set to ON in step S3726, which will be described later.

When the subtraction stop flag is set to ON (step S3724: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the jackpot signal output process, and when the subtraction stop flag is set to OFF (step S3724: No), the process is executed. The process moves to step S3725.

<Steps S3725 and S3726>
When the subtraction stop flag is set to OFF (step S3724: No), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the second special figure reservation number counter (step S3725), and sets the subtraction stop flag to ON (step S3726), the jackpot signal output process ends.

<Steps S3727 and S3728>
When the special figure fluctuation displaying flag is set to off (step S3723: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the special figure fluctuation stop flag indicating that the special figure game has ended is set to on. (Step S3727).

MPU41, when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S3727: Yes), sets the subtraction stop flag to OFF (step S3728), and shifts the process to step S3729. On the other hand, when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S3727: No), the MPU 41 ends the jackpot signal output process.

<Steps S3729 and S3730>
At step S3729, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the finished special game is a jackpot (step S3729). That is, it is executed based on the second special figure reservation (second special figure remaining reservation) which is the reservation of the right to execute the second special figure game at the end of the high frequency support mode (variable probability game state or time saving game state) It is determined whether or not the result of the big win lottery notified by the second special game is a big win.

MPU41, when the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the finished special figure game is a big hit (step S3729: Yes), clears the second special figure reservation number counter (step S3730), and shifts the process to step S3732. do. On the other hand, MPU41 transfers a process to step S3731, when the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the said special figure game which ended is not a jackpot (step S3729: No).

<Step S3731>
If the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the finished special figure game is not a big hit (step S3729: No), that is, the second special figure game at the end of the high frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time saving game state) is executed If the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the second special symbol game executed based on the second special symbol reservation (second special symbol remaining reservation) that is the reservation of the right to play is not a big win but a loss, the MPU 41 Of the second special figure reservation (second special figure remaining reservation) that is the reservation of the right to execute the second special figure game at the end of the high frequency support mode (variable probability game state or time saving game state) It is determined whether or not the value of the second special figure reservation number counter indicating the number of times of 2 special figure games is 0 (step S3731). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the finished second special symbol game is the second special symbol game to be executed based on the last second special symbol remaining reservation of the second special symbol remaining reservations. .

MPU41, when the value of the second special figure pending number counter is 0 (step S3731: Yes), that is, the finished second special figure game is the last second special figure remaining among the second special figure remaining reservations If it is the second special figure game that is executed based on the hold, the process proceeds to step S3732. On the other hand, if the value of the second special figure pending number counter is not 0 (step S3731: No), the MPU 41 determines that the finished second special figure game is the last second special figure of the second special figure remaining pending If it is not the second special symbol game to be executed based on the remaining hold, the jackpot signal output process is terminated.

<Steps S3732 to S3734>
If the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the finished second special game is a jackpot and the second special reserved number counter is cleared (step S3730), or the finished second special game is the second special If it is the second special symbol game to be executed based on the last second special symbol remaining suspension of the figure remaining suspension (step S3731: Yes), the MPU 41 stops outputting the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2. (Step S3732), a jackpot signal 2B output stop command indicating that the output of the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 is stopped is set (step S3733). That is, it is executed based on the second special figure reservation (second special figure remaining reservation) which is the reservation of the right to execute the second special figure game at the end of the high frequency support mode (variable probability game state or time saving game state) When the jackpot game is executed after the end of any second special game, or when the execution of all the second special patterns for the second special pattern remaining reservation is finished, the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 output is stopped. In other words, the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 is the second special symbol reservation based on the second special symbol reservation (the second special symbol remaining reservation), which is the reservation of the right to execute the second special symbol game at the end of the high-frequency support mode. It is continuously output during the execution period of the special figure game. Therefore, according to the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2, it is possible to identify that it is the execution period of the second special symbol game based on the second special symbol remaining reservation.

Then, the MPU 41 turns off the jackpot signal 2B output flag indicating that the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 is being output (step S3734), and ends the jackpot signal output process.

Thus, in the jackpot signal output process, the second special figure based on the second special figure reservation (second special figure remaining reservation) which is the reservation of the right to execute the second special figure game at the end of the high frequency support mode An extension signal capable of identifying the execution period of the game is continuously output as the jackpot signal 2 after the output of the basic signal is stopped. Therefore, when the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 is output from the gaming machine 10 to the hall computer 102, the hall computer 102 adjusts the period during which the extension signal is received to the second special symbol based on the second special symbol remaining hold. It can be grasped that the figure game is being executed. Therefore, in the hall computer 102, when receiving the jackpot signal 1 indicating that the jackpot game state (executing the jackpot game) is received during the period of receiving the extension signal, the jackpot game is the second special figure remaining. It can be grasped that it is a jackpot game executed based on the hold. As a result, in the hall computer 102, even if it is a jackpot game based on the special figure game executed in the normal game state shifted after the end of the high frequency support mode, it is the second special figure of the second special figure remaining reservation. In the case of the jackpot game executed based on the figure game, it becomes possible to manage the jackpot game triggered by the second special figure remaining reservation in the number of consecutive jackpot games. As a result, the hall computer 102 can include the jackpot game triggered by the second special figure remaining reservation in the jackpot consecutive game count and display it on the data display 103. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of deviation between the number of consecutive games played and the number of consecutive games played in a jackpot game recognized by a player. As a result, since the player's motivation to increase the number of consecutive games of the big win game displayed on the data display 103 is prevented from being lowered, the player's interest in the game is prevented from being lowered.

[Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device 5]
In this embodiment, part of the procedure of the command determination process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 is different from that of the above-described first embodiment.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process of the present embodiment, a process of setting the type of background effect (stage effect) displayed behind the decoration pattern on the pattern display section 341 in the special symbol game in accordance with the game state or the like is executed. Here, FIGS. 186 and 187 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing according to this embodiment. When the pattern display unit 341 displays an image as output information, the output method is mainly moving image display.

<Step S3801>
As shown in FIG. 186, in the command determination process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not a command has been received (step S3801). If the MPU 51 has received a command (step S3801: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3802, and if it has not received a command (step S3801: No), the command determination process ends.

<Steps S3802 and S3803>
When the command is received (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a probability variation gaming state command indicating that the probability variation gaming state has been entered (step S3802). The probability variation gaming state command is set in step S3623 in the gaming state transition processing in FIG. 182 when shifting to the probability variation gaming state.

When the probability variation gaming state command is received (step S3802: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the probability variation gaming state flag indicating the probability variation gaming state to ON (step S3803), and terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 has not received the variable probability gaming state command (step S3802: No), the process proceeds to step S3804.

<Steps S3804 and S3805>
When the probability variation gaming state command is not received (step S3802: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a time saving gaming state command indicating that the game has transitioned to the time saving gaming state (step S3804). The time saving game state command is set in step S3627 in the game state transition processing in FIG. 182 when shifting to the time saving game state.

When the MPU 51 receives the time saving game state command (step S3804: Yes), it sets the time saving game state flag indicating the time saving game state to ON (step S3804), and terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 has not received the time saving gaming state command (step S3804: No), the process proceeds to step S3806.

<Steps S3806 and S3807>
When the time-saving game state command is not received (step S3804: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a normal game state command indicating that the normal game state has been entered (step S3806). The normal game state command is set in step S3636 in the game state transition process of FIG. 183 when the normal game state is entered.

When the MPU 51 receives the time-saving game state command (step S3806: Yes), the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state is set to ON (step S3807), and the process proceeds to step S3808. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 has not received the normal game state command (step S3806: No), the process proceeds to step S3812.

<Steps S3808 and S3809>
In step S3808, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the variable probability gaming state flag is set to ON. The probability variation gaming state flag is a flag indicating that it is a probability variation gaming state, and is set to ON in step S3803 of the command determination process when shifting to the probability variation gaming state.

When the variable probability gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3808: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the variable probability gaming state flag to OFF (step S3809), and terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, when the variable probability gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3808: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3810.

<Steps S3810 and S3811>
When the probability variation gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3808: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the time saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3810). The time saving game state flag is a flag indicating the time saving game state, and is set to ON in step S3805 of the command determination process when shifting to the time saving game state.

When the time saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3810: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the time saving game state flag to OFF (step S3811), and terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, when the time saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3810: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process.

<Step S3812>
When the normal game state command is not received (step S3806: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is the command during jackpot signal 2B output (step S3812). The command during jackpot signal 2B output is a command indicating that the extension signal of jackpot signal 2 has been output, and is set in step S3733 in the jackpot signal output process of FIG. 185 when the output of the extension signal is started. be.

When the MPU 51 receives the jackpot signal 2B output command (step S3812: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3813, and when the jackpot signal 2B output command is not received (step S3812: No), the process is stepped. Move to S3815.

<Steps S3813 and S3814>
When the jackpot signal 2B output command is received (step S3812: Yes), the MPU 51 turns on the extension signal output flag indicating that the jackpot signal 2 extension signal is being output (step S3813). That is, the MPU 51, based on the extension signal outputting flag, the second special figure reservation ( It is possible to determine whether or not it is a period in which the second special figure game (variation display) based on the second special figure remaining reservation) is being executed.

In addition, the MPU 51 is the second special figure reservation (second special figure remaining reservation) that is the reservation of the right to execute the second special figure game at the end of the high frequency support mode (variable probability game state or time saving game state) The second special figure pending number is set in the storage area set in the RAM 512 (step S3814).

Here, as described above, the RAM 512 of the audio lamp control device 5 corresponds to the special figure reservation storage area 412b (see FIG. 8) set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4, corresponding to the special figure reservation storage area A region (not shown) is set. This special figure reservation storage area corresponding area (not shown) includes a second special figure reservation number storage area corresponding area (not shown) capable of storing the second special figure reservation number M. Therefore, the MPU 51 refers to the second special figure reservation number M stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area corresponding area (not shown) at the end of the high frequency support mode (variable probability game state and time saving game state) , the second special figure remaining reservation can be specified.

<Step S3815>
When the jackpot signal 2B output command is not received (step S3812: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot signal 2B output stop command indicating that the output of the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 has been stopped has been received. It judges (step S3815).

When the MPU 51 receives the jackpot signal 2B output stop command (step S3815: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3816. 187 step S3818.

<Step S3816 and Step S3817>
When the jackpot signal 2B output stop command is received (step S3815: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the extension signal output flag indicating that the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 is output to OFF (step S3816), Clear the second special figure pending number indicating the number of unexecuted second special figure remaining pending (step S3817), and terminate the command determination process.

<Steps S3818 and S3819>
When the jackpot signal 2B output stop command is not received (step S3815: No), as shown in FIG. 187, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special figure variation pattern command (step S3818). . The special figure variation pattern command is a command including the variation display time of the special symbols in the special figure game to be started, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, etc. When the special figure variation is started (the special figure game is started) , It is set in step S2105 in the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG.

When the MPU 51 receives the special figure variation pattern command (step S3818: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3820. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 has not received the special figure variation pattern command (step S3818: No), it executes processing based on other commands (step S3819), and terminates the command determination processing.

<Step S3820>
When the special figure variation pattern command is received (step S3818: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state is set to ON (step S3820). The normal game state flag is set to ON at step S3807 in the command determination process in FIG. 186 when the normal game state is entered.

When the game state flag is set to ON (step S3820: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3821, and when the game state flag is set to OFF (step S3820: No), the process to step S3824.

<Steps S3821 to S3823>
When the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S3820: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the extension signal output flag indicating that the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 is being output is set to ON. is determined (step S3821). The extension signal outputting flag is set to ON at step S3813 in the command determination process in FIG. 186 when the output of the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 is started.

When the extension signal outputting flag is set to ON (step S3821: Yes), the MPU 51 executes normal game state A effect setting processing (step S3822), and terminates the command determination processing. On the other hand, when the extension signal outputting flag is set to OFF (step S3821: No), the MPU 51 executes normal game state B effect setting processing (step S3823), and terminates the command determination processing.

In addition, in the normal game state A effect setting process and the normal game state B effect setting process, the above-mentioned first By executing the same processing as steps S3103 to S3106 in the command determination processing of FIG. 47 in the embodiment, the effect executed in the special figure game is set.

Further, the background image (background effect) displayed on the back side of the decoration pattern in the pattern display section 341 differs between the normal game state A effect and the normal game state B effect.

Here, FIGS. 188 and 189 are diagrams showing image examples such as a background image (background effect) displayed as output information on the symbol display section 341 in various game states.

FIG. 188(A) is a diagram showing a background effect in the normal game state. As shown in FIG. 188(A), in the normal game state, a predetermined background effect is set from a plurality of types of background effects, and is displayed on the pattern display section 341 by the information output processing of the moving image. Multiple types of background effects are basically set basic background effects, look-ahead zone background effects set when predetermined conditions are met, and high frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time saving game state) to normal Including a normal transition background performance set when shifting to a game state, different background images are displayed on a pattern display part 341 in the basic background performance, the look-ahead zone background performance and the normal transition background performance.

The basic background effect is a background effect that is set except when the look-ahead zone background effect and the background effect at normal transition are set, and includes the background effect A, the background effect B, the background effect C and the background effect D. Of course, there is no limit to the number of basic background effects, and the number may be set as appropriate.

Each background effect A to D is set continuously until a predetermined number of special game games are executed, except when the look-ahead zone background effect and normal transition background effect are set, and a predetermined number of specific games are set. Other background effects A to D are set when the background effects are set. Here, the predetermined number of times of the special game until the other background effects A to D are set may be a fixed number such as 10 times or 15 times, or may be set from a predetermined range. It may be a non-fixed number of times. In addition, the change to other background effects A to D may be performed when a background effect change lottery is performed and the change of the background effect is determined in the change lottery, and the result of the jackpot lottery is determined. You may make it change in the next special figure game of the special figure game in which super reach production and special reach production which are performed when it is out are performed. In addition, it may be changed in the special game next to the special game in which the look-ahead zone background effect executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is lost.

In addition, the setting order of the background effects A to D may be set according to a predetermined order such as background effect A→background effect B→background effect C→background effect D→background effect A→ . be done. In this case, when the background effects A to D are changed in an order different from the predetermined order, for example, the reverse order such as changing from the background effect A to the background effect D, or changing from the background effect A to the background effect C It is also conceivable to increase the degree of expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot (jackpot expectation) when a skip occurs. Of course, the setting order of the background effects A to D does not have to be a predetermined order, and may be set randomly by lottery or the like.

The contents of the background effects A to D are not particularly limited, but for example, a school stage background that expresses the main character going to school, a school stage that expresses the behavior of the main character during classes and breaks at school. Background presentations are conceivable in accordance with the daily activities of the main character, such as a background, an after-school stage background that expresses the main character's behavior after school, and a home stage background that expresses the main character's behavior at home. Also, the background effects A to D may be background effects suitable for the season, such as a spring stage background, a summer stage background, an autumn stage background, and a winter stage background, and may be set appropriately.

Further, the look-ahead zone background effect is a background effect with a higher expectation for a big win than the basic background effects (background effects A to D) and a lower setting frequency than the basic background effect. In this look-ahead zone background effect, an image indicating that the look-ahead zone background effect is being executed, for example, an image such as "XX zone" is displayed.

In addition, the look-ahead zone background effect can be set, for example, when there are a plurality of first special figure reservations that are reservations of the right to execute the first special figure game, and the number of first special figure reservations (first special figure reservation Number N) corresponding to a plurality of times (for example, 2 times to 4 times) is set continuously to the special figure game. Also, the look-ahead zone background effect can be set when the variable display time of the first special figure is long, such as when the special reach effect is executed in the first special figure pending. Therefore, when the look-ahead zone background effect is executed, there is a high possibility that the special ready-to-win effect with a high degree of expectation for the big win will be executed, and in this respect, as described above, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than the basic background effect.

Note that one type of look-ahead zone background effect may be set, but a plurality of types may be set. In this case, it is preferable to set different expectations for big wins when the look-ahead zone background effect is executed. Also, when setting multiple types of look-ahead zone background effects, it is conceivable to change to a different look-ahead zone background effect during execution of the look-ahead zone background effect. For example, if multiple types of look-ahead zone background effects with different jackpot expectations are set, change (promote) to the look-ahead zone background effect with high jackpot expectations while executing the look-ahead zone background effects with low jackpot expectations. It is also conceivable to execute

In addition, as described above, the normal transition background effect is a background effect set when the high frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time saving game state) is shifted to the normal game state, and is output as a moving image. It includes a normal transition background effect A and a normal transition background effect B, which are information.

The normal transition background effect A is set when there is a second special figure reservation (second special figure remaining reservation) that is a reservation of the right to execute the second special figure game at the end of the high frequency support mode. That is, the normal shift background effect A corresponds to the change of the game state when the variable display of the second special symbol game executed for the second special symbol remaining hold at the end of the high frequency support mode is started. Then, image information is output. Therefore, the player believes that the period during which the normal transition background effect A is being executed is the period during which the second special symbol game for the second special symbol remaining hold at the end of the high-frequency support mode can be executed. Identifiable.

In addition, the normal transition background effect A is set when there is a second special figure reservation (second special figure remaining reservation) that is a reservation of the right to execute the second special figure game at the end of the high frequency support mode, During the execution period of the second special game in which the normal transition background effect A is executed, an extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 indicating the execution period is sent from the game machine 10 to the hall computer 102 on the store side. output. That is, during execution of the normal transition background effect A, an extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 is output from the gaming machine 10 to the hall computer 102 or the like on the store side. Therefore, when the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 is output from the game machine 10 to the hall computer 102 on the store side, etc., in the data display 103, after the high frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time saving game state) ends When executing the above-mentioned effect (for example, character image effect such as "Renso Challenge") indicating that it is possible to add the number of jackpot consecutive games, the execution period of the effect and the background effect A at normal transition period and can be linked. As a result, the player can display on the data display 103 and the background effect A at normal transition displayed on the pattern display section 341 that it is a period in which the number of consecutive jackpots can be added after the end of the high-frequency support mode. It is possible to grasp both the performance to be performed. Therefore, the player can easily and reliably grasp that it is a period after the end of the high-frequency support mode in which the number of consecutive jackpots can be added. In particular, even a player who does not recognize that the normal transition background effect A is a period in which the number of consecutive jackpots can be added after the end of the high-frequency support mode may be affected by the effect displayed on the data display device 103. Based on this, it is possible to easily and reliably grasp that it is a period in which the number of consecutive jackpots can be added after the end of the high-frequency support mode.

The normal transition background effect B is set when there is no second special figure reservation (second special figure remaining reservation) which is the reservation of the right to execute the second special figure game at the end of the high frequency support mode. This normal transition background effect B is set continuously until, for example, a predetermined number of special games are executed, and when a predetermined number of specific games are set, the basic background effects (background effects A to D) are set. be done. Here, the predetermined number of times of the special game from the normal transition background effect B to the setting of the basic background effect (background effects A to D) may be a fixed number such as 10 times or 15 times, for example. , may be a non-fixed number set from a predetermined range. In addition, in order to change from the normal transition background effect B to the basic background effects (background effects A to D), a final lottery for the normal transition background effect B will be conducted, and the setting of the normal transition background effect B will be completed in the end lottery. It may be done when it is decided to do so.

In addition, the basic background effect set first when starting the basic background effect (background effects A to D) after finishing the background effect at normal transition (background effect A at normal transition and background effect B at normal transition) The type may be fixed (for example, background effect A), or may be randomly set by lottery or the like. In addition, the timing to end the normal transition background effects (normal transition background effects A and normal transition background effects B) and start the basic background effects (background effects A to D) is at least the end of the high-frequency support mode. If there is a second special figure remaining reservation, the timing at which all of the corresponding second special figure games can be executed is preferable, and the background effect during normal transition (background effect at normal transition A and normal transition at the time of normal transition over a long period of time A background effect B) may be displayed. In that case, the start timing of the basic background effect may be determined by lottery.

In addition, as a background effect at the time of normal transition, depending on the presence or absence of the second special figure reservation (second special figure remaining reservation) at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time saving game state) Normal transition background effect Two types, A and normal transition background effect B, are set, but one type of normal transition background effect is set, and the same normal transition background effect is set regardless of whether or not there is a second special figure remaining hold. You may do so.

In this embodiment, a unique normal transition background effect is set when the transition from the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state or time-saving game) to the normal game state is set, but from the high-frequency support mode to the normal game It is also conceivable to set the basic background effects (background effects A to D) when transitioning to the state. In other words, the normal transition background effect may be omitted. In this case, even if the basic background effects (background effects A to D) that are initially set when shifting to the normal game state are fixed (for example, background effects A), they are randomly set by lottery or the like. You may do so.

Here, FIGS. 188(B), 188(C) and 189(A) are diagrams showing screen examples of the symbol display section 341 during execution of the jackpot game. That is, FIGS. 188(B), 188(C) and 189(A) are examples of images in the symbol display section 341 when the normal game state, the variable probability game state or the time saving game state is shifted to the jackpot game state. is.

As shown in FIG. 188(B), at the opening of the jackpot game, for example, an image indicating the start of the jackpot game and an image indicating the number of consecutive jackpot games are displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 188(B), the character image of "jackpot game" is an image indicating that the jackpot game is started, and the character image of "X times" is an image indicating the number of consecutive jackpot games.

As shown in FIG. 188(C), in the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game, for example, an image showing the current number of rounds, an image showing the current number of balls to be played with respect to the number of game balls (number of balls to be played) that can be obtained in the jackpot game , an image showing the total number of balls released after the start of the first jackpot game, and the like are displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 188(C), the character image of "Round X" is an image indicating the number of rounds, and the character image of "800/1200" is the number of game balls obtainable in the jackpot game. number), and the character image of "Total 3800 balls" is an image showing the total number of paid balls since the start of the first jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 189(A), at the ending of the jackpot game, for example, an image indicating that the jackpot game ends or the total number of balls released after the start of the first jackpot game at the end of the jackpot game is displayed. The image shown is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 188(C), the character image "jackpot end" is an image indicating that the jackpot game is over, and the character image "5200 balls to be played" is the first character image at the end of the jackpot game. It is an image showing the total number of balls released after the jackpot game is started.

Then, when the jackpot game ends, the game is shifted to the variable probability game state or the time-saving game, which is the high-frequency support mode. Here, FIG. 189 (B1) is a screen example in the variable probability game state, and FIG. 189 (B2) is a screen example in the time saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 189 (B1), in the probability variation gaming state, an image indicating that it is in the probability variation gaming state and an image indicating the maximum number of special figure games that can be executed in the probability variation gaming state are displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 189 (B1), the character image of "○○ RUSH" is an image indicating that the probability variation gaming state, and the character image of "ST50 times" is the maximum number that can be executed in the probability variation gaming state It is an image showing the number of special figure games.

In addition, although it is not clarified in FIG. 189 (B1), in the probability variation gaming state, a background effect unique to the probability variation gaming state is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 189 (B2), in the time saving game state, an image indicating that the time saving game state is in progress and an image indicating the maximum number of special figure games executable in the time saving game state are displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 189 (B2), the character image of "XX mode" is an image indicating that the time saving game state is in effect, and the character image of "remaining time saving 50 times" can be executed in the time saving game state. It is an image showing the maximum number of special figure games.

In addition, although not clearly shown in FIG. 189 (B2), in the time-saving game state, a background effect unique to the time-saving game state is displayed.

Then, when the variable probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state is shifted to the jackpot gaming state, the same effect as when shifting from the normal gaming state to the jackpot gaming state is executed (Fig. 188 (B), Fig. 188 (C ) and FIG. 189(A)). On the other hand, without being transferred from the probability variation gaming state or the time saving gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, if the normal gaming state is shifted, as described above, in the special figure game, at the end of the probability variation gaming state or the time saving gaming state Depending on whether or not the right to execute the second special game is reserved, a unique normal transition background effect A or normal transition background effect B is executed in the pattern display part 341 when the game state is shifted to the normal game state. .

Also, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a so-called ST, but the arrangement of the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, the through gates 317L and 317R, and the variable winning port 316 is configured as a loop variable machine. It is the same as the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is more advantageous for the player to hit the left side by hitting the game ball in the left side area of the game board 31, so the left side hit is encouraged, and in the variable probability game state and the time saving game state, the right side area of the game board 31. Right-handed hitting is encouraged because it is more advantageous for the player to hit the game ball right-handedly. For this reason, at the start of the jackpot game, for example, at the opening of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. A character image of "Right shot" and an image of an arrow pointing to the right) are displayed. On the other hand, at the time of transition from the probability variable gaming state or the time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, for example, as shown in FIG. An image prompting the player to hit left (in FIG. 188(C), a character image of "left hit" and an image of an arrow pointing to the left) is displayed. In this way, when the launching area of the game ball to the game board 31 that is encouraged by the transition of the game state changes, the encouraged launching area of the game board 31 is clearly indicated on the symbol display section 341, thereby allowing the game ball to be launched. The player can avoid hitting the game ball in vain by hitting the game ball indicated on the pattern display part 341. - 特許庁

<Steps S3824 and S3825>
Returning to the description of the command determination process in FIG. 187, when the normal gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3820: No), the MPU 51 sets the probability variable gaming state flag indicating the probability variable gaming state to ON. (step S3824). The probability variation gaming state flag is set to ON in step S3803 in the command determination processing in FIG. 186 when the probability variation gaming state is shifted.

When the variable probability gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3824: Yes), the MPU 51 executes variable probability gaming state effect setting processing (step S3825), and ends the command determination processing. On the other hand, when the variable probability gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3824: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3826.

Here, in the probability variation gaming state effect setting process, based on the variation display time of the special symbol included in the special figure variation pattern command, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, etc., the command determination of FIG. 47 in the first embodiment described above By executing the same processing as steps S3103 to S3106 in the processing, the effect executed in the special figure game is set. In addition, in the probability variation gaming state effect setting process, a unique background image (background effect) indicating that the probability variation gaming state is set, and a character image indicating that the probability variation gaming state is in progress (for example, "○○ RUSH" character image) and an image indicating the maximum number of special figure games that can be executed in the probability variable gaming state (for example, "ST50 times" character image) are set (see FIG. 189 (B1)).

<Steps S3826 and S3827>
When the probability variation gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3824: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the time saving gaming state flag indicating the time saving gaming state is set to ON (step S3826). . The time saving game state flag is set to ON in step S3805 in the command determination process concerned in FIG. 186 when the time saving game state is shifted.

When the time saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3826: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the time saving game state effect setting process (step S3827), and ends the command determination process. On the other hand, when the time saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3826: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process.

Here, in the time-saving gaming state effect setting process, based on the variation display time of the special symbol included in the special symbol variation pattern command, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, etc., the command determination of FIG. 47 in the first embodiment described above By executing the same processing as steps S3103 to S3106 in the processing, the effect executed in the special figure game is set. In addition, in the time-saving game state effect setting process, a unique background image (background effect) indicating that the time-saving game state is set, and a character image (for example, "XX Mode" character image) and an image showing the maximum number of special figure games that can be executed in the probability variation gaming state (for example, character image of "remaining time reduction 50 times") are set (see FIG. 189 (B2)).

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the jackpot gaming state and high-frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) as an advantageous state control, the information output unit by the jackpot signal output processing by the MPU 41 as the information output processing By continuously outputting the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information capable of identifying the state through the external output terminal plate 101 as the output information Based on the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2, it can be grasped that it is a jackpot game state and a high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) as advantageous state control. As a result, the hole computer 102 can grasp the number of continuous jackpot games from the start of the first jackpot game to the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) as advantageous state control. On the other hand, in the data display device 103 provided together with the gaming machine 10, the information (signal) generated and output based on the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 as the output information output from the hall computer 102 is used to display the first jackpot game. From the start to the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) as advantageous state control, it is possible to display the number of consecutive games of the jackpot game.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, after the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) as advantageous state control, by the jackpot signal output processing by the MPU41 as information output processing, the external output terminal as an information output unit Through the plate 101, at least in the second special figure reservation storage area NAB of the second special figure reservation storage area REB set in the RAM412 as the reservation number storage area or in the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area set in the RAM512 By continuously outputting an extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information capable of identifying that it is a period during which variable display of the decoration pattern corresponding to the reserved right can be executed for a predetermined period, For example, in the hall computer 102 of the game hall, based on the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 as output information, a predetermined It can be understood that the variable display is being executed. As a result, in the hall computer 102, when the result of the jackpot lottery by the MPU 41 as the determination processing is to execute the jackpot game, the predetermined variation display is based on the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 as the output information. It can be understood that it is a predetermined variable display due to suspension at the end of the high frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state, time saving gaming state) as state control. Therefore, in the hall computer 102, the jackpot game executed based on the predetermined fluctuation display by holding at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) as advantageous state control is displayed as output information. It is possible to include and count the number of continuous jackpot games from the start of the first jackpot game grasped based on the basic signal of the signal 2.例文帳に追加As a result, in the data display device 103 installed in the gaming machine 10, the high-frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) as advantageous state control is executed based on a predetermined variable display by holding at the end It is possible to display the jackpot game by including it in the number of consecutive games of the jackpot game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 as the output information is continuously output for a predetermined period. It is possible to execute an effect indicating that it is a period in which variable display of decoration symbols corresponding to suspension at the end of the support mode (probability variable game state, time reduction game state) can be executed. Specifically, after the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) as advantageous state control, the data display 103 displays a jackpot such as "Renso Challenge" or "Jackpot Challenge" as the effect. It is possible to display a character image or the like that indicates or suggests to the player that the number of consecutive games can be increased. As a result, even after the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) as advantageous state control for the player, it is possible to add the number of consecutive games of the jackpot to the player. Since it is possible to clearly indicate that there is something, the player's motivation for increasing the number of consecutive games can be improved, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

As described above, in the present embodiment, each game state can be controlled more appropriately by performing more detailed notification according to each game state. Specifically, based on the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 as the output information output via the external output terminal board 101 as the information output section by the jackpot signal output processing by the MPU 41 as the information output processing, the jackpot game state And it can be grasped that it is a high frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state, time saving gaming state) as advantageous state control, and as output information output by MPU 41 and external output terminal board 101 as information output unit or information output processing Based on the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2, it is possible to grasp that it is a predetermined fluctuation display by holding at the end of the high frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time reduction game state) as advantageous state control. In the data display device 103, the jackpot game executed based on the predetermined fluctuation display by holding at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time reduction game state) as advantageous state control is performed as a series of jackpot games. It is possible to include it in the number of visits and display it. Therefore, when the jackpot game is executed triggered by the suspension at the end of the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) as advantageous state control, the number of consecutive games of the jackpot game displayed on the data display 103 , and the number of consecutive games of jackpot games recognized by the player. As a result, since the player's motivation to increase the number of consecutive games of the big win game displayed on the data display 103 is prevented from being lowered, the player's interest in the game is prevented from being lowered.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the present invention has been described by taking the so-called ST machine as an example, but the technical idea of the present invention is that at least one of the probability variable game state and the time saving game state which are high frequency support modes after the end of the jackpot game It can be applied to game machines that are transferred. For example, the present invention can be applied not only to the ST machine but also to a loop variable machine, a one-kind-two-kind mixing machine, and the like.

In the 1-kind 2-kind mixed machine, as a result of the big winning lottery, a small winning is set in addition to a big winning and a losing, and when the result of the big winning lottery is a small winning, a small winning game is executed. In the small winning game, for example, it is possible to enter the game ball into the V winning opening that generates the big winning game by entering the game ball, and in addition to the case where the result of the big winning lottery is the big winning, the entry to the V winning opening is possible. A jackpot game is executed with the entry of a game ball as a trigger. In the 1-type 2-type mixing machine in which such a small winning game is executed, the outputs of the big winning signal 1 and the big winning signal 2 are different from the ST in which the small winning game is not set.

Here, FIG. 190 is a diagram showing an output example of the jackpot signal 1 in the 1-type 2-type mixer, and FIG. 191 is a diagram showing an output example of the jackpot signal 2 in the 1-type 2-type mixer. In addition, FIG.190 and FIG.191 is an example in case a time saving game is performed after the jackpot game is over.

As shown in FIG. 190 (A), in the small winning game of the 1 type 2 type mixing machine, the big winning signal 1 is not output in the time saving game state and is not output at the start of the small winning game. Also, as shown in FIG. 190(B), in the small winning game of the 1 type 2 type mixing machine, the output of the big winning signal 1 is started when the game ball enters the V winning hole (at the time of V winning). be. The jackpot signal 1 whose output is started at the time of the V prize is continuously output even in the jackpot game started after the small prize game is finished with the entry of the game ball into the V prize opening as a trigger.

As shown in FIG. 191 (A), in the small winning game of the 1 type 2 type mixing machine, the big winning signal 2 is output in the time saving game state, and is also output during execution of the small winning game. Also, as shown in FIG. 190 (B), in the small winning game of the 1 type 2 type mixing machine, the big winning signal 2 is a small winning game triggered by the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening. It is continuously output even in the jackpot game started after the end of .

Further, in the present embodiment, when the right to execute the variable display is reserved in the reserved number storage area at the end of the advantageous state control, a predetermined variable display corresponding to the reserved right can be executed in a period The specific output information indicating that there is a jackpot game state control and the advantageous state control is continuously output to the predetermined output information, but the specific output information is the predetermined output information identification information You may continue and output to the specific output information different from.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the second special figure reservation (second special figure If there is a remaining reserve), a specific identifiable period is the execution period of the second special game for the second special reserve until the execution of the second special game for the second special reserve is completed. Although the identification signal was output as an extension signal of the jackpot signal 2, the specific identification signal may be output as the jackpot signal 1, or may be output as a signal separate from the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2. good too.

Further, in this embodiment, the predetermined output information is output as a level signal, and the specific output information is output as a pulse signal or an on/off signal. For example, predetermined output information may be output as a pulse signal or an on/off signal, and specific output information may be output as a level signal. Further, the predetermined output information and the specific output information extension signal may be output as level signals with different levels, and the predetermined output information and the specific output information may be output as pulse signals with different output periods or output stop periods, or on/off signals. You may output as a signal.

Specifically, in this embodiment, the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 is output as a level signal, and the extended signal of the jackpot signal 2 is output as a pulse signal or an on/off signal. The extension signal may be output in a different manner. For example, the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2 may be output as a pulse signal or an on/off signal, and the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 may be output as a level signal. Further, the basic signal and the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 may be output as level signals with different levels, and the basic signal and the extension signal of the jackpot signal 2 may be output as pulse signals or on/off signals with different output periods or output stop periods. can be output.

Further, in the present embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to tenth embodiments are possible within the applicable range.

Moreover, in each embodiment, it is also possible to apply the items described in other embodiments within the applicable range.

[Twelfth Embodiment]
As a specific configuration of the present invention, the game machine includes "numerical value storage processing" as first numerical value information setting means and second numerical value information setting means, "subtraction processing" as subtraction means, and It has a "display effect" as a specific effect, a "effect display process" as a effect display means, a "game state" as a specific game state and a predetermined game state, and an "update process" as an update means. ” and a “correspondence display” as a specific correspondence display.

The first numerical value information setting means and the second numerical value information setting means may perform processing for setting (storing) various numerical value information relating to games. As the first numerical information setting means and the second numerical information setting means, numerical information corresponding to the values of various counters acquired, for example, by starting winnings is set in a predetermined storage area, provided that the purpose of the present invention can be realized. Numerical information corresponding to the values of various counters acquired by the first special jackpot lottery executed when the game ball enters the first winning hole is set in a predetermined storage area ( and setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the values of various counters obtained by the second special jackpot lottery executed when the game ball enters the second winning hole, in a predetermined storage area. ) processing, processing of setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the variable display time of the first special symbol for the first special symbol game in a predetermined storage area, variable display time of the second special symbol for the second special symbol game A process of setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to a predetermined storage area, a process of setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the first special game in a predetermined storage area, 2 A process of setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery announced by the special game in a predetermined storage area, and numerical information corresponding to the values of various counters acquired by the normal drawing lottery. Processing of setting (storing) in the storage area, processing of setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the variable display time of the normal pattern to the normal pattern game in a predetermined storage area, normal pattern per lottery announced by the normal pattern game Processing of setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the result in a predetermined storage area, processing of setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the number of round games in a jackpot game in a predetermined storage area, high support mode (second A process of setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of executions of a special figure game in a predetermined storage area, after the end of the jackpot game A process of setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of executions of the special figure game in the high support mode "a" time saving game state to be shifted to a predetermined storage area, a special figure of a specific number after the end of the jackpot game A process of setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of special game executions in the b time-saving game state, which is a high support mode that is shifted by game execution, in a predetermined storage area, and the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving design. A process of setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of executions of a special figure game in a short time gaming state c, which is a high support mode that is shifted after the end of a special figure game that is out of stop, in a predetermined storage area, b A process of setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the number of remaining special games required until transition to a time-saving game state in a predetermined storage area, and the number of reservations of the right to execute the first special game. A process of setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to one special figure reservation number N in a predetermined storage area, and numerical information corresponding to the second special figure reservation number M, which is the number of reservations for the right to execute the second special figure game Processing to set (storage) in a predetermined storage area, processing to set (store) numerical information corresponding to the number of reservations of the right to execute the normal game in a predetermined storage area (storage), display A process of setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the first special figure pending number N displayed on the device in a predetermined storage area, and a process of setting (storing) numerical information corresponding to the second special figure pending number M displayed on the display device. Processing of setting (storing) in the storage area of, processing of setting numerical information corresponding to the normal figure fluctuation reservation number X displayed on the display device, the first special figure reservation image corresponding to the first special figure reservation number N Processing for setting (storing) the number of displays on the display device in a predetermined storage area, setting the number of displays on the display device of the second special figure reservation image corresponding to the second special figure reservation number M in a predetermined storage area ( storage), any combination thereof, and the like.

The subtraction means may perform processing for subtracting various numerical information. As the subtracting means, if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, a process of subtracting numerical information corresponding to the variable display time of the first special figure in the first special figure game, the second special figure in the second special figure game 2 Processing for subtracting numerical information corresponding to the variable display time of the special figure, processing for subtracting numerical information corresponding to the variable display time of the general figure in the general figure game, numerical information corresponding to the number of round games in the jackpot game Subtraction processing, processing for subtracting numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of executions of special figure games in high support mode, a subtraction of numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of remaining special figure games that can be executed in the time saving game state Processing to do, process of subtracting numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of remaining special figure games that can be executed in b time saving gaming state, numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of remaining special figure games that can be performed in c time saving gaming state Subtraction process, process of subtracting numerical information corresponding to the number of remaining special figure games required until transition to the b time saving game state, first special which is the number of reservations of the right to execute the first special figure game Processing for subtracting numerical information corresponding to the number of figure reservations N, processing for subtracting numerical information corresponding to the second special figure reservation number M, which is the number of reservations for the right to execute the second special figure game, executing a general figure game Processing to subtract numerical information corresponding to the normal figure fluctuation reservation number X which is the number of reservations of the right to do, processing to subtract numerical information corresponding to the first special figure reservation number N displayed on the display device, display on the display device Processing of subtracting numerical information corresponding to the second special figure reservation number M to be displayed, processing of subtracting numerical information corresponding to the normal figure fluctuation reservation number X displayed on the display device, corresponding to the first special figure reservation number N Processing to subtract the number of displays on the display device of the second special figure reservation image, processing to subtract the number of displays on the display device of the second special figure reservation image corresponding to the second special figure reservation number M, any of them and the like.

The update means may be a process for updating various numerical information. As the updating means, if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, processing for updating numerical information in a predetermined storage area for storing numerical information corresponding to the values of various counters acquired by a jackpot lottery; Processing of updating numerical information corresponding to the variable display time of the first special figure in the special figure game, processing of updating numerical information corresponding to the variable display time of the second special figure in the second special figure game, normal figure Processing to update the numerical information corresponding to the variable display time of the normal figure in the game, processing to update the numerical information corresponding to the number of round games in the jackpot game, correspondence to the maximum execution number of special figure games in high support mode Processing to update the numerical information, a processing to update the numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of remaining special figure games that can be performed in the time saving game state, b maximum number of remaining special figure games that can be performed in the time saving game state Processing to update numerical information corresponding to c, Processing to update numerical information corresponding to the maximum number of remaining special figure games that can be executed in c time saving game state, b Remaining necessary until transition to time saving game state Processing to update the numerical information corresponding to the number of special figure games, processing to update the numerical information corresponding to the first special figure reservation number N which is the number of reservations of the right to execute the first special figure game, second special figure game Processing to update the numerical information corresponding to the second special figure reservation number M, which is the number of reservations for the right to execute Processing to update, processing to update the numerical information corresponding to the first special figure reservation number N displayed on the display device, processing to update the numerical information corresponding to the second special figure reservation number M displayed on the display device, Processing to update the numerical information corresponding to the normal figure fluctuation reservation number X displayed on the display device, the second special figure corresponding to the second special figure reservation number M which is the number of reservations for the right to execute the second special figure game The process of updating the display count of pending images on a display device, any combination thereof, and the like.

The specific effect may be any effect that is executed in a predetermined game state. As the specific effect, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, the effect executed during the execution of the first special symbol game, the effect executed during the execution of the second special symbol game, and the execution of the jackpot game Production executed during the execution of the small winning game, production executed during the execution of the normal game, production executed during the execution of the normal game, low support mode (second winning Effects executed during the execution of the state in which the frequency or probability of operation of the electric accessory provided in the mouth is low), effects executed during the execution of the high support mode, effects executed in a state where the jackpot game is likely to occur, A performance executed in a state where the probability of winning a big win is high in which a lottery result in a big winning lottery is advantageous to a player, a performance executed in a state where a small winning game is likely to occur, and a lottery result in a big winning lottery is advantageous to a player. Effects executed in a state with a high probability of a small win, effects executed during execution of a time-saving gaming state, b effects executed during execution of time-saving gaming state, c executions during execution of time-saving gaming state Production, production executed during the execution of the first special game in the normal game state, production executed during the execution of the second special game in the normal game state, the first special game in the time saving game state Effects executed during execution of the game, effects executed during execution of the second special game in the time saving game state a, effects executed during the execution of the first special game in the time saving game state b, Production executed during execution of the second special game in the b time saving game state, production executed during the execution of the first special game in the c time saving game state, Second special figure in the c time saving game state Effects executed during execution of the game, effects executed during execution of the first special figure game triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole in the normal game state, normal game state An effect executed during the execution of the second special game that is triggered by the game ball entering the second winning hole, the game ball entering the first winning hole in the time-saving game state Production executed during the execution of the first special game executed as a trigger, during execution of the second special game executed with the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole in the time-saving gaming state Effect executed during the execution of the first special game that is executed when the game ball enters the first winning hole in the b time-saving gaming state, 2nd in the b time-saving gaming state An effect executed during execution of the second special game that is triggered by the game ball entering the winning hole, and triggered by the game ball entering the first winning hole in the c time-saving game state. Effect executed during the execution of the first special game to be executed, executed during the execution of the second special game to be executed triggered by the game ball entering the second winning hole in the c time saving game state production, any combination thereof, and the like.

The effect display means may perform a process of displaying an effect in a predetermined game state. As the effect display means, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, processing for displaying the effect for the first special game, processing for displaying the effect for the second special game, processing for displaying the effect for the jackpot game , processing to display the effect for the small winning game, processing to display the effect for the normal game, processing to display the effect for the normal game, processing to display the effect for the low support mode, display the effect for the high support mode processing, processing to display an effect in a state in which a big win game is likely to occur, processing to display an effect in a state in which the lottery result in the big win lottery is likely to result in a big win advantageous to the player, and in a state in which a small win game is likely to occur Processing to display the performance, processing to display the performance in a state where the lottery result in the jackpot lottery has a high probability of becoming a small win that is advantageous to the player, a processing to display the performance in the time saving game state, b performance in the time saving game state. Processing to display, processing to display the production in the c time-saving game state, processing to display the production in the normal game state, processing to display the production in the normal game state, a production for the first special game in the time-saving game state Processing to display, processing to display the effect for the second special game in the time saving game state, processing to display the effect for the first special game in the b time saving game state, b in the time saving game state Processing to display the production for the second special game, c Processing for displaying the production for the first special game in the c time saving game state, production for the second special game in the c time saving game state Processing to display, processing to display the effect for the first special game that is executed when the game ball enters the first winning hole in the normal game state, to the second winning hole in the normal game state Processing to display the effect for the second special game executed triggered by the entry of the game ball, the first Processing to display the effect for the special game, a processing to display the effect for the second special game that is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole in the time saving game state, b time saving Processing to display the effect for the first special game that is executed with the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole in the gaming state, b Entering of the game ball into the second winning hole in the time-saving gaming state For the first special game executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole in the c time saving game state Processing to display an effect, processing to display an effect for the second special game that is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole in the c time saving game state, any combination thereof, etc. be done.

The specific game state may be a game state in which a specific game out of a plurality of types of games can be executed. As the specific game state, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, the game state in which the first special symbol game can be executed, the state in which the right to execute the first special symbol game is reserved, and the second special symbol A game state in which a game can be executed, a state in which the right to execute a second special game is reserved, a game state in which a second special pattern game can be executed, a game state in which a jackpot game can be executed, and a small winning game is executed. Possible game state, game state that can execute normal game, game state that can execute game per normal game, game state that is low support mode, normal game state that is low support mode and low probability mode with low jackpot probability , high support mode game state, high support mode and high probability mode with high probability game state, high support mode and low probability mode time saving game state, a time saving game state, b time saving game state, c Time-saving gaming state, gaming state in which a big winning game is likely to occur, gaming state in which the lottery result in the big winning lottery has a high probability of becoming a big winning in favor of the player, gaming state in which a small winning game is likely to occur, lottery result in the big winning lottery A game state in which there is a high probability of a small win advantageous to the player, a game state in which launching the game ball to the left side area of the game board (so-called left hitting) is encouraged, launching the game ball to the right side area of the game board (so-called A game state in which hitting to the right is encouraged, any combination thereof, and the like.

The specific correspondence display may be a display corresponding to various numerical information. As the specific correspondence display, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, a display corresponding to the number of round games played in the jackpot game, a display corresponding to the number of balls released in the jackpot game, and a display corresponding to the number of consecutive jackpots. , Display corresponding to the total number of balls released during the jackpot series, display corresponding to the number of remaining special figure games that can be executed in the variable game state, and the remaining special figures required before moving to the b time-saving game state in the normal game state Display corresponding to the number of games, display corresponding to the number of remaining special figure games executable in the time saving game state, display corresponding to the remaining number of special figure games executable in the time saving game state, b executable in the time saving game state Display corresponding to the number of remaining special figure games, display corresponding to the remaining number of special figure games executable in c time-saving gaming state, display corresponding to the remaining number of special figure games executable in a state where big winning games are likely to occur, big hit A display corresponding to the number of remaining special figure games that can be executed in a state where the lottery result in the lottery results in a high probability of winning a big win advantageous to the player, and corresponding to the remaining number of special figure games that can be performed in a state where small winning games are likely to occur. display, display corresponding to the number of remaining special symbol games that can be executed in a state with a high probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will result in a small win that is advantageous to the player, and the number of reserved rights to execute the first special symbol game. Display corresponding to the first special figure reservation number N, display corresponding to the second special figure reservation number M, which is the number of reservations for the right to execute the second special figure game, and any combination thereof.

By the way, gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of game states having different occurrence conditions and game values. And it is notified that it is in each game state. Each game state is often established independently without overlapping each other, but depending on the type, overlapping occurrences may occur. For example, in the past, there was a game state with a higher value by satisfying a condition during a game state with a lower value. In this case, since the game state transition is preferable for the player, the notification is switched based on the game state transition.

However, when a game state with a lower value occurs during a certain game state, it is not always the player's desire to switch the notification to the game state with a lower value that has occurred. Therefore, it is desirable to appropriately perform notification control when game states overlap.

The gaming machine includes a first prize winning port that gives an opportunity to execute the first special game and a second prize winning port that gives an opportunity to execute the second special prize game. By providing an electric accessory 315b, the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole is switched between a state of being restricted and a state of being permitted. As the game state in this case, a low support mode in which the frequency or probability of operation of the electric accessory 315b is low and a high support mode in which the frequency or probability of operation of the electric accessory 315b is high are set. As the game state, a normal game state with a low jackpot probability and a low support mode and a time-saving game state with a low jackpot probability and a high support mode may be set. In addition, as the time-saving gaming state, in addition to the a time-saving gaming state that can be shifted after the end of the jackpot game, the c time-saving gaming state that is transferred when the result of the jackpot lottery is out of the time-saving design stop can be set. be.

On the other hand, in the game machine, various effects are executed according to the game state and game situation. For example, after the end of the jackpot game, an effect (for example, a RUSH effect) may be executed to clearly indicate that the jackpot game is in an advantageous state in which it is easy to continue. In the RUSH production and the like, the result of the jackpot lottery is notified by a predetermined production such as a battle production or a mission production. In addition, in the c time saving game state, the c time saving game state production that clearly indicates that it is in the c time saving game state is executed. In the c time saving game state production, a background image unique to the c time saving game state and an image indicating that it is in the c time saving game state are displayed, and an image indicating the number of remaining special figure games in the c time saving game state. Is displayed.

However, during the execution of the RUSH effect, it may shift to the c time saving game state. In this case, if the c time saving game state effect for the c time saving game state is executed with priority over the RUSH effect, the RUSH effect ends in the middle and is switched to the c time saving game state effect. Therefore, in RUSH production such as battle production and mission production, it becomes impossible to confirm the result of the jackpot lottery result. As a result, if the RUSH effect is switched to the c time-saving game state effect during execution, the RUSH effect will become a mere mere fact, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease.

On the other hand, in the present invention, even if the specific condition is established during execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect, the specific correspondence display is not started. Further, in the present invention, even if the update condition is satisfied during execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect, the post-update specific correspondence display is not started. In this way, when the specific condition or the update condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game rotation during execution of the specific effect, the specific correspondence display is not started, so that the second game rotation during execution of the specific effect is performed. Even if a specific condition or an update condition is established during execution, the specific correspondence display prevents the specific effect from being terminated in the middle, so that the game caused by the specific effect being terminated in the middle is prevented. A decline in interest is prevented.

On the other hand, in the present invention, based on the end of the specific effect, the specific corresponding display corresponding to the second numerical information of the second counting means at the time of the end of the specific effect is started. In this way, by starting the display corresponding to the second numerical information of the second counting means at the end of the specific performance, the display corresponding to the specific performance can be started without ending the specific performance in the middle. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the specific correspondence display not being started.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, in the a time-saving gaming state that shifts after the time-saving jackpot game ends, the second game round executed based on the game ball to the second winning hole 315 as the second ball entering means The second special figure reservation number M as the first numerical information corresponding to the number of the second reservation for the right to execute the second special figure game as the operation is step S1108 (Figure 200), it is set in the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB as the first counting means, and based on the start of the second special figure game for the second special figure reservation as the subtraction condition, special as subtraction processing In step S3806 (see FIG. 209) in the figure data setting process, the second special figure reservation number M set in the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB is subtracted. In addition, in the present embodiment, the RUSH effect as a display effect for the second special figure game executed based on the game ball to the second winning hole 315 in the a reduced working hours gaming state, the effect display process It is set in the variation type (effect pattern) setting process.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, based on the end of the special figure game notifying that the result of the jackpot lottery as a specific condition is out of the time saving pattern stop, it is shifted to the c time saving game state as the game state, and the c time saving game state The second numerical value information corresponding to the maximum number of special figure games that can be executed in step S4211 (see FIG. 217) in the game state transition processing as numerical value storage processing c time saving number counter as second counting means is set to In addition, in this embodiment, the number of remaining special figure games that can be executed in the c time saving game state is based on the start of the special figure game as the update condition, step S3724 in the special figure game control process (see FIG. 208) , and based on the value of the c time-saving number counter after updating, the remaining c time-saving game number display (effect) as a corresponding display can be executed.

And, in this embodiment, the second special figure game executed based on the game ball to the second winning port 315 in the time-saving game state a transition after the end of the jackpot game, variation as effect display processing During the execution of the RUSH effect as a display effect in the type (effect pattern) setting process, based on the fact that the jackpot lottery result is out of the time saving pattern stop, when the game state is shifted to the c time saving game state as the game state, RUSH During execution of the performance, the remaining c time-saving game number display (performance) as a corresponding display in the c time-saving game state is not executed. In this way, when the c time reduction game state is shifted to during the RUSH production, the remaining c time reduction game count display (production) in the c time reduction game state is not executed during the execution of the RUSH production, so during the RUSH production Even when the jackpot lottery result shifts to the c time-saving game state based on the fact that the time-saving pattern is not stopped, the remaining c time-saving game count display (performance) prevents the RUSH performance from ending in the middle. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered due to the RUSH effect being terminated in the middle.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game state shifts to the c time-saving game state as the game state during execution of the RUSH effect as the display effect, the remaining c time-saving game count display (effect) is executed after the RUSH effect ends. Therefore, in this embodiment, based on the end of the RUSH production, the display of the number of remaining special figure games that can be executed in the c short gaming state at the time of the end of the RUSH production is started. In this way, based on the end of the RUSH performance, the display of the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed in the c time reduction game state at the time of the end of the RUSH performance is started, so that the RUSH performance is ended in the middle. Since the display of the remaining number of special figure games that can be performed in the c time saving game state can be started without starting, the display of the remaining number of special figure games that can be performed in the c time saving game state is not started. To prevent a decrease in interest in a game.

The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 192 to 229, focusing on differences from the first embodiment described above. However, important matters in this embodiment may be explained again even if they have already been explained in the first embodiment.

[Configuration of Gaming Machine 10]
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 to 194. FIG. Here, FIG. 192 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the game machine 10 according to this embodiment, and FIGS. is a cross-sectional view showing the main part of.

[Through gate 317R]
As shown in FIG. 192, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the through gate 317R is provided only on the right side area of the game board 31, and no through gate is provided on the left side area of the game board 31. FIG. Here, as described in the above-described first embodiment, a game ball launched into the right area of the game board 31 can enter the second winning hole 315 . In addition, the second winning hole 315 is provided with an electric accessory 315b that switches between a state in which entry of a game ball into the second winning hole 315 is restricted and a state in which the entry is permitted. Then, the electric accessary 315b is operated when the result of the normal drawing lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 317R is the normal drawing (see FIGS. 205 and 206). Therefore, in order to operate the electric accessory 315b to enter the game ball into the second winning hole 315, it is necessary to strike the game ball to the right side area of the game board 31 by striking to the right. In this embodiment, since no through-gate is provided in the left area of the game board 31, step S1301 is omitted in the through-gate process of FIG.

[Feather accessory device 83]
The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured as a one-type two-type mixing machine instead of a loop variable machine, unlike the first embodiment described above. An object device 83 is provided. The feather accessory device 83 is operated in a small winning game that is executed when the result of the big winning lottery in the second special game is a small winning, and to the V winning opening 833 described later in the small winning game. It gives an opportunity to execute the second type jackpot game by entering the game ball.

The feather accessory device 83 is provided above the variable winning opening 316 and on the right side of the pattern display section 341 . As shown in FIG. 83, the feather accessory device 83 has an introduction port 831 for introducing the game ball 99 into the interior of the feather accessory device 83, and a closed position (solid line position in FIG. 193) for closing the introduction port 831. and an open position (the position indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 193) for opening the introduction port 831 by a driving means such as a solenoid (not shown). The game ball 99 is not introduced into the wing accessory device 83 when the inlet 831 is closed by the movable wing portion 832 because the movable wing portion 832 is at the standby position. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 194(A) and 194(B), when the inlet 831 is opened by the movable feather 832 being in the open position, the game ball 99 can be received by the movable feather 832. It is possible. The game ball 99 received by the movable wing portion 832 can be introduced into the wing accessory device 83 through the introduction port 831 . The movable feather portion 832 is operated to the open position when the lottery result of the big winning lottery triggered by the winning of the second winning opening 315 is a small winning (see FIG. 198(A)), and the inlet 831 is opened for a predetermined time. For example, it is opened only for the time (1.8 seconds or less) for one to three game balls 99 to enter the feather accessory device 83 . Of course, the opening time of the introduction port 831 at the time of the small win may be appropriately set, and is not limited to the time shown above.

Inside the feather accessory device 83, a V winning opening 833, a normal winning opening 834, and a V winning opening opening/closing section 835 are provided. The V winning opening 833 and the normal winning opening 834 are respectively provided with ball entry sensors (not shown), and these ball entry sensors detect that a game ball has entered the V winning opening 833 or the normal winning opening 834. be done. Between the closed position (see FIG. 194(A)) in which the V winning port 833 is closed and the open position (see FIG. 194(B)) in which the V winning port 833 is opened, It is rotated by driving means such as a solenoid (not shown). The V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 normally waits at a closed position to close the V winning opening 833, and is operated at a predetermined timing when the lottery result in the big winning lottery is a small winning, thereby opening the V A winning opening 833 is opened.

[System Configuration of Gaming Machine 10]
Next, various tables and the like used in the main controller 4 of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 to 199. FIG.

[Performance table for normal figures, etc.]
Here, FIG. 195 is a diagram showing an example of a normal figure hit/failure table and the like. In this embodiment, two types of the normal game state normal pattern hit/failure table shown in FIG. 195(A) and the time-saving game state normal pattern hit/failure table shown in FIG. It is That is, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the normal game state and the reduced working hours game state, the normal pattern per probability is different, the normal game state than the normal game state normal pattern per probability is set higher .

Figure 195 (A) is a normal game state normal game per hit/fail table is a low support mode with a low operating frequency or operation probability of the electric role product 315b provided in the second winning port 315 Normal game per normal game lottery is a table used in As shown in FIG. 195 (A), in the normal game state general pattern per hit/fail table, when the value of the general pattern random number counter C4 is 0, the general pattern per normal pattern random number counter C4 has a value of 1 to 299. If set to off. In other words, the normal game state (low support mode) is a low-profit state in which the normal pattern per probability in the normal pattern lottery is set to 1/300, and the second winning opening 315 is difficult to open.

Figure 195 (B) shown in the time-saving game state normal figure winning table is a high support mode with a high operating frequency or operating probability of the electric role product 315b provided in the second winning port 315 lottery per normal figure in the time-saving game state is a table used in As shown in FIG. 195 (B), in the time-saving game state general pattern per hit/fail table, contrary to the normal game state general pattern per hit/fail table, the value of the general pattern random number counter C4 is 0 when it is off, and the normal pattern When the value of the per random number counter C4 is 1 to 299, it is set per normal pattern. In other words, in the time-saving game state (high support mode), the probability per normal pattern in the lottery per normal pattern is set to 299/300, and the probability per normal pattern is set higher than the normal game state (low support mode). , is a high-profit state in which the second winning hole 315 is easily opened.

In this way, in the low support mode gaming state, the second prize winning port 315 is difficult to open, and the player is less likely to obtain a particular profit by opening the second prize winning port 315 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described later, as a time-saving game state, a time-saving game state that is shifted after the end of the jackpot game, and a specified number of times (for example, 1000 times) after the end of the jackpot game. The b time-saving game state and the c time-saving game state that is shifted when the result of the jackpot lottery is out of the time-saving pattern stop are set, but in any of the a to c time-saving game states, the normal figure hit The probabilities are set to be the same. Of course, the normal pattern per probability may be set differently depending on the type of the time-saving gaming state. In addition, normal game per probability in the game state (low support mode), and normal per probability in the time-saving game state (high support mode), the example shown in Figure 195 (A) and Figure 195 (B) is not limited and can be changed as appropriate. In addition, as a game state that refers to the short game state normal figure per hit or miss table, it may be referred to when it is a special figure probability fluctuation state or when it is a time reduction game state.

Here, FIG.195(C) and FIG.195(D) are the figures which show an example of a normal figure fluctuation table. In this embodiment, two types of the normal game state normal pattern fluctuation table and the time reduction game state normal pattern fluctuation table shown in FIG. 195(C) are set as the normal pattern fluctuation table. That is, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the normal game state and the reduced working hours game state, the normal pattern fluctuation time is different, the normal pattern fluctuation time is set shorter than the normal game state in the reduced working hours game state .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 195 (C), in the normal game state general pattern fluctuation table, the value of the general pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 is 30 seconds when the value of the general pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 is 0 to 98, and the value of the general pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 is set to 1 second when is 99. That is, in the normal game state, the normal pattern fluctuation time is set long, and the operating frequency of the electric accessory 315b (the frequency of opening the second winning opening 315) is set low.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 195 (D), in the time-saving game state general figure fluctuation table, the value of the general figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is set to 1 second when it is 0-99. That is, in the time-saving game state, the regular pattern fluctuation time is set short, and the operating frequency of the electric accessory 315b (opening frequency of the second winning opening 315) is set high.

Here, FIG. 195 (E) shows the type of game state and the opening mode (open FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a relationship with time).

As shown in FIG. 195 (E), when the lottery result per normal pattern is per normal pattern, the second winning opening 315 by opening the electric accessory 315b in the game per normal pattern as described above The game ball 99 is allowed to enter, but the opening form (maximum opening time) of the electric accessory 315b in the game per normal pattern is set according to the game state in which the lottery per normal pattern is executed. In this embodiment, even before the maximum opening time elapses, the electric accessory 315b is closed when five game balls enter the second winning hole 315, and the electric accessory 315b is closed once. The maximum winning number of game balls to the second winning hole 315 by opening is set to five.

Specifically, in the normal game state, which is a low support mode, and in the c time reduction game state that shifts when the jackpot lottery result is out of the time reduction symbol stop, the maximum opening time of the electric accessory 315b is the game ball. It is set to 0.1 seconds (short release), which is shorter than the firing interval (0.6 seconds). In this short opening, even if the game balls are continuously hit to the right side area of the game board 31, entry of the game balls into the second winning hole 315 is set to be impossible or extremely difficult. Therefore, in the normal game state and the c time-saving game state, the left-handed hitting that hits the game ball to the left area of the game board 31 is encouraged. In addition, in the c time-saving game state, the maximum number of time-saving games is set to 10 times, 20 times, 30 times, or 40 times according to the type of time-saving pattern stoppage, and the maximum time-saving game in which the result of the jackpot lottery is out. When the special figure game of the number of times is executed, it is shifted to the normal game state.

Here, as described above, when the result of the jackpot lottery is out of stoppage of the time saving symbol, the game state shifts to the c time saving game state. Also, as will be described later, in the special symbol game when the result of the jackpot lottery is the stoppage of time-saving symbols, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol display section 341 in a combination corresponding to the time-saving design stoppage. In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, a plurality of types (four types) are set as the maximum number of time-saving games in the c time-saving game state, and the time-saving symbols corresponding to the maximum number of time-saving games are stopped and displayed. For example, as will be described later, in the case of time-saving symbol stop deviation A with a maximum number of time-saving games of 10 times, non-reach "119" or "991" is stopped and displayed, and the maximum number of time-saving games is 20 times. In the case of time-saving design stop deviation B, non-reach ``554'' or ``556'' is stop-displayed, and in the case of time-saving design stop deviation C in which the maximum number of time-saving games is 30 times, non-reach ``332''. Or "334" is stopped and displayed, and "776" or "778", which is non-reach, is stopped and displayed in the case of time saving symbol stop deviation D where the maximum number of times of time saving games is 40 times (see FIG. 198 (D) ). As a result, the player can grasp that the result of the jackpot lottery is out of stoppage of time-saving symbols from the combination of decorative patterns displayed in a stopped state, and further grasps the maximum number of times of time-saving games in the c time-saving game state. it becomes possible to

In addition, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of time-saving games in the c time-saving gaming state is set to 4 types, but it is also possible to set the maximum number of time-saving games in the c time-saving gaming state to 1 type to 3 types. It is also conceivable to set a plurality of types other than four types. Also, the maximum number of time-saving games in the c time-saving game state can be changed in various ways.

On the other hand, in the time-saving game state a, which is shifted after the end of the jackpot game, the maximum opening time of the electric accessory 315b is set to 15 seconds (long opening), which is 25 times the shooting interval of the game ball. In this long release, when the game balls are continuously hit to the right side area of the game board 31, it is possible to enter five game balls, which is the maximum winning number. Therefore, in the time-saving game state a, hitting to the right, which hits the game ball to the right side area of the game board 31, is encouraged. In addition, in the time-saving game state a, the maximum number of time-saving games is set to 1 time, and when the game per normal pattern is executed once, the game state is shifted to the normal game state.

In addition, in the b time-saving game state that is shifted after the variation game is executed a specified number of times (for example, 1000 times) after the end of the jackpot game, the maximum opening time of the electric accessory 315b is 3 seconds, which is five times the shooting interval of the game ball. It is set to (middle open). In this middle open, the expected number of entering balls when the game ball 99 is continuously hit is set to 1 or more, for example, 1 to 3 balls in the second winning opening 315 for one normal game. A game ball about the size of a ball is entered. Therefore, in the time-saving game state b, hitting to the right, which hits the game ball to the right side area of the game board 31, is encouraged. In addition, in b time-saving game state, the maximum number of times of time-saving game is set to 500 times, and when the special game in which the result of the jackpot lottery is lost is executed 500 times, the state is shifted to the normal game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, even before the maximum opening time elapses, when five game balls enter the second winning opening 315, the electric accessory 315b is returned to the second winning opening 315. is closed.

In addition, the maximum opening time and the maximum number of opening times of the electric accessary 315b in the game per normal figure in various game states are not limited to the example shown in FIG.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 195 (E), for each game state, only one type of maximum opening time and maximum opening number of times of the electric accessory 315b is set as a game per normal game, but the normal game state, At least one of the maximum opening time and the maximum opening time of the electric accessory 315b in the normal figure per game is set for at least one of the reduced working hours game state, the reduced working hours game state b, and the reduced working hours game state c. You may

[1st special figure jackpot success/failure table]
The first special figure jackpot success/failure table is used for the first special figure jackpot lottery that is executed when a game ball enters the first winning hole 314 . Here, FIG. 196(A) is a diagram showing an example of the first special figure jackpot success/failure table.

As shown in FIG. 196(A), the first special figure big hit right/wrong table includes six big hit right/wrong tables corresponding to game set values 1 to 6 in six stages. In each jackpot success/failure table, as the lottery result of the first special jackpot lottery, either a jackpot or a loss is selected according to the value (random number) of the jackpot random number counter C1. In addition, in the first special figure jackpot success/failure table, the game setting value 6, the game setting value 5, the game setting value 4, the game setting value 3, the game setting value 2, and the game setting value 1 (the value of the game setting value is large) sequentially), the probability that the lottery results in the first special jackpot lottery will be a big win is high, which is advantageous to the player.

In the first special figure jackpot success/failure table of the game setting value 1, 206 random numbers of 0 to 205 out of the values (random numbers) of 65536 jackpot random number counters C1 of 0 to 65535 correspond to jackpots, and other of random numbers corresponds to a loss, and the probability of a big win is set to approximately 1/318.1 (206/65536).

In the first special figure jackpot success/failure table of the game setting value 2, 202 random numbers of 0 to 211 out of 65536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random numbers) of 0 to 65535 correspond to jackpots, and other The random number corresponds to a loss, and the probability of a big win is set to approximately 1/309.1 (212/65536).

In the first special figure jackpot success/failure table of the game setting value 3, 218 random numbers of 0 to 217 out of 65536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random numbers) of 0 to 65535 correspond to jackpots, and others corresponds to an error, and the jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/300.6 (218/65536).

In the first special figure jackpot success/failure table of the game setting value 4, 224 random numbers of 0 to 223 out of 65536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random numbers) of 0 to 65535 correspond to jackpots, and other corresponds to an error, and the jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/292.6 (224/65536).

In the first special figure jackpot success/failure table of the game setting value 5, 230 random numbers of 0 to 229 out of 65536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random numbers) of 0 to 65535 correspond to jackpots, and others corresponds to an error, and the jackpot probability is set to about 1/284.9 (230/65536).

In the first special figure jackpot success/failure table of the game set value 6, 236 random numbers of 0 to 235 out of 65536 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random numbers) of 0 to 65535 correspond to jackpots, and other corresponds to an error, and the jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/277.7 (236/65536).

Then, when the first special big winning lottery is performed based on the big winning success/failure table selected according to the game set value, the big winning game is executed when the value of the big winning random number counter C1 indicates a big winning.

In addition, in the first special figure jackpot success/failure table of the present embodiment, the jackpot random numbers are continuous values, but the jackpot random numbers may not be continuous values but may be partially or wholly discrete values.

In addition, the first special figure jackpot success/failure tables are provided six in accordance with the game set values of six stages, but at least one first special figure jackpot success/failure table is sufficient, and the game set values are set in six stages. Not limited.

[1st special figure jackpot type distribution table]
The first special figure jackpot type distribution table indicates the jackpot type when the lottery result of the first special figure jackpot lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole 314 is a jackpot. used for sorting. Here, FIG. 196 (B) is a diagram showing an example of normal-a time saving first special figure jackpot type distribution table, FIG. 196 (C) is b time saving -c time saving first special figure jackpot type distribution table It is a figure which shows an example.

The normal-a time-saving first special figure jackpot type distribution table shown in FIG. is. In the normal-a time-saving first special figure jackpot type distribution table, 12 random numbers from 0 to 11 out of the 20 jackpot type counter C2 values (random numbers) from 0 to 19 are 4R time-saving jackpots. , 12-19 are the 4R normal jackpots. In this embodiment, as the first special figure jackpot, two types of 4R short-time jackpot and 4R normal jackpot are set, the distribution rate of the 4R short-time jackpot is set to 60%, and the distribution rate of the 4R normal jackpot is set to 40%. It is

Here, when the lottery result of the first special figure jackpot lottery is the 4R time-saving jackpot and the 4R normal jackpot, an opening/closing execution mode is executed in which the round game in which the variable prize winning port 316 is opened is repeated twice.

Then, in the 4R time saving jackpot, after the jackpot game executed based on this 4R time saving jackpot ends, the game is shifted to the a time saving game state which is a high support mode. In this a time-saving game state, the number of operations of the electric accessory 315b is one, but the maximum opening time of the electric accessory 315b is set to 15 seconds, which is 25 times 0.6 seconds, which is the shooting interval of the game ball. It is Also, the maximum winning number of game balls by opening the electric accessory 315b once is five. Therefore, when shifting to the a time-saving game state, it is possible to execute the second special figure game a maximum of 5 times. In the 4R normal jackpot, after the jackpot game executed based on the 4R normal jackpot ends, the normal game state, which is the low support mode, is entered.

The bc time-saving first special figure jackpot type distribution table shown in FIG. It is a thing. In the bc time-saving first special figure jackpot type distribution table, 20 random numbers, which are all the values (random numbers) of 20 jackpot type counters C2 from 0 to 19, are 4R time-saving jackpots. That is, when the first special figure jackpot is achieved in the b time saving game state or the c time saving game state, the so-called RUSH direct hit that shifts to the a time saving game state after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the first special figure jackpot It becomes a big hit. In addition, RUSH means that the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 will be a small win is high (20% in this embodiment (see FIG. 198 (A)). )), which is advantageous to a player who is likely to continuously run a big winning game triggered by a small winning.

[1st special figure jackpot variation table]
The first special figure jackpot variation table is a first special figure game executed for the first special figure jackpot lottery when the lottery result of the first special figure jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Used to set the special figure fluctuation pattern (variation display time). Here, FIG. 196(D) is a diagram showing an example of the first special figure jackpot variation table.

As shown in FIG. 196 (D), in the first special figure jackpot variation table, the special figure variation pattern is associated in advance according to the value of the special figure variation type counter CS1. In this first special figure jackpot variation table, one of the special figure variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value (random number) of the special figure variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the first special figure jackpot variation table, among the 200 special figure variation type counter CS1 values of 0 to 199, 10 random numbers of 0 to 9 have a variation display time of 30 seconds. A certain special figure fluctuation pattern "01" corresponds, 10 to 119 110 random values correspond to special figure fluctuation pattern "02" whose fluctuation display time is 60 seconds, 80 random numbers from 120 to 199 The numerical value corresponds to the special figure variation pattern "03" whose variation display time is 90 seconds.

Here, when the special figure variation pattern "01" is selected, the sound ramp control device 5 determines a normal ready-to-win production pattern with a special figure variation display time of 30 s as the variation type (production pattern type), and the symbol display section 341 In such a case, the normal reach effect pattern is executed. The normal reach production pattern is a production pattern in which the final individual production type in the special game production is the normal reach production. Further, when the special figure variation pattern "02" is selected, the sound ramp control device 5 determines a super ready-to-win production pattern with a special figure variation display time of 60 s as the variation type (production pattern type), and the symbol display unit 341 In such a case, the super reach effect pattern is executed. The super reach production pattern is a production pattern in which the final individual production type in the special game production is the super reach production. Furthermore, when the special figure variation pattern "03" is selected, the special reach effect pattern with the longest special figure variation display time of 90 s is determined as the variation type (effect pattern) in the sound lamp control device 5, and the symbol display unit At 341 or the like, a special ready-to-win effect pattern is executed. The special reach production pattern is a production pattern in which the final individual production type in the special game production is the special reach production.

[1st special figure off type distribution table]
The first special figure loss type distribution table is used for distributing the loss type when the lottery result in the first special figure jackpot lottery is a loss. Here, FIG. 196(E) is a diagram showing an example of the first special figure exclusion classification table.

As shown in FIG. 196 (E), in the first special figure off type distribution table, the off type is defined according to the value (random number) of the reach random number counter C3. Specifically, in the first special figure off type sorting table, out of the 239 reach random number counter C3 values of 0 to 238, 9 random numbers of 0 to 8 are front and rear off reach, 9 to Thirty random values of 38 are reach other than near misses, and 200 random values of 39 to 238 are completely misses.

Here, the ready-to-win state is a state in which a combination of decorative patterns indicating that a big win is likely to occur during the period from when the variable display of the decorative patterns in the pattern display section 341 is started until the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed. is the state of change where is indicated. In one example, the same decoration pattern is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions on the active line in the pattern display section 341, and the decoration pattern corresponding to the remaining one stop position fluctuates. In addition, during the change state of the reach in the symbol display section 341, a story production process in which a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the degree of expectation, or a game in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the production. A person-participation type operation rendering process and the like are executed. It is also conceivable that the variable display of the decorative pattern in the pattern display section 341 may be hidden or displayed in a reduced or enlarged size during execution of these effect processing.

Then, the front-rear out reach is a loss in which the final stop symbol is shifted forward or backward of the reach symbol by one after the reach due to the decorative pattern occurs, and the reach other than front-rear failure is the final after the reach due to the decorative symbol occurs. The stop symbol is a misalignment that stops other than before and after the ready-to-win symbol. Further, the complete miss is a miss (non-reach miss) in which reach does not occur due to the decoration pattern.

In addition, in the first special figure off type distribution table, the time saving pattern stop off that shifts to the c time saving gaming state is not set as the off type, but the time saving pattern stop off may be set as the off type.

[1st special figure off fluctuation table]
The first special figure loss variation table is for the first special figure in the first special figure game executed for the first special figure jackpot lottery when the lottery result in the first special figure jackpot lottery is a loss. Used to set the special figure fluctuation pattern (variation display time). Here, FIG. 196(F) is a diagram showing an example of the first special figure loss variation table.

As shown in FIG. 196 (F), in the first special figure deviation fluctuation table, the special figure variation pattern of the first special figure (variation display time ) are stipulated. This first special figure loss variation table includes a loss first special figure loss variation table for loss reach (front-rear loss reach and reach other than front-rear loss) and a first special figure loss variation table for complete loss.

In the first special figure deviation fluctuation table for out reach (reach other than front and rear out reach and front and rear out reach), special figure variation patterns "01" to "03" according to the value (random number) of the special figure variation type counter CS1 Either is selected. Specifically, in the first special figure out variation table for out reach (outside reach and reach other than front and back out), 0 to 99 out of 200 special figure variation type counter CS1 values of 0 to 199 The 100 random numbers correspond to the special figure fluctuation pattern "01" with a special figure fluctuation display time of 30 seconds, and the 50 random numbers from 100 to 149 have a special figure fluctuation display time of 60 seconds. The figure fluctuation pattern "02" corresponds, and the special figure fluctuation pattern "03" with a special figure fluctuation display time of 90 seconds corresponds to the 50 random numbers of 150 to 199.

In the first special figure deviation variation table for complete loss, one of the special figure variation patterns "04" and "05" is selected according to the value (random number) of the special figure variation type counter CS1. Specifically, in the first special figure deviation variation table for complete loss, of the 200 special figure variation type counter CS1 values of 0 to 199, 150 random values of 0 to 149 special figure variation display The special figure fluctuation pattern "04" whose time is 7 seconds corresponds, and the special figure fluctuation pattern "05" whose special figure fluctuation display time is 10 seconds corresponds to 50 random numbers of 150 to 199. .

[b time saving-c time saving 2nd special figure jackpot success table]
The b time-saving-c time-saving 2nd special figure jackpot success or failure table is the second special figure jackpot lottery that is executed as a trigger for the game ball to enter the second winning port 315 in the b time-saving gaming state and c time-saving gaming state. used. Here, FIG. 197(A) is a diagram showing an example of a b time saving-c time saving second special figure jackpot propriety table.

As shown in FIG. 197(A), the b time saving-c time saving second special figure jackpot success/failure table is the same as the first special figure jackpot success/failure table described above (see FIG. 196(A)). It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the b time saving-c time saving second special figure jackpot success or failure table is set separately from the first special figure jackpot success or failure table (see FIG. 196 (A)), but b time saving-c time saving second The 2 special figure jackpot success/failure table may be omitted, and the first special figure jackpot success/failure table (see FIG. 196(A)) may be used in the second special figure jackpot lottery in the b time saving gaming state and the c time saving gaming state.

[b time saving - c time saving 2nd special jackpot type distribution table]
The b time saving-c time saving second special figure jackpot type distribution table is a game ball to the second winning opening 315 when the game state at the start of the fluctuation of the second special figure is the normal game state or the a time saving game state When the lottery result in the second special jackpot lottery executed with the entry of the ball is a jackpot, it is used to distribute the type of jackpot. Here, FIG. 197(B) is a diagram showing an example of b time saving-c time saving second special figure jackpot type distribution table.

As shown in FIG. 197 (B), in the b time saving-c time saving second special jackpot type distribution table, 20 values (random values) of 20 jackpot type counters C2 of 0 to 19 are all 20 The random value is the 4R time-saving jackpot. That is, when the second special figure jackpot in the b time saving game state or the c time saving game state is reached, the so-called RUSH direct hit that shifts to the a time saving game state after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the second special figure jackpot It becomes a big hit. In addition, RUSH means that the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 will be a small win is high (20% in this embodiment (see FIG. 198 (A)). )), which is advantageous to a player who is likely to continuously run a big winning game triggered by a small winning.

[b time saving-c time saving 2nd special figure jackpot fluctuation table]
In the first special figure jackpot variation table, when the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation of the second special figure is the b time saving gaming state or c time saving gaming state, the lottery result in the second special figure jackpot lottery is a big hit. In addition, it is used to set the special figure fluctuation pattern (variation display time) of the second special figure in the second special figure game executed for the second special figure jackpot lottery. Here, FIG. 197(C) is a diagram showing an example of b time saving-c time saving second special figure jackpot variation table.

As shown in FIG. 197 (D), the b time saving-c time saving second special figure jackpot variation table is the same as the above-described first special figure jackpot variation table (see FIG. 196 (D)). It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the b time-saving-c time-saving second special figure jackpot variation table is set separately from the first special figure jackpot variation table (see FIG. 196 (D)), but the b time-saving-c time-saving second The 2 special figure jackpot variation table may be omitted, and the 1st special figure jackpot variation table (see FIG. 196 (D)) may be used in the second special figure jackpot lottery in the b time saving game state and c time saving game state.

[b time saving - c time saving 2nd special figure sorting table]
The b time reduction-c time reduction second special figure out type distribution table is the second special figure jackpot lottery when the game state at the start of the fluctuation of the second special figure is the b time reduction game state or the c time reduction game state. It is used to sort out the type of loss when the lottery result is a loss. Here, FIG. 197 (D) is a diagram showing an example of b time saving-c time saving second special figure off type distribution table.

As shown in FIG. 197 (D), the b time saving-c time saving second special figure off type distribution table is the same as the above-described first special figure off type distribution table (see FIG. 196 (E)). In addition, in the present embodiment, the b time saving-c time saving second special figure off type distribution table is set separately from the first special figure off type distribution table (see FIG. 196 (E)), b time saving -Omit the c short time 2nd special figure out type distribution table, and in the 2nd special figure jackpot lottery in the b short time game state and c time short game state, the 1st special figure out type distribution table (see FIG. 196 (E)) may be used.

In addition, in the b time saving-c time saving second special figure off type distribution table, the time saving pattern stop off that shifts to the c time saving gaming state is not set as the off type, but the time saving pattern stop off is set as the off type. good too.

[b time saving - c time saving 2nd special figure deviation table]
The b time reduction-c time reduction 2nd special figure deviation fluctuation table is the result of the lottery result in the 2nd special figure jackpot lottery when the gaming state at the start of the variation of the 2nd special figure is the b time reduction game state or the c time reduction game state. is out, it is used to set the special figure fluctuation pattern (variation display time) of the second special figure in the second special figure game executed for the second special figure jackpot lottery. Here, FIG. 197(E) is a diagram showing an example of the first special figure loss variation table.

As shown in FIG. 197 (E), the b time saving-c time saving second special figure deviation variation table is the same as the above-described first special figure deviation variation table (see FIG. 196 (F)). It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the b time-saving-c time-saving second special figure off variation table is set separately from the first special figure-off variation table (see FIG. 196 (F)), but b time saving-c time saving second The 2 special figure deviation fluctuation table may be omitted, and the 1st special figure deviation variation table (see FIG. 196 (F)) may be used in the second special figure jackpot lottery in the b time saving game state and the c time saving game state.

[Normal-a time saving 2nd special figure jackpot hit table]
The normal-a time-saving second special figure jackpot success or failure table is used for the second special figure jackpot lottery that is executed as a trigger for entering the game ball into the second winning port 315 in the normal game state and the a time-saving game state. be. Here, FIG. 198(A) is a diagram showing an example of a normal-a time saving second special figure jackpot success/failure table.

As shown in FIG. 198 (A), the normal-a time-saving second special figure jackpot success or failure table differs from the first special figure jackpot success or failure table described above (see FIG. 196 (A)), and the second special figure jackpot lottery As a result of , "big hit" is not set, but two types of "small win" and "loss" are set, and the probability of small win and probability of loss are set to be the same for all game setting values. Specifically, in the normal-a time-saving second special figure jackpot success or failure table, 13107 random values from 0 to 13106 out of the values (random values) of 65536 jackpot random number counters C1 from 0 to 65535 Correspondingly, the other random values correspond to the deviation, and the small winning probability is set to about 1/5 (13107/65536).

In addition, the small hit probability defined by the normal-a time-saving second special figure jackpot success/failure table is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 198(A), and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, "jackpot" may be set as a result of the second special figure jackpot lottery in the normal-a time-saving second special figure jackpot success or failure table. In this case, it is conceivable that the jackpot probability is similar to the first special-figure jackpot success/failure table (see FIG. 196(A)) so as to have different probabilities for each game set value.

[a time saving 2nd special figure off type distribution table]
The a time-saving 2nd special figure out type distribution table is when the game state at the start of the fluctuation of the 2nd special figure is a time-saving gaming state, and when the lottery result in the 2nd special figure jackpot lottery is out It is used to sort the types of outliers. Here, FIG. 198(B) is a figure which shows an example of a time saving 2nd special figure out classification table.

As shown in FIG. 198 (B), in the time-saving second special figure sorting table, unlike the above-mentioned first special figure sorting table (see FIG. 196 (E)), Reach is not set except for off-reach and front-back off, only complete off is set. Specifically, in the a time-saving second special figure off type distribution table, all random numbers of 239 reach random number counter C3 values from 0 to 238 are set to be completely off.

In addition, in the a time saving second special figure off type distribution table, reach other than front and back off reach and front and back off may be set as the off type. In addition, in the a time saving second special figure loss type distribution table, the time saving symbol stop loss that shifts to the c time saving game state is not set as the loss type, but the time saving symbol stop loss may be set as the loss type.

[Normal game state 2nd special figure off type distribution table]
Normal game state 2nd special figure loss type distribution table, when the game state at the start of fluctuation of the 2nd special figure is the normal game state, when the lottery result in the 2nd special figure jackpot lottery is out It is used to sort the types of outliers. Here, FIG. 198(C) is a diagram showing an example of the normal game state second special figure loss classification table.

As shown in FIG. 198 (C), in the normal game state second special figure off type distribution table, unlike the above-mentioned first special figure off type distribution table (see FIG. 196 (E)), as an off type Reach is not set except front and rear out reach and front and rear out, and complete out and time saving pattern stop out are set. Specifically, in the normal game state second special figure off type distribution table, out of the 239 reach random number counter C3 values of 0 to 238, 227 random numbers of 0 to 226 are completely off, 12 random numbers of 227 to 238 are time saving pattern stop off (time saving pattern stop off A to D) that shifts to c time saving gaming state. That is, in the normal game state second special figure off type distribution table, the probability of time saving pattern stop off (time saving pattern stop off A to D) is set to about 5%.

As shown in FIGS. 198(C) and 198(D), in the present embodiment, as time saving pattern stop loss, the maximum number of time saving games that can be executed in c time saving game state is different time saving pattern stop loss a time saving pattern stop loss b Four types of time saving pattern stop off C and time saving pattern stop off D are set, and the probability of each time saving pattern stop off A to D is set to 3/239 (about 1.25%).

The time saving pattern stop off A is the maximum number of special figure games that can be executed in the c time saving game state (maximum time saving game number) is 10 times, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 is either 227 to 229. set. Then, in the special symbol game executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is time saving symbol stop deviation A, the decorative symbol variably displayed in the symbol display part 341 is stopped and displayed at "119" or "991". That is, "119" and "991" are associated with the time-saving design stop-off A as the stop display combination of the decorative design, and "119" and "991" as the stop display combination of the decorative design are the time-saving design. correspond to

The time saving pattern stop off B is when the maximum special figure game number (maximum time saving game number) that can be executed in the c time saving game state is 20 times, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 is either 230 to 232. set. Then, in the special symbol game executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is time saving symbol stoppage B, the decorative symbol variably displayed in the symbol display part 341 is stopped and displayed at "554" or "556". That is, "554" and "556" are associated with the stop display combination of decorative patterns, and "554" and "556" are associated with the stop display combination of the decorative patterns. correspond to

The time saving pattern stop off C is when the maximum special figure game number (maximum time saving game number) that can be executed in the c time saving game state is 30 times, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 is any one of 233 to 235 set. Then, in the special symbol game executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is the time-saving symbol stoppage C, the decorative symbol variably displayed in the symbol display part 341 is stopped and displayed at ``332'' or ``334''. That is, "332" and "334" are associated with the stop display combination of decorative patterns, and "332" and "334" are associated with the stop display combination of the decorative patterns. correspond to

The time saving pattern stop off D is when the maximum special figure game number (maximum time saving game number) that can be executed in the c time saving game state is 40 times, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 is either 236 to 238 set. Then, in the special symbol game executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is the time saving symbol stoppage D, the decorative symbol variably displayed in the symbol display part 341 is stopped and displayed at "776" or "778". That is, "776" and "778" are associated with the stop display combination of the decorative patterns, and "776" and "778" are associated with the stop display combination of the decorative patterns. correspond to

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is that the time-saving design is not stopped, the decorative design that is variably displayed in the design display section 341 is stopped and displayed as the time-saving design. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting the time-saving pattern to be stop-displayed even in a situation where the decoration pattern does not reach the ready-to-win position and the big win lottery result is lost and the big win cannot be expected. can be done. In addition, the player can grasp the maximum number of time-saving games that can be executed in the time-saving game state based on the type of time-saving design (combination type of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed). Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that the time-saving symbols having a large maximum number of times of time-saving games are stopped and displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, four types of time saving pattern stop off are set, but the time saving pattern stop off is not limited to four types, and there is no need to have a plurality of types, for example, one type may be used. Also, when setting multiple types of time-saving design stop off, it is not necessary to equalize the probability (distribution) of each time-saving design stop off, and the probability of some or all of the time-saving design stop off (distribution) is other time-saving design It may be different from out of stop.

Further, in the present embodiment, two types of time-saving patterns are associated with one type of time-saving design stop off, but one type of time-saving design may be associated with one type of time-saving design stop off. Also, the number of time-saving designs associated with some or all of the time-saving designs stop-off may be different from the number of time-saving designs associated with other time-saving design stop-offs. Furthermore, a plurality of types of maximum number of time-saving games may be associated with one type of time-saving design.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot lottery result is out of stoppage of the time-saving design, the decorative design that is variably displayed in the design display section 341 is stopped and displayed as the time-saving design. , The first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362, or the stop display symbol of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363. good. In this case, the first special symbol, or the type of stop display symbol of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363, and the maximum number of special symbol games that can be executed in the time saving game state (maximum number of time saving games) may be associated.

And, in the above-mentioned normal game state second special figure off type distribution table, the time saving pattern stop off is set, but the time saving pattern stop off is not set in the other off type distribution table (Fig. 196 (E), see FIGS. 197(D) and 198(B)). That is, the result of the special figure jackpot lottery is the time saving symbol stop off is the second special figure at the start of the second special figure in the normal game state which is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening 315 It is only a special drawing jackpot lottery.

Here, in the present embodiment, the game per normal pattern is executed once in the a reduced working hours game state, the maximum opening time in the game per normal pattern is 15 seconds, and the maximum winning number is set to 5. (See FIG. 195(E)). Therefore, when the normal figure per game is executed based on the transition of the a time saving game state (when the second winning opening 315 is opened by the operation of the electric role product 315b), in addition to the variation display of the second special figure , It is possible to execute a total of five second special symbol games of variable display of the second special symbols based on up to four second special symbol reservations (so-called remaining reservations). And, while the maximum opening time of the game per normal figure in the a reduced working hours game state is 15 seconds, the fluctuation display time (variation pattern) of the second special figure game started in the reduced working hours gaming state as described later Since is 40 seconds (see FIG. 199 (A)), a time-saving game by ending the normal figure per game before the end of the second special game that is executed first after the transition to the a time-saving game state It shifts from the state to the normal game state. As a result, the second special symbol game based on the second special symbol reservation (residual reservation) executed after the end of the second special symbol game is started in the normal game state. In addition, as described above, the maximum opening time of the electric accessory 315b in the normal game per game in the normal game state is 0.1 seconds (see FIG. 195 (E)), and the second winning opening in the normal game state It is impossible or extremely difficult to enter the game ball into 315, and since left-handed hitting that hits the game ball to the left side area of the game board 31 is encouraged, the second winning opening based on the normal game per game in the normal game state The second special symbol game is not substantially executed by the entry of the game ball to 315. Therefore, the second special game is started in the normal game state is the game to the second winning opening 315 in the normal game that is executed when the time saving jackpot game is shifted to the a time saving game state after the end of the time saving jackpot game It is the second special game that is suspended by the entry of the ball. In other words, the normal game state second special figure off type distribution table shifts after the time saving jackpot game ends A game ball enters the second winning hole 315 by the operation of the electric accessory 315b in the time saving game state By doing so, when the second special figure reservation number M is 1 or more (when there is a remaining reservation), when starting the second special figure game executed based on the second special figure reservation (remaining reservation) Referenced.

Then, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, when a game per normal pattern is executed based on the display effect shifting to the reduced working hours game state (the second winning port 315 is opened by the operation of the electric accessory 315b ), in addition to the variable display of the second special figure, the variable display of the second special figure based on up to four second special figure reservations (so-called remaining reservations) is performed up to a total of five times. In the 2 special game, a RUSH effect as a display effect including a battle effect is performed in the symbol display section 341 or the like. Also, the battle effect is a remaining pending effect that is executed with respect to the second special figure pending (remaining pending) triggered by the transition to the a reduced working hours gaming state as will be described later. On the other hand, if the jackpot lottery result is out of the time saving pattern stoppage, it shifts to the c time saving game state. A time-saving game effect (display effect such as a unique background effect or a remaining time-saving number display effect) is executed in the symbol display section 341 or the like (see FIG. 225(C)).

Thus, in the time-saving game state, the game per normal pattern is executed only once, but after the end of the game per normal pattern, the state is shifted from the time-saving game state to the normal game state, and the second game in the time-saving game state If the remaining hold executed with the entry of the game ball into the 2 winning hole 315 as a trigger includes information that the jackpot lottery result indicates that the time saving pattern is not stopped, it is notified that the time saving pattern is not stopped. After the notified 2nd special figure game is completed, it is shifted to c time saving game state. That is, in the present embodiment, a game state in which the second special figure game including the remaining hold executed triggered by the entering ball of the game ball to the second winning hole 315 in the time saving game state and the normal game The state or c time saving game state overlaps and occurs.

Then, the second special game including the remaining hold executed with the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the a time saving game state (so-called RUSH state, which is a jackpot consecutive state) is a jackpot In order to generate a small winning game that gives an opportunity to generate a game with a high probability (see FIG. 198 (A)), it is a gaming state with a high game value because a big winning game is likely to occur. On the other hand, in the normal game state and c time-saving game state, it is impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the second winning hole 315, so the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole 314 is triggered. Since the jackpot lottery is executed as a jackpot game, it is difficult to generate a jackpot game (see FIG. 198(A)). Therefore, the game state in which the second special figure game including the remaining hold executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the a time saving game state is easy to generate a jackpot game. This is a game state with a higher game value than the normal game state and the c time-saving game state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the RUSH effect is executed as a display effect in the second special figure game including the remaining hold executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the a time saving game state. (See Figures 226-228). In particular, a battle effect is executed as a display effect for the second special symbol game corresponding to the remaining reservation. On the other hand, in the normal game state, a unique display effect that clearly indicates or suggests that it is a normal game state is executed (see FIG. 225 (A)), and in the c time saving game state, it indicates or indicates that it is a c time saving game state. A unique display effect is executed (see FIG. 225(C)). Therefore, when the jackpot lottery result is out of the time saving pattern stoppage in the remaining pending, as a display effect, from the battle performance executed for the second special game corresponding to the remaining pending with high game value Also, if priority is given to the normal game state effect or the c time reduction game effect that is executed corresponding to the normal game state or the c time reduction game state with a low game value, the battle effect is interrupted in the middle, and the pattern display unit 341 displays the battle. It becomes impossible to judge the result (property of a small hit). Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the display effect, a battle effect (RUSH effect as a specific effect) that is executed in a game state in which the second special game corresponding to the remaining reservation with a high game value can be executed is used. This is executed with priority over the normal game state performance and the c time reduction game performance which can be executed in the normal game state and the c time reduction game having a lower game value than the game state to be executed. That is, in the present embodiment, when game states with different game values are executed in duplicate, the display effect for the game state with the higher game value is preferentially executed. As a result, when the battle effect as the display effect is started, the player can be notified of the success or failure of the small win based on the battle result in the battle effect without the battle effect being interrupted due to the duplication of the game state. be possible. In particular, even if the jackpot lottery result is out of the time saving pattern stoppage during the remaining pending, and it is shifted to the c time saving game state based on the time saving pattern stoppage out, by the battle production as the display production It is possible to notify the player of the success or failure of the small win based on the battle result.

Also, as described above, in the time-saving game state, the game per normal pattern is executed only once, and after the end of the game per normal pattern, the normal game state is transferred from the time-saving game state to the time-saving game state. If the remaining hold executed with the entry of the game ball into the second winning port 315 as a trigger includes the result of the jackpot lottery indicating that the time saving pattern is not stopped, the time saving pattern is not stopped. After the end of the second special figure game informing that there is, the game control of the MPU 41 shifts to the c time saving game state. In other words, at the end of the battle effect as the display effect, it is in the normal game state or c time saving game state. Therefore, when the jackpot lottery result for the remaining reservation executed with the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving gaming state is all out, after the RUSH effect as the display effect is finished, the RUSH effect Depending on the game state at the end of (whether or not the time saving symbol stop is off), the normal game state effect or the c time saving game state effect is executed as the display effect.

Here, the normal game state and the c time-saving game state are common in that it is difficult to generate a jackpot game (see FIG. 196 (A)), but in the normal game state, the RUSH rush (occurrence of the jackpot Renso high probability state) While the distribution of the time-saving jackpot that triggers is 50% (see FIG. 196 (B)), in the c-time-saving gaming state, the distribution of the time-saving jackpot that triggers the RUSH rush (occurrence of the high probability state of the jackpot) It is 100% (see FIG. 196 (C)), and the jackpot in the c time saving game state is a jackpot that is a RUSH direct hit. Therefore, the c time reduction game state is a game state with a higher game value for the player than the normal game state in that the time reduction jackpot distribution that triggers the RUSH rush (occurrence of the jackpot consecutive high probability state) is high. In other words, after the RUSH effect as the display effect is completed, the normal game state effect or the c short game state effect is executed as the display effect, but from the player's point of view, the c short game state effect is executed after the RUSH effect ends It is preferable to be Therefore, in the present embodiment, after the end of the RUSH effect as the display effect, a branch effect, which will be described later, is displayed to indicate or suggest which of the c time-saving game state effect and the normal game state effect as the display effect is to be executed. (See FIG. 229). Therefore, even if the player is notified that the battle effect executed based on the remaining hold has not won a small hit, the c time-saving game effect, which is a chance for a direct hit of RUSH, is performed after the battle effect is completed. The subsequent execution makes it possible to maintain the interest in the game, thereby improving the interest in the game.

[V winning jackpot type distribution table]
The V winning time jackpot type distribution table is used to distribute the jackpot game type executed based on the game ball entering the V winning prize opening 833 in the small winning game. Here, FIG. 198(E) is a diagram showing an example of a V winning jackpot classification table.

As shown in FIG. 198(E), in the V winning jackpot type distribution table, the 16R short-time jackpot and the 4R short-time jackpot are set as the jackpot types. The 16R time saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the round game is executed 16 times in the opening and closing execution mode, and after the end of the 16R time saving jackpot game, the state is shifted to the a time saving game state. The 4R time saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the round game is executed four times in the opening and closing execution mode, and the game is shifted to the a time saving game state after the end of the 4R time saving jackpot game. Then, in the V winning time jackpot type distribution table, 0 to 3 of the jackpot type counter values 0 to 19 are 16R short time jackpots, and 4 to 19 are 4R short time jackpots. That is, in the V-winning jackpot type distribution table, the probability (distribution) of the 16R short-time jackpot is 20%, and the probability (distribution) of the 4R short-time jackpot is 80%.

In addition, in the present embodiment, two types of the jackpot game are set to be executed based on the game ball entering the V winning opening 833 in the small hit game, but there is one type of the jackpot game. However, it may be three or more types, and the number of round games executed in the jackpot game is not limited to 4R and 16R.

[a time saving second special figure fluctuation table]
The a time saving second special figure fluctuation table shows the special figure fluctuation pattern (variation display time) of the second special figure in the second special figure game when the game state at the start of the second special figure fluctuation is the a time saving gaming state used to set the Here, FIG. 199(A) is a figure which shows an example of a time saving 2nd special figure fluctuation table.

As shown in FIG. 199 (A), a time-saving second special figure fluctuation table includes the first special figure jackpot variation table (see FIG. 196 (D)) and the first special figure deviation variation table (see FIG. 196 (F )), it is a table that is referenced regardless of whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot or a loss, and the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) is 40 seconds Special figure fluctuation pattern "08" Only one type of is set. Thereby, it is possible to reliably shift from the time-saving game state to the normal game state during execution of the first second special figure game in the case of shifting to the time-saving game state. Also, as described above, when the transition to the a reduced working hours gaming state, the RUSH effect is executed in the symbol display unit 341 and the like, but in the first second special figure game when shifted to the a reduced working hours gaming state, Of the RUSH effects, a button effect is executed as a one-shot notification effect, which will be described later (see FIG. 226(D)). And, the variation pattern (variation display time) set in the a time saving second special figure variation table is only one type of 40 seconds, so that the button effect before the battle effect in the RUSH effect starts is executed at a good tempo. It is possible to smoothly transition to battle production.

[Normal game state 2nd special figure holding 2nd special figure fluctuation table]
The normal game state second special figure holding second special figure variation table is a special figure variation pattern of the second special figure in the second special figure game when the game state at the start of variation of the second special figure is the normal game state. (variable display time). In other words, the normal game state second special figure reservation second special figure variation table is used when starting the second special figure game for the second special figure reservation (remaining reservation) triggered by the transition to the a reduced time gaming state be done. Here, FIG. 199(B) is a diagram showing an example of a normal game state second special figure pending second special figure variation table.

As shown in FIG. 199(B), the normal game state second special figure holding second special figure variation table includes the first special figure jackpot variation table (see FIG. 196(D)) and the first special figure deviation variation. Unlike the table (see FIG. 196 (F)), it is a table that is referenced regardless of whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot or a loss, and the type of the second special figure fluctuation pattern (variation display time) is set according to the remaining pending pattern. In this embodiment, eight types of 1 to 8 are set as the remaining reservation patterns.

As shown in FIG. 199 (C) and FIG. 199 (D), the remaining reservation pattern 1 moves from the a reduced working hours game state to the normal game state (the second special that was started first after moving to the reduced working hours gaming state) The number of second special figure remaining reservations when the figure game ends) is 1, and the result of the jackpot lottery for the one second special figure remaining reservation is a pattern that is lost. In the remaining pending pattern 2, the second special figure remaining pending number when the transition from the a time saving game state to the normal game state (the first second special figure game started after moving to the a time saving game state is completed) It is a pattern in which the results of the jackpot lottery for the two second special figure remaining reservations are all out. In the remaining pending pattern 3, the second special figure remaining pending number when the transition from the a time saving game state to the normal game state (the second special figure game that was first started after moving to the a time saving game state is completed) There are three, and the result of the big hit lottery for the three second special figure remaining reservations is a pattern in which all are out. In the remaining pending pattern 4, the second special figure remaining pending number when shifting from the a time saving game state to the normal game state (the second special figure game that was first started after moving to the a time saving game state is completed) It is a pattern in which the result of the jackpot lottery for the four second special figure remaining reservations is out.

On the other hand, the remaining reservation pattern 5 is the second special figure remaining reservation when the transition from the a time saving game state to the normal game state (the second special figure game that was started first after moving to the a time saving game state ends) It is a pattern in which the number is 1 to 4, and the result of the big hit lottery for the second special game that is started first during the second special game is a small hit. In the remaining pending pattern 6, the second special figure remaining pending number when the transition from the a time saving game state to the normal game state (the second special figure game that was first started after moving to the a time saving game state is completed) There are 2 to 4 pieces, and the result of the jackpot lottery for the 2nd special game that is started first while the 2nd special figure is pending is out, and the 2nd special that is started second while the 2nd special figure is pending. It is a pattern in which the result of the big winning lottery for the figure game is a small winning. In the remaining pending pattern 7, the second special figure remaining pending number when shifting from the a time saving game state to the normal game state (the second special figure game that was first started after moving to the a time saving game state is completed) There are 3 to 4 pieces, and the result of the jackpot lottery for the 2nd special game that is started first and second during the second special reservation is out, and it is started third during the second special reservation. It is a pattern in which the result of the big hit lottery for the second special game is a small hit. In the remaining pending pattern 8, the second special figure remaining pending number when the transition from the a time saving game state to the normal game state (the second special figure game that was first started after moving to the a time saving game state is completed) There are 4, and the result of the jackpot lottery for the 2nd special game started from the first to the 3rd in the 2nd special game pending is out, and the 2nd game started in the 4th place in the 2nd special game pending It is a pattern in which the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game is a small hit.

As shown in FIGS. 199(B) and 199(D), in this embodiment, for the remaining reservation patterns 1 and 5, the second special figure variation pattern for one second special figure remaining reservation A special figure fluctuation pattern "09" with a 2 special figure fluctuation display time of 120 seconds is set, and the second special figure game of 120 seconds is executed once for the remaining reservation of the second special figure. For the remaining pending patterns 2 and 6, the special figure fluctuation pattern " 02" is set, and the second special symbol game of 60 seconds is executed twice for the remaining reservation of the second special symbol. For the remaining pending patterns 3 and 7, the special figure fluctuation pattern " 10" is set, and the second special symbol game of 40 seconds is executed three times with respect to the remaining reservation of the second special symbol. For the remaining reserved patterns 4 and 8, the special figure fluctuation pattern " 01" is set, and the second special symbol game of 30 seconds is executed four times with respect to the remaining reservation of the second special symbol. That is, for each remaining reservation pattern, the total variable display time of the second special figure game executed in each remaining reservation pattern is standardized to 120 seconds. Therefore, the battle production (remaining pending production) of the RUSH production described later is executed as a display production completed in 120 seconds, and the second special game for the second special holding pending is executed how many times during the battle production. It's getting harder to find out what happened.

In addition, the total variable display time of the second special figure game executed in each remaining reservation pattern is not limited to 120 seconds, and can be changed as appropriate. Moreover, the variable display time of the second special figure executed in each remaining pending pattern does not necessarily have to be equal. In addition, the total variable display time of the second special game executed in each remaining pending pattern does not need to be standardized and may be different for each remaining pending pattern. Time may be associated.

[Main Timer Interrupt Processing of Main Controller 4]
The main timer interrupt processing of the main control device 4 in this embodiment is basically the same as the main timer interrupt processing of the main control device 4 in the above-described first embodiment, but the first The procedure of special figure reservation command setting processing and the 2nd special figure reservation command setting processing differs from above-mentioned 1st execution form.

[Start winning process]
Here, FIG. 200 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the starting winning process executed by the MPU 41 at step S1004 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. The starting winning process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1101>
As shown in FIG. 200, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the first winning port 314 has won a prize. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that a prize has been won for the first prize winning port 314 (step S1101: Yes), the specific condition is established, the process proceeds to step S1102, and it is determined that there is no prize for the first prize winning port 314. Then (step S1101: No), the process proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the first special figure reservation number N stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum number of reservations (4 in this embodiment). Here, if the number N of 1st special figure reservations is the maximum number of reservations (Step S1102: Yes), MPU41 will shift processing to Step S1106. On the other hand, if the first special figure reservation number N is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 performs a process of adding 1 to the first special figure reservation number N as a numerical value storage process (step S1103 ). When the numerical information is stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA, it becomes the first special figure reservation game state in which the first special figure game can be executed.

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, MPU41, as a numerical value storage processing, jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. Acquire the counter value of the special figure variation type counter CS1 updated in steps S1402 and S1414 in the process, and store the counter value in the first special figure suspension storage area REA of the special figure suspension storage area 412b in RAM412 A process of storing in the first empty reservation area among the areas REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 is executed.

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 determines whether the special figure propriety information for the first special figure hold acquired in step S1104 is a judgment target of the propriety of the jackpot in step S2102 or S2103 in the special figure fluctuation start processing of FIG. 28 described later. To confirm the contents of the special figure propriety information, execute the first special figure reservation command setting process of setting the first special figure reservation command in the RAM 412 based on this confirmation result. The details of the first special figure pending command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a prize for the second prize winning port 315. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that a prize has been won for the second prize winning port 315 (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107, and if it determines that there is no prize for the second prize winning port 315 (step S1106: No ), the starting winning process is terminated.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second special figure reservation number M stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum number of reservations (4 in this embodiment). Here, if the second special figure reservation number M is the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process. On the other hand, if the second special figure reservation number M is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: No), the MPU 41 performs a process of adding 1 to the second special figure reservation number M as a numerical value storage process (step S1108 ). When the numerical information is stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB, it becomes the first special figure reservation game state in which the second special figure game can be executed.

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, MPU41, as a numerical value storage process, jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. Acquire the counter value of the special figure variation type counter CS1 updated in steps S1402 and S1414 in the process, and store the counter value in the second special figure reservation storage area REB of the special figure reservation storage area 412b in the RAM412. A process of storing in the first empty reservation area among the area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 is executed.

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41, the special figure propriety information for the second special figure hold acquired in step S1109 is before the judgment target of the propriety of the jackpot in step S2102 or S2103 in the special figure fluctuation start processing of FIG. 28 described later. To confirm the contents of the special figure propriety information, the second special figure reservation command setting process for setting the second special figure reservation command in the RAM 412 based on this confirmation result is executed. Here, since the 2nd special figure reservation command setting processing is the same as the 1st special figure reservation command setting processing mentioned below with reference to Drawing 19, detailed explanation is omitted. In the second special figure pending command setting process, in the first special figure pending command setting process of FIG. Number N" should be read as "second special figure reservation number M".

[First special figure pending command setting process]
Here, FIG. 201 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special figure pending command setting process executed by the MPU 41 at step S1105 in the starting winning process of FIG. In addition, the 1st special figure pending command includes information indicating that the command is the 1st special figure pending command, the result of the jackpot lottery (jackpot type or loss type), the special figure fluctuation display time and the 1st special figure and information such as the number N of reservations. Hereinafter, the first special figure pending command setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Steps S3301 and S3302>
As shown in FIG. 201, in the first special figure pending command setting process of the present embodiment, the MPU 41 first selects the first special figure pending number from the first special figure pending number storage area NAA of the first special figure pending storage area REA. While reading N, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first special figure reservation is read from the RAM 412 (step S3301). Then, the MPU 41 refers to the first special-figure jackpot success/failure table (see FIG. 196(A)), and based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, determines whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery for the starting prize is a jackpot. It judges (step S3302). MPU41 shifts a process to step S3303, when the result of the jackpot lottery regarding start winning is a jackpot (step S3302: Yes). On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3305 when the result of the jackpot lottery related to the start winning is not a jackpot (step S3302: No), that is, when it is lost.

<Step S3303>
When the result of the jackpot lottery for the starting winning is a jackpot (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the special figure variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412 (step S3303). For example, when the special figure right/wrong information is stored in the third reservation area REA3 at step S1104 in the starting winning process of FIG. C2 and the counter value of special figure variation type counter CS1 are read. In addition, among the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4, the reservation area in which the special figure propriety information is stored in step S1104 in the start winning process of FIG. 200 is stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA. It can be determined by the value of the first special figure reservation number N.

<Step S3304>
In step S3304, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2 (jackpot type), the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1 (special figure fluctuation pattern) and the first special figure reservation number N to the first special figure reservation command, and the first End the special figure pending command setting process.

<Steps S3305 and S3306>
If the result of the jackpot lottery related to the starting winning is not a jackpot (step S3302: No), that is, if it is out, the MPU 41 reads out the counter values of the reach random number counter C3 and the special figure variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412 (step S3305). . Next, the MPU 41 sets the reach random number counter C3 (off type), the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1 (special figure fluctuation pattern) and the first special figure reservation number N to the first special figure reservation command (step S3306), End the first special figure pending command setting process.

Thus, the first special figure reservation command set in step S3304 or S3306 includes the first special figure reservation number N read out in step S3301. Therefore, the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 that receives the first special figure pending command refers to the first number of reservations N included in the first special figure pending command, so that the first special figure pending command is the first It is possible to recognize which one of the reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 corresponds to the first special figure propriety information stored. As a result, the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 displays the first special figure pending image as a corresponding display for the first special figure game in the first special figure pending image display area 76 (FIGS. 225 (A) and 225 (C) reference) can be controlled.

In addition, the first special figure pending command set in step S3307 or S3309 of the first special figure pending command setting process is stored in the RAM412, and is executed by the MPU41 of the main control device 4 of FIG. In step S1401 of the main processing, it is erased after being transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 together with other commands. Furthermore, the content of the first special figure pending command described here is only an example, and if it is possible to grasp the same content as the first special figure pending command in the audio lamp control device 5, it will be explained here. It is not limited to what you do. For example, it is conceivable that part or all of the information of the first special figure pending command is included in other commands.

[Second special figure pending command setting process]
Here, FIG. 202 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second special figure pending command setting process executed by the MPU 41 at step S1110 in the starting winning process of FIG. In addition, the second special figure pending command includes information indicating that the command is the second special figure pending command, the result of the jackpot lottery, the special figure fluctuation display time and the second special figure pending number M etc. is included. Hereinafter, the second special figure pending command setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S3401>
As shown in FIG. 202, in the second special figure pending command setting process of the present embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not it is in the normal game state (step S3401). Whether or not the normal game state, in steps S4216, S4222, S4228 of the game state transition process of FIG. It is determined based on the normal game state flag that is set to ON when shifting to .

When the MPU 41 is in the normal game state (step S3401: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3409, and when not in the normal game state (step S3401: No), the process proceeds to step S3402.

<Step S3402>
When it is not in the normal gaming state (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is in the a reduced working hours gaming state (step S3402). Whether or not the time-saving game state is determined based on the time-saving game state flag a, which is set to ON after the time-saving jackpot game is completed in step S4246 of the game state transition process in FIG.

MPU41 shifts a process to step S3409, when it is a time saving game state (step S3402: Yes). On the other hand, when the MPU 41 is not in the a reduced working hours gaming state (step S3402: No), that is, when it is in the a reduced working hours gaming state or the c reduced working hours gaming state, the process proceeds to step S3403.

<Steps S3403 and S3404>
If it is not a time-saving gaming state (step S3402: No), that is, if it is a time-saving gaming state or c time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 selects from the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB of the second special figure reservation storage area REB. While reading 2 special figure reservation number M, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each 2nd special figure reservation is read from RAM412 (step S3403). Then, the MPU 41 refers to the b time saving-c time saving second special figure jackpot success table (see FIG. 197 (A)), and based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the result of the jackpot lottery related to the start winning is a jackpot. It is determined whether or not there is (step S3404). MPU41 shifts a process to step S3405, when the result of the jackpot lottery regarding start winning is a jackpot (step S3404: Yes). On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3407 when the result of the jackpot lottery related to the start winning is not a jackpot (step S3404: No), that is, when it is lost.

<Step S3405>
When the result of the jackpot lottery for the start winning is a jackpot (step S3404: Yes), the MPU 41 reads out the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the special figure variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412 (step S3405). For example, when the special figure right/wrong information is stored in the third reservation area REB3 at step S1104 in the starting winning process of FIG. C2 and the counter value of special figure variation type counter CS1 are read. In addition, among the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4, the reservation area in which the special figure propriety information is stored in step S1104 in the start winning process of FIG. 200 is stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB. It can be determined by the value of the second special figure reservation number M.

<Step S3406>
In step S3406, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2 (jackpot type), the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1 (special figure fluctuation pattern) and the second special figure reservation number M to the second special figure reservation command, and the second End the special figure pending command setting process.

<Steps S3407 and S3408>
If the result of the jackpot lottery related to the start winning is not a jackpot (step S3404: No), that is, if it is out, the MPU 41 reads out the counter values of the reach random number counter C3 and the special figure variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412 (step S3407). . Next, the MPU 41 sets the reach random number counter C3 (off type), the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1 (special figure fluctuation pattern) and the second special figure reservation number M to the second special figure reservation command (step S3408), End the second special figure pending command setting process.

<Steps S3409 to S3411>
When the normal game state (step S3401: Yes), or when it is a time-saving game state (step S3402: Yes), the MPU 41 is a special figure variation pattern "08" whose variation display time is 40 seconds as a special figure variation pattern. ” is set (step S3409). Then, the MPU 41 reads out the second special figure reservation number M from the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB of the second special figure reservation storage area REB, and the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each second special figure reservation The value is read from RAM 412 (step S3410). In addition, the MPU41 sets the jackpot lottery result (jackpot type, small hit, loss type), the special figure fluctuation pattern and the second special figure reservation number M to the second special figure reservation command (step S3411), the second special The drawing hold command setting process is ended.

Thus, the second special figure pending command set in steps S3406, S3408 or S3411 includes the second special figure pending number M read out in step S3403 or S3410. Therefore, the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 that has received the second special figure pending command refers to the second special figure pending number M included in the second special figure pending command, so that the second special figure pending command is It is possible to recognize which one of the second reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 corresponds to the second special figure propriety information stored. As a result, the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 is the second special figure pending image as a corresponding display for the second special figure game in the second special figure pending image display area 77 (FIGS. 225 (B) and 225 (D) reference) can be controlled.

It should be noted that the second special figure pending command set in steps S3406, S3408 or S3411 of the second special figure pending command setting process is stored in the RAM412 and executed by the MPU41 of the main control device 4 It is erased after being transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 together with other commands in step S1401 of the main processing in FIG. 203 which will be described later. Furthermore, the content of the second special figure pending command described here is only an example, and if it is possible to grasp the same content as the second special figure pending command in the voice lamp control device 5, it will be explained here. It is not limited to what you do. For example, it is also conceivable that part or all of the information of the second special figure pending command is included in other commands.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
The main processing of the main controller 4 in this embodiment is basically the same as the main processing of the main controller 4 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 21), but as shown in FIG. In addition, the point that the small winning game control process is executed, the part of the procedure of the part of the process is different. In the following, the main processing of the main controller 4 in this embodiment will focus on the differences from the main processing of the main controller 4 in the above-described first embodiment, and the processing necessary for explaining this embodiment. to explain.

[Universal figure game control process]
The general pattern game control processing executed in step S1404 in the main processing of FIG. 203 of this embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in the general pattern variation start processing. Hereinafter, normal figure fluctuation start processing of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

[Normal pattern fluctuation start process]
In the normal pattern fluctuation start process of the present embodiment, the normal pattern fluctuation in the normal pattern display unit 361 is started, and when the lottery result in the normal pattern per lottery is a hit, the normal pattern per type (electric accessory 315b) is set.

<Step S3501>
As shown in FIG. 204, in the normal figure fluctuation start process of the present embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not it is in the normal game state (step S3501). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game state in the case of starting the variable display of normal symbols (normal game) is the normal game state. In other words, it is determined whether it is a normal game state that is a low support mode or a short game state that is a high support mode at the start of fluctuation of normal patterns, and per normal pattern based on the support mode type at the start of fluctuation of normal patterns Make a judgment on whether or not

Whether or not the normal game state, in steps S4216, S4222, S4228 of the game state transition process of FIG. It is determined based on the normal game state flag which is set to ON when shifting to .

When the MPU 41 is in the normal game state (step S3501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3402, and when not in the normal game state (step S3402: No), the process proceeds to step S3405.

<Steps S3502 to S3504>
When the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S3501: Yes), that is, when the low support mode, the MPU 41 determines the normal game state based on the normal game state normal figure winning table (see FIG. 195 (A)). It is determined whether or not the lottery per figure is determined (step S3502), and the result of the determination is a general figure per (step S3503).

It should be noted that whether or not the result of the success/failure determination is a normal game is obtained by entering the game ball 99 into the 317R, and is stored in the normal game reservation storage area 412c (see FIG. 11). It is determined based on C4.

MPU41, when the result of the success/failure determination based on the normal game state normal figure per success/failure table is the normal figure per (step S3503: Yes), the short open normal figure per flag is set to ON (step S3504), and the process is stepped. The process proceeds to S3511. The short open normal figure per flag is a flag indicating that the result of the general figure per lottery is a short open per (see FIG. 195 (E)) in which the maximum opening time of the electric accessory 315b is 0.1 seconds, In step S3609 of the normal figure per game control process of FIG. 204 described later, it is referred to when determining whether or not to set the value of the open counter to the time corresponding to the short opening as the opening time of the electric auditors 315b.

On the other hand, the MPU 41, when the result of the success/failure determination based on the normal game state normal/universal figure per success/failure table is not per the general/universal figure (step S3503: No), that is, when the result of the success/failure determination is off, the process proceeds to step S3511. .

<Steps S3505 and S3506>
If it is not in the normal game state (step S3501: No), that is, if it is in the time saving game state that is the high support mode (a time saving game state, b time saving game state and c time saving game state), the MPU 41 Based on the time-saving game state general pattern per hit/fail table (see FIG. 195 (B)), the success/failure determination for the general pattern per lottery is performed (step S3505), and it is determined whether the result of the success/failure determination is the general pattern per. (Step S3506).

It should be noted that whether or not the result of the success/failure determination is a normal game hit is acquired by entering the game ball 99 into the through gate 317R in the same manner as in step S3502 described above. ) is determined based on the value of the random number counter C4 per normal pattern.

MPU41, if the result of the success/failure determination based on the success/failure table per time-saving game state general pattern is per general pattern (step S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3507, and if the result of the success/failure determination is not per general pattern ( Step S3506: No), that is, if the result of the right/wrong determination is NO, the process proceeds to step S3509.

<Steps S3507 and S3508>
If the result of the success/failure determination based on the time-saving game state normal figure per success/failure table is a normal game (step S3506: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is a time-saving game state (step S3507). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game state in the case of starting the variable display of normal symbols (normal game) is the a reduced working hours game state. Whether or not the time-saving game state is determined based on the time-saving game state flag a, which is set to ON after the time-saving jackpot game is completed in step S4246 of the game state transition process in FIG.

When the MPU 41 is in the a reduced working hours gaming state (step S3507: Yes), it sets the long open normal figure per flag to ON (step S3508), and shifts the process to step S3511. The long open general pattern per flag is a flag indicating that the result of the general pattern per lottery is a long open per (see FIG. 195 (E)) with a maximum opening time of 15 seconds for the electric accessory 315b, which will be described later. In step S3603 of the game control process per normal figure in Figure 205, it is referred to when determining whether to set the value of the open counter to the time corresponding to the long open as the open time of the electric auditors 315b. On the other hand, MPU41 transfers a process to step S3509, when it is not a time-saving gaming state (step S3507: No).

<Steps S3509 and S3510>
When it is not a time-saving game state (step S3507: No), MPU41 judges whether it is b time-saving game state (step S3509). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game state in the case of starting the variable display of normal symbols (normal game) is the b time reduction game state. Whether or not it is the b time-saving gaming state, in step S4203 of the game state transition processing in FIG. Based on this, it is determined based on the b time saving game state flag which is set to ON when shifting from the normal game state to the b time saving game state.

When the MPU 41 is in the b time-saving gaming state (step S3509: Yes), it sets the middle open normal figure hit flag to ON (step S3509), and shifts the process to step S3511. The middle open normal figure per flag is a flag indicating that the result of the normal figure per lottery is a middle open per (see FIG. 195 (E)) with a maximum opening time of 3 seconds for the electric accessory 315b, which will be described later. In step S3606 of the game control process per normal figure in Figure 205, it is referred to when determining whether or not to set the value of the open counter to the time corresponding to the middle open as the open time of the electric auditors 315b. On the other hand, MPU41 transfers a process to step S3509, when it is not b time saving gaming state (step S3507: No).

<Steps S3511 and S3512>
If the result in the lottery per normal figure is out (step S3503 or S3506: No), if the short open normal map per flag is set to ON (step S3504), if the long open normal map per flag is set to ON (Step S3508), or when the middle open normal pattern hit flag is set to ON (step S3510), the MPU 41 starts variable display of normal patterns in the normal design display section 361 of the main display section 36 (step S3511). . Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal pattern fluctuation display flag to ON, which indicates that the normal pattern is displayed in a variable manner, that is, the normal pattern game is being executed (step S3512), and starts the normal pattern fluctuation start process. finish.

[Universal figure per game control process]
Here, Figures 205 and 206 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the normal figure per game control process executed in step S1405 in the main process of Figure 203 . In the game control process per normal pattern, when the result of the lottery per normal pattern is a win, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 315b is performed to allow the game ball to enter the second winning hole 315. A process of switching to and from a restrictive state is executed. Hereafter, normal figure per game control processing is demonstrated, referring FIG.205 and FIG.206.

<Step S3601>
As shown in FIG. 205, in the normal pattern per game control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag indicating that the normal pattern has been stopped and displayed (that the normal pattern game has ended) is on. (step S3601). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to start the game per normal pattern. It should be noted that the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is set to ON in step S1511 when the normal pattern is stopped and displayed in the normal pattern game control process of FIG.

When the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is ON (step S3601: Yes), that is, when it is time to start the normal pattern per game, the process proceeds to step S3602. On the other hand, when the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S3601: No), that is, when the normal pattern per game can not be started, the process proceeds to step S3616 in FIG.

<Step S3602>
When the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is ON (step S3601: Yes), that is, when the normal pattern per game can be started, the MPU 41 indicates that the jackpot game is being executed. It is determined whether it is on (step S3602). The jackpot playing flag is set to ON in step S2206 when the jackpot game is started in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, and is set to OFF in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends.

When the jackpot playing flag is ON (step S3602: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the per-universal pattern game control process. That is, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is forcibly terminated by starting, even if the result of the lottery per normal pattern for the normal pattern game is per normal pattern, the game per normal pattern is not started. That is, in the present embodiment, the regular pattern per game is not started during execution of the jackpot game. Of course, a new normal game may be started during execution of the jackpot game.

On the other hand, when the jackpot playing flag is off (step S3602: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3603.

<Step S3603>
When the jackpot playing flag is off (step S3602: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the long open normal pattern hit flag is set to on (step S3603). . The long open general figure per flag is a flag indicating that the result of the lottery per general figure is the long open general figure per figure, and when the result of the lottery per general figure is the long open general figure per normal figure 204 It is set to ON in step S3508 of the figure fluctuation start process. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the lottery per normal pattern for the ended normal pattern game is per long open normal pattern. MPU41, if the long open normal map per flag is set to ON (step S3603: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3604, if the long open normal map per flag is set to OFF (step S3603: No), the process proceeds to step S3606.

<Steps S3604 and S3605>
If the long open general pattern per flag is set to ON (step S3603: Yes), that is, if the result of the general pattern per lottery for the finished general pattern game is a long open general pattern per, the MPU 41 performs numerical value storage processing. , open the value corresponding to 15 seconds (see FIG. 195 (E)) which is the opening time of the electric accessory 315b in the game per long open general pattern (the time allowed for the game ball to enter the second winning hole 315) A process for setting the value of the time counter is executed (step S3604). The opening time counter is referred to in step S3618 of the game control process per normal figure in order to determine the return timing of the electric auditors 315b. Then, the MPU 41 sets the long open normal figure hit flag to OFF (step S3605), and shifts the process to step S3612.

<Step S3606>
If the long open normal map per flag is set to off (step S3603: No), that is, if the result of the general pattern per lottery for the finished normal game is not per long open normal pattern, the MPU 41 is the middle open normal map It is determined whether or not the hit flag is set to ON (step S3606). Medium open general pattern per flag is a flag indicating that the result of the lottery per general pattern is per medium open general pattern, and when the result of the lottery per general pattern is per medium open general pattern, the normal of Figure 204 It is set to ON in step S3510 of the figure fluctuation start process. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the lottery per normal pattern for the ended normal pattern game is per open normal pattern. MPU41, when the middle open normal map per flag is set to ON (step S3606: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3607, when the middle open normal map per flag is set to off (step S3606: No), the process proceeds to step S3609.

<Steps S3607 and S3608>
If the middle open normal map hit flag is set to ON (step S3606: Yes), that is, if the result of the normal pattern per lottery for the finished normal game is the middle open normal map hit, the MPU 41 performs numerical value storage processing. , open the value corresponding to 3 seconds (see FIG. 195 (E)) which is the opening time of the electric accessory 315b in the game per middle open general pattern (the time allowed for the game ball to enter the second winning hole 315) A process for setting the value of the time counter is executed (step S3607). Then, the MPU 41 sets the middle open normal map hit flag to OFF (step S3608), and shifts the process to step S3612.

<Step S3609>
If the medium open general pattern per flag is set to off (step S3606: No), that is, if the result of the general pattern per lottery for the finished general pattern game is not per medium open general pattern, the MPU 41 is a short open general pattern It is determined whether or not the hit flag is set to ON (step S3609). Short open normal map per flag is a flag indicating that the result of the lottery per normal pattern is per short open normal map, and when the result of the lottery per normal pattern is per short open normal map, the normal of Figure 204 It is set to ON in step S3504 of the figure fluctuation start process. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the lottery per normal pattern for the ended normal pattern game is per short open normal pattern. MPU41, if the short open normal map per flag is set to ON (step S3609: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3610, if the short open normal map per flag is set to OFF (step S3609: No), that is, if the result of the lottery per normal pattern for the ended normal pattern game is out, the process proceeds to step S3612.

<Steps S3610 and S3611>
If the short open normal pattern per flag is set to ON (step S3609: Yes), that is, if the result of the general pattern per lottery for the ended normal pattern game is per short open normal pattern, the MPU 41 performs numerical value storage processing. As a value corresponding to 0.1 seconds (see FIG. 195 (E)), which is the opening time of the electric accessory 315b in the game per short open normal figure (the time allowed for the game ball to enter the second winning hole 315) is set as the value of the open time counter (step S3610). Then, the MPU 41 sets the short open normal figure hit flag to OFF (step S3611), and shifts the process to step S3612.

<Steps S3612 to S3614>
When the result of the lottery per normal drawing is a hit, the flag indicating the type per normal map (long open normal map per flag, medium open normal map per flag or short open normal map per flag) is set to off (step S3605 , S3608 or S3611), the MPU 41 operates the electric accessory 315b (step S3612). As a result, the second winning hole 315 is opened, and a state of allowing game balls to enter the second winning hole 315 is established. Then, the MPU 41 sets an electric role product open command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric role product 315b is open (step S3613), and indicates that the electric role product 315b is open. The electric accessary product open flag is set to ON (step S3614), and the process proceeds to step S3615.

In addition, the electric accessory open command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 203) executed by the MPU41. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 can start a display effect indicating that the electric accessory 315b is open to the symbol display unit 341, for example, based on the electric accessory open command.

<Step S3615>
When the process of opening the electric accessory 315b is executed when the result of the lottery per normal drawing is a win (steps S3603 to S3614), or the long open normal map per flag and the short open normal map per flag are both turned off. If it is set (when the result of the lottery per normal pattern is out) (steps S3602, S3606 and step S3609 are all No), the MPU 41 normally stops displaying the design (that the normal pattern game is finished ) is set to OFF (step S3615), and the normal pattern per game control process is terminated.

<Step S3616>
When the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S3601: No), as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the electric accessory open flag set to is set to ON (step S3616). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game per normal pattern is being executed. MPU41, when the electric accessary product opening flag is set to ON (step S3616: Yes), that is, when the normal figure per game is being executed, the process proceeds to step S3617. On the other hand, the MPU 41, when the electric auditors product open flag is set to OFF (step S3616: No), that is, when the general pattern per game is not being executed, ends the general pattern per game control process.

<Steps S3617 and S3618>
When the electric auditors open flag is set to ON (step S3616: Yes), that is, when the game per general pattern is being executed, the MPU 41 performs step S3604 of the game control process per general pattern as update processing. , S3607 or S3610, the value of the open time counter is subtracted by 1 (step S3617), and it is determined whether the value of the open time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3618). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to restore the electric accessory 315b. MPU41, when the value of the open time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3618: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to restore the electric accessory 315b, the process proceeds to step S3619. On the other hand, MPU41, when the value of the open time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3618: No), that is, when it is not the timing to return the electric auditors 315b, ends the game control process per normal figure.

<Steps S3619 to S3621>
When the open time counter value after subtraction is 0 (step S3618: Yes), that is, when it is time to restore the electric accessory 315b, the MPU 41 restores the electric accessory 315b (step S3619). As a result, the second winning hole 315 is closed, and entry of game balls into the second winning hole 315 is restricted. Then, the MPU 41 sets an electric role product closing command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the electric role product 315b is closed (step S3620), and an electric role product indicating that the electric role product 315b is opened The flag during opening of the role product is set to OFF (step S3621), and the process proceeds to step S3822.

In addition, the electric accessary product closing command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 203) executed by the MPU41. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the display performance indicating that the electric role product is open, which is executed in the symbol display unit 341, for example, based on the electric role product closing command.

<Step S3622>

In step S3822, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the a time saving gaming state flag indicating the a time saving gaming state is set to ON. The a time saving game state flag is set to ON after the end of the time saving jackpot game in step S4246 of the game state transition processing in FIG.

When the a time saving gaming state flag indicating that the a time saving gaming state is set to ON (step S3622: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3823, and the a time saving gaming state flag is set to off. When (step S3622: No), it ends the game control processing per general pattern.

<Steps S3623 and S3624>
When the a time-saving gaming state flag indicating that the a time-saving gaming state is set to ON (step S3622: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal gaming state transition flag to ON for shifting the game state to the normal gaming state. (step S3623). The normal game state transition flag is referenced in step S4215 of the game state transition process in FIG. 218 when determining whether or not the game state is to be shifted from the time-saving game state to the normal game state. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the a reduced working hours game state flag to OFF (step S3624), and ends the game control process per normal pattern.

Here, in the normal figure per control process of the present embodiment, when the normal figure per game is executed in the a reduced working hours game state, based on the end of the general figure per game, the game state is changed to the a reduced working hours game state in step S3623 While the normal game state transition flag for shifting from to the normal game state is set to ON, the a time saving game state flag is set to OFF in step S3624. That is, in the present embodiment, when the normal figure per game is started in the a time saving game state, the game state is a time saving game by executing the general figure per game once (operation of the electric auditors 315b once) state to normal game state. And, as described above, when the general pattern per game is executed based on the transition of the a reduced working hours game state (when the second winning opening 315 is opened by the operation of the electric role product 315b), the second special figure In addition to the variable display, it is possible to execute a total of five second special symbol games of variable display of the second special symbol based on up to four second special symbol reservations (so-called remaining reservations). The second special symbol game based on the remaining reservation of the 2 special symbols is started in the normal game state shifted from the a time saving game state.

[Special game control process]
Here, Figures 207 and 208 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game control process executed in step S1406 in the main process of Figure 203 . In the special figure game control process, the stored contents of the special figure reservation storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main controller 4 are updated, and the control of the progress of the first special figure game or the second special figure game, for example, the second The variable display and stop display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display portion 363 are controlled. Hereinafter, with reference to Figure 207 and Figure 208, the special figure game control processing will be described.

<Step S3701>
As shown in FIG. 207, in the special figure game control process of the present embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the jackpot playing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is ON (step S3701). . The jackpot playing flag is set to ON in step S2206 when the jackpot game is started in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29, and is set to OFF in step S2252 when the jackpot game ends.

The MPU 41 ends the special figure game control process when the jackpot playing flag is ON (step S3701: Yes), ie when the jackpot game is being executed. That is, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game is being executed, the special figure game is not started. Of course, the special game may be started during execution of the jackpot game.

On the other hand, when the jackpot playing flag is off (step S3701: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3702.

<Step S3702>
When the jackpot playing flag is off (step S3701: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is fluctuatingly displayed (the first special symbol game or the second It is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation display flag indicating that the special figure game is being executed is ON (step S3702). The special figure fluctuation displaying flag is set to ON in step S3915 when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the special figure variation start processing of FIG. 208 described later, and the special figure game control When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the process, it is set to OFF in step S3710.

MPU41, when the special figure fluctuation display flag is ON (step S3702: Yes), that is, when the special symbol is during the fluctuation display (during execution of the special figure game), the process proceeds to step S3706. On the other hand, the MPU 41, when the special figure fluctuation display flag is off (step S3702: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed and the special symbol is not being displayed in a fluctuation (during the execution of the special figure game), the process to step S3703.

<Step S3703>
If the flag during special figure fluctuation display is off (step S3702: No), that is, if the special symbol is not during the fluctuation display (during execution of the special figure game) when the jackpot game is not being performed, the MPU 41 holds the special figure Both the first special figure reservation number N stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA of the storage area 412b and the second special figure reservation number M stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB is 0 (step S3703).

MPU41, when both the first special figure reservation number N and the second special figure reservation number M are 0 (step S3703: Yes), that is, the reservation of the right to execute the first special figure game, and the second special figure If there is no reservation of the right to execute the game, the special figure game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if one of the first special figure reservation number N and the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S3703: No), that is, the reservation of the right to execute the first special figure game, and When there is at least one of the reservation of the right to execute the second special figure game, the process proceeds to step S3704.

<Step S3704>
If either one of the first special figure reservation number N and the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S3703: No), that is, the reservation of the right to execute the first special figure game, and the second special figure game When there is at least one of the reservation of the right to execute, the MPU 41 executes the special figure data setting process related to the special figure propriety information data (special figure data) stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b ( Step S3704), the process moves to step S3705. The details of the special figure data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3705>
In step S3705, the MPU 41 starts the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363 (first special symbol game or second special symbol Execute the special figure fluctuation start process for executing the figure game), and terminate the special figure game control process. In addition, the details of the special figure fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3706>
When the special figure fluctuation display flag is ON (step S3702: Yes), that is, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed in fluctuation (during execution of the special figure game), the MPU 41 is the first special From the start of the variation display of the symbol or the second special figure game, the first special symbol set in the first special figure variation pattern setting process of step S3903 in the special figure variation start process of FIG. 210 described later, or the same special figure It is determined whether or not the special figure variation display time for the second special symbol set in the second special figure variation pattern setting process A, B of step S3907 or S3909 in the variation start process has elapsed (step S3706). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to stop and display the special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner and end the special symbol game.

When the special symbol variation display time has passed from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S3706: Yes), that is, the timing to end the special symbol game by stopping and displaying the special symbol during the variation display If so, the process proceeds to step S3707. On the other hand, if the variable display time has not passed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S3706: No), the MPU 41 stops and displays the special symbol during the variable display. When it is not the timing to end the figure game, the special figure game control process is terminated.

<Steps S3707 to S3710>
When the variable display time has passed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S3706: Yes), that is, at the timing of stopping and displaying the special symbol during variable display and ending the special symbol game In some cases, the MPU 41 stops and displays the special symbols in the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363 of the main display portion 36 in a mode according to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the special symbol game. (Step S3707). Then, the MPU 41 sets on the special figure fluctuation stop flag indicating that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (step S3708), and the special figure game is completed. 5 to set the special figure game end command to be notified (step S3709). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets off the special figure fluctuation display flag indicating that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed (the special figure game is being executed) (step S3710), and the process is started. 208, the process proceeds to step S3711.

<Steps S3711 and S3712>
At step S3711 in FIG. 208, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the remaining setting counter is zero. The remaining setting counter is executed for the second special figure suspension (remaining suspension) due to the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening 315 triggered by the opening of the electric accessory 315b in the time saving game state a. It shows the remaining number of times of the second special figure game (special variation), and is set in step S4015 of the second special figure variation pattern setting process B in FIG. 211, or step S4019 or S4023 in FIG.

MPU 41, when the value of the remaining setting counter indicating the remaining number of times of special variation for the remaining hold of the second special figure is 0 (step S3711: Yes), notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the special variation ends A special variation end command is set (step S3712), and the special figure game control process is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the remaining setting counter is not 0 (step S3711: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3713.

<Step S3713>
If the value of the remaining setting counter is not 0 (step S3711: No), the MPU 41 indicates that the ceiling number counter indicating the number of remaining special figure games until the game state is shifted to the b time saving game state is set. It is determined whether or not the ceiling count counter flag shown is set to ON (step S3713). The ceiling number counter is set when the jackpot game ends in step S4251 of the game state transition process in FIG. 219, and the ceiling number counter flag sets the ceiling number counter in step S4252 of the game state transition process. is set to on.

When the ceiling number counter flag indicating that the ceiling number counter is set is set to ON (step S3713: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3714, and the ceiling number counter flag is set to OFF. If so (step S3713: No), the process proceeds to step S3717.

<Steps S3714 to S3716>
When the ceiling number counter flag indicating that the ceiling number counter is set is set to ON (step S3713: Yes), the MPU 41 performs update processing until the game state is shifted to the b time-saving game state. A process of subtracting 1 from the value of the ceiling number counter indicating the remaining special figure game number is executed (step S3714), and the process proceeds to step S3715.

In step S3715, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the ceiling number counter after the subtraction is zero. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to shift the gaming state to the b time-saving gaming state. MPU41, when the value of the ceiling number counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3715: Yes), that is, when it is time to shift the game state to the b time reduction game state b The time saving game state transition flag is set to ON (step S3716), and the special figure game control process is ended. On the other hand, the MPU 41 ends the special figure game control process when the value of the ceiling number counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S3715: No), that is, when it is not the time to shift the game state to the b time-saving game state.

<Steps S3717 and S3718>
If the ceiling number counter flag indicating that the ceiling number counter is set is set to OFF (step S3713: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery for the variable display is the time saving pattern stop off (step S3717). Here, time-saving symbol stop-off is a jackpot lottery result in which the game state is shifted to c time-saving game state after the end of the variable display. That is, in step S3717, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to shift to the c time-saving game state after stopping the variable display.

MPU41, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the variable display is out of the time saving pattern stop (step S3717: Yes), sets the c time saving game state transition flag for shifting the game state to the c time saving game state to ON (step S3718 ), to end the special figure game control process. The c time saving game state transition flag is referred to when determining whether or not to shift the game state to the c time saving game state in step S4208 of the game state transition processing in FIG.

On the other hand, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3719 when the result of the jackpot lottery for the variable display is not out of time saving symbol stoppage (step S3717: No), that is, when the game state is not shifted to the c time saving game state.

<Step S3719>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the variable display is not out of the time saving pattern stop off (step S3717: No), that is, if the game state is not shifted to the c time saving game state, the MPU 41 is a b time saving game indicating that it is in the b time saving game state. It is determined whether or not the status flag is set to ON (step S3719). The b time saving game state flag is set to ON when the game state is shifted from the normal game state to the b time saving game state in step S4203 of the game state transition processing in FIG.

When the b time saving gaming state flag indicating the b time saving gaming state is set to ON (step S3719: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3720, and the b time saving gaming state flag is set to off. If so (step S3719: No), the process proceeds to step S3723.

<Steps S3720 to S3722>
If the b time-reduction gaming state flag indicating that it is in the b time-reduction gaming state is set to ON (step S3719: Yes), the MPU 41 indicates the number of remaining time-saving games that can be executed in the b time-reduction gaming state as update processing. A process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time saving number counter b is executed (step S3720), and the process proceeds to step S3721. The b time saving number counter is set when the game state is shifted from the normal game state to the b time saving game state in step S4205 of the game state transition processing in FIG.

In step S3721, MPU41 judges whether the value of the b time saving frequency counter after subtraction is zero. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to shift the game state from the b time-reduction game state to the normal game state. MPU41, when the value of the b time-saving counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3721: Yes), that is, when it is time to shift the game state from the b time-saving game state to the normal game state, the game state is set to b time-saving game The normal game state transition flag for shifting from the state to the normal game state is set to ON (step S3722), and the special figure game control process is terminated. On the other hand, MPU41, if the value of the b time-saving counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3721: No), that is, if it is not the timing to shift the game state from the b time-saving game state to the normal game state, the special figure game control processing exit.

<Step S3723>
If the b time saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3719: No), that is, if the gaming state is not the b time saving gaming state, the MPU 41 turns on the c time saving gaming state flag indicating that it is in the c time saving gaming state. is set (step S3723). The c time saving game state flag is set to ON when the game state is shifted from the normal game state to the c time saving game state in step S4209 of the game state transition processing in FIG.

When the c time saving gaming state flag indicating that the c time saving gaming state is set to ON (step S3723: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3724, and the c time saving gaming state flag is set to off. When (step S3723: No), it ends particular figure game control processing.

<Steps S3724 to S3726>
When the c time-saving gaming state flag indicating that it is in the c time-saving gaming state is set to ON (step S3723: Yes), the MPU 41 indicates the number of remaining time-saving games that can be executed in the c time-saving gaming state as update processing. A process of subtracting 1 from the value of the c time saving number counter is executed (step S3724), and the process proceeds to step S3725. The c time saving number counter is set when the game state is shifted from the normal game state to the c time saving game state in step S4211 of the game state transition processing in FIG.

In step S3725, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the c time saving number counter after the subtraction is zero. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to shift the game state from the c time-reduction game state to the normal game state. MPU41, when the value of the c time reduction number counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3725: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to shift the game state from the c time reduction game state to the normal game state, the game state is c time reduction game The normal game state transition flag for shifting from the state to the normal game state is set to ON (step S3726), and the special figure game control process is terminated. On the other hand, MPU41, if the value of the c time reduction number counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3725: No), that is, if it is not the timing to shift the game state from the c time reduction game state to the normal game state, the special figure game control processing exit.

[Special figure data setting process]
Here, FIG. 209 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3704 of the special figure game control process of FIG. In the special figure data setting process of this embodiment, the storage contents of the special figure reservation storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 are updated. The special figure data setting process will be described below with reference to FIG.

In addition, since the special figure reservation storage area 412b of this embodiment is the same as that of the above-described first embodiment, detailed description is omitted, but as shown in FIG. First special figure reservation storage area REA (first reservation area REA1, 2nd reservation area REA2, 3rd reservation area REA3, 4th reservation area REA4, and 1st special reservation number storage area NAA) and the second start triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 Second special figure reservation storage area REB (first reservation area REB1, second reservation area REB2, third reservation area REB3, the fourth reservation area REB4, and the second special symbol reservation number storage area NAB), and the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363 of the main display portion 36, the variable display of the special symbol is started. It is a storage area for moving the special figure propriety information stored in the first reserved area REA1 of the first special figure reserved storage area REA or the first reserved area REB1 of the second special figure reserved storage area REB when A special figure execution area AE is provided.

<Step S3801>
As shown in FIG. 209, in the special figure data setting process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the second special figure reservation number M for the second special figure game is 0 (step S3801). MPU41, when the second special symbol reservation number M is 0 (step S3801: Yes), that is, when there is no second special symbol reservation for the second special symbol game and there is a first special symbol reservation for the first special symbol game , the process proceeds to step S3802. On the other hand, when the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S3801: No), that is, when there is a second special figure reservation for the second special figure game, the process proceeds to step S3806. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation number M for the second special symbol game is 0, thereby starting the second special symbol game with priority over the first special symbol game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the second special symbol game is started with priority over the first special symbol game, but the first special symbol game is started with priority over the second special symbol game. Also, the special symbol game is started in the order of entry (reservation order) of the game ball to the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315, either the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game may be executed. Further, the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game are executed independently of each other without providing priority to the start of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game, and the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game are executed independently of each other. The second special symbol game may be executed at the same time (so-called simultaneous variation of special symbols).

<Steps S3802 to S3804>
If the second special figure pending number M is 0 (step S3801: Yes), MPU41, as an update process, is stored in the first special figure pending number storage area NAA of the first special figure pending storage area REA Execute the process of subtracting 1 from the 1 special figure reservation number N (step S3802), and move the 1st special figure right or wrong information from the 1st reservation area REA1 of the 1st special figure reservation storage area REA to the special figure execution area AE ( step S3803). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the first special figure propriety information of the second reservation area REA2 to the fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA one by one (step S3804). Specifically, in step S3804, the first special figure validity information of the second reservation area REA2 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA is moved to the first reservation area REA1, and the first special figure validity of the third reservation area REA3 The information is moved to the second reservation area REA2, and the first special figure propriety information in the fourth reservation area REA4 is moved to the third reservation area REA3. When the process of step S3804 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3805.

<Step S3805>
In step S3805, the MPU 41 sets the first special figure shift command in the RAM 412 indicating that the first special figure propriety information of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA is shifted. Then, the special figure data setting process is terminated. This first special figure shift command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 203) executed by the MPU41. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5, based on the first special figure shift command, the holding display corresponding to the first special figure holding displayed on the pattern display unit 341 (FIGS. 225 (A) and 225 (C )) can be changed.

<Steps S3806 to S3808>
When the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S3801: No), the MPU 41, as a subtraction process, is stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB of the second special figure reservation storage area REB. Executes a process of subtracting 1 from the special figure reservation number M (step S3806), and moves the second special figure right or wrong information from the first reservation area REB1 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB to the special figure execution area AE (step S3807). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the second special figure propriety information of the second reservation area REB2 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB one by one (step S3808). Specifically, in step S3808, the second special figure validity information in the second reservation area REB2 is moved to the first reservation area REB1, and the second special figure validity information in the third reservation area REB3 is moved to the second reservation area REB2. and move the second special figure propriety information in the fourth reservation area REB4 to the third reservation area REB3. When the process of step S3807 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3809.

<Step S3809>
In step S3809, the MPU 41 sets the second special figure shift command indicating that the second special figure propriety information of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB is shifted in the RAM412. Then, the special figure data setting process is terminated. This second special figure shift command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 203) executed by the MPU41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5, based on the second special figure shift command, the holding display (FIGS. 225 (B) and 225 (D )) can be changed.

[Special figure fluctuation start process]
Here, FIG. 210 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure variation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3705 of the special figure game control process of FIG. In the special figure fluctuation start process of the present embodiment, by starting the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 based on the start winning of the game ball to the first winning opening 314, or the second winning opening With the start of the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363 based on the start winning of the game ball to 315, the first special game or the second special symbol game (special symbol game) is started, special Various processes associated with the start of the figure game are executed. Hereinafter, the special figure fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S3901>
As shown in FIG. 210, in the special figure fluctuation start processing of the present embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the special figure game to be started is the first special figure game (step S3901). When the special symbol game to be started is the first special symbol game (step S3901: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3902. If the special symbol game to be started is not the first special symbol game (step S3901: No), that is, if the special symbol game to be started is the second special symbol game, the process proceeds to step S3904.

<Steps S3902 and S3903>
When the special figure game to be started is the first special figure game (step S3901: Yes), the MPU 41 performs the first special figure jackpot lottery based on the first special figure jackpot success/failure table (see FIG. 196(A)). (step S3902), further executes the first special figure variation pattern setting process (step S3903), and the process proceeds to step S3910.

In the first special figure variation pattern setting process, the MPU 41 is based on the result of the first special figure jackpot lottery in step S3902, the first special figure jackpot variation table (see FIG. 196 (D)) or the first special figure deviation variation With reference to the table (see FIG. 196(F)), the first special figure fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation display time of the first special figure in the first special figure game to be started, is set.

<Step S3904>
When the special figure game to be started is not the first special figure game (step S3901: No), ie when the special figure game to be started is the second special figure game, the MPU 41 indicates that it is in the b time saving gaming state. b It is determined whether or not the time saving gaming state is set to ON (step S3504). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming state when starting the variable display of the second special figure (second special figure game) is the b time saving gaming state. It should be noted that the b time-saving gaming state flag is, in step S4203 of the game state transition processing in FIG. It is set to ON when shifting from the normal game state to the b time saving game state based on.

When the b time-saving gaming state indicating that it is the b time-saving gaming state is set to ON (step S3904: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3906. On the other hand, MPU41 transfers a process to step S3905, when b time saving gaming state is set to OFF (step S3904: No).

<Step S3905>
When the b time saving gaming state indicating that it is in the b time saving gaming state is set to off (step S3904: No), the MPU 41 sets the c time saving gaming state indicating that it is in the c time saving gaming state to on. It is determined whether or not there is (step S3505). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming state when starting the variable display of the second special figure (second special figure game) is the c time saving gaming state.

When the c time-saving gaming state indicating the c time-saving gaming state is set to ON (step S3905: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3906. On the other hand, MPU41 transfers a process to step S3908, when c time saving gaming state is set to OFF (step S3905: No). That is, the MPU 41, the game state when starting the variable display of the second special figure (second special figure game) is not the b time reduction game state and the c time reduction game state, but the normal game state or the a time reduction game state. If so, the process moves to step S3908.

<Steps S3906 and S3907>
If the b time-saving gaming state indicating that it is a b time-saving gaming state is set to ON (step S3904: Yes), or if the c time-saving gaming state indicating that it is a c time-saving gaming state is set to ON (Step S3905: Yes), that is, if the gaming state when starting the variable display of the second special figure (second special figure game) is the b time saving game state or c time saving game state, the MPU 41 is b time saving -c The second special figure jackpot lottery is performed based on the time saving second special figure jackpot success/failure table (see FIG. 197 (A)) (step S3906), and the second special figure variation pattern setting process A is executed (step S3907). , the process proceeds to step S3910.

In the second special figure fluctuation pattern setting process A, the MPU 41 is based on the result of the second special figure jackpot lottery result in step S3906, b time reduction-c time reduction second special figure jackpot fluctuation table (see FIG. 197 (C)) Or b time saving-c time saving second special figure off variation table (see FIG. 197 (E)), is the second special figure variation display time of the second special figure in the second special figure game to be started second special figure variation pattern is set.

<Steps S3908 and S3909>
When the c time saving gaming state is set to off (step S3905: No), that is, the gaming state when starting the variation display of the second special figure (second special figure game) is the b time saving gaming state and c time saving Instead of the gaming state, if the normal gaming state or a time-saving gaming state, the MPU41 performs the second special figure jackpot lottery based on the normal-a time-saving second special figure jackpot success or failure table (see FIG. 198 (A)) And (step S3908), further executes the second special figure variation pattern setting process (step S3908), and moves the process to step S3910.

In the second special figure fluctuation pattern setting process B, the MPU 41 is based on the result of the second special figure jackpot lottery result in step S3908, a time saving second special figure fluctuation table (see FIG. 199 (A)) or normal second With reference to the special figure variation table (see FIG. 199(B)), the second special figure variation pattern, which is the variation display time of the second special figure in the second special figure game to be started, is set. The details of the second special figure variation pattern setting process B will be described later with reference to FIGS. 211 to 213.

<Step S3910>
In step S3910, MPU41, the result of the jackpot lottery in step S3902, S3906 or S3908, step S3903, S3907 or S3909 set special figure variation pattern command including the special figure variation pattern in RAM412, processing to step S3911. The special figure variation pattern command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 203) executed by the MPU41. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can execute a special figure game effect in the symbol display section 341 or the like as a display effect based on the special figure variation pattern command.

In addition, if the result of the jackpot lottery is "4R short time jackpot", the MPU41 adds "A" to the special figure variation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 4R short time jackpot "A01" to " A03" is set in the RAM 412 as a special figure variation pattern command. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "4R normal jackpot", the MPU 41 adds "B" to the special figure variation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 4R through concave jackpot. Either "B03" is set in the RAM 412 as a special figure variation pattern command. Furthermore, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "small win", the MPU 41 attaches "C" to the special figure variation patterns "01", "02", "08" to "010" to indicate that it is a small win. Either "C01", "C02", "C08" to "C010" is set in the RAM 412 as a special figure variation pattern command. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "missing", the MPU 41 attaches "D" to the special figure fluctuation patterns "01" to "05" and "08" to "10" to indicate that it is missing. D01” ~ “D05”, “D08” ~ “D10” is set to RAM412 as a special figure variation pattern command. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "losing", the MPU 41 includes information indicating the type of loosing (front-rear out-of-reach reach, reach other than front-rear-lose, complete failure, time-saving pattern stop failure) in the special figure variation pattern command.

<Step S3911>
When the special figure variation pattern command is set, the MPU 41 starts the special figure game by starting the special symbol variation display in the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363 of the main display portion 36. (step S3911). Specifically, when the MPU 41 is based on the start winning of the game ball to the first winning opening 314, the first special game is started by the start of the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362. When it is based on the start winning of the game ball to the second winning opening 315, the second special symbol game is started by the start of the second special symbol display section 363 with the variable display of the second special symbol. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets on a special figure fluctuation display flag indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed (a special figure game is being executed) (step S3911), and ends the special figure fluctuation start processing.

[Second special figure fluctuation pattern setting process B]
Here, Figures 211 to 213 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the second special figure variation pattern setting process B executed by the MPU 41 in step S3909 of the special figure variation start process in Figure 207 . In the second special figure variation pattern setting process B of the present embodiment, the storage contents of the special figure reservation storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main controller 4 are updated. Hereinafter, the second special figure variation pattern setting process B will be described with reference to FIGS. 211 to 213. FIG.

<Step S4001>
As shown in FIG. 211, in the second special figure variation pattern setting process B of the present embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the a time saving gaming state flag indicating the time saving gaming state is set to ON. do. The a time saving game state flag is set to ON after the time saving jackpot game ends in step S4246 of the game state transition processing in FIG.

MPU41, when a time-reduction gaming state flag indicating that it is a time-reduction gaming state is set to ON (step S4001: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4002, a time-reduction gaming state flag is set to off If so (step S4001: No), the process proceeds to step S4006.

<Steps S4002 and S4003>
If the a time-saving gaming state flag indicating that it is a time-saving gaming state is set to ON (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 41 changes the second special figure in the second special figure game as a numerical value storage process 40 seconds of the variation pattern "08" as the display time (see FIG. 199 (A)) is executed (step S4002), and the second special figure game is started in the a reduced working hours game state with a voice lamp A special variation start command to be notified to the control device 5 is set (step S4003), and the process proceeds to step S4004. That is, the MPU 41 notifies the sound lamp control device 5 that the probability that the result of the big winning lottery will be a small winning is high and that the special variation that facilitates the execution of the big winning game is started.

The special variation start command is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 203) executed by the MPU 41. FIG. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5, based on the special variation start command, has a high probability that the result of the big winning lottery will be a small winning, and the special variation notifying the player that the big winning game is likely to be executed. RUSH effect (see FIG. 226) can be started as a specific effect.

<Step S4004>
In step S4004, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the big hit lottery for the second special game is a small hit. The MPU 41 ends the second special figure variation pattern setting process B when the result of the big hit lottery for the second special figure game is a small hit (step S4004: Yes). On the other hand, MPU41, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special game is not a small hit (step S4004: No), that is, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special game is out, the process step S4005 transition to

<Step S4005>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special game is not a small hit (step S4004: No), that is, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special game is out, the MPU 41 starts the special variation. The special fluctuation start flag indicating that is set to ON (step S4005), and the second special figure fluctuation pattern setting process B is terminated. The special fluctuation start flag is the second special game to be started, the second special game (a time saving game In order to judge whether it is the second special figure game by the remaining reservation based on the entering ball of the game ball to the second winning hole 315 in the state, it is referred in the next step S4006.

<Step S4006>
When the a time-saving gaming state flag indicating that it is a time-saving gaming state is set to off (step S4001: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special fluctuation start flag is set to on (step S4006). That is, the MPU 41 determines that the second special game to be started is the second special game to be executed continuously next to the second special game of the deviation notification started in the time saving game state (a time saving game state It is determined whether or not it is the second special figure game due to the remaining reservation based on the entry of the game ball to the second winning hole 315 in.

MPU41, when the special fluctuation start flag is set to ON (step S4006: Yes), that is, the second special figure game to be started is the second special figure game of the deviation notification started in the a reduced working hours gaming state Next, if it is the second special game to be continuously executed (the second special game due to the remaining hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning port 315 in the time-saving game state), step the process Move to S4007. On the other hand, MPU41, when the special fluctuation start flag is set to off (step S4006: No), that is, the second special figure game to be started is the second special figure of the deviation notification started in the a reduced working hours gaming state If it is not the second special game to be executed continuously after the game (the second special game due to the remaining hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning port 315 in the time saving game state a), the process is performed. The process moves to step S4024 in FIG.

<Steps S4007 and S4008>
If the special fluctuation start flag is set to ON (step S4006: Yes), that is, the second special game to be started is continued next to the second special game of the deviation notification started in the a time saving game state If it is a second special game (second special game due to remaining hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning port 315 in a reduced working hours game state), the MPU 41 starts special fluctuation The flag is set to off (step S4007), and the process proceeds to step S4008.

<Steps S4008 and S4009>
In step S4008, the MPU 41 executes the second special symbol game at the end of the second special symbol game that was first executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving gaming state. Identify the remaining pending pattern (see FIGS. 199(B) to 199(D)) and the remaining pending number (step S4008), and set the remaining pending pattern command (step S4009) , the process proceeds to step S4010.

The remaining pending pattern command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the remaining pending pattern and the remaining pending number based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the a time saving game state. This remaining pending pattern command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 203) executed by the MPU 41. FIG. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can start the battle effect (see FIGS. 227 and 228) of the RUSH effect as a display effect based on the remaining pending pattern command. In addition, the voice lamp control device 5 can manage the remaining pending number based on the remaining pending pattern command, and as a result, the remaining pending number is displayed on the pattern display unit 341 as a second special figure pending image that is a display effect can be displayed.

<Steps S4010 and S4011>
In step S4010, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the remaining pending pattern specified in step S4008 corresponds to either the remaining pending pattern 1 or the remaining pending pattern 5.

When the remaining reservation pattern corresponds to either the remaining reservation pattern 1 or the remaining reservation pattern 5 (step S4010: Yes), the MPU 41, as the numerical value storage processing, the game ball to the second winning opening 315 in the time saving game state a Executes the process of setting 120 seconds which is the special figure fluctuation pattern "08" as the second special figure fluctuation display time for the second special figure game which is the remaining hold based on the entry (step S4011), and the second special The figure fluctuation pattern setting process B is ended. On the other hand, when the remaining reserved pattern does not correspond to either the remaining reserved pattern 1 or the remaining reserved pattern 5 (step S4010: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4012.

<Step S4012>
If the remaining pending pattern does not correspond to either the remaining pending pattern 1 or the remaining pending pattern 5 (step S4010: No), the MPU 41 determines that the remaining pending pattern identified in step S4008 is the remaining pending pattern 2 and the remaining pending pattern 6 (step S4012).

If the remaining pending pattern corresponds to either the remaining pending pattern 2 or the remaining pending pattern 6 (step S4012: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4013, and the remaining pending pattern is the remaining pending pattern 2 and the remaining pending pattern 6 (step S4012: No), the process proceeds to step S4016 in FIG.

<Step S4013>
When the remaining reservation pattern corresponds to either the remaining reservation pattern 2 or the remaining reservation pattern 6 (step S4012: Yes), the MPU 41, as the numerical value storage processing, the game ball to the second winning opening 315 in the time-saving gaming state As the second special figure variation display time for the second special figure game which is the remaining hold based on the entry of , 60 seconds which is the special figure variation pattern "02" is set (step S4011), and the process is performed in step S4014 transition to

<Steps S4014 and S4015>
In step S4014, the MPU 41 sets the remaining pending pattern 2 and 6 flags indicating that the remaining pending pattern is either the remaining pending pattern 2 or the remaining pending pattern 6 to ON. Then, the MPU 41 executes a process of setting a remaining setting counter indicating the remaining number of remaining reservations based on the number of game balls entering the second winning hole 315 in the time saving game state to 1 as a numerical value storage process ( Step S4015), the second special figure variation pattern setting process B ends.

<Step S4016>
If the remaining pending pattern does not correspond to either the remaining pending pattern 2 or the remaining pending pattern 6 (step S4012: No), as shown in FIG. 3 and remaining pending pattern 7 (step S4016).

If the remaining pending pattern corresponds to either the remaining pending pattern 3 or the remaining pending pattern 7 (step S4016: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4017, and the remaining pending pattern is the remaining pending pattern 3 and the remaining pending pattern 7 (step S4016: No), the process proceeds to step S4020.

<Step S4017>
When the remaining reservation pattern corresponds to either the remaining reservation pattern 3 or the remaining reservation pattern 7 (step S4016: Yes), the MPU 41, as the numerical value storage processing, the game ball to the second winning opening 315 in the time-saving gaming state As the second special figure variation display time for the second special figure game which is the remaining hold based on the entering ball, the process of setting 40 seconds which is the special figure variation pattern "10" is executed (step S4017), and the process is performed in step S4018 transition to

<Steps S4018 and S4019>
In step S4018, the MPU 41 sets the remaining pending patterns 3 and 7 flags indicating that the remaining pending pattern is either the remaining pending pattern 3 or the remaining pending pattern 7 to ON. Then, the MPU 41 executes a process of setting a remaining setting counter indicating the remaining number of remaining reservations to 2 based on the number of game balls entering the second winning opening 315 in the time-saving game state as a numerical value storage process ( Step S4019), the second special figure variation pattern setting process B ends.

<Step S4020>
If the remaining pending pattern does not correspond to any of the remaining pending pattern 3 and the remaining pending pattern 7 (step S4016: No), the MPU 41 determines that the remaining pending pattern identified in step S4008 is the remaining pending pattern 4 and the remaining pending pattern 8. (step S4020).

If the remaining pending pattern corresponds to either the remaining pending pattern 4 or the remaining pending pattern 8 (step S4020: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4021, and the remaining pending pattern is the remaining pending pattern 4 or the remaining pending pattern. When it does not correspond to any of 8 (step S4020: No), the second special figure variation pattern setting process B is terminated.

<Step S4021>
When the remaining reservation pattern corresponds to either the remaining reservation pattern 4 or the remaining reservation pattern 8 (step S4020: Yes), the MPU 41, as the numerical value storage processing, the game ball to the second winning opening 315 in the time-saving gaming state As the second special figure variation display time for the second special figure game which is the remaining hold based on the entry, 30 seconds which is the special figure variation pattern "01" is set (step S4021), and the process is performed in step S4022 transition to

<Steps S4022 and S4023>
In step S4022, the MPU 41 sets the remaining pending patterns 4 and 8 flags indicating that the remaining pending pattern is either the remaining pending pattern 4 or the remaining pending pattern 8 to ON. Then, the MPU 41 executes a process of setting a remaining set counter indicating the remaining number of remaining reservations to 3 based on the number of game balls entering the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving game state as a numerical value storage process ( Step S4023), the second special figure variation pattern setting process B ends.

<Step S4024>
If the special fluctuation start flag is set to OFF (step S4006: No), that is, the second special game to be started is continued next to the second special game of the deviation notification started in the a time saving game state If it is not the second special game (the second special game due to the remaining hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the time saving game state), as shown in FIG. 212, The MPU 41 determines whether or not the remaining pending pattern 2, 6 flag indicating that the remaining pending pattern is either the remaining pending pattern 2 or the remaining pending pattern 6 is set to ON (step S4024).

If the remaining pending patterns 2 and 6 flags are set to ON (step S4024: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4025, and if the remaining pending patterns 2 and 6 flags are set to OFF (step S4024: No), the process proceeds to step S4029.

<Steps S4025 to S4028>
If the remaining pending patterns 2 and 6 flags are set to ON (step S4024: Yes), the MPU 41 is based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving game state as the numerical value storage process. A process of setting 60 seconds which is the special figure variation pattern "02" as the second special figure variation display time for the second special figure game which is the remaining pending is executed (step S4025). Then, as the subtraction process, the MPU 41 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the remaining setting counter indicating the remaining number of remaining reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the time saving game state ( Step S4026), it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining set counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4027).

MPU41, when the value of the remaining setting counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4027: Yes), sets the remaining pending pattern 2, 6 flags to OFF (step S4028), the second special figure fluctuation pattern setting process B exit. On the other hand, MPU41 ends the said 2nd special figure fluctuation pattern setting process B, when the value of the remaining setting counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4027: No).

<Step S4029>
When the remaining pending patterns 2 and 6 flags are set to OFF (step S4024: No), the MPU 41 sets the remaining pending pattern 3 indicating that the remaining pending pattern is either the remaining pending pattern 3 or the remaining pending pattern 7. , 7 flags are set to ON (step S4029).

If the remaining pending patterns 3 and 7 flags are set to ON (step S4029: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4030, and if the remaining pending patterns 3 and 7 flags are set to OFF (step S4029: No), the process proceeds to step S4034.

<Steps S4030 to S4033>
When the remaining pending patterns 3 and 7 flags are set to ON (step S4029: Yes), the MPU 41 is based on the entering ball of the game ball to the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving gaming state as the numerical value storage processing. A process of setting 40 seconds, which is the special figure variation pattern "10", as the second special figure variation display time for the second special figure game which is the remaining pending is executed (step S4030). Then, as the subtraction process, the MPU 41 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the remaining setting counter indicating the remaining number of remaining reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the time saving game state ( Step S4031), it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining set counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4032).

MPU41, when the value of the remaining setting counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4032: Yes), sets the remaining pending patterns 3 and 7 flags to OFF (step S4033), the second special figure fluctuation pattern setting process B exit. On the other hand, MPU41 ends the said 2nd special figure fluctuation pattern setting process B, when the value of the remaining setting counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4032: No).

<Step S4034>
When the remaining pending patterns 3 and 7 flags are set to OFF (step S4029: No), the MPU 41 sets the remaining pending pattern 4 indicating that the remaining pending pattern is either the remaining pending pattern 4 or the remaining pending pattern 8. , 8 flag is set to ON (step S4034).

If the remaining pending patterns 4 and 8 flags are set to ON (step S4034: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S4035, and if the remaining pending patterns 4 and 8 flags are set to OFF (step S4034: No), the second special figure variation pattern setting process B is terminated.

<Steps S4035 to S4038>
If the remaining pending patterns 4 and 8 flags are set to ON (step S4034: Yes), the MPU 41 is based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving gaming state as the numerical value storage process. A process of setting 30 seconds which is the special figure variation pattern "01" as the second special figure variation display time for the second special figure game which is the remaining pending is executed (step S4035). Then, as the subtraction process, the MPU 41 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the remaining setting counter indicating the remaining number of remaining reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the time saving game state ( Step S4036), it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining setting counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4037).

MPU41, when the value of the remaining setting counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4037: Yes), sets the remaining pending patterns 4 and 8 flags to OFF (step S4037), the second special figure fluctuation pattern setting process B exit. On the other hand, MPU41 ends the said 2nd special figure fluctuation pattern setting process B, when the value of the remaining setting counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4037: No).

In addition, in this embodiment, the big hit lottery is executed according to the game state at the start of the fluctuation of the special figure, but the game state at the time of entry of the game ball to the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 A jackpot lottery may be executed accordingly.

[Small hit game control process]
Here, FIGS. 214 to 216 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the small winning game control process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407-1 in the main process of FIG. In the small winning game control process of the present embodiment, the small winning game executed based on the fact that the lottery result in the big winning lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 as a trigger is a small winning. , a process for controlling the operation of the feather accessory device 83 is executed.

<Step S4101>
As shown in FIG. 214, in the small hit game control process of the present embodiment, the MPU 41 is set on the special figure fluctuation stop flag indicating that the first special figure or the second special figure is stopped and displayed first. It is determined whether or not there is (step S4101). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to start the small winning game by stop-displaying the first special figure or the second special figure. It should be noted that the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON when stopping and displaying the first special figure or the second special figure in step S3709 in the special figure game control process of FIG.

MPU41, when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S4101: Yes), that is, when it is the timing at which the small winning game can be started, the process proceeds to step S4102. On the other hand, MPU41, when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S4101: No), that is, when it is not the timing at which the small winning game can be started, the process proceeds to step S4106.

<Step S4102>
When the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S4101: Yes), that is, when it is the timing when the small winning game can be started, the MPU 41 determines that the result of the big winning lottery for the special figure game is a small winning. (step S4102). Whether or not the result of the big winning lottery is a small winning is determined based on the result of the big winning lottery stored in the RAM 413 when the big winning lottery is performed in step S3808 in the special figure fluctuation start processing of FIG.

When the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game is a small hit (step S4102: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4103. On the other hand, the MPU 41 ends the small winning game control process when the result of the big winning lottery is not a small winning (step S4102: No), that is, when the result of the big winning lottery is a loss.

<Steps S4103 to S4105>
When the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game is a small hit (step S4102: Yes), the MPU 41 sets on a small hit game start flag indicating that the small hit game is started (step S4103). Then, the MPU 41 sets on the opening flag indicating that the opening of the small winning game is being executed (step S4104), and sets the opening time counter indicating the remaining time of the opening as the numerical value storage processing. Executed (step S4105), and ends the small winning game control process.

<Step S4106>
When the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S4101: No), that is, when it is not the timing at which the small winning game can be started, the MPU 41 is an opening flag indicating that the opening of the small winning game is being executed. is set to on.

MPU41, when the opening flag is set to ON (step S4106: Yes), that is, when the opening of the small winning game is executed, the process proceeds to step S4107. On the other hand, when the opening flag is set to OFF (step S4106: No), that is, when the opening of the small winning game is not executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4115 of FIG.

<Steps S4107 to S4109>
When the opening flag is set to ON (step S4106: Yes), that is, when the opening of the small winning game is executed, the MPU 41 updates the value of the opening time counter indicating the remaining time of the opening by 1 Subtraction processing is executed (step S4107), and it is determined whether or not the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4108). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to end the opening and start the operation of the movable feather portion 832 of the feather accessory device 83 in the small winning game.

When the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4108: Yes), the MPU 41 is the timing to end the opening and start the operation of the movable feather portion 832 of the feather accessory device 83 in the small winning game. If so, the opening flag indicating that the opening is being executed is set to off (step S4105), and the process proceeds to step S4110. On the other hand, when the opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4108: No), that is, in the small winning game, it is not the timing to end the opening and start the operation of the movable feather portion 832 of the feather accessory device 83. In that case, the small winning game control process is terminated.

<Step S4110>
In the small winning game, when it is time to end the opening and start the operation of the movable wing portion 832, the MPU 41 starts the operation of the movable wing portion 832 of the wing accessory device 83 (step S4110), and the process proceeds to step S4110. The process proceeds to S4111 (step S4110). Thus, by starting the operation of the movable feather portion 832 of the feather accessory device 83 in the small winning game, the inlet 831 of the feather accessory device 83 is opened, and the game inside the feather accessory device 83 It is possible to enter the ball.

<Steps S4111 and S4112>
At step S4111, the MPU 41 sets on a movable wing actuation flag indicating that the movable wing 832 is being actuated (step S4111). Then, the MPU 41 executes processing of setting a movable wing portion operating time counter indicating the remaining operating time of the movable wing portion 832 as numerical value storage processing (step S4112), and shifts the processing to step S4113.

<Steps S4113 and S4114>
At step S4113, the MPU 41 turns on the V winning opening opening/closing unit operation standby flag indicating that the operation of the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 is on standby (step S4113). Then, the MPU 41 executes processing of setting a V winning opening opening/closing unit operation standby time counter indicating the remaining time until the operation of the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 is started, as numerical value storage processing (step S4114). End the winning game control process.

<Step S4115>
When the opening flag is set to OFF (step S4106: No), that is, when the opening of the small winning game is not executed, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the V winning opening opening/closing unit operation standby flag indicating that the game is in progress is set to ON (step S4115). When the V winning opening opening/closing section operation standby flag is set to ON (step S4115: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4116, and when the V winning opening opening/closing section operation standby flag is set to OFF. (Step S4115: No), the process proceeds to step S4122.

<Steps S4116 and S4117>
When the V winning opening opening/closing unit operation standby flag is set to ON (step S4115: Yes), the MPU 41 updates the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 of the feather accessory device 83 until it starts operating. A process of subtracting 1 from the V winning opening opening/closing section operation standby time counter indicating time is executed (step S4116), and it is determined whether the value of the V winning opening opening/closing section operation standby time counter after the subtraction is 0 ( step S4117). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to start operating the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 and open the V winning opening 833 .

When the value of the V winning opening opening/closing unit operation standby time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4117: Yes), the MPU 41 starts the operation of the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 of the feather accessory device 83 to win a V prize. If it is time to open the mouth 833, the process proceeds to step S4118. On the other hand, when the value of the V winning opening opening/closing unit operation standby time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4117: No), the MPU 41 starts operating the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 (opens the V winning opening/closing unit 833). If it is not the timing, the process proceeds to step S4130 in FIG.

<Steps S4118 to S4121>
If the value of the V winning opening opening/closing unit operation standby time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4117: Yes), that is, the operation of the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 of the feather accessory device 83 is started and the V winning opening 833 is opened. When it is time to open, the MPU 41 starts operating the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 (step S4118), and turns on the V winning opening opening/closing unit operation flag indicating that the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 is being operated. Set (step S4119).

Then, the MPU 41 executes a process of setting a V winning opening opening/closing section operating time counter indicating the remaining operation time of the V winning opening opening/closing section 835 as a numerical value storage process (step S4120). The standby flag is set to off (step S4121), and the process proceeds to step S4130 in FIG.

<Step S4122>
When the V winning opening opening/closing section operation standby flag is set to OFF (step S4115: No), the MPU 41 opens and closes the V winning opening opening/closing indicating that the V winning opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather accessory device 83 is being operated. It is determined whether or not the partial operation flag is set to ON (step S4122). When the V winning opening opening/closing section operation flag is set to ON (step S4122: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2023, and when the V winning opening opening/closing section operation flag is set to OFF (step S4122: No), the process proceeds to step S4130 in FIG.

<Step S4123>
When the V winning opening opening/closing unit operation flag is set to ON (step S4122: Yes), the MPU 41 turns on the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83. is set (step S4123). The V winning flag is set to ON in step S4125 when a game ball enters the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83. FIG.

When the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 is set to ON (step S4123: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4126, If the winning flag is set to OFF (step S4123: No), the process proceeds to step S4124.

<Steps S4124 and S4125>
When the V winning flag is set to OFF (step S4123: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 (step S4124). Whether or not the game ball has entered the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 is determined, for example, by the game ball 99 entering the V winning opening 833 in the winning ball command setting process of step S1403 in the main processing of FIG. It is determined by whether or not the ball is detected by an incoming ball sensor (not shown).

When the game ball enters the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 (step S4124: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the V winning flag to ON (step S4125), and shifts the process to step S4126. On the other hand, when the game ball has not entered the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 (step S4124: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4126.

<Steps S4126 and S4127>
In step S4126, the MPU 41 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the V winning opening opening/closing section operating time counter indicating the remaining operating time of the V winning opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather accessory device 83 as update processing. determines whether or not the value of the V winning opening opening/closing unit operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4127). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to restore the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 of the feather accessory device 83 (close the V winning opening 833).

When the value of the V winning opening opening/closing unit operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4127: Yes), the MPU 41 restores the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 of the feather accessory device 83 (closes the V winning opening 833 ), the process proceeds to step S4128. On the other hand, if the value of the V winning opening opening/closing unit operation time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4127: No), the MPU 41 restores the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 of the feather accessory device 83 (the V winning opening 833 If it is not the time to close), the process proceeds to step S4130 in FIG.

<Steps S4128 and S4129>
If the value of the V winning opening opening/closing unit operating time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4127: Yes), that is, the timing to restore the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 of the feather accessory device 83 (close the V winning opening 833) , the MPU 41 restores the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 (step S4128), and sets the V winning opening opening/closing unit operation flag indicating that the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 is being operated to OFF (step S4129), and the process proceeds to step S4130 in FIG.

<Step S4130>
As shown in FIG. 216, in step S4130, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a movable wing actuation flag indicating that the movable wing 832 is actuated is set to ON. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4131 when the movable wing operation flag is set to ON (step S4130: Yes), and when the movable wing operation flag is set to OFF (step S4130: No). , ends the small winning game control process.

<Steps S4131 and S4132>
When the movable wing operation flag is set to ON (step S4130: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the movable wing operation time counter indicating the remaining operation time of the movable wing 832 as an update process. Processing is executed (step S4131). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the movable vane operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4132). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to end the small winning game by returning the movable feather portion 832 and closing the introduction port 831 .

When the value of the movable wing portion operating time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4132: Yes), the MPU 41 restores the movable wing portion 832 and closes the inlet 831, thereby ending the small winning game. If so, the process proceeds to step S4133. On the other hand, when the value of the movable wing portion operating time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4132: No), the MPU 41 returns the movable wing portion 832 and closes the introduction port 831 to end the small winning game. If it is not the timing, the small winning game control process is terminated.

<Steps S4133 to S4135>
When the value of the movable wing portion operating time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4132: Yes), the MPU 41 returns the movable wing portion 832 to end the small winning game (step S4133). Then, the MPU 41 turns off the movable wing operation flag indicating that the movable wing 832 is activated (step S4134), and turns on the small winning game end flag indicating that the small winning game has ended. Set (step S4135), and terminate the small winning game control process.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, FIGS. 217 to 220 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 of the main process of FIG. In the game state transition processing of the present embodiment, processing for transitioning various game states is executed. The game state transition processing will be described below with reference to FIGS. 217 to 220. FIG.

<Step S4201>
As shown in FIG. 217, in the game state transition processing of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state is set to ON (step S4201). . The normal game state flag is set to ON in step S4216, step S4223, or step S4226 of FIG. is set to OFF in steps S4207, S4213, steps S4238 and S4248 in FIG. 219, or step S4263 in FIG.

When the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S4201: Yes), that is, when the game state is the normal game state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4202. On the other hand, when the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S4201: No), that is, when the game state is other than the normal game state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4214 in FIG.

<Step S4202>
When the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S4201: Yes), that is, when the game state is the normal game state, the MPU 41 moves the game state from the normal game state to the b time-reduction game state b time-reduction game It is determined whether or not the state transition flag is set to ON (step S4202). b time-saving game state transition flag, in step S3716 of the special game control process of FIG. set to on.

MPU41, when the b time-reduction gaming state transition flag for shifting the game state from the normal game state to the b time-reduction gaming state is set to ON (step S4202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4203, b time-reduction gaming state If the transition flag is set to OFF (step S4202: No), the process proceeds to step S4208.

<Steps S4203 and S4204>
When the b time saving game state transition flag for shifting the game state from the normal game state to the b time saving game state is set to ON (step S4202: Yes), the MPU 41 indicates that the game state is the b time saving game state The b time saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4203), and the b time saving game state transition command is set (step S4204).

The b time-saving gaming state transition command is a command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the game state has transitioned to the b time-saving gaming state, and further includes information on the maximum number of time-saving games that can be executed in the b time-saving gaming state. . This b time-saving game state transition command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 203) executed by the MPU41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5, based on the b time-saving game state transition command, when the game state is the b time-saving game state, has a unique effect (background effect, right-handed display, remaining b time-saving game count display, Display effects such as chance notification and display of the number of pending games of the second special figure game) (see FIG. 225 (B)) can be started, and the remaining number of time-saving games that can be executed in the b time-saving gaming state by the update process can be managed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, information on the maximum number of time-saving games that can be executed in the b time-saving game state is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the b time-saving game state transition command. It may be sent to the audio lamp control device 5 as a command different from the state transition command.

<Steps S4205 to S4207>
In step S4205, the MPU 41 executes a process of setting a b time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of time saving games that can be executed in the b time saving game state as a numerical value storage process. The maximum number of time-saving games executable in the b time-saving gaming state is set to, for example, 500 times (see FIG. 195(E)). Then, the MPU 41 sets the b time saving game state transition flag and the normal game state flag to OFF (steps S4206 and S4207), and terminates the game state transition processing.

<Step S4208>
When the b time saving game state transition flag for shifting the game state from the normal game state to the b time saving game state is set to OFF (step S4202: No), the MPU 41 changes the game state from the normal game state to the c time saving game state. It is determined whether or not the c time-saving gaming state transition flag to be shifted is set to ON (step S4208). The c time saving game state transition flag is set to ON in step S3718 of the special game control process in FIG.

When the c time reduction gaming state transition flag for shifting the game state from the normal gaming state to the c time reduction gaming state is set to ON (step S4208: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4209 and c time reduction gaming state If the transition flag is set to OFF (step S4202: No), the game state transition processing is terminated.

<Steps S4209 and S4210>
When the c time reduction game state transition flag that shifts the game state from the normal game state to the c time reduction game state is set to ON (step S4208: Yes), the MPU 41 is c time reduction game indicating that it is in the c time reduction game state A state flag is set to ON (step S4209), and a c time saving game state transition command is set (step S4210).

The c time-saving game state transition command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the c time-saving game state has been entered, and further includes information regarding the maximum number of time-saving games executable in the c time-saving game state. This c time saving game state transition command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 203) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5, based on the c time-saving game state transition command, when the game state is the c time-saving game state, has a unique effect (background effect, left-handed display, remaining c time-saving game count display, Display effects such as chance notification and first special game pending display) (see FIG. 225 (C)) can be started, and the remaining number of time-saving games that can be executed in the c time-saving gaming state by the update process. can be managed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, information about the maximum number of time-saving games that can be executed in the c time-saving game state is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the c time-saving game state transition command, but the information is c time-saving game It may be sent to the audio lamp control device 5 as a command different from the state transition command.

<Steps S4211 to S4213>
In step S4211, the MPU 41 executes a process of setting the remaining number of time-saving games that can be executed in the c time-saving game state to the c time-saving number counter as a numerical value storage process. The maximum number of time-saving games that can be executed in the c time-saving gaming state is 10 times (time-saving design stop off A), 20 times (time-saving design stop-off B), 30 times (time-saving design stop off) depending on the type of time-saving design stop off. It is set to C) or 40 times (time saving symbol stop off D) (see FIG. 198 (D)). Then, the MPU 41 sets the c time saving game state transition flag and the normal game state flag to OFF (steps S4212 and S4213), and terminates the game state transition processing.

<Step S4214>
When the normal game state flag indicating that the game state is the normal game state is set to OFF (step S4201: No), that is, when the game state is other than the normal game state, as shown in FIG. determines whether or not the a time-saving gaming state flag indicating that the gaming state is the a time-saving gaming state is set to ON (step S4214).

MPU41, when a time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4214: Yes), that is, when the game state is a time-saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step S4215. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4220 when the a reduced working hours gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S4214: No), that is, when the gaming state is not the normal gaming state or the a reduced working hours gaming state.

<Step S4215>
When the a reduced working hours gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4214: Yes), that is, when the gaming state is the a reduced working hours gaming state, the MPU 41 changes the gaming state from the a reduced working hours gaming state to the normal gaming state. It is determined whether or not the game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4215). The normal game state transition flag for shifting the game state from the reduced working hours game state to the normal game state is the normal game per normal game control process of FIG. It is set to ON in step S3623.

When the normal game state transition flag for shifting the game state from the reduced working hours game state to the normal game state is set to ON (step S4215: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4216, and the normal game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4215: No), the game state transition processing is terminated.

<Steps S4216 and S4217>
When the normal game state transition flag for shifting the game state from the time-saving game state to the normal game state is set to ON (step S4215: Yes), the MPU 41 normally indicates that the game state is the normal game state. The state flag is set to ON (step S4216), and the normal game state transition command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the normal game state has been transitioned is set (step S4217).

The normal game state transition command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process executed by the MPU 41 (see FIG. 203). As a result, the sound lamp control device 5, based on the normal game state transition command, when the game state is the normal game state, a unique effect (background effect, display of the first special figure game pending display (first special figure pending image), etc.) (see FIG. 225(A)) can be executed.

<Steps S4218 and S4219>
In step S4218, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag to OFF, furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the a time saving game state flag to OFF (step S4219), and terminates the game state transition processing.

<Step S4220>
When the a time saving game state flag indicating that the game state is the a time saving game state is set to OFF (step S4214: No), that is, when the game state is other than the normal game state and the a time saving game state, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the b time-saving gaming state flag indicating that it is in the b time-saving gaming state is set to ON (step S4220).

When the b time saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4220: Yes), that is, when the game state is the b time saving game state, the process proceeds to step S4221. On the other hand, if the b time saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S4220: No), that is, if the gaming state is not the normal gaming state, the a time saving gaming state, or the b time saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step S4226. Transition.

<Step S4221>
When the b time saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4220: Yes), that is, when the game state is the b time saving gaming state, the MPU 41 changes the game state from the b time saving gaming state to the normal game state. It is determined whether or not the game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4221). The normal game state transition flag for shifting the game state from the b time saving game state to the normal game state is specified times (for example, 500 times (see FIG. 195 (E))) When the special figure game of the b time saving game is executed, It is set to ON in step S3722 of the special figure game control process of FIG.

When the normal game state transition flag for shifting the game state from the b time saving game state to the normal game state is set to ON (step S4221: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4222, and the normal game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4221: No), the game state transition processing is terminated.

<Steps S4222 and S4223>
When the normal game state transition flag for shifting the game state from the b time-saving game state to the normal game state is set to ON (step S4221: Yes), the MPU 41 normally indicates that the game state is the normal game state A state flag is set to ON (step S4222), and a normal game state transition command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the normal game state has been transitioned is set (step S4223).

The normal game state transition command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process executed by the MPU 41 (see FIG. 203). As a result, the sound lamp control device 5, based on the normal game state transition command, when the game state is the normal game state, a unique effect (background effect, display effect such as a hold display of the first special game) ( (see FIG. 225(A)) can be executed.

<Steps S4224 and S4225>
In step S4224, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag to OFF, furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the b time saving game state flag to OFF (step S4225), and terminates the game state transition processing.

<Step S4226>
When the b time saving game state flag indicating that the game state is the b time saving game state is set to OFF (step S4220: No), that is, the game state is the normal game state, the a time saving game state and the b time saving game state. In this case, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the c time-saving gaming state flag indicating that the gaming state is the c time-saving gaming state is set to ON (step S4226).

MPU41, when the c time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4226: Yes), ie, when a game state is c time-saving gaming state, transfers a process to step S4227. On the other hand, the MPU 41, when the c time reduction gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S4226: No), that is, when the game state is not the normal game state, the a time reduction game state, the b time reduction game state, and the c time reduction game state, The process moves to step S4232 in FIG.

<Step S4227>
If the c time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4226: Yes), that is, if the gaming state is the c time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 changes the gaming state from the c time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state. It is determined whether or not the game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4227). The normal game state transition flag that shifts the game state from the c time saving game state to the normal game state is the specified number of times (10 times, 20 times, 30 times or 40 times (see FIG. 198 (D) )) When the special figure game of the c time saving game is executed, it is set to ON in step S3726 of the special figure game control process of FIG.

When the normal game state transition flag for shifting the game state from the c time saving game state to the normal game state is set to ON (step S4227: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4228, and the normal game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4227: No), the game state transition processing is terminated.

<Steps S4228 and S4229>
When the normal game state transition flag for shifting the game state from the c time-saving game state to the normal game state is set to ON (step S4227: Yes), the MPU 41 normally indicates that the game state is the normal game state A state flag is set to ON (step S4228), and a normal game state transition command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the normal game state has been transitioned is set (step S4229).

The normal game state transition command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process executed by the MPU 41 (see FIG. 203). As a result, the sound lamp control device 5, based on the normal game state transition command, when the game state is the normal game state, a unique effect (background effect, display effect such as a hold display of the first special game) ( (see FIG. 225(A)) can be executed.

<Steps S4230 and S4231>
In step S4230, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag to OFF, furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the c time saving game state flag to OFF (step S4231), and terminates the game state transition processing.

<Step S4232>
When the c time saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S4226: No), that is, when the game state is not the normal game state, the a time saving game state, the b time saving game state and the c time saving game state, the MPU 41 , it is determined whether or not the jackpot gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4232). The jackpot game state flag indicates that the game state is a jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is executed, and is set to ON in step S4234 when the jackpot game is started.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4245 when the jackpot game state flag indicating that the game state is the jackpot game state in which the jackpot game is executed is set to ON (step S4232: Yes). On the other hand, MPU41 transfers a process to step S4233, when the jackpot gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S4232: No).

<Steps S4233 and S4234>
When the jackpot game state flag is set to OFF (step S4232: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game start flag indicating that the jackpot game is started is set to ON (step S4233 ). The jackpot game start flag is set to ON in step S2205 of the jackpot game control process in FIG. 29 when the jackpot game is started.

When the jackpot game start flag indicating that the jackpot game is started is set to ON (step S4233: Yes), the MPU 41 indicates that the game state is the jackpot game state in which the jackpot game is executed. The gaming state flag is set to ON (step S4234), and the process proceeds to step S4235. On the other hand, MPU41 transfers a process to FIG.220 S4253, when the jackpot game start flag is set to OFF (step S4233: No).

<Steps S4235 and S4236>
In step S4235, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game to be started is a time saving jackpot in which the game state is shifted to the time saving game state a after the end of the jackpot game. MPU41, when the jackpot game to be started is a time-reduction jackpot in which the game state is shifted to the time-reduction game state after the end of the jackpot game (step S4235: Yes), the game state is changed to the time-reduction game after the end of the jackpot game The a time-saving game state transition flag for shifting to the state is set to ON (step S4236), and the process proceeds to step S4237. MPU41 transfers a process to step S4237, when the jackpot game started is not a time saving jackpot (step S4235: No).

<Steps S4237 and S4238>
In step S4237, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal game state flag indicating that the game state is the normal game state is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the big win game is started based on the result of the big win lottery when the game state is the normal game state.

When the normal game state flag indicating that the game state is the normal game state is set to ON (step S4237: Yes), that is, when the game state is the normal game state, the MPU 41 determines that the result of the jackpot lottery is the jackpot. When the jackpot game is started based on that, the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S4238), and the process proceeds to step S4244. On the other hand, when the normal game state flag indicating that the game state is the normal game state is set to ON (step S4237: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4239.

<Steps S4239 to S4241>
In step S4239, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the b time saving game state flag indicating that the game state is the b time saving game state is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the big win game is started based on the fact that the result of the big win lottery when the game state is the b time saving game state is a big win.

MPU41, when the b time-reduction gaming state flag indicating that the game state is b time-reduction gaming state is set to ON (step S4239: Yes), that is, when the game state is b time-reduction gaming state When a jackpot game is started based on the fact that the result is a jackpot, the b time-saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S4240). Then, as the updating process, the MPU 41 executes a process of clearing the b time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of time saving games that can be executed when the game state is the b time saving game state (step S4241), and performs the process in step S4244. transition to

On the other hand, when the b time saving gaming state flag is set to off (step S4239: No), the MPU 41 determines that the result of the jackpot lottery when the game state is the b time saving gaming state is the jackpot game to be started. If it is not based on , the process proceeds to step S4242.

<Steps S4242 and S4243>
In step S4242, the MPU 41 sets the c time-saving gaming state flag to OFF, and further, the MPU 41 updates the c time-saving game state indicating the remaining number of time-saving games that can be executed when the game state is the c time-saving gaming state. A process of clearing the number counter is executed (step S4243), and the process proceeds to step S4244.

<Step S4244>
When the MPU 41 executes various processes such as setting off the flag related to the game state before the start of the jackpot game (steps S4234 to S4243), the jackpot game start flag is set off (step S4244), and the game state End the migration process.

<Steps S4245 to S4249>
When the jackpot game state flag indicating that the game state is the jackpot game state in which the jackpot game is executed is set to ON (step S4232: Yes), the MPU 41 indicates that the jackpot game ends. It is determined whether or not the end flag is on (step S4245). The jackpot game end flag is set to ON in step S2251 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 29 when the jackpot game ends.

When the jackpot game end flag is ON (step S4245: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game ends, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4246. On the other hand, when the jackpot game end flag is off (step S4245: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not finished, the MPU 41 ends the game state transition processing.

<Steps S4246 to S4252>
When the jackpot game end flag is on (step S4245: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game ends, the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the jackpot game state to the a time saving game state based on the end of the jackpot game. It is determined whether or not the game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4246).

The MPU 41 shifts the game state from the jackpot game state to the a time saving game state based on the end of the jackpot game When the a time saving game state transition flag is set to ON (step S4246: Yes), the game state is a time saving A time-saving game state flag indicating that it is in the game state is set to ON (step S4247). Then, the MPU 41 sets a time-saving game state transition command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the game state has shifted to the time-saving game state (step S4248), and the process proceeds to step S4251.

a time-saving game state transition command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 203) executed by the MPU41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5, based on the a time-saving game state transition command, when the game state is the a time-saving game state, has a unique effect (background effect, RUSH display, right-handed display, remaining a time-saving game Display effects such as display of the number of times, display of the number of reservations of the second special figure game, etc.) (see FIG. 225 (D)) can be started.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since the number of time-saving games (number of openings of the second winning opening 315) when the game state is the a time-saving game state is set to 1 time, the a time-saving game state transition command is Information indicating the maximum number of time-saving games that can be executed when the game state is the time-saving game state a is not included. Of course, information indicating the maximum number of time-saving games executable when the game state is the a time-saving gaming state may be included in the a time-saving gaming state transition command.

On the other hand, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag, which indicates that the game state is the normal game state, to ON when the a time saving game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S4246: No) (step S4249). . Then, the MPU 41 sets a normal game state shift command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the game state has shifted to the normal game state (step S4250), and shifts the process to step S4251.

Incidentally, the normal game state transition command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process executed by the MPU 41 (see FIG. 203). As a result, the sound lamp control device 5, based on the normal game state transition command, when the game state is the normal game state, a unique effect (background effect, display effect such as a hold display of the first special game) ( (see FIG. 225(A)) can be executed.

<Steps S4251 to S4254>
In step S4251, a jackpot game state flag indicating that the game state is a jackpot game state is set to OFF (step S4251), and a jackpot game end flag indicating that the jackpot game ends is set to OFF (step S4252 ). Furthermore, the MPU 41 performs a process of setting a ceiling number counter indicating the number of remaining special-figure games required until the game state shifts to the b time-saving game state as a numerical value storage process to a specified number of times (for example, 500 times). At the same time (step S4253), the ceiling number counter flag indicating that the ceiling number counter is set is set to ON (step S4254), and the game state transition processing is terminated.

<Step S4255>
When the jackpot game start flag indicating that the jackpot game is started is set to OFF (step S4233: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the small hit game state flag is set to ON, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S4255). The small hit game state flag indicates that the game state is the small hit game state in which the small hit game is executed, and is set to ON in step S4257 when the small hit game is started.

MPU41, when the small winning game state flag which shows that the game state is the small winning game state in which the small winning game is executed is set to ON (step S4255: Yes), shifts the process to step S4259 . On the other hand, MPU41 transfers a process to step S4256, when the small hitting game state flag is set to OFF (step S4255: No).

<Steps S4256 to S4258>
When the small winning game state flag is set to OFF (step S4255: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the small winning game start flag indicating that the small winning game is started is set to ON. (Step S4256). The small hitting game start flag is set to ON in step S4103 of the small hitting game control process in FIG. 214 when the small hitting game is started.

When the small winning game start flag indicating that the small winning game is started is set to ON (step S4256: Yes), the MPU 41 is in the small winning game state in which the small winning game is executed. A small hit game state flag indicating that is set to ON (step S4257), a small hit game start flag indicating that a small hit game is started is set to OFF (step S4258), and transition processing of the game state exit. On the other hand, when the small hit game start flag is set to OFF (step S4256: No), the MPU 41 ends the transition processing of the game state.

<Step S4259>
When the small winning game state flag indicating that the game state is the small winning game state in which the small winning game is executed is set to ON (step S4255: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the small winning game. (step S4259). The small hitting game end flag is set to ON in step S4132 in the small hitting game control process in FIG. 216 when the small hitting game ends.

MPU41, when the small hitting game end flag is ON (step S4259: Yes), that is, when ending the small hitting game, the process proceeds to step S4260. On the other hand, when the small hitting game end flag is off (step S4259: No), that is, when the small hitting game is not ended, the MPU 41 ends the transition processing of the game state.

<Steps S4260 and S4261>
When the small winning game end flag is on (step S4259: Yes), that is, when ending the small winning game, the MPU 41 determines that the game state is a small winning game state in which the small winning game is executed. The winning game state flag is set to OFF (step S4260), the small winning game end flag indicating that the small winning game is finished is set to OFF (step S4261), and the process proceeds to step S4262.

<Step S4262>
In step S4262, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 is set to ON. The V winning flag is set to ON when a game ball enters the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 in step S4125 in the small winning game control process of FIG.

When the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 is set to ON (step S4262: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4263. On the other hand, when the V winning flag is set to OFF (step S4262: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4266.

<Steps S4263 and S4264>
When the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 is set to ON (step S4262: Yes), the MPU 41 indicates that the jackpot game is started. A jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S4263), and a time saving game state shift flag for shifting the game state to a time saving game state is set to ON after the jackpot game ends (step S4264). Then, the MPU 41 sets off the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 (step S4265), and ends the game state transition processing.

<Steps S4266 and S4267>
When the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered the V winning hole 833 of the feather accessory device 83 is set to OFF (step S4262: No), the MPU 41 determines that the game state is the normal game state. is set to ON (step S4266). Then, the MPU 41 sets a normal game state transition command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the game state has shifted to the normal game state (step S4267), and terminates the game state transition processing.

Incidentally, the normal game state transition command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process executed by the MPU 41 (see FIG. 203). As a result, the sound lamp control device 5, based on the normal game state transition command, when the game state is the normal game state, a unique effect (background effect, display effect such as a hold display of the first special game) ( (see FIG. 225(A)) can be executed.

[Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device 5]
Next, referring to FIGS. 221 to 223, the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 will be described, focusing on differences from the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the processes of the sound lamp control device 5, part of the command determination process is different from that of the above-described first embodiment.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process of this embodiment, the command received from the main control device 4 is determined, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. It differs from the command determination process of the above-described first embodiment in that an effect display process for executing a RUSH effect as a specific effect is executed with respect to the second special game executed based on. Here, FIGS. 221 to 223 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in step S2703 of the secondary timer interrupt processing in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 42 and described above.

<Step S4501>
As shown in FIG. 221, in the command determination process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received (step S4501). If the MPU 51 has received a command (step S4501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4502, and if it has not received a command (step S4501: No), the command determination process ends.

<Step S4502>
When a command is received (step S4501: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a normal game state transition command (step S4502). The normal game state transition command indicates that the normal game state is to be transitioned. , S4229 or step S4250 of FIG.

MPU51, if the received command is a normal game state transition command (step S4502: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4503, if the received command is not a normal game state transition command (step S4502: No), the process The process moves to step S4505.

<Steps S4503 and S4504>
When the received command is the normal game state transition command (step S4502: Yes), the MPU 51 sets on the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state (step S4503). The normal game state flag is referred to when determining whether or not to set an effect corresponding to the normal game state in step S4618 of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process in FIG. 224 described later. Then, the MPU 51 sets off the game state flag corresponding to the game state before shifting to the normal game state (step S4504), and ends the command determination process.

<Step S4505>
When the received command is not the normal game state transition command (step S4502: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the b time saving game state transition command (step S4505). The b time-saving game state transition command indicates that a transition to the b time-saving game state is made, and when the normal game state is shifted to the b time-saving game state, step S4204 in the game state transition processing of FIG. is set in

MPU51, if the received command is b time-saving gaming state transition command (step S4505: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4506, if the received command is not b time-saving gaming state transition command (step S4505: No), The process moves to step S4509.

<Steps S4506 to S4508>
When the received command is the b time saving game state transition command (step S4505: Yes), the MPU 51 sets on the b time saving game state flag indicating that it is in the b time saving game state (step S4506). The b time-saving gaming state flag is referred to when determining whether or not to set an effect corresponding to the b time-saving gaming state in step S4619 of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process in FIG. 224 described later.

In addition, MPU51, as a numerical value storage process, in the storage area for the b time-saving number counter set in the RAM512, the maximum number of special figure games that can be executed in the b time-saving gaming state processing to set as the value of the b time-saving number counter Execute (step S4507). The value of the time saving number counter is 1 in the time saving number counter update process of step S4539 of the command determination process when the special figure is started in the b time saving game state, that is, when the variation pattern command is received in the b time saving game state. decremented (updated). That is, the value of the b time saving number counter set in the storage area for the b time saving number counter of the RAM 512 indicates the remaining maximum special figure game number that can be executed in the b time saving game state. Then, the MPU 51 can grasp the remaining maximum number of special-figure games that can be executed in the b time saving game state by referring to the value of the b time saving number counter. Thereby, the MPU 51 can display the remaining maximum number of special-figure games that can be executed in the b time-saving gaming state as a display effect in the symbol display section 341 (see FIG. 225(B)).

Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the normal game state flag for the game state before shifting to the b time-saving game state to OFF (step S4508), and terminates the command determination process.

<Step S4509>
When the received command is not the b time saving game state transition command (step S4505: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the c time saving game state transition command (step S4509). The c time-saving gaming state transition command that establishes the specific condition indicates that the transition to the c time-saving gaming state, which is the specific gaming state, is performed. is set in step S4210 in the game state transition process.

MPU51, if the received command is c time-saving game state transition command (step S4509: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4510, if the received command is not c time-saving game state transition command (step S4509: No), The process moves to step S4513 in FIG.

<Steps S4510 to S4512>
When the received command is the c time saving gaming state transition command (step S4509: Yes), the MPU 51 sets on the c time saving gaming state flag indicating that it is in the c time saving gaming state (step S4510). The c time saving game state flag is referred to when determining whether or not to set the effect corresponding to the c time saving game state which is the specific game state in step S4621 of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process in FIG. 224 described later. be done.

In addition, as a numerical value storage process, the MPU 51 stores the maximum number of special figure games that can be executed in the c time saving game state as the second numerical information in the storage area for the c time saving number counter set in the RAM 512. A value setting process is executed (step S4511). The value of the time saving number counter is 1 in the time saving number counter update process in step S4539 of the command determination process when the special figure is started in the c time saving game state, that is, when the variation pattern command is received in the c time saving game state. decremented (updated). That is, the value of the c time saving number counter set in the storage area for the c time saving number counter of the RAM 512 indicates the remaining maximum special figure game number that can be executed in the c time saving game state as the specific numerical information. Then, the MPU 51 can grasp the remaining maximum special figure game frequency that can be executed in the c time saving game state by referring to the value of the c time saving number counter as the second numerical information. As a result, the MPU 51 can display the maximum number of remaining special-figure games that can be executed in the c time-saving gaming state in the symbol display section 341 as a specific corresponding display (see FIG. 225(B)).

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is out of stoppage of the time saving symbol, the state is shifted to the c time saving game state. The result of the jackpot lottery is the time saving pattern stop off, it is only for the jackpot lottery (win/fail judgment) notified by the second special game started in the normal game state (see FIG. 198 (C)) . In the normal game state, the operating frequency of the electric accessory 315b is low and the operating time is short. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state that is shifted after the time-saving jackpot game ends, a plurality of game balls can be entered into the second winning opening 315 by one operation of the electric accessory 315b, and in the time-saving game state. The second special figure game can be executed a plurality of times based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 of. Then, when a plurality of game balls enter the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving gaming state, the second special figure game to be executed first is started in the time-saving gaming state, and the remaining second winning holes 315 2nd special figure game (second special figure game due to remaining reservation) which is executed with the entry ball as a trigger is started in the normal game state. In other words, the c time-saving game state is shifted to when the time-saving design stoppage is included in the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the second special game due to the remaining hold.

Here, when the transition to the time-saving gaming state after the execution of the jackpot game, for the second special game executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening 315 in the time-saving gaming state A RUSH effect as a specific effect is executed as a display effect. In the RUSH effect, when a plurality of game balls enter the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving game state, a one-shot notification effect is displayed as a display effect for the second special game started in the time-saving game state. (See FIG. 226) is executed, and the battle production ( 227 and 228) is executed. And, as described above, it is possible to be out of stoppage of the time saving symbol only for the big hit lottery for the remaining hold started in the normal game state. Therefore, during the execution of the battle production, it is possible to shift from the normal game state to the c time saving game state, but even if it is shifted to the c time saving game state during the execution of the battle production, the battle production that is the display production A battle effect is executed for the second special figure game corresponding to a predetermined number of remaining reservations without being interrupted. As a result, even if the transition to the c time-saving gaming state is made during the execution of the battle production, the remaining maximum special figure game count that can be executed in the c time-saving gaming state is displayed in the symbol display unit 341 as a specific correspondence display. never Further, by preferentially executing the battle effect, the unique c time-saving game state effect is not executed as a display effect in the c time-saving game state. On the other hand, when the c time-saving gaming state is entered, the c time-saving number counter is set, and in the time-saving number counter updating process in step S4539 of the command determination process described later, the remaining maximum feature that can be executed in the c time-saving gaming state By updating the figure game number, after the battle production is completed, based on the value of the c time reduction counter as specific numerical information, the remaining maximum number of special figure games that can be executed in the c time reduction game state is displayed as a specific correspondence display. It can be displayed in the symbol display unit 341, and can start the c time saving game state effect.

Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets off the normal game state flag for the normal game state, which is the game state before shifting to the c time saving game state (step S4512), and ends the command determination process.

<Step S4513>
When the received command is not the c time saving gaming state transition command (step S4509: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the first special figure shift command (step S4513). The first special figure shift command indicates that the first special figure validity information of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA has been shifted, and the first special figure reservation When the first special figure propriety information of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 of the storage area REA is shifted, it is set in step S3805 in the special figure data setting process of FIG.

MPU51, if the received command is the first special figure shift command (step S4513: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4514, if the received command is not the first special figure shift command (step S4513: No), The process proceeds to step S4516.

<Steps S4514 and S4515>
If the received command is the first special figure shift command (step S4513: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the first special figure data update process (step S4514), and the first special figure data image as the effect display process Display processing is executed (step S4515), and the command determination processing ends.

<Step S4516>
When the received command is not the first special figure shift command (step S4513: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the second special figure shift command (step S4516). The second special figure shift command indicates that the second special figure validity information of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB has been shifted, and the second special figure reservation When the second special figure propriety information of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the storage area REB is shifted, it is set in step S3809 in the special figure data setting process of FIG.

MPU51, if the received command is the second special figure shift command (step S4516: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4517, if the received command is not the second special figure shift command (step S4516: No), The process proceeds to step S4519.

<Step S4517 and Step S4518>
When the received command is the second special figure shift command (step S4516: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the second special figure data update process (step S4517) and the second special figure data image as the effect display process. Display processing is executed (step S4518), and the command determination processing ends.

Here, in the RAM 512 of the voice lamp control device 5, a special figure pending storage area corresponding area (not shown) corresponding to the special figure pending storage area 412b (see FIG. 8) set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 is set be done. This special figure reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) is the first special figure reserved storage area REA of the special figure reserved storage area 412b (see FIG. 8) of the main control device 4, the second special figure reserved storage area REB, and It includes a first special figure reservation storage area corresponding area, a second special figure reservation storage area corresponding area, and a special figure execution area corresponding area corresponding to each of the special figure execution areas AE (see FIG. 8). Then, in the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the voice lamp control device 5, data of special figure validity information equivalent to the special figure reservation storage area 412b (see FIG. 8) of the main control device 4 data) is stored.

Then, in the first special figure data update processing executed in step S4514, the same processing as steps S3802 to S3804 in the special figure data setting processing of FIG. 209 executed by the main control device 4 is executed as update processing. . Specifically, in the first special figure data setting process, the first special figure reservation number N stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area corresponding area of the first special figure reservation storage area corresponding area is subtracted by 1 Then, the first special figure propriety information (first special figure data) is moved from the first reserved area corresponding area of the first special figure reserved storage area corresponding area to the special figure execution area corresponding area, and the first special figure reserved storage area The first special figure propriety information (first special figure data) of the second reservation area REA2 to the fourth reservation area corresponding area of the corresponding area is shifted one by one.

Also, in the second special figure data update process executed in step S4517, the same processes as steps S3806 to S3808 in the special figure data setting process of FIG. 209 executed by the main controller 4 are executed. Specifically, in the second special figure data setting process, as a subtraction process, the second special figure reservation number stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area corresponding area of the second special figure reservation storage area corresponding area A process of subtracting 1 from M is executed, and as an update process, the second special figure propriety information (second special figure data ) is moved, and the second special figure propriety information (second special figure data) of the second reservation area REA2 to the fourth reservation area corresponding area of the second special figure reservation storage area corresponding area is shifted one by one.

On the other hand, in the first special figure data image display process executed in step S4515, the first special figure data stored in the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the RAM 512 shifted (updated) in step S4514 Based on this, the image (first special figure data image) (see FIGS. 225(A) and 225(C)) related to the first special figure data displayed on the symbol display section 341 is shifted.

Here, FIG. 225 shows screen examples of the symbol display section 341 in various game states. Specifically, FIG. 225 (A) is a screen example of the normal game state except during the RUSH production, FIG. 225 (B) is a screen example of the b time saving game state, FIG. FIG. 225(D) is an example screen during the RUSH effect. Special figure data image display portions 75, 76 and 77 corresponding to various game states are set in the symbol display portion 341. FIG. The special figure data image display units 75, 76, 77 are set in the RAM 512, and the special figure execution area of the above-mentioned special figure reservation storage area corresponding area (not shown) Corresponding to the corresponding area (not shown), the first special figure reserved storage area corresponding area, and the second special figure reserved storage area corresponding area, the special figure fluctuation image display area 75, the first special figure reserved image display area 76 And the second special figure reserved image display area 77 is included.

As shown in Figure 225 (A) and Figure 225 (C), in the normal game state and c time-saving game state except during RUSH production, as the special figure data image display units 75, 76, 77, the special figure fluctuation image display The area 75 and the first special figure reserved image display area 76 are set, and the second special figure reserved image display area 77 is not set. That is, in the normal game state and the c time-saving game state excluding the RUSH production, it is stored in the special figure execution area corresponding area (not shown) of the special figure holding storage area corresponding area (not shown) in the special figure fluctuation image display area 75 The variation image is displayed based on the first special figure data, and is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area (not shown) in the first special figure reservation image display area 76. The first special figure reserved image is displayed as a corresponding display based on the first special figure data, and the second special figure data as a corresponding display based on the second special figure data stored in the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area (not shown) 2 special figure pending image is not displayed.

Here, in the normal game state and the c time saving game state, as described above, the game ball is hit to the left side area of the game board 31, so-called left hitting, and the game ball is entered into the first winning hole 314. Participation in the first special jackpot lottery is encouraged. Therefore, the special figure fluctuation image display area 75 and the first special figure reserved image display area 76 are set as the special figure data image display units 75, 76, and 77 in the normal game state and c time saving game state except during the RUSH production (the first special figure pending image as the corresponding display is displayed), and the second special figure pending image display area 77 is not set (the second special figure pending image as the corresponding display is not displayed), so that the player It is possible to suggest that left-handed hitting is encouraged.

Then, in the first special figure data image display process of step S4514 executed in the normal game state and the c time saving game state except during RUSH production, based on the content shifted (updated) in the process of step S4514 as updating means Then, based on the first special figure data stored in the special figure execution area corresponding area (not shown) of the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area (not shown) and the first special figure reservation storage area corresponding area, the variation image And the first special figure reserved image as a corresponding display is displayed. As a result, the number of the first special figure pending image as the corresponding display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is reduced by one from the end of the previous first special figure game (Fig. 52 (A1) and Fig. 52 ( B1)).

In addition, in the normal game state and the c time saving game state except during the RUSH production, the first special figure reserved image is displayed as the corresponding display and the corresponding display, and the second special figure reserved image is not displayed as the corresponding display, but the RUSH production The second special figure pending image may be displayed as a corresponding display in the normal game state or c time-saving game state excluding the middle. That is, both the first special figure pending image and the second special figure pending image may be displayed as the corresponding display in the normal game state and c time saving game state except during the RUSH effect.

As shown in FIGS. 225 (B) and 225 (D), during the b time-saving gaming state and RUSH production, the special figure fluctuation image display area 75 and the second The special figure reserved image display area 77 is set, and the first special figure reserved image display area 76 is not set. That is, during the b time-saving gaming state and RUSH production, the second special figure stored in the special figure execution area corresponding area (not shown) of the special figure holding storage area corresponding area (not shown) in the special figure fluctuation image display area 75 The variation image is displayed based on the data, and the second special figure stored in the second special figure reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the second special figure reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) in the second special figure reserved image display area 77 A second special figure reserved image is displayed as a corresponding display based on the data, and a first special figure reserved image is displayed as a corresponding display based on the first special figure data stored in the special figure reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown). is not displayed.

Here, in the b time-saving gaming state and the RUSH production, as described above, the game ball is hit to the right side area of the game board 31, so-called right hitting, and the game ball is entered into the second winning hole 315. Participating in the second special jackpot lottery is encouraged. Therefore, during the b time-saving gaming state and RUSH production, the special figure fluctuation image display area 75 and the second special figure pending image display area 77 are set as the special figure data image display units 75, 76, 77 (as corresponding display The second special figure reserved image is displayed), and the first special figure reserved image display area 76 is not set (the first special figure reserved image is displayed as a corresponding display), so that the player hits right It becomes possible to suggest that it is encouraged.

However, during the RUSH effect, hitting to the right by hitting the game ball to the right side area of the game board 31 is encouraged because it is advantageous to the player. For example, unless the game ball launch failure occurs, the start winning of the game ball to the first winning hole 314 does not occur. However, during the RUSH production, the second special figure reservation number M is likely to be the maximum number of reservations in order to be in the high support mode, and when the second special figure reservation number M is the maximum number of reservations, the second winning opening 315 It is not necessary to enter the game ball into the . On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the second special symbol game is preferentially executed over the first special symbol game. Therefore, when the second special figure reservation number M is the maximum number of reservations and the first special figure reservation number is not the maximum number of reservations, the first special figure game continues immediately after the end of the RUSH effect In order to make the first special figure reservation number the maximum reservation number, the game ball may be attempted to enter the first winning hole 314 by intentionally hitting left. Further, even when the player attempts to launch the game ball to the right side area of the game board 31, the game ball is launched to the left side area of the game board 31 against the player's will due to the poor launch of the game ball. Sometimes I end up In this way, even during the RUSH effect in which hitting to the right is encouraged, game balls may be launched into the left area of the game board 31 . Therefore, a game ball may enter the first winning hole 314 even during the RUSH effect. Even if a game ball enters the first winning hole 314 due to a game that is not encouraged (for example, left-handed hitting during RUSH), the game machine does not invalidate the winning and processes it as a valid ball entering. . That is, when the game ball enters the first winning hole 314 as a specific condition, the first special figure reservation command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 and set in the RAM 512 of the audio lamp control device 5. Information is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area, numerical information related to the first special figure is stored by the numerical value storage process, but during RUSH production The first special figure reserved image is never displayed as a corresponding display. That is, during the RUSH effect, the first special figure reserved image is not displayed as a corresponding display during the RUSH effect, but when the game ball enters the first winning hole 314, etc., the update process is performed. The data (first special figure data) of the first special figure propriety information of the first special figure reservation storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area is updated.

Then, in the second special figure data image display process of step S4518 that is executed during b time-saving gaming state and RUSH production, based on the contents shifted (updated) in step S4517, special figure reservation storage area corresponding area (illustration Omitted) based on the second special figure data stored in the special figure execution area corresponding area (not shown) and the second special figure reservation storage area corresponding area, the second special figure reservation image as the variation image and the corresponding display is displayed. As a result, the number of second special figure pending images displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is reduced by one from the end of the previous second special figure game (see FIGS. 52(A2) and 52(B2)). .

In addition, during the b time saving game state or RUSH production, the second special figure pending image is displayed as the corresponding display and the corresponding display, and the first special figure pending image is not displayed as the corresponding display. This is because even if the first special figure pending image is displayed as a corresponding display for the first special figure game in which the variable display is not executed, the information obtained from the image is unnecessary information, and such This is because, even if an image corresponding to unnecessary information is displayed, it only hinders the visibility of the necessary image from the player's point of view. However, the first special figure pending image may be displayed as a corresponding display during b time-saving gaming state or RUSH production. That is, both the first special figure pending image and the second special figure pending image may be displayed as the corresponding display in the normal game state and c time saving game state except during the RUSH effect.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the transition of various game states is executed, but before and after the transition of the game state, the first special figure pending image and the second 2 The display mode of the special figure pending image may be different. For example, when the gaming state is shifted from the c time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, the display state of the first special figure reserved image as the corresponding display is maintained, and the second special figure reserved image as the corresponding display While the non-display state is maintained (see FIG. 225 (C) → FIG. 225 (A)), when the game state is shifted from the b time-saving game state to the normal game state, the first as the corresponding display While the special figure reservation image is changed from the non-display state to the display state, the second special figure reservation image as the corresponding display is changed from the display state to the non-display state (Fig. 225(B) → Fig. 225(A)).

In addition, when the game state is shifted from the reduced working hours gaming state to the normal gaming state, even in the normal gaming state, it is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the reduced working hours gaming state. RUSH effect as a specific effect is executed for the second special game, and during this RUSH effect, the display state of the second special figure pending image as the corresponding display is maintained, and the second as the corresponding display The non-display state of the 1 special figure pending image is maintained (see FIG. 225 (D)). Of course, during execution of the RUSH effect, even if there is a game ball entering the first winning hole 314, the non-display state of the first special figure reserved image as a corresponding display is maintained, but in this case, The first special figure reservation number N stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area corresponding area of the first special figure reservation storage area corresponding area set in the RAM 512 is updated by the update process.

On the other hand, if the RUSH effect is completed without the jackpot game being executed, the first special figure reservation storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area set in the RAM 512 at that time ), based on the data of the first special figure propriety information (first special figure data), the first special figure pending image as a corresponding display that was in a non-display state is displayed, while it is in a display state The second special figure reservation image as the corresponding display that was held is in a non-display state (Fig. 225 (D) → Fig. 225 (A)). That is, the display mode of the first special figure pending image and the second special figure pending image as the corresponding display in the special figure data image display units 75, 76, 77 changes with the end of the RUSH effect as the specific effect.

<Step S4519>
222, if the received command is not the second special figure shift command (step S4516: No), MPU51 determines whether the received command is the first special figure pending command (step S4519 ). The first special figure reservation command indicates that the information stored in the first special figure reservation storage area REA1 has been updated. When the information stored in the special figure reservation storage area REA1 is updated, it is set in step S3304 or S3306 in the first special figure reservation command setting process of FIG.

MPU51, if the received command is the first special figure pending command (step S4519: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4520, if the received command is not the first special figure pending command (step S4519: No), The process proceeds to step S4522.

<Steps S4520 and S4521>
When the received command is the first special figure pending command (step S4519: Yes), the MPU 51 executes update processing of the first special figure pending information as update processing (step S4520), and corresponding display as effect display processing. Executes the display processing of the first special figure reservation image as (step S4521), and ends the command determination processing.

Here, the update processing of the first special figure reservation information executed in step S4520 is the first special figure validity information in the first special figure reservation storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the above-mentioned special figure reservation storage area corresponding area. It is a process of adding (updating) the data (first special figure data). Specifically, in the update process of the first special figure reservation information, the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA of the special figure reservation storage area 412b in the RAM412 of the main controller 4 The first special figure data corresponding to the first special figure validity information stored in the first empty reservation area among (see FIG. 8) is stored in the first reservation area REA1 to the first 4 Stored in the 1st special figure 1st to 4th reservation area corresponding area (not shown) set corresponding to the reservation area REA4. For example, when the first special figure propriety information is stored in the second reserved area REA2 (see FIG. 8) of the first special figure reserved storage area REA in the special figure reserved storage area 412b, it corresponds to the second reserved area REA2 1st special figure data is stored in the 1st special figure 2nd reservation area correspondence field (not shown) which is set. Also, in the update process of the first special figure reservation information, 1 is added to the first special figure reservation number N stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area , the numerical value information added by the numerical value storage processing is stored.

On the other hand, the display processing of the first special figure reserved image as the corresponding display executed in step S4521 is the first special figure added (updated) to the first special figure reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) in step S4520. Based on the data, a process of adding the first special figure reserved image as a corresponding display to the first special figure reserved image display area 76 is executed.

<Step S4522>
When the received command is not the first special figure pending command (step S4519: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the second special figure pending command (step S4522). The second special figure reservation command indicates that the information stored in the second special figure reservation storage area REB1 has been updated. When the information stored in the special figure reservation storage area REA1 is updated, it is set in steps S3403, S3406 or S3408 in the second special figure reservation command setting process of FIG.

MPU51, if the received command is the second special figure pending command (step S4522: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4523, if the received command is not the second special figure pending command (step S4522: No), The process proceeds to step S4525 in FIG.

<Steps S4523 and S4524>
If the received command is the second special figure pending command (step S4522: Yes), MPU51 executes the update process of the second special figure pending information as update process (step S4523), corresponding display as effect display process Executes the display processing of the second special figure reservation image as (step S4524), and ends the command determination processing.

Here, the update processing of the second special figure reservation information executed in step S4523 is the second special figure validity information in the second special figure reservation storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the above-mentioned special figure reservation storage area corresponding area It is a process of adding (updating) the data of (second special figure data). Specifically, in the update process of the second special figure reservation information, the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB of the special figure reservation storage area 412b in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 The second special figure data corresponding to the second special figure validity information stored in the first empty reservation area among (see FIG. 8) is stored in the first reservation area REB1 to the second special figure validity information. 4 Stored in the 1st special figure 1st to 4th reservation area corresponding area (not shown) set corresponding to the reservation area REB4. For example, when the second special figure validity information is stored in the second reservation area REB2 (see FIG. 8) of the second special figure reservation storage area REB in the special figure reservation storage area 412b, it corresponds to the second reservation area REB2 2nd special figure data is stored in the 2nd special figure 2nd reservation area corresponding field (not shown) which is set. Also, in the update process of the second special figure reservation information, 1 is added to the second special figure reservation number M stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area be.

On the other hand, the display processing of the second special figure reserved image as the corresponding display executed in step S4524 is the second special figure added (updated) to the second special figure reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) in step S4523. Based on the data, a process of adding a second special figure pending image as a corresponding display to the second special figure pending image display area 77 is executed.

<Step S4525>
Returning to the description of FIG. 222, if the received command is not the second special figure pending command (step S4522: No), as shown in FIG. is determined (step S4525). The special variation start command indicates that it is the second special game that is executed first after the transition to the time-saving gaming state based on the game ball entering the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving gaming state. Yes, when the first second special figure game is started in the a time saving game state, it is set in step S4003 in the second special figure variation pattern setting process B of FIG.

If the received command is the special variation start command (step S4525: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4526, and if the received command is not the special variation start command (step S4525: No), the process proceeds to step S4527. transition to

<Step S4526>
When the received command is a special variation start command (step S4525: Yes), the MPU 51 is the second special figure game that is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball to the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving gaming state A RUSH effect start flag for starting a RUSH effect as a specific effect for notifying that (a state in which a small hit probability is high and a big hit game is likely to be executed) is set to ON (step S4526), and the command determination process exit. The RUSH effect start flag is referenced in step S4601 of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process in FIG. RUSH effect is set when there is.

The RUSH effect is set for the second special game that is executed with the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the a reduced working hours game state, and the 1st to 5th times as described above. It is set for 2 special figure games. This RUSH effect is a one-shot announcement effect (see FIG. 226) that is executed for the second special game that is executed first after the transition to the a reduced working hours gaming state, and 2 after the transition to the reduced working hours gaming state Including the battle production (see Figure 227 and Figure 228) that is executed for the second to fifth second special game. In addition, the RUSH production is a battle production when all of the second special game executed with the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving game state as the opportunity to notify the loss. includes a result effect and a branch effect as display effects executed after the end of (see FIG. 229).

Here, FIG. 226 is a diagram showing an example of a one-shot announcement effect that is executed at the beginning of the RUSH effect. As shown in FIG. 226, the one-shot notification effect is executed as a button effect. In this one-shot announcement effect, first, an image simulating the operation button 20 prompting the player to operate the operation button 20 is displayed (see FIG. 226(A)).

Then, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special figure game is a small win, the movable accessory member 39 is operated by the player's operation of the operation button 20 (see FIG. 226 (B)), and the movable accessory member After the return of 39, the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed with double eyes (see FIG. 226(A)), and the player is notified that the result of the big hit lottery for the second special symbol game is a small hit.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special game is a loss, the movable accessory member 39 is not operated even by the player's operation of the operation button 20 (see FIG. 226 (D)), and the decorative pattern is displayed. The player is informed that the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol game is lost by being stopped and displayed with loose eyes other than double eyes (see FIG. 226 (E)).

227 and 228 are diagrams showing an example of a battle effect that can be executed after the one-shot notification effect of the RUSH effect. In the battle production, depending on the result of the battle between the ally character and the enemy character, the jackpot is included in the second special reservation (remaining reservation) of the right to execute the second special game at the end of the one-shot announcement production of the RUSH production. Whether or not the lottery result includes a small win is notified. In addition, the battle production is not executed if there is no second special reservation (remaining reservation) of the right to execute the second special game at the end of the one-shot announcement production of the RUSH production, and the remaining reservation is 1 Executed if there are at least

As shown in FIG. 227(A), in this embodiment, types of patterns A to D are set as battle effects. Patterns A and B are those in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character, and during the second special reservation (remaining reservation) of the right to execute the second special game at the end of the one-shot notification effect of the RUSH effect It is selected when the results of the jackpot lottery do not include a small win. Patterns C and D are those in which the ally character wins over the enemy character, and during the second special reservation (remaining reservation) of the right to execute the second special game at the end of the one-shot notification effect of the RUSH effect It is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery includes a small win.

In pattern A of the battle production, a character image indicating the start of battle is displayed in the pattern display portion 341 (see FIG. 227(B)), the enemy character first attacks (see FIG. 227(D)), and the enemy character's attack becomes an ally. The character is hit (see FIG. 228(B2))→the ally character is defeated by the enemy character (see FIG. 228(B3)).

In pattern B of the battle production, a character image indicating the start of the battle is displayed on the pattern display portion 341 (see FIG. 227(B)), first the ally character attacks (see FIG. 227(C)), and the ally character's attack The character defends (see FIG. 228(B1))→the enemy character counterattacks (see FIG. 227(D)), and the enemy character's attack hits the ally character (see FIG. 228(B2))→the ally character is the enemy. The character is defeated (see FIG. 228 (B3)).

In pattern C of the battle production, a character image indicating the start of battle is displayed in the pattern display portion 341 (see FIG. 226(B)), first the ally character attacks (see FIG. 226(C)), and the ally character attacks the enemy. A character is hit (see FIG. 228(A1))→the ally character wins over the enemy character (see FIG. 228(A3)).

In the battle production pattern D, a character image indicating the start of the battle is displayed in the pattern display section 341 (see FIG. 226(B)), the enemy character first attacks (see FIG. The character defends (see FIG. 228(A2)), the ally character counterattacks (see FIG. 227(C)), and the ally character's attack hits the enemy character (see FIG. 228(A1)) →the ally character becomes the enemy. It is to win the character (see FIG. 228 (A3)).

And the battle effect is executed according to the number of times of the second special figure game according to the type of the remaining reservation pattern. Specifically, in the remaining reservation patterns 1 and 5, the battle production is executed for the second special game once, and in the remaining reservation patterns 2 and 6, the battle is performed for the second special game twice. Production is executed, in the remaining reservation patterns 3 and 7, the battle production is executed for the second special game three times, and in the remaining reservation patterns 4 and 8, the battle is performed for the second special game once. A performance is performed. That is, in the remaining reservation patterns 2 to 4 and the remaining reservation patterns 6 to 9 excluding the remaining reservation patterns 1 and 5, the battle production is executed collectively for the second special figure game for a plurality of times. And, in this embodiment, as described above, the second special symbol game is executed with priority over the first special symbol game. Therefore, if there is a game ball entering the first winning port 314 during the execution of the battle production (the first special figure reservation number storage area corresponding area of the first special figure reservation storage area set in the RAM 512 The second special figure game is preferentially executed even if the first special figure reservation number N stored in is added by the update process. As a result, until the predetermined number of the second special figure games targeted for the execution of the battle effect is completed, that is, the second special figure reserved number storage area corresponding to the second special figure reserved storage area set in the RAM 512 The second special figure reservation number M stored in the area is subtracted by the subtraction processing by executing the second special figure game to 0 (the number of the second special figure reservation images displayed on the design display unit 341 is 0). Until , the first special figure game based on the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole 314 during execution of the battle effect as the display effect is not started. Thereby, the battle effect is not hindered based on the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole 314 during execution of the battle effect. Further, the first special figure game based on the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole 314 during execution of the battle effect is started after the battle effect is finished.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 225(D), in the RUSH effect as the specific effect, for example, an image indicating that the RUSH is in progress (a character image of "big win RUSH"), an image showing the number of times of the big win RUSH ("RUSH x 3 ”), and an image indicating the total number of balls released in the jackpot RUSH (character image of “3000 balls”) are displayed at least partly during the execution of the RUSH effect. Some or all of these images may be omitted, and it is also conceivable to display an image showing the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed in the jackpot RUSH.

Also, FIG. 229(A) is a diagram showing a screen example in the result effect, and FIGS. 229(B) to 229(D) are diagrams showing screen examples in the branching effect. FIGS. 229(E) and 229(F) are diagrams showing screen examples after the end of the branch effect.

The result production and the branch production as the display production shown in FIG. is executed if Specifically, the result production and the branch production are executed when the number of the second special game to be executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning port 315 in the time saving game state is one. , after the end of the one-shot notification effect (see FIG. 226 (E)) that informs the deviation, the result effect and the branch effect are executed, and the entry of the game ball to the second winning port 315 in the time-saving game state When the number of the second special figure games to be executed as a trigger is 2 to 5, it is executed after the end of the battle effect (see FIG. 228 (B3)) that informs that it is out.

As shown in FIG. 229(A), in the result production, the results of a series of jackpot games (continuous jackpot games) including the first jackpot game that can be executed triggered by the first jackpot game that does not go through the small win game. An image is displayed. Specifically, in the result effect of the present embodiment, an image indicating the number of consecutive jackpots (character image of "RUSH 5 times") and the total number of balls released in the consecutive jackpot game are displayed together with the character image of "result announcement". An image showing the number (a character image of "total paid out 2600 balls") is displayed. As a result, the player can grasp the number of consecutive jackpots and the total number of balls released.

It should be noted that even if the transition to the time-saving gaming state is triggered by the first big winning game that does not go through the small winning game, the entry of the game ball into the second winning port 315 in the time-saving gaming state that was first shifted to If all of the second special games executed with the ball as a trigger indicate a loss, it will be a so-called single-shot jackpot instead of a consecutive jackpot. It is called Renso. In the case of a single-shot jackpot, the number of consecutive games is one, and a character image of "RUSH 1 time" is displayed as an image indicating the number of consecutive jackpots.

In addition, the number of consecutive jackpots displayed in the result effect of the present embodiment includes the first jackpot game that does not go through the small win game, but the number of consecutive jackpots is counted excluding the first jackpot game, and the number of times may be displayed.

In addition, in the result effect of the present embodiment, an image (image of a left-pointing arrow and a character image of "left-handed") is displayed to prompt the player to hit left-handed. Here, in the present embodiment, when all of the second special figure games executed with the entry of the game ball to the second winning hole 315 in the a time saving game state as a trigger are to notify the deviation When all of the second special game ends (when the RUSH effect ends), at the end of the last executed second special game (at the start of the next executed first special game) The game state is either a normal game state or a c time-saving game state. That is, the game state at the end of the last executed second special game (the start of the first special game to be executed next) is when all of the second special games are completely out. is in the normal game state, and when one of the second special game is out of the time saving pattern stop, it is in the c time saving game state. In both the normal game state and the c time-saving game state, left-handed hitting to hit the game ball to the left side area of the game board 31 is encouraged. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the transition to the time-saving gaming state is made after the time-saving jackpot game is completed (during execution of the RUSH effect) or during the jackpot game, the game ball is launched into the right region of the game board 31 as described above. Right handed is encouraged. That is, when it is notified that the RUSH will end in the RUSH effect, switching from right-handed to left-handed is encouraged. Therefore, by displaying an image that encourages hitting to the left in the result effect, the player can grasp that the area in which the game ball is launched toward the game board 31 to be encouraged has been changed.

As shown in FIG. 229(B), the branch effect is executed as a button effect. Specifically, in the branch effect of the present embodiment, the operation button 20 is pressed together with a character image of "Select Fate" indicating that the branch effect is being executed to prompt the player to operate the operation button 20. A simulated image and a character image of "Press!!" are displayed.

Here, as described above, when all of the second special figure game executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the a time saving game state is to notify the When all of the second special game ends (when the RUSH effect ends), at the end of the last executed second special game (at the start of the next executed first special game) The game state is c time-saving game state or normal game state. Then, in the c time-saving gaming state, the distribution of the time-saving jackpot when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot is 100% (see FIG. 196 (C)), whereas in the normal game state, the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot. The distribution of the time saving jackpot in the case is 50% (see FIG. 196 (C)). Therefore, the c time-saving gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 229 (C), in the branch production, all of the second special game executed with the entry of the game ball into the second winning port 315 in the time-saving game state as the opportunity is lost. When all of the second special game is completed in the case of notification (when the RUSH effect is completed), at the end of the last executed second special game (the next executed first special When the game state at the start of the game shown in the figure) is the c time-saving game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state, a character image of "Congratulations!" is displayed. As a result, to the player, when all the second special game executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the c time saving game state is out. When all of the second special game ends (when the RUSH effect ends), at the end of the second special game last executed (at the start of the first special game to be executed next) It is specified or suggested that the game state of is a c time-saving game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 229 (D), in the branch effect, all of the second special game that is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning port 315 in the time-saving game state When all of the second special game is completed in the case of notification (when the RUSH effect is completed), at the end of the last executed second special game (the next executed first special If the game state at the start of the game shown in the figure) is a normal game state that is more disadvantageous than the c time-saving game state, a character image of "I'm sorry..." is displayed. As a result, to the player, when all the second special game executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the c time saving game state is out. When all of the second special game ends (when the RUSH effect ends), at the end of the second special game last executed (at the start of the first special game to be executed next) It is specified or suggested that the game state of is a normal game state that is more disadvantageous than the time-saving game state c.

In addition, when displaying a character image of "Congratulations!" . That is, the image prompting the player to hit left is displayed from beginning to end during execution of the branch effect. Of course, the image prompting the player to hit left may be displayed during part of the execution of the branch effect, or may be omitted.

In addition, after the end of the branch effect indicating or suggesting that the c time-saving gaming state is shown in FIG. 229(C), as shown in FIG. . The character images of "RUSH confirmed with a big hit!" Thus, by displaying an image related to the game in the c time saving game state, the player can grasp that the RUSH effect is finished and the c time saving game state is set. Then, in the case of the c time-saving gaming state, after the RUSH effect is completed, if there is a reservation of the right to execute the first special figure, the number of first special figure reservations corresponding to the first special figure reservation number N The image is displayed as a corresponding display. That is, when a game ball enters the first winning hole 314 during execution of the RUSH effect, and the right to execute the first special figure is reserved, the first special figure at the end of the RUSH effect A number of first special figure reserved images corresponding to the figure reserved number N are displayed as corresponding displays.

Also, an image (a leftward arrow image and a character image of "left shot") is displayed to prompt the player to hit left. As a result, the player can understand that it is desirable to switch from right-handed to left-handed, and can be prevented from being disadvantaged by continuing right-handed. The image prompting the player to hit left may be displayed until a certain period of time has passed since the image was displayed. After the image is displayed, it may be displayed until the special figure game is executed a certain number of times, or it may be displayed until a certain time has passed since the image is displayed, or the image is displayed. , and may be displayed until a certain number of game balls are continuously hit to the left.

Furthermore, during the execution of the c time saving game state production, the remaining c time saving game number display as a specific correspondence display indicating the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed in the c time saving game state (character image of "remaining 8 times") is displayed.

In addition, the player can play the second special figure game in the c time saving game state executed during the execution of the RUSH effect based on the c time saving game number display when the image related to the game in the c time saving game state is displayed. The number of times can be grasped, and it is possible to grasp which result of the jackpot lottery for which remaining reservation is out of stoppage of time-saving symbols. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 229 (E), the character image of "remaining 8 times" is displayed as the c time saving game number display, but based on this c time saving game number display, the first set c time saving game The number of times is 10 times, it can be grasped that two special game games have already been executed in the c time saving game state, and the jackpot notified by the second special game executed three times before It can be grasped after the fact that the result of the lottery was out of the time saving pattern stop.

On the other hand, after the end of the branch effect indicating or suggesting the normal game state shown in FIG. 229(D), an image relating to the game in the normal game state is displayed as shown in FIG. 229(F). The character images of "RUSH confirmed with a big hit!" In this way, by displaying an image relating to the game in the normal game state, the player can understand that the RUSH effect has ended and the normal game state is in effect. Then, in the case of the normal game state, after the RUSH effect is completed, if there is a reservation of the right to execute the first special figure, the number of first special figure reserved images corresponding to the first special figure reserved number N is displayed as a corresponding display. That is, when a game ball enters the first winning hole 314 during execution of the RUSH effect, and the right to execute the first special figure is reserved, the first special figure at the end of the RUSH effect A number of first special figure reserved images corresponding to the figure reserved number N are displayed as corresponding displays.

Also, an image (a leftward arrow image and a character image of "left shot") is displayed to prompt the player to hit left. As a result, the player can understand that it is desirable to switch from right-handed to left-handed, and can be prevented from being disadvantaged by continuing right-handed. The image that urges the player to hit left may be displayed until a certain period of time has passed since the image was displayed, for example, the image is displayed until a certain number of special game games are executed after the image is displayed. Alternatively, the image may be displayed until a certain period of time has elapsed since the image was displayed, or the image may be displayed until a certain number of game balls are continuously hit left after the image is displayed. good too.

In this embodiment, the result effect is executed before the branch effect, but the branch effect may be executed before the result effect.

Also, in this embodiment, the result effect (see FIG. 229(A)) and the branch effect (see FIGS. 229(B) to (F)) are executed separately. may be performed in duplicate with the other. For example, the image shown in FIG. 229(B) may be displayed together with the screen example of the result effect shown in FIG. 229(A), and the branch effect screens shown in FIGS. As an example, the result image shown in FIG. 229(A) may also be displayed.

Also, in the present embodiment, the result effect and the branch effect are described as part of the RUSH effect, but one or both of the result effect and the branch effect may be executed as a different effect from the RUSH effect. That is, in the present embodiment, the result production and the branch production are executed in the second special game that is executed last of the remaining reservations, but one or both of the result production and the branch production are the result production And the branch effect may be executed in (at the start of) the first special symbol game executed after the end of the second special symbol game executed last of the remaining reservations.

<Step S4527>
Returning to the description of FIG. 223, if the received command is not the special variation start command (step S4525: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the remaining pending pattern command (step S4527). The remaining pending pattern command is the second feature of FIG. It is set in step S4009 in the figure fluctuation pattern setting process B.

When the received command is the remaining pending pattern command (step S4527: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4528, and when the received command is not the remaining pending pattern command (step S4527: No), the process proceeds to step S4532. transition to

<Steps S4528 to S4531>
If the received command is the remaining pending pattern command (step S4527: Yes), MPU51 stores the remaining pending pattern in the RAM512 based on the remaining pending pattern command (step S4528), to start the battle effect in the RUSH effect A battle production start flag is set to ON (step S4529). The battle effect start flag is referred to in step S4604 of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process in FIG. A battle effect is set in the case.

Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the value of the remaining pending number counter in the storage area for the remaining pending number counter set in the RAM 512 as a numerical value storage process based on the information about the remaining pending number contained in the remaining pending pattern command. (step S4530). Then, the MPU 51 turns on the remaining pending number counter flag indicating that the remaining pending number counter is set (there is remaining pending) (step S4531), and terminates the command determination process.

In step S4530 of the command determination process, the second special figure game at the end of the second special figure game that was first executed based on the entry of the game ball to the second winning opening 315 in the a time saving game state The value of the remaining pending number counter is set to a value corresponding to the number of rights to execute (remaining pending number). Here, in the present embodiment, since the maximum number of reservations of the second special figure is set to 4, the number of remaining reservations is any one of 1-4. Then, in the storage area for the remaining pending number counter set in the RAM 512, 1 is set as the value of the remaining pending number counter when the remaining pending number is 1, and when the remaining pending number is 2 2 is set as the value of the remaining pending number counter, and if the remaining pending number is 3, 3 is set as the value of the remaining pending number counter, and if the remaining pending number is 4, the remaining pending 4 is set as the value of the number counter.

Also, the value of the remaining pending number counter is subtracted (updated) by 1 when the second special figure game for the remaining pending ends in step S4542 of the command determination process described later. Therefore, the value of the remaining pending number counter indicates the number of unexecuted second special figure games among the executable second special symbol games based on the remaining pending. As a result, the MPU 51 can display the second special figure game number for the unexecuted remaining reservation on the symbol display unit 341 by referring to the remaining reservation number counter.

Here, although the details will be described later, for the second special figure game executed based on the remaining reservation, in the fluctuation type (production pattern) setting process described later, it is specified based on the remaining reservation pattern command A battle effect (see FIGS. 227 and 228) is set based on the remaining pending pattern (see FIG. 199(D)). For example, in the case of the remaining reservation pattern 1, the battle production is executed for the second special game for one remaining reservation, and in the case of the remaining reservation pattern 2, the second two times for the two remaining reservations. A battle production is executed for the special game, in the case of the remaining reservation pattern 3, the battle production is executed for the second special game three times for the three remaining reservations, and in the case of the remaining reservation pattern 4 A battle effect is executed for the second special symbol game four times for four remaining reservations. In other words, when the second special symbol game for the remaining suspension ends, the remaining suspension number counter indicating the number of unexecuted second special symbol games out of the remaining suspension is decremented (updated) by one. The value corresponds to the number of unexecuted second special figure games in which the battle production is executed. Therefore, the battle effect is continuously executed until the value of the remaining reservation number counter becomes 0 in the storage area for the remaining reservation number counter set in the RAM 512 .

<Step S4532>
If the received command is not the remaining pending pattern command (step S4527: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the special variation end command (step S4532). In the special variation end command, the value of the remaining setting counter indicating the remaining number of special variations for the remaining reservation of the second special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the time saving game state is 0. In case, it is set in step S3712 in the special figure game control processing of Figure 208.

If the received command is the special variation end command (step S4532: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4533, and if the received command is not the special variation end command (step S4532: No), the process proceeds to step S4534. transition to

<Step S4533>
If the received command is a special variation end command (step S4532: Yes), the MPU 51 turns on the RUSH effect end flag for ending the RUSH effect (step S4533), and ends the command determination process. The RUSH effect end flag is referenced in step S4612 of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process in FIG. If there is, the RUSH effect is terminated.

<Step S4534>
If the received command is not a special variation end command (step S4532: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special figure variation pattern command (step S4534). The special figure variation pattern command is set in step S3910 in the special figure variation start process of FIG. 210 when the special figure variation pattern for the first special figure game or the second special figure game is set.

MPU51, if the received command is a special figure variation pattern command (step S4534: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4535, if the received command is not a special figure variation pattern command (step S4534: No), the process The process proceeds to step S4540.

<Step S4535>
When the received command is a special figure variation pattern command (step S4534: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the variation type (effect pattern) to be executed in the symbol display unit 341 etc. in the special figure game as the effect display process. (Effect pattern) setting processing is executed (step S4535), and the processing proceeds to step S4536. Details of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S4536>
In step S4536, MPU51, similar to the stop symbol combination setting process of step S3104 in the command determination process in the first embodiment described above, a plurality of decorative symbols ( For example, 3) is stop-displayed on the active line.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is the time-saving design stop-off, as the stop design combination of the decorative design, one corresponding to the time-saving design stop-off type is set (see FIG. 198 (D)). . Specifically, as the stop symbol combination of the decorative pattern, "119" or "991" is set in the case of the time saving pattern stop off A, and "554" or "991" is set in the case of the time saving pattern stop off B. "556" is set, "332" or "334" is set when it is the time saving pattern stop deviation C, and "776" or "778" is set when it is the time saving design stop deviation D.

<Step S4537>
In step S4537, the MPU 51 sets the variation display time corresponding to the received special figure variation pattern command to the variation display counter. Variation display time is determined according to the variation pattern information included in the special figure variation pattern command. Then, the variation display counter is decremented by one in the counter update processing of step S2701 in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. It is possible to determine the remaining time of the display time and the like. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display is finished when the variation display counter reaches zero.

<Step S4538>
In step S4538, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command for specifying the effect pattern type set in step S4535 of the command determination process and the content of the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols determined in step S4536 to the display control device. 6 to end the command determination process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop symbol combination of the effect pattern type and the decoration symbol. On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores a variation image of a decorative pattern and an effect image corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variable display and effect display in the symbol display section 341 according to the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the display variation pattern command, the variation type and the effect type.

<Step S4539>
In step S4539, the MPU 51 executes a time saving number counter update process and terminates the command determination process. In this time saving number counter update process, 1 is subtracted from the value of the b time saving number counter or c time saving number counter set in the storage area for b time saving number counter or c time saving number counter set in RAM 512, and after subtraction A process of storing the value is performed. Specifically, the MPU 51 is set to the RAM 512 when the b time saving gaming state flag set to on in step S4506 of the command determination process is set to ON, that is, when the b time saving gaming state is set to the RAM 512 b 1 is subtracted from the value of the b time saving number counter set in the storage area for the time saving number counter. In addition, in the time saving number counter update process, the MPU 51 is set to ON in step S4510 of the command determination process, when the c time saving game state flag is set to ON, that is, when it is in the c time saving game state, the RAM 512 1 is subtracted from the value of the c time saving number counter set in the c time saving number counter storage area.

<Step S4540>
When the received command is not a special figure variation pattern command (step S4534: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special figure game end command (step S4540). The special symbol game end command is, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363 of the main display portion 36, step S3709 in the special symbol game control process of FIG. is set in

MPU51, if the received command is a special figure game end command (step S4540: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4541, if the received command is not a special figure variation pattern command (step S4540: No), the process The process moves to step S4545.

<Steps S4541 to S4544>
If the received command is a special figure game end command (step S4540: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the remaining pending number counter flag indicating that the remaining pending number counter is set is set to ON. (step S4541). The remaining pending number counter flag executes the second special game at the end of the second special game that was first executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning port 315 in the time saving game state. It is a flag indicating that a remaining pending number counter indicating the number of unexecuted second special figure games out of the remaining pending which is the holding of the right to play is set.

When the remaining pending number counter flag is set to ON (step S4541: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the remaining pending number counter as a subtraction process (step S4542). That is, the MPU 51 updates the value of the remaining pending number counter stored in the storage area set in the RAM 512 at the end of the second special figure game during execution of the battle effect in the RUSH effect as the specific effect. Thus, during the execution of the battle production, by updating (decrementing) the value of the remaining pending number counter stored in the storage area set in the RAM 512 at the end of the second special game, for example, the remaining pending Even if the result of the jackpot lottery includes a time-reduction symbol stop-off that shifts to the c time-reduction gaming state, the value of the remaining pending number counter stored in the storage area set in the RAM 512 is changed. By referring to it, it becomes possible to continuously execute the battle production until the value of the remaining number counter becomes 0, and it is unique when the c time saving game state is entered after the value of the remaining number counter becomes 0 c time-saving gaming state effect (see FIG. 225(C)) can be executed as a display effect.

On the other hand, when the remaining pending number counter flag is set to OFF (step S4541: No), that is, when processing for the remaining pending is unnecessary, the MPU 51 ends the command determination process.

Furthermore, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the remaining pending number counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4543). When the value of the remaining pending number counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4543: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the remaining pending number counter flag to off (step S4544), and terminates the command determination process. That is, the MPU 51 ends management (update) of the remaining number of reservations when the value of the remaining number of reservations counter becomes zero. In other words, when the value of the remaining pending number counter becomes 0 in the storage area for the remaining pending number counter set in the RAM 512, the battle effect is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the remaining pending number counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4543: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process. That is, the MPU 51 continues to manage (update) the remaining number of reservations when the value of the remaining number of reservations counter is not zero. In other words, the battle effect is continued when the value of the remaining pending number counter does not become 0 in the storage area for the remaining pending number counter set in the RAM 512 .

In addition, in this embodiment, the value of the remaining pending number counter is updated (subtracted) at the time of receiving the special figure fluctuation pattern, that is, at the start of the special figure game, but the value of the remaining pending number counter is changed to the end of the special figure game It may be updated (subtracted) from time to time.

In addition, although the remaining pending number specified from the remaining pending pattern command is managed (updated), instead of this, the second executed in the battle production based on the remaining pending pattern specified from the remaining pending pattern command The number of special figure games may be specified, and the second number of special figure games may be managed (updated). In this case, the second special figure game number to be executed in the battle production is set to a battle production counter corresponding to the second special figure game number in the storage area set in the RAM 512, and this battle production counter is set to the second special game. By updating at the start (or end) of the figure game, it is possible to manage the remaining number of second special figure games executed in the battle production. As a result, the MPU 51 can specify the second special figure game in which the battle effect ends by referring to the value of the battle effect counter.

<Step S4545>
If the received command is not a special figure variation pattern command (step S4540: No), the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands (step S4545) and terminates the command determination processing.

[Variation type (production pattern) setting process]
Here, FIG. 224 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process of this embodiment. In the variation type (effect pattern) setting process of the present embodiment, the variation type (effect pattern) and the like to be executed in the symbol display section 341 and the like in the special figure game are set according to the game state type and the like. The variation type (effect pattern) setting process of the present embodiment includes a process of setting a one-shot notification effect and a process of setting a battle effect as effect display means for setting a RUSH effect as a specific effect.

<Step S4601>
In the variation type (effect pattern) setting process of the present embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the RUSH effect start flag is set to ON (step S4601). The RUSH effect start flag is a flag for starting a RUSH effect as a specific effect, and is set to ON in step S4524 of the command determination process in FIG. 223 when a special variation start command is received.

When the RUSH effect start flag is set to ON (step S4601: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4602, and when the RUSH effect start flag is set to OFF (step S4601: No), the process to step S4604.

Here, in this embodiment, in step S4601, by determining whether or not the RUSH effect start flag is set to ON, priority is given to the b time saving game state effect and the c time saving game state effect as the display effect. It becomes possible to execute a RUSH effect as a specific effect. For example, the remaining hold of the second special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the a time-saving game state is started in the normal game state, and the jackpot lottery result is out of the time-saving design stop during the remaining hold. is included, the jackpot lottery result shifts to c time saving game state after the end of the second special figure game in which the time saving pattern is out of stoppage. In this case, when the c time saving game state effect corresponding to the c time saving game state is executed as the display effect, the battle effect which has been executed as the RUSH effect is ended in the middle.

On the other hand, by judging whether or not the RUSH effect flag is set to ON, it becomes possible to execute the RUSH effect as the display effect with priority over the c time saving game state effect. As a result, the battle effect executed as the RUSH effect is prevented from ending in the middle.

In the present embodiment, as the display effect, the RUSH effect as the specific effect is executed with priority over the c time reduction game state effect, thereby preventing the battle effect from ending in the middle, but the RUSH effect ends. By withholding the transition to the c time-saving gaming state until (all the remaining pending second special game ends), the battle production may be prevented from ending in the middle.

<Steps S4602 and S4603>
When the RUSH effect start flag is set to ON (step S4601: Yes), the MPU 51 executes processing as effect display means for setting the aforementioned one-shot notification effect (see FIG. 226) included in the RUSH effect. (Step S4602). Then, the MPU 51 sets the RUSH effect start flag to OFF (step S4603), and ends the variation type (effect pattern) setting process.

<Step S4604>
When the RUSH production start flag is set to OFF (step S4601: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the battle production start flag is set to ON (step S4604). The battle effect start flag is a flag for starting the battle effect as the RUSH effect when executing the RUSH effect as the specific effect, and is turned on in step S4527 of the command determination process in FIG. 223 when the remaining pending pattern command is received. is set to That is, in the battle production, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special game that is first executed after the transition to the a time saving game state is out, the second special game is performed at the end of the second special game Executed if there are any outstanding pending.

MPU51 shifts a process to step S4605, when the battle production|presentation start flag is set to ON (step S4604: Yes). On the other hand, when the battle effect start flag is set to OFF (step S4604: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4611.

<Steps S4605 and S4606>
If the battle effect start flag is set to ON (step S4604: Yes), the MPU 51 identifies the remaining pending pattern stored in the RAM 512 in step S4526 of the command determination process in FIG. 223 (step S4605). Then, as the effect display process, the MPU 51 executes the process of setting the aforementioned battle effect (see FIGS. 227 and 228) included in the RUSH effect as the specific effect as the display effect based on the remaining pending pattern (step S4606), and the process proceeds to step S4607.

Here, in this embodiment, among the game balls entering the second winning port 315 in the time-saving gaming state, the first game ball entering the second winning port 315 in the time-saving gaming state On the other hand, the one-shot notification effect is executed, and the battle effect is set when the remaining reservation pattern is set for the entry of the second and subsequent game balls to the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving game state. be. That is, when there is a second special figure reservation (remaining reservation) at the end of the second special figure game based on the entry of the game ball into the first second winning hole 315 in the a time saving game state, the battle effect is executed. , When there are a plurality of such remaining reservations, a battle effect is collectively set for the second special figure game executed based on the plurality of second special figure reservations. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the remaining reservation is all the remaining reservation patterns 1 to 4 (see FIG. 199 (C)), the battle production pattern A or the battle production in which the ally character is defeated If pattern B (see FIG. 227 (A)) is set and the remaining pending patterns 5 to 8 (see FIG. 199 (C)) containing a small hit in the result of the jackpot lottery for the remaining pending , a battle effect pattern C or a battle effect pattern D (see FIG. 227A) in which the ally character wins is set. Then, when there are a plurality of the remaining reservations, the battle production is set collectively for the second special game that is executed based on the plurality of the second special reservations, so that the remaining reservations are made multiple times. is prevented from being executed.

<Steps S4607 and S4608>
In step S4607, the MPU 51 sets the battle effect already set flag to ON, further sets the battle effect start flag to OFF (step S4608), and shifts the process to step S4609.

The battle effect already set flag is one or more (2 to 4) at the end of the second special figure game based on the entry of the game ball into the first second winning port 315 in the time saving game state. There is 2 special figure reservation (remaining reservation), a flag indicating that the battle effect is set for the remaining reservation, and in step S4611 of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process, the battle effect is set It is referenced to determine whether or not

In addition, during the execution of the RUSH effect (one-shot notification effect and battle effect) as a specific effect, as described above, an image indicating that RUSH is in progress (character image of "jackpot RUSH"), indicating the number of jackpot RUSH Image (character image of "RUSH × 3"), image indicating the total number of balls in the jackpot RUSH (character image of "3000 balls"), image indicating the number of remaining special figure games that can be executed in the jackpot RUSH, etc. Although it is displayed (see FIG. 225(D)), these images may be set at the same time when setting the one-shot announcement effect or the battle effect, or when setting the one-shot announcement effect or the battle effect. It may be set at different timings.

<Steps S4609 and S4610>
In step S4609, the MPU 51 determines whether the battle effect set in step S4606 is the battle effect pattern A or the battle effect pattern B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a battle effect (see FIG. 227A) in which the teammate character is defeated in battle has been set.

If the battle effect set in step S4606 is battle effect pattern A or battle effect pattern B (step S4609: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a battle effect in which the ally character is defeated in battle (see FIG. 227(A)). If so, a process of setting a branch effect (see FIG. 229) as a display effect is executed as the effect display process (step S4610), and the change type (effect pattern) setting process ends.

Here, the battle effect pattern A or the battle effect pattern B (see FIG. 227(A)) in which the ally character is defeated in the battle is performed when all the results of the jackpot lottery for the remaining reservations in which the battle effect is executed are out. set. That is, the branch effect (see FIG. 229) as a display effect is performed after the end of the battle effect when it is clearly or implied to the player that the high-probability state of jackpot consecutive games ends due to the defeat of the ally in the battle effect. executed. Then, as described above, during the execution of the battle production for the remaining pending state, it is the normal game state or the c time reduction game state, and this c time reduction game state provides an opportunity to shift to the jackpot consecutive high probability state. Since the probability of is higher than that of the normal game state, the game value is higher than that of the normal game state. Therefore, in the branch effect (see FIG. 229), it is a c time-saving gaming state with a high game value for the player, that is, whether it is in any of the two types of game states with different game values for the player. whether or not is specified or implied. In this way, by executing a branch effect that clearly indicates or suggests whether or not the player is in the c time-saving gaming state, which has a high gaming value for the player, as a display effect, the defeat of the ally character in the battle effect results in a big hit. A c time-saving game, which is a game state advantageous to a player by a branching performance as a display performance, even in a situation where the player's interest in the game decreases due to the fact that the high-probability state ends is specified or suggested to the player. Since the user can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that the state is specified or indicated, the loss of interest in the game can be prevented.

On the other hand, if the battle effect set in step S4606 is not the battle effect pattern A or the battle effect pattern B (step S4609: No), the game ball enters the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving gaming state. A battle production pattern C or a battle production pattern D (see FIG. 227(A)) in which the ally character wins the battle based on the fact that the result of the jackpot lottery for the remaining reserves based on the balls includes a small prize. If set, the variation type (effect pattern) setting process is terminated.

<Step S4611>
When the battle effect start flag is set to OFF (step S4604: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the battle effect already set flag is set to ON (step S4611). That is, the MPU 51 is a battle production for the second special figure reservation (remaining reservation) at the end of the second special figure game based on the entry of the game ball into the first second winning port 315 in the a time saving game state Determines whether is set.

If the battle effect already set flag is set to ON (step S4611: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4612, and if the battle effect already set flag is set to OFF (step S4611: No). , the process proceeds to step S4617.

<Step S4612>
When the battle effect already set flag is set to ON (step S4611: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the RUSH effect end flag for ending the RUSH effect as the specific effect is set to ON (step S4612). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to end the RUSH effect (battle effect) when the battle effect is being executed.

When the RUSH effect end flag is set to ON (step S4612: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4613. On the other hand, when the RUSH effect end flag is set to OFF (step S4612: No), that is, when it is not time to end the RUSH effect (battle effect), the MPU 51 ends the variation type (effect pattern) setting process. .

<Steps S4613 to S4616>
When the RUSH effect end flag is set to ON (step S4612: Yes), the MPU 51 sets off the battle effect already set flag indicating that the battle effect is set (step S4613), and the RUSH effect is set to OFF (step S4614), and the variation type (effect pattern) setting process is terminated.

Furthermore, the MPU 51 executes a process of clearing the remaining pending number counter as update processing (step S4615), sets the remaining pending number counter flag to OFF (step S4616), and sets the variation type (effect pattern) setting process. exit. That is, the MPU 51 ends the management (update) of the remaining pending number when ending the RUSH effect (battle effect). That is, when the MPU 51 ends the battle effect as the display effect when the remaining pending number is not 0 (when the remaining pending includes a small winning result of the jackpot lottery), the remaining pending number is managed ( update).

<Steps S4617 and S4618>
When the battle effect already set flag is set to OFF (step S4611: No), that is, when the battle effect (RUSH effect) is not being executed, the MPU 51 turns on the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state. is set (step S4617).

When the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S4617: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the normal game state effect as the display effect (step S4618), and ends the variation type (effect pattern) setting process. On the other hand, when the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S4617: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4619.

Then, when the RUSH production ends without executing the small winning game (when the ally character is defeated in the battle production), in the normal game state after the RUSH production ends, it corresponds to the second special figure reservation number M. The second special figure pending image as the corresponding display of the number is not displayed, and the first special figure pending image of the number corresponding to the first special figure pending number N at the end of the RUSH production is displayed as the corresponding display ( See FIG. 225(A)). That is, when the RUSH effect ends, the display of the special figure pending image as the corresponding display is switched from the second special figure pending image to the first special figure pending image. This suggests to the player to switch from right-handed to left-handed upon completion of the RUSH effect.

<Steps S4619 and S4620>
When the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state is set to OFF (step S4617: No), the MPU 51 sets the b time saving game state flag indicating the b time saving game state to ON. It is determined whether or not there is (step S4619).

When the b time saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4619: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the b time saving game state effect as the display effect (step S4620), and ends the variation type (effect pattern) setting process. do. On the other hand, MPU51 transfers a process to step S4621, when the b time saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S4619: No).

In addition, in the b time saving game state effect, a background effect (stage effect) different from other game states is executed as a display effect, and it is possible to identify the b time saving game state based on this background effect (stage effect). It is said that Further, as shown in FIG. 225(B), in the b time saving game state production, an image relating to the game in the b time saving game state is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 225(B), the character images "RUSH confirmed with jackpot!!", "Right shot", and "Ceiling chance" correspond to images related to games in the b time-saving game state. Also, during execution of the b time saving game state production, a character image of “remaining 50 times” is displayed as a corresponding display indicating the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed in the b time saving game state.

<Steps S4621 and S4622>
When the b time saving game state flag indicating that it is in the b time saving game state is set to OFF (step S4619: No), the MPU 51 sets the c time saving game state flag indicating that it is in the c time saving game state to ON. It is determined whether or not it is set (step S4621).

When the c time saving game state flag is set to ON (step S4621: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the c time saving game state effect as the display effect (step S4622), and ends the variation type (effect pattern) setting process. do. On the other hand, when the c time saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S4621: No), the MPU 51 ends the variation type (production pattern) setting process.

Note that the c time-saving game state effect is executed in the c time-saving game state excluding the execution of the RUSH effect as described above, but a background effect (stage effect) different from other game states is executed as the display effect. , Based on this background effect (stage effect), it is possible to identify the c time-saving game state as the specific game state. Further, as shown in FIG. 225(C), in the c time saving game state production, an image regarding the game in the c time saving game state is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 225(C), the character images "RUSH confirmed with a jackpot!!", "Left shot", and "Sudden chance" correspond to the images related to the game in the c time-saving game state. In addition, during execution of the c time saving game state production, a character image of “remaining 10 times” (remaining c time saving game number display) as a specific correspondence display indicating the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed in the c time saving game state is displayed.

As described above, according to the present invention, even if the specific condition is established during the execution of the second game rotation during execution of the specific effect, the specific corresponding display is not started. Further, in the present invention, even if the update condition is satisfied during execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect, the post-update specific correspondence display is not started. In this way, when the specific condition or the update condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game rotation during execution of the specific effect, the specific correspondence display is not started, so that the second game rotation during execution of the specific effect is performed. Even if a specific condition or an update condition is established during execution, the specific correspondence display prevents the specific effect from being terminated in the middle, so that the game caused by the specific effect being terminated in the middle is prevented. A decline in interest is prevented.

On the other hand, in the present invention, based on the end of the specific effect, the specific corresponding display corresponding to the second numerical information of the second counting means at the time of the end of the specific effect is started. Thus, by starting the display corresponding to the second numerical information of the second counting means at the end of the specific performance, the display corresponding to the specific performance can be started without ending the specific performance in the middle. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the specific correspondence display not being started.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, in the a time-saving gaming state that shifts after the time-saving jackpot game ends, the second game round executed based on the game ball to the second winning hole 315 as the second ball entering means The second special figure reservation number M as the first numerical information corresponding to the number of the second reservation for the right to execute the second special figure game as the operation is step S1108 (Figure 200), it is set in the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB as the first counting means, and based on the start of the second special figure game for the second special figure reservation as the subtraction condition, special as subtraction processing In step S3806 (see FIG. 209) in the figure data setting process, the second special figure reservation number M set in the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB is subtracted. In addition, in the present embodiment, the RUSH effect as a display effect for the second special figure game executed based on the game ball to the second winning hole 315 in the a reduced working hours gaming state, the effect display process It is set in the variation type (effect pattern) setting process.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, based on the end of the special figure game notifying that the result of the jackpot lottery as a specific condition is out of the time saving pattern stop, it is shifted to the c time saving game state as the game state, and the c time saving game state The second numerical value information corresponding to the maximum number of special figure games that can be executed in step S4211 (see FIG. 217) in the game state transition processing as numerical value storage processing c time saving number counter as second counting means is set to In addition, in this embodiment, the number of remaining special figure games that can be executed in the c time saving game state is based on the start of the special figure game as the update condition, step S3724 in the special figure game control process (see FIG. 208) , and based on the value of the c time-saving number counter after updating, the remaining c time-saving game number display (effect) as a corresponding display can be executed.

And, in this embodiment, the second special figure game executed based on the game ball to the second winning port 315 in the time-saving game state a transition after the end of the jackpot game, variation as effect display processing During the execution of the RUSH effect as a display effect in the type (effect pattern) setting process, based on the fact that the jackpot lottery result is out of the time saving pattern stop, when the game state is shifted to the c time saving game state as the game state, RUSH During execution of the performance, the remaining c time-saving game number display (performance) as a corresponding display in the c time-saving game state is not executed. In this way, when the c time reduction game state is shifted to during the RUSH production, the remaining c time reduction game count display (production) in the c time reduction game state is not executed during the execution of the RUSH production, so during the RUSH production Even when the jackpot lottery result shifts to the c time-saving game state based on the fact that the time-saving pattern is not stopped, the remaining c time-saving game count display (performance) prevents the RUSH performance from ending in the middle. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered due to the RUSH effect being terminated in the middle.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game state shifts to the c time-saving game state as the game state during execution of the RUSH effect as the display effect, the remaining c time-saving game count display (effect) is executed after the RUSH effect ends. Therefore, in this embodiment, based on the end of the RUSH production, the display of the number of remaining special figure games that can be executed in the c short gaming state at the time of the end of the RUSH production is started. In this way, based on the end of the RUSH performance, the display of the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed in the c time reduction game state at the time of the end of the RUSH performance is started, so that the RUSH performance is ended in the middle. Since the display of the remaining number of special figure games that can be performed in the c time saving game state can be started without starting, the display of the remaining number of special figure games that can be performed in the c time saving game state is not started. To prevent a decrease in interest in a game.

In the present embodiment, the one-shot notification effect and the battle effect are executed as the RUSH effect, but one of the one-shot notification effect and the battle effect may be omitted, and one of the one-shot notification effect and the battle effect may be omitted. Alternatively, instead of both effects, other effects such as mission effects may be executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a battle effect is collectively set for the remaining hold of the second special figure game executed for the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the a time saving game state. However, when there are a plurality of the remaining reservations, an effect may be set individually for each remaining reservation.

Further, in the present embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to eleventh embodiments described above are possible within the applicable range.

Moreover, in each embodiment, it is also possible to apply the matters described in other embodiments within the applicable range.

[Thirteenth Embodiment]
As a specific configuration of the present invention, the game machine includes a "starting ball entry section" as a start ball entry means, a "lottery process" as a winning lottery means, and a "display effect" as a specific effect. ”, and includes “display control processing” as display control means, “movable body” as movable means, “movable body control processing” as movable control means, and specific information 'information', 'continuous motion' as a series of specific motions, 'return side position' as a first position, and 'driving side position' as a second position, and An "end determination condition" is provided as a termination condition, and an "end determination" is provided as determination means.

The starting ball entry means is provided in the game area, and it is sufficient that the game ball can be entered. As the starting ball entry means, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, a ball entrance that generates a special game triggered by the entry of a game ball, a first special game triggered by the entry of a game ball A ball entrance (1st winning mouth) that generates a ball entrance (1st winning mouth), a ball entrance (2nd winning mouth) that generates a 2nd special game with the entry of a game ball as a trigger, a normal figure game with the entry of a game ball as a trigger A ball entrance (through gate) that generates a ball, a ball entrance that activates a movable body (electric accessories, feathers) when a game ball enters, and a ball can be entered in a small winning game, and a game ball enters A ball entrance that generates a jackpot game triggered by a ball, a ball can be entered in a small winning game, a ball entrance that generates a time-saving gaming state triggered by the ball entry of a game ball, a ball can be entered in a jackpot game, A ball entrance that generates a variable probability game state triggered by the entry of a game ball, a ball entrance that allows a ball to enter in a jackpot game and generates a time-saving game state triggered by the entry of a game ball, and any combination thereof etc.

The win/fail lottery means may be a process for executing various lotteries. As the win/fail lottery means, if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, a process of executing a lottery to determine whether to generate a jackpot game, a process to execute a lottery to determine whether to generate a small winning game, etc. A lottery process to determine whether or not to generate a per-figure game, activating a movable body (electric accessories, feathers, etc.) with high frequency or high probability From the game state, activating the movable body with low frequency or low probability Lottery processing for whether or not to fall to the gaming state, processing for executing lottery for whether or not to fall from the variable probability gaming state to the normal gaming state, lottery for whether or not to fall from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state , any combination thereof, and the like.

The specific effect may be any effect that is executed by the display means according to the results of various lotteries. As the specific effect, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, a display effect executed by display means having a liquid crystal display, a display effect executed by display means having a dot matrix display, and a display means having a plasma display. display effect executed by the display means, display effect executed by the display means having the organic EL display, effect executed by the display means according to the result of the big win lottery as to whether or not to generate the big win game, and the small win game is generated. Production executed by the display means according to the result of the lottery of whether or not to generate, production executed by the display means according to the result of the lottery of whether or not to generate the normal game, movable body (electric accessory , Feathers, etc.) are operated with high frequency or high probability to a game state in which the movable body is operated at low frequency or low probability. Production executed according to the result of the lottery whether to fall from the state to the normal game state, production executed according to the result of the lottery whether to fall from the time-saving game state to the normal game state, jackpot game Effect executed by the display means in the special game according to the result of the lottery of whether or not to generate, Executed by the display means in the first special game according to the result of the lottery of whether to generate the jackpot game Production to be performed, production executed by the display means in the second special game according to the result of the lottery of whether to generate the jackpot game, jackpot game according to the result of the lottery of whether to generate the jackpot game In the production executed by the display means, the production executed by the display means in the special game when the result of the jackpot lottery causes the jackpot, and the result of the jackpot lottery when the jackpot is generated. The effect executed by the display means in the first special game, the effect executed by the display means in the second special game when the result of the big win lottery causes the big win, and the result of the big win lottery causes the small win. The effect executed by the display means in the special game when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a small win, the effect executed by the display means in the first special game when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a small win, and the jackpot lottery. An effect executed by the display means in the second special game when the result is to generate a small win, and executed by the display means in the special game when the result of the big win lottery is to generate a time-saving game state. When the result of the big winning lottery causes the time saving game state, the effect executed by the display means in the first special game, and when the big winning lottery result causes the time saving game state The effect executed by the display means in the second special game, the effect executed by the display means in the jackpot game when the result of the jackpot lottery generates a jackpot, and the result of the jackpot lottery is the probability variable jackpot game state (the The effect executed by the display means when the result of the jackpot lottery changes the time-saving jackpot game state (shift to the time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends). The effect executed by the display means when it is generated, and the display means when the result of the jackpot lottery causes the normal jackpot game state (shift to the normal game state after the jackpot game ends). opening effect executed by the display means at the opening of the jackpot game when the result of the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot; execution of opening and closing the jackpot game when the jackpot lottery result results in a jackpot. The opening and closing execution mode effect executed by the display means in the mode, the round game effect executed by the display means in the round game of the jackpot game when the result of the jackpot lottery generates the jackpot, and the result of the jackpot lottery causes the jackpot. Interval effect executed by the display means at intervals of the jackpot game when it occurs, ending effect executed by the display means at the ending of the jackpot game when the result of the jackpot lottery causes the jackpot, Production executed by the display means in the normal game according to the result of the lottery of whether to generate the game per figure, and when the result of the lottery of whether to generate the normal game is a normal game Production executed by the display means in the normal per game, production executed by the display means in the normal per game when the result of the lottery as to whether or not to generate the normal per game is out, the movable body is high Effect executed by the display means according to the result of the lottery of whether or not to fall from the game state in which the movable body is operated at a low frequency or a low probability from the game state in which it is operated with high frequency or high probability, and from the variable probability game state to the normal game Effect executed by the display means according to the result of the lottery of whether to fall to the state, effect executed by the display means according to the result of the lottery of whether to fall from the time-saving game state to the normal game state, Any combination thereof and the like are included.

The display control means may perform a process of determining and executing an effect from among a plurality of effect display modes. As the display control means, if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, a process of determining a display effect executed by a display means having a liquid crystal display from among a plurality of effect display modes, and a dot matrix display. A process of determining and executing a display effect to be executed by the provided display means from among a plurality of effect display modes, and determining and executing a display effect to be executed by the display means provided with the plasma display from a plurality of effect display modes. a process of determining a display effect to be executed by a display means provided with an organic EL display from among a plurality of effect display modes and executing it; and a display means according to the result of a jackpot lottery as to whether or not to generate a jackpot game. A process for determining and executing an effect to be executed from among a plurality of effect display modes, and a plurality of effect display modes for the effect to be executed by a display means according to the result of a lottery as to whether or not to generate a small winning game. Processing to decide and execute from among, Processing to decide and execute the production executed by the display means according to the result of the lottery as to whether or not to generate a normal game winning game from among a plurality of production display modes, Executed according to the results of a lottery to determine whether or not to fall from a game state in which movable bodies (electric accessories, feathers, etc.) are activated with high frequency or high probability to a game state in which movable bodies are activated with low frequency or low probability. A process of determining and executing the effect to be performed from among a plurality of effect display modes, and the effect to be executed according to the result of a lottery as to whether or not to fall from the probability variable game state to the normal game state is selected from the plurality of effect display modes. Processing to determine and execute from inside, processing to determine and execute the performance to be executed according to the result of lottery as to whether or not to fall from the time-saving game state to the normal game state from a plurality of performance display modes, big win A process of determining and executing an effect to be executed by a display means in a special game from among a plurality of effect display modes according to the result of a lottery as to whether or not to generate a game, and determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game. A process of determining and executing a performance to be executed by a display means in a first special game from among a plurality of performance display modes according to the result of the lottery, and depending on the result of the lottery of whether or not to generate a jackpot game. A process of determining and executing the performance to be executed by the display means in the second special game from among a plurality of performance display modes, and the display means in the big win game according to the result of the lottery as to whether or not to generate the big win game. A process of determining and executing a performance to be executed from among a plurality of performance display modes, and displaying a plurality of performances executed by a display means in a special game when the result of a jackpot lottery generates a big win. A process to be executed by deciding from modes, and a performance to be executed by a display means in a first special figure game when the result of a jackpot lottery generates a big win is determined from a plurality of performance display modes. Processing to be executed, processing for determining and executing the performance to be executed by the display means in the second special game from among a plurality of performance display modes when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate the jackpot, and the jackpot lottery. A process of determining and executing a performance to be executed by a display means in a special game from among a plurality of performance display modes when the result is to generate a small win, and a process in which the result of a big win lottery generates a small win. In the case of , a process of determining and executing the effect executed by the display means in the first special game from among a plurality of effect display modes, and when the result of the big win lottery is to generate a small win, the second A process of determining and executing the performance to be executed by the display means in the special game from among a plurality of performance display modes, and the display means in the special game when the result of the jackpot lottery causes a time-saving game state. A process of determining and executing a performance to be executed from among a plurality of performance display modes, and a performance executed by a display means in a first special game when the result of a jackpot lottery causes a time-saving game state. A process of determining and executing from among a plurality of performance display modes, and a plurality of performance display modes of performance executed by a display means in a second special figure game when the result of a jackpot lottery causes a time-saving game state. A process of determining and executing from among a plurality of performance display modes, a process of determining and executing an effect to be executed by a display means in a big win game when the result of a big win lottery is to generate a big win, When the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a probability variable jackpot game state (transition to the probability variable jackpot game state after the end of the jackpot game), the performance executed by the display means is determined from a plurality of performance display modes and executed. When the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a time-saving jackpot game state (transition to the time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends), the performance to be executed by the display means is determined from a plurality of performance display modes. and the effect executed by the display means when the result of the jackpot lottery causes the normal jackpot game state (shift to the normal game state after the jackpot game ends) in a plurality of effect display modes. A process to be executed by determining from among a plurality of performance display modes, and an opening performance to be executed by a display means at the opening of a jackpot game when the result of a jackpot lottery is to generate a jackpot is determined and executed. Processing, processing for determining and executing an opening/closing execution mode presentation executed by a display means in an opening/closing execution mode of a jackpot game from a plurality of presentation display modes when the result of the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot, and a jackpot. A process of determining and executing a round game performance to be executed by a display means in a round game of a jackpot game from among a plurality of performance display modes when the result of the lottery is to generate a jackpot, and the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. A process of determining and executing an interval performance to be executed by a display means at intervals of a jackpot game from among a plurality of performance display modes when the result of the jackpot lottery is to generate a jackpot. A process of determining and executing the ending effect executed by the display means at the ending of the jackpot game from among a plurality of effect display modes, and a normal pattern game according to the result of the lottery of whether or not to generate the normal pattern winning game A process of determining and executing the effect executed by the display means from among a plurality of effect display modes, and if the result of the lottery as to whether or not to generate the game per normal pattern is per normal pattern, the game per normal pattern A process of determining and executing the effect executed by the display means from among a plurality of effect display modes, and displaying in the normal pattern winning game when the result of the lottery as to whether or not to generate the normal pattern winning game is out. A process of determining and executing an effect to be executed by the means from among a plurality of effect display modes, a game state in which the movable body is actuated with high frequency or high probability to a game state in which the movable body is actuated with low frequency or low probability A process of determining and executing a performance to be executed by a display means from among a plurality of performance display modes according to the result of a lottery for whether or not to fall, and a lottery for whether or not to fall from a probability variable game state to a normal game state. A process of determining and executing an effect to be executed by a display means from among a plurality of effect display modes according to the result of (2), and a display means according to the result of a lottery as to whether or not to fall from a time-saving game state to a normal game state. A process of determining and executing an effect to be executed in from among a plurality of effect display modes, an arbitrary combination thereof, and the like.

The movable means is provided in the game area and may be operable during display of the effect. As the movable means, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, those operated during the display of the effect in the special game (first special game or second special game), the display of the effect in the jackpot game Those that are operated during, those that are operated during display of effects in small winning games, those that are operated during display of effects in normal per game, those that can move along a straight path, and those that can move through non-linear paths movable, movable along a curvilinear path, reciprocally movable between two positions, rotatable, moving the tip of the movable means along an arc-shaped path around a fulcrum One that can rotate with a finger, one that can change its shape, one that can be combined or separated from a plurality of movable members, one that can be expanded or contracted at least in part, one that has a display part such as a liquid crystal display, and one that can emit light. What is provided with a light emitting unit, what is operated as a production, what is operated as a production in a special game (first special game or second special game), special game (first special game or second (special game), operated to notify the player whether or not to execute a predetermined effect, operated to notify the player whether or not to execute Super Reach, whether or not to execute Special Reach to notify the player of the above, to notify whether the state is more advantageous than the previously suggested state, or to indicate or suggest that the expectation of a big win is high Those that are operated to notify that it is a variable probability jackpot, those that are operated to notify that it is a probability variable jackpot, and after suggesting that it is a probability variable jackpot one that is operated to notify that it is a variable jackpot after suggesting that it is a normal jackpot, one that is operated to notify that it is a short-time jackpot after suggesting that it is a normal jackpot, It is operated to notify that it is a time-saving jackpot after suggesting that it is a normal jackpot, and to allow or restrict the entry of game balls into the ball entrance (open or close the ball entrance) Allows or restricts (enters) the entry of game balls into the entrance that gives the opportunity to execute the special game (first special game or second special game) by entering the game ball. Those operated to open or close the ball mouth), those operated in a special game (first special game or second special game), those operated in a jackpot game, at the opening of a jackpot game What is operated, what is operated in the opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot game, what is operated in the round game of the opening and closing execution mode in the jackpot game, what is operated in the interval of the opening and closing execution mode in the jackpot game, the ending of the jackpot game , operated to open or close a ball entrance (variable winning opening) that is opened and closed in a round game, opened and closed in a round game, and after the jackpot game ends due to the entry of a game ball It is operated to open or close the ball entrance (V winning mouth) that gives the opportunity to shift to the frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state or time-saving gaming state), is opened and closed in the small winning game, and the game ball enters A ball that is operated to open or close a ball entrance that gives a prize ball, is opened and closed in a small winning game, and gives an opportunity to generate a big winning game after the small winning game is completed by entering a game ball. Operated to open or close the ball entrance (V prize mouth), operated to switch the path of the game ball, a launching mallet moved to shoot the game ball, and a game ball A ball feeder that moves the firing mallet into a firing position, any combination thereof, and the like.

The movable control means may be any process that determines and executes the movable mode of the movable means. As the movable control means, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, the movable mode of the movable means during the display of the effect in the special game (first special game or second special game) is determined. Processing to be executed, processing to determine and execute the movable mode of the movable means during display of the effect in the jackpot game, processing to determine and execute the movable mode of the movable means during display of the effect in the small winning game, general Processing for determining and executing the movement mode of the movable means during the display of the performance in the per-figure game, processing for determining the movement mode in which the movable means moves along the linear path and moving the movable means along the linear path , a process of determining a movement mode in which the movable means moves along the non-curved path and moving the movable means along the non-curved path, determining a movement mode in which the movable means moves along the curved path, and moving the movable means along the curved path; A process of moving along a target path, a process of determining a path along which the movable means reciprocates between two positions, a process of reciprocating the movable means between the two positions, and a moving mode in which the movable means rotates is determined. a process of rotating the movable means with the fulcrum, a process of rotating the movable means by determining a movable mode in which the tip of the movable means moves along an arc-shaped path about the fulcrum, and a movable mode of changing the shape of the movable means. A process of determining and changing the form of the movable means, a process of determining a movable mode for coupling or separating a plurality of movable members and coupling or separating a plurality of movable members, and a movement for expanding or contracting at least a part of the movable means A process of determining the mode and enlarging or reducing at least a part of the movable means, a process of determining the movable mode of the movable means provided with a display part such as a liquid crystal display and moving the movable means, a movable means having a light emitting part capable of emitting light A process of determining the movable mode of the means and moving the movable means, a process of determining the movable mode as a production of the movable means and moving the movable means as a production, the movable means to a special game (first special game or second 2 special figure game) to determine the movable mode as a production in the special figure game, move the movable means in the special figure game, move the movable means in the special figure game (first special figure game or second special figure game) Determining the movement mode for notifying the player whether or not to execute Super Reach, and moving the moving means, determining the movement mode for notifying the player whether or not Super Reach is to be executed, and moving the moving means a process of notifying the player whether or not special reach is to be executed for the movable means, a process of determining the movable mode and moving the movable means, and a process of determining whether or not the movable means is in a more advantageous state than the previously suggested state. A process of determining the movable mode to be notified and moving the movable means, a process of determining the movable mode and moving the movable means in a moving mode that expresses or suggests that the expectation of the big win is high, and a process of moving the movable means. A process of determining the movable mode for notifying that there is a certain variable and moving the movable means, and after suggesting that it is a variable probability jackpot, notifying that it is a variable probability jackpot with a higher expected value of winning balls. Determine the movable mode and activate the movable means. Processing to move, after suggesting that it is a normal jackpot, notifying that it is a probability variable jack Processing that determines the movable mode and moving the movable means, after suggesting that it is a normal jackpot, notifying that it is a time-saving jackpot A process of determining the movable mode to move and moving the movable means, a process of determining the movable mode of allowing or restricting the entry of the game ball into the ball entrance (opening or closing the ball entrance) and moving the movable means , Allow or restrict the entry of game balls into the ball entrance that gives the opportunity to execute the special game (first special game or second special game) by entering the game ball (open the ball entrance or closed) to determine the movable mode to move the movable means, determine the movable mode of the movable means in the special figure game (first special figure game or second special figure game) and special figure game (first A process of moving the movable means in the special game or the second special game), a process of determining the movable mode of the movable means in the jackpot game and moving the movable means in the jackpot game, the movable means at the opening of the jackpot game A process of determining the movable mode and moving the movable means at the opening, a process of determining the movable mode of the movable means in the opening/closing execution mode of the big win game and moving the movable means in the opening/closing execution mode, and the opening/closing execution mode of the big win game. A process of determining the movable mode of the movable means in the round game and moving the movable means in the round game, and a process of determining the movable mode of the movable means at intervals of the opening/closing execution mode in the jackpot game and moving the movable means at the intervals. , the process of determining the movable mode of the movable means at the ending of the jackpot game and moving the movable means at the ending, and the movable mode of the movable means for opening or closing the ball entrance (variable prize winning opening) that is opened and closed in the round game. A process of determining and moving the movable means in a round game, determining a movement mode for allowing or restricting the entry of game balls into the ball entrance by the movable means (opening or closing the ball entrance), and moving the movable means Allows or restricts entry of game balls to the entrance that gives the opportunity to execute the special game (first special game or second special game) by entering the game ball (entrance (Open or close)) to determine the movable mode of the movable means and move the movable means, open and close in the round game, and give the opportunity to shift to the high frequency support mode after the jackpot game is finished by entering the game ball. A process of determining the movable mode of the movable means for opening or closing the ball entrance (V winning opening) and moving the movable means, opening and closing in the round game, and entering the probability variable game state after the jackpot game ends due to the entry of the game ball. Determining the movement mode of the movable means for opening or closing the ball entrance (V winning opening) that gives the opportunity to shift and moving the movable means; Processing to determine and move the movable means for opening or closing the ball entrance (V prize opening) that gives the opportunity to shift to the time-saving game state after the end, and the movable manner of the movable means to switch the flow path of the game ball. and a process of moving the movable means, and any combination thereof.

The specific information may be a data group that is set by one setting process corresponding to various movable modes of the movable means, and that allows the movable means to execute a series of operations based on the information set by one setting process. . As the specific information, if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, a task table (driving data 1) for causing the movable means to execute a series of operations by a plurality of processes, a series of operations to be executed by the movable means by a plurality of processes, etc. Task table (drive data 1) for controlling the driving source (for example, motor) of the movable means to make it work, information to operate the movable means in various movable modes in the special figure game (first special figure game or second special figure game) , information to operate the movable means in various movable modes in the jackpot game, information to operate the movable means in various movable modes in the small winning game, information to operate the movable means in various movable modes in the normal game, linear path Information for operating the movable means in various movable modes along a nonlinear path Information for operating the movable means in various movable modes along a non-linear path Information for operating the movable means in a movable mode along a curved path Two positions Information to operate the movable means in a movable mode in which the movable means is reciprocated at least once between Information for rotating the movable means by operating with, information corresponding to various movable modes for changing the shape of the movable means, information corresponding to various movable modes for coupling or separating a plurality of movable members, at least part of the movable means Information corresponding to various movable modes for enlarging or shrinking the ball, information for opening and closing the ball entrance into which the game ball can enter in various movable modes by the operation of the movable means, triggering the execution of the special figure game by entering the game ball Information to open and close the winning opening that gives a prize in various movable modes by the operation of the movable means, information to open and close the ball opening that gives the prize ball by the movement of the game ball in various movable modes by the operation of the movable means, special game (1st special game or 2nd special game) information to open and close the ball entrance that gives prize balls by the operation of the movable means in various movable modes, and the entry of the game ball in the jackpot game Information that opens and closes the ball entrance for awarding prize balls in various movable modes by the operation of the movable means, and information that opens and closes the ball entrance for awarding prize balls by the operation of the movable means in the opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot game Information to repeatedly open and close multiple times in various movable modes, information to open and close in various movable modes by the operation of the movable means the ball entrance for awarding prize balls by entering game balls in the round game of the jackpot game, and 1 of the movable means. Information set corresponding to the motion of all or part of the movable mode, information corresponding to the motion of the movable means common to a plurality of movable modes, time-series motion of the whole or part of one movable mode of the movable means (scenario data, drive data), information corresponding to information (scenario data, drive data) indicating the time-series operation of the movable means common to a plurality of movable modes, all or one of the movable means in one movable mode Numerical information set corresponding to the movable time of the part, Numerical information set corresponding to the number of times of movement of all or part of the movable means in one movable mode, Repetition included in one movable mode of the movable means Numerical information set corresponding to all or part of the number of times of operation, and set corresponding to all or part of the waiting period until the next operation of one of the movable modes of the movable means is started. Numerical information set corresponding to all or part of the waiting period until the operation of the movable means is started, and the number of times the ball entrance into which a game ball can enter is opened and closed by the operation of the movable means Numerical information set corresponding to all or part of, Numerical information set corresponding to all or part of the maximum number of openings and closings of the ball entrance through which the game ball can be entered by the operation of the movable means, Numerical information set corresponding to all or part of the remaining number of opening and closing times of opening and closing of the ball entrance into which game balls can be entered by the operation of the movable means, and the entry of winning balls by entering game balls in the jackpot game. Numerical information set corresponding to all or part of the number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing of the ball opening by the operation of the movable means, and the opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot game, the ball opening for awarding prize balls by entering the game ball is moved by the moving means. Numerical information set corresponding to all or part of the number of times of repeated opening and closing by the operation of , opening and closing the ball entrance that gives prize balls by entering game balls in the round game of the jackpot game by the operation of the movable means Numerical information set corresponding to all or part of the number of times, all or one of the maximum number of times of opening and closing the ball entrance for awarding prize balls by the operation of the movable means in the round game of the jackpot game Numerical information set corresponding to the part, corresponding to all or part of the remaining number of times to open and close the ball entrance for awarding prize balls by the operation of the movable means in the round game of the jackpot game Numerical information to be set, any combination thereof, and the like.

The series of specific motions may be motions performed within the movable range of the movable means. As the series of specific actions, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, a continuous action executed in the movable range of the movable means, between the starting point (return side position) and the turning back position (drive side position) An operation in which the movable means is reciprocated at least once, a standby position (return side position) when the movable means is in a non-driving state, and a maximum movable position when the movable means is in a driven state (the position farthest from the standby position ( The movable means is reciprocated at least once between the drive side position)), and the intermediate position between the standby position and the maximum movable position is set as the starting point (return side position) or the return position (drive side position). is reciprocated at least once, the standby position is the starting point (return side position), the intermediate position is the return position (driving side position), and the movable means is reciprocated at least once, the intermediate position is the starting point (return side position) With the maximum movable position as the return position (drive side position), the movable means is reciprocated at least once, one of the different intermediate positions is the starting point (return side position), and the other intermediate position is the return position. As the (driving side position), an operation in which the movable means is reciprocated at least once, an operation including at least one movement of the movable means in the direction toward the standby position, and a movement of the movable means in the direction toward the maximum movable position. An operation including movement at least once, an operation of moving the movable means in the direction toward the standby position and positioning the movable means at least once at or near the standby position (return side position), and moving toward the maximum movable position an operation of moving the movable means in the direction to position the movable means at least once at or near the maximum movable position (driving side position); An operation of positioning the movable means at least once at a position, an operation of moving the movable means in a direction toward the maximum movable position (driving side position) and positioning the movable means at least once at an intermediate position, movement at a predetermined position Rotational movement of means, rotational movement of movable means at standby position (return side position), rotational movement of movable means at maximum movable position (drive side position), rotational movement of movable means at intermediate position, actuation of movable means Operation of opening and closing the winning opening at least once by operating, operation of opening and closing the ball entrance at least once by operating the movable means in the special game (first special game or second special game), jackpot game operation of opening and closing the winning opening at least once by actuating the movable means in the operation of opening and closing the winning opening at least once by operating the movable means in the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game; moving means in the round game of the jackpot game Operation of opening and closing the winning opening at least once by operating Actions of opening and closing the ball at least once, any combination thereof, and the like.

The first position and the second position may be different positions set within the movable range of the movable means. As the first position and the second position, if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, the standby position (return side position) when the movable means is in a non-driving state, and the maximum position when the movable means is in a driving state. Movable position (position furthest from standby position (driving side position)), intermediate position set between standby position and maximum movable position (position furthest from standby position), maximum movable position among intermediate positions A position closer to the standby position than the position, a position near the standby position among the intermediate positions, a position nearer the maximum movable position than the standby position among the intermediate positions, a position near the maximum movable position among the intermediate positions , the starting point (return side position) when the movable means performs reciprocating motion, the return position (drive side position) when the movable means performs reciprocating motion, the rotational position when the movable means performs rotating motion, and the movable means is enlarged. A position to perform an operation or a contraction operation, a position to perform a connection operation or a separation operation of a plurality of movable members, a position to close a ball entrance where a game ball can be entered (return side position) or a position to open it (drive side) position), the position to close the ball entrance (return side position) or the position to open (drive side position ), a position where a ball can be entered in a jackpot game, and a position where the ball entrance for awarding a prize ball is closed (return side position) or opened (drive side position), and a ball can be entered in a jackpot game. The position (return side position) or the position (drive side position) where the ball entrance that generates the variable probability game state triggered by the entry of the game ball is closed, and the ball can be entered in the jackpot game, and the game ball The position (return side position) or opening position (drive side position) that closes the ball entrance that generates a time-saving gaming state triggered by the entry of the ball, and the ball can be entered in the small winning game, and the game ball A position (return side position) or a position (driving side position) where the ball entrance that generates the jackpot game as a trigger is closed, and a ball can be entered in the small hit game, and a time-saving game state triggered by the game ball's entry. position (return side position) or opening position (driving side position), any combination thereof, and the like.

The termination condition may be any condition that terminates a series of specific operations of the movable means. If the gist of the present invention can be realized, the termination condition may be, for example, that the maximum movable time of the movable means has elapsed, or subtractive numerical value information (subtractive counter, etc.) set corresponding to the maximum movable time of the movable means. ) is 0 or the addition type numerical information (addition type counter etc.) is the maximum value, the maximum number of times of movement of the movable means has passed, the subtraction type numerical information ( subtraction type counter, etc.) is 0 or addition type numerical information (addition type counter, etc.) is the maximum value; The number of times the means returns to a predetermined position is a specified number, and the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) that defines the number of times the movable means returns to a predetermined position is 0 or the additive numerical information (additional counter, etc.) is the maximum value, the specified number of reciprocating motions of the movable means is completed, and the subtractive numerical value information (subtractive counter, etc.) set corresponding to the specified number of reciprocating motions of the movable means is 0 or the adding formula Numerical information (addition type counter, etc.) is the maximum value, the specified number of reciprocating motions of the movable means in the special game is completed, and the specified number of reciprocating motions of the movable means in the special figure game The set subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) is 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) is the maximum value, the player operates the operation means that can be operated by the player, The operation means is operated by the player within a predetermined period set in advance, the operation means is not operated by the player during the predetermined period set in advance, and the maximum movable time of the movable means is set. The operation means is operated by the player within a predetermined period, the operation means is not operated by the player within the predetermined period set as the maximum movable time of the movable means, and the movable means in the jackpot game. Completion of the specified number of reciprocating motions, subtraction type numerical information (subtraction type counter etc.) set corresponding to the specified number of times of reciprocating motion of the movable means in the jackpot game is 0 or addition type numerical information (addition type counter etc.) is the maximum value, the specified number of reciprocating motions of the movable means in the small winning game is completed, and the subtraction formula numerical value set corresponding to the specified number of reciprocating motions of the movable means in the small winning game Information (subtraction type counter etc.) is 0 or addition type numerical information (addition type counter etc.) is the maximum value The subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) set corresponding to the specified number of reciprocating motions of the movable means is 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) is the maximum value; Completion of the opening and closing of the winning opening opened and closed by the operation for the specified number of times, and the subtractive numerical value information (subtractive counter, etc.) set corresponding to the opening and closing of the winning opening for the specified number of times by the operation of the movable means is 0 or added. Formula numerical information (addition type counter etc.) is the maximum value, opening and closing of the specified number of openings and closings for the winning opening opened and closed by the operation of the movable means in the special game (first special game or second special game) is completed Then, in the special game (first special game or second special game), the subtraction type numerical information (subtraction type counter etc.) set corresponding to the opening and closing of the winning opening of the specified number of times by the operation of the movable means 0 or addition type numerical information (addition type counter, etc.) is the maximum value, opening and closing of the winning opening opened and closed by the operation of the movable means in the jackpot game is completed a specified number of times, by the operation of the movable means in the jackpot game The subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) set in correspondence with the opening and closing of the winning opening of the specified number of times (the predetermined number of round games corresponding to the jackpot type) is 0 or the additive numerical information (additional counter, etc.) is The maximum value, the completion of opening and closing of the winning opening opened and closed by the operation of the movable means in the small winning game, and the opening and closing of the winning opening of the predetermined number of times by the operation of the movable means in the small winning game. Set subtraction type numerical information (subtraction type counter etc.) is 0 or addition type numerical information (addition type counter etc.) is the maximum value Completion of opening and closing of the number of times, subtraction type numerical information (subtraction type counter etc.) set corresponding to the opening and closing of the winning opening of the specified number of times by the operation of the movable means in the normal game per game is 0 or addition type numerical information ( addition type counter, etc.) is at its maximum value, an error occurs in the operation of the movable means, and any combination thereof.

The determination means may determine whether or not the termination condition is satisfied. If the purpose of the present invention can be realized, the determination means may be, for example, determination of whether or not the maximum movable time of the movable means has passed, and subtractive numerical information set corresponding to the maximum movable time of the movable means. Determination of whether (subtraction type counter, etc.) is 0 or addition type numerical information (addition type counter, etc.) is the maximum value, determination of whether the maximum number of times of movable means has passed, maximum of movable means Judgment whether the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) set corresponding to the number of times of movement is 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) is the maximum value, and the operation of the movable means Determining whether or not all processing specified by the set motion data has been completed Determining whether or not the number of times the movable means has returned to a predetermined position is a specified number of times Returning the movable means to a predetermined position Judgment whether or not the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) that defines the number of times is 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) is the maximum value, and when the reciprocating motion of the movable means has completed the specified number of times Determination whether or not the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) set corresponding to the specified number of reciprocating motions of the movable means is 0 or the additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) is the maximum value Determination of whether or not, determination of whether or not the specified number of reciprocating motions of the movable means in the special figure game has been completed, subtraction formula set corresponding to the specified number of reciprocating motions of the movable means in the special figure game Determination of whether or not numerical information (subtraction type counter, etc.) is 0 or addition type numerical information (addition type counter, etc.) is the maximum value, determination of whether or not an operation means operable by the player has been operated by the player Determination, determination of whether or not the operating means has been operated by the player within a preset predetermined period of time, determination of whether or not the predetermined period of time has passed without the player operating the operating means, movable Determination of whether or not the operation means is operated by the player within a predetermined period set as the maximum movable time of the means, and whether or not the operation means is operated by the player within the predetermined period set as the maximum movable time of the movable means. Determination of whether or not has elapsed, determination of whether or not the specified number of reciprocating motions of the movable means in the jackpot game has been completed, set corresponding to the specified number of reciprocating motions of the movable means in the jackpot game Determination of whether the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) is 0 or the additive numerical information (additional counter, etc.) is the maximum value, and the reciprocating operation of the movable means for the specified number of times in the small winning game is completed. Determination of whether or not the subtraction type numerical information (subtraction type counter etc.) set corresponding to the specified number of reciprocating motions of the movable means in the small winning game is 0 or addition type numerical information (addition type counter etc.) Determination of whether or not is the maximum value, determination of whether or not the specified number of reciprocating motions of the movable means in the normal figure per game has been completed, the specified number of reciprocating motions of the movable means in the normal figure per game Judgment as to whether or not correspondingly set subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) is 0 or additive numerical information (additive counter, etc.) is the maximum value, winning opening opened and closed by operation of movable means Determination of whether the opening and closing of the specified number of times has been completed, and the subtractive numerical value information (subtractive counter, etc.) set corresponding to the opening and closing of the winning opening of the specified number of times by the operation of the movable means is 0 or the additive numerical value Determining whether information (addition type counter, etc.) is the maximum value, opening and closing the winning opening opened and closed by the operation of the movable means in the special game (first special game or second special game) a specified number of times Determination of whether or not has ended, subtraction type numerical information set corresponding to the opening and closing of the winning opening of the specified number of times by the operation of the movable means in the special figure game (first special figure game or second special figure game) Determining whether (subtraction type counter, etc.) is 0 or addition type numerical information (addition type counter, etc.) is the maximum value, completion of opening and closing of the specified number of openings and closings of the winning openings that are opened and closed by the operation of the movable means in the jackpot game Decrease numerical value information (subtraction counter etc.) is 0 or addition type numerical information (addition type counter etc.) is the maximum value, whether the opening and closing of the winning opening opened and closed by the operation of the movable means in the small winning game has been completed the specified number of times Determination of whether or not, subtraction type numerical information (subtraction type counter etc.) set corresponding to the opening and closing of the winning opening of the specified number of times by the operation of the movable means in the small winning game is 0 or addition type numerical information (addition type counter etc. ) is the maximum value, determination of whether the opening and closing of the specified number of times for the winning opening that is opened and closed by the operation of the movable means in the normal game is completed, and the movable means in the normal game Determining whether or not the subtractive numerical information (subtractive counter, etc.) set corresponding to the opening and closing of the winning opening a specified number of times by the action is 0 or the additive numerical information (additional counter, etc.) is the maximum value; Determining whether an error has occurred in the operation of the movable means, any combination thereof, and the like.

By the way, a game machine is provided with a movable body that is driven in various games. The movable body is, for example, a special game that notifies the result of a jackpot lottery that is executed when a game ball enters a winning opening, or a jackpot game that is executed when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot. It is movable in a movable configuration including continuous motion such as reciprocating motion. In addition, in the control of the movable body, it is desired to perform the motion control and end control of the movable body with more efficient control.

In the game machine, the movable body is moved while the display effect is being executed on the display means. As the movable mode of the movable body, a plurality of movable modes are provided in order to improve interest. The movable form referred to here includes the movement trajectory of the movable body, the number of times of movement, the amount of movement, etc., and naturally also includes combinations thereof. Then, the movable body performs various operations between a predetermined initial position and a movable limit position. At this time, the control unit that controls the movable body is required to control the movable body more preferably by sharing control and data for common movable modes in order to simplify control and reduce the amount of data. there is As a result, the amount of drive data used for one movable mode can be reduced, so not only can the load on the memory be reduced, but also the number of times the drive data is read out and temporarily stored (set) when the movable body is operated ( control load) is reduced. Then, when the movable bodies are operated based on the common drive data, after all the control processing based on the common drive data is completed, the following motions of the movable bodies are individually controlled according to each movable mode. The next motion of the movable body is executed based on the set drive data.

However, even in the case of executing a common movable mode, there are cases where the end conditions and end timing for ending the common movable mode and transitioning to the next action differ depending on the movable mode to be executed. For this reason, in the conventional movable body control, end control of a predetermined movable mode and transition control to the next motion cannot be performed efficiently.

On the other hand, an object of the present invention is to efficiently perform end control of a predetermined movable mode and transition control to the next motion.

Specifically, in the game machine, for example, during the execution of the display effect on the display means in various games, the performance performance is enhanced by moving the performance accessory, which is a type of movable body, and the interest in the game is improved. is planned. For example, the movable body is driven during execution of the display effect on the display means to suggest that it develops into a super reach (SP reach) or a special reach (SPSP reach) in a special game, and a special game After notifying that it is a normal jackpot, it is driven to suggest that it is a probability variable jackpot in the special game or the jackpot game executed after the special game is finished. In this case, after continuous motion such as a reciprocating motion, the movable body performs an action of notifying the player that is advantageous to the player or an action of notifying the player that is disadvantageous according to the content of the subsequent notification. (or the movable body is not operated).

In addition, in the control of a performance accessory, which is a type of movable body, when the movable body is moved in one movable mode determined from a plurality of movable modes, common actions in those movable modes (for example, the above-mentioned A single common drive data (see FIG. 269) is utilized for continuous motions such as reciprocating motions). This drive data is stored in the ROM, read from the ROM corresponding to the common operation of the movable body in various movable modes, set (temporarily stored) in the RAM by one setting process, and is set (temporarily stored) in the RAM by one setting process. A group of data for executing a common continuous motion of the movable body by a plurality of processes according to the information set in . Specifically, the drive data in this embodiment controls the stepping motor to execute three types of reciprocating motions with different motion amounts and motion trajectories of the movable body as continuous motions common to a plurality of movable modes. It is set as a task table, and by sequentially executing the processing defined by this task table, the movable body gradually advances from the upper part of the display means toward the center part while performing reciprocating motion, and then returns to the initial position. A continuous operation is performed. In this way, by setting one common drive data for a common continuous operation in a plurality of movable modes, the amount of drive data used for one movable mode can be reduced. Not only can the memory load be reduced, but also the control load such as readout of drive data from the ROM and setting (temporary storage) in the RAM when operating the movable body can be reduced. Then, when the movable bodies are operated based on the common drive data, after all the control processing based on the common drive data is completed, the following motions of the movable bodies are individually controlled according to each movable mode. The next motion of the movable body is executed based on the set drive data.

On the other hand, the operation of the operation button 20 by the player may be valid during a predetermined period set during the execution period of the continuous movement of the movable body. In this case as well, the drive that is individually set for the motion of the movable body after all the control processing based on the common drive pattern data is completed, not at the timing when the operation button 20 is operated. The next motion of the movable body is executed based on the pattern data.

However, the timing at which the operation button 20 is operated in the predetermined period in which the operation on the operation button 20 is valid is not uniform and is indefinite. Therefore, the time from the operation of the operation button 20 to the end of the control processing of the movable body based on the common drive data is not uniform and is indefinite. In other words, after the operation button 20 is operated to satisfy the end determination condition for the common continuous motion in the plurality of movable modes, the end control of the movable body for the common continuous motion may not be executed immediately. Therefore, the time until the start of the next motion executed after the common motion of the movable body is uneven, so that the motion transition of the movable body from the common continuous motion to the next motion can be performed smoothly. sometimes not. As a result, the player may feel uncomfortable that the movement of the movable body cannot be smoothly performed. In particular, for example, when the operation button 20 is operated immediately after the start of a predetermined period in which the operation of the operation button 20 is valid, the movable position is lower than when the operation button 20 is operated immediately before the end of the predetermined period. Since it takes a long time until the next action is executed by the body, and the player cannot move to the next action immediately after the operation button 20 is operated, the player cannot immediately move to the next action after the operation button 20 is operated. It is easy to feel a sense of incongruity in not being transferred to the next action immediately. And, as described above, the movable body may be operated for the effect of whether or not to perform various notifications during the execution of the display effect in the special game or the jackpot game. , the sense of incongruity felt by the player with respect to the action of the movable body causes a decrease in the performance effect of the movable body.

On the other hand, in the present invention, when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means, according to the lottery result of the lottery lottery means, the movable control means moves the ball during the display of one specific effect on the display means. One mode of motion for the means is determined. Further, in the present invention, while one specific effect is being displayed by the display control means, the movable control means executes a series of specific actions for the movable means based on specific information set corresponding to one movable mode. .

Furthermore, in the present invention, while one specific effect is being displayed by the display control means, the movable control means executes a series of specific actions for the movable means based on specific information set corresponding to one movable mode. In this case, when the movable means is positioned at or near the first position, which is the initial position side, the determination means determines whether or not the conditions for ending the series of specific actions are satisfied. In this way, when the display control means is displaying one specific effect, the movable control means executes a series of specific actions for the movable means based on the specific information set corresponding to one movable mode, When the movable means is positioned at or near the first position, which is the initial position side, the determination means determines whether or not the conditions for ending the series of specific actions are satisfied, thereby controlling the movement based on the specific information. In a series of specific operations of the movable means by the means, each time the movable means is positioned at or near the first position on the initial position side by the movable control means, the judging means judges whether or not the termination condition is established. be done. Further, in the present invention, when the determination means determines that the termination condition is satisfied in a series of specific operations of the movable means by the movable control means based on the specific information, the termination means determines the position at or near the first position. The movement of the moving means is stopped, and the series of specific operations is terminated. That is, in the present invention, in a series of specific operations of the movable means by the movable control means based on the specific information, even before the end of all the movement control for the movable means based on the specific information, the position is at or near the first position. Each time the movable means is positioned, the terminating means can stop the movement of the movable means and terminate the series of specific actions on condition that the terminating condition is satisfied. Thereby, when the end condition is satisfied during execution of a series of specific actions of the movable means, the movable means can be moved based on the specific information at the stage when the movable means is positioned at or near the first position after the end condition is satisfied. You can stop to end a series of specific actions. As a result, when it is determined that the conditions for terminating the series of specific actions are met, the series of specific actions of the movable means can be immediately terminated, so that the end control of the movable means can be performed smoothly. can. Therefore, in the present invention, since a series of specific actions of the movable means can smoothly transition to the next action, the player does not feel uncomfortable after it is determined that the conditions for ending the series of specific actions are satisfied. , can terminate a series of specific motions of the movable means. Therefore, when another individual motion is subsequently executed after the series of specific motions of the movable means is completed, the series of specific motions can be smoothly transitioned to another individual motion. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity when transitioning to action. Thus, even when the movable means is operated for the purpose of performance while one specific performance is being displayed by the display control means, the movable means can be operated without impairing the performance effect.

More specifically, in this embodiment, the result of the jackpot lottery executed by the lottery process triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 as the ball entry starting unit is reported. In the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the display effect is set by the special figure game effect setting process as the display control process, and the display variation pattern command in the display control device 6 as the display control process is received A display effect is executed in the symbol display section 341 by the processing of the case. Further, in the present embodiment, the movable mode of the movable rotary accessory member 37 as the movable body during execution of the display presentation is determined from a plurality of movable modes A to D by the accessory action effect setting process as the movable body control process. , the movable rotary accessory member 37 as the movable body can be moved based on one movable mode determined from a plurality of movable modes A to D during execution of the display effect by the movable rotary accessory control process as the movable body control process. be done.

Further, in this embodiment, one driving data is used for the driving patterns A to C, which are common operations as continuous operations in a plurality of movable modes A to D, and in which the timing at which the end determination condition is satisfied may be undefined. 1 (accessory action scenario data), the movable rotating accessory member 37 as a movable body is moved, and after the operation in the drive patterns A to C is completed, individual Based on the information of the drive data 2 to 5, the movable rotating accessory member 37 as a movable body is moved in any one of the drive patterns D to G as continuous motions. In this way, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved based on the information of one drive data 1 for the actions in the drive patterns A to C, which are common actions in a plurality of movable modes A to D. Since the amount of drive data used for one movable mode A to D can be reduced, not only can the load on the memory be reduced, but also the readout and temporary storage of the drive data when operating the movable rotary accessory member 37 can be controlled. burden is reduced.

In this embodiment, the operation in the drive patterns A to C, which are common operations of the movable rotating accessory member 37 in a plurality of movable modes A to D, and in which the timing at which the end determination condition is satisfied can be uncertain, is one drive. When executed based on the information of data 1 (role product action scenario data), the movable rotation is performed from the intermediate operating position 1 or intermediate operating position 2 as the drive side position to the standby position or intermediate operating position 1 as the return side position. At the timing when the accessory member 37 is returned, it is determined whether or not the condition for judging the end of the motions of the drive patterns A to C, which are common motions, is met, that is, whether the operation button 20 has been operated by the player. It is determined whether or not Then, when the conditions for determining the end of the motion in the drive patterns A to C, which are the common motions of the movable rotating accessory member 37 in the plurality of movable modes A to D, are not established, the motion mode A continues to the plurality of movable modes A. The operation in drive patterns A to C, which are common operations of the movable rotary accessory member 37 in to D, is continued. On the other hand, when the condition for judging the end of the action in the driving patterns A to C, which are common actions of the movable rotary accessory member 37 in the plurality of movable modes A to D, is established (the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is If there is), even in the middle of the operation in the drive patterns A to C, which are common actions of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the information of the drive data 1 (accessory action scenario data), the movable rotating role The operation of the drive patterns A to C, which are common operations of the material member 37, is completed. Then, based on the information of the individual drive data 2 to 5 corresponding to each of the movable modes A to D determined according to the content of the notification, it is possible to move in the drive patterns D to G, which are individual motions as continuous motions. A movable rotary accessory member 37 as a body is moved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, based on the information of the drive data 1 (accessory action scenario data), the drive patterns A to C, which are common motions of the movable rotating accessory member 37 in the plurality of movable modes A to D, are performed. is executed based on the information of one drive data 1 (accessory action scenario data), at the timing when the movable rotating accessory member 37 returns from the drive side position to the return side position, common It is determined whether or not a condition for judging the end of actions in drive patterns A to C, which are actions, is established (whether or not the player has operated the operation button 20). That is, in the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 in the driving patterns A to C, which are common actions, each time the movable rotary accessory member 37 is positioned at the return side position, it is whether or not the end determination condition is satisfied. It is determined whether or not the player has operated the operation button 20 . In addition, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the end determination condition is established in the motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37 in the drive patterns A to C, which are common motions (the operation button 20 by the player If it is determined that there has been an operation), the movement of the movable rotary accessory member 37 positioned at the return side position is stopped, and the operations in the drive patterns A to C, which are common operations, are terminated. As a result, when the conditions for judging the end of the motions of the drive patterns A to C, which are common motions, are satisfied during the execution of the motions of the movable rotary accessory member 37 in the drive patterns A to C, which are the common motions, the operation ends. At the stage when the movable rotary accessory member 37 is positioned at the return side position after the determination condition is established, the movement of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is stopped to end the operation in the drive patterns A to C, which are common operations. can be done. As a result, when it is determined that the condition for judging the end of the common operation in the drive patterns A to C is established, the common operation in the drive patterns A to C of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is immediately terminated. can be made Therefore, it is possible to immediately shift to the next motion when the completion determination condition of a continuous motion, which is common to a plurality of movable modes A to D and in which the completion timing of the completion determination condition is undefined, is satisfied. As a result, after it is determined that the conditions for determining the end of the plurality of movable modes A to D are established, the motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is terminated without making the player feel uncomfortable, and the movable body is moved to the next motion. It can be transferred smoothly. Therefore, when another individual action is executed after the common action of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is completed, the common action can smoothly transition to another individual action. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity at the time of transition to the action of . As a result, even if the movable rotary accessory member 37 is operated for the purpose of effect during execution of the display effect in the first special game or the second special game, the effect can be movably rotated without impairing the effect. It becomes possible to operate the accessory member 37 .

The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 230 to 289, focusing on differences from the first embodiment described above. However, important matters in this embodiment may be explained again even if they have already been explained in the first embodiment.

[Configuration of Gaming Machine 10]
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 230 to 234. FIG. Here, FIGS. 230 to 232 are front views showing an example of the game board 31 of the game machine 10 according to this embodiment, and FIG. 233 is a front view showing an operation example of the movable rotary accessory member 37 provided on the game board 31. 234 is a partially broken side view showing the periphery of the movable rotary accessory member 37. FIG.

[Configuration of front frame 11]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a selection decision unit 21, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, and an illumination portion 27. .

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23 . The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 7) for switching an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later, depending on whether or not the operation button 20 is pressed. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine the operating state (operated or not operated) of the operation button 20 as described later (see FIGS. 256 and 257). This operation button 20 is triggered by the operation of the operation button 20 by the player during a predetermined operation reception period in the special game effect executed in the special game that clearly indicates the lottery result of the big win lottery to the player. It is operated to execute the operation button effect (see FIG. 277) to be executed.

The shooting handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by the player to shoot the game ball. In the game machine 10, when a player performs a rotation operation as a predetermined game operation on the shooting handle 22, a game ball is shot from a game ball shooting mechanism 32 described later with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A basic game is performed by For example, in response to a predetermined game operation on the shooting handle 22 by the player, a so-called left-handed shot, in which a game ball is shot in the left area of the game board 31, and a so-called right-handed shot, in which a game ball is shot in the right area of the game board 31, are performed. can be executed. And, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is encouraged in order to enter the game ball into the first winning port 314 as the starting ball entering portion and to execute the first special figure game, and the probability variation game state And in the time-saving gaming state, the game ball is entered into the through gate 317R and the second winning port 315 as the starting ball entering section, and right-handed hitting is encouraged to execute the second special game, and in the jackpot gaming state, Right-handed hitting is encouraged in order to enter the game ball into the variable winning hole 316. - 特許庁Therefore, the player can prevent the occurrence of disadvantages by performing a predetermined game operation on the shooting handle 22 that is encouraged according to the game state.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game ball launching mechanism 32, a game board 31, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 2 , the game ball launching mechanism 32 includes a launch rail 321 , a ball feeder 322 and a solenoid 323 . The launching rail 321 is formed from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 is directed to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It guides. The ball feeding device 322 has a drive means such as a solenoid, and by executing a reciprocating motion that is a continuous motion of the movable body between the return side position and the drive side position, the ball is stored in the upper tray 23 . The game balls are supplied onto the launch rail 321 one by one. The solenoid 323 causes the firing mallet, which is a movable body, to perform a reciprocating motion, which is a continuous motion, between the return side position and the drive side position. Drive means for firing toward the outer rail 312 . In the gaming machine 10, when the player performs a predetermined game operation on the shooting handle 22, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled according to the operation of the shooting handle 22 by the player, and one solenoid 323 is generated every 0.6 sec. A game ball is shot toward the game area. In addition, the game ball shooting mechanism 32 may be a mechanism for shooting game balls using other driving means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323 .

As shown in FIG. 230, the game board 31 includes an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a first winning opening 314 and a second winning opening 315 as starting ball entry means, and a variable winning opening. A mouth 316, through gates 317L and 317R, an out mouth 318, a variable display unit 34, a main display section 36, and a movable rotary accessory member 37 as movable means are provided.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending out the launched game balls toward the game area on the board surface of the game board 31 . After being shot from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, game balls that do not enter the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315 or the variable winning port 316 are discharged from the out port 318. be done. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315 or the variable winning opening 316, a preset number of winning balls are paid out. For example, the number of prize balls when entering the general prize opening 313 is 10, the number of prize balls when entering the first prize opening 314 or the second prize opening 315 is 3, and the ball enters the variable prize opening 316. The number of prize balls in this case is 10.

In addition, when game balls enter the through gates 317L and 317R, no prize balls are paid out, but when the game balls enter the through gates 317L and 317R, the game ball enters the through gates 317L and 317R. Processing is performed. And, when the result of the lottery per normal pattern is per normal pattern, the game per normal pattern is executed. In this normal figure per game, the second winning opening 315, which is the starting ball entry portion, is opened by activating the electric accessory 315b, which is a movable body. That is, by executing the movable control process for the electric accessory 315b, one movable mode is determined from a plurality of movable modes (short opening of 0.1 seconds, long opening of 6 seconds), and in the game per normal figure , 1, the electric accessory 315b is between a standby position (return side position) for closing the second winning opening 315 and an operating position (driving side position) for opening the second winning opening 315. A continuous motion is performed reciprocating at . In this way, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning opening 315 by opening the second winning opening 315 in the game per normal pattern.

Here, in this embodiment, the second winning port 315 is opened for 0.1 seconds, the movable state in which the game ball entering the second winning port 315 is impossible or difficult, and the second winning port 315 is opened for 6 seconds. Two movable modes are set, that is, the movable mode in which the game ball is opened and the game ball can easily enter the second winning hole 315 (see FIGS. 240(C) and 240(D)). Therefore, in the movement control process for the electric accessory 315b, the easiness of the game ball to the second winning hole 315 is different, and one movement mode is determined from two movement modes in which the timing at which the end determination condition is satisfied may be indefinite, Continuous operation of the electric accessory 315b is executed in the determined one movable mode.

In addition, when the game ball enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 as the starting ball entering part, , a process relating to a jackpot lottery as a winning lottery process is executed. Then, the result of the jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 is a special symbol game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) in which the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is variably displayed. When the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the jackpot game is executed after the end of the special game. In this jackpot game, a predetermined number of round games (for example, 5 times or 16 times) are repeatedly executed in the opening and closing execution mode. It is reciprocated between a position (return side position) and an operating position (drive side position) that opens the variable winning opening 316 . That is, in the opening and closing execution mode, as the movable control process for the opening and closing door 319, the number of round games is determined from a plurality of round game numbers (for example, 5 times or 16 times) according to the result of the jackpot lottery, and the determined number By executing the round game, a continuous action of repeatedly moving the opening/closing door 319 back and forth is executed. In this way, in the jackpot game, since the variable prize winning port 316 is repeatedly opened by the continuous operation of the open/close door 319, a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

As shown in FIGS. 230 to 234, the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, can be vertically moved, rotated, and expanded/contracted by the accessory drive mechanism 37a (see FIG. 235), although the details will be described later. , is operated to provide the player with predetermined information regarding the game in the special game. Here, in this embodiment, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is used to notify the player whether or not a predetermined effect (super ready-to-win effect or special reach effect) will be executed, or to notify the player of whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery will be executed. In order to inform the player whether or not it is a 16R variable probability jackpot after suggesting that it is a 5R normal jackpot or a 5R probability variable jackpot, one movable mode determined from a plurality of movable modes is operated. Further, in this embodiment, as will be described later, various notifications are made to the player depending on the movable mode of the movable rotary accessory member 37, and four movable modes are set corresponding to the contents of the notification. Specifically, as four movable modes, a movable mode A (SP development announcement) that notifies the player that the super ready-to-win effect will be executed, and a movable mode that notifies the player that the special ready-to-win effect will be executed. B (SPSP development notification), movable mode C (variable probability promotion notification) for notifying the player that it is a variable probability jackpot, and predetermined production (super reach production or special reach production) is not executed, or the result of the jackpot lottery A movable mode D (notification of no development, no promotion of probability variation) that notifies that is not a variable probability jackpot (normal jackpot) is set (see FIG. 266).

In addition, the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, may be moved in order to provide the player with predetermined information regarding the game in the big win game. For example, when it is specified that the result of a jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot in a special game, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved as a probability variable promotion effect to notify that the jackpot lottery result is a probability variable jackpot in the jackpot game. may In addition, if there is a reservation of the right to execute a special game, the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the reserved special game executed after the end of the jackpot game is a notification that the result is a jackpot (so-called reservation ), the movable rotary accessory member 37 may be moved in the jackpot game.

In addition, by moving the movable rotary accessory member 37 in the special game, whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery notified by the special game is a big hit or not depending on the movable mode is determined by the special game. It may also be possible to notify whether or not there is a high expectation that the result of the reported big win lottery will be a big win.

The movable rotary accessory member 37 has a shape resembling a flower when viewed from the front in a reduced state, and is arranged on the front side of the pattern display section 341 . Note that the installation location of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is not limited to the front side of the pattern display unit 341, and can be changed as long as the movable rotary accessory member 37 is movable and visible to the player. Just do it. The movable rotary accessory member 37 includes a plurality of plate-like members 370 , a rotating shaft 372 and a plurality of expansion/reduction guide mechanisms 373 .

The plurality of plate-like members 370 have the same or substantially the same shape resembling flower petals, and are entirely made of resin, for example. Of course, at least one of the plurality of plate-like members 370 may have a different shape. Moreover, the plurality of plate-like members 370 do not necessarily have to have a shape that imitates petals.

The rotating shaft 372 is a portion to which a rotational driving force is input from an accessory driving mechanism 37 a (see FIG. 235 ), which will be described later, and extends in the front-rear direction of the game board 31 toward the symbol display section 341 . The rotating shaft 372 is brought into a rotating state by inputting a rotational force from the accessory drive mechanism 37a under the control of the MPU 51, and is stopped by stopping the input of the rotation force from the accessory drive mechanism 37a under the control of the MPU 51. state.

The rotational speed of the rotating shaft 372 (plurality of plate-shaped members 370) in the rotating state, that is, the rotational speed of the movable rotary accessory member 37, is not particularly limited, and may be constant or indefinite. Furthermore, the rotation speed and rotation direction may be changed.

A plurality of expansion/reduction guide mechanisms 373 are radially fixed to the rotating shaft 372 in a front view. Therefore, the plurality of expansion/contraction guide mechanisms 373 can rotate about the rotating shaft 372 as the rotating shaft 372 rotates. The rotary shaft 372 is rotatably supported by a support ring 375 fixed to the elevating shaft 374 , and its longitudinal movement is restricted by a restriction ring 376 . Here, the elevation shaft 374 vertically moves the rotating shaft 372, and vertically moves the rotating shaft 372 by a driving force input from the accessory driving mechanism 37a (see FIG. 235) described later. As a result, the movable rotating accessory member 37 can move vertically as a whole by moving the rotating shaft 372 vertically.

Each expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373 supports one plate-like member 370 , and can slide the supported plate-like member 370 along the radial direction of the rotating shaft 372 . Each expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373 converts a rotational force input from, for example, an accessory drive mechanism 37a (see FIG. 235), which will be described later, into a linear force, thereby moving the supported plate-like member 370 along the radial direction of the rotating shaft 372. to slide. As each expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373, a known mechanism that converts a rotational force into a rectilinear force can be employed. Specifically, each expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373 includes an actuator including one or more components such as racks, screw shafts, ball screws, endless belts, wires, chains, various gears such as spur gears and bevel gears, and rollers. be done. Further, each expansion/contraction guide mechanism 373 may use magnetic force or electromagnetic force.

In this way, in the movable rotary accessory member 37, the rotating shaft 372 is rotatably supported by the lifting shaft 374, and the plate-like members 370, 371 is slidably supported. Therefore, the first rotary accessory member 37 is vertically movable on the front side of the pattern display section 341, rotatable about the rotating shaft 372, and expandable and contracting about the rotating shaft 372. .

Here, FIG. 235 is a block diagram showing an example of the main part of the system configuration of the gaming machine 10. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 235, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is controlled in vertical movement, rotation and expansion/contraction via the accessory drive mechanism 37a controlled by the MPU51. The role product driving mechanism 37a is connected to the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 via the input/output I/F 52. This accessory drive mechanism 37a has, for example, a plurality of motors, a return detection section for detecting that the movable rotary accessory member 37 has returned to the standby position, and a motor driver.

The plurality of motors are, for example, stepping motors, DC motors, etc., and the return detection unit is, for example, an optical sensor, a contact sensor, or the like. Each motor is connected to the rotating shaft 372 of the movable rotating accessory member 37, a plurality of expansion/reduction guide mechanisms 373, and an elevation shaft 374 via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear. Driving force is input to the mechanism 373 and the lifting shaft 374 . The movable rotating accessory member 37 receives the driving force of the lifting shaft 374, and the movable rotating accessory member 37 is exposed from the opening 31A. 231), and the position where the movable rotating accessory member 37 is most moved downward, and the driving position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 231 where the entire movable rotating accessory member 37 is exposed. , and can be moved vertically on the front side of the pattern display portion 341 . Also, as shown in FIG. 233, the movable rotary accessory member 37 can rotate counterclockwise on the front side of the pattern display section 341 by inputting a rotational force to the rotating shaft 372 . The rotational position of the movable rotary accessory member 37 may be any position between the standby position and the operating position, but in this embodiment, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is rotated at the operating position. Further, in the movable rotary accessary member 37, each plate-like member 370 is slid in the radial direction of the rotating shaft 372 on the front side of the pattern display section 341 by inputting a driving force to the expansion/reduction guide mechanism 373. It can be scaled by The movable rotary accessory member 37 is rotatable on the front side of the pattern display portion 341 in both the reduced state (see FIG. 233(A)) and the enlarged state (see FIG. 233(B)).

In addition, the motor driver of the accessory drive mechanism 37a is connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the sound lamp control device 5. The motor driver then controls each motor according to control instructions from the audio lamp controller 5 . Also, the motor driver can acquire the detection result of the recovery detection unit and transmit it to the sound lamp control device 5 . Note that the motor driver may be omitted, and each motor and return detection unit may be directly connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5 and controlled by the audio lamp control device 5 .

In addition, there is no particular limitation on the configuration for vertically moving, rotating, and expanding/contracting the movable rotary accessory member 37 . For example, the driving force for rotating, enlarging and contracting the movable rotary accessory member 37 is not limited to being applied by a motor, and may be applied by another driving source such as a solenoid.

Here, with reference to FIG. 236, the storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform the jackpot lottery and the normal figure winning lottery will be described. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the counter information stored in the lottery counter storage area 412a of the RAM 412, the special figure reservation storage area 412b and the general figure reservation storage area 412c, and is the winning lottery process. Execution and setting of the variable display time of the special figure, execution of the processing related to the normal drawing per lottery which is the winning lottery process, and setting of the variable display time of the normal symbol are executed.

In the lottery counter storage area 412a, as a lottery counter used for executing processing related to a big win lottery, which is a winning lottery process, a big win random number counter C1 used for a big win lottery to determine whether or not to execute a big win game is stored. , a jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the type of jackpot when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and a reach random number counter used to determine the type of win when the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss. C3 is stored.

In addition, in the lottery counter storage area 412a, as a lottery counter, the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the first special symbol display portion 362 of the main display portion 36 or the first A special symbol variation type counter CS1 used for determining the variation display time of the special symbol in the 2 special symbol display section 363 is stored.

Furthermore, in the lottery counter storage area 412a, the electric accessory 315b of the second winning opening 315 is set in the electric role open state as a lottery counter used for executing the processing related to the normal drawing winning lottery, which is the winning lottery process. Ordinary random number counter C4 used for the lottery per normal pattern whether or not, and when the result of the lottery per normal pattern is per normal pattern, when distributing the type per normal pattern (short open or long open) A normal per type random number counter C5 to be used is stored.

In the lottery counter storage area 412a, as lottery counters, a normal winning random number initial value counter CIN2 used for setting the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4, and a normal winning random number initial value counter CIN2 in the normal symbol display section 361 of the main display section 36 are stored. A general pattern variation type counter CS2 used for determining the symbol variation display time is stored.

The lottery counters C1 to C5, CIN1, CIN2, CS1 and CS2 are used as loop counters in which the MPU 41 adds 1 to the previous value at short time intervals and returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. be done. Updated values are recorded in each lottery counter C1 to C5, CIN1, CIN2, CS1, CS1, execution of processing related to the jackpot lottery, which is a lottery lottery process, setting of the fluctuation display time of the special figure, and jackpot type and loss It is referenced by the MPU 41 when setting the type, executing the process related to the jackpot lottery which is the winning lottery process, setting the variable display time of the normal pattern, setting the type per normal pattern, and the like.

The special figure reservation storage area 412b includes a first special figure reservation storage area REA, a second special figure reservation storage area REB and a special figure execution area AE. The first special figure reservation storage area REA includes a first reservation area REA1, a second reservation area REA2, a third reservation area REA3, a fourth reservation area REA4, and a first special figure reservation number storage area NAA. The second special figure reservation storage area REB includes a first reservation area REB1, a second reservation area REB2, a third reservation area REB3, a fourth reservation area REB4, and a second special figure reservation number storage area NAB.

Then, when the game ball enters the first winning hole 314 as the starting ball entering section, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the special figure fluctuation type counter stored in the RAM 412 Information corresponding to CS1 is acquired as special figure success or failure information used in the jackpot lottery, and stored in any of the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA. Also, when the game ball enters the second winning hole 315 as the starting ball entering section, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the special figure fluctuation type counter stored in the RAM 412 Information corresponding to CS1 is acquired as special figure success/failure information used in the jackpot lottery, and stored in any one of the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB. In addition, corresponding to each of the first special figure reservation storage area REA and the second special figure reservation storage area REB, the lottery counter storage area 412a (jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3 and special figure fluctuation type counter CS1, etc.) may be provided separately.

Thus, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3, the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1 is the first reservation area REA1 to the first special figure reservation storage area REA. 4 reserved area REA4, and stored in one of the first reserved area REB1 to fourth reserved area REB4 of the second special figure reserved storage area REB.

Therefore, the special features stored in the first reserved area REA1 to fourth reserved area REA4 of the first special figure reserved storage area REA and the first reserved area REB1 to fourth reserved area REB4 of the second special figure reserved storage area REB In addition to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game executed based on the figure success/failure information, the special symbol (symbol display part 341 It is possible to determine in advance the fluctuation display time (special figure fluctuation pattern) for the decoration pattern in).

Specifically, when the game ball enters the first winning hole 314 as the starting ball entering section, the special figure success or failure information is the first reservation area REA1 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA, the second reservation area REA2 , the third reservation area REA3, and the fourth reservation area REA4 in order of priority. In the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA, the number in which the special figure propriety information is stored among the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 is stored as the first special figure reservation number N.

In addition, when the game ball enters the second winning hole 315 as the starting ball entering section, the special figure winning information is the first reservation area REB1, the second reservation area REB2, the second reservation area REB2 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB. It is stored in an empty area in the order of priority of the 3rd reservation area REB3 and the 4th reservation area REB4. In the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB, the number in which the special figure propriety information is stored among the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 is stored as the second special figure reservation number M.

That is, in the gaming machine 10, the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA, and the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB With a total of 8 storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of reservations, it is possible to reserve up to 4 pieces of special prize winning information as a winning history to the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315 as the starting ball section. It is possible.

In addition, it is considered as another embodiment that the first winning port 314 and the second winning port 315 as the starting ball entry part are provided with a holding area with a maximum number of holdings of eight in common, and even in this case It is possible to reserve up to eight special figure win/loss information as a winning history. The memory processing of the special figure propriety information is executed by the MPU 41 by executing the processing according to the control program.

The special figure execution area AE is the first special figure reservation storage area REA when the variable display of special symbols is started in the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363 of the main display portion 36. It is a storage area used to move the special figure propriety information stored in the first reserved area REB1 of the first reserved area REA1 or the second special figure reserved storage area REB. Specifically, the special figure validity information in the first reservation area REB1 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB is preferentially moved to the special figure execution area AE, and the first reservation area of the second special figure reservation storage area REB When the special figure validity information does not exist in REB1 and the second special figure reservation number M stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB is 0, the first reservation area of the first special figure reservation storage area REA The special figure propriety information of REA1 is moved to the special figure execution area AE. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the second special symbol game is executed with priority over the first special symbol game, and in the probability variable gaming state and the time saving gaming state which are the high frequency support modes, the game ball is placed in the right area of the game board 31. By executing the so-called right hitting, the second special symbol game is mainly executed.

In addition, the first special figure reservation number N stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA of the first special figure reservation storage area REA and the second special figure reservation number storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area REB When the difference from the second special figure reservation number M stored in NAB is 2 or more, the value of the area for reservation with a larger number may be preferentially moved to the special figure execution area AE Other embodiments are possible. In addition, the special figure propriety information of the first reservation area REA1 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA and the first reservation area REB1 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB may be alternately moved to the special figure execution area AE. Other embodiments are possible.

Then, the MPU 41 performs a jackpot lottery or the like based on the numerical information stored as the special figure propriety information in the special figure execution area AE at the start of one special figure game. At this time, when the first reserved area REA1 of the first special figure reserved storage area REA is moved to the special figure execution area AE, the special figure propriety information stored in the second reserved area REA2 is the first reserved area REA1 , the special figure validity information stored in the third reservation area REA3 is shifted to the second reservation area REA2, and the special figure validity information stored in the fourth reservation area REA4 is shifted to the third reservation area REA3.

Similarly, when the first reserved area REB1 of the second special figure reserved storage area REB is moved to the special figure execution area AE, the special figure propriety information stored in the second reserved area REB2 is stored in the first reserved area REB1 Shift, the special figure validity information stored in the third reservation area REB3 is shifted to the second reservation area REB2, the special figure validity information stored in the fourth reservation area REB4 is shifted to the third reservation area REB3.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated by being sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 637, for example, in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing in FIG. returned to Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated in the same manner as the jackpot random number counter C1. Then, in the first to fourth reservation areas REA1 to REA4, REB1 to REB4 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA1 or the second special figure reservation storage area REA2, the game ball is the first winning opening as the start ball entry part 314 or the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 at the timing of winning the second prize winning port 315 is stored.

The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is two types corresponding to the low-probability mode that is the normal game state or the time-saving game state and the high-probability mode that is the probability variable game state, according to the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area in the ROM 411. is set. Here, FIG. 237A is a diagram showing an example of a low-probability mode validity table corresponding to the low-probability mode, and FIG. 237B is a diagram showing an example of a high-probability mode validity table corresponding to the high-probability mode.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 237(A) and 237(B), the low probability mode success/failure table and the high probability mode success/failure table each have a probability that the lottery result of the big winning lottery will be a big hit (jackpot probability) as the game set value. A plurality of hit/fail tables are provided which are different depending on the situation. The low-probability mode success/failure table and the high-probability mode success/failure table respectively include six success/failure tables corresponding to game set values 1 to 6 in six stages. A game set value of 6, a game set value of 5, a game set value of 4, a game set value of 3, a game set value of 2, and a game set value of 1, in this order, have a high jackpot probability that the jackpot drawing results in a jackpot and are advantageous to the player. becomes.

At the game set value 1, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers with which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 206 (0 to 205) for the low probability mode success/failure table, and 206 (0 to 205) for the high probability mode. There are 821 (0 to 820) probability mode propriety tables. That is, at the game set value 1, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is about 1/318.1 (206/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode is about four times that in the low-probability mode, which is about 1/79. 9 (820/65536).

At the game set value 2, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers with which the lottery results in the jackpot lottery result in a big win is 212 (0 to 211) for the low probability mode success/failure table, and 212 (0 to 211) for the high probability mode success/failure table. There are 845 (0 to 844) probability mode propriety tables. That is, at the game setting value 2, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is about 1/309.1 (212/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode is about four times that in the low-probability mode, which is about 1/77. 6 (845/65536).

At the game setting value 3, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers with which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 218 (0 to 217) for the low probability mode success/failure table, and 218 (0 to 217) for the high probability mode. There are 869 (0 to 868) probability mode propriety tables. That is, at the game setting value 3, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is about 1/300.6 (218/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode is about four times that in the low-probability mode, which is about 1/75. 4 (869/65536).

At the game setting value 4, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers with which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 224 (0 to 223) for the low probability mode success/failure table, and 224 (0 to 223) for the high probability mode. There are 893 (0 to 892) probability mode propriety tables. That is, at the game set value 4, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is about 1/292.6 (224/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode is about four times that in the low-probability mode, which is about 1/73. 4 (893/65536).

At the game setting value 5, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers with which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 230 (0 to 229) for the low probability mode success/failure table, and 230 (0 to 229) for the high probability mode. There are 917 (0 to 916) probability mode propriety tables. That is, at the game setting value 5, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is about 1/284.9 (230/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode is about four times as high as in the low-probability mode, which is about 1/71. 5 (917/65536).

At the game set value 6, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers with which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 236 (0 to 235) for the low probability mode success/failure table, and 236 (0 to 235) for the high probability mode. There are 941 (0 to 940) probability mode success/failure tables. That is, at the game setting value 6, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is about 1/277.7 (236/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode is about four times as high as in the low-probability mode, which is about 1/69. 6 (941/65536).

Incidentally, if the value of the big win random number counter C1 is other than these random numbers for winning the big win, the result of the big win lottery is lost.

Here, in the low-probability mode success/failure table and the high-probability mode success/failure table, it is also considered that the random numbers that result in a big win are common to the lottery results of the jackpot lottery between the same game set values, but that the random numbers that result in a big win are not common. be done. Also, the random numbers for winning the jackpot may not be continuous values, but may be partially or wholly discrete values.

In addition, six low-probability mode success/failure tables and six high-probability mode success/failure tables are provided according to game setting values in six stages, but at least one success/failure table for each mode is sufficient. In other words, the game set values are not limited to six stages. It is also conceivable to provide a plurality of low-probability mode success/failure tables corresponding to game set values in multiple stages, and to provide one high-probability mode success/failure table. That is, it is conceivable to provide a plurality of stages of game setting values for the low probability mode, and not to provide stepwise game setting values for the high probability mode, thereby making the jackpot probability uniform. Of course, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode may be made uniform, and game setting values of multiple stages may be provided for the high-probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 19, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315. In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of two jackpot types, ie, variable jackpot and normal jackpot, is set by the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area of the ROM 411.

Here, FIG. 237C is a diagram showing an example of the distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 237 (C), if the type of the special game is the first special game triggered by winning the first winning port 314 as the starting ball entry section, the random number that becomes the 5R probability variable jackpot There are 10 numbers from 0 to 9, 5 random numbers from 10 to 14 for 16R probability variable jackpots, and 5 random numbers from 15 to 19 for 5R normal jackpots. On the other hand, if the type of the special game is the second special game triggered by winning the second winning port 315 as the starting ball entry part, the number of random numbers that will be the 5R probability variable jackpot is 5 of 0 to 4. , the number of random numbers for the 16R probability variable jackpot is 10 from 5 to 14, and the number of random numbers for the 5R normal jackpot is 5 from 15 to 19.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of the probability variable jackpot in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is set to be the same at 75%, but 16R in the second special symbol game compared to the first special symbol game. The probability of a definite variable jackpot is set high. That is, in the variable probability game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric accessory 315b), and in the time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), the normal game state (low probability mode and electric Compared to the low frequency support mode in which the probability of opening the accessory 315b is low), the expected value of acquisition of the game ball is set high when the lottery result in the big win lottery is a big win.

Then, in both the first special game and the second special game, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a probability variable jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the probability variable game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode). Transition. In the gaming machine 10, the upper limit is not set to the number of times of the special figure game that can be executed in the probability variable gaming state, and the gaming machine 10 is configured as a so-called loop probability variable machine.

Further, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game is shifted to a time-saving game state (low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode). In the gaming machine 10, an upper limit value (100 times in this embodiment) is set to the number of times of the special figure game that can be executed in the time saving game state (the number of times of the time saving game), and the jackpot is set within the number of special figure games of this upper limit value. When the result of the lottery is not a big hit, the normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode, is entered after execution of the special game with the upper limit value. In addition, the special figure game frequency in the time saving game state is not limited to 100 times, and may be other times.

It should be noted that the transition from the probability variable gaming state to the normal gaming state is not limited to when the special figure game of the upper limit value is executed, for example, it may be executed when the state transition lottery (fall lottery) is won. . In this case, until the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed, from the probability variation gaming state to the normal game state (falling) so as not to move (fall), to the predetermined number of times as the minimum number of special figure games to be executed in the probability variation gaming state Guarantee is also possible. Thereby, it is prevented that the number of times of the special figure game executed in the probability variation game state is remarkably reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first winning opening 314 as a starting ball entry portion that triggers the execution of the first special symbol game by winning, and the starting ball entry portion that triggers the execution of the second special symbol game by winning. An individual distribution table is set for each second winning port 315, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the game ball wins the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315. However, it is also conceivable that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same between the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. In addition, the game machine 10 is not limited to a loop variable machine, but may be configured as an ST machine including a V-ST machine, a one-two-kind mixed machine, or the like.

Then, the MPU 41, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the special figure execution area AE, the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are "5R probability variable jackpot", "16R probability variable jackpot", " It is determined whether it is a 5R normal big hit or a loss.

Here, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the 5R probability variable jackpot or the 5R normal jackpot, the variable winning opening in the jackpot game is based on the movable body mode of the opening/closing door 319 which is the movable body set for the 5R jackpot. An opening/closing execution mode is executed in which a round game in which 316 is opened in a predetermined manner is repeated five times. In addition, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the 16R probability variable jackpot, the round game is opened and closed 16 times in the jackpot game based on the movable body mode of the open/close door 319, which is the movable body set for the 16R jackpot. Run mode is executed. That is, in the jackpot game, information corresponding to the movable body mode is set according to the number of round games in the jackpot game determined according to the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process, and based on the information, in the jackpot game Between the standby position, which is the return side position for closing the variable winning opening 316, and the operating position, which is the driving side position for opening the variable winning opening 316, according to the number of round games. is reciprocated by continuous motion at .

In addition, each round game is, as described later, when the maximum opening time of the variable winning port 316 elapses, or when the player performs an appropriate predetermined game operation on the shooting handle 22, the maximum opening time elapses. Since the game ends when the maximum winning number of game balls have entered before, the timing at which the conditions for judging the end of each round game are satisfied can be undefined. Since the timing at which the completion determination condition is satisfied can be undefined, the period during which the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body, is moved to the operating position, which is the drive side position, becomes undefined in each round game. That is, in the open/close execution mode in which the open/close door 319 is continuously operated, at least the first period (for example, the maximum opening of the variable winning opening 316) is set as the period during which the open/close door 319 is moved to the operating position which is the driving side position. when the maximum winning number of game balls enter before the time elapses) and a second period longer than the first period (for example, when the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening 316 has passed) .

Furthermore, since the timing at which the end determination condition is satisfied can be undefined, the end timing of the opening/closing execution mode (jackpot game) can also be undefined. That is, as the execution period of the opening and closing execution mode (jackpot game), according to the type of the jackpot game, at least 5R probability variable jackpot game and 5R normal jackpot game opening and closing execution mode (jackpot game) execution period corresponding to the first period and a second period longer than the first period corresponding to the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode (jackpot game) of the 16R probability variable jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, as will be described later, in one round game in the jackpot game, the opening and closing door 319 which is a movable body is in a standby position (return side position) to close the variable winning opening 316, and the variable winning opening 316 is reciprocated once between the operating position (driving side position) that opens the , but in at least one round game out of a plurality of round games executed in one jackpot game, the movable body A certain open/close door 319 is reciprocated multiple times between a standby position (return side position) for closing the variable winning opening 316 and an operating position (driving side position) for opening the variable winning opening 316, and the end determination condition is established. It is conceivable to set a plurality of opening/closing modes of the variable winning opening 316 (moving modes of the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body) for the jackpot game by adopting a moving mode of continuous operation whose timing can be indefinite.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described later, the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening in each round game in the jackpot game is uniform, but by setting a plurality of maximum opening times of the variable winning opening in each round game It is also conceivable to set a plurality of opening/closing modes of the variable winning opening 316 (moving modes of the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body) for the jackpot game.

Further, in the case of a 5R variable probability jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot, after the jackpot game in which the open/close door 319, which is a movable body, is positioned at the standby position which is the return side position, the jackpot is awarded by the first control. The game state is shifted to a probability variable game state which is a high probability mode with a high winning probability and a high frequency support mode with a high opening probability of the electric accessory 315b which is a movable body. And, in this embodiment, the probability variable gaming state is until the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process executed by the MPU 41 is determined to be "5R probability variable jackpot", "16R probability variable jackpot" or "5R normal jackpot". continue.

On the other hand, in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, the winning probability of the jackpot is low by the second control after the jackpot game is finished with the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body, positioned at the standby position which is the return side position. It is shifted to a time saving game state which is a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode with a high opening probability of the electric accessory 315b which is a movable body. And in this embodiment, the time-saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) is until the player is notified of the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process of a predetermined number of times, such as 100 times. The process is continued or terminated when the player is notified that the result of the big win lottery in the lottery process is a big win before the specified number of times has passed.

In addition, it is also possible to perform lottery processing whether or not to fall from the probability variation gaming state to the time saving gaming state or the normal gaming state in the special figure game as another embodiment. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery by the lottery process is out, it is not shifted from the variable probability game state to the jackpot game state and the time saving game state. In the present embodiment, a case where the gaming machine 10 has three kinds of jackpot types, 5R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot, and 5R normal jackpot, will be described as an example. It is also conceivable to have other jackpot types, such as Round Regular Jackpot, 16R Regular Jackpot.

Further, the reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated by being sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing in FIG. 17, and reaches the maximum value. It will be reset to 0 later. Then, in the first to fourth reservation areas REA1 to REA4, REB1 to REB4 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA1 or the second special figure reservation storage area REA2, the game ball is the starting ball entry part 1 winning opening 314 or the second winning port 315 stores the value of the reach random number counter C3 at the winning timing.

In the gaming machine 10, the reach random number counter C3 selects the type of stop result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display section 341 when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a loss. Specifically, according to the loss type table stored in the loss type table storage area in the ROM 411, after the occurrence of the reach, the final stop symbol shifts to the front and back of the reach symbol by one and stops, and the reach is also generated. The value of the ready-to-win random number counter C3 is set for each of three kinds of loss types, namely, the ready-to-win except before and after the final stop pattern stops before and after the ready-to-win pattern, and the complete loss in which the ready-to-win does not occur.

Here, FIG. 237D is a diagram showing an example of the exclusion type table. In the example shown in FIG. 237 (D), the value of the random number that becomes the front and back reach is 0 to 8, the value of the random number that becomes the reach other than the front and back is 9 to 38, and the value of the random number that becomes completely out is 39. ~238. In addition, the MPU 41 determines that a reach occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in a special game in which a 5R variable probability jackpot, a 16R probability variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot is won, that is, a special game in which the state shifts to a jackpot game state. .

Here, the ready-to-win indicates a state in which a pattern combination of decorative patterns indicating that a jackpot has been won is likely to occur during the period from the start of the variable display of the patterns in the pattern display section 341 to the stop display of the patterns. It is a variable state that In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions of the decoration symbol on the active line in the symbol display section 341, and the display symbol corresponding to the remaining one stop position is changed. be. In addition, during the change state of the reach in the symbol display section 341, a story production process in which a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the degree of expectation, or a game in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the production. A person-participation type operation rendering process and the like are executed. It is conceivable that the variable display in the symbol display section 341 may be hidden, or may be displayed in a reduced or enlarged size during execution of these rendering processes.

The special figure variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 199, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the special symbol variation type counter CS1, according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, the special symbol (symbol display part It determines the special figure variation pattern type (variation display time of the special symbol) indicating the variation display time of the decoration symbol in 341). The special figure variation pattern type (variation display time of the special symbol) is transmitted as a special figure variation pattern command to the voice lamp control device 5 together with the result of the big hit lottery by the main control unit 331 . In the voice lamp control device 5, based on the special figure fluctuation pattern command, by executing the display control process and the movable control process, the special figure game (first special figure game or second special figure game) and jackpot game , and controls the display effect on the variable display unit 34 (symbol display unit 341) and the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body. Specifically, by executing the display control process according to the result of the jackpot lottery when the special figure game is started, the display effect to be executed in the special figure game is determined, and the determined display effect is the special figure game is executed by the symbol display unit 341 in the above. Further, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the display control processing is executed when the jackpot starts, thereby determining the display effect to be executed in the jackpot game, and the determined display effect is the jackpot game. is executed by the symbol display unit 341 in the above. In addition, during the display performance in which the jackpot game is executed, the sound performance by the speaker 26 and the lamp performance by the illumination part 27 are executed. Further, by executing the movable control process according to the result of the jackpot lottery when the special figure game is started, the continuous movement of the movable rotary accessory member 37 performed in the special figure game is determined from a plurality of movable modes. Obtained, when the continuous motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is determined, the continuous motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is executed in the special figure game. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the display effect to be executed in the jackpot game can be determined by executing the movable control process when the jackpot starts, and the movable rotary accessory member 37 is determined, the continuous motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is executed in the jackpot game.

In addition, the special figure variation type counter CS1 is updated at least once in step S1402 each time the main processing of FIG. be done. Then, in the first to fourth reservation areas REA1 to REA4, REB1 to REB4 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA1 or the second special figure reservation storage area REA2, the game ball is the starting ball entry part 1 winning opening 314 or the value of the special figure variation type counter CS1 at the timing of winning the second winning opening 315 is stored.

Then, the MPU41, and the special figure variation type counter CS1, the variation table preset according to the result of the jackpot lottery by the lottery process (see Figure 238 (A) ~ Figure 238 (C)) based on the special symbol To determine the special figure fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation display time. Specifically, the MPU 41 is a normal jackpot fluctuation table (see FIG. 238 (A)), a probability variable jackpot fluctuation table (see FIG. 238 (B)), or an outlier fluctuation table ( Figure 238 (C) reference) to specify the special figure variation pattern type. Note that these variation tables may be separately provided for the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. Further, the probability variable jackpot variation table may be separately provided for each of the 5R probability variable jackpot and the 16R probability variable jackpot.

Here, FIGS. 238A, 238B, and 238C are diagrams showing examples of variation tables. Normal jackpot fluctuation table shown in FIG. 238 (A), probability variation jackpot fluctuation table shown in FIG. 238 (B), off fluctuation table shown in FIG. Patterns are associated in advance. Then, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery by lottery processing is "5R normal jackpot", the MPU 41 determines the normal jackpot fluctuation table shown in FIG. Probability variation big hit" if the probability variation big hit variation table shown in FIG. Identifies the type of pattern.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 238 (A) and 238 (B), in the normal jackpot fluctuation table and probability variation jackpot fluctuation table, the special figure fluctuation pattern "01" according to the value of the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1 to "03" is selected.

Here, when the special figure variation pattern "01" is selected when the normal jackpot variation table or the probability variation jackpot variation table is referred to, the display control processing by the sub-control unit 332 varies as a variation type (effect pattern type). A normal ready-to-win effect pattern with a display time of 30 seconds is determined, and a special game effect is executed in the symbol display section 341 or the like according to the normal ready-to-win effect pattern. The normal reach production pattern is a production pattern in which the final individual production type in the special game production is the normal reach production.

Furthermore, when the special figure variation pattern "01" is selected when the normal jackpot variation table or the probability variable jackpot variation table is referred to, the movable control processing by the sub-control unit 332 causes normal reach as a display effect in the symbol display unit 341. As the movable mode of the movable rotary accessory member 37 when the performance corresponding to the performance pattern is executed, the movable mode C (see FIG. 266 (C)) as a continuous operation to notify that it is a variable probability jackpot or the normal jackpot A movable mode D (see FIG. 266(D)) is determined as a continuous operation to notify that there is a certain state, and during the execution of the production corresponding to the normal reach production pattern in the pattern display section 341, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is movable. It is operated in mode C (see FIG. 266(C)) or movable mode D (see FIG. 266(D)).

In addition, when the special figure variation pattern "02" is selected when the normal jackpot variation table or the probability variable jackpot variation table is referred to, the display control processing by the sub-control unit 332 causes the voice lamp control device 5 to change the variation type (effect A super ready-to-win effect pattern having a variable display time of 60 seconds is determined as the pattern type), and a special game effect is executed in accordance with the super ready-to-win effect pattern in the pattern display section 341 or the like. The super reach production pattern is a production pattern in which the final individual production type in the special game production is the super reach production.

Furthermore, when the special figure variation pattern "02" is selected when the normal jackpot variation table or the probability variable jackpot variation table is referred to, the movable control processing by the sub-control unit 332 causes the super display effect in the symbol display unit 341. As the movable mode of the movable rotating accessory member 37 when the performance corresponding to the reach performance pattern is executed, the movable mode A (see FIG. 266 (A)) as a continuous operation for notifying that the development to the super reach performance is performed. , movable mode C (see FIG. 266 (C)) as a continuous action to announce that it is a variable probability jackpot, or movable mode D (see FIG. 266 (D)) as a continuous action to announce that it is a normal jackpot. During the execution of the effect corresponding to the super ready-to-win effect pattern in the pattern display unit 341, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved to the movable mode A (see FIG. 266 (A)) and the movable mode C (see FIG. 266 ( C)) or in movable mode D (see FIG. 266(D)).

Furthermore, when the special figure variation pattern "03" is selected when the normal jackpot variation table or the probability variable jackpot variation table is referred to, the display control processing by the sub-control unit 332 causes the variation display time as the variation type (effect pattern) is the longest 90s, and a special game effect is executed in the symbol display section 341 or the like according to the special reach effect pattern. The special reach production pattern is a production pattern in which the final individual production type in the special game production is the special reach production.

In addition, when the special figure variation pattern "03" is selected when the normal jackpot variation table or the probability variable jackpot variation table is referred to, the movable control processing by the sub-control unit 332 causes a special display effect on the symbol display unit 341. As the movable mode of the movable rotating accessory member 37 when the performance corresponding to the reach performance pattern is executed, the movable mode A (see FIG. 266 (A)) as a continuous operation for notifying that the development to the super reach performance is performed. , Moving mode B (see FIG. 266 (A)) as a continuous action to notify that it will develop into a special reach effect, and moving mode C (see FIG. 266 (C)) to notify that it is a variable probability jackpot ) or as a continuous operation to announce that it is a normal jackpot, the movable mode D (see FIG. 266 (D)) is determined, and during the execution of the effect corresponding to the super ready-to-win effect pattern in the symbol display section 341, the movable The rotating accessory member 37 has a movable mode A (see FIG. 266 (A)), a movable mode B (see FIG. 266 (B)), a movable mode C (see FIG. 266 (C)) or a movable mode D (see FIG. H.266(D)).

As shown in FIG. 238(C), the lost variation table corresponds to the stop display type of the decorative symbol at the time of loss determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3 (front-rear out-of-reach, reach other than front-rear out-of-order, complete loss). Then, the correspondence relationship between the special figure variation type counter CS1 and the special figure variation pattern is defined. More specifically, if the stop display type at the time of deviation is a reach other than the front-rear out reach or the front-rear out reach, any of the special figure fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" according to the value of the special figure fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected. Then, if any of the special figure variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected when the off variation table is referred to, when the above-mentioned normal jackpot variation table or probability variation jackpot variation table is referred to Special figure As in the case where any one of the variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected, the movable control process by the sub-control unit 332 selects the special figure variation patterns "01" to "03" as the variation type (effect pattern). A predetermined ready-to-win effect pattern (normal ready-to-win effect pattern, super ready-to-win effect pattern, or special ready-to-win effect pattern) is determined according to the type, and a special game effect is executed according to the predetermined ready-to-win effect pattern in the pattern display part 341 or the like.

In addition, when the special figure variation pattern "01" is selected when the deviation variation table is referred to, the movement control processing by the sub-control unit 332 causes the display effect in the symbol display section 341 to be the effect corresponding to the normal reach effect pattern. As the movable mode of the movable rotary accessory member 37 when is executed, the movable mode D (see FIG. 266 (D)) is determined as a continuous action to notify that the super reach effect will not be developed, and the symbol display section 341 During the execution of the production corresponding to the normal reach production pattern in , the movable rotary accessory member 37 is operated in the movable mode D (see FIG. 266 (D)).

Also, when the special figure variation pattern "02" is selected when the deviation variation table is referred to, the movement control processing by the sub-control unit 332 corresponds to the super reach effect pattern as the display effect on the symbol display unit 341. As a movable mode of the movable rotating accessory member 37 when the performance is executed, a movable mode A (see FIG. 266 (A)) as a continuous operation to notify that it will develop into a super reach performance, and a special reach performance. Movable mode D (see FIG. 266(D)) is determined as a continuous operation for notifying that the movable rotary accessory member 37 is not activated. , movable mode A (see FIG. 266(A)) and movable mode D (see FIG. 266(D)).

Also, when the special figure variation pattern "03" is selected when the deviation variation table is referred to, the movement control processing by the sub-control unit 332 corresponds to the special reach effect pattern as the display effect on the symbol display unit 341. As a movable mode of the movable rotating accessory member 37 when the performance is executed, a movable mode A (see FIG. 266 (A)) as a continuous operation to notify that it will develop into a super reach performance, and a special reach performance. Movable mode B (see FIG. 266(B)) is determined as a continuous operation to announce that the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moving during the execution of the production corresponding to the normal reach production pattern on the pattern display unit 341. , movable mode A (see FIG. 266(A)) and movable mode B (see FIG. 266(B)).

On the other hand, when the stop display type at the time of deviation is completely out, either the special figure variation pattern "04" or "05" is selected according to the value of the special figure variation type counter CS1. In addition, when the special figure fluctuation pattern "04" is selected, the display control processing by the sub-control unit 332 causes the change type (production pattern type) to be a non-reach production pattern (7 seconds non-reach production) with a fluctuation display time of 7 s. pattern) is determined, and a special figure game effect is executed according to the 7-second non-reach effect pattern in the symbol display unit 341 and the like. Also, when the special figure variation pattern "05" is selected, the display control processing by the sub-control unit 332 causes the variation type (production pattern type) to be a non-reach production pattern (10 seconds non-reach production pattern) is determined, and a special figure game effect is executed according to the 10-second non-reach effect pattern in the symbol display section 341 or the like. In addition, when the stop display type at the time of detachment is complete detachment, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is not moved.

For example, in the game machine 10, as the variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the special figure variation pattern "04", the variation display of the decoration pattern is not accompanied by the advance notice effect such as the display of the character, the message, etc. Variation display of the stop-displayed outlier pattern is executed. In addition, in the game machine 10, as a variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the special figure variation pattern "05", the variation display of the decoration pattern is accompanied by an advance notice effect such as displaying a character, a message, etc. Variation display of the displayed outlier pattern is performed. In addition, when the variation display at the time of loss corresponding to the special figure variation pattern "05" is performed, a player participation type operation effect reflecting the operation of the operation button 20 by the player may be executed as a notice effect. be.

In addition, the type of special figure variation pattern is not limited to the example shown in Figure 238 (A), Figure 238 (B) and Figure 238 (C).

For example, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of normal reach effects with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as normal reach effects executed in the normal reach effect pattern corresponding to the special figure variation pattern "01", and a selection is made from among them. Any normal reach effect is executed.

Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of super ready-to-win effects with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as super ready-to-win effects to be executed in the super ready-to-win effect pattern corresponding to the special figure variation pattern "02". Any super reach effect selected from is executed. The super reach effect is a reach effect with a longer fluctuation time than the normal reach effect, and the probability (expectation) that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is higher than the normal reach effect, and the jackpot is won more than the special reach effect. Executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation) is low.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of special reach effects with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as the special reach effects executed in the special reach effect pattern corresponding to the special figure variation pattern "03". Any special reach effect selected from is executed. The special ready-to-win effect is a ready-to-win effect with a longer fluctuation time than the normal ready-to-win effect, and is an effect developed from, for example, the normal ready-to-win effect or the super ready-to-win effect. The special reach effect is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation) of winning the jackpot is higher than in the normal reach effect and the special reach effect.

In addition, the effect pattern corresponding to the special figure variation pattern includes an operation effect in which the operation status of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect, for example, a single operation effect in which a single operation is reflected in the effect, and an operation button by the player. A player-participation type operation effect such as a repeated hitting operation effect in which the continuous hitting operation of 20 is reflected in the effect, and a long-pressing operation effect in which the long-pressing operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect may be included.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, a one-shot operation effect is executed when notifying the player whether or not the 16R probability variable jackpot is achieved. Specifically, as the movable mode of the movable rotary accessory member 37 to notify that it is a 16R variable variable jackpot, the movable mode C (see FIG. 266 (C)) or the movable mode D (see FIG. 266 (D)) is set, the condition for judging the end of the valid period (operation of the operation button 20 or elapse of the valid period ) is established, the one-shot operation effect is executed in the symbol display section 341 (see FIG. 277(C)).

Then, when the MPU 41 specifies the variable display time of the special symbol in the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363 of the main display portion 36 (the variable display time of the decorative symbol in the symbol display portion 341), A special figure variation pattern command indicating the special figure variation display time and the result of the big hit lottery by the lottery process is input to the voice lamp control device 5.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "5R normal jackpot", the MPU 41 puts "A" indicating that it is a 5R normal jackpot before the special figure variation patterns "01" to "03". Toku-zu fluctuation pattern command "A01" ~ "A03" to output either. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "5R probability variable jackpot", the MPU 41 is a special figure with "B" indicating that it is a 5R probability variable jackpot before the special figure fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". Any one of the variation pattern commands "B01" to "B03" is output. Furthermore, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "16R probability variable jackpot", the MPU 41 is a special figure with "C" indicating that it is a 16R probability variable jackpot before the special figure fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". Output one of the variation pattern commands "C01" to "C03". In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "missing", the MPU 41 is a special figure variation pattern command " D01” to “D05” are output. That is, the special figure variation pattern command includes not only the special figure variation pattern (the time of the special figure game), which is the variation display time of the special symbol, but also information specifying the result of the big hit lottery by the lottery process. Then, in the voice lamp control device 5, based on the special figure variation pattern command, not only the special figure variation pattern (special figure game time), which is the variation display time of the special symbol, but also the result of the jackpot lottery can be determined. It is possible, and based on the variable display time of the special symbol (time of the special symbol game) and the result of the big hit lottery, the variation type (production pattern) displayed in the symbol display unit 341 etc. and the stop of the decorative symbol Determine details such as display combinations. Then, the audio lamp control device 5, based on the determined variation type (effect pattern) and other details, variably displays and stops displaying the decorative pattern in the pattern display section 341, and performs image effects in accordance with the variable display of the decorative pattern. Furthermore, in accordance with the variable display of the decoration pattern, the speaker 26 executes a sound effect, the illumination part 27 executes the illumination effect (lamp effect), and if necessary, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is rotated. It is made movable in predetermined movable modes A to D.

Thus, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 executes a simple process of determining the variable display time of the decorative symbols in the symbol display section 341 based on the special symbol variation type counter CS1 and the variation table. It will be. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably execute the big winning lottery. In addition, since the details of the variation mode of the decoration pattern actually displayed on the pattern display section 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute a wide variety of variation modes as the variation mode. is.

Figure 238 (A) to Figure 238 (C) is shown in the variation table is used in common in various game states (normal game state, time-saving game state and variable probability game state), but the variation table is individually for each game state may be set, and the variable table may be set separately for the high frequency support mode (time reduction gaming state and probability variable gaming state) and the low frequency support mode. Also, when setting the variable table individually for each game state and each support mode, the average value of the variable display time is, for example, normal game state (low frequency support mode) is better, time-saving game state and probability variable game state (high frequency support mode). Also, when setting different variation tables in the time saving gaming state and the probability variation gaming state, the average value of the variation display time may be set longer in the time saving gaming state than in the probability variation gaming state, or in the probability variation gaming state It may be set longer than the time-saving game state.

Here, FIG. 239 is a block diagram showing an example of the general map reserved storage area 412c of the memory area of the main controller 4 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 239, the general map reservation storage area 412c includes the general map first reservation area SE1, the general map second reservation area SE2, the general map third reservation area SE3, the general map fourth reservation area SE4, and the general map fluctuation. It includes a pending number storage area SNA and a normal figure execution area SAE.

Ordinary figure 1st reservation area SE1 ~ Ordinary figure 4th reservation area SE4 is a general figure per lottery executed in the lottery process of whether or not the game ball passes through the through gates 317L and 317R. It is a storage area that stores the normal per random number counter C4, the normal per type random number counter C5 and the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 that are acquired as the normal pattern correctness information that is used.

The general pattern fluctuation reservation number storage area SNA stores the number of the general pattern first reservation area SE1 to the general pattern fourth reservation area SE4 in which the general pattern correctness information is stored. That is, the normal pattern fluctuation reservation number storage area SNA is a storage area for storing the number of reservations of the right to execute the normal pattern game.

The general pattern execution area SAE is a memory used for moving the general pattern right/wrong information of the first general pattern reservation area SE1 when the variable display of the normal pattern is started in the normal pattern display section 361 of the main display section 36. area. Then, at the start of one normal game, the MPU 41 stores numerical information (normal per random number counter C4, normal per type random number counter C5 and normal per type random number counter C5) stored as normal pattern correctness information in the normal pattern execution area SAE Based on the value of the counter CS2), the general figure per right or wrong table (see FIGS. 240 (A) and 240 (B)) and the general figure per classification table (FIGS. 240 (C) and 240 (D) reference) is used to perform a lottery per normal pattern, and a normal pattern fluctuation table (not shown) is used to determine the normal pattern fluctuation display time for the normal pattern. At this time, when the general map correctness information stored in the general map first reservation area SE1 is moved to the general map execution area SAE, the general map correctness information stored in the general map second reservation area SE2 is transferred to the general map The general map correctness information that is shifted to the first reservation area SE1 and stored in the general map third reservation area SE3 is shifted to the general map second reservation area SE2 and is stored in the general map fourth reservation area SE4. The information is shifted to the general map third reservation area SE3.

The normal hit random number counter C4 is periodically updated by sequentially adding 1 within the range of 0 to 299, for example, in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing in FIG. set back to 0. Then, in the general pattern first reservation area SE1 to the general pattern fourth reservation area SE4 of the general pattern reservation storage area 412c, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gates 317L and 317R is stored. be done. In addition, at a predetermined timing, a general pattern winning lottery is performed to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b for a predetermined time based on the value of the normal random number counter C4 stored in the general pattern reservation storage area 412c.

Here, FIG. 240(A) and FIG. 240(B) are diagrams showing an example of a general-purpose hit/failure table. In this embodiment, two types of low frequency support mode normal per hit/fail table shown in FIG. 240(A) and high frequency support mode normal per hit/fail table shown in FIG. is set. That is, in the present embodiment, in the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, the probability per normal pattern in the lottery per normal pattern executed in the lottery process of whether it is per normal pattern is different, high frequency The support mode has a higher probability of hitting the normal pattern than the low frequency support mode.

The low-frequency support mode general pattern per hit/fail table shown in FIG. table. As shown in FIG. 240 (A), in the low-frequency support mode general pattern per suitability table, when the value of the general pattern random number counter C4 is 0, the general pattern per general pattern random number counter C4 value is 1 to 299 If set to off. That is, in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), the normal pattern per probability is set to 1/300, and the operation frequency of the electric accessory 315b is low.

Figure 240 (B) shown in the high-frequency support mode general figure per right or wrong table, the normal figure per executed in the lottery process of whether or not the normal figure per in the high-frequency support mode probability variation gaming state and time-saving gaming state This is the table used in the lottery. As shown in FIG. 240 (B), in the high-frequency support mode general figure hit/failure table, contrary to the low frequency support mode general figure hit/failure table, when the value of the general figure random number counter C4 is 0, it comes off, When the value of the random number counter C4 per normal map is 1 to 299, it is set per normal map. That is, in the probability variation gaming state and the time saving gaming state (high frequency support mode), the normal pattern per probability is set to 299/300, and the normal pattern per probability is set higher than the normal game state (low frequency support mode) At the same time, the operating frequency of the electric accessory 315b is increased.

In addition, the low frequency support mode normal pattern per probability and the high frequency support mode normal pattern per probability are not limited to the examples shown in FIGS.

The normal per type random number counter C5 is periodically updated by adding 1 in order within the range of 0 to 199, for example, in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing in FIG. 17, and reaches the maximum value. It will be reset to 0 later. Then, in the general pattern first reservation area SE1 to the general pattern fourth reservation area SE4 of the general pattern reservation storage area 412c, the value of the normal per type random number counter C5 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gates 317L and 317R Stored. In addition, when the value of the normal per random number counter C4 stored in the general map 1st reservation area SE1 to the general map 4th reservation area SE4 is the general map per, the general map 1st reservation area SE1 to the general map 4th reservation According to the value of the normal per type random number counter C5 stored in the area SE4, the type per normal pattern (per short open normal pattern and per long open normal pattern), that is, the opening time of the electric accessary 315b is set.

Here, FIG.240(C) and FIG.240(D) are the figures which show an example of the classification table per normal figure. In this embodiment, as per general figure type distribution table, low frequency support mode per general pattern type distribution table shown in FIG. 240 (C) and high frequency support mode per general pattern type distribution Two types are set, one with the minute table. That is, in the present embodiment, the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode have different distribution probabilities of types per normal pattern (per short open normal pattern and per long open normal pattern). In addition, in this embodiment, by setting two types of maximum opening time of the second winning opening 315 in the game per normal pattern, the opening and closing mode of the second winning opening 315 in the game per normal pattern (electric role that is a movable body Two types of opening/closing modes are set as the movable mode of the object 315b, in which the timing at which the completion determination condition is satisfied may be undefined. Of course, the opening and closing modes of the second winning opening 315 in the game per normal pattern may be three or more types.

Here, in the case of a short open normal game, the electric accessory 315b, which is a movable body, is opened for a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds), so that the game ball enters the second winning hole 315, which is the starting ball entry part. is executed for a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds). In this short open normal game, information corresponding to the opening time (for example, 0.1 second) of the electric accessory 315b is set, and the electric accessory 315b, which is a movable body, moves from the standby position, which is the return side position, to the driving side. is moved to an operating position. After that, when it is determined that the end determination condition is satisfied due to the passage of the opening time of the electric accessory 315b, the electric accessory 315b is returned from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position. be. In the short-open normal game, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning port 315 because the opening time of the electric accessory 315b is short, and in many cases, the game ball does not enter the second winning port 315.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, in the case of a long open normal pattern, the electric accessory 315b, which is a movable body, is opened for a longer time (for example, 6 seconds) than the short open normal pattern per game, so that the short open normal pattern per game is started. A long open normal game per game is executed in which a game ball can be entered for a long time (for example, 6 seconds) in the second winning hole 315 which is a ball part. In this long open normal game, information corresponding to the opening time (for example, 6 seconds) of the electric accessory 315b is set, and the electric accessory 315b, which is a movable body, moves from the standby position, which is the return side position, to the drive side position. Moved to an operating position. After that, when it is determined that the end determination condition is satisfied due to the passage of the opening time of the electric accessory 315b, the electric accessory 315b is returned from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position. be. In the long open normal game, the electric accessory 315b is open for a long time, so the game ball easily enters the second winning port 315, and the upper limit number (for example, 4) of the right to execute the second special game can be held until

The low-frequency support mode normal pattern per type distribution table shown in FIG. table used. As shown in FIG. 240 (C), in the low-frequency support mode normal map per type distribution table, when the value of the normal map per type random number counter C5 is 0 to 99, the short open normal map per normal map type random number When the value of the counter C5 is 100 to 199, it is set per long open/universal figure. In other words, in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), the distribution ratio between the short-open normal figure per and the long-open normal figure per is set to 1:1. Of course, in the normal game state (low frequency support mode), the distribution ratio between the short open normal figure and the long open normal figure per hit is not necessarily 1: 1 and can be changed as appropriate. The distribution rate per figure is zero (the value of the normal per type random number counter C5 per long open normal map is zero) or almost zero (the value of the normal per type random number counter C5 per long open normal map is 1 or 2 ) can also be set.

Figure 240 (D) per type distribution table per high-frequency support mode normal figure, is a high-frequency support mode normal figure per normal or not in the probability variation gaming state and time-saving gaming state is executed in the lottery process It is a table used in drawing per figure lottery. As shown in FIG. 240 (D), in the high-frequency support mode normal map per type distribution table, when the value of the normal map per type random number counter C5 is 0, the short open normal map per normal map type random number counter C5 If the value of is 1 to 199, it is set per long open wide map. In other words, in the probability variation gaming state and the time-saving gaming state (high frequency support mode), it is set to be more easily distributed per long open normal figure than per short open normal figure. Of course, the allocation rate between short open normal figure per and long open normal figure per probability variation gaming state and time saving gaming state (high frequency support mode) is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 240 (D) as appropriate It can be changed, for example, it is also possible to set the distribution rate per short open normal figure to zero (the value of the normal per type random number counter C5 per short open normal figure is zero).

In addition, the movable mode of the electric accessory 315b, which is a movable body, is not limited to once per normal game, and may be multiple times. In this case, the opening time and the opening interval (interval between openings) of each opening of the electric accessary 315b in one normal game may be one type or a plurality of types. In other words, the movable mode of the electric accessory 315b in the game per normal pattern is not limited to the two types of short opening and long opening described above, and can be changed in various ways.

Normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is, for example, by incrementing one by one within the range of 0 to 99, and is updated at least once in step S1402 each time the main processing of FIG. 241 described later is executed once, It is repeatedly updated in step S1414 even within the remaining time in the main processing. Then, in the general pattern first reservation area SE1 to the general pattern fourth reservation area SE4 of the normal pattern reservation storage area 412c, the normal pattern fluctuation at the timing when the game ball wins the through gates 317L and 317R which are the starting ball entry parts The value of the type counter CS2 is stored. In addition, at a predetermined timing, based on the value of the general pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 stored in the general pattern reservation storage area 412c, the general pattern fluctuation display time is determined with reference to the general pattern fluctuation display table (not shown). be.

The normal map fluctuation display table (not shown) is, for example, a high frequency support mode normal map fluctuation table that is referred to in the case of high frequency support mode, and a low frequency support mode normal map that is referred to in the case of low frequency support mode and a variable display table. In the high frequency support mode general pattern fluctuation display table and the low frequency support mode general pattern fluctuation display table, for example, a plurality of general pattern fluctuation display times are set in correspondence with the value of the general pattern fluctuation type counter CS2. Also, normally, the high frequency support mode general pattern fluctuation display table is set so that the average time of the general pattern fluctuation display time is shorter than the low frequency support mode general pattern fluctuation display table. For example, the partial fluctuation display time set in the high frequency support mode general pattern fluctuation display table is set to be longer than the partial fluctuation display time set in the low frequency support mode general pattern fluctuation display table. However, all fluctuation display times set in the high-frequency support mode general figure fluctuation display table should be set to be longer than all fluctuation display times set in the low-frequency support mode general figure fluctuation display table. may

In addition, a common general figure fluctuation display table may be set in the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, and at least of the high frequency support mode general figure fluctuation display table and the low frequency support mode general figure fluctuation display table One type of normal pattern fluctuation display time may be set in one normal pattern fluctuation display table. In addition, the normal pattern fluctuation display time may be set according to the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X, for example, the normal pattern fluctuation display time may be set so that the larger the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is, the shorter the normal pattern fluctuation display time is. , It may be set so that the normal pattern fluctuation display time is longer as the normal pattern fluctuation retention number X is smaller.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described later, in a normal game, the electric accessory 315b, which is a movable body, closes the second winning opening 315 at the waiting position (return side position) and the second winning opening 315. Although it is reciprocated once between the opening operating position (drive side position), the standby position (return side position) and the operating position (driving side position) for opening the second winning port 315, by adopting a movable mode of continuous operation that is reciprocated a plurality of times, the second winning for the game per normal figure As the opening/closing mode of the mouth 315 (moving mode of the electric accessory 315b, which is a movable body), it is conceivable to set a plurality of opening/closing modes in which the timing at which the completion determination condition is satisfied may be undefined.

[Processing of main controller 4]
Next, processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 241 to 252. FIG. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 includes a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, a main timer interrupt process that is started periodically, and a main timer interrupt process that is executed when a power failure occurs. Execute NMI interrupt processing and the like. Note that the main processing will be described in the present embodiment.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 will be described with reference to FIG. In the main process, the main control process for the progress of the general game, the special game and the jackpot game is executed. In the main process, the processes of steps S1401 to S1411 are executed as periodic processes, for example, in a 4 msec cycle, and the counter update processes of steps S1413 and S1414 are executed in the remaining time from the end of the processes of steps S1401 to S1411 to the next cycle. be.

<Step S1401>
As shown in FIG. 241, in step S1401, the MPU 41 sends output data such as commands set in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. Execute external output processing to send to. For example, in the RAM 412, normal figure fluctuation pattern command, electric role product open command, electric role product close command, special figure fluctuation pattern command, first special figure reservation command, second special figure reservation command, special figure shift command, jackpot game start command, opening start command, opening end command, open/close execution mode start command, round game start command, round game end command, interval start command, interval end command, open/close execution mode end command, ending start command, ending end command, jackpot game When a command such as an end command or a game set value change command is set, the command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5.例文帳に追加In addition, when a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1403 described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, MPU41 updates the values of the special figure variation type counter CS1 and the normal figure variation type counter CS2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the special figure variation type counter CS1 and the normal figure variation type counter CS2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. .

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 sets the prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub-control unit 332 in the RAM412. Specifically, based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a winning has occurred in the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, the variable winning port 316, or the like. to judge. Then, when a prize has been won, a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the prize is set in the RAM 412. - 特許庁At this time, the MPU 41 stores the information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in the normal game state (low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode) when winning occurs in the general winning port 313 or the first winning port 314. The number of balls to be paid out from the general winning opening or the number of balls to be paid out from the first winning opening is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out due to the current winning. In addition, the MPU 41, in the time-saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) or variable probability gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), when the winning of the second winning opening 315 has occurred, the RAM 412 The number of balls to be paid out from the second winning opening stored in the game information storage area 412d is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out from the current winning. Further, in the jackpot game state, when a prize is won in the variable winning port 316, the MPU 41 changes the number of balls to be paid out from the variable winning port stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to the number of balls to be paid out due to the current winning. is added to the value.

<Step S1404>
In step S1404, the MPU 41 executes a normal game control process for controlling the progress of the normal game. In addition, the details of the normal game control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 242 to 244. FIG.

<Step S1405>
In step S1405, the MPU 41 executes a game control process per normal pattern as a movable body control process for controlling the progress of the game per normal pattern which is executed when the result of the lottery per normal pattern is a win. In addition, the details of the game control process per normal figure will be described later with reference to FIG. 245 .

<Step S1406>
In step S1406, the MPU 41 executes a special figure game control process for controlling the progress of the special figure game. It should be noted that the details of the special figure game control processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. The special figure variation pattern command required for is set. At this time, the MPU41, the jackpot random number counter C1 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. Based on each value of the variation type counter CS1, a special figure variation pattern command indicating the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the variation display time is set in the RAM412.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes jackpot game control processing as movable body control processing for controlling the progress of the jackpot game executed when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot. Details of the jackpot game control process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process for controlling the transition of various game states (normal game state, time-saving game state, probability variable game state, probability variable jackpot game state and normal jackpot game state). Note that the game state transition processing of this embodiment is the same as the game state transition processing of the first embodiment described above with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34, so detailed description thereof will be omitted here. .

<Step S1409>
In step S1409, the MPU 41 executes game set value change processing. In this game set value change process, a process of displaying or not displaying the set values or controlling the change of the game set values stored in the game information storage area 412d according to the operation of the set value change operation unit 46 is executed. . Note that the game set value change processing of this embodiment is the same as the game set value change processing of the first embodiment described above with reference to FIG. 35, so detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the game setting value change process is executed in the main process, but the start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, or after the start-up process and before the game ball is started to be launched. A limited execution is also conceivable. As a result, after the game is started by the player, the game set values cannot be changed until the power is turned on next time. can be prevented.

<Step S1410>
In step S1410, the MPU 41 executes specific performance information update processing in the game information. In this embodiment, base information or the like is updated as the specific performance information. Note that the specific performance information update processing of this embodiment is the same as the specific performance information update processing of the first embodiment described above with reference to FIGS. omitted.

<Step S1411>
In step S<b>1411 , the MPU 41 executes display control processing for the performance display monitor 43 . In the display control processing of the performance display monitor 43, processing for displaying the base information updated in the specific performance information update processing in step S1410 on the performance display monitor 43 is executed. Note that the display control processing of the performance display monitor 43 of this embodiment is the same as the display control processing of the performance display monitor 43 of the first embodiment described above with reference to FIGS. detailed description is omitted.

<Step S1412>
In step S1412, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main process this time. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1412: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1401, and the processes after S1401 described above are executed. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived (step S1412: No), the MPU 41 waits until the execution timing of the next main process arrives, that is, at the execution timing of the next main process. During the remaining time until it is determined that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1412: Yes), steps S1413 and S1414 are repeatedly executed.

<Step S1413>
In step S1413, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal random number initial value counter CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal winning random number initial value counter CIN2, and sets the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. clear.

<Step S1414>
In step S1414, MPU41 updates the special figure variation type counter CS1 and the normal figure variation type counter CS2. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter values of the special figure variation type counter CS1 and the normal figure variation type counter CS2, and when those counter values reach the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. And, MPU41, after updating the special figure variation type counter CS1 and normal figure variation type counter CS2, returns the process to step S1412.

[Universal figure game control process]
Here, FIG. 242 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of normal game control processing executed in step S1404 in the main processing of FIG. In the general pattern game control process, a process for controlling the variable display and stop display of the general pattern in the normal pattern display section 361 of the main display section 36 is executed. Hereinafter, normal figure game control processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S3201>
As shown in FIG. 242, in the general pattern game control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the general pattern fluctuation display flag indicating that the normal pattern is being displayed in fluctuation (during execution of the normal pattern game) is on. is determined (step S3201). The normal pattern fluctuation display flag is set to ON in step S3411 when the normal pattern fluctuation display (normal pattern game) is started in the normal pattern fluctuation start processing of FIG. When the general pattern game ends), it is set to OFF at step S3210 in the general pattern game control process.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3207 when the normal pattern fluctuation display flag is ON (step S3201: Yes), that is, when the normal pattern game is being executed. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S3202 when the normal pattern fluctuation display flag is off (step S3201: No), that is, when the normal pattern game is not being executed.

<Step S3202>
When the normal pattern fluctuation display flag is off (step S3201: No), that is, when the normal pattern game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines that the electric auditors 315b, which are movable bodies, are open (during execution of the normal pattern per game ), it is determined whether or not the electric accessary product open flag is on (step S3202). The electric accessory open flag is set when the electric accessory 315b, which is a movable body, is released (when the electric accessory 315b, which is a movable body, is driven is set to ON in step S3511 when the electric accessory 315b is closed (when the electric accessory 315b which is a movable body is positioned at the standby position which is the return side position). case) is set to off in step S3518.

MPU41, when the electric accessary product opening flag is ON (step S3202: Yes), that is, when the general pattern per game is being executed, ends the general pattern game control process. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3203 when the electric auditors product open flag is off (step S3202: No), that is, when the normal figure per game is not being executed.

<Step S3203>
When the electric accessary product open flag is off (step S3202: No), that is, when the normal game is not being executed, the MPU 41 indicates that the jackpot game is being executed. (step S3203). The jackpot game flag is set to ON in step S3906 when the jackpot game is started in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 249 described later, and is set to OFF in step S3952 when the jackpot game ends.

MPU41, when the jackpot playing flag is ON (step S3203: Yes), when the jackpot game is being executed, ends the normal game control process. That is, in the present embodiment, the regular game is not started during execution of the jackpot game.

Of course, the regular game may be started during execution of the jackpot game. In this case, according to the support mode type (high-frequency support mode and low-frequency support mode) before the jackpot game is started, that is, according to the game state before shifting to the jackpot game state, the general pattern reservation storage area 412c Based on the information (random number counter per general pattern C4, random number counter per general pattern C5 and value of the general pattern variation type counter CS2) moved from the general pattern first reservation area SE1 to the general pattern execution area SAE, the general pattern Winning lottery determination is executed. In other words, if the game state before the jackpot game is executed is the probability variable game state or the time-saving game state which is the high-frequency support mode, the normal figure per success/failure table for the high-frequency support mode (see FIG. 240 (B)), Based on the per-universal figure type table (see Figure 240 (D)) and the per-universal figure fluctuation table (not shown), the per-universal figure lottery (per or out of the per-universal figure), the per-universal figure type (long open per per or short Per open normal map), and normal map fluctuation display time is set. On the other hand, when the game state before the jackpot game is executed is the normal game state which is the low-frequency support mode, the general figure per success/failure table for the low-frequency support mode (see FIG. 240 (A)), the general figure per type Based on the table (see Figure 240 (C)) and the normal figure fluctuation table (not shown), per normal figure lottery (per normal figure or out), per normal figure type (per long open normal figure or short open normal figure per ), and the normal figure fluctuation display time is set.

On the other hand, when the jackpot playing flag is off (step S3203: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3204.

<Step S3204>
When the jackpot game flag is off (step S3203: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 is stored in the normal pattern fluctuation pending number storage area SNA set in the normal pattern pending storage area 412c of the RAM 412. It is determined whether or not the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is 0 (step S3204). MPU41, when the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is 0 (step S3204: Yes), ends the normal pattern game control process, and when the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is not 0 (step S3204: No), process to step S3205.

<Step S3205>
If the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is not 0 (step S3204: No), the MPU 41 executes the normal pattern data setting process for the normal pattern correctness information stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 412c (step S3205), The process moves to step S3206. The details of the normal map data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3206>
In step S3206, the MPU 41 executes a normal pattern fluctuation start process for causing the normal pattern display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 to display the normal pattern fluctuation based on the information stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 412c. , End the normal game control process. In addition, the details of the normal pattern fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 244 .

<Step S3207>
When the normal pattern fluctuation display flag is ON (step S3201: Yes), that is, when the normal pattern game is being executed, the MPU 41 indicates that the jackpot game is being executed. (step S3207). The jackpot game flag is set to ON in step S3906 when the jackpot game is started in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 249 described later, and is set to OFF in step S3952 when the jackpot game ends.

When the jackpot playing flag is ON (step S3207: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3209. On the other hand, when the jackpot playing flag is off (step S3207: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3208.

<Step S3208>
When the jackpot playing flag is off (step S3207: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal pattern fluctuation display time has elapsed from the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display ( step S3208). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to stop display (end the normal game) the normal symbols that are variably displayed in the normal symbol display portion 361 of the main display portion 36 .

MPU41, when the normal pattern fluctuation display time has elapsed (step S3208: Yes), that is, at the timing of stopping and displaying the normal pattern that is variably displayed in the normal pattern display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 (finishing the normal pattern game) If so, the process proceeds to step S3209. On the other hand, when the normal pattern fluctuation display time has not elapsed (step S3208: No), the MPU 41 stops displaying the normal pattern that is displayed in the normal pattern display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 (finishing the normal pattern game ), if it is not the timing to make, end the normal game control process.

<Steps S3209 to S3211>
If the normal pattern fluctuation display flag is on (step S3201: Yes) and the jackpot game flag is on (step S3207: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is started during execution of the normal pattern game, Or when the normal pattern fluctuation display time of the normal pattern has passed (step S3208: Yes), that is, when it is time to stop display the normal pattern displayed in fluctuation (end the normal pattern game), the MPU 41 is the normal pattern game The normal pattern is stopped and displayed in the pattern according to the result of the lottery for the normal pattern corresponding to (step S3209), and the normal pattern fluctuation display flag indicating that the normal pattern is being displayed (executing the normal pattern game) is turned off (step S3210). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets on the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag indicating that the normal pattern is stopped and displayed, that is, the end of the normal pattern game (step S3211), and ends the normal pattern game control process.

It should be noted that the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is, in step S3501 of the normal pattern per game control processing of FIG. It is referenced to determine whether

In addition, in the present embodiment, not only when it is time to stop display (finish the normal game) the normal symbol to be displayed in a variable manner due to the lapse of the normal pattern fluctuation display time of the normal symbol, the execution of the normal pattern game When the jackpot game is started during, the normal symbols that are variably displayed are stopped and displayed (the normal pattern game is terminated). That is, the general pattern game is forcibly terminated before the general pattern fluctuation display time of the normal pattern elapses when the jackpot game is started. Of course, the general pattern game may be continuously executed until the general pattern fluctuation display time of the normal pattern elapses even when the jackpot game is started.

[General map data setting process]
Here, FIG. 243 is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the normal figure data setting process performed by MPU41 in FIG.242 S3205. In the general pattern data setting process, the storage contents of the general pattern reservation storage area 412c in the storage area of the main controller 4 in FIG. 239 are updated. Hereinafter, the general pattern data setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Steps S3301 to S3303>
As shown in FIG. 243, in the general pattern data setting process, first, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the general pattern fluctuation reservation number X stored in the general pattern fluctuation reservation number storage area SNA (step S3301), The general pattern correctness information is moved from the reservation area SE1 to the general pattern execution area SAE (step S3302). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the general map correctness information stored in the general map second reservation area SE2 to the general map fourth reservation area SE4 one by one (step S3303). Specifically, in step S3303, the general map correctness information of the general pattern second reservation area SE2 is moved to the general pattern first reservation area SE1, and the general pattern correctness information of the general pattern third reservation area SE3 is transferred to the general pattern second reservation area SE3. It is moved to the area SE2, and the general map correctness information of the general map 4th reservation area SE4 is moved to the general map 3rd reservation area SE3.

[Normal pattern fluctuation start process]
Here, FIG. 244 is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of normal figure fluctuation start processing performed by MPU41 in FIG.242 S3206. In the normal pattern fluctuation start process, the normal pattern display unit 361 starts to display the normal pattern fluctuation, and various commands and flags are set based on the lottery result of the normal pattern per lottery. Hereinafter, normal figure fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S3401>
As shown in FIG. 244, in normal figure fluctuation start processing, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the high frequency support mode flag indicating the high frequency support mode (probability variation gaming state or time saving gaming state) is on. (Step S3401). The high-frequency support mode flag is set to ON in step S2313 of FIG. 34 when the jackpot game ends in the game state transition process described above, and the game state changes from the probability variation game state or the time saving game state to the probability variation jackpot game state or normal It is set to OFF at step S2307 in FIG. 33 when shifting to the jackpot gaming state, or at step S2326 in FIG. 34 when the gaming state shifts from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state.

MPU41, when the high-frequency support mode flag is on (step S3401: Yes), that is, when the high-frequency support mode probability variable gaming state or time-saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step S3402, high-frequency support mode If the flag is off (step S3401: No), that is, if the normal game state is the low-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S3403.

<Steps S3402 and S3403>
When it is the probability variation gaming state or the time saving gaming state which is the high-frequency support mode (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 41 performs the normal figure per right/wrong determination based on the high-frequency support mode (step S3402). Specifically, the MPU 41 is based on the high-frequency support mode normal figure per right or wrong table (see FIG. 240 (B)) and the high-frequency support mode normal figure per classification table (see FIG. 240 (D)). Whether the values of the normal hit random number counter C4 and the normal hit type random number counter C5 included as numerical information in the normal pattern correctness information stored in the normal pattern execution area SAE of the reserved storage area 412c are values corresponding to the normal pattern per It determines whether or not it is appropriate. That is, when the MPU41 is in the high frequency support mode, based on the high frequency support mode general per figure table and the high frequency support mode general per figure classification distribution table, lottery to determine whether or not per general pattern Execute the process.

On the other hand, when the normal game state is the low-frequency support mode (step S3401: No), the general pattern hit determination is performed based on the low-frequency support mode (step S3403). Specifically, the MPU 41 is based on the low-frequency support mode general figure per right or wrong table (see FIG. 240 (A)) and the low-frequency support mode general figure per type distribution table (see FIG. 240 (C)). Whether the normal hit random number counter C4 and the normal hit type random number counter C5 included as numerical information in the normal pattern correctness information stored in the normal pattern execution area SAE of the drawing reservation storage area 412c are values corresponding to the normal pattern winning Make a right or wrong decision. That is, when the MPU41 is in the low frequency support mode, based on the low frequency support mode general per figure table and the low frequency support mode general per figure classification distribution table, lottery to determine whether or not per general figure Execute the process.

<Steps S3404 and S3405>
When the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is per normal pattern by the lottery process for determining whether it is per normal pattern (step S3402 or S3403), the result of the determination is the second winning opening which is the starting ball section It is determined whether or not 315 is a long open/universal pattern that is long open (step S3404). MPU41, if the result of the success/failure determination is per long open general pattern (step S3404: Yes), the long open general pattern per flag indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is per long open general pattern is set to ON ( Step S3405), the process proceeds to step S3408. On the other hand, MPU41 transfers a process to step S3406, when the result of right or wrong determination is not per long open normal figure (step S3404: No).

<Steps S3406 and S3407>
If the result of the success/failure determination is not a long-open normal match (step S3404: No), the MPU 41 determines that the result of the success/failure determination is a short-open normal match in which the second winning hole 315, which is the starting ball entry portion, is short-opened. It is determined whether or not there is (step S3406). MPU 41, if the result of the success/failure determination is a short open normal map per (step S3406: Yes), the short open normal map per flag indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a short open normal map is set to ON ( Step S3407), the process proceeds to step S3408. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3408 when the result of the win-or-fail judgment is not a hit in the short-open normal pattern (step S3406: No), that is, when the result of the win-or-fail judgment is out.

<Steps S3408 and S3409>
If the long open normal map per flag is set to ON (step S3405), if the short open normal map per flag is set to ON (step S3407), or if the result of the judgment is out (step S3406: No), the MPU 41 sets the normal pattern fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation display time of the normal pattern in the normal pattern display section 361 of the main display section 36 in the normal pattern game, with reference to the normal pattern fluctuation display table (not shown). Execute normal figure fluctuation pattern setting process. Normal figure fluctuation display table (not shown) is, as described above, a high frequency support mode general figure fluctuation table that is referenced when it is in high frequency support mode, and a low frequency that is referenced when it is in low frequency support mode Including support mode normal chart fluctuation display table. Therefore, in the general pattern fluctuation pattern setting process, the general pattern fluctuation pattern is set based on the general pattern fluctuation display table corresponding to the support mode type. In addition, since the high frequency support mode general figure fluctuation display table is set so that the average time of the fluctuation display time of the normal pattern is shorter than the low frequency support mode general figure fluctuation display table, the high frequency support mode Then, the time during which the normal figure game is executed is shorter than in the low frequency support mode.

Then, the MPU41, in addition to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern set in step S3408, the result of the success or failure determination by the lottery process for determining whether or not the normal pattern per step S3402 or S3403 (per normal pattern lottery result) And the type of support mode (differentiated high frequency support mode and low frequency support mode) to set the general figure fluctuation pattern command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 (step S3409), and the process proceeds to step S3410 do.

In addition, the normal figure fluctuation pattern command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 241) executed by the MPU41. On the other hand, in the sound lamp control device 5, based on the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command, the effect corresponding to the normal pattern game for the symbol display unit 341, for example, the effect indicating that the normal pattern game is being executed Execute the production showing the result of the lottery for the normal drawing.

In addition, the general pattern fluctuation pattern command may be at least a command that notifies the sound lamp control device 5 of the general pattern fluctuation pattern, and the result of the general pattern per lottery and the type of support mode are not necessarily the general pattern fluctuation pattern command. There is no need to notify the audio ramp controller 5 . For example, the result of the lottery per normal pattern is to set the lottery result command per normal pattern when the success or failure is determined in step S3402 or S3403, and the type of support mode is high frequency support mode or low frequency support mode. When the transition is made, the sound lamp control device 5 may be notified by setting a support mode type command that can identify the type of the support mode after the transition.

<Steps S3410 and S3411>
In step S3410, the MPU 41 starts variable display of normal symbols in the normal symbol display portion 361 of the main display portion 36 (step S3410). Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal pattern fluctuation display flag to ON, which indicates that the normal pattern is displayed in a variable manner, that is, the normal pattern game is being executed (step S3411), and starts the normal pattern fluctuation start process. finish.

It should be noted that the flag during the normal pattern fluctuation display is referred to in order to determine whether the normal pattern game is being executed (during the normal pattern fluctuation display) in step S3201 in the normal pattern game control process of FIG. 242 .

[game control process per normal figure]
Here, FIG. 245 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game control process per normal figure executed in step S1405 in the main process of FIG. In the general pattern per game control process, when the result of the general pattern per lottery by the lottery process for determining whether it is per normal pattern is a hit, opening and closing control by continuous operation of the electric accessory 315b which is a movable body is performed, a movable body control process for switching between an allowable state for allowing entry of a game ball into the second winning port 315, which is a starting ball entry portion, and a restricted state for limiting is executed. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 245, the game control process per normal figure will be described.

<Step S3501>
As shown in FIG. 245, in the normal pattern per game control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag indicating that the normal pattern has been stopped and displayed (that the normal pattern game has ended) is on. (step S3501). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing at which the normal figure per game can be started to cause the electric role product 315b, which is a movable body, to perform continuous actions. It should be noted that the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is set to ON in step S3211 when the normal pattern is stopped and displayed in the normal pattern game control process of FIG.

When the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is ON (step S3501: Yes), that is, when it is time to start the normal pattern per game, the process proceeds to step S3502. On the other hand, when the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S3501: No), that is, when it is not the timing at which the normal pattern per game can be started, the process proceeds to step S3513.

<Step S3502>
When the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is ON (step S3501: Yes), that is, when the normal pattern per game can be started, the MPU 41 indicates that the jackpot game is being executed. It is determined whether it is on (step S3502). The jackpot playing flag is set to ON in step S2906 when a jackpot game is started in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 249 described later, and is set to OFF in step S3952 when the jackpot game ends.

When the jackpot playing flag is ON (step S3502: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the game control process per normal pattern. That is, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is forcibly terminated by starting, even if the result of the lottery per normal pattern for the normal pattern game is per normal pattern, the game per normal pattern is not started. That is, in the present embodiment, the regular pattern per game is not started during execution of the jackpot game. Of course, a new normal game may be started during execution of the jackpot game.

On the other hand, when the jackpot playing flag is off (step S3502: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3503.

<Step S3503>
When the jackpot playing flag is off (step S3502: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the long open normal pattern hit flag is set to ON (step S3503). . Long open normal pattern per flag is a flag indicating that the result of the general pattern per lottery by the lottery process to determine whether it is per normal pattern is per long open normal pattern, and the result of the lottery per normal pattern is When it is per long open normal pattern, it is set to ON in step S3405 of normal pattern fluctuation start processing in FIG. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the lottery per normal pattern for the ended normal pattern game is per long open normal pattern. MPU41, when the long open normal map per flag is set to ON (step S3503: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3504, when the long open normal map per flag is set to off (step S3503: No), the process proceeds to step S3506.

<Steps S3504 and S3505>
If the long open general pattern per flag is set to ON (step S3503: Yes), that is, if the result of the general pattern per lottery by the lottery process for the finished general pattern game is per long open general pattern, the MPU 41, As the movable body control process, the opening time of the electric accessory 315b in the game per long open normal figure (the time allowed for the game ball to enter the second winning hole 315) is 6 seconds, based on the information corresponding to the movable body In order to execute long opening as the movable mode of the electric accessory 315b, a process of setting the value of the opening time counter is executed (step S3504). The opening time counter is referenced in step S3515 of the game control process per normal figure to determine the timing of returning the electric auditors 315b from the operating position which is the drive side position to the standby position which is the return side position. Then, the MPU 41 sets the long open normal map hit flag to OFF (step S3505), and shifts the process to step S3509.

<Step S3506>
If the long open general map per flag is set to off (step S3503: No), that is, if the result of the general general pattern per lottery for the finished general pattern game is not per long open general pattern, the MPU 41, short open general pattern It is determined whether or not the hit flag is set to ON (step S3506). Short open normal pattern per flag is a flag indicating that the result of the general pattern per lottery by the lottery process to determine whether it is per normal pattern is per short open normal pattern, and the result of the lottery per normal pattern is When it is per short open normal pattern, it is set to ON in step S1707 of the normal pattern fluctuation start process of FIG. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the lottery per normal pattern for the ended normal pattern game is per short open normal pattern. MPU41, if the short open normal map per flag is set to ON (step S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3507, if the short open normal map per flag is set to OFF (step S3506: No), that is, if the result of the lottery per normal game for the ended normal game is out, the process proceeds to step S3512.

<Steps S3507 and S3508>
If the short open normal pattern per flag is set to ON (step S3506: Yes), that is, if the result of the general pattern per lottery by the lottery process for the ended normal pattern game is per short open normal pattern, the MPU 41, As a movable body control process, based on information corresponding to 0.1 seconds, which is the opening time of the electric accessory 315b in the game per short open normal figure (the time allowed for the game ball to enter the second winning hole 315), In order to execute short opening as the movable mode of the electric accessory 315b which is a movable body, a process of setting the value of the opening time counter is executed (step S3507). The opening time counter is referenced in step S3515 of the game control process per normal figure to determine the timing of returning the electric auditors 315b from the operating position which is the drive side position to the standby position which is the return side position. Then, the MPU 41 sets the short open normal figure per flag to OFF (step S3508), and shifts the process to step S3509.

<Steps S3509 to S3511>
When the result of the lottery per normal figure by the lottery process is a hit, the flag indicating the type per normal pattern (flag per long open normal map or flag per short open normal map) is set to off (step S3505 or S3508), The MPU 41 executes a movable body control process for actuating the electric accessory 315b, which is a movable body, from the standby position, which is the return side position, to the operating position, which is the drive side position (step S3509). As a result, the second winning hole 315, which is the starting ball entering part, is opened, and the game ball entering the second winning hole 315 is allowed to enter. Then, the MPU 41 sets an electric role product open command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric role product 315b is open (step S3510), and indicates that the electric role product 315b is open. The electric accessary product open flag is set to ON (step S3511), and the process proceeds to step S3512.

It should be noted that the electric accessory open command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 241) executed by the MPU41. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 can start an effect indicating that the electric accessory 315b is open to the symbol display unit 341, for example, based on the electric accessory release command.

<Step S3512>
If the movable body control process (steps S3503 to S3511) is executed to open the electric accessory 315b which is a movable body when the result of the lottery per normal drawing by the lottery process is a hit, or the long open normal map per flag and If the short open normal pattern per flag is set to OFF (if the result of the normal pattern per lottery by the lottery process is out) (both step S3503 and step S3506 are No), the MPU 41 normally stops displaying the symbol The normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag indicating that the normal pattern game has ended is set to OFF (step S3512), and the normal pattern per game control process is terminated.

<Step S3513>
When the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S3501: No), the MPU 41 is set to ON when the electric auditors 315b are released in step S3511 of the normal pattern per game control process. It is determined whether or not the open flag is set to ON (step S3513). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game per normal pattern is being executed. MPU41, when the electric accessary product during opening flag is set to ON (step S3513: Yes), that is, when the normal figure per game is being executed, the process proceeds to step S3514. On the other hand, the MPU 41 ends the game control process per general pattern when the electric auditors product open flag is set to OFF (step S3513: No), that is, when the general pattern per game is not being executed.

<Steps S3514 and S3515>
When the electric accessary product opening flag is set to ON (step S3513: Yes), that is, when the game per general pattern is being executed, the MPU 41 is set in step S3504 or S3507 of the game control process per general pattern. 1 is subtracted from the open time counter value obtained (step S3514), and it is determined whether or not the open time counter value after the subtraction is 0 (step S3515). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to return the electric accessory 315b, which is a movable body, from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position, as the movable body control processing when the end determination condition is established. or end judgment.

If the value of the open time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3515: Yes), that is, if it is time to return the electric accessory 315b to the standby position that is the return side position, the process proceeds to step S3516. do. On the other hand, MPU41, if the value of the open time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3515: No), that is, if it is not the timing to return the electric auditors 315b to the standby position which is the return side position, the normal per game control End the process.

<Steps S3516 to S3518>
If the value of the open time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3515: Yes), that is, if it is time to return the electric accessory 315b to the standby position that is the return side position, the MPU 41 returns the electric role that is the movable body. The object 315b is returned from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position (step S3516). As a result, the second winning hole 315, which is the starting ball entering part, is closed, and entry of game balls into the second winning hole 315 is restricted. Then, the MPU 41 sets an electric role product closing command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric role product 315b is closed (step S3517), and an electric role product indicating that the electric role product 315b is open The flag during opening of the role product is set to OFF (step S3518), and the game control process per normal pattern is terminated.

In addition, the electric accessory closing command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 241) executed by the MPU41. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the effect indicating that the electric role product is open, which is executed in the symbol display unit 341, for example, based on the electric role product closing command.

In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the electric accessory 315b, which is a movable body, is driven to the driving side position only once in one normal game per game (when the second winning opening 315 is opened once) As described above, the electric accessory 315b may be driven to the driving side position a plurality of times (the second winning opening 315 may be opened a plurality of times) in one normal game per game. 2 When the winning opening 315 is closed (when the electric accessory 315b as a movable body is in the standby position which is the return side position), it is determined whether the end determination condition for ending the normal figure per game is established. , When the second winning port 315 is opened, the condition for determining the end of the normal pattern winning game is set, and when the second winning port 315 is opened, the end determination is not executed. This is because the normal pattern winning game cannot be ended while the second winning prize port 315 is open, so the second winning prize port 315 will be opened even though the normal pattern winning game has ended in terms of control. , causes a problem. In addition, if this problem is dealt with by control, useless control will increase. Therefore, when the second winning opening 315 is closed (when the electric accessory 315b as a movable body is in the standby position which is the return side position), it is determined whether the end determination condition for ending the normal figure per game is established. By performing, it becomes possible to efficiently execute the movement control and end control of the electric accessory 315b, which is a movable body. Of course, even when the electric accessory 315b, which is a movable body, is driven to the drive side position only once in one normal game per game, the end determination to end the normal game per game when the second winning opening 315 is closed An end determination may be made to determine whether the conditions are met.

[Special game control process]
Here, FIG. 246 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game control process executed in step S1406 in the main process of FIG. In the special figure game control process, the stored contents of the special figure reservation storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main controller 4 are updated, and the control of the progress of the first special figure game or the second special figure game, for example, the second The variable display and stop display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display portion 363 are controlled. Hereinafter, the special figure game control processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S3601>
As shown in FIG. 246, in step S3601, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot playing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is ON. The jackpot game flag is set to ON in step S3906 when the jackpot game is started in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 249 described later, and is set to OFF in step S3552 when the jackpot game ends. .

The MPU 41 ends the special figure game control process when the jackpot playing flag is ON (step S3601: Yes), ie when the jackpot game is being executed. That is, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game is being executed, the special figure game is not started. Of course, the special game may be started during execution of the jackpot game.

On the other hand, when the jackpot playing flag is off (step S3601: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3602.

<Step S3602>
When the jackpot playing flag is off (step S3601: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is fluctuatingly displayed (the first special symbol game or the second It is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation display flag indicating that the special figure game is being executed is ON (step S3602). The special figure fluctuation displaying flag is set to ON in step S3807 when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the special figure variation start processing of FIG. 248 described later, and the special figure game control When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the process, it is set to OFF in step S3609.

MPU41, when the special figure fluctuation display flag is ON (step S3602: Yes), that is, when the special symbol is during the fluctuation display (during execution of the special figure game), the process proceeds to step S3606. On the other hand, the MPU 41, when the special figure fluctuation display flag is off (step S3602: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the special symbol is not being displayed while the fluctuation is being performed (the special figure game is being executed), the process to step S3603.

<Step S3603>
If the flag during special figure fluctuation display is off (step S3602: No), that is, if the special symbol is not during the fluctuation display (during execution of the special figure game) when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 holds the special figure Both the first special figure reservation number N stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA of the storage area 412b and the second special figure reservation number M stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB is 0 (step S3603).

MPU41, when both the first special figure reservation number N and the second special figure reservation number M are 0 (step S3603: Yes), that is, the reservation of the right to execute the first special figure game, and the second special figure If there is no reservation of the right to execute the game, the special figure game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if one of the first special figure reservation number N and the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S3603: No), that is, the reservation of the right to execute the first special figure game, and If there is at least one of the reservation of the right to execute the second special figure game, the process proceeds to step S3604.

<Step S3604>
If either one of the first special figure reservation number N and the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S3603: No), that is, the reservation of the right to execute the first special figure game, and the second special figure game When there is at least one of the reservation of the right to execute, the MPU 41 executes the special figure data setting process related to the special figure propriety information data (special figure data) stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b ( Step S3604), the process moves to step S3605. The details of the special figure data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3605>
In step S3605, the MPU 41 starts the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363 (first special symbol game or second special symbol Execute the special figure fluctuation start process for executing the figure game), and terminate the special figure game control process. In addition, the details of the special figure fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3606>
When the special figure fluctuation display flag is ON (step S3602: Yes), that is, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed in a variation (during execution of the special figure game), the MPU 41 is the first special From the start of the variation display of the symbol or the second special symbol game, the special symbol for the first special symbol or the second special symbol set in the special symbol variation pattern setting process of step S3804 in the special figure variation start process of FIG. 248 described later It is determined whether or not the figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (step S3606). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to stop display the special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner and end the special symbol game.

When the special symbol variation display time has passed from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S3606: Yes), that is, the timing to end the special symbol game by stopping and displaying the special symbol during the variation display If so, the process moves to step S3607. On the other hand, when the variable display time has not elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S3606: No), the MPU 41 stops displaying the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner. When it is not the timing to end the figure game, the special figure game control process is terminated.

<Steps S3607 to S3609>
When the variable display time has passed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S3606: Yes), that is, at the timing of stopping and displaying the special symbol during variable display and ending the special symbol game In some cases, the MPU 41 stops and displays the special symbols in the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363 of the main display portion 36 in a mode according to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the special symbol game. (Step S3607). Then, the MPU 41 turns on the special symbol fluctuation stop flag indicating that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (step S3608), and the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. During the special figure fluctuation display flag indicating that it is during (the special figure game is being executed) is set to OFF (step S3609), and the special figure game control process is terminated.

[Special figure data setting process]
Here, FIG. 247 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S3604 of FIG. In the special figure data setting process, the storage contents of the special figure reservation storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main controller 4 are updated. Hereinafter, the special figure data setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S3701>
As shown in FIG. 247, in step S3701, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second special figure reservation number M for the second special figure game is zero. MPU41, when the second special symbol reservation number M is 0 (step S3701: Yes), that is, when there is no second special symbol reservation for the second special symbol game and there is a first special symbol reservation for the first special symbol game (See step S3603 in the special figure game control process in Figure 246), the process proceeds to step S3702. On the other hand, when the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S3701: No), that is, when there is a second special figure reservation for the second special figure game, the process proceeds to step S3705. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation number M for the second special symbol game is 0, thereby starting the second special symbol game with priority over the first special symbol game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the second special symbol game is started with priority over the first special symbol game, but the first special symbol game is started with priority over the second special symbol game. Also, the special symbol game is started in the order of entering the game ball (reservation order) for the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315, which is the starting ball entrance part, and the first special symbol game and the second special Either one of the illustrated games may be executed. Further, the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game are executed independently of each other without providing priority to the start of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game, and the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game are executed independently. The second special symbol game may be executed at the same time (so-called simultaneous variation of special symbols).

<Steps S3702 to S3704>
When the second special figure reservation number M is 0 (step S3701: Yes), the MPU 41 is the first special figure reservation stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA of the first special figure reservation storage area REA. The number N is subtracted by 1 (step S3702), and the special figure propriety information is moved from the first reservation area REA1 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA to the special figure execution area AE (step S3703). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the special figure propriety information of the second reservation area REA2 to the fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA one by one (step S3704). Specifically, in step S3704, the special figure validity information in the second reservation area REA2 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA is moved to the first reservation area REA1, and the special figure validity information in the third reservation area REA3 is transferred to the second reservation area REA3. It is moved to the reservation area REA2, and the special figure propriety information of the fourth reservation area REA4 is moved to the third reservation area REA3. When the process of step S3704 is finished, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3708.

<Steps S3705 to S3707>
When the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S3701: No), the MPU 41 is the second special figure reservation number stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB of the second special figure reservation storage area REB M is subtracted by 1 (step S3705), and the special figure propriety information is moved from the first reservation area REB1 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB to the special figure execution area AE (step S3706). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the special figure propriety information of the second reservation area REB2 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB one by one (step S3707). Specifically, in step S3707, the special figure validity information of the second reservation area REB2 is moved to the first reservation area REB1, the special figure validity information of the third reservation area REB3 is moved to the second reservation area REB2, and the fourth The special figure propriety information in the reservation area REB4 is moved to the third reservation area REB3. When the process of step S3707 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3708.

<Step S3708>
In step S3708, MPU41, the first reservation area REA1 ~ fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA, or the first reservation area REB1 ~ fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB A special figure shift command indicating that the special figure propriety information has been shifted is set in the RAM 412, and the special figure data setting process is terminated. This special figure shift command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 241) executed by the MPU41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 changes the display number of the hold display corresponding to the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold displayed on the pattern display unit 341 based on the special figure shift command. be able to.

[Special figure fluctuation start process]
Here, FIG. 248 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S3605 of FIG. In the special figure variation start process, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display portion 363 starts to display the first special game or the second special figure. A game (special figure game) is started, and various processes associated with the start of the special figure game are executed. Hereinafter, the special figure fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S3801>
As shown in FIG. 248, in step S3801, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game state is a probability variable game state which is a high probability mode. Whether or not the high probability mode is determined by whether or not the probability variation gaming state flag indicating that the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state which is the high probability mode is set to ON. The probability variation gaming state flag is set to ON when the gaming state is shifted from the probability variation jackpot gaming state to the probability variation gaming state in step S2317 of FIG. is set to OFF when shifting from the probability variable gaming state to the probability variable jackpot game state or the normal jackpot game state.

MPU41, when the game state is a probability variation gaming state is a high probability mode (step S3801: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3802, if the game state is not a probability variation gaming state is a high probability mode (step S3801: No ), that is, if the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state or the normal gaming state that is the low probability mode, the process proceeds to step S3803.

<Steps S3802 and S3803>
When the game state is the probability variable game state which is the high probability mode (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 41 is a high probability stored according to the game set value in step S2410 in the game set value change process of FIG. The mode validity table (see FIG. 237B) is read, and validity determination is executed based on the high-probability mode validity table (step S3802).

On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a high probability mode variable probability gaming state (step S3801: No), that is, if the gaming state is a low probability mode time-saving gaming state or a normal gaming state, the MPU 41 of FIG. In step S2410 in the game set value change process, the low probability mode right/wrong table (see FIG. 237(A)) stored according to the game set value is read, and the right/wrong determination is executed based on the low probability mode right/wrong table. (Step S3803).

In steps S3802 and S3803, success/failure determination is executed based on the high-probability mode success/failure table or the low-probability mode success/failure table that is stored according to the game setting value in step S2410 in the game setting value change processing of FIG. However, in steps S3802 and S3803, after reading out the game setting values saved in step S2408 in the game setting value change processing of FIG. The probability mode success/failure table may be selected one by one to determine success/failure.

<Step S3804>
When the success or failure determination is performed in step S3802 or S3803, the MPU 41 is the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 in the special symbol game or the second special symbol Design fluctuation display time is set as a special figure fluctuation pattern (step S3804).

It should be noted that the variation display time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (special symbol variation pattern), if the result of the success or failure determination in step S3802 or S3803 is a normal jackpot, special figure variation type counter CS1 and normal The jackpot variation table (see FIG. 238 (A)) is set based on and if the result of the success or failure determination in step S3802 or S3803 is a probability variation jackpot, the special figure variation type counter CS1 and the probability variation jackpot variation table (Figure 238 (B) reference) and is set based on, step S3802 or S3803 if the result of the decision is out, the special figure variation type counter CS1 and the off variation table (see FIG. 238 (C)) and set based on

<Step S3805>
In step S3805, MPU41, step S3802 or S3803 is the result of the success or failure determination of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the special figure game, and the special figure variation pattern command including the special figure variation pattern set in step S3804 is set in the RAM 412, and the process proceeds to step S3806. The special figure variation pattern command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 241) executed by the MPU41. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can execute a special figure game effect in the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the special figure variation pattern command.

In addition, as described above, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "normal jackpot", the MPU 41 attaches "A" to the special figure variation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 5R normal jackpot " A01" ~ "A03" is set to RAM412 as a special figure variation pattern command. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "5R probability variable jackpot", the MPU41 adds "B" to the special figure variation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 5R probability variable jackpot. B03" is set in the RAM 412 as a special figure variation pattern command. Furthermore, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "16R probability variable jackpot", the MPU 41 adds "C" to the special figure variation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 16R probability variable jackpot "C01" to " C03" is set in the RAM 412 as a special figure variation pattern command. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "losing", the MPU 41 selects any of "D01" to "D08" with "D" added to the special figure variation patterns "01" to "08" to indicate that it is loosing. It is set in the RAM412 as a special figure variation pattern command. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is "losing", the MPU 41 includes information indicating the type of loosing (outside reach, reach other than loosing before and after, complete loosing) in the special figure variation pattern command.

<Step S3806>
In step S3806, the MPU 41 starts the special symbol game by starting the variable display of the special symbols in the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363 of the main display portion 36, and the process proceeds to step S3807. transition to

In addition, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the “cumulative jackpot lottery count” stored in the game information storage area 412 d set in the RAM 412 when the variable display of the special symbol is started. Further, when the result of the win/loss determination based on the low-probability mode win/fail table in step S3803 is a loss, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the "number of times of consecutive failures" stored in the game information storage area 412d, and the win/loss result is a jackpot. If there is, clear "Consecutive Loss Count" to 0 times.

<Step S3807>
In step S3807, the MPU 41 sets on a special figure variable display flag indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (a special figure game is being executed), and the process proceeds to step S3808. The flag during special symbol fluctuation display is that the special symbol is being variably displayed (special It is referenced to determine whether the game is in progress).

<Step S3808>
In step S3808, the MPU 41 sets off a special figure fluctuation stop flag indicating that the special symbol has been stopped (the special figure game is ended), and the process proceeds to step S3809. The special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON when the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363 of the main display portion 36 is stopped and displayed in step S3608 in the special figure game control process of FIG. , It is referenced to determine whether or not it is time to start the jackpot game in step S3902 of the jackpot game control process in FIG. 249 to be described later.

<Step S3809>
In step S3809, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time saving game state flag indicating the time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) is on. The time saving game state flag is set to ON when the normal jackpot game ends in step S2321 of FIG. It is set to OFF when transitioning from the state to the jackpot game state or the normal game state.

MPU41, when the time saving game state flag is ON (step S3809: Yes), that is, when it is the time saving game state, the process proceeds to step S3810. On the other hand, when the time saving gaming state flag is off (step S3809: Yes), that is, when it is not the time saving gaming state, the MPU 41 ends the special figure fluctuation start processing.

<Step S3810>
When the time saving game state flag is ON (step S3809: Yes), that is, when the time saving game state, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed in the time saving game state. (Step S3810), and ends the special figure fluctuation start process. It should be noted that the time-saving number counter is set when the game state is shifted from the jackpot game state to the time-saving game state at step S2320 in the game state transition process of FIG.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the time saving number counter is set when the game state shifts from the jackpot game state to the time saving game state, but the time saving number counter shifts the game state from the jackpot game state to the variable probability game state. It may also be set when it is set when it is set. That is, by setting the maximum number of special-figure games executed in the variable probability gaming state to a limited number of times, the gaming machine 10 can be configured as a so-called ST machine.

Further, when the normal jackpot game executed based on the fact that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the normal jackpot, the game machine 10 enters the normal game state without shifting from the jackpot game state to the time-saving game state. It is also possible to set to shift, and in this case, the time saving number counter is not set after the end of the normal jackpot game.

[Jackpot game control process]
Here, FIGS. 249 to 252 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in step S1407 in the main process of FIG. In the jackpot game control process, a process for controlling the progress of the jackpot game, such as a movable body control process for opening and closing the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body provided in the variable winning opening 316, is executed. Hereinafter, the jackpot game control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 249 to 252. FIG.

<Step S3901>
As shown in FIG. 249, in step S3901, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot playing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is ON. The jackpot playing flag is set to ON in step S3906 of the jackpot game control process when starting the jackpot game, and set to OFF in step S3952 of the jackpot game control process when the jackpot game is terminated.

When the jackpot playing flag is ON (step S3901: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3911. On the other hand, when the jackpot playing flag is off (step S3901: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3902.

<Step S3902>
If the jackpot playing flag is off (step S3901: No), that is, if the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether the special symbol fluctuation stop flag indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed is on. to judge. The special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON in step S3608 in the special figure game control process of FIG. It is set to off in step S3808 in the special figure fluctuation start process. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to start the jackpot game by determining whether or not the special figure game started when the jackpot game is not being executed has ended.

MPU41, when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is ON (step S3902: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game can be started because the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to step S3903. On the other hand, when the special symbol fluctuation stop flag is off (step S3902: No), that is, when the big winning game cannot be started because the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the MPU 41 ends the big winning game control process.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, when the special symbol is being variably displayed (during execution of the special symbol game), the jackpot game is not started (executed), but the special symbol is variably displayed (during the execution of the special symbol game). It may be possible to start (execute) a jackpot game. For example, the jackpot game may be started (executed) during the variable display of the first special symbol, and conversely, the jackpot game may be started (executed) during the variable display of the second special symbol. Specifically, by making it possible to change to the simultaneous variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol as described above, the second special symbol game is executed during the execution of the jackpot game for the first special symbol game , The first special game may be executed during the execution of the jackpot game for the second special game. Furthermore, the jackpot game for the first special pattern game and the jackpot game for the second special pattern game may be executed simultaneously, or the jackpot game for the first special pattern game and the jackpot game for the second special pattern game When the condition for starting the other jackpot game is established during execution of one of the jackpot games, the other jackpot game may be started after one jackpot game ends.

<Step S3903>
When the special symbol fluctuation stop flag is ON (step S3902: Yes), that is, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the MPU 41 determines that the result of the jackpot lottery by the lottery process for the special symbol game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is a big hit. Determine whether or not Whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed is a big hit is determined by the jackpot lottery stored in the special symbol execution area AE of the special symbol reservation storage area 412b set in the RAM 41, for example. It is judged based on the special figure propriety information.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3904 when the result of the jackpot lottery by the lottery process for the special symbol game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is a big hit (step S3903: Yes). On the other hand, the MPU 41 terminates the jackpot game control process when the jackpot lottery result for the special symbol game in which the special symbols are stopped is not a jackpot (step S3903: No), that is, when the jackpot lottery result is lost. .

<Step S3904>
When the result of the jackpot lottery by the lottery process for the special pattern game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is a jackpot (step S3903: Yes), the MPU 41 starts the jackpot game and the type of the jackpot game (probability variable jackpot game or A jackpot game start command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of normal jackpot game) is set (step S3904), and the process proceeds to step S3905. The jackpot game start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process executed by the MPU 41 (see FIG. 241). Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can execute a jackpot game effect such as a display effect executed by the symbol display unit 341 according to the jackpot game type based on the jackpot game start command.

<Step S3905>
In step S3905, the MPU 41 sets on a jackpot game start flag indicating that a jackpot game is to be started, and shifts the process to step S3906. The jackpot game start flag is referred to in step S2301 in the game state transition process of FIG. 33 described above when determining whether the game state should be shifted to the probability variable jackpot game state or the normal jackpot game state.

<Step S3906>
In step S3906, the MPU 41 sets on a jackpot playing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed, and shifts the process to step S3907. During the jackpot game flag, in order to determine whether the jackpot game is being executed, in addition to step S3901 of the jackpot game control process, step S3203 of the normal game control process of FIG. It is referred in step S3601 of game control processing.

<Step S3907>
In step S3907, MPU41, according to the jackpot type, based on information (round number information) set corresponding to the maximum number of round games to be executed in the opening and closing execution mode, subtraction formula indicating the number of remaining round games A movable body control process for setting a round number counter is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3908. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the round number counter to "5" when the jackpot lottery result is the 5R probability variable jackpot and the 5R normal jackpot, and sets the round counter to "5" when the jackpot lottery result is the 16R probability variable jackpot. is set to "16". As a result, in the round game, based on the information set as the round number counter corresponding to the jackpot type, the opening and closing door 319, which is a movable body, is the standby position and the driving side that are the return side position by the number corresponding to the jackpot type. A movable body control process is executed in which the movable body is reciprocated between the operating positions, which are positions, and a continuous operation is executed in which the timing at which the completion determination condition is established is indefinite depending on the type of the jackpot.

In the present embodiment, the round number counter is set as a subtraction type counter, but the round number counter may be set as an addition type counter. When the round number counter is set as an addition type counter, for example, when the value of the round number counter becomes a numerical value corresponding to the maximum number of round games played, the conditions for judging the end of the opening/closing execution mode are established, and the MPU 51 terminates the operation. The opening/closing execution mode is terminated when it is determined that the determination condition is satisfied. In other words, the movable body control process is executed by the MPU 41 to end the continuous operation of the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body, when it is determined that the termination determination condition of the opening/closing execution mode whose establishment timing is indefinite is met. executed.

<Step S3908>
In step S3908, the MPU 41 sets an opening start command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of starting the opening of the jackpot game, and the process proceeds to step S3909. The opening start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process executed by the MPU 41 (see FIG. 241). Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can start an opening effect such as a display effect executed in the pattern display section 341 based on the opening start command.

<Step S3909>
In step S3909, the MPU 41 sets a subtractive opening time counter as information indicating the remaining opening time based on information (opening time information) set corresponding to the maximum opening time executed in the jackpot game. , the process proceeds to step S3910. The opening time counter is referenced in step S3913 of FIG. 250 of the jackpot game control process in order to determine whether or not it is time to end the opening.

In this embodiment, the opening time counter is set as a subtraction counter, but the opening time counter may be set as an addition counter. When the opening time counter is set as an addition type counter, for example, when the value of the opening time counter reaches the maximum value set corresponding to the maximum opening time, the condition for judging the end of the opening is satisfied, and the MPU 41 When it is determined that the end determination condition is satisfied, the opening is terminated.

<Step S3910>
In step S3910, the MPU 41 sets ON the flag during opening, which indicates that the opening is being executed, and ends the jackpot game control process. The opening flag is referred to in step S3911 in the jackpot game control process in order to determine whether the opening is in progress.

<Step S3911>
When the jackpot game in-progress flag is ON (step S3901: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening flag indicating that the opening is being executed is ON. (step S3911).

When the opening flag is ON (step S3911: Yes), that is, when opening is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3912 in FIG. On the other hand, if the opening flag is off (step S3911: No), that is, if the opening is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S3922.

<Steps S3912 and S3913>
If the opening flag is ON (step S3911: Yes), that is, if the opening is being executed, the MPU 41 changes the value of the opening time counter as information indicating the remaining time of the opening by 1 as shown in FIG. Subtraction is performed (step S3912), and it is determined whether or not the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0, which is the condition for determining the end of the opening (step S3913). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to end the opening.

When the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3913: Yes), the MPU 41 determines that it is time to end the opening based on the end determination that the condition for determining the end of the opening is satisfied. If so, the process proceeds to step S3914. On the other hand, when the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3913: No), the MPU 41 determines that it is not the timing to end the opening based on the determination that the conditions for determining the end of the opening are not satisfied. If so, the jackpot game control process is terminated.

<Steps S3914 and S3915>
When the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3913: Yes), that is, when it is determined that it is time to end the opening based on the end determination that the conditions for determining the end of the opening are satisfied. , The MPU 41 sets an opening end command that notifies the sound lamp control device 5 that the opening of the jackpot game is over (step S3914). is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1401. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can end the opening effect such as the display effect executed in the pattern display section 341 based on the opening end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the opening flag indicating that the opening is being executed to OFF (step S3915), and shifts the process to step S3916.

<Step S3916>
In step S3916, the MPU 41 determines that the opening/closing execution mode in which the round game is executed a plurality of times (5 times or 16 times) is started, that is, the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body, continuously moves. An opening/closing execution mode start command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that opening/closing is executed in a movable mode determined according to the jackpot type is set, and the process proceeds to step S3917. The opening/closing execution mode start command is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 241) executed by the MPU 41. FIG. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can start the opening/closing execution mode effect such as the display effect executed in the pattern display section 341 based on the opening/closing execution mode start command.

<Step S3917>
In step S3917, the MPU 41 sets a round game start command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the round game is started, and shifts the process to step S3918. The round game start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process executed by the MPU 41 (see FIG. 241). As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can start a round game effect such as a display effect executed in the pattern display unit 341 based on the round game start command, and the symbol display unit 341 in each round game The number of rounds can be displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the round game effect is executed individually in each round game. In addition, the number of rounds of the round game may be displayed. In this case, the interval production may not be executed between the round games, and the production of displaying the number of rounds of the round game to be executed next time may be executed as the interval production.

<Steps S3918 and S3919>
In step S3918, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the subtraction type round number counter as information indicating the number of remaining round games in the opening/closing execution mode, and further moves the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body, to the return side position. A movable body control process for opening the variable winning opening 316 by moving from the position to the operating position, which is the drive side position, is executed (step S3919), and the process proceeds to step S3920.

<Steps S3920 and S3921>
In step S3920, the MPU 41 sets on a round game in-progress flag indicating that the round game is being executed, and further corresponds to the maximum time of the round game (maximum movable time of the opening/closing door 319 which is a movable body). Based on the information of the round game time set by the set, execute a movable body control process to set a subtraction type round game time counter as information indicating the remaining time of the round game (step S3921), the jackpot game control process finish. The round game time counter is used to determine the end of the round game (return the open/close door 319, which is the movable body, from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position) when the specified time elapses in the movable body control process. It is referred in step S3924 of FIG. 351 of the said jackpot game control process, in order to perform the completion|finish determination of whether conditions are satisfied.

In this embodiment, the round game time counter is set as a subtraction type counter, but the round game time counter may be set as an addition type counter. When the round game time counter is set as an addition type counter, for example, in the movable body control process, when the value of the round game time counter reaches the maximum value set corresponding to the maximum round game time, the round game is satisfied, and the round game is terminated when the MPU 41 determines that the end determination condition is satisfied.

<Step S3922>
Returning to FIG. 249, when the opening flag is off (step S3911: No), that is, when the opening is not being executed, the MPU 41 sets the round game flag indicating that the round game is being executed to ON. (step S3922). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the round game is being executed.

MPU41 transfers a process to FIG.251 S3923, when a round game flag is ON (step S3922: Yes), ie, when a round game is being performed. On the other hand, when the round playing flag is off (step S3922: No), that is, when the round game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3926.

<Steps S3923 and S3924>
When the round game in progress flag is ON (step S3922: Yes), that is, when the round game is being executed, as shown in FIG. 1 is subtracted from the value of And MPU41 judges whether the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3924). That is, the MPU 41, as the movable body control process, terminates the round game when the specified time elapses (the open/close door 319, which is the movable body, returns from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position). End determination is made to determine whether or not the conditions are met.

When the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3924: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the round game when the specified time elapses according to the end determination in the movable body control process (opening and closing door which is a movable body When it is determined that the round game is to be terminated due to the fulfillment of the termination determination condition for returning the 319 from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position, the process proceeds to step S3928. On the other hand, when the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3924: No), the MPU 41 terminates the round game when the specified time elapses by the end determination in the movable body control process (opening and closing of the movable body). When it is determined not to end the round game due to non-satisfaction of the termination determination condition for returning the door 319 from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position, the process proceeds to step S3925.

<Step S3925>
If the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3924: No), that is, the round game is terminated due to the elapse of the specified time by the end determination (the opening and closing door 319 which is a movable body is moved from the operating position which is the drive side position When it is determined not to end the round game due to non-fulfillment of the end determination condition for returning to the standby position which is the return side position), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the variable winning hole 316 (step S3925). Whether or not a game ball has entered the variable winning hole 316 is determined when the game ball has entered the ball sensor 316a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. The determination is made based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412 immediately.

When there is a game ball entering the variable winning opening 316 (step S3925: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3926, and when there is no gaming ball entering the variable winning opening 316 (step S3925: No), end the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S3926 and S3927>
When there is a game ball entering the variable winning hole 316 (step S3925: Yes), the MPU 41 receives an addition formula input as information indicating the number of game balls entering the variable winning hole 316 in the round game. 1 is added to the value of the ball number counter (step S3926). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the number-of-entered-balls counter after the addition has reached 10 (step S3927), that is, as the movable body control process, the upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning opening 316 to make a round. It is determined whether or not the end determination condition for ending the game (returning the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body, from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position) is established. That is, the end determination condition of the round game is the elapse of the specified time and the entry of the upper limit number of game balls into the variable winning opening 316, and the timing of establishment of the end determination condition of the round game is undefined. During execution, it is determined whether or not any of these end determination conditions are met.

When the value of the number-of-entered-balls counter after addition has reached 10 (step S3927: Yes), the MPU 41 determines that the upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning opening 316 by the end determination in the movable body control process. If it is determined that the end determination condition for ending the round game (returning the opening and closing door 319, which is a movable body, from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position) is satisfied, the process is stepped Move to S3928. On the other hand, if the value of the number-of-entered-balls counter after addition has not reached 10 (step S3927: No), the MPU 41 determines that the upper limit number of game balls to the variable winning opening 316 is determined by the end determination in the movable body control process. When it is determined that the end determination condition for ending the round game by entering a ball (returning the opening and closing door 319, which is a movable body, from the operating position that is the drive side position to the standby position that is the return side position) is not satisfied, the The jackpot game control process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the number-of-entered-balls counter is set as an addition-type counter, but the number-of-enters-balls counter may be set as a subtraction-type counter. When the number of entering balls counter is set as a subtraction type counter, for example, in the movable body control process, when the value of the number of entering balls counter reaches the maximum value set corresponding to the maximum number of entering balls, the round game is started. is satisfied, and the round game is terminated when the MPU 41 determines that the end determination condition is satisfied.

<Step S3928>
When the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3924: Yes), or when the value of the number-of-balls counter reaches 10 (step S3927: Yes), the MPU 41 performs the movable body control process as follows: The variable winning opening is closed by returning the open/close door 319 as a movable body from the operating position, which is the drive side position, to the standby position, which is the return side position (step S3928), and the process proceeds to step S3929. That is, when it is determined by the end determination in the movable body control process that the termination determination condition for terminating the round game is satisfied, the MPU 41 returns the open/close door 319, which is the movable body, from the operating position which is the driving side position. By returning to the standby position which is the side position, the variable prize winning port 316 is closed and the round game is finished.

<Steps S3929 to S3931>
In step S3929, the MPU 41 sets a round game end command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the round game ends. The round game end command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process executed by the MPU 41 (see FIG. 241). As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can terminate the round game effect such as the display effect executed in the pattern display section 341 based on the round game end command.

Then, the MPU 41 clears the number-of-entering-ball counter as information indicating the number of entering balls into the variable winning hole 316 in the round game (step S3930), and indicates that the round game is being executed. The round playing flag is set to OFF (step S3930), and the process proceeds to step S3932.

<Step S3932>
In step S3932, the MPU 41 determines whether the round number counter as information indicating the number of remaining round games in the opening/closing execution mode is 0 (step S3932), that is, the opening/closing execution mode is ended as the movable body control processing. It is determined whether or not the termination determination condition is satisfied.

When the round number counter is 0 (step S3932: Yes), the MPU 41 determines that the termination determination condition for terminating the opening/closing execution mode is satisfied by the termination determination in the movable body control process (there is no unexecuted round game). ), the process proceeds to step S3941. On the other hand, if the round number counter is not 0 (step S3932: No), the MPU 41 determines that the termination determination condition for terminating the opening/closing execution mode is not met (the unexecuted round game is Yes), the process proceeds to step S3933.

Here, when the variable winning opening 316 is opened (when the open/close door 319 as a movable body is in the operating position which is the drive side position), the end determination condition of the open/close execution mode is set (5Rth or 16thR opening). The reason why the end determination is not executed when the variable winning hole 316 is opened is that the opening/closing execution mode cannot be ended while the variable winning hole 316 is open, so the variable opening/closing execution mode is finished in terms of control. This is because the winning opening 316 is opened, causing a problem. In addition, if this problem is dealt with by control, useless control will increase. Therefore, when the variable prize winning opening 316 is closed (when the opening/closing door 319 as a movable body is in the standby position which is the return side position), it is determined whether or not the end determination condition for ending the opening/closing execution mode is established. , it becomes possible to efficiently perform the movement control and the end control of the opening/closing door 319 which is a movable body.

<Step S3933>
If the round number counter is not 0 (step S3932: No), that is, it is determined that the termination determination condition for terminating the opening/closing execution mode is not met (there is an unexecuted round game) by the termination determination in the movable body control process. If so, the MPU 41 sets an interval start command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 of starting the interval between round games (step S3933), and shifts the process to step S3934. The interval start command is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 241) executed by the MPU 41. FIG. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can start the interval effect such as the display effect executed in the pattern display section 341 based on the interval start command.

In addition, in the present embodiment, interval effects such as display effects are executed in intervals between round games, but the interval effects are omitted, and round game effects such as display effects for the previously executed round game are executed in the intervals. It may be executed continuously, or a round game effect such as a display effect for the round game to be executed next may be executed.

<Steps S3934 and S3935>
In step S3934, the MPU 41 sets on an interval flag indicating that the interval between round games is being executed. Then, the MPU 41 sets a subtraction type interval time counter as information indicating the remaining time of the interval (step S3935), and terminates the jackpot game control process. The interval time counter, as the movable body control processing, in order to determine whether or not the end determination condition for ending the interval (starting the round game) is satisfied, step S3938 in Figure 252 in the jackpot game control processing Referenced in

<Step S3936>
Returning to FIG. 249, when the round playing flag is off (step S3922: No), that is, when the round game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines that the interval flag indicating that the interval between round games is being executed is It is determined whether or not it is on (step S3936). During the interval flag is set to ON in step S3934 of FIG. 251 in the jackpot game control process when the interval is started, and turned off in step S3940 of FIG. 252 in the jackpot game control process when the interval ends. set.

When the interval flag is ON (step S3936: Yes), that is, when the interval between rounds is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3937 in FIG. On the other hand, when the interval flag is off (step S3936: No), that is, when the interval between rounds is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3945.

<Steps S3937 and S3938>
If the interval flag is ON (step S3936: Yes), that is, if the interval between rounds is being executed, the MPU 41 sets the interval time counter as information indicating the remaining time of the interval, as shown in FIG. 1 is subtracted from the value (step S3937). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the interval time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3938), that is, as an end determination in the movable body control process, the end determination condition for ending the interval (starting the round game) is Determine whether or not it is established.

When the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3938: Yes), the MPU 41 determines that the end determination condition for ending the interval (starting the round game) is established in the end determination in the movable body control process. If it is determined that there is, the process proceeds to step S3939. On the other hand, if the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3938: No), that is, the end determination condition for ending the interval (starting the round game) is established in the end determination in the movable body control process. If it is determined that it is not, the jackpot game control process is terminated.

<Steps S3939 and S3940>
If the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3938: Yes), that is, in the end determination in the movable body control process, it is determined that the end determination condition for ending the interval (starting the round game) is established. If so, the MPU 41 sets an interval end command that notifies the audio lamp controller 5 that the interval has ended. The interval end command is transmitted to the audio lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 241) executed by the MPU 41. FIG. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can end the interval effect such as the display effect executed in the pattern display section 341 based on the interval end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets an interval flag indicating that the interval between round games is being executed to OFF (step S3940), and shifts the processing to step S3917. By moving the process to step S3917 of FIG. 250 described above, the process of steps S3917 to S3921 relating to the start of the round game is executed, and the jackpot game control process is terminated.

<Step S3941>
Returning to FIG. 251, when the round number counter is 0 (step S3932: Yes), that is, the termination determination condition for terminating the opening/closing execution mode is satisfied by the termination determination in the movable body control process (unexecuted round game If it is determined that there is no), the MPU 41 sets the opening/closing execution mode end command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game is ended (step S3941), and the process proceeds to step S3942. do. The open/close execution mode end command is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 241) executed by the MPU 41. FIG. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can end the round game effect (opening/closing execution mode effect) such as the display effect executed in the pattern display section 341 based on the opening/closing execution mode end command.

<Step S3942>
In step S3942, the MPU 41 sets an ending start command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of starting the ending of the jackpot game, and the process proceeds to step S3943. The ending start command is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 241) executed by the MPU 41. FIG. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can start an ending effect such as a display effect executed in the pattern display section 341 based on the ending start command.

<Steps S3943 and S3944>
In step S3943, the MPU 41 turns on an ending flag indicating that the ending is being executed. Then, the MPU 41 sets a subtractive ending time counter as information indicating the remaining time of the ending (step S3944), and terminates the jackpot game control process. The ending time counter is referenced in step S3947 in FIG. 252 of the jackpot game control process for the end determination of whether or not the ending (jackpot game) is to be ended by establishment of the end determination condition of the ending (jackpot game). .

In this embodiment, the ending time counter is set as a subtraction counter, but the ending time counter may be set as an addition counter. When the ending time counter is set as an addition type counter, for example, when the value of the ending time counter reaches the maximum value set corresponding to the maximum opening time, the ending end determination condition is established, and the MPU 41 The ending is terminated when it is determined that the end determination condition is satisfied.

<Step S3945>
Returning to FIG. 249, if the during-interval flag is off (step S3936: No), that is, if the interval between rounds is not being executed, whether or not the during-ending flag indicating that the ending is being executed is on. is determined (step S3945).

If the ending flag is ON (step S3945: Yes), that is, if the ending is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3946 in FIG. On the other hand, when the ending flag is off (step S3945: No), that is, when the ending is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3950.

<Steps S3946 and S3947>
If the ending flag is ON (step S3945: Yes), that is, if the ending is being executed, the MPU 41 changes the value of the ending time counter as information indicating the remaining time of the ending to 1 Subtract (step S3946). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3947). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the end determination condition for the ending is satisfied.

When the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3947: Yes), that is, when it is determined by the end determination that the end determination condition for the ending is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3948. . On the other hand, MPU41, if the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3947: No), that is, if it is determined that the end determination condition of the ending is not satisfied by the end determination, the jackpot game control process finish.

<Steps S3948 and S3949>
When the value of the ending time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3947: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the ending (jackpot game), the MPU 41 ends the ending of the jackpot game through the voice lamp control device. Set the ending end command to be notified to 5. The ending ending command is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 241) executed by the MPU 41. FIG. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can end the ending effect such as the display effect executed in the pattern display section 341 based on the ending ending command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the ending flag indicating that the ending is being executed to OFF (step S3949), and ends the jackpot game control process.

<Step S3950>
Returning to FIG. 249, if the ending flag is off (step S3945: No), that is, if neither during the opening, during the round game, during the interval nor during the ending, the MPU 41 voices that the jackpot game ends. A jackpot game end command to be notified to the lamp control device 5 is set (step S3950), and the process proceeds to step S3951. The jackpot game end command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process executed by the MPU 41 (see FIG. 241). As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can terminate the jackpot game effect such as the display effect executed in the symbol display section 341 based on the jackpot game end command.

<Steps S3951 and S3952>
In step S3951, a jackpot game end flag indicating that the jackpot game ends is set to ON. The jackpot game end flag is referred to in step S2312 of the game state transition processing in FIG. be.

Then, the MPU 41 sets off the jackpot playing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed (step S3952), and terminates the jackpot game control process.

[Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 in the sound lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 253 to 287. FIG.

It is also conceivable as another embodiment that part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 in this embodiment is executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 . In addition, in the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing for the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, startup processing when starting up the sound lamp control device 5, NMI interrupt processing at the time of power failure, and the like. Description of these processes is omitted.

[Secondary Timer Interrupt Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device 5]
Here, FIG. 253 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5. As shown in FIG. The MPU 51 executes, for example, sub timer interrupt processing as regular processing with a period of 1 msec.

As shown in FIG. 253, the MPU 51 performs counter update processing (step S2701), operation detection processing (step S2702), command determination processing (step S2703), special figure game effect control processing (step S2704) in the sub timer interrupt processing. ), and a jackpot game effect control process (step S2705).

[Counter update process]
In the counter update process (step S2701), the MPU 51 updates the production pattern type counter, the first stop symbol type counter, the variation display counter, and the like. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values of the effect type counter and the first stop symbol type counter, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values. The effect pattern type counter is used to determine the variation type (effect pattern) based on the special figure variation pattern command received from the main controller 4. For example, the effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-109. Also, the first stop symbol type counter is used to determine the type of decoration symbol to be stopped first based on the special figure variation pattern command received from the main control device 4 . For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-99. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the variation display counter. This variable display counter is for measuring the variable display time of the pattern display section 341, and the counter value of the variable display counter is set to 0 when the remaining variable display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variation display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining variation display time, the fact that variation is in progress, the end of the variation display of the pattern display section 341, and the like.

[Operation detection processing]
Next, an example of the procedure of operation detection processing executed in step S2702 of the secondary timer interrupt processing in FIG. 253 will be described. Here, FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of operation detection processing.

As shown in FIG. 254, in the operation detection process, the MPU 41 performs operation button operation detection process (step S4001), operation detection pattern determination process (step S4002), selection button operation detection process (step S4003), selection operation detection pattern determination, Processing (step S4004), determination button operation detection processing (step S4005), and determination operation detection pattern determination processing (step S4006) are executed.

[Operation button operation detection process]
In the operation button operation detection process (step S4001 of the operation detection process), the operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and the operation history for the past three times is sequentially updated. In the game machine 10, the MPU 41 executes the operation button operation detection process, so that the operation button 20 is operated at predetermined intervals (1 msec intervals in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub timer interrupt process. The presence or absence of is determined. Here, FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of operation button operation detection processing. The operation button operation detection processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Steps S4101 to S4103>
As shown in FIG. 255, in the operation button operation detection process, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second detection flag to the first detection flag (step S4101). Next, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third detection flag to the second detection flag (step S4102). After that, the MPU 41 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a to the third detection flag (step S4103), and terminates the operation detection process.

As described above, in the operation button operation detection process, the operations of steps S4101 to S4103 are executed, so that the operation state of the operation button 20 for the most recent three times at 1 msec intervals is set to the first detection flag to the third detection flag. It is stored in RAM 512 as a flag. Specifically, the most recent operation state is stored as the third detection flag, the operation state immediately before is stored as the second detection flag, and the operation state two times before is stored as the first detection flag.

[Operation Detection Pattern Judgment Processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 254, in the operation detection pattern determination process in step S4002 in the operation detection process, the operation of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag is determined. An operation pattern flag is set for determining the operation state of the operation button 20 from the history. The operation pattern flags are composed of first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by a combination of ON and OFF of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 is continued (see FIG. 257(A)). Also, when only the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has started (see FIG. 257(A)). Also, when only the third operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has ended (see FIG. 257(A)). Then, when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to OFF, it can be determined that the operation button 20 has not been operated (see FIG. 257(A)). Here, FIG. 256 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process. FIG. 257A is a table showing the relationship between detection patterns and operation states for the operation button 20. FIG. The operation button operation detection process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 256 and 257(A).

<Step S4201>
As shown in FIG. 256, in the operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to ON (step S4201). . Here, if the first operation detection flag is on (step S4201: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4202, and if the first operation detection flag is off (step S4201: No), the process The process moves to step S4205.

<Step S4202>
If the first operation detection flag is ON (step S4201: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is set to ON ( step S4202). Here, when the second operation detection flag is on (step S4202: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4203, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S4202: No), the process proceeds to step S4203. The process moves to step S4208.

<Step S4203>
If the second operation detection flag is ON (step S4202: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the latest operation state of the operation button 20 is set to ON (step S4203). ). Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S4203: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4204, and when the third operation detection flag is off (step S4203: No), the process proceeds to step S4204. The process moves to step S4210.

<Step S4204>
When the third operation detection flag is ON (step S4203: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF (step S4204). The operation detection pattern determination processing ends. That is, when the operation pattern of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second operation pattern flag to ON. The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 257(A)). The first operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the operation button 20 continues. For example, when the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 may set an operation button operation continuation command in the RAM 412 and transmit this operation button operation continuation command to the sound lamp control device 5. . Accordingly, since the sound lamp control device 5 can determine that the operation of the operation button 20 continues, the operation button 20 is continuously operated based on the number of times the operation button operation continuation command is continuously transmitted. I can keep track of time. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not the operation button 20 has been long-pressed based on the time during which the operation button 20 has been continuously operated. can be executed.

<Step S4205>
When the first operation detection flag is off (step S4201: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is on (step S4205). ). Here, when the second operation detection flag is on (step S4205: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4206, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S4205: No), the process is performed. The process moves to step S4210.

<Step S4206>
When the second operation detection flag is on (step S4205: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the latest operation state of the operation button 20 is on (step S4206). Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S4206: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4207, and when the third operation detection flag is off (step S4206: No), the process proceeds to step S4207. The process moves to step S4210.

<Step S4207>
When the third operation detection flag is ON (step S4206: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first and third operation pattern flags to OFF (step S4207). That is, when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first operation pattern flag to ON. The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 257(A)), and the detected operation pattern determination process ends. The second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has been started). In this way, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state using the second operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times is reflected. Alternatively, erroneous detection of the start of operation of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the start of operation of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the performance display at a timing unintended by the player.

<Step S4208>
When the second operation detection flag is off (step S4202: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the latest operation state of the operation button 20 is on (step S4208). Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S4208: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4210, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S4208: No), the process proceeds to step S4210. The process moves to step S4209.

<Step S4209>
When the second operation detection flag is off (step S4208: No), the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to on, and sets the first and second operation pattern flags to off (step S4209). The operation detection pattern determination processing ends. That is, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times, and the first operation pattern flag is set to ON. The flag and the second operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 257(A)). The third operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has ended). can.

<Step S4210>
If the third operation detection flag is off (step S4203: No), if the second operation detection flag is off (step S4205: No), if the third operation detection flag is off (step S4206: No) , or if the third operation detection flag is ON (step S4208: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to OFF (step S4210), The operation detection pattern determination processing ends. That is, the MPU 41 turns off all the first to third operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times. (see FIG. 257(A)). Note that the MPU 41 determines that the operation button 20 is in the non-operating state when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off.

[Selection button operation detection process]
Returning to the description of FIG. 254, in the selection button operation detection process (step S4003), the MPU 41 executes an upper selection button operation process, a lower selection button operation process, a left selection button operation process, and a right selection button operation process.

<Upper selection button operation processing>
In the upper selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the upper selection button 211 and executes a process for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, since the upper selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 255, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that, in the upper selection button operation processing, the “operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 255 should be replaced with the “up selection operation detection flag”.

<Lower selection button operation processing>
In the down selection button operation processing, the MPU 41 detects the operating state of the down selection button 212 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the down selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 255, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in the down selection button operation processing, in each step of the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 255, the “operation detection flag” can be read as the “down selection operation detection flag”.

<Left selection button operation processing>
In the left selection button operation processing, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the left selection button 213 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the left selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 255, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the left selection button operation processing, the “operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 255 should be replaced with the “left selection operation detection flag”.

<Right selection button operation processing>
In the right selection button operation processing, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the right selection button 214 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the right selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 255, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in the right selection button operation processing, the “operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 255 should be replaced with the “right selection operation detection flag”.

[Selection operation detection pattern determination process]
Returning to the description of FIG. 254, in the selection operation detection pattern determination processing (step S4004), the MPU 41 performs up selection operation detection pattern determination processing, down selection operation detection pattern determination processing, left selection operation detection pattern determination processing, and right selection operation detection. Execute pattern determination processing.

<Upper selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the up-selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 detects an up-selection operation history from the operation history of the up-selection button 211 determined based on the first up-selection operation detection flag, the second up-selection operation detection flag, and the third up-selection operation detection flag. An up operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the selection button 211 is set. Here, since the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 256, detailed description thereof will be omitted. 256, the "operation detection flag" is replaced with the "upper selection operation detection flag", and the "operation pattern flag" is replaced with the "upper selection operation pattern". You can read it as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 257(B), in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" are the operation states of the upper selection button 211 three times. When it occurs, the first upper selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first upper selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the upper selection button 211 continues.

Further, when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times, the MPU 41 sets the second upper selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second upper selection operation pattern flag to ON. The 1st upper selection operation pattern flag and the 3rd upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has started). used.

Further, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operating state of the upper selection button 211 three times, the MPU 41 sets the third upper selection operation pattern flag to ON, The 1st upper selection operation pattern flag and the 2nd upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has ended). used.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times. to off. Note that the MPU 41 determines that the upper selection button 211 is in the non-operating state when all of the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Lower selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the bottom selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 selects the bottom selection button from the operation history of the bottom selection button 212 determined based on the first bottom selection operation detection flag, the second bottom selection operation detection flag, and the bottom selection operation detection flag. A lower operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 212 is set. Here, since the downward selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 256, detailed description thereof will be omitted. 256, the "operation detection flag" is changed to the "down selection operation detection flag", and the "operation pattern flag" is changed to the "down selection operation pattern". You can read it as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 257(C), in the down selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the operation pattern of "ON", "ON", and "ON" is set as the operation state of the down selection button 212 three times. When it occurs, the first bottom selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second bottom selection operation pattern flag and the third bottom selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first lower selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the lower selection button 212 continues.

Further, when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 three times, the MPU 41 sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag to ON. The first lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set to off. The second lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state (whether or not the lower selection button 212 has been operated). used.

Further, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operating state of the lower selection button 212 three times, the MPU 41 sets the third lower selection operation pattern flag to ON, The first lower selection operation pattern flag and the second lower selection operation pattern flag are set to off. The third lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has ended). used.

In addition, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the down selection button 212 three times, the MPU 41 sets the first to third down selection operation detection flags. to off. Note that the MPU 41 determines that the bottom selection button 212 is in the non-operating state when all of the first to third bottom selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Left selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 selects the left selection button from the operation history of the left selection button 213 determined based on the first left selection operation detection flag, the second left selection operation detection flag, and the left selection operation detection flag. A left operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 213 is set. Here, since the left selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 256, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that the left selection operation detection pattern determination process is such that in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. You can read it as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 257(D), in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the left selection button 213 has three operation states of "ON", "ON", and "ON". When it occurs, the first left selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first left selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the left selection button 213 continues.

Further, when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times, the MPU 41 sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON. The 1 left selection operation pattern flag and the 3rd left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the left selection button 213 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has started). used.

Further, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times, the MPU 41 sets the third left selection operation pattern flag to ON, The 1 left selection operation pattern flag and the 2nd left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the left selection button 213 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has ended). used.

In addition, the MPU 41 sets the first to third left selection operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times. to off. Note that the MPU 41 determines that the left selection button 213 is in a non-operating state when all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Right selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 selects the right selection button from the operation history of the right selection button 214 determined based on the first right selection operation detection flag, the second right selection operation detection flag, and the right selection operation detection flag. A right operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 214 is set. Here, since the right selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 256, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that the right selection operation detection pattern determination process is such that in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. You can read it as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 257(E), in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" are the operation states of the right selection button 214 three times. When it occurs, the first right selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. Then, the first right selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the right selection button 214 continues.

Further, when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times, the MPU 41 sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON. The 1 right selection operation pattern flag and the 3rd right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the right selection button 214 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has started). used.

Further, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times, the MPU 41 sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON, The 1 right selection operation pattern flag and the 2nd right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the right selection button 214 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has ended). used.

The MPU 41 also sets the first to third right selection operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times. to off. Note that the MPU 41 determines that the right selection button 214 is in a non-operating state when all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags are off.

[OK button operation detection process]
Returning to the description of FIG. 254, in the determination button operation detection process (step S4005), the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the determination button 21B, and executes processing for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, since the enter button operation detection process is the same as the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 255, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in the decision button operation detection process, in each step of the operation button operation detection process shown in FIG.

[Determination operation detection pattern determination process]
In the determination operation detection pattern determination process (step S4006), the MPU 41 selects the determination button from the operation history of the determination button 21B determined based on the first determination operation detection flag, the second determination operation detection flag, and the third determination operation detection flag. 21B to set an operation pattern flag for determining the operation state. Here, since the determination operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 255, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the determination operation detection pattern determination processing, the “operation detection flag” in each step of the operation detection pattern determination processing in FIG. 255 may be read as the “determination operation detection flag”.

Here, as shown in FIG. 257(F), in the enter operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the operation pattern of "ON", "ON", and "ON" has occurred as the operating state of the enter button 21B three times. , the first determination operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second determination operation pattern flag and the third determination operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first decision operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the decision button 21B is being operated continuously.

Further, when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the enter button 21B three times, the MPU 41 sets the second enter operation pattern flag to ON, The operation pattern flag and the third determined operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second enter operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the enter button 21B has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state (whether or not the enter button 21B has been operated). .

Furthermore, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the enter button 21B three times, the MPU 41 sets the third enter operation pattern flag to ON, The operation pattern flag and the second determined operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third enter operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the enter button 21B has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the enter button 21B has ended). .

Further, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third determination operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the determination button 21B three times. to off. Note that the MPU 41 determines that the enter button 21B is in the non-operating state when all of the first to third enter operation pattern flags are off.

[Command judgment processing]
Next, an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in step S2703 of the secondary timer interrupt processing in FIG. 253 will be described. Here, FIGS. 258 and 259 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing.

<Step S4301>
As shown in FIG. 258, in the command determination process, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not a command has been received from the main controller 4 (step S4301). Here, when the MPU 51 receives a command (step S4301: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4302. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received a command (step S4301: No), it ends the command determination process.

Commands received from main controller 4 are stored in the unprocessed command storage area of RAM 512, and MPU 51 refers to the unprocessed command storage area to determine whether or not a command has been received. Also, the command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is erased from the unprocessed command storage area when it is judged that the command has been received in this step S4301 and becomes the object of processing. stored in

<Step S4302>
When a command is received (step S4301: Yes), MPU51 judges whether the received command is a special figure variation pattern command (step S4302). The special figure fluctuation pattern command is a command indicating the fluctuation display time of special symbols in the special figure game (special figure fluctuation pattern) and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery.

Here, MPU51, if the received command is a special figure variation pattern command (step S4302: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4303, if the received command is not a special figure variation pattern command (step S4302: No) , the process proceeds to step S4307.

<Steps S4303 and S4304>
If the received command is a special figure variation pattern command (step S4302: Yes), MPU51, based on the special figure variation pattern command received from the main control device 4, stop symbol combination setting processing (step S4303) and variation type (Effect pattern) setting processing (step S4304) is executed. For the details of the stop symbol combination setting process, see FIGS. 260 and 261. For the details of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process,
Description will be made with reference to FIGS. 262 to 275. FIG.

<Step S4305>
Returning to the description of the command determination process in FIG. 258, in step S4305, the MPU 51 sets the variation display time corresponding to the received special figure variation pattern command to the variation display counter. Variation display time is determined according to the variation pattern information included in the special figure variation pattern command. Then, the variation display counter is decremented by one in the counter update processing of step S2701 in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. It is possible to determine the remaining time of the display time and the like. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display is finished when the variation display counter reaches zero.

<Step S4306>
In step S4306, the MPU 51 sends a display variation pattern command for specifying the contents of the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols determined in step S4303 of the command determination process and the effect pattern type set in step S4304 to the display control device. 6 to end the command determination process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop symbol combination of the effect pattern type and the decoration symbol. On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores a variation image of a decorative pattern and an effect image corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes display effects such as variable display and effect display in the symbol display section 341 according to the stop pattern combination of decorative patterns corresponding to the display variation pattern command, the variation type, and the effect type. do.

Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 performs variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols (for example, three) until a preset variable display time elapses, and a plurality of The variation of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed in order. During the variable display of the decoration pattern, various effects corresponding to the content of the variation type (production pattern type) specified by the display fluctuation pattern command are executed by the pattern display section 341, the speaker 26, the illumination section 27, and the like. .

In addition, when the MPU 51 outputs the display variation pattern command to the display control device 6, for example, the special figure game effecting flag is set to ON. This special figure game effect in progress flag is a flag indicating that the special figure game effect is being executed.

<Step S4307>
When the received command is not a special figure variation pattern command (step S4302: No), MPU51 judges whether the received command is a special figure shift command (step S4307). The special figure shift command is the first special figure reservation storage area REA when the first special figure reservation number N or the second special figure reservation number M decreases due to the start of the special figure game (variation display of the special figure) 1 Reservation area REA1 ~ 4th reservation area REA4, or 1st reservation area REB1 ~ 4th reservation area REB4 (see Figure 236) of the 2nd special reservation storage area REB Special figure showing the lottery result in the jackpot lottery This command indicates that the information has been shifted.

MPU51, if the received command is a special figure shift command (step S4307: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4308, if the received command is not a special figure shift command (step S4307: No), the process to step S4310 transition to

<Steps S4308 and S4309>
If the received command is a special figure shift command (step S4307: Yes), MPU51 performs special figure data setting processing (step S4308) and special figure data image display processing (step S4309), and the command determination processing finish.

Here, the special figure data setting process executed in step S4308 is the data of the special figure propriety information stored in the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area (not shown) set in the RAM 512 of the voice lamp control device 5 (special This is the process of shifting (updating) data. The special figure reservation storage area corresponding area (not shown) is an area corresponding to the special figure reservation storage area 412b (see FIG. 236) set in the RAM 412 of the main controller 4, and is equivalent to the special figure reservation storage area 412b. Special figure data is stored. The special figure reservation storage area corresponding area (not shown) is the first special figure reservation storage area REA of the special figure reservation storage area 412b, the second special figure reservation storage area REB, and the special figure execution area AE (see FIG. 236) It includes a first special figure reserved storage area corresponding area, a second special figure reserved storage area corresponding area, and a special figure execution area corresponding area corresponding to each. In addition, the first special figure reservation storage area corresponding area is the first special figure reservation storage area 412b corresponding to the first to fourth reservation areas REA1 to REA4 (see FIG. 236) of the first special figure reservation storage area REA Figure 1st ~ 4th reservation area corresponding area (not shown), including the first special figure reservation number storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation number storage area (see Figure 236). Furthermore, the second special figure reservation storage area corresponding area is the second special figure corresponding to the first to fourth reservation areas REB1 to REB4 (see FIG. 236) of the second special figure reservation storage area REB in the special figure reservation storage area 412b Including the second special figure reservation number storage area corresponding to the figure 1st to 4th reservation area corresponding area, the second special figure reservation number storage area (see Figure 236).

On the other hand, the special figure data image display process executed in step S4309 is based on the special figure data stored in the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the RAM 512 shifted (updated) in step S4308. It is a process of shifting the image (special figure data image) related to the special figure data displayed on the display unit 341 .

Here, the special figure data image is displayed in the special figure data image display portion set in the symbol display portion 341 (not shown). The special figure data image display unit is set in the RAM 512, the special figure execution area corresponding area (not shown) of the special figure reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown), the first special figure reserved storage area corresponding area, and the second Corresponding to the 2 special figure reservation storage area corresponding area, it includes the special figure variation image display area, the first special figure reservation image display area and the second special figure reservation image display area.

The special figure fluctuation image display area is set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 Special figure reservation storage area 412b Special figure execution area AE (see FIG. 236) corresponding to the above-mentioned special figure reservation storage area corresponding area Based on the special figure data stored in the figure execution area corresponding area (not shown), it is an area for displaying the special figure game image for the special figure game. Then, in the special figure fluctuation image display area, when the special figure data is stored in the special figure execution area corresponding area, the special figure game image is displayed, while the special figure is displayed in the special figure execution area corresponding area When the data is not stored, the special figure game image is not displayed. That is, the special symbol game image is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and is hidden by the stop display of the special symbol. In other words, by displaying the special figure game image, it is clearly indicated that the special figure game is being executed, and by hiding the special figure game image, the end of the special figure game is clearly indicated. .

The first special figure reservation image display area 76 is the above-mentioned special figure reservation storage corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage area REA (see FIG. 236) of the special figure reservation storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main controller 4. An area for displaying a first special figure reserved image for a first special figure game based on special figure data stored in a first special figure reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the area corresponding area. This first special figure reserved image display area corresponds to the first special figure 1st to 4th reserved area corresponding area (not shown) of the first special figure reserved storage area corresponding area in the above-mentioned special figure reserved storage area corresponding area Then, it includes a first special figure first reserved image display area, a first special figure second reserved image display area, a first special figure third reserved image display area, and a first special figure fourth reserved image display area. Then, in the first special figure reserved image display area, when the special figure data is stored in any of the first special figure first to fourth reservation area corresponding areas (not shown), the first special figure reserved image is displayed, the first special figure pending image is not displayed when special figure data is not stored in any of the first special figure first to fourth reserved area corresponding regions (not shown). That is, the first special figure pending image is displayed by the number corresponding to the first special figure pending number N when there is a hold for the first special figure game, and when there is no hold for the first special figure game Do not show. In other words, the first special figure reservation number N for the first special figure game is specified based on the display number of the first special figure reservation images.

The second special figure reserved image display area is the above-mentioned special figure reserved storage area corresponding to the second special figure reserved storage area REB (see FIG. 236) of the special figure reserved storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main controller 4 Based on the special figure data stored in the second special figure reservation storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the corresponding area, it is an area for displaying the second special figure reservation image for the second special figure game. This second special figure reserved image display area corresponds to the second special figure 1st to 4th reserved area corresponding area (not shown) of the second special figure reserved storage area corresponding area in the above-mentioned special figure reserved storage area corresponding area Then, it includes a second special figure first reserved image display area, a second special figure second reserved image display area, a second special figure third reserved image display area, and a second special figure fourth reserved image display area. Then, in the second special figure reserved image display area, when the special figure data is stored in any of the second special figure first to fourth reservation area corresponding areas (not shown), the second special figure reserved image is displayed, the second special figure pending image is not displayed when the special figure data is not stored in any of the second special figure first to fourth reserved area corresponding regions (not shown). That is, the second special figure pending image is displayed by the number corresponding to the second special figure pending number M when there is a hold for the second special figure game, and when there is no hold for the second special figure game Do not show. In other words, the second special figure reservation number M for the second special figure game is specified based on the display number of the second special figure reservation images.

Then, in the special figure data image display process, when the received special figure shift command is for the first special figure, that is, when the first special figure game is started, the special figure execution of the area corresponding to the special figure reservation storage area The special figure game image is displayed in the special figure fluctuation image display area 75 based on the special figure data stored in the area corresponding area (not shown), and the first special figure reservation of the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area The first special figure reserved image is displayed in the first special figure reserved image display area 76 based on the special figure data stored in the storage area corresponding area (not shown).

On the other hand, in the special figure data image display process, when the received special figure shift command is for the second special figure, that is, when the second special figure game is started, the special figure execution of the area corresponding to the special figure reservation storage area The special figure game image is displayed in the special figure fluctuation image display area 75 based on the special figure data stored in the area corresponding area (not shown), and the second special figure reservation of the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area The second special figure reserved image is displayed in the second special figure reserved image display area 77 based on the special figure data stored in the storage area corresponding area (not shown).

<Step S4310>
Returning to the description of FIG. 258, when the received command is not a special figure shift command (step S4307: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the first special figure pending command (step S4310). The first special figure reservation command includes information indicating that the first special figure reservation number N for the first special figure game increases, information about the first special figure reservation number N after the increase, and the increasing first reservation Information on special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation display time) and the result of the big hit lottery is included.

MPU51, if the received command is the first special figure pending command (step S4310: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4311, if the received command is not the first special figure pending command (step S4310: No), The process proceeds to step S4313.

<Steps S4311 and S4312>
If the received command is the first special figure pending command (step S4310: Yes), MPU51 executes the first special figure pending information update process (step S4311) and the first special figure pending image display process (step S4312) and terminates the command determination process.

Here, the first special figure reservation information update process executed in step S4311 is data ( Toku-zu data) is a process to add (update). Specifically, in the first special figure reservation information update process, the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 ( Figure 236 reference), the special figure data corresponding to the special figure propriety information stored in the first empty reservation area corresponds to the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 in which the special figure propriety information is stored It is stored in the 1st special figure 1st to 4th reserved area corresponding area (not shown) set by. For example, when the special figure propriety information is stored in the second reserved area REA2 (see FIG. 236) of the first special figure reserved storage area REA in the special figure reserved storage area 412b, corresponding to the second reserved area REA2 Special figure data is stored in the first special figure second reservation area corresponding area (not shown) that is set. Also, in the first special figure reservation information update process, 1 is added to the first special figure reservation number N stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area .

On the other hand, the first special figure reserved image display process executed in step S4312 is based on the special figure data added (updated) to the first special figure reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) in step S4312. A process of adding the first special figure reserved image to the special figure reserved image display area is executed.

<Step S4313>
When the received command is not the first special figure pending command (step S4310: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the second special figure pending command (step S4313). The second special figure reservation command is information indicating that the second special figure reservation number M for the second special game game increases, information about the second special figure reservation number M after the increase, and the increasing second reservation Information on special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation display time) and the result of the big hit lottery is included.

MPU51, if the received command is the second special figure pending command (step S4313: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4314, if the received command is not the second special figure pending command (step S4313: No), The process proceeds to step S4316.

<Steps S4314 and S4315>
If the received command is the second special figure pending command (step S4313: Yes), MPU51 executes the second special figure pending information update process (step S4314) and the second special figure pending image display process (step S4315) and terminates the command determination process.

Here, the second special figure reservation information update process executed in step S4314 is data ( Toku-zu data) is a process to add (update). Specifically, in the second special figure reservation information update process, the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 ( Figure 236 reference), the special figure data corresponding to the special figure propriety information stored in the first empty reservation area corresponds to the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 where the special figure propriety information is stored It is stored in the 2nd special figure 1st to 4th reservation area corresponding area (not shown) set by. For example, when the special figure propriety information is stored in the third reserved area REB3 (see FIG. 236) of the second special figure reserved storage area REB in the special figure reserved storage area 412b, corresponding to the third reserved area REB3 Special figure data is stored in the set first special figure third reserved area corresponding area (not shown). Also, in the second special figure reservation information update process, 1 is added to the second special figure reservation number M stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area .

On the other hand, the second special figure reserved image display processing executed in step S4315 is based on the special figure data added (updated) to the second special figure reserved storage area corresponding area (not shown) in step S4314, the second A process of adding a second special figure reserved image to the special figure reserved image display area 77 is executed.

<Step S4316>
When the received command is not the second special figure pending command (step S4313: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is the jackpot game start command (step S4316). The jackpot game start command is a command indicating to start the jackpot game, and is set when the jackpot game is started in step S3904 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 249 executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4. .

If the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S4316: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4317, and if the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S4316: No), the process goes to step S4319. transition to

<Steps S4317 and S4318>
When the jackpot game start command is received (step S4316: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the jackpot game effect setting process (step S4317), sets the jackpot game flag to ON (step S4318), and executes the command determination process. exit.

In the jackpot game effect setting process, the process of setting the jackpot effect including the opening effect, opening/closing execution mode effect (round game effect and interval effect), and ending effect executed in the jackpot game is executed. The opening effect and the ending effect are display effects executed by the display control process in the symbol display section 341 which is a controlled object different from the opening/closing door 319 in a state where the variable winning opening 316 is closed by the opening/closing door 319 which is a movable body. be. Specifically, the opening effect is executed in the pattern display unit 341 before opening and closing of the door 319 is started by the movable body control process, and the ending effect is executed after the opening and closing of the door 319 is finished by the movable body control process. It is executed in the pattern display section 341 . The open/close execution mode effect (round game effect and interval effect) is a display effect executed in a state where the variable prize winning opening 316 is opened and closed by moving the open/close door 319 by the movable body control process. That is, the opening and closing of the variable prize winning opening 316 by the open/close door 319 is executed while the opening/closing execution mode effect as the display effect in the pattern display section 341 is being displayed.

In this jackpot game effect setting process, a display control process for setting the display effects executed by the symbol display unit 341 in the opening of the jackpot game, the opening/closing execution mode (round game and interval), and the ending is executed. The process of setting the sound effect in the speaker 26 and the lamp effect in the illumination part 27 executed in the opening, opening/closing execution mode (round game and interval), and ending is executed. In addition, the opening and closing door 319, which is a movable body, is opened and closed during execution of the effect in the opening and closing execution mode (round game and interval).

The opening effect, opening/closing execution mode effect (round game effect and interval effect), and ending effect may be of one type or plural types. For example, when setting multiple types of opening effects, opening and closing execution mode effects (round game effects and interval effects), and ending effects, effects in the case of a variable probability jackpot, effects in the case of a normal jackpot, and cases in which the variable probability game state continues It is conceivable to set the production of

In addition, the flag during the jackpot game is a flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed, and in step S5201 in the jackpot game effect control process of FIG. It is referred to determine whether or not to control the progress of the jackpot game effect.

<Step S4319>
If the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S4316: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an opening start command (step S4319) The opening start command starts the opening of the jackpot game. It is a command indicating that the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 is executed, and is set when starting the opening at step S3908 in the jackpot game control process of FIG.

If the received command is the opening start command (step S4319: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4320, and if the received command is not the opening start command (step S4319: No), shifts the process to step S4321. do.

<Step S4320>
When the opening start command is received (step S4319: Yes), the MPU 52 sets the opening effect start flag to ON (step S4320), and terminates the command determination process. The opening effect start flag is a flag for starting the opening effect of the jackpot game, and is referred to in order to determine whether or not to start the opening effect in step S5202 in the jackpot game effect control process of FIG. .

<Step S4321>
When the received command is not the opening start command (step S4319: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the opening end command (step S4321) The opening end command ends the opening of the jackpot game. It is a command indicating that, and is set when ending the opening in step S3914 in the jackpot game control process of FIG.

If the received command is the opening end command (step S4321: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4322, and if the received command is not the opening end command (step S4321: No), the process proceeds to the step in FIG. Move to S4323.

<Step S4322>
When the opening end command is received (step S4321: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the opening effect end flag to ON (step S4322), and ends the command determination process. The opening effect end flag is a flag for ending the opening effect of the jackpot game, and is referred to in order to determine whether or not to end the opening effect in step S5205 in the jackpot game effect control process of FIG. 289 described later. .

<Step S4323>
When the received command is not the opening end command (step S4321: No), as shown in FIG. 259, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the round game start command (step S4323). The round game start command is a command indicating the start of the round game in the opening/closing execution mode and indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be executed this time, and is a jackpot game of FIG. It is set when starting the round game of opening and closing execution mode in step S3917 in control processing.

If the received command is the round game start command (step S4323: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4324, and if the received command is not the round game start command (step S4323: No), the process goes to step S4326. transition to

<Steps S4324 and S4325>
When the round game start command is received (step S4323: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect start flag to ON (step S4324), and stores the round number information indicating what round the round game is in the RAM 512. (step S4325), and the command determination process ends. The round game effect start flag is referenced in order to determine whether or not to start each round game effect of the open/close execution mode effect in step S5208 of the jackpot game effect control process in FIG. 289 described later.

<Step S4326>
When the received command is not the round game start command (step S4323: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the round game end command (step S4326). The round game end command is a command indicating to end the round game in the opening/closing execution mode, and when the round game is ended in step S3929 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. is set to

MPU51, if the received command is a round game end command (step S4326: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4327, if the received command is not a round game end command (step S4326: No), the process to step S4328 transition to

<Step S4327>
When the round game end command is received (step S4326: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect end flag to ON (step S4327), and ends the command determination process. The round game end flag is referenced when determining whether or not to end the round game effect in step S5211 in the jackpot game effect control process of FIG. 289 described later.

<Step S4328>
When the received command is not the round game end command (step S4326: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the interval start command (step S4328). The interval start command is a command indicating to start the interval between round games in the opening/closing execution mode, and the interval is started in step S3933 in the big hit game control process of FIG. set if

Here, if the received command is the interval start command (step S4328: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4329, and if the received command is not the interval start command (step S4328: No), the process proceeds to step S4328. Move to S4330.

<Step S4329>
When the received command is the interval start command (step S4328: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the interval effect start flag to ON (step S4329), and terminates the command determination process. The interval production start flag is referenced when determining whether or not to start the interval production in step S5214 in the jackpot game production control process of FIG. 289 described later.

<Step S4330>
If the received command is not the interval start command (step S4328: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the interval end command (step S4330). The interval end command is a command indicating to end the interval between round games in the opening/closing execution mode, and ends the interval in step S3939 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. set if

Here, if the received command is the interval end command (step S4330: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4331; The process proceeds to S4332.

<Step S4331>
When the received command is the interval end command (step S4330: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the interval effect end flag to ON (step S4331), and ends the command determination process. The interval production end flag is referenced when it is determined whether or not the interval production is ended in step S5217 in the jackpot game production control process of FIG. 289 described later.

<Step S4332>
If the received command is not the interval end command (step S4330: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the ending start command (step S4332). The ending start command is a command indicating to start the ending in the jackpot game, and is set when starting the ending in step S3942 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. .

Here, if the received command is the ending start command (step S4332: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4333, and if the received command is not the ending start command (step S4332: No), the process proceeds to step S4333. The process proceeds to S4334.

<Step S4333>
When the received command is the ending start command (step S4332: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending effect start flag to ON (step S4333), and ends the command determination process. The ending effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start the ending effect in step S5220 of the jackpot game effect control process in FIG. 289 described later.

<Step S4334>
If the received command is not the ending start command (step S4332: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the ending end command (step S4334). The ending end command is a command indicating that the ending of the jackpot game ends, and is set when the ending is ended in step S3948 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. .

Here, if the received command is the ending end command (step S4334: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4335, and if the received command is not the ending end command (step S4334: No), the process proceeds to step S4335. The process proceeds to S4336.

<Step S4335>
When the received command is the ending ending command (step S4334: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending effect end flag to ON (step S4335), and ends the command determination process. The ending effect end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to end the ending effect in step S5223 of the jackpot game effect control process in FIG. 289 described later.

<Step S4336>
When the received command is not the ending end command (step S4334: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the jackpot game end command (step S4336). The jackpot game end command is a command indicating to end the jackpot game, and is set when the jackpot game is ended in step S3950 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 249 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 .

Here, if the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S4336: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4337, and if the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S4336: No), the process to step S4339.

<Step S4337>
When the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S4336: Yes), the MPU 51 sets off the jackpot game flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed (step S4337), and executes the command determination process. finish.

<Step S4338>
If the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S4336: No), the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands received from the main control device 4 (step S4338), and terminates the command determination processing.

[Stop symbol combination setting process]
Next, an example of the procedure of the stop symbol combination setting process executed in step S4303 of the command process of FIG. 258 will be described. In the stop symbol combination setting process, a symbol combination is set when a plurality of decoration symbols (for example, three) variably displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the special symbol game are stopped and displayed on the active line. Specifically, based on the special figure variation pattern command, the MPU 51 sets a stop symbol combination with reference to a first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 260), which will be described later. Here, FIG. 260 is a diagram showing an example of the first stop symbol selection table, and FIG. 261 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the stop symbol combination setting process. The stop symbol combination setting process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 260 and 261. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 260, in the first stop symbol selection table, a decoration symbol (first stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed first in the symbol display section 341 is determined. In addition, in FIG. 260, the decorative patterns are “1” to “9”, “333” is a pattern combination indicating that it is a probability variable jackpot (either 5R probability variable jackpot or 16R probability variable jackpot), and “777” is 16R It is premised that the symbol combination indicating that it is a definite variable jackpot, and the combination of symbols other than "333" and "777" is either a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R definite variable jackpot, or a 16R definite variable jackpot. .

When the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", there is no sorting of "3" and "7" as the first stop symbols, and the first stop symbols are selected from decoration symbols other than "3" and "7" with a predetermined probability. It is determined. That is, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the symbol combination of "333" or "777" indicating the 5R probability variable jackpot or the 16R probability variable jackpot (variable probability jackpot) is not stopped and displayed.

Further, when the lottery result is ``5R probability variable jackpot'', ``7'' is not sorted as the first stop pattern, and the first stop pattern is determined with a predetermined probability from decoration patterns other than ``7''. That is, when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", the symbol combination of "777" indicating the 16R probability variable jackpot is not stop-displayed. On the other hand, even if the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", double symbol combinations other than the symbol combination "333" indicating the 5R probability variable jackpot can be stop-displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is ``5R probability variable big win'', the double symbol combination other than the ``333'' symbol combination whose decorative symbol stop display result suggests 5R normal big win can be stop-displayed.

Furthermore, when the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", there is a distribution for all the decorative patterns of "1" to "9", and the first stop with a predetermined probability from the decorative patterns of "1" to "9" Design is determined. In other words, even if the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", double symbol combinations other than the "777" symbol combination indicating the 16R probability variable jackpot can be stop-displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", the stop display result of the decorative pattern indicates a 5R probability variable jackpot or 5R normal jackpot. can be

Then, when the lottery result is a big win and the first stop symbol is determined, the MPU 51 determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same symbols as the previously determined first stop symbol. Thereby, the stop symbol combination to be stopped and displayed on the active line of the symbol display section 341 in the special symbol game is determined.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is "missing", there is a distribution for all the decorative patterns "1" to "9", and the first stop pattern is determined with a predetermined probability from the decorative patterns "1" to "9". be done. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is "losing", the losing type selected based on the losing type table (see FIG. 237(D)) and the previously determined first stop symbol A second stop symbol is determined based on the stop symbol. For example, when the outlier type is front and rear outreach reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbol before and after the first stop symbol. In addition, when the out-of-order type is a ready-to-win other than front-to-rear out-of-order, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is different from the first stop symbol and the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. Determined by the design. Further, when the above-mentioned loss type is complete loss, the second stop symbol is determined as a symbol different from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined regardless of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. The combination of decorative symbols to be stopped may be determined by the display control device 6. Only the first stop symbol is determined by the sound lamp control device 5, and the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol are determined by the display control device 6. may decide.

Here, FIG. 261 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the stop symbol combination setting process. An example of the procedure of the stop symbol combination setting process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Steps S4401 to S4403>
As shown in FIG. 261, in the first stop symbol selection table, the MPU 51 first specifies the value of the first stop symbol type counter (step S4401), and specifies the result of the jackpot lottery (step S4402). Then, the MPU 51 sets a stop symbol combination based on the value of the first stop symbol type counter specified at step S4401 and the result of the big winning lottery specified at step S4402 (step S4403), and the process proceeds to step S4403. The process proceeds to S4404.

<Step S4404>
In step S4404, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery specified in step S4402 is the 16R variable probability jackpot. Then, when the result of the jackpot lottery is the 16R probability variable jackpot (step S4404: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4405, and when the jackpot lottery result is not the 16R probability variable jackpot (step S4404: No), the process is performed. The process moves to step S4406.

<Step S4405>
If the result of the jackpot lottery is the 16R probability variable jackpot (step S4404: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the stop symbol combination set in step S4403 is "777" for notifying that the 16R probability variable jackpot. do. Then, when the stop symbol combination is "777" (step S4405: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4406, and when the stop symbol combination is not "777" (step S4405: No), the process goes to step S4407. transition to

<Step S4406>
If the result of the jackpot lottery is not a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S4404: No), or if the stop symbol combination is "777" (step S4405: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the 16R probability variation non-promotion flag to ON (step S4406), the stop symbol combination setting process ends. The 16R probability variation non-promotion flag is a movable rotating accessory member 37 that is a movable body, and the 16R probability variation promotion effect is executed by moving the driving pattern G (see FIGS. 266 (D) and 274), and this 16R probability variation promotion It is a flag for executing a button effect (see FIG. 277) before the execution of the effect. G (see FIGS. 266(D) and 274) to determine whether or not to move, or in step S4702 in the button effect setting process in FIG. Referred to for

<Step S4407>
If the stop symbol combination set in step S4403 is not "777" notifying that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S4405: No), the MPU 51 sets the 16R probability variation promotion flag to ON, and performs the stop symbol combination setting process. exit. The 16R probability variation promotion flag executes the 16R probability variation promotion effect by moving the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, with the drive pattern F (see FIGS. 266 (C) and 272), and this 16R probability variation promotion effect 281 in step S4942 in FIG. 281 or step S4950 in FIG. (See FIGS. 266(C) and 272) to determine whether or not to set the drive data 4 to be activated, or whether to execute the button effect in step S4701 in the button effect setting process of FIG. 276 described later. It is referenced to determine whether or not

[Variation type (production pattern) setting process]
Next, an example of the procedure of the variation type (effect pattern) setting process executed in step S4304 of the command process of FIG. 258 will be described. In the variation type (production pattern) setting process, the special game production to be executed by various production means (symbol display unit 341, speaker 26, illumination unit 27, movable rotary accessory member 37) in the special game is set. The variation type (effect pattern) setting process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 262 to 277. FIG.

<Step S4501>
As shown in FIG. 262, in the variation type (effect pattern) setting process, the MPU 51 first refers to the variation type table (see FIG. 263) based on the special figure variation pattern command to determine the variation type (effect pattern) and The variable display time is set, and the effect pattern type is set based on the effect pattern type selection table (see FIG. 264) corresponding to the variation type (effect pattern) (step S4501).

Here, FIG. 263 is a diagram showing an example of the variation type table referred to by the MPU 51 when determining the variation type (effect pattern).

As shown in Figure 263, in the variation type table, the contents of the variation display time and the variation type (effect pattern) corresponding to the special figure variation pattern command are defined. For example, the special figure variation pattern command "A01" in which the lottery result is "normal jackpot" and the special figure variation pattern is "01" is associated with the variation display time "30 s" and the variation type "normal reach effect pattern". ing. In addition, the special figure variation pattern command "B02" whose lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot" and the special figure variation pattern is "02" corresponds to the variation display time "60 s" and the variation type "super reach effect pattern". The special figure variation pattern command "C03", which has a lottery result of "16R probability variable jackpot" and a special figure variation pattern of "03", has a variation display time of "90s" and a variation type of "special reach production pattern". are associated. Furthermore, the special figure variation pattern command "D04" in which the lottery result is "out" and the special figure variation pattern is "04" is associated with the variation display time "7 s" and the variation type "non-reach production pattern". The special figure variation pattern command "D05" with the lottery result "out" and the special figure variation pattern "05" is associated with the variation display time "10s" and the variation type "non-reach production pattern". It is

264(A) to 264(C) are diagrams showing an example of the effect pattern type selection table. The production pattern type selection table is set for each variation type (production pattern). Specifically, FIG. 264 (A) is a normal reach production pattern type selection table that is referred to when the final individual production type in the special game production is a normal reach production, and FIG. 264 (B) is in the special game production It is a super reach production pattern type selection table that is referred to when the final individual production type is a super reach production, and FIG. 264 (C) is a special reach production. It is a special reach effect pattern type selection table to be referred to.

In addition, in this embodiment, the case where there are five kinds of effect types corresponding to each variation type will be described as an example, but the number of effect types may be six or more. In addition, in FIG. 264, the effect type table when the variation type is no reach is omitted.

In the normal reach production pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 264 (A), the production pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the production pattern type counter according to the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot, and loss) , "effect pattern X1" to "effect pattern X5" are defined. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the normal reach effect pattern, the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is selected from the normal reach effect pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. select. Here, the production pattern X1 to the production pattern X3 included in the normal ready-to-win production pattern type selection table are productions in which, for example, normal ready-to-win production is executed in which the decoration pattern is in the ready-to-win state after the high-speed fluctuation production in which the decoration pattern fluctuates at high speed. , The final individual effect type is a normal reach effect.

In addition, in the super ready-to-win production pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 264(B), "production pattern Y1" to "production pattern Y5" are defined as production pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the production pattern type counter according to the lottery result. It is When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the super ready-to-win effect pattern, the MPU 51 selects a super ready-to-win effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Select from a table. Here, the production pattern Y1 to production pattern Y3 included in the super ready-to-win production pattern type selection table, for example, the normal ready-to-win production is executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation production, and furthermore, as the final individual production type, the expected degree of jackpot is higher than the normal ready-to-win production. It is a production that develops into a super reach production that is high and has a longer production execution time than the normal reach production. Note that the super ready-to-win effect pattern type selection table may include a super ready-to-win effect pattern that develops into a super ready-to-win effect after the high-speed fluctuation effect is completed without passing through the normal ready-to-win effect.

Furthermore, in the special ready-to-win effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 264(C), "effect pattern Z1" to "effect pattern Z5" are defined as effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the result of the lottery. It is When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the special ready-to-win effect pattern, the MPU 51 selects the special ready-to-win effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Select from a table. Here, the production pattern Z1 to production pattern Z3 included in the special reach production pattern type selection table, for example, normal reach production and super reach production are executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation production, and normal reach production and super reach production are executed as the final individual production type. It is a production that develops into a special reach production with a higher expectation for a big hit than the ready-to-win production and a longer production execution time than the normal reach production. The special reach production pattern type selection table includes a special reach production pattern that develops into a special reach production after a high-speed fluctuation production or a normal reach production ends without going through at least one of the normal reach production and the super reach production. You can

<Steps S4502 and S4503>
Returning to the description of FIG. 262, in step S4502, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the effect pattern set in step S4501 is the normal ready-to-win effect pattern. The MPU 51 sets a multi-reach flag when the effect pattern set in step S4501 is the normal reach effect pattern (step S4502: Yes) (step S4503), and shifts the process to step S4508. The normal reach flag is referenced in step S4601 of the accessory actuation effect setting process in FIG. 275 described later. On the other hand, when the effect pattern set in step S4501 is not the normal ready-to-win effect pattern (step S4502: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4504.

<Steps S4504 and S4505>
When the effect pattern set in step S4501 is not the normal ready-to-win effect pattern (step S4502: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the effect pattern set in step S4501 is the super ready-to-win effect pattern (step S4504). When the effect pattern set in step S4501 is the super reach effect pattern (step S4504: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a super reach flag (step S4505), and proceeds to step S4508. The super reach flag is referred to in step S4606 of the accessory actuation effect setting process in FIG. 275, which will be described later. On the other hand, when the effect pattern set in step S4501 is not the super ready-to-win effect pattern (step S4504: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4506.

<Steps S4506 and S4507>
When the production pattern set in step S4501 is not the super ready-to-win production pattern (step S4504: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the production pattern set in step S4501 is the special ready-to-win production pattern (step S4506). . When the effect pattern set in step S4501 is the special reach effect pattern (step S4506: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a special reach flag (step S4507), and proceeds to step S4508. The special reach flag is referred to in step S4614 of the accessory actuation effect setting process in FIG. 275, which will be described later. On the other hand, when the effect pattern set in step S4501 is not the special ready-to-win effect pattern (step S4506: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4508.

<Step S4408>
In step S4408, the MPU 51 executes a role product activation effect setting process, and shifts the process to step S4409. In the accessory operation effect setting process, details will be described later, but if super reach effect or special reach effect is executed in the special game effect, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a jackpot, the special game A movable body control process for setting the motion of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is the movable body in the performance, is executed.

<Step S4409>
In step S4409, the MPU 51 executes a button effect setting process and terminates the special figure game setting process. The details of the button effect setting process will be described later. An effect is set to prompt the player to operate the operation button 20 before informing the player whether or not the player will be promoted to the 16R probability variable jackpot by the action of the accessory member 37.例文帳に追加

[Accessory actuation effect setting process]
Next, the role product operation effect setting process executed in step S4508 of the special game effect setting process of FIG. 262 will be described. will be explained first.

Here, FIG. 265 is a diagram showing an example of the operation timing of the movable rotating accessory member 37 which is a movable body. In this embodiment, the movable rotary accessory member 37 notifies that it will develop into a super reach performance, notifies that it will not develop into a super reach performance, notifies that it will develop into a special reach performance, and does not develop into a special reach performance. , notification of the 16R probability variable jackpot, and notification of the 16R probability variable jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 265, the operation timing of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is set according to the effect type (effect pattern) set in step S4501 of the special figure game effect setting process of FIG.

Specifically, when the production type (production pattern) is a completely off production pattern, the operation timing of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is not set. That is, when the production type (production pattern) is completely off, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is not operated.

When the effect type (effect pattern) is the normal reach effect pattern, the accessory actuation timing A is set as the actuation timing of the movable rotating accessory member 37 . The accessory actuation timing A is set at the end of the normal reach performance, and is started when the time T1 has elapsed from the start of the special figure game.

Then, at the accessory actuation timing A in the case of the normal reach performance pattern, the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is a 16R probability variable jackpot when the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a 16R probability variable jackpot. It is operated in a movable mode C (see FIG. 266 (C)) that announces that (16R variable promotion), and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R variable variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, it is not a 16R variable variable jackpot (16R It is operated in the later-described movable mode D (see FIG. 266 (D)) to announce the variable probability non-promotion), and if the result of the jackpot lottery is lost, it will notify that it will not develop into a special reach (SP non-development). It is operated in a movable mode D (see FIG. 266(D)), which will be described later.

When the effect type (effect pattern) is the super ready-to-win effect pattern, the accessory actuation timing A and the accessory actuation timing B are set as the actuation timings of the movable rotary accessory member 37 . The accessory actuation timing A is set at the end of the normal reach performance, and is started when the time T1 has elapsed from the start of the special figure game. The accessory actuation timing B is set at the final stage of the super ready-to-win production, and is started when the time T2 has passed from the start of the special figure game.

Then, at the accessory actuation timing A in the case of the super reach effect pattern, the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, develops into super reach regardless of the result of the big win lottery in the lottery process (SP 266(A)), which will be described later.

Further, at the accessory actuation timing B in the case of the super reach performance pattern, the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is a 16R variable variable jackpot when the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a 16R variable variable jackpot. It is operated in a movable mode C (see FIG. 266 (C)) to notify that there is something (16R variable promotion), and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R variable variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, it is not a 16R variable variable jackpot ( 16R probability variable non-promotion) is operated in the later-described movable mode D (see FIG. 266 (D)), and if the result of the jackpot lottery is lost, it will not develop into a special reach (SPSP non-development). 266(D)).

When the production type (production pattern) is the special ready-to-win production pattern, accessory actuation timing A, accessory actuation timing B, and accessory actuation timing C are set as the actuation timings of the movable rotary accessory member 37 . The accessory actuation timing A is set at the end of the normal reach performance, and is started when the time T1 has elapsed from the start of the special figure game. The accessory actuation timing B is set at the final stage of the super ready-to-win production, and is started when the time T2 has passed from the start of the special figure game. The accessory actuation timing C is set at the final stage of the special ready-to-win production, and is started when the time T3 has passed from the start of the special figure game.

Then, at the accessory actuation timing A in the case of the special reach effect pattern, the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, develops into super reach (SP 266(A)), which will be described later.

In addition, at the accessory actuation timing B in the case of the special reach effect pattern, the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, develops into a special reach (SPSP 266(A)), which will be described later.

Further, at the accessory actuation timing C in the case of the special reach performance pattern, the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is the 16R variable variable jackpot when the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is the 16R variable variable jackpot. It is operated in a movable mode C (see FIG. 266 (C)) to notify that there is something (16R variable promotion), and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R variable variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, it is not a 16R variable variable jackpot ( It is operated in the later-described movable mode D (see FIG. 266 (D)) that announces 16R probability variable non-promotion).

Here, FIGS. 266(A) to 266(D) are diagrams showing an example of the movable mode of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body. As shown in FIGS. 266(A) to 266(D), in the present embodiment, movable mode A, movable mode B, movable mode C, and movable mode D are set as movable modes of the movable rotary accessory member 37. ing.

Movable mode A shown in FIG. 266(A) notifies that the super reach performance will be developed. Control for displaying a super ready-to-win effect as a display effect is executed by display control processing in the symbol display unit 341 which is a control object different from the accessory member 37 . Movable state B shown in FIG. 266(B) notifies that the special reach performance will be developed, and after the control of the movable rotary accessory member 37 in the movable state B by the movable body control process is completed, the movable rotation is performed. Control for displaying a special ready-to-win effect as a display effect is executed by display control processing in the symbol display unit 341 which is a control object different from the accessory member 37 . The movable mode C shown in FIG. 266(C) notifies that it is a 16R probability variable jackpot. In the symbol display section 341, which is a control object different from the accessory member 37, control is executed to display a display effect for notifying that the 16R probability variable jackpot is won.

On the other hand, movable mode D shown in FIG. 266(D) notifies that super ready-to-win effect will not develop, that special ready-to-win effect will not develop, or that 16R variable variable jackpot will not occur. Even in this case, after the control of the movable rotating accessory member 37 in the movable mode D by the movable body control processing is completed, the symbol display unit 341, which is a control object different from the movable rotating accessory member 37, is displayed by the display control processing. You may perform control which displays production.

Thus, in this embodiment, the control executed after the series of specific actions of the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is completed includes a control target different from the movable rotary accessory member 37. In this way, the control executed after the series of specific actions of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is completed includes a control target different from the movable rotary accessory member 37, so that the movable rotary accessory member 37 can perform a series of operations. After the specific action is completed, it is possible to give the information given by the movable rotary accessory member 37 to a control object different from the movable rotary accessory member 37 again. As a result, even if the player misses the action of the movable rotary accessory member 37 or does not understand the content given by the action of the movable rotary accessory member 37, the movable rotary accessory member 37 can be It is possible to give information to the player again in a control object different from the control object. In addition, in the present embodiment, the control executed after the series of specific actions of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, includes a control target different from the movable rotating accessory member 37, so that the movable rotation can be performed. Depending on the action of the accessory member 37, it is also possible to specify or suggest an effect to be executed later. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while paying attention to the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 and expecting that an effect advantageous to the player will be executed or suggested. , the interest in the game is improved.

Movable Mode A, Movable Mode B, Movable Mode C, and Movable Mode D include common continuous motions as motions of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body. In this common continuous motion, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved according to drive pattern A, drive pattern B, and drive pattern C, which will be described later. Then, in the movable mode A shown in FIG. 266(A), the movable rotating accessory member 37 is movable according to the driving pattern D described later after the common continuous operation (driving pattern A, driving pattern B, and driving pattern C). be done. In the movable mode B shown in FIG. 266(B), the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved according to the drive pattern E described later after common continuous motions (drive pattern A, drive pattern B, and drive pattern C). . In the movable mode C shown in FIG. 266(C), the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved according to the drive pattern F, which will be described later, after common continuous motions (drive pattern A, drive pattern B, and drive pattern C). . In the movable mode D shown in FIG. 266(D), the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved according to the drive pattern G described later after common continuous motions (drive pattern A, drive pattern B, and drive pattern C). .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 266(E), the ROM 511 of the sound lamp control device 5 stores drive data as information for operating the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, in a predetermined movable mode. A data storage area is set. In this drive data storage area, drive data 1 (role product action scenario data 1), drive data 2 (role product action scenario data 2), drive data 3 (role product action scenario data 3), drive data 4 (role product action scenario data 3) Action scenario data 4) and driving data 5 (accessory action scenario data 5) are stored. When controlling the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, based on the drive data 1, the drive data corresponding to the movable mode of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is read from the drive data storage area set in the ROM 511. The read drive data is set in a temporary storage area provided in the RAM 512 . Then, the MPU 51 controls the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, based on the drive data 1 set in the temporary storage area of the RAM 512. FIG. Here, since the ROM 511 is a non-volatile memory, it is suitable for storing the driving data, but the reading speed is slow. unsuitable. Therefore, by setting the drive data read from the drive data storage area of the ROM 511 in the temporary storage area of the RAM 512 and controlling the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37, the drive data can be directly read from the drive data storage area of the ROM 511. It is possible to improve the operating speed of the movable rotating accessory member 37 as compared with the case where the operation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is controlled by

The driving data 1 (accessory action scenario data 1) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. It is information that causes the member 37 to perform a common continuous motion. That is, when it is decided to operate the movable rotating accessory member 37 which is a movable body in the movable modes A to D, the drive data 1 read from the drive data storage area of the ROM 511 is stored in the temporary storage area of the RAM 512. Only by setting the number of times, it is possible to cause the movable rotating accessory member 37 to perform a common continuous motion. Further, by controlling the common continuous motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1, it becomes possible to simplify the control of the movable rotary accessory member 37 and reduce the amount of data. As a result, the amount of drive data used for one movable mode can be reduced, so not only can the memory load be reduced, but also the drive data read and temporary The burden of control such as memory is reduced. When the movable rotary accessory member 37 is operated based on the common drive data 1, after all the control processing based on the common drive data 1 is completed, the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 On the other hand, the next operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is executed based on the drive data 2 to 5 individually set according to each movable mode.

The driving data 2 (accessory action scenario data 2), details of which will be described later with reference to FIG. In the movable mode A, after the common continuous motion (driving patterns A to C), the movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved by the driving pattern D (see FIG. 270 (A)) as an individual motion, which will be described later. be.

The driving data 3 (accessory action scenario data 3), details of which will be described later with reference to FIG. In the movable mode B, after the common continuous motion (driving patterns A to C), the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved by the driving pattern E (see FIG. 271 (A)) as an individual motion, which will be described later. be.

The driving data 4 (accessory action scenario data 4), details of which will be described later with reference to FIG. In mode C, after the common continuous motions (driving patterns A to C), it is information for moving the movable rotary accessory member 37 in a driving pattern F (see FIG. 272) as an individual motion, which will be described later.

The driving data 5 (role item action scenario data 5), whose details will be described later with reference to FIG. SPSP non-development), or in the movable mode D of the movable rotating accessory member 37 that notifies that it is not a 16R probability variable jackpot (16R probability variable non-promoted), after common continuous operations (drive patterns A to C), individual operations This is information for moving the movable rotary accessory member 37 in a drive pattern G (see FIG. 274(A)) described later.

Thus, movable mode A, movable mode B, movable mode C, and movable mode D include common continuous motions as motions of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body. Among movable modes A to D, movable mode A, movable mode B, and movable mode C are intended to notify the player in an advantageous manner by the action of the movable rotary accessory member 37 . On the other hand, among the movable modes A to D, the movable mode D is for giving a disadvantageous notification to the player by the action of the movable rotary accessory member 37 . That is, in the present embodiment, after the control of the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body by continuous motion common to the movable modes A to D, is completed, in the movable modes A to C, an advantageous notification is given to the player. Control 1 is executed, and in movable mode D, second control is executed to give a disadvantageous notice to the player.

Further, in this embodiment, although the details will be described later, at the end of the continuous motion common to the movable modes A to D, the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is positioned at the standby position, which is the return side position. Movement is stopped in the state. That is, in the present embodiment, after the control of the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body by continuous motion common to the movable modes A to D, is completed, in the movable modes A to C, an advantageous notification is given to the player. In both the case where the control 1 is executed and the case where the second control in which the player is notified disadvantageously in the movable mode D is executed, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is in the standby position which is the return side position. , the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is started. Therefore, when the continuous motion common to the movable modes A to D is completed, the subsequent control of the movable rotary accessory member 37 may be either the first control or the second control, without any sense of incongruity. Smoothly, the subsequent control of the movable rotary accessory member 37 can be started. As a result, when it is determined that the end determination condition of the continuous motion is satisfied, the first control and the second control are performed from the continuous motion even if the timing of the end determination is undefined. It is possible to shift to the next operation by the driving patterns D to G executed by .

Here, FIG. 267(A) is a diagram showing an example of the motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37 in drive pattern A, which is a common continuous motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body. (B) is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 in the drive pattern B, which is a common continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37, and FIG. 268 is the movable body. It is a figure which shows an example of operation|movement of the movable rotation accessory member 37 by the drive pattern C which is the common continuous operation|movement of the movable rotation accessory member 37. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 267(A), the driving pattern A, which is a common continuous motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37, is such that the movable rotary accessory member 37 is in the standby position (FIG. 267(A1) 267 (A3)) and the intermediate operating position 1 (see FIG. 267 (A2)) which is the driving side position (see FIG. 267 (A3)). The intermediate operating position 1 is set at a position closer to the standby position (near the standby position) between the standby position and the maximum operating position (position farthest from the standby position) of the movable rotary accessory member 37 .

As shown in FIG. 267(B), the driving pattern B, which is a common continuous motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37, is such that the movable rotary accessory member 37 is in the standby position (FIG. 267(B1) 267 (B3)) and the intermediate operating position 2 (see FIG. 267 (B2)) which is the drive side position (see FIG. 267 (B3)). The intermediate operating position 2 is set at a position closer to the maximum operating position than the intermediate operating position 1 between the standby position and the maximum operating position (the position farthest from the standby position) of the movable rotary accessory member 37. .

As shown in FIG. 268, the drive pattern C, which is a common continuous motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37, moves the movable rotary accessory member 37 from the standby position (see FIG. 268 (A1)) to the intermediate operating position 1 ( 268 (A2)), intermediate operating position 1 (see FIG. 268 (A2)) which is the return side position, and intermediate operating position 2 (see FIG. 268 (A3)) which is the drive side position. 268(A2)), and then return to the standby position (see FIG. 268(A4)).

As described above, the common continuous motion (driving patterns A to C) of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is based on the information stored in the driving data storage area set in the RAM 512 of the sound lamp control device 5. is realized based on the drive data 1 (role product action scenario data 1). Here, FIG. 269 is a diagram showing an example of drive data 1 (role product action scenario data 1) that is information stored in the drive data storage area. The drive data 1 (accessory action scenario data 1) shown in FIG. 269 is a group of data that defines the control content and the control order for performing common continuous motions of the movable rotary accessory member 37 which is a movable body. , is an example in which the vertical movement of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is controlled by a stepping motor for lifting.

As shown in FIG. 269, the drive data 1 (accessory action scenario data 1) is processed No. 01 to process No. 29, the movable rotary accessary member 37 is operated with drive patterns A to C. Processing No. 01 to process No. 29, processing no. 01 to process No. 09 corresponds to the processing for drive pattern A, and processing No. 10 to process No. 17 corresponds to the processing for drive pattern B, and processing No. 18 to process No. 29 corresponds to processing for drive pattern C;

Processing No. for drive pattern A, which is a continuous operation. 01 to process No. In the process of 09, first, drive data 1 (role object action scenario data 1) is set in the temporary storage area of the RAM 512, and after maintaining the stepping motor for lifting and lowering in a stopped state for 200 msec (process No. 01), The stepping motor for lifting is rotated in the forward direction by 12 steps (processing No. 02). As a result, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved downward by 12 mm, and the movable rotary accessory member 37 is positioned at the intermediate operating position 1, which is the drive side position. Then, after the stepping motor rotation stop state for lifting is maintained for 12 msec (processing No. 03), the stepping motor for lifting is rotated 12 steps in the opposite direction (processing No. 04). As a result, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved upward by 12 mm after the stop state of the movable rotary accessory member 37 at the intermediate operating position 1 is maintained for 12 msec, and the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved to the return side. is positioned at the standby position. As a result, the movable rotary accessory member 37 makes one reciprocation between the standby position, which is the return side position, and the intermediate operating position 1, which is the drive side position. After that, after the stepping motor for lifting and lowering has been kept in a stopped state for 40 msec (process No. 05), process No. 06 to process No. 09, the processing No. 09 described above is executed. 02 to process No. 05, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is reciprocated once between the standby position, which is the return side position, and the intermediate operating position 1, which is the drive side position. As a result, processing no. 01 to process No. By executing the process of 09, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved to the standby position (see FIG. 267 (A1)), which is the return side position, and the intermediate operating position 1 (see FIG. 267 (A2)), which is the drive side position. The operation of the driving pattern A that makes two round trips between and is executed.

Processing No. for drive pattern B, which is a continuous operation. 10 to process No. In the process of 17, first, the stepping motor for lifting is rotated in the forward direction by 36 steps (process No. 10). As a result, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved downward by 36 mm, and the movable rotary accessory member 37 is positioned at the intermediate operating position 2, which is the drive side position. Then, after the stepping motor for elevation is maintained in a stopped state for 36 msec (processing No. 11), the stepping motor for elevation is rotated in the opposite direction by 36 steps (processing No. 12), and the stepping motor for elevation is rotated by 36 steps. The rotation stop state of the motor is maintained for 40 msec (processing No. 13). As a result, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved upward by 36 mm, and is positioned at the standby position, which is the return side position. One reciprocation is made between a standby position and an intermediate operating position 2 which is a drive side position. Furthermore, processing no. 14 to process No. By executing the process No. 17, the above process No. 10 to process No. 13, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is reciprocated once between the standby position, which is the return side position, and the intermediate operating position 2, which is the drive side position. As a result, processing no. 10 to process No. 17, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved to the standby position (see FIG. 267 (B1)), which is the return side position, and the intermediate operating position 2 (see FIG. 267 (B2)), which is the drive side position. The operation of the drive pattern B that makes two reciprocations between and is executed.

Processing No. for drive pattern C, which is a continuous operation. 18 to process No. In the process of 29, first, the stepping motor for lifting is rotated in the positive direction by 12 steps (processing No. 18), and the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for lifting is maintained for 40 msec (processing No. 19). As a result, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved downward by 12 mm, and the movable rotary accessory member 37 is positioned from the standby position (see FIG. 268 (A1)) to the intermediate operating position 1 (see FIG. 268 (A2)). be. As described above, the intermediate operating position 1 in the drive pattern C is the return side position in the reciprocating motion between the intermediate operating position 1 and the intermediate operating position 2 in the drive pattern C. Then, the stepping motor for lifting is further rotated in the positive direction by 24 steps (processing No. 20), and the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for lifting is maintained for 24 msec (processing No. 21). As a result, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is further moved downward by 24 mm, and the movable rotary accessory member 37 is positioned at the intermediate operating position 2 (see FIG. 267 (A3)). As described above, the intermediate operating position 2 in the drive pattern C is the drive side position in the reciprocating motion between the intermediate operating positions 1 and 2 in the drive pattern C. Further, the stepping motor for lifting is rotated in the opposite direction by 24 steps (processing No. 22), and the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for lifting is maintained for 40 msec (processing No. 23). As a result, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved upward by 24 mm, and the movable rotating accessory member 37 is positioned at the intermediate operating position 1 (see FIG. 268 (A2)), which is the return side position. The accessory member 37 is reciprocated once between the intermediate operating position 1, which is the return side position, and the intermediate operating position 2, which is the drive side position. After that, process no. 24 to process No. 27, the processing No. 27 described above is executed. 20 to process No. 23, the movable rotatable accessory member 37 is moved to the intermediate operating position 1 (see FIG. 268 (A2)), which is the return side position, and the intermediate operating position 2 (see FIG. 268 (A2)), which is the driving side position. (See A3)). As a result, processing no. 20 to process No. 27, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved to the intermediate operating position 1 (see FIG. 268 (A2)), which is the return side position, and the intermediate operating position 2 (see FIG. 268 (A3), which is the driving side position). See). Further, the stepping motor for lifting is rotated in the opposite direction by 12 steps (processing No. 28), and the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for lifting is maintained for 40 msec (processing No. 29). As a result, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is returned to the standby position (see FIG. 268 (A1)). As a result, processing no. 18 to process No. By executing the process of 29, the operation of the drive pattern C for the movable rotary accessory member 37 is executed.

Here, in the drive data 1, the period in which the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is in a stopped state at the intermediate operating position 1, which is the driving side position when operated in the driving pattern A, is the movable rotating accessory. It is set to 12 msec corresponding to the number of steps (12 steps) of upward movement and downward movement in the reciprocating motion of the member 37 . Further, in the drive data 1, the period in which the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is in a stopped state at the intermediate operating position 2, which is the driving side position when operated in the drive pattern B, is the movable rotating accessory member. It is set to 36 msec corresponding to the number of steps (36 steps) of upward movement and downward movement in 37 reciprocating motions. Further, in the drive data 1, the period in which the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is in a stopped state at the intermediate operating position 2, which is the driving side position when operated in the drive pattern C, is the movable rotating accessory member. It is set to 24 msec corresponding to the number of steps (24 steps) of upward movement and downward movement in 37 reciprocating motions. That is, in the continuous movement of the movable rotary accessory member 37 executed based on the drive data 1, the stop time at the drive side position is set according to the amount of movement of the reciprocating motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37, The longer the stop time at the drive side position is set, the larger the movement amount of the reciprocating motion is. That is, in the present embodiment, the period during which the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved to the driving side position in the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 executed based on the drive data 1 is at least the first period. and a second period longer than the first period. In the continuous motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37 executed based on the drive data 1, the larger the movement amount of the reciprocating motion is, the longer the stop time at the driving side position is set. The larger the amount of movement of the movable rotating accessory member 37 in the reciprocating motion, the more slowly the movable rotating accessory member 37 moves. That is, by setting a plurality of periods during which the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved to the driving side position in the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 executed based on the drive data 1, for example, at least the first and a second period longer than the first period in the continuous operation, the movable rotary accessory member 37 can be operated in various driving patterns. It becomes possible to diversify the continuous operation. As a result, when the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved for the purpose of effect during execution of the display effect on the pattern display part 341, the effect can be improved, and the interest in the game is improved. be.

In the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1, the period during which the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved to the driving side position is at least the first period and longer than the first period. The second period may be included, and may be set regardless of the amount of movement of the movable rotary accessory member 37 in the reciprocating motion.

Further, in the present embodiment, the processing No. specified in the drive data 1 (role product action scenario data 1). 05, process no. 09, process no. 13, process no. 17, process no. 23, process no. 27, and treatment no. While the process of 29 is being executed, it is determined whether or not the termination determination condition for terminating the continuous movement of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body based on the drive data 1, is satisfied. That is, the end determination is executed a plurality of times at different timings from the start of the continuous motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1 . Then, although the details will be described later, when it is determined that the conditions for determining the end of the continuous motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1 are satisfied, the continuous motion is terminated. be. That is, the end timing of the continuous motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1 is indefinite. As a result, the execution period of the continuous movement of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1 becomes indefinite, and at least the first period is set as the execution period of the continuous movement of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1. and a second period longer than the first period.

On the other hand, the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the driving data 1 is the execution time of the special figure game, which is the period set at the start of the variation of the special figure, and cannot be changed during the variation of the special figure. do not have. As a result, the execution period of the continuous movement of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1 becomes indefinite, and at least the first period is set as the execution period of the continuous movement of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1. and a second period longer than the first period, the period after the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1 ends, that is, the remaining fluctuation time of the special game indeterminate. As a result, it is possible to execute the display effect in the symbol display section 341 according to the remaining variation time of the indefinite special figure game. For example, it is possible to make the display effect when the remaining variation time of the special symbol game is long and the display effect when the remaining variation time of the special symbol game is short. Then, when the condition for determining the end of the continuous motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1 is the operation of the operation button 20 by the player, the earlier the timing at which the player operates the operation button 20, the more special The remaining variation time of the figure game becomes longer. Therefore, the display performance when the remaining fluctuation time of the special game is short, for example, the timing when the player operates the operation button 20 is delayed and the execution period of the continuous action is the second period longer than the first period. As a display effect in a certain case, while the default display effect is executed, if the remaining fluctuation time of the special game is long, for example, the timing at which the player operates the operation button 20 is early, and the execution period of the continuous action is the first. As the display effect for the period 1, it is possible to execute the premium effect. This makes it possible to prompt the player to operate the operation button 20 for the purpose of executing the premium effect as the display effect.

Here, the movable body has various movable modes consisting of a plurality of actions, and the movable mode to be executed is determined by lottery or the like. On the other hand, the movable modes of the movable body have a common action. At this time, if the drive data is set separately for each operation of the movable mode of the movable body (moving slightly downward from the initial position, returning from the downward movement position to the initial position, etc.), the following can be obtained for each operation. It is necessary to perform a series of processes such as specifying one operation to be executed next, reading the drive data of the next operation to be executed from the ROM and setting it in the RAM, setting the end condition of the one operation being executed, and judging the end . Since the movable mode of the movable body includes a plurality of one motions, if the above-described series of processing is executed for each motion included in the movable mode being executed, the number of processing man-hours increases. It's a big burden. Moreover, when one motion of the movable mode of the movable body 1 is common to one motion of the other movable mode, redundantly storing the same drive data in the ROM results in a large amount of data. It is useless because it becomes Therefore, by storing in the ROM as one common drive data (data list, task data) for operations common to a plurality of movable modes of the movable body, one common drive data from the ROM can be stored in the ROM. It is possible to cause the movable body to perform a common operation by reading the data once and setting one common drive data to the RAM once. As a result, the amount of data required in the ROM can be reduced when the movable bodies are caused to perform common operations, and control such as reading drive data from the ROM and setting drive data in the RAM can be simplified.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a plurality of movable modes (movable modes A to D) are provided for the movable rotary accessory member 37, and drive patterns A to C of these movable modes AD common behavior. In this embodiment, drive data 1 for continuous motions (driving patterns A to C) common to a plurality of movable modes A to D for the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is stored in the ROM. Therefore, when a continuous operation common to a plurality of movable modes AD for the movable rotary accessory member 37 is executed, the drive data 1 is read once from the ROM and the drive data 1 is read once into the RAM. set. As a result, it is possible to reduce the amount of drive data required to realize each of the movable modes A to D, so that not only the load on the memory can be reduced, but also the drive data can be read out and temporarily stored when the movable rotary accessory member 37 is operated. (Setting) and other control burdens are reduced.

By the way, even if a continuous motion common to a plurality of movable modes for a movable body is executed based on one common driving data, the end determination conditions for the movable modes other than the other movable modes are not met. may contain different That is, the timing at which the determination condition for determining the end of the continuous motion common to the plurality of movable modes for the movable body may be satisfied may be undefined. For example, as the end determination condition, there is a case where the execution of the operation by the player on the operating means is set within a predetermined period set during the execution period of the common continuous action. That is, the end timing of a continuous motion common to a plurality of movable modes of the movable body and the timing of transition from a common continuous motion to the next motion become undefined. However, when a continuous motion common to a plurality of movable modes of the movable body is executed based on one common drive data, the operation is performed until all the processing (motion) defined by the one common drive data is completed. , unable to finish a common continuous action and unable to transition to the next action.

In addition, in order to cope with the termination determination condition that is satisfied at an indefinite timing, the termination determination is performed by determining whether the termination determination condition is satisfied for each motion in the common continuous motion, the specification of the next motion, and the determination of the next motion. If the driving data for one operation is read from the ROM and the driving data for the next operation is set in the RAM, even if the end determination condition is satisfied at an undefined timing, the end determination condition is satisfied. After that, it is possible to shift to the next operation immediately.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as the movable body control process, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is driven based on the drive data 1 (accessory action scenario data) with the drive pattern A in which the timing at which the completion determination condition is satisfied can be undefined. When operating, process No. 05 and treatment no. When the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is positioned at the standby position, which is the return side position of the reciprocating motion, by executing the process of 09, the movement based on the drive data 1 (accessory motion scenario data) is performed. An end determination is made as to whether or not the end determination condition for the continuous motion of the rotating accessory member 37 is satisfied. Specifically, in this embodiment, in step S4948 of the movable rotating accessory control process in FIG. 05 and treatment no. 09 is being executed, in step S4949 of the movable rotary accessory control process, it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 is operated by the player, which is the termination determination condition. Judgment is made. Then, processing no. 05 or processing No. If it is determined that the end determination condition is satisfied in the end determination during execution of the process of 09, the movable rotary accessory member based on the drive data 1 is executed without executing all the processes specified by the drive data 1. The control of 37 (stepping motor for lifting) is ended. That is, processing no. 05 or processing No. When it is determined that the end determination condition is satisfied in the end determination during the execution of the process of 09, the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is positioned at the standby position, which is the return side position, Continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1 is terminated.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the movable body control process, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is operated based on the drive data 1 (accessory product action scenario data) in a drive pattern B in which the timing at which the end determination condition is satisfied may be undefined. , process no. 13 and treatment no. 17 is executed, and when the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is positioned at the standby position, which is the return side position of the reciprocating motion, the movement based on the drive data 1 (accessory motion scenario data) is performed. An end determination is made as to whether or not the end determination condition for the continuous motion of the rotating accessory member 37 is satisfied. Specifically, in this embodiment, in step S4948 of the movable rotating accessory control process in FIG. 13 and treatment no. 17 is being executed, in step S4949 of the movable rotary accessory control process, it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 is operated by the player, which is the end determination condition. Judgment is made. Then, processing no. 13 or treatment no. 17, when it is determined that the termination determination condition is satisfied in the termination determination during the execution of the process of 17, the movable rotary accessory member based on the drive data 1 is executed without executing all the processes specified by the drive data 1. The control of 37 (stepping motor for lifting) is terminated. That is, processing no. 13 or treatment no. When it is determined that the end determination condition is satisfied in the end determination during the execution of the process of 17, the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is positioned at the standby position, which is the return side position, Continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1 is terminated.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the movable body control process, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is operated based on the drive data 1 (accessory product action scenario data) in a drive pattern C in which the timing at which the end determination condition is satisfied may be undefined. , process no. 23 and treatment no. 27 is executed so that the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is positioned at the intermediate operating position 1, which is the return side position of the reciprocating motion, to drive data 1 (accessory motion scenario data). It is determined whether or not the end determination condition for the continuous motion of the movable rotary accessary member 37 based on is satisfied. Specifically, in this embodiment, in step S4948 of the movable rotating accessory control process in FIG. 23 and treatment no. 27 is being executed, in step S4949 of the movable rotating accessory control process, it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 is operated by the player, which is the termination determination condition. Judgment is made. Then, processing no. 23 or treatment no. 27, when it is determined that the termination determination condition is satisfied in the termination determination during execution of the processing No. 27, the processing No. 27 is performed. 28, and processing No. 28 and treatment no. By executing the process of 29, the control of the movable rotating accessory member 37 (stepping motor for raising and lowering) based on the drive data 1 ends. That is, processing no. 23 or treatment no. 27, when it is determined that the end determination condition is satisfied in the end determination during the execution of the process of 27, the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is put on standby from the intermediate operation position 1, which is the return side position of the reciprocating motion. After returning to the position, the continuous movement of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the driving data 1 is terminated.

In other words, when operating the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the driving data 1 (accessory motion scenario data) with the driving patterns A to C in which the timing at which the completion determination condition is satisfied may be undefined, the operation is performed based on the driving data 1. The continuous motion of the movable rotating accessory member 37 common to the plurality of movable modes A to D is that the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is moving regardless of the timing when the end determination condition is satisfied. , is finished in the state of being positioned at the standby position, which is the return side position.

Thus, in the present embodiment, as the movable body control processing, it is common to a plurality of movable modes A to D for the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, and the completion timing of the end determination condition can be undefined. Actions (drive patterns A to C) are executed based on information corresponding to one common drive data 1 (role product action scenario data 1). Therefore, compared to the case where drive data is set for each motion included in each movable mode, it is possible to reduce the burden of control and data amount as described above.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the movable body control processing, it is common to a plurality of movable modes A to D for the movable rotary accessory member 37 that is a movable body, and a continuous operation ( When the drive patterns A to C) are executed based on information corresponding to one drive data 1 (accessory action scenario data 1), the movable rotating accessory member 37 is at the return position, which is the return side position of the reciprocating motion. Alternatively, when positioned at the intermediate actuation position 1, the end determination is made as to whether or not the end determination condition of the continuous motion of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1 (the role product motion scenario data 1) is established. done. As a result, the reciprocating motion of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is determined based on the drive data 1 (accessory motion scenario data 1) to determine whether the end determination condition for the continuous motion of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is satisfied. Since it is performed at the return side position of , when it is determined that the end determination condition is satisfied in the end determination, the continuous rotation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the driving data 1 (accessory action scenario data 1) When terminating the action, it is not necessary to move the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, or the moving distance of the movable rotating accessory member 37 can be reduced. In addition, the end determination of whether or not the end determination condition for terminating the continuous motion based on the drive data 1 (accessory action scenario data 1) is satisfied is performed when the movable rotating accessory member 37 is at the return side position of the reciprocating motion. By being executed each time it is positioned, the end determination is repeatedly executed a plurality of times in the continuous motion. As a result, when it is determined in the end determination that the condition for determining the end of the continuous motion of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the driving data 1 (the role product motion scenario data 1) is established, the continuous motion is performed. Not only can it be terminated immediately after it is determined that the end determination condition is satisfied, but also it can be terminated immediately after the end determination condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to immediately shift to the next motion when the completion determination condition of a continuous motion, which is common to a plurality of movable modes A to D and in which the completion timing of the completion determination condition is undefined, is satisfied.

Furthermore, it is common to a plurality of movable modes A to D, and it is possible to immediately shift to the next action from the satisfaction of the end determination condition of the continuous motion in which the timing at which the end determination condition is satisfied can be uncertain. When transitioning from the common continuous motion in modes A to D to individual next motions in each movable mode A to D, smooth motion transition between the common continuous motion and another next motion can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the previous movement. As a result, even when the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is operated for the purpose of presentation, it is possible to operate the movable rotary accessory member 37 without impairing the presentation effect.

In this embodiment, the drive data 1 is configured as a data group for controlling the stepping motor, and the processing No. is specified, and the specified processing No. is specified. However, the drive data 1 may be configured as a data group for executing the process of performing the end determination. For example, as shown in FIG. 300, the drive data 1 is for the period when the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is returned to the standby position, which is the return side position of the reciprocating motion, that is, the processing No. 06, process no. 11, process no. 16, process no. 21, process no. 28, process no. 34, and treatment no. It can be configured as a data group for which termination determination is performed at 37 . Even with such drive data 1, the end determination is executed each time the movable rotary accessory member 37 returns to the standby position. It is possible to shift to the next operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 immediately after the end determination condition is satisfied while reducing the burden of data amount. In addition, simply by executing the processes in the order specified in the driving data 1, it is possible to determine whether or not the common continuous motion end determination condition is satisfied. , which is executed in the drive data 1 in order to determine whether or not the end determination condition of No. 1 is satisfied. has the advantage of not needing to specify

Here, FIGS. 270A and 270B are diagrams for explaining the drive pattern D. FIG. The drive pattern D is, in the movable mode A notifying that it develops into super reach (SP development), the individual It's a pattern of action. The drive data 2 (accessory product action scenario data 2) shown in FIG. 270(B) is an example in which the vertical movement of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is controlled by a stepping motor for elevation.

As shown in FIG. 270(A), in the drive pattern D, the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, moves from the standby position (see FIG. 270(A1)), which is the return side position, to the movable rotation position, which is the drive side position. Reciprocating motion to return to the standby position which is the return side position (see FIG. 270 (A3)) after stopping for a certain period of time (for example, 2 seconds) at the maximum operating position of the accessory member 37 (see FIG. 270 (A2)) is a driving pattern in which is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, after the continuous movement of the movable rotary accessory member 37 common to each of the movable modes A to D is completed, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved to the maximum operating position and stopped for a certain period of time. is executed, the development to super reach (SP development) is notified.

As shown in FIG. 270(B), the drive pattern D is a drive pattern in which the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is operated based on information corresponding to the drive data 2 (accessory product action scenario data 2). is. This drive data 2 (accessory action scenario data 2) is processed No. 01 to process No. 05 to control the stepping motor for lifting.

Processing no. In 01, the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for raising and lowering is maintained for 10 msec after the drive data 2 (role object action scenario data 2) is read. As a result, the state where the movable rotary accessory member 37 is positioned at the standby position, which is the return side position, is maintained (see FIG. 270 (A1)).

Processing no. At 02, the stepping motor for lifting is rotated in the forward direction by 72 steps. Furthermore, processing no. In 03, the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for lifting is maintained for 2000 msec. As a result, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved downward by 72 mm, so that the movable rotary accessory member 37 is positioned at the maximum operating position, which is the driving side position, and the movable rotary accessory member 37 is at the maximum operating position. The positioned state is maintained for 2 seconds (see FIG. 270 (A2)).

Processing no. At 04, the stepping motor for lifting is rotated 72 steps in the opposite direction. Furthermore, processing no. In 05, the stopped state of the stepping motor for lifting is maintained for 10 msec. As a result, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved upward by 72 mm, so that the movable rotary accessory member 37 is positioned at the standby position, which is the return side position. As a result, in the drive pattern D, the movable rotary accessory member 37 makes one reciprocation between the standby position, which is the return side position, and the maximum operating position, which is the drive side position.

Here, FIGS. 271A and 271B are diagrams for explaining drive pattern E. FIG. The drive pattern E is, in the movable mode B that announces the development to Special Reach (SPSP development), an individual movement that is executed after the continuous movement of the movable rotary accessory member 37 common to each movable mode A to D ends. It's a pattern of action. In the driving data 3 (accessory action scenario data 3) shown in FIG. is controlled by a stepping motor for scaling.

As shown in FIG. 271(A), in drive pattern E, the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, moves from the standby position (see FIG. 271(A1)), which is the return side position, to the movable rotation, which is the drive side position. After being stopped for a certain period of time (for example, 2 seconds) at the maximum operating position of the accessory member 37 (see FIGS. 270 (A2) to 270 (A4)), it returns to the standby position which is the return side position (FIG. 270 (A5) ) in that the reciprocating motion is executed, but while the movable rotary accessory member 37 is stopped at the maximum operating position for a certain period of time (for example, 2 seconds), the expansion/contraction (Fig. 270 (A2) to FIG. 270 (A4)). That is, in this embodiment, after the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 common to each of the movable modes A to D is completed, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved to the maximum operating position, and the movable rotary accessory is moved. The expansion and contraction of the member 37 at the maximum operating position announces the development of special reach (SPSP development).

As shown in FIG. 271(B), drive pattern E is a drive pattern in which the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is operated based on information corresponding to drive data 3 (accessory product action scenario data 3). is. This drive data 3 (accessory action scenario data 3) is processed No. 01 to process No. 07 to control the stepping motor for lifting and the stepping motor for expansion/contraction.

Processing no. In 01, the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for lifting is maintained for 10 msec after the drive data 3 (role object action scenario data 3) is read. As a result, the state where the movable rotary accessory member 37 is positioned at the standby position, which is the return side position, is maintained (see FIG. 271 (A1)).

Processing no. At 02, the stepping motor for lifting is rotated in the forward direction by 72 steps. As a result, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved downward by 72 mm, and the movable rotary accessory member 37 is positioned at the maximum operating position, which is the drive side position (see FIG. 271 (A2)).

In addition, processing No. 01 and treatment no. At 02, the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for enlarging/reducing is maintained.

Processing no. At 03, the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for elevation is maintained for 2000 msec, and the stepping motor for expansion/contraction is rotated 50 steps in the positive direction. Furthermore, processing no. In 04, the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for enlarging/reducing is maintained for 1900 msec. As a result, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is expanded at the maximum operating position, which is the drive side position, and this expanded state is maintained (see FIG. 271 (A3)).

Processing no. At 05, the stepping motor for scaling is rotated 50 steps in the opposite direction. As a result, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is returned to the contracted state at the maximum operating position, which is the driving side position (see FIG. 271 (A4)).

Processing no. At 06, the stepping motor for lifting is rotated 72 steps in the opposite direction. Furthermore, processing no. In 07, the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for lifting is maintained for 10 msec. As a result, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is returned to the standby position, which is the return side position (see FIG. 271 (A5)).

In addition, processing No. 06 and treatment no. At 07, the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for enlarging/reducing is maintained.

272 and 273 are diagrams for explaining the drive pattern F. FIG. The drive pattern F is a movable mode B that notifies that the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a 16R variable probability jackpot (variable probability promotion). A pattern of discrete actions that are performed after the action is finished. In the drive data 4 (accessory action scenario data 4) shown in FIG. is controlled by the stepping motor, and the rotation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is controlled by the stepping motor for rotation.

As shown in FIG. 272, the driving pattern F is such that the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, moves from the standby position (see FIG. 271 (A1)), which is the return side position, to the movable rotating accessory member, which is the driving side position. 270 (A2) to 270 (A4)), it is returned to the standby position (see FIG. 270 (A5)). While the movable rotary accessory member 37 is stopped at the maximum operating position for a certain period of time (for example, 2 seconds), the reciprocating motion is executed. Unlike the drive pattern D in that it is rotated (see FIGS. 270(A3) and 270(A4)), while the movable rotary accessory member 37 is stopped at the maximum operating position for a certain period of time (for example, 2 seconds), It differs from drive pattern E in that it rotates (see FIGS. 270(A3) and 270(A4)). That is, in this embodiment, after the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 common to each of the movable modes A to D is completed, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved to the maximum operating position, and the movable rotary accessory is moved. By expanding, contracting and rotating the member 37 at the maximum operating position, it is announced that the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is a 16R probability variable jackpot (variable probability promotion).

As shown in FIG. 273, the drive pattern F is a drive pattern in which the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is operated based on information corresponding to the drive data 4 (accessory product action scenario data 4). This drive data 4 (accessory action scenario data 4) is processed No. 01 to process No. 07, to control the stepping motor for elevation, the stepping motor for expansion and contraction, and the stepping motor for rotation.

Processing no. In 01, the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for raising and lowering is maintained for 10 msec after the drive data 4 (role object action scenario data 4) is read. As a result, the state where the movable rotary accessory member 37 is positioned at the standby position, which is the return side position, is maintained (see FIG. 273 (A1)).

Processing no. At 02, the stepping motor for lifting is rotated in the forward direction by 72 steps. As a result, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved downward by 72 mm, and the movable rotary accessory member 37 is positioned at the maximum operating position, which is the drive side position (see FIG. 272 (A2)).

In addition, processing No. 01 and treatment no. At 02, the stepping motor for scaling and the stepping motor for rotation are maintained in a stopped state.

Processing no. At 03, the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for lifting is maintained for 2000 msec, the stepping motor for scaling is rotated in the forward direction by 50 steps, and the stepping motor for rotation is rotated in the forward direction by 2000 steps. . Furthermore, processing no. In 04, the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for enlarging/reducing is maintained for 1900 msec. As a result, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is rotated in an enlarged state at the maximum operating position, which is the drive side position, and the rotation in this enlarged state is maintained (see FIG. 272 (A3)).

Processing no. At 05, the stepping motor for enlargement/reduction is rotated 50 steps in the opposite direction, and the rotation of the stepping motor for rotation is stopped. As a result, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is in the non-rotating enlarged state at the maximum operating position, which is the driving side position (see FIG. 272 (A4)).

Processing no. At 05, the stepping motor for scaling is rotated 50 steps in the opposite direction. As a result, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is returned to the contracted state at the maximum operating position, which is the driving side position (see FIG. 271 (A4)).

Processing no. At 06, the stepping motor for lifting is rotated 72 steps in the opposite direction. Furthermore, processing no. In 07, the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for lifting is maintained for 10 msec. As a result, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is returned to the standby position, which is the return side position (see FIG. 272 (A5)).

In addition, processing No. 06 and treatment no. At 07, the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for enlarging/reducing is maintained.

By the way, the driving pattern D is a driving pattern executed after the continuous operation of the driving patterns A to C in the movable mode A (see FIG. 266(A)). The process is started from the standby position, which is the return side position (see FIG. 270(B)). Drive pattern E is a drive pattern that is executed after completion of the continuous operation of drive patterns A to C in movable mode B (see FIG. 266(B)), and the standby state in which the movable rotary accessory member 37 is at the return side position. Processing is started from the state of being positioned (see FIG. 271(B)). Drive pattern F is a drive pattern that is executed after completion of the continuous operation of drive patterns A to C in movable mode C (see FIG. 266(C)), and the standby state in which the movable rotary accessory member 37 is at the return side position. Processing is started from the state of being positioned (see FIG. 273). Drive pattern G is a drive pattern that is executed after the continuous motion of drive patterns A to C is completed in movable mode D (see FIG. 266(D)), and the movable rotating accessory member 37 is at the return side position. Processing is started from the state of being positioned (see FIG. 274(B)). In other words, each of the individual motions executed after the end of the continuous motion common to the plurality of movable modes A to D is a state in which the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is positioned at the standby position, which is the return side position. processing starts from

On the other hand, the continuous motion common to the plurality of movable modes A to D is terminated when the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is positioned at the standby position, which is the return side position, as described above. That is, the position of the movable rotary accessory member 37 when the continuous action common to a plurality of movable modes A to D ends, and the individual movement performed according to the movable modes A to D after the continuous motion ends The position of the movable rotary accessory member 37 that starts the action is common at the standby position. Therefore, when the continuous motion common to the plurality of movable modes A to D ends, the individual motions executed according to the movable modes A to D can be smoothly started without discomfort. As a result, based on the driving data 1, when executing a continuous motion common to a plurality of movable modes A to D in which the timing at which the condition for judging the termination of the movable rotary accessary member 37 is satisfied may be undefined, at which timing is the termination performed? Even when the determination condition is satisfied, the continuous motion common to the movable modes A to D can be changed to the motion specific to the movable modes A to D.

Here, FIGS. 274A and 274B are diagrams for explaining the drive pattern G. FIG. The driving pattern G does not develop into super reach (SP non-development), does not develop into special reach (SPSP non-development), or the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is not a 16R probability variable jackpot (16R probability variable non-promotion). It is a pattern of individual motions executed after completion of the continuous motion of the movable rotating accessory member 37 common to each of the movable modes A to D in the movable mode D that announces. The drive data 5 (accessory product action scenario data 5) shown in FIG. 271(B) is an example in which the vertical movement of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is controlled by a stepping motor for elevation.

As shown in FIG. 274(A), in the drive pattern G, the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, moves from the standby position (see FIG. 274(A1)), which is the return side position, to the intermediate operation, which is the drive side position. After being stopped at position 1 for a certain period of time (for example, 0.04 seconds) (see FIG. 274 (A2)), reciprocating motion is executed to return to the standby position (see FIG. 274 (A1)), which is the return side position. drive pattern. That is, in the present embodiment, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is reciprocated between the standby position and the intermediate operating position 1 after the continuous movement of the movable rotary accessory member 37 common to each of the movable modes A to D is completed. In other words, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is not moved to the maximum movable position, so that it does not develop into super reach (SP non-development), does not develop into special reach (SPSP non-development), or in the lottery process It is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery is not a 16R probability variable jackpot (16R probability variable non-promotion).

As shown in FIG. 274(B), the drive pattern G is a drive pattern in which the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is operated based on information corresponding to the drive data 5 (accessory product action scenario data 5). is. This drive data 5 (accessory action scenario data 5) is processed No. 01 to process No. 05 to control the stepping motor for lifting.

Processing no. In 01, the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for raising and lowering is maintained for 10 msec after the drive data 5 (role object action scenario data 5) is read. As a result, the state in which the movable rotary accessory member 37 is positioned at the standby position, which is the return side position, is maintained (see FIG. 274 (A1)).

Processing no. At 02, the stepping motor for lifting is rotated in the forward direction by 12 steps. Furthermore, processing no. In 03, the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for lifting is maintained for 40 msec. As a result, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved downward by 12 mm, and the movable rotary accessory member 37 is positioned at the intermediate operating position 1, which is the drive side position (see FIG. 274 (A2)).

Processing no. At 04, the stepping motor for lifting is rotated 12 steps in the opposite direction. Furthermore, processing no. In 05, the rotation stop state of the stepping motor for lifting is maintained for 10 msec. As a result, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is returned to the standby position, which is the return side position (see FIG. 274 (A1)).

Here, FIG. 275 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the accessory operation effect setting process executed in step S4508 of the special game effect setting process of FIG. In the role product operation effect setting process of the present embodiment, a movable body control process for setting the movable timing and the movable mode of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is executed. Hereinafter, an example of the procedure of the role product actuation effect setting process of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 275 .

<Step S4601>
As shown in FIG. 275, in the role product operation effect setting process of the present embodiment, the MPU 51 first sets the normal reach flag indicating that the normal reach effect pattern is set as the special figure game effect for the special game to ON. (step S4601) to determine whether or not the multi-reach flag is the same special figure game when it is determined that the normal reach effect pattern is set in step S4502 in the special figure game effect setting process of FIG. It is set to ON in step S4503 in the effect setting process.

When the normal reach flag is set to ON (step S4601: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4602, and when the normal reach flag is set to OFF (step S4601: No), the process proceeds to step S4606. Transition.

<Steps S4602 and S4603>
If the normal reach flag is set to ON (step S4601: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the T1 counter (step S4602), sets the T1 drive flag to ON (step S4603), and advances the process to step S4604. Transition.

The T1 counter is a counter that indicates the remaining time until the accessory actuation timing A, which is set at the end of the normal ready-to-win production, starts. The T1 drive flag is a flag for starting to drive the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, at time T1, which is the start timing of the accessory actuation timing A. FIG. That is, when the normal reach effect pattern is set, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is started to be driven when the T1 drive flag is on and the value of the T1 counter is 0, and the accessory actuation timing A , the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved (see FIG. 265).

<Steps S4604 and S4605>
In step S4604, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is lost. When the result of the jackpot lottery is lost (step S4604: Yes), the MPU 51 sets on the SP non-development flag indicating that the win does not develop into super reach (normal reach lost) (step S4604), End the object action effect setting process. That is, by setting the SP non-development flag to ON, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is out when the normal reach effect pattern is set, super reach at the role product operation timing A. The movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved in order to notify that it will not develop into.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is not lost (step S4604: No), that is, if it is a jackpot, the relevant accessory actuation effect setting process is terminated. In addition, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is not lost when the normal reach production pattern is set (if it is a jackpot), depending on the jackpot type, the announcement that it is a 16R probability variable jackpot, or 16R The movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved at the accessory actuation timing A for notifying that the probability variable jackpot is not achieved.

<Step S4606>
When the normal reach flag is set to off (step S4601: No), the MPU 51 indicates that the super reach effect pattern is set as the special figure game effect for the special game. The super reach flag is set to on. (step S4606). The super reach flag is set to ON in step S4505 in the special game effect setting process when it is determined that the super reach effect pattern is set in step S4504 in the special game effect setting process of FIG. be.

If the super reach flag is set to ON (step S4606: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4607, and if the super reach flag is set to OFF (step S4606: No), the process proceeds to step S4607. The process proceeds to S4614.

<Steps S4607 to S4609>
When the super reach flag is set to ON (step S4606: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the T1 counter (step S4607) and sets the T1 drive flag to ON (step S4608). Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets ON the SP development flag indicating development to super reach (step S4609), and shifts the process to step S4610.

The T1 counter is a counter that indicates the remaining time until the accessory actuation timing A, which is set at the end of the normal ready-to-win production, starts. The T1 drive flag is a flag for starting to drive the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, at time T1, which is the start timing of the accessory actuation timing A. FIG. The SP development flag is a flag indicating the development to super reach. It is referred to in step S4930 in the role product control process. In other words, when the super reach effect pattern is set, when the T1 drive flag is on and the value of the T1 counter is 0, the driving of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is started, and the accessory operation timing In A, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved to announce the development of super reach (see FIG. 265).

<Steps S4610 and S4611>
In step S4610, the MPU 51 sets the T2 counter, sets the T2 drive flag to ON (step S4611), and proceeds to step S4612.

The T2 counter is a counter that indicates the remaining time until the accessory actuation timing B set at the end of the super ready-to-win effect is started. The T2 drive flag is a flag for starting to drive the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, at time T2, which is the start timing of the accessory actuation timing B. FIG. In other words, when the super reach effect pattern is set, when the T2 drive flag is on and the value of the T2 counter is 0, the driving of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is started, and the accessory operation timing At B, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved (see FIG. 265).

<Steps S4612 and S4613>
In step S4612, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is out. When the result of the jackpot lottery is lost (step S4612: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the SPSP non-development flag to ON (step S4613), and terminates the accessory actuation effect setting process. The SPSP non-development flag is a flag indicating that it is not developed into a special reach (super reach out), and is used to determine whether or not to notify that the movement of the movable rotary accessory member 37 will develop into a super reach. In addition, it is referred to in step S4941 in the movable rotating accessory control process in FIG. 281 to be described later. That is, by setting the SPSP non-development flag to ON, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is out when the special reach effect pattern is set, at the accessory operation timing B, the special The movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved to notify that it will not develop into a reach.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is not lost (step S4612: No), that is, if it is a hit, the accessory actuation effect setting process is terminated. In addition, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is not lost when the super reach effect pattern is set (if it is a jackpot), depending on the jackpot type, a notification that it is a 16R probability variable jackpot, or The movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved at the accessory actuation timing B for notifying that the 16R probability variable jackpot is not achieved.

<Step S4614>
When the super reach flag is set to OFF (step S4606: No), the MPU 51 sets the special reach flag to ON indicating that a special reach effect pattern is set as a special game effect for the special game. It is determined whether or not it is set (step S4614). The special reach flag is set to ON in step S4507 in the same special game effect setting process when it is determined that the special reach effect pattern is set in step S4506 in the special game effect setting process of FIG. be.

When the special reach flag is set to ON (step S4614: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4615. On the other hand, when the super reach flag is set to OFF (step S4614: No), the MPU 51 ends the accessory operation effect setting process. That is, when a non-ready effect pattern that is not a ready-to-win effect pattern is set, the flag for activating the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is not set to ON, and the timing for activating the movable rotating accessory member 37 is set. is not set. As a result, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is not moved in the non-reach effect pattern.

<Steps S4615 to S4617>
When the special reach flag is set to ON (step S4614: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the T1 counter (step S4615) and sets the T1 drive flag to ON (step S4616). Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets on the SP development flag indicating development to super reach (step S4617), and shifts the process to step S4618.

The T1 counter is a counter that indicates the remaining time until the accessory actuation timing A, which is set at the end of the normal ready-to-win production, starts. The T1 drive flag is a flag for starting to drive the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, at time T1, which is the start timing of the accessory actuation timing A. FIG. The SP development flag is a flag indicating the development to super reach. It is referred to in step S4930 in the role product control process. In other words, when the special reach effect pattern is set, when the T1 drive flag is on and the value of the T1 counter is 0, the driving of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is started, and the accessory operation timing In A, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved to announce the development of super reach (see FIG. 265).

<Steps S4618 to S4620>
At step S4618, the MPU 51 sets the T2 counter. Further, the MPU 51 sets ON the T2 drive flag (step S4619), sets ON the SPSP development flag indicating development to special reach (step S4620), and shifts the process to step S4621.

The T2 counter is a counter that indicates the remaining time until the accessory actuation timing B set at the end of the super ready-to-win effect is started. The T2 drive flag is a flag for starting to drive the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, at time T2, which is the start timing of the accessory actuation timing B. FIG. In other words, when the special reach effect pattern is set, when the T2 drive flag is on and the value of the T2 counter is 0, the driving of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is started, and the accessory operation timing In B, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved to notify that it will develop into a special reach (see FIG. 265).

<Steps S4621 and S4622>
At step S4621, the MPU 51 sets the T3 counter. Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the T3 drive flag to ON (step S4622), and ends the accessory actuation effect setting process.

The T3 counter is a counter that indicates the remaining time until the accessory actuation timing C set at the end of the special ready-to-win effect is started. The T3 drive flag is a flag for starting to drive the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, at time T3, which is the start timing of the accessory actuation timing C. In other words, when the special reach effect pattern is set, when the T3 drive flag is on and the value of the T3 counter is 0, the driving of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is started, and the accessory operation timing is At C, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved (see FIG. 265).

[Button effect setting process]
Next, the button effect setting process executed in step S4509 of the special figure game effect setting process of FIG. 262 will be described. Here, FIG. 276 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the button effect setting process of this embodiment. The button effect setting process of this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S4701>
As shown in FIG. 276, in the button effect setting process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the 16R probability variation promotion flag is set to ON (step S4701). The 16R probability variation promotion flag executes the 16R probability variation promotion effect by moving the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, with the drive pattern F (see FIGS. 266 (F) and 272), and this 16R probability variation promotion effect It is a flag to execute the button effect (see FIG. 277) before the execution of . This 16R probability variation promotion flag is the stop symbol combination setting of FIG. It is set to ON in step S4407 in the process.

If the 16R probability variation promotion flag is set to ON (step S4701: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4703, and if the 16R probability variation promotion flag is set to OFF (step S4701: No), the process to step S4702.

<Step S4702>
When the 16R probability variation promotion flag is set to OFF (step S4701: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the 16R probability variation non-promotion flag is set to ON (step S4702). The 16R probability variation non-promotion flag is a movable rotating accessory member 37 that is a movable body, and the 16R probability variation promotion effect is executed by moving the driving pattern G (see FIGS. 266 (D) and 274), and this 16R probability variation promotion It is a flag for executing the button effect (see FIG. 277) before the effect is executed. This 16R probability variable non-elevation flag is a combination of the decorative pattern stop display when the result of the jackpot lottery in the lottery process is the 5R probability variable jackpot or the 5R normal jackpot, or when the jackpot lottery result is the 16R probability variable jackpot. When other than "777" is set, it is set to ON in step S4406 in the stop symbol combination setting process of FIG.

If the 16R probability variation non-promotion flag is set to ON (step S4702: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4703, and if the 16R probability variation non-promotion flag is set to OFF (step S4702: No) , the button effect setting process ends.

<Steps S4703 and S4704>
If the 16R probability variation promotion flag is set to ON (step S4701: Yes), or if the 16R probability variation non-promotion flag is set to ON (step S4702: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the T3 drive flag to ON It is determined whether or not it is set (step S4703). The T3 drive flag is a flag for starting to drive the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, at time T3 (see FIG. 265), which is the start timing of accessory actuation timing C set at the end of the special reach effect. Yes, when the special reach production pattern is set, it is set to ON in step S4622 in the role product operation production setting process of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the last timing to move the movable rotary accessory member 37 set in the accessory actuation effect setting process of FIG. 275 is the accessory actuation timing C set at the end of the special reach effect. to judge whether

When the T3 drive flag is set to ON (step S4703: Yes), the MPU 51 decides that the timing of finally moving the movable rotary accessory member 37 set in the accessory operation effect setting process of FIG. When it is the accessory actuation timing C set at the end of the ready-to-win effect, the T3 button effect flag is set to ON (step S4704), and the button effect setting process ends. The T3 button effect flag is a flag for executing a button effect at the role product actuation timing C (see FIG. 265) when the time T3 has elapsed from the start of the special game, and is a step in the button effect setting process of FIG. 287 to be described later. In S5107, reference is made to determine whether or not it is time to execute the button effect.

On the other hand, when the T3 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4703: No), the MPU 51 determines that the timing to finally move the movable rotary accessory member 37 set in the accessory operation effect setting process of FIG. , If it is not the accessory actuation timing C set at the end of the special reach effect, the process proceeds to step S4705.

Here, the button effect is executed when the 16R probability variable promotion effect or the 16R probability variable non-promotion effect is executed by moving the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body. 265), a display effect is included in which a predetermined image is displayed on the pattern display section 341 to prompt the player to operate the operation button 20. FIG. The button effect is executed in a period (button operation valid period) in which the pressing operation as a predetermined game operation for the operation button 20 is valid. It is set to the execution timings A to C (see FIG. 265). Further, the button effect starts when the button operation effective period starts, and ends when the player presses the operation button 20 within the button operation effective period or when the button operation effective period elapses. For example, as shown in FIG. 277, in the button effect, the pattern display portion 341 displays an image simulating the operation button 20 and an image indicating the remaining period of the button operation valid period. Of course, the image in the button effect shown in FIG. 277 is an example, and various changes are possible.

Further, when the button effect is being executed (within the button operation valid period), if the player presses the operation button 20 as a predetermined game operation, the movable rotation role common to the movable modes A to D is performed. The continuous action is terminated by the satisfaction of the end determination condition of the continuous action of the object member 37, and then the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is moved to perform a 16R probability variable promotion effect or a 16R probability variable non-promotion effect. is executed. In addition, when the operation button 20 is not operated by the player while the button effect is being executed (within the valid period of button operation), the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, can be moved after the expiration of the valid period of button operation. 16R probability variation promotion performance or 16R probability variation non-promotion performance is executed by being performed.

<Steps S4705 and S4706>
If the T3 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4703: No), that is, the timing of finally moving the movable rotating accessory member 37 set in the accessory operation effect setting process of FIG. If it is not the accessory actuation timing C set in the final stage, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the T2 drive flag is set to ON (step S4703). The T2 drive flag is a flag for starting the driving of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, at time T2 (see FIG. 265), which is the start timing of the accessory actuation timing B set at the end of the super ready-to-win production. Yes, when the super reach production pattern is set, it is set to ON in step S4611 in the role product operation production setting process of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the last timing to move the movable rotating accessory member 37 set in the accessory actuation effect setting process of FIG. to judge whether

When the T2 drive flag is set to ON (step S4705: Yes), the MPU 51 decides that the timing of finally moving the movable rotary accessory member 37 set in the accessory operation effect setting process of FIG. When it is the accessory actuation timing B set at the end of the ready-to-win effect, the T2 button effect flag is set to ON (step S4705), and the button effect setting process is terminated. The T2 button effect flag is a flag for executing a button effect at the role product operation timing B (see FIG. 265) when the time T2 has passed since the start of the special game, and is a step in the button effect setting process of FIG. 287 described later. In S5104, reference is made to determine whether or not it is time to execute the button effect.

On the other hand, when the T2 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4705: No), the MPU 51 determines that the timing to finally move the movable rotary accessory member 37 set in the accessory operation effect setting process of FIG. , If it is not the accessory actuation timing B set at the end of the super ready-to-win effect, the process proceeds to step S4707.

<Steps S4707 and S4708>
When the T2 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4705: No), that is, the timing of finally moving the movable rotating accessory member 37 set in the accessory operation effect setting process of FIG. If it is not the accessory actuation timing B set in the final stage, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the T1 drive flag is set to ON (step S4707). The T1 drive flag is a flag for starting the driving of the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, at time T1 (see FIG. 265), which is the start timing of the accessory actuation timing A set at the end of the normal reach production. , When the normal reach production pattern is set, it is set to ON in step S4603 in the role product operation production setting process of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the last timing to move the movable rotating accessory member 37 set in the accessory actuation effect setting process of FIG. 275 is the accessory actuation timing A set at the end of the normal reach effect. to judge.

When the T1 drive flag is set to ON (step S4707: Yes), the MPU 51 decides that the timing of finally moving the movable rotary accessory member 37 set in the accessory operation effect setting process of FIG. If it is the accessory actuation timing A that is set at the end of the effect, the T1 button effect flag is set to ON (step S4708), and the button effect setting process ends. The T1 button effect flag is a flag for executing a button effect at the role product actuation timing A (see FIG. 265) when the time T1 has passed since the start of the special game, and is a step in the button effect setting process of FIG. 287 described later. In S5101, reference is made to determine whether or not it is time to execute the button effect.

On the other hand, when the T1 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4707: No), the MPU 51 determines that the timing to finally move the movable rotary accessory member 37 set in the accessory operation effect setting process of FIG. , If it is not the accessory actuation timing A set at the end of the normal ready-to-win effect, the button effect setting process is terminated.

[Special game production control process]
Next, the special figure game effect control processing executed in step S2704 in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 53 will be described. In the special figure game effect control process of this embodiment, the special figure game effect executed in the special game is controlled based on the special figure game effect set in the special figure game effect setting effect process of FIG. Here, FIG. 278 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special game effect control process. Hereinafter, an example of special figure game effect control processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S4801>
In the special figure game effect control process of the present embodiment, the MPU 51 is the movable body in the special figure game based on the role product operation effect set in the role product operation effect setting process as the movable body control process of FIG. Movable rotating accessory control processing as movable body control processing for controlling the operation of a certain movable rotating accessory member 37 is executed (step S4801). The details of the movable rotating accessory control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 279 to 286.

<Step S4802>
In step S4802, the MPU 51 executes a button effect control process for controlling the execution of the button effect in the special figure game based on the button effect set in the button effect setting process of FIG. Details of the button effect control processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 287 and 288. FIG.

<Step S4803>
In step S4803, the MPU 51 executes other production control processing related to production other than the role product operation production and the button production in the special game.

[Movable rotating accessory control process]
Next, an example of the movable rotary accessary product control process executed in step S4801 of the special figure game effect control process of FIG. 278 will be described. In the movable rotating accessory control process of this embodiment, based on the role product operating effect set in the role product operating effect setting process of FIG. Control processing is executed. Here, FIGS. 279 to 286 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the movable rotating accessory control process. The movable rotating accessory control process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 279 to 286. FIG.

<Steps S4901 and S4902>
As shown in FIG. 279, in the movable rotating accessory control process of the present embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the T1 drive flag is set to ON (step S4901). The T1 drive flag is a flag for starting the drive of the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, at time T1, which is the start timing of the accessory actuation timing A (see FIG. 265) set at the end of the normal reach production.

When the T1 drive flag is set to ON (step S4901: Yes), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the T1 counter indicating the remaining time until the accessory actuation timing A starts (step S4902), and processes to step S4903. On the other hand, when the T1 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4901: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4903.

<Steps S4903 and S4904>
At step S4903, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the T2 drive flag is set to ON (step S4903). The T2 drive flag is a flag for starting the driving of the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, at time T2, which is the start timing of the accessory actuation timing B (see FIG. 265) set at the end of the super ready-to-win production. .

When the T2 drive flag is set to ON (step S4903: Yes), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the T2 counter indicating the remaining time until the accessory actuation timing B starts (step S4904), and processes to step S4905. On the other hand, when the T2 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4903: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4905.

<Steps S4905 and S4906>
At step S4905, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the T3 drive flag is set to ON (step S4905). The T3 drive flag is a flag for starting to drive the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, at time T3, which is the start timing of accessory actuation timing C (see FIG. 265) set at the end of the special reach production. .

When the T3 drive flag is set to ON (step S4905: Yes), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the T3 counter indicating the remaining time until the start of the accessory actuation timing C (step S4906), and processes to step S4907. On the other hand, when the T3 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4905: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4907.

<Step S4907>
At step S4907, the MPU 51 determines whether the T1 drive flag is set to ON. When the T1 drive flag is set to ON (step S4907: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4908. On the other hand, when the T1 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4907: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4910.

<Steps S4908 and S4909>
When the T1 drive flag is set to ON (step S4907: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the T1 counter indicating the remaining time until the start of the accessory actuation timing A is 0. (Step S4908). That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to start driving the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body.

When the value of the T1 counter is 0 (step S4908: Yes), that is, when it is time to start driving the movable rotary accessory member 37, the MPU 51 sets the T1 drive flag to OFF (step S4908) and processes to step S4916. On the other hand, when the value of the T1 counter is not 0 (step S4908: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start driving the movable rotating accessory member 37, the MPU 51 ends the movable rotating accessory control process.

<Step S4910>
When the T1 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4907: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the T2 drive flag is set to ON (step S4910). When the T2 drive flag is set to ON (step S4910: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4911. On the other hand, when the T2 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4910: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4913.

<Steps S4911 and S4912>
When the T2 drive flag is set to ON (step S4910: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the T2 counter indicating the remaining time until the start of the accessory actuation timing B is 0. (Step S4911). That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to start driving the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body.

MPU51, when the value of the T2 counter is 0 (step S4910: Yes), that is, when it is time to start driving the movable rotary accessory member 37, sets the T2 drive flag to OFF (step S4912), and processes to step S4916. On the other hand, if the value of the T2 counter is not 0 (step S4911: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start driving the movable rotating accessory member 37, the MPU 51 ends the movable rotating accessory control process.

<Step S4913>
When the T2 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4910: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the T3 drive flag is set to ON (step S4913). When the T3 drive flag is set to ON (step S4913: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4914. On the other hand, when the T3 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4913: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4920 in FIG.

<Steps S4914 and S4915>
When the T3 drive flag is set to ON (step S4914: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the T3 counter indicating the remaining time until the start of the accessory actuation timing C is 0. (Step S4914). That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to start driving the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body.

MPU51, when the value of the T3 counter is 0 (step S4914: Yes), that is, when it is time to start driving the movable rotary accessory member 37, sets the T3 drive flag to OFF (step S4915), and processes to step S4916. On the other hand, when the value of the T3 counter is not 0 (step S4914: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start driving the movable rotating accessory member 37, the MPU 51 ends the movable rotating accessory control process.

<Step S4916>
When it is time to start driving the movable rotary accessory member 37, the MPU 51 sets drive data 1 (accessory product action scenario data 1) (see FIG. 269) (step S4916). The drive data 1 is information for causing the movable rotating accessory member 37 to perform common continuous motions (driving patterns A to C) in the movable modes A to D of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body. . That is, the MPU 51 controls the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the common drive data 1 regardless of the movable mode.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the continuous motions (driving patterns A to C) common to the plurality of movable modes A to D with respect to the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, are combined into one common drive data 1 ( It is executed based on the information corresponding to the role product action scenario data 1). Further, as described above, the drive data 1 is stored in the ROM, and when the continuous motion common to the plurality of movable modes A to D with respect to the movable rotary accessory member 37 is executed, the drive data 1 is driven from the ROM. Data 1 is read once, and drive data 1 is set in the RAM once. Then, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is read out once from the ROM and once set in the RAM, and by continuous operation common to the plurality of movable modes A to D. be movable. As a result, it is possible to reduce the amount of drive data required to realize each of the movable modes A to D, so that not only the load on the memory can be reduced, but also the drive data can be read out and temporarily stored when the movable rotary accessory member 37 is operated. and other control burdens are reduced.

<Steps S4917 to S4919>
In step S4917, the MPU 51 sets the driving data 1 scenario timer to cause the movable rotary accessory member 37 to perform continuous operations (driving patterns A to C) according to the processing procedure specified in the driving data 1 (see FIG. 269). Along with setting (step S4917), the drive data 1 set flag indicating that the drive data 1 is set to control the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is set to ON (step S4918). Then, the MPU 51 determines the processing No. of the drive data 1 (see FIG. 269). 1 (step S4919), and ends the movable rotating accessory control process.

<Step S4920>
When the T3 drive flag is set to OFF (step S4913: No), as shown in FIG. is set to ON (step S4920).

If the driving data 1 set flag is set to ON (step S4920: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4921, and if the driving data 1 set flag is set to OFF (step S4920: No). , the process proceeds to step S4961 in FIG.

<Steps S4921 to S4923>
If the driving data 1 set flag is set to ON (step S4920: Yes), the MPU 51 updates the driving data 1 scenario timer (step S4921), and based on the value of the driving data 1 scenario timer after updating, It is determined whether or not it is time to move to the next process specified in drive data 1 (step S4922).

When it is time to move to the next process defined in the drive data 1 (step S4922: Yes), the MPU 51 starts the next process defined in the drive data 1 (step S4923), and the movable rotary accessory End the control process. For example, as shown in FIG. 5 is being executed, that is, when the stepping motor for lifting is in a state of stopping rotation, the process is changed to process No. 5. By shifting to 6, the process of rotating the stepping motor for lifting by 12 steps in the positive direction is executed.

In this way, by referring to the driving data 1 scenario timer updated in step S4921 and sequentially executing the next processing in the driving data 1, the processing No. 1 to processing No. 29 are performed. As a result, continuous motions (driving patterns A to C) common to a plurality of movable modes A to D are executed with respect to the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body.

On the other hand, if it is not the timing to move to the next process specified in drive data 1 (step S4922: No), the MPU 51 moves to step S4924.

<Step S4924>
If it is not the timing to move to the next process specified in the drive data 1 (step S4922: No), the MPU 51 determines the process No. It is determined whether or not the V.28 execution flag is set to ON (step S4924). Processing no. 28 execution flag is the processing No. in the drive data 1; 28 (see FIG. 269), and while the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is in a stopped state at the intermediate operation position 1, which is the return side position, a plurality of movable modes AD When it is determined that the conditions for determining the end of the continuous action common to the above are satisfied (when it is determined that there is an operation on the operation button 20), the step of FIG. It is set to ON in S4959. That is, processing no. 28 execution flag, when the movable rotary accessory member 37 is stopped at the intermediate operation position 1 and the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is terminated, the process No. 28 of the drive data 1 is executed. By skipping the process to 28, it is a flag for ending the continuous operation in a state where the movable rotary accessory member 37 is returned to the standby position. Thereby, even if the movable rotary accessory member 37 is not in the standby position, the movable rotary accessory member 37 can be immediately returned to the standby position to end the continuous operation.

Then, the MPU 51 determines the processing No. 28 execution flag is set to ON (step S4924: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4925, and the process No. If the V.28 execution flag is set to off (step S4924: No), the process proceeds to step S4927 in FIG.

<Steps S4925 and S4926>
Processing no. 28 execution flag is set to ON (step S4924: Yes), the MPU 51 executes processing No. 28 of drive data 1. 28 is executed (step S4925). Then, the MPU 51 resets the driving data 1 scenario timer (step S4926), and terminates the movable rotating accessory control process. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the value of the driving data 1 scenario timer to the processing No. when all the processing of the driving data 1 is executed. 28 is started. As a result, the processing No. of drive data 1 is determined. 28 and treatment no. 29 (see FIG. 269) are sequentially executed, and the processing of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1 can be completed in a state in which the movable rotary accessory member 37 is returned to the standby position.

<Step S4927>
If it is not the timing to shift to the next process specified in drive data 1 (step S4922: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the drive data 1 scenario timer is the maximum value or not, as shown in FIG. (step S4927). That is, the MPU 51 is the timing to end the continuous movement of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1 by the completion of the end determination condition based on the completion of all the processing defined by the drive data 1. or end judgment.

When the value of the driving data 1 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S4927: Yes), the MPU 51 determines that the driving data 1, the process proceeds to step S4928. On the other hand, if the value of the driving data 1 scenario timer is not the maximum value (step S4927: No), that is, if all the processes specified by the driving data 1 are not completed, the MPU 51 does not meet the termination determination condition. If it is determined that it is not time to end the continuous motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1, the process proceeds to step S4948 in FIG.

<Steps S4928 and S4929>
When the value of the driving data 1 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S4927: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the driving data 1 due to the establishment of the end determination condition, the process ends. If determined, the MPU 51 sets the driving data 1 scenario timer for causing the movable rotating accessory member 37 to perform continuous operations (driving patterns A to C) according to the processing procedure specified in the driving data 1 (see FIG. 269). is cleared (step S4948). Then, the MPU 51 turns off the drive data 1 set flag indicating that the drive data 1 is set to control the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 (step S4929), and shifts the process to step S4930. do. That is, when the value of the driving data 1 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S4927: Yes), the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is terminated.

<Step S4930>
In step S4930, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the SP development flag indicating development to super reach is set to ON.

If the SP development flag indicating development to super reach is set to ON (step S4930: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4931, and if the SP development flag is set to OFF (step S4930: No), the process proceeds to step S4933.

<Steps S4931 and S4932>
When the SP development flag indicating development to super reach is set to ON (step S4930: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the driving data 2 unset flag to ON (step S4931). The drive data 2 non-set flag is a flag for setting the drive data 2, and is referred to in order to determine whether or not to set the drive data 2 in step S4961 in FIG. 283 described later.

In addition, the driving data 2 is a common continuous operation (driving patterns A to C) based on the driving data 1 in the movable mode A of the movable rotary accessory member 37 that announces development to super reach (SP development). This is information for moving the movable rotary accessory member 37 later as an individual operation with the drive pattern D (see FIGS. 266(A) and 270).

Then, the MPU 51 sets the SP development flag to OFF (step S4932), and terminates the movable rotating accessory control process.

<Step S4933>
When the SP development flag indicating development to super reach is set to off (step S4930: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the SP non-development flag indicating not to develop to super reach is set to on. is determined (step S4933).

When the SP non-development flag indicating that the development to super reach is not set to ON (step S4933: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4934, and when the SP non-development flag is set to OFF (Step S4933: No), the process proceeds to step S4936.

<Steps S4934 and S4935>
When the SP non-development flag indicating that the super reach does not develop is set to ON (step S4933: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the driving data 5 unset flag to ON (step S4934). The drive data 5 non-set flag is a flag for setting the drive data 5, and is referred to in order to determine whether or not to set the drive data 5 in step S5000 in FIG. 286, which will be described later.

In addition, the drive data 5 is a common continuous operation based on the drive data 1 (driving patterns A to C) in the movable mode D of the movable rotary accessory member 37 that notifies that it will not develop into super reach (SP non-development). After that, it is information for moving the movable rotary accessory member 37 with the drive pattern G (see FIGS. 266(D) and 274) as an individual operation.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the SP non-development flag to OFF (step S4935), and ends the movable rotating accessory control process.

<Step S4936>
When the SP non-development flag is set to OFF (step S4933: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the SPSP development flag indicating development to special reach is set to ON (step S4936).

If the SPSP development flag indicating development to Special Reach is set to ON (step S4936: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4937, and if the SPSP development flag is set to OFF (step S4936: No), the process proceeds to step S4939.

<Steps S4937 and S4938>
When the SPSP development flag indicating development to special reach is set to ON (step S4936: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 3 non-set flag to ON (step S4937). The drive data 3 non-set flag is a flag for setting the drive data 3, and is referred to in order to determine whether or not to set the drive data 3 in step S4974 in FIG. 284, which will be described later.

In addition, the driving data 3, in the movable mode B of the movable rotary accessory member 37 that announces the development to the special reach (SPSP development), the common continuous movement (driving patterns A to C) based on the driving data 1 It is the information for moving the movable rotary accessory member 37 later as a separate operation with the drive pattern E (see FIGS. 266(B) and 271).

Then, the MPU 51 sets the SPSP development flag to OFF (step S4938), and terminates the movable rotating accessory control process.

<Step S4939>
When the SPSP development flag is set to OFF (step S4936: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the SPSP non-development flag indicating that special reach will not develop is set to ON (step S4939).

When the SPSP non-development flag indicating that special reach is not developed is set to ON (step S4939: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4940, and when the SPSP non-development flag is set to OFF (Step S4939: No), the process proceeds to step S4942.

<Steps S4940 and S4941>
When the SPSP non-development flag indicating that the special reach does not develop is set to ON (step S4939: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 5 unset flag to ON (step S4940). The drive data 5 non-set flag is a flag for setting the drive data 5, and is referred to in order to determine whether or not to set the drive data 5 in step S5000 in FIG. 286, which will be described later.

In addition, the driving data 5 is a common continuous operation (driving patterns A to C) based on the driving data 1 in the movable mode D of the movable rotary accessory member 37 that notifies that it will not develop into a special reach (SPSP non-development). After that, it is information for moving the movable rotary accessory member 37 with the drive pattern G (see FIGS. 266(D) and 274) as an individual operation.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the SPSP non-development flag to OFF (step S4941), and terminates the movable rotating accessory control process.

<Step S4942>
When the SPSP non-development flag is set to off (step S4939: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the 16R probability variation promotion flag is set to on (step S4942). The 16R probability variation promotion flag executes the 16R probability variation promotion effect by moving the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, with the drive pattern F (see FIGS. 266 (C) and 272), and this 16R probability variation promotion effect It is a flag to execute the button effect (see FIG. 277) before the execution of .

If the 16R probability variation promotion flag is set to ON (step S4942: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4943, and if the 16R probability variation promotion flag is set to OFF (step S4942: No), the process to step S4945.

<Steps S4943 and S4944>
When the 16R probability variation promotion flag is set to ON (step S4942: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the driving data 4 unset flag to ON (step S4943). The drive data 4 non-set flag is a flag for setting the drive data 4, and is referred to in order to determine whether or not to set the drive data 4 in step S4987 of FIG. 285, which will be described later.

In addition, the driving data 4 is a common continuous operation (driving patterns A to C) based on the driving data 1 in the movable mode C of the movable rotary accessory member 37 that notifies that it will not develop into a special reach (SPSP non-development). After that, it is information for moving the movable rotating accessory member 37 with the drive pattern F (see FIGS. 266(C) and 272) as an individual operation.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the 16R probability variation promotion flag to OFF (step S4944), and ends the movable rotating auditors control process.

<Step S4945>
When the 16R probability variation promotion flag is set to OFF (step S4942: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the 16R probability variation non-promotion flag is set to ON (step S4945). The 16R probability variation non-promotion flag is a movable rotating accessory member 37 that is a movable body, and the 16R probability variation promotion effect is executed by moving the driving pattern G (see FIGS. 266 (D) and 274), and this 16R probability variation promotion It is a flag for executing the button effect (see FIG. 277) before the effect is executed.

If the 16R probability variation non-promotion flag is set to ON (step S4945: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4946, and if the 16R probability variation non-promotion flag is set to OFF (step S4945: No) , to end the movable rotating accessory control process.

<Steps S4946 and S4947>
When the 16R probability variable non-promotion flag is set to ON (step S4945: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 5 unset flag to ON (step S4946). The drive data 5 non-set flag is a flag for setting the drive data 5, and is referred to in order to determine whether or not to set the drive data 5 in step S5000 in FIG. 286, which will be described later.

In addition, the driving data 5 is a common continuous operation based on the driving data 1 (driving pattern A to After C), it is information for moving the movable rotary accessory member 37 with the drive pattern G (see FIGS. 266(D) and 274) as an individual operation.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the 16R probability variation non-promotion flag to OFF (step S4947), and terminates the movable rotating auditors control process.

<Step S4948>
If the drive data 1 scenario timer value is not the maximum value (step S4927: No), as shown in FIG. is determined (step S4948). Specifically, the MPU 51 selects process No. 1 among the processes executed based on the drive data 1. 05, process no. 09, process no. 5, process no. 13, process no. 17, process no. 23, process no. 27 and treatment no. 29 (see FIG. 269).

When it is time to determine whether or not the end determination condition is satisfied (step S4948: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4949 to determine whether or not the end determination condition is satisfied. If it is not the timing to perform (step S4948: No), the movable rotating accessory control process is terminated.

Here, as shown in FIG. 05, process no. 09, process no. 5, process no. 13, process no. 17, process no. 23, process no. 27 and treatment no. 29 (see FIG. 269) is the driving side position of the reciprocating motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, which is continuous motion in the driving patterns A to C executed based on the driving data 1. It is executed at the timing of being positioned at the standby position or the intermediate operating position 1 which is the return side position. That is, in the present embodiment, as the movable body control process, the continuous motions (driving patterns A to C) common to the plurality of movable modes A to D for the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, are combined into one driving data. 1 (accessory action scenario data 1), when the movable rotating accessory member 37 is positioned at the return position or the intermediate operating position 1, which is the return side position of the reciprocating action, It is determined whether or not the conditions for determining the end of the continuous movement of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1 (accessory product action scenario data 1) are met. As a result, the reciprocating motion of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is determined based on the drive data 1 (accessory motion scenario data 1) to determine whether the end determination condition for the continuous motion of the movable rotating accessory member 37 is satisfied. Since it is performed at the return side position of , when it is determined that the end determination condition is satisfied in the end determination, the continuous rotation of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the driving data 1 (accessory action scenario data 1) When terminating the action, it is not necessary to move the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, or the moving distance of the movable rotating accessory member 37 can be reduced. In addition, the end determination of whether or not the end determination condition for terminating the continuous motion based on the drive data 1 (accessory action scenario data 1) is satisfied is performed when the movable rotating accessory member 37 is at the return side position of the reciprocating motion. By being executed each time it is positioned, the end determination is repeatedly executed a plurality of times in the continuous motion. As a result, when it is determined in the end determination that the condition for determining the end of the continuous motion of the movable rotating accessory member 37 based on the driving data 1 (the role product motion scenario data 1) is established, the continuous motion is performed. Not only can it be terminated immediately after it is determined that the end determination condition is satisfied, but also it can be terminated immediately after the end determination condition is satisfied. Therefore, the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 can be terminated without making the player feel uncomfortable after it is determined that the end determination condition is satisfied in the end determination or after the end determination condition is satisfied. . Therefore, after the continuous movement of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 1 (accessory action scenario data 1) is completed, the movable rotary role in the drive patterns D to G specific to each of the movable modes A to D is performed. When the individual motion of the material member 37 is executed, the continuous motion common to the plurality of movable modes A to D can be smoothly transitioned to the individual motion of each of the other movable modes A to D. When the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved in A to D, when the continuous motion common to the plurality of movable modes A to D is shifted to individual motions in each of the other movable modes A to D It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of discomfort. As a result, even when the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is operated for the purpose of presentation, it is possible to operate the movable rotary accessory member 37 without impairing the presentation effect.

In the present embodiment, when the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is positioned at the return position or the intermediate operation position 1 in the continuous motion common to the plurality of movable modes A to D, , end determination is made as to whether or not the end determination condition for the continuous motion is satisfied. is not established. This is because when the movable rotary accessory member 37 is immediately stopped while it is being moved to the drive side position, the next motion in the continuous motion is started. At the start, the movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved to the start position of the next motion, or the movable rotating accessory member 37 is moved to the start position of the next motion, or the movable stop position on the driving side position side at the time of end determination in the continuous motion is started, and the movable rotating accessory member is moved to the next motion. This is because, as a result of the need to start the movement of 37, it is necessary to perform useless or complicated control, and there is a possibility that the transition from continuous motion to the next motion cannot be smoothly performed. Therefore, while the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moving toward the drive side position in the continuous operation, the end determination of whether the end determination condition is satisfied is not performed, which leads to unnecessary control and complicated operation. Since there is no need to perform such control, the end control of the movable rotating accessory member 37 in continuous motion can be appropriately performed, and the transition from continuous motion to the next motion can be performed smoothly. The movement control of the material member 37 can be preferably performed.

<Step S4949>
Returning to the description of FIG. 269, when it is time to determine whether or not the termination determination condition is satisfied (step S4948: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the player to perform a predetermined game operation on the operation button 20. It is determined whether or not a certain pressing operation has been performed (step S4949). That is, the MPU 51 determines that the player presses the operation button 20, which is a predetermined game operation, during the continuous movement (driving patterns A to C) of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body based on the driving data 1. A termination determination is made as to whether or not the termination determination condition based on the operation is satisfied. Whether or not the operation button 20 has been operated by the player is determined in the operation detection pattern setting process of FIG. It is determined by whether or not a pattern has occurred.

As described above, the condition for judging the end of the continuous motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body based on the drive data 1, is the pressing operation, which is a predetermined game operation, on the operation button 20 by the player. On the other hand, as described above, the timing for determining whether or not the termination determination condition is satisfied is the process No. 1, which is executed based on the drive data 1. 05, process no. 09, process no. 5, process no. 13, process no. 17, process no. 23, process no. 27 and treatment no. 29 (see FIG. 269) is being executed, and the reciprocating motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a continuous motion in the drive patterns A to C executed based on the drive data 1, is 1 to the standby position or the intermediate operating position 1, which is the return side position. Therefore, even if the condition for judging the end of the continuous action is established before all the control processes for the continuous action of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, are completed by the player's pressing operation on the operation button 20, Also, when the movable rotary accessory member 37 is positioned at the standby position or the intermediate actuation position 1, which is the return side position, it is determined whether or not the condition for determining the end of the continuous motion is established. Therefore, when the condition for judging the end of the continuous action is satisfied before all the control processes for the continuous action of the movable rotary accessory member 37 are completed by the player's pressing operation on the operation button 20, the end judging condition When the movable rotary accessory member 37 is positioned at the standby position or the intermediate operation position 1 after the establishment of , the continuous motion can be terminated. As a result, when the condition for judging the end of the continuous action is satisfied, the continuous action of the movable rotating accessory member 37 can be terminated immediately. The continuous motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37 can be terminated without making the person feel uncomfortable. Therefore, when the next motion (the motion of the drive pattern C or the drive pattern D) is executed after the continuous motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is finished, the continuous motion can smoothly transition to the next motion. To prevent a player from feeling a sense of incongruity when transitioning from a continuous motion to another motion. As a result, even if the movable rotary accessory member 37 is operated for the purpose of presentation while the display presentation is being displayed on the pattern display part 341, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is operated without impairing the presentation effect. It becomes possible to let

When the player presses the operation button 20 as a predetermined game operation (step S4949: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4950. If the pressing operation, which is a predetermined game operation, has not been performed (step S4949: No), the movable rotating auditors control process is terminated.

<Step S4950>
When the player presses the operation button 20 as a predetermined game operation (step S4949: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the 16R probability variation promotion flag is set to ON (step S4950 ). The 16R probability variation promotion flag executes the 16R probability variation promotion effect by moving the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, with the drive pattern F (see FIGS. 266 (C) and 272), and this 16R probability variation promotion effect It is a flag to execute the button effect (see FIG. 277) before the execution of .

If the 16R probability variation promotion flag is set to ON (step S4950: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4951, and if the 16R probability variation promotion flag is set to OFF (step S4950: No), the process to step S4953.

<Steps S4951 and S4952>
When the 16R probability variation promotion flag is set to ON (step S4950: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the driving data 4 unset flag to ON (step S4951). The drive data 4 non-set flag is a flag for setting the drive data 4, and is referred to in order to determine whether or not to set the drive data 4 in step S4987 of FIG. 285, which will be described later.

In addition, the driving data 4 is a common continuous operation based on the driving data 1 in the movable mode C of the movable rotating accessory member 37 that notifies that it is a 16R probability variable jackpot (16R probability variable promotion) (driving patterns A to C) After that, it is information for moving the movable rotating accessory member 37 with the drive pattern F (see FIGS. 266(C) and 272) as an individual operation.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the 16R probability variation promotion flag to OFF (step S4952), and terminates the movable rotating auditors control process.

<Step S4953>
When the 16R probability variation promotion flag is set to OFF (step S4950: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the 16R probability variation non-promotion flag is set to ON (step S4953). The 16R probability variation non-promotion flag is a movable rotating accessory member 37 that is a movable body, and the 16R probability variation promotion effect is executed by moving the driving pattern G (see FIGS. 266 (D) and 274), and this 16R probability variation promotion It is a flag for executing the button effect (see FIG. 277) before the effect is executed.

If the 16R probability variation non-promotion flag is set to ON (step S4953: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4954, and if the 16R probability variation non-promotion flag is set to OFF (step S4953: No) , to end the movable rotating accessory control process.

<Steps S4954 and S4955>
When the 16R probability variable non-promotion flag is set to ON (step S4953: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 5 unset flag to ON (step S4954). The drive data 5 non-set flag is a flag for setting the drive data 5, and is referred to in order to determine whether or not to set the drive data 5 in step S5000 in FIG. 286, which will be described later.

In addition, the driving data 5 is a common continuous operation based on the driving data 1 (driving pattern A to After C), it is information for moving the movable rotary accessory member 37 with the drive pattern G (see FIGS. 266(D) and 274) as an individual operation.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the 16R probability variation non-promotion flag to OFF (step S4955), and shifts the process to step S4956.

<Step S4956>
In step S4956, the MPU 51 determines that the process of drive data 1 for which the end determination has been made is the process No. 05, No. 09, No. 13, No. 17 (see FIG. 269). That is, the MPU 51 determines that the termination determination condition for terminating the continuous motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37 common to the plurality of movable modes A to D is established (the operation button 20 has been operated). At the timing, it is determined whether or not the movable rotary accessory member 37 is stopped at the standby position.

The MPU 51 determines that the process of the drive data 1 for which the end determination has been made is the process No. 05, No. 09, No. 13, No. 17 (step S4956: Yes), that is, the termination determination condition for terminating the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 common to the plurality of movable modes A to D is satisfied (operation button 20 If the movable rotary accessory member 37 is stopped at the standby position at the timing when it is determined that the operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S4956. On the other hand, the MPU 51 determines that the processing of drive data 1 for which the end determination has been made is the processing No. 05, No. 09, No. 13, No. 17 (step S4956: No), that is, the termination determination condition for terminating the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 common to the plurality of movable modes A to D is established (for the operation button 20 If the movable rotary accessory member 37 is not stopped at the standby position at the timing when it is determined that the operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S4959.

<Steps S4957 and S4958>
Processing No. 1 is the processing of drive data 1 for which end determination has been made. 05, No. 09, No. 13, No. 17 (step S4956: Yes), that is, the termination determination condition for terminating the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 common to the plurality of movable modes A to D is satisfied (operation button 20 When it is determined that the movable rotary accessory member 37 is stopped at the standby position, the MPU 51 moves according to the procedure defined in the drive data 1 (see FIG. 269). Clear the driving data 1 scenario timer for causing the rotary accessory member 37 to perform continuous operations (driving patterns A to C) (step S4957). Then, the MPU 51 sets off the drive data 1 set flag indicating that the drive data 1 is set to control the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 (step S4958), and controls the movable rotary accessory member 37. End the process. That is, at the timing when it is determined that the end determination condition for terminating the continuous action of the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is satisfied (the operation button 20 is operated), the movable rotary accessory member 37 is activated. is stopped at the standby position, the process based on the driving data 1 is terminated by setting the driving data 1 set flag to OFF, and the movable rotary accessory member 37 is stopped at the standby position. , the continuous motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37 common to the plurality of movable modes A to D is terminated.

<Step S4959>
Processing No. 1 is the processing of drive data 1 for which end determination has been made. 05, No. 09, No. 13, No. 17 (step S4956: No), that is, the termination determination condition for terminating the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 common to the plurality of movable modes A to D is established (for the operation button 20 If the movable rotary accessory member 37 is not in a stopped state at the standby position at the timing when it is determined that the operation has been performed, the MPU 51 determines that the processing of the drive data 1 for which the end determination has been performed is the processing No. 23, No. 27 (see FIG. 269) (step S4959). That is, the MPU 51 determines that the termination determination condition for terminating the continuous motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37 common to the plurality of movable modes A to D is established (the operation button 20 has been operated). At the timing, it is determined whether or not the movable rotary accessory member 37 is stopped at the intermediate operating position 1 .

The MPU 51 determines that the process of the drive data 1 for which the end determination has been made is the process No. 23, No. 27 (see FIG. 269) (step S4959: Yes), that is, the termination determination condition for terminating the continuous motion of the movable rotating accessory member 37 common to the plurality of movable modes A to D is established. If the movable rotary accessory member 37 is in a stopped state at the intermediate operation position 1 at the timing when it is determined that the operation button 20 is operated, the process proceeds to step S4960.

On the other hand, the MPU 51 determines that the processing of drive data 1 for which the end determination has been made is the processing No. 23, No. 27 (see FIG. 269) (step S4959: No), that is, the end determination condition for ending the continuous motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37 common to the plurality of movable modes A to D is established. If the movable rotary role product member 37 is not stopped at the intermediate operation position 1 at the timing when it is determined that the operation button 20 has been operated, the movable rotary role product control process is terminated.

<Step S4960>
Processing No. 1 is the processing of drive data 1 for which end determination has been made. 23, No. 27 (see FIG. 269) (step S4959: Yes), that is, the termination determination condition for terminating the continuous motion of the movable rotating accessory member 37 common to the plurality of movable modes A to D is established. When it is determined that the movable rotary accessory member 37 is stopped at the intermediate operation position 1 at the timing when it is determined that the operation button 20 is operated, the MPU 51 performs processing No. 1. 28 execution flag is set to ON (step S4960), and the movable rotating accessory control process ends.

Here, as described above, processing No. 28 execution flag is the processing No. in the drive data 1; 28 (see FIG. 269), the movable rotary accessory member 37 is returned to the standby position, and the continuous motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37 common to the plurality of movable modes A to D ends. In step S4924 of FIG. 280 of the movable rotary accessory control process, the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body that is in a stopped state at the intermediate operation position 1, is returned to the standby position, and a plurality of It is referenced to determine whether or not to end the continuous motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37 common to the movable modes AD.

<Step S4961>
If the value of the driving data 1 scenario timer is not the maximum value (step S4927: No), i.e., if all the processes specified by the driving data 1 have not been completed, the end determination condition is not met. If it is determined that it is not time to terminate the continuous motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the drive data 2 unset flag is set to ON, as shown in FIG. (Step S4961). The drive data 2 non-set flag is a flag for setting the drive data 2 .

If the drive data 2 unset flag is set to ON (step S4961: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4962, and if the drive data 2 unset flag is set to OFF (step S4961: No), the process proceeds to step S4967.

<Steps S4962 to S4966>
When the drive data 2 unset flag is set to ON (step S4961: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 2 unset flag to OFF (step S4962), and sets the drive data 2 (accessory action scenario data 2) (see FIG. 270(B)) is set (step S4963). Drive data 2 is a common continuous operation (driving patterns A to C) in the movable mode A (see FIG. 266 (A)) of the movable rotary accessory member 37 that announces development to super reach (SP development) After that, it is information for moving the movable rotary accessory member 37 with the drive pattern D (see FIG. 270(A)) as an individual operation.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the driving data 2 scenario timer in order to move the movable rotary accessory member 37 in the driving pattern D according to the processing procedure defined in the driving data 2 (see FIG. 270(B)) (step S4964 ), the drive data 2 set flag indicating that the drive data 2 is set to control the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is set to ON (step S4965). Further, the MPU 51 determines the processing No. of the drive data 2. 1 (step S4966), and ends the movable rotating accessory control process.

<Step S4967>
If the drive data 2 non-set flag is set to OFF (step S4961: No), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 2 to control the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37. It is determined whether or not the 2 set flag is set to ON (step S4967).

If the drive data 2 set flag is set to ON (step S4967: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4968, and if the drive data 2 set flag is set to OFF (step S4967: No). , the process proceeds to step S4974 in FIG.

<Steps S4968 to S4970>
If the driving data 2 set flag is set to ON (step S4967: Yes), the MPU 51 updates the driving data 2 scenario timer (step S4968), and based on the value of the driving data 2 scenario timer after updating, It is determined whether or not it is time to move to the next process specified in drive data 2 (step S4969).

When it is time to move to the next process specified in the drive data 2 (step S4969: Yes), the MPU 51 starts the next process specified in the drive data 2 (step S4970), and the movable rotary accessory End the control process. For example, as shown in FIG. 3 is being executed, that is, when the stepping motor for lifting is in a state of stopping rotation, the process is changed to process No. 3. 4, a process of rotating the stepping motor for lifting by 72 steps in the opposite direction is executed.

In this way, by referring to the driving data 2 scenario timer updated in step S4968 and sequentially executing the next processing in the driving data 2, the processing No. in the driving data 2 is determined. 01 to process No. 05 are executed. As a result, the motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is executed in the drive pattern D (see FIG. 270(A)) as an individual motion for the movable rotary accessory member 37. FIG.

On the other hand, when it is not the timing to move to the next process specified in the drive data 2 (step S4969: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4971.

<Step S4971>
If it is not the timing to move to the next process specified in the drive data 2 (step S4969: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the drive data 2 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S4971). That is, the MPU 51 is the timing to end the continuous movement of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 2 by the establishment of the end determination condition based on the completion of all the processing defined by the drive data 2. or end judgment.

If the value of the driving data 2 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S4971: Yes), the MPU 51 terminates the processing based on the completion of all the processing defined by the driving data 2 (see FIG. 270(B)). If it is determined that it is time to end the continuous motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 2 due to the establishment of the determination condition, the process proceeds to step S4972. On the other hand, if the value of the driving data 2 scenario timer is not the maximum value (step S4971: No), i.e., if all the processes defined by the driving data 2 have not been completed, the MPU 51 does not satisfy the end determination condition. If it is determined that it is not time to end the continuous movement of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 2, the movable rotary accessory control process is terminated.

<Steps S4972 and S4973>
When the value of the driving data 2 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S4971: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the driving data 2 due to the establishment of the end determination condition, the process ends. If determined, the MPU 51 clears the driving data 2 scenario timer in order to move the movable rotary accessory member 37 in the driving pattern D according to the processing procedure defined in the driving data 2 (see FIG. 270 (B)) ( step S4972). Then, the MPU 51 sets off the drive data 2 set flag indicating that the drive data 2 is set to control the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 (step S4973), and controls the movable rotary accessory member 37. End the process. That is, when the value of the driving data 2 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S4971: Yes), the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is terminated.

<Step S4974>
When the drive data 2 set flag is set to OFF (step S4967: No), as shown in FIG. 284, the MPU 51 determines whether the drive data 3 unset flag is set to ON (step S4974). The drive data 3 non-set flag is a flag for setting the drive data 3 .

If the driving data 3 unset flag is set to ON (step S4974: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4975, and if the driving data 3 unset flag is set to OFF (step S4974: No), the process proceeds to step S4980.

<Steps S4975 to S4979>
When the drive data 3 unset flag is set to ON (step S4974: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 3 unset flag to OFF (step S4975), and sets the drive data 3 (accessory action scenario data 3) (see FIG. 271(B)) is set (step S4976). Drive data 3 is a common continuous operation (driving patterns A to C) in the movable mode B (see FIG. 266 (B)) of the movable rotary accessory member 37 that announces development to special reach (SPSP development) After that, it is information for moving the movable rotating accessory member 37 in the drive pattern E (see FIG. 271(A)) as an individual operation.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the driving data 3 scenario timer in order to move the movable rotary accessory member 37 in the driving pattern E according to the processing procedure defined in the driving data 3 (see FIG. 271(B)) (step S4977 ), the drive data 3 set flag indicating that the drive data 3 is set to control the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is set to ON (step S4978). Further, the MPU 51 determines that the processing No. of the driving data 3 is 1 is started (step S4979), and the movable rotating accessory control process ends.

<Step S4980>
When the driving data 3 non-set flag is set to OFF (step S4974: No), the MPU 51 provides driving data indicating that the driving data 3 is set in order to control the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37. It is determined whether or not the 3-set flag is set to ON (step S4980).

If the drive data 3 set flag is set to ON (step S4980: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4981, and if the drive data 3 set flag is set to OFF (step S4980: No). , the process proceeds to step S4987 in FIG.

<Steps S4981 to S4983>
If the drive data 3 set flag is set to ON (step S4980: Yes), the MPU 51 updates the drive data 3 scenario timer (step S4981), and based on the updated drive data 3 scenario timer value, It is determined whether or not it is time to move to the next process specified in drive data 3 (step S4982).

When it is time to move to the next process defined in the drive data 3 (step S4982: Yes), the MPU 51 starts the next process defined in the drive data 3 (step S4983), and the movable rotary accessory End the control process. For example, as shown in FIG. 2 is being executed, that is, when the stepping motor for lifting is rotated in the forward direction, the process is changed to process No. 2. By shifting to 3, the stepping motor for lifting is stopped from rotating.

In this way, by referring to the driving data 3 scenario timer updated in step S4981 and sequentially executing the next processing in the driving data 3, the processing No. in the driving data 3 is determined. 01 to process No. 07 are executed. As a result, the motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is executed in the drive pattern E (see FIG. 271(A)) as an individual motion for the movable rotary accessory member 37. FIG.

On the other hand, when it is not the timing to move to the next process defined in drive data 3 (step S4982: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4984.

<Step S4984>
If it is not the timing to move to the next process specified in drive data 3 (step S4982: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the drive data 3 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S4984). That is, the MPU 51 is the timing to terminate the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 3 by the establishment of the end determination condition based on the completion of all the processing defined by the drive data 3. or end judgment.

If the value of the driving data 3 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S4984: Yes), the MPU 51 terminates the processing based on the completion of all the processing defined by the driving data 3 (see FIG. 271(B)). If it is determined that it is time to end the continuous motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 3 due to the establishment of the determination condition, the process proceeds to step S4985. On the other hand, if the value of the driving data 3 scenario timer is not the maximum value (step S4984: No), that is, if all the processes specified by the driving data 3 are not completed, the MPU 51 does not satisfy the end determination condition. If it is determined that it is not time to end the continuous movement of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 3, the movable rotary accessory control process is terminated.

<Steps S4985 and S4986>
When the value of the driving data 3 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S4984: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the driving data 3 due to the establishment of the end determination condition, the process ends. If determined, the MPU 51 clears the driving data 3 scenario timer in order to move the movable rotary accessory member 37 in the driving pattern E according to the processing procedure defined in the driving data 3 (see FIG. 271 (B)) ( step S4985). Then, the MPU 51 sets off the drive data 3 set flag indicating that the drive data 3 is set to control the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 (step S4986), and controls the movable rotary accessory member 37. End the process. That is, when the value of the drive data 3 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S4984: Yes), the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is terminated.

<Step S4987>
When the drive data 3 set flag is set to OFF (step S4980: No), as shown in FIG. 285, the MPU 51 determines whether the drive data 4 unset flag is set to ON (step S4987). The driving data 4 unset flag is a flag for setting the driving data 4 .

If the drive data 4 unset flag is set to ON (step S4987: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4988, and if the drive data 4 unset flag is set to OFF (step S4987: No), the process proceeds to step S4993.

<Steps S4988 to S4992>
When the drive data 4 unset flag is set to ON (step S4987: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 4 unset flag to OFF (step S4988), and sets the drive data 4 (accessory action scenario data 4) (see FIG. 273) is set (step S4989). Drive data 4 is a common continuous operation (driving patterns A to C ), it is information for moving the movable rotary accessory member 37 with the drive pattern F (see FIG. 272) as an individual operation.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the driving data 4 scenario timer in order to move the movable rotating accessory member 37 in the driving pattern F according to the processing procedure specified in the driving data 4 (see FIG. 273) (step S4990), A driving data 4 set flag indicating that the driving data 4 is set is set to ON in order to control the operation of the rotary accessory member 37 (step S4991). Further, the MPU 51 determines that the processing No. of the driving data 4 is 1 is started (step S4992), and the movable rotating accessory control process ends.

<Step S4993>
When the driving data 4 non-set flag is set to OFF (step S4987: No), the MPU 51 sets the driving data indicating that the driving data 4 is set to control the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37. It is determined whether or not the 4-set flag is set to ON (step S4993).

If the driving data 4 set flag is set to ON (step S4993: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4994, and if the driving data 4 set flag is set to OFF (step S4993: No). , the process proceeds to step S5000 in FIG.

<Steps S4994 to S4996>
If the drive data 4 set flag is set to ON (step S4993: Yes), the MPU 51 updates the drive data 4 scenario timer (step S4994), and based on the updated drive data 4 scenario timer value, It is determined whether or not it is time to move to the next process specified in drive data 4 (step S4995).

When it is time to move to the next process defined in the drive data 4 (step S4995: Yes), the MPU 51 starts the next process defined in the drive data 4 (step S4996), and the movable rotary accessory End the control process. For example, as shown in FIG. 2 is being executed, that is, when the stepping motor for lifting is rotated in the forward direction, the process is changed to process No. 2. By shifting to 3, the stepping motor for lifting is stopped from rotating.

In this way, by referring to the driving data 4 scenario timer updated in step S4994 and sequentially executing the next processing in the driving data 4, the processing No. in the driving data 4 is determined. 01 to process No. 07 are executed. As a result, the motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is executed in the drive pattern F (see FIG. 272) as an individual motion for the movable rotary accessory member 37. FIG.

On the other hand, when it is not the timing to move to the next process specified in drive data 4 (step S4995: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4997.

<Step S4997>
If it is not the timing to shift to the next process specified in drive data 4 (step S4995: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the drive data 4 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S4997). That is, the MPU 51 is the timing to end the continuous movement of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 4 when the end determination condition based on the end of all the processing defined by the drive data 4 is satisfied. or end judgment.

If the value of the drive data 4 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S4997: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the end determination condition based on the end of all the processes defined by the drive data 4 (see FIG. 273). If it is determined that it is time to terminate the continuous motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the driving data 4, the process proceeds to step S4998. On the other hand, if the value of the driving data 4 scenario timer is not the maximum value (step S4997: No), that is, if all the processes defined by the driving data 4 are not completed, the MPU 51 does not satisfy the termination determination condition. If it is determined that it is not time to end the continuous motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 4, the movable rotary accessory control process is terminated.

<Steps S4998 and S4999>
When the value of the driving data 4 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S4997: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the driving data 4 due to the establishment of the end determination condition, the process ends. If determined, the MPU 51 clears the driving data 4 scenario timer in order to move the movable rotating accessory member 37 in the driving pattern F according to the procedure defined in the driving data 4 (see FIG. 273) (step S4998) . Then, the MPU 51 sets off the drive data 4 set flag indicating that the drive data 4 is set to control the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 (step S4999), and controls the movable rotary accessory member 37. End the process. That is, when the value of the drive data 4 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S4997: Yes), the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is terminated.

<Step S5000>
When the drive data 4 set flag is set to OFF (step S4993: No), as shown in FIG. 286, the MPU 51 determines whether the drive data 5 unset flag is set to ON (step S5000). The driving data 5 unset flag is a flag for setting the driving data 5 .

If the drive data 5 unset flag is set to ON (step S5000: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S5001, and if the drive data 5 unset flag is set to OFF (step S5000: No), the process proceeds to step S5006.

<Steps S5001 to S5005>
When the drive data 5 unset flag is set to ON (step S5000: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the drive data 5 unset flag to OFF (step S5001), and sets the drive data 5 (accessory action scenario data 5) (see FIG. 274(B)) is set (step S5002). The driving data 5 is a movable rotating accessory member 37 that notifies that it will not develop into super reach (SP non-development), that it will not develop into special reach (SPSP non-development), or that it is not a 16R probability variable jackpot (16R probability variable non-promotion) In the movable mode D (see FIG. 266 (D)), after the common continuous motion (driving patterns A to C), the movable rotating accessory member in the drive pattern G (see FIG. 274 (A)) as an individual motion 37 is information to move.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the driving data 5 scenario timer in order to move the movable rotary accessory member 37 in the driving pattern F according to the processing procedure defined in the driving data 5 (see FIG. 274(B)) (step S5003 ), the drive data 5 set flag indicating that the drive data 5 is set to control the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is set to ON (step S5004). Further, the MPU 51 determines the processing No. of the driving data 5. 1 is started (step S5005), and the movable rotating accessory control process is terminated.

<Step S5006>
When the drive data 5 non-set flag is set to OFF (step S5000: No), the MPU 51 provides drive data indicating that the drive data 5 is set to control the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37. It is determined whether or not the 5 set flag is set to ON (step S5006).

If the drive data 4 set flag is set to ON (step S5006: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S5007, and if the drive data 5 set flag is set to OFF (step S5006: No). , to end the movable rotating accessory control process.

<Steps S5007 to S5009>
If the driving data 5 set flag is set to ON (step S5006: Yes), the MPU 51 updates the driving data 5 scenario timer (step S5007), and based on the updated driving data 5 scenario timer value, It is determined whether or not it is time to move to the next process specified in drive data 5 (step S5008).

When it is time to move to the next process specified in the drive data 5 (step S5008: Yes), the MPU 51 starts the next process specified in the drive data 5 (step S5009), and the movable rotary accessory End the control process. For example, as shown in FIG. 03 is being executed, that is, when the stepping motor for lifting is in a stopped state, the processing No. By shifting to 04, the stepping motor for lifting is rotated in the opposite direction by 12 steps.

In this way, by referring to the driving data 5 scenario timer updated in step S5007 and sequentially executing the next processing in the driving data 5, the processing No. 01 to process No. 05 are executed. As a result, the motion of the movable rotating accessory member 37, which is a movable body, is executed in the drive pattern G (see FIG. 274(B)) as an individual motion for the movable rotating accessory member 37. FIG.

On the other hand, if it is not the timing to move to the next process specified in drive data 5 (step S5008: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S5010.

<Step S5010>
If it is not the timing to shift to the next process specified in drive data 5 (step S5008: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the drive data 5 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S5010). That is, the MPU 51 is the timing to terminate the continuous movement of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the driving data 5 by the completion of the termination determination condition based on the termination of all the processing defined by the driving data 5. or end judgment.

When the value of the driving data 5 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S5010: Yes), the MPU 51 terminates the processing based on the completion of all the processing defined by the driving data 5 (see FIG. 274(B)). If it is determined that it is time to terminate the continuous motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 5 due to the establishment of the determination condition, the process proceeds to step S5011. On the other hand, if the value of the driving data 5 scenario timer is not the maximum value (step S5010: No), that is, if all the processes specified by the driving data 5 are not completed, the MPU 51 does not meet the end determination condition. If it is determined that it is not time to end the continuous movement of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the drive data 5, the movable rotary accessory control process is terminated.

<Steps S5011 and S5012>
If the value of the driving data 5 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S5010: Yes), that is, it is the timing to end the continuous operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the driving data 5 due to the establishment of the end determination condition. If determined, the MPU 51 clears the driving data 5 scenario timer in order to move the movable rotary accessory member 37 in the driving pattern G according to the processing procedure defined in the driving data 5 (see FIG. 274 (B)) ( step S5011). Then, the MPU 51 sets off the drive data 5 set flag indicating that the drive data 5 is set to control the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 (step S5012), and controls the movable rotary accessory member 37. End the process. That is, when the value of the drive data 5 scenario timer is the maximum value (step S5010: Yes), the continuous motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is terminated.

[Button effect control processing]
Next, Button Effect Control Processing FIGS. 287 and 288 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of the button effect control processing of this embodiment. The button effect control processing will be described below with reference to FIGS. 287 and 288. FIG.

<Step S5101>
As shown in FIG. 287, in the button effect control process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the T1 button effect flag is set to ON (step S5101). The T1 button production flag is a flag for executing the button production at the role product operation timing A (see FIG. 265) when the time T1 has passed since the start of the special game, and at the role product operation timing A 16R probability variable promotion production or 16R When the variable probability non-elevation effect is executed, in step S4708 in the button effect setting process of FIG. 276, it is set to ON.

MPU51, when the T1 button production flag is set to ON (step S5101: Yes), that is, when executing the button production at the role product operation timing A (see FIG. 265), the process proceeds to step S5102. On the other hand, when the T1 button effect flag is set to OFF (step S5101: No), that is, when the button effect is not executed at the role product activation timing A (see FIG. 265), the process proceeds to step S5104. .

<Steps S5102 and S5103>
When the T1 button production flag is set to ON (step S5101: Yes), that is, when the button production is executed at the role product operation timing A (see FIG. 265), the MPU 51 performs the role set at the end of the normal ready-to-win production. It is determined whether or not the value of the T1 counter indicating the remaining time until the object actuation timing A starts is 0 (step S5102). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the button effect.

When the value of the T1 counter indicating the remaining time until the start of the accessory actuation timing A set at the end of the normal reach effect is 0 (step S5102: Yes), that is, at the timing to start the button effect If so, the T1 button effect flag is set to OFF (step S5103), and the process proceeds to step S5110 in FIG.

On the other hand, the MPU 51 determines that the value of the T1 counter indicating the remaining time until the start of the accessory actuation timing A set at the end of the normal reach effect is not 0 (step S5102: No), that is, the timing to start the button effect. Otherwise, the button effect control process is terminated.

<Step S5104>
When the T1 button effect flag is set to OFF (step S5101: No), that is, when the button effect is not executed at the role product actuation timing A (see FIG. 265), the MPU 51 sets the T2 button effect flag to ON. (step S5104). The T2 button production flag is a flag for executing the button production at the role product operation timing B (see FIG. 265) when the time T2 has passed from the start of the special game, and at the role product operation timing B, 16R probability variable promotion production or 16R When the variable probability non-elevated effect is executed, in step S4706 in the button effect setting process of FIG. 276, it is set to ON.

MPU51, when the T2 button production flag is set to ON (step S5104: Yes), that is, when executing the button production at the role product operation timing B (see FIG. 265), the process proceeds to step S5105. On the other hand, if the T2 button effect flag is set to OFF (step S5104: No), that is, if the button effect is not executed at the role product activation timing B (see FIG. 265), the process proceeds to step S5107. .

<Steps S5105 and S5106>
When the T2 button production flag is set to ON (step S5104: Yes), that is, when the button production is executed at the role product operation timing B (see FIG. 265), the MPU 51 is set to the final stage of the super ready-to-win production. It is determined whether or not the value of the T2 counter indicating the remaining time until the start of the accessory actuation timing B is 0 (step S5105). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the button effect.

When the value of the T2 counter indicating the remaining time until the start of the accessory actuation timing B set at the end of the super ready-to-win effect is 0 (step S5105: Yes), the MPU 51 determines the timing to start the button effect. If so, the T2 button effect flag is set to OFF (step S5106), and the process proceeds to step S5110 in FIG.

On the other hand, if the value of the T2 counter indicating the remaining time until the start of the accessory actuation timing B set at the end of the super ready-to-win production is not 0 (step S5105: No), the MPU 51 starts the button production. If it is not the timing, the button effect control process is terminated.

<Step S5107>
When the T2 button effect flag is set to OFF (step S5104: No), that is, when the button effect is not executed at the role product actuation timing B (see FIG. 265), the MPU 51 sets the T3 button effect flag to ON. (step S5107). The T3 button production flag is a flag for executing the button production at the role product operation timing C (see FIG. 265) after the time T3 has passed from the start of the special game, and at the role product operation timing C, 16R probability variable promotion production or 16R When the variable probability non-elevation effect is executed, in step S4702 in the button effect setting process of FIG. 276, it is set to ON.

When the T3 button effect flag is set to ON (step S5107: Yes), that is, when executing the button effect at the role product activation timing C (see FIG. 265), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S5108. On the other hand, if the T3 button effect flag is set to OFF (step S5107: No), that is, if the button effect is not executed at the role product activation timing C (see FIG. 265), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S5114 in FIG. transition to

<Steps S5108 and S5109>
When the T3 button effect flag is set to ON (step S5107: Yes), that is, when the button effect is executed at the role product operation timing C (see FIG. 265), the MPU 51 is set at the end of the special ready-to-win effect. It is determined whether or not the value of the T3 counter indicating the remaining time until the start of the accessory actuation timing C is 0 (step S5108). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the button effect.

MPU51, when the value of the T3 counter indicating the remaining time until the start of the accessory actuation timing C set at the end of the special reach effect is 0 (step S5108: Yes), that is, the timing to start the button effect If so, the T3 button effect flag is set to OFF (step S5109), and the process proceeds to step S5110 in FIG.

On the other hand, the MPU 51, if the value of the T3 counter indicating the remaining time until the start of the accessory actuation timing C set at the end of the special reach effect is not 0 (step S5108: No), that is, starts the button effect. If it is not the timing, the button effect control process is terminated.

<Steps S5110 and S5111>
When it is time to start the button effect, as shown in FIG. 288, the MPU 51 sets a button effect start command for starting the button effect (step S5110), and transmits this button effect start command to the display control device 6. (Step S5111). As a result, in the pattern display section 341, the button effect as the display effect is started under the control of the display control device 6. FIG.

<Steps S5112 and S5113>
In step S5112, the MPU 51 sets a button operation effective period timer corresponding to a period during which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is effective (button operation effective period). Then, the MPU 51 turns on an operation effective period timer flag indicating that the button operation effective period timer is set (step S5113), and terminates the button effect control process.

<Step S5114>
In step S5114, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the operation effective period timer flag indicating that the button operation effective period timer is set is set to ON. When the operation effective period timer flag is set to ON (step S5114: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S5115. On the other hand, when the operation effective period timer flag is set to OFF (step S5114: No), the MPU 51 ends the button effect control process.

<Steps S5115 and S5116>
When the operation effective period timer flag is set to ON (step S5114: Yes), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the button operation effective period timer (step S5115), and the value of the button operation effective period timer after the subtraction is 0. It is determined whether or not there is (step S5116). That is, it is determined whether or not the button effect is to be terminated due to the lapse of the button operation effective period.

When the value of the button operation valid period timer after subtraction is 0 (step S5116: Yes), that is, when the button operation valid period has elapsed, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S5119. On the other hand, if the value of the button operation effective period timer after subtraction is not 0 (step S5116: No), that is, if the button operation effective period has not elapsed, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S5117.

<Steps S5117 and S5118>
If the value of the button operation valid period timer after subtraction is not 0 (step S5116: No), that is, if the button operation valid period has not passed, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the operation button 20 has been operated by the player. (step S5117). Whether or not the operation button 20 has been operated by the player is determined in the operation detection pattern setting process of FIG. It is determined by whether or not

When the player operates the operation button 20 before the button operation valid period elapses (step S5117: Yes), the MPU 51 clears the button operation valid period timer (step S5118), and shifts the process to step S5119. On the other hand, when the operation button 20 is not operated by the player before the expiration of the button operation valid period (step S5117: No), the MPU 51 ends the button effect control process.

<Steps S5119 to S5121>
If the value of the button operation valid period timer after the subtraction is 0 (step S5116: Yes), that is, if the button effect ends due to the lapse of the button operation valid period, or the player operates before the button operation valid period elapses. When the button 20 is operated (step S5117: Yes), the MPU 51 sets off the operation effective period timer flag indicating that the button operation effective period timer is set (step S5119).

Then, the MPU 51 sets a button effect end command for ending the button effect (step S5120), transmits this button effect end command to the display control device 6 (step S5121), and ends the button effect control process. . As a result, in the pattern display section 341, the button effect as the display effect is terminated under the control of the display control device 6. FIG.

[Jackpot game production control process]
Next, an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect control process executed in step S2705 of the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 253 will be described. In the jackpot game effect control process, based on the jackpot game effect set in the jackpot game effect setting process of step S4317 in the command determination process of FIG. be done. Here, FIG. 289 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect control process. Hereinafter, the jackpot game effect control processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S5201>
As shown in FIG. 289, in the jackpot game effect control process, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the jackpot game flag is set to ON (step S5201). The jackpot game flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed, and is set to ON when the jackpot game start command is received in step S4318 in the command determination process of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game is being executed.

When the jackpot playing flag is set to ON (step S5201: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S5202. On the other hand, when the jackpot playing flag is set to OFF (step S5201: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 51 ends the jackpot game effect control process.

<Step S5202>
When the jackpot playing flag is set to ON (step S5201: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 51 determines whether the opening effect start flag is set to ON (step S5202) punning production start flag is a flag for starting the opening production of the jackpot game, in step S4320 in the command determination process of FIG. 258, is set to ON when the opening start command is received. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the opening effect.

When the opening effect start flag is set to ON (step S5202: Yes), that is, when it is time to start the opening effect, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S5203. On the other hand, when the opening effect start flag is set to OFF (step S5202: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the opening effect, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S5205.

<Steps S5203 and S5204>
When the opening effect start flag is set to ON (step S5202: Yes), that is, when it is time to start the opening effect, the MPU 51 executes processing for starting the opening effect (step S5203). Specifically, the MPU 51 executes a display control process for starting a display effect on the symbol display section 341, of the opening effect set in the jackpot game effect setting process of step S4317 in the command determination process of FIG. Then, a sound control process for starting a sound effect in the speaker 26 is executed, and a lamp control process for starting a lamp effect in the decoration part 27 is executed.

And MPU51 sets an opening production|presentation start flag to OFF (step S5204), and complete|finishes the said jackpot game production|presentation control processing.

<Step S5205>
If the opening effect start flag is set to off (step S5202: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start the opening effect, the MPU 51 determines whether the opening effect end flag is set to on (step S5205) punning effect end flag is a flag to end the opening effect of the jackpot game, in step S4322 in the command determination process of FIG. 258, is set to ON when the opening end command is received. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to end the opening effect.

When the opening effect end flag is set to ON (step S5205: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the opening effect, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S5206. On the other hand, when the opening effect end flag is set to OFF (step S5205: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the opening effect, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S5208.

<Steps S5206 and S5207>
When the opening effect end flag is set to ON (step S5205: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the opening effect, the MPU 51 executes processing for ending the opening effect (step S5206). Specifically, the MPU 51 executes a display control process for ending the display effect on the symbol display section 341 in the opening effect set in the jackpot game effect setting process in step S4317 in the command determination process of FIG. Then, a sound control process for ending the sound effect in the speaker 26 is executed, and a lamp control process for ending the lamp effect in the decoration part 27 is executed.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the opening effect end flag to OFF (step S5207), and ends the jackpot game effect control process.

<Step S5208>
If the opening effect end flag is set to OFF (step S5205: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the opening effect, the MPU 51 determines whether the round game effect start flag is set to ON ( step S5208). The round game effect start flag is a flag for starting the round game effect of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when the round game start command is received in step S4324 in the command determination process of FIG. 259 . That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the round game effect.

When the round game effect start flag is set to ON (step S5208: Yes), that is, when it is time to start the round game effect, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S5209. On the other hand, when the round game effect start flag is set to OFF (step S5208: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the round game effect, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S5211.

<Steps S5209 and S5210>
When the round game effect start flag is set to ON (step S5208: Yes), that is, when it is time to start the round game effect, the MPU 51 executes the process of starting the round game effect of the jackpot game effect ( step S5209). Specifically, the MPU 51 performs the display control process for starting the display effect on the symbol display unit 341, out of the round game effects set in the big hit game effect setting process in step S4317 in the command determination process of FIG. Executes a sound control process for starting a sound effect in the speaker 26, and executes a lamp control process for starting a lamp effect in the decoration part 27. - 特許庁

And MPU51 sets a round game production|presentation start flag to OFF (step S5210), and complete|finishes the said jackpot game production|presentation control processing.

<Step S5211>
When the round game effect start flag is set to OFF (step S5208: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the round game effect, the MPU 51 determines whether the round game effect end flag is set to ON. (step S5211). The round game effect end flag is a flag for ending the round game effect of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when the round game end command is received in step S4327 in the command determination process of FIG. 259 . That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to end the round game effect.

MPU51, when the round game effect end flag is set to ON (step S5211: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the round game effect, the process proceeds to step S5212. On the other hand, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S5214 when the round game effect end flag is set to OFF (step S5211: No), that is, when it is not the time to end the round game effect.

<Steps S5212 and S5213>
When the round game effect end flag is set to ON (step S5211: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the round game effect, the MPU 51 executes processing for ending the round game effect (step S5212). Specifically, the MPU 51 performs display control processing for ending the display effect on the symbol display unit 341, of the round game effect set in the jackpot game effect setting process in step S4317 in the command determination process of FIG. Executes a sound control process for ending the sound effect in the speaker 26, and executes a lamp control process for ending the lamp effect in the decoration part 27. - 特許庁

Then, the MPU 51 sets the round game effect end flag to OFF (step S5213), and ends the jackpot game effect control process.

<Step S5214>
When the round game effect end flag is set to OFF (step S5211: No), that is, when it is not the time to end the round game effect, the MPU 51 determines whether the interval effect start flag is set to ON. (Step S5214). The interval production start flag is a flag for starting the interval production of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when the interval start command is received in step S4329 in the command determination processing of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the round game effect.

When the interval production start flag is set to ON (step S5214: Yes), that is, when it is time to start the interval production, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S5215. On the other hand, when the interval production start flag is set to OFF (step S5214: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the interval production, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S5217.

<Steps S5215 and S5216>
When the interval production start flag is set to ON (step S5214: Yes), that is, when it is time to start the interval production, the MPU 51 executes processing for starting the interval production of the jackpot game production (step S5215). . Specifically, the MPU 51 executes a display control process for starting a display effect on the symbol display section 341, out of the interval effects set in the jackpot game effect setting process of step S4317 in the command determination process of FIG. Then, a sound control process for starting a sound effect in the speaker 26 is executed, and a lamp control process for starting a lamp effect in the decoration part 27 is executed.

And MPU51 sets an interval production|presentation start flag to OFF (step S5216), and complete|finishes the said jackpot game production|presentation control processing.

<Step S5217>
When the interval production start flag is set to OFF (step S5214: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the interval production, the MPU 51 determines whether the interval production end flag is set to ON (step S5217). The interval effect end flag is a flag for ending the interval effect of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when an interval end command is received in step S4331 in the command determination process of FIG. 259 . That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to end the interval effect.

When the interval effect end flag is set to ON (step S5217: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the interval effect, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S5218. On the other hand, when the interval production end flag is set to OFF (step S5217: No), that is, when it is not the time to end the interval production, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S5220.

<Steps S5218 and S5219>
When the interval production end flag is set to ON (step S5217: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the interval production, the MPU 51 executes processing for ending the interval production (step S5218). Specifically, the MPU 51 executes a display control process for ending the display effect on the symbol display section 341 in the interval effect set in the jackpot game effect setting process in step S4317 in the command determination process of FIG. Then, a sound control process for ending the sound effect in the speaker 26 is executed, and a lamp control process for ending the lamp effect in the decoration part 27 is executed.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the interval effect end flag to OFF (step S5219), and ends the big hit game effect control process.

<Step S5220>
If the interval production end flag is set to OFF (step S5217: No), that is, if it is not the time to end the interval production, the MPU 51 determines whether the ending production start flag is set to ON (step S5220). The ending effect start flag is a flag for starting the ending effect, and is set to ON when an ending start command is received in step S4333 in the command determination process of FIG. 259 . That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the ending effect.

When the ending effect start flag is set to ON (step S5220: Yes), that is, when it is time to start the ending effect, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S5221. On the other hand, when the ending effect start flag is set to OFF (step S5220: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the ending effect, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S5223.

<Steps S5221 and S5222>
When the ending effect start flag is set to ON (step S5220: Yes), that is, when it is time to start the ending effect, the MPU 51 executes the process of starting the ending effect of the jackpot game effect (step S5221). . Specifically, the MPU 51 executes a display control process for starting a display effect on the symbol display section 341, among the ending effects set in the jackpot game effect setting process of step S4317 in the command determination process of FIG. Then, a sound control process for starting a sound effect in the speaker 26 is executed, and a lamp control process for starting a lamp effect in the decoration part 27 is executed.

Here, in the jackpot game, the opening and closing door 319, which is a movable body, moves between the standby position, which is the return side position, and the operating position, which is the drive side position, according to the number of round games corresponding to the jackpot type. This is a display effect executed in the pattern display section 341 which is a controlled object different from the opening/closing door 319 after the opening/closing execution mode in which a series of specific actions to be reciprocated is executed. In this ending effect, for example, information that can identify the type of jackpot that triggered the execution of the jackpot game, the number of balls released in the jackpot game, the number of consecutive jackpots, and the total number of balls released during the jackpot consecutive games are displayed. can do. In addition, in the ending effect, information that can specify the jackpot type that triggered the execution of the jackpot game may be displayed. For example, the jackpot type that triggered the execution of the jackpot game is a probability variation jackpot (moving to a probability variation game state after the end of the jackpot game), or a normal jackpot (of the jackpot game It may be possible to display information that can be specified to be shifted to the time saving game state after the end. The former information is, for example, when the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body, is stopped in a state where the opening/closing door 319 is positioned at the standby position, which is the return side position, so that the first control is executed after the opening/closing execution mode is terminated. By doing so, a character image such as "○○ RUSH Rush" is displayed. On the other hand, the latter information is, for example, the second information after the opening/closing execution mode is terminated by the opening/closing door 319, which is a movable body, being stopped in a state where the opening/closing door 319 is positioned at the standby position which is the return side position. By performing control, a character image such as "Enter XX chance mode" is displayed. In this way, by displaying the information capable of specifying the jackpot type that triggered the execution of the jackpot game in the ending effect, even if the player forgets the jackpot type, the jackpot type is displayed. can be re-recognized by the ending production.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the ending effect start flag to OFF (step S5222), and ends the jackpot game effect control process.

<Step S5223>
If the ending effect start flag is set to OFF (step S5220: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start the ending effect, the MPU 51 determines whether the ending effect end flag is set to ON (step S5223). The ending effect end flag is a flag for ending the ending effect of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when an ending end command is received in step S4335 in the command determination process of FIG. 259 . That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to end the ending effect.

When the ending effect end flag is set to ON (step S5223: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the ending effect, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S5224. On the other hand, when the ending effect end flag is set to OFF (step S5223: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the ending effect, the MPU 51 ends the big hit game effect control process.

<Steps S5224 and S5225>
When the ending effect end flag is set to ON (step S5223: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the ending effect, the MPU 51 executes processing for ending the ending effect (step S5224). Specifically, the MPU 51 executes display control processing for terminating the display effect on the symbol display section 341 among the ending effects set in the jackpot game effect setting process in step S4317 in the command determination process of FIG. Then, a sound control process for ending the sound effect in the speaker 26 is executed, and a lamp control process for ending the lamp effect in the decoration part 27 is executed.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the ending effect end flag to OFF (step S5225), and ends the jackpot game effect control process.

As described above, in the present invention, when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means, the movable control means moves the ball during the display of one specific effect on the display means according to the lottery result of the lottery lottery means. One mode of motion for the means is determined. Further, in the present invention, while the display control means is displaying one specific effect, the movable control means executes a series of specific actions for the movable means based on specific information set corresponding to one movable mode. .

Furthermore, in the present invention, while one specific effect is being displayed by the display control means, the movable control means executes a series of specific actions for the movable means based on specific information set corresponding to one movable mode. In this case, when the movable means is positioned at or near the first position, which is the initial position side, the determination means determines whether or not the conditions for ending the series of specific actions are satisfied. In this way, when the display control means is displaying one specific effect, the movable control means executes a series of specific actions for the movable means based on the specific information set corresponding to one movable mode, When the movable means is positioned at or near the first position, which is the initial position side, the determination means determines whether or not the conditions for ending the series of specific actions are satisfied, thereby controlling the movement based on the specific information. In a series of specific operations of the movable means by the means, each time the movable means is positioned at or near the first position on the initial position side by the movable control means, the judging means judges whether or not the termination condition is established. be done. Further, in the present invention, when the determination means determines that the termination condition is satisfied in a series of specific operations of the movable means by the movable control means based on the specific information, the termination means determines the position at or near the first position. The movement of the moving means is stopped, and the series of specific operations is terminated. That is, in the present invention, in a series of specific operations of the movable means by the movable control means based on the specific information, even before the end of all the movement control for the movable means based on the specific information, the position is at or near the first position. Each time the movable means is positioned, the terminating means can stop the movement of the movable means and terminate the series of specific actions on condition that the terminating condition is satisfied. Thereby, when the end condition is satisfied during execution of a series of specific actions of the movable means, the movable means can be moved based on the specific information at the stage when the movable means is positioned at or near the first position after the end condition is satisfied. You can stop to end a series of specific actions. As a result, when it is determined that the conditions for terminating the series of specific actions are met, the series of specific actions of the movable means can be immediately terminated, so that the end control of the movable means can be performed smoothly. can. Therefore, in the present invention, since a series of specific actions of the movable means can smoothly transition to the next action, the player does not feel uncomfortable after it is determined that the conditions for ending the series of specific actions are satisfied. , can terminate a series of specific motions of the movable means. Therefore, when another individual motion is subsequently executed after the series of specific motions of the movable means is completed, the series of specific motions can be smoothly transitioned to another individual motion. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity at the time of transition to action. Thus, even when the movable means is operated for the purpose of performance while one specific performance is being displayed by the display control means, the movable means can be operated without impairing the performance effect.

More specifically, in this embodiment, the result of the jackpot lottery executed by the lottery process triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 as the ball entry starting unit is reported. In the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the display effect is set by the special figure game effect setting process as the display control process, and the display variation pattern command in the display control device 6 as the display control process is received A display effect is executed in the symbol display section 341 by the processing of the case. Further, in the present embodiment, the movable mode of the movable rotary accessory member 37 as the movable body during execution of the display presentation is determined from a plurality of movable modes A to D by the accessory action effect setting process as the movable body control process. , the movable rotary accessory member 37 as the movable body can be moved based on one movable mode determined from a plurality of movable modes A to D during execution of the display effect by the movable rotary accessory control process as the movable body control process. be done.

Further, in this embodiment, one driving data is used for the driving patterns A to C, which are common operations as continuous operations in a plurality of movable modes A to D, and in which the timing at which the end determination condition is satisfied may be undefined. 1 (accessory action scenario data), the movable rotating accessory member 37 as a movable body is moved, and after the operation in the drive patterns A to C is completed, individual Based on the information of the drive data 2 to 5, the movable rotating accessory member 37 as a movable body is moved in any one of the drive patterns D to G as continuous motions. In this way, the movable rotary accessory member 37 is moved based on the information of one drive data 1 for the actions in the drive patterns A to C, which are common actions in a plurality of movable modes A to D. Since the amount of drive data used for one movable mode A to D can be reduced, not only can the load on the memory be reduced, but also the readout and temporary storage of the drive data when operating the movable rotary accessory member 37 can be controlled. Reduced burden.

In this embodiment, the operation in the drive patterns A to C, which are common operations of the movable rotating accessory member 37 in a plurality of movable modes A to D, and in which the timing at which the end determination condition is satisfied can be uncertain, is one drive. When executed based on the information of data 1 (role product action scenario data), the movable rotation is performed from the intermediate operating position 1 or intermediate operating position 2 as the drive side position to the standby position or intermediate operating position 1 as the return side position. At the timing when the accessory member 37 is returned, it is determined whether or not the condition for judging the end of the motions of the drive patterns A to C, which are common motions, is met, that is, whether the operation button 20 has been operated by the player. It is determined whether or not Then, when the conditions for determining the end of the motion in the drive patterns A to C, which are the common motions of the movable rotating accessory member 37 in the plurality of movable modes A to D, are not established, the motion mode A continues to the plurality of movable modes A. The operation in drive patterns A to C, which are common operations of the movable rotary accessory member 37 in to D, is continued. On the other hand, when the condition for judging the end of the action in the driving patterns A to C, which are common actions of the movable rotary accessory member 37 in the plurality of movable modes A to D, is established (the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is If there is), even in the middle of the operation in the drive patterns A to C, which are common actions of the movable rotary accessory member 37 based on the information of the drive data 1 (accessory action scenario data), the movable rotating role The operation of the drive patterns A to C, which are common operations of the material member 37, is completed. Then, based on the information of the individual drive data 2 to 5 corresponding to each of the movable modes A to D determined according to the content of the notification, it is possible to move in the drive patterns D to G, which are individual motions as continuous motions. A movable rotary accessory member 37 as a body is moved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, based on the information of the drive data 1 (accessory action scenario data), the drive patterns A to C, which are common motions of the movable rotating accessory member 37 in the plurality of movable modes A to D, are performed. is executed based on the information of one drive data 1 (accessory action scenario data), at the timing when the movable rotating accessory member 37 returns from the drive side position to the return side position, common It is determined whether or not a condition for judging the end of actions in drive patterns A to C, which are actions, is established (whether or not the player has operated the operation button 20). That is, in the operation of the movable rotary accessory member 37 in the driving patterns A to C, which are common actions, each time the movable rotary accessory member 37 is positioned at the return side position, it is whether or not the end determination condition is satisfied. It is determined whether or not the player has operated the operation button 20 . In addition, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the end determination condition is established in the motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37 in the drive patterns A to C, which are common motions (the operation button 20 by the player If it is determined that there has been an operation), the movement of the movable rotary accessory member 37 positioned at the return side position is stopped, and the operations in the drive patterns A to C, which are common operations, are terminated. As a result, when the conditions for judging the end of the motions of the drive patterns A to C, which are common motions, are satisfied during the execution of the motions of the movable rotary accessory member 37 in the drive patterns A to C, which are the common motions, the operation ends. At the stage when the movable rotary accessory member 37 is positioned at the return side position after the determination condition is established, the movement of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is stopped to end the operation in the drive patterns A to C, which are common operations. can be done. As a result, when it is determined that the condition for judging the end of the common operation in the drive patterns A to C is established, the common operation in the drive patterns A to C of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is immediately terminated. can be made Therefore, it is possible to immediately shift to the next motion when the completion determination condition of a continuous motion, which is common to a plurality of movable modes A to D and in which the completion timing of the completion determination condition is undefined, is satisfied. As a result, after it is determined that the conditions for determining the end of the plurality of movable modes A to D are established, the motion of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is terminated without making the player feel uncomfortable, and the movable body is moved to the next motion. It can be transferred smoothly. Therefore, when another individual action is executed after the common action of the movable rotary accessory member 37 is completed, the common action can smoothly transition to another individual action. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity at the time of transition to the action of . As a result, even if the movable rotary accessory member 37 is operated for the purpose of effect during execution of the display effect in the first special game or the second special symbol game, the movable rotary object member 37 can be rotated without impairing the effect of the effect. It becomes possible to operate the accessory member 37 .

Further, in the present embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to twelfth embodiments described above are possible within the applicable range.

Moreover, in each embodiment, it is also possible to apply the matters described in other embodiments within the applicable range.

[14th embodiment]
In the gaming machine, various game states with different profit states are set to improve interest in the game. In the gaming machine, it is desired that transition control of each game state is appropriately performed and that control is performed so as not to give unnecessary disadvantages to the player.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
Equipped with shooting means capable of shooting game balls into the game area by adjusting the shooting force by the player,
A first game performed by shooting game balls in a first direction and a second game performed by shooting game balls in a second direction different from the first direction can be executed,
a display means capable of executing a symbol variation game;
a plurality of starting means capable of generating a starting condition for executing the variable game;
an auxiliary means for assisting establishment of the starting condition;
Special game execution means for executing a special game as a profit game when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result;
A gaming machine capable of generating a specific game state by switching the control state for the auxiliary means when the number of executions of the predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number without executing the special game,
a first ball entry means provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific flow path;
a second ball-entering means comprising an opening/closing means capable of switching between an open state and a closed state, and a specific ball-entering area;
opening executing means for opening the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means for a predetermined period based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means;
Specific period game execution for executing a specific period game for a specific period different from the special game as the profit game based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period. means and
with
In a predetermined game state which is a first control state in which the control state of the auxiliary means does not correspond to the specific game state, when the game for a predetermined specific period ends, from the first control state to the specific game state The control state is changed to a second control state corresponding to .

A profitable game may be any game that can provide the player with some kind of profit. As profit games, if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, a game in which a large winning opening (variable winning opening) is opened, a game in which a V winning opening provided in the big winning opening can be opened, a jackpot game, a variable probability A certain variable jackpot game that generates a game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), a short time jackpot game that generates a time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), a normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), a latent probability variable jackpot game that generates a latent probability variable game state (high probability mode and low frequency support mode), a probability variable game by entering a game ball into the V winning opening provided in the big winning opening A jackpot game that generates a state, a jackpot game that generates a time-saving game state by entering a game ball into the V prize gate provided in the jackpot game, a round game that opens the big prize gate in the jackpot game, and a big prize gate A round game in which the V winning opening provided is opened, a small winning game in which the big winning opening is opened for a short time, a small winning game in which a game ball enters the V winning opening provided in the big winning opening to generate a big hit, A game that is executed based on the game ball entering a specific ball area provided outside the big winning opening (variable winning opening), a special electric call that is executed based on the game ball entering the special electric start opening A special electric starting game in which the prize opening is opened, a game executed based on the entry of a game ball into the prize opening opened by the operation of the electric accessory, and a game in the prize opening opened by the operation of the electric accessory Variable game with special symbols executed based on entry of a ball, variable game with decorative symbols executed based on entry of a game ball into a winning opening opened by operation of an electric accessory, through Variation games of normal symbols that are executed based on game balls entering the gate, arbitrary combinations thereof, and the like are included.

The special game may be a game that can be awarded when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result. As special games, if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, a game in which a large winning opening (variable winning opening) is opened, a game in which a V winning opening provided in the big winning opening can be opened, a jackpot game, a variable probability A certain variable jackpot game that generates a game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), a short time jackpot game that generates a time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), a normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), a latent probability variable jackpot game that generates a latent probability variable game state (high probability mode and low frequency support mode), a probability variable game by entering a game ball into the V winning opening provided in the big winning opening A jackpot game that generates a state, a jackpot game that generates a time-saving game state by entering a game ball into the V prize gate provided in the jackpot game, a round game that opens the big prize gate in the jackpot game, and a big prize gate A round game in which the V winning opening provided is opened, a small winning game in which the big winning opening is opened for a short time, a small winning game in which a game ball enters the V winning opening provided in the big winning opening to generate a big hit, Any combination thereof and the like are included.

The specific period game is a game different from the special game, and is a game executed based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means capable of switching between the open state and the closed state is open. If it is As a specific period game, if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, a game executed based on the game ball entering a specific ball entry area provided outside the big winning opening (variable winning opening), A special electric starting game in which a special electric grand prize opening is opened, which is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the special electric starting opening, and a game ball entering the winning opening opened by the operation of the electric role. A special symbol variation game that is executed based on the entry of a game ball into a winning opening opened by the operation of an electric accessory, and a game in a winning opening opened by the operation of an electric accessory Variation games of decorative symbols executed based on the entry of a ball, variation games of normal symbols executed based on the entry of a game ball into a through gate, and any combination thereof.

The specific game state may be a game state generated when the number of executions of a predetermined variation game reaches a predetermined number of times without executing a special game. As a specific game state, if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, a time-saving game state (low probability mode and high-frequency support mode), a time-saving game state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number without executing a jackpot game, and a normal game state (low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode) A time-saving game state generated when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number of times without executing a special game, and a predetermined number of times of execution of a predetermined variable game without executing a jackpot game in a normal game state. Time-saving game state (b time-saving game state) generated when it becomes, and the probability variable game state (high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode) in which the upper limit number of times is defined (high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode). Occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the upper limit without executing a jackpot game in a normal game state that occurs when the number of executions reaches the upper limit, or in the probability variable game state in which the upper limit is specified. A normal game state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the upper limit number without executing a special game in the normal game state in which the upper limit number of times is defined, and the upper limit number of times is defined A normal game state generated when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the upper limit without executing a jackpot game in the time-saving game state, or any combination thereof.

The predetermined game state may be a game state different from the specific game state. As the predetermined game state, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, probability variable game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), latent probability variable game state (High probability mode and low frequency support mode), normal game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), probability variable game state that is shifted after the end of the jackpot game, probability variable game state with an upper limit on the number of variable games, fluctuation Probability variable game state with no upper limit on the number of games, time-saving game state with an upper limit on the number of variable games, time-saving game state with no upper limit on the number of variable games, time-saving game state that is shifted after the end of the jackpot game (a time-saving game state), a time-saving game state that is shifted from the normal game state, a time-saving game state (b time-saving game state), a time-saving game state (c time-saving game state) that is transferred when a specific pattern stops in a variable game of special patterns or decorative patterns, a normal game state that is transferred after the end of the jackpot game, and a shift from the time-saving game state normal game state, normal game state transferred from a reduced-time game state, normal game state transferred from b reduced-time game state, normal game state transferred from c reduced-time game state, jackpot transferred from probability variable game state Game state, jackpot game state transferred from the time-saving game state, jackpot game state transferred from the latent probability variable game state, jackpot game state transferred from the time-saving game state, small-hit game state transferred from the probability variable game state, time reduction A small winning game state transferred from the game state, a small winning game state transferred from the latent probability variable game state, a small winning game state transferred from the time saving game state, and any combination thereof.

The first control state may be a control state in which the control state for the auxiliary means for assisting establishment of the starting condition does not correspond to the specific game state. As the first control state, if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, the control for the auxiliary means that assists the establishment of the starting condition in the starting means corresponding to the probability variable gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) state, a control state corresponding to the probability variable gaming state and a control state for the electric accessory that assists the establishment of the starting condition at the entrance, a control state corresponding to the probability variation gaming state and a variable game at the entrance The control state for the electric accessories that assists the establishment of the starting condition, the control state that corresponds to the probability variable game state, and the control state for the electric accessories that assists the establishment of the starting condition for the special figure game at the entrance, time saving A control state corresponding to the game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), a control state for auxiliary means that assists establishment of the starting condition in the starting means, a control state corresponding to the time-saving game state, and entering a ball Control state for the electric accessory that assists establishment of the start condition at the mouth, Control state for the electric accessory that is the control state corresponding to the time-saving game state and assists establishment of the start condition for the variable game at the entrance, It is a control state corresponding to the time-saving game state, and it corresponds to the control state for the electric accessories that assists the establishment of the start condition of the special game at the ball entrance, and the latent probability variable game state (high probability mode and low frequency support mode). Control state for the auxiliary means that assists establishment of the starting condition in the starting means in the controlled state that is controlled, Control state corresponding to the latent probability variable gaming state and assists establishment of the starting condition at the ball entrance A control state for, a control state corresponding to the latent probability variable gaming state and a control state for the electric accessory that assists establishment of the start condition of the variable game at the ball entrance, a control state corresponding to the latent probability variable gaming state A control state for electric accessories that assists establishment of the start condition of the special game at the ball entrance, a control state corresponding to the normal game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) and a start condition by the start means The control state for the auxiliary means that assists the establishment of the time-saving game state, the control state for the electric accessories that assists the establishment of the starting condition at the entrance that is the control state that corresponds to the time-saving game state, the control state that corresponds to the time-saving game state There is a control state for the electric accessory that assists establishment of the start condition of the variable game at the entrance, and a control state corresponding to the time-saving game state and assists establishment of the start condition of the special figure game at the entrance. The control state for the electric accessory to be played, the control state for the auxiliary means that assists the establishment of the starting condition in the starting means, which is the control state corresponding to the variable probability game state that is shifted after the end of the jackpot game, and the transition after the end of the jackpot game It is a control state corresponding to the probability variation gaming state that is entered and is a control state for the electric accessory that assists the establishment of the starting condition at the entrance, and a control state that corresponds to the probability variation gaming state that is shifted after the end of the jackpot game. It is a control state for electric accessories that assists establishment of the start condition of the variable game at the entrance, and a control state corresponding to the probability variable game state that is shifted after the end of the jackpot game, and is a special game at the entrance. The control state for the electric accessory that assists the establishment of the starting condition, the control state for the auxiliary means that assists the establishment of the starting condition in the starting means, which is the control state corresponding to the probability variable game state with an upper limit on the number of variable games , A control state corresponding to a probability variable gaming state with an upper limit on the number of variable games and a control state for electric accessories that assists establishment of the starting condition at the entrance, a probability variable game state with an upper limit on the number of variable games It is a control state corresponding to the control state for the electric accessory that assists the establishment of the start condition of the variable game at the entrance, and the control state corresponding to the probability variable game state with an upper limit on the number of variable games. A control state for electric accessories that assists the establishment of the start condition of the special game at the ball mouth, a control state corresponding to the probability variable game state with no upper limit on the number of variable games, and establishment of the start condition by the starting means Control state for auxiliary means to assist, control state for electric accessories that supports establishment of starting conditions at the ball entrance, which is a control state corresponding to a variable game state with no upper limit on the number of variable games, number of variable games It is a control state corresponding to a probability variable game state with no upper limit, and a control state for electric accessories that assists establishment of the start condition of the variable game at the entrance, and a variable game number without an upper limit. It is a control state that is a control state for electric accessories that assists establishment of the start condition of the special game at the ball entrance, a control state that corresponds to a time-saving game state with an upper limit on the number of variable games, and a starting means The control state for the auxiliary means that assists the establishment of the starting condition at the , and the control state corresponding to the time-saving game state with an upper limit on the number of variable games, and the electric accessory that assists the establishment of the starting condition at the ball entrance Control state, the control state corresponding to the time-saving game state with an upper limit on the number of variable games, and the control state for the electric accessory that assists the establishment of the start condition of the variable game at the ball entrance, the upper limit on the number of variable games It is a control state corresponding to a certain time-saving game state, a control state for electric accessories that assists establishment of the start condition of a special game at the ball entrance, and a time-saving game state with no upper limit on the number of variable games. A control state for auxiliary means that assists establishment of the starting condition in the starting means in the control state, and a control state corresponding to the time-saving game state with no upper limit on the number of variable games and establishment of the starting condition at the ball entrance. The control state for the electric accessory that assists the control state for the electric accessory that supports the time-saving game state with no upper limit on the number of variable games, and the control state for the electric accessory that assists the establishment of the start condition for the variable game at the entrance. , The control state corresponding to the time-saving game state with no upper limit on the number of variable games, and the control state for the electric accessories that assists the establishment of the starting conditions for the special figure game at the entrance, and the transition after the end of the jackpot game A control state corresponding to a time-saving gaming state (a time-saving gaming state) and a control state for auxiliary means that assists establishment of the starting condition in the starting means, a control state corresponding to the time-saving gaming state and a ball entrance Control state for the electric accessory that assists establishment of the starting condition at a, Control state for the electric accessory that is a control state corresponding to the time-saving game state and assists establishment of the starting condition for the variable game at the entrance, A control state corresponding to the time-saving game state and a control state for the electric accessory that assists the establishment of the start condition of the special figure game at the ball entrance, and a control state corresponding to the time-saving game state transferred from the normal game state It is a control state for the auxiliary means that assists establishment of the starting condition in the starting means, and is a control state corresponding to the time-saving game state shifted from the normal game state and assists establishment of the starting condition at the entrance. Control state for electric accessories, control state for electric accessories that is a control state corresponding to the time-saving game state shifted from the normal game state and assists establishment of the start condition of the variable game at the entrance, normal game state A control state corresponding to the time-saving game state shifted from and a control state for the electric accessory that assists the establishment of the start condition of the special figure game at the entrance, and a predetermined without executing the jackpot game in the normal game state A control state corresponding to a time-saving game state (b time-saving game state) generated when the number of executions of the variable game reaches a predetermined number of times, and a control state for the auxiliary means that assists establishment of the starting condition in the starting means. , b Control state corresponding to time-saving gaming state and control state for electric accessory that assists establishment of start condition at ball entrance, b Control state corresponding to time-saving gaming state and variation at ball entrance Control state for the electric accessory that assists establishment of the game start condition, Control state for the electric accessory that is a control state corresponding to the b time-saving game state and assists establishment of the start condition for the special figure game at the ball entrance , A control state corresponding to a time-saving game state (c time-saving game state) that is shifted when a specific pattern stops in a variable game of special patterns or decorative patterns, and assists establishment of the starting condition by the starting means. A control state for means, a control state corresponding to the c time-saving gaming state and a control state for the electric accessory that assists establishment of the starting condition at the ball entrance, a control state corresponding to the c time-saving gaming state and entering a ball A control state for electric accessories that assists establishment of the start condition of the variable game at the mouth, a control state corresponding to the c time reduction game state, and an electric role that assists establishment of the start condition of the special figure game at the entrance. A control state for objects, a control state corresponding to the normal game state that is shifted after the end of the jackpot game, and a control state for the auxiliary means that assists establishment of the start condition in the starting means, and a control state that is shifted to the normal state after the end of the jackpot game A control state corresponding to a game state and a control state for an electric accessory that assists establishment of a starting condition at a ball entry port, a control state corresponding to a normal game state that is shifted after the end of a jackpot game, and a ball entry A control state for the electric accessory that assists the establishment of the start condition of the variable game at the mouth, a control state corresponding to the normal game state that is shifted after the end of the jackpot game, and the start condition of the special figure game at the entrance The control state for the electric accessory that assists the establishment of the control state for the auxiliary means that is the control state corresponding to the normal game state shifted from the time saving game state and assists the establishment of the starting condition in the starting means, the time saving game state In the control state corresponding to the normal game state shifted from and the control state for the electric accessory that assists the establishment of the start condition at the ball entrance, the control state corresponding to the normal game state shifted from the time-saving game state A control state for the electric accessory that assists the establishment of the start condition of the variable game at the ball entrance, and a control state corresponding to the normal game state shifted from the time-saving game state, and the special figure game at the ball entrance A control state for the electric accessory that assists the establishment of the starting condition of (a), a control state corresponding to the normal game state shifted from the time-saving game state (a) and a control state for the auxiliary means that assists the establishment of the starting condition by the starting means , a control state corresponding to the normal game state transferred from the time-saving game state, and a control state for the electric accessory that assists the establishment of the start condition of the variable game at the ball entrance, and is transferred from the time-saving game state A control state corresponding to the normal game state and a control state for the electric accessory that assists establishment of the start condition at the entrance, and a control state corresponding to the normal game state that is shifted from the time-saving game state. A control state for the electric accessory that assists establishment of the start condition of the special game at the ball mouth, a control state corresponding to the normal game state shifted from the b time reduction game state, and establishment of the start condition by the start means. Control state for auxiliary means to assist, Control state for electric accessories that is a control state corresponding to normal game state shifted from b time saving game state and assists establishment of start condition at ball entrance, b time saving game state A control state corresponding to the normal game state shifted from , and a control state for the electric accessory that assists the establishment of the start condition of the variable game at the ball entrance, b Corresponds to the normal game state shifted from the time-saving game state A control state corresponding to the electric accessory that assists establishment of the start condition of the special figure game at the ball entrance, and a control state corresponding to the normal game state shifted from the c time reduction game state and starting means The control state for the auxiliary means that assists the establishment of the starting condition at c, and the control state corresponding to the normal game state that is shifted from the c time-saving game state to the electric accessory that assists the establishment of the starting condition at the ball entrance Control state, a control state corresponding to the normal game state shifted from the c time-saving game state, and a control state for the electric accessory that assists establishment of the start condition of the variable game at the ball entrance, transition from the c time-saving game state A control state corresponding to the normal game state, which is the control state for the electric accessory that assists the establishment of the start condition of the special figure game at the entrance, and the control corresponding to the jackpot game state transferred from the variable probability game state. A control state for auxiliary means that assists the establishment of the starting condition in the starting means, and a control state corresponding to the jackpot game state that is shifted from the variable probability game state and assists establishment of the starting condition at the entrance. The control state for the electric role product, the control state corresponding to the jackpot game state transferred from the probability variable game state, and the control state for the electric role object that assists the establishment of the start condition of the variable game at the entrance, the probability variable game A control state corresponding to the jackpot game state transferred from the state and a control state for the electric accessory that assists establishment of the starting condition of the special figure game at the ball entrance, and any combination thereof.

The second control state may be a control state corresponding to the specific game state for the auxiliary means for assisting establishment of the starting condition. As the second control state, if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, a time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), the control state for the auxiliary means that assists the establishment of the starting condition in the starting means, and the number of executions of the predetermined variable game reaches the predetermined number of times without executing the special game A control state corresponding to a time-saving game state generated when it becomes, a control state for an electric accessory that assists establishment of a start condition at the ball entrance, and execution of a predetermined variable game without executing a special game It is a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state generated when the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times, and a control state for an electric accessory that assists establishment of a start condition for a variable game at the ball entrance, and a special game is executed. It is a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state generated when the number of execution times of a predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number of times, and assists establishment of a starting condition of a special figure game at a ball entrance. , a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state generated when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number without executing a jackpot game, and assists establishment of the starting condition in the starting means. The control state for the auxiliary means to play, the control state corresponding to the time-saving game state generated when the number of executions of the predetermined variable game reaches the predetermined number of times without executing the jackpot game, and the start condition at the ball entrance A control state for the electric accessory that assists the establishment of a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state generated when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number of times without executing a jackpot game. Corresponds to the control state for the electric accessory that assists the establishment of the start condition of the variable game at the mouth, and the time-saving game state that is generated when the number of executions of the predetermined variable game reaches the predetermined number without executing the jackpot game. Without executing a special game in the control state and the control state for the electric accessory that assists the establishment of the start condition of the special game at the ball entrance, the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). A control state corresponding to a time-saving game state generated when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number of times, and a control state for the auxiliary means for assisting establishment of the starting condition in the starting means, in the normal game state A control state corresponding to a time-saving game state generated when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number without executing a special game, and an electric role that assists establishment of a start condition at a ball entrance. A control state for objects, a control state corresponding to a time-saving game state generated when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number of times without executing a special game in a normal game state, and at a ball entrance. A control state for the electric accessory that assists the establishment of the starting condition of the variable game, and a time-saving game state that is generated when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number without executing a special game in the normal game state. Control state for the electric accessory that is the corresponding control state and assists establishment of the start condition of the special game at the ball entrance, and the number of executions of the predetermined variable game without executing the jackpot game in the normal game state. A control state corresponding to a time-saving game state (b time-saving game state) generated when the number of times is reached and a control state for an auxiliary means for assisting establishment of a starting condition in the starting means, corresponding to the b time-saving game state. A control state for electric accessories that assists establishment of the start condition at the entrance in the control state, and a control state corresponding to the b time-saving game state and assists establishment of the start condition for the variable game at the entrance. A control state for an electric accessory that is a control state that corresponds to the b time-saving game state and that assists the establishment of the start condition of the special figure game at the entrance, and a probability variable in which the upper limit number of times is specified A control state corresponding to a normal game state that occurs when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the upper limit without executing a special game in the game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) and starts. It is generated when the number of executions of the predetermined variable game reaches the upper limit number without executing the special game in the control state for the auxiliary means that assists the establishment of the starting condition in the means and the probability variable game state in which the upper limit number of times is specified. It is a control state corresponding to the normal game state, and the control state for the electric accessory that assists the establishment of the starting condition at the entrance, and the probability variable game state in which the upper limit number of times is specified without executing a special game A control state corresponding to the normal game state generated when the number of executions of the variable game reaches the upper limit, and a control state for the electric accessory that assists the establishment of the start condition of the variable game at the ball entrance, the upper limit A control state corresponding to a normal game state generated when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the upper limit without executing a special game in a probability variable game state in which the number of times is specified, and at the ball entrance When the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the upper limit number without executing a jackpot game in the control state for the electric accessory that assists the establishment of the starting condition of the special figure game, and the probability variable game state in which the upper limit number of times is specified A control state corresponding to the generated normal game state and a control state for auxiliary means for assisting establishment of the starting condition in the starting means, and a predetermined variable game state in which the upper limit number of times is specified without executing a jackpot game. A control state corresponding to the normal game state that occurs when the number of variable game executions reaches the upper limit number of times, and the control state for the electric accessory that assists the establishment of the start condition at the ball entrance, and the upper limit number of times is stipulated. A control state corresponding to a normal game state generated when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the upper limit without executing a jackpot game in the probability variable game state, and the variable game at the ball entrance. The control state for the electric accessory that assists the establishment of the starting condition, the probability variation game state in which the upper limit number of times is specified, and the number of times of execution of the predetermined variable game reaches the upper limit number of times without executing the jackpot game Normal Without executing a special game in a control state corresponding to a game state and a control state for an electric accessory that assists establishment of a start condition of a special game at a ball entrance, and a time-saving game state in which the upper limit number of times is specified. A control state corresponding to the normal game state generated when the number of executions of a predetermined variation game reaches the upper limit number of times, and the control state for the auxiliary means that assists the establishment of the starting condition in the starting means, and the upper limit number of times are stipulated. A control state corresponding to a normal game state generated when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the upper limit without executing a special game in the time-saving game state, and the start condition at the ball entrance. A normal game state generated when the number of execution times of a predetermined variable game reaches the upper limit number without executing a special game in a control state for an electric accessory that assists establishment and a time-saving game state in which the upper limit number of times is specified. A predetermined variable game without executing a special game in a corresponding control state and a control state for an electric accessory that assists establishment of a start condition for a variable game at a ball entrance, and a time-saving game state in which the upper limit number of times is specified. It is a control state corresponding to the normal game state that occurs when the number of executions reaches the upper limit number of times, and the control state for the electric accessory that assists the establishment of the start condition of the special figure game at the entrance, the upper limit number of times is a control state corresponding to a normal game state generated when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the upper limit without executing a jackpot game in a time-saving game state in which is defined, and a starting condition by a starting means The control state for the auxiliary means that assists the establishment of the normal game state that occurs when the number of times of execution of the predetermined variable game reaches the upper limit number of times without executing the jackpot game in the time-saving game state in which the upper limit number of times is specified. A control state for an electric accessory that is a corresponding control state and assists establishment of a start condition at a ball entrance, and a predetermined number of execution times of variable games without executing a jackpot game in a time-saving game state in which the upper limit number of times is specified. is the control state corresponding to the normal game state generated when reaches the upper limit number of times, and the control state for the electric accessory that assists the establishment of the start condition of the variable game at the ball entrance, the upper limit number of times is specified A control state corresponding to a normal game state generated when the number of executions of a predetermined variable game reaches the upper limit without executing a jackpot game in a time-saving game state, and a special game is started at a ball entrance. A control state for an electric accessory that assists establishment of a condition, an arbitrary combination thereof, and the like are included.

By the way, in the gaming machine, when the number of special figure fluctuations in the normal game state reaches the specified number of times without executing the special figure jackpot game as a large profit game, the time saving game state (first profit game state As a control, there is a transition to the so-called b time-saving game state). The b time-saving gaming state ends when the special figure jackpot game is executed, or when the special figure game is executed the upper limit number of times the special figure jackpot game is executed. In addition, when the special figure game is executed for the upper limit number of times without executing the special figure jackpot game, and the b time saving game state ends, the normal game state is entered.

However, in the gaming machine, in the normal game state that is shifted from the b time-saving game state, when the number of special figure fluctuations reaches the specified number without the special figure jackpot game being executed after the transition to the normal game state Even if it is, it will not be transferred to the b time saving game state again. That is, in the normal game state transferred from the b time-saving game state, the b time-saving game state does not occur (first auxiliary state control), and the normal game state that is transferred after the end of the special figure jackpot game or after the end of the probability variation game state Then b time saving game state can occur (second auxiliary state control). Therefore, after the special figure jackpot game is executed first, the b time saving game state can occur only once before the next special figure jackpot game is executed.

On the other hand, in the present invention, the control state of the auxiliary means for assisting establishment of the start condition of the symbol variation game is the first control state that does not correspond to the specific game state, in the predetermined game state, opening and closing for a predetermined period When a game for a specific period different from a special game as a profit game is completed based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry area while the means is open, the first control state is changed to the specific game state. The control state is changed to the corresponding second control state. That is, in the present invention, even if the control state of the auxiliary means is in the predetermined game state which is the first control state that does not correspond to the specific game state, the game ball is entered into the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open. It is possible to generate a specific game state in which the control state with respect to the auxiliary means is the second control state by making a ball and executing the game for a predetermined specific period. As a result, even if the specific game state ends, it is possible to generate the specific game state again, so the gaming machine is left alone because the specific game state ends and the specific game state does not occur. is prevented, and a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine is suppressed.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, a special figure jackpot game that is a large profit game and a V prize jackpot game that is a small profit game can be given to the player as game profits. A special figure jackpot game as a large profit game is executed when a game ball enters the first prize winning port 314 or the second prize winning port 315 as a starting means. This game is highly profitable for the player who can obtain a large number of game balls by opening and closing the variable winning port 316 a plurality of times. On the other hand, the V winning jackpot game as a small profit game is a special electric starting game that is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the special electric starting port 37 as the first ball entering means. It is executed when the game ball enters the special electric V winning opening 383 as a specific ball entering area provided by the second ball entering means that is opened by the operation of the special electric opening and closing door 382 as means, and the special electric electric big winning opening 381 It is possible to enter a game ball, but the number of game balls that can be obtained by entering the game ball into the Tokudendai winning opening 381 is small, and the profit for the player is small. In addition, in the present embodiment, the special electric starting port 37, the special electric grand prize-winning port 381, and the special electric V-winning prize port 383 are the second flow path 392 as a specific flow path set in the right side area of the game board 31. It is provided at a position where a ball can enter. In other words, the V winning jackpot game as a small profit game can be executed by launching a game ball into the second flow path 392 .

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the V winning jackpot game as a small profit game ends, the number of special game as a variable game that can generate the b time saving game state which is the first profit game state control Maximum value is set. Here, the b time-saving game state, which is the first profit game state control, is the opening and closing frequency of the electric accessory 315b as an auxiliary means for opening and closing the second winning opening 315 (the opening and closing frequency of the electric accessory 315b entering the second winning opening 315). In the low-frequency support mode, which is the second auxiliary state control in which the ball support frequency) is low, the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 times) without executing the special figure jackpot game as a large profit game. It is a time saving game state in which the upper limit number of times (for example, 1000 times) to be shifted to is defined. That is, in the present embodiment, the player continues to launch the game ball toward the second flow path 392, a special figure game that can be shifted to the b time-saving game state which is the first profit game state control The maximum value is set as the number of

And, in the present embodiment, the player continues to launch the game ball toward the second flow path 392 to generate the b time-saving gaming state which is the first profit gaming state control. By setting the maximum value as the number of times, when the special figure game of the upper limit number of times is executed without executing the special figure jackpot game as a large profit game in the b time saving game state which is the first profit game state control , the b time saving game state is shifted to the normal game state, and the first auxiliary state control in which the b time saving game state, which is the first profit game state control, does not occur. By continuing to launch the game ball toward , the second auxiliary state control capable of generating the b time-saving game state, which is the first profit game state control, can be generated by the intention of the player. Thus, in the present embodiment, since the player can generate the state that is the second auxiliary state control capable of generating the b time-saving game state that is the first profit game state control, large profit game It is possible to improve the operating rate for the gaming machine in which the b time saving game state, which is the first profit game state control, ends without the special figure jackpot game as being executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the player continues to launch the game ball toward the second flow path 392, so that the b time-saving game state, which is the first profit game state control, can be generated. Since the maximum value is set as the number of times, when the player ends the game in the state of the second auxiliary state control capable of generating the b time saving game state which is the first profit game state control, the player By continuing to launch the game ball toward the second flow path 392 before completing the V winning jackpot game as a small profit game, the b time saving game state which is the first profit game state control It is possible to clear the number of special figure games executed by the player in the state of the second auxiliary state control that can occur. As a result, the player can make the disadvantage received by the player in the state of the second auxiliary state control capable of generating the b time-saving game state, which is the first profit game state control, be the benefit of others. can be prevented. In other words, the player invests time, money, labor, etc. by the number of times the special game is executed in the state of the second auxiliary state control that can generate the b time-saving game state, which is the first profit game state control. The continuation of launching game balls toward the second flow path 392 indicates that such an investment will benefit others who later play games on the gaming machine, that is, be subject to so-called hyena behavior. Therefore, it can be prevented by the intention of the player.

The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 291 to 327, focusing on differences from the first embodiment described above. However, important matters in this embodiment may be explained again even if they have already been explained in the first embodiment.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, the gaming machine includes a "game profit" as a profit game, a "large profit game" as a special game, and a "small profit game" as a specific period game. Also, it has a "first profit game state control" as a specific game state, a "second profit game state control" as a predetermined game state, and a "first auxiliary state control" as a first control state. and a "second auxiliary state control" as a second control state.

[Configuration of Gaming Machine 10]
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 291 to 293. FIG. Here, FIG. 291 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the game machine 10 according to this embodiment, and FIGS. is.

[Configuration of front frame 11]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a selection decision unit 21, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, and an illumination portion 27. .

The shooting handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by the player to shoot the game ball. In the gaming machine 10, when a player rotates the shooting handle 22, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 32 as shooting means with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation. games are played. For example, in response to a predetermined game operation on the shooting handle 22 by the player, a left-handed game as a first game in which a game ball is launched in the left region of the game board 31 in the first direction, and a game in the second direction A right-handed game can be executed as a second game in which a game ball is hit to the right side area of the board 31. - 特許庁In addition, in this embodiment, as a right-handed game, a strong right-handed game in which a game ball is hit to the right side of the separation unit 393 described later, and a weak right-handed game in which a game ball is hit to the left of the separation unit 393 can be executed. is.

And, in this embodiment, in the normal game state, a left-handed game is encouraged in order to enter the game ball into the first winning hole 314 as the starting means and execute the first special figure game as the variable game. . In addition, in the probability variable gaming state and various time-saving gaming states (a time-saving gaming state, b time-saving gaming state), the game ball is entered into the through gate 317 and the second winning port 315 as a starting means, and the second game as a variable game In the special figure jackpot game as a large profit game that is a game profit for the player, the game ball is made to flow down to the first flow path 391 described later. A strong right-handed game is encouraged in order to enter the game ball into the variable winning hole 316.例文帳に追加In addition, a game ball is entered into a special electric starting port 37 described later to execute a special electric starting game, and a game ball is entered into a special electric V winning port 383 of a special electric big winning device 38 described later to execute a V winning jackpot game. A weak right-handed game is encouraged to encourage Therefore, the player can prevent the occurrence of disadvantages by performing a predetermined game operation on the shooting handle 22 that is encouraged according to the game state.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIG. 230, the game board 31 includes an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, left and right general winning ports 313, a first winning port 314 and a second winning port 315 as starting means, and a through gate. 317, an out port 318, a symbol display portion 341 as display means, a main display portion 36 having a first special symbol display portion 362 and a second special symbol display portion 363 as display means, and a special electric start port 37 , a special electric prize winning device 38, a variable winning opening 316, a first flow path 391, and a second flow path 392 as a specific path are provided.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending out the launched game balls toward the game area on the board surface of the game board 31 . After being launched from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game board 31 can enter the left general winning hole 313 and the first winning hole 314, and the game board 31 The game ball flowing down the right side area can enter the right general winning opening 313, second winning opening 315, variable winning opening 316, through gate 317, special electric starting opening 37, special electric big winning device 38. On the other hand, left and right general winning openings 313, first winning openings 314, second winning openings 315 which are specific ball winning areas, variable winning openings 316, special electric starting openings 37 or special electric big winning device 38 are not entered. is discharged from the out port 318 . Then, when the game ball enters the left and right general winning opening 313, first winning opening 314, second winning opening 315, variable winning opening 316, special electric starting opening 37 or special electric big winning device 38, a predetermined number of Prize balls are paid out. For example, as shown in FIG. 294(B), the number of prize balls when entering the left and right general prize holes 313 is 10, and the number of prize balls when entering the first prize hole 314 or the second prize hole 315 The number is 3, the number of prize balls when entering the variable winning opening 316 is 10, the number of prize balls when entering the special electric start opening 37 is 1, the special electric prize winning device 38 (specific prize winning area described later) The number of prize balls is one when the ball enters the special electric V winning opening 383 or the special electric normal winning opening 384). Incidentally, the number of prize balls when a game ball enters the through gate 317 is zero.

Also, based on the game ball entering the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315, the main control unit 331 (the MPU 41 of the main control device 4) executes the processing related to the special figure jackpot lottery. When the main control unit 331 performs a special figure jackpot lottery, a special figure game as a small profit game for a specific period different from the large profit game is executed as a game profit for the player, and the result of the special figure jackpot lottery. to be notified. Specifically, the result of the special figure jackpot lottery triggered by the game ball entering the first winning hole 314 is a small profit game in which the first special figure is variably displayed in the first special symbol display unit 362 It is notified in the first special game of a specific period as. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the through gate 317, the opening/closing execution means opens the electric accessory 315b, which is the opening/closing means, for a predetermined period of time, so that the game ball enters the second winning hole 315 which is opened. The result of the special figure jackpot lottery executed based on the entry of the ball is the result of a specific period as a small profit game in which the second special figure is variably displayed in the second special symbol display unit 363 by the specific period game execution means. It is notified in the second special figure game.

Further, when the result of the special figure jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the special figure jackpot game as a large profit game is executed as a game profit for the player after the special figure game as a small profit game is finished. In this special figure jackpot game, a round game is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times or 16 times) in the opening/closing execution mode. In each round game, the opening/closing door 319 as opening/closing means is switched between a standby position in which the variable winning opening 316 is closed and an operating position in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened. That is, in the opening and closing execution mode, the number of round games is determined according to the result of the jackpot lottery from the number of round games (for example, 5 times or 16 times), and the determined number of round games is executed. Door 319 is repeatedly actuated. Thus, in the special figure jackpot game, since the variable winning opening 316 is repeatedly opened by the opening/closing door 319, the special figure jackpot game is a large profit game in which a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out as a game profit.

Here, the right side area of the game board 31, which enables execution of a right-handed game as the second game, is separated into two game areas by a separating portion 393 made of resin or the like. The separating portion 393 can also be provided by driving a plurality of nails. The two game areas in the right area of the game board 31 define a specific path along which game balls flow down in a right-handed game, and each game area has a first ball entry means and a second ball entry means. is provided.

A first flow path 391 is defined as a specific path in a first area as a game area set on the right side of the separation section 393 in the right area of the game board 31 . Also, in the first area, a through gate 317 is provided as the first ball entering means, and a second prize winning opening 315 is provided as the specific ball entering area of the second ball entering means. Therefore, a game ball that flows down the first flow path 391 in a right-handed game can enter the through gate 317 and the second winning opening 315 . Further, the second prize winning port 315 is provided with an electric accessory 315b as an opening/closing means of the second ball entry means. This electric accessory 315b switches the second winning port 315 between a closed state and an open state.

When a game ball enters the through gate 317, no prize balls are paid out, but with the game ball entering the through gate 317 as a trigger, a process relating to a normal pattern winning lottery is executed, and normal patterns are displayed in a variable manner. By doing so, the general pattern game as a profit game that informs the result of the lottery per general pattern is executed. Then, when the result of the lottery per normal pattern is per normal pattern, the processing for the normal pattern per game as a profit game in which the second winning opening 315 is opened for a predetermined period by the opening and closing execution means is executed. In this normal figure per game, the second winning opening 315 is opened by operating the electric accessory 315b. That is, by executing the opening/closing control process for the electric accessory 315b, a plurality of movable modes (for example, short opening of 0.1 seconds, long opening of 6 seconds (see FIGS. 12A and 12B) ), one movable mode is determined from ), and the electric accessory 315b is placed in the standby position where the second winning port 315 is closed and the second winning port 315 is opened according to the one movable mode in the normal game. The second winning port 315 is switched between the closed state and the open state by being operated between the operating positions. In this way, the game ball can enter the second winning opening 315 by opening the second winning opening 315 in the normal game.

A plurality of nails are driven above the through gate 317, and a passage through which game balls can enter the through gate 317 and a passage through which game balls cannot enter are set in the through gate 317. Some of the game balls that are hit in the right area of the game board 31 and flow down the first flow path 391 enter the through gate 317 . In addition, a plurality of nails are driven above the second prize winning port 315, and there is a flow path in which game balls can enter the second prize winning port 315 and a flow path in which game balls cannot enter the second prize winning port 315. A path is set, and some of the game balls that are hit to the right side area of the game board 31 and flow down the first flow path 391 enter the second winning opening based on the entry of the game ball into the through gate 317. When 315 is opened, the ball enters the second winning hole 315. - 特許庁As described above, the number of prize balls when a game ball enters the through gate 317 is zero. Also, as described above, the number of prize balls when the game ball enters the second winning hole 315 is three (see FIG. 294 (B)), and the time when the second winning hole 315 is open is , 0.1 seconds for short opening and 6 seconds for long opening (see FIGS. 12(C) and 294(D)). And, in the present embodiment, in both the high-frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state, a reduced working hours gaming state, b reduced working hours gaming state) and low frequency support mode (normal gaming state), as the first game, the game ball When executing a game in which game balls are launched to the right side area of the game board 31 and flow down through the first flow path 391, which is a specific path, a specific number of game balls are dropped into the first flow path 391 by continuously launching game balls. , the number of profitable game balls that the player can acquire becomes smaller than the specific number. As a result, in the high frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state, a reduced working hours gaming state, b reduced working hours gaming state) and low frequency support mode (normal gaming state), the gaming ball is caused to flow down to the first flow path 391. prevented from increasing. In other words, since the game ball flow-down region can be freely adjusted by the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 22 by the player, the game ball can flow freely in the first flow path 391, which is a specific route, at any time. Although it is possible to launch the game ball as shown in the above, the game ball is configured so that the number of balls possessed by the player does not increase even if the game ball flows down the first flow path 391, so that the game ball can be pushed to the first flow path 391. It is possible to prevent the hitting method of flowing down to the 1 flow path 391 from becoming a strategy hitting method.

A second flow path 392 is defined as a specific path in a second area as a game area set on the left side of the separation section 393 in the right area of the game board 31 . Also, in the second area, a special electric starting port 37 is provided as a first ball entering means, and a special electric prize winning device 38 is provided below the special electric starting port 37 as a second ball entering means. Therefore, a game ball that flows down the second flow path 392 in a right-handed game can enter the special electric starting port 37 and the special electric prize winning device 38 .

The special electric starting port 37 activates the special electric prize winning device 38 when a game ball enters the special electric prize winning device 38, and executes a special electric starting game in which a game ball can enter a special electric prize winning port 383 of the special electric prize winning device 38 described later. It gives an opportunity to do so. The special electric starting port 37 is provided with a ball entry sensor 37a (see FIG. 294) for detecting that a game ball has entered the special electric starting port 37.

In addition, when the game ball is entered in the special electric start game, that is, when the game ball is detected by the entering ball sensor 37a (see FIG. 294), the game profit is a small profit game, which will be described later. A V winning jackpot game is executed.

Here, FIG. 232(A) is a front view of the special electric prize winning device 38, FIG. 232(B) is a vertical sectional view of the special electric prize winning device 38, and FIG. A) is a cross-sectional view of the special electric prize winning device 38 along the line X1-X1, and FIG. 232 (D) is a cross-sectional view of the special electric prize winning device 38 along the line X2-X2 of FIG. 232 (A), FIG. 233(A) is a sectional view corresponding to FIG. 233(B) is a sectional view corresponding to FIG. 232(C) in a state in which the special electric open/close door 382 of the special electric big prize winning device 38 is opened and the game ball cannot enter the special electric V prize opening 383, and FIG. (C) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 232(A) and 232(B), the special electric prize winning device 38 includes a special electric prize winning opening 381, a special electric opening/closing door 382, a special electric V winning opening 383 which is a specific ball area, and a special electric normal winning opening. 384, and a V winning opening opening/closing door 385 as an opening/closing means.

The special electric prize winning opening 381 is opened on the front side of the game board 31 . 232(C) and 232(D). It switches between an open state in which a game ball can enter the big winning hole 381.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIG. 232(A), when the special electric V winning opening 383 is opened by the V winning opening opening/closing door 385 which is the opening/closing means, the special electric electric winning opening 383 enters from the special electric large winning opening 381. It is possible to enter the game ball that has been played. In addition, the special electric V winning opening 383 is provided with a ball entry sensor 383a (see FIG. 294) for detecting that a game ball has entered the special electric V winning opening 383 .

Also, as shown in FIG. 232(B), when the special electric V winning opening 383 is closed by the V winning opening opening/closing door 385, a ball is entered from the special electric large winning opening 381. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 232(C), a game ball entered from the special electric big winning opening 381 can enter the special electric normal winning opening 384 . In addition, the special electric normal prize winning opening 384 is provided with a ball entry sensor 384a (see FIG. 294) for detecting that a game ball has entered the special electric V winning opening 383 .

The special electric prize winning device 38 is operated to execute a special electric starting game, which is a small profit game, when a game ball is entered into the special electric starting port 37, which is the first ball entering means. In this special electric start game, the special electric prize winning opening 381 is switched between a closed state and an open state by a special electric opening/closing door 382, so that a game ball can enter the special electric prize winning opening 381.

In addition, the special electric prize winning device 38 executes a V winning jackpot game, which is a small profit game, based on the game ball entering the special electric V prize opening 383 of the special electric prize winning device 38 in the special electric starting game. is activated. In this V winning jackpot game, the special electric prize winning opening 381 is switched between a closed state and an open state by a special electric opening/closing door 382, so that a game ball can enter the special electric prize winning opening 381.例文帳に追加

Here, a plurality of nails are driven above the special electric start port 37, and there are a channel in which a game ball can enter the special electric start port 37 and a channel in which a game ball cannot enter the special electric start port 37. is set. Therefore, some of the game balls that are hit in the right area of the game board 31 and flow down the second flow path 392 enter the special electric starting port 37 . As described above, the number of prize balls when a game ball enters the special electric start port 37 is one (see FIG. 294(B)). Therefore, when launching a game ball toward the special electric starting port 37 in order to generate a special electric starting game, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player is larger than the number of hitting game balls required to generate the special electric starting game. fewer in number.

Further, as described above, when the game ball entered from the special electric prize winning opening 381 enters the special electric prize winning opening 383, the number of prize balls is one, and the ball entered from the special electric prize winning opening 381 is one. When the game ball enters the special electric normal winning hole 384, the number of prize balls is one (see FIG. 294(B)). Therefore, in the special electric start game and the V prize jackpot game, an increase in the number of game balls for the player cannot be expected.

In this way, when launching a game ball toward the special electric starting port 37 in order to generate a special electric starting game, compared to the number of game balls launched (specific number of balls) required to generate a special electric starting game The number of profitable game balls that can be acquired by the player is reduced, and an increase in the number of game balls by the player cannot be expected in the special electric start game and the V prize jackpot game. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in both the high-frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state, a reduced working hours gaming state, b reduced working hours gaming state) and low frequency support mode (normal gaming state), as the first game, the game ball When executing a game in which game balls are launched to the right side area of the game board 31 and flow down the second flow path 392, which is a specific path, a specific number of game balls are sent to the second flow path by continuously launching game balls. The number of profitable game balls that can be obtained by the player becomes smaller than the specific number of balls when the ball is dropped at 392 . As a result, in the high frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state, a reduced working hours gaming state, b reduced working hours gaming state) and low frequency support mode (normal gaming state), the gaming ball is caused to flow down to the second flow path 392. prevented from increasing. In other words, since the game ball flow-down area can be freely adjusted by the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 22 by the player, the game ball can flow freely in the second flow path 392, which is a specific path, at any time. Although it is possible to launch a game ball like this, the game ball is configured so that even if the game ball flows down to the second flow path 392, the number of balls possessed by the player does not increase. The hitting method of flowing down to the second flow path 392 is prevented from becoming a strategy hitting method.

As shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning opening 316 as the specific ball entry area is provided below the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means provided in the two game areas in the right area of the game board 31. there is In addition, the variable prize winning port 316 is provided with an opening/closing door 319 as opening/closing means. This open/close door 319 repeatedly switches between the closed state and the open state of the variable winning opening 316 in the special figure jackpot game as described above. In other words, the variable winning opening 316 and the opening/closing door are the third ball entering means different from the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means. A game ball can enter the variable winning hole 316 by executing a right-handed game in which a game ball is hit to the right side area of the game board 31 as a second game. Specifically, the variable winning port 316 receives a game ball regardless of whether the game ball is launched in the game area on the right side of the separation section 393 or the game area on the left side of the separation section 393 in the right side area of the game board 31. ball is possible.

In this way, the third ball entry means having the variable winning port 316 and the open/close door is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, so that the special figure jackpot game, which is a large profit game, is changed to a small profit game. It is possible to give to the player as a game profit different from the normal figure winning game and the V winning jackpot game. Further, since the third ball entry means is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, the special figure jackpot game, the V prize jackpot game, and the normal figure jackpot game can be executed independently. Therefore, the special figure jackpot game, the V prize jackpot game, and the general figure jackpot game are executed at the same time, and on the contrary, two or more games of the special figure jackpot game, the V prize jackpot game, and the general figure jackpot game It is possible to realize a game property that does not execute simultaneously. For example, a small-profit game is not executed while a large-profit game is being executed, a large-profit game can be executed while the small-profit game is being executed, and another small-profit game is being executed while the small-profit game is being executed. It is conceivable that other small profit games can be executed while the small profit game is being executed. Specifically, during the execution of the special figure jackpot game, by preventing the operation of the special electric opening/closing door 382 as the opening/closing means, the V winning which is a small profit game is performed during the execution of the special figure jackpot game which is a large profit game. By preventing the start of the jackpot game and not operating the electric accessory 315b as an opening/closing means during the execution of the special jackpot game, the normal game which is a small profit game is executed during the execution of the special jackpot game which is a big profit game. A winning game is prevented from being started, and a special electric opening/closing door 382 as an opening/closing means which is a small profit game is prevented from being operated during execution of a special figure game which is a small profit game, thereby preventing execution of a V winning jackpot game. By making the special electric opening/closing door 382 as an opening/closing means operable during the execution of the special game which is a small profit game, the V winning jackpot game which is a small profit game is started, and the small profit game is executed. By preventing the operation of the electric accessary 315b as an opening/closing means during execution of a certain special figure game, the normal figure winning game as a small profit game is not performed, and the special figure game as a minor profit game is performed. By activating the electric accessory 315b as an opening/closing means, it is possible to start a normal figure winning game which is a small profit game.

In this way, by preventing the small profit game from being executed while the large profit game is being executed and by enabling the large profit game to be executed while the small profit game is being executed, the profit of the large profit game is obtained as the game profit. can be realized. Furthermore, by preventing other small-profit games from being executed while a small-profit game is being executed, it is possible to realize a game property in which the profit of one type of small-profit game can be obtained as a game profit. In addition, by making it possible to execute another small profit game while the small profit game is being executed, it is possible to realize a game property in which the profit of a plurality of small profit games can be obtained as a game profit.

[Game system]
First, a gaming system including the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 294(A) and 294(C). Here, FIG. 294(A) is a block diagram showing an example of part of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 291, and FIG. 294(C) is a diagram showing signal types output to the outside of the gaming machine. be.

As shown in FIG. 294(A), the gaming system according to this embodiment includes a gaming machine 10, a hall computer 102 and a data display 103. FIG.

The gaming machine 10 includes an external output terminal board 101 as signal output means for outputting a signal of game information of the gaming machine 10 to the outside such as the hall computer 102 . This external output terminal board 101 has, for example, a plurality of output terminal units (not shown), and each output terminal unit (not shown) is an input/output interface for data communication with the MPU 41 of the main control unit 4. It is connected to F42 by wiring (not shown) so as to be able to communicate (receive) data. As a result, game information of the gaming machine 10 is output to the outside of the gaming machine 10 as various signals through corresponding output terminal portions (not shown) of the external output terminal board 101 . Each output terminal section (not shown) can output one type of predetermined signal to the outside. That is, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the type of the output terminal section (not shown) and the type of signal that can be output to the outside. For example, as shown in FIG. 294 (C), among a plurality of output terminal units (not shown), the first terminal can output a jackpot signal 1 as a special signal, and the second terminal can output a jackpot signal 2. , the third terminal can output a V winning jackpot game signal as an identification signal, and the fourth terminal can output a special figure fluctuation stop signal as an identification signal.

As shown in FIG. 295(A), the jackpot signal 1 is a signal that is continuously output during execution of the special figure jackpot game, which is a large profit game. With this jackpot signal 1, it can be identified that a special jackpot game is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 295 (B), the jackpot signal 2 is during the execution of the special figure jackpot game which is a large profit game, and the high frequency support mode (variable probability game state, a short game state ) is continuously output during execution. With this jackpot signal 2, it can be identified that the special figure jackpot game is being executed or the high frequency support mode is shifted to the end of the special figure jackpot game. Further, by comparing the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2, for example, when both the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 are output, it can be identified that the special jackpot game is being executed. When the signal 1 is not output and the jackpot signal 2 is output, it can be identified that the high frequency support mode is shifted after the special figure jackpot game ends.

As shown in FIG. 296(A), the V winning jackpot game signal is a signal that is continuously output during execution of the V winning jackpot game, which is a small profit game. From this V winning big winning game signal, it can be identified that the V winning big winning game is being executed. The V winning jackpot game signal may be a pulse signal that is output only at the start of the V winning jackpot game. In this case, the V winning jackpot game signal identifies that the V winning jackpot game has started. can. Further, the V winning jackpot game signal may be a pulse signal output only when the V winning jackpot game ends. In this case, it can be identified from the V winning big winning game signal that the V winning big winning game has ended.

Here, in this embodiment, as a jackpot game, a special jackpot game as a large profit game that is executed when the result of the special jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and a game ball entering the special electric start port 37 V winning jackpot game as a small profit game executed when a game ball enters the special electric V winning opening 383 in the special electric start game executed based on. In this embodiment, when the special figure jackpot game is executed, the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 are output, and the V prize jackpot game signal different from the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 is not output. When the V winning big winning game is executed, the big winning signal 1 and the big winning signal 2 are not outputted, and the V winning big winning game signal is outputted.

In this way, when the V-winning jackpot game is executed, the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 are not output. A jackpot game is prevented from being recognized as a special figure jackpot game. Thereby, the game hall can accurately manage the execution count of the special figure jackpot game in the hall computer 102 and display the execution count of the special figure jackpot game on the data display 103 accurately.

Further, when the V winning jackpot game is executed, a V winning jackpot game signal different from the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 is output, so that the hall computer 102 determines whether the V winning jackpot game is executed. It is possible to grasp that it has been executed, that is, the number of executions of the special figure game until the b time saving game state occurs has been reset. As a result, even if the V winning jackpot game is executed in the hall computer 102, the game hall can perform the rest of the special game required from the end of the previous normal jackpot game to the generation of the b time-saving gaming state. It is possible to grasp the number of executions of Therefore, the game hall is based on the number of times the remaining special game is executed until the b time saving game state grasped from the hall computer 102 is generated. It can be used as a reference for determining whether to reset the number of executions of the special figure game until it is generated to the maximum value.

As shown in FIG. 296(B), the special figure fluctuation stop signal is a pulse signal output when the special figure is stopped and displayed. With this special figure fluctuation stop signal, it can be identified that the special figure game has ended. Therefore, based on the special figure fluctuation stop signal, it is possible to identify the number of executions of the special figure game. In place of the special figure fluctuation stop signal, a pulse signal may be output as the special figure fluctuation start signal when the special figure fluctuation display is started. Since it can be identified that the special figure game has been started by this special figure variation start signal, the number of executions of the special figure game can be identified based on the special figure variation start signal. Further, instead of the special figure fluctuation stop signal, the special figure fluctuation signal may be output continuously during the fluctuation display of the special figure. Since it can be identified that the special figure game is being executed by the special figure variation signal, the number of executions of the special figure game can be identified based on the special figure variation signal.

As shown in FIG. 294(A), a plurality of output terminals (not shown) are connected to the hall computer 102 on the game hall side by wiring or the like so that data can be communicated (transmitted). As a result, the hall computer 102 can obtain game information corresponding to the game status of the gaming machine 10 based on various signals output from the respective output terminals (not shown) of the gaming machine 10. . As a result, the game hall side can grasp the game situation and game state of each game machine 10 based on various signals received by the hall computer 102 . Also, on the game hall side, it is possible to select a necessary output terminal portion from a plurality of output terminal portions (not shown) and connect it to the hall computer 102 via wiring or the like. As a result, the game hall side can selectively obtain the game information managed by the game hall side by selecting the output terminal unit (not shown) connected to the hall computer 102, so that the necessary game information can be obtained. Management can be performed efficiently, and necessary game information can be displayed on the data display device 103. - 特許庁

Here, the gaming information signal output from the gaming machine 10 to the hall computer 102 includes, for example, that the game is in progress, that a jackpot game has started (that a jackpot game is in progress), high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time-saving game state), low-frequency support mode (normal game state), special game started (during special game), number of game balls fired (out ball number), the number of balls played, the number of difference balls, and the like. Therefore, on the gaming hall side, based on the game information signal-output from the gaming machine 10 to the hall computer 102, the hall computer outputs, for example, the number of jackpots for the current day and the past several days, and the number of jackpot wins for the current day and the past several days. Number of times, past highest number of jackpots, past highest number of consecutive jackpots, current number of consecutive jackpots, total number of fluctuation games for the current day and the past several days, number of special game games between jackpots for the current day and the past several days, It is possible to manage the number of special game games from the previous big hit of the day to the current variable game, the number of balls released and difference balls for the current day and the past several days, and the game status and game status of each gaming machine 10. For example, being in a game, being in a jackpot game, being in a high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, time-saving game state), being in a low-frequency support mode (normal game state), etc. can.

The data display 103 displays, for example, the game status of the gaming machine 10, and is provided above each gaming machine 10 in the island facilities of the gaming hall. The data display device 103 is connected to the hall computer 102 by wiring or the like so as to be capable of data communication (receiving). The game state can be displayed directly or indirectly. Specifically, the data display 103 displays, for example, the number of jackpots for the current day and the past several days, the number of consecutive jackpots for the current day and the past several days, the highest number of jackpots in the past, the highest number of consecutive jackpots in the past, the current The number of jackpot consecutive games, the total number of variable games for the current day and the past few days, the number of special game games between the jackpots for the current day and the past few days, the number of special game games from the previous jackpot of the day to the current variable game, the current day And the past few days' worth of balls and difference balls, being in the game, being in the jackpot game, being in the high-frequency support mode (probability variable game state, short-time game state), low-frequency support mode (normal game status) can be indicated directly or indirectly.

[Processing of main controller 4]
Next, processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 297 to 321. FIG.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
Since the through gate 317 of this embodiment is provided only on the right side area of the game board 31, the main timer interrupt processing of this embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in part of the procedure of through gate processing. is different.

[Through gate processing]
Here, FIG. 297 is a flow chart showing the procedure of through gate processing executed by the MPU 41 at step S1006 in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. In the through gate process, when the game ball passes through the through gate 317, the MPU 41 updates the information stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 412c of the RAM 412 (see FIG. 11). Through gate processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1301>
As shown in FIG. 297, in the through gate process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 317, which is the first ball entering means (step S1301). Whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 317 is determined based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412 in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has passed through the through gate 317L (step S1301: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1302, and when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the through gate 317L (step S1301: No), the through gate process is terminated.

<Step S1302>
When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has passed through the through gate 317L (step S1301: Yes), the normal pattern stored in the normal pattern variation pending number storage area SNA set in the normal pattern pending storage area 412c of the RAM 412 It is determined whether or not the variable pending number X is the maximum pending number (4 in this embodiment) (step S1302). MPU41, when normal pattern fluctuation reservation number X is the maximum number of reservations (step S1302: Yes), ends the through gate process, when normal pattern fluctuation reservation number X is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1302: No), The process proceeds to step S1303.

<Steps S1303 and S1304>
MPU41, when the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1302: No), adds 1 to the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X (step S1303), in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. The counter values of the normal per random number counter C4 and the normal per type random number counter C5 to be updated, and the value of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 to be updated in steps S1402 and S1414 of the main processing of the figure 300 described later are obtained, and the counter The value is stored in the first empty reservation area out of the normal diagram first reservation area SE1 to the normal diagram fourth reservation area SE4 of the normal diagram reservation storage area 412c in the RAM 412 (step S1304), and the through gate process is terminated.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 will be described with reference to FIG. The main processing of this embodiment includes special figure game count management processing (step S1406-1), special electric starting game control processing (step S1407-2), V winning jackpot game control processing (step S1407-3), and signal output processing. This differs from the above-described first embodiment in that (step S1408-1) is executed. These processes will be described below, and the processes necessary for understanding the present embodiment will also be described as appropriate.

Before explaining the main processing of the main controller 4, the transition of the game state in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 298 is a diagram showing an example of game state transition.

As shown in FIG. 298 (A), in this embodiment, the basic game state includes a normal game state, a variable probability game state, a time-saving game state, b time-saving game state and special figure jackpot game state, and a predetermined The game state is shifted when the condition is established.

The normal game state is a low probability mode in which a special figure jackpot lottery is executed based on a low probability mode success or failure table (see FIG. 9 (A)) with a low probability of becoming a jackpot as a result of the special figure jackpot lottery. It is a mode in which it is difficult to shift to a jackpot game state. In addition, the normal game state is a low-frequency support mode in which the operation frequency of the electric accessory 315b is low and the game ball is difficult to enter the second winning hole 315. FIG. Therefore, in the normal game state, in order to execute the first special figure game by entering the game ball into the first winning hole 314, the first game of hitting the game ball to the left area of the game board 31 which is the first direction As a left-handed game is encouraged. This normal game state is shifted to the special figure game of a specified number of times without transitioning to the special figure jackpot game state in the time saving game state a or the time saving game state b. Specifically, in the normal game state, without transitioning to the special figure jackpot game state in the a time saving game state, for example, 100 special figure games are executed, or special in the b time saving game state For example, 1000 times of special figure games are executed without transferring to the figure jackpot game state. Then, the normal game state that shifts from the a time-saving game state is b time-saving by executing the special game of a specified number of times (for example, 1000 times) without shifting to the special game game state after the end of the normal jackpot game. It is the second auxiliary state control that can shift to the game state. On the other hand, the normal game state that shifts from the b time saving game state does not shift to the special game jackpot game state after the transition to the normal game. This is the first auxiliary state control that does not shift to the game state.

The probability variation gaming state is a high probability mode in which a special figure jackpot lottery is executed based on a high probability mode success or failure table (see FIG. 9 (B)) with a high probability of becoming a jackpot as a result of the special figure jackpot lottery, and a special figure This is a mode in which it is easy to shift to a jackpot game state. In addition, the variable probability game state is a high frequency support mode in which the frequency of operation of the electric accessory 315b is high and the game ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 315. Therefore, in the probability variable gaming state, in order to execute the second special figure game by entering the game ball into the second winning opening 315, the game is played on the right side of the separation part 393 in the right region of the game board 31 which is the second direction. A hard-right hitting game, which is the second game of hitting a ball, is encouraged. This probability variable game state is shifted from the probability variable big win game state after the probability variable big win game, which is a large profit game, is completed.

The a time-saving gaming state is a low probability mode in which a special jackpot lottery is executed based on a low probability mode success or failure table (see FIG. 9 (A)) that has a low probability of becoming a jackpot as a result of the special jackpot lottery. This is a mode in which it is difficult to shift to the jackpot gaming state. In addition, the time-saving game state a is a high-frequency support mode in which the electric accessory 315b operates at a high frequency and the game ball easily enters the second winning hole 315. FIG. Therefore, in the a time-saving gaming state, the game area provided with the through gate 317 and the second winning opening 315 in order to execute the second special figure game by entering the game ball into the second winning opening 315, that is, the game board A hard right hitting game is encouraged with the game ball in the game area on the right side of the separation part 393 in the right area of 31 . After the end of the normal jackpot game, which is a large-profit game, the normal jackpot game state is shifted to the a time-saving game state.

The b time-saving gaming state is a low probability mode in which a special figure jackpot lottery is executed based on a low probability mode success or failure table (see FIG. 9 (A)) that has a low probability of becoming a jackpot as a result of the special figure jackpot lottery. This is a mode in which it is difficult to shift to the jackpot gaming state. The b time-saving game state is a high-frequency support mode in which the electric accessory 315b operates at a high frequency and the game ball easily enters the second winning hole 315. FIG. Therefore, in the b time-saving gaming state, the game area provided with the through gate 317 and the second winning opening 315 in order to execute the second special figure game by entering the game ball into the second winning opening 315, that is, the game board A hard right hitting game is encouraged with the game ball in the game area on the right side of the separation part 393 in the right area of 31 . In this b time-saving game state, after the end of the normal jackpot game which is a large profit game, the transition is made by executing the special game a specified number of times (for example, 1000 times) without being transferred to the special jackpot game state. do.

The special figure jackpot game state is a predetermined round game in which the variable winning port 316 as the third ball entry means is opened until a predetermined time elapses or until the upper limit number (for example, 9) or more game balls wins. It is a gaming state in which a special figure jackpot game, which is a large profit game performed a number of times, is executed. The special figure jackpot game state includes a 5R normal jackpot game state, a 5R probability variable jackpot game state, and a 16R probability variable jackpot game state. The 5R normal jackpot game state is a game state in which the 5R normal jackpot game in which the round game is performed five times is executed, and after the end of this 5R normal jackpot game, the state is shifted to the a reduced working hours game state. The 5R probability variable jackpot game state is a game state in which a 5R probability variable jackpot game in which round games are performed five times is executed, and the game state is shifted to the probability variable jackpot game state after the end of this 5R probability variable jackpot game. The 16R probability variable jackpot game state is a gaming state in which a 16R probability variable jackpot game in which a round game is performed 16 times is executed, and the state is shifted to the probability variable game state after the end of this 16R probability variable jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 298(B), in the present embodiment, the game state further includes a V winning jackpot game state. This V winning jackpot game state is a gaming state in which a V winning jackpot game, which is a small profit game, is executed. The V winning jackpot game is a special electric that is executed based on the entry of the game ball to the special electric start port 37 as the first ball entry means in the normal game state, the probability variable game state, the time saving game state a, and the time saving game state b. In the starting game, the game ball entered a special electric V winning port 383 as a specific ball entry area provided in the second ball entering means, which is opened by the operation of the special electric opening/closing door 382 as the opening/closing means provided in the second ball entering means. is executed if That is, when the game ball enters the special electric starting port 37 during the execution of the special electric game which is a small profit game (during the fluctuation of the special electric power), the special electric starting game is executed, and the special electric opening and closing door 382 is operated. By allowing game balls to enter the V winning opening 383, a V winning jackpot game can occur. Therefore, during the execution of the special figure game (while the special figure is fluctuating), the V winning jackpot game can be performed at the same time as the special figure game. As a result, the V winning jackpot game state is generated independently of the normal game state, the probability variable game state, the time saving game state a, and the time saving game state b.

In this embodiment, the game state is the same before the start of the V winning jackpot game and after the end of the game. Specifically, when the V winning jackpot game state occurs in the normal game state, the normal game state is maintained from before the V winning jackpot game starts to after the end of the V winning jackpot game, and the V winning jackpot game is played in the variable probability game state. When the state occurs, the variable probability game state is maintained from before the start of the V prize jackpot game to after the end, and when the V prize jackpot game state occurs in the time saving game state a, before the start of the V prize jackpot game. The time-saving game state a is maintained from to after the end, and if the V-winning jackpot game state occurs in the time-saving game state b, the time-saving game state b is also maintained from before the start of the V-winning jackpot game to after the game ends. is maintained. In other words, before and after the execution of the V winning jackpot game, which is a small profit game, the game state does not change, and the game profit of the player does not change.

In this way, since the game state is not changed before and after the execution of the V-winning big winning game, the player is prevented from being disadvantaged by the V-winning big winning game, and the player's existing gains before executing the V-winning big winning game are prevented. profits are continuously protected after the execution of the V prize jackpot game. Specifically, when the gaming state before the execution of the V winning jackpot game is the probability variable gaming state, even after the execution of the V winning jackpot game, the high probability mode with a high special jackpot probability of the special jackpot lottery is set. It is maintained, and the high-frequency support mode with a high probability of winning a lottery per normal figure is maintained. In addition, when the gaming state before the execution of the V winning jackpot game is the a reduced working hours gaming state or the b reduced working hours gaming state, even after the execution of the V winning jackpot game, the normal drawing winning probability of the general drawing winning lottery is high. The frequency support mode is maintained and does not affect the number of remaining time-saving games. Therefore, when the player intentionally causes the V-winning big winning game, the player is prevented from being disadvantaged, and the vested profit is protected.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the high-frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state, a reduced working hours gaming state or b reduced working hours gaming state), by flowing down the game ball to the first flow path 391, the through gate 317 and the second winning It is possible to enter the game ball into the mouth 315 and execute the second special figure game. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, a strong right-handed game in which a game ball is hit to the right of the separating portion 393 in the right area of the game board 31 is encouraged. However, even if the player hits the game ball with the intention of executing a hard right-handed game, the second flow may occur against the player's will due to poor launch of the game ball or mutual interference of the game balls. It is assumed that the game ball flows down the path 392 . In this case, the game ball that flows down the second flow path 392 enters the special electric start opening 37 against the player's will. It is assumed that a game is executed, and a game ball enters the special electric V winning opening 383 in the special electric starting game, thereby executing the V winning jackpot game. And, the number of executions of the special game until the b time saving game state is generated by executing the special electric V winning opening 383 based on the game ball flowing down the second flow path 392 against the intention of the player is reset, if the game state is changed before and after the execution of the V winning jackpot game, the player will be greatly disadvantaged. For example, the V winning jackpot game is executed in the probability variation gaming state that is most advantageous to the player, so that the game state is more disadvantageous to the player than other gaming states, that is, the probability variation gaming state (special figure jackpot lottery is low probability mode) , the player loses the advantage that the special jackpot lottery is in the high probability mode, which is a great disadvantage to the player. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by preventing the game state from being changed before and after execution of the V winning jackpot game, the profit of the player of being in the high frequency support mode or the high probability mode is reduced to the V winning. It can be maintained even after the execution of the jackpot game, and the player is prevented from being greatly disadvantaged.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the V winning jackpot game state occurs separately (simultaneously) from the normal game state, the variable probability game state, the reduced working hours game state and the reduced working hours game state b. The game state may be prevented from occurring at the same time as the state, the probability variable game state, the reduced working hours game state a or the reduced working hours game state b, and the game state may not be shifted even by the execution of the V winning jackpot game. Even in this case, the game profit of the player is not changed before and after the execution of the V winning jackpot game, which is a small profit game, and the game profit before the execution of the V winning jackpot game is the same as that after the execution of the V winning jackpot game. is also maintained.

Further, when the game state before the execution of the V winning jackpot game, which is a small profit game, is the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state is maintained even after the execution of the V winning jackpot game, but the V winning jackpot game is performed. After execution, the maximum value is set as the number of executions of the special figure game required to generate the b time-saving gaming state which is the first profit gaming state control.

Then, the game state before the execution of the V winning jackpot game is the normal game state of the first auxiliary state control shifted from the b time saving game state, that is, the normal game of the second profit game state control in which the b time saving game state cannot occur. In the case of the state, the maximum value is set as the number of executions of the special figure game required to generate the b time saving game state, and the second auxiliary state control that can generate the b time saving game state is changed. be. That is, in the present embodiment, the V winning jackpot game is executed when the b time saving gaming state transferred from the b time saving gaming state is a normal gaming state that cannot occur, so that after the execution of the V winning jackpot game, b The time-saving game state is changed to a normal game state that can occur. In addition, in the V winning jackpot game, a game ball is entered into the special electric starter 37, which is the first ball entering means, and the special electric V winning opening, which is the specific ball entering area of the special electric big winning device 38, which is the second ball entering means. It is executed by entering a game ball into 383 . The special electric starting port 37 and the special electric prize winning device 38 are provided in a second area as a game area set on the left side of the separating section 393 in the right area of the game board 31 . Therefore, the player launches the game ball toward the second area and causes the game ball to flow down to the second flow path 392 by the weak right-hand hitting game, thereby making it possible to intentionally execute the V winning jackpot game. . Thereby, the player can change to the normal game state in which the b time saving game state cannot occur by launching the game ball toward the second area in the normal game state in which the b time saving game state cannot occur. As a result, it is possible to give the player a motivation to start the game in the gaming machine in which the b time-saving game state cannot occur by ending the b time-saving game state without executing the special figure jackpot game, and the game machine. It is possible to improve the operating rate for

On the other hand, if the game state before the execution of the V winning jackpot game is the normal game state of the second auxiliary state control transferred from the time saving game state a, that is, the normal game state in which the time saving game state b can occur, After execution of the V winning jackpot game, the second auxiliary state control is maintained in the normal game state, but similarly to the normal game state in which the b time saving game state cannot occur, after the V winning jackpot game is executed, the b time saving game is performed. The maximum value is set as the number of executions of the special figure game required to generate the state. Therefore, when the player ends the game in a state in which the b time-saving gaming state can be generated, the player launches the game ball toward the second area and hits the game ball to the second flow path 392 by a weak right-handed game. By making it flow down, it is possible to clear the number of times of the special figure game executed by the player in a state where the b time saving game state can be generated by executing the V winning jackpot game. As a result, the player can prevent the disadvantage received by the player playing the game in a state in which the b time-saving gaming state can be generated, from benefiting others. In other words, the player invests time, money, effort, etc. by the number of times the special game is executed in a state where the b time-saving gaming state can occur, and such investment is later played on the gaming machine. By hitting the game ball toward the second area and making the game ball flow down to the second flow path 392 by a weak right-handed game, It can be prevented by the intention of the player.

In addition, when a game ball enters the special electric starting port 37 during execution of a special electric big winning game which is a large profit game, the special electric starting game is not executed and the special electric opening/closing door 382 of the special electric big winning device 38 is not operated. . In this way, during execution of the special figure jackpot game, the game ball does not enter the special electric V prize opening 383, and the V prize jackpot game does not occur, so that the special figure jackpot game state changes to the V prize jackpot game state. are not migrated. In this way, since the V winning jackpot game does not occur during the execution of the special drawing jackpot game, the profit obtained by the player through the special drawing jackpot game which is a large profit game due to the V winning jackpot game which is a small profit game disappears. is prevented.

It should be noted that during execution of the V winning jackpot game, the special figure jackpot game can be executed. In this way, during the execution of the V winning jackpot game, the special figure jackpot game can be executed, so that the V winning jackpot game which is a small profit game is being executed. It is possible to prevent the profit of the figure jackpot game from becoming unobtainable, and to properly obtain the profit of the special figure jackpot game.

Here, FIG. 299 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in main controller 4. FIG. Specifically, FIG. 299(A) is a diagram showing an example of a special electric start propriety table, FIG. 299(B) is a diagram showing an example of a low frequency support mode special electric start classification table, and FIG. C) is a diagram showing an example of a high-frequency support mode special electric start type distribution table, and FIG. 299D is a diagram showing an example of a V winning jackpot type distribution table.

As shown in FIG. 299(A), in the special electric start propriety table, the special electric big prize winning device 38, which is the second ball entering means, is activated based on the entry of the game ball into the special electric starting port 37, which is the first ball entering means. It is a table referred to by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 in order to determine whether or not to execute the activated special electric starting game, and is stored in the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 . In this special electric start propriety table, 16 special electric start random number counters from 0 to 15 are set, and all the special electric start random number counter values are hits. That is, when the win/loss determination is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the special electric starting port 37, the special electric starting game as a small profit game in which the special electric big winning device 38 is operated is executed.

However, if there is a game ball entering the special electric starting port 37 during execution of the special figure jackpot game which is a large profit game, the win/loss determination is not executed. Therefore, during the execution of the special figure jackpot game, the special electric starting game is not executed, and as a result, the V prize jackpot game is not executed during the execution of the special figure jackpot game. In addition, in this embodiment, the result of the success/failure determination as to whether or not to execute the special electric starting game based on the entry of the game ball into the special electric starting port 37 is 1/1, but other than 1/1 It is also conceivable to set the win with a predetermined probability, and to set the probability that the result of the hit/fail determination is a win may be set differently depending on the game state or the like.

Here, in the special electric starting game, the special electric prize winning opening 381 of the special electric prize winning device 38, which is the second ball entry means, is switched between the closed state and the open state by the special electric opening and closing door 382, which is the opening and closing means. A game ball can enter the Tokudendai prize-winning port 381. - 特許庁Further, when the special electric big winning opening 381 is opened in the special electric starting game, it is possible to enter the game ball to the special electric V winning opening 383 which is the specific ball entering area. Therefore, by executing the special electric starting game, it is possible to execute the V winning jackpot game based on the entry of the game ball into the special electric V winning opening 383 as a specific period game. And, in this embodiment, as the special electric starting game, two kinds of different maximum opening times are set for the special electric large winning opening 381 and the special electric V winning opening 383 (see FIGS. 299(B) and 299(C)). . Specifically, in the present embodiment, as a special electric starting game, the maximum opening time of the special electric prize opening 381 and the special electric V prize opening 383 is 0.1 seconds. The maximum opening time of the short-open special electric start game in which it is difficult to enter the game ball, and the special electric prize winning opening 381 and the special electric V winning opening 383 are 1.2 seconds. Includes a long open special electric start game that makes it easy to enter a game ball into. Since it is difficult for the game ball to enter the special electric V winning opening 383 in the short opening special electric starting game, it is difficult for the V winning jackpot game to occur when the short opening special electric starting game is executed. On the other hand, in the long open special electric starting game, since it is easy to enter the game ball into the special electric V winning opening 383, the V winning jackpot game is likely to occur with the execution of the long open special electric starting game.

The low frequency support mode special electric start type distribution table shown in FIG. 299 (B) and the high frequency support mode special electric start type distribution table shown in FIG. It is a table referred to by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 in order to distribute the type of the special electric start game when the result of the success/failure determination is a hit, and is stored in the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 of the main controller 4.

The low-frequency support mode special electric start type distribution table is a special electric start game type when the result of the winning judgment based on the entry of the game ball into the special electric start port 37 in the normal game state in the low-frequency support mode is a hit. used to distribute In this low frequency support mode special electric start type distribution table, all the values of the special electric start type random number counter from 0 to 49 are long open special electric start games. That is, in the special electric starting game based on the entry of the game ball into the special electric starting opening 37 in the normal game state, it is easy for the game ball to enter the special electric V winning opening 383, and it is easy to generate the V winning jackpot game. Therefore, in a normal game state in which a left-handed game as a first game in which a game ball is hit to the left side area of the game board 31 in the first direction is encouraged, the left-handed game is shifted from the left-handed game to the left side of the game board 31 in the second direction. By changing to a weak right hitting game in which the game ball is hit to the left side of the separation part 393 in the right area, the execution of the special figure game necessary for easily generating the V winning jackpot game and generating the b time saving game state. It is possible to change the number of times to the maximum value.

On the other hand, the high-frequency support mode special electric start type distribution table is a high-frequency support mode. It is used to distribute the type of special electric starting game when the result is a hit. In this high frequency support mode special electric start type distribution table, all the values of the special electric start type random number counter from 0 to 49 are short open special electric start games. That is, the special electric start game based on the entry of the game ball to the special electric start opening 37 in the probability variable gaming state, the reduced working hours gaming state, or the reduced working hours gaming state b, which is the high frequency support mode, It is difficult to enter a ball, and it is difficult to generate a V winning jackpot game.

By the way, in the probability variable gaming state, a reduced working hours gaming state or b reduced working hours gaming state, which is a high frequency support mode, a strong right-handed game that launches a game ball to the right of the separation portion 393 in the right region of the game board 31 in the second direction is encouraged. On the other hand, the V-winning jackpot game can be generated by a weak right-hand hitting game in which a game ball is hit to the left of the separating portion 393 in the right area of the game board 31, which is the second direction. However, even when trying to execute a strong right-handed game that is encouraged in the high-frequency support mode, the variable probability gaming state, the reduced working hours gaming state, or the reduced working hours gaming state b, the flow balls etc. move the left side of the separation unit 393 It is quite possible that it will flow down. In this case, the special electric start game is executed by the game ball entering the special electric start opening 37, and in this special electric starting game, the game ball enters the special electric V winning opening 383, which is V against the player's will. A winning jackpot game may also be executed. Therefore, by making it difficult to generate a V winning jackpot game in the high-frequency support mode, the variable probability gaming state, the reduced working hours gaming state, or the reduced working hours gaming state b, in order to generate the b reduced working hours gaming state against the player's will. To prevent the execution frequency of a required special figure game from being changed to the maximum value.

In addition, in this embodiment, depending on the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, that is, depending on whether the game ball that is encouraged to be launched is left-handed or right-handed, two different special electric start type distribution tables is set, but the same table may be used for the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, that is, for the left-handed and right-handed launches of game balls that are encouraged. Three or more types of tables may be set accordingly.

As shown in FIG. 299(D), the V winning jackpot type allocation table distributes the V winning jackpot game type executed based on the entry of the game ball into the special electric V winning opening 383 in the special electric starting game. Therefore, it is a table referred to by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 and stored in the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 . In this V-winning jackpot type distribution table, all the values of the jackpot type random number counters of 0 to 19 are set to jackpots, and no deviations are set. Therefore, when the game ball enters the V winning jackpot game of the special electric winning device 38 in the special electric starting game, the V winning jackpot game is executed with a probability of 100%. In this V winning jackpot game, the special electric prize winning port 381 of the special electric prize winning device 38, which is the second ball winning means, is switched between the closed state and the open state by the special electric opening/closing door 382, which is the opening/closing means. A game ball can enter the big winning opening 381, but the special electric V winning opening 383, which is the specific ball winning area of the special electric big winning device 38, which is the second ball entering means, is not opened. Therefore, in the V winning jackpot game, it is impossible for the game ball to enter the special electric V winning opening 383, and a new V winning jackpot game based on the entry of the game ball to the special electric V winning opening 383 is generated. Limited. Of course, it may be possible to enter the game ball into the special electric V winning opening 383 in the V winning jackpot game. It is configured so that such a V winning jackpot game is not generated.

By the way, in the special electric big prize winning device 38 which is the second ball winning means, the number of prize balls when a game ball enters the special electric V prize opening 383 and the special electric normal winning opening 384 is one. Therefore, the maximum value of the recovery rate of the game balls in the V winning jackpot game is 100% when all the game balls hit enter the special electric V winning opening 383 and the special electric normal winning opening 384 ), an increase in the number of game balls cannot be expected in the V prize jackpot game. Also, the number of prize balls when a game ball enters the special electric starting port 37, which is the second ball entering means, is also one. Then, in the special electric start port 37, a weak right hitting game is executed as a second game in which a game ball is launched into a game area on the left side of the separation part 393 in the right area of the game board 31. A part of the game balls to be entered. As a result, when the game ball is caused to flow down to the second flow path 392 by executing the weak right-handed game, an increase in the game ball of the player cannot be expected, and the number of balls possessed by the player decreases. Therefore, it is prevented that the game ball is allowed to flow down to the second flow path 392 as a strategy hitting method.

In addition, in the V winning jackpot classification table of this embodiment, the jackpot distribution is set to 100%, but the jackpot distribution is set to 100%, but the jackpot distribution is not 100%. may

[Universal figure game control process]
Here, FIG. 301 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of normal game control processing executed in step S1404 in the main processing of FIG. The general pattern game control process is a process related to the general pattern game which is a small profit game. In this general-purpose game control process, a process of controlling fluctuation display and stop display of general-purpose symbols in the normal symbol display unit 361 as display means of the main display unit 36, and the like are executed. Hereinafter, normal figure game control processing is explained, referring to figure 301 .

<Step S1501>
As shown in FIG. 301, in the general pattern game control process, first, the MPU 41 normally turns on the normal pattern fluctuation display flag indicating that the normal pattern is being displayed in fluctuation (during execution of the general pattern game as a profit game). It is determined whether or not there is (step S1501). The normal pattern fluctuation display flag is set to ON in step S1711 when the normal pattern fluctuation display (normal pattern game) is started in the normal pattern fluctuation start processing of FIG. When the general pattern game ends), it is set to OFF at step S1510 in the general pattern game control process.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1507 when the normal pattern fluctuation display flag is ON (step S1501: Yes), that is, when the normal pattern game is being executed. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1502 when the normal pattern fluctuation display flag is off (step S1501: No), that is, when the normal pattern game is not being executed.

<Step S1502>
When the normal pattern fluctuation display flag is off (step S1501: No), that is, when the normal pattern game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines that the electric accessory 315b, which is the opening/closing means of the second ball entry means, is open (profit It is determined whether or not the electric accessary product opening flag indicating that the game is being executed (per normal figure per game as a game) is ON (step S1502). The electric auditors open flag is set to ON at step S1811 when opening the electric auditors 315b in the normal game control process of FIG. set to off.

MPU41, when the flag during the electric auditors open is on (step S1502: Yes), that is, execution of the general figure per game given as a game profit based on the fact that the result of the general figure per lottery is the general figure per If it is in the middle, the general game control process is terminated. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1503 when the electric auditors product open flag is off (step S1502: No), that is, when the game per normal pattern is not being executed.

<Step S1503>
When the electric auditors product open flag is off (step S1502: No), that is, when the normal game is not being executed, the MPU 41 is a special figure jackpot game that is a large profit game. It is determined whether or not the big hit playing flag is ON (step S1503). The special figure jackpot game flag is set to ON in step S3406 when the special figure jackpot game is started in the special figure jackpot game control process of FIG. is set to off.

When the special figure jackpot playing flag is ON (step S1503: Yes), that is, when the special figure jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the normal game control process. That is, in the present embodiment, the regular game as a profit game is not started during execution of the special figure jackpot game. Therefore, in this embodiment, during the execution of the special figure jackpot game, the normal figure per game as a profit game is not started. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the through gate 317, which is the first obtaining means, the electric accessary 315b, which is the opening/closing means in the second ball entering means, is closed during execution of the special figure jackpot game. The state is not switched to the open state, and the closed state of the second winning port 315 in the second ball entering means is maintained.

Of course, the general pattern game which is a small profit game and the general pattern per game which is a small profit game may be started during execution of the jackpot game. In the general figure game in this case, according to the support mode type (high frequency support mode and low frequency support mode) before the special figure jackpot game which is a large profit game is started, that is, it is shifted to the special figure jackpot game state According to the previous game state, the success/failure information (random number counter per general pattern C4, random number counter per general pattern C5 and random number counter C5 Based on the value of the figure fluctuation type counter CS2), the success or failure determination for the general figure per lottery is executed. In other words, when the game state before the special figure jackpot game is executed is the high frequency support mode which is the first auxiliary state control, the variable game state or the time saving game state (a time saving game state, b time saving game state), Based on the general pattern per hit table (see FIG. 12 (B)), the general pattern per type table (see FIG. 12 (D)) and the general pattern variation table (not shown) for the high frequency support mode, the lottery per normal pattern (Per normal map or off), type per normal map (per long open normal map or per short open normal map), and normal map fluctuation display time are set. On the other hand, when the game state before the special figure jackpot game is executed is the normal game state which is the low frequency support mode which is the second auxiliary state control, the general figure hit success/failure table for the low frequency support mode (Fig. 12 ( A)), based on the per-universal figure type table (see FIG. 12 (C)) and the per-universal figure fluctuation table (not shown), the per-universal figure lottery (per or out), the per-universal figure type (long open Per normal map or per short open normal map), and normal map fluctuation display time is set.

On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1504 when the special figure jackpot game flag is off (step S1503: No), that is, when the special figure jackpot game, which is a large profit game, is not being executed.

<Step S1504>
When the special figure jackpot game in-progress flag is off (step S1503: No), that is, when the special figure jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 stores the number of general figure fluctuation reservations set in the general figure reservation storage area 412c of the RAM 412. It is determined whether or not the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X stored in the area SNA is 0 (step S1504). MPU41, when the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is 0 (step S1504: Yes), ends the normal pattern game control process, and when the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is not 0 (step S1504: No), process to step S1505.

<Step S1505>
If the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is not 0 (step S1504: No), the MPU 41 executes normal pattern data setting processing for the normal pattern correctness information stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 412c (step S1505), The process moves to step S1506. The details of the normal map data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1506>
In step S1506, the MPU 41 executes a normal pattern fluctuation start process for causing the normal pattern display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 to display the normal pattern fluctuation based on the information stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 412c. , End the normal game control process. In addition, the details of the normal pattern fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1507>
When the general pattern fluctuation display flag is ON (step S1501: Yes), that is, when the general pattern game which is a small profit game is being executed, the MPU 41 is executing a special pattern jackpot game which is a large profit game It is determined whether or not the special figure jackpot playing flag indicating that there is ON (step S1507). The special figure jackpot game flag is set to ON in step S3406 when the special figure jackpot game is started in the special figure jackpot game control process of FIG. is set to off.

When the special figure jackpot playing flag is ON (step S1507: Yes), that is, when the special figure jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1509. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1508 when the special figure jackpot playing flag is off (step S1507: No), that is, when the special figure jackpot game is not being executed.

<Step S1508>
When the special figure jackpot playing flag is off (step S1507: No), that is, when the special figure jackpot game, which is a large profit game, is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines that the normal pattern fluctuation display time has elapsed since the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display. It is determined whether or not it has passed (step S1508). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to stop display (end the normal game) the normal symbols that are variably displayed in the normal symbol display portion 361 as the display means of the main display portion 36 .

MPU41, when the normal pattern fluctuation display time has passed (step S1508: Yes), that is, at the timing to stop display the normal pattern that is variably displayed in the normal pattern display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 (end the normal pattern game) If so, the process proceeds to step S1509. On the other hand, when the normal pattern fluctuation display time has not elapsed (step S1508: No), the MPU 41 stops displaying the normal pattern that is displayed in the normal pattern display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 (ends the normal pattern game). ), if it is not the timing to make, end the normal game control process.

<Steps S1509 to S1511>
If the normal pattern fluctuation display flag is on (step S1501: Yes) and the special pattern jackpot game flag is on (step S1507: Yes), that is, the special pattern jackpot game starts during the execution of the normal pattern game If it is, or if the normal pattern fluctuation display time of the normal pattern has passed (step S1508: Yes), that is, when it is time to stop display the normal pattern that is displayed in fluctuation (end the normal pattern game), the MPU 41 The normal pattern is stopped and displayed in the pattern corresponding to the result of the normal pattern winning lottery corresponding to the normal pattern game (step S1509), and the normal pattern indicating that the normal pattern is being displayed (during execution of the normal pattern game). The variable display flag is set to OFF (step S1510). Furthermore, the MPU 41 turns on the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag indicating that the normal pattern is stop-displayed, that is, the end of the normal pattern game (step S1511), and ends the normal pattern game control process.

It should be noted that the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is, in step S1801 of the normal pattern per game control process of FIG. It is referenced to determine whether

In addition, in the present embodiment, not only when it is time to stop display (finish the normal game) the normal symbol that is displayed in fluctuation due to the lapse of the normal pattern fluctuation display time of the normal symbol, but also the execution of the normal pattern game When the special figure jackpot game is started during, the normal symbols that are variably displayed are stopped and displayed (the general figure game is ended). That is, the general pattern game as a game profit is forcibly terminated before the normal pattern fluctuation display time elapses when the special pattern jackpot game is started. Of course, the general pattern game may be continuously executed until the general pattern fluctuation display time of the normal pattern passes even when the special pattern jackpot game is started.

[General map data setting process]
Here, FIG. 302 is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the normal figure data setting process performed by MPU41 in FIG.301 S1505. In the general pattern data setting process, the storage contents of the general pattern reservation storage area 412c in the storage area of the main controller 4 in FIG. 11 are updated. Hereinafter, normal figure data setting processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Steps S1601 to S1603>
As shown in FIG. 302, in the general pattern data setting process, the MPU 41 first subtracts 1 from the general pattern fluctuation reservation number X stored in the general pattern fluctuation reservation number storage area SNA (step S1601), and the general pattern first The general pattern correctness information is moved from the reservation area SE1 to the general pattern execution area SAE (step S1602). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the general map correctness information stored in the general map second reservation area SE2 to the general map fourth reservation area SE4 one by one (step S1603). Specifically, in step S1603, the general map correctness information of the general map second reservation area SE2 is moved to the general map first reservation area SE1, and the general map correctness information of the general map third reservation area SE3 is transferred to the general map second reservation area SE1. It is moved to the area SE2, and the general map correctness information of the general map 4th reservation area SE4 is moved to the general map 3rd reservation area SE3.

[Normal pattern fluctuation start process]
Here, FIG. 303 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of normal pattern fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1506 of FIG. In the normal pattern fluctuation start process, the normal pattern display unit 361 starts to display the normal pattern fluctuation, and various commands and flags are set based on the lottery result of the normal pattern per lottery. Hereinafter, normal figure fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1701>
As shown in FIG. 303, in the normal pattern fluctuation start process, the MPU 41 performs high-frequency support as the first profit game state control in which the electric accessory 315b, which is the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means, is the first auxiliary state control. It is determined whether or not the mode (probability variable gaming state, a reduced working hours gaming state or b reduced working hours gaming state) (step S1701). Whether or not the high-frequency support is determined by whether or not any of the probability variable gaming state flag, the time saving game state flag a and the time saving game state flag b is set to ON.

It should be noted that the probability variation gaming state flag is set to ON when the probability variation gaming state is shifted from another gaming state in the gaming state transition processing described later with reference to FIGS. It is set to OFF when transitioning to another game state. In addition, the a time-saving game state is set to ON when transitioning from another game state to the a time-saving game state in the game state transition processing described later with reference to FIGS. It is set to OFF when transitioning from the state to another game state. In addition, the b time saving game state flag is set to ON when transitioning from another game state to the b time saving game state in the game state transition processing described later with reference to FIGS. It is set to OFF when transitioning from a game state to another game state.

If the MPU 41 is in the high frequency support mode (step S1701: Yes), that is, if the variable probability gaming state, a reduced working hours gaming state or b reduced working hours gaming state, the process proceeds to step S1702, if not high frequency support mode ( Step S1701: No), that is, when the electric accessary 315b, which is the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means, is in the normal game state, which is the low-frequency support mode as the second profit game state control, which is the second auxiliary state control, The process moves to step S1703.

<Steps S1702 and S1703>
When it is the probability variation gaming state or the time saving gaming state which is the high frequency support mode (step S1701: Yes), the MPU 41 performs the normal figure per right/wrong determination based on the high frequency support mode (step S1702). Specifically, the MPU 41 is based on the high-frequency support mode general figure per right or wrong table (see FIG. 12 (B)) and the high-frequency support mode general figure per classification table (see FIG. 12 (D)). Whether the values of the normal hit random number counter C4 and the normal hit type random number counter C5 included as numerical information in the normal pattern correctness information stored in the normal pattern execution area SAE of the reserved storage area 412c are values corresponding to the normal pattern per It determines whether or not it is appropriate.

On the other hand, when the normal game state is the low-frequency support mode (step S1701: No), the general pattern hit determination is performed based on the low-frequency support mode (step S1703). Specifically, the MPU 41 is based on the low frequency support mode general figure per right or wrong table (see FIG. 12 (A)) and the low frequency support mode general figure per type distribution table (see FIG. 12 (C)). Whether the normal hit random number counter C4 and the normal hit type random number counter C5 included as numerical information in the normal pattern correctness information stored in the normal pattern execution area SAE of the drawing reservation storage area 412c are values corresponding to the normal pattern winning Make a right or wrong decision.

<Steps S1704 and S1705>
When the MPU 41 determines the success or failure of the normal game (step S1702 or S1703), the result of the success or failure determination is the long opening in which the second winning opening 315, which is the specific ball entering area in the second ball entering means, is long opened. It is determined whether or not it is a normal pattern (step S1704). MPU41, if the result of the success/failure determination is per long open general pattern (step S1704: Yes), the long open general pattern per flag indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is per long open general pattern is set to ON ( Step S1705), and the process proceeds to step S1708. On the other hand, MPU41 transfers a process to step S1706, when the result of right or wrong determination is not per long open normal figure (step S1704: No).

<Steps S1706 and S1707>
If the result of the success/failure determination is not a long-open/square hit (step S1704: No), the MPU 41 determines that the result of the success/failure determination indicates that the second winning opening 315, which is the specific ball-entering area in the second ball-entering means, is short-opened. It is determined whether or not it is a short open normal figure per (step S1706). MPU 41, if the result of the success/failure determination is a short open normal map per (step S1706: Yes), the short open normal map per flag indicating that the result of the success/failure determination is a short open normal map is set to ON ( Step S1707), the process proceeds to step S1708. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1708 when the result of the win-or-fail judgment is not a short-open normal figure hit (step S1706: No), that is, when the result of the win-or-fail judgment is out.

<Steps S1708 and S1709>
If the long open normal map per flag is set to ON (step S1705), if the short open normal map per flag is set to ON (step S1707), or if the result of the judgment is out (step S1706: No), the MPU 41 sets the normal pattern fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation display time of the normal pattern in the normal pattern display section 361, which is the display means in the main display section 36, with reference to a normal pattern fluctuation display table (not shown). Execute normal figure fluctuation pattern setting process. Normal figure fluctuation display table (not shown) is, as described above, a high frequency support mode general figure fluctuation table that is referenced when it is in high frequency support mode, and a low frequency that is referenced when it is in low frequency support mode Including support mode normal chart fluctuation display table. Therefore, in the general pattern fluctuation pattern setting process, the general pattern fluctuation pattern is set based on the general pattern fluctuation display table corresponding to the support mode type. In addition, since the high frequency support mode general figure fluctuation display table is set so that the average time of the fluctuation display time of the normal pattern is shorter than the low frequency support mode general figure fluctuation display table, the high frequency support mode Then, as compared with the low-frequency support mode, the time during which the normal figure game given as a game profit based on the entering ball of the game ball to the through gate 317 is shortened.

Then, MPU41, in addition to the normal figure fluctuation pattern set in step S1708, the result of the success or failure determination in step S1702 or S1703 (the result of the lottery per normal figure), the type of support mode (high frequency support mode and low frequency Separate support mode) to set the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 (step S1709), and the process proceeds to step S1710.

In addition, the normal figure fluctuation pattern command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 300) executed by the MPU41. On the other hand, in the sound lamp control device 5, based on the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command, the effect corresponding to the normal pattern game for the pattern display unit 341 etc., for example, the effect indicating that the normal pattern game is being executed Execute the production showing the result of the lottery for the normal drawing.

In addition, the general pattern fluctuation pattern command may be at least a command that notifies the sound lamp control device 5 of the general pattern fluctuation pattern, and the result of the general pattern per lottery and the type of support mode are not necessarily the general pattern fluctuation pattern command. There is no need to notify the audio ramp controller 5 . For example, the result of the lottery per normal pattern is to set the lottery result command per normal pattern when the decision is made in step S1702 or S1703, and the type of support mode is high frequency support mode or low frequency support mode. When the transition is made, the sound lamp control device 5 may be notified by setting a support mode type command that can identify the type of the support mode after the transition.

<Steps S1710 and S1711>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 starts a general pattern game, which is a small profit game, by starting variable display of normal symbols in the normal symbol display portion 361 of the main display portion 36 (step S1710). Then, the MPU 41 displays that the normal pattern is variably displayed, that is, the normal pattern fluctuation display indicating that the normal pattern game given as a game profit based on the entry of the game ball into the through gate 317 is being executed. The middle flag is set to ON (step S1711), and the general pattern fluctuation start process is terminated.

It should be noted that the flag during the normal pattern fluctuation display is referred to in order to determine whether the normal pattern game is being executed (during the normal pattern fluctuation display) in step S1501 in the normal pattern game control process of FIG.

[Universal figure per game control process]
Here, FIG. 304 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game control process per normal figure executed in step S1405 in the main process of FIG. Normal figure per game control processing is a process related to the normal figure per game which is a profit game. In this general pattern per game control process, when the result of the general pattern per lottery is a win, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 315b, which is the opening and closing means of the second ball entering means, is performed to control the second ball entering means. A process of switching between a closed state for restricting entry of game balls into the second winning opening 315, which is a specific ball entry area, and an open state for allowing entry of gaming balls into the second winning opening 315 is executed. . Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 304, the game control process per normal figure will be described.

<Step S1801>
As shown in FIG. 304, in the normal pattern per game control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag indicating that the normal pattern has been stopped and displayed (that the normal pattern game has ended) is on. (step S1801). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to start a game per normal figure, which is a small profit game. It should be noted that the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is set to ON in step S1511 when the normal pattern is stopped and displayed in the normal pattern game control process of FIG.

When the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is ON (step S1801: Yes), that is, when it is time to start the normal pattern per game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1802. On the other hand, MPU41, when the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S1801: No), that is, the normal pattern per game given as a game profit based on the fact that the result of the normal pattern per lottery is per normal pattern If it is not the time to start the process, the process moves to step S1813.

<Step S1802>
When the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is ON (step S1801: Yes), that is, when the normal pattern per game can be started, the MPU 41 is executing the special pattern jackpot game, which is a large profit game. (step S1802). The special figure jackpot game flag is set to ON in step S3406 when the special figure jackpot game is started in the special figure jackpot game control process of FIG. is set to off.

When the special figure jackpot playing flag is ON (step S1802: Yes), that is, when the special figure jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the game control process per normal figure. That is, in the present embodiment, when the special figure jackpot game, which is a large profit game, is being executed, the general figure per lottery based on the game ball entering the through gate 317, which is the first ball entry means. Even if the result is normal pattern per, normal pattern per game, which is a small profit game, is not started. That is, in this embodiment, during execution of the special figure jackpot game, the normal figure winning game is not started, and the second ball entering means is operated by the electric accessory 315b which is the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means. The second winning opening 315, which is the specific ball entry area, is never switched between the closed state and the open state. Of course, during execution of the jackpot game, a new normal game or normal game may be started. On the other hand, during execution of the special game, a normal game can be started, and a game ball can enter the second winning hole 315. As a result, the right to execute the second special game can be reserved by entering the game ball into the second winning hole 315 during the execution of the special game, so the high frequency support mode (probability variable game state, a time saving It is possible to repeatedly execute the second special figure game without giving excessive stress to the player in the game state, b time saving game state).

On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1803 when the special figure jackpot playing flag is off (step S1802: No), that is, when the special figure jackpot game is not being executed.

<Step S1803>
When the special figure jackpot playing flag is off (step S1802: No), that is, when the special figure jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether the long open general figure hit flag is set to on. (Step S1803). The long open general figure per flag is a flag indicating that the result of the lottery per general figure is the long open general figure per figure, and when the result of the lottery per general figure is the long open general figure per normal figure 304 It is set to ON in step S1705 of the figure fluctuation start process. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the lottery per normal pattern for the general pattern game which is the finished small profit game is per long open normal pattern. MPU41, when the long open normal map per flag is set to ON (step S1803: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1804, when the long open normal map per flag is set to off (step S1803: No), the process proceeds to step S1806.

<Steps S1804 and S1805>
If the long open general pattern per flag is set to ON (step S1803: Yes), that is, if the result of the general pattern per lottery for the ended general pattern game is per long open general pattern, the MPU 41 is as a game profit The opening time of the electric accessory 315b that is the opening and closing means of the second ball entry means in the given long open normal game A value corresponding to 6 seconds, which is the possible ball entry time, is set as the value of the open time counter (step S1804). The opening time counter is referred to in step S1815 of the game control process per normal figure in order to determine the return timing of the electric auditors 315b. Then, the MPU 41 sets the long open normal map hit flag to OFF (step S1805), and shifts the process to step S1809.

<Step S1806>
If the long open general map per flag is set to off (step S1803: No), that is, if the result of the general general pattern per lottery for the finished general pattern game is not per long open general pattern, the MPU 41, short open general pattern It is determined whether or not the hit flag is set to ON (step S1806). Short open normal map per flag is a flag indicating that the result of the lottery per normal pattern is per short open normal map, and when the result of the lottery per normal pattern is per short open normal map, the normal of Figure 304 It is set to ON in step S1707 of the figure fluctuation start process. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the lottery per normal pattern for the normal pattern game, which is the finished small profit game, is the short open normal pattern. MPU41, if the short open normal map per flag is set to ON (step S1806: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1807, if the short open normal map per flag is set to OFF (step S1806: No), that is, when the result of the lottery per normal pattern for the ended normal pattern game is out, the process proceeds to step S1812.

<Steps S1807 and S1808>
If the short open normal pattern per flag is set to ON (step S1806: Yes), that is, if the result of the general pattern per lottery for the ended normal pattern game is per short open normal pattern, the MPU 41 per normal pattern The opening time of the electric accessory 315b, which is the opening and closing means of the second ball entry means in the short-open normal game per game, which is given as a game profit based on the result of the lottery being a normal ball hit (of the second ball entry means A value corresponding to 0.1 seconds, which is the time allowed for a game ball to enter the second winning hole 315, which is a specific ball entry area, is set as the value of the open time counter (step S1807). Then, the MPU 41 sets the short open normal map hit flag to OFF (step S1808), and shifts the process to step S1809.

<Steps S1809 to S1811>
If the result of the lottery per normal figure is a hit, the flag indicating the type per normal pattern (flag per long open normal map or flag per short open normal map) is set to off (step S1805 or S1808), MPU 41, The electric accessory 315b, which is the opening/closing means, is operated (step S1809). As a result, the second winning opening 315, which is the specific ball winning area, is switched from the closed state to the open state, and entry of the game ball into the second winning opening 315 is permitted. Then, the MPU 41 sets an electric role product open command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric role product 315b is open (step S1810), and indicates that the electric role product 315b is open. The electric accessary product open flag is set to ON (step S1811), and the process proceeds to step S1812.

It should be noted that the electric accessory open command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 300) executed by the MPU41. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 can start an effect indicating that the electric role object 315b is open, for example, on the symbol display unit 341 as a display means, based on the electric role object release command. can.

<Step S1812>
When the process of opening the electric accessory 315b is executed when the result of the lottery per normal drawing is a win (steps S1803 to S1811), or the long open normal map per flag and the short open normal map per flag are both turned off. If it is set (when the result of the lottery per normal pattern is lost) (both steps S1803 and S1806 are No), the MPU 41 determines that the normal pattern is stopped and displayed (entering the game ball into the through gate 317). The general pattern fluctuation stop display flag indicating that the general pattern game given as a game profit based on the ball has ended) is set to OFF (step S1812), and the normal pattern per game control process is terminated.

<Step S1813>
When the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S1801: No), the MPU 41 is set to ON when the electric auditors 315b are released in step S1811 of the normal pattern per game control process. It is determined whether or not the open flag is set to ON (step S1813). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game per normal figure, which is a small profit game, is being executed. MPU41, when the electric accessary product during opening flag is set to ON (step S1813: Yes), that is, when the normal figure per game is being executed, the process proceeds to step S1814. On the other hand, the MPU 41, when the electric auditors product open flag is set to OFF (step S1813: No), that is, when the general pattern per game is not being executed, ends the general pattern per game control process.

<Steps S1814 and S1815>
When the electric accessary product opening flag is set to ON (step S1813: Yes), that is, when the game per general pattern is being executed, the MPU 41 is set in step S1804 or S1807 of the game control process per general pattern. 1 is subtracted from the open time counter value obtained (step S1814), and it is determined whether or not the open time counter value after the subtraction is 0 (step S1815). That is, the MPU 41 restores the electric accessory 315b, which is the opening/closing means of the second ball-entering means, and switches the second winning port 315, which is the specific ball-entering area of the second ball-entering means, from the open state to the closed state. determine whether there is MPU41, when the value of the open time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to restore the electric accessory 315b, the process proceeds to step S1816. On the other hand, MPU41, when the value of the open time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1815: No), that is, when it is not the timing to return the electric auditors 315b, ends the game control process per normal figure.

<Steps S1816 to S1818>
If the value of the open time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, if it is time to restore the electric accessory 315b, the MPU 41 restores the electric accessory 315b (step S1816). As a result, the second winning hole 315, which is the specific ball-entering area, is switched from the open state to the closed state, and entry of game balls into the second winning hole 315 is restricted. Then, the MPU 41 sets an electric role product closing command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric role product 315b is closed (step S1817), and an electric accessory indicating that the electric role product 315b is opened The flag during opening of the role product is set to OFF (step S1818), and the game control process per normal pattern is terminated.

In addition, the electric accessary product closing command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 300) executed by the MPU41. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the effect indicating that the electric role product is open, which is executed in the symbol display unit 341, for example, based on the electric role product closing command.

[Special game control process]
Here, Figure 305 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game control process executed in step S1406 in the main process of Figure 300 . The special figure game control process is a process related to a special figure game which is a small profit game. In this special figure game control process, the storage contents of the special figure reservation storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main controller 4 are updated, and the control of the progress of the first special figure game or the second special figure game, for example The variable display and stop display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display portion 362 as the display means or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display portion 363 as the display means are controlled. Hereinafter, the special figure game control processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 305, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special figure jackpot playing flag indicating that the special figure jackpot game, which is a large profit game, is being executed is ON. The special figure jackpot playing flag is set to ON in step S3406 when the special figure jackpot game is started in the special figure jackpot game control process of FIG. 310 described later, and the special figure jackpot When the game ends, it is set to OFF in step S3452.

The MPU 41 ends the special figure game control process when the special figure big winning game flag is ON (step S1901: Yes), that is, when the special figure big winning game is being executed. That is, in the present embodiment, when the special figure jackpot game, which is a large profit game, is being executed, the special figure game, which is a small profit game, is not started. Of course, the special figure game may be started during execution of the special figure jackpot game.

On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1902 when the special figure jackpot playing flag is off (step S1901: No), that is, when the special figure jackpot game is not being executed.

<Step S1902>
When the special figure jackpot playing flag is off (step S1901: No), that is, when the special figure jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed while the first special symbol is fluctuating (the first special symbol It is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation display flag indicating that the game or the second special figure game is being executed is ON (step S1902). The special figure fluctuation displaying flag is set to ON in step S2107 when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the special figure variation start processing of FIG. 307 described later, and the special figure game control When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the process, it is set to OFF in step S1910.

MPU41, when the special figure fluctuation display flag is ON (step S1902: Yes), that is, when the special symbol is during the fluctuation display (during execution of the special figure game), the process proceeds to step S1906. On the other hand, the MPU 41, when the special figure fluctuation display flag is off (step S1902: No), that is, when the special figure jackpot game is not being executed and the special symbol is not being displayed while the special figure is being displayed (during execution of the special figure game) , the process proceeds to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
If the special figure fluctuation display flag is off (step S1902: No), that is, if the special symbol is not during the fluctuation display (during the execution of the special figure game) when the special figure jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 The first special figure reservation number N stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA of the figure reservation storage area 412b, and the second special figure reservation number M stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB are both 0 (step S1903).

MPU41, when both the first special figure reservation number N and the second special figure reservation number M are 0 (step S1903: Yes), that is, the reservation of the right to execute the first special figure game, and the second special figure If there is no reservation of the right to execute the game, the special figure game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if one of the first special figure reservation number N and the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S1903: No), that is, the reservation of the right to execute the first special figure game, and If there is at least one of the reservation of the right to execute the second special figure game, the process proceeds to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
If either one of the first special figure reservation number N and the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S1903: No), that is, the reservation of the right to execute the first special figure game, and the second special figure game When there is at least one of the reservation of the right to execute, the MPU 41 executes the special figure data setting process related to the special figure propriety information data (special figure data) stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b ( Step S1904), and the process proceeds to step S1905. The details of the special figure data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1905>
In step S1905, the MPU 41 starts the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363 (first special symbol game or second special symbol Execute the special figure fluctuation start process for executing the figure game), and terminate the special figure game control process. In addition, the details of the special figure fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1906>
When the special figure fluctuation display flag is ON (step S1902: Yes), that is, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed in a variation (during execution of the special figure game), the MPU 41 is the first special From the start of the variation display of the symbol or the second special symbol game, the special symbol for the first special symbol or the second special symbol set in the special figure variation pattern setting process of step S2104 in the special figure variation start process of FIG. 307 described later It is determined whether or not the figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (step S1906). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to stop and display the special symbol during variable display and end the special symbol game, which is a small profit game.

When the special symbol variation display time has passed from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S1906: Yes), that is, the timing to end the special symbol game by stopping and displaying the special symbol during the variation display If so, the process proceeds to step S1907. On the other hand, when the variable display time has not passed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S1906: No), the MPU 41 stops and displays the special symbol during variable display. When it is not the timing to end the figure game, the special figure game control process is terminated.

<Steps S1907 to S1910>
When the variable display time has passed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S1906: Yes), that is, at the timing of stopping and displaying the special symbol during variable display and ending the special symbol game In some cases, the MPU 41 is displayed in the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363, which is the display means of the main display portion 36, in a mode according to the result of the special figure jackpot lottery corresponding to the special figure game. The special symbol is stopped and displayed (step S1907). Then, the MPU 41 sets on the special figure fluctuation stop flag indicating that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (step S1908), and sets the special figure game number count flag on ( step S1909). This special figure game number count flag generates the remaining number of special figure games in a reduced working hours game state and b reduced working hours game state and b reduced working hours game state in step S3301 of special figure game number management processing in FIG. 308 described later. It is referred to determine whether or not to subtract the remaining number of special figure games until it is made. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the special figure fluctuation stop signal output flag to ON (step S1909). This special figure fluctuation stop signal output flag is, in step S3819 of the signal output processing described later, through the 4th terminal in a plurality of output terminal units (not shown) of the external output terminal plate 101 (see FIG. 294 (A)) It is referenced to determine whether or not to output a special figure fluctuation stop signal as an identification signal to the outside of the gaming machine 10 . Then, the special figure fluctuation display flag indicating that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed in fluctuation (the special figure game is being executed) is set to OFF (step S1910), and the special figure game control process exit.

[Special figure data setting process]
Here, FIG. 306 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1904 of the special figure game control process of FIG. In the special figure data setting process, the storage contents of the special figure reservation storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main controller 4 are updated. Hereinafter, the special figure data setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S2001>
As shown in FIG. 306, in step S2001, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second special figure reservation number M for the second special figure game which is a small profit game is zero. MPU41, when the second special symbol reservation number M is 0 (step S2001: Yes), that is, the first special symbol for the first special symbol game which is a small profit game without the second special symbol reservation for the second special symbol game If there is a figure pending (see step S1903 in the special figure game control process of Figure 305), the process proceeds to step S2002. On the other hand, when the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S2001: No), that is, when there is a second special figure reservation for the second special figure game, the process proceeds to step S2005. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation number M for the second special symbol game is 0, thereby starting the second special symbol game with priority over the first special symbol game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the second special symbol game is started with priority over the first special symbol game, but the first special symbol game is started with priority over the second special symbol game. Also, the special symbol game is started in the order of entry (reservation order) of the game ball to the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315, either the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game may be executed. Further, the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game are executed independently of each other without providing priority to the start of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game, and the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game are executed independently of each other. The second special symbol game may be executed at the same time (so-called simultaneous variation of special symbols).

<Steps S2002 to S2004>
When the second special figure reservation number M is 0 (step S2001: Yes), the MPU 41 is the first special figure reservation stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA of the first special figure reservation storage area REA. The number N is subtracted by 1 (step S2002), and the special figure propriety information is moved from the first reservation area REA1 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA to the special figure execution area AE (step S2003). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the special figure propriety information of the second reservation area REA2 to the fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA one by one (step S2004). Specifically, in step S2004, the special figure validity information in the second reservation area REA2 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA is moved to the first reservation area REA1, and the special figure validity information in the third reservation area REA3 is transferred to the second reservation area REA3. It is moved to the reservation area REA2, and the special figure propriety information of the fourth reservation area REA4 is moved to the third reservation area REA3. MPU41 transfers a process to step S2008, when the process of step S2004 is complete|finished.

<Steps S2005 to S2007>
When the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S2001: No), the MPU 41 is the second special figure reservation number stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB of the second special figure reservation storage area REB M is subtracted by 1 (step S2005), and the special figure propriety information is moved from the first reservation area REB1 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB to the special figure execution area AE (step S2006). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the special figure propriety information of the second reservation area REB2 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB one by one (step S2007). Specifically, in step S2007, the special figure validity information of the second reservation area REB2 is moved to the first reservation area REB1, the special figure validity information of the third reservation area REB3 is moved to the second reservation area REB2, and the fourth The special figure propriety information in the reservation area REB4 is moved to the third reservation area REB3. MPU41 transfers a process to step S2008, when the process of step S2007 is complete|finished.

<Step S2008>
In step S2008, MPU41, the first reservation area REA1 ~ fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA, or the first reservation area REB1 ~ fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB A special figure shift command indicating that the special figure propriety information has been shifted is set in the RAM 412, and the special figure data setting process is terminated. This special figure shift command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 300) executed by the MPU41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 changes the display number of the hold display corresponding to the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold displayed on the pattern display unit 341 based on the special figure shift command. be able to.

[Special figure fluctuation start process]
Here, FIG. 307 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure variation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1905 of the special figure game control process of FIG. In the special figure fluctuation start process, it is a small profit game by starting the fluctuation display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display part 362 or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display part 363 which is the display means. A first special game or a second special game (special game) is started, and various processes associated with the start of the special game are executed. Hereinafter, the special figure variation start processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S2101>
As shown in FIG. 307, in step S2101, the MPU 41 determines whether the game state is the high probability mode. The high probability mode is a variable probability game state in which the control state of the electric accessory 315b, which is the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means, is the high frequency support mode of the first auxiliary state control. Whether or not the high probability mode is determined by whether or not the probability variation gaming state flag indicating that the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state which is the high probability mode is set to ON. The probability variation gaming state flag is set to ON when the gaming state is shifted from the probability variation jackpot gaming state to the probability variation gaming state at step S3722 in FIG. is set to OFF when shifting from the probability variable gaming state to the probability variable jackpot game state or the normal jackpot game state.

MPU41, when the game state is a high probability mode probability variation gaming state (step S2101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2102, if the gaming state is not a high probability mode probability variation gaming state (step S2101: No ), that is, if the game state is the low-probability mode a time-saving game state, b time-saving game state, or normal game state, the process proceeds to step S2103.

In the time-saving game state a and the time-saving game state b, the control state of the electric accessory 315b, which is the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means, is the high-frequency support mode of the first auxiliary state control. On the other hand, in the normal game state, the control state of the electric accessory 315b, which is the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means, is the low frequency support mode of the second auxiliary state control.

<Steps S2102 and S2103>
When the game state is the probability variable game state which is the high probability mode (step S2101: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the high probability mode is saved according to the game set value in step S2410 in the game set value change process of FIG. The table (see FIG. 9(B)) is read, and the success/failure determination is executed based on the high-probability mode success/failure table (step S2102).

On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a variable probability gaming state that is a high probability mode (step S2101: No), that is, if the gaming state is a low probability mode a reduced working hours gaming state, b reduced working hours gaming state or normal gaming state, the MPU 41 In step S2410 in the game set value change process of FIG. 35, the low probability mode right/wrong table (see FIG. 9(A)) stored according to the game set value is read, and the right/wrong is determined based on the low probability mode right/wrong table. Determination is executed (step S2103).

Thus, in this embodiment, the special figure jackpot lottery (whether judgment) is based on whether the mode related to the special figure jackpot lottery when the special game is started is the high probability mode or the low probability mode is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, a high probability and a low probability are set as the probability of winning a jackpot as a result of the special jackpot lottery (special jackpot probability). It is not affected by the execution of the starting game, the V prize jackpot game, and the normal pattern winning game. Therefore, in this embodiment, regarding the special figure jackpot probability, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the execution of the game for the specific period.

Incidentally, in steps S2102 and S2103, success/failure determination is executed based on the high-probability mode success/failure table or the low-probability mode success/failure table stored according to the game setting value in step S2410 in the game setting value change process of FIG. However, in steps S2102 and S2103, after reading out the game setting values stored in step S2408 in the game setting value change processing of FIG. may be selected one by one to determine the suitability.

<Step S2104>
When the success or failure determination is performed in step S2102 or S2103, the MPU 41 is the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363 of the main display portion 36 in the special symbol game or the second special Design variation display time is set as a special figure variation pattern (step S2104).

It should be noted that the variation display time (special figure variation pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which is a small profit game, is a special figure variation when the result of the success or failure determination in step S2102 or S2103 is a normal jackpot. Type counter CS1 and normal jackpot variation table (see FIG. 10 (A)) is set based on, if the result of the success or failure determination in step S2102 or S2103 is a probability variation jackpot, special figure variation type counter CS1 and probability variation It is set based on the big hit variation table (see FIG. 10 (B)), and if the result of the success or failure determination in step S2102 or S2103 is out, the special figure variation type counter CS1 and the out variation table (FIG. 10 ( C) is set based on ).

<Step S2105>
In step S2105, MPU41, step S2102 or S2103 is the result of the winning determination in the jackpot lottery lottery result for the special figure game, and the special figure variation pattern command including the special figure variation pattern set in step S2104 is set in the RAM 412, and the process proceeds to step S2106. The special figure variation pattern command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 300) executed by the MPU41. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can execute a special figure game effect on the symbol display section 341 or the like which is a display means based on the special figure variation pattern command.

As described above, when the result of the special figure jackpot lottery is "normal jackpot", the MPU 41 adds "A" to the special figure variation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 5R normal jackpot. Either "A01" ~ "A03" is set in RAM412 as a special figure variation pattern command. In addition, when the result of the special figure jackpot lottery is "5R probability variation jackpot", the MPU 41 adds "B" to the special figure variation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot "B01". ~ "B03" is set to RAM412 as a special figure variation pattern command. Furthermore, when the result of the special figure jackpot lottery is "16R probability variation jackpot", the MPU 41 attaches "C" to the special figure variation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot "C01". ~ "C03" is set in the RAM412 as a special figure variation pattern command. In addition, when the result of the special figure jackpot lottery is "missing", the MPU 41 adds "D01" to "D08" to the special figure variation patterns "01" to "08" to indicate that it is missing. Any one of is set in the RAM 412 as a special figure variation pattern command. In addition, when the result of the special figure jackpot lottery is "missing", the MPU 41 includes information indicating the loss type (front-rear failure reach, reach other than front-rear failure, complete failure) in the special figure variation pattern command.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 41 starts the variable display of the special symbols in the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363, which is the display means in the main display portion 36, and is a special symbol that is a small profit game. A game is started, and the process proceeds to step S2107.

<Step S2107>
In step S2107, the MPU 41 sets on a special figure fluctuation displaying flag indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed (a special figure game is being executed), and ends the special figure fluctuation start processing. The flag during special symbol fluctuation display indicates that the special symbol is being variably displayed (special It is referred to to determine whether the game is in progress).

[Special game count management process]
Here, FIG. 308 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game frequency management process executed in step S1406-1 in the main process of FIG. In the special figure game number management process, based on the execution of the special figure game which is a small profit game, the remaining time saving game number in the time saving game state (a time saving game state and b time saving game state) and the first profit game state control A process for managing the remaining number of special figure games, which is the second auxiliary state control until the b time-saving gaming state is generated, is executed. Hereinafter, the special figure game frequency management process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Steps S3301 and S3302>
As shown in FIG. 308, in the special figure game number management process of the present embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the special figure variation count flag is set to ON (step S3301). The special figure variation count flag is set to ON when the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363 of the main display portion 36 is stopped and displayed in step S1909 in the special figure game control process of FIG. be.

When the special figure fluctuation count flag is set to ON (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the special figure fluctuation count flag to OFF (step S3302), and shifts the process to step S3303. On the other hand, when the special figure variation count flag is set to OFF (step S3301: No), the MPU 41 ends the special figure game number management process.

<Step S3303>
In step S3303, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game whose variation has been stopped is a normal jackpot. When the result of the special figure jackpot lottery for the special figure game whose variation is stopped is a normal jackpot (step S3303: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3304, and the special figure for the special figure game whose variation is stopped If the result of the jackpot lottery is not the normal jackpot (step S3303: No), the process proceeds to step S3311.

<Steps S3304 and S3305>
When the result of the special figure jackpot lottery for the special figure game whose fluctuation has been stopped is a normal jackpot (S3303: Yes), the MPU 41 has a ceiling activation remaining indicating the number of remaining special figure games until the b time saving gaming state is generated. The maximum value of 1000 is set as the number counter value (step S3304). That is, in the present embodiment, the second auxiliary state control is performed after the end of the normal jackpot game, and after the end of the normal jackpot game, the special jackpot game is not executed (shift to the special jackpot game state ), and when 1000 special game is executed as a small profit game, b time saving game state is generated. In addition, the MPU 41 turns on a ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag indicating that the ceiling activation remaining number counter is set (second auxiliary state control) (step S3305), and advances the process to step S3306. Transition.

<Steps S3306 and S3307>
In step S3306, the MPU 41 sets 100, which is the maximum value, as the value of the a time saving remaining number counter indicating the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed in the a time saving game state as the second profit game state control. That is, in the present embodiment, after the end of the normal jackpot game, it is transferred to the a time-saving gaming state that is given as a game profit, and the special figure jackpot game that is a large profit game is not executed (shift to the special jackpot game state When the special game is executed 100 times, the a time saving game state is terminated and the normal game state as the first profit game state control is entered. In addition, the MPU 41 turns on the a time saving remaining number counter set flag indicating that the a time saving remaining number counter is set (step S3307), and shifts the process to step S3308.

<Step S3308>
In step S3308, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the b time saving remaining number counter set flag indicating that the b time saving remaining number counter is set is set to ON. If the b time saving remaining number counter set flag is set to ON (step S3308: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3309, and if the b time saving remaining number counter set flag is set to OFF (step S3308: No), the special figure game count management process is terminated.

<Steps S3309 and S3310>
When the b time saving remaining number counter set flag is set to ON (step S3308: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the remaining b time saving remaining number counter value executable in the b time saving gaming state as the first profit gaming state control. is cleared (step S3309), the b time saving remaining number counter flag indicating that the b time saving remaining number counter is set is set to OFF (step S3310), and the special figure game number management process is ended.

<Step S3311>
If the result of the special figure jackpot lottery for the special figure game whose variation is stopped is not a normal jackpot (S3303: No), the MPU 41 determines that the result of the special figure jackpot lottery for the special figure game whose variation is stopped is a probability variable jackpot (5R probability variable It is determined whether it is a jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot) (step S3311). MPU41, when the result of the special figure jackpot lottery for the special figure game in which the variation is stopped is a probability variation jackpot (S3311: Yes), moves the process to step S3312, the special figure jackpot for the special figure game in which the variation is stopped If the result of the lottery is not a variable probability jackpot (S3311: No), the process proceeds to step S3318 in FIG.

<Step S3312>
If the result of the special figure jackpot lottery for the special game whose variation has been stopped is a probability variation jackpot (S3311: Yes), the MPU 41 is the second auxiliary state control in which the ceiling activation remaining number counter is set. It is determined whether or not the remaining activation count counter set flag is ON (step S3312). This ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag is that the result of the special figure jackpot lottery for the special game whose fluctuation has been stopped is a normal jackpot (step S3303: Yes), the ceiling activation remaining number counter set second When the auxiliary state control (step S3304), it is set to ON in step S3305 of the special figure game number management process.

If the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag is ON (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3313, and if the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag is OFF (step S3312: No), the process to step S3315.

<Steps S3313 and S3314>
When the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag is ON (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 41 clears the ceiling activation remaining number counter indicating the remaining number of special figure games that need to be executed before the b time reduction gaming state occurs At the same time (step S3313), the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag indicating the second auxiliary state control in which the ceiling activation remaining number counter is set is set to OFF (step S3314), and the process proceeds to step S3315. .

<Step S3315>
When the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag is set to OFF (step S3314), or when the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag is OFF (step S3311: No), the MPU 41 determines that the a time saving remaining number counter is set. It is determined whether or not the a time saving remaining number counter set flag indicating that there is is set to ON (step S3315: Yes).

MPU41 shifts a process to step S3316, when a time saving remaining frequency|count counter set flag is set to ON (step S3315: Yes). On the other hand, if a time saving remaining number counter set flag is set to OFF (step S3315: No), the above-described steps S3308 to S3310 are executed, and if b time saving remaining number counter is set, Along with clearing the b time saving remaining number counter, the b time saving remaining number counter set flag is set to OFF, and the special figure fluctuation number management process is ended.

<Steps S3316 and S3317>
When the a time saving remaining number counter set flag is set to ON (step S3315: Yes), the MPU 41 clears the value of the remaining a time saving remaining number counter that can be executed in the a time saving game state (step S3316) , By setting the a time saving remaining number counter flag indicating that the a time saving remaining number counter is set to OFF (step S3317), and executing the processing of steps S3308 to S3310 described above, the b time saving remaining number counter is When it is set, the b time saving remaining number counter is cleared, the b time saving remaining number counter set flag is set to OFF, and the special figure game number management process is ended.

<Step S3318>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game whose variation is stopped is not a probability variation jackpot (step S3311: No), as shown in FIG. 309, the ceiling activation remaining number counter indicating that the ceiling activation remaining number counter is set It is determined whether or not the set flag is set to ON (step S3318).

When the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag is ON (step S3318: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3319, and when the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag is OFF (step S3318: No), the process to step S3325.

<Steps S3319 and S3320>
When the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag is ON (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter (step S3319), and the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter after subtraction becomes 0. (step S3320). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to generate the b time-saving gaming state, which is the first profit gaming state control.

MPU41, when the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3320: Yes), that is, when generating the b time-saving game state, the process proceeds to step S3321. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3325 when the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3320: No), that is, when the b time saving game state is not generated.

<Steps S3321 to S3324>
When the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3320: Yes), that is, when the b time saving game state is generated, the MPU 41 determines the number of remaining special figure games that can be executed in the b time saving game state. 1000, which is the maximum value, is set as the value of the b time saving remaining number counter shown (step S3321). That is, in the present embodiment, 1000 times is set as the maximum number of special figure games that can be executed in the b time-saving gaming state. Then, the MPU 41 turns on the b time saving remaining number counter set flag indicating that the b time saving remaining number counter is set (step S3322).

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the b time saving game state transition flag for shifting the game state to the b time saving game state (step S3323). This b time saving game state transition flag is referenced in step S3726 of game state transition processing in FIG. Then, the MPU 41 sets the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag to OFF (step S3324), and ends the special figure game number management process.

<Step S3325>
If the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag is off (step S3318: No), or if the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3320: Yes), that is, if the b time saving game state is not generated , MPU 41 determines whether or not the a time saving remaining number counter set flag indicating that the a time saving remaining number counter is set is set to ON (step S3325).

If the time saving remaining number counter set flag is on (step S3325: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3326, and if the time saving remaining number counter set flag is off (step S3325: No), the process to step S3330.

<Steps S3326 and S3327>
When the a time saving remaining number counter set flag is ON (step S3325: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the a time saving remaining number counter (step S3326), and the value of the a time saving remaining number counter after subtraction becomes 0. (step S3327). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to end the reduced working hours gaming state and shift to the normal gaming state.

MPU41, if the value of the time-reduction remaining counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3327: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the time-reduction game state and shift to the normal game state, the process proceeds to step S3328. Transition. On the other hand, the MPU 41 ends the special figure game number management process when the value of the a time saving remaining number counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3327: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the a time saving game state.

<Steps S3328 and S3329>
If the value of the time saving remaining number counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3327: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the time saving game state and shift to the normal game state, the MPU 41 changes the game state to the normal game A normal game state transition flag for shifting to the state is set to ON (step S3328). This normal game state transition flag is referenced in step S3731 of the game state transition process in FIG. Then, the MPU 41 sets the a time saving remaining number counter set flag to OFF (step S3329), and ends the special figure game number management process.

<Step S3330>
When the a time saving remaining number counter set flag is off (step S3325: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the b time saving remaining number counter set flag indicating that the b time saving remaining number counter is set is set to on. (step S3330).

If the b time saving remaining number counter set flag is on (step S3330: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3331, and if the b time saving remaining number counter set flag is off (step S3325: No), the End the special figure game number management process.

<Steps S3331 and S3332>
If the b time saving remaining number counter set flag is ON (step S3330: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the b time saving remaining number counter value (step S3331), and the value of the b time saving remaining number counter after subtraction is 0. (step S3332). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to end the b time-saving game state and shift to the normal game state.

MPU41, when the value of b remaining number counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3332: Yes), that is, when ending the b time-saving game state and moving to the normal game state, the process proceeds to step S3333. On the other hand, the MPU 41 ends the special figure game number management process when the value of the b remaining number of times counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3332: No), that is, when not ending the b time saving game state.

<Steps S3333 and S3334>
When the value of the b time saving remaining number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3332: Yes), that is, when ending the b time saving game state and shifting to the normal game state, the MPU 41 shifts the game state to the normal game state. A normal game state transition flag is set to ON (step S3333). This normal game state transition flag is referred to in step S3731 of FIG. 318 or step S3737 of FIG. 319 of the later-described game state transition process to determine whether or not to transition to the normal game state. Then, the MPU 41 sets the b time saving remaining number counter set flag to OFF (step S3334), and ends the special figure game number management process.

In the present embodiment, the ceiling activation remaining number counter is set when the special figure variation (special figure game) in which the result of the jackpot lottery is usually a jackpot ends, but the ceiling activation remaining number counter is the jackpot lottery. It may also be set when the special figure variation (special figure game) whose result is a probability variable jackpot ends. In addition, the ceiling activation remaining number counter may be set at the end of the normal jackpot game (at the time of transition from the jackpot game state to the time saving game state a) instead of the end of the special figure fluctuation (special figure game).

[Special jackpot game control process]
Here, FIGS. 310 to 313 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the special figure jackpot game control process executed in step S1407-1 in the main process of FIG. In the special figure jackpot game control process, a process for controlling the progress of the special figure jackpot game such as opening/closing control of the opening/closing door 319 provided in the variable winning opening 316 is executed. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 310 to 313, the special figure jackpot game control processing will be described.

<Step S3400>
As shown in FIG. 310, in the special figure jackpot game control process of the present embodiment, the MPU 41 first indicates that the special figure jackpot game is being executed as a large profit game. (step S3400). The special figure jackpot playing flag is set to ON in step S3406 of the special figure jackpot game control process when starting the special figure jackpot game, and when ending the special figure jackpot game, the special figure jackpot game control process It is set to off in step S3452.

When the special figure jackpot playing flag is ON (step S3400: Yes), that is, when the special figure jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3411. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3401 when the special figure jackpot playing flag is off (step S3400: No), that is, when the special figure jackpot game is not being executed.

<Step S3401>
When the special figure jackpot playing flag is off (step S3400: No), that is, when the special figure jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines that the special figure fluctuation stop flag indicating that the special symbols are stopped and displayed is on. It is determined whether or not there is (step S3401). The special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON in step S1908 in the special figure game control process of FIG. It is set to off in step S2108 in the special figure fluctuation start process. That is, the MPU 41 can start a special figure jackpot game as a large profit game by determining whether the special figure game as a small profit game started when the special figure jackpot game is not being executed has ended. It is determined whether or not it is the appropriate timing.

MPU41, when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is ON (step S3401: Yes), that is, when the special symbol is stop-displayed so that the special figure jackpot game can be started, the process proceeds to step S3402. On the other hand, when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is off (step S3401: No), that is, when the special figure jackpot game cannot be started because the special symbol is being displayed in fluctuation, the special figure jackpot game control process is executed. finish.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, when the special symbol is displayed in a variable display (during execution of the special symbol game as the small profit game), the special symbol jackpot game as the large profit game is not started (executed), but the special symbol It may be possible to start (execute) the special figure jackpot game during the variable display (during the execution of the special figure game). For example, the special figure jackpot game is started (executed) during the variable display of the first special figure, and conversely, the special figure jackpot game is started (executed) during the variable display of the second special figure. may Specifically, by making it possible to change to the simultaneous fluctuation of the first special figure and the second special figure as described above, the second special figure game is executed during the execution of the special figure jackpot game for the first special figure game It is executed, and the first special symbol game may be executed during the execution of the special symbol jackpot game for the second special symbol game. Furthermore, the special figure jackpot game for the first special figure game and the special figure jackpot game for the second special figure game may be executed at the same time, or the special figure jackpot game for the first special figure game and the second special figure game When one of the special figure jackpot games for the special figure game is executed and the condition for starting the other special figure jackpot game is established, the other special figure jackpot is won after one special figure jackpot game ends. A game may be started.

<Step S3402>
If the special figure fluctuation stop flag is ON (step S3401: Yes), that is, if the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the MPU 41 sets the special figure fluctuation stop flag to OFF (step S3402), and the process proceeds to step S3403. Transition.

<Step S3403>
In step S3403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the special figure jackpot lottery for the special figure game in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed is a special figure jackpot. Whether or not the result of the special figure jackpot lottery for the special figure game in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed is a special figure jackpot is stored in the special figure execution area AE of the special figure reservation storage area 412b set in the RAM 41, for example. It is determined based on the special figure propriety information for the special figure jackpot lottery.

When the result of the special figure jackpot lottery for the special figure game in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed is a special figure jackpot (step S3403: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3404. On the other hand, the MPU 41, when the result of the special figure jackpot lottery for the special game in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed is not a special figure jackpot (step S3403: No), that is, when the result of the special figure jackpot lottery is out, The figure jackpot game control process is ended.

<Step S3404>
If the result of the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed is a special jackpot (step S3403: Yes), the MPU 41 starts the special jackpot game and the type of the special jackpot game (probability variable A special figure jackpot game start command for notifying the jackpot game or normal jackpot game) to the voice lamp control device 5 is set (step S3404), and the process proceeds to step S3405. The special figure jackpot game start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process executed by the MPU 41 (see FIG. 300). Thereby, the sound ramp control device 5 can execute a special figure jackpot game effect corresponding to the special figure jackpot game type based on the special figure jackpot game start command.

<Step S3405>
In step S3405, the MPU 41 sets on a special figure jackpot game start flag indicating starting a special figure jackpot game as a large profit game, and shifts the process to step S3406. The special figure jackpot game start flag is referred to in step S3701 in the game state transition processing of FIG.

<Step S3406>
In step S3406, the MPU 41 sets on the special figure jackpot playing flag indicating that the special figure jackpot game is being executed, and shifts the process to step S3407. In order to determine whether or not the special figure jackpot game is being executed, the special figure jackpot game in-progress flag is step S1503 of the normal figure game control process of FIG. And S1507, step S1802 of the normal figure per game control process of FIG. 304, and step S1901 of the special figure game control process of FIG. 305 are referred.

<Step S3407>
In step S3407, the MPU 41 sets a round number counter indicating the number of remaining round games in the opening/closing execution mode, and shifts the process to step S3408. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the round number counter to "5" when the result of the special jackpot lottery is the 5R variable probability jackpot and the 5R normal jackpot, and when the result of the special jackpot lottery is the 16R probability variable jackpot. , set "16" to the round number counter.

<Step S3408>
In step S3408, the MPU 41 sets an opening start command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of starting the opening of the special figure jackpot game, and the process proceeds to step S3409. The opening start command is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 300) executed by the MPU 41. FIG. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can start the opening effect of the special figure jackpot game in the pattern display section 341 or the like based on the opening start command.

<Step S3409>
In step S3409, the MPU 41 sets an opening time counter indicating the remaining time of the opening, and shifts the process to step S3410. The opening time counter is referenced in step S3413 of FIG. 311 of the special figure jackpot game control process in order to determine whether or not it is time to end the opening.

<Step S3410>
In step S3410, the MPU 41 sets on the flag during opening, which indicates that the opening is being executed, and terminates the special figure jackpot game control process. During opening flag is referred to in step S3411 in the special figure jackpot game control process in order to determine whether it is during opening.

<Step S3411>
When the special figure jackpot game in-progress flag is ON (step S3400: Yes), that is, when the special figure jackpot game is being executed as a large profit game, the MPU 41 displays an opening during opening flag indicating that the opening is being executed. is on (step S3411).

When the opening flag is ON (step S3411: Yes), that is, when the opening is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3412 in FIG. On the other hand, if the opening flag is off (step S3411: No), that is, if the opening is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S3422.

<Steps S3412 and S3413>
If the opening flag is ON (step S3411: Yes), that is, if the opening is being executed, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time counter indicating the remaining time of the opening ( Step S3412), it is determined whether or not the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3413). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to end the opening.

When the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3413: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the opening, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3414. On the other hand, MPU41, when the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3413: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the opening, ends the special figure jackpot game control process.

<Steps S3414 and S3415>
When the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3413: Yes), that is, when it is time to finish the opening, the MPU 41 informs the sound lamp control device 5 that the opening of the special figure jackpot game is finished. An opening end command to be notified is set (step S3414). The opening end command is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process executed by the MPU 41 (see FIG. 300). Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can end the opening effect of the special figure jackpot game executed in the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the opening end command.

Then, the MPU 41 turns off the opening flag indicating that the opening is being performed (step S3415), and shifts the process to step S3416.

<Step S3416>
In step S3416, the MPU 41 issues an opening/closing execution mode start command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the opening/closing execution mode as a game profit in which the round game is executed a plurality of times (5 times or 16 times) is started. set, and the process proceeds to step S3417. The opening/closing execution mode start command is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 300) executed by the MPU 41. FIG. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can start the opening/closing execution mode production of the special figure jackpot game executed in the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the opening/closing execution mode start command.

<Step S3417>
In step S3417, the MPU 41 sets a round game start command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the round game is started, and shifts the process to step S3418. The round game start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process executed by the MPU 41 (see FIG. 300). Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can start the round game production corresponding to each round game of the special figure jackpot game including the number of rounds displayed in the pattern display part 341 or the like based on the round game start command. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the round game effect is executed individually in each round game, but the round game effect executes a series of one effect in the opening and closing execution mode, and the number of rounds of the round game in each round game may be displayed. In this case, the interval production may not be executed between the round games, and the production of displaying the number of rounds of the round game to be executed next time may be executed as the interval production.

<Steps S3418 and S3419>
In step S3418, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the round number counter indicating the number of remaining round games in the open/close execution mode, and further operates the open/close door 319 to open the variable winning opening 316 (step S3419), and the process to step S3420.

<Steps S3420 and S3421>
In step S3420, the MPU 41 sets on a round game in-progress flag indicating that the round game is being executed, and further sets a round game time counter indicating the remaining time of the round game (step S3421). The figure jackpot game control process is ended. The round game time counter determines whether it is time to end the round game (return the open/close door 319 and close the variable winning opening 316) after the lapse of the specified time. is referred to in step S3424.

<Step S3422>
Returning to FIG. 310, if the opening flag is off (step S3411: No), that is, if the opening is not being executed, the MPU 41 sets the round game flag indicating that the round game is being executed to ON. (step S3422). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the round game is being executed.

MPU41 transfers a process to FIG.312 S3423, when a flag is ON during a round game (step S3422: Yes), ie, when a round game is in execution. On the other hand, when the round playing flag is off (step S3422: No), that is, when the round game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3436.

<Steps S3423 and S3424>
When the round game in progress flag is ON (step S3422: Yes), that is, when the round game is being executed, as shown in FIG. Subtract 1. And MPU41 judges whether the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3424). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to end the round game (close the variable winning opening by returning the opening/closing door 319) after the lapse of the specified time.

MPU41, when the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3424: Yes), that is, at the timing of ending the round game (closing the variable winning opening by returning the opening and closing door 319) with the passage of the specified time If so, the process proceeds to step S3428. On the other hand, MPU41, if the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3424: No), that is, the timing to end the round game (close the variable winning opening by returning the opening and closing door 319) when the specified time has elapsed Otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3425.

<Step S3425>
If the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3424: No), that is, if it is not the time to end the round game due to the passage of the specified time (close the variable winning opening by returning the open/close door 319), the MPU 41 , determines whether or not a game ball has entered the variable winning hole 316 (step S3425). Whether or not a game ball has entered the variable winning hole 316 is determined when the game ball has entered the ball sensor 316a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. The determination is made based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412 immediately.

MPU 41, if there is a game ball entering the variable winning opening 316 (step S3425: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3426, if there is no game ball entering the variable winning opening 316 (step S3425: No), the special figure jackpot game control process is terminated.

<Steps S3426 and S3427>
When there is a game ball entering the variable winning hole 316 (step S3425: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the value of the entering ball number counter indicating the number of entering balls into the variable winning hole 316 in the round game. 1 is added (step S3426). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the number-of-entered-balls counter after the addition has reached 10 (step S3427), that is, ends the round game by entering the upper limit number of game balls into the variable winning hole 316 (opening/closing door It is determined whether or not it is time to close the variable winning opening by returning to step 319.

The MPU 41 ends the round game when the value of the number-of-entered-balls counter after addition reaches 10 (step S3427: Yes), that is, by entering the upper limit number of game balls into the variable winning hole 316 (opening/closing door 319 If it is time to close the variable winning opening by the return of , the process proceeds to step S3428. On the other hand, the MPU 41 ends the round game (opens/closes If it is not the timing to close the variable winning opening by returning the door 319, the special figure jackpot game control process is terminated.

<Step S3428>
When the value of the round game time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3424: Yes), or when the value of the ball-entering counter reaches 10 (step S3427: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the round game , the MPU 41 closes the variable winning opening by restoring the opening/closing door 319 (step S3428), and shifts the processing to step S3429. That is, the MPU 41 closes the variable winning opening 316 to end the round game when it is time to end the round game due to the passage of the specified time or the entry of the upper limit number of game balls into the variable winning opening 316. .

<Steps S3429 to S3431>
In step S3429, the MPU 41 sets a round game end command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the round game ends. The round game end command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process executed by the MPU 41 (see FIG. 300). Thereby, in the sound ramp control device 5, based on the round game end command, it is possible to end the round game effect of the special figure jackpot game executed in the symbol display section 341 or the like.

Then, the MPU 41 clears a ball entry counter indicating the number of game balls entering the variable winning hole 316 in the round game (step S3430), and indicates that the round game is being executed. The flag is set to off (step S3431), and the process proceeds to step S3432.

<Step S3432>
In step S3432, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the round number counter indicating the number of remaining round games in the opening/closing execution mode is 0 (step S3432), that is, the timing for ending the opening/closing execution mode (unexecuted round game there is).

When the round number counter is 0 (step S3432: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3441. On the other hand, when the round number counter is not 0 (step S3432: No), that is, when there is an unexecuted round game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3433.

<Step S3433>
If the round number counter is not 0 (step S3432: No), that is, if there is an unexecuted round game, the MPU 41 sets an interval start command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 to start the interval between round games. (step S3433), and the process proceeds to step S3434. The interval start command is transmitted to the audio lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 300) executed by the MPU 41. FIG. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can start the interval performance of the special figure jackpot game in the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the interval start command.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the interval production is executed in the interval between round games, but the interval production may be omitted, and the round game production for the previously executed round game may be continuously executed in the interval. Also, a round game effect may be executed for the round game to be executed next.

<Steps S3434 and S3435>
In step S3434, the MPU 41 sets on an interval flag indicating that the interval between round games is being executed. And MPU41 sets the interval time counter which shows the remaining time of an interval (step S3435), and complete|finishes the said special figure jackpot game control process. The interval time counter is referenced in step S3438 of FIG. 313 in the special figure jackpot game control process in order to determine whether it is time to end the interval (start the round game).

<Step S3436>
Returning to FIG. 310, when the round playing flag is off (step S3422: No), that is, when the round game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines that the interval flag indicating that the interval between round games is being executed is It is determined whether or not it is on (step S3436). During the interval flag is set to ON in step S3434 of FIG. 312 in the special figure jackpot game control process when starting the interval, and when ending the interval step of FIG. 313 in the special figure jackpot game control process It is set to off at S3440.

When the interval flag is ON (step S3436: Yes), that is, when the interval between rounds is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3437 in FIG. On the other hand, when the interval flag is off (step S3436: No), that is, when the interval between rounds is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3445.

<Steps S3437 and S3438>
If the interval flag is ON (step S3436: Yes), that is, if the interval between rounds is being executed, the MPU 41 counts the remaining time of the interval by 1 from the value of the interval time counter, as shown in FIG. Subtract (step S3437). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3438), that is, whether or not it is time to end the interval (start the round game).

MPU41, when the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3438: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the interval and start the round game, the process proceeds to step S3439. On the other hand, MPU41, when the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3438: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the interval (start the round game), ends the special figure jackpot game control process.

<Steps S3439 and S3440>
When the value of the interval time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3438: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the interval and start the round game, the MPU 41 notifies the sound lamp control device 5 that the interval ends. Sets the interval end command to notify to. The interval end command is transmitted to the audio lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 310) executed by the MPU 41. FIG. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can terminate the interval effect of the big winning game executed in the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the interval end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets an interval flag indicating that the interval between round games is being executed to OFF (step S3440), and shifts the processing to step S3417. By moving the process to step S3417 in the above-described FIG. 311, the process of steps S3417 to S3421 relating to the start of the round game is executed, and the special figure jackpot game control process is terminated.

<Step S3441>
Returning to FIG. 312, when the round number counter is 0 (step S3432: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 41 displays a voice lamp to end the opening/closing execution mode of the special figure jackpot game. An opening/closing execution mode end command to be notified to the control device 5 is set (step S3441), and the process proceeds to step S3442. The opening/closing execution mode end command is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 300) executed by the MPU 41. FIG. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can terminate the round game effect (opening/closing execution mode effect) of the special figure jackpot game when executed in the symbol display unit 341 or the like based on the opening/closing execution mode end command.

<Step S3442>
In step S3442, the MPU 41 sets an ending start command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of starting the ending of the special figure jackpot game, and the process proceeds to step S3443. The ending start command is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 300) executed by the MPU 41. FIG. Thereby, in the sound lamp control device 5, based on the ending start command, the ending effect of the special figure jackpot game can be started in the symbol display section 341 or the like.

<Steps S3443 and S3444>
In step S3443, the MPU 41 turns on an ending flag indicating that the ending is being executed. And MPU41 sets the ending time counter which shows the remaining time of ending (step S3444), and complete|finishes the said special figure jackpot game control process. The ending time counter is referenced in step S3447 in FIG. 313 of the special figure jackpot game control process in order to determine whether it is the timing to end the ending (special figure jackpot game).

<Step S3445>
Returning to FIG. 310, if the during-interval flag is off (step S3436: No), that is, if the interval between rounds is not being executed, whether or not the during-ending flag indicating that the ending is being executed is on. is determined (step S3445).

When the ending flag is ON (step S3445: Yes), that is, when the ending is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3446 in FIG. On the other hand, when the ending flag is off (step S3445: No), that is, when the ending is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3450.

<Steps S3446 and S3447>
If the ending flag is ON (step S3445: Yes), that is, if the ending is being executed, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the ending time counter indicating the remaining time of the ending ( step S3446). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3447). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to end the ending (special figure jackpot game).

MPU41, when the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3447: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the ending (special figure jackpot game), the process proceeds to step S3448. On the other hand, MPU41, when the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3447: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the ending (special figure jackpot game), ends the special figure jackpot game control process.

<Steps S3448 and S3449>
If the value of the ending time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3447: Yes), that is, if it is time to end the ending (special figure jackpot game), the MPU 41 instructs to finish the ending of the special figure jackpot game. An ending end command to be notified to the sound lamp control device 5 is set. The ending ending command is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 300) executed by the MPU 41. FIG. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can terminate the ending effect of the special figure jackpot game executed in the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the ending ending command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the ending flag indicating that the ending is being executed to OFF (step S3449), and terminates the special figure jackpot game control process.

<Step S3450>
Returning to FIG. 310, when the ending flag is off (step S3445: No), that is, during the opening, during the round game, during the interval and during the ending, the MPU 41 terminates the special figure jackpot game. is set to the special figure jackpot game end command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 (step S3450), and the process proceeds to step S3451. The special figure jackpot game end command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process executed by the MPU 41 (see FIG. 300). Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can terminate the special figure jackpot game effect executed in the symbol display unit 341 or the like based on the special figure jackpot game end command.

<Steps S3451 and S3452>
In step S3451, a special figure jackpot game end flag indicating that the special figure jackpot game ends is set to ON. The special figure jackpot game end flag is a step of the game state transition processing in FIG. It is referred to in S3717.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the special figure jackpot playing flag indicating that the special figure jackpot game is being executed to OFF (step S3452), and ends the special figure jackpot game control process.

[Tokuden start game control process]
Here, FIG. 314 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special electric starting game control process executed in step S1407-2 in the main process of FIG. In the special electric starting game control process of the present embodiment, the special electric big winning device 38, which is the second ball entering means, is operated based on the entry of the game ball into the special electric starting port 37, which is the first ball entering means. A process for controlling the progress of the special electric starting game as a profit game is executed. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 314, the special electric starting game control processing of this embodiment will be described.

<Step S3501>
As shown in FIG. 314, in the special electric starting game control process of the present embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not a game ball has entered the special electric starting opening 37 (step S3501). Whether or not the game ball has entered the special electric start port 37 is determined when the game ball has entered the ball sensor 37a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. The determination is made based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412 immediately.

When the game ball enters the special electric start port 37 (step S3501: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3502, and when the game ball does not enter the special electric start port 37 (step S3501: No). , the process proceeds to step S3512.

<Step S3502>
When the game ball enters the special electric start port 37 (step S3501: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the special figure jackpot game in-progress flag indicating that the special figure jackpot game, which is a large profit game, is being executed. (step S3502). The special figure jackpot playing flag is set to ON at step S3406 when the special figure jackpot game is started in the special figure jackpot game control process of FIG. 310, and is turned off at step S3452 when the special figure jackpot game ends. is set to

The MPU 41 ends the special electric starting game when the special figure jackpot game flag is ON (step S3502: Yes), that is, when the special figure jackpot game is being executed. That is, in the present embodiment, the special electric starting game is not started during execution of the special figure jackpot game. In this way, by preventing the special electric start game as a small profit game from being started while the special figure jackpot game as a large profit game is being executed, the start of the V prize jackpot game as a small profit game is prevented. Thus, it is possible to prevent the profit obtained by the large-profit game from being hindered by the execution of the small-profit game.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the result of the special figure jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot, the remaining number of special figure games required to generate the b time-saving gaming state (the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter) is the maximum. A value of 1000 is set, and a time-saving gaming state is generated after the normal jackpot game ends. That is, after the end of the special figure jackpot game, the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is set to 1000 which is the maximum value.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is set not only at the time of the normal jackpot, but also when the game ball enters the special electric start opening 37, and the game ball enters the special electric V winning opening 383 in the special electric starting game. is set to the maximum value of 1000 after the V prize jackpot game executed based on the entry of the ball. In other words, the special electric starting game and the V winning jackpot game are executed in order to set the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter to 1000 which is the maximum value.

Then, the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is set to the maximum value of 1000. In the situation where it is scheduled to occur, that is, when the special figure jackpot game is being executed, the ceiling It is meaningless to execute a special electric starting game or a V prize jackpot game for setting the value of the remaining activation counter to the maximum value of 1000. On the contrary, when the special electric starting game or the special electric jackpot game is started when the special electric starting game is being executed, the processing for executing the electric electric starting game, the processing for executing the V winning jackpot game, the ceiling activation remaining number counter value of 1000, which is the maximum value, must be executed in vain.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, during the execution of the special figure jackpot game scheduled to occur a time-saving gaming state in which the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is set to 1000 which is the maximum value , The special electric start game does not start. Therefore, the process of executing the special electric starting game, the process of executing the V prize jackpot game, and the process of setting the value of the ceiling activation remaining counter to the maximum value of 1000 are prevented from being wastefully executed, and the game progresses. complication of the processing required for

On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3503 when the special figure jackpot playing flag is off (step S3502: No), that is, when the special figure jackpot game is not being executed.

<Step S3503>
If the special figure jackpot game in-progress flag is off (step S3502: No), that is, if the special figure jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 displays V indicating that the V winning jackpot game, which is a small profit game, is being executed. It is determined whether or not the winning jackpot playing flag is set to ON (step S3503). The V winning big winning game in-progress flag is set to ON in step S3606 when the V winning big winning game is started in the V winning big winning game control process of FIG. is set to off.

The MPU 41 ends the special electric starting game when the V winning big winning game flag is ON (step S3503: Yes), that is, when the V winning big winning game is being executed. That is, in the present embodiment, the special electric starting game is not started during execution of the V prize jackpot game. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3504 when the V winning big winning game flag is off (step S3503: No), that is, when the V winning big winning game is not being executed.

<Step S3504>
If the V winning jackpot game in-progress flag is off (step S3503: No), that is, if the V winning jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 displays a special electric starting game indicating that a special electric starting game, which is a small profit game, is being executed. It is determined whether or not the in-game flag is set to ON (step S3504). The special electric starting game in progress flag is set to ON in step S3507 when the special electric starting game is started in the special electric starting game control process described later, and is set to OFF in step S3516 when the special electric starting game ends. .

The MPU 41 ends the special electric starting game when the special electric starting game in-progress flag is ON (step S3504: Yes), that is, when the special electric starting game is being executed. That is, in this embodiment, the special electric starting game is not started while the special electric starting game is being executed. On the other hand, when the special electric starting game flag is off (step S3504: No), that is, when the special electric starting game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3505.

<Step S3505>
When the special electric starting game in-progress flag is off (step S3504: No), that is, when the special electric starting game is not being executed, the MPU 41 opens and closes the special electric opening/closing door which is the opening/closing means of the special electric prize winning device 38 which is the second ball entering means. By actuating 382, the special electric grand prize-winning port 381 is switched from the closed state to the open state (step S3505). As a result, a game ball can be entered into the special electric prize winning opening 381.例文帳に追加In addition, the MPU 41 operates the V winning opening/closing door 385, which is the opening/closing means of the special electric grand prize winning device 38, which is the second ball winning means, so that the special electric V winning opening 383, which is the specific ball winning area, changes from the closed state to the open state. (step S3506). As a result, a game ball can be entered into the special electric V winning opening 383, and a V winning jackpot game, which is a small profit game, can be started.

Further, the MPU 41 sets on a special electric starting game in-progress flag indicating that the special electric starting game is being executed (step S3507), and shifts the process to step S3508. In order to determine whether or not the special electric starting game is being executed, the special electric starting game flag is used in step S3504 or S3515 of the special electric starting game control process, and step S3802 of the V winning jackpot game control process in FIG. 315 described later. referenced in

Thus, the special electric starting game is not started during execution of the special electric starting game, the V winning jackpot game, or the special electric starting game, and the V winning jackpot game is also the special drawing jackpot game, the V winning jackpot game, or the special electric starting game. It does not start while the game is running. On the other hand, the special electric starting game and the V winning jackpot game can be started during execution of the special figure game. As a result, the special electric starting game and the V winning jackpot game can be started without waiting for the end of the special game, so if you want to reset the number of times the special game is executed until the b time saving game state occurs, It can be reset instantly. For example, if there is a reservation of the right to execute a special game, or if a reach effect is executed, it may take a lot of time to finish all the special games, but in such a case However, it is possible to immediately reset the number of executions of the special figure game until the b time saving game state occurs. In addition, by being able to immediately reset the number of executions of the special figure game until the b time saving game state occurs, if it is reset during the execution of the special figure game, the special figure game is also executed after the reset can be counted as the number of times, and if there is a reservation of the right to execute the special game, the number of special games related to the reservation executed after the reset is also the special game executed after the reset can be counted as the number of Therefore, for example, in a state where the b time saving game state does not occur due to the occurrence of the b time saving game state, the number of executions of the special figure game until the b time saving game state is generated by the player is reset and the b time saving game state is newly created. can be generated, the right to execute the special game generated by the player can be effectively counted as the number of special games required to generate the b time-saving gaming state. can.

<Step S3508>
In step S3508, the MPU 41 sets the high-frequency support mode (probability variable gaming state, a short gaming state Or b time-saving gaming state) is determined (step S3508). Whether or not the high-frequency support is determined by whether or not any of the probability variable gaming state flag, the time saving game state flag a and the time saving game state flag b is set to ON.

MPU41, if the high-frequency support mode (step S3508: Yes), that is, if the probability variable gaming state, a reduced working hours gaming state or b reduced working hours gaming state, the process proceeds to step S3509, if not high-frequency support mode ( Step S3508: No), the process proceeds to step S3509.

<Step S3509>
In the case of the high frequency support mode (step S3508: Yes), that is, in the variable probability gaming state, the reduced working hours gaming state or the reduced working hours gaming state b, the MPU 41 restores the special electric opening/closing door 382 and opens the special electric big winning opening 381. A special electric operation time counter indicating the remaining time until switching from the state to the closed state is set (step S3509), and the special electric starting game control process ends. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets a value corresponding to the time set based on the high-frequency support mode special electric start type distribution table (see FIG. 299(C)) as the value of the special electric operation time counter, that is, 0.1 Set a value corresponding to seconds.

In addition, the special electric operation time counter is referred to in step S3514 of the special electric starting game control process in order to determine whether or not it is time to close the special electric prize winning opening 381 .

<Step S3510>
When it is not high frequency support mode (step S3508: No), MPU41 judges whether it is low frequency support mode (normal game state) (step S3510). That is, the MPU 41 performs the process when the electric accessory 315b, which is the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means, is in the normal game state which is the low frequency support mode as the first profit game state control which is the second auxiliary state control. The process moves to step S1703.

If the MPU 41 is in the low frequency support mode (step S3510: Yes), that is, if it is in the normal game state, the process proceeds to step S3511, and if it is not in the low frequency support mode (step S3510: No), the special electric start game End the control process.

<Step S3511>
In the case of the low-frequency support mode (step S3510: Yes), that is, in the normal gaming state, the MPU 41 restores the special electric opening/closing door 382 and switches the special electric prize winning opening 381 from the open state to the closed state. (step S3511), and ends the special electric starting game control process. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the value of the special electric operation time counter to a value corresponding to the time set based on the low-frequency support mode special electric start type distribution table (see FIG. 299(B)), that is, 1.2 Set a value corresponding to seconds.

In addition, the special electric operation time counter is referred to in step S3514 of the special electric starting game control process in order to determine whether or not it is time to close the special electric prize winning opening 381 .

<Step S3512>
When the game ball has not entered the special electric starting port 37 (step S3501: No), the MPU 41 checks whether or not the special electric starting playing flag indicating that the special electric starting game is being executed is set to ON. It judges (step S3512). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special electric starting game is being executed. In addition, the special electric starting game flag is set to ON in step S3507 when the special electric starting game is started in the special electric starting game control process, and is set to OFF in step S3516 when the special electric starting game is ended. be.

When the special electric starting game flag is set to ON (step S3512: Yes), ie, when the special electric starting game is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3513. On the other hand, the MPU 41 ends the special electric starting game control process when the special electric starting game flag is set to OFF (step S3512: No), that is, when the special electric starting game is not being executed.

<Steps S3513 and S3514>
When the special electric starting game flag is set to ON (step S3512: Yes), that is, when the special electric starting game is being executed, the MPU 41 restores the special electric opening/closing door 382 to open the special electric prize winning opening 381. 1 is subtracted from the value of the special electric operation time counter indicating the remaining time until switching to the closed state (step S3513), and it is determined whether the value of the special electric operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3514). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to restore the special electric opening/closing door 382 and switch the special electric prize winning opening 381 from the open state to the closed state.

If the value of the special electric operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3514: Yes), that is, if it is time to restore the special electric opening/closing door 382 and switch the special electric prize winning opening 381 from the open state to the closed state. , the process proceeds to step S3519. On the other hand, if the value of the special electric operation time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S3514: No), that is, if it is not the time to restore the special electric open/close door 382 and switch from the open state to the closed state of the special electric prize winning opening 381, the process is executed. The process moves to step S3515.

<Step S3515>
If the value of the special electric operation time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3514: No), that is, if it is not the time to return the special electric opening/closing door 382 and switch the special electric large prize opening 381 from the open state to the closed state, the special electric V prize opening It is determined whether or not the V winning hole flag indicating that the game ball has entered 383 is set to ON (step S3515). When a game ball enters the special electric V winning opening 383, the V winning opening flag is set to ON in step S3517 of the special electric starting game control process.

When the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered the special electric V winning opening 383 is set to ON (step S3515: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the special electric starting game control process, and the V winning flag If it is set to OFF (step S3515: No), the process proceeds to step S3516.

<Step S3516>
When the V winning flag is set to OFF (step S3515: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the special electric V winning opening 383 (step S3516). Whether or not the game ball has entered the special electric V winning opening 383 is determined by the sensor detection processing of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. A determination is made based on winning detection information stored in the RAM 412 when a ball is detected.

If the game ball has entered the special electric V winning opening 383 (step S3516: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3517, and if the gaming ball has not entered the special electric V winning opening 383 (step S3516: No), end the special electric start game control process.

<Steps S3517 and S3518>
When the game ball enters the special electric V winning opening 383 (step S3516: Yes), the MPU 41 turns on the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered the special electric V winning opening 383 (step S3517 ), sets a V winning command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the game ball has entered the special electric V winning opening 383 (step S3518), and ends the special electric starting game control process.

The V winning command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 300) executed by the MPU 41. FIG. On the other hand, in the voice lamp control device 5, based on the V winning command, the symbol display unit 341 or the like informs the player that the game ball has entered the special electric V winning opening 383 in the special figure start game. Execute the specified production.

<Steps S3519 to S3521>
If the value of the special electric operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3514: Yes), that is, if it is time to restore the special electric opening/closing door 382 and switch the special electric prize winning opening 381 from the open state to the closed state, the MPU 41 , the special electric opening/closing door 382 is restored to switch the special electric prize winning opening 381 from the open state to the closed state (step S3519), and the V winning opening opening/closing door 385 is restored to change the V winning opening 383 from the open state to the closed state. Switch (step S3520). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets off the special electric starting game in-progress flag indicating that the special electric starting game is being executed (step S3521), and terminates the special electric starting game control process.

[V Winning Jackpot Game Control Processing]
Here, FIG. 315 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the V winning jackpot game control process executed in step S1407-3 in the main process of FIG. In the V winning jackpot game control process of the present embodiment, a process for controlling the progress of the V winning jackpot game as a small profit game in which the special electric big winning device 38, which is the second ball winning means, is operated is executed. Hereinafter, the V winning jackpot game control processing of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S3601>
As shown in FIG. 315, in the V winning big winning game control process of this embodiment, first, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the V winning big winning playing flag indicating that the V winning big winning game is being executed is set to ON. is determined (step S3601). The V winning big winning game in-progress flag is set to ON in step S3606 of the V winning big winning game control process when the V winning big winning game is started, and the V winning big winning game control is set when the V winning big winning game ends. It is set to off in step S3620 of the process.

When the V winning big win playing flag is set to ON (step S3601: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3611, and when the V winning big win playing flag is set to OFF (step S3601: No), the process moves to step S3602.

<Step S3602>
When the V winning jackpot playing flag is set to OFF (step S3601: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the special electric starting game flag indicating that the special electric starting game is being executed as a small profit game to ON. (step S3602). The special electric starting game flag is set to ON in step S3507 of the special electric starting game control process in FIG. 314 when the special electric starting game is started, and when the special electric starting game is ended, the special electric starting game in FIG. It is set to off in step S3521 of the control processing.

When the special electric starting game flag is set to ON (step S3602: Yes), that is, when the special electric starting game is being executed, the MPU 41 does not start the V winning jackpot game, and starts the V winning jackpot. End the game control process. On the other hand, when the special electric starting game flag is set to OFF (step S3602: No), ie, when the special electric starting game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3603.

<Step S3603>
When the special electric starting game flag is set to OFF (step S3602: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the special electric V winning opening 383 of the special electric big winning device 38 which is the second ball winning means in the special electric starting game as a small profit game. It is determined whether or not the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered is set to ON (step S3603). The V winning flag is set to ON in step S3517 of the special electric starting game control process in FIG. 314 when a game ball enters the special electric V winning opening 383 in the special electric starting game.

When the V winning flag is set to ON (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3604, and when the V winning flag is set to OFF (step S3603: No), the V winning flag is set. The jackpot game control process is terminated.

<Steps S3604 to S3607>
When the V winning flag is set to ON (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 41 sets to ON the V winning big winning game start flag indicating that the V winning big winning game is started (step S3604).

It should be noted that the V winning big winning game start flag is referred to in order to determine whether or not to generate the V winning big winning game state in step S3741 of the game state transition processing in FIG.

Then, the MPU 41 sets 2 as the value of the round number counter indicating the number of remaining round games to be executed in the V winning jackpot game (step S3605). That is, in the V winning jackpot game of this embodiment, two round games are executed as described above (see FIG. 299(D)).

In addition, the MPU 41 sets the V winning big winning game flag indicating that the V winning big winning game is being executed to ON (step S3606), and the game ball enters the special electric V winning opening 383 in the special electric starting game. The V winning flag indicating that is set to OFF (step S3607), and the process proceeds to step S3608.

<Steps S3608 to S3610>
In step S3608, the MPU 41 operates the special electric opening/closing door 382 of the special electric prize winning device 38, which is the second ball entry means, to switch the special electric prize winning port 381 from the closed state to the open state, thereby opening the special electric prize winning port 381. (Step S3608), and 1 is subtracted from the value of the round number counter indicating the number of remaining round games to be executed in the V winning jackpot game (Step S3609). Then, the MPU 41 sets a special electric prize winning opening opening time counter indicating the remaining opening time of the special electric prize winning opening 381 (step S3610), and terminates the V winning jackpot game control process. In addition, in this embodiment, a value corresponding to 30 seconds is set as the value of the Tokudendai prize winning opening time counter (see FIG. 299(D)).

<Steps S3611 and S3612>
If the V-winning jackpot playing flag is set to ON (step S3601: Yes), that is, if the V-winning jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 sends a special electric signal indicating the remaining opening time of the special electric prize winning opening 381. 1 is subtracted from the value of the winning opening opening time counter (step S3611), and it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric big winning opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3612). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the special electric prize winning opening 381 has passed.

When the value of the special electric prize winning opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3612: Yes), that is, when the maximum opening time of the special electric prize winning opening 381 has passed, the process proceeds to step S3618. do. On the other hand, if the value of the special electric prize winning opening opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3612: No), that is, if the maximum opening time of the special electric prize winning opening 381 has not elapsed, the MPU 41 advances the process to step S3613. Transition.

<Step S3613>
If the value of the special electric grand prize opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3612: No), that is, if the maximum opening time of the special electric grand prize opening 381 has not passed, the MPU 41 is the second ball entry means. It is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the special electric normal prize winning opening 384 of the special electric prize winning device 38 (step S3613). Whether or not a game ball has entered the special electric normal winning prize opening 384 is detected by a ball sensor 384a (Fig. 294 (A)) is determined based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412 when the entry of the game ball is detected.

In addition, in the V winning jackpot game, unlike the special electric starting game, the special electric V winning opening 383 of the special electric winning device 38 is not opened, and no game ball enters the special electric V winning opening 383 . Therefore, in the V winning jackpot game control process, the process of confirming whether the game ball has entered the special electric V winning opening 383 is not executed.

When the game ball enters the special electric normal winning prize opening 384 (step S3613: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3614, and when the game ball does not enter the special electric normal winning prize opening 384 (step S3613: No), the V winning jackpot game control process is terminated.

<Steps S3614 and S3615>
When a game ball enters the special electric normal winning prize opening 384 (step S3613: Yes), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the value of the entering ball number counter indicating the number of game balls entering the special electric normal winning prize opening 384 (step S3614). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the number-of-entered-balls counter after addition is 10 (step S3615). That is, it is determined whether or not the maximum number of game balls entered into the special electric normal winning opening 384 set for the round game of the V winning jackpot game has entered the special electric normal winning opening 384 .

When the value of the number-of-entering-balls counter after the addition is 10 (step S3614: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the maximum number of entering balls to the special electric normal winning opening 384 for the round game of the V-winning jackpot game. When the ball enters the special electric normal winning hole 384, the process proceeds to step S3616. On the other hand, if the value of the number-of-entered-balls counter after addition is not 10 (step S3615: No), the V winning jackpot game control process is terminated.

<Steps S3616 and S3617>
If the value of the number-of-entered-balls counter after the addition is 10 (step S3614: Yes), the game balls with the maximum number of entering balls to the special electric normal winning opening 384 set for the round game of the V winning jackpot game When the ball enters the normal winning gate 384, the MPU 41 clears the value of the number of balls entered (step S3616), and clears the special electric winning gate opening time counter indicating the remaining opening time of the special electric winning gate 381. (Step S3617), the process proceeds to step S3618.

<Step S3618>
In step S3618, the MPU 41 restores the special electric opening/closing door 382 of the special electric prize winning device 38, which is the second ball entry means, and switches the special electric prize winning port 381 from the open state to the closed state to close the special electric prize winning port 381. (Step S3618), the process proceeds to step S3619. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the value of the special electric prize winning opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (when the maximum opening time of the special electric prize winning opening 381 has passed) (step S3612: Yes), or the special electric normal winning When the value of the ball entry counter is 10 due to the entry of game balls into the opening 384 (the maximum number of game balls entered into the special electric normal winning opening 384 set for the round game of the V winning jackpot game is When the ball enters the special electric normal winning opening 384 (step S3614: Yes), the special electric big winning opening 381 is closed, and the round game of the V winning jackpot game ends.

<Step S3619>
In step S3619, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the round number counter indicating the number of remaining round games to be executed in the V winning jackpot game is 0, that is, whether or not it is time to end the V winning jackpot game. to decide.

When the value of the round number counter indicating the number of remaining round games to be executed in the V winning jackpot game is 0 (step S3619: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the V winning jackpot game, the MPU 41 executes the process. The process moves to step S3620.

On the other hand, when the value of the round number counter indicating the number of remaining round games to be executed in the V winning jackpot game is not 0 (step S3619: No), that is, when it is not the time to end the V winning jackpot game, the MPU 41 executes the process. It moves to step S3608 and executes the next round game.

<Steps S3620 and S3621>
When the value of the round number counter indicating the number of remaining round games to be executed in the V winning jackpot game is 0 (step S3619: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the V winning jackpot game, the MPU 41 selects the V winning jackpot game. The V winning big winning game flag indicating that the big winning game is being executed is set to OFF (step S3620), and the V winning big winning game end flag indicating that the V winning big winning game is over is set to ON (step S3620). S3621), the V winning jackpot game control process ends.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, FIGS. 316 to 320 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in step S1408 of the main process of FIG. 300. FIG. In the game state transition process of the present embodiment, a process for controlling the transition of various game states (normal game state, time saving game state, probability variable game state, probability variable jackpot game state and normal jackpot game state) is executed. The game state transition processing of this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 316 to 320. FIG.

<Step S3701>
As shown in FIG. 316, in the game state transition processing of the present embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the special figure jackpot game start flag indicating that the special figure jackpot game is started is on (step S3701 ). The special figure jackpot game start flag is set to ON in step S3405 when the special figure jackpot game is started in the special figure jackpot game control process of FIG. set to off.

When the special figure jackpot game start flag is ON (step S3701: Yes), that is, when it is time to start the special figure jackpot game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3702. On the other hand, when the special figure jackpot game start flag is off (step S3701: No), that is, when it is not the time to start the special figure jackpot game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3716.

<Steps S3702 and S3703>
When the special figure jackpot game start flag is ON (step S3701: Yes), that is, when the special figure jackpot game is started, the MPU 41 sets the special figure jackpot game state flag indicating the special figure game state to ON. (step S3702). The special figure jackpot game state flag is referred to in order to determine whether or not it is the special figure jackpot game state in step S3716 of FIG. 316 of the game state transition process.

In addition, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 1 output start flag to start outputting the jackpot signal 1 (see FIG. 295(A)) as a special signal from the first terminal of the external output terminal board 101 (step S3703). . The jackpot signal 1 output start flag is referred to for determining whether or not to start outputting the jackpot signal 1 in step S3801 of the signal output processing in FIG.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the special figure jackpot game start flag to OFF (step S3704), and shifts the process to step S3705.

<Step S3705>
In step S3705, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special figure jackpot game to be started is a probability variable jackpot game. Whether or not the special figure jackpot game to be started is a probability variable jackpot game is based on the special figure propriety information stored in the special figure execution area AE (see FIG. 8) of the special figure reservation storage area 412b set in the RAM 412. be judged.

MPU41 moves a process to step S3706, when starting a probability variable jackpot game (step S3705: Yes). On the other hand, if the probability variable jackpot game is not started (step S3705: No), that is, if the normal jackpot game is started, the process proceeds to step S3707.

<Step S3706>
When the probability variation jackpot game is started (step S3705: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the probability variation game state transition flag to be shifted to the probability variation jackpot game state after the completion of the probability variation jackpot game (step S3706), and the process is step S3707. transition to Probability variation gaming state transition flag, in order to determine whether to shift the game state to any of the probability variation gaming state and the normal gaming state when the special figure jackpot game ends, the game state transition processing of FIG. It is referred to in step S3721.

<Steps S3707 and S3708>
In step S3707, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state is on. The normal game state flag is set to ON when shifting from another game state to the normal game state (step S3732 in FIG. 318 of the game state transition process or step S3738 in FIG. 319), and from the normal game state to another game It is set to OFF when transitioning to a state (step S3708 in FIG. 316 or step S3728 in FIG. 317 of the game state transition process).

When the normal game state flag is ON (step S3707: Yes), that is, when the game is in the normal game state, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag to OFF (step S3708), and shifts the process to step S3711. On the other hand, MPU41, if the normal game state flag is off (step S3707: No), ie high-frequency support mode that is not normal game state (probability variable game state, a reduced working hours gaming state or b reduced working hours gaming state), processing to step S3709.

<Steps S3709 and S3710>
If the normal gaming state flag is off (step S3707: No), that is, not the normal gaming state of the high frequency support mode that is the second auxiliary state control, but the high frequency support mode that is the first profit gaming state control (probability variable game state, a time saving game state or b time saving game state), the MPU 41 determines whether the b time saving game state flag indicating the b time saving game state is on (step S3709). The b time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON when shifting from the normal gaming state to the b time-saving gaming state (step S3727 in FIG. 317 of the game state transition process), and from the b time-saving gaming state to the normal game state or special figure jackpot It is set to OFF when shifting to the game state (step S3710 in FIG. 316 or step S3739 in FIG. 319 of the game state transition process).

MPU41, when the b time-reduction gaming state flag is ON (step S3709: Yes), that is, when it is in the b time-reduction gaming state, sets the b time-reduction gaming state flag to OFF (step S3710), and shifts the processing to step S3711. do. On the other hand, when the b time saving gaming state flag is off (step S3709: No), that is, when it is not in the b time saving gaming state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3712.

<Step S3711>
In step S3711, the MPU 41 sets on the jackpot signal 2 output start flag for starting the output of the jackpot signal 2 (see FIG. 295(A)) from the second terminal of the external output terminal board 101 . The jackpot signal 2 output start flag is referred to for determining whether or not to start outputting the jackpot signal 2 in step S3804 of the signal output processing in FIG.

Here, in step S3711, the special figure game started in the normal game state or the b time saving game state is transferred when the result of the special figure jackpot lottery is a jackpot. That is, in the present embodiment, when the special figure game started in the normal game state or b time saving game state is to notify that the result of the special figure jackpot lottery is a jackpot, at the end of the special figure game (At the start of the special figure jackpot game), the jackpot signal 2 is started to be output.

It should be noted that, in the probability variation gaming state and a time-saving gaming state, since the jackpot signal 2 is being output (see FIG. 295 (B)), the special figure game started in the probability variation gaming state or a time-saving gaming state is the special figure jackpot Even if the lottery result indicates a big win, the output of the big win signal 2 is not started at the end of the special game (at the start of the special big win game).

<Steps S3712 and S3713>
If the b time-reduction gaming state flag is off (step S3709: No), that is, if it is not in the b time-reduction gaming state, the MPU 41 determines whether the probability variation gaming state flag is on, that is, whether it is in the probability variation gaming state. to decide. The probability variation gaming state flag is set to ON in the case of transition from the jackpot gaming state to the probability variation gaming state (see step S3722 in FIG. 316 of the game state transition process), and when the probability variation gaming state is shifted to the jackpot gaming state is set to OFF (see step S3713 in FIG. 316 of the game state transition process).

MPU41, when the probability variation gaming state flag is ON (step S3712: Yes), that is, when the probability variation gaming state, sets the probability variation gaming state flag to OFF (step S3713), the process proceeds to step S3741 in FIG. do. On the other hand, when the probability variation gaming state flag is off (step S3712: No), that is, when it is not the probability variation gaming state, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3714.

<Steps S3714 and S3715>
If the probability variation gaming state flag is off (step S3712: No), that is, if it is not in the probability variation gaming state, the MPU 41 determines whether the a time saving gaming state flag is on (step S3714), that is, the a time saving gaming state or not. The a time-saving game state flag is set to ON when the jackpot game state is shifted to the a time-saving game state (see step S3724 in FIG. 316 of the game state transition process), and when the a time-saving game state is changed to the jackpot game state or normal It is set to OFF when transitioning to the game state (see step S3715 in FIG. 316 or step S3734 in FIG. 318 of the game state transition process).

MPU41, if a time-reduction gaming state flag is on (step S3714: Yes), that is, if it is a time-reduction gaming state, a time-saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3715), and the process proceeds to the step of FIG. The process proceeds to S3741. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3741 in FIG. 320 when the a time saving game state flag is off (step S3714: No), that is, when it is not in the a time saving game state.

<Step S3716>
If the special figure jackpot game start flag is off (step S3701: No), that is, if it is not the timing to start the special figure jackpot game, the MPU 41 determines that the special figure jackpot game state flag indicating that the special figure jackpot game state is It is determined whether or not it is on (step S3716). The special figure jackpot game state flag is set to ON in step S3702 in FIG. 316 of the game state transition process when transitioning to the special figure jackpot game state.

When the special figure jackpot game state flag is ON (step S3716: Yes), that is, when the special figure jackpot game state is set (when the special figure jackpot game is being executed), the process proceeds to step S3717. . On the other hand, if the special figure jackpot game state flag is off (step S3716: No), that is, if it is not the special figure jackpot game state (if the special figure jackpot game is not being executed), the process proceeds to step S3725 in FIG. .

<Step S3717>
If the special figure jackpot game state flag is ON (step S3716: Yes), that is, if the special figure jackpot game state (if the special figure jackpot game is being executed), the MPU 41 ends the special figure jackpot game It is determined whether or not the special figure jackpot game end flag indicating that is ON (step S3717). The special figure jackpot game end flag is set to ON in step S3451 in the special figure jackpot game control process in FIG. 310 when the special figure jackpot game ends.

When the special figure jackpot game end flag is ON (step S3717: Yes), that is, when the special figure jackpot game ends, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3718. On the other hand, when the special figure jackpot game end flag is off (step S3717: No), that is, when it is not the time to finish the special figure jackpot game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3741 in FIG.

<Steps S3718 to S3720>
When the special figure jackpot game end flag is on (step S3717: Yes), that is, when the special figure jackpot game ends, the MPU 41 outputs the jackpot signal 1 being output from the first terminal of the external output terminal board 101 (Fig. 295 (A)) to stop the output of the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is set to ON (step S3718). The jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is referred to for determining whether or not to stop the jackpot signal 1 output in step S3807 of the signal output processing in FIG.

Then, the MPU 41 sets off the special figure jackpot game state flag indicating that the special figure jackpot game state is set (step S3719), and sets off the jackpot game end flag indicating that the special figure jackpot game ends. (step S3720), and the process proceeds to step S3721.

<Steps S3721 to S3724-1>
In step S3721, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the probability variation gaming state transition flag for shifting from the special figure jackpot gaming state to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the special figure jackpot game is set to ON. The probability variation game state transition flag is set to ON in step S3706 in FIG. 316 of the game state transition process when the probability variation jackpot game is started.

MPU41, when the probability variation gaming state transition flag is set to ON (step S3721: Yes), that is, when shifting from the special figure jackpot gaming state to the probability variation gaming state, the probability variation gaming state flag indicating that the probability variation gaming state (step S3722), and set the probability variation gaming state command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the probability variation gaming state (step S3722-1).

The probability variation gaming state command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 300) executed by the MPU41. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can execute a special figure effect corresponding to the probability variation gaming state in the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the probability variation gaming state command (see FIG. 326 (B1)).

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the variable probability gaming state transition flag to OFF (step S3723), and shifts the processing to step S3741 in FIG.

On the other hand, when the probability variation gaming state transition flag is set to off (step S3721: No), that is, from the special figure jackpot gaming state, the MPU 41 is not the probability variation gaming state but the a time saving gaming state, a time saving gaming A time saving game state flag indicating that it is in the state is set to ON (step S3724), and a time saving game state command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that it is a time saving game state is set (step S3724- 1), the process moves to step S3741 in FIG.

The a time-saving gaming state command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 300) executed by the MPU41. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can execute a special figure effect corresponding to the a time saving game state command in the symbol display unit 341 or the like based on the a time saving game state command (see FIG. 326 (B2)). .

<Step S3725>
If the special figure jackpot game state flag is off (step S3716: No), that is, if it is not a special figure jackpot game state (if the special figure jackpot game is not being executed), as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the normal game state flag indicating the state is set to ON (step S3725).

When the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S3725: Yes), that is, when the game state is normal, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3726. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3730 in FIG. 318 when the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S3725: No), that is, when it is not in the normal game state.

<Step S3726>
If the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S3725: Yes), that is, if the normal game state, the MPU41 turns on the b time saving game state transition flag for shifting the game state to the b time saving game state is set (step S3726). The b time saving game state transition flag is set to ON in step S3323 in FIG. 316 of the game state transition process when the normal jackpot game ends.

MPU41, when the b time saving game state transition flag is set to ON (step S3726: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3727, and when the b time saving game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S3726: No), the process proceeds to step S3741 in FIG.

<Steps S3727 to S3729>
When the b time saving gaming state transition flag is set to ON (step S3726: Yes), the MPU 41 sets on the b time saving gaming state flag indicating that it is in the b time saving gaming state (step S3727), b Set the b time-saving game state command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that it is a time-saving game state (step S3727-1).

The b time-saving gaming state command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 300) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can execute a special figure effect corresponding to the b time-saving gaming state command in the symbol display unit 341 or the like based on the b time-saving gaming state command (see FIG. 327 (B1)). .

Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag indicating that it is in the normal game state to OFF (step S3728), sets the b time saving game state transition flag to OFF (step S3729), and proceeds to the step of FIG. The process proceeds to S3741.

<Step S3730>
If the normal game state flag is set to OFF (step S3725: No), that is, if it is not in the normal game state, as shown in FIG. is set to ON (step S3730).

MPU41, when a time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3730: Yes), that is, when it is a time-saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step S3731. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3736 in FIG. 319 when the a time saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S3731: No), that is, when it is not in the a time saving game state.

<Step S3731>
If the time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3730: Yes), that is, if it is in the time-saving gaming state, the MPU 41 turns on the normal gaming state transition flag for shifting the gaming state to the normal gaming state. is set (step S3731). The normal game state transition flag is set to ON in step S3328 of the special figure game number management process in FIG.

When the normal game state transition flag is set to ON (step S3731: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3732, and when the normal game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S3731: No). , the process proceeds to step S3741 in FIG.

<Steps S3732 to S3733>
When the normal game state b time-saving game state transition flag is set to ON (step S3731: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag to ON indicating that it is a normal game state (step S3732), A normal game state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that it is in a normal game state is set (step S3732-1).

The normal game state command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process executed by the MPU 41 (see FIG. 300). Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can execute a special figure effect corresponding to the normal game state command in the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the normal game state command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets on the jackpot signal 2 output stop flag for stopping the output of the jackpot signal 2 (see FIG. 295(B)) being output from the second terminal of the external output terminal plate 101 (step S3733), The process proceeds to step S3734. The jackpot signal 2 output stop flag is referred to in step S3810 of the signal output processing in FIG. 321 to determine whether or not to stop the jackpot signal 2 output.

<Steps S3734 to S3735>
In step S3734, the MPU 41 sets the a time-saving gaming state flag indicating that it is in the a time-saving gaming state to OFF, further sets the normal game state transition flag to OFF (step S3735), and proceeds to the step of FIG. Move to S3741.

<Step S3736>
When a time saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3730: No), that is, when it is not a time saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the status flag is set to ON (step S3736).

When the b time saving gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3736: Yes), that is, when it is in the b time saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step S3737. On the other hand, when the b time saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3736: No), that is, when it is not in the b time saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step S3741 in FIG.

<Step S3737>
If the b time saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3736: Yes), that is, if it is in the b time saving game state, the MPU 41 turns on the normal game state transition flag for shifting the game state to the normal game state. is set (step S3737). The normal game state transition flag is set to ON in step S3333 of the special figure game number management process in FIG.

When the normal game state transition flag is set to ON (step S3737: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3738, and when the normal game state transition flag is set to OFF (step S3737: No). , the process proceeds to step S3741 in FIG.

<Steps S3738 and S3738-1>
When the normal game state transition flag is set to ON (step S3737: Yes), the MPU 41 sets ON the normal game state flag indicating that it is in the normal game state (step S3738), and in the normal game state A normal game state command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the fact is set (step S3738-1), and the process proceeds to step S3739.

The normal game state command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process executed by the MPU 41 (see FIG. 300). Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can execute a special figure effect corresponding to the normal game state command in the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the normal game state command.

<Steps S3739 and S3740>
In step S3739, the MPU 41 sets off the b time saving gaming state flag indicating that it is in the b time saving gaming state, further sets the normal game state transition flag to off (step S3740), and proceeds to the step of FIG. Move to S3741.

<Step S3741>
In step S3741, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the V winning big winning game start flag indicating that the V winning big winning game is started is set to ON. The V winning big winning game start flag is set to ON in step S3604 of the V winning big winning game control process in FIG. 315 when the V winning big winning game is started.

If the V winning big winning game start flag is set to ON (step S3741: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3742, and if the V winning big winning game starting flag is set to OFF (step S3741: No), the process proceeds to step S3744.

<Steps S3742 and S3743>
When the V winning jackpot game start flag is set to ON (step S3741: Yes), the MPU 41 starts outputting a V winning jackpot game signal as an identification signal from the third terminal of the external output terminal board 101. A game signal output start flag is set to ON (step S3742). Then, the MPU 41 sets the V winning jackpot game start flag to OFF (step S3743), and ends the game state transition processing.

<Step S3744>
When the V winning big winning game start flag is set to OFF (step S3741: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the V winning big winning game running flag indicating that the V winning big winning game is being executed is set to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S3744). The V winning big winning game running flag is set to ON when the V winning big winning game is started in step S3606 of the V winning big winning game control process in FIG.

When the V winning big winning game running flag is set to ON (step S3744: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3745, and when the V winning big winning game running flag is set to OFF (step S3744: No), the game state transition processing ends.

<Step S3745>
When the V winning big winning game running flag is set to ON (step S3744: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the V winning big winning game end flag indicating that the V winning big winning game is to be ended is set to ON. (step S3745). The V winning big winning game end flag is set to ON when the V winning big winning game ends in step S3621 of the V winning big winning game control process in FIG.

If the V winning big winning game end flag is set to ON (step S3745: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3746, and if the V winning big winning game ending flag is set to OFF (step S3745: No), the game state transition process ends.

<Step S3746>
When the V winning jackpot game end flag is set to ON (step S3745: Yes), the MPU 41 stops outputting the V winning jackpot game signal output as the identification signal from the third terminal of the external output terminal board 101. The V winning jackpot game signal output stop flag is set to ON (step S3746), and the process proceeds to step S3747.

<Steps S3747 and S3748>
In step S3747, the MPU 41 sets 1000, which is the maximum value, as the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter indicating the number of remaining special figure games until the b time saving gaming state is generated. That is, in the present embodiment, when the V winning jackpot game ends, the ceiling activation remaining number counter is reset to 1000, which is the maximum value. In addition, the MPU 41 sets ON a ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag indicating that the ceiling activation remaining number counter is set (step S3748), and shifts the process to step S3749.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the V winning jackpot game ends, the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is reset to the maximum value of 1000, and the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag is set to ON. In the normal game state, which is the first auxiliary state control in which the b time saving game state cannot occur, the normal game state can be set as the second auxiliary state control in which the b time saving game state can occur. As a result, the player can generate the normal game state of the second auxiliary state control by executing the V winning jackpot game, and can newly generate the b time-saving game state. The player can be motivated to start the game in the normal game state, which is the first auxiliary state control in which the b time-saving game state cannot occur. On the other hand, in the normal game state which is the second auxiliary state control in which the b time saving game state can occur, the number of executions of the special figure game required until the b time saving game state occurs can be changed to the maximum value. As a result, when the game machine is ended in the normal game state, etc., which is the second auxiliary state control in which the b time-saving game state can occur, the V winning jackpot game is executed, so that the special figure game executed by the end of the game The number of times is not reflected in the number of executions of the special game required until the b time-saving game state occurs, and the game can be ended, preventing the so-called hyena act of others. be done.

<Steps S3749 and S3750>
At step S3749, the MPU 41 sets a ceiling activation remaining count counter reset command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the ceiling activation remaining count has been reset (step S3749). The ceiling activation remaining number counter reset command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process executed by the MPU 41 (see FIG. 300). As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can execute a special figure effect corresponding to the resetting of the remaining number of ceiling activations in the pattern display unit 341 or the like based on the ceiling activation remaining number counter reset command (Fig. 327 (B2)).

Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the V winning jackpot game end flag to OFF (step S3750), and ends the game state transition process.

[Signal output processing]
Here, FIG. 321 is a flow chart showing an example of the signal output processing procedure executed in step S1408-1 of the main processing of FIG. In the signal output processing of this embodiment, processing for outputting various signals to the outside of the gaming machine 10 is executed. The signal output processing of this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S3801>
As shown in FIG. 321, in the signal output processing of this embodiment, first, the MPU 41 starts outputting a jackpot signal 1 (see FIG. 295 (A)) as a special signal from the first terminal of the external output terminal board 101. It is determined whether or not the jackpot signal 1 output start flag is set to ON (step S3801). The jackpot signal 1 output start flag is set to ON when the special figure jackpot game is started in step S3703 of the game state transition processing in FIG.

When the jackpot signal 1 output start flag is set to ON (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3802, and when the jackpot signal 1 output start flag is set to OFF (step S3801: No), the process moves to step S3804.

<Steps S3802 and S3803>
When the jackpot signal 1 output start flag is set to ON (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 41 outputs jackpot signal 1 (see FIG. 295 (A)) as a special signal from the first terminal of the external output terminal board 101. Output is started (step S3802). And MPU41 sets a jackpot signal 1 output start flag to OFF (step S3803), and complete|finishes the said signal output process.

<Step S3804>
When the jackpot signal 1 output start flag is set to OFF (step S3801: No), the MPU 41 outputs the jackpot signal 1 (FIG. 295 (A )) to stop the output), it is determined whether or not the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is set to ON (step S3804). The jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is set to ON in step S3718 of the game state transition process in FIG. 316 when the special figure jackpot game is terminated.

When the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is set to ON (step S3804: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3805, and when the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is set to OFF (step S3804: No), the process proceeds to step S3807.

<Steps S3805 and S3806>
When the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is set to ON (step S3804: Yes), the MPU 41 outputs the jackpot signal 1 (FIG. 295 (A )) is stopped (step S3805). Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag to OFF (step S3806), and terminates the signal output processing.

<Step S3807>
When the jackpot signal 1 output stop flag is set to OFF (step S3804: No), the MPU 41 starts outputting the jackpot signal 2 (see FIG. 295 (B)) from the second terminal of the external output terminal board 101. It is determined whether or not the jackpot signal 2 output start flag is set to ON (step S3807). The jackpot signal 2 output start flag is, in step S3711 of the game state transition processing in FIG. is set on if the is terminated.

MPU41, when the jackpot signal 2 output start flag is set to ON (step S3807: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3808, when the jackpot signal 2 output start flag is set to OFF (step S3807: No), the process proceeds to step S3810.

<Steps S3808 and S3809>
When the jackpot signal 2 output start flag is set to ON (step S3807: Yes), the MPU 41 starts outputting the jackpot signal 2 (see FIG. 295 (B)) from the second terminal of the external output terminal board 101 (Step S3808). Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot signal 2 output start flag to OFF (step S3809), and ends the signal output processing.

<Step S3810>
When the jackpot signal 2 output start flag is set to OFF (step S3807: No), the MPU 41 outputs the jackpot signal 2 (see FIG. 295 (B)) output from the second terminal of the external output terminal board 101. It is determined whether or not the jackpot signal 2 output stop flag for stopping the output is set to ON (step S3810). The jackpot signal 2 output stop flag is set to ON in step S3733 of the game state transition process in FIG.

MPU41, when the jackpot signal 2 output stop flag is set to ON (step S3810: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3811, when the jackpot signal 2 output stop flag is set to OFF (step S3810: No), the process proceeds to step S3813.

<Steps S3811 and S3812>
When the jackpot signal 2 output stop flag is set to ON (step S3810: Yes), the MPU 41 outputs the jackpot signal 2 (see FIG. 295 (B)) output from the second terminal of the external output terminal board 101. Output is stopped (step S3811). And MPU41 sets a jackpot signal 2 output stop flag to OFF (step S3812), and complete|finishes the said signal output process.

<Step S3813>
When the jackpot signal 2 output stop flag is set to OFF (step S3810: No), the MPU 41 outputs a V prize jackpot game signal as an identification signal from the third terminal of the external output terminal board 101 (see FIG. 296(A)) (step S3813). The V winning big winning game signal output start flag is set to ON when the V winning big winning game is started (when the V winning big winning game state is generated) in step S3742 of the game state transition processing in FIG.

When the V winning jackpot game signal output start flag is set to ON (step S3813: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3814, and when the V winning jackpot game signal output start flag is set to OFF (Step S3813: No), the process proceeds to step S3816.

<Steps S3814 and S3815>
When the V winning jackpot game signal output start flag is set to ON (step S3813: Yes), the MPU 41 outputs the V winning jackpot game signal as an identification signal from the third terminal of the external output terminal board 101 (FIG. 296 (A) ) is started (step S3814). Then, the MPU 41 sets the V winning jackpot game signal output start flag to OFF (step S3815), and terminates the signal output processing.

<Step S3816>
When the V winning jackpot game signal output start flag is set to OFF (step S3813: No), the MPU 41 outputs the V winning jackpot game signal (Fig. 296 (A)) to stop the output, it is determined whether or not the V winning jackpot game signal output stop flag is set to ON (step S3816). The V winning big winning game signal output stop flag is set to ON when the V winning big winning game ends (when the V winning big winning game state ends) in step S3746 of the game state transition process in FIG.

When the V winning jackpot game signal output stop flag is set to ON (step S3816: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3817, and when the V winning jackpot game signal output stop flag is set to OFF (Step S3816: No), the process proceeds to step S3819.

<Steps S3817 and S3818>
When the V winning jackpot game signal output stop flag is set to ON (step S3816: Yes), the MPU 41 outputs the V winning jackpot game signal (Fig. 296(A)) is stopped (step S3817). Then, the MPU 41 sets the V winning jackpot game signal output stop flag to OFF (step S3818), and terminates the signal output processing.

<Step S3819>
When the V winning jackpot game signal output stop flag is set to OFF (step S3816: No), the MPU 41 outputs a special figure fluctuation stop signal as an identification signal from the 4th terminal of the external output terminal board 101. It is determined whether or not the stop signal output flag is set to ON (step S3819). The special figure fluctuation stop signal output flag is set to ON when the special figure game ends in step S1909 of the special figure game control process of FIG.

MPU41, if the special figure fluctuation stop signal output flag is set to ON (step S3819: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3820, if the special figure fluctuation stop signal output flag is set to OFF (step S3819: No), the process proceeds to step S3823.

<Step S3820>
When the special figure fluctuation stop signal output flag is set to ON (step S3819: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the special figure fluctuation stop signal output flag indicating that the special figure fluctuation stop signal is output to ON (step S3820), and the process proceeds to step S3821. The special figure fluctuation stop signal output flag is referred to in order to determine whether or not to stop the output of the special figure fluctuation stop signal in step S3823 of the signal output process.

<Steps S3821 and S3822>
In step S3821, the MPU 41 starts outputting a special figure fluctuation stop signal as an identification signal from the fourth terminal of the external output terminal board 101 (step S3821). And MPU41 sets a special figure fluctuation stop signal output flag to OFF (Step S3822), and ends the signal output processing concerned.

<Step S3823>
When the special figure fluctuation stop signal output flag is set to off (step S3819: No), the MPU 41 sets the special figure fluctuation stop signal output flag indicating that the special figure fluctuation stop signal is output to ON It is determined whether or not it is set (step S3823).

MPU41, if the special figure fluctuation stop signal output flag is set to ON (step S3823: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3824, if the special figure fluctuation stop signal output flag is set to OFF (Step S3823: No), the signal output processing ends.

<Steps S3824 and S3825>
When the special figure fluctuation stop signal output flag is set to ON (step S3823: Yes), the MPU 41 outputs the special figure fluctuation stop signal as the identification signal output from the 4th terminal of the external output terminal board 101 is stopped (step S3824). Then, the MPU 41 sets the special figure fluctuation stop signal outputting flag to OFF (step S3825), and ends the signal output processing. That is, in the present embodiment, the special figure fluctuation stop signal is output until step S3824 of the signal output process to be executed next is executed after the process of step S3820 of the signal output process executed previously is executed. be done. In other words, the output period of the special figure fluctuation stop signal corresponds or substantially corresponds to the execution cycle of the main processing of FIG. be done.

Of course, when the special figure fluctuation stop signal is output as a pulse signal, the pulse width does not need to be 2 msec or approximately 2 msec. It may be a substantially integer multiple. Moreover, the special figure fluctuation stop signal may be output as a signal other than a pulse signal.

[Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device 5]
In this embodiment, part of the procedure of the command determination process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 is different from that of the above-described first embodiment.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process of the present embodiment, various game states (for example, jackpot game state, probability variation game state, a time-saving game state, b time-saving game state, normal game state) is executed, and when the V winning jackpot game ends, the symbol display unit 341 as a display means is displayed. A process for executing a ceiling remaining count reset effect indicating that the ceiling activation remaining count has been reset as game state information is executed. Here, FIGS. 322 to 324 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing according to this embodiment. When the pattern display unit 341 displays an image as output information, the output method is mainly moving image display.

<Step S3901>
As shown in FIG. 322, in the command determination process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not a command has been received (step S3901). If the MPU 51 has received a command (step S3901: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3902, and if it has not received a command (step S3901: No), the command determination process ends.

<Step S3902>
When a command is received (step S3901: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special figure jackpot game start command (step S3902). The special figure jackpot game start command is a command indicating to start a special figure jackpot game as a large profit game, and is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 at step S3404 in the special figure jackpot game control process of FIG. It is set when starting a jackpot game.

MPU51, if the received command is a special figure jackpot game start command (step S3902: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3903, if the received command is not a special figure jackpot game start command (step S3902: No), The process moves to step S3905.

<Steps S3903 and S3904>
When the special figure jackpot game start command is received (step S3902: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the special figure jackpot game effect setting process (step S3903), and the jackpot game indicating that the special figure jackpot game is being executed. The medium flag is set to ON (step S3904), and the command determination processing is terminated.

It should be noted that the jackpot playing flag is referred to for controlling the jackpot game effect in the jackpot game effect control process executed in step S2705 of the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 42 (see step S3201 of FIG. 54). Incidentally, since the jackpot game effect control process of the present embodiment is the same as the jackpot game effect control process (see FIG. 54) of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, FIG. 325 is a diagram showing an example of a special figure jackpot game effect displayed in the symbol display section 341 as display means.

FIG. 325(A) is a diagram showing an example of the opening effect of the special figure jackpot game effect displayed in the symbol display section 341. FIG. As shown in FIG. 325 (A), in the opening effect, in the symbol display unit 341, when a special figure game, which is a small profit game as a specific period game in which the special figure is variably displayed for a specific period, ends, the special figure Based on the fact that the result of the special figure jackpot lottery notified by the game is a jackpot, notification display corresponding to the fact that the newly set game state is the special figure jackpot game state is executed. Specifically, in the opening effect of the present embodiment, the symbol display unit 341 displays a character image of "jackpot" as the gaming state information, and also displays the number of consecutive jackpots (character image of "Xth time"). be done.

FIG. 325(B) is a diagram showing an example of a round game effect of a special figure jackpot game effect displayed in the symbol display section 341. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 325(B), in the round game production, the symbol display section 341 indicates that the round game is being executed and what round the round game is in the open/close execution mode. Notification display is executed. Specifically, in the round game effect of the present embodiment, a character image of "Round X" indicating the number of rounds being executed in the jackpot game is displayed in the pattern display unit 341, and a payout in the jackpot game is displayed. Image related to the number of game balls (number of balls played) (“800/1200” indicating the current number of balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game, and the total number of balls in the jackpot series including the jackpot game) A character image of "total of 3800 shots" shown below) is displayed.

FIG. 325(C) is a diagram showing an example of the ending effect of the special figure jackpot game effect displayed in the symbol display section 341. FIG. As shown in FIG. 325(C), in the ending effect, in the symbol display section 341, the end of the big win game and the transition destination of the game state after the end of the big win game are clearly indicated. Specifically, in the ending effect of the present embodiment, in the symbol display unit 341, when shifting to the variable probability game state, a notification display of a character image of "○○ RUSH rush" is made as the game state information, and a time saving When the game state is shifted to the game state, a notification display of a character image "entering XX mode" is made as the game state information. In the ending effect, instead of or in addition to the illustrated example, a character image of "jackpot end" indicating that the jackpot game is over, and "RUSH X times" indicating the number of jackpot games including the jackpot game. A character image and a character image such as "out of balls △△△△" indicating the total number of balls in the jackpot series including the jackpot game may be displayed.

<Step S3905>
If the received command is not a special figure jackpot game start command (step S3902: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an opening start command (step S3905). The opening start command is a command indicating to start the opening of the special figure jackpot game, and when starting the opening in step S3408 in the special figure jackpot game control process of FIG. 310 executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 is set to

If the received command is the opening start command (step S3905: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3906, and if the received command is not the opening start command (step S3905: No), shifts the process to step S3907. do.

<Step S3906>
When the opening start command is received (step S3905: Yes), the MPU 52 sets the opening effect start flag to ON (step S3906), and terminates the command determination process. The opening effect start flag is a flag for starting the opening effect of the special figure jackpot game as a large profit game, and in step S3202 of the jackpot game effect control process in FIG. 54, for determining whether or not to start the opening effect. is referred to.

<Step S3907>
If the received command is not the opening start command (step S3905: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the opening end command (step S3907). The opening end command is a command indicating to end the opening of the jackpot game, and is set when the opening is ended in step S3414 in the special figure jackpot game control process of FIG. 311 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 be done.

If the received command is the opening end command (step S3907: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3908, and if the received command is not the opening end command (step S3907: No), shifts the process to step S3909. do.

<Step S3908>
When the opening end command is received (step S3907: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the opening effect end flag to ON (step S3908), and ends the command determination process. The opening effect end flag is a flag for ending the opening effect of the jackpot game, and is referred to in step S3205 in the jackpot game effect control process of FIG. 54 to determine whether or not to end the opening effect.

<Step S3909>
When the received command is not the opening end command (step S3907: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the round game start command (step S3909). The round game start command is a command indicating the start of the round game in the opening/closing execution mode and indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be executed this time. It is set when starting the round game of the opening and closing execution mode in step S3417 in the jackpot game control process.

If the received command is a round game start command (step S3909: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3910, and if the received command is not a round game start command (step S3909: No), the process goes to step S3912. transition to

<Steps S3910 and S3911>
When the round game start command is received (step S3909: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect start flag to ON (step S3910), and stores the round number information indicating what round the round game is in the RAM 512. (step S3911), and the command determination process ends. The round game effect start flag is referenced in order to determine whether or not to start each round game effect of the open/close execution mode effect in step S3208 of the jackpot game effect control process of FIG.

<Step S3912>
When the received command is not the round game start command (step S3909: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the round game end command (step S3912). The round game end command is a command indicating to end the round game in the opening/closing execution mode, and ends the round game in step S3429 in the special figure jackpot game control process of FIG. 312 executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 set if

MPU51, if the received command is a round game end command (step S3912: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3913, if the received command is not a round game end command (step S3912: No), the process to step S3914 transition to

<Step S3913>
When the round game end command is received (step S3912: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect end flag to ON (step S3913), and ends the command determination process. The round game end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to end the round game effect in step S3211 in the jackpot game effect control process of FIG.

<Step S3914>
When the received command is not the round game end command (step S3912: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the interval start command (step S3914). The interval start command is a command indicating to start the interval between round games in the opening and closing execution mode, and the interval is started in step S3433 in the special figure jackpot game control process of FIG. Set to start.

Here, if the received command is an interval start command (step S3914: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3915; The process proceeds to S3916.

<Step S3915>
When the received command is the interval start command (step S3914: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the interval effect start flag to ON (step S3915), and terminates the command determination process. The interval production start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start the interval production in step S3214 in the jackpot game production control process of FIG.

<Step S3916>
If the received command is not the interval start command (step S3914: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the interval end command (step S3916). The interval end command is a command indicating to end the interval between round games in the opening/closing execution mode, and the interval is ended in step S3439 in the special figure jackpot game control process of FIG. Set to terminate.

Here, if the received command is the interval end command (step S3916: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3917, and if the received command is not the interval end command (step S3916: No), the process continues. 323 to step S3918.

<Step S3917>
When the received command is the interval end command (step S3916: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the interval effect end flag to ON (step S3917), and ends the command determination process. The interval production end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to end the interval production in step S3217 in the jackpot game production control process of FIG.

<Step S3918>
If the received command is not the interval end command (step S3916: No), as shown in FIG. 323, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the ending start command (step S3918). The ending start command is a command indicating to start the ending in the jackpot game, and is set when starting the ending in step S3442 in the special figure jackpot game control process of FIG. 31 executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4. be done.

Here, if the received command is the ending start command (step S3918: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3919, and if the received command is not the ending start command (step S3918: No), the process proceeds to step S3918. Go to S3920.

<Step S3919>
When the received command is the ending start command (step S3918: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending effect start flag to ON (step S3919), and terminates the command determination process. The ending effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start the ending effect in step S3220 of the jackpot game effect control process in FIG.

<Step S3920>
If the received command is not the ending start command (step S3918: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the ending end command (step S3920). The ending end command is a command indicating that the ending of the jackpot game ends, and is set when the ending is ended in step S3448 in the special figure jackpot game control process of FIG. 313 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 be done.

Here, if the received command is the ending end command (step S3920: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3921, and if the received command is not the ending end command (step S3920: No), the process proceeds to step S3920. The process proceeds to S3922.

<Step S3921>
When the received command is the ending ending command (step S3920: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending effect end flag to ON (step S3921), and ends the command determination process. The ending effect end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to end the ending effect in step S3223 of the jackpot game effect control process in FIG.

<Step S3922>
When the received command is not the ending end command (step S3920: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the special figure jackpot game end command (step S3922). The special figure jackpot game end command is a command indicating to end the special figure jackpot game, and is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. In step S3450 in the special figure jackpot game control process of FIG. Set when exiting.

Here, if the received command is a special figure jackpot game end command (step S3922: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3923, and if the received command is not a special figure jackpot game end command (step S3922: No), the process proceeds to step S3924.

<Step S3923>
If the received command is a special figure jackpot game end command (step S3922: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off the jackpot game flag indicating that the special figure jackpot game is being executed as a large profit game ( Step S3923), the command determination process ends.

<Steps S3924 and S3925>
If the received command is not a special figure jackpot game end command (step S3922: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a probability variation gaming state command indicating that the probability variation gaming state has shifted (step S3924 ). The probability variation gaming state command is set in step S3722-1 in the gaming state transition processing in FIG. 316 when shifting to the probability variation gaming state.

When the probability variation gaming state command is received (step S3924: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the probability variation gaming state flag indicating the probability variation gaming state to ON (step S3925), and ends the command determination process. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 has not received the variable probability gaming state command (step S3924: No), the process proceeds to step S3926.

<Steps S3926 and S3927>
If the probability variation gaming state command is not received (step S3924: No), the MPU 51 is a time-saving gaming state command indicating that the received command has shifted to the a time-saving gaming state as the second profit gaming state control It is determined whether or not (step S3926). The a time-saving gaming state command is set in step S3724-1 in the game state transition processing in FIG. 316 when shifting to the a time-saving gaming state.

When the MPU 51 receives the time-saving gaming state command (step S3926: Yes), it sets the time-saving gaming state flag indicating the time-saving gaming state to ON (step S3927), and terminates the command determination process. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 has not received the a reduced working hours gaming state command (step S3926: No), the process proceeds to step S3928.

<Steps S3928 to S3930>
If the a time-saving gaming state command has not been received (step S3926: No), the MPU 51 is a b time-saving gaming state command indicating that the received command has transitioned to the b time-saving gaming state, which is the second profit gaming state control. (step S3928). The b time-saving gaming state command is set in step S3727-1 in the game state transition processing in FIG. 317 when transitioning to the b time-saving gaming state.

When the MPU 51 receives the b time saving game state command (step S3928: Yes), it sets the time saving game state flag indicating that it is in the b time saving game state to ON (step S3929), and also indicates that it is in the normal game state. The normal game state flag shown is set to OFF (step S3930), and the command determination process ends. On the other hand, MPU51 transfers a process to step S3931, when the b time saving gaming state command is not received (step S3928: No).

<Steps S3931 to S3933>
If the b time-saving gaming state command is not received (step S3928: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a normal gaming state command indicating that the normal gaming state has shifted to the first profit gaming state control. (step S3931). The normal game state command is set in step S3732-1 of FIG. 318 or step S3738-1 of FIG.

When the MPU 51 receives the normal game state command (step S3931: Yes), the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state is set to ON (step S3932), and the normal game state before shifting to the normal game state. Other game state flags (a time saving game state flag or b time saving game state) corresponding to the game state are set to OFF (step S3933), and the command determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the MPU 51 has not received the normal gaming state command (step S3931: No), the process proceeds to step S3934 in FIG.

<Steps S3934 and S3919>
When the normal game state command is not received (step S3931: No), as shown in FIG. 324, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special figure variation pattern command (step S3934). The special figure variation pattern command is a command including the variation display time of the special symbols in the special figure game to be started, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, etc. When the special figure variation is started (the special figure game is started) , It is set in step S2105 in the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG.

When the MPU 51 receives the special figure variation pattern command (step S3934: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3935. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 has not received the special figure variation pattern command (step S3934: No), the process proceeds to step S3943.

<Step S3935>
If the special figure variation pattern command is received (step S3934: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state is set to ON (step S3935). The normal game state flag is set to ON at step S3932 in FIG. 324 in the command determination process when the normal game state is entered.

When the game state flag is set to ON (step S3935: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3936, and when the game state flag is set to OFF (step S3935: No), the process to step S3937.

<Step S3936>
When the normal game state flag is set to ON (step S3935: Yes), the MPU 51 executes normal game state effect setting processing corresponding to the normal game state (step S3936), and terminates the command determination processing.

Here, in the normal game state effect setting process, based on the variation display time of the special symbol included in the special symbol variation pattern command, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, etc., the command determination of FIG. 47 in the first embodiment described above By executing the same processing as steps S3103 to S3106 in the processing, the effect executed in the special figure game is set. Also, in the normal game state effect setting process, a unique background image (background effect, stage effect) indicating the normal game state is set. Therefore, the player can identify the normal game state based on the notification display of the game state information such as the background image (background effect, stage effect) unique to the normal game state.

<Steps S3937 and S3938>
When the normal gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3935: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the probability changing gaming state flag indicating the probability changing gaming state is set to ON (step S3937). . The probability variation gaming state flag is set to ON at step S3925 in FIG. 323 in the command determination process when the probability variation gaming state is shifted.

When the variable probability gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3937: Yes), the MPU 51 executes variable probability gaming state effect setting processing (step S3938), and ends the command determination processing. On the other hand, when the variable probability gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3937: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3939.

Here, in the probability variation gaming state effect setting process, based on the variation display time of the special symbol included in the special figure variation pattern command, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, etc., the command determination of FIG. 47 in the first embodiment described above By executing the same processing as steps S3103 to S3106 in the processing, the effect executed in the special figure game is set. In addition, in the probability variation gaming state effect setting process, a unique background image (background effect, stage effect) indicating that the probability variation gaming state is set, and a character image indicating that the probability variation gaming state is in progress (for example, "○○ RUSH ) is set (see FIG. 326(B1)). Therefore, the player, the probability variation gaming state based on the game state information such as a character image indicating that the probability variation gaming state specific background image (background effect, stage effect) and the probability variation gaming state is notified and displayed is identifiable. In addition, in the variable probability gaming state, the symbol display section 341 may display the number of consecutive jackpots and the number of balls released.

In addition, as described above, in the probability variable jackpot game, the electric role 315b is operated based on the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole 314 or the entry of the game ball into the through gate 317 of the electric role. When the result of the special figure jackpot lottery executed by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 is a probability variable jackpot, the special figure is specified as a small profit game in which the special figure is variably displayed for a specific period It shifts after execution of the special figure game as a period game. In addition, the probability variation gaming state is shifted after the probability variation jackpot game ends. Therefore, in the symbol display unit 341, after the game state information is notified and displayed as the ending image of the probability variation jackpot game (see FIG. 326 (A1)), it indicates that it is in the probability variation gaming state when it shifts to the probability variation gaming state. The game state information is notified and displayed (see FIG. 326 (B1)).

<Steps S3939 and S3940>
When the probability variation gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3937: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the a time saving gaming state flag indicating the a time saving gaming state is set to ON (step S3939). The a time saving game state flag is set to ON at step S3724 in FIG. 316 in the game state transition process when the game state is shifted to the a time saving game state.

When the a time saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3939: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a time saving game state effect setting process (step S3940), and ends the command determination process. On the other hand, MPU51 transfers a process to step S3941, when a time saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3939: No).

Here, in the a time-saving gaming state effect setting process, based on the variation display time of the special symbol included in the special symbol variation pattern command, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, etc., the command of FIG. 47 in the first embodiment described above By executing the same processing as steps S3103 to S3106 in the determination processing, the effect executed in the special figure game is set. In addition, in the a time-saving game state effect setting process, a unique background image (background effect, stage effect) indicating that the a time-saving game state is set, and a character image (for example, " XX mode" character image), the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed in the a time saving game state (for example, "remaining time saving 100 times" character image) etc. are set (see FIG. 326 (B2)) . Therefore, the player is notified and displayed game state information such as a background image (background effect, stage effect) unique to the time-saving game state and a character image indicating that the time-saving game state is in progress. It can be identified that it is in the time saving gaming state. In addition, in the variable probability gaming state, the symbol display section 341 may display the number of consecutive jackpots and the number of balls released.

In addition, as described above, in the normal jackpot game, the electric role 315b is operated based on the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole 314 or the entry of the game ball into the through gate 317 of the electric role. When the result of the special figure jackpot lottery executed by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 is a normal jackpot, the special figure is specified as a small profit game in which the special figure is variably displayed for a specific period It shifts after execution of the special figure game as a period game. In addition, the probability variation gaming state is shifted after the probability variation jackpot game ends. Therefore, in the symbol display unit 341, after the game state information is notified and displayed as the ending image of the normal jackpot game (see FIG. 326 (A2)), when it shifts to the a time saving game state, it is in the a time saving game state. (See FIG. 326 (B2)).

In addition, in the a time-saving gaming state production setting process, it is determined whether or not it is the last special figure game in the a time-saving gaming state, and if it is the last special figure game in the a time-saving gaming state, the special When the result of the special figure jackpot lottery notified by the figure game is lost, the game state indicating that the a time saving game state is completed in the symbol display unit 341 at the end of the special figure game as the specific period game As information, a time saving end display is notified and displayed (see FIG. 327(A)). In this embodiment, for example, a character image of "RUSH end" is displayed to indicate that the a time-saving gaming state is ended. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the a time saving end display is also used as a result screen for the jackpot consecutive game, and the character image of "RUSH Y times" indicating the number of jackpot consecutive games and the number of balls released in the jackpot consecutive game are displayed. The results of the jackpot series, such as the character image of "7500 balls" shown, are displayed.

<Steps S3941 and S3942>
When the a time saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3939: No), the MPU 51 sets the b time saving gaming state flag indicating that the b time saving gaming state is the first profit gaming state control to ON. (step S3941). The b time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON in step S3727 in FIG. 317 in the game state transition processing when the game state is shifted to the b time-saving gaming state.

When the b time saving game state flag is set to ON (step S3941: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the b time saving game state effect setting process (step S3942), and ends the command determination process. On the other hand, MPU51 complete|finishes the said command determination process, when the b time saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3941: No).

Here, in the b time-saving gaming state effect setting process, based on the variation display time of the special symbol included in the special symbol variation pattern command, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, etc., the command of FIG. 47 in the first embodiment described above By executing the same processing as steps S3103 to S3106 in the determination processing, the effect executed in the special figure game is set. In addition, in the b time-saving game state effect setting process, a unique background image (background effect, stage effect) indicating that the b time-saving game state is set, and a character image (for example, " In addition to the character image of "ceiling RUSH"), the remaining number of special-figure games that can be executed in the b time-saving game state (for example, the character image of "remaining 1000 times") etc. are set (see FIG. 327 (B1)). Therefore, the player is notified and displayed of game state information such as a background image (background effect, stage effect) specific to the b time saving game state and a character image indicating that the b time saving game state is in progress. It can be identified that it is in the time saving gaming state. In addition, in the variable probability gaming state, the symbol display section 341 may display the number of consecutive jackpots and the number of balls released.

In addition, as described above, in the normal jackpot game, the electric role 315b is operated based on the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole 314 or the entry of the game ball into the through gate 317 of the electric role. When the result of the special figure jackpot lottery executed by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 is a normal jackpot, the special figure is specified as a small profit game in which the special figure is variably displayed for a specific period It shifts after execution of the special figure game as a period game. In addition, the probability variation gaming state is shifted after the probability variation jackpot game ends. Therefore, in the symbol display unit 341, after the game state information is notified and displayed as the ending image of the normal jackpot game (see FIG. 326 (A2)), when it shifts to the a time saving game state, it is in the a time saving game state. (See FIG. 326 (B2)).

<Steps S3943 and S3944>
If the received command is not a special figure variation pattern command (step S3934: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a ceiling activation remaining number counter reset command indicating that the ceiling activation remaining number counter has been set. is determined (step S3943). The ceiling activation remaining number counter reset command is based on the execution of the V winning jackpot game which is a small profit game. is set in step S3748 in FIG. 320 in the game state transition process.

If the received command is a ceiling activation remaining number counter reset command indicating that the ceiling activation remaining number counter indicating the remaining special figure game number until generating the b time saving gaming state is reset (step S3943 : Yes), the process proceeds to step S3944. On the other hand, if the received command is not the ceiling activation remaining number counter reset command (step S3941: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3945.

<Step S3944>
If the received command is a ceiling activation remaining count counter reset command (step S3943: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a ceiling activation remaining count reset display indicating that the ceiling activation remaining count has been reset in the pattern display unit 341 ( step S3944). For example, in the present embodiment, a character image of "remaining ceiling count reset" is displayed in the pattern display section 341 (see FIG. 327 (B2)). Therefore, the player can identify that the remaining number of ceiling activations has been reset based on the notification display of the reset display of the remaining number of ceiling activations indicating that the remaining number of ceiling activations has been reset as the game state information. be.

Here, the ceiling activation remaining number counter is reset after the end of the V winning jackpot game as a specific period game which is a small profit game. In addition, the V winning jackpot game is a special electric starting game based on the entry of a game ball into the special electric starting opening 37 as the first ball entering means, and the special electric V winning opening as the specific ball entering area as the second ball entering means H.383. In other words, the player executes a weak right-hand hitting game in which the game ball is hit to the left of the separation portion 393 in the right area of the game board 31, which is the second direction, to generate a V winning jackpot game and leave the ceiling activated. The number of times can be intentionally reset, and the fact that the ceiling activation remaining number has been reset can be confirmed on the symbol display section 341 based on the ceiling activation remaining number reset display as the game state information.

It is conceivable that the ceiling activation remaining count reset display is displayed at least for a certain period after the V prize jackpot game ends. In addition, the ceiling activation remaining count reset display may be displayed on a standby screen (demo screen) that is shifted when neither a special game nor a special jackpot game is being executed. It is also conceivable to display by a predetermined operation on the operation button 20 or the selection button 21A. By doing so, the player can understand that the ceiling activation remaining count has been reset before starting a game on the gaming machine 10 .

here, Differences may occur in the knowledge and understanding of the players regarding the functions of the gaming machine 10 and the game method. for example, The game machine 10 is Having a ceiling function that generates a b time-saving game state, which is a high-frequency support mode, by executing a special game a predetermined number of times, b The number of special figure games required until the time-saving gaming state is generated, Having a ceiling activation remaining count reset function that sets to the maximum value by entering a game ball into the special electric V prize opening 383 of the special electric prize winning device 38, While there may be players who fully understand that this ceiling activation remaining count reset function can be activated by causing the game ball to flow down the second flow path 392 in a weak right-handed game, It is assumed that there are players who do not understand some functions and game methods of the gaming machine 10 . For the ceiling function, It is thought that there are many people who understand it because it is widely used, Also in game halls, it is widely practiced to clearly indicate that the game machine has a ceiling function by notation such as "play time". on the other hand, The gaming machine 10 is It has a function to reset the remaining number of ceiling activations by a weak right-handed game, For such characteristic features, It is difficult for players to immediately understand until it is widely popularized by players, There may be those who play the game without knowing the ceiling activation remaining count reset function and the ceiling activation remaining count reset method.

In this embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, resetting the ceiling activation remaining number is performed by causing a game ball to flow down to the second flow path 392 by a weak right-hand hitting game in which the game ball is hit to the left side of the separating portion 393. On the other hand, against the player's will, the game ball flows down the second flow path 392 due to the game ball's failure to shoot or the game balls interfere with each other, and the ceiling is activated. It can happen that the remaining number of times is reset. Therefore, a player who does not understand the ceiling activation remaining count reset function of the gaming machine 10 or the method of resetting the ceiling activation remaining count reset display (refer to FIG. 327 (B2)) alone cannot explain what happened. can't understand As a result, there is a possibility of continuing the game while misunderstanding that the number of executions of the remaining special game required to generate the b time saving game state is the number of times before the ceiling activation remaining number reset. In that case, the ceiling is not activated (b time-saving gaming state occurs) even though the player has executed the special game assumed, so the player can display the gaming machine 10 and the data display 103 ( The display of the number of executions of the special game after finishing the normal jackpot game first) causes distrust, lowers interest in the game machine 10, and may result in distrust in the game hall. unfavorable for Therefore, in order to solve such a problem, in place of or in addition to the reset display of the remaining number of ceiling activations (see FIG. 327 (B2)), the fact that the remaining number of ceiling activations has been reset by the player's own action is displayed. For example, it is preferable to perform this in the pattern display section 341 . Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, an explanation using a character image or , a moving image or a still image including an image simulating the special electric prize winning device 38 can be considered. In addition, not only when the ceiling activation remaining number of times is reset, but also when a game ball enters the special electric V prize opening 383 of the special electric prize winning device 38 on the demo screen during execution of the special game or during non-execution of the game. It is also conceivable to preliminarily explain the game that the number of ceiling activation remaining times is reset based on.

<Step S3945>
If the received command is not the ceiling activation remaining number counter reset command (step S3941: No), the MPU 51 executes a process based on another command (step S3945), and terminates the command determination process.

As described above, in the present invention, the control state of the auxiliary means for assisting establishment of the starting condition of the symbol variation game is the first control state that does not correspond to the specific game state, in the predetermined game state, opening and closing for a predetermined period When a game for a specific period different from a special game as a profit game is completed based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry area while the means is open, the first control state is changed to the specific game state. The control state is changed to the corresponding second control state. That is, in the present invention, even if the control state of the auxiliary means is in the predetermined game state which is the first control state that does not correspond to the specific game state, the game ball is entered into the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open. It is possible to generate a specific game state in which the control state with respect to the auxiliary means is the second control state by making a ball and executing the game for a predetermined specific period. As a result, even if the specific game state ends, it is possible to generate the specific game state again, so the gaming machine is left alone because the specific game state ends and the specific game state does not occur. is prevented, and a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine is suppressed.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, a special figure jackpot game that is a large profit game and a V prize jackpot game that is a small profit game can be given to the player as game profits. A special figure jackpot game as a large profit game is executed when a game ball enters the first prize winning port 314 or the second prize winning port 315 as a starting means. This game is highly profitable for the player who can obtain a large amount of game balls by opening and closing the variable winning port 316 as the third ball entry means a plurality of times. On the other hand, the V winning jackpot game as a small profit game is a special electric starting game that is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the special electric starting port 37 as the first ball entering means. It is executed when the game ball enters the special electric V winning opening 383 as a specific ball entering area provided by the second ball entering means that is opened by the operation of the special electric opening and closing door 382 as means, and the special electric electric big winning opening 381 It is possible to enter a game ball, but the number of game balls that can be obtained by entering the game ball into the Tokudendai winning opening 381 is small, and the profit for the player is small. In addition, in the present embodiment, the special electric starting port 37, the special electric grand prize-winning port 381, and the special electric V-winning prize port 383 are the second flow path 392 as a specific flow path set in the right side area of the game board 31. It is provided at a position where a ball can enter. In other words, the V winning jackpot game as a small profit game can be executed by launching a game ball into the second flow path 392 .

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the V winning jackpot game as a small profit game ends, the number of special game as a variable game that can generate the b time saving game state which is the first profit game state control Maximum value is set. Here, the b time-saving game state, which is the first profit game state control, is the opening and closing frequency of the electric accessory 315b as an auxiliary means for opening and closing the second winning opening 315 (the opening and closing frequency of the electric accessory 315b entering the second winning opening 315). In the low frequency support mode which is the second auxiliary state control with low ball support frequency), when the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 times) without executing the special figure jackpot game as a large profit game It is a time saving game state in which the upper limit number of times (for example, 1000 times) to be shifted to is defined. That is, in the present embodiment, the player continues to launch the game ball toward the second flow path 392, a special figure game that can be shifted to the b time-saving gaming state which is the first profit gaming state control The maximum value is set as the number of

And, in the present embodiment, the player continues to launch the game ball toward the second flow path 392 to generate the b time-saving gaming state which is the first profit gaming state control. By setting the maximum value as the number of times, when the special figure game of the upper limit number of times is executed without executing the special figure jackpot game as a large profit game in the b time saving game state which is the first profit game state control , the b time saving game state is shifted to the normal game state, and the first auxiliary state control in which the b time saving game state, which is the first profit game state control, does not occur. By continuing to launch the game ball toward , the second auxiliary state control capable of generating the b time-saving game state, which is the first profit game state control, can be generated by the intention of the player. Thus, in the present embodiment, since the player can generate the state that is the second auxiliary state control capable of generating the b time-saving game state that is the first profit game state control, large profit game It is possible to improve the operating rate for the gaming machine in which the b time saving game state, which is the first profit game state control, ends without the special figure jackpot game as being executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the player continues to launch the game ball toward the second flow path 392, so that the b time-saving game state, which is the first profit game state control, can be generated. Since the maximum value is set as the number of times, when the player ends the game in the state of the second auxiliary state control capable of generating the b time saving game state which is the first profit game state control, the player By continuing to launch the game ball toward the second flow path 392 before completing the V winning jackpot game as a small profit game, the b time saving game state which is the first profit game state control It is possible to clear the number of special figure games executed by the player in the state of the second auxiliary state control that can occur. As a result, the player can make the disadvantage received by the player in the state of the second auxiliary state control capable of generating the b time-saving game state, which is the first profit game state control, be the benefit of others. can be prevented. In other words, the player invests time, money, labor, etc. by the number of times the special game is executed in the state of the second auxiliary state control that can generate the b time-saving game state, which is the first profit game state control. The continuation of launching game balls toward the second flow path 392 indicates that such an investment will benefit others who later play games on the gaming machine, that is, be subject to so-called hyena behavior. Therefore, it can be prevented by the intention of the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to thirteenth embodiments described above are possible within the applicable range.

Moreover, in each embodiment, it is also possible to apply the matters described in other embodiments within the applicable range.

[Fifteenth embodiment]
In a gaming machine capable of transitioning to a value-giving state when predetermined count information is updated a predetermined number of times in a predetermined game state, an improvement in the method of informing a player is desired.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
a launching means capable of launching a game ball;
A starting ball entry area provided in a game area where game balls can flow down;
display means for variably displaying a predetermined pattern when a game ball enters the starting ball entry area;
variable ball entry means provided in the game area and performing opening and closing operations a plurality of times;
A gaming machine comprising
updating means for updating specific information based on establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display;
profit state generation means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information has reached a predetermined update state in a specific game state;
Notification control means for performing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or in a second notification mode different from the first notification mode;
Determination means for executing a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
Profit generating to generate a specific profit when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by a player when the result of the predetermined determination executed by the determination means is a specific determination result. means and
with
The notification control means, when the result of the predetermined determination executed by the determination means is a specific determination result, until a predetermined timing before a predetermined period of time before the specific information enters the predetermined update state. A switching means is provided for notifying that the specific determination result has been obtained in the first notification mode, and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing.

The specific information may be information that is updated based on establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display of predetermined symbols. As the specific information, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, various counters set in RAM, various commands, various flags, right or wrong information and reservation number information regarding the reservation of the right to execute a special game Information on the right to execute fluctuations, various information stored at a predetermined address in RAM, information stored in various buffers, a series of predetermined data groups, pointers for grasping update positions in data groups, time-saving games Time saving number counter corresponding to the remaining maximum number of time saving times of the state (a time saving number counter, b time saving number counter, c time saving number counter), counter corresponding to the remaining special figure game number until b time saving game state is generated ( Ceiling activation remaining number counter), jackpot random number counter, jackpot type counter, reach random number counter, special figure fluctuation type counter, jackpot random number initial value counter, random number counter per normal figure, random number counter per normal figure, random number counter per normal figure variation type random number counter , random number initial value counter per normal figure, opening time counter indicating the remaining opening time of the electric accessory, round number counter corresponding to the remaining number of rounds of the jackpot game, opening time corresponding to the remaining time of the opening of the jackpot game Counter, round game time counter corresponding to the maximum remaining time of the round game, ending time counter corresponding to the remaining time of the ending of the jackpot game, special figure fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, number of pending balls command, confirmation display command, special Figure shift command, 1st special figure reservation command, 2nd special figure reservation command, small winning game start command, profit display OP command, loss display OP command, small winning opening start command, small winning opening end command, movable feather operation Start command, small win game end command, big win game start command, opening start command, opening end command, round game start command, round game end command, interval start command, interval end command, ending start command, ending end command, jackpot game End command, special figure fluctuation display flag, special figure fluctuation stop flag, general figure fluctuation display flag, general figure fluctuation stop display flag, electric accessory open flag, jackpot game start flag, jackpot game flag, opening flag , Round game flag, interval flag, ending flag, jackpot game end flag, small win game start flag, small win opening flag, V winning opening opening/closing operation flag, movable feather operation flag, V winning flag, small winning Game flag, variable probability game state flag, normal game state flag, jackpot game state flag, small hit game state flag, normal game state flag, time saving game state flag (a time saving game state flag, b time saving game state flag, c time saving game state flag), the special symbol validity information stored in the first special symbol reservation area for the reservation of the right to execute the first special symbol game, the information on the number of reservations of the first special symbol game, the right to execute the second special symbol game Special figure right or wrong information stored in the second special figure reservation area for the hold, information about the number of reservations of the second special figure game, special figure right or wrong information stored in the special figure execution area for the special figure change, normal figure change General pattern correctness information stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area for the reservation of the right to execute, information that functions on the number of normal pattern fluctuation reservations, and when executing a special pattern game, for the entire special pattern game A series of drawing lists to be set, a series of drawing lists to be set for the whole of one big winning game when executing a big winning game, and a series of drawing lists to the whole of one small winning game when executing a small winning game A series of drawing lists set for a special game, a pointer for grasping the update position in the drawing list set for the special game, and a pointer for grasping the update position in the drawing list set for the jackpot game , Pointer for grasping the update position in the drawing list set for the small winning game, information stored in the display data table buffer (display data table), information stored in the additional data table buffer (additional data table ), information stored in a transfer data table buffer (transfer data table), drawing information stored in a frame buffer, any combination thereof, and the like.

The update means may be a process for updating the specific information. As updating means, if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, processing by software, overwrite control processing, write control processing, load processing, processing by hardware circuits, updating various counters set in RAM (addition, subtraction , initialization, clearing) processing, processing to update (set) various commands, processing to update various flags (on/off switching processing), information on whether the right to execute a special game is reserved and information on the number of reservations Processing to update, processing to update information on the right to execute normal figure fluctuation, processing to update various information stored in a predetermined address of RAM, processing to update information stored in various buffers, predetermined Processing to store a series of data groups in a predetermined storage area such as a buffer, processing to update (move) the pointer for grasping the update position in the data group, time saving number of times corresponding to the remaining maximum time saving number of times in the time saving game state Processing to update (subtract, add, initialize, clear) the counter (a time saving number counter, b time saving number counter, c time saving number counter), corresponding to the remaining special figure game number until b time saving game state is generated Processing to update (subtract or add) the counter (ceiling activation remaining number counter), processing to update the jackpot random number counter, processing to update the jackpot type counter, processing to update the reach random number counter, update the special figure fluctuation type counter Processing, processing to update the jackpot random number initial value counter, processing to update the random number counter per normal pattern, processing to update the type random number counter per normal pattern, processing to update the random number counter per normal pattern variation type, random value initial per normal pattern Processing of updating the value counter, processing of updating (subtracting, adding or clearing) the opening time counter corresponding to the remaining opening time of the electric accessory, updating (subtracting) the round number counter corresponding to the remaining number of rounds of the jackpot game or addition) processing, updating (subtracting or adding) the opening time counter corresponding to the remaining time of the opening of the jackpot game, updating (subtracting, adding or adding) the round game time counter corresponding to the maximum remaining time of the round game Clear) processing, processing to update (subtract or add) the corresponding ending time counter to the remaining time of the ending of the jackpot game, processing to update (set) the special figure variation pattern command, processing to update (set) the stop type command , Processing to update (set) the number of pending balls command, processing to update (set) the fixed display command, processing to update (set) the special figure shift command, process to update (set) the first special figure pending command, Processing to update (set) the second special figure pending command, processing to update (set) the small hit game start command, processing to update (set) the gain display OP command, processing to update (set) the loss display OP command , processing to update (set) the small winning opening start command, processing to update (set) the small winning opening end command, processing to update (set) the movable feather operation start command, update (setting) the small winning game end command ) processing, processing for updating (setting) the jackpot game start command, processing for updating (setting) the opening start command, processing for updating (setting) the opening end command, processing for updating (setting) the round game start command, Processing to update (set) the round game end command, processing to update (set) the interval start command, processing to update (set) the interval end command, processing to update (set) the ending start command, update the ending end command Processing to (set), processing to update (set) the jackpot game end command, processing to update the special figure fluctuation display flag (on / off switching processing), processing to update the special figure fluctuation stop flag (on / off Switching processing), processing to update the normal pattern fluctuation display flag (on / off switching processing), processing to update the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag (on / off switching processing), electric accessory opening flag Update process (ON/OFF switching process), process to update the jackpot game start flag (ON/OFF switching process), process to update the jackpot game flag (ON/OFF switching process), during opening flag Update processing (ON/OFF switching processing), updating the round game flag (ON/OFF switching processing), updating the interval flag (ON/OFF switching processing), updating the ending flag processing (ON/OFF switching processing), processing for updating the jackpot game end flag (ON/OFF switching processing), processing for updating the small winning game start flag (ON/OFF switching processing), small winning opening flag (ON/OFF switching process), V winning opening opening/closing operation flag updating process (ON/OFF switching process), Movable feather operation flag updating process (ON/OFF switching process) , Processing to update the small winning game flag (ON / OFF switching processing), processing to update the V winning flag (ON / OFF switching processing), processing to update the probability variable gaming state flag (ON / OFF switching processing) , processing to update the normal gaming state flag (ON / OFF switching processing), processing to update the jackpot gaming state flag (ON / OFF switching processing), processing to update the small winning gaming state flag (ON / OFF switching processing), processing to update the normal game state flag (on/off switching processing), processing to update the time saving game state flag (a time saving game state flag, b time saving game state flag, c time saving game state flag) (on/ OFF switching process), processing to update the special figure propriety information (addition or shift) stored in the first special figure reservation area for the reservation of the right to execute the first special figure game, the number of reservations of the first special figure game Processing of updating (adding or subtracting) information about, processing of updating (adding or shifting) special figure propriety information stored in the second special figure reservation area for holding the right to execute the second special figure game, second Processing to update (addition or subtraction) information on the number of reservations for special graphics games, processing to update (overwrite) special graphics information stored in the special graphics execution area, normal graphics for the reservation of the right to execute normal graphics fluctuation A series of drawing lists that are set for the entire special game when executing a special game, a process of updating the information on the general pattern correctness information and the number of general pattern fluctuation reservations stored in the reservation storage area is updated (stored in the drawing list area (buffer) set in the work RAM), and when a jackpot game is executed, a series of drawing lists set for the entire jackpot game are updated (work RAM (stored in the drawing list area (buffer) set to ), updating a series of drawing lists set for the entire small winning game when executing a small winning game (set in the work RAM processing to store in the drawing list area (buffer)), processing to update (move) the pointer for grasping the update position in the drawing list set for the special game, drawing set for the jackpot game Processing of updating (moving) the pointer for grasping the update position in the list, processing of updating (moving) the pointer for grasping the update position in the drawing list set for the small winning game, display data table buffer update the information stored in the buffer (display data table), update the information stored in the additional data table buffer (additional data table), update the information stored in the transfer data table buffer (transfer data table) processing, processing to update drawing information stored in the frame buffer, and any combination thereof.

The specific game state may be any state related to the game. As a specific game state, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, a normal game state, a time saving game state (a time saving game state, b time saving game state, c time saving game state), start or end of a jackpot game A state in which the number of special game executions in the time saving game state is initialized, a state in which the number of special game executions required to generate the b time saving gaming state is initialized by the start or end of the jackpot game, A jackpot game starts from the initialization of the number of special game executions required to generate the b time saving game state by clearing the RAM of the gaming machine, and the initialization of the number of special game executions in the a time saving game state. From the game state until the execution number of the special figure game is initialized in the b time saving game state to the start of the jackpot game, from the initialization of the special figure game execution number in the c time saving game state Game state until the start of the jackpot game, state from the end of the jackpot game to the start of the next jackpot game, probability variable game state, small win game state, state in which the opening is executed in the small win game, small win A state in which the V winning port is open in the game, a jackpot game state, a state in which the opening is executed in the jackpot game, a state in which the opening/closing execution mode is executed in the jackpot game, and each round game is executed in the jackpot game. The state where the ending is being executed in the jackpot game, the state from the start of the normal game to the end of the normal game state, fluctuation state of predetermined design (state from start of fluctuation of predetermined design to end of fluctuation), fluctuation state of special design (1st special design, 2nd special design) (special design of state from the start of fluctuation until the end of fluctuation), the fluctuation state of special symbols when the result of the jackpot lottery is a big win, the fluctuation state of special symbols when the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win, the jackpot lottery If the result is out, the fluctuation state of the special pattern, the fluctuation state of the normal pattern (the state from the start of the fluctuation of the normal pattern to the end of the fluctuation), If the result of the lottery per normal pattern is a hit Variation state of normal symbols, variation state of normal symbols when the result of the lottery for normal symbols is lost, state in which the movable body provided on the game board is in operation, execution state of various effects, performance is executed in the jackpot game The state in which it is done, the state in which the production is being executed in the special game, and any combination thereof.

The predetermined update state may be a state in which some kind of profit can be given to the player as a result of updating the specific information based on the establishment of the predetermined update condition in the variable display of the predetermined symbols. As the predetermined update state, if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, a state in which a jackpot game can be started, a state in which a jackpot game can be ended, a state in which a small win game can be started, and a small win game can be finished. A state, a state where you can start a game per normal pattern, a state where you can end a game per normal pattern, a state where you can start a probability variation gaming state, a state where you can end a probability variation gaming state, a state where you can start a time-saving gaming state , a state where the time-saving gaming state can be ended, b state where the time-saving gaming state can be started, b state where the time-saving gaming state can be ended, c state where the time-saving gaming state can be started, c state where the time-saving gaming state can be ended , a state in which it is possible to start variable display of predetermined symbols, a state in which variable display of predetermined symbols can be terminated, a state in which variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) can be started, special symbols ( 1st special pattern, 2nd special pattern), the state where the variable display of special symbols can be ended, the state where the variable display of special symbols can be started when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the state where the variable display of the special pattern can be started when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot The state in which the variable display of the special symbols has started, the state in which the variable display of the special symbols is being displayed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win, and the variable display of the special symbols when the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win is stopped. state where variable display of decorative patterns can be started; state where variable display of decorative patterns can be ended; state where variable display of decorative patterns can be started when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot; The state in which the variable display of decorative patterns has started when is a big win, the state in which the variable display of decorative patterns is being displayed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win, and the state of decorative patterns when the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win The state where the fluctuation display is stopped, the state where the fluctuation display of the normal pattern can be started, the state where the fluctuation display of the normal pattern is started when the result of the lottery per normal pattern is successful, the result of the lottery per normal pattern The state in which the variable display of normal symbols is being displayed in the case of a hit, the state in which the variable display of normal symbols is stopped when the result of the lottery for the normal pattern is a win, the state in which various counters have become 0, and the various counters are predetermined. The b time saving game state based on the fact that the subtraction type counter (ceiling activation remaining number counter) corresponding to the number of executions of the special figure game required to generate the b time saving game state becomes 0. The b time-saving game state based on the addition type counter (ceiling activation remaining number counter) corresponding to the number of executions of the special game required to generate the possible state and the b time-saving game state exceeding a predetermined value. Possible state, state where the value of the jackpot random number counter corresponds to the jackpot, state where the value of the jackpot random number counter corresponds to the value corresponding to the small win, and the value of the random number counter per normal corresponds to the win A state where the variable probability game state can be generated based on the subtraction type ending time counter becoming 0 corresponding to the remaining time for the ending of the probability variable jackpot game, and an addition corresponding to the remaining time for the ending of the probability variable jackpot game. A variable probability game state can be generated based on a formula ending time counter reaching a predetermined value or more, and a time saving game state based on a subtraction type ending time counter corresponding to the remaining time becoming 0 for the ending of a time saving jackpot game. Occurrence possible state, the ending of the time-saving jackpot game corresponds to the remaining time A state where the time-saving game state can occur based on the addition type ending time counter exceeding a predetermined value, the ending of the normal jackpot game corresponds to the remaining time A time-saving game state can be generated based on the subtraction type ending time counter becoming 0, and the ending of the normal jackpot game is based on the addition type ending time counter corresponding to the remaining time exceeding a predetermined value. A state in which a game state can be generated, a state in which the value of the subtraction type time counter corresponding to the remaining time of the small winning game becomes 0 when a game ball enters the V winning hole during execution of the small winning game, A special figure game is executed in a state where the value of an addition type time counter corresponding to the remaining time of the small winning game when the game ball enters the V winning hole during execution of the small winning game is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. In the case where a series of drawing lists set for the entire special game is updated (stored in the drawing list area (buffer) set in the work RAM), when executing the special game A state in which a series of drawing lists set for the whole of one special game is executed to the end (a state in which the drawing process in the display means in the special game is completed), and once when a jackpot game is executed A state in which a series of drawing lists set for the entire jackpot game is executed to the end (a state in which the drawing process in the display means in the jackpot game is completed), and one small hit when executing the small win game A state in which a series of drawing lists set for the entire game has been executed to the end (a state in which the drawing process in the display means in the small winning game has been completed), for grasping the update position in the drawing list for the special game A state in which the pointer indicates the last updated position in the drawing list, a state in which the pointer for grasping the updated position in the drawing list for the jackpot game indicates the last updated position in the drawing list, and a state in which the updated position in the drawing list for the small winning game , and any combination thereof.

The predetermined profit state may be a state in which some profit is given to the player. If the purpose of the present invention can be realized, the predetermined profit state may be, for example, a state in which prize balls are likely to be given, a big win gaming state, a small winning gaming state, a state in which the result of a big winning lottery tends to be a big win, or a big winning lottery. A state where the result is likely to be a small hit, a probability game state, a state where electric accessories are easy to operate, a state where the result of the lottery per normal drawing is likely to be a win, a time-saving game state, b time-saving game state, c time-saving game state, small In a winning game, the expected value of ball output is higher than in a winning game without V winning and in a short working time game state, and in a small winning game, a short working time game state is generated without V winning in a small winning game. A state in which the player has a higher expected ball output value, a state in which a specific effect is executed in a special game, a state in which a jackpot confirmation effect is executed in a special game, a state in which a probability variable jackpot confirmation effect is executed in a special game. , a state in which the effect of confirming the small hit is executed in the special game, a state in which the effect related to the game method in which the expected value of the ball output is advantageous in the special game is executed, and a ball is put out when the V prize is won in the special game A state in which a performance indicating that it is advantageous in terms of expected value is executed, a state in which a performance indicating that it is advantageous in terms of the expected value of the ball to be released is not allowed to win a V prize at the time of a small win in a special game, and a state in which a performance is performed that indicates that it is advantageous in terms of the expected value of winning balls. A state in which a specific performance is executed, a state in which a probability-variable promotion performance is executed in a jackpot game, a state in which a reservation continuous performance is executed in a jackpot game, and a time-saving game in which it is better to win a V prize in a small win game without winning a V prize. A state in which an effect is executed that indicates that it is more advantageous in terms of expected ball output value than the state is generated, and it is better to generate a b time-saving game state without V winning than V winning in a small winning game. A state in which an effect indicating being advantageous in terms of value is executed, an arbitrary combination thereof, and the like are included.

The notification mode may be any mode corresponding to a predetermined notification. As the notification mode, if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, an image notification mode, a light notification mode, a sound notification mode, a mode for notifying a player's profit, and a mode for notifying a player's disadvantage. , a mode of notifying an event that will occur in the future, a mode of notifying that a prize ball is likely to be given, a mode of notifying that it is in a big winning game state, a mode of notifying that it is in a small winning game state, A mode of notifying that the result of a big winning lottery is likely to result in a big win, a mode of notifying that the result of a big winning lottery is likely to result in a small winning, a mode of notifying that it is a probability game state, and an electric role. A mode of notifying that the object is in a state where it is easy to operate, a mode of notifying that the result of the lottery for normal drawing is likely to win, a mode of notifying that it is in a reduced working time game state, and b in a reduced working time game state. A mode of notifying that there is a short time game state, a state of notifying that it is a c time saving game state, and a state in which V winning in a small winning game has a higher expectation value than generating a b time saving game state without V winning. A mode for notifying that, a mode for notifying that the expected value of ball output is higher when the b time-saving game state is generated without V winning than V winning in the small winning game, when the small winning in the special game A mode of notifying that a performance indicating that V winning is advantageous in terms of expected value of winning balls is being executed, and in a special figure game, it is advantageous in terms of expected value of winning balls not to make V winning at the time of small winning. A mode of notifying that the effect indicating that is in a state of being executed, a display mode of the reach effect in the special game (reach effect type), a mode of notifying the reach effect type that will occur in the future in the special game (for example, effect stock), a mode of notifying that some kind of effect will occur in a special game (for example, a timer effect), a mode of notifying that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, a mode of notifying that the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win A mode of informing, a mode of informing that the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, a mode of informing that it is a big win after informing that the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss (for example, a resurrection effect), and a jackpot lottery A mode (e.g., promotion effect) for notifying that the type of jackpot after informing that the result is a jackpot is more advantageous to the player (probability variable jackpot, RUSH rush rush jackpot, jackpot with a larger number of rounds), Predetermined symbol stop mode (stop type) in the figure game, special symbol stop mode (stop type) in the special symbol game, stop mode of the special symbol to notify that it is a jackpot in the special symbol game, probability change in the special symbol game Stop mode of special symbols to notify that it is a jackpot, Stop mode of special symbols to notify that it is a normal hit in a special game, Stop mode of special symbols to notify that it is a time-saving jackpot in a special game, Special Stop mode for notifying that it is a small hit in the figure game, stop mode for notifying that it is out in the special figure game, stop mode (stop type) of the decorative pattern in the special figure game, being a big hit in the special figure game The stop mode of the decorative pattern that informs the (for example, double eyes stop), the stop mode of the decorative pattern that informs that it is a probability variable jackpot in the special game (for example, the double eyes stop of 7 patterns), It is a normal jackpot in the special game Decorative pattern stop mode (for example, even-numbered double eyes) to notify that, Decorative pattern stop mode to notify that it is a time-saving jackpot in a special game, Decorative design to notify that it is a small hit in a special game The stop mode, the stop mode of the decorative pattern that informs that it is out in the special game (for example, non-Zoro eyes stop), the stop mode of the decorative pattern that informs that it is out of reach in the special game, the special game In the stop mode of the decorative pattern that informs that it is reach other than the front and back off, the stop mode of the decorative pattern that informs that it is completely off in the special game (for example, the stop of the loose eyes), and the off in the special game A mode of changing from a stopped state of the decorative pattern to be notified (for example, a non-double stop state) to a stopped state of the decorative pattern to notify that it is out in the special game (for example, a double stop state), and a big hit in the special game From the stop state of the decoration pattern (for example, the even-numbered second stop state) to the stop state of the decoration pattern that informs that it is a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player (probable variable jackpot, RUSH rush rush hit jackpot, jackpot with a larger number of rounds). A mode that changes to (for example, the 7th Zorroth stop state), a normal pattern stop mode (stop type) in a normal game, a normal pattern stop mode that notifies that it is a hit in a normal game, and is out in a normal game A stop mode of normal symbols that informs that there is, an arbitrary combination of them, and the like.

The notification control means may perform processing for controlling the notification mode. As the notification control means, if it is possible to realize the purpose of the present invention, for example, processing for controlling the notification mode by image, processing for controlling the notification mode by light, processing for controlling the notification mode by sound, Processing for controlling to notify mode, processing for controlling to notify mode for player's disadvantage, processing for controlling to mode for notifying events that will occur in the future, and reporting that prize balls are likely to be awarded Processing to control to a mode, processing to control to a mode to notify that it is in a big win gaming state, processing to control to a mode to notify that it is in a small winning game state, and a state that the result of a big win lottery is likely to be a big win Processing to control to notify the state, processing to control to notify that the result of the jackpot lottery is likely to be a small win, processing to control to notify that it is a probability game state, electric accessary A process of controlling to notify that it is easy to operate, a process of controlling to notify that it is in a time-saving gaming state, b processing to control to a mode of notifying that it is in a time-saving gaming state, c A process of controlling in a mode of notifying that it is a time-saving game state, and notifying that the expected value of ball output is higher when V winning in a small winning game is generated than when b-time saving game state is generated without V winning. Processing to control to a mode, processing to control to a mode of informing that the expected value of ball output is higher when the b time saving game state is generated without V winning than V winning in the small winning game, special figure game In the above, control is performed in a state in which an effect indicating that it is advantageous in terms of the expected value of the ball to be released is to be given a V prize at the time of the small hit, and it is not given to the V prize at the time of the small hit in the special figure game. Processing for controlling to a state of notifying that the effect indicating that the ball expected value is advantageous is being executed, processing for controlling the display mode (ready-to-win effect type) of the ready-to-win effect in the special figure game, special figure Processing to control to a mode (for example, production stock) to notify the reach effect type that will occur in the future in the game, processing to control to a mode (for example, timer effect) to notify that some effect will occur in the special game, jackpot A process of controlling to notify that the result of the lottery is a big win, a process of controlling to a mode of notifying that the result of the big win lottery is a small win, and a mode of notifying that the result of the big win lottery is a loss. Control processing, processing for controlling in a mode (for example, resurrection performance) to notify that the result of the jackpot lottery is a win after informing that the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, and notifying that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Processing to control to a mode (e.g., promotion effect) that informs that the type of jackpot from is more advantageous to the player (variable jackpot, RUSH rush decision jackpot, jackpot with a larger number of rounds), predetermined symbols in special game The process of controlling to the stop mode (stop type), the process of controlling to the stop mode (stop type) of the special symbol in the special figure game, the process of controlling to the stop mode of the special symbol to notify that it is a jackpot in the special figure game , Processing to control to the stop mode of the special design that notifies that it is a probability variable jackpot in the special figure game, processing to control the stop mode of the special design that notifies that it is a normal hit in the special figure game, Time saving in the special figure game Processing to control to the stop mode of the special symbol to notify that it is a big hit, processing to control to the stop mode to notify that it is a small hit in the special symbol game, to the stop mode to notify that it is out in the special symbol game Processing to control, processing to control to the stop mode (stop type) of the decorative pattern in the special figure game, processing to control to the stop mode of the decorative pattern to notify that it is a jackpot in the special figure game (for example, double eyes stop), special Processing to control the decorative pattern stop mode (for example, stop of 7 symbols) to notify that it is a probability variable jackpot in the figure game, decorative pattern stop mode (for example, even number) to notify that it is a normal jackpot in the special figure game A process of controlling to double eyes of the pattern), a process of controlling to the stop mode of the decorative pattern that informs that it is a time-saving jackpot in the special game, and a stop mode of the decorative pattern that informs that it is a small hit in the special game Processing to control, processing to control to the stop mode (for example, non-double stop) of the decorative pattern that informs that it is out in the special game, stop of the decorative pattern that informs that it is front and back off reach in the special game Processing to control to the mode, processing to control to the stop mode of the decorative pattern that informs that it is reach other than front and back in the special game, stop mode of the decorative pattern that informs that it is completely out in the special game (for example, the barake A stop state of decorative symbols that informs that it is out in a special game from a processing to control to a mode of control, a decorative design that informs that it is out in a special game (for example, a non-double stop state). (For example, a double-rolling stop state), a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player from the decorative pattern stopping state (eg, an even-numbered double-rolling state) that notifies the jackpot in a special game (for example, a variable jackpot, RUSH) A process of controlling to change to a state in which the decorative pattern is stopped (for example, the 7th row stop state) to notify that it is a rush confirmed jackpot, a jackpot with a larger number of rounds), a stop state of the normal pattern in the normal game (stop type), processing to control to the stop mode of the normal pattern that informs that it is hit in the normal game, processing to control to the stop mode of the normal pattern that informs that it is out in the normal game, those Any combination of

The predetermined game condition may be a condition that is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player when the result of the predetermined determination performed by the determination means is the specific determination result. As long as the gist of the present invention can be realized, the predetermined game conditions include, for example, a condition that is established when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, a condition that is established when the result of the jackpot lottery is a variable win, and a jackpot lottery. Conditions to be established if the result of is a time-saving hit, conditions to be established if the result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot, conditions to be established if the result of the jackpot lottery is a small hit, and the result of the jackpot lottery is not out. A condition that is established in a certain case, a condition that is established in a jackpot game that is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and a player operates the launch handle in a jackpot game that is executed when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot Conditions established by shooting a game ball based on the above conditions, conditions established by a game ball entering a predetermined winning hole in a jackpot game executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, jackpot A condition established when a game ball enters a predetermined winning hole by shooting a game ball based on a player's operation of a shooting handle in a jackpot game executed when the result of the lottery is a jackpot. , a condition established by the game ball entering the V winning port in the jackpot game executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and a variable probability jackpot game executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot Conditions to be established in, conditions to be established by game balls entering the V winning opening in the probability variable jackpot game executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a probability variable jackpot, and when the result of the jackpot lottery is a time-saving jackpot Conditions established in the time-saving big winning game to be executed, conditions established in the normal big winning game executed when the result of the big winning lottery is a normal big win, small winning game executed when the result of the big winning lottery is a small winning Conditions to be established in, Conditions to be established by shooting game balls based on the player operating the shooting handle in the small winning game that is executed when the result of the big winning lottery is a small winning, the result of the big winning lottery A condition established by the game ball entering a predetermined winning hole by shooting the game ball based on the player operating the shooting handle in the small win game executed when is a small win, A condition established by a game ball entering a V prize opening in a small winning game executed when the result of a big winning lottery is a small winning, a condition established based on the operation of an operation button, and the front side of the game board. A condition established based on a touch operation, a condition established by the player operating the shooting handle to shoot the game ball, and a game ball shooting based on the player operating the shooting handle A condition established by a game ball entering a predetermined prize-winning hole, a condition established by shooting a game ball to the left side area of the game board based on the operation of the shooting handle, and a predetermined operation on the shooting handle. A condition established by shooting a game ball to the right side area of the game board based on, a condition established by shooting a game ball to the right side area of the game board based on a predetermined operation of the shooting handle, any of them Combination etc. are mentioned.

The specific benefit may be a benefit given when a predetermined game condition is satisfied. If the purport of the present invention can be realized, the specific benefit includes, for example, a benefit provided when the result of a predetermined lottery is a specific result, a benefit provided when the result of a jackpot lottery is a jackpot, Execution of jackpot game, execution of variable jackpot game, generation of variable jackpot game state based on entry of game ball into V winning port in jackpot game, execution of short-time jackpot game, game ball to V winning port in jackpot game Occurrence of a time-saving game state based on the entry of a ball, execution of a normal jackpot game, occurrence of a time-saving game state based on the execution of a normal jackpot game, profit given when the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win, small win Execution of a game, execution of a jackpot game based on the entry of a game ball into the V winning hole in a small win game, profit given when the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, and when the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss b Subtraction of the number of executions of the special game required to generate the time-saving gaming state, profit given when the result of the lottery per normal drawing is a win, execution of the normal drawing per game, predetermined winning opening Benefits given by entering game balls, awarding of prize balls based on the entry of game balls into predetermined winning slots, awarding of winning balls based on the entry of game balls into general winning slots (regular winning slots) , Giving a prize ball based on the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole that gives an opportunity to start the first special game, giving a game ball to the second winning hole that gives an opportunity to start the second special game Granting of prize balls based on winning balls, granting of prize balls based on the entry of game balls into variable winning openings (large winning openings) in jackpot games, and giving of game balls to variable winning openings (large winning openings) in small winning games Execution of jackpot lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first prize opening, execution of the first special game based on the entry of game balls into the first prize opening, 2 Execution of a jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball into a winning opening, execution of a second special game based on entry of a game ball into a second winning opening, entry (passing) of a game ball into a through gate Execution of lottery per normal drawing based on, execution of game per normal drawing based on entering (passing) of game ball into through gate, execution of specific effect, execution of specific effect in special game, execution in special game Execution of finalized jackpot effect, execution of promotion effect in special game, execution of resurrection effect in special game, execution of specific effect in jackpot game, execution of promotion effect in jackpot game, any combination thereof, etc. are mentioned.

The profit generating means may be any process that generates a specific profit. As the profit generation means, if the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, a process of generating profits that are given when the result of a predetermined lottery is a specific result, or a profit is given when the result of a jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Processing to generate a profit, processing to execute a jackpot game, processing to execute a probability variable jackpot game, processing to generate a probability variable game state based on the entry of a game ball into the V winning opening in the probability variable jackpot game, time saving jackpot game , processing to generate a time-saving game state based on the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening in the probability variable jackpot game, processing to execute the normal jackpot game, normal jackpot game execution Based on the time-saving game state Processing to generate, processing to generate profits given when the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win, processing to execute a small win game, jackpot game based on the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening in the small win game , processing to generate profit given when the result of the jackpot lottery is lost, execution of the special game necessary to generate the b time-saving gaming state when the result of the jackpot lottery is lost Processing to subtract the number of times, processing to generate profits that are given when the result of the lottery per normal drawing is a hit, processing for executing a game per normal drawing, given by entering a game ball into a predetermined winning opening processing to generate a profit, processing to award a prize ball based on the entry of a game ball into a predetermined winning aperture, processing to award a prize ball based on the entry of a game ball into a general winning aperture (normal winning aperture) , a process of giving a prize ball based on the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole that gives an opportunity to start the first special game, a game to the second winning hole that gives an opportunity to start the second special game Processing of awarding prize balls based on ball entry, processing of awarding prize balls based on entry of game balls into variable winning opening (large winning opening) in big winning game, variable winning opening in small winning game (big winning process of awarding a prize ball based on the entry of a game ball into the first winning opening, processing of executing a jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the first winning opening, and processing of entering a game ball into the first winning opening Based on the process of executing the first special game, the process of executing the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening, the second special game based on the entry of the gaming ball into the second winning opening Processing to be executed, processing to execute the lottery per normal pattern based on the entry (passage) of the game ball to the through gate, processing to execute the game per normal pattern based on the entry (passage) of the game ball to the through gate, Processing for executing a specific production, processing for executing a specific production in a special game, processing for executing a jackpot confirmation production in a special game, processing for executing a promotion production in a special game, executing a resurrection production in a special game processing, processing of executing a specific effect in the jackpot game, processing of executing a promotion effect in the jackpot game, any combination thereof, and the like.

By the way, in recent gaming machines, for example, in a predetermined game state such as a low probability mode (a state in which the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot is low), for example, the number of special figure fluctuations as update information (For example, a counter corresponding to the number of executions of a special game required to generate a b time-saving game state) is a predetermined profit state when the predetermined profit state is a time-saving game state (a so-called profit game state b time-saving game state, ceiling time saving game state). The notification for it is monotonous, such as only notifying the remaining number of special game games required until the specified number of times is reached, or displaying the same content until the specified number of times. is required. For example, specifically, in the time-saving game state b, which is a profitable game state, the second winning opening that provides the opportunity to execute the jackpot lottery is frequently opened by frequently operating the electric accessory. Therefore, in the b time-saving gaming state, it is easy to receive a prize ball award and a jackpot lottery as a privilege award based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole. As a result, in the b time-saving game state, the player can receive a jackpot lottery while suppressing the decrease in the number of game balls. In comparison, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls required to generate a jackpot game as a bonus.

In addition, in recent gaming machines, compared to the case where a jackpot game is generated as a privilege given when a game ball enters the first winning hole, the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole is used as a trigger. There is a tendency that the profit given to the player is set larger when a jackpot game is generated as a privilege. For example, a state (so-called RUSH state) in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur when a game ball enters the second winning port than when a game ball enters the first winning port. ) may be given preferential treatment. In one example, the RUSH entry rate is set to 50% when the game ball enters the first winning hole, whereas the RUSH entry rate is set to 50% when the game ball enters the second winning hole. The RUSH inrush rate for the case is set to 100%. Therefore, the b time-saving gaming state, which is a profitable gaming state, has a higher RUSH rush rate than the normal gaming state, and as a result, a low probability mode (a gaming state in which the probability that the jackpot lottery result will be a jackpot is low) Compared to the case where the first jackpot game occurs in the normal game state, the case where the first jackpot game occurs in the b time-saving game state in which the gaming state is the low probability mode is the first jackpot game after the occurrence. The expected ball output value (the average value of the total number of prize balls obtained by the player) is increased. In this way, the expected value of the ball output is higher in the b time-saving game state than in the normal game state when the first big winning game occurs.

Here, in order to shift from the normal game state to the b time saving game state, it is necessary to execute a specified number of special game in the normal game state in which the number of game balls is less than the b time saving game state. As a result, until the number of minus difference balls in the normal game state (the difference between the total number of prize balls and the number of game balls fired) reaches a predetermined number, the first jackpot game is generated in the normal game state. The difference ball expected value (the average value obtained by subtracting the number of shot balls from the total number of prize balls) is higher than when the first jackpot game is generated in the b time-saving game state. On the other hand, after the number of negative balls in the normal game state reaches a predetermined number, the expected value of the difference ball when the first big win game is generated in the b time saving game state is the first big win game in the normal game state. higher than when the In this way, from the viewpoint of the difference ball expected value, there is a state in which it is more advantageous for the player to generate a jackpot game in the normal game state, and a state in which the player is shifted to the b time-saving game state without generating a jackpot game in the normal game state. There is a state in which it is more advantageous for the player to generate a jackpot game.

However, in gaming machines, it is not possible to control the timing of generating a jackpot game. Therefore, a jackpot game may occur at the timing when the expected ball difference value in the normal game state is negative, for example, immediately before shifting to the b time-saving game state. And, in the normal game state, as a result of executing the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole, the RUSH may not be entered. In this case, the player cannot receive the benefits of rushing into RUSH, and the interest in the game may decrease.

On the other hand, in the present invention, when the result of the predetermined determination is the specific determination result, the specific information updated by the updating means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined update condition in the variable display is the predetermined A first notification mode informs that a specific determination result is obtained until a predetermined timing before a predetermined period of time before an update state is reached, and the notification mode is switched to a second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing. In this way, the fact that the result of the predetermined determination becomes the specific determination result is notified in the first notification mode until the predetermined timing before the predetermined update state occurs, and the specific determination result is notified after the predetermined timing. By switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at the timing, whether the timing at which the predetermined determination result becomes the specific determination result is before reaching the predetermined timing or after reaching the specific timing. can be judged. As a result, the player can determine whether or not it is advantageous to receive a specific benefit based on the specific determination result, based on the type of notification mode in which the timing of the specific determination result can be determined. It can be determined whether or not a predetermined game condition is established. As a result, based on the type of notification mode in which the timing of the specific determination result can be determined, the player can establish a predetermined game condition for the current specific determination result to receive a specific profit, or receive a specific profit. For the specific judgment result after the specified game condition is not established and the specified profit is not received for the specified determination result, and the specified information is updated to the specified state later and the specified profit state occurs Since it is possible to select whether or not to receive a specific profit by establishing a predetermined game condition by pressing, it is possible to receive a specific profit at a timing judged to be advantageous by the player himself/herself. Therefore, since the player can avoid receiving a specific profit when it is judged that receiving a specific profit is disadvantageous, the player can receive a specific profit at the timing when it is judged to be disadvantageous to him/herself. A decrease in interest and amusement in a game due to putting away is prevented.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, when the result of the special figure jackpot lottery, which is the result of the predetermined determination, is a small hit, which is the result of the specific determination, the value of the ceiling activation remaining counter, which is the specific information, is set to a predetermined value. Until reaching the break-even point, which is a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before 0, which is the update state, the fact that it is a small hit, which is the result of the specific determination, is notified by the opening effect of the first notification mode, which is the first notification mode. After reaching the break-even point, which is the specific timing, the fact that there is a small win, which is the result of the specific determination, is switched to be notified by the loss display opening effect, which is the second notification mode. That is, in the present embodiment, in a notification mode corresponding to the expected value of profit that the player can obtain at the stage of occurrence of the small winning game, the profit and loss of the expected value of profit is notified at the opening of the small winning game. . Therefore, when a small winning game occurs, the player pays attention to the opening performance of the small winning game, so that it is possible to grasp the profit and loss that the player can obtain at the stage The player can determine whether or not to generate the big winning game based on the notification mode in the opening effect of the small winning game. As a result, it is better to select not to generate the jackpot game when the expected value of the profit that can be obtained is higher if the jackpot game is not generated based on the small winning game, and to generate the jackpot game based on the small winning game. It is possible to select to generate a jackpot game when the expected value of profit that can be obtained is high. As a result, the player can avoid the disadvantage of not shifting to the b time-saving gaming state due to the occurrence of the jackpot game at the stage when the transition to the b time-saving gaming state, which is the ceiling time-saving gaming state, is approaching. is improved.

In particular, in the present embodiment, after reaching the break-even point, which is a specific timing advantageous to the player to shift to the b time-saving gaming state, which is the ceiling time-saving gaming state, the notification mode of the opening effect of the small winning game is switched. Therefore, even if a small winning game occurs in a period in which it is difficult to judge the profit and loss in the vicinity of the break-even point, a decision that is advantageous to itself is more reliably made based on the notification mode of the opening performance of the small winning game. becomes possible.

The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 328 to 391, focusing on differences from the first embodiment described above. However, important matters in this embodiment may be explained again even if they have already been explained in the first embodiment.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, the game machine includes "update information" as specific information, "update processing" as update means, and "playing state" as a specific game state. It also has an "update end state" as a predetermined update state, a "profitable gaming state" as a predetermined profit state, a "notification display" as a notification mode, and a notification control means. It has "notification display control", "privilege granting condition" as a predetermined game condition, "privilege granting" as a specific profit, and "privilege granting control" as profit generating means.

[Configuration of Gaming Machine 10]
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 328 to 330 in addition to FIGS. 1 to 3 described above. Here, FIG. 328 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the game machine 10 according to this embodiment, and FIGS. be.

[Configuration of front frame 11]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a selection decision unit 21, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, and an illumination portion 27. .

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23 . The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 7) for switching an input signal to the sound lamp control device 5 depending on whether or not the button is pressed. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine the operating state (operated or not operated) of the operation button 20 as described above (see FIGS. 45 and 46). This operation button 20 is triggered by the operation of the operation button 20 by the player during a predetermined operation reception period in the special game effect executed in the special game that clearly indicates the lottery result of the big win lottery to the player. It is operated for executing the operation button performance to be executed, switching the background performance (background stage) in the special game performance, and customizing the game such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined performance and character selection.

The shooting handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by the player to shoot the game ball. In the game machine 10, when a player performs a rotation operation as a predetermined game operation on the shooting handle 22, a game ball is shot from a game ball shooting mechanism 32 described later with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A basic game is performed by For example, in response to a predetermined game operation on the shooting handle 22 by the player, a so-called left-handed shot, in which a game ball is shot to the left side area of the game board 31, and a so-called right-handed shot, in which a game ball is shot to the right side area of the game board 31, are performed. can be executed. And, in this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, left-handed hitting is encouraged in order to enter the game ball into the first winning hole 314 as the starting ball entry area and to execute the first special figure game, and a predetermined In profit conditions, right-handed shots are encouraged. Specifically, for example, in the time-saving gaming state (a time-saving gaming state and b time-saving gaming state), which is a profitable gaming state, by entering the game ball into the second winning opening 315 or the through gate 317 as the starting ball entry area In order to establish the privilege granting condition and execute the second special game as the privilege grant, right-handed hitting is encouraged, and in the small winning game state which is the profit game state, V winning of the feather accessory device 83 as the privilege granting condition. Right-handed hitting is encouraged in order to establish the entry of the game ball into the opening 833 and generate a jackpot game as a bonus award. Right-handed hitting is encouraged in order to establish the entry of a game ball and receive a large amount of prize balls as a privilege. Therefore, the player can receive an appropriate award by executing a predetermined game operation on the shooting handle 22 that is encouraged according to the game state.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game ball launching mechanism 32 as a launching means, a game board 31 in which a game area in which game balls can flow is set, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 2 , the game ball launching mechanism 32 includes a launch rail 321 , a ball feeder 322 and a solenoid 323 . The launching rail 321 is formed from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 is directed to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It guides. The ball feeding device 322 has driving means such as a solenoid, and feeds game balls stored in the upper tray 23 onto the launch rail 321 one by one. The solenoid 323 is driving means for shooting game balls supplied onto the shooting rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 . In the gaming machine 10, when the player performs a predetermined game operation on the shooting handle 22, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled according to the operation of the shooting handle 22 by the player, and one solenoid 323 is generated every 0.6 sec. A game ball is shot toward the game area. In addition, the game ball shooting mechanism 32 may be a mechanism for shooting game balls using other driving means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323 .

As shown in FIG. 328, the game board 31 includes an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general prize winning port 313, a first prize winning port 314 and a second prize winning port 315 as starting ball entry areas, and a small prize winning port. A V winning port 833 and a normal winning port 834 of a feather accessory device 83, which will be described later, which are operated in a game, a variable winning port 316 as a variable ball entry means which is operated in a jackpot game, a through gate 317 as a starting ball entry area, An out port 318, a variable display unit 34 as display means, a main display section 36 as display means, and a feather accessory device 83 are provided.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending out game balls shot by a player's predetermined game operation with respect to the shooting handle 22 toward a game area on the board surface of the game board 31 . Then, game balls shot from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 by a predetermined game operation on the shooting handle 22 by the player enter the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the V winning opening 833. A game ball that does not enter the normal winning hole 834 or the variable winning hole 316 is discharged from the out hole 318. - 特許庁On the other hand, a game ball shot by a predetermined game operation on the shooting handle 22 by the player is a general winning opening 313, a first winning opening 314, a second winning opening 315, a V winning opening 833, a normal winning opening 834, or a variable winning opening. When the player enters the ball 316, a prize ball giving process is executed as privilege giving control, and a preset number of prize balls are paid out. For example, in prize ball giving processing as privilege giving control, 10 prize balls are given to a game ball entering the general winning hole 313, and a game to the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 is executed. 3 prize balls are given for the ball entering the game, and 10 prize balls are given for the game ball entering the V winning hole 833, the normal winning hole 834 or the variable winning hole 316. be.

In addition, when a game ball enters the through gate 317, no prize ball is paid out, but when the game ball enters the through gate 317 as a condition for awarding a privilege, winning or not lottery processing is performed as a privilege award. Privilege grant control regarding the normal figure per lottery is executed. And, when the result of the lottery per normal pattern is established as the privilege provision condition, the normal pattern per game is executed as the privilege provision. In this normal figure per game, the electric accessory 315b is operated as privilege provision control, so that the privilege provision is executed in which the second winning opening 315, which is the starting ball entry area, is opened. In this way, the game ball can enter the second winning opening 315 by opening the second winning opening 315 in the normal game.

In addition, when the privilege provision condition is satisfied with the entry of the game ball into the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315 as the starting ball entry area, a special jackpot lottery is executed as a privilege grant. This special figure jackpot lottery is realized by execution of privilege provision control by the main control unit 331 (MPU 41 of the main control device 4). Then, the result of the special figure jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 is displayed in the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36, which is a display means. Special figure) is notified by executing a special figure game (first special figure game or second special figure game) that is variably displayed. At the same time, the result of the special figure jackpot lottery is also reported by executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, which is the predetermined symbol, in the symbol display section 341 of the variable display unit 34, which is the display means.

Furthermore, when the special figure jackpot lottery result is a small prize and the privilege giving condition is established, a small prize game is executed as a privilege given after the special figure game ends. In this small winning game, the movable wing portion 832 and the V winning opening opening/closing portion 835 of the wing accessory device 83 are operated as privilege provision control, and the game ball can enter the V winning opening 833 and the normal winning opening 834. Become. In addition, when a game ball shot by a player's predetermined game operation on the shooting handle 22 enters the V winning opening 833 or the normal winning opening 834 and the condition for granting the privilege is satisfied, a prize ball is granted as a privilege grant. be done. Further, in the small winning game, when the game ball fired by the player's predetermined game operation to the shooting handle 22 enters the V winning opening 833 and the privilege granting condition is satisfied, the special winning game is awarded as a privilege. A jackpot game is generated after the end. In this way, in the small winning game, the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 833 or the normal winning opening 834 is established as a condition for granting a privilege by a predetermined game operation on the shooting handle 22 by the player. A prize ball can be given as a privilege, and entry of a game ball into a V winning hole 833 or a normal winning hole 834 as a privilege giving condition is established by a predetermined game operation on the shooting handle 22 by the player. Based on this, it becomes possible to generate a jackpot game as a bonus. Conversely, if the player does not perform a predetermined game operation with respect to the shooting handle 22, the entry of the ball into the V winning opening 833 and the normal winning opening 834 is not established as the condition for awarding the award, and the award is granted. is not received, and no jackpot game occurs after the end of the small hit game, so after the end of the small hit game Execution is possible.

Further, as described above, in the small winning game, when the game ball fired by a predetermined game operation on the shooting handle 22 by the player enters the V winning opening 833 and the privilege granting condition is established, the small winning A jackpot game is generated after the end of the game. In this jackpot game, a round game is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times or 16 times) in the opening and closing execution mode as privilege grant control. Operated between a position closing the mouth 316 and a position opening the variable winning mouth 316 . In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode, by executing the privilege grant control for the opening/closing door 319, the number of round games determined according to the result of the jackpot lottery from a plurality of round game numbers (for example, 5 times or 16 times) is performed. executed. In this way, in the jackpot game, since the variable winning opening 316 as the variable ball entry means is repeatedly opened in the open/close execution mode, the variable winning opening 316 as the privilege giving condition is obtained by a predetermined game operation of the shooting handle 22 by the player. It can be expected that a large amount of prize balls will be given as a privilege, based on the establishment of the entry of the game ball into the game ball. Conversely, if the player does not perform a predetermined game operation with respect to the shooting handle 22, the entry of the game ball into the variable winning hole 316 as the condition for awarding the privilege is not established, and the award is received. After the jackpot game is over, a special game can be executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315.例文帳に追加

[Feather accessory device 83]
Unlike the above-described first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment is configured as a 1-kind 2-kind mixing machine instead of a loop variable machine, and includes the feather accessory device 83 as described above. The feather accessory device 83 is operated in a small winning game in which a privilege is granted when a privilege granting condition is satisfied by the result of the big winning lottery being a small win. When the feather accessory device 83 is operated in this small winning game, two types of jackpot games are provided as a privilege based on the fact that the game ball enters the V winning opening 833 described later as the privilege granting condition. is executed.

The feather accessory device 83 is provided above the variable winning opening 316 as variable ball entry means and on the right side of the pattern display section 341 as display means. As shown in FIG. 329, the feather accessory device 83 has an introduction port 831 for introducing the game ball 99 into the interior of the feather accessory device 83, and a closed position (solid line position in FIG. 329) for closing the introduction port 831. and an open position (position indicated by a dashed line in FIG. 329) for opening the introduction port 831 by a drive means such as a solenoid (not shown). In a state where the inlet 831 is closed by the movable feather portion 832 due to the movable feather portion 832 being in the standby position, the game ball 99 is not introduced into the feather accessory device 83 . On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 330(A) and 330(B), when the inlet 831 is opened by the movable feather 832 being in the open position, the game ball 99 can be received by the movable feather 832. It is possible. The game ball 99 received by the movable wing portion 832 can be introduced into the wing accessory device 83 through the inlet 831 . The movable feather portion 832 is in the open position when the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315, which is the start ball entry area, is a small win (see FIG. 341 (A)). When activated, the introduction port 831 is opened for a predetermined time, for example, for a time (1.8 seconds or less) for one to three game balls 99 to enter the feather accessory device 83 . Of course, the opening time of the introduction port 831 at the time of the small win may be appropriately set, and is not limited to the time shown above.

Inside the feather accessory device 83, a V winning opening 833, a normal winning opening 834 and a V winning opening opening/closing section 835 are provided. The V winning opening 833 and the normal winning opening 834 are provided with ball entry sensors 833a and 834a (see FIG. 331), respectively. It is detected that the ball has entered the ball. When the entry of the game ball is detected by the ball entry sensors 833a and 834a of the V winning opening 833 or the normal winning opening 834 and the privilege granting condition is established, the privilege granting control is executed to execute the privilege. Prize ball giving is executed as the giving.

Between the closed position (see FIG. 330(A)) in which the V winning port 833 is closed and the open position (see FIG. 330(B)) in which the V winning port 833 is opened, It is rotated by driving means such as a solenoid (not shown). The V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 normally waits at a closed position to close the V winning opening 833, and is operated at a predetermined timing when the lottery result of the big winning lottery is a small winning, thereby opening the V A winning opening 833 is opened.

In this embodiment, the V winning opening 833 and the normal winning opening 834 are provided inside the feather accessory device 83, but the normal winning opening 834 may be omitted. Further, in the present embodiment, the wing accessory device 83 is provided separately from the variable winning port 316 as the variable ball entry means, but the variable winning port 316 is omitted and the wing accessory device 83 is operated in the jackpot game. It may be used as a variable entry means for

[System Configuration of Gaming Machine 10]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 331 to 345, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment and various tables used in the main controller 4 of the gaming machine 10 will be described.

Here, FIG. 331 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine 10. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 331, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 is basically the same as that of the above-described first embodiment. A ball entry sensor 833a for detecting entry of a game ball and a ball entry sensor 834a for detecting entry of a game ball into a normal prize winning opening 834 are provided.

[Electrical Configuration of Display Control Device 6]
Next, referring to FIG. 332, the electrical configuration of the display control device 6 will be described. 332 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the display control device of the game machine shown in FIG. 328. FIG. As shown in FIG. 332, the display control device 6 includes an MPU 631, a work RAM 633, a character ROM 634, a resident video RAM 635, a normal video RAM 636, an image controller 637, an input port 638, and an output port 639. , bus lines 640 and 641 .

The output side of the sound lamp controller 5 is connected to the input side of the input port 638 , and the MPU 631 , work RAM 633 , character ROM 634 and image controller 637 are connected to the output side of the input port 638 via the bus line 640 . . A resident video RAM 635 and a normal video RAM 636 are connected to the image controller 637 , and an output port 639 is connected via a bus line 641 . A pattern display unit 341 is connected to the output side of the output port 639 .

The MPU 631, character ROM 634, image controller 637, resident video RAM 635, and normal video RAM 636 will be described first, and then the work RAM 633 will be described below.

First, the MPU 631 controls the display contents of the pattern display section 341 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound ramp control device 5 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 4 . The MPU 631 incorporates an instruction pointer 631a whose address designation destination is updated (moved) by update processing, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 631a, and performs various processes according to the instruction code. to run. The MPU 631 is designed to be subjected to a system reset from the power control unit 9 immediately after power-on (including recovery from a power failure; hereinafter the same). 631a, the value of the instruction pointer 631a as update information is set to "0000H" by update processing automatically executed by the hardware of the MPU 631. FIG. Then, each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 631a as update information is incremented by one by update processing. Further, when the MPU 631 executes an instruction to set the instruction pointer 631a, the value of the pointer as update information indicated by the setting instruction is set to the instruction pointer 631a.

In this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 631 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in the character ROM 634 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the pattern display section 341. is stored in Of course, the control program executed by the MPU 631 and various fixed value data used in the control program may be stored in a dedicated program ROM.

The character ROM 634 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 634a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 634, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 6 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 631 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 634 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. This may occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 631, the processing performance of the display control device 6 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 631 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 634a of the character ROM 634 is transferred to the work RAM 633 provided for temporary storage of various data. store. The MPU 631 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 633 . The work RAM 633 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 631 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 6, and the design display section 341 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 634 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 631 and image data displayed on the pattern display section 341 , and is connected to the MPU 631 via a bus line 640 . The MPU 631 directly accesses the character ROM 634 via the bus line 640 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 634a1 of the character ROM 634 to the program storage area 633a of the work RAM 633. An image controller 637 is also connected to the bus line 640, and the image controller 637 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 634a2 of the character ROM 634 to a resident video RAM 635 connected to the image controller 637, or the like. Transfer to the normal video RAM 636 .

The character ROM 634 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 634a, a ROM controller 634b, a buffer RAM 634c, and a NOR ROM 634d.

The NAND type flash memory 634a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 634, and stores fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 631 and the pattern display unit 341. It has at least a second program storage area 634a1 and a character storage area 634a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the pattern display section 341. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 634 can be easily increased. Thus, in the game machine 10, by using the NAND flash memory 634a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 634a2 as images to be displayed on the pattern display section 341. . Therefore, the images displayed on the symbol display section 341 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 634a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 634a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 634a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the character ROM 634 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the pattern display section 341 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 6 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 634b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 634. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 631 or the image controller 637 via the bus line 640, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 634a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 631 or the image controller 637 via the bus line 640 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 634a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 634b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 634a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 634a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 634b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 634a including error bits. It is possible to prevent the MPU 631 from performing processing and the image controller 637 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 634b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 634a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 634 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 634a is used for the character ROM 634, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 634 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 634c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 634a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 634 is specified from the MPU 631 or the image controller 637 via the bus line 640, the ROM controller 634b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether data is set in the buffer RAM 634c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 634a (or NOR ROM 634d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 634c. do. Then, the ROM controller 634 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 631 and the image controller 637 via the bus line 640 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 634c is composed of two banks, and one page of data in the NAND flash memory 634a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 634b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 634a to the outside using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 631 or the image controller 637. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 634a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 631 or image controller 637 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 631 and the image controller 637 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading the character ROM 634 can be improved.

The NOR-type ROM 634d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 634, and is intended to complement the NAND-type flash memory 634a. ). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 634, the NOR-type ROM 634d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 634a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 634a. At least a first program storage area 634d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 6 so that various controls for the pattern display section 341 can be executed, and the MPU 631 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 6 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 634d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 634c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 634a), which should be processed first by the MPU 631 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 634d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 634c. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 631 sets the value of the instruction pointer 631a as update information to "0000H" by hardware, and transfers the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 631a to the bus line 640. configured to specify On the other hand, when the ROM controller 634b of the character ROM 634 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 640, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 634d1 of the NOR type ROM 634d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 634c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 631 .

When the MPU 631 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 634, the MPU 631 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code. The indicated address is assigned to bus line 640 . Then, the ROM controller 634b of the character ROM 634, while the address specified by the bus line 640 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 634d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 634c from the NOR ROM 634d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 634 c and output to the MPU 631 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 634a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 631 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 634d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 634a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 634a, an address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 631 via the bus line 640 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 631 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 634 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 634a and set it in the buffer RAM 634c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 634a, it takes a long time to read and set the buffer RAM 634c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start up the MPU 631 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the pattern display section 341 in the display control device 6 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 631 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 634d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 631 via the bus line 640 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 634 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 634d1 of the NOR type ROM 634d into the buffer RAM 634c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 631 . Therefore, the MPU 631 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 631 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 634 composed of the NAND flash memory 634a with a slow read speed, the control of the pattern display section 341 in the display control device 6 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 634a1 of the NAND flash memory 634a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 634d1 of the NOR ROM 634d. , fixed value data used in the control program (for example, a display data table, an additional data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) are stored in the work RAM 633 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 634a). program storage area 633a and data table storage area 633b. The MPU 631 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 634a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 634d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 634c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 633a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 634d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 634c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 634d1 is set in the buffer RAM 634c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 634c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 634a1 to the program storage area 633a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 634d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 634c is transferred to the program storage area 633a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 634d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 634d1 again in the buffer RAM 634c, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 634a1 is transferred to the program storage area 633a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 634d1 transfers the command pointer 631a to the program storage area 633a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 631 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 634a1 to the program storage area 633a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 631a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 633a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 634a1 are stored in the program storage area 633a, the MPU 631 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 633a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 631 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 634a having the second program storage area 634a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 633 having the program storage area 633a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 633 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 634 configured by the NAND flash memory 634a with a slow read speed, the MPU 631 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 634a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 634d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 634d1 is transferred to the program storage area 633a of the work RAM 633 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 634a1. The instruction pointer 631a is programmed to be included, and the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 633a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 631 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 634a1 to the program storage area 633a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 634d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all of the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 633a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, an additional data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are stored. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 634a1 to the program storage area 633a or the data table storage area 633b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 631a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 633a. Specifically, the second predetermined address is an initialization process (step S4102 in FIG. 377) that is executed after the boot process (see step S4101 in FIG. 377) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 633a. ), set the start address of the program corresponding to

By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 631 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 634a1 to the program storage area 633a or the data table storage area 633b. Then, when the boot program is executed by the MPU 631 to the end, the instruction pointer 631a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 631 is transferred to the program storage area 633a without referring to the NAND flash memory 634a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 634 configured by the NAND flash memory 634a with a slow read speed, the control program can be transferred to the program storage area 633a of the work RAM 633 after the system reset is released. , the MPU 631 can perform various controls by reading control programs from a work RAM composed of a DRAM with a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 6, and the design display section 341 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated presentations.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 634d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 631 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 634a1 of the NAND flash memory 634a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 634a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 633a. Therefore, the character ROM 634 can start up the MPU 631 in a short time simply by adding a NOR type ROM 634d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 637 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that executes update processing for drawing an image as update information and displays the drawn image on the pattern display section 341 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 637 executes an update process of drawing an image for one frame as update information based on a drawing list (see FIG. 339) transmitted from the MPU 631 to be described later. By developing an image drawn in one of the frame buffers 636c and outputting image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the design display section 341, the design display section 341 to display the image. The image controller 637 performs drawing processing as updating processing of one frame of image as update information and display processing of one frame of image in the image display time of one frame in the pattern display section 341 (this embodiment). Now, parallel processing is performed within 20 milliseconds).

The image controller 637 sends a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 631 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing as update processing for one frame of image as update information is completed. ). Each time the MPU 631 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 631 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 378(B)), and instructs the image controller 637 to draw the image for the next one frame as update information. Indicate (update). In response to this instruction, the image controller 637 executes drawing processing (update processing) of the image for the next one frame as update information, and also causes the pattern display section 341 to display the image developed by drawing previously. Execute.

In this manner, the MPU 631 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 637 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 637. Therefore, the image controller 637 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 631 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 637 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 637 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 and normal video RAM 636 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 631 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 635 and normal video RAM 636 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 or normal video RAM 636 based on instructions from the MPU 631 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 6, the MPU 631 instructs the image controller 637 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 635 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 635 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 637 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 635. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 635, there is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 634 composed of the NAND flash memory 634a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the pattern display section 341 .

In particular, in the resident video RAM 635, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by the main controller 4 or the display controller 6 are permanently resident. Even if the character ROM 634 is composed of the NAND flash memory 634a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until an image is displayed on the pattern display section 341. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 6 draws an image using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 635, before the drawing is performed, the display control device 6 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 634 in the normal video RAM 636. The MPU 631 is configured to instruct the image controller 637 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 636 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 634 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the pattern display part 341.例文帳に追加

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 636 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 635, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 635. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 635 can be suppressed.

The image controller 637 has a buffer RAM 637a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 634a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 637 by the MPU 631 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 634 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 635 or normal video RAM 636), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 635 or normal video RAM 636) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 637 reads one block of data as update information from a predetermined address of the character ROM 634 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 637a, executes an update process, When the video RAM 636 is unused, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 637a is transferred to the resident video RAM 635 or the normal video RAM 636. FIG. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 634 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 637a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 637a to the resident video RAM 635 or normal video RAM 636 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 or the normal video RAM 636, it is possible to prevent the resident video RAM 635 or the normal video RAM 636 from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 635 and the normal video RAM 636 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 635 and 636 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the pattern display unit 341 from being too late.

Image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 637a to the resident video RAM 635 or the normal video RAM 636 by the image controller 637. It is possible to easily determine the unused period for the display process to display, and to simplify the process.

The resident video RAM 635 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 634 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 635e and an error message image area 635f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 635b and a decoration pattern area 635d are provided.

The power-on main image area 635a corresponds to the power-on main image displayed on the pattern display section 341 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 635 is stored. This is an area for storing data. The power-on variation image area 635b is displayed when the game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is being displayed on the pattern display section 341 and a ball entering the first winning hole 314 is detected. In addition, it is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the result of the lottery performed in the main control device 4 by means of a special game effect.

The MPU 631 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 634 to the power-on main image area 635a when the power supply from the power control device 9 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 637 (see steps S4103 and S4104 in FIG. 377).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 333 . FIG. 333 shows a power-on image displayed on the pattern display section 341 immediately after the display control device 6 is powered on, while image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 635 is being transferred from the character ROM 634. It is an explanatory view explaining.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 6 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 634 to the power-on main image area 635a and the power-on varying image area 635b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 635 is transferred from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 6 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 635a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the pattern display section 341 .

At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 5 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 4, which is the instruction command to start variation, the display control device 6 displays FIG. As shown in FIG. 333(C), on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a variation image at power-on with a "○" pattern at the lower right position of the screen, and a "○" at power-on as shown in FIG. A power-on fluctuation image of an "x" pattern is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the pattern during the fluctuation period. Then, from the variation pattern command for display and the stop type command for display transmitted from the sound lamp control device 5 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 4, the jackpot lottery performed by the main control device 4 333(B) is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the special figure game effect if it is "small hit", and if it is "out", the image shown in FIG. 333(C) is displayed for a certain period of time after the special figure game production is stopped.

The MPU 631 instructed the image controller 637 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 635a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 635 was transferred to the resident video RAM 635. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 635, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the pattern display section 341.例文帳に追加Therefore, the display control device 6 can take time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 while the main image is being displayed on the pattern display section 341 when the power is turned on. can. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the pattern display section 341 when the power is turned on, the remaining image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 635 is not stored. It is possible to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 635 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped during the transfer from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the pattern display section 341 when the power is turned on. The character ROM 634 can be checked immediately, and by using the NAND-type flash memory 634a having a slow read speed as the character ROM 634, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In addition, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the pattern display unit 341, and the ball is detected to enter the first winning hole 314, the power-on fluctuation image area 635b is displayed. The power-on variation image is drawn using image data corresponding to the resident power-on variation image, and the images shown in FIGS. The MPU 631 instructs the image controller 637 as follows. As a result, a simple special-figure game effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple special symbol game performance even while the main image is displayed on the pattern display part 341 when the power is turned on.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the pattern display unit 341, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 635b. When a winning ball is detected in the first winning hole 314 while the image is displayed on the pattern display part 341, the corresponding special figure game performance can be immediately displayed on the pattern display part 341.例文帳に追加

Returning to FIG. 332, the back image area 635c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the pattern display portion 341. FIG. Here, with reference to FIGS. 334 and 335, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 635c among the rear images will be described. 334 and 335 are explanatory diagrams for explaining three kinds of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 635c of the resident video RAM 635 for each back image, and FIG. 334(A). 334(B) is for back surface B corresponding to "empty stage", and FIG. 335 is for back surface C corresponding to "island stage". are shown respectively.

As shown in FIG. 334, the back images corresponding to the back A and the back B among the backs A to C are images longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed in the pattern display section 341. provided for. The image controller 637 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the pattern display section 341 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each back surface A and back surface B (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed in the pattern display section 341 as a display area, and then an image between position a and position a' is displayed in the pattern display section 341 as a display area. It is designed to be scrolled.

When the operation button 20 is operated by the player to change the stage to the "town stage" or "empty stage", the MPU 631 moves the corresponding rear image from position a to position a' to the initial position of the display area. , and controls the image controller 637 so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the pattern display section 341 . As time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 637 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the pattern display section 341. When the image between the position c and the position d is reached, the image controller 637 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the pattern display section 341 as the image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, in the pattern display section 341, the images between positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth manner so as to flow leftward.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 335, the rear image on the rear surface C changes over time in the order of (A)→(B)→(C)→(A)→ . 341. Specifically, on the back surface C, the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed in a fixed position. 341. On the other hand, an image of the sky that spreads over the mountains changes its color tone with the passage of time.

When the player operates the operation button 20 to change the stage to the "island stage", the back image shown in FIG. In the rear image shown in FIG. 335(A), an orange sky indicating morning glow is displayed. As time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 335(B) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 335(B), a clear blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, as time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 335(C) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 335(C), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and further to orange. Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed, the rear image shown in FIG. 335(A) is displayed again, and the rear images shown in FIGS.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 635c will be described. As shown in FIG. 334(A), the rear surface A corresponding to the street stage, which is the initial stage, is stored in the rear surface of the resident video RAM 635 in all image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, from position a to position d. Stored in image area 635c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the initial stage, the town stage, is displayed. 635c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 634 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 6 can be reduced.

On the other hand, for the back surface B corresponding to the empty stage, as shown in FIG. back image area 635c. In addition, the back surface C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 335(A), and the image data corresponding to the back surface images between FIGS. It is stored in the back image area 635c of the resident video RAM 635 and made resident during the start-up process after the input.

Here, since the operation of the operation button 20 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at any timing based on the player's intention, even if the operation button 20 is operated at any timing, In order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 635. A large-capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position a to position a' or 335(A) to 335(B) are stored in the rear image area 635c of the resident video RAM 635. Therefore, even if the character ROM 634 is composed of a NAND flash memory 634a with a slow read speed, if the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of the operation button 20 by the player, the resident video RAM 635 By using the image data resident in the back image area 635c, the initial positions of the back B and C are immediately displayed on the pattern display unit 341, and scroll display or color tone is changed with the passage of time. can be displayed. In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images are stored for the rear surfaces B and C, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 635 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

After the image at the initial position is displayed, the rear surface B is scrolled from left to right in the range from position a to position b using the image data resident in the rear image area 635c of the resident video RAM 635. The range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636 during this period. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 636 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After scrolling the range from position a to position b without delay, the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 636 is used to scroll the range from position b' to position d to display the pattern. It can be displayed on the part 341 .

335(A) to 335(B) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 635c of the resident video RAM 635 after the image at the initial position is displayed on the rear surface C. 335(B) to 335(C) and 335(C) to 335(A) from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636. 335(A) to 335(B) are set. As a result, images corresponding to the images of FIGS. 335(B) to 335(C) and 335(C) to 335(A) are displayed while the images of FIGS. Since the data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 636, after displaying the images of FIGS. 335(B) to 335(C) and 335(C) to 335(A) are sequentially displayed over time using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 636. , can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 .

Image data stored in the normal-use video RAM 636 for the rear surfaces B and C is stored in sub-areas dedicated to rear-surface images provided in the image storage area 636a of the normal-use video RAM 636 (see FIG. 332). As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, in the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 635c of the resident video RAM 635 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 636 are images corresponding to images between positions b′ and b. Data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 637 by the MPU 631, the image data stored in the rear image area 635c of the resident video RAM 635 is used to display the image up to the position b on the pattern display unit 341. By using the stored image data to display the image from the position b' on the pattern display section 341, the rear image is scroll-displayed in a smooth connection on the pattern display section 341. - 特許庁

Further, the MPU 631 controls the image controller 637 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed as the display area on the pattern display section 341 using the image data in the normal video RAM 636. Then, the MPU 631 Using the image data in the rear image area 635c of the resident video RAM 635, the image controller 637 is controlled so that the image between the position a and the position a' is displayed on the pattern display section 341 as the display area. As a result, in the pattern display section 341, images between positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 332, the description continues. The decoration pattern area 635d is an area for permanently storing a decoration pattern as a predetermined pattern displayed on the pattern display section 341 as display means. That is, in the decorative pattern area 635d, image data corresponding to nine types of decorative patterns numbered from "1" to "9" (see FIG. 344) are resident. As a result, when the special symbol game effect is performed in the symbol display unit 341, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 634 one by one. A figure game presentation can be started. Therefore, after the ball is entered into the first winning hole 314 as the starting ball area, the first special symbol display unit 362 as the display means starts the variable display of the first special symbol. First, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the special symbol game effect is not immediately started in the symbol display section 341 as display means.

Further, in the decorative pattern area 635d, for example, as predetermined patterns to which the numerals "1" to "9" are not attached, a decorative pattern consisting of a backward pattern such as a wooden box, a rearward pattern and a planer, a wrapping cloth, etc. are displayed. , and image data corresponding to decoration patterns consisting of accessory patterns imitating characters such as helmets are also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the symbol display section 341, for example, when the next variation associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variation has stopped. As a result, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the pattern display section 341, a decorative pattern with no number is displayed as a decorative pattern in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the gaming machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the decorative symbols with no numbers from the display image of the symbol display section 341 .

The character design area 635e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the design display section 341 as display means. In the gaming machine 10, various characters including, for example, "Boy" are displayed according to various effects. When the control device 6 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 5, instead of newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 634, the control device 6 changes the character design area 635e of the resident video RAM 635. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 637 by reading out the image data previously resident in the . This eliminates the need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 634, so even if the character ROM 634 uses the NAND flash memory 634a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 635f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the gaming machine 10. FIG. In the game machine 10, when the sound lamp control device 5 detects vibration from the output of the vibration sensor attached to the back surface of the game board 31, the sound lamp control device 5 detects the occurrence of the vibration error by the error command, and the display control device 6 to notify. Also, when the sound lamp control device 5 detects other errors, such as magnetic force or radio waves detected by a magnet sensor or a radio wave sensor, the sound lamp control device 5 notifies the error by an error command. The display control device 6 is notified together with the error type. The display control device 6 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the pattern display section 341 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the game machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are preliminarily resident in the error message image area 635f. By reading the image data pre-resident in the image area 635f, the image controller 637 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 634. Therefore, even if the character ROM 634 uses the NAND flash memory 634a with a slow read speed, the error message corresponding to the error command is read after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 636 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated as needed, and has at least an image storage area 636a, a first frame buffer 636b, and a second frame buffer 636c.

The image storage area 636a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 635, among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the pattern display section 341. FIG. The image storage area 636a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is determined in advance.

The MPU 631 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 635 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 634 in a sub area provided in the image storage area 636 a of the normal video RAM 636 . , instructs the image controller 637 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 637 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 631 from the character ROM 634 and transfers the read image data to the specified sub-area of the image storage area 636a via the buffer RAM 637a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 631 instructs the image controller 637 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 631 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 637, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 636b and the second frame buffer 636c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the pattern display section 341 as display means. The image controller 637 writes an image for one frame as update information drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 631 to either one of the first frame buffer 636b and the second frame buffer 636c by update processing. An image for one frame is developed in a frame buffer, and while an image is developed in one of the frame buffers, image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and this image information is read out. By transmitting to the pattern display section 341 together with the drive signal, the process of displaying one frame of image on the pattern display section 341 is executed.

Thus, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 636b and the second frame buffer 636c, the image controller 637 develops one frame of image as update information drawn in one of the frame buffers. At the same time, it is possible to read one frame of image previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read one frame of image on the pattern display section 341 as display means.

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame as update information in order to display an image on the pattern display section 341 as display means are divided into two. The MPU 631 alternately designates one of the first frame buffer 636b and the second frame buffer 636c every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image is completed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 636b is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 636c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out one frame of image information as update information. 20 milliseconds after the completion of the image drawing process for one frame, the second frame buffer is used as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame as update information. 636c is designated, and the first frame buffer 636b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. As a result, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 636b can be read out and displayed in the pattern display section 341, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 636c.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 636b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding one frame of image, and the second frame is designated as a frame buffer from which one frame of image information as update information is read. A buffer 636c is specified. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 636c can be read out and displayed on the pattern display section 341, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 636b. After that, a frame buffer for developing one frame of image and a frame buffer for reading out one frame of image information are transferred to either the first frame buffer 636b or the second frame buffer 636c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying them alternately, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing (update processing) for the image for one frame as update information. can.

The work RAM 633 stores the control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 634, and is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 631. Configured. The work RAM 633 includes a program storage area 633a, a data table storage area 633b, a simple image display flag 633c, a display data table buffer 633d, an additional data table buffer 633e, a transfer data table buffer 633f, a pointer 633g, a drawing list area 633h, and a time counter. 633i, a stored image determination flag 633j, and a drawing target buffer flag 633k.

The program storage area 633a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 631 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 631 reads the control program from the character ROM 634, transfers it to the work RAM 633, and stores it in the program storage area 633a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 633a, the MPU 631 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 633a. As described above, since the work RAM 633 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 634 configured by the NAND flash memory 634a having a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 6, and the pattern display unit 341 is used. Therefore, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

The data table storage area 633b stores a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the pattern display unit 341 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 4, An additional data table describing display contents to be displayed with the lapse of time and one effect displayed by the display data table for the effect to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in addition to one effect based on the command from transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 635 and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 634a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 634a of the character ROM 634, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 631 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 634 to the work RAM 633 and stored in the data table storage area 633b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 633b, the MPU 631 controls the display of the pattern display section 341 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 633b. As described above, since the work RAM 633 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 634 configured by the NAND flash memory 634a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 6, and the pattern display section 341 can be can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the pattern display unit 341 based on a command from the main controller 4. For example, a special game effect, a demonstration effect, etc. , a confirmation display effect, a restart effect, and a re-lottery effect (re-lottery display) which is a special effect (see FIGS. 343 and 344).

It should be noted that, as described above, the demo production, even after a predetermined time has passed since one special game production stopped, when the next special game production accompanying the start winning prize is not started, the pattern as a display means This is an effect displayed on the display unit 341, in which a decorative pattern as a predetermined pattern to which the numbers "1" to "9" are not attached is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the symbol display portion 341, the player and the people involved in the hall can recognize that the gaming machine 10 is not playing a game.

Further, the confirmation display effect is an effect displayed on the symbol display unit 341 when a stop symbol is confirmed and displayed by receiving a confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 4 via the sound lamp control device 5. is. For example, when the result of the big win lottery is a win, a notification display control is performed to emphasize that the stop symbol as a notification display is a winning symbol, and when the result of the big win lottery is a small win, a notification is made. A notification display control is performed to emphasize that the stop symbol as a display is a small winning symbol. The player can easily judge the game value given by the content of the stop symbol by visually recognizing this fixed display effect.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 1 type 2 type mixing machine. When the symbol is a jackpot, notification display control is performed to emphasize the jackpot.

Further, in the restart performance, when a fixed command transmitted from the main control unit 4 is not received even after a predetermined time has passed since the decorative pattern as a predetermined pattern is stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern is displayed centering on a predetermined position. This is an effect of displaying a vibrated (swayed) image on the pattern display section 341 . When the player visually recognizes that the decoration pattern is vibrated and displayed after the variation of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed in the pattern display part 341, the player recognizes that the stop pattern is not determined at that time. can be done.

In addition, a re-lottery effect (re-lottery display), which is a special effect, is a special game in which a predetermined pattern is stopped and displayed as a notification display, and then the decorative pattern is changed and notified. This is an effect (display) that is determined and displayed as a display. In this embodiment, the re-lottery effect (re-lottery display) includes at least a resurrection effect (resurrection display) (see FIG. 343(B)) and a promotion effect (promotion display) (see FIG. 343(C)).

In the present embodiment, the resurrection effect (resurrection display) is a notification display in a combination corresponding to the loss of the decorative pattern as the predetermined pattern when the result of the big win lottery is a small win in the special game in the playing state. After the display is stopped by , the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed by the notification display in a combination corresponding to the small winning. Specifically, the resurrection effect (resurrection display) is a effect (display) in which the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed as the notification display except for the double eyes, and then the double eyes are confirmed and displayed as the notification display (Fig. 343(B)). reference).

In the present embodiment, the promotion effect (promotion display) is a small hit that generates a 4R short-time jackpot game by entering a game ball into the V winning opening 833 in a small win game in a special game that is in a playing state. After the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed by the notification display for notifying that there is, the decoration for notifying that it is a small win that generates a 16R time-saving big winning game by entering the game ball into the V winning prize opening 833 in the small winning game. This is an effect in which the symbol is confirmed and displayed by the notification display. Specifically, the promotion effect (promotion display) is the effect (display ) (see FIG. 343(C)).

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 1 type 2 type mixing machine. As a re-lottery effect (re-lottery display), which is a special effect in the special game, it is possible to execute a promotion effect (promotion display) or a resurrection effect (resurrection display). As the promotion effect (promotion display) in this case, for example, in the special game that is in the game state, it is possible to notify the promotion from the normal jackpot to the probability variable jackpot. It is conceivable to notify a jackpot from.

Further, the re-lottery effect (re-lottery display) in the special game that is in the in-game state does not include the effect (display) that is disadvantageous to the player. For example, the notification of the decrease in the number of round games executed as a jackpot game (demotion), the notification of the normal jackpot from the notification of the probability variable jackpot (demotion), the notification of the jackpot or the small hit (cancellation) is a re-lottery production (re-lottery indication) is not included. Specifically, for example, by executing a promotion effect (promotion display), which is a special effect in a special game, a small win that generates a 16R short-time jackpot game by entering a game ball into the V winning opening 833 in a small win game After being notified that it is, it is not notified that it is a small win that generates a 4R time-saving big winning game or that it is a loss until at least the small winning game is started or ended. In addition, after the execution of the promotion effect (promotion display) as a special effect that notifies the promotion from the notification display of the normal jackpot to the notification display to the probability variable jackpot in the special game, it is notified that it is a probability variable jackpot , At least until the probability variable jackpot game is started or ended, it is not reported that the game is a normal jackpot or a loss. In this way, the re-lottery effect (re-lottery display) does not include the effect (display) that is disadvantageous to the player, so that the game can be played by executing the promotion effect (promotion display) and the resurrection effect (resurrection display), which are special effects. Since it is possible to prevent the reduction or cancellation of the profit notified that the player can obtain, it is possible to prevent the loss of interest in the game due to the execution of the unreasonable performance (display).

The data table storage area 633b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the demonstration effect, the confirmation display effect, the restart effect, and the re-lottery effect (re-lottery display). In addition, if there are 32 patterns of effect patterns to be set, for example, 32 tables in total, one table for one effect pattern, are prepared for the variable display data table which is the display data table for the special game effect.

Furthermore, in the variable display data table, if the effect pattern instructed by the main control device 4 via the sound lamp control device 5 does not match the stop pattern to be displayed when the special figure game effect is stopped, for example A display pattern table for special variation is also prepared, which is used when the main control unit 4 instructs a stop symbol for losing when the performance pattern is a winning performance pattern. In this special variation, until the confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 4 via the sound lamp control device 5 is received, the decoration pattern is variably displayed at high speed, and the confirmation command is received. At the same time, special stop symbols (for example, symbols displaying "3", "4" and "1" in order from the left column) are fixed as stop symbols.

When the effect pattern instructed by the main control device 4 via the voice lamp control device 5 does not match the stop pattern to be displayed when the special game effect is stopped, the display control device 6 controls the main control device 4 There is a possibility that the result of the drawn lottery cannot be properly reflected and the final display cannot be performed in the special game performance. On the other hand, in the game machine 10, in such a case, a special variation effect is performed, and after the variation display, a special stop symbol indicating a special failure is fixedly displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Even if the result of the lottery is lost, it is possible to prevent the confirmation display of the big win from being erroneously displayed on the pattern display part 341.例文帳に追加Further, even if the special stop symbol is confirmed and displayed on the symbol display unit 341, if the lottery result in the main control device 4 is a small win, the actual game state of the gaming machine 10 shifts to a small win game state. The player can continue playing the game with peace of mind. Furthermore, by setting the fixed display to a special stop pattern, it is possible to suggest to the player that the gaming machine 10 may be in a small winning state even if the fixed display is off. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy because the gaming machine 10 enters a small winning state in spite of the fact that the confirmation display is off.

[Display data table]
Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 336 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table is associated with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) for one frame of an image to be displayed on the pattern display section 341, which is the display means, and is displayed at that time. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame, which is the update information to be updated.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for causing the symbol display section 341 to render sprites is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the pattern display section 341 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame, which is update information defined corresponding to each address, include one back image, nine decorative designs (design 1, design 2, . . . ), Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of light in an image, and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the pattern display unit 341, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are constant over time. Therefore, in the display data table for variation, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is defined. This back face type is to display one of the back faces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage"), or display back face A ˜Information specifying whether to display a rear image different from the rear surface C is described. Further, in the back face type, when specifying to display a back face image different from back face A to back face C, information specifying which back face image is to be displayed is also described.

If any of the back faces A to C is specified to be displayed by the back face type, the MPU 631 specifies the back face image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back faces A to C as the object to be drawn. Also, the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to C, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 631 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the pattern display section 341) was started. In this case, the MPU 631 selects the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the display database as the back image that was being displayed when the drawing of the image (or the display of the pattern display section 341) was started. and the elapsed time from the start of the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the pattern display section 341).

Furthermore, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and image drawing based on the display data table (or display of the pattern display unit 341) according to the back surface type. ), or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position Information indicating whether it is information indicating the elapsed time since was displayed, or whether it is information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of an image based on the display database (or the display of the pattern display unit 341) was started ) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The decorative patterns (design 1, design 2, . . . ) describe design type offset information as design type information for specifying the decorative design to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each decorative pattern. Instead of directly specifying the type of decoration pattern, the offset information is specified because the display of the decoration pattern in the special game production is the stop pattern in the special game production performed before This is because it changes according to the stop pattern in the special game production, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the fluctuation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset from the stop pattern of the special game production performed one before Include information. As a result, the special symbol game effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous special symbol game effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 4 via the sound lamp control device 5 Include information. As a result, in the special game effect, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 4 can be stopped.

In addition, since each decorative pattern is attached with a unique number, the variable pattern in the previous special game effect or the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 4 can be selected from the decorative pattern. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each decorative pattern, the decorative pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined time to switch from the offset information of the stop symbol in the special symbol game effect performed before to the offset information of the stop symbol in the special symbol game effect that is being performed this time is the predetermined symbol. It is set to be the time when the decorative pattern is displayed fluctuating at high speed. While the decorative pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the decorative pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern in the special game performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the decoration pattern is interrupted, the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. can do.

"0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 336) describes the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

MPU631, based on the command from the main control device 4 and the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 5 (for example, variation pattern command for display) specified from such as variation display time and the result of the jackpot lottery, in advance A display data table to be used is selected from a plurality of prepared display data tables, the selected display data table is read from the data table storage area 633b, stored in the display data table buffer 633d, and the pointer 633g is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 633g is incremented by 1 as update processing, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d is based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 633g. , the image contents to be drawn next are identified and a drawing list (see FIG. 339), which will be described later, is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 637, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 633g is updated by the updating process, the drawing contents as the update information are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the pattern display section 341. be done.

As described above, in the game machine 10, the display control device 6 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 5 based on a command or the like from the main control device 4. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 631, the effect to be displayed on the pattern display unit 341 can be achieved by simply performing an update process of appropriately replacing the display data table, which is update information, with the display data table buffer 633d. The image can be changed (updated).

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, if a program to be executed by the MPU 631 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is changed, complicated processing is required as the effect images become more diverse. In addition, there is a risk that the processing capacity of the display control device 6 will be limited, and that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited due to the enormous load imposed on the start-up and execution of the ever-expanding programs. . On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the symbol display section 341 can be changed (updated) only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table, which is update information, with the display data table buffer 633d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 6, various types of effect images can be displayed on the pattern display section 341, which is the display means.

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and one frame as update information is displayed according to the set data table. The reason why the drawing list can be created one by one is that the game machine 10 selects an effect to be displayed in advance on the pattern display unit 341 from a plurality of effect patterns according to the lottery result of the big win lottery performed based on the start winning and the fluctuation time. is determined. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. In this manner, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the set data table is updated frame by frame by update processing. The configuration of creating a drawing list as information can only be realized based on the fact that the game machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the symbol display section 341 based on the jackpot lottery performed based on the starting winnings. is.

[Additional data table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 337, details of the additional data table will be described. FIG. 337 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an additional data table. As described above, the additional data table describes the display contents to be displayed with the lapse of time for the effects to be displayed on the pattern display section 341 in addition to the one effect based on the command from the main control device 4. is. Here, "adding to one effect" means changing the display content of one effect based on a command from the main control device 4, for example, displaying an image that is not normally displayed in one effect. It includes the concept of superimposing another effect on the one effect, changing the color tone of part or all of the one effect, or changing the image displayed in the one effect. .

That is, the additional data table contains drawing contents necessary for adding and displaying an image that is normally not displayed for one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main controller 4. , the drawing content necessary to change the color tone of part or all of the one effect, or the drawing content necessary to change and display the image displayed in the one effect is.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is displayed in addition to the special figure game effect displayed by the display data table for variation selected based on the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) from the main control device 4 A case will be described where the display content for displaying the continuous advance notice effect is defined by the additional data table.

That is, the additional data table is prepared, for example, corresponding to the continuous notice effect that is additionally set for the special game effect, and specifically, the display mode of the continuous notice effect "bubbles", " Additional data tables corresponding to "egg", "chick", "chicken", and "chicken group" are stored in the data table storage area 633b.

In this additional data table, the content (drawing content) of one frame of image to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address is defined in detail in association with the address defined in the display data table. The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object to be additionally displayed in the image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and so on according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the pattern display section 341 to render a sprite, such as a translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

For example, in the example of FIG. 337, two effects (effect 1, effect 2) and two characters (character 1, character 2) are respectively associated with the address "0097H" defined in the display data table. Sprite type (effect type, character type), display position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are specified. On the other hand, if there is no display object to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, it means that there is no display object to be added corresponding to that address in the additional data table. Null data is defined (corresponding to address "0001H" in FIG. 337).

It should be noted that "0000H", which is the top address of the additional data table, contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, as in the display data table, and the last address of the additional data table (in the example of FIG. 337, "00FDH") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the additional data table are drawn. is described.

When the MPU 631 receives a continuous notice command from the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 631 reads an additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice mode indicated by the continuous notice command from the data table storage area 633b, and stores the additional data table in the work RAM 633, which will be described later. Store in the buffer 633e. Each time the pointer 633g is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 633g are drawn from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 633e. Then, the content of the image to be drawn next is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 339) is created as update information to be described later.

For example, in the example of FIG. 337, when the pointer 633g becomes "0097H", the MPU 631 adds various sprites defined at address "0097H" of the display data table to address "0097H" of the additional data table. Effect 1, Effect 2, Character 1, and Character 2 sprites are added to create a drawing list as updated information, and the image controller 637 is instructed to draw the image. On the other hand, when the pointer 633g is "0001H", it is determined that there is no display object to be added because Null data is specified at the address "0001H" of the additional data table, and the address "0001H" of the display data table is determined. 0001H" to generate a drawing list, which is update information. Further, when the information defined by the address indicated by the pointer 633g in the additional data table is "End" information, or when the pointer 633g indicates an address not defined in the additional data table (for example, , in the example of FIG. 337, when the pointer 633g indicates an address after "00FEH"), it is determined that there is no display object to be added, and updates are made based on various sprites defined in the display data table. Generates a draw list of information.

By transmitting the generated drawing list to the image controller 637, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, according to the update processing of the pointer 633g, which is the update information, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, and the drawing contents specified in the additional data table are added. An image as defined in the additional data table is displayed in the pattern display section 341 .

As described above, in the game machine 10, the display control device 6 displays a pattern according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 5 based on a command or the like from the main control device 4. When displaying another effect image (for example, a continuous notice effect image) in addition to the effect image (for example, special effect image) to be displayed on the display unit 341, the other effect image to be displayed in addition. By setting the additional data table corresponding to the additional data table buffer 633e, the effect image can be easily added to the base effect image and displayed. As a result, for example, when there are 32 types of original effect images and 5 types of other effect images to be additionally displayed, it is possible to temporarily display an image in which the other effect images are superimposed on each of the original effect images. If a data table is prepared separately, 32 x (1 + 5) = 192 types of display data tables must be prepared. By specifying separately, 32+5=37 kinds of displays and additional data tables can be prepared, and an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 633b can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to store data tables corresponding to various types of effects in the capacity prepared in the data table storage area 633b, and it is possible to easily achieve further diversification of the effects images.

Further, as in the gaming machine 10, by defining another effect image to be additionally displayed as an additional data table, after the display data table corresponding to the original effect image is set in the display data table buffer 633d, Even when it is decided to display another effect image to be additionally displayed, the additional data table corresponding to the other effect image is added without changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d. By simply setting in the data table buffer 633e, the additional effect image to be displayed can be easily displayed in addition to the original effect image.

Further, since the additional data table has the same data structure as the display data table, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d and the additional data set in the additional data table buffer 633e From the table, while updating the pointer 633g at each time, it is possible to easily specify the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer, and one drawing can be performed by the updating process corresponding to one frame from these. A list can be easily generated as update information. Therefore, even if the display of other effects is determined by the sound lamp control device 5 or the like in addition to the effects performed based on the command from the main control device 4, the additional effects to be displayed are not displayed. By defining the display contents in the additional data table, it is possible to easily display a wide variety of effects from a small number of data tables.

[Transfer data table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 338, details of the transfer data table will be described. FIG. 338 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 635 for normal use from the character ROM 634 to the image storage area 636a of the video RAM 636 for normal use and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 635, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 633b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 338). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 636a before the drawing of the given sprite starts according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 338).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 634 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 636). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 631 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 5 based on a command or the like from the main control device 4, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 633b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 633f of the work RAM 633, which will be described later. Each time the pointer 633g is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 633g are drawn from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 633e. 339), which is update information to be described later, is created, and image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is selected from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 633f. , and add the transfer data information to the created drawing list.

For example, in the example of FIG. 338, when the pointer 633g is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 631 stores the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table in the display data table and the additional data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list created based on the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 637 . On the other hand, when the pointer 633g is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 637 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 631, the image controller 637 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 634 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 636a according to the transfer data information. process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 636a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 634 to the image storage area 636a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 635 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 636a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 636a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 634 is composed of the NAND flash memory 634a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 634 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 636. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the pattern display section 341. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 635 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636 by the description of the transfer data table.

In addition, in the game machine 10, the display control device 6 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 5 based on a command or the like from the main control device 4. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 633d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 633f. Data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636 in units of sprites, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 636 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d. Thus, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 634 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 634a with a slow read speed, various effects images can be easily displayed on the pattern display section 341. can.

Returning to the description of FIG. 332, the simple image display flag 633c causes the pattern display section 341 to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. is a flag indicating whether to display This simple image display flag 633c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 635a or power-on variation image area 635b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 377) executed by the MPU 631 (see step S4105 in FIG. 377). Then, when all the resident target image data are stored in the resident video RAM 635 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, the image display section 341 is turned off to display an image other than the power-on image. It is set (see step S6105 in FIG. 389(B)).

This simple image display flag 633c is referenced in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 631 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 637 is detected (see step S4301 in FIG. 378), and the simple image display is performed. If the flag 633c is ON, the simple command determination process (see step S4308 in FIG. 378B) and the simple display setting process (see step S4308 in FIG. ) is executed (see step S4309). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 633c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 5 based on commands from the main control device 4 and the like. Processing (see FIGS. 379 to 383) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 384 to 387) are executed.

The simple image display flag 633c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 631 in the V interrupt process (see step S6001 in FIG. 389A), and the simple image display flag 633c is on. 389(B)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 (see FIG. 389(B)). If the simple image display flag 633c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 390) is executed to transfer the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636. FIG.

The display data table buffer 633d is for storing a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the pattern display section 341 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 5 based on a command or the like from the main control device 4. is a buffer of The MPU 631 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the pattern display section 341 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 5, and selects the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 633b. Then, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 633d. Then, the MPU 631 increments the pointer 633g by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 633g in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d, the image controller 637 A drawing list (see FIG. 339) is generated as update information (to be described later) in which the content of the instruction for drawing an image is described. As a result, the design display section 341 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d.

The additional data table buffer 633e responds to a command or the like from the sound lamp control device 5 to add an effect ( This is a buffer for storing an additional data table corresponding to continuous advance notice effects, etc.). When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 633d, the MPU 631 temporarily writes Null data, which means that there is no additional display object to be displayed, in the additional data table buffer 633e. Clear contents.

After that, the MPU 631 determines the presence or absence of an effect to be displayed in addition to the effect displayed on the pattern display section 341 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d based on a command or the like from the sound lamp control device 5. If there is an effect to be additionally displayed, the additional data table corresponding to the effect mode is selected from the data table storage area 633b, and the selected additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 633e. .

Then, the MPU 631 increments the pointer 633g by 1 by update processing, and updates the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d with the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 633g and the additional data table buffer 633e. A drawing list (to be described later) as update information describing the instruction content of image drawing to the image controller 637 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 633g in the additional data table stored in the See FIG. 339). As a result, the symbol display section 341 displays an effect corresponding to the additional data table in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Further, when the additional data table is not stored in the additional data table buffer 633e, since the additional data table buffer 633e stores Null data, the design display section 341 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table as it is. Is displayed.

The transfer data table buffer 633f stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 5 based on a command or the like from the main control device 4. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 633d, the MPU 631 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 633b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 633f. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d is stored in the resident video RAM 635, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 631 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 633f by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

Then, the MPU 631 increments the pointer 633g by 1 by update processing, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 633g in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 633f. If defined (that is, if Null data is not described), a drawing list (see FIG. 339) as update information to be described later describing the contents of image drawing instructions to the image controller 637 generated for each frame. to the transfer data information.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 631, the image controller 637 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 634 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 636a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 636a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 634 to the image storage area 636a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 635 can always be stored in the image storage area 636a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 634 is composed of the NAND flash memory 634a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 634 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 636, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the pattern display section 341. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 635 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 633g selects the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image from the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d, the additional data table buffer 633e, and the transfer data table buffer 633f, respectively. This is for designating the address from which the transfer data information of the data should be obtained. The MPU 631 once initializes the pointer 633g to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 633d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 631 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 637 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed (step in FIG. 384). In step S4303), pointer update processing (see step S5411 in FIG. 384) is executed as update processing, and the value of the pointer 633g, which is update information, is incremented by one.

The MPU 631 updates the pointer 633g from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 633e each time the pointer 633g is updated. Specify the drawing contents specified by the address, create a drawing list (see FIG. 384) as update information to be described later, and start transferring from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 633f at that time. The transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be drawn is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d is displayed on the pattern display section 341, and when the additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 633e, the additional data is displayed. An effect corresponding to the table can be displayed on the pattern display section 341 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the pattern display section 341 by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 633e. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 6, various effects can be displayed.

Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 633f is stored, based on the transfer data table, by the time the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite, the sprite Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 635 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 636a. As a result, even if the character ROM 634 is composed of the NAND flash memory 634a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 634 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 636, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the pattern display section 341. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 635 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 633h is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d, the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 633e, and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 633f. This area is for storing a drawing list as update information for instructing the image controller 637 to draw an image for one frame.

[Drawing List]
Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 339 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list, which is update information, is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 637 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. Decoration pattern (symbol 1, pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls pattern 1, number of reserved balls The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as pattern 2, . . . , error pattern). The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 637 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 635 or normal video RAM 636) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 637 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed in either the first frame buffer 636b or the second frame buffer 636c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 633k by update processing by the image controller 637. FIG.

The MPU 631 updates the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 633e with the rendering content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 633g, which is update information, and other data. Detailed drawing for all sprites used to draw one frame image based on the contents of the image to be drawn (for example, a reserved image that displays the number of reserved balls, a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.) Information (detailed information) is generated, and a drawing list is created by rearranging the detailed information for each sprite.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing data of the sprite (display object) are specified from the sprite type defined in the display data table and the additional data table and other image contents. generated according to the sprite type. For each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 635 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 636a of the normal video RAM 636 is fixed. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately identified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 631 stores other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite, for display data table and additional data. Copy the information defined in the table as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 631 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the predetermined patterns (design 1, design 2, . . . ) and effects (effect 1, effect 2, . . . ) are described. ), characters (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, . . . , error pattern).

The image controller 637 executes drawing processing for each sprite as update processing according to the order described in the drawing list as update information, and develops the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 633f, if the transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 633g, the MPU 631 stores the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 634, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 636a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 637 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 634 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 636 a of the normal video RAM 636 .

Returning to the description of FIG. 332, the clock counter 633i is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the pattern display section 341 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 633d, the MPU 631 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the pattern display section 341 .

Then, the MPU 631 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 378 (B )) is executed, the clock counter 633i, which is update information, is decremented by one (see step S5413 in FIG. 384). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 633i becomes 0 or less, the MPU 631 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. perform various operations to

The stored image determination flag 633j determines whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 635 are stored in the image storage area 636a of the normal video RAM 636. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not

The stored image determination flag 633j, which is update information, is generated by initial setting processing (see step S4102 in FIG. 377) executed by the MPU 631 in the main processing when the power is turned on. The storage image determination flag 633j generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status of all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 636a.

The update processing of the stored image determination flag 633j is executed when the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 390) executed by the MPU 631. will be In this update process, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 636a. Image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 636a as that one sprite are always unstored when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, the stored state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 635 from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636, the MPU 631 refers to the stored image determination flag 633j to determine whether the image of the sprite to be transferred is transferred. It is determined whether the data has already been stored in the image storage area 636a of the normal video RAM 636 (see step S6215 in FIG. 390). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 636a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see step S3216 in FIG. 390). ), the image controller 637 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 634 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 636a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 636a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 6 and the traffic on the bus line 640 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 633k selects a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") for developing an image drawn by the image controller 637 from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 636b and the second frame buffer 636c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 633k is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 636b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 636c. The information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 637 together with the drawing list, which is update information (see step S6302 in FIG. 391).

As a result, the image controller 637 executes the drawing process of drawing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 637 reads previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer, and sends the image information to the pattern display unit 341 together with the drive signal. By transferring the image, display processing for displaying the image on the pattern display unit 341 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 633k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 637 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the buffer flag 633k to be drawn, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 636b and the second frame buffer 636c each time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 631 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 637 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame image are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the process (see FIG. 378) is executed (see step S6302 in FIG. 391).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 636b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 636c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 636c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. A first frame buffer 636b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 636b can be read out and displayed in the pattern display section 341, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 636c.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 636b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 636c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 636c can be read out and displayed in the pattern display section 341, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 636b. After that, a frame buffer for developing one frame of image and a frame buffer for reading one frame of image information are transferred to either the first frame buffer 636b or the second frame buffer 636c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

[Normal figure per hit/fail table]
Here, FIG. 340(A) and FIG. 340(B) are diagrams showing an example of a general-purpose hit/failure table. In this embodiment, two types of the normal game state normal pattern hit/failure table shown in FIG. 340(A) and the time-saving game state normal pattern hit/failure table shown in FIG. It is That is, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state and when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, the probability of hitting a normal figure is different, and the time-saving gaming state is normal The normal pattern hit probability is set higher than the game state.

340(A) shows the normal game state general pattern per hit/fail table, in the normal game state (low frequency support mode, low probability support mode) as the game state, the game ball passing through the through gate 317 benefits It is a table used in the lottery per normal figure that is executed as a privilege grant when the grant condition is satisfied. As shown in FIG. 340(A), in the normal game state general pattern hit/fail table, when the value of the general pattern random number counter C4 which is the update information is 0, the normal pattern per normal pattern random number counter C4 value is 1 to 299 are set to be out. In other words, in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), the normal pattern per probability is set to 1/300, and the operating frequency/operating probability of the electric accessory 315b is low.

The time-saving game state normal figure per hit/fail table shown in FIG. It is a table used in the lottery per normal figure that is executed as a privilege grant when the grant condition is satisfied. As shown in FIG. 340 (B), in the time-saving game state general pattern per hit/fail table, contrary to the normal game state general pattern per hit/fail table, when the value of the random number counter C4 per normal pattern which is the update information is 0 When the value of the random number counter C4 is 1 to 299 per normal pattern, it is set per normal pattern. That is, in the time-saving game state, the probability of hitting a normal pattern is set to 299/300, and the probability of hitting a normal pattern is set higher than in the normal game state, and the operating frequency and operating probability of the electric accessory 315b are increased. there is

The normal hit random number counter C4, which is the update information, is updated by executing the update process in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. , and reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Then, in the general pattern first reservation area SE1 to the general pattern fourth reservation area SE4 of the general pattern reservation storage area 412c, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 317 is stored. .

It should be noted that the normal pattern per probability in the normal game state and the normal pattern per probability in the time saving game state are not limited to the examples shown in FIGS.

[Type distribution table per normal figure]
Here, FIG.340(C) and FIG.340(D) are figures which show an example of the classification table per normal figure. In this embodiment, as per normal figure type distribution table, normal game state per normal pattern type distribution table shown in FIG. Two types are set. That is, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state and when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, the normal figure per type (short open normal figure per and long open Per normal figure) distribution probability is different.

Here, when the privilege grant condition is satisfied because the result of the lottery per normal pattern is per normal pattern, the game per normal pattern executed as per privilege is per short open normal pattern, the electric accessory 315b is By being operated for a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds), the maximum opening time of the second winning opening 315, which is the starting ball entry area, is set to a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds). In this short-open normal game, the operation time of the electric accessory 315b is short and the opening time of the second winning port 315 is short, so the game ball is difficult to enter the second winning port 315. 2. A game ball does not enter the winning hole 315. - 特許庁

On the other hand, when the privilege grant condition is satisfied because the result of the lottery per normal pattern is per normal pattern, the per game per normal pattern executed as a privilege is per long open normal pattern, the electric accessory 315b is long. By operating for a period of time (for example, 6 seconds), the maximum opening time of the second winning opening 315, which is the starting ball entry area, is set to a long time (for example, 6 seconds). In this long open normal game, the operating time of the electric accessory 315b is long, so the opening time of the second winning opening 315 is long, so the game ball easily enters the second winning opening 315, and the second special figure game can be reserved up to an upper limit (for example, 4).

The normal game state normal pattern per type distribution table shown in FIG. 340(C) is a table used for distributing the normal pattern per type in the normal game state as the in-game state. As shown in FIG. 340 (C), in the normal game state per normal pattern type distribution table, when the value of the per normal pattern random number counter C5, which is the update information, is 0 to 199, it becomes a short open per normal pattern, and a long There is no distribution per open normal figure. In other words, in the normal game state, when the privilege provision condition is established by the result of the lottery per normal pattern is per normal pattern, the short open normal pattern per game that is executed as a privilege provision is executed. Therefore, the normal gaming state is set as a gaming state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second winning hole 315 .

Figure 340 (D) is shown in the time-saving game state normal figure per type distribution table, in the time-saving game state (a time-saving game state, b time-saving game state) as a state during the game, it is used to distribute the type per normal figure table. As shown in FIG. 340 (D), in the time-saving game state normal pattern per type distribution table, when the value of the normal pattern per type random number counter C5, which is the update information, is 0 to 199, it becomes a long open normal pattern, and a short There is no distribution per open normal figure. That is, in the time-saving game state, when the privilege granting condition is satisfied because the result of the lottery per normal pattern is per normal pattern, the long open normal pattern per game executed as privilege provision is executed. Therefore, the time-saving gaming state is set as a gaming state in which the game ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 315 .

The normal per type random number counter C5, which is the update information, is updated by executing the update process in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. dynamically updated and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Then, in the general pattern first reservation area SE1 to the general pattern fourth reservation area SE4 of the general pattern reservation storage area 412c, the value of the normal hit type random number counter C5 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 317 is stored. be. In addition, when the value of the normal per random number counter C4 stored in the normal map 1st reservation area SE1 to the normal map 4th reservation area SE4 is the normal map per, the normal map 1st reservation area SE1 to the normal map 4th reservation Depending on the value of the normal per type random number counter C5 stored in the area SE4, the type per normal pattern (per short open normal pattern and per long open normal pattern), that is, the operating time of the electric accessory 315b (the second winning opening 315 maximum open time) is set.

Of course, the allocation rate between the short open normal figure hit and the long open normal figure hit in the normal game state and the time saving game state (a time saving game state, b time saving game state) is not necessarily limited to the above example, It can be changed as appropriate, for example, it may be possible to generate a long open normal game per game at a constant rate in the normal game state, and it may be possible to generate a short open normal game per game at a constant rate in the time saving game state.

Further, the opening of the electric accessory 315b is not limited to once per game per normal figure, and may be multiple times. In this case, the opening time and the opening interval (interval between openings) of each opening of the electric accessary 315b in one normal game may be one type or a plurality of types.

[Jackpot success table]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 341(A) to 341(C), the jackpot success/failure table used in the special jackpot lottery will be described. Here, FIG. 341(A) is a diagram showing an example of a special 1 jackpot hit/fail table, FIG. 341(B) is a diagram showing an example of a b time-saving special 2 jackpot hit/fail table, and FIG. 341(C) is a It is a figure which shows an example of a time-saving special 2 jackpot success-or-failure table. In this embodiment, as the jackpot hit/failure table, a special 1 jackpot hit/failure table used in the special figure jackpot lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole 314 shown in FIG. 341(A) as a trigger, A special 2 big hit table used in a special figure big hit lottery executed with the entry of the game ball to the second winning hole 315 in the b time saving gaming state shown in FIG. ) is set with a special 2 big hit table used in the special figure big hit lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the time saving game state shown in a).

As shown in FIG. 341 (A), in the special 1 jackpot success/failure table, 206 random values of 0 to 205 out of the values (random values) of 65536 jackpot random number counters C1 of 0 to 65535 in the updated state corresponds to a small win, the other random numbers correspond to a loss, and the small win probability is set to approximately 1/318.1 (206/65536). In other words, when a game ball enters the first winning hole 314 as a trigger, it is difficult for a small winning game to occur.

Here, in the normal game state as the in-game state, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second winning hole 315 by hitting to the right. Hitting is encouraged. Therefore, in the special 1 jackpot success/failure table, it is mainly difficult to enter the game ball into the second winning hole 315 by right-handed hitting, and left-handed hitting is encouraged in order to enter the game ball into the first winning hole 314. It is used in the normal game state as a game state. As a result, in the normal game state, when the player executes a left-handed shot that is encouraged by a predetermined game operation on the shooting handle 22, a special figure jackpot lottery mainly using the special 1 jackpot success/failure table is performed. As a result of the hard hitting game, the big hitting game based on the entry of the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 in the small hitting game is also hard to occur.

As shown in FIG. 341 (B), in the b time-saving special 2 jackpot propriety table, 206 jackpot random number counter C1 values (random values) of 0 to 65535, which are in the updated state, are 206 of 0 to 205. A random number corresponds to a small win, other random numbers correspond to a loss, and the small win probability is set to about 1/318.1 (206/65536). That is, the small hit probability in the b time-saving special 2 big hit success/failure table is set to be the same as the special 1 big success success/failure table, and is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the b time-saving gaming state. , it is difficult for a small winning game to occur. That is, in the b time-saving gaming state as the gaming state, the special figure jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning port 314 in the b time-saving gaming state, and the second in the b time-saving gaming state The small winning probability is set to be the same for the special big winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the winning opening 315.例文帳に追加Therefore, in the b time-saving gaming state, even if it is a special jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into any of the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315, it is difficult for the small winning game to occur. As a result, it is difficult for a jackpot game to occur.

Here, the b time-saving gaming state is executed each time the special figure game starts or ends as a result of the special figure game being executed a specified number of times in the gaming state from after the end of the jackpot game until the next jackpot game is executed. By the update process, the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter as update information described later becomes the update end state (for example, 0), so that the normal game state is shifted. Right-handed hitting is encouraged in order to enter the game ball into the winning hole 315 . Therefore, the b time-saving special 2 jackpot success/failure table is mainly used when the player executes a right-handed shot that is encouraged by a predetermined game operation on the shooting handle 22 .

As shown in FIG. 341 (C), in the a time-saving special 2 jackpot propriety table, among the values (random values) of 65536 jackpot random number counters C1 of 0 to 65535 in the updated state, 8484 of 0 to 8483 A random number corresponds to a small win, other random numbers correspond to a loss, and the small win probability is set to about 1/7.725 (8484/65536). That is, the small hit probability in the a time-saving special 2 big hit right or wrong table is set significantly higher than the special 1 big hit right or wrong table (see FIG. 341 (A)) and b time-saving special 2 big hit right or wrong table (see FIG. 341 (C)) It is

Here, in the a time-saving gaming state, the game ball fired by a predetermined game operation on the shooting handle 22 by the player in the small winning game enters the V winning opening 833 When the privilege grant condition is established, the It is transferred when the big winning game to be given a privilege after the ending of the small winning game ends. Therefore, when the big winning game ends, a small winning game that triggers the occurrence of the big winning game is likely to occur.

It should be noted that the jackpot random number counter C1, which is the update information, is updated by step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. , and is reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Then, in the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special figure reservation area RE1 of the special figure reservation storage area 412b, or the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REAB of the second special figure reservation area REB stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 at the timing when the game ball enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315.

[Jackpot classification table]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 341(D) and 341(E), the jackpot type table used in the special jackpot lottery will be described. Here, FIG. 341(D) is a diagram showing an example of a special 1 jackpot type distribution table, and FIG. 341(E) is a diagram illustrating an example of a special 2 jackpot type distribution table.

As shown in FIG. 341 (D), in the special 1 jackpot type distribution table, among the 20 jackpot type counter C2 values (random values) of 0 to 19 that are in the updated state, 19 of 0 to 18 The random value is the 4R short time jackpot, and one random value of 19 is the 16R short time jackpot. That is, in the present embodiment, in the small winning game executed when the result of the big winning lottery is a small winning, the privilege granting condition is based on the entry of the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83. When established, the type of jackpot game to be executed as a privilege is set at the time of a special jackpot lottery. In this embodiment, in the special jackpot lottery by the ball entering the first winning hole 314, the distribution of the 5R short-time jackpot is 95%, and the distribution of the 16R short-time jackpot is 5%.

As shown in FIG. 341 (E), in the special 2 jackpot type distribution table, among the 20 jackpot type counter C2 values (random numbers) of 0 to 19 that are in the updated state, 5 of 0 to 4 The random number is the 4R short time jackpot, and the 15 random numbers from 5 to 19 are the 16R short time jackpot. That is, in the present embodiment, in the small winning game executed when the result of the big winning lottery is a small winning, the privilege granting condition is based on the entry of the game ball 99 into the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83. When established, the type of jackpot game to be executed as a privilege is set at the time of a special jackpot lottery. In this embodiment, in the special jackpot lottery by the ball entering the first winning hole 314, the distribution of the 5R short-time jackpot is 25%, and the distribution of the 16R short-time jackpot is 75%. That is, when triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315, the 16R jackpot game is more likely to occur than when the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole 314 is triggered. The expected ball output value is higher when the game ball enters the second winning hole 315 as a trigger.

In addition, the jackpot type counter C2, which is the update information, is updated by executing the update process in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. , and is reset to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Then, in the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special figure reservation area RE1 of the special figure reservation storage area 412b, or the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REAB of the second special figure reservation area REB stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2 at the timing when the game ball enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315. Also, when the value of the big hit random number counter C1 is a small hit, the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special figure reservation area RE1 of the special figure reservation storage area 412b, or the second special figure reservation area Depending on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REAB of REB, the type of jackpot (4R jackpot and 16R jackpot), that is, the number of round games when the jackpot game is executed is set. be done.

Here, the normal game state as the in-game state is shifted from the time-saving game state a when a predetermined number (five or nine) of game balls enter the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving game state a. . That is, a small winning game is executed based on the fact that the result of the special figure big winning lottery in the normal game state becomes a small winning, and the game ball 99 enters the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 in the small winning game. When a jackpot game is started based on what has been done, the jackpot game is a so-called first hit. Then, in this embodiment, the number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state a when the first hit jackpot game ends is set to one time, and the second game ball based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 is set. The maximum number of reserved rights to execute a special game is four. Therefore, the number of special jackpot lotteries (second special game) that can be executed with the opening of the second winning port 315 started in the a time saving game state is up to 5 times (1 time saving + remaining pending 4 times). As a result, in the first hit from the normal game state, the number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state is set to 1 time, so the probability of entering RUSH, in which the jackpot game is likely to occur continuously, is 50%. . On the other hand, when the jackpot game generated based on the game ball entering the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving game state a or the time-saving game state b ends, the number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state a is 5 times. is set. Therefore, the number of special figure jackpot lottery (2nd special figure game) that can be executed with the opening of the second winning port 315 started in the a time saving game state or b time saving game state is up to 9 times (time saving 5 times + remaining hold 4 times). As a result, the RUSH rush rate for the first hit from the b time-saving game state is 100%, and the b time-saving game state due to ceiling activation is a profit game state. In addition, the RUSH continuation rate in the a time-saving gaming state that shifts after the end of the jackpot game is 71.3%.

[Variation table]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 342(A) and 342(B), a special figure (first special figure, second special figure) which is a predetermined symbol in a special figure game (first special figure game, second special figure game) 2 special figure) and the variation table for setting the variation pattern (variation display time) of the decorative design will be described. Here, FIG. 342(A) is a diagram showing an example of a losing variation table, and FIG. 342(B) is a diagram showing an example of a winning variation table.

As shown in FIG. 342(A), the loss fluctuation table sets the fluctuation display time of the special figure (first special figure, second special figure) and decoration pattern when the result of the special figure jackpot lottery is lost. used to As the loss variation table, two types of tables are defined according to the type of loss. Specifically, there are two types: when the type of loss is accompanied by the reach of the decorative pattern (front and back reach, reach other than front and back), and when the type of loss does not involve the reach of the decorative pattern (complete loss). is set.

If the off type is accompanied by the reach of the decorative pattern (front and back off reach, reach other than front and back off), the value (random value) of 200 special figure variation type counters CS1 of 0 to 199 in the updated state, The fluctuation display time of 100 random numbers from 0 to 99 is 30 seconds (special figure fluctuation pattern "01"), and the fluctuation display time of 50 random numbers from 100 to 149 is 60 seconds (special figure fluctuation pattern " 02”), and the fluctuation display time of 100 random numbers from 150 to 199 is 90 seconds (special figure fluctuation pattern “03”).

On the other hand, if the out type does not involve the reach of the decorative pattern (completely out), 150 of 0 to 149 out of the 200 special figure fluctuation type counter CS1 values (random values) of 0 to 199 that are in the updated state The random number fluctuation display time is 7 seconds (special figure fluctuation pattern "04"), and the fluctuation display time of 50 random numbers from 150 to 199 is 10 seconds (special figure fluctuation pattern "05").

In addition, the special figure variation type counter CS1, which is the update information, is updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. 17 and step S1414 in FIG. It is periodically updated by adding 1 in order, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Then, in the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special figure reservation area RE1 of the special figure reservation storage area 412b, or the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REAB of the second special figure reservation area REB , the value of the special figure variation type counter CS1 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 is stored.

Here, in the present embodiment, any one of the special figure variation patterns "01" to "05" is selected in the off variation table according to the value of the special figure variation type counter CS1. Then, when the special figure variation pattern "01" is selected (when the reach outside the front and back or the reach other than the front and back is selected), the audio lamp control device 5 has a variation display time of 30 s as a variation type (production pattern type). A certain normal ready-to-win effect pattern is determined, and a special game effect is executed in the symbol display section 341 or the like according to the normal ready-to-win effect pattern. The normal reach production pattern is a production pattern in which a normal reach production is executed after a high-speed fluctuation production (high-speed fluctuation display), and is a production pattern in which the final individual production type in the special game production is a normal reach production (Fig. 342 (C )reference). In addition, when the special figure variation pattern "02" is selected (when the reach outside the front and back or the reach other than the front and back is selected), in the voice lamp control device 5, the variation display time is 60 s as the variation type (production pattern type). A certain super ready-to-win effect pattern is determined, and a special game effect is executed according to the super ready-to-win effect pattern in the symbol display section 341 or the like. The super reach production pattern is a production pattern in which the normal reach production is executed after the high speed fluctuation production (high speed fluctuation display), and then the super reach production pattern is executed, and the final individual production type in the special game production is the super reach production. It is a pattern (see FIG. 342(D)). Furthermore, when the special figure variation pattern "03" is selected (when the reach outside the front and back or the reach outside the front and back is selected), the audio lamp control device 5 has the longest variation display time as the variation type (production pattern) 90s is determined, and a special game effect is executed in the symbol display section 341 or the like according to the special reach effect pattern. The special reach production pattern is a production pattern in which a normal reach production is performed after a high-speed fluctuation production (high-speed fluctuation display), then a super reach production pattern, and a special reach production is executed, and the final individual production type in the special game production is special. This is an effect pattern that becomes a ready-to-win effect (see FIG. 342(E)). Also, when the special figure variation pattern "04" is selected (when complete deviation is selected), the non-reach effect pattern which is 7s with the shortest variation display time as the variation type (effect pattern) in the audio lamp control device 5 is determined, and when the special figure variation pattern "05" is selected (when complete deviation is selected), the non-reach effect pattern in which the variation display time is 10 s as the variation type (effect pattern) in the voice lamp control device 5 is determined, and a special game effect is executed in the symbol display portion 341 or the like according to the non-reach effect pattern. The non-ready-to-win effect pattern is an effect pattern in which a high-speed fluctuation effect (high-speed change display) is executed without executing a ready-to-win effect (see FIG. 342(F)).

As shown in FIG. 342 (B), in the hit variation table, when the result of the special figure jackpot lottery is a small hit, the variation display time of the special figure (first special figure, second special figure) and the decorative pattern used to configure. In this hit fluctuation table, among the 200 special figure fluctuation type counter CS1 values (random numbers) from 0 to 199 that are in the updated state, the fluctuation display time of 20 random numbers from 0 to 19 is 30 seconds (special Figure fluctuation pattern "01"), the fluctuation display time of 100 random numbers from 20 to 119 is 60 seconds (special figure fluctuation pattern "02"), and the fluctuation display of 70 random numbers from 120 to 199 Time is 90 seconds (special figure fluctuation pattern "03").

In addition, the special figure variation type counter CS1, which is the update information, is updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. 17 and step S1414 in FIG. It is periodically updated by adding 1 in order, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Then, in the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special figure reservation area RE1 of the special figure reservation storage area 412b, or the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REAB of the second special figure reservation area REB , the value of the special figure variation type counter CS1 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 is stored.

Here, in this embodiment, in the per variation table, one of the special figure variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the special figure variation type counter CS1. Then, when the special figure variation pattern "01" is selected, the normal reach production pattern with a variation display time of 30 s is determined as the variation type (production pattern type) in the sound lamp control device 5, and the normal reach pattern is displayed in the pattern display unit 341 and the like. A special game effect is executed according to the effect pattern. The normal reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which a normal reach performance is executed after a high-speed fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation display), and is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the special game performance is a normal reach performance. Further, when the special figure variation pattern "02" is selected, the super reach effect pattern whose variation display time is 60 s is determined as the variation type (effect pattern type) in the sound lamp control device 5, and in the symbol display unit 341 etc. A special game effect is executed according to the super ready-to-win effect pattern. The super reach production pattern is a production pattern in which the normal reach production is executed after the high speed fluctuation production (high speed fluctuation display), and then the super reach production pattern is executed, and the final individual production type in the special game production is the super reach production. It's a pattern. Furthermore, when the special figure variation pattern "03" is selected, the special reach effect pattern with the longest variation display time of 90 seconds is determined as the variation type (effect pattern) in the sound lamp control device 5, and the symbol display unit 341 and the like are determined. A special game effect is executed according to the special ready-to-win effect pattern. The special reach production pattern is a production pattern in which a normal reach production is performed after a high-speed fluctuation production (high-speed fluctuation display), then a super reach production pattern, and a special reach production is executed, and the final individual production type in the special game production is special. This is a production pattern that serves as a reach production.

In this way, when the result of the special figure jackpot lottery is a small hit, any one of "01" to "03" is selected as the special figure variation pattern, so that the symbol display unit 341 performs voice lamp control. In the device 5, a reach performance pattern (normal reach performance pattern, super reach performance pattern, or special reach performance pattern) is determined as a variation type (performance pattern).

Also, in the hit variation table of the present embodiment, unlike the off variation table, the reach production pattern (normal reach production pattern, super reach production pattern, or special reach production pattern) is the special production re-lottery production (re- Lottery display) includes a reach effect pattern that is executed.

Here, FIG. 343(A) is a diagram for explaining an example of an effect pattern in which a re-lottery effect (re-lottery display) is executed. The production pattern shown in FIG. 343(A) is a special ready-to-win production pattern in which a resurrection production (resurrection display) and a promotion production (promotion display) are executed as a re-lottery production (re-lottery display) after execution of the special ready-to-reach production. This is an example of the case.

Although drawings are omitted, as a special reach production pattern, a production pattern in which only a resurrection production (resurrection display) is executed as a re-lottery production (re-lottery display) after the execution of the special reach production, or after execution of the special reach production An effect pattern in which only promotion effect (promotion display) is executed as re-lottery effect (re-lottery display) may be included.

In addition, in the normal effect pattern in which the re-lottery effect (re-lottery display) is executed, at least one of the resurrection effect (resurrection display) and the promotion effect (promotion display) as the re-lottery effect (re-lottery display) after the normal effect is executed. is executed. Further, in the special effect pattern in which a re-lottery effect (re-lottery display) is executed, at least one of a resurrection effect (resurrection display) and a promotion effect (promotion display) is performed as a re-lottery effect (re-lottery display) after execution of the special effect. is executed.

Note that the hit variation table of the present embodiment does not include a non-reach effect pattern unlike the loss variation table, but when the non-reach effect pattern is included in the hit change table, a re-lottery effect ( You may set the production|presentation pattern by which a re-lottery display) is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 343(B), 343(C) and 344, the re-lottery effect (re-lottery display) will be described. Here, FIGS. 343(B), 343(C) and 344 are diagrams for explaining the re-lottery effect (re-lottery display).

As shown in FIG. 343(B), the resurrection effect (resurrection display), which is a special effect in the special game in the in-game state, is a decorative pattern as a predetermined pattern when the result of the jackpot lottery is a small hit. is stop-displayed by the notification display in the combination corresponding to the loss, and then the decoration pattern is stop-displayed by the notification display in the combination corresponding to the small win. Specifically, the resurrection effect (resurrection display) is, for example, after the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as a notification display except for double eyes, for a certain period of time, the decorative patterns do not completely stop and oscillate (vibrate). ), the decorative pattern is changed from non-coordinated to coherent as a notification display, and is determined and displayed (display).

As shown in FIG. 343(C), the promotion effect (promotion display), which is a special effect in the special game which is in the playing state, is, for example, 4R by entering the game ball into the V winning opening 833 in the small winning game. After the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed by the notification display for notifying that it is a small winning game for generating the time saving big winning game, the 16R time saving big winning game is generated by entering the game ball into the V winning opening 833 in the small winning game. This is an effect in which a decorative pattern for informing that a small win is made is determined and displayed by an informing display. Specifically, in the promotion effect (promotion display), after the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed with a double number other than "777" as a notification display, a double number other than "777" is displayed as a notification display (see FIG. 344 (A)) ) and double eyes of "777" (see FIG. 344(B)) are alternately switched and displayed as notification display, and then the double eyes of "777" are confirmed and displayed as notification display. (See FIG. 344(C)). In addition, when the promotion effect (promotion display) is not executed, double eyes other than "777" (see FIG. 344 (A)) as the notification display and double eyes of "777" (see FIG. 344 (B)) as the notification display (see FIG. 344(D)).

The resurrection effect (resurrection display) and the promotion effect (promotion display) in the special game that is in such a playing state is a specific variation type (production pattern) set for one special game as described above. ). In other words, the resurrection effect (resurrection display) and promotion effect (promotion display) in the special game that is in the playing state are the variable types (effects pattern), if the result of the special jackpot lottery is a small hit, the resurrection effect (revival display) or promotion effect (promotion display) is performed. It is executed as a part of the special game production (a part of the variable display of the decoration pattern). Therefore, the resurrection effect (resurrection display) and the promotion effect (promotion display) are based on the specific variation type (production pattern) set for the special game, and the update process of the drawing list, which is the update information. It is executed by repeating only the number of times defined according to the variation type (production pattern). In other words, in the special game which is in the in-game state, in the update process up to a predetermined period before the update end state in which the update process of the last drawing list is executed as the update information, it is displayed as a notification display before resurrection or before promotion. The pattern is stopped and displayed, and the drawing list, which is update information, is updated to the end by the update processing using the subsequent period, so that the decoration pattern can be displayed as notification display. As a result, in the playing state of one special game in which a big hit is announced, the revival performance (resurrection display) and promotion performance (promotion display) of the decorative pattern in the pattern display part 341 are smoothly and reliably executed as special performance. it becomes possible to

[Start winning process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 345, the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 at step S1004 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 17 will be described. Here, FIG. 345 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the starting winning process.

<Step S1101>
As shown in FIG. 345, in the starting prize winning process of this embodiment, first, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a prize for the first prize winning port 314 (step S1101). Here, when the MPU 41 determines that a prize has been won for the first prize winning port 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102, and if it determines that there is no prize for the first prize winning port 314 (step S1101: No ), and the process proceeds to step S1110.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the first special figure reserved ball number N stored in the first special figure reserved number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum number of reserved balls (4 in this embodiment). do. Here, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1110 if the number N of the first special figure reserved balls is the maximum number of reserved balls (step S1102: Yes). On the other hand, the MPU 41 executes a process of adding 1 to the first special figure reservation number N if the first special figure reservation number N is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1103: No) (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, MPU41 confirms the contents of the special figure propriety information before becoming the determination target of the propriety of the jackpot in step S2102 in the special figure fluctuation start processing of FIG. , is set in the RAM 412. This pending ball number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. In the voice lamp control device 5, when the pending ball number command is received, the image (special figure data image) relating to the special figure data displayed on the symbol display section 341 is updated (see FIG. 53).

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 is a big hit random number counter C1, a big hit type counter C2 and a reach random number counter C3 as update information updated by the update process in step S1003 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. Acquire the counter value of the special figure variation type counter CS1 as the update information updated by the update process in steps S1402 and S1414 in the main process, and the counter value of the special figure reservation storage area 412b in the RAM412. It is stored in the first empty reservation area among the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 of the reservation storage area REA in FIG. At this time, in the first empty reservation area among the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA, the game state (normal game state, a Time saving game state, b time saving game state) are stored.

<Steps S1106 and S1107>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 is based on the various counter values stored in the first empty reservation area of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA Special 1 jackpot propriety table (See FIG. 341(A)) is used to determine whether or not the result is a small hit (step S1107). MPU41, when the result of the success/failure determination is a small hit (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1108, and when the result of the success/failure determination is not a small hit (step S1106: No), the process is performed. The process moves to step S1109.

<Step S1108>
If the result of the negative determination is a small hit (step S1106: Yes), the MPU41 is stored in the first empty reservation area out of the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA The 1st special figure reservation command which can specify the big hit classification and fluctuation pattern which is done is set in RAM412. This first special figure pending command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. In the voice lamp control device 5, when the first special figure pending command is received, the update processing of the special figure data which is the update information stored in the special figure pending storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the RAM 512 is executed.

<Step S1109>
If the result of the success or failure determination is not a small hit (step S1106: No), the MPU 41 is the first empty reservation of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA The first special figure pending command that can identify the deviation type and variation pattern stored in the area is set in RAM412. This first special figure pending command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. In the voice lamp control device 5, when the first special figure pending command is received, the update processing of the special figure data which is the update information stored in the special figure pending storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the RAM 512 is executed.

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a prize for the second prize winning port 315. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that a prize has been won for the second prize winning port 315 (step S1110: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1111, and if it determines that there is no prize for the second prize winning port 315 (step S1110: No ), the starting winning process is terminated.

<Steps S1111 and S1112>
In step S1111, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second special figure reserved ball number M stored in the second special figure reserved number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum number of reserved balls (4 in this embodiment). do. Here, the MPU 41 ends the starting winning process if the second special figure reserved ball number M is the maximum reserved ball number (step S1111: Yes). On the other hand, the MPU 41 executes a process of adding 1 to the second special figure reserved ball number M as update processing if the second special figure reserved ball number M is not the maximum number of reserved balls (step S1111: No) ( step S1112).

<Step S1113>
In step S1113, MPU41 confirms the contents of the special figure propriety information before becoming the determination target of the propriety of the jackpot in step S2102 in the special figure fluctuation start processing of FIG. , is set in the RAM 412. This pending ball number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. In the voice lamp control device 5, when the pending ball number command is received, the image (special figure data image) relating to the special figure data displayed on the symbol display section 341 is updated (see FIG. 53).

<Step S1114>
In step S1104, MPU41, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 as update information updated by the update process in step S1003 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. Acquire the counter value of the special figure variation type counter CS1 as the update information updated by the update process in steps S1402 and S1414 in the main process, and the counter value of the special figure reservation storage area 412b in the RAM412 Second special It is stored in the first empty reservation area among the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the reservation storage area REB in the figure. At this time, in the first empty reservation area among the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special drawing reservation storage area REB, the game state (normal game state, a Time saving game state, b time saving game state) are stored.

<Steps S1115 to S1117>
In step S1115, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the a time-reduction gaming state flag indicating the a time-reduction gaming state, which is the profit gaming state, is on. The time-saving gaming state flag a is set to ON in step S3638 of the game state transition processing in FIG. It is set to OFF in step S3651 of the game state transition process.

MPU41, when a time-saving gaming state flag indicating that it is a time-saving gaming state is on (step S1115: Yes), the first reservation area REB1 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB ~ fourth reservation area REB4 Based on the various counter values stored in the first vacant reservation area, the a time-saving special 2 big hit success or failure table (see FIG. 341 (B)) is used to determine the success or failure (step S1116), and the process proceeds to step S1118 Transition. On the other hand, MPU41, when a time-saving gaming state flag indicating that it is a time-saving gaming state is off (step S1115: Yes), the first reservation area REB1 ~ fourth reservation area of the second special figure reservation storage area REB Based on the various counter values stored in the first vacant reservation area of REB4, the b time-saving special 2 jackpot success/failure table (see FIG. 341 (C)) is used to make a success/failure determination (step S1117), and step processing The process proceeds to S1118.

<Step S1118>
In step S1118, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the win/loss determination is a small hit. MPU41, if the result of the success/failure determination is a small hit (step S1118: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1119, if the result of the success/failure determination is not a small hit (step S1118: No), the process The process proceeds to step S1120.

<Step S1119>
If the result of the no determination is a small hit (step S1118: Yes), MPU41 is stored in the first empty reservation area out of the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB It sets in RAM412 the 2nd special figure reservation command which can specify the big hit classification and fluctuation pattern which are done. This second special figure pending command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. In the voice lamp control device 5, when the second special figure pending command is received, the update processing of the special figure data which is the update information stored in the special figure pending storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the RAM 512 is executed.

<Step S1120>
If the result of the success or failure determination is not a small hit (step S1118: No), the MPU 41 is the first empty reservation of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB A second special figure pending command that can identify the deviation type and variation pattern stored in the area is set in the RAM 412. This second special figure pending command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. In the voice lamp control device 5, when the second special figure pending command is received, the update processing of the special figure data which is the update information stored in the special figure pending storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the RAM 512 is executed.

[Main processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 346 to 368, main processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 of this embodiment will be described. Main processing of the present embodiment, special figure game number management processing (step S1406-1 in FIG. 346) and small hit game control processing (step S1406-2 in FIG. 346) are executed in that the above-mentioned first Unlike the main processing of the embodiment, part of other processing is also different from the main processing of the above-described first embodiment. Main processing of the present embodiment will be described below, focusing on differences from the main processing of the first embodiment.

[Universal figure game control process]
Here, FIG. 347 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of normal game control processing executed in step S1404 in the main processing of FIG. In the general pattern game control process, a process for controlling the variable display and stop display of the normal pattern (normal pattern) in the normal pattern display section 361 of the main display section 36 is executed. Hereinafter, normal figure game control processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1501>
As shown in FIG. 347, in the general pattern game control process, the MPU 41 first turns on the general pattern fluctuation display flag indicating that the normal pattern is in the state of being displayed in fluctuation (the general pattern game is being executed). It is determined whether or not there is (step S1501). The normal pattern fluctuation display flag is set to ON in step S1711 when the normal pattern fluctuation display (normal pattern game) is started in the normal pattern fluctuation start processing of FIG. When the general pattern game ends), it is set to OFF at step S1511 in the general pattern game control process.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1508 when the normal pattern fluctuation display flag is ON (step S1501: Yes), that is, when the normal pattern game is being executed. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1502 when the normal pattern fluctuation display flag is off (step S1501: No), that is, when the normal pattern game is not being executed.

<Step S1502>
When the normal pattern fluctuation display flag is off (step S1501: No), that is, when the normal pattern game is not being executed, the MPU 41 is during the game while the electric auditors 315b are open (executing the normal pattern per game) It is determined whether or not the electric accessory open flag indicating the state is ON (step S1502). The electric auditors open flag is set to ON in step S1811 when opening the electric auditors 315b in the normal game control process of FIG. set to off.

MPU41, when the electric accessary product during opening flag is ON (step S1502: Yes), that is, when the general pattern per game is being executed, ends the general pattern game control process. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1503 when the electric auditors product open flag is off (step S1502: No), that is, when the game per normal pattern is not being executed.

<Step S1503>
When the electric auditors open flag is off (step S1502: No), that is, when the normal game per game is not being executed, the MPU 41 is in a small winning game state indicating that it is in a playing state during small winning game execution It is determined whether the flag is on (step S1503). The small winning game state flag is set to ON in step S3602 when the small winning game is started in the game state transition processing of FIG. 366 described later, and is set to OFF in step S3614 when the small winning game ends. be.

MPU41, when the small hitting game state flag is ON (step S1503: Yes), when the small hitting game is being executed, ends the normal game control process. That is, in the present embodiment, the regular game is not started during execution of the small winning game. Of course, the regular game may be started during execution of the small winning game. On the other hand, when the small hitting game state flag is off (step S1503: No), that is, when the small hitting game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1504.

<Step S1504>
When the small winning game state flag is off (step S1503: No), that is, when the small winning game is not being executed, the MPU 41 indicates that the big winning game is being executed and the big winning playing flag is ON. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1504). The jackpot game flag is set to ON in step S3507 when a jackpot game is started in jackpot game control processing in FIG. 366 described later, and set to OFF in step S3554 when a jackpot game ends.

MPU41, when the jackpot playing flag is ON (step S1504: Yes), when the jackpot game is being executed, ends the normal game control process. That is, in this embodiment, the regular game is not started during the execution of the jackpot game. Of course, the regular game may be started during execution of the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the jackpot playing flag is off (step S1504: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1505.

<Step S1505>
When the jackpot game in-progress flag is off (step S1504: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 is stored in the normal pattern fluctuation pending number storage area SNA set in the normal pattern pending storage area 412c of the RAM 412. It is determined whether or not the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is 0 (step S1505). MPU41, when the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is 0 (step S1505: Yes), ends the normal pattern game control process, and when the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is not 0 (step S1505: No), process to step S1506.

<Step S1506>
If the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X is not 0 (step S1505: No), the MPU 41 executes normal pattern data setting processing for the normal pattern correctness information stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 412c (step S1506), The process moves to step S1507. The details of the normal map data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1507>
In step S1507, the MPU 41 executes a normal pattern fluctuation start process for causing the normal pattern display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 to display the normal pattern fluctuation based on the information stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 412c. , End the normal game control process. In addition, the details of the normal pattern fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1508>
When the normal pattern fluctuation display flag is ON (step S1501: Yes), that is, when the normal pattern game is being executed, the MPU 41 indicates that the jackpot game is being executed. (step S1508). The jackpot game flag is set to ON in step S3507 when a jackpot game is started in jackpot game control processing in FIG. 366 described later, and set to OFF in step S3554 when a jackpot game ends.

When the jackpot playing flag is ON (step S1508: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1509. On the other hand, when the jackpot playing flag is off (step S1508: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1509.

<Step S1509>
When the jackpot playing flag is off (step S1508: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether the normal pattern fluctuation display time has elapsed from the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display ( step S1509). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to stop display (end the normal game) the normal symbols that are variably displayed in the normal symbol display portion 361 of the main display portion 36 .

MPU41, when the normal pattern fluctuation display time has elapsed (step S1509: Yes), that is, at the timing to stop display the normal pattern that is variably displayed in the normal pattern display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 (end the normal pattern game) If so, the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, when the normal pattern fluctuation display time has not elapsed (step S1509: No), the MPU 41 stops displaying the normal pattern that is displayed in the normal pattern display unit 361 of the main display unit 36 (finishing the normal pattern game ), if it is not the timing to make, end the normal game control process.

<Steps S1510 to S1512>
If the normal pattern fluctuation display flag is on (step S1501: Yes) and the jackpot game flag is on (step S1508: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is started during execution of the normal pattern game, Or when the normal pattern fluctuation display time of the normal pattern has passed (step S1508: Yes), that is, when it is time to stop display the normal pattern displayed in fluctuation (end the normal pattern game), the MPU 41 is the normal pattern game The normal pattern is stopped and displayed in the pattern according to the result of the lottery for the normal pattern corresponding to (step S1510), and the normal pattern fluctuation display flag indicating that the normal pattern is being displayed (executing the normal pattern game) is turned off (step S1511). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets on the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag indicating that the normal pattern is stopped and displayed, that is, the normal pattern game has ended (step S1512), and ends the normal pattern game control process.

In addition, the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag determines whether it is the timing of starting the normal pattern per game (opening the electric auditors 315b) in step S1801 of the normal pattern per game control process of FIG. Referred to for

In addition, in the present embodiment, not only when it is time to stop display (finish the normal game) the normal symbol to be displayed in a variable manner due to the lapse of the normal pattern fluctuation display time of the normal symbol, the execution of the normal pattern game When the jackpot game is started during, the normal symbols that are variably displayed are stopped and displayed (the normal pattern game is terminated). That is, the general pattern game is forcibly terminated before the general pattern fluctuation display time of the normal pattern elapses when the jackpot game is started. Of course, the general pattern game may be continuously executed until the general pattern fluctuation display time of the normal pattern elapses even when the jackpot game is started.

[General map data setting process]
Here, FIG. 348 is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the normal figure data setting process performed by MPU41 in FIG.347 S1506. In the normal map data setting process, the process of updating the storage contents of the normal map reservation storage area 412c in the storage area of the main controller 4 in FIG. 11 is executed. Hereinafter, normal figure data setting processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Steps S1601 to S1603>
As shown in Figure 348, in the general pattern data setting process, the MPU 41 first executes update processing for subtracting 1 from the normal pattern fluctuation pending number X, which is the update information stored in the general pattern fluctuation pending number storage area SNA. (Step S1601), update processing is executed to move the general pattern correctness information from the general pattern first reservation area SE1 to the general pattern execution area SAE (step S1602). Subsequently, the MPU 41 executes an update process for shifting the general map correctness information stored in the general map 2nd reservation area SE2 to the general map 4th reservation area SE4 (step S1603). Specifically, in step S1603, the general map correctness information of the general map second reservation area SE2 is moved to the general map first reservation area SE1, and the general map correctness information of the general map third reservation area SE3 is transferred to the general map second reservation area SE1. An update process is executed to move to the area SE2 and to move the general map right/wrong information of the general map 4th reservation area SE4 to the general map 3rd reservation area SE3.

[Normal pattern fluctuation start process]
Here, FIG. 349 is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of normal figure fluctuation start processing performed by MPU41 in FIG.347 S1507. In the normal pattern fluctuation start process, the normal pattern display unit 361 starts to display the normal pattern fluctuation, and based on the lottery result in the normal pattern per lottery, various commands and flags that are update information are set. Update processing. is executed. Hereinafter, normal figure fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1701>
As shown in FIG. 349, in the normal figure fluctuation start process, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal game state indicating the normal game state is on (step S1701). The normal game state is set to ON in step S3628 of FIG. 367, step S3649 and step S3655 of FIG. When shifting from the normal game state to another game state, it is set to OFF in step S3604 in FIG. 366 and step S3645 in FIG.

When the normal game state is on (step S1701: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1702, and when the normal game state is off (step S1701: No), the process shifts to step S1705.

<Steps S1702 to S1704>
When the normal game state is on (step S1701: Yes), the MPU 41 is a normal game state normal pattern hit/failure table (see FIG. 340 (A)) and a normal game state normal pattern per classification distribution table (FIG. 340 (C )), based on the normal per type random number counter C4 and normal per type random number counter C5, which is update information included as numerical information in the normal pattern correctness information stored in the normal pattern execution area SAE of the normal pattern reservation storage area 412c It is determined whether the value is a value corresponding to the general pattern or not (step S1702). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the general pattern hit determination is the general pattern hit (step S1703).

MPU41, when the result of the general pattern per suitability determination is the general pattern per (step S1703: Yes), the long open general pattern per flag indicating that the second winning opening 315 is long open general pattern per is turned on (step S1704), and the process proceeds to step S1708. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1708 when the result of the normal pattern hit determination is not per normal pattern (step S1703: No), that is, when it is off.

<Steps S1705 to S1707>
When the normal game state is off (step S1701: No), that is, when it is the time-saving game state (a time-saving game state, b time-saving game state), the MPU 41 determines the time-saving game state normal figure winning/failure table (Fig. 340 (B )) and based on the time-saving game state normal pattern per type distribution table (see FIG. 340 (D)), the normal pattern correctness information stored in the normal pattern execution area SAE of the normal pattern reservation storage area 412c as numerical information It is determined whether the values of the normal per random number counter C4 and the normal per type random number counter C5, which are the update information, are values corresponding to the normal per pattern (step S1706). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the general pattern hit determination is the general pattern pattern (step S1707).

MPU41, when the result of the general pattern per suitability determination is a general pattern per (step S1706: Yes), the short open general pattern per flag indicating that the second winning opening 315 is a short open general pattern per is turned on (step S1707), and the process proceeds to step S1708. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1708 when the result of the normal pattern hit determination is not the normal pattern hit (step S1706: No), that is, when it is off.

<Steps S1708 and S1709>
In step S1708, the MPU 41 refers to a normal pattern fluctuation display table (not shown) for a normal pattern fluctuation pattern, which is the normal pattern fluctuation display time in the normal pattern display portion 361 of the main display portion 36 in the normal pattern game. Execute normal figure fluctuation pattern setting process to be set.

Then, MPU41, in addition to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern set in step S1708, normal pattern fluctuation for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 the result of the success or failure determination in step S1702 or S1705 (result of lottery per normal pattern) A pattern command is set (step S1709), and the process proceeds to step S1710.

In addition, the normal figure fluctuation pattern command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 346) executed by the MPU41. On the other hand, in the sound lamp control device 5, based on the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command, the effect corresponding to the normal pattern game for the pattern display unit 341 etc., for example, the effect indicating that the normal pattern game is being executed Execute the production showing the result of the lottery for the normal drawing.

<Steps S1710 and S1711>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 starts variable display of normal symbols in the normal symbol display portion 361 of the main display portion 36 (step S1710). Then, the MPU 41 sets on the normal pattern fluctuation display flag indicating that the normal pattern is displayed in a variable manner, that is, the normal pattern game is being executed (step S1711), and starts the normal pattern fluctuation start process. finish.

It should be noted that the normal pattern fluctuation display flag is referred to in order to determine whether the normal pattern game is being executed (during normal pattern fluctuation display) in step S1501 in the normal pattern game control process of FIG. 347 .

[Universal figure per game control process]
Here, FIG. 350 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game control process per normal figure executed in step S1405 in the main process of FIG. In the game control process per normal pattern, when the result of the lottery per normal pattern is a win, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 315b is performed to allow the game ball to enter the second winning hole 315. A process of switching to and from a restrictive state is executed. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 350, the normal figure per game control process will be described.

<Step S1801>
As shown in FIG. 350, in the normal pattern per game control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag indicating that the normal pattern has been stopped and displayed (that the normal pattern game has ended) is on. (step S1801). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to start the game per normal pattern. In addition, the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is set to ON in step S1512 when the normal pattern is stopped and displayed in the normal pattern game control process of FIG.

MPU41, when the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is ON (step S1801: Yes), that is, when the normal pattern per game can be started, the process proceeds to step S1802. On the other hand, when the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S1801: No), that is, when it is not the timing at which the normal pattern per game can be started, the process proceeds to step S1813.

<Step S1802>
When the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is ON (step S1801: Yes), that is, when the normal pattern per game can be started, the MPU 41 indicates that the jackpot game is being executed. It is determined whether or not it is on (step S1802). The jackpot game flag is set to ON in step S3507 when a jackpot game is started in jackpot game control processing in FIG. 362 described later, and set to OFF in step S3554 when a jackpot game ends.

When the jackpot playing flag is ON (step S1802: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is being executed, the MPU 41 ends the per-universal pattern game control process. That is, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is forcibly terminated by starting, even if the result of the lottery per normal pattern for the normal pattern game is per normal pattern, the game per normal pattern is not started. That is, in the present embodiment, the regular pattern per game is not started during execution of the jackpot game. Of course, a new normal game may be started during execution of the jackpot game.

On the other hand, when the jackpot playing flag is off (step S1802: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1803.

<Step S1803>
When the jackpot playing flag is off (step S1802: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the long open normal pattern hit flag is set to on (step S1803). . The long open general figure per flag is a flag indicating that the result of the lottery per general figure is the long open general figure per figure, and when the result of the lottery per general figure is the long open general figure, the general of FIG. It is set to ON in step S1704 of the figure fluctuation start process. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the lottery per normal pattern for the ended normal pattern game is per long open normal pattern. MPU41, when the long open normal map per flag is set to ON (step S1803: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1804, when the long open normal map per flag is set to off (step S1803: No), the process proceeds to step S1806.

<Steps S1804 and S1805>
If the long open general pattern per flag is set to ON (step S1803: Yes), that is, if the result of the general general pattern per lottery for the finished general pattern game is a long open general pattern, the MPU 41 A value corresponding to 6 seconds, which is the opening time of the electric accessory 315b in the per-figure game (the time allowed for the game ball to enter the second winning hole 315), is set as the value of the opening time counter as update information (step S1804). ). The opening time counter is referred to in step S1815 of the game control process per normal figure in order to determine the return timing of the electric auditors 315b. Then, the MPU 41 sets the long open normal map hit flag to OFF (step S1805), and shifts the process to step S1809.

<Step S1806>
If the long open general map per flag is set to off (step S1803: No), that is, if the result of the general general pattern per lottery for the finished general pattern game is not per long open general pattern, the MPU 41, short open general pattern It is determined whether or not the hit flag is set to ON (step S1806). Short open normal map per flag is a flag indicating that the result of the lottery per normal pattern is per short open normal map, and when the result of the lottery per normal pattern is per short open normal map, the normal of FIG. It is set to ON in step S1707 of the figure fluctuation start process. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the lottery per normal pattern for the ended normal pattern game is per short open normal pattern. MPU41, if the short open normal map per flag is set to ON (step S1806: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1807, if the short open normal map per flag is set to OFF (step S1806: No), that is, when the result of the lottery per normal pattern for the ended normal pattern game is out, the process proceeds to step S1812.

<Steps S1807 and S1808>
If the short open normal map per flag is set to ON (step S1806: Yes), that is, if the result of the general pattern per lottery for the finished normal game is per short open normal map, the MPU 41 A value corresponding to 0.1 seconds, which is the opening time of the electric accessory 315b in the per-figure game (the time allowed for the game ball to enter the second winning hole 315), is set as the value of the opening time counter as update information ( step S1807). Then, the MPU 41 sets the short open normal map hit flag to OFF (step S1808), and shifts the process to step S1809.

<Steps S1809 to S1811>
If the result of the lottery per normal figure is a hit, the flag indicating the type per normal pattern (flag per long open normal map or flag per short open normal map) is set to off (step S1805 or S1808), MPU 41, The electric accessory 315b is operated (step S1809). As a result, the second winning hole 315, which is the starting ball entering area, is opened, and a state of allowing the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 is established. Then, the MPU 41 sets an electric role product open command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric role product 315b is open (step S1810), and indicates that the electric role product 315b is open. The electric accessary product open flag is set to ON (step S1811), and the process proceeds to step S1812.

It should be noted that the electric accessory open command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 346) executed by the MPU41. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 can start an effect indicating that the electric accessory 315b is open to the symbol display unit 341, for example, based on the electric accessory release command.

<Step S1812>
When the process of opening the electric accessory 315b is executed when the result of the lottery per normal drawing is a win (steps S1803 to S1811), or the long open normal map per flag and the short open normal map per flag are both turned off. If it is set (when the result of the lottery per normal pattern is out) (both step S1803 and step S1806 are No), the MPU 41 normally stops displaying the symbol (that the normal pattern game is finished). The normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag shown is set to OFF (step S1812), and the normal pattern per game control process is terminated.

<Step S1813>
When the normal pattern fluctuation stop display flag is off (step S1801: No), the MPU 41 is set to ON when the electric auditors 315b are released in step S1811 of the normal pattern per game control process. It is determined whether or not the open flag is set to ON (step S1813). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game per normal pattern is being executed. MPU41, when the electric accessary product during opening flag is set to ON (step S1813: Yes), that is, when the normal figure per game is being executed, the process proceeds to step S1814. On the other hand, the MPU 41, when the electric auditors product open flag is set to OFF (step S1813: No), that is, when the general pattern per game is not being executed, ends the general pattern per game control process.

<Steps S1814 and S1815>
When the flag during electric accessary product opening is set to ON (step S1813: Yes), that is, when the game per general pattern is being executed, the MPU 41 updates in step S1804 or S1807 of the game control process per general pattern. An update process is performed by subtracting 1 from the value of the open time counter set as information (step S1814), and it is determined whether the value of the open time counter after the subtraction is 0, which indicates the end of updating (step S1815). ). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to restore the electric accessory 315b. MPU41, when the value of the open time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to restore the electric accessory 315b, the process proceeds to step S1816. On the other hand, MPU41, when the value of the open time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1815: No), that is, when it is not the timing to return the electric auditors 315b, ends the game control process per normal figure.

<Steps S1816 to S1818>
If the value of the open time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, if it is time to restore the electric accessory 315b, the MPU 41 restores the electric accessory 315b (step S1816). As a result, the second winning hole 315, which is the starting ball entering area, is closed, and entry of game balls into the second winning hole 315 is restricted. Then, the MPU 41 sets an electric role product closing command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 that the electric role product 315b is closed (step S1817), and an electric accessory indicating that the electric role product 315b is opened The flag during opening of the role product is set to OFF (step S1818), and the game control process per normal pattern is terminated.

In addition, the electric accessary product closing command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 346) executed by the MPU41. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 can end the effect indicating that the electric role product is open, which is executed in the symbol display unit 341, for example, based on the electric role product closing command.

[Special game control process]
Here, Figure 351 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game control process executed in step S1406 in the main process of Figure 346 . In the special figure game control process, update processing of the storage contents of the special figure reservation storage area 412b set in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 is executed, and control of the progress of the first special figure game or the second special figure game For example, the variable display and stop display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display section 363 are controlled. Hereinafter, the special figure game control processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 351, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot playing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is ON. The jackpot game flag is set to ON in step S3507 when a jackpot game is started in jackpot game control processing in FIG. 366 described later, and set to OFF in step S3554 when a jackpot game ends.

The MPU 41 ends the special figure game control process when the jackpot playing flag is ON (step S1901: Yes), ie when the jackpot game is being executed. That is, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game is being executed, the special figure game is not started. Of course, the special game may be started during execution of the jackpot game.

On the other hand, when the jackpot playing flag is off (step S1901: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
When the jackpot playing flag is off (step S1901: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines that the small hit game state flag is on indicating that the game is in a state where the small hit game is being executed. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1902). The small winning game state flag is set to ON in step S3602 when the small winning game is started in the game state transition processing of FIG. 366 described later, and is set to OFF in step S3614 when the small winning game ends. be.

MPU41, when the small hitting game state flag is ON (step S1902: Yes), that is, when the small hitting game is being executed, ends the special figure game control process. That is, in the present embodiment, when the small winning game is being executed, the special figure game is not started. Of course, the special symbol game may be started during execution of the small winning game.

On the other hand, when the small hitting game state flag is off (step S1902: No), that is, when the small hitting game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
When the small hit game state flag is off (step S1902: No), that is, when the small hit game is not being executed, the MPU 41 is displayed while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is fluctuating (the first special symbol game or It is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation display flag indicating that the second special figure game is being executed is ON (step S1903). The special figure fluctuation displaying flag is set to ON in step S2107 or S2117 when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the special figure variation start processing of FIG. 353 described later, and the special figure When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the game control process, it is set to OFF in step S1912.

MPU41, when the special figure fluctuation display flag is ON (step S1903: Yes), that is, when the special symbol is during the fluctuation display (during execution of the special figure game), the process proceeds to step S1907. On the other hand, the MPU 41, when the special figure fluctuation display flag is off (step S1903: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not being executed and the special symbol is not being displayed while the special figure is being changed (during execution of the special figure game), the process to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
If the flag during special figure fluctuation display is off (step S1903: No), that is, when the big hit game and the small hit game are not being executed and the special symbol is not during fluctuation display (during execution of the special figure game), the MPU 41 , The first special figure reservation ball number N, which is the update information stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA of the special figure reservation storage area 412b, and the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB. It is determined whether or not both of the second special figure reserved ball number M, which is the update information, is 0 (step S1904).

MPU41, when both the number N of the first special figure reserved balls and the number M of the second special figure reserved balls which are the update information are 0 (step S1904: Yes), that is, the reservation of the right to execute the first special figure game , And when there is neither of the reservation of the right to execute the second special figure game, the special figure game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if either one of the number N of the first special figure reserved balls and the number M of the second special figure reserved balls is not 0 (step S1904: No), the MPU 41 reserves the right to execute the first special figure game. , And when there is at least one of the reservation of the right to execute the second special figure game, the process proceeds to step S1905.

<Step S1905>
If either one of the update information of the first special figure reserved ball number N and the second special figure reserved ball number M is not 0 (step S1904: No), that is, the reservation of the right to execute the first special figure game, And when there is at least one of the reservation of the right to run the second special figure game, the MPU 41 is the update information stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b Special figure propriety information data (special figure data) Executes the special figure data setting process, which is the update process (step S1904), and moves the process to step S1906. The details of the special figure data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1906>
In step S1906, the MPU 41 is the first special symbol which is a predetermined symbol in the first special symbol display portion 362 which is a display means, or the second special symbol which is a predetermined symbol in the second special symbol display portion 363 which is a display means. A special figure variation start process for starting the variation display of 2 special symbols (executing the first special figure game or the second special figure game) is executed, and the special figure game control process is terminated. In addition, the details of the special figure fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1907>
When the special figure fluctuation display flag is ON (step S1903: Yes), that is, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol which is the predetermined symbol is displayed in fluctuation (during execution of the special figure game), the MPU 41 Is set in the special figure variation pattern setting process of step S2103 or S2111 in the special figure variation start process of FIG. It is determined whether or not the special symbol variation display time for the first special symbol or the second special symbol has elapsed (step S1906). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to stop and display the special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner and end the special symbol game.

When the special symbol variation display time has passed from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S1907: Yes), that is, the special symbol game is ended by the notification display by the stop display of the special symbol during the variation display If it is the timing to start, the process moves to step S1907.

On the other hand, the MPU 41, when the variable display time has not elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S1907: No), that is, the notification display by the stop display of the special symbol during the variable display If it is not the timing to end the special figure game, the special figure game control process is terminated.

<Step S1908>
When the variable display time has passed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S1907: Yes), the special symbol game is terminated by the notification display by the stop display of the special symbol during variable display. If it is the timing, the MPU 41 executes notification display control on the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363, which is the display means, so that the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special In the symbol display unit 363, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode according to the result of the big winning lottery corresponding to the special symbol game (step S1908). Specifically, the MPU 41 executes notification display control with respect to the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363, so that when the result of the big winning lottery is a small winning, a small winning On the other hand, when the result of the big winning lottery is a loss, the special symbols corresponding to the loss are stopped and displayed to indicate a small win. Execute the notification display of the fact.

In the present embodiment, as a result of the jackpot lottery, a small win and a loss are set, and a big win is not set. By executing notification display control for the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363, the special symbol corresponding to the big win is stopped and displayed to perform the notification display of the big win. .

<Steps S1909 and S1910>
In step S1909, the MPU 41 sets ON a special figure fluctuation stop flag indicating that the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which is a predetermined symbol, has been stopped and displayed by the execution of the notification display control, and furthermore, the first A special symbol variable display flag indicating that the special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (a special symbol game is being executed) is set to OFF (step S1910), and the process proceeds to step S1911.

<Step S1911>
In step S1911, the MPU 41 sets the special figure game frequency count flag to ON. This special figure game number count flag manages the remaining number of time saving games in the time saving game state (a time saving game state, b time saving game state) in step S3310 of the special figure game number management process in FIG. It is referenced in the management of the number of special figure games for managing the number of remaining special figure games required before shifting to the game state.

<Step S1912>
With step S1912, MPU41 sets the decision display command, ends particular figure game control processing. The fixed display command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed. This confirmation display command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. In the voice lamp control device 5, when the confirmation display command is received, the confirmation display effect of the decoration pattern which is the predetermined pattern is executed in the pattern display section 341, and the special symbol game effect is terminated.

[Special figure data setting process]
Here, FIG. 352 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1905 in the special figure game control process of FIG. In the special figure data setting process, the update process of the stored contents of the special figure reservation storage area 412b in which the update information set in the RAM 412 of the main controller 4 is stored is executed. Hereinafter, the special figure data setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S2001>
As shown in FIG. 352, in step S2001, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second special figure pending ball number M, which is the update information for the second special figure game, is zero. MPU41, when the number of second special figure reserved balls M is 0 (step S2001: Yes), that is, there is no second special figure reserved for the second special figure game and there is a first special figure reserved for the first special figure game If so, the process moves to step S2002. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2006 when the second special figure reserved ball number M is not 0 (step S2001: No), that is, when there is a second special figure reserved for the second special figure game. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second special symbol reserved ball number M for the second special symbol game is 0, thereby giving priority to the second special symbol game over the first special symbol game and starting it. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the second special symbol game is started with priority over the first special symbol game, but the first special symbol game is started with priority over the second special symbol game. Also, the special symbol game is started in the order of entry (reservation order) of the game ball to the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315, either the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game may be executed. Further, the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game are executed independently of each other without providing priority to the start of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game, and the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game are executed independently of each other. The second special symbol game may be executed at the same time (so-called simultaneous variation of special symbols).

<Steps S2002 to S2005>
When the second special figure reservation ball number M is 0 (step S2001: Yes), the MPU 41 is the update information stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area NAA of the first special figure reservation storage area REA. Execute update processing to subtract 1 from the first special figure reservation number N (step S2002), and update to move the special figure right or wrong information from the first reservation area REA1 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA to the special figure execution area AE Processing is executed (step S2003). Subsequently, the MPU 41 executes update processing to shift the special figure propriety information of the second reservation area REA2 to the fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA one by one (step S2004). Specifically, in the update process of step S2004, the special figure validity information of the second reservation area REA2 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA is moved to the first reservation area REA1, and the special figure validity information of the third reservation area REA3 is moved to the second reservation area REA2, and the special figure propriety information of the fourth reservation area REA4 is moved to the third reservation area REA3.

When the process of step S2004 ends, the MPU 41 turns on the first special figure game start flag indicating that the first special figure game is started (step S2005), and shifts the process to step S2010. This first special figure game start flag is referred to in order to determine whether or not to start the first special figure game in step S2101 in special figure game start processing of FIG. 353 described later.

<Steps S2006 to S2009>
When the second special figure reservation number M is not 0 (step S2001: No), the MPU 41 is the update information stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area NAB of the second special figure reservation storage area REB. Execute update processing to subtract 1 from the special figure reservation ball number M (step S2006), and update processing to move the special figure right or wrong information from the first reservation area REB1 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB to the special figure execution area AE is executed (step S2007). Subsequently, the MPU 41 executes update processing for shifting the special figure propriety information of the second reservation area REB2 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB one by one (step S2008). Specifically, in step S2008, the special figure validity information in the second reservation area REB2 is moved to the first reservation area REB1, the special figure validity information in the third reservation area REB3 is moved to the second reservation area REB2, and the fourth reservation area REB3 is moved to the second reservation area REB2. The special figure propriety information in the reservation area REB4 is moved to the third reservation area REB3. MPU41 transfers a process to step S2009, when the process of step S2008 is complete|finished.

When the process of step S2008 ends, the MPU 41 turns on the second special figure game start flag indicating that the second special figure game is started (step S2009), and shifts the process to step S2010. This second special figure game start flag is referenced in order to determine whether or not to start the second special figure game in step S2109 in special figure game start processing of FIG. 353 described later.

<Steps S2010 and S2011>
In step S2010, MPU41, the first reservation area REA1 ~ fourth reservation area REA4 of the first special figure reservation storage area REA, or the first reservation area REB1 ~ fourth reservation area REB4 of the second special figure reservation storage area REB A special figure shift command indicating that the special figure propriety information has been shifted is set in the RAM412. This special figure shift command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 346) executed by the MPU41. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 changes the display number of the hold display corresponding to the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold displayed on the pattern display unit 341 based on the special figure shift command. be able to.

In addition, the MPU 41 sets, in the RAM 412, a pending ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the pending ball number after the special figure game is started (step S2011), and ends the special figure data setting process. . This pending ball number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. In the voice lamp control device 5, when the pending ball number command is received, the image (special figure data image) relating to the special figure data displayed on the symbol display section 341 is updated (see FIG. 53).
End the special figure data setting process.

[Special figure fluctuation start process]
Here, FIG. 353 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1906 of the special figure game control process of FIG. In the special symbol variation start process, the first special symbol which is a predetermined symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 which is the display means, or the predetermined symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363 which is the display means The first special game or the second special symbol game (special symbol game) is started by the start of the variable display of the 2 special symbols, and various processes in the in-game state accompanying the start of the special symbol game are executed. Hereinafter, the special figure fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S2101>
As shown in FIG. 353, in step S2101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the first special figure game start flag indicating that the first special figure game is started is set to ON. As for the first special figure game start flag, in order to start the first special figure game in step S2005 of the special figure data setting process in FIG. Set to on when finished.

MPU41, if the first special figure game start flag is set to ON (step S2101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2102, if the first special figure game start flag is not set to ON (step S2101: No), the process proceeds to step S2109.

<Steps S2102 and S2103>
When the first special figure game start flag is set to ON (step S2101: Yes), the MPU 41 reads out the winning/failure information stored in the special figure execution area AE of the special figure reservation storage area 412b (step S2102), The variable display time of the first special symbol which is a predetermined symbol in the first special symbol display part 362 of the main display part 36 which is the display means is set as a special symbol variation pattern, and the first special symbol as a notification display is set. A stop type is set (step S2103), and the process proceeds to step S2104.

It should be noted that the variation display time of the first special symbol (special figure variation pattern), if the result of the success or failure determination in step S2102 is a small hit, the special figure variation type counter CS1 and the hit variation table ( Figure 342 (B) reference) and is set based on, if the result of the right or wrong determination in step S2102 is out, the special figure variation type counter CS1 and off variation table (Figure 342 (A) See).

In addition, as for the stop type of the first special symbol, if the result of the success/failure determination in step S2102 is a small hit, the symbol corresponding to the small hit is set, and if the result of the success/failure determination is off, it is off. A corresponding pattern is set. By determining the stop type of the first special symbol in this way, it is displayed that the result of the success/failure determination is a small hit or a miss.

In the present embodiment, as a result of the jackpot lottery, a small win and a loss are set, and a big win is not set. , a symbol corresponding to a big hit is set as the stop type of the first special symbol. By determining the stop type of the first special symbol in this way, it is displayed that the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit.

<Steps S2104 and S2105>
In step S2104, MPU41, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the first special figure game, which is the result of the success or failure determination in step S2102, and the special figure variation pattern command including the special figure variation pattern set in step S2103 is set in the RAM 412, and further, a stop type command specifying the stop type of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 362 set in step S2103 is set (step S2105), and the process proceeds to step S2107. do.

The special figure variation pattern command and the stop type command are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 346) executed by the MPU41. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 sets the effect pattern (special figure game effect) in the symbol display unit 341 etc. based on the special figure variation pattern command and the stop type command, and update information based on the effect pattern By creating a drawing list to the end and executing display etc., in the first special game which is in the game state, promotion production (promotion display) which is re-lottery production (re-lottery display) as special production or a resurrection effect (resurrection display) can be executed. In addition, the stop type command does not necessarily need to be set separately from the special figure variation pattern command, and the special figure variation pattern command may be set as a command capable of specifying the stop type of the first special symbol.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 41 makes the first special symbol game in-game state by starting the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display portion 362 of the main display portion 36, and shifts the processing to step S2107. do.

<Steps S2107 and S2108>
In step S2107, the MPU 41 sets the special symbol variable display flag indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable state (playing state during execution of the special symbol game), and further starts the first special symbol game. The first special figure game start flag is set to OFF (step S2108), and the fluctuation start process is terminated.

It should be noted that the special symbol fluctuating display flag is, in step S1903 in the special symbol game control process of FIG. It is referred to determine whether it is (playing state during special game execution).

<Step S2109>
When the first special symbol game start flag is not set to ON (step S2101: No), the MPU 41 indicates that the second special symbol game is started, and the second special symbol game start flag is set to ON. It is determined whether or not there is (step S2109). As for the second special figure game start flag, in order to start the second special figure game in step S2009 of the special figure data setting process in FIG. Set to on when finished.

MPU41, when the second special figure game start flag is set to ON (step S2109: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2110, when the first special figure game start flag is not set to ON (step S2109: No), the fluctuation start process is terminated.

<Steps S2110 and S2111>
When the second special figure game start flag is set to ON (step S2109: Yes), the MPU 41 reads out the winning/failure information stored in the special figure execution area AE of the special figure reservation storage area 412b (step S2110), The variation display time of the second special symbol which is a predetermined symbol in the second special symbol display portion 363 of the main display portion 36 which is the display means is set as a special symbol variation pattern, and the second special symbol as a notification display is set. A stop type is set (step S2111), and the process proceeds to step S2112.

It should be noted that the variation display time of the second special symbol (special figure variation pattern), if the result of the success or failure determination in step S2110 is a small hit, the special figure variation type counter CS1 and the hit variation table ( Figure 342 (B) reference) and is set based on, if the result of the right or wrong determination in step S2110 is out, the special figure variation type counter CS1 which is the update information and the off variation table (Figure 342 (A) See).

In addition, as for the stop type of the second special symbol, if the result of the success/failure determination in step S2110 is a small hit, the symbol corresponding to the small hit is set, and if the result of the success/failure determination is off, it will be off. A corresponding pattern is set. By determining the stop type of the second special symbol in this way, it is displayed that the result of the success/failure determination is a small hit or a miss.

In the present embodiment, as a result of the jackpot lottery, a small win and a loss are set, and a big win is not set. , a symbol corresponding to a big hit is set as the stop type of the second special symbol. By determining the stop type of the second special symbol in this way, it is notified and displayed that the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit.

<Steps S2112 and S2113>
In step S2112, MPU41, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the second special figure game, which is the result of the success or failure determination in step S2110, and the special figure variation pattern command including the special figure variation pattern set in step S2111 is set in the RAM 412, and further, a stop type command specifying the stop type of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363 set in step S2111 is set (step S2113), and the process proceeds to step S2114. do.

The special figure variation pattern command and the stop type command are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in step S1401 of the next main process (see FIG. 346) executed by the MPU41. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 sets the effect pattern (special figure game effect) in the symbol display unit 341 etc. based on the special figure variation pattern command and the stop type command, and update information based on the effect pattern By creating a drawing list to the end and executing display etc., in the second special game which is in a game state, promotion production (promotion display) which is a re-lottery production (re-lottery display) as a special production. or a resurrection effect (resurrection display) can be executed. In addition, the stop type command does not necessarily need to be set separately from the special figure variation pattern command, and the special figure variation pattern command may be set as a command capable of specifying the stop type of the second special symbol.

<Step S2114>
In step S2114, the MPU 41 makes the second special symbol game in-game state by starting the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display portion 363 of the main display portion 36, and shifts the process to step S2115. do.

<Steps S2115 and S2116>
In step S2115, the MPU 41 sets the special symbol variable display flag indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable state (playing state during special symbol game execution), and further, starts the second special symbol game. The second special figure game start flag to be caused is set to OFF (step S2116), and the fluctuation start process is terminated.

It should be noted that the special symbol fluctuating display flag is, in step S1903 in the special symbol game control process of FIG. It is referred to determine whether it is (playing state during special game execution).

[Special game count management process]
Here, Figure 354 and Figure 355, is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure game frequency management process executed in step S1406-1 in the main process of Figure 346. In the special figure game number management process, based on the execution of the special figure game, the remaining time saving game number which is update information in the time saving game state (a time saving game state, b time saving game state) which is a profit game state, profit game A process for managing the remaining number of special-figure games, which is the update information until the state b time-saving gaming state is generated, is executed. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 354 and 355, the special figure game frequency management process will be described.

<Step S3301>
As shown in FIG. 354, in the special figure game number management process of the present embodiment, first, the MPU 41 updates the ceiling activation remaining number counter which is the update information indicating the number of special figure games required to shift to the b time saving gaming state. It is determined whether or not the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag for setting is set to ON (step S3301). This ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag is set to ON in step S3553 of the jackpot game control process of FIG.

When the ceiling activation remaining counter set flag is set to ON (step S3301: Yes), that is, when setting the ceiling activation remaining counter which is the update information, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3302. On the other hand, when the ceiling activation remaining counter set flag is set to OFF (step S3301: No), that is, when the ceiling activation remaining counter, which is update information, is not set, the process proceeds to step S3311.

<Step S3302>
When the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag is set to ON (step S3301: Yes), that is, when setting the ceiling activation remaining number counter which is the update information, the MPU 41 sets 1000 as the initial value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter. to set. That is, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot gaming state, which is the profit gaming state, is completed, the privilege granting condition is satisfied when the special figure game is executed 1000 times without being transferred to the jackpot gaming state. , a time-saving gaming state b, which is a profitable gaming state, is generated as a bonus.

In the present embodiment, the ceiling activation remaining number counter, which is the update information, is set as a subtraction type counter, but the ceiling activation remaining number counter may be set as an addition type counter. Also, the initial value set in the counter for the number of remaining ceiling activations, which is the update information, is not limited to 1000, and may be set as appropriate according to the probability of a small hit.

By the way, in this embodiment, compared to the case where the big winning game is generated based on the small winning game triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning port 314, the number of game balls entering the second winning port 315 is increased. The rate of entering the RUSH state, in which consecutive jackpots are more likely to occur, is favored when a jackpot game occurs based on a small win game triggered by a ball entry (Fig. 341 (D) and Fig. 341 ( E)). Specifically, the rate of entering the RUSH state after the end of the big winning game based on the small winning game triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole 314 is 50%, whereas the second The entry rate to the RUSH state after the end of the big winning game based on the small winning game triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 is 100%.

On the other hand, in the normal game state where left-handed hitting is encouraged, the game ball easily enters the first winning hole 314 by hitting left-handed, and in the time-saving gaming state including the b time-saving gaming state where right-handed hitting is encouraged, right-handed hitting. By performing , the game ball can easily enter the second winning hole 315 . Therefore, the rate of entry into the RUSH state and the expected ball output value are higher after shifting to the b time-saving game state than before the shift to the b time-saving game state, which is the ceiling time-saving game state. As a result, at the stage when the transition to the b time-saving gaming state is approaching, there is a break-even point, which will be described later, at which it is more advantageous not to generate a jackpot game.

Similarly, in some conventional gaming machines, there is a break-even point at which it is more advantageous not to generate a jackpot game when the shift to the b time-saving gaming state is approaching. In a conventional gaming machine having such a break-even point, despite the player's desire to shift to the b time-saving gaming state, a jackpot game occurs against the player's will, and the b time-saving gaming state occurs. may not be able to move to In other words, in the conventional gaming machine, since it is not possible to control the timing of generating a jackpot game, generating a jackpot game is a timing when the difference ball expected value is less than shifting to the b time saving game state, for example b time saving game A jackpot game may occur immediately before shifting to the state. In this case, the player cannot enjoy the benefit of transitioning to the b time-saving gaming state (higher expected ball output value), and the number of difference balls that can be expected is reduced.

On the other hand, in the hit/fail table of the present embodiment, there is no big hit distribution, and only small hits and losses are set (see FIGS. 341(A) to 341(E)), so the result of the big hit lottery is It won't be a hit. In addition, by performing a predetermined game operation on the shooting handle 22 in order to hit to the right in the small winning game, entry of the game ball into the V prize opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83, which is a predetermined game condition, is allowed. When established, a jackpot game state with a specific profit is generated. Therefore, the big winning game state is not generated without going through the small winning game, and in order to generate the big winning game state, a predetermined It is necessary to perform a game operation.

In addition, the ceiling activation remaining number counter of the present embodiment is not set to the initial value of 1000 by the occurrence of a small winning game, and when a big winning game is executed, the completion of the big winning game causes the Regardless of the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter at the end, the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is set to the initial value of 1000. On the other hand, when a predetermined game operation is not performed on the shooting handle 22 in order to hit right in the small winning game, the game ball does not enter the V prize opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83, which is a predetermined game condition. Therefore, a jackpot game is not generated (so-called puncture state). In other words, even when the small winning game is executed, the game ball entering the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83, which is a predetermined game condition, is not established, and the big winning game state is a specific profit. is not generated, the value of the ceiling activation remaining counter at the end of the small winning game is taken over, and if the special game is executed after that, the ceiling activation that takes over the number of executions of the special game It is subtracted from the value of the remaining count counter. As a result, even if a small winning game occurs, the player stops shooting the game ball or hits it to the left, that is, performs a predetermined game operation for hitting to the right with respect to the shooting handle 22. By doing so, it is possible to intentionally prevent the game ball from entering the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83, which is a predetermined game condition.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the winning/failing table does not set the distribution of the big wins, the result of the big winning lottery will not be a big win. As a result, when the player desires the occurrence of the b time-saving game state by activating the ceiling rather than the occurrence of the jackpot game, against the player's will, the jackpot game is generated before the ceiling is activated and the ceiling activation remaining number counter is counted. is set to the initial value of 1000.

Further, in the present embodiment, a small winning game is executed when the result of the big winning lottery is a small winning. By doing so, when the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83, which is a predetermined game condition, is established, a jackpot game state, which is a specific profit, is generated. When a predetermined game operation is not performed with respect to the shooting handle 22 for hitting, a game ball does not enter the V prize opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83, which is a predetermined game condition, so that no jackpot game is generated. (So-called puncture state). That is, in the present embodiment, in the small winning game, whether or not a predetermined game operation is performed with respect to the firing handle 22 in order to hit to the right, that is, the V winning opening of the feather accessory device 83 which is a predetermined game condition By selecting whether or not to establish the entry of the game ball into the 833, whether to generate a jackpot game (initialize the value of the ceiling activation remaining counter) or not to generate a jackpot game (ceiling It is possible to select whether or not to take over the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter before the occurrence of the small winning game without initializing the value of the activation remaining number counter. In other words, even if a small winning game occurs, without enjoying the profit of the big winning game, a new special figure while enjoying the same profit as before the small winning game occurs (maintaining the same state) A game can be executed. As a result, when the value of the ceiling activation remaining counter approaches 0 and the transition to the b time saving game state which is the ceiling time saving game state is imminent, that is, it is advantageous for the player not to generate a jackpot game. In some cases, when a small winning game is executed, a game ball is not allowed to enter the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 to generate a big winning game (initialization of the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter). While avoiding, it is possible to generate the b time saving game state which is the ceiling time saving game state as desired by the player by executing the special game of the specified number of times. That is, in the present embodiment, by not generating a jackpot game even if a small hit game occurs, the value of the ceiling activation remaining counter at the end of the small hit game is taken over, and the special figure game is executed after that. Since it is possible to generate a b time-reduction gaming state, which is a ceiling time-reduction gaming state, by subtracting the value of the counter for the remaining number of ceiling activations, when a small winning game occurs before and after the break-even point, the player himself Based on the determination of , a game property is imparted in which it is possible to select whether to generate a jackpot game or to activate the ceiling. Specifically, the player can select the occurrence of the b time-saving gaming state by activating the ceiling, so that the player can enjoy the benefits of the b time-saving gaming state (preferential treatment for the rush rate of RUSH and high expected ball output value) at his/her own discretion. can. On the other hand, the player can select the occurrence of a jackpot game, so when there is no room in the game time (for example, when the remaining time until the game hall closes is short, when the remaining game time is restricted due to personal reasons, etc.) ), it becomes possible to give priority to the occurrence of the big hit game over the activation of the ceiling.

In addition, in the present embodiment, before and after reaching the break-even point, the notification mode of the opening effect of the small winning game is different (see FIGS. 359 (A) and 359 (B)), so that the break-even point The player is informed of whether or not the point has been reached. Therefore, the player can select whether or not to generate the big winning game based on his/her own judgment when the small winning game occurs based on the notification mode of the opening effect of the small winning game. The details of the notification mode of the opening effect will be described later.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the initial value of the value of the remaining jackpot activation counter, which is the update information, is set to 1000, but the initial value set as the value of the jackpot activation remaining count counter is not limited to 1000. can be the value of

In addition, multiple initial values are set as the value of the remaining number of jackpot activation counters, and if the conditions for setting the initial value as the value of the remaining number of jackpot activation counters are met, a lottery etc. The initial value may be set by In one example, it is conceivable to set 200, 400, 600, 800 and 1000 as initial values and set one of these by lottery with equal or unequal probability.

In this way, by setting the initial value by lottery etc. from the multiple set initial values, the ceiling activation remaining which is the remaining number of special figure games required until the b time saving game which is the ceiling time saving game state is generated It becomes difficult for the player to grasp the number of times (the value of the remaining number of ceiling activations). Therefore, whether or not the number of remaining ceiling activations (the value of the number of remaining ceiling activations) has been set, for example, whether the game hall side has cleared the RAM of the gaming machine or changed the setting value that defines the small winning probability (big winning probability) Since it becomes difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the RAM has been cleared or the setting value has been changed, the operating rate of the gaming machine is prevented from decreasing due to the player's grasp. In addition, since it is difficult for the player to grasp the remaining number of ceiling activations (the value of the remaining number of ceiling activations), the number of remaining special figure games required until the b time-saving game, which is the ceiling time-saving game state, is generated is low. Targeting the machine 10, the so-called hyena act, is suppressed. In addition, since it is difficult for the player to grasp the number of remaining ceiling activations (the value of the remaining number of ceiling activations), the notification mode of the opening effect when a small winning game occurs is the first notification mode described later. It also becomes difficult to grasp the timing of switching from the display (see FIG. 359(A)) to the loss display (see FIG. 359(B)) which is the second notification mode. Therefore, when a small winning game occurs, it is expected to switch from the profit display (see FIG. 359 (A)) which is the first notification mode to the loss display (see FIG. 359 (B)) which is the second notification mode. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game at the same time, his or her interest in the game is improved.

<Steps S3303 and S3304>
Returning to the description of FIG. 354, in step S3303, the MPU 41 indicates that the ceiling activation remaining number counter is set, that is, the b time saving gaming state of the profit gaming state which is the ceiling working hours gaming state has not occurred. The unactivated flag is set to ON (step S3303), and the process proceeds to step S3304. The ceiling unactivated flag is referenced in step S3312 of the special figure game number management process in order to determine whether or not to subtract the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter which is the update information.

In addition, the MPU 41 sets the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag to OFF (step S3304), and shifts the process to step S3305.

<Step S3305>
In step S3305, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the five times a reduced working hours set flag is set to ON. The a time-saving 5 times set flag sets 5 times as the number of times of the a time-saving gaming state, which is a profitable gaming state that is shifted when the jackpot gaming state, which is a profitable gaming state, ends (the remaining time-saving in the a time-saving gaming state It is a flag that sets 5 as the initial value of a time-saving remaining number counter indicating the number of games), and a game ball entering the second winning port 315 in a time-saving game state (a time-saving game state, b time-saving game state) When a jackpot game state, which is a profit game state, is generated based on the entry of the game ball into the V winning port 833 of the feather accessory device 83 in the playing state of the small win game that occurred as a trigger, It is set to ON in step S3622 or step S3625 of the game state transition process.

The MPU 41 sets 5 as the initial value of the a time saving remaining number counter indicating the remaining time saving game number in the a time saving game state when the a time saving 5 times set flag is set to ON (step S3305: Yes). If so, the process proceeds to step S3306. On the other hand, when the a time saving 5 times set flag is set to OFF (step S3305: No), the MPU 41 sets 5 as the initial value of the a time saving remaining number counter indicating the remaining number of time saving games in the a time saving game state. is not set, the process proceeds to step S3308.

<Steps S3306 and S3307>
When the a time saving 5 times set flag is set to ON (step S3305: Yes), the MPU 41 is updated information indicating the remaining time saving game number in the a time saving game state as the initial value of the a time saving remaining number counter Along with setting 5 (step S3306), a time saving 5 times set flag is set to OFF (step S3307), and the special figure game number management process is terminated.

<Step S3308>
If the a time saving 5 times set flag is set to OFF (step S3305: No), that is, if 5 is not set as the initial value of the a time saving remaining number counter indicating the remaining number of time saving games in the a time saving game state, MPU41 judges whether a time saving 1 time set flag is set to ON (step S3308). The a time saving 1 time set flag sets 1 time as the number of times of the a time saving game state which is a profit game state to be shifted when the jackpot game state which is a profit game state ends (the remaining time saving in the a time saving game state It is a flag that sets 1 as the initial value of the time-saving remaining number counter a indicating the number of games), and during the game of a small winning game triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning port 314 in the normal game state When a jackpot game state, which is a profit game state, is generated based on the entry of a game ball into the V winning port 833 of the feather accessory device 83 in the state, it is set to ON in step S3618 of the game state transition processing to be described later. be done.

The MPU 41 sets 1 as the initial value of the a time saving remaining number counter indicating the remaining time saving game number in the a time saving game state when the a time saving 1 time set flag is set to ON (step S3308: Yes). If so, the process proceeds to step S3309. On the other hand, the MPU 41, when the a time saving 1 time set flag is set to OFF (step S3308: No), that is, the initial value of the a time saving remaining number counter indicating the remaining number of time saving games in the a time saving game state is 1 is not set, the special figure game number management process is terminated.

<Steps S3309 and S3310>
When the a time saving 1 time set flag is set to ON (step S3308: Yes), the MPU 41 is updated information indicating the remaining time saving game number in the a time saving game state as the initial value of the a time saving remaining number counter Along with setting 1 (step S3309), a time saving 1 time set flag is set to OFF (step S3310), and the special figure game number management process is terminated.

<Steps S3311 and S3312>
If the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag is set to OFF (step S3301: No), that is, if the ceiling activation remaining number counter is not set as update information, the MPU 41 sets the special figure game number count flag to ON. (step S3311). The special figure game number count flag is a flag for executing update processing of the values of various counters managed in the special figure game number management process, and the main which is the display means in step S1911 in the special figure game control process of FIG. It is set to ON when the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which is a predetermined symbol, is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363 of the display portion 36 .

When the special figure game frequency count flag is set to ON (step S3311: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the special figure game frequency count flag to OFF (step S3312), and shifts the processing to step S3313. On the other hand, when the special figure game frequency count flag is set to OFF (step S3311: No), the MPU 41 ends the special figure game frequency management process.

<Step S3313>
In step S3313, the MPU 41 confirms that the ceiling activation remaining number counter, which is the update information, is set, that is, the gaming state in which the b time-reduction gaming state of the profit gaming state, which is the ceiling time-reduction gaming state, has not occurred. It is determined whether or not the ceiling unactivated flag shown is set to ON.

MPU41, when the ceiling non-execution flag indicating that the b time-saving gaming state of the profit gaming state which is the ceiling time-saving gaming state is not occurring is set to ON (step S3313: Yes), that is If the ceiling activation remaining counter, which is the update information, is set, the process proceeds to step S3314. On the other hand, if the ceiling unactivated flag indicating that the b time saving gaming state of the profit gaming state which is the ceiling time saving gaming state has not occurred is set to OFF (step S3313: No), that is, the b time saving gaming state occurs When the in-game state that has not been performed is completed and the b time-saving gaming state has already occurred, the special figure game number management process is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, when the b time-reduction gaming state occurs, if the jackpot game does not occur in the b time-reduction gaming state, the normal game state is entered, and the b time-reduction gaming state is generated again. no.

<Steps S3314 and S3315>
MPU41, when the ceiling non-execution flag indicating that it is a specific gaming state in which the b time saving gaming state of the profit gaming state which is the ceiling working hours gaming state has not occurred is set to ON (step S3313: Yes), That is, when the ceiling activation remaining number counter, which is the specific information, is set, update processing is performed to subtract 1 from the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter (step S3314), and the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter after subtraction is updated. It is determined whether or not it is 0, which is the end state (step S3315).

When the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter after subtraction is 0, which is a predetermined update state (step S3315: Yes), the mPU 41 shifts the process to step S3316, and the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter after subtraction is If it is not 0, which is the predetermined update state (step S3315: No), the process proceeds to step S3320 in FIG.

<Steps S3316 to S3319>
If the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter after subtraction is 0, which is a predetermined update state (step S3315: Yes), the MPU 41 is updated information indicating the remaining number of time-saving games that can be executed in the b time-saving gaming state. 1000 is set as the initial value of the b time saving remaining number counter (step S3316). That is, when the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter becomes 0, which is a predetermined update state, and a predetermined game condition is established, a maximum of 1000 time-saving games are possible as a predetermined profit state, and b is a time-saving state. A game state is generated.

Then, the MPU 41 turns on the b time saving remaining number counter set flag indicating that the b time saving remaining number counter, which is the update information, is set (step S3317). The b time saving remaining number counter set flag is used to determine whether or not to execute the updating process of the b time saving remaining number counter when the b time saving remaining number counter which is the update information is set. It is referred to in step S3325 in FIG. 355 of the count management process.

In addition, the MPU 41 sets the b time saving game state transition flag for shifting the game state to the b time saving game state which is the profit game state (step S3318), and the b time saving game in the profit game state which is the ceiling time saving game state. The ceiling non-execution flag indicating that the state is not generated is set to OFF (step S3319), and the special figure game number management process is ended.

It should be noted that the b time saving game state transition flag is referenced in step S3642 in the game state transition processing of FIG.

<Step S3320>
If the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter after subtraction is not 0, which is a predetermined update state (step S3315: No), the MPU 41, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the a time saving remaining number counter set flag indicating that there is is set to ON (step S3320).

If the a time saving remaining number counter set flag indicating that the a time saving remaining number counter is set is set to ON (step S3320: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3321, When the a time saving remaining number counter set flag indicating that the a time saving remaining number counter is set is set to OFF (step S3320: No), the process proceeds to step S3325.

<Steps S3321 and S3322>
When the a time saving remaining number counter set flag indicating that the a time saving remaining number counter is set is set to ON (step S3320: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the a time saving remaining number counter. (step S3321), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving remaining number counter a after the subtraction is 0, which is the update end state (step S3322).

If the value of the time saving remaining number counter after subtraction is 0, which is the update end state (step S3322: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3323, and the value of the time saving remaining number counter after subtraction is updated. If it is not 0, which is the end state (step S3322: No), the special figure game count management process is terminated.

<Steps S3323 and S3324>
When the value of the a time saving remaining number counter after the subtraction is 0, which is the update end state (step S3322: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal game state transition flag to ON for shifting the game state to the normal game state At the same time (step S3323), the a time saving remaining number counter set flag indicating that the a time saving remaining number counter is set is set to off (step S3324), and the special figure game number management process is ended. do.

It should be noted that the normal game state transition flag is referenced in step S3648 or S3654 in the game state transition process of FIG. 368 in order to determine whether or not to shift the game state to the normal game state.

<Step S3325>
When the a time-saving remaining number counter set flag indicating that the a time-saving remaining number counter, which is the update information, is set to off (step S3320: No), the MPU 41 updates the b time-saving remaining number, which is the update information. It is determined whether or not the b time saving remaining number counter set flag indicating that the counter is set is set to ON (step S3325).

When the b time saving remaining number counter set flag indicating that the b time saving remaining number counter is set is set to ON (step S3325: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3326, When the b time saving remaining number counter set flag indicating that the b time saving remaining number counter is set is set to OFF (step S3325: No), the special figure game number management process is terminated.

<Steps S3326 and S3327>
When the b time saving remaining number counter set flag indicating that the b time saving remaining number counter is set is set to ON (step S3325: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the b time saving remaining number counter. (step S3326), and it is determined whether or not the value of the b time saving remaining number counter after the subtraction is 0, which is the update end state (step S3327).

If the value of the b time saving remaining number counter after subtraction is 0, which is the update end state (step S3327: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3328, and the value of the b time saving remaining number counter after subtraction is updated. If it is not 0, which is the end state (step S3327: No), the special figure game number management process is terminated.

<Steps S3328 and S3329>
When the value of the b time saving remaining number counter after the subtraction is 0, which is the update end state (step S3327: Yes), the MPU 41 sets on the normal game state transition flag for shifting the game state to the normal game state. At the same time (step S3328), the b time saving remaining number counter set flag indicating that the b time saving remaining number counter which is the update information is set is set to off (step S3329), and the special figure game number management process is ended. do.

It should be noted that the normal game state transition flag is referenced in step S3648 or S3654 in the game state transition process of FIG. 368 in order to determine whether or not to shift the game state to the normal game state.

[Small hit game control process]
Here, Figures 356 and 357 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the small winning game control process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407-2 in the main process of Figure 346 . In the small winning game control process of the present embodiment, the lottery result in the big winning lottery executed with the entry of the game ball to the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 as the starting ball entry area is a small winning. A process for controlling the operation of the feather accessory device 83 is executed in the small winning game executed based on that.

<Step S3401>
As shown in FIG. 214, in the small hit game control process of the present embodiment, the MPU 41 is, first, the special figure fluctuation stop flag indicating that the first special figure or the second special figure, which is a predetermined symbol, has been stopped and displayed. It is determined whether or not it is set to ON (step S3401). That is, the MPU 41 starts the small winning game by ending the playing state of the special symbol game (first special symbol game, second special symbol game) by the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Determine whether or not the time has come. It should be noted that the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON when stopping and displaying the first special figure or the second special figure in step S1909 in the special figure game control process of FIG.

MPU41, when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S3401: Yes), that is, when the playing state of the special figure game is the timing when it is possible to start the small winning game, the process is step S3402 transition to On the other hand, when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S3401: No), that is, when it is not the timing at which the small winning game can be started, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3412.

<Step S3402>
If the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S3401: Yes), that is, if it is time to start the small winning game that the playing state of the special figure game has ended, the MPU 41 is the special figure game It is determined whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery for is a small hit (step S3402). Whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a small hit is determined based on the win/fail information read from the special figure execution area AE of the special figure reservation storage area 412b in step S2102 or S2110 in the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. be done.

The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3403 when the result of the jackpot lottery for the special game is a small hit (step S3402: Yes). On the other hand, the MPU 41 ends the small winning game control process when the result of the big winning lottery is not a small winning (step S3402: No), that is, when the result of the big winning lottery is a loss.

<Steps S3403 and S3404>
When the result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game is a small hit (step S3402: Yes), the MPU 41 sets on a small hit game start flag indicating that the small hit game is started (step S3403). Then, the MPU 41 sets a small winning game start command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the small winning game is started (step S3404), and shifts the process to step S3405.

The small winning game start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. In the voice lamp control device 5, by receiving a small winning game start command, it is possible to set a small winning game effect to be executed in the symbol display section 341 or the like.

<Steps S3405 and S3406>
In step S3405, the MPU 41 sets ON an opening flag indicating that the opening of the small winning game is being executed. Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets an opening time counter, which is update information indicating the remaining time of the opening (step S3406), and shifts the process to step S3407.

<Step S3407>
In step S3407, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter, which is the update information indicating the number of special figure games required before shifting to the b time saving gaming state, is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. Here, the predetermined value in step S3407 is a jackpot game that is a specific profit by establishing a game ball entering the V winning port 833 of the feather accessory device 83, which is a predetermined game condition in the small winning game. A break-even point is set as to whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player to generate the state.

This break-even point is set based on design values for the gaming machine 10 when the gaming machine 10 is shipped from the factory, for example. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 346(A), the <shipping design value> for the gaming machine 10 at the time of shipment from the factory is (1) 1 when left-handed, which is encouraged in the normal gaming state. 12.5 balls (20 times per difference ball of -250 balls), (2) Before reaching the b time-saving game state, which is the ceiling time-saving game state When the first jackpot game (first hit) occurs, the difference ball expected value is +3000 balls, and (3) the first jackpot game (first hit) occurs when the b time saving game state, which is the ceiling time saving game state, is reached. If the expected ball difference value is +4500 balls, the <calculated value> is (1) the expected ball difference value between the first hit in the b time-reduced gaming state and the first hit before reaching the b time-reduced gaming state. The difference is 1,500 balls, and (2) the theoretical value of the number of executions of the special-design game that can be executed with 1,500 balls, which is the difference between the difference ball expected values, is 120 times. Therefore, as a <result>, (1) If the remaining number of times to reach the b time saving game state which is the ceiling time saving game state is 120 times or less, the expected difference ball when reaching the b time saving game state If the number is positive and (2) the remaining number of times to reach the b time saving game state, which is the ceiling time saving game state, is 121 or more, the expected number of difference balls when reaching the b time saving game state is minus. becomes. Therefore, when the game machine 10 is shipped from the factory and the design value for the game machine 10 is the example shown in FIG.

Returning to the description of FIG. 356, when the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (step S3407: Yes), for example, when the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is 121 or more, the MPU 41 performs the process in step S3409. transition to On the other hand, when the value of the ceiling activation remaining counter is less than the predetermined value (step S3407: No), for example, when the value of the ceiling activation remaining counter is less than 121 (120 or less), the process proceeds to step S3408. Transition.

<Step S3408>
When the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is less than a predetermined value (step S3407: No), for example, when the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is less than 121 (120 or less), the MPU 41 is in the b time saving game state. It is determined whether or not the b time-saving gaming state flag indicating is set to ON (step S3408).

Here, if the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is less than a predetermined value (step S3407: No), for example, if the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is less than 121 (120 or less), the ceiling activation remaining number counter is 0. On the other hand, the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter becomes 0 when it is in the b time saving game state (activating the ceiling time saving game state), or after the b time saving game state ends the normal game state (ceiling time saving game state) activated). Therefore, by judging whether the b time-saving gaming state flag is set to ON, the value of the ceiling activation remaining counter is 0 because it is in the b time-saving gaming state (activating the ceiling time-saving gaming state) , b It is determined whether the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is 0 because it is the normal game state after the end of the time saving game state (the ceiling time saving game state has been activated).

MPU41, when the b time-reduction gaming state flag is set to ON (step S3408: Yes), that is, when it is b time-reduction gaming state (during activation of the ceiling time-reduction gaming state), the process proceeds to step S3409. On the other hand, the MPU 41, if the b time-reduction gaming state flag is set to off (step S3408: No), that is, the normal game state after the end of the b time-reduction gaming state (already activated the ceiling time-reduction gaming state), process to step S3410.

<Step S3409>
In step S3409, the MPU 41 provides the sound lamp control device 5 with a winning display OP command for setting a winning display opening effect (see FIG. 359(A)) in the symbol display unit 341 described later as the opening effect of the small winning game. set. This get display OP command is sent to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. In the sound lamp control device 5, by receiving the obtain display OP command, it is possible to set the obtain display opening effect as the opening effect of the small hit game executed in the pattern display section 341. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 359(A), the winning display opening effect indicates that the break-even point has not been reached, that is, it is more advantageous to generate a big win game in the small win game in the first notification mode. This is an effect that is notified at the opening of the game. In the example shown in FIG. 359 (A), in the pattern display unit 341, "Aim for V with right hand! Because that is more profitable!" It is notified that it is more advantageous to generate a jackpot game.

<Step S3410>
The value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is less than a predetermined value (step S3407: No), for example, the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is less than 121 (120 or less), b time saving game indicating that it is in b time saving game state When the state flag is set to OFF (step S3408; No), the MPU 41 instructs the sound lamp control device 5 to display a loss display opening effect (Fig. 359(B)) is set (step S3410). This loss display OP command is sent to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. By receiving the loss display OP command, the sound lamp control device 5 can set the loss display opening effect as the opening effect of the small winning game executed in the symbol display section 341 .

As shown in FIG. 359(B), the loss display opening effect indicates that the break-even point has been reached, that is, it is more advantageous not to generate the big win game in the small win game in the second notification mode. This is an effect that is notified at the opening of the game. In the example shown in FIG. 359(B), in the pattern display section 341, "Well, if you wait a little longer, you will definitely be able to enter RUSH. If you want to do that, why don't you hit right?", it is informed that it is more advantageous not to generate a big winning game based on the small winning game.

Here, in step S3409 where the obtain display OP command is set, if the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (step S3407: Yes), for example, the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is 121 or more. migrated if That is, until the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter becomes less than a predetermined value, for example, until the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter becomes less than 120, the difference ball expected value is higher than the shift to the b time-saving gaming state. Since it is in the state, at the opening of the small winning game, the symbol display unit 341 is informed that it is more advantageous to generate the big winning game based on the small winning game by the first notification mode.

In addition, to step S3409 in which the obtained display OP command is set, even when a small winning game occurs in the b time-saving gaming state, the transition is made (step S3408: Yes). That is, in the small winning game generated in the b time saving game state, the rate of entering the RUSH state when the big winning game ends is preferentially treated as 100%, so at the opening of the small winning game, the symbol display unit 341 It is reported that it is more advantageous to generate a big winning game based on the small winning game by the 1 notification mode.

On the other hand, in step S3410 where the loss display OP command is set, the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is less than the predetermined value (step S3407: No), for example, the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is less than 121 ( 120 or less), and when the b time saving game state flag indicating that it is in the b time saving game state is set to OFF (step S3408; No). That is, from when the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter becomes less than a predetermined value to transition to the b time saving game state, for example, when the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is less than 120 to 0, the b time saving game state Since shifting is a state with a higher expected ball difference value, it is advantageous not to cause the symbol display unit 341 to generate a big winning game based on the small winning game in the second notification mode at the opening of the small winning game. be notified.

That is, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 358 (B), even if the result of the big winning lottery is the same small winning, the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is a predetermined value or more as the opening effect of the small winning game. Until the break-even point is reached (for example, the remaining number of times until the transition to the b time-saving gaming state, which is the ceiling time-saving gaming state, is up to 121 times), the obtained display opening effect according to the first notification mode is executed, After the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is less than a predetermined value and the break-even point is reached (for example, the remaining number of times before moving to the b time saving game state which is the ceiling time saving game state is 120 times), the second After the loss display opening effect by the 2 notification mode is executed, and after shifting to the b time reduction game state which is the ceiling time reduction game state, the gain display opening effect by the 1st notification mode is executed.

<Step S3411>
Returning to the description of Figure 356, when the gain display OP command is set (step S3409) or when the loss display OP command is set (step S3410), the MPU 41 starts the opening of the small winning game by voice lamp control A small hit opening start command to be notified to the device 5 is set (step S3411), and the small hit game control process is terminated.

The small hit opening start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. In the sound lamp control device 5, by receiving the small winning opening start command, as the opening effect in the small winning game executed in the symbol display unit 341 etc., the first notification mode shown in FIG. A display opening effect or a loss display opening effect, which is the second notification mode shown in FIG. 359(B), can be started.

By the way, as a conventional gaming machine, like the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, there is one that generates a b time-saving gaming state, which is a ceiling time-saving gaming state, by executing a special figure game for a specified number of times. As a conventional gaming machine equipped with such a ceiling function, as described above, there is one that notifies the remaining number of special game games required to reach the specified number of times, for example. Therefore, it is difficult to judge whether or not the above-mentioned break-even point is exceeded, that is, it is difficult to judge whether or not generating a big win is advantageous to the player. In addition, in a conventional gaming machine equipped with a ceiling function, when a small winning game occurs, a display prompting right-handed hitting is made in the opening performance of the small winning game. Therefore, when a small winning game occurs, the player unconditionally hits to the right according to the display prompting him to hit to the right.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 in which the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter is not initialized by not generating a jackpot game even if a small winning game occurs, as in the present embodiment, a small winning game is performed in the same manner as in the conventional gaming machine. If a display prompting right-handed hitting is performed in the opening production of , the player is more advantageous to receive the benefits of the b-time-saving gaming state, which is the ceiling-time-saving gaming state, without generating a jackpot game beyond the break-even point. There is a concern that the player will unconditionally hit to the right and will not be able to receive the benefits of the b time-reduction game state, which is the ceiling time-reduction game state.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if the result of the special jackpot lottery, which is the result of the predetermined determination, is a small hit, which is the result of the specific determination, the value of the ceiling activation remaining counter, which is the specific information, is updated in a predetermined manner. Until the break-even point, which is a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the state 0, is reached, the fact that it is a small hit, which is a specific determination result, is notified by the profit display opening effect, which is the first notification mode, After reaching the break-even point, which is the specific timing, the fact that the game is a small win, which is the result of the specific determination, is switched to be notified by the loss display opening effect, which is the second notification mode. That is, in the present embodiment, in a notification mode corresponding to the expected value of profit that the player can obtain at the stage of occurrence of the small winning game, the profit and loss of the expected value of profit is notified at the opening of the small winning game. . Therefore, when a small winning game occurs, the player can grasp the profit and loss of the profit that the player can acquire by paying attention to the opening effect of the small winning game. Whether or not to generate a big winning game can be determined based on the notification mode in the opening effect of the small winning game. As a result, it is better to select not to generate the jackpot game when the expected value of the profit that can be obtained is higher if the jackpot game is not generated based on the small winning game, and to generate the jackpot game based on the small winning game. It is possible to select to generate a jackpot game when the expected value of profit that can be obtained is high. As a result, the player can avoid the disadvantage of not transitioning to the b time-saving gaming state due to the occurrence of a jackpot game at the stage when the transition to the b time-saving gaming state, which is the ceiling time-saving gaming state, is approaching. Interest is enhanced.

In particular, in the present embodiment, after reaching the break-even point, which is a specific timing advantageous to the player to shift to the b time-saving gaming state, which is the ceiling time-saving gaming state, the notification mode of the opening effect of the small winning game is switched. Therefore, even if a small winning game occurs in a period in which it is difficult to judge the profit and loss in the vicinity of the break-even point, a decision that is advantageous to itself is more reliably made based on the notification mode of the opening performance of the small winning game. becomes possible.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the opening effect of the small winning game, the profit display opening effect in the first notification mode is executed until the break-even point is reached, and the second notification mode is executed after the break-even point is reached. A loss display opening effect is executed. That is, when the loss display opening effect by the second notification mode is executed as the opening effect of the small winning game that occurred before shifting to the b time saving game state which is the ceiling time saving game state, the b time saving game which is the ceiling time saving game state The acquisition display opening effect by the first notification mode is not executed until the transition to the state is made.

In this way, when the loss display opening effect according to the second notification mode is executed as the opening effect of the small winning game generated before shifting to the b time saving game state which is the ceiling time saving game state, the profit display according to the first notification mode It can be continuously understood that it is advantageous not to generate a big winning game when a small winning game is generated by not executing the opening performance. Therefore, when the loss display opening performance in the second notification mode is executed after the loss display opening performance in the second notification mode is executed as the opening performance of the small win game, the big win is not generated in a short time. can be determined to be advantageous. As a result, when it is more advantageous not to generate a big winning game when a small winning game is generated, the possibility of erroneously causing a big winning game is reduced, so that the player receives an unexpected disadvantage. is prevented.

By the way, the break-even point set as a characteristic of the gaming machine 10 is effective for a player who has plenty of time to play, but the length of time that a player can play depends on the time remaining until the game hall closes. , varies depending on the player's own convenience. In other words, the break-even point may not be effective when the player is short on playing time.

Also, as described above, the break-even point is pinpointed, for example, based on the design values at the time of shipment from the factory. On the other hand, the actual break-even point differs for each game machine 10 depending on the state of the game nail driven into the game board 31 at the time of shipment, the degree of deterioration over time, etc., and also differs depending on the intensity of the game ball shot by the player. . In other words, since the winning rate of game balls into the various winning holes 313 to 316 may change due to deterioration over time, the strength of the game ball shot by the player, etc., the break-even point is not constant. In addition, the break-even point is whether or not there is a stopping strike when there is a certain number of reservations for the right to execute a special game, whether or not there is a stopping strike when a reach effect with a long variable display time occurs, a small hit game or a big hit game It also depends on the game technique, such as whether or not there is a stopping shot at the opening. In other words, the actual break-even point varies depending on factors unique to each gaming machine 10, factors based on the game technique of the player, and the like. Therefore, the actual break-even point cannot be fixed and pinpointed, but is an approximation of the value set based on the design value at the time of shipment from the factory.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special figure jackpot lottery is a small win, the timing before reaching the break-even point is set as the predetermined timing, and after reaching the break-even point A timing after a certain period of time may be set as the specific timing. That is, an intermediate period including the break-even point may be set between the predetermined timing and the specific timing. Also in this case, as the opening effect of the small winning game, the win display opening effect of the first notification mode is executed until a predetermined timing, and the loss display opening effect of the second notification mode is executed from the specific timing. In an intermediate period including a break-even point set between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, the opening effect of the small winning game is executed in a third notification mode different from the first notification mode and the second notification mode. can be considered.

For example, as shown in FIG. 359 (A), for example, when the break-even point is the ceiling time-saving gaming state b time-saving gaming state remaining until the occurrence of the special game number (ceiling activation remaining number of times) is 120 times , the point where the number of remaining ceiling activations 20 times before the break-even point is 140 is a predetermined timing, the point where the remaining number of ceiling activations 20 times after the break-even point is 100 times is a specific timing, and the ceiling It is conceivable to set the remaining activation count of 100 to 140 times as the intermediate period. Then, as the opening effect of the small winning game, the first notification mode of the opening display effect is executed until the ceiling activation remaining count is 140 times at a predetermined timing, and from the ceiling activation remaining count of 100 times at the specific timing. It is conceivable to execute the loss display opening effect of the second notification mode, and execute the opening effect of the third notification mode when the ceiling activation remaining count is 100 to 140 times, which is the intermediate period.

In addition, as the opening effect of the third notification mode at the opening of the small winning game, for example, border notification between these, which is neither a win display nor a loss display, can be considered. As a border notification, for example, as in the example shown in FIG. ' is conceivable, and the advantages and disadvantages of generating a big winning game based on the small winning game are ambiguously notified.

It should be noted that as the border notification of the third notification mode in the intermediate period including the break-even point, other modes are also conceivable. For example, as shown in FIG. 360(C), as the border notification in the third notification mode, it is possible to alternately switch between the winning display in the first reporting mode and the loss display in the second reporting mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, an intermediate period including the break-even point between the predetermined timing and the specific timing is set, and border notification in the third notification mode is performed in this intermediate period. Even if the break-even point is variable and differs from the break-even point pinpointed based on the design value at the time of shipment from the factory, by the border notification of the third notification mode in the intermediate period including the break-even point, When a small winning game occurs, it is reported that it is difficult to judge the profit and loss of generating a big winning game. As a result, when the border notification of the third notification mode is performed as the opening performance when the small winning game occurs, the player generates the big winning game by his/her own judgment considering fluid factors. can decide whether

<Step S3412>
Returning to the description of FIG. 356, if the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S3401: No), that is, if it is not the timing at which the small winning game can be started, the MPU 41 executes the opening of the small winning game. It is determined whether or not the opening flag indicating that the opening is set to ON (step S3412).

MPU41, when the opening flag is set to ON (step S3412: Yes), that is, when the opening of the small winning game is executed, the process proceeds to step S3413. On the other hand, when the opening flag is set to OFF (step S3412: No), that is, when the opening of the small winning game is not executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3423 of FIG.

<Steps S3413 to S3416>
When the opening flag is set to ON (step S3412: Yes), that is, when the opening of the small winning game is executed, the MPU 41 is updated by 1 from the value of the opening time counter which is the update information indicating the remaining time of the opening. An update process of subtraction is executed (step S3413), and it is determined whether or not the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0, which is the update end state (step S3414). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to end the opening and start the operation of the movable feather portion 832 of the feather accessory device 83 in the small winning game.

When the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3414: Yes), the MPU 41 is the timing to end the opening and start the operation of the movable feather portion 832 of the feather accessory device 83 in the small winning game. In this case, the opening flag indicating that the opening is being executed is set to OFF (step S3415), and the small winning opening end command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the opening of the small winning is finished is set ( Step S3416), and the process proceeds to step S3417.

The small winning opening end command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. In the sound lamp control device 5, by receiving the small winning opening end command, it is possible to end the opening effect in the small winning game executed in the pattern display section 341 or the like.

On the other hand, when the opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3414: No), that is, in the small winning game, it is not the timing to end the opening and start the operation of the movable feather portion 832 of the feather accessory device 83. In that case, the small winning game control process is terminated.

<Steps S3417 and 3418>
In step S3417, the operation of the movable wing portion 832 of the wing accessory device 83 is started (step S3417), and the process proceeds to step S3418. Thus, by starting the operation of the movable feather portion 832 of the feather accessory device 83 in the small winning game, the inlet 831 of the feather accessory device 83 is opened, and the game inside the feather accessory device 83 It is possible to enter the ball.

Then, the MPU 41 sets a movable wing operation start command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the operation of the movable wing portion 832 of the wing accessory device 83 is started (step S3418), and advances the process to step S3419. Transition.

The command to start the operation of the movable wing portion is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. The sound lamp control device 5 receives the command to start the operation of the movable wing portion, thereby executing the movable wing portion operation effect in the small winning game executed in the pattern display portion 341 or the like.

<Steps S3419 and S3420>
In step S3419, the MPU 41 sets on a movable wing actuation flag indicating that the movable wing 832 is being actuated. Then, the MPU 41 executes a process of setting a movable wing section operating time counter, which is update information indicating the remaining operating time of the movable wing section 832 (step S3420), and shifts the process to step S3421.

<Steps S3421 and S3422>
In step S3421, the MPU 41 starts the operation of the V winning opening opening/closing section 835, and further sets the V winning opening opening/closing section operating time counter, which is update information indicating the remaining time of the V winning opening opening/closing section 835 (step S3422). , ends the small winning game control process.

<Step S3423>
When the opening flag is set to OFF (step S3412: No), that is, when the opening of the small winning game is not executed, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the V winning opening opening/closing unit operation flag indicating that there is is set to ON (step S3423). When the V winning opening opening/closing unit operation flag is set to ON (step S3423: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3424, and when the V winning opening opening/closing unit operation flag is set to OFF (step S3423: No), the process proceeds to step S3432.

<Step S3424>
When the V winning opening opening/closing unit operation flag is set to ON (step S3423: Yes), the MPU 41 turns on the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83. (step S3424). The V winning flag is set to ON in step S3426 when a game ball enters the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83. FIG.

When the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 is set to ON (step S3424: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3428, If the winning flag is set to OFF (step S3424: No), the process proceeds to step S3425.

<Steps S3425 to S3427>
When the V winning flag is set to OFF (step S3424: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 (step S3425). Whether or not the game ball has entered the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 is determined, for example, in the winning ball command setting process of step S1403 in the main processing of FIG. It is determined by whether or not the ball is detected by an incoming ball sensor (not shown).

When the game ball enters the V winning port 833 of the feather accessory device 83 (step S3425: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the V winning flag to ON (step S3426), A V winning command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that a game ball has entered the winning hole 833 is set (step S3427), and the process proceeds to step S3428.

The V winning command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. In the voice lamp control device 5, by receiving the V winning command, the V winning effect in the small winning game executed in the symbol display unit 341 or the like can be terminated.

On the other hand, when the game ball has not entered the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 (step S3425: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3428.

<Steps S3428 and S3429>
In step S3428, the MPU 41 performs update processing for subtracting 1 from the V winning opening opening/closing section operating time counter, which is update information indicating the remaining operating time of the V winning opening opening/closing section 835 of the feather accessory device 83, and further, The MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the V winning opening opening/closing section operation time counter after the subtraction is 0, which is the end state of updating (step S3429). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to restore the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 of the feather accessory device 83 (close the V winning opening 833).

When the value of the V winning opening opening/closing unit operating time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3429: Yes), the MPU 41 restores the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 of the feather accessory device 83 (closes the V winning opening 833 ), the process proceeds to step S3430. On the other hand, if the value of the V winning opening opening/closing unit operating time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3429: No), the MPU 41 restores the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 of the feather accessory device 83 (the V winning opening 833 If it is not the time to close), the process proceeds to step S3432.

<Steps S3430 and S3431>
If the value of the V winning opening opening/closing unit operating time counter after the subtraction is 0 in the update end state (step S3430: Yes), that is, the V winning opening opening/closing unit 835 of the feather accessory device 83 is restored (the V winning opening 833 is When it is time to close the gate, the MPU 41 restores the V winning opening opening/closing section 835 (step S3430) and turns off the V winning opening opening/closing section operation flag indicating that the V winning opening opening/closing section 835 is being operated. set (step S3431), and the process proceeds to step S3433.

<Step S3432>
In step S3432, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a movable wing actuation flag indicating that the movable wing 832 is being actuated is set to ON. When the movable wing operation flag is set to ON (step S3432: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3433, and when the movable wing operation flag is set to OFF (step S3432: No). , ends the small winning game control process.

<Steps S3433 and S3434>
When the movable wing operation flag is set to ON (step S3432: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the movable wing operation time counter, which is update information indicating the remaining operation time of the movable wing 832. Update processing is executed (step S3433). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the movable blade operation time counter after the subtraction is 0, which is the end state of update (step S3434). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to end the small winning game by returning the movable feather portion 832 and closing the introduction port 831 .

When the value of the movable wing portion operating time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3434: Yes), the MPU 41 restores the movable wing portion 832 and closes the introduction port 831 to play a small winning game. If it is time to end the process, the process proceeds to step S3435. On the other hand, if the value of the movable wing portion operating time counter after subtraction is not 0, which is the end state of updating (step S3434: No), the MPU 41 restores the movable wing portion 832 and closes the introduction port 831, thereby closing the inlet 831. When it is not the timing to end the game, the small winning game control process is ended.

<Steps S3435 to S3438>
When the value of the movable wing portion operating time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3434: Yes), the MPU 41 returns the movable wing portion 832 to end the small winning game (step S3435). Then, the MPU 41 turns off the movable wing operation flag indicating that the movable wing 832 is activated (step S3436), and turns on the small winning game end flag indicating that the small winning game has ended. Set (step S3437), further, set a small winning game end command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the small winning game ends (step S3438), and end the small winning game control process.

It should be noted that the small winning game end command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the main process of FIG. In the voice lamp control device 5, by receiving the small winning game end command, the small winning game effect executed in the symbol display unit 341 or the like can be ended.

[Jackpot game control process]
Here, FIGS. 362 to 365 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in step S1407 in the main process of FIG. In the jackpot game control process, when a predetermined game condition is established by entering a game ball into the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 in the small winning game, the profit generation means generates a specific profit as a variable ball entry means. A process for generating a jackpot game such as opening/closing control of the opening/closing door 319 provided in the variable winning opening 316 is executed. Hereinafter, the jackpot game control process will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Step S3501>
As shown in FIG. 362, in the jackpot game control process of the present embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the small hit game end flag indicating that the small hit game ends is on (step S3501). The small hitting game end flag is set to ON in step S3447 in the small hitting game control process in FIG. 357 when ending the small hitting game.

MPU41, when the small hitting game end flag is ON (step S3501: Yes), that is, when it is the timing when the small hitting game ends, the process proceeds to step S3502. On the other hand, when the small hitting game end flag is off (step S3501: No), that is, when it is not the timing when the small hitting game ends, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3512.

<Step S3502>
When the small hit game end flag is ON (step S3501: Yes), that is, when it is the timing when the small hit game ends, the small hit game end flag is set to OFF (step S3502), and the process proceeds to step S3503. do.

<Steps S3503 and S3504>
In step S3503, the MPU 41 indicates that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 in the small winning game, but determines whether or not the V winning flag is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 in a small winning game under a predetermined game condition in which a specific profit of executing the big winning game is generated by the profit generating means. or not.

It should be noted that the V winning flag is set to ON in step S3426 in the small winning game control process of FIG.

When the V winning flag is set to ON (step S3503: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the V winning flag to OFF (step S3504), and shifts the process to step S3505. On the other hand, when the V winning flag is set to OFF (step S3503: No), the MPU 41 ends the big hit game control process.

<Step S3505>
In step S3505, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game start command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of the type of jackpot game (4R short-time jackpot game or 16R short-time jackpot game) to start the jackpot game, and step processing. Move to S3506. The jackpot game start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 of the next main process executed by the MPU 41 (see FIG. 346). Thereby, the sound ramp control device 5 can execute a jackpot game effect corresponding to the jackpot game type based on the jackpot game start command.

<Step S3506>
In step S3506, the MPU 41 sets on a jackpot game start flag indicating that a jackpot game is to be started, and shifts the process to step S3507. The jackpot game start flag is updated information indicating the number of remaining a time-saving games in the a time-saving game state that is shifted after the end of the jackpot game in step S3516 in the game state transition processing of FIG. 357 described later. It is referred to when determining whether to set the initial value of the remaining number counter.

<Step S3507>
In step S3507, the MPU 41 sets on a jackpot playing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed, and shifts the process to step S3508. The jackpot game flag is referenced in step S1504 of the normal game control process of FIG. 347 and step S1901 of the special game control process of FIG. 351 in order to determine whether or not the jackpot game is being executed.

<Step S3508>
In step S3508, the MPU 41 sets a round number counter, which is update information indicating the number of remaining round games in the open/close execution mode, and shifts the process to step S3507. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the round number counter to "4" when the jackpot type is the 4R short time jackpot, and sets the round number counter to "16" when the jackpot type is the 16R probability variable jackpot.

<Step S3509>
In step S3509, the MPU 41 sets an opening start command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of starting the opening of the jackpot game, and the process proceeds to step S3510. The opening start command is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 346) executed by the MPU 41. FIG. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can start the opening effect in the pattern display section 341 or the like based on the opening start command.

<Step S3510>
In step S3510, the MPU 41 sets an opening time counter, which is update information indicating the remaining time of the opening, and shifts the process to step S3511. The opening time counter is referenced in step S3514 of FIG. 363 of the jackpot game control process in order to determine whether or not it is time to end the opening.

<Step S3511>
In step S3511, the MPU 41 sets ON the flag during opening, which indicates that the opening is being executed, and ends the jackpot game control process. The opening flag is referred to in step S3512 in the jackpot game control process in order to determine whether the opening is in progress.

<Step S3512>
When the small hit start flag is off (step S3501: No), that is, when it is not the time to start the small hit game, the MPU 41 checks whether the opening flag indicating that the opening is being executed is on. It judges (step S3512).

When the opening flag is ON (step S3512: Yes), that is, when the opening is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3513 in FIG. On the other hand, if the opening flag is off (step S3512: No), that is, if the opening is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S3523.

<Steps S3513 and S3514>
If the opening flag is ON (step S3512: Yes), that is, if the opening is being executed, the MPU 41 calculates the value of the opening time counter, which is update information indicating the remaining time of the opening, as shown in FIG. An update process of subtracting 1 is executed (step S3513), and it is determined whether or not the value of the opening time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3514). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to end the opening.

When the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3514: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the opening, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3515. On the other hand, MPU41, when the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3514: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the opening, ends the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S3515 and S3516>
When the value of the opening time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3514: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the opening, the MPU 41 notifies the sound lamp control device 5 that the opening of the jackpot game ends. An opening end command is set (step S3515). This opening end command is sent to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 346) executed by the MPU 41. FIG. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can end the opening effect executed in the pattern display section 341 or the like based on the opening end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the opening flag indicating that the opening is being executed to off (step S3516), and shifts the process to step S3517.

<Step S3517>
In step S3517, the MPU 41 sets an opening/closing execution mode start command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the opening/closing execution mode in which the round game is executed a plurality of times (4 times or 16 times) is started, and performs processing. to step S3518. The opening/closing execution mode start command is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 346) executed by the MPU 41. FIG. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can start the opening/closing execution mode effect executed in the pattern display section 341 or the like based on the opening/closing execution mode start command.

<Step S3518>
In step S3518, the MPU 41 sets a round game start command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the round game is started, and shifts the process to step S3519. The round game start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process executed by the MPU 41 (see FIG. 346). Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can start the round game effect corresponding to each round game including the number of rounds displayed in the pattern display section 341 or the like based on the round game start command.

<Steps S3519 and S3520>
In step S3519, the MPU 41 performs an update process of subtracting 1 from the round number counter, which is update information indicating the number of remaining round games in the open/close execution mode, and operates the open/close door 319 to perform variable ball entry means. is opened (step S3520), and the process proceeds to step S3521.

<Steps S3521 and S3522>
In step S3521, the MPU 41 sets on a round game in-progress flag indicating that the round game is being executed, and further sets a round game time counter which is update information indicating the remaining time of the round game (step S3522 ), the jackpot game control process ends. The round game time counter determines whether it is time to end the round game (return the open/close door 319 and close the variable winning port 316) after the lapse of the specified time. It is referred to in S3525.

<Step S3523>
Returning to FIG. 362, when the opening flag is off (step S3512: No), that is, when the opening is not being executed, the MPU 41 sets the round game flag indicating that the round game is being executed to ON. (step S3523). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the round game is being executed.

MPU41 transfers a process to step S3524 of FIG. 364, when a round game flag is ON (step S3523: Yes), ie, when a round game is being performed. On the other hand, when the round playing flag is off (step S3523: No), that is, when the round game is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3537.

<Steps S3524 and S3525>
When the round game in progress flag is ON (step S3523: Yes), that is, when the round game is being executed, as shown in FIG. An update process of subtracting 1 from the counter value is executed (step S3524). And MPU41 judges whether the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3525). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to end the round game after the lapse of the specified time (close the variable winning port 316, which is the variable ball entry means, by returning the opening/closing door 319).

When the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3525: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the round game when the specified time elapses 316), the process proceeds to step S3529. On the other hand, if the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3525: No), that is, the round game is terminated when the specified time has elapsed If it is not time to close the mouth 316, the process proceeds to step S3526.

<Step S3526>
If the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3525: No), that is, the round game is terminated when the specified time elapses (the variable winning port 316, which is the variable ball entry means, is closed by the return of the opening/closing door 319). If it is not the timing to do so, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the variable winning hole 316 (step S3526). Whether or not a game ball has entered the variable winning hole 316 is determined when the game ball has entered the ball sensor 316a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. The determination is made based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412 immediately.

MPU41, when there is a game ball entering the variable winning opening 316 (step S3526: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3527, when there is no game ball entering the variable winning opening 316 (step S3526: No), end the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S3527 and S3528>
When there is a game ball entering the variable winning hole 316 (step S3526: Yes), the MPU 41 updates the number of entering balls, which is update information indicating the number of entering balls into the variable winning hole 316 in the round game. Update processing for adding 1 to the counter value is executed (step S3527). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the number-of-entered-balls counter after the addition has reached 10 (step S3528), that is, ends the round game by entering the upper limit number of game balls into the variable winning hole 316 (opening/closing door It is determined whether or not it is time to close the variable winning opening 316, which is the variable ball entry means, by the return of 319.

The MPU 41 ends the round game when the value of the number-of-entered-balls counter after addition has reached 10 (step S3528: Yes), that is, by entering the upper limit number of game balls into the variable winning hole 316 (opening/closing door 319 When it is time to close the variable winning opening 316, which is the variable ball entry means, the process proceeds to step S3529. On the other hand, the MPU 41 ends the round game (opens and closes When it is not the timing to close the variable winning opening 316 which is the variable ball entry means by the return of the door 319, the jackpot game control process is terminated.

<Step S3529>
When the value of the round game time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3525: Yes), or when the value of the ball-entering counter reaches 10 (step S3528: Yes), the MPU 41 restores the open/close door 319. By doing so, the variable winning opening 316 is closed (step S3529), and the process proceeds to step S3530. That is, the MPU 41 closes the variable winning opening 316 to end the round game when it is time to end the round game due to the passage of the specified time or the entry of the upper limit number of game balls into the variable winning opening 316. .

<Steps S3530 to S3532>
In step S3530, the MPU 41 sets a round game end command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the round game ends. The round game end command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process executed by the MPU 41 (see FIG. 346). As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can terminate the round game effect executed in the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the round game end command.

Then, the MPU 41 executes update processing for clearing the number-of-entered-balls counter, which is update information indicating the number of game balls entered into the variable winning hole 316 in the round game (step S3531), and executes the round game. A round playing flag indicating that the game is in progress is set to OFF (step S3532), and the process proceeds to step S3533.

<Step S3533>
In step S3533, the MPU 41 determines whether the round number counter, which is update information indicating the number of remaining round games in the opening/closing execution mode, is 0 (step S3533), that is, the timing to end the opening/closing execution mode (not It is determined whether or not there is a round game to be executed.

When the round number counter is 0 (step S3533: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3542. On the other hand, when the round number counter is not 0 (step S3533: No), that is, when there is an unexecuted round game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3534.

<Step S3534>
If the round number counter is not 0 (step S3533: No), that is, if there is an unexecuted round game, the MPU 41 sets an interval start command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 to start the interval between round games. (step S3534), and the process proceeds to step S3535. The interval start command is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 346) executed by the MPU 41. FIG. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can start the interval production in the pattern display section 341 or the like based on the interval start command.

<Steps S3535 and S3536>
In step S3535, the MPU 41 sets on an interval flag indicating that the interval between round games is being executed. And MPU41 sets the interval time counter which shows the remaining time of an interval as update information (step S3536), and complete|finishes the said jackpot game control processing. The interval time counter is referenced in step S3539 of FIG. 365 in the jackpot game control process in order to determine whether it is time to end the interval (start the round game).

<Step S3537>
Returning to FIG. 365, when the round playing flag is off (step S3523: No), that is, when the round game is not being executed, the MPU 41 determines that the interval flag indicating that the interval between round games is being executed is It is determined whether or not it is on (step S3537). During the interval flag is set to ON in step S3534 of FIG. 364 in the jackpot game control process when the interval is started, and turned off in step S3541 of FIG. 365 in the jackpot game control process when the interval ends. set.

When the interval flag is ON (step S3537: Yes), that is, when the interval between rounds is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3538 in FIG. On the other hand, when the interval flag is off (step S3537: No), that is, when the interval between rounds is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3547.

<Steps S3538 and S3539>
If the interval flag is ON (step S3537: Yes), that is, if the interval between rounds is being executed, the MPU 41 updates the interval time counter, which is update information indicating the remaining time of the interval, as shown in FIG. update processing is executed to subtract 1 from the value of (step S3538). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3539), ie, whether or not it is time to end the interval (start the round game).

MPU41, when the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3539: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the interval and start the round game, the process proceeds to step S3540. On the other hand, MPU41, when the value of the interval time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3539: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the interval (start the round game), ends the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S3540 and S3541>
When the value of the interval time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3539: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the interval and start the round game, the MPU 41 informs the sound lamp control device 5 that the interval is over. Interval end command to be notified to is set (step S3540). The interval end command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process executed by the MPU 41 (see FIG. 346). As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can end the interval effect executed in the pattern display section 341 or the like based on the interval end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the interval flag indicating that the interval between round games is being executed to OFF (step S3541), and shifts the processing to step S3518 in FIG. 363 described above. By moving the process to step S3517 in the above-described FIG. 363, the process of steps S3518 to S3522 relating to the start of the round game is executed, and the jackpot game control process ends.

<Step S3542>
Returning to FIG. 364, when the round number counter is 0 (step S3533: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 41 terminates the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game. 5 is set (step S3542), and the process proceeds to step S3543. The opening/closing execution mode end command is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 346) executed by the MPU 41. FIG. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can terminate the round game effect (opening/closing execution mode effect) executed in the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the opening/closing execution mode end command.

<Step S3543>
In step S3543, the MPU 41 sets an ending start command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of starting the ending of the jackpot game, and the process proceeds to step S3544. The ending start command is sent to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 346) executed by the MPU 41. FIG. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can start the ending effect in the pattern display section 341 or the like based on the ending start command.

<Steps S3544 and S3545>
In step S3544, the MPU 41 turns on an ending flag indicating that the ending is being executed. And MPU41 sets the ending time counter which shows the remaining time of ending which is update information (step S3545), and complete|finishes the said jackpot game control processing. The ending time counter is referenced in step S3548 in FIG. 365 of the jackpot game control process in order to determine whether it is time to end the ending (jackpot game).

<Step S3546>
Returning to FIG. 362, if the during-interval flag is off (step S3537: No), that is, if the interval between rounds is not being executed, whether or not the during-ending flag indicating that the ending is being executed is on is determined (step S3546).

If the ending flag is ON (step S3546: Yes), that is, if the ending is being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3547 in FIG. On the other hand, when the ending flag is off (step S3546: No), that is, when the ending is not being executed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3551.

<Steps S3547 and S3548>
If the ending flag is ON (step S3546: Yes), that is, if the ending is being executed, as shown in FIG. An update process of subtracting 1 is executed (step S3547). Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3548). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is time to end the ending (jackpot game).

MPU41, when the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3548: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the ending (jackpot game), the process proceeds to step S3549. On the other hand, MPU41, when the value of the ending time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3548: No), that is, when it is not the timing to end the ending (jackpot game), ends the jackpot game control process.

<Steps S3549 and S3550>
When the value of the ending time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3548: Yes), that is, when it is time to end the ending (jackpot game), the MPU 41 terminates the ending of the jackpot game through the voice lamp control device. 5 is set (step S3549). The ending ending command is sent to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 346) executed by the MPU 41. FIG. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can end the ending effect executed in the pattern display section 341 or the like based on the ending end command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the ending flag indicating that the ending is being executed to OFF (step S3550), and ends the jackpot game control process.

<Step S3551>
Returning to FIG. 362, if the ending flag is off (step S3546: No), that is, if neither during the opening, during the round game, during the interval nor during the ending, the MPU 41 voices that the jackpot game ends. A jackpot game end command to be notified to the lamp control device 5 is set (step S3551), and the process proceeds to step S3552. The jackpot game end command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process executed by the MPU 41 (see FIG. 346). Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can terminate the big winning game effect executed in the symbol display section 341 or the like based on the big winning game end command.

<Steps S3552 to S3554>
In step S3552, a jackpot game end flag indicating that the jackpot game ends is set to ON. The jackpot game end flag is referenced in step S3621 of the game state transition process in FIG.

Then, the MPU 41 turns on the ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag for setting the ceiling activation remaining number counter, which is the update information indicating the number of special figure games required until the transition to the b time saving gaming state (step S3553), and the process proceeds to step S3554. The ceiling activation remaining number counter set flag is referred to in order to determine whether or not to set the ceiling activation remaining number counter which is update information in step S3301 in the special figure game number management process of FIG.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot playing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed to OFF (step S3554), and ends the jackpot game control process.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, FIGS. 366 to 368 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in step S1408 of the main process of FIG. In the game state transition process, a process for controlling the transition of various game states (normal game state, a short game state, b short game state, small winning game state, big winning game state) is executed. The game state transition processing will be described below with reference to FIGS. 366 to 368. FIG.

<Step S3601>
As shown in FIG. 366, in step S3601, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a small winning game start flag indicating starting a small winning game is ON. The small hitting game start flag is set to ON in step S3403 when the small hitting game is started in the small hitting game control process of FIG.

MPU41, when the small hitting game start flag is ON (step S3601: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to start the small hitting game, the process proceeds to step S3602. On the other hand, when the small hitting game start flag is off (step S3601: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the small hitting game, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3613.

<Steps S3602 and S3603>
When the small winning game start flag is ON (step S3601: Yes), that is, when starting the small winning game, the MPU 41 turns on the small winning game state flag indicating that the small winning game is being executed. (step S3602). The small hit game state flag is referred to when determining whether to start the general pattern game in step S1503 of the general pattern game control process in FIG. Referred when determining whether to start.

And MPU41 sets a small hit game start flag to OFF (step S3603), and transfers a process to step S3604.

<Steps S3604 to S3606>
In step S3604, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state is on.

When the normal game state flag is ON (step S3604: Yes), that is, when the normal game state, the MPU 41 performs a jackpot lottery triggered by the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 in the normal gaming state. A normal small hit flag indicating a small win started based on the fact that the result is a small win is set to ON (step S3605). Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag to OFF (step S3606), and terminates the game state transition process.

On the other hand, when the normal game state flag is off (step S3604: No), that is, when the game state is not normal, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3607.

<Steps S3607 to S3609>
When the normal gaming state flag is off (step S3604: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the a time-saving gaming state flag indicating the a time-saving gaming state, which is the profit gaming state, is set to on. (Step S3607).

MPU41, when a time-saving gaming state flag is ON (step S3607: Yes), that is, when it is a time-saving gaming state, triggered by the first winning opening 314 or second winning opening 315 in a time-saving gaming state A time-saving small winning flag indicating that the small winning is started based on the fact that the result of the big winning lottery is a small winning is set to ON (step S3608). And MPU41 sets a time saving game state flag to OFF (step S3609), and complete|finishes the said game state transition processing.

On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3610 when the a time saving gaming state flag is off (step S3607: No), that is, when it is not in the a time saving gaming state.

<Steps S3610 to S3612>
When the a time saving gaming state flag is off (step S3607: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the b time saving gaming state flag indicating the b time saving gaming state which is the profit gaming state is set to ON. (step S3610).

MPU41, when the b time-saving gaming state flag is ON (step S3610: Yes), that is, when it is in the b time-saving gaming state, is triggered by the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 in the b time-saving gaming state A b time-saving small winning flag indicating that the small winning is started based on the fact that the result of the big winning lottery is a small winning is set to ON (step S3611). And MPU41 sets b time saving game state flag to OFF (step S3612), and complete|finishes the said game state transition process.

On the other hand, when the b time saving game state flag is off (step S3610: No), that is, when it is not in the b time saving game state, the game state transition processing is terminated.

<Step S3613>
When the small winning game start flag is off (step S3601: No), that is, when it is not the timing to start the small winning game, the MPU 41 determines whether the small winning game end flag indicating to end the small winning game is on. It is determined whether or not (step S3613). The small hitting game end flag is set to ON in step S3437 when the small hitting game is ended in the small hitting game control process of FIG.

MPU41, when the small hitting game end flag is ON (step S3613: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to end the small hitting game, the process proceeds to step S3614. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3636 in FIG. 367 when the small winning game end flag is off (step S3613: No), that is, when it is not the time to end the small winning game.

<Steps S3614 and S3615>
When the small winning game end flag is ON (step S3613: Yes), that is, when ending the small winning game, the MPU 41 turns off the small winning game state flag indicating that the small winning game is in a playing state during execution of the small winning game. (step S3614). And MPU41 sets a small hit game end flag to OFF (step S3615), and transfers a process to step S3616.

<Steps S3616 and S3617>
In step S3616, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game start flag indicating the start of the jackpot game is set to ON. The jackpot game start flag is set to ON in step S3506 when a jackpot game is started in the jackpot game control process of FIG.

When the jackpot game start flag is ON (step S3616: Yes), that is, when the jackpot game is started, the MPU 41 turns on the jackpot game state flag indicating that the jackpot game is being played (step S3617 ), and the process proceeds to step S3618. On the other hand, when the jackpot game start flag is off (step S3616: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not started, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3627 in FIG.

<Steps S3618 to S3620>
In step S3618, the MPU 41 indicates that the small winning is started based on the fact that the result of the big winning lottery triggered by the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 in the normal game state is a small winning. It is determined whether or not the normal small hit flag is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the big winning game to be started is based on the small winning game that occurred in the normal game state.

When the small hit flag is set to ON (step S3618: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the number of time saving games in the a time saving game state to be shifted when the big hit game in the in-game state ends to 1 time. The a time saving 1 time set flag for doing is set to ON (step S3619). Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal small hit flag to OFF (step S3620), and terminates the game state transition process.

On the other hand, MPU41 transfers a process to step S3621, when the small hit flag is normally set to OFF (step S3618: No).

<Steps S3621 to S3623>
When the normal small hit flag is set to off (step S3618: No), the MPU 41 is triggered by the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 in the time saving game state. It is determined whether or not the a time-saving small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit started based on is set to ON (step S3621). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the big winning game to be started is based on the small winning game generated in the a reduced working hours gaming state.

MPU41, when the a time-saving small hit flag is set to ON (step S3621: Yes), the number of time-saving games in the a time-saving gaming state that is shifted when the jackpot game in the in-game state is completed to 5 times The a time saving 5 times set flag for setting is set to ON (step S3622). Then, the MPU 41 sets the a time saving small hit flag to OFF (step S3623), and ends the game state transition processing.

On the other hand, MPU41 shifts a process to step S3624, when a time saving small hit flag is set to OFF (step S3621: No).

<Steps S3624 to S3626>
When the time-saving small hit flag is set to off (step S3621: No), the MPU 41 determines that the result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 in the b time-saving gaming state is small. It is determined whether or not the b time-saving small winning flag indicating that the small winning is started based on the winning is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the big winning game to be started is based on the small winning game that occurred in the b time saving gaming state.

MPU41, when the b time-reduction small hit flag is set to ON (step S3624: Yes), the number of time-reduction games in the a time-reduction gaming state that is shifted when the jackpot game in the in-game state is completed to 5 times The a time saving 5 times set flag for setting is set to ON (step S3625). Then, the MPU 41 sets the b time saving small hit flag to OFF (step S3626), and terminates the game state transition process.

On the other hand, MPU41 complete|finishes the said game state transition process, when the b time saving small hit flag is set to OFF (step S3624: No).

<Steps S3627 to S3629>
When the jackpot game start flag is off (step S3616: No), that is, when the jackpot game is not started, as shown in FIG. (step S3627). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the small winning game has occurred in the normal game state when the small winning game ends without generating the big winning game.

MPU41, when the normal small hit flag is set to ON (step S3627: Yes), that is, when the small winning game that ends without generating the big winning game occurs in the normal game state, the game state In order to return to the normal game state before the occurrence of the small winning game, the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state is set to ON (step S3628). Then, the MPU 41 sets the normal small hit flag to OFF (step S3629), and terminates the game state transition process.

On the other hand, the MPU 41 normally processes when the small hit flag is set to OFF (step S3627: No), that is, when the small hit game that ends without generating the big hit game does not occur in the normal game state. to step S3630.

<Steps S3630 to S3632>
When the normal small hit flag is set to OFF (step S3627: No), that is, when the small hit game that ends without generating the big hit game is not generated in the normal game state, the MPU 41 is a time saving game The a time-saving small winning flag indicating that the small winning is started based on the fact that the result of the big winning lottery triggered by the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 in the state is set to ON. It is determined whether or not it is set (step S3630). In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the small winning game has occurred in the reduced working hours game state when the small winning game ends without generating the big winning game.

MPU41, when a time-saving small hit flag is set to ON (step S3630: Yes), that is, when a small winning game that ends without generating a big winning game occurs in the a time-saving gaming state, In order to return the game state to the a time saving game state before the occurrence of the small winning game, the a time saving game state flag indicating the a time saving game state is set to ON (step S3631). Then, the MPU 41 sets the a time saving small hit flag to OFF (step S3632), and ends the game state transition processing.

On the other hand, the MPU 41, when the a time reduction small winning flag is set to OFF (step S3630: No), that is, when the small winning game that ends without generating the big winning game does not occur in the a time saving game state , the process proceeds to step S3633.

<Steps S3633 to S3635>
If the a time saving small hit flag is set to OFF (step S3630: No), that is, if the small winning game that ends without generating the big winning game does not occur in the a time saving game state, the MPU 41 b The time-saving small winning flag is turned on, which indicates that the small winning is started based on the fact that the result of the big winning lottery triggered by the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 in the time-saving gaming state is a small winning. (step S3633). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the small winning game occurs in the b-short game state when the small winning game ends without generating the big winning game.

MPU41, when the b time reduction small hit flag is set to ON (step S3633: Yes), that is, when the small winning game that ends without generating the big winning game occurs in the b time saving gaming state, In order to return the game state to the b time saving game state before the occurrence of the small winning game, the b time saving game state flag indicating the b time saving game state is set to ON (step S3634). Then, the MPU 41 sets the b time saving small hit flag to OFF (step S3635), and ends the game state transition processing.

On the other hand, the MPU 41, when the b time reduction small winning flag is set to OFF (step S3633: No), that is, when the small winning game that ends without generating the big winning game does not occur in the b time reduction gaming state , the game state transition process ends.

<Step S3636>
If the small winning game end flag is off (step S3613: No), that is, if it is not the timing to end the small winning game, as shown in FIG. is set to ON (step S3636).

MPU41, when the jackpot game state flag indicating that it is in the jackpot game playing state is set to ON (step S3636: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3637, it is in the jackpot game playing state is set to off (step S3636: No), the process proceeds to step S3641.

<Step S3637>
When the jackpot game state flag indicating that the jackpot game is being played is set to ON (step S3636: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game end flag indicating that the jackpot game ends to ON. (step S3637).

When the jackpot game end flag indicating that the jackpot game ends is set to ON (step S3637: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3638, and sets the jackpot game end flag indicating that the jackpot game ends. is set to off (step S3637: No), the game state transition process is terminated.

<Steps S3638 to S3640>
When the jackpot game end flag indicating that the jackpot game ends is set to ON (step S3637: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the a time saving game state flag to ON ( Step S3638), set the a time-saving game state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that it is in the a time-saving game state (step S3639).

The a time-saving gaming state command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 346) executed by the MPU41. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 5 can execute a special figure game effect corresponding to the a reduced working hours gaming state based on the a reduced working hours gaming state command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets off the jackpot game end flag indicating that the jackpot game ends (step S3640), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3641>
When the jackpot game state flag indicating that the jackpot game is being played is off (step S3636: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state is set to ON. (step S3641).

When the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state is set to ON (step S3641: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3642 and sets the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state. is set to off (step S3641: No), the process proceeds to step S3647 in FIG.

<Step S3642>
When the normal game state flag indicating the normal game state is set to ON (step S3641: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the b time saving game state transition flag for shifting to the b time saving game state is set to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S3642). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to shift from the normal game state to the b time saving game state.

MPU41, when the b time-reduction gaming state transition flag for shifting to the b time-reduction gaming state is set to ON (step S3642: Yes), moves the process to step S3643, b time-reduction gaming state for shifting to the b time-reduction gaming state If the transition flag is set to OFF (step S3642: No), the game state transition process is terminated.

<Steps S3643 to S3646>
When the b time saving game state transition flag for shifting to the b time saving game state is set to ON (step S3642: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the b time saving game state flag indicating that it is in the b time saving game state to ON. (Step S3643), to set the b time-saving game state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that it is in the b time-saving game state (step S3644).

The b time-saving gaming state command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process (see FIG. 346) executed by the MPU41. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 5 can execute a special figure game effect corresponding to the b time saving gaming state based on the b time saving gaming state command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets off the normal game state flag indicating that it is in the normal game state (step S3645), and sets off the b time saving game state transition flag for shifting to the b time saving game state (step S3646 ), the game state transition process ends.

<Step S3647>
When the normal game state flag indicating that it is a normal game state is set to OFF (step S3641: No), as shown in FIG. It is determined whether the flag is set to ON (step S3647).

When the a time-reduction gaming state flag indicating that it is in a time-reduction gaming state is set to ON (step S3647: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3648 and a indicating that it is in a time-reduction gaming state When the time saving gaming state flag is set to OFF (step S3647: No), the process proceeds to step S3653.

<Step S3648>
When the a time saving game state flag indicating the a time saving game state is set to ON (step S3647: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the normal game state transition flag for shifting to the normal game state is set to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S3648). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to shift from the reduced working hours gaming state to the normal gaming state.

When the normal game state transition flag for shifting to the normal game state is set to ON (step S3648: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3649, and the normal game state transition flag for shifting to the normal game state is turned off. (step S3648: No), the game state transition process is terminated.

<Steps S3649 to S3652>
When the normal game state transition flag for shifting to the normal game state is set to ON (step S3648: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag to ON (step S3649). , sets a normal game state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that it is in the normal game state (step S3650).

The normal game state command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process executed by the MPU 41 (see FIG. 346). Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can execute a special figure game effect corresponding to the normal game state based on the normal game state command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the a time saving game state flag indicating that it is in the a time saving game state to OFF (step S3651), and further sets the normal game state transition flag for shifting to the normal game state to OFF (step S3652 ), the game state transition process ends.

<Step S3653>
When the a time saving game state flag indicating that it is a time saving game state is set to OFF (step S3647: No), the MPU 41 sets the b time saving game state flag indicating that it is b time saving game state to ON It is determined whether or not it is set (step S3653).

When the b time-reduction gaming state flag indicating that it is in the b time-reduction gaming state is set to ON (step S3653: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3654 to indicate that it is in the b time-reduction gaming state. When the time saving game state flag is set to OFF (step S3653: No), the game state transition processing is terminated.

<Step S3654>
When the b time saving game state flag indicating the b time saving game state is set to ON (step S3653: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the normal game state transition flag for shifting to the normal game state is set to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S3654). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to shift from the b time-saving game state to the normal game state.

When the normal game state transition flag for shifting to the normal game state is set to ON (step S3654: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3655, and the normal game state transition flag for shifting to the normal game state is turned off. (step S3654: No), the game state transition process is terminated.

<Steps S3655 to S3658>
When the normal game state transition flag for shifting to the normal game state is set to ON (step S3654: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal game state flag to ON indicating the normal game state (step S3655). , sets a normal game state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that it is in the normal game state (step S3656).

The normal game state command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1401 in the next main process executed by the MPU 41 (see FIG. 346). Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can execute a special figure game effect corresponding to the normal game state based on the normal game state command.

Then, the MPU 41 sets off the b time saving game state flag indicating that it is in the b time saving game state (step S3657), and further sets off the normal game state transition flag for shifting to the normal game state (step S3658 ), the game state transition process ends.

[Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device 5]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 51 in the audio ramp control device 5 after the start-up processing of the audio ramp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 369 to 376. FIG. FIG. 369 is a flow chart showing this main process.

[Main processing of sound lamp control device 5]
<Step S3701>
As shown in FIG. 369, in the main process, first, it is determined whether 1 millisecond or more has passed since the main process was started or since the process of step S3701 was last executed (step S3701). If seconds or more have not elapsed (step S3701: No), the process proceeds to step S3712 without performing the processes of steps S3702 to S3711. In the process of step S3701, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed because steps S3702 to S3711 are processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing in step S3713 in a short cycle. By executing the process of step S3713 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 4 from being missed in reception, and by executing the process of step S3712 in a short cycle, a command received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on the command, it is possible to make settings related to the special game effect without delay.

<Steps S3702 to S3704>
If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of step S3701 (step S3701: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 6 set by the processing of steps S3703 to S3713 are sent to the display control device 6. (step S3702). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the illumination part 27 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of step S3709 described later (step S3703), and then the power-on notification process is executed ( step S3704). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 6 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the pattern display section 341 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S3705 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

<Steps S3705 to S3707>
In the process of step S3705, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (step S3706). In the customer waiting effect, when the game machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the symbol display unit 341 to a title screen is performed. sent. In the pending number display update process, the process of displaying the special figure data image (see FIGS. 51 and 52) in the special figure data image display units 75, 76, and 77 set in the symbol display unit 341 is performed.

After that, operation button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (step S3707). In this operation button input monitoring and effect processing, an input as to whether or not the operation button 20 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and a case where the input of the operation button 20 is confirmed is dealt with. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is detected, an operation button operation command is set to notify the display control device 6 that the operation button 20 has been operated.

Further, when the operation button 20 is pressed during a period in which the special game effect is not executed or during a period in which the decoration pattern is changed at high speed, for example, a process for changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command is issued to the display control device 6. set. By including information about the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in the back image change command, the back image displayed on the pattern display section 341 in the display control device 6 is changed to an image corresponding to the stage. processing is performed. In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the variable display, by pressing the operation button 20, the expected value of the big win due to the current variation is displayed, and by pressing the operation button 20 during the ready-to-win production, the expectation of the big win is displayed. Alternatively, the operation button 20 may be changed to a decision button for selecting one ready-to-win effect out of a plurality of ready-to-win effects. Note that if the operation button 20 is not provided, the process of step S3707 is omitted.

<Step S3708>
When the operation button input monitoring/effect processing ends, vibration sensor input monitoring processing is performed (step S3708). This vibration sensor input monitoring process is a process of monitoring an input signal from a vibration sensor (not shown) and detecting whether or not the game machine 10 is vibrated.

[Vibration sensor input monitoring process of sound lamp control device 5]
Details of the vibration sensor input monitoring process (step S3708) will now be described with reference to FIG. 370 is a flow chart showing the vibration sensor input monitoring process executed by the MPU 51 in the sound lamp control device 5. FIG.

<Steps S3801 and S3802>
In the vibration sensor input monitoring process, first, an output value (vibration level) from a vibration sensor (not shown) is read (step S3801), and it is determined from the read output value whether the vibration level is equal to or higher than a predetermined level (step S3802). As a result, if the vibration level is less than the predetermined level (step S3802: No), the vibration sensor input monitoring process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 369).

<Steps S3803 and S3804>
On the other hand, if the vibration level is equal to or higher than the predetermined level (step S3802: Yes), it is determined that the gaming machine 10 has been vibrated, and the electrical decoration unit 27 is set to output an alarm sound (step S3803). , sets an error command for notifying the occurrence of a vibration error to the display control device 6 (step S3804), and returns to the main processing (FIG. 369). As a result, the display control device 6 performs a process of displaying an error message image informing of the vibration error on the pattern display section 341 .

<Steps S3709 to S3711>
Returning to FIG. 369, the description of the main processing is continued. After the vibration sensor input monitoring process (step S3708) ends, the lamp edit process is executed (step S3709), and then the sound edit/output process is executed (step S3710). In the lamp editing process, the lighting pattern of the illumination portion 27 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the pattern display portion 341 . In the sound editing/output processing, the output pattern of the speaker 26 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the pattern display section 341, and the sound is output from the speaker 26 according to the setting. Further, when the output of the alarm sound is set by the vibration sensor input monitoring process (see FIG. 370) (see step S3710), the output pattern of the alarm sound is set by this sound editing/output process, and the alarm sound Output from the speaker 26 .

After the process of step S3710, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (step S3711), and the process proceeds to step S3712. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the special figure variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 4, the time required for the variation display performed by the symbol display section 341 and the time synchronized therewith are set. Lamp edit processing of step S3709 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring processing. Note that the sound editing/output processing in step S3710 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the pattern display section 341. FIG.

<Step S3712>
In the process of step S3712, in order to display the special figure game effect in the symbol display unit 341, to generate a display variation pattern command based on the special figure variation pattern command received from the main control device 4, display control of the command This is processing for setting for transmission to the device 6 . The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After this process, the process according to the command received from the main controller 4 is performed (FIGS. 371 and 372).

<Steps S3713 to S3717>
When the process of step S3712 is completed, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 512 (step S3713). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 4 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of step S3713 (step S3713: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (step S3715), and the power-off process is executed (step S3716). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (step S3717), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the speaker 26 and the illumination section 27 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of step S3713 (step S3713: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 512 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 512 (step S3714). If the RAM 512 is not destroyed (step S3714: No), the process returns to step S3701 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 512 has been destroyed (step S3714: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is broken and the loop is infinitely looped, the display by the pattern display section 341 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like to request repair of the gaming machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 512 has been destroyed, the speaker 26 or the illumination section 27 may notify the destruction of the RAM.

[Command determination processing of sound lamp control device 5]
Next, command determination processing executed in step S3712 of the main processing of the sound lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 371 to 375. FIG. 371 to 375 are flowcharts showing this command determination processing. This command determination process determines the command received from the main controller 4 as described above. In addition, this processing also determines the start of the continuous advance notice effect by the pattern display section 341 when the pending ball number command is received from the main control device 4 .

<Step S3901>
As shown in FIG. 371, in the command determination process of the sound lamp control device 5, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 512 (step S3901). If there is an unprocessed command (step S3901: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3902, and if there is no unprocessed command (step S3901: No), the command determination process ends.

<Step S3902>
If there is an unprocessed command (step S3901: Yes), the first command received from the main controller 4 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 512, analyzed, and stored in the main controller. It is determined whether or not the special figure variation pattern command is received from 4 (step S3902). Then, if it is determined that the special figure variation pattern command is received (step S3902: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3903, and if it is determined that the special figure variation pattern command is not received (step S3901: No ), and the process proceeds to step S3908.

<Step S3903>
When it is determined that the special figure variation pattern command is received (step S3902: Yes), based on the special figure variation pattern command received from the main control device 4, variation type (effect pattern) setting processing (step S3903) is executed. After that, the process of step S3904 is executed. In this variation type (production pattern) setting process, the special game production to be executed by various production means (symbol display unit 341, speaker 26, illumination unit 27) in the special game is set. Specifically, as described above, based on the special figure variation pattern command, with reference to the variation type table (see FIG. 49), the variation type (effect pattern) and the variation display time are set, and further the variation type ( The effect pattern type is set based on the effect pattern type selection table (see FIG. 50) corresponding to the effect pattern).

<Step S3904>
In step S3904, the variation display time corresponding to the received special figure variation pattern command is set in the variation display counter, and then the process of step S3905 is executed. Variation display time is determined according to the variation pattern information included in the special figure variation pattern command. Then, the variation display counter is decremented by one in the counter update processing of step S2701 in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. It is possible to determine the remaining time of the display time and the like. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display is finished when the variation display counter reaches zero.

<Step S3905>
In step S3905, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command for identifying the effect pattern type set in step S3103 of the command determination process to the display control device 6, and the process proceeds to step S3906. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the effect pattern type. On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores effect images and the like corresponding to each display variation pattern command. Thereby, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the effect display in the pattern display section 341 according to the effect type corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

<Steps S3908 and S3909>
If it is determined that the special figure variation pattern command has not been received (step S3902: No), it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 4 (step S3908). If it is determined that the stop type command has been received (step S3908: Yes), the stop type command for display is set in order to transmit the stop type command as it is to the display control device 6 (step S3909). On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (step S3908: No), the process proceeds to step S3910.

<Steps S3910 to S3913>
If it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (step S3908: No), it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 4 (step S3910). Then, when it is determined that the pending ball number command is received (step S3910: Yes), the first special figure pending number storage area NAA or the second special which is the update information of the main controller 4 included in the pending ball number command Extract the value of figure pending number storage area NAB (that is, the number of special figure games reserved in the main controller 4) and store it in the pending ball number counter of the voice lamp control device 5 (step S3911).

Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 4 when the game ball wins (start winning) in the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315, or when the special figure game is started. Therefore, every time a starting prize or a special game is started, the value of the pending ball number counter of the voice lamp control device 5 is matched with the value of the pending ball number counter of the main control device 4 by the processing of step S3911. be able to. Therefore, even if the value of the reserved ball number counter of the voice lamp control device 5 deviates from the value of the reserved ball number counter of the main control device 4 due to the influence of noise, etc. The value of the number counter can be modified to match the value of the main controller 4's pending ball counter.

Further, after the process of step S3911, a display pending ball number command for notifying the display controller 6 of the value of the pending ball counter updated by the process of step S3911 is set (step S3912). As a result, the display control device 6 executes a process to display the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number on the pattern display section 341 .

After that, the continuous notice determination process is executed (step S3913), and the process returns to the main process. In this continuous notice determination process, the value of the number of pending balls received from the main control device 4 by the number of pending balls command, and the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3, which are update information, It is determined whether or not to carry out a continuous notice performance for continuously displaying notice performance images over the special game performance suspended at the time point. In addition, when performing the continuous notice effect, as the continuous notice effect mode, the same image (for example, "bubble" image) is displayed across a plurality of special game effects A continuous notice effect mode of the same effect type Alternatively, the related images are displayed in order each time the special game effect is performed (for example, each image is displayed in the order of “egg” → “chick” → “chicken” → “chicken group”) Step-up type It decides whether or not to use the continuous advance notice effect mode.

The decision as to whether or not to carry out the continuous advance notice effect is specifically based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, which are updated information, at the time when the pending ball number command is transmitted. The result of the lottery performed corresponding to the reservation and the type of stop after the special game performance are estimated, and based on the estimation result and the number of balls reserved at that time. For example, when it is estimated that the stop type after the special game effect is the 16R probability variable jackpot or the front-rear off reach, it may be determined so that the continuous announcement effect is performed with a predetermined probability. Also, in this case, it may be determined such that the more the number of pending balls, the higher the probability that the continuous announcement effect is performed.

In addition to this, if the estimated result of the lottery is a big win, regardless of the stop type, continuous advance notice effects may be performed with a predetermined probability, or if the result of the lottery is a loss. However, when the stop type is the ready-to-win state, that is, when it is estimated to be the out-of-front-end ready-to-win state and the non-out-of-state ready-to-win state, the continuous announcement effect may be performed at a predetermined probability. As described above, the condition for determining to perform the continuous advance notice effect may be appropriately set according to the game characteristics to be provided to the gaming machine 10 .

In addition, as the continuous advance notice effect mode, a condition may be appropriately set as to whether the same effect type or the step-up type is used. For example, a random number counter may be provided inside the sound lamp control device 5, and the continuous announcement effect mode may be determined according to the value of the random number counter.

In the game machine 10, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, which are the updated information acquired at the time of starting winning, are updated in the main controller 4 by the pending ball number command. , and the voice lamp control device 5 determines the start of the continuous announcement effect and sets the mode of the continuous announcement effect based on the values of various counters and the value of the number of pending balls notified by the pending ball number command. . As a result, the process in the main controller 4 is changed to the lottery process for selecting the game state to be changed based on the ball entering the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315, which is the most important process of the gaming machine 10. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 with high processing capability is used for the sound lamp control device 5, the conditions for executing the continuous announcement effect can be set in various ways.

In addition, the number of pending balls and the values of various counters can be transmitted from the main controller 4 to the sound lamp control device 5 with one pending ball number command. As a result, in the audio lamp control device 5, it is possible to accurately grasp the correspondence between the values of various counters acquired in conjunction with the starting winning and the number of pending balls at the time when the starting winning is detected. When execution of the continuous advance notice performance is determined, the number of pending balls to which the continuous notice performance is added can be accurately grasped. Therefore, compared to the case where the number of held balls and the values of various counters are transmitted from the main controller 4 to the sound lamp control device 5 by separate commands, the control in the sound lamp control device 5 is facilitated. be able to.

<Steps S3914 and S3915>
As a result of the process of step S3910, if it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (step S3910: No), it is determined whether or not the fixed display command has been received (step S3914). If it is determined that the fixed display command has been received (step S3914: Yes), the display demo command is set (step S3915), and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the confirmation display command has not been received (step S3914: No), the process proceeds to step S3916.

<Step S3916>
When it is determined that the fixed display command has not been received (step S3914: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special figure shift command (step S3916). The special figure shift command is the first special figure reservation storage area REA when the first special figure reservation number N or the second special figure reservation number M decreases due to the start of the special figure game (variation display of the special figure) 1 Reservation area REA1 to 4th reservation area REA4, or 1st reservation area REB1 to 4th reservation area REB4 (see FIG. 8) in the 2nd special reservation storage area REB Special figure success or failure indicating the lottery result in the jackpot lottery This command indicates that the information has been shifted.

MPU51, if the received command is a special figure shift command (step S3916: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3917, if the received command is not a special figure shift command (step S3916: No), the process is step S3918 transition to

<Step S3917>
When the received command is a special figure shift command (step S3116: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a special figure data setting process (step S3917) and returns to the main process.

Here, the special figure data setting process executed in step S3917 is the data of the special figure propriety information stored in the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area (not shown) set in the RAM 512 of the voice lamp control device 5 (special This is the process of shifting (updating) data. The special figure reservation storage area corresponding area (not shown) is an area corresponding to the special figure reservation storage area 412b (see FIG. 8) set in the RAM 412 of the main controller 4, and is equivalent to the special figure reservation storage area 412b. Special figure data is stored. The special figure reservation storage area corresponding area (not shown) is the first special figure reservation storage area REA of the special figure reservation storage area 412b, the second special figure reservation storage area REB, and the special figure execution area AE (see FIG. 8) It includes a first special figure reserved storage area corresponding area, a second special figure reserved storage area corresponding area, and a special figure execution area corresponding area corresponding to each. In addition, the first special figure reserved storage area corresponding area is the first special figure corresponding to the first to fourth reserved areas REA1 to REA4 (see FIG. 8) of the first special figure reserved storage area REA in the special figure reserved storage area 412b. FIG. 1st to 4th reservation area corresponding area (not shown), including the first special figure reservation number storage area corresponding area corresponding to the first special figure reservation number storage area (see FIG. 8). Furthermore, the second special figure reservation storage area corresponding area is the second special figure corresponding to the first to fourth reservation areas REB1 to REB4 (see FIG. 8) of the second special figure reservation storage area REB in the special figure reservation storage area 412b Including the second special figure reservation number storage area corresponding to the figure 1st to 4th reservation area corresponding area, the second special figure reservation number storage area (see FIG. 8).

<Step S3918>
If the received command is not a special figure shift command (step S3116: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the first special figure pending command (step S3918). The first special figure reservation command includes information indicating that the second special figure reservation number N for the first special figure game increases, information about the second special figure reservation number M after the increase, and the increasing second reservation Information on special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation display time) and the result of the big hit lottery is included.

MPU51, if the received command is the first special figure pending command (step S3918: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3919, if the received command is not the first special figure pending command (step S3918: No), Processing proceeds to step S3920.

<Step S3919>
When the received command is the second special figure pending command (step S3918: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the first special figure pending information update process (step S3919) and returns to the main process.

Here, the first special figure reservation information update process executed in step S3919 is data ( Toku-zu data) is a process to add (update). Specifically, in the first special figure reservation information update process, the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 ( 8), the special figure data corresponding to the special figure validity information stored in the first empty reservation area corresponds to the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 in which the special figure validity information is stored It is stored in the 1st special figure 1st to 4th reserved area corresponding area (not shown) set by. For example, when the special figure propriety information is stored in the third reserved area REA3 (see FIG. 8) of the second special figure reserved storage area REA in the special figure reserved storage area 412b, corresponding to the third reserved area REA3 Special figure data is stored in the first special figure third reserved area corresponding area (not shown) that is set. Also, in the first special figure reservation information update process, 1 is added to the first special figure reservation number N stored in the first special figure reservation number storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area .

<Step S3920>
When the received command is not the first special figure pending command (step S3118: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the second special figure pending command (step S3920). The second special figure reservation command is information indicating that the second special figure reservation number M for the second special game game increases, information about the second special figure reservation number M after the increase, and the increasing second reservation Information on special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation display time) and the result of the big hit lottery is included.

MPU51, if the received command is the second special figure pending command (step S3920: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3921, if the received command is not the second special figure pending command (step S3920: No), The process proceeds to step S3922 in FIG.

<Step S3921>
When the received command is the second special figure pending command (step S3920: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the second special figure pending information update process (step S3921) and returns to the main process.

Here, the second special figure reservation information update process executed in step S3921 is data ( Toku-zu data) is a process to add (update). Specifically, in the second special figure reservation information update process, the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 ( 8), the special figure data corresponding to the special figure validity information stored in the first empty reservation area corresponds to the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 in which the special figure validity information is stored It is stored in the 2nd special figure 1st to 4th reservation area corresponding area (not shown) set by. For example, when the special figure propriety information is stored in the third reserved area REB3 (see FIG. 8) of the second special figure reserved storage area REB in the special figure reserved storage area 412b, corresponding to the third reserved area REB3 Special figure data is stored in the set second special figure third reserved area corresponding area (not shown). Also, in the second special figure reservation information update process, 1 is added to the second special figure reservation number M stored in the second special figure reservation number storage area corresponding area (not shown) of the special figure reservation storage area corresponding area .

<Step S3922>
If the received command is not the second special figure pending command (step S3920: No), the MPU 51, as shown in FIG. 372, determines whether the received command is a small winning game start command (step S3922). . The small winning game start command is a command indicating to start the small winning game, and when starting the small winning game in step S3404 in the small winning game control process of FIG. 356 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 is set to

MPU51, if the received command is a small hitting game start command (step S3922: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3923, if the received command is not a small hitting game start command (step S3922: No), the process The process proceeds to step S3930.

<Steps S3923 and S3924>
When the received command is a small hit game start command (step S3922: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not it has received a profit display OP command (step S3923). The win display OP command sets the win display opening effect (see FIG. 359(A)) of the first notification mode as the effect executed by the symbol display unit 341 at the opening of the small winning game. In the winning game control process, it is set in step S3409 when it is determined that the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter, which is the update information at the time of occurrence of the small winning game, is a predetermined value (for example, 121) or more.

When the MPU 41 has received the win display OP command (step S3923: Yes), the win display opening effect of the first notification mode (Fig. 359 ( A)) is set (step S3924), and the process proceeds to step S3927.

<Steps S3925 and S3926>
If the gain display OP command has not been received (step S3923: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the loss display OP command has been received (step S3925). The loss display OP command is for setting the loss display opening effect (see FIG. 359(B)) of the second notification mode as the effect executed by the symbol display unit 341 at the opening of the small winning game. In the winning game control process, it is set in step S3410 when it is determined that the value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter, which is the update information at the time of occurrence of the small winning game, is less than a predetermined value (for example, 121).

When the MPU 41 has received the loss display OP command (step S3925: Yes), the loss display opening effect of the second notification mode (Fig. 359 ( B)) is set (step S3926), and the process proceeds to step S3927.

<Steps S3927 to S3929>
In step S3927, the MPU 41 sets a movable wing actuation effect which is an effect while the movable wing part 832 of the wing accessory device 83 is operating in the small winning game, and further sets the wing accessory device in the small winning game. A V winning effect when a game ball enters the V winning opening 833 of 83 is set (step S3928). Then, the MPU 41 sets ON the small-hit-playing flag indicating that the small-hit game is in the in-game state (step S3929), and terminates the command determination process.

<Steps S3930 and S3931>
When the received command is not the small hitting game start command (step S3922: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the received command is the small hitting opening start command (step S3930). The small winning opening start command is a command indicating that the opening of the small winning game is started, and is set in step S3411 when the opening of the small winning game is started in the small winning game control process of FIG. .

When the received command is a small winning opening start command (step S3930: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a small winning opening start flag for starting the opening production in the small winning game to ON (step S3931), and the command determination process. exit. On the other hand, MPU41 transfers a process to step S3932, when the received command is not a small hit opening start command (step S3930: No).

<Steps S3932 and S3933>
When the received command is not a small winning opening start command (step S3930: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the received command is a small winning opening end command (step S3932). The small winning opening end command is a command indicating that the opening of the small winning game is ended, and is set in step S3416 when the opening of the small winning game is ended in the small winning game control process of FIG. .

MPU41, when the received command is a small winning opening end command (step S3932: Yes), sets the small winning opening end flag for ending the opening effect in the small winning game to ON (step S3933), the command determination process exit. On the other hand, when the received command is not the small winning opening end command (step S3932: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3934 in FIG.

<Steps S3934 and S3935>
When the received command is not the small winning opening end command (step S3932: No), as shown in FIG. 373, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the received command is the movable feather portion operation start command (step S3934). . The movable feather part operation start command indicates that the operation of the movable feather part 832 of the feather accessory device 83 is started in the small winning game, and in the small winning game control process of FIG. 356, the feather accessory device It is set in step S3419 when the operation of the movable vane 832 of 83 is started.

When the received command is a movable feather actuation start command (step S3934: Yes), the MPU 41 sets on a movable feather actuation effect start flag for starting a movable feather actuation effect in a small winning game (step S3935). ), the command determination process ends. On the other hand, when the received command is not the command to start the movable feather portion operation (step S3932: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3936 in FIG.

<Steps S3936 to S3938>
If the received command is not the command to start the movable feather portion operation (step S3934: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the received command is the V winning command (step S3936). The V winning command indicates that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 in the small winning game, and in the small winning game control process of FIG. This is set in step S3427 when it is confirmed that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 833 of the accessory device 83. FIG.

When the received command is the V winning command (step S3936: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the V winning effect for notifying that the game ball has entered the V winning port 833 of the feather accessory device 83 (step S3937 ), furthermore, the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 is set to ON (step S3938), and the command determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the received command is not the V winning command (step S3936: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3939.

<Steps S3939 and S3940>
When the received command is not the V winning command (step S3936: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the received command is the small winning game end command (step S3939). The small hitting game end command indicates that the small hitting game ends, and is set in step S3438 when the small hitting game is ended in the small hitting game control process of FIG.

When the received command is the small winning game end command (step S3939: Yes), the MPU 41 turns on the small winning game production end slag for ending the small winning game production (movable feather operation production) (step S3940 ), the command determination process is terminated. On the other hand, MPU41 transfers a process to step S3941 of FIG.374, when the received command is not a small hit game end command (step S3939: No).

<Step S3941>
If the received command is not a small winning game end command (step S3939: No), the MPU 51, as shown in FIG. 374, determines whether the received command is a big winning game start command (step S3941). The jackpot game start command is a command indicating to start the jackpot game, and is set when the jackpot game is started in step S3505 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. .

If the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S3941: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3942, and if the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S3941: No), the process goes to step S3944. transition to

<Steps S3942 and S3943>
When the jackpot game start command is received (step S3941: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the jackpot game effect setting process (step S3942), sets the jackpot game flag to ON (step S3943), and returns to the main process. .

In the jackpot game effect setting process, the process of setting the jackpot effect including the opening effect, opening/closing execution mode effect (round game effect and interval effect), and ending effect executed in the jackpot game is executed.

In addition, the jackpot game in-progress flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed, and in the jackpot game effect control processing described later, whether or not the jackpot game is being executed, that is, the progress of the jackpot game effect is controlled. It is referenced to determine whether or not to

<Step S3944>
When the received command is not the jackpot game start command (step S3941: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the opening start command (step S3944). The opening start command is a command indicating to start the opening of the jackpot game, and is set when starting the opening in step S3509 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. .

If the received command is the opening start command (step S3944: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3945, and if the received command is not the opening start command (step S3944: No), shifts the process to step S3946. do.

<Step S3945>
When the opening start command is received (step S3944: Yes), the MPU 52 sets the opening effect start flag to ON (step S3945) and returns to the main process. The opening effect start flag is a flag for starting the opening effect of the jackpot game, and is referred to in order to determine whether or not to start the opening effect in the later-described jackpot game effect control process.

<Step S3946>
When the received command is not the opening start command (step S3944: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the opening end command (step S3946) The opening end command ends the opening of the jackpot game. It is a command indicating that, and is set when ending the opening in step S3515 in the jackpot game control process of FIG.

If the received command is the opening end command (step S3946: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3947, and if the received command is not the opening end command (step S3946: No), shifts the process to step S3948. do.

<Step S3947>
When the opening end command is received (step S3946: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the opening effect end flag to ON (step S3947) and returns to the main process. The opening effect end flag is a flag for ending the opening effect of the jackpot game, and is referred to in order to determine whether or not to end the opening effect in the later-described jackpot game effect control process.

<Step S3948>
When the received command is not the opening end command (step S3946: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the round game start command (step S3948). The round game start command is a command indicating the start of the round game in the opening/closing execution mode and indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be executed this time, and the jackpot game of FIG. In step S3518 in the control process, it is set when starting the round game of the opening and closing execution mode.

If the received command is the round game start command (step S3948: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3949, and if the received command is not the round game start command (step S3948: No), the process proceeds to FIG. to step S3951.

<Steps S3949 and S3950>
When the round game start command is received (step S3948: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect start flag to ON (step S3949), and stores the round number information indicating what round the round game is in the RAM 512. (step S3950) and returns to the main process. The round game effect start flag is referred to in order to determine whether or not to start each round game effect of the open/close execution mode effect in the jackpot game effect control process described later.

<Step S3951>
When the received command is not the round game start command (step S3948: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the round game end command (step S3951). The round game end command is a command indicating to end the round game in the opening/closing execution mode, and ends the round game in step S3530 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. set if

If the received command is a round game end command (step S3951: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3952, and if the received command is not a round game end command (step S3951: No), the process goes to step S3953. transition to

<Step S3952>
When the round game end command is received (step S3951: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect end flag to ON (step S3952) and returns to the main process. The round game end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to end the round game effect in the jackpot game effect control process described later.

<Step S3953>
When the received command is not the round game end command (step S3951: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the interval start command (step S3953). The interval start command is a command indicating to start the interval between round games in the open/close execution mode, and the interval is started in step S3534 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. set if

Here, if the received command is the interval start command (step S3953: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3954, and if the received command is not the interval start command (step S3953: No), the process proceeds to step S3953. It shifts to S3955.

<Step S3954>
When the received command is the interval start command (step S3953: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the interval production start flag to ON (step S3954) and returns to the main processing. The interval production start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start the interval production in the jackpot game production control process described later.

<Step S3955>
If the received command is not the interval start command (step S3953: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the interval end command (step S3955). The interval end command is a command indicating to end the interval between round games in the opening/closing execution mode, and ends the interval in step S3540 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. set if

Here, if the received command is the interval end command (step S3955: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3956, and if the received command is not the interval end command (step S395: No), the process proceeds to step S3956. It shifts to S3957.

<Step S3956>
When the received command is the interval end command (step S3955: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the interval effect end flag to ON (step S3956) and returns to the main processing. The interval production end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to end the interval production in the jackpot game production control process described later.

<Step S3957>
If the received command is not the interval end command (step S3956: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the ending start command (step S3957). The ending start command is a command indicating to start the ending in the jackpot game, and is set when starting the ending in step S3543 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. be.

Here, if the received command is the ending start command (step S3957: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3958, and if the received command is not the ending start command (step S3957: No), the process proceeds to step S3957. Move to S3959.

<Step S3958>
When the received command is the ending start command (step S3957: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending effect start flag to ON (step S3958), and returns to the main process. The ending effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start the ending effect in the jackpot game effect control process described later.

<Step S3959>
If the received command is not the ending start command (step S3957: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the ending end command (step S3959). The ending end command is a command indicating that the ending of the jackpot game ends, and is set when ending the ending in step S3549 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. be.

Here, if the received command is the ending end command (step S3959: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3960, and if the received command is not the ending end command (step S3959: No), the process proceeds to step S3959. The process proceeds to S3961.

<Step S3960>
When the received command is the ending ending command (step S3959: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending effect end flag to ON (step S3960) and returns to the main process. The ending effect end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to end the ending effect in the jackpot game effect control process described later.

<Step S3961>
When the received command is not the ending end command (step S3959: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is the jackpot game end command (step S3961). The jackpot game end command is a command indicating to end the jackpot game, and is set when the jackpot game is finished in step S3551 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. be.

Here, if the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S3961: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3962, and if the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S3961: No), the process to step S3963.

<Step S3962>
When the received command is the jackpot game end command (step S3961: Yes), the MPU 51 sets off the jackpot playing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed (step S3962), and returns to the main process.

<Step S3963>
If the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S3961: No), the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands received from the main control device 4 (step S3963), and terminates the command determination processing.

[Secondary Timer Interrupt Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device 5]
Next, referring to FIG. 376, sub timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 will be described. Here, FIG. 376 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5. As shown in FIG. The MPU 51 executes, for example, sub timer interrupt processing as regular processing with a period of 1 msec.

As shown in Figure 376, MPU51 counter update processing (step S4001), special figure game effect control processing (step S4002), small winning game effect control processing (step S4003) and jackpot game Effect control processing (step S4004) is executed.

[Counter update process]
In the counter update process (step S4001), the MPU 51 executes the update process of the effect pattern type counter, the first stop symbol type counter, the variable display counter, etc., which are the update information. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values of the effect type counter and the first stop symbol type counter, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values. The effect pattern type counter is used to determine the variation type (effect pattern) based on the special figure variation pattern command received from the main controller 4. For example, the effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-109. Also, the first stop symbol type counter is used to determine the type of decoration symbol to be stopped first based on the special figure variation pattern command received from the main control device 4 . For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-99. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the variation display counter. This variable display counter is for measuring the variable display time of the pattern display section 341, and the counter value of the variable display counter is set to 0 when the remaining variable display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variation display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining variation display time, the fact that variation is in progress, the end of the variation display of the pattern display section 341, and the like.

[Special game production control process]
In the special figure game effect control process (step S4002), the MPU 51 is set in step S3903 of the command determination process in FIG. A process is performed to control progress.

[Small hit game production control process]
In the small hit game effect control process (step S4003), the MPU 51 is the opening effect set in step S3923 or S3926 of the command determination process in FIG. 372 when the small hit game start command is received, and the movable A process for controlling the progress of the small winning game effect is executed according to the effect during operation of the wings and the V winning effect set in step S3928.

[Jackpot game production control process]
In the jackpot game effect control process (step S4004), the MPU 51 controls the progress of the jackpot game effect according to the jackpot game effect set in step S3942 of the command determination process in FIG. 374 when receiving the jackpot game start command. executed.

[Processing of display control device 6]
Next, each control executed by the MPU 631 of the display control device 6 will be described with reference to FIGS. 377 to 391. FIG. The processing of the MPU 631 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 5, and processing for one frame from the image controller 637. There is a V-interrupt process which is an update process executed when the MPU 631 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 631 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to command reception and V interrupt signal detection. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 5 can be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing can be executed.

[Main processing of display control device 6]
First, referring to FIG. 377, main processing executed by the MPU 631 in the display control device 6 will be described. FIG. 377 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power control device 9 to the display control device 6 and the system reset is released, the MPU 631 changes the instruction pointer 631a, which is the update information provided in the MPU 631, to "0000H" depending on the hardware configuration. ” and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 631 a to the bus line 640 . When the ROM controller 634b of the character ROM 634 detects that the address specified on the bus line 640 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 634d1 of the NOR type ROM 634d in the buffer RAM 634c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 631 . Then, the MPU 631 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 634, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 631 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 634a, the character ROM 634 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 640 is "0000H". When it is detected, update processing of reading one page of data, which is update information including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H", from the NAND flash memory 634a and setting it in the buffer RAM 634c must be executed. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 634a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 634c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start up the MPU 631 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the pattern display section 341 in the display control device 6 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 634d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 631 after the system reset is canceled, thereby speeding up the NOR ROM. Since this is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 631 via the bus line 640 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 634 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 634d1 of the NOR type ROM 634d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 634 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 631 . Therefore, since the MPU 631 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 631 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 634 composed of the NAND flash memory 634a with a slow read speed, the control of the pattern display section 341 in the display control device 6 can be started immediately.

<Step S4101>
When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (step S4101), and the display control device 6 is turned on so that various controls on the pattern display section 341 can be executed. to start. In the boot process, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 633a of the work RAM 633, and among the fixed value data, the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, additional data table, transfer data table) are stored. is stored in the data table storage area 633b.

Here, as described above, in this embodiment, the control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 631 are stored in the symbol display unit 341 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. The character ROM 634 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the . The character ROM 634 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 634a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 6 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 6 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 634a1 of the NAND flash memory 634a are transferred to the program storage area 633a provided in the work RAM 633 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 633b is executed. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 631a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 631 stores the control program transferred to the program storage area 633a and , various processes are executed using the data table storage area 633b.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 634 configured by the NAND flash memory 634a with a slow read speed, the control program and the like are transferred to the program storage area 633a and the like of the work RAM 633 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 631 can read control programs and the like from the work RAM, which is a DRAM with a high read speed, and perform various controls. Using the unit 341, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 634d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 631 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 634a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 634a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 633a. Therefore, the character ROM 634 can start up the MPU 631 in a short time simply by adding a NOR type ROM 634d with a very small capacity. can be done.

<Step S4102>
After the boot process is finished, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 633a of the work RAM 633 (step S4102). Specifically, the MPU 631 is initialized, and the work RAM 633, resident video RAM 635, and normal video RAM 636 are cleared. In addition, various flags are provided in the work RAM 633 as update information, and initial values are set for the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after initializing the image controller 637, the image controller 637 is instructed to draw and display an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the pattern display section 341. Instructs execution of processing. As a result, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the pattern display section 341 immediately after the power is turned on. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the pattern display section 341 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the gaming machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, it is checked whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the pattern display section 341 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not activation can be started.

<Step S4103>
Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 637 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 635a of the resident video RAM 635 (step S4103). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 634 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 635), and the transfer destination. The image controller 637 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 according to this transfer instruction. Transferred to image area 635a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 637 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 631 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 631 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 637 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 637 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 631 reads the information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects that the image controller 637 has written the transfer end information, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 635a at power-on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

<Step S4104>
Based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 637 by the processing in step S4103, when the image data corresponding to the power-on main image has been transferred to the power-on main image area 635a, the power-on fluctuation A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the image to the power-on variation image area 635b of the resident video RAM 635 (step S4104). This transfer instruction includes the head address of the character ROM 634 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 635). , and the head address of the power-on variation image area 635b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the power-on variation image area 635b. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 635b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

<Step S4105>
When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 635b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 637 by the processing in step S4104, then the simple image display flag is set. 633c is turned on (step S4105). As a result, while the simple image display flag 633c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 635 is transferred from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 in transfer setting processing (see FIG. 389A), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 637 to transfer the image (see step S3002 in FIG. 389B).

Also, the simple image display flag 633c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 635 are transferred from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 637 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 378B), the simple command is executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 333 is drawn. Determination processing (see step S4308 in FIG. 378B) and simple display setting processing (see step S4309 in FIG. 378B) are executed.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 634a for the character ROM 634. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 635 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 . Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635, and the main image at power-on is displayed as a pattern. While the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 635, the player or hall personnel can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the pattern display unit 341 by displaying it on the unit 341. can do. Therefore, the display control device 6 can take time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 while the main image is being displayed on the pattern display section 341 when the power is turned on. can. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed in the pattern display section 341 at the time of power-on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 635 is displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about the operation stopping.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the pattern display section 341 when the power is turned on. The character ROM 634 can be checked immediately, and by using the NAND-type flash memory 634a having a slow read speed as the character ROM 634, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In the display control device 6 of the gaming machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are transferred from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635. 341, the player has started the game, there is a ball entry (start winning) to the first winning opening 314, and the instruction to start the special game effect is sent from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device. 5, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. It can be displayed and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple special symbol game performance even while the main image is displayed on the pattern display part 341 when the power is turned on.

As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635, the main image continues to be displayed on the pattern display section 341 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 634 is read out. Since it is composed of the NAND type flash memory 634a with a slow speed, it takes time to transfer the data, so that the main image continues to be displayed for a long time after the power is turned on. However, in the gaming machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple special-figure game effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 635 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, To enable a player to play a game without anxiety even while a power-on main image is being displayed immediately after a power failure is restored.

<Step S4106>
After the process of step S4105, interrupt permission is set (step S4106), and thereafter the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of step S4106, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

[Command interrupt processing of display control device 6]
Next, with reference to FIG. 378(A), command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 631 of the display control device 6 will be described. FIG. 378(A) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 5, the MPU 631 executes command interrupt processing.

As shown in FIG. 378(A), in the command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 633 (step S4201). End the command interrupt processing. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

[V Interrupt Processing of Display Control Device 6]
Next, with reference to FIG. 378(B), V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 631 of the display control device 6 will be described. FIG. 378B is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, which is the update process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the pattern display unit 341, the image is displayed. By creating a drawing list (see FIG. 339) as update information and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 637, the image controller 637 is instructed to execute the drawing processing and display processing of the image. .

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal, which is update information from the image controller 637, is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 637 and sent to the MPU 631 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 637 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 637 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

<Steps S4301 to S4303>
Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 378B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 633c is on (step S4301). , is off (step S4301: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 635 has been completed. Command determination processing (step S4302) is executed in order to display the effect image in symbol display section 341, and then display setting processing (step S4303) is executed.

In the command determination process (step S4302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 5 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. or display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 633d, and the set display data table corresponds to The transfer data table to be transferred is set in the transfer data table buffer 633f. Further, when a continuous announcement command is stored, a continuous announcement additional data table corresponding to the continuous announcement image type is set in the additional data table buffer 633e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main controller 4 decides to start the variable effect, there is a high possibility that the variable pattern command for display, the stop type command, the continuous notice command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the special figure game effect and the continuous notice effect selected by the main control device 4 and the voice lamp control device 5 can be quickly grasped, Drawing of the image can be controlled so that the effect image is displayed on the pattern display section 341 . Details of this command interrupt processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In the display setting process (step S4303), based on the contents of the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 633d and the additional data table buffer 633e by the command determination process (step S4302), etc. Next, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed is specifically specified. In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the pattern display section 341 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 633d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

<Step S4304>
After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (step S4304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed in the pattern display section 341 specified by the display setting processing (step S4303) or the simple display setting processing (step S4309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

<Step S4305>
Next, transfer setting processing is executed (step S4305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 633c is on, the image controller 637 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 635 from the character ROM 634 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 635. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 633c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 634 to the image controller 637 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 633f. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 636 a of the video RAM 636 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 5 , the image controller 637 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the back image after change from the character ROM 634 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 636a of the normal video RAM 636. FIG.

<Step S4306>
Next, drawing processing is executed (step S4306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (step S4304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (step S4305) 339 to generate a drawing list as update information and send the drawing list to the image controller 637 together with the drawing object buffer information. As a result, the image controller 637 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S4307>
Next, update processing of various counters, which is update information provided in the display control device 6, is executed (step S4307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of step S4307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 633, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, stop corresponding to the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (small hit, front-rear out reach, reach other than front-rear out, complete out) The type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop design after the special figure game production of the decorative design displayed on the design display section 341 is finally set.

<Steps S4308 and S4309>
In the process of step S4301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag is ON (step S4301: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 635 has not been completed. In order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. Go to processing.

[Command determination processing of display control device 6]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 379 to 391, details of command determination processing of interrupt processing executed in step S4302 of V interrupt processing of FIG. 378(B) will be described. First, FIG. 379 is a flowchart showing command determination processing.

<Steps S4401 to S4403>
As shown in FIG. 379, in the command determination process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (step S4401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (step S4401: No). , to end the command determination process and return to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (step S4401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (step S4303 in FIG. 378) that the new command has been processed is set to ON (step S4402), and then analyzes the command types of all the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area (step S4403).

<Steps S4404 and S4505>
Then, among the unprocessed commands, it is first determined whether or not there is a command for the number of reserved balls for display (step S4404), and if there is a command for the number of reserved balls for display (step S4404: Yes), the number of reserved balls Command processing is executed (step S4405), and the process returns to step S4401.

[Processing of number of pending pitches command]
Here, with reference to FIG. 380(A), the pending ball number command process executed in step S4405 of the command determination process of the display control device 6 in FIG. 379 will be described. FIG. 380(A) is a flow chart showing the pending pitch number command process. In this pending ball number command process, a process corresponding to the display pending ball number command received from the sound lamp control device 5 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 380(A), in the pending ball number command process, first, the display setting process (step S4303 in FIG. 378) is notified that the display pending ball number command has been processed in the ON state. The command flag is turned on (step S4501), and then the pending ball number information included in the pending ball number command for display is acquired (step S4502). In addition, in the process of step S4502, if two or more display reserved ball number commands are stored in the command buffer area, the reserved ball number information is obtained from the last stored display reserved ball number command. This makes it possible to acquire the latest information on the number of pending balls.

Then, among the number discrimination flags provided for each number of held balls, the number discrimination flag corresponding to the number of held balls acquired in the process of step S4502 is turned on, and the number discrimination flag corresponding to the other number of held balls is turned off. 379 (step S4503), and returns to the command determination process in FIG.

As a result, in the display setting process, when the new pending ball number command flag is on, by referring to the number discrimination flag, the number of pending ball patterns for the number of pending balls corresponding to the number discrimination flag set to ON is displayed. is displayed on the pattern display portion 341, the reserved image data is developed.

<Steps S4406 and S4507>
Returning to the description of the command determination processing in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is a command (step S4406), and if there is a confirmation command for display (step S4406: Yes), confirmation command processing is executed (step S4407), and the process returns to step S4401.

[Confirm command processing]
Here, with reference to FIG. 380(B), fixed command processing executed in step S4407 of the command determination processing of the display control device 6 in FIG. explain. FIG. 380(B) is a flow chart showing determination command processing. This confirmation command processing is to execute the processing corresponding to the display confirmation command received from the sound lamp control device 5 .

As shown in FIG. 380B, in the confirmation command processing, the confirmation command flag is set to ON to notify the display setting processing (step S4303 in FIG. 378) that the confirmation command for display has been received in the ON state ( Step S4601), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process in FIG. Thus, in the display setting process, the state of the confirmation command flag is monitored, and when the flag is turned on, the display setting process is executed so that the confirmation display effect is started to be displayed on the symbol display section 341. do. In addition, when processing the setting of the display of the special game effect, if the confirmation command flag does not turn on even after the effect time set for the special game effect has passed, the restart effect is displayed in the symbol display unit 341 Execute the display setting process so that it is displayed on the

<Steps S4408 and S4509>
Returning to the command determination process in FIG. 379, if it is determined in the process of step S4406 that there is no display confirmation command (step S4406: No), then the display demo command is included in the unprocessed commands. It is determined whether there is a display demo command (step S4408), and if there is a display demo command (step S4408: Yes), the demo command process is executed (step S4409), and the process returns to step S4401.

[Demonstration command processing]
Here, the demonstration command processing executed in step S4409 of the command determination processing of the display control device 6 in FIG. 379 will be described with reference to FIG. 380(C). FIG. 380(C) is a flowchart showing demo command processing. This demonstration command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display demonstration command received from the sound lamp control device 5 .

<Steps S4701 and S4702>
As shown in FIG. 380(C), in the demonstration command process, first, a demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is selected from the data table storage area 633b and set in the display data table buffer 633d (step S4701). . Next, by writing Null data into the additional data table buffer 633e, its contents are cleared, and in the demonstration display data table, it is necessary to newly transfer the image data necessary for drawing from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636. Therefore, the corresponding transfer data table is not prepared in the data table storage area 633b. Therefore, the transfer data table buffer 633f is also written with Null data to clear its contents (step S4702).

<Steps S4703 to S4705>
Next, the time data corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the clock counter 633i (step S4703), and the pointer 633g is initialized to 0 (step S4704). Then, the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is displayed in the ON state in the pattern display portion 341 is set to ON, and the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is displayed in the pattern display portion 341 in the ON state. is set to OFF, and the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to OFF (step S4705) to end the command processing and return to the command determination processing.

By executing this demonstration command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 633g, which is the update information initialized by the process of step S4701, the display data table buffer 633d is updated by the process of step S4701. From the set demonstration display data table, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 633g are extracted, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the pattern display section 341 are specified. Also, in the display setting process, the timer counter 633i, which is updated information in which the time data corresponding to the demonstration effect is set by the process of step S4703, is used to measure the time of the demonstration effect specified in the demonstration display data table. Simultaneously, based on the states of the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag, which are the update information set by the processing in step S4705, the display setting control timing counter 633i, which is the update information, counts, and the demonstration effect in the demonstration display data table ends. When it is determined that the demonstration has been performed, control is performed so that the demonstration effect is displayed again as the effect to be displayed next.

<Steps S4410 and S4511>
Returning to the description of the command determination process in FIG. 379, in the process of step S4408, if it is determined that there is no display demo command (step S4408: No), then the display variation pattern command (step S4410), and if there is a display variation pattern command (step S4410: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (step S4411), and the process returns to step S4401.

[Variation pattern command processing]
Here, with reference to FIG. 381(A), the variation pattern command processing executed in step S4411 of the command determination processing of the display control device 6 in FIG. 379 will be described. FIG. 381(A) is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing. In this variation pattern command processing, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 5 is executed.

<Step S4801>
As shown in FIG. 381(A), in the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is It reads from the data table storage area 633b and sets it in the display data table buffer 633d (step S4801).

Here, since the judgment of the start of the fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main controller 4, two or more fluctuation pattern commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is also the risk of being interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of step S4801, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time The data table is set in the display data table buffer 633d.

If a variable display data table corresponding to a variable pattern with a long variable time is set in the display data table buffer 633d, a special figure game effect having a shorter variable time than the set display data table will actually be produced. If instructed by the main control device 4, the determination command (display Since the changing decorative pattern is suddenly stopped and displayed, there is a possibility that the player may feel a sense of incompatibility.

In contrast, as in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table for variation corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 633d, the display data table that is actually longer than the set display data table is set. Even if a special figure game effect having a variable time is instructed by the main controller 4, after the special figure game effect according to the display data table buffer 633d ends, the main controller 4 The display of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled by the display setting process so that the restart effect is displayed until the confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the player. is visually recognized as a part of the special game performance, and the variation of the decoration pattern in the pattern display part 341 can be continued without discomfort until the stop display of the decoration pattern is confirmed.

<Steps S4802 and S4803>
Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in step S4801 is determined, read from the data table storage area 633b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 633f (step S4802). Then, by writing Null data to the additional data table buffer 633e, the content is cleared (step S4803).

<Step S4804>
After that, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing in step S4801 is turned on, The data table discrimination flags corresponding to other variable display data tables are set to OFF (step S4804). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of step S4804, it is determined which variation pattern the display data table for variation set in the display data table buffer 633d corresponds to. can be easily determined. Then, in the display setting process, it is determined whether or not there is a contradiction between the fluctuation pattern of the set fluctuation display data table and the stop pattern set by the display stop type command to be received later. sets the display data table corresponding to the special variation in the display data table buffer 633d, as will be described later.

<Steps S4805 to S4808>
Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table for fluctuation set in the display data table buffer 633d by the process of step S4801, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 633i (step S4805). ), and the pointer 633g is initialized to 0 (step S4806). Then, the determination command flag, the demonstration display flag, and the determination display flag are all set to OFF (step S4807), and the restart timer counter used in the display setting process is initialized to 0 (step S4808). End the pattern command and return to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while executing the update process of the pointer 633g, which is the update information initialized by the process of step S4806, the display data table buffer 633d by the process of step S4801 is extracted from the variable display data table set to , and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the pattern display section 341 is specified. The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 633g is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 633f by the process of S4802, and the necessary sprite image data in the set display data table for variation is extracted. is transferred from the character ROM 634 to the image storage area 636a of the normal video RAM 636 in advance.

In addition, in the display setting process, by using the time counter 633i, which is the update information in which the variable time data is set by the process of step S4805, the time of the special figure game effect specified in the variable display data table is measured, and the variable When it is determined that the special figure game effect in the display data table for use is completed, if a confirmation command (fixed command for display) from the main control device 4 is received, the confirmation display effect is displayed on the pattern display unit 341, and the special figure is displayed. If the determination command (determination command for display) cannot be received within a predetermined time after the end of the game effect, the setting of the display is controlled so that the restart effect is displayed on the pattern display part 341.例文帳に追加

Here, if both the fixed command for display and the fluctuation pattern command for display are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if priority is given to the processing corresponding to the fixed command for display, Since the special figure game effect accompanying the variation pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to give priority to the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display. On the other hand, in this command determination process, since it is first determined whether or not there is a confirmation command for display, the confirmation command process corresponding to the confirmation command for display is always executed first. The processing corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command for is executed later, and as in the processing of step S4807, the determination command flag set by the display determination command can be set to OFF by overwriting. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display determination command, and the special figure game effect associated with the display variation pattern command can be displayed on the symbol display section 341 with priority.

Similarly, if both the display demo command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if the processing corresponding to the display demo command is prioritized, the display Since the special figure game effect accompanying the variation pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to give priority to the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display. On the other hand, in this command determination process, since the presence or absence of the display demo command is determined first, the demo command process corresponding to the display demo command is always executed first. A process corresponding to the variation pattern command is executed later, and the demonstration display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d by the display demonstration command is rewritten to the variation display data table by overwriting, as in the process of step S4801. be able to. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display demonstration command, and the special figure game effect associated with the display variation pattern command can be displayed on the symbol display section 341 with priority.

<Steps S4412 and S4413>
Returning to the description of the command determination process in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is a command (step S4412), and if there is a display variation type command (step S4411: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (step S4413), and the process returns to step S4401.

[Stop type command processing]
Here, the stop type command processing will be described with reference to FIG. 381(B). FIG. 381(B) is a flow chart showing stop type command processing executed in step S4413 of the command determination processing of the display control device 6 in FIG. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 5 .

<Steps S4901 to S4903>
As shown in FIG. 381(B), in the stop type command process, first, the stop type information (small hit, front-rear out reach, reach other than front-rear out, or complete out) indicated by the stop type command for display corresponds to The stop type table to be used is determined (step S4901), and the stop type table and the value of the stop type counter, which is updated information updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 378(B)) is executed. By comparison, the stop design after the special game effect displayed on the design display unit 341 is finally set (step S4902).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of step S4542 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. It is set to off (step S4903).

Here, as described above, in the display data table for variation, step Offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the process of S4902 is described. In the task processing (step S4304 in FIG. 378 (B)) in the above-described V interrupt processing, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the fluctuation was started, the processing of step S4902 from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by step S4543 A decorative pattern to be actually displayed is specified by specifying the stop pattern set by and adding the pattern offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop pattern. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified decoration pattern is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the decorative design is stored in the decorative design area 635d of the resident video RAM 635 as described above.

<Step S4904>
After the process of step S4903, the comparison flag is turned on (step S4904), this stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process in FIG. By turning on this comparison flag, in the display setting process, there is no contradiction between the variation pattern of the variation display data table set by the above-described variation pattern command setting process and the stop pattern set by the process of step S4902. If there is a contradiction, a display data table corresponding to the special variation is set in the display data table buffer 633d, as will be described later.

It should be noted that since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main controller 4, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of step S4901, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, Determine the type table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the process of step S4902.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is set, the stop symbol of the big win will be displayed on the symbol display section 341 even if the winning is actually lost, and the player will be able to enjoy the game. There is a possibility that the game state of the game machine 10 is misunderstood as a big win, and the reliability of the game machine 10 is lowered. On the other hand, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to a complete loss as in the present embodiment, if a big win is actually made, even if a stop symbol corresponding to a complete loss is displayed on the symbol display section 341, Since the game state of the game machine 10 shifts to the jackpot state, the player can be pleased.

<Steps S4414 and S4415>
Returning to the description of the command determination process in FIG. 379, if it is determined in the process of step S4412 that there is no stop type command for display (step S4412: No), then there is a continuous notice command among the unprocessed commands. It is determined whether or not there is (step S4414), and if there is a continuous notice command (step S4414: Yes), the continuous notice command process is executed (step S4415), and the process returns to step S4401.

[Continuous notice command processing]
Here, the details of the continuous notice command process will be described with reference to FIG. 382(A). FIG. 382(A) is a flow chart showing the continuous notice command process executed in step S4415 of the command determination process of the display control device 6 in FIG. This continuous announcement command process is to execute a process corresponding to the continuous announcement command received from the sound lamp control device 5 .

<Steps S5001 and S5002>
As shown in FIG. 382(A), in the continuous notice command process, first, the transfer setting process of the V interrupt process (step S4305 in FIG. 378(A)) is notified that the continuous notice command has been processed in the ON state. A new continuous notice command flag is set to ON (step S5001). Next, a continuous announcement additional data table corresponding to the continuous announcement image type (one of "bubble", "egg", "chick", "chicken" and "chicken group") indicated by the continuous announcement command is determined. Then, the determined additional data table for continuous announcement is read from the data table storage area 633b and set in the additional data table buffer 633e (step S5002).

As a result, in the display setting process, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d corresponds to the continuous announcement additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 633e by the process of step S4552. The display contents of the image for the next one frame in the pattern display part 341 are specified so that the continuous advance notice effect is additionally displayed.

<Step S5003>
After that, among the continuous notice determination flags provided for each continuous notice image type, the continuous notice determination flag corresponding to the continuous notice image type included in the continuous notice command is turned on, and the continuous notice judgment flag corresponding to the other continuous notice image type is turned on. The advance notice determination flag is set to off (step S4553), the continuous advance notice command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing in FIG. 379 is returned to.

In the transfer setting process of the V interrupt process (step S4305 in FIG. 378A), when it is detected that the new continuous notice command flag set by the process of step S5001 is turned on, additional data is transferred by the continuous notice command process. It is determined that a predetermined continuous announcement additional data table has been set in the table buffer 633e, and the continuous announcement additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 633e corresponds to the continuous announcement discrimination flag set by the process of step S4553. Identify the continuous notice type to be used. Then, the image controller 637 is instructed to transfer the image data necessary for displaying the specified continuous announcement type.

<Steps S4416 and S4417>
Returning to the description of the command determination process in FIG. 379, if it is determined in the process of step S4414 that there is no continuous notice command (step S4414: No), then there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands. (step S4416), and if there is a back image change command (step S4416: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (step S4417), and the process returns to step S4401.

[Back image change command processing]
Here, with reference to FIG. 382(B), the back image change command process will be described. FIG. 382(B) is a flow chart showing the back image change command process executed in step S4417 of the command determination process of the display control device 6 in FIG. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 5 .

<Steps S5101 and S5102>
As shown in FIG. 382(B), in the back image change command processing, first, a back image change command for notifying the transfer setting processing (step S2405) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state. A flag is set to ON (step S5101). Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back face A to back face C), the back face image discrimination flag corresponding to the back face image type indicated by the back face image change command is turned on, and the other back face image discrimination flags are turned on. The back image determination flag corresponding to the image type is set to off (step S5102), the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing in FIG. 379 is returned to.

In the transfer setting process of the V interrupt process (step S4305 in FIG. 378A), when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of step S5101 is turned on, it is set by the process of step S5102. The back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag. Then, when the identified back image type is back B or C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 635c of the resident video RAM 635, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 637 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 634 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 636a of the normal video RAM 636. FIG.

Further, in the task processing of the V interrupt process (step S4304 in FIG. 378A), it is specified that one of the back faces A to C is displayed according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table. If so, the type of the back image to be displayed at that point in time is specified from the back image discrimination flag set in step S5102, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time. The RAM type (resident video RAM 635 or normal video RAM 636) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the image is stored and the address of the RAM are specified.

In addition, since the player does not operate the operation button 20 continuously for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of step S5102, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the gaming machine 10 , it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the gaming machine 10 .

<Steps S4418 and S4419>
Returning to the description of the command determination process in FIG. 379, if it is determined in the process of step S4416 that there is no back image change command (step S4416: No), then the operation button operation command is included in the unprocessed commands. If there is an operation button operation command (step S4418: Yes), the operation button operation command process is executed (step S4419), and the process returns to step S4401.

[Operation button operation command processing]
Here, the operation button operation command processing will be described with reference to FIG. 383(A). FIG. 383A is a flow chart showing operation button operation command processing executed in step S4419 of the command determination processing of the display control device 6 in FIG. This operation button operation command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the operation button operation command received from the sound lamp control device 5 .

As shown in FIG. 383(A), in the operation button operation command, an operation button operation flag indicating that the operation button has been operated in the ON state is set to ON (step S5201), this process is terminated, and the command Return to judgment processing.

In the display setting process of the V interrupt process (step S4303 in FIG. 378A), the super ready-to-win selection screen is displayed by the pattern display unit 341 according to the variable display data table based on the operation button operation flag set by the process of step S5201. When it detects that the operation button has been operated while displaying it, it executes processing to update the type of super reach to be displayed later. As a result, the player can select a desired super ready-to-win effect.

<Steps S4420 and S4421>
Returning to the description of the command determination process in FIG. 379, if it is determined in the process of step S4418 that there is no operation button operation command (step S4418: No), then whether there is an error command among the unprocessed commands. It is determined whether or not (step S4420), and if there is an error command (step S4420: Yes), error command processing is executed (step S4421), and the process returns to step S4401.

[Error command processing]
Here, error command processing will be described with reference to FIG. 383(B). FIG. 383B is a flow chart showing error command processing executed in step S4421 of the command determination processing of the display control device 6 in FIG. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 5 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 383(B), in the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (step S5301). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set off (step S5302). The command processing is ended, and the command determination processing in FIG. 379 is returned to.

In the display setting process of the V interrupt process (step S4303 in FIG. 378A), when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of step S5301, the flag set by the process of step S5302 is displayed. The type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag, and processing is executed to display a warning image corresponding to the type of error on the pattern display section 341 .

Note that if it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of step S5302, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. . As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the symbol display section 341, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

<Step S4822>
Returning to the description of the command determination processing in FIG. 379, if it is determined that there is no error command in the processing of step S4420 (step S4420: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (step S4422) and returns to the processing of step S4401.

In the process of step S4401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. : Yes), the processing of steps S4402 to S4422 is executed again. Then, the processing of steps S4401 to S4422 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. This command determination processing ends.

Note that the simple command determination process (step S4308) executed when the simple image display flag 633c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 378B) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. Only commands and stop type commands for display are extracted, and processing corresponding to each command, fixed command processing (see FIG. 380 (B)), fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 381 (A)) and stop type Command processing (see FIG. 381(B)) is executed, and other commands are discarded without executing the processing corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 381A) executed in this case, in the processing of step S4801, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is set to the display data table buffer 633d. , and the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 635a and the power-on varying image area 635b of the resident video RAM 635. Therefore, in the process of step S4802, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 633f and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

[Display setting processing]
Next, the display setting process (step S4303) of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 631 of the display control device 6 in FIG. 378(B) will be described with reference to FIGS. 384 to 387. FIG. 384 and 385 are flow charts showing this display setting process.

<Steps S5401 and S5402>
As shown in FIG. 384, in the display setting process, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (step S5401). , it determines that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing executed first, skips the processing of steps S5402 to S5410, and proceeds to the processing of step S5411. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (step S5401: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag off (step S5402), step The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing from S5403 to S5410.

<Steps S5403 and S5404>
In the process of step S5403, it is determined whether or not the new pending ball number command flag is ON (step S5403), and if the new pending ball number command flag is ON (step S5403: Yes), the previous command determination process , it is determined that the pending ball number command for display has been processed, and pending image setting processing is executed (step S5404).

[Hold image setting process]
Here, with reference to FIG. 386(A), the details of the pending image setting process will be described. FIG. 386(A) is a flowchart showing pending image setting processing. This pending image setting process is image data for displaying on the pattern display unit 341 the pending ball number pattern corresponding to the pending ball number notified from the voice lamp control device 5 in accordance with the processing of the display pending ball number command. This is the process for expanding the .

<Steps S5501 and S5502>
As shown in FIG. 386(A), in the pending image setting process, first, the number discrimination flag is referred to, and the number of pending balls corresponding to the number discrimination flag set to ON is displayed in the pattern display section 341. , is developed (step S5501). In the task processing of the V interrupt process (step S4304 in FIG. 386(A)), based on the expanded pending image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the pending image is specified, and each sprite Next, various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined.

In the pending image setting process, after the process of step S5501, the new pending ball number command is set to OFF (step S5502), and the process returns to the display setting process in FIG.

<Steps S5405 and S5406>
Returning to the description of the display setting process in FIG. 384, after the pending image setting process (step S5404) or in the process of step S5403, when it is determined that the new pending ball number command flag is not on, that is, is off ( Step S5403: No), then it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (step S5405). If the error occurrence flag is ON (step S5405: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (step S5406).

[Warning image setting process]
Here, the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 386(B). FIG. 386B is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing.

<Steps S5601 and S602>
As shown in FIG. 386(B), the warning image setting process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the pattern display section 341. First, the error determination flag is referred to. , warning image data for displaying on the pattern display section 341 error warning images corresponding to all the error determination flags set to ON (step S5601).

In task processing of V interrupt processing (step S4304 in FIG. 378), based on the expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) forming the warning image are identified, and each sprite is displayed. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of step S5601, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (step S5602), and the process returns to the display setting process of FIG.

<Steps S5407 and S5408>
Returning to the description of the display setting process in FIG. 384, after the warning image setting process (step S5406) or in the process of step S5405, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (step S5405: No), then it is determined whether or not the operation button operation flag is ON (step S5407). If the operation button operation flag is ON (step S5407: Yes), operation button operation processing is executed (step S5408).

[Operation button operation processing]
Here, the operation button operation process will be described with reference to FIG. 386(C). FIG. 386(C) is a flowchart showing operation button operation processing. In the operation button operation process, when the operation button 20 is operated by the player while the selection screen for selecting the display mode of the super ready-to-win is displayed on the symbol display unit 341, the super ready-to-win to be displayed is selected according to the operation. This is a process for selecting a mode.

<Steps S5701 and S5702>
As shown in FIG. 386(C), in the operation button operation process, first, after setting the operation button operation flag to OFF (step S5701), it is checked whether or not the super ready-to-win selection screen is displayed in the symbol display section 341. It discriminates (step S5702). This super reach selection screen is displayed on the symbol display section 341 in accordance with the display data table for variation set in the display data table buffer 633d. Based on the data table, when the image controller 637 is instructed to draw a sprite for the super reach selection screen, it is determined that the super reach selection screen is being displayed on the pattern display section 341 .

<Step S5703>
In the process of step S5702, if it is determined that the super ready-to-win selection screen is not displayed on the symbol display section 341 (step S5702: No), the operation button operation process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the display setting process of FIG. . On the other hand, as a result of the process of step S5702, if it is determined that the super reach selection screen is displayed in the symbol display unit 341 (step S5702: Yes), the super reach type flag provided for each display mode of super reach Of these, according to a predetermined order, the super reach type flag is updated so that only the super reach type flag corresponding to one display mode is turned on and the other super reach type flags are set to be off (step S5703). , the process returns to the display setting process in FIG.

In this embodiment, when defining the super reach display mode selected by the player in the variable display data table, the drawing contents corresponding to each super reach display mode are defined for each address. In the display setting process, when the contents of the display data table are developed in the process of step S5412, which will be described later, only the drawing contents corresponding to the super reach display mode with the super reach type flag turned on are extracted. As a result, in the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) corresponding to the selected Super Reach display mode is specified, and for each sprite, various data necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle are displayed. Since the parameters are set, the symbol display section 341 displays the super ready-to-win effect in the selected display mode.

<Steps S5409 and S5410>
Returning to the description of the display setting process in FIG. : No), it is determined whether or not the comparison flag is ON (step S5409). If the comparison flag is ON (step S5409: Yes), comparison processing is executed (step S5410).

[Comparison process]
Here, with reference to FIG. 387, details of the comparison processing will be described. FIG. 387 is a flowchart showing comparison processing. This processing is performed when the display data table for variation set in the display data table buffer 633d based on the variation pattern command for display contradicts the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display. The figure game performance is changed to a special variable performance in which decorative patterns are variably displayed at high speed until a confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main controller 4 via the voice lamp controller 5 is received. This process is for

<Steps S5801 and S5802>
As shown in FIG. 387, in the comparison process, first, among the data table discrimination flags, the data table discrimination flag set to the ON state is specified, and from the specified data table discrimination flag, the display data table buffer 633d (step S5801). Next, among the stop design determination flags, the stop design determination flag set to ON state is specified, and the set stop design is specified from the specified stop design determination flag (step S5802).

<Steps S5803 and S5804>
Then, it is determined whether or not the type of the display data table for variation specified by the process of step S5802 matches the stop symbol specified by the process of step S5802 (step S5803). As described above, the display data table for variation is prepared for each variation pattern, and each variation pattern has an error, a small hit, and the like. Therefore, in the process of step S5803, for example, even though the display data table for variation corresponds to the variation pattern for loss, if the stop symbol is set to the jackpot symbol, it is determined that these do not match. do.

In the process of step S5803, if it is determined that they match (step S5803: Yes), the process moves to step S5808, sets the comparison flag to off (step S5808), and returns to the display setting process in FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (step S5803: No), first, the display data table for special fluctuations defining the special fluctuations is set in the display data table buffer 633d, and the additional data table buffer 633e and the transfer data By writing Null data to each of the table buffers 633f, their contents are cleared (step S5804).

<Steps S5805 to S5808>
Next, the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to special stop symbols (for example, symbols displayed as "3", "4", "1" from the left column) are turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned on. is set to OFF (step S5805), and further, time data corresponding to the effect time of the special variation effect is set to the clock counter 633i (step S5806). In addition, as described above, the special variation effect is to display the decorative pattern at high speed until the confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 4 via the sound lamp control device 5 is received. Therefore, the performance time is set to a long time (for example, 90 seconds). Therefore, 90 seconds (90000 milliseconds)÷20 milliseconds=4500 is set in the clock counter 633i as update information as time data corresponding to the performance time of the special variation performance.

Then, the pointer 633g as update information is initialized to 0 (step S5807), the comparison flag is set to OFF (step S5808), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Thus, if the display data table for variation set in the display data table buffer 633d based on the variation pattern command for display contradicts the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display, a special Since the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 633d, the symbol display section 341 displays a special variable effect in which the decorative symbols continue to fluctuate at high speed. Then, since a special stop pattern is set as the stop pattern, when a confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 4 via the sound lamp control device 5 is received, the special stop pattern is displayed. can be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display section 341 .

Here, when the variation performance pattern instructed by the main controller 4 via the sound lamp controller 5 does not match the stop pattern to be displayed when the variation performance is stopped, the display controller 6 controls the main controller. There is a possibility that the result of the lottery performed in 4 cannot be correctly reflected and the variable performance and the fixed display performance cannot be performed. On the other hand, in the game machine 10, in such a case, a special variation effect is performed, and after the variation display, a special stop symbol indicating a special failure is fixedly displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Even if the result of the lottery is a loss, it is possible to prevent the symbol display part 341 from erroneously performing a finalized display performance of a big win. Further, even if the special stop symbol is confirmed and displayed on the symbol display section 341, if the lottery result of the main control device 4 is a big win, the actual game state of the gaming machine 10 shifts to the special game state. The game can be continued with peace of mind. Furthermore, by making the fixed display a special stop symbol, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a possibility that the gaming machine 10 is in a big win state even if the fixed display is off. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy because the gaming machine 10 enters the jackpot state in spite of the fact that the confirmation display is off.

<Step S5411>
Returning to the description of the display setting process in FIG. A pointer update process is executed (step S5411).

[Pointer update process]
Here, pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 388 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process is performed by extracting the corresponding drawing contents or transfer data from the display data table, additional data table, and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d, additional data table buffer 633e, and transfer data table buffer 633f, respectively. This is the process of updating the pointer 633g designating the address from which the transfer data information of the target image data should be acquired.

<Step S5901>
As shown in FIG. 388, in the pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 633g, which is update information (step S5901). That is, the pointer 633g is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 633g is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 633d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table of

<Steps S5902 to S5905>
After the value of the pointer 633g, which is the update information, is updated by the update processing in step S5901, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d, the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 633g is the End information. It is determined whether or not there is (step S5902). As a result, if it is the End information (step S5902: Yes), it means that the pointer 633g has been updated past the address where the entity data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d. .

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d is the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table (step S5903). If it is a data table (step S5903: Yes), the pointer 633g is set to 1 (step S5904), and furthermore, the rendering time of the demonstration display data table or restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d is set in the clock counter 633i (step S5905), and the process proceeds to step S5907. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table, so that the pattern display section 341 repeatedly displays the demonstration effect or the restart effect. be able to.

<Step S5906>
In the process of step S5903, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 633d is neither the demonstration display data table nor the restart display data table (step S5903: No), the update information The value of a certain pointer 633g is decremented by 1 (step S5906), and the process proceeds to step S5907. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demonstration display data table and the restart display data table, for example, a variable display data table or a fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 633d, , the drawing contents of the previous address where the End information is described are always expanded, so that the pattern display section 341 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. can.

As a result of the process in step S5902, if it is determined that the data at the address indicated by the pointer 633g after the update in step S5901 is not the End information in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d, step The process of S5903 to S5905 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S5907.

<Steps S5907 to S5909>
In the processing of step S5907, it is determined whether or not the fixed command flag is ON. Return to display setting processing. On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is ON (step S5907: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main control device 4 via the sound lamp control device 5, so the display data table The value of the pointer 633g is set to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the end position address where the End information is stored in the display data buffer set in the buffer 633d (step S5908), and the value of the timer counter, which is update information. is set to 1 (step S5909), and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, when the confirmation command is received, the display setting process can expand the drawing content specified at the end of the set display data table and control the start of the confirmation display effect.

<Step S5412>
Returning to the description of the display setting process in FIG. The drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 633g are expanded (step S5412). In task processing of V interrupt processing (step S4304 in FIG. 378(B)), an image is configured based on the drawing contents developed in step S5412 together with the pending image and warning image developed earlier. The type of sprite (display object) is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite. If Null data is described in the additional data table, the subsequent processing is executed assuming that there is no sprite to be added. Also, when the additional data table buffer 633e is cleared with Null data, the Null data is always developed from the additional data table buffer 633e.

<Steps S5413 to S5421>
Next, update processing is executed to decrement the value of the time counter 633i, which is update information, by 1 (step S5413), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 633i after the subtraction is 0 or less (step S5414). Then, if the value of the clock counter 633i is 1 or more (step S5414: No), the display setting process ends and returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 633i is 0 or less (step S5414: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 633d, a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is sent from the main controller 4 via the sound lamp controller 5 in accordance with the end of the presentation. ) should be transmitted, so in the subsequent processing of step S5415, it is checked whether or not the determination command flag is ON (step S5415).

As a result, if the confirmation command flag is ON (step S5415: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main controller 4 via the sound lamp controller 5. The confirmed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 633d, and null data is written in each of the additional data table buffer 633e and the transfer data table buffer 633f to clear their contents (step S5416). Next, the time data corresponding to the production time of the finalized display is set in the clock counter 633i as update information (step S5417), and the value of the pointer 633g as update information is initialized to 0 (step S5418). Then, the confirmation command flag is set to OFF (step S5419), and then the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (step S5420), and the contents of the stop pattern determination flag are left as they are. It is copied to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 633 (step S5421), and returns to the V interrupt process of FIG. 378(B).

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 633d, the confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received, the drawing contents can be set so that the fixed display effect of the stop pattern in the special game effect is displayed on the pattern display section 341.例文帳に追加Further, the effect displayed on the pattern display section 341 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d to the fixed display data table. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 631 is not overloaded. Various modes of effect images can be displayed on the pattern display section 341 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 6 .

It should be noted that the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of step S5421 is used to specify the decoration symbol to be displayed on the symbol display section 341 in the next special symbol game effect. That is, as described above, the display of the decoration pattern in the special game effect is changed according to the stop pattern of the special game effect performed immediately before. Until a predetermined time elapses after the fluctuation based on is started, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the special symbol game effect performed one before is described. In the task processing of the V interrupt processing (step S4304 in FIG. 378(B)), from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in step S5421 until a predetermined time elapses after the start of the variation, the process is performed one before. A decorative pattern to be actually displayed is specified by specifying the stop pattern of the special symbol game performance thus obtained and adding the pattern offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop pattern. As a result, the special symbol game effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous special symbol game effect.

<Steps S5422 to S5427>
In the process of step S5415, if the confirmation command flag is not on but off (step S5415: No), the process proceeds to step S5422 shown in FIG. 385 to determine whether the confirmation display flag is on ( step S5422). Then, if the fixed display flag is on (step S5422: Yes), the result of determination in the process of step S5414 (step S5414: Yes) means that the fixed display effect has ended, so the fixed display flag is turned off. (step S5423), the display data table for display is set in the display data table buffer 633d (step S5424), and then the time data corresponding to the performance time of the data display is set in the clock counter 633i as update information. (step S5425). Then, the pointer 633g is initialized to 0 (step S5426), and the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed is set to on (step S5427), and the V interrupt process of FIG. 378(B) is executed. finish.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next special game effect or the display demonstration effect command indicating the start of the demonstration effect is not received before the final display effect ends, automatically Also, the drawing contents can be set so that the demonstration effect is displayed on the pattern display section 341 .

It should be noted that the branch condition of step S5422: Yes is satisfied when the confirmation display effect is being performed. Contents are cleared. Therefore, in the process of step S5424, the process of clearing those data table buffers is omitted. As a result, the processing load on the MPU 631 can be reduced.

<Step S5428>
In the processing of step S5422, if the fixed display flag is not on but off (step S5422: No), then it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (step S5428). Then, if the demonstration display flag is on (step S5428: Yes), the result of determination in the process of step S5414 (step S5414: Yes) means that the demonstration effect has ended, so the display setting process ends. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the pattern display section 341 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

<Steps S5429 and S5430>
In the process of step S548, if the demonstration display flag is not ON, but is OFF (step S5428: No), the result of determination in the process of step S5414 (step S5414: Yes) is that the special figure game effect has ended. means Therefore, if the confirmation command is not received even after a predetermined time has passed since the special game effect is completed, the display data table for variation corresponding to the special game effect is changed to start the restart effect. An update process is executed to add 1 to the restart timer counter, which is update information initialized to 0 as it is set in the buffer 633d (step S5429), and the value of the restart timer counter after the addition is a predetermined value. A determination is made as to whether or not a value has been reached (step S5430).

<Steps S5431 to S5433>
If the restart timer counter does not reach the predetermined value (step S5430: No), the display setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process in FIG. 378(B). If the restart timer counter, which is the update information, has a predetermined value (step S5430: Yes), the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 633d, and the additional data table buffer 633e and the transfer data table buffer 633f are set. By writing Null data to each of them, their contents are cleared (step S5431). Then, time data, which is update information corresponding to the effect time of the restart effect, is set in the clock counter 633i (step S5432), and the value of the pointer 633g, which is update information, is initialized to 0 (step S5433), Return to the V interrupt process in FIG. 378(B).

As a result, in the display control device 6, even after a predetermined time has passed since the decorative pattern was stopped and displayed with the end of the special game effect, the confirmation transmitted from the main control device 4 via the sound lamp control device 5 When the command (confirmation command for display) is not received, the drawing contents can be set so that the restart effect is displayed on the pattern display section 341 . Then, as described above, the restart effect is a effect of displaying an image in which the decorative pattern is vibrated on the pattern display section 341, so that the player can stop and display the fluctuation of the decorative pattern on the pattern display section 341. By visually recognizing that the decorative pattern is vibrated and displayed after the game is finished, it is possible to recognize that the stop pattern is not determined at that time.

It should be noted that after the last drawing content specified by the restart display data table is expanded, the drawing content is expanded again from the beginning of the restart display data table by the above-described pointer update processing. Therefore, the restart effect can be repeatedly displayed on the pattern display section 341 until the confirmation command for display is received from the sound lamp control device 5 or a new variation pattern command for display is received. Here, the restart effect is to be displayed on the pattern display section 341 in such a manner that the decorative pattern is vibrated (swayed) about a predetermined position. Specify only the drawing contents necessary to move and display. By repeatedly developing the drawing contents from the top of the restart display data table, the restart effect in which the decoration pattern is repeatedly vibrated is displayed on the pattern display section 341.例文帳に追加In this way, by setting the restart effect to display the decorative patterns on the pattern display unit 341 by vibrating the decorative patterns, the restart display data table can be displayed by swinging the decorative patterns at least once. Since it is sufficient to store only the necessary drawing contents, the capacity required for storing the restart display data table can be reduced.

In addition, when the confirmation command for display is received from the sound lamp control device 5 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the processing of step S5416 shown in FIG. 384 is performed, and the display data table A fixed display data table is set in the buffer 633d. As a result, even during the restart performance, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed with the stop symbols indicated by the stop symbol discrimination flag in accordance with the reception of the confirmation command for display, and the confirmation display is displayed on the symbol display part 341. - 特許庁.

Further, when the display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 5 while the restart effect is being performed by the start display data table, the processing of step S4801 in FIG. A variable display data table is set in the data table buffer 633 d , and a special figure game effect is displayed in the symbol display section 341 . Further, when the display demo command is received from the sound lamp control device 5 while the restart effect is being performed by the start display data table, the processing of step S4701 in FIG. A demonstration display data table is set in the table buffer 633 d , and a demonstration effect is displayed in the pattern display section 341 . In the restart effect, even after a predetermined time has passed since the decorative pattern was stopped and displayed with the end of the special game effect, a confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 4 that should have been originally received is received. Since it is an effect that is displayed when it is not displayed, there is a possibility that the confirmation command will not be received even while the restart effect is being displayed due to the effects of noise, malfunction, etc. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if a display variation pattern command or a display demo command is received during the restart effect, the effect corresponding to the command can be displayed on the pattern display unit 341, so that the pattern display can be performed. Various effects in the part 341 can be performed according to the game state of the gaming machine 10 .

Note that the simple display setting process (step S4309) executed when the simple image display flag 633c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 378B) is similar to the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the special game effect by the power-on fluctuation image is over, when a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the main control device 4 via the sound lamp control device 5 Stops and displays one image (either of FIG. 333(B) or FIG. 333(C)) of the power-on variation image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display for a predetermined time. A process of setting a display data table that defines this in the display data table buffer 633d is performed. In addition, after the production time of the special game production by the power-on fluctuation image ends, the reception of the confirmation command (the confirmation command for display) that should be received from the main control device 4 via the sound lamp control device 5 is acknowledged. If not, a process of setting a display data table specifying that the special figure game effect of the power-on fluctuation image is restarted as it is in the display data table buffer 633d is performed.

In the comparison processing, the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is compared with the stop type indicated by the display stop type, and if they do not match, the off pattern is set as the stop pattern.

[Transfer setting process]
Next, transfer setting processing (step S4305) of V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 631 of the display control device 6 will be described with reference to FIGS. 389 and 390. FIG. Here, FIG. 389A is a flow chart showing transfer setting processing.

<Steps S6001 to S6003>
As shown in FIG. 389A, in the transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 633c is ON (step S6001). If the simple image display flag 633c is on (step S6001: Yes), all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 635 have not been transferred from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635, so the resident image transfer setting is made. Processing is executed (step S6002), the transfer setting processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 637 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 635 from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in step S6001, if the simple image display flag 633c is not on, that is, if it is off (step S6001: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 635 is transferred from the character ROM 634 to the resident. It has been transferred to the video RAM 635 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (step S6003), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 634 is performed to the normal video RAM 636 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Resident image transfer setting process]
Next, resident image transfer setting processing (step S6002), which is one process of the transfer setting processing (step S4305) executed by the MPU 631 of the display control device 6, will be described with reference to FIG. 389(B). FIG. 389B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (step S6002).

<Steps S6101 and S6102>
As shown in FIG. 389B, in the resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 637 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (step S6101). has been transmitted (step S6101: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 637 based on the transfer instruction has ended (step S6102). In the process of step S6102, after instructing the image controller 637 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 637, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. do. If it is determined in step S6102 that the transfer process has not ended (step S6102: NO), the image controller 637 continues the image transfer process. End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (step S6102: Yes), the process proceeds to step S6103. Also, as a result of the processing in step S6101, even if a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 637 (step S6101: No), the process proceeds to step S6103.

<Steps S6103 and S6104>
In the process of step S6103, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 635 have been transferred (step S6103). Then, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 637 so as to transfer the untransferred resident image data from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 (step S6104), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list as update information transmitted to the image controller 637 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the resident target image data that has not been transferred. Resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 based on the described transfer data information. The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 634 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 635), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 635 for storing the resident object image data is included. The image controller 637 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 634, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 637a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 637a while the resident video RAM 635 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 635 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 631 .

<Step S6105>
As a result of the process in step S6103, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (step S610: Yes), the simple image display flag 633c is set to OFF (step S6105), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. . As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see step S4308 in FIG. 378B), instead of the simple command determination processing (see step S4308 in FIG. 378B) and the simple display setting processing (see step S4309 in FIG. 378B), , command determination processing (see FIGS. 379 to 383) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 384 to 387) are executed. A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 634 is performed to the normal video RAM 636 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 390) (see step S6001: No in FIG. 389A).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 631 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 635, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. Target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 634 to the resident video RAM 635 . Then, the MPU 631 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 635 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 635 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 635 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 635 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 635, the display controller 6 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 635 while the image controller 637 can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 635, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 634 composed of the NAND flash memory 634a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be saved, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the pattern display section 341 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 635 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, decorative designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main control unit 4, sound lamp control unit 5, display control unit 6, and the like. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by , even if the character ROM 634 is composed of the NAND flash memory 634a, various operations performed by the player at any timing, High responsiveness can be maintained until some image is displayed on the pattern display section 341 .

[Normal image transfer setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 390, the normal image transfer setting process (step S6003), which is one process of the transfer setting process (step S4305) executed by the MPU 631 of the display control device 6, will be described. FIG. 390 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process.

<Steps S6201 to S6204>
As shown in FIG. 390, in the normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 633f, the pointer update process (step S5411) of the previously executed display setting process (step S4303) is performed. ), the information described in the address indicated by the pointer 633g is obtained (step S6201). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (step S6202). The head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 634 and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 636) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 633. (step S6203), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 633 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state, is set to ON (step S6204), and the process proceeds to step S6205. .

<Steps S6205 and S6206>
Also, in the processing of step S6202, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (step S6202: No), the processing of steps S6203 and S6204 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to step S6205. In the process of step S6205, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 637 after the previous image data transfer is completed (step S6205). If set (step S6205: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 637 based on the transfer instruction has ended (step S6206).

In the process of step S6206, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 637, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 637, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. do. If it is determined by the processing in step S6206 that the transfer processing has not ended (step S6206: NO), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 637, so the normal image transfer setting is performed. End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (step S6206: Yes), the process proceeds to step S6207. Also, as a result of the process in step S6205, even if no image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 637 after the previous transfer process (step S6205: No), the process proceeds to step S6207.

<Steps S6207 to S6211>
In the processing of step S6207, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on. It is turned off (step S6208), and the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of step S6203 is set as the transfer target image, and the processing proceeds to step S6215. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not ON, but OFF (step S6207: No), then it is determined whether or not the new continuation notice command flag is ON (step S6209).

If the new continuous notice command flag is ON (step S6209: Yes), it means that the continuous notice command has been processed and the continuous notice additional data table for the continuous notice effect has been set in the additional data table buffer 633e. Therefore, after setting the new continuation notice command flag to OFF (step S6210), the continuation notice image corresponding to the continuation notice discrimination flag that is in the ON state among the continuation notice discrimination flags provided for each continuation notice image type is set to OFF (step S6210). The head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 634 in which the image data is stored, and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 636) are specified (step S6211). After the image data of the sprite indicated by the specified various information is set as the image to be transferred, the process proceeds to step S6215.

<Steps S6212 to S6214>
In the process of step S6209, if the new continuation notice command flag is not on but off (step S6209: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (step S6212). If the back image change flag is not on, but off (step S6212: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (step S6212: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. The first address (storage source first address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 634 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state among the back image determination flags is stored, and , the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 636) is specified (step S6214), and the image data of the sprite indicated by the specified various information is set as the transfer target image, and the process proceeds to step S6215.

When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is for back A, all the corresponding image data are resident in the back image area 635c of the resident video RAM 635, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 636 Data does not exist. Therefore, in the process of step S6214, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, the normal image transfer process ends.

<Steps S6215 to S6217>
In the process of step S6215, it is determined whether or not the image to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 636 or not. The determination in the process of step S6215 is performed by referring to the stored image determination flag 633j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image determination flag 633j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 636. If it is determined that the image data is stored and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 636. FIG.

As a result of the processing in step S6215, if the image to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 636 (step S6215: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636. Therefore, the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent image data from being wastefully transferred from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 6 and the traffic on the bus line 640. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 636 as a result of the processing in step S6215 (step S6215: Yes), a transfer instruction for the image to be transferred is set (step S6216). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 637 in the drawing process, and the image controller 637 uses the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Also, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 634 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 636), and the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The head address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 636a of the normal video RAM 636 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 637 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads image data designated in the transfer processing from the character ROM 634, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 636). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 631 .

After the process of step S6216, the stored image determination flag 633j is updated (step S6217), and this normal transfer setting process ends. Updating the stored image determination flag 633j involves, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred to "on" and storing the image in the same sub-area of the image storage area 636a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites that are to be stored to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process for the continuous announcement command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and the continuous announcement image corresponding to the continuous announcement command is executed. When the additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 633e, the image data of the continuous preview images used in the additional data table can be transferred from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 635 . Image data not stored in the image area 635c can be transferred from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636 without delay.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 633d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 5 based on a command or the like from the main control device 4. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 633f. Then, the MPU 631 executes normal image transfer setting processing to perform transfer to the image controller 637 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 633g of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 633f. Since the transfer instruction for the target image is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 633d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636 at a desired timing. .

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 636a so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 636a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 634 to the image storage area 636a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, whereby the predetermined address is displayed according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 635 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 636a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 634 is composed of the NAND flash memory 634a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 634 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 636, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the pattern display section 341. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 635 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 634 to the normal video RAM 636 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

[Drawing process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 391, the drawing process (step S4306) of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 631 of the display control device 6 will be described. FIG. 391 is a flowchart showing drawing processing.

<Step S6301>
As shown in FIG. 390, in the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in task processing of V interrupt processing (step S4304 in FIG. 378) and the parameters (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, filter designation information), and from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (step S4305 in FIG. 378) of the V interrupt process, A drawing list is generated as update information shown in FIG. 339 (step S3301). That is, in the processing of step S6301, image data of sprites are stored for each sprite based on the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in task processing of V interrupt processing (step S4304 in FIG. 378). The type and address of the stored RAM are specified, and the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing of the V interrupt processing (step S4304 in FIG. 378) are set for the specified storage RAM type and address. Associate. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. A drawing list is generated by describing, as drawing information (detailed information), the type and address of a storage RAM in which sprite image data is stored, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (step S4305 in FIG. 378) of the V-interrupt process, the character ROM 634 in which the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. The head address (storage source head address), the end address (storage source end address), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 636) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 635 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the subarea of the image storage area 636a of the normal video RAM 636 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 631 , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

<Step S6302>
When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 633k are transmitted to the image controller (step S6302). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 633k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 633k includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 636b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 636c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 631, the image controller 637 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 634 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 636), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 634 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 637a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 637a are sequentially transferred to the area of the normal video RAM 636 indicated by the top address of the transfer destination when the normal video RAM 636 is not in use. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 636 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 631 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 637 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information to the pattern display unit 341 together with the drive signal. do. As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the pattern display section 341 . In addition, while developing an image drawn in one frame buffer, an image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the pattern display unit 341, and drawing processing and display processing can be performed simultaneously in parallel. can.

<Step S6303>
In the drawing process, after the process of step S6302, the drawing target buffer flag 633k is updated (step S6303). Then, the rendering process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process in FIG. The draw target buffer flag 633k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 636b and the second frame buffer 636c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 631 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 637 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is done each time the drawing process of the load process (see FIG. 378(B)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 636b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 636c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 636c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 636b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 636b can be read out and displayed on the pattern display section 341, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 636c.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 636b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 636c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 636c can be read out and displayed on the pattern display section 341, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 636b. After that, a frame buffer for developing one frame of image and a frame buffer for reading out one frame of image information are transferred to either the first frame buffer 636b or the second frame buffer 636c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

Thus, in this embodiment, the special figure game effect executed in the symbol display unit 341 for one special figure game is based on the result of the special figure jackpot lottery for one special figure game. In accordance with the set variation type (effect pattern), the process of updating the drawing list, which is the update information, is repeated a predetermined number of times. In other words, the special symbol game effect in the symbol display unit 341 is terminated by executing update processing of the drawing list, which is the update information, by the number of times corresponding to the variable display time of the decorative symbol after the special symbol game is started. do. Then, when the update process of the drawing list, which is the update information corresponding to the variable display time of the special figure game, is completed, the special figure game informs that the result of the special figure jackpot lottery is out, When there is a suspension of the special figure game to be executed after the end of the special figure game, the special figure game for the suspension is started and the update process of the drawing list, which is the update information, is again performed for the special figure game. Special figure game production is executed by repeating the number of times. In other words, the special figure game is repeatedly performed until the special figure game that informs that the result of the special figure jackpot lottery is a small hit is performed, and in each special figure game, the special figure game performed by the symbol display unit 341 The effect is executed by repeating update processing of the drawing list, which is update information, a predetermined number of times. As a result, it is possible to smoothly and reliably execute the special figure game effect in the symbol display section 341 for one special figure game.

On the other hand, when the special figure game notifies that the result of the special figure jackpot lottery is a small win, when the update process of the drawing list, which is the update information corresponding to the variable display time of the special figure game, is completed , A small winning game state, which is a profit game state, is generated by executing a small winning game after the end of the special game effect. In the playing state of the special game for generating the small win game, the decoration pattern is fixedly displayed in doubles as a notification display for notifying that the result of the special big win lottery is a small win. Then, in the playing state of the special game that generates the small winning game, as described above, as a re-lottery effect (re-lottery display) which is a special effect, a resurrection effect (resurrection display) (see FIG. 343 (B)) or A promotion effect (promotion display) (see FIG. 343(C)) may be executed.

The resurrection effect (resurrection display), which is a special effect in the special game in the in-game state, is a notification display in a combination corresponding to the removal of the decorative pattern as a predetermined pattern when the result of the jackpot lottery is a small win. This is an effect (display) in which, after being stopped and displayed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed by notification display in a combination corresponding to the small win. Specifically, the resurrection effect (elevation display) in the special game that is in the in-game state is the effect (display ) (see FIG. 343(B)).

On the other hand, in the promotion effect (promotion display), which is a special effect in the special game that is in the playing state, for example, a small win that generates a 4R short-time big win game by entering the game ball into the V winning opening 833 in the small win game. After the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed by the notification display to notify that it is, it is notified that it is a small win that generates a 16R time-saving big winning game by entering the game ball into the V winning prize opening 833 in the small winning game. This is an effect in which the decoration pattern is confirmed and displayed by the notification display. Specifically, the promotion effect (promotion display) in the special game which is in the in-game state is, after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a double number other than "777" as the notification display, the Zorro "777" as the notification display is displayed. This is an effect (display) in which the eyes are confirmed and displayed (see FIG. 343(C)).

Promotion production (promotion display) and resurrection production (resurrection display) in the special game that is in such a playing state, as described above, for one special game that is in the game state that notifies the jackpot It is an effect that is incorporated in the set specific variation type (effect pattern) (see FIG. 343(A)). In other words, the promotion effect (promotion display) and revival effect (resurrection display) are the variation types (production patterns) that are set according to the variation display time of the decorative pattern and the results of the special jackpot lottery, and the special jackpot lottery. If a specific variation type (production pattern) is set in which promotion production (promotion display) or revival production (resurrection display) is executed when the result is a small hit, part of the special game production (decoration It is executed as part of the variable display of symbols). Therefore, the promotion effect (promotion display) and the resurrection effect (resurrection display) are based on the specific variation type (production pattern) set for the special game, and the update process of the drawing list, which is update information. It is executed by repeating only the number of times defined according to the variation type (production pattern). In other words, when executing a promotion effect (promotion display) or a resurrection effect (resurrection display) in one special game that is in a state in which a big win is announced, the last drawing list update process is executed as update information. In the update process up to a predetermined period before the updated end state update process, the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed as a notification display before the promotion or before the revival, and the drawing list as the update information is displayed to the end by the update process using the subsequent period. By updating, it is possible to confirm and display the decoration pattern as the notification display. As a result, it is possible to smoothly and reliably execute promotion performance (promotion display) and resurrection performance (resurrection display) of decorative symbols in the symbol display part 341 for one special symbol game, which is a state in which a big win is announced. be possible.

In addition, as described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 1 type 2 type mixing machine, but when configuring the gaming machine 10 as a loop variable machine, ST machine, V-ST machine Also, in a special game that is a game state in which a big hit is announced, a re-lottery effect (re-lottery display), which is a special effect such as a promotion effect (promotion display) or a resurrection effect (resurrection display), is executed. In the special game that is in-game state to be notified, for example, notification of promotion from normal jackpot to probability variable jackpot, promotion that increases the number of round games in the jackpot game, and execution of resurrection from out to jackpot It is conceivable. However, in the promotion effect and resurrection effect in this case, in the update process until a predetermined period of time before the update end state in which the last update process of the drawing list is executed as update information, the decoration pattern is displayed as a notification display before promotion or before resurrection. The drawing list, which is update information, is updated to the end by update processing using the subsequent period after it is stopped and displayed, so that the decorative pattern can be displayed as notification display.

Also, in the present embodiment, the break-even point is set based on, for example, factory-shipped design values, but instead of this, the break-even point may be set based on other criteria. For example, it is conceivable to perform a trial-hitting test on the gaming machine 10 before shipment from the factory and set the break-even point based on the results of this trial-hitting test.

Also, it is conceivable that the break-even point is not fixed but can be changed based on a program installed in the gaming machine 10 . For example, the aforementioned game information (performance information) stored in the game information storage area 412d, "base information", "continuous role information", "accessory ratio information", "unit jackpot lottery number of times", etc. It is also conceivable to change the break-even point based on one or more pieces of game information (performance information). As a result, the break-even point can be changed according to variations in the game nails driven into the game board 31 for each game machine 10 at the time of shipment and aged deterioration of the game nails. Correspondingly, it becomes possible to set the break-even point.

In addition, the change timing of the break-even point is when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, when the RAM is cleared, every execution of a certain number of special game games (for example, every 10,000 times), and every execution of a certain number of jackpot games ( For example, every 1000 times).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the opening effect executed in the symbol display unit 341 when a small winning game occurs is changed from the profit display opening effect, which is the first notification mode, to the second notification mode before and after the break-even point. Although it is switched to a certain loss display opening performance, in the profit display opening performance and the loss display opening performance, in addition to or instead of the symbol display part 341, the loss and gain of generating the big winning game based on the small winning game are notified. may be executed by other means of presentation, such as the speaker 26, the electric decoration part 27, the movable accessory member 39 (see FIG. 4), and the like. Specifically, in the opening effect of the small winning game, for example, from the speaker 26, as a profit notification (first notification mode), for example, while executing a sound output such as "You should hit right", a loss notification (second It is conceivable to execute voice output such as "Don't hit to the right" as a notification mode). In addition, in the opening effect of the small winning game, for example, the electric decoration part 27 is made to emit blue light etc. to execute the profit notification (first notification mode), while the electric decoration part 27 is made to emit red light etc. It is conceivable to execute notification (second notification mode). Furthermore, in the opening performance of the small winning game, two types of movable modes of the movable accessory member 39 are set, and one of these movable modes is used as a gain notification (first notification mode), while the other is used as a loss notification. (Second notification mode) may be considered. As the two movable modes of notification of the profit and loss caused by the occurrence of a jackpot game by the movable accessory member 39, for example, when the movable accessory member 39 is moved so as to overlap the display surface of the pattern display section 341, vertical movement, etc. It is conceivable to set two types of moving distance (stroke, amplitude) and moving speed of the reciprocating motion of .

Further, in the present embodiment, a predetermined timing (for example, the number of ceiling activations remaining 20 times before the break-even point is 140 times) and a specific timing (for example, the ceiling activation number of times remaining 20 times after the break-even point is 140 times) 100 times), when a small winning game occurs in an intermediate period including the break-even point (for example, the number of ceiling activations remaining is 100 to 140 times), the pattern is displayed as the opening effect of the small winning game. Although the border notification of the third notification mode is performed in the part 341, such border notification may be performed in the special figure game performed in the intermediate period. For example, as shown in FIG. 361, in the special figure game executed in the intermediate period, the telop display of the character image in the area that does not hinder the visual recognition of the special figure game production including the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display section 341 etc. can be considered.

Here, when a small winning game occurs in an intermediate period including a break-even point between a predetermined timing and a specific timing, border notification in a third notification mode is performed at the opening of the small winning game, border notification. The period during which is made is limited to the opening when a small winning game occurs. Therefore, from the player's point of view, it takes a short time to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game, that is, whether or not a game ball enters the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 by hitting to the right. Therefore, while the player is considering whether or not to hit to the right, the period in which the game ball can enter the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 passes, and the jackpot game is played. Things can happen that cannot happen. In particular, for a player who is poor in game knowledge of the gaming machine 10, even if the border notification of the third notification mode is performed at the opening of the small winning game, it may not be possible to understand the meaning, or it may take time to understand the meaning. Therefore, it is likely that the big winning game cannot be generated based on the small winning game in which the border notification of the third notification mode is performed at the opening. Conversely, when the small winning game is started, the player unconditionally hits to the right, which may cause a big winning game against the player's will.

On the other hand, the probability that a small winning game occurs is low (in this embodiment, about 1/318.1 (see FIG. 341 (A))), and the number of executions of the special figure game that can be executed during the intermediate period is also relatively Many times (40 times in this embodiment (see FIG. 360(A))). Therefore, border notification can be performed for a long time by performing border notification in a special figure game executed in an intermediate period including a break-even point between a predetermined timing and a specific timing. As a result, when the border notification is made in the special game, it is possible to determine in advance whether to generate the big winning game when the small winning game occurs. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a jackpot game against the will of the player, or, conversely, to prevent the occurrence of a jackpot game against the will of the player. It is possible for the player to enjoy the benefits of doing so.

In addition, although there is no particular limitation on the execution timing of the border notification in the special game, it is preferable to set the timing at which the high-speed fluctuation performance in which the decoration pattern is displayed fluctuating at high speed is executed. In this way, by setting the execution timing of the border notification in the special game to the timing at which the high-speed fluctuation production is executed, even if the reach production is executed later, the reach production is performed by the border notification. It is possible to prevent obstruction of visual recognition and hearing of voice output.

In addition, the border notification (third notification mode) in the special figure game executed in the intermediate period including the break-even point between the predetermined timing and the specific timing is in addition to or instead of the symbol display unit 341. , such as the speaker 26, the electric decoration part 27, the movable accessory member 39 (see FIG. 4), etc., may be used. Specifically, in the special game executed in the intermediate period, for example, as a border notification (third notification mode) from the speaker 26, such as "loss, profit, loss, profit, loss, profit..." may perform ambiguous audio output. Also, in the special game executed in the intermediate period, blinking the illumination part 27 in a specific manner, such as high-speed blinking, low-speed blinking, and blinking at irregular intervals. It is conceivable to execute a performance that gives a sense of incongruity. Furthermore, in the special figure game executed in the intermediate period, the movable accessory member 39 may overlap the display surface of the pattern display unit 341 and be moved in a specific manner, for example, the movable accessory member 39 may be caused to vibrate at high speed. , low-speed micro-vibrations, micro-vibrations at irregular intervals, and the like, which make the player feel uncomfortable.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the result of the special figure jackpot lottery, which is the result of the predetermined determination, is a small hit, which is the result of the specific determination, the value of the ceiling activation remaining counter, which is the specific information, is updated in a predetermined manner. Until the break-even point, which is a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the state 0, is reached, the fact that it is a small hit, which is a specific determination result, is notified by the profit display opening effect, which is the first notification mode, After reaching the break-even point, which is the specific timing, the fact that the game is a small win, which is the result of the specific determination, is switched to be notified by the loss display opening effect, which is the second notification mode. That is, in the present embodiment, in a notification mode corresponding to the expected value of profit that the player can obtain at the stage of occurrence of the small winning game, the profit and loss of the expected value of profit is notified at the opening of the small winning game. . Therefore, when a small winning game occurs, the player pays attention to the opening performance of the small winning game, so that it is possible to grasp the profit and loss that the player can obtain at the stage The player can determine whether or not to generate the big winning game based on the notification mode in the opening effect of the small winning game. As a result, it is better to select not to generate the jackpot game when the expected value of the profit that can be obtained is higher if the jackpot game is not generated based on the small winning game, and to generate the jackpot game based on the small winning game. It is possible to select to generate a jackpot game when the expected value of profit that can be obtained is high. As a result, the player can avoid the disadvantage of not shifting to the b time-saving gaming state due to the occurrence of the jackpot game at the stage when the transition to the b time-saving gaming state, which is the ceiling time-saving gaming state, is approaching. is improved.

In particular, in this embodiment, after reaching the break-even point, which is a specific timing advantageous to the player to shift to the b time-saving gaming state, which is the ceiling time-saving gaming state, the notification mode of the opening effect of the small winning game is switched. Therefore, even if a small winning game occurs in a period in which it is difficult to judge profit and loss in the vicinity of the breakeven point, a decision that is advantageous to itself is more reliably made based on the notification mode of the opening performance of the small winning game. becomes possible.

In this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the above-described first to fourteenth embodiments are possible within the applicable range.

Moreover, in each embodiment, it is also possible to apply the items described in other embodiments within the applicable range.

[Summary of Invention]
An outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be added below. In addition, in order to understand the corresponding relationship between each additional note and each embodiment, reference numerals and the like may be attached for convenience of explanation, but the invention related to the additional note is limited to the specific configuration attached with the reference numeral. not a thing Moreover, it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function described below.

[Appendix A1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
Predetermined prize winning openings (314, 315) that establish the determination condition with the entry of a game ball as a trigger;
Display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Reservation means ( 41) and
The transition determination means (41) is a first determination state (normal game state) in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state is a first probability, or the probability of being determined to be shifted to the special game state. performs the transition determination in the second determination state (variable probability gaming state), which is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between the first winning opening (314) and the allowable state in which entry of game balls is permitted, and the restricted state in which entry of game balls is restricted. including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314),
The game machine is
As the information game (first special game or second special game), the first information game (first special game) executed with the entry of the game ball to the first winning port (314) and a second information game (second special figure game) that is executed when a game ball enters the second winning hole (315);
The information game execution means is
A specific effect image (for example, a chance eye effect image) is displayed on the display means (341) continuously after the first information game (first special game) of a predetermined number of times in the first determination state (normal game state). means to
A predetermined number of the predetermined second information game in the first determination state (normal game state) (second special game executed with the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 at the time of short opening) means (51) for displaying the specific effect image on the display means (341) in
The specific first information game executed after the end of the predetermined second information game (second special game) 1 special game), causing the display means (341) to continuously display the specific effect image,
When a specific condition is satisfied in the specific first information game (first special game), the specific effect image (for example, the image of chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) is changed to the specific effect A gaming machine characterized by being able to switch to a predetermined effect image (for example, an image of the same color pattern effect) different from an image.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A1, the game to the second winning hole is executed after the end of the predetermined second information game executed with the entry of the game ball to the second winning hole in the first determination state. A specific effect image is continuously displayed in a specific first information game executed with the entry of a ball as a trigger, and when a specific condition is established in the specific first information game, the specific effect image changes to a predetermined effect image. can switch. In this way, the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole is executed after the predetermined second information game executed with the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole in the first determination state as a trigger. A specific effect image is continuously displayed in a specific first information game that is executed as a trigger, and when a specific condition is satisfied in the specific first information game, the specific effect image can be switched to a predetermined effect image. , it is possible to select whether to continue to display a specific effect image or to switch to a predetermined effect image and display it, based on whether or not a specific condition is established. For example, if the continuous execution of the specific effect image does not cause any inconvenience, the specific effect image is continuously executed, and if the continuous execution of the specific effect image causes any inconvenience, the predetermined effect image is displayed. can be switched and executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent inconvenience caused by the continuous execution of the specific effect image.

Further, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A1, the specific effect image is continuously displayed or is switched to the predetermined effect image based on whether or not the specific condition is established in the specific first information game in the first determination state. When a predetermined effect image is displayed after the end of the specific effect image, the player may feel uncomfortable due to the resumption of the specific effect image. In addition, since the possibility that the specific effect image is not restarted makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the player feels uncomfortable with the effect during the progress of the game, the interest in the game caused by the player feeling uncomfortable with the effect during the progress of the game is reduced. decline is prevented.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A1, when the specific condition is not satisfied in the specific first information game in the first determination state, the specific effect image is continuously displayed, and is displayed in the first information game. It is possible to effectively utilize the specific effect image that has been displayed even in the second information game.

[Appendix A2]
a privilege granting means (41) for granting a privilege to a player when the specific effect image is continuously displayed in the information game for a specified number of times or more;
The specific condition includes that there is no privilege given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed continuously in the information game for the specific number of times or more. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A1.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A2, the specific condition includes that there is no benefit given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed continuously in the information game a specific number of times or more. In this way, the specific condition includes that there is no privilege to be given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed continuously in the information game a specific number of times or more. is not established, the specific effect image is continuously displayed in the information game for a specific number of times or more in spite of the fact that there is no privilege given to the player when the specific effect image is continuously displayed. is avoided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a privilege is not given to the player despite the fact that the privilege is clearly given by the display in the information game.

[Appendix A3]
The allowable state of the second winning port (315) includes a first allowable state (short open) in which the time to be in the allowable state is a first time, and a time to be in the allowable state is longer than the first time. a long second allowable state (long open),
The specific condition is the game ball to the second winning port (315) set to the first allowable state (short open) in the first information game (first special game) in which the specific effect image is displayed The gaming machine according to appendix A2, characterized in that it includes a ball entry of .

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A3, it is the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole that is in the first allowable state in the first information game in which the specific effect image is displayed. In this way, by entering the game ball into the second winning hole set in the first permitted state in the first information game in which the specific effect image is displayed, the second winning hole is made in the first permitted state. When the specific performance image is continuously displayed by , it is avoided that the specific performance image is continuously displayed in the information game more than a predetermined number of times even though there is no privilege given to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a privilege is not given to the player despite the fact that the privilege is clearly given by the display in the information game.

[Appendix A4]
The specific condition is that in the first information game (first special game) in which the specific effect image is displayed on the display means (341), 0 is set to the second winning opening (315) set in the allowable state. The gaming machine according to appendix A2, characterized by including the fact that game balls exceeding a specific number or less are entered.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A4, game balls of a specific number exceeding 0 or less than 0 are entered into the second winning opening set to the allowable state in the first information game in which the specific effect image is displayed on the display means. . In this way, in the first information game in which the specific effect image is displayed on the display means, by including the entry of a specific number of game balls exceeding 0 into the second winning hole which is allowed, the allowable When the number of times of the second information game executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole in the state is equal to or less than a specific number exceeding 0, and the specific effect image is continuously displayed, To prevent a specific performance image from being continuously displayed in a predetermined number of information games or more even though there is no privilege given to a player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a privilege is not given to the player despite the fact that the privilege is clearly given by the display in the information game.

[Appendix A5]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A2 to A4, wherein the privilege is execution of the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A5, the privilege is execution of a special game. In this way, since the privilege is the execution of the special game, a situation may occur in which the special game is not executed despite the fact that the special game will be executed by the display in the information game. prevented.

[Appendix A6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is reported by stopping and displaying the symbols that are variably displayed on the display means (341),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A5, wherein the specific effect image is an image of a combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A6, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the display means in the information game. In this way, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the display means in the information game, so that the player can easily grasp that the specific effect image has been displayed. As a result, the player can easily understand that the specific effect images are displayed continuously, so it is expected that the specific effect images will be displayed continuously when the specific effect images are displayed. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game while playing, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix A7]
The specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are characterized in that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) indicates the degree of expectation that the transition to the special game state will be made. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A6.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A7, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of transition determination by the transition determination means will cause the transition to the special game state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will cause the transition to the special game state, so that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image It is possible to enjoy the progress of the game while expecting it to be displayed, and when the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are displayed, attention is paid to whether the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game state. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game with the help of the player, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix A8]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A7, characterized in that the specific effect image can be switched to the predetermined effect image in the predetermined second information game (second special game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A8, when the specific condition is established in the specific first information game in the first determination state, the specific effect image can be switched to the predetermined effect image in the predetermined second information game. Thus, when the specific condition is established in the specific first information game, the specific effect image can be switched to the predetermined effect image in the predetermined second information game, so that the specific condition in the specific first information game By continuing to execute the specific performance image by establishment, the occurrence of inconvenience in the predetermined second information game is avoided, and when the inconvenience occurs in the first information game restarted after the termination of the predetermined second information game. Even so, the occurrence of inconvenience is avoided in advance before the first information game is executed.

[Appendix A9]
The predetermined second information game (second special game) is the second information game (second The game machine according to appendix A8, characterized in that it is a special game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A9, the predetermined second information game is the second information game to be executed next to the specific first information game in which the specific condition is established. In this way, the predetermined second information game is the second information game that is executed next to the specific first information game that satisfies the specific condition, so that it is inconvenient to continue to execute the specific effect image. The occurrence of the inconvenience is avoided immediately after it is grasped that the occurrence of

[Appendix A10]
a privilege granting means (41) for granting a privilege to a player when the specific effect image is continuously displayed in the information game for a specified number of times or more;
The specific condition includes that there is no privilege to be given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed continuously in the information game for the specific number of times or more,
The predetermined second information game (second special game) is the second information game (second special game) of the specific number of times in which the specific effect image is continuously executed. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A9.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A10, when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed continuously in the information game for a specific number of times or more and there is no privilege given to the player, it is executed at the specific number of times. When the information game to be played is the second information game, the specific effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image in the second information game. In this way, when there is no privilege given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed continuously in the information game for a specific number of times or more, the information game is executed for the specific number of times. is the second information game, by switching from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image in the second information game, the specific effect images can be displayed continuously to the maximum. As a result, since the player's expectation due to the continuous display of the specific effect images can be maintained to the maximum, the player's interest in the game is reduced by switching the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image. is reduced, a decrease in interest in the game is prevented.

[Appendix A11]
Supplementary notes A1 to A7 characterized in that the specific effect image can be switched to the predetermined effect image in the predetermined first information game (first special game) executed in the specific first information game The gaming machine according to any one of

In the gaming machine according to appendix A11, when the specific condition is established in the specific first information game in the first determination state, the specific effect image can be switched to the predetermined effect image in the predetermined first information game. Thus, when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific first information game in the first determination state, the specific effect image can be switched to the predetermined effect image in the predetermined first information game, so that the specific condition is satisfied By continuously executing the performance image, the occurrence of inconvenience in the first information game is avoided.

Further, by switching from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image in the first information game which is restarted after the end of the predetermined second information game, when the specific effect image is continuously executed and inconvenience occurs, the specific effect image can be To ensure a large number of information games in which performance images are continuously displayed. In this way, by maximizing the number of information games in which the specific effect images are continuously displayed, it is possible that the specific effect image is continuously executed due to the establishment of the specific condition, which may cause inconvenience. However, the player can enjoy the specific effect image to the maximum.

[Appendix A12]
a privilege granting means (41) for granting a privilege to a player when the specific effect image is continuously displayed in the information game for a specified number of times or more;
The specific condition includes that there is no privilege to be given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed continuously in the information game for the specific number of times or more,
The specific first information game (first special game) is the first information game (first special game) of the specific number of times in which the specific effect image is continuously executed. The gaming machine according to appendix A11.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A12, when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed continuously in the information game for a specific number of times or more, and there is no privilege to be given to the player, it is executed at the specific number of times. When the information game to be played is the first information game, the specific effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image in the first information game. In this way, when there is no privilege given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed continuously in the information game for a specific number of times or more, the information game is executed for the specific number of times. is the first information game, by switching from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image in the first information game, the specific effect images can be displayed continuously to the maximum. As a result, since the player's expectation due to the continuous display of the specific effect images can be maintained to the maximum, the player's interest in the game is reduced by switching the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image. is reduced, a decrease in interest in the game is prevented.

[Appendix A13]
The specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will cause the transition to the special game state,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A12, wherein the degree of expectation is set to be the same or substantially the same for the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A13, the degree of expectation for shifting to the special game state is set to be the same or substantially the same for the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image. In this way, the predetermined image displayed on the display means is specified by setting the degree of expectation for transitioning to the special game state to be the same or substantially the same for the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image. Even when the effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image, by switching the predetermined image, the expectation of the player for the display of the predetermined image can be maintained without lowering, so that the predetermined image is not caused by the switching. Therefore, the player's interest in the game is prevented from being lowered, and the interest in the game is prevented from being lowered.

[Appendix A14]
The gaming machine according to appendix A13, wherein the difference in the degree of expectation between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image is set to -5% to +5%.

[Appendix A15]
The gaming machine according to appendix A14, wherein the difference in the degree of expectation between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image is set to -2.5% to +2.5%.

In the gaming machines according to notes A14 and A15, the difference in the degree of expectation between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image is set to -5% to +5%, preferably -2.5% to +2.5%. Thus, the difference in the degree of expectation between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image is set to -5% to +5%, preferably -2.5% to +2.5%, so that the predetermined image is displayed. Since the player's expectation of the game can be more properly maintained, the player's interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing due to the switching of the predetermined image, and the interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

[Appendix A16]
The probability that the specific effect image is displayed on the display means (341) in the first information game (first special game) in the first determination state (normal game state) is determined by displaying the predetermined effect image. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A13 to A15, wherein the probability is set higher than the probability.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A16, the probability that the specific effect image is displayed on the display means in the first information game in the first determination state is set higher than the probability that the predetermined effect image is displayed. Thus, the probability that the specific effect image is displayed on the display means in the first information game in the first determination state is set higher than the probability that the predetermined effect image is displayed, so that the game is continuously executed. Thus, the occurrence of inconvenience is appropriately avoided when specific effect images, which have a high probability of causing inconvenience, are continuously displayed.

[Appendix A17]
The specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will cause the transition to the special game state,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A12, wherein the predetermined effect image is set to have a higher degree of expectation than the specific effect image.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A17, the degree of expectation for shifting to the special game state is set higher for the predetermined effect image after switching than for the specific effect image before switching. In this way, the degree of expectation for transitioning to the special game state is set higher for the predetermined effect image after switching than for the specific effect image before switching, so that the predetermined image is the specific effect image. When switching from to a predetermined effect image, the degree of expectation suggested to the player is improved by switching to the predetermined effect image. As a result, when the specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that the specific effect image will be switched to the predetermined effect image. , you can enjoy the progress of the information game while having great expectations that the result of the transition determination for the information game in which the predetermined effect image is displayed will cause the transition to the special game state, so from the specific effect image Interest in the game is improved by switching the predetermined image to the predetermined effect image.

[Appendix A18]
The degree of expectation when the predetermined effect image is displayed on the display means (341) in the information game, and the degree of expectation when the specific effect image is displayed on the display means (341) in the information game. The gaming machine according to appendix A17, wherein the difference between is set to 10% or more.

[Appendix A19]
The degree of expectation when the predetermined effect image is displayed on the display means (341) in the information game, and the degree of expectation when the specific effect image is displayed on the display means (341) in the information game. The gaming machine according to appendix A18, wherein the difference between is set to 25% or more.

In the gaming machines according to notes A18 and A19, the difference in the degree of expectation between the predetermined effect image and the specific effect image is set to 10% or more, preferably 25% or more. By setting the difference in the degree of expectation between the predetermined effect image and the specific effect image to be 10% or more, preferably 25% or more in this way, when the specific effect image is displayed, the specific effect image can be changed from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image. The user can enjoy the progress of the game while anticipating the switching to the performance image, and when the switching to the predetermined performance image is performed, the transition determination result for the information game in which the predetermined performance image is displayed is the special game state. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the information game with high expectation by shifting to , interest in the game is further improved by switching the predetermined image from the specific performance image to the predetermined performance image.

[Appendix A20]
The probability that the specific effect image is displayed on the display means (341) in the first information game (first special game) in the first determination state (normal game state) is determined by displaying the predetermined effect image. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A17 to A19, wherein the probability is set higher than the probability.

In the gaming machine pertaining to Appendix A20, the probability that the specific effect image is displayed on the display means in the first information game in the first determination state is set higher than the probability that the predetermined effect image is displayed. Thus, the probability that the specific effect image is displayed on the display means in the first information game in the first determination state is set higher than the probability that the predetermined effect image is displayed, so that the specific effect image is displayed. Since the frequency of switching increases, the chances for the player to expect that the specific effect image will be switched to the predetermined effect image increase, so that the interest in the game is further improved and the predetermined effect image after switching is selected. By setting the probability to be low, the frequency of displaying the predetermined effect image is reduced, and thus the player's pleasure when the predetermined effect image is displayed is further enhanced, thereby further enhancing the interest of the game. .

[Appendix A21]
When the specific effect image (for example, the chance eye effect image) is switched to the predetermined effect image (for example, the same color pattern effect image), it is executed between the information game before switching and the information game after switching. Any one of appendices A1 to A20, characterized in that a specific information image different from the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image, which indicates or suggests specific information, is displayed on the display means (341) in the information game. The gaming machine described in Crab.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A21, in the information game executed between the information game before switching the predetermined image and the information game after switching the predetermined image, a specific information image indicating or suggesting specific information is displayed. be done. Thus, in the information game executed between the information game before switching the predetermined image and the information game after switching the predetermined image, by displaying the specific information image indicating or suggesting the specific information In a plurality of information games, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are not displayed continuously, but the continuity between the display of the specific effect image and the display of the predetermined effect image is interrupted. As a result, the game gives the illusion that the display of the predetermined effect image is executed independently from the display of the specific effect image after the display of the specific effect image is finished, instead of switching from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image. Therefore, it can be disguised as if the switching from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image was not performed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience caused by the continuous execution of the specific effect image without being noticed by the player.

By the way, when switching from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image is performed in order to avoid the inconvenience caused by the continuous execution of the specific effect image, the information game in which the predetermined effect image after switching is executed. The result of the transition determination for is not to be the transition to the special game state. Therefore, when the specific effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image, the player realizes that the transition determination result for the information game in which the predetermined effect image after switching is displayed does not cause the transition to the special game state. It is feared that Therefore, by camouflaging as if the switching from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image was not performed, the result of the transition determination for the information game in which the predetermined effect image after switching is displayed does not cause the transition to the special game state. It is possible to prevent the player from realizing that there is none.

[Appendix B1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
Predetermined prize winning openings (314, 315) that establish the determination condition with the entry of a game ball as a trigger;
Display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Reservation means ( 41) and
The transition determination means (41) is a first determination state (normal game state) in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state is a first probability, or the probability of being determined to be shifted to the special game state. performs the transition determination in the second determination state (variable probability gaming state), which is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between the first winning opening (314) and the allowable state in which entry of game balls is permitted, and the restricted state in which entry of game balls is restricted. including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314),
The game machine is
As the information game (first special game or second special game), the first information game (first special game) executed with the entry of the game ball to the first winning port (314) and a second information game (second special figure game) that is executed when a game ball enters the second winning hole (315);
The information game execution means is
A specific effect image (for example, a chance eye effect image) is displayed on the display means (341) continuously after the first information game (first special game) of a predetermined number of times in the first determination state (normal game state). means to
A predetermined number of the predetermined second information game in the first determination state (normal game state) (second special game executed with the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 at the time of short opening) means (51) for displaying the specific effect image on the display means (341) in
The specific first information game executed after the end of the predetermined second information game (second special game) 1 special game), causing the display means (341) to continuously display the specific effect image,
When a specific condition is satisfied in the specific first information game (first special game), the specific effect image (for example, the image of chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) is changed to the specific effect It can be switched to a predetermined effect image different from the image (for example, an image with the same color pattern effect),
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the predetermined second information game (second special game), the specific effect image can be switched to the predetermined effect image.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B1, when a specific condition is established in a specific first information game in the first determination state, a specific effect image can be switched to a predetermined effect image in a predetermined second information game. Thus, when the specific condition is established in the specific first information game, the specific effect image can be switched to the predetermined effect image in the predetermined second information game, so that the specific condition in the specific first information game By continuing to execute the specific performance image by establishment, the occurrence of inconvenience in the predetermined second information game is avoided, and when the inconvenience occurs in the first information game restarted after the termination of the predetermined second information game. Even so, the occurrence of inconvenience is avoided in advance before the first information game is executed.

[Appendix B2]
The predetermined second information game (second special game) is the second information game (second The game machine according to appendix B1, characterized in that it is a special game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix B2, the predetermined second information game is the second information game to be executed next to the specific first information game in which the specific condition is established. In this way, the predetermined second information game is the second information game that is executed next to the specific first information game that satisfies the specific condition, so that it is inconvenient to continue to execute the specific effect image. The occurrence of the inconvenience is avoided immediately after it is grasped that the occurrence of

[Appendix B3]
a privilege granting means (41) for granting a privilege to a player when the specific effect image is continuously displayed in the information game for a specified number of times or more;
The specific condition includes that there is no privilege to be given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed continuously in the information game for the specific number of times or more,
The predetermined second information game (second special game) is the second information game (second special game) of the specific number of times in which the specific effect image is continuously executed. The gaming machine according to Appendix B1.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B3, when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed continuously in the information game for a specific number of times or more and there is no privilege given to the player, it is executed at the specific number of times When the information game to be played is the second information game, the specific effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image in the second information game. In this way, when there is no privilege given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed continuously in the information game for a specific number of times or more, the information game is executed for the specific number of times. is the second information game, by switching from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image in the second information game, the specific effect images can be displayed continuously to the maximum. As a result, since the player's expectation due to the continuous display of the specific effect images can be maintained to the maximum, the player's interest in the game is reduced by switching the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image. is reduced, a decrease in interest in the game is prevented.

[Appendix B4]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is reported by stopping and displaying the symbols that are variably displayed on the display means (341),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B3, wherein the specific effect image is an image of a combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix B4, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means in the information game. In this way, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the display means in the information game, so that the player can easily grasp that the specific effect image has been displayed. As a result, the player can easily understand that the specific effect images are displayed continuously, so it is expected that the specific effect images will be displayed continuously when the specific effect images are displayed. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game while playing, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix B5]
The specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are characterized in that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) indicates the degree of expectation that the transition to the special game state will be made. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B4.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B5, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of transition determination by the transition determination means will cause the transition to the special game state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will cause the transition to the special game state, so that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image The progress of the game can be enjoyed in anticipation of being displayed, and when the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are displayed, attention is paid to whether the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game with the help of the player, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix C1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
Predetermined prize winning openings (314, 315) that establish the determination condition with the entry of a game ball as a trigger;
Display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Reservation means ( 41) and
The transition determination means (41) is a first determination state (normal game state) in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state is a first probability, or the probability of being determined to be shifted to the special game state. performs the transition determination in the second determination state (variable probability gaming state), which is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between the first winning opening (314) and the allowable state in which entry of game balls is permitted, and the restricted state in which entry of game balls is restricted. including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314),
The game machine is
As the information game (first special game or second special game), the first information game (first special game) executed with the entry of the game ball to the first winning port (314) and a second information game (second special figure game) that is executed when a game ball enters the second winning hole (315);
The information game execution means is
A specific effect image (for example, a chance eye effect image) is displayed on the display means (341) continuously after the first information game (first special game) of a predetermined number of times in the first determination state (normal game state). means to
A predetermined number of the predetermined second information game in the first determination state (normal game state) (second special game executed with the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 at the time of short opening) means (51) for displaying the specific effect image on the display means (341) in
The specific first information game executed after the end of the predetermined second information game (second special game) 1 special game), causing the display means (341) to continuously display the specific effect image,
When a specific condition is satisfied in the specific first information game (first special game), the specific effect image (for example, the image of chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) is changed to the specific effect It can be switched to a predetermined effect image different from the image (for example, an image with the same color pattern effect),
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect image can be switched to the predetermined effect image in the predetermined first information game (first special game) executed in the specific first information game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C1, when a specific condition is established in a specific first information game in the first determination state, a specific effect image can be switched to a predetermined effect image in a predetermined first information game. Thus, when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific first information game in the first determination state, the specific effect image can be switched to the predetermined effect image in the predetermined first information game, so that the specific condition is satisfied By continuously executing the performance image, the occurrence of inconvenience in the first information game is avoided.

Further, by switching from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image in the first information game which is restarted after the end of the predetermined second information game, when the specific effect image is continuously executed and inconvenience occurs, the specific effect image can be To secure a large number of information games in which performance images are continuously displayed. In this way, by maximizing the number of information games in which the specific effect images are continuously displayed, it is possible that the specific effect image is continuously executed due to the establishment of the specific condition, which may cause inconvenience. However, the player can enjoy the specific effect image to the maximum.

[Appendix C2]
a privilege granting means (41) for granting a privilege to a player when the specific effect image is continuously displayed in the information game for a specified number of times or more;
The specific condition includes that there is no privilege to be given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed continuously in the information game for the specific number of times or more,
The specific first information game (first special symbol game) is the first information game (first special symbol game) of the specific number of times in which the specific effect image is continuously executed. The gaming machine according to appendix C1.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C2, if there is no privilege given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed continuously in the information game for a specific number of times or more, it is executed for the specific number of times. When the information game to be played is the first information game, the specific effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image in the first information game. In this way, when there is no privilege given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed continuously in the information game for a specific number of times or more, the information game is executed for the specific number of times. is the first information game, by switching from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image in the first information game, the specific effect images can be displayed continuously to the maximum. As a result, since the player's expectation due to the continuous display of the specific effect images can be maintained to the maximum, the player's interest in the game is reduced by switching the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image. is reduced, a decrease in interest in the game is prevented.

[Appendix C3]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is reported by stopping and displaying the symbols that are variably displayed on the display means (341),
The gaming machine according to appendix C1 or appendix C2, wherein the specific effect image is an image of a combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C3, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the display means in the information game. In this way, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the display means in the information game, so that the player can easily grasp that the specific effect image has been displayed. As a result, the player can easily understand that the specific effect images are displayed continuously, so it is expected that the specific effect images will be displayed continuously when the specific effect images are displayed. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game while playing the game, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix C4]
The specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are characterized in that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) indicates the degree of expectation that the transition to the special game state will be made. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C3.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C4, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of transition determination by the transition determination means will cause the transition to the special game state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will cause the transition to the special game state, so that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image The progress of the game can be enjoyed in anticipation of being displayed, and when the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are displayed, attention is paid to whether the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game with the help of the player, the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix D1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
Predetermined prize winning openings (314, 315) that establish the determination condition with the entry of a game ball as a trigger;
Display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Reservation means ( 41) and
The transition determination means (41) is a first determination state (normal game state) in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state is a first probability, or the probability of being determined to be shifted to the special game state. performs the transition determination in the second determination state (variable probability gaming state), which is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between the first winning opening (314) and the allowable state in which entry of game balls is permitted, and the restricted state in which entry of game balls is restricted. including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314),
The game machine is
As the information game (first special game or second special game), the first information game (first special game) executed with the entry of the game ball to the first winning port (314) and a second information game (second special figure game) that is executed when a game ball enters the second winning hole (315);
The information game execution means is
A specific effect image (for example, a chance eye effect image) is displayed on the display means (341) continuously after the first information game (first special game) of a predetermined number of times in the first determination state (normal game state). means to
A predetermined number of the predetermined second information game in the first determination state (normal game state) (second special game executed with the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 at the time of short opening) means (51) for displaying the specific effect image on the display means (341) in
The specific first information game executed after the end of the predetermined second information game (second special game) 1 special game), causing the display means (341) to continuously display the specific effect image,
When a specific condition is satisfied in the specific first information game (first special game), the specific effect image (for example, the image of chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) is changed to the specific effect It can be switched to a predetermined effect image different from the image (for example, an image with the same color pattern effect),
The specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will cause the transition to the special game state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the degree of expectation is set to be the same or substantially the same for the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix D1, the degree of expectation for transitioning to the special game state is set to be the same or substantially the same for the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image. In this way, the predetermined image displayed on the display means is specified by setting the degree of expectation for transitioning to the special game state to be the same or substantially the same for the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image. Even when the effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image, by switching the predetermined image, the expectation of the player for the display of the predetermined image can be maintained without lowering, so that the predetermined image is not caused by the switching. Therefore, the player's interest in the game is prevented from being lowered, and the interest in the game is prevented from being lowered.

[Appendix D2]
The gaming machine according to appendix D1, wherein the difference in the degree of expectation between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image is set to -5% to +5%.

[Appendix D3]
The gaming machine according to appendix D2, wherein the difference in the degree of expectation between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image is set to -2.5% to +2.5%.

In the gaming machines according to attachments D2 and D3, the difference in expectations between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image is set to -5% to +5%, preferably -2.5% to +2.5%. Thus, by setting the difference in the degree of expectation between the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image to -5% to +5%, preferably -2.5% to +2.5%, the predetermined image can be displayed. Since the player's expectation of the game can be more properly maintained, the player's interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing due to the switching of the predetermined image, and the interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

[Appendix D4]
The probability that the specific effect image is displayed on the display means (341) in the first information game (first special game) in the first determination state (normal game state) is determined by displaying the predetermined effect image. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D3, wherein the probability is set higher than the probability.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D4, the probability that the specific effect image is displayed on the display means in the first information game in the first determination state is set higher than the probability that the predetermined effect image is displayed. Thus, the probability that the specific effect image is displayed on the display means in the first information game in the first determination state is set higher than the probability that the predetermined effect image is displayed, so that the game is continuously executed. Thus, the occurrence of inconvenience is appropriately avoided when the specific effect images, which have a high probability of causing inconvenience, are continuously displayed.

[Appendix D5]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is reported by stopping and displaying the symbols that are variably displayed on the display means (341),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D4, wherein the specific effect image is an image of a combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix D5, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed on the display means in the information game. In this way, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the display means in the information game, so that the player can easily grasp that the specific effect image has been displayed. As a result, the player can easily understand that the specific effect images are displayed continuously, so it is expected that the specific effect images will be displayed continuously when the specific effect images are displayed. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game while playing the game, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix E1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
A predetermined prize winning port (314, 315) that satisfies the determination condition with the entry of a game ball as a trigger;
Display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Reservation means ( 41) and
The transition determination means (41) is a first determination state (normal game state) in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state is a first probability, or the probability of being determined to be shifted to the special game state. performs the transition determination in the second determination state (variable probability gaming state), which is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between the first winning opening (314) and the allowable state in which entry of game balls is permitted, and the restricted state in which entry of game balls is restricted. including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314),
The game machine is
As the information game (first special game or second special game), the first information game (first special game) executed with the entry of the game ball to the first winning port (314) and a second information game (second special figure game) that is executed when a game ball enters the second winning hole (315);
The information game execution means is
A specific effect image (for example, a chance eye effect image) is displayed on the display means (341) continuously after the first information game (first special game) of a predetermined number of times in the first determination state (normal game state). means to
A predetermined number of the predetermined second information game in the first determination state (normal game state) (second special game executed with the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 at the time of short opening) means (51) for displaying the specific effect image on the display means (341) in
The specific first information game executed after the end of the predetermined second information game (second special game) 1 special game), causing the display means (341) to continuously display the specific effect image,
When a specific condition is satisfied in the specific first information game (first special game), the specific effect image (for example, the image of chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) is changed to the specific effect It can be switched to a predetermined effect image different from the image (for example, an image with the same color pattern effect),
The specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will cause the transition to the special game state,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined effect image is set to have a higher degree of expectation than the specific effect image.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix E1, the degree of expectation for shifting to the special game state is set higher for the predetermined effect image after switching than for the specific effect image before switching. In this way, the degree of expectation for transitioning to the special game state is set higher for the predetermined effect image after switching than for the specific effect image before switching, so that the predetermined image is the specific effect image. When switching from to a predetermined effect image, the degree of expectation suggested to the player is improved by switching to the predetermined effect image. As a result, when the specific effect image is displayed, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that the specific effect image will be switched to the predetermined effect image. , you can enjoy the progress of the information game while having great expectations that the result of the transition determination for the information game in which the predetermined effect image is displayed will cause the transition to the special game state, so from the specific effect image Interest in the game is improved by switching the predetermined image to the predetermined effect image.

[Appendix E2]
The degree of expectation when the predetermined effect image is displayed on the display means (341) in the information game, and the degree of expectation when the specific effect image is displayed on the display means (341) in the information game. The gaming machine according to appendix E1, wherein the difference between is set to 10% or more.

[Appendix E3]
The degree of expectation when the predetermined effect image is displayed on the display means (341) in the information game, and the degree of expectation when the specific effect image is displayed on the display means (341) in the information game. The gaming machine according to appendix E2, wherein the difference between is set to 25% or more.

In the gaming machines according to attachments E2 and E3, the difference in expectations between the predetermined effect image and the specific effect image is set to 10% or more, preferably 25% or more. By setting the difference in the degree of expectation between the predetermined effect image and the specific effect image to be 10% or more, preferably 25% or more in this way, when the specific effect image is displayed, the specific effect image can be changed from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image. The user can enjoy the progress of the game while anticipating the switching to the performance image, and when the switching to the predetermined performance image is performed, the transition determination result for the information game in which the predetermined performance image is displayed is the special game state. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the information game with high expectation by shifting to , the amusement of the game is further improved by switching the predetermined image from the specific performance image to the predetermined performance image.

[Appendix E4]
The probability that the specific effect image is displayed on the display means (341) in the first information game (first special game) in the first determination state (normal game state) is determined by displaying the predetermined effect image. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E3, wherein the probability is set higher than the probability.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E4, the probability that the specific effect image is displayed on the display means in the first information game in the first determination state is set higher than the probability that the predetermined effect image is displayed. Thus, the probability that the specific effect image is displayed on the display means in the first information game in the first determination state is set higher than the probability that the predetermined effect image is displayed, so that the specific effect image is displayed. Since the frequency of switching increases, the chances for the player to expect that the specific effect image will be switched to the predetermined effect image increase, so that the interest in the game is further improved and the predetermined effect image after switching is selected. By setting the probability to be low, the frequency of displaying the predetermined effect image is reduced, and thus the player's pleasure when the predetermined effect image is displayed is further enhanced, thereby further enhancing the interest of the game. .

[Appendix E5]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is reported by stopping and displaying the symbols that are variably displayed on the display means (341),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E4, wherein the specific effect image is an image of a combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix E5, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the display means in the information game. In this way, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the display means in the information game, so that the player can easily grasp that the specific effect image has been displayed. As a result, the player can easily understand that the specific effect images are displayed continuously, so it is expected that the specific effect images will be displayed continuously when the specific effect images are displayed. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game while playing the game, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix F1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
Predetermined prize winning openings (314, 315) that establish the determination condition with the entry of a game ball as a trigger;
Display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Reservation means ( 41) and
The transition determination means (41) is a first determination state (normal game state) in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state is a first probability, or the probability of being determined to be shifted to the special game state. performs the transition determination in the second determination state (variable probability gaming state), which is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between the first winning opening (314) and the allowable state in which entry of game balls is permitted, and the restricted state in which entry of game balls is restricted. including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314),
The game machine is
As the information game (first special game or second special game), the first information game (first special game) executed with the entry of the game ball to the first winning port (314) and a second information game (second special figure game) that is executed when a game ball enters the second winning hole (315);
The information game execution means is
A specific effect image (for example, a chance eye effect image) is displayed on the display means (341) continuously after the first information game (first special game) of a predetermined number of times in the first determination state (normal game state). means to
A predetermined number of the predetermined second information game in the first determination state (normal game state) (second special game executed with the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 at the time of short opening) means (51) for displaying the specific effect image on the display means (341) in
The specific first information game executed after the end of the predetermined second information game (second special game) 1 special game), causing the display means (341) to continuously display the specific effect image,
When a specific condition is satisfied in the specific first information game (first special game), the specific effect image (for example, the image of chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) is changed to the specific effect It can be switched to a predetermined effect image different from the image (for example, an image with the same color pattern effect),
When the specific effect image (for example, the chance eye effect image) is switched to the predetermined effect image (for example, the same color pattern effect image), it is executed between the information game before switching and the information game after switching. A game machine characterized by displaying a specific information image different from the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image, which expresses or suggests specific information, on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix F1, in the information game executed between the information game before switching the predetermined image and the information game after switching the predetermined image, a specific information image indicating or suggesting specific information is displayed. be done. Thus, in the information game executed between the information game before switching the predetermined image and the information game after switching the predetermined image, by displaying the specific information image indicating or suggesting the specific information In a plurality of information games, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are not displayed continuously, but the continuity between the display of the specific effect image and the display of the predetermined effect image is interrupted. As a result, the game gives the illusion that the display of the predetermined effect image is executed independently from the display of the specific effect image after the display of the specific effect image is finished, instead of switching from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image. Therefore, it can be disguised as if the switching from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image was not performed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience caused by the continuous execution of the specific effect image without being noticed by the player.

By the way, when switching from a specific effect image to a predetermined effect image is performed in order to avoid inconvenience caused by continuously executing a specific effect image, an information game in which the predetermined effect image after switching is executed. The result of the transition determination for is not to be the transition to the special game state. Therefore, when the specific effect image is switched to the predetermined effect image, the player realizes that the transition determination result for the information game in which the predetermined effect image after switching is displayed does not cause the transition to the special game state. It is feared that Therefore, by camouflaging as if the switching from the specific effect image to the predetermined effect image was not performed, the result of the transition determination for the information game in which the predetermined effect image after switching is displayed does not cause the transition to the special game state. It is possible to prevent the player from realizing that there is none.

[Appendix F2]
a privilege granting means (41) for granting a privilege to a player when the specific effect image is continuously displayed in the information game for a specified number of times or more;
The specific condition includes that there is no privilege given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed continuously in the information game for the specific number of times or more. The gaming machine according to appendix F1.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F2, the specific condition includes that there is no benefit given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed continuously in the information game for a specific number of times or more. In this way, the specific condition includes that there is no privilege to be given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed continuously in the information game a specific number of times or more. is not established, the specific effect image is continuously displayed in the information game for a specific number of times or more in spite of the fact that there is no privilege given to the player when the specific effect image is continuously displayed. is avoided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a privilege is not given to the player despite the fact that the privilege is clearly given by the display in the information game.

[Appendix F3]
The allowable state of the second winning port (315) includes a first allowable state (short open) in which the time to be in the allowable state is a first time, and a time to be in the allowable state is longer than the first time. a long second allowable state (long open),
The specific condition is the game ball to the second winning port (315) set to the first allowable state (short open) in the first information game (first special game) in which the specific effect image is displayed The gaming machine according to appendix F2, characterized in that it includes a ball entry of .

In the gaming machine according to appendix F3, it is the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole which is in the first allowable state in the first information game in which the specific effect image is displayed. In this way, by entering the game ball into the second winning hole set in the first permitted state in the first information game in which the specific effect image is displayed, the second winning hole is made in the first permitted state. When the specific performance image is continuously displayed by , it is avoided that the specific performance image is continuously displayed in the information game more than a predetermined number of times even though there is no privilege given to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a privilege is not given to the player despite the fact that the privilege is clearly given by the display in the information game.

[Appendix F4]
The specific condition is that 0 is set to the second winning opening (315) set in the allowable state in the first information game (first special game) in which the specific effect image is displayed on the display means (341). The gaming machine according to appendix F2, characterized in that it includes the entry of game balls equal to or less than a specific number exceeding the specified number.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F4, game balls of a specific number exceeding 0 and less than or equal to a specific number exceeding 0 are entered into the second winning opening set to the allowable state in the first information game in which the specific effect image is displayed on the display means. . In this way, in the first information game in which the specific effect image is displayed on the display means, by including the entry of a specific number of game balls exceeding 0 into the second winning hole which is allowed, the allowable When the number of times of the second information game executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole in the state is equal to or less than a specific number exceeding 0, and the specific effect image is continuously displayed, To prevent a specific performance image from being continuously displayed in a predetermined number of information games or more even though there is no privilege given to a player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a privilege is not given to the player despite the fact that the privilege is clearly given by the display in the information game.

[Appendix F5]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F2 to F4, wherein the privilege is execution of the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F5, the privilege is execution of a special game. In this way, since the privilege is the execution of the special game, a situation may occur in which the special game is not executed despite the fact that the special game will be executed by the display in the information game. prevented.

[Appendix F6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is reported by stopping and displaying the symbols that are variably displayed on the display means (341),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F5, wherein the specific effect image is an image of a combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix F6, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the display means in the information game. In this way, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the display means in the information game, so that the player can easily grasp that the specific effect image has been displayed. As a result, the player can easily understand that the specific effect images are displayed continuously, so it is expected that the specific effect images will be displayed continuously when the specific effect images are displayed. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game while playing the game, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix F7]
The specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are characterized in that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) indicates the degree of expectation that the transition to the special game state will be made. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to F6.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F7, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of transition determination by the transition determination means will cause the transition to the special game state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will cause the transition to the special game state, so that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image It is possible to enjoy the progress of the game while expecting it to be displayed, and when the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are displayed, attention is paid to whether the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game state. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game with the help of the player, the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix G1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
A predetermined prize winning port (314, 315) that satisfies the determination condition with the entry of a game ball as a trigger;
Display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Reservation means ( 41) and
The transition determination means (41) is a first determination state (normal game state) in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state is a first probability, or the probability of being determined to be shifted to the special game state. performs the transition determination in the second determination state (variable probability gaming state), which is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between the first winning opening (314) and the allowable state in which entry of game balls is permitted, and the restricted state in which entry of game balls is restricted. including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314),
The game machine is
As the information game (first special game or second special game), the first information game (first special game) executed with the entry of the game ball to the first winning port (314) and a second information game (second special figure game) that is executed when a game ball enters the second winning hole (315);
The information game execution means is
A specific effect image (for example, a chance eye effect image) is displayed on the display means (341) continuously after the first information game (first special game) of a predetermined number of times in the first determination state (normal game state). means to
A predetermined number of the predetermined second information game in the first determination state (normal game state) (second special game executed with the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 at the time of short opening) means (51) for displaying the specific effect image on the display means (341) in
The specific first information game executed after the end of the predetermined second information game (second special game) 1 special game), causing the display means (341) to continuously display the specific effect image,
When a specific condition is established in the specific first information game (first special game), the specific effect image (for example, the image of chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) is changed to the specific effect It can be switched to a predetermined effect image different from the image (for example, an image with the same color pattern effect),
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is reported by stopping and displaying the symbols that are variably displayed on the display means (341),
A gaming machine, wherein the specific effect image is an image of a combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix G1, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display means in the information game. In this way, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the display means in the information game, so that the player can easily grasp that the specific effect image has been displayed. As a result, the player can easily understand that the specific effect images are displayed continuously, so it is expected that the specific effect images will be displayed continuously when the specific effect images are displayed. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game while playing the game, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix G2]
a privilege granting means (41) for granting a privilege to a player when the specific effect image is continuously displayed in the information game for a specified number of times or more;
The specific condition includes that there is no privilege given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed continuously in the information game for the specific number of times or more. The gaming machine according to Appendix G1.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G2, the specific condition includes that there is no benefit given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed continuously in the information game for a specific number of times or more. In this way, the specific condition includes that there is no privilege to be given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed continuously in the information game a specific number of times or more. is not established, the specific effect image is continuously displayed in the information game for a specific number of times or more despite the fact that there is no privilege given to the player when the specific effect image is continuously displayed. is avoided. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a privilege is not given to the player despite the fact that the privilege is clearly given by the display in the information game.

[Appendix G3]
The allowable state of the second winning port (315) includes a first allowable state (short open) in which the time to be in the allowable state is a first time, and a time to be in the allowable state is longer than the first time. a long second allowable state (long open),
The specific condition is the game ball to the second winning port (315) set to the first allowable state (short opening) in the first information game (first special game) in which the specific effect image is displayed The gaming machine according to appendix G2, characterized in that it includes a ball entry of .

In the gaming machine according to appendix G3, it is the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole that is in the first allowable state in the first information game in which the specific effect image is displayed. In this way, by entering the game ball into the second winning hole set in the first permitted state in the first information game in which the specific effect image is displayed, the second winning hole is made in the first permitted state. When the specific performance image is continuously displayed by , it is avoided that the specific performance image is continuously displayed in the information game more than a predetermined number of times even though there is no privilege given to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a privilege is not given to the player despite the fact that the privilege is clearly given by the display in the information game.

[Appendix G4]
The specific condition is that 0 is set to the second winning opening (315) set in the allowable state in the first information game (first special game) in which the specific effect image is displayed on the display means (341). The gaming machine according to appendix G2, characterized by including the fact that game balls exceeding a specific number or less are entered.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G4, game balls of a specific number exceeding 0 or less than a specific number exceeding 0 are entered into the second winning opening set to the allowable state in the first information game in which the specific effect image is displayed on the display means. . In this way, in the first information game in which the specific effect image is displayed on the display means, by including the entry of a specific number of game balls exceeding 0 into the second winning hole which is allowed, the allowable When the number of times of the second information game executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole in the state is equal to or less than a specific number exceeding 0, and the specific effect image is continuously displayed, To prevent a specific performance image from being continuously displayed in a predetermined number of information games or more even though there is no privilege given to a player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a privilege is not given to the player despite the fact that the privilege is clearly given by the display in the information game.

[Appendix G5]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G2 to G4, wherein the privilege is execution of the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G5, the privilege is execution of a special game. In this way, since the privilege is the execution of the special game, a situation may occur in which the special game is not executed despite the fact that the special game will be executed by the display in the information game. prevented.

[Appendix G6]
The specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are characterized in that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) indicates the degree of expectation that the transition to the special game state will be made. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1 to G5.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G6, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of transition determination by the transition determination means will cause the transition to the special game state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will cause the transition to the special game state, so that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image It is possible to enjoy the progress of the game while expecting it to be displayed, and when the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are displayed, attention is paid to whether the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game state. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game with the help of the player, the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix H1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
Predetermined prize winning openings (314, 315) that establish the determination condition with the entry of a game ball as a trigger;
Display means (341) for displaying a notification game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
Reservation means ( 41) and
The transition determination means (41) is a first determination state (normal game state) in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state is a first probability, or the probability of being determined to be shifted to the special game state. performs the transition determination in the second determination state (variable probability gaming state), which is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between the first winning opening (314) and the allowable state in which entry of game balls is permitted, and the restricted state in which entry of game balls is restricted. including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314),
The game machine is
As the information game (first special game or second special game), the first information game (first special game) executed with the entry of the game ball to the first winning port (314) and a second information game (second special figure game) that is executed when a game ball enters the second winning hole (315);
The information game execution means is
A specific effect image (for example, a chance eye effect image) is displayed on the display means (341) continuously after the first information game (first special game) of a predetermined number of times in the first determination state (normal game state). means to
A predetermined number of the predetermined second information game in the first determination state (normal game state) (second special game executed with the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 at the time of short opening) means (51) for displaying the specific effect image on the display means (341) in
The specific first information game executed after the end of the predetermined second information game (second special game) 1 special game), causing the display means (341) to continuously display the specific effect image,
When a specific condition is satisfied in the specific first information game (first special game), the specific effect image (for example, the image of chance eye effect) displayed on the display means (341) is changed to the specific effect It can be switched to a predetermined effect image different from the image (for example, an image with the same color pattern effect),
The specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are characterized in that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) indicates the degree of expectation that the transition to the special game state will be made. game machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H1, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of transition determination by the transition determination means will cause the transition to the special game state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will cause the transition to the special game state, so that the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image The progress of the game can be enjoyed in anticipation of being displayed, and when the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image are displayed, attention is paid to whether the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game with the help of the player, the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix H2]
a privilege granting means (41) for granting a privilege to a player when the specific effect image is continuously displayed in the information game for a specified number of times or more;
The specific condition includes that there is no privilege given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed continuously in the information game for the specific number of times or more. The game machine according to appendix H1.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H2, the specific condition includes that there is no benefit given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed continuously in the information game a specific number of times or more. In this way, the specific condition includes that there is no privilege to be given to the player when the specific effect image is scheduled to be displayed continuously in the information game a specific number of times or more. is not established, the specific effect image is continuously displayed in the information game for a specific number of times or more despite the fact that there is no privilege given to the player when the specific effect image is continuously displayed. is avoided. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a privilege is not given to the player despite the fact that the privilege is clearly given by the display in the information game.

[Appendix H3]
The allowable state of the second winning port (315) includes a first allowable state (short open) in which the time to be in the allowable state is a first time, and a time to be in the allowable state is longer than the first time. a long second allowable state (long open),
Said specific condition is a game ball to said second winning port (315) in said first allowable state (short open) in said first information game (first special game) in which said specific effect image is displayed The gaming machine according to appendix H2, characterized in that it includes a ball entry of .

In the gaming machine according to appendix H3, it is the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole set in the first allowable state in the first information game in which the specific effect image is displayed. In this way, by entering the game ball into the second winning hole set in the first permitted state in the first information game in which the specific effect image is displayed, the second winning hole is made in the first permitted state. When the specific performance image is continuously displayed by , it is avoided that the specific performance image is continuously displayed in the information game more than a predetermined number of times even though there is no privilege given to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a privilege is not given to the player despite the fact that the privilege is clearly given by the display in the information game.

[Appendix H4]
The specific condition is that in the first information game (first special game) in which the specific effect image is displayed on the display means (341), 0 is set to the second winning opening (315) set in the allowable state. The gaming machine according to appendix H2, characterized by including the fact that game balls exceeding a specific number or less are entered.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H4, game balls of a specific number exceeding 0 and less than or equal to a specific number exceeding 0 are entered into the second winning opening set to the allowable state in the first information game in which the specific effect image is displayed on the display means. . In this way, in the first information game in which the specific effect image is displayed on the display means, by including the entry of game balls of a specific number exceeding 0 into the second winning hole which is allowed, the allowable When the specific effect image is continuously displayed because the number of times of the second information game executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole in the state is equal to or less than a specific number exceeding 0, To prevent a specific performance image from being continuously displayed in an information game for a predetermined number of times or more even though there is no privilege given to a player. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a privilege is not given to the player despite the fact that the privilege is clearly given by the display in the information game.

[Appendix H5]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H2 to H4, wherein the privilege is execution of the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H5, the privilege is execution of a special game. In this way, since the privilege is the execution of the special game, a situation may occur in which the special game is not executed despite the fact that the special game will be executed by the display in the information game. prevented.

[Appendix H6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is reported by stopping and displaying the symbols that are variably displayed on the display means (341),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1 to H5, wherein the specific effect image is an image of a combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on the display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix H6, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the display means in the information game. In this way, the specific effect image is an image of a combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the display means in the information game, so that the player can easily grasp that the specific effect image has been displayed. As a result, the player can easily understand that the specific effect images are displayed continuously, so it is expected that the specific effect images will be displayed continuously when the specific effect images are displayed. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game while playing the game, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix I1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
Predetermined prize winning openings (314, 315) that establish the determination condition with the entry of a game ball as a trigger;
An information game executing means (41) for executing an information game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
with
The transition determination means (41) is a first determination state (normal game state) in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state is a first probability, or the probability of being determined to be shifted to the special game state. performs the transition determination in the second determination state (variable probability gaming state), which is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between the first winning opening (314) and the allowable state in which entry of game balls is permitted, and the restricted state in which entry of game balls is restricted. including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314),
The information game (first special game or second special game) is the first information game (first special game) that is executed with the entry of the game ball into the first winning port (314) And a second information game (second special game) that is executed with the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315),
Suggestion information display means (341) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (information about the degree of expectation of a big hit by the pending continuous performance of the degree of expectation of a big win) in the predetermined first information game (the first special game in which the continuous performance of the reservation is executed) )and,
Reservation that can hold the right to execute the second information game (second special game) up to the upper limit number (for example, 4) that is executed when the game ball enters the second winning hole (315) means (41);
A specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning hole (315) is in the predetermined allowable state (long open);
with
The specific game state is based on the second winning port (315) being in the predetermined allowable state (long open), and the second information game is continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number. is in a state where it is possible to
Specification to display a specific effect image (image displayed by a second special figure special effect) corresponding to the second information game executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41) Effect image display means (51);
When the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second information game (second special game), the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed (for example, as a capture image 78 suggestive information continuation display means (51) for displaying);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I1, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed when the specific effect image is displayed in the second information game. In this way, when the specific effect image is displayed in the second information game, the predetermined suggestion information is continuously displayed, so that the predetermined suggestion information is displayed before the start of the second information game. , and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information is resumed after the second information game ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the user from forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second information game, and to prevent the display of the predetermined suggestive information from being restarted after the end of the second information game. can be known in advance. As a result, due to forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second information game, the display of the predetermined suggestive information is restarted after the second information game ends. Since the player is prevented from feeling a sense of incongruity, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.
[Appendix I2]
The game according to appendix I1, wherein the suggestive information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the predetermined suggestive information without changing when the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed. machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix I2, when the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed without being changed. Thus, when the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously without being changed, so that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed before the start of the second information game. The player can easily grasp that the display of the predetermined suggestive information is resumed after the end of the second information game. As a result, it is possible to further prevent the user from forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second information game, and to restart the display of the predetermined suggestive information after the end of the second information game. can be known in advance. As a result, due to forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second information game, the display of the predetermined suggestive information is restarted after the second information game ends. Since the player is further prevented from feeling a sense of discomfort, it is possible to further prevent a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix I3]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) is the second informal game (second special symbol game) executed next to the first informal game (first special symbol game) in which the predetermined suggested information is displayed. , wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed while maintaining the mode displayed in the first information game (first special game).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I3, in the second information game executed subsequent to the first information game in which the predetermined suggestion information is displayed, the predetermined suggestion is displayed while maintaining the mode displayed in the first information game. By displaying the information, the player can more easily and reliably grasp that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed in the first information game before execution of the second information game. As a result, it is possible to more appropriately prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information after the end of the second information game. Further deterioration of interest in games caused by this is prevented.

[Appendix I4]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) is the second informal game (second special symbol game) executed next to the first informal game (first special symbol game) in which the predetermined suggested information is displayed. , wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed in a manner different from that of the first information game (first special game).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I4, in the second information game executed after the first information game in which the predetermined information is displayed, the predetermined information is displayed in a manner different from that of the first information game. Thus, in the second information game executed next to the first information game in which the predetermined suggestion information is displayed, the predetermined suggestion information is displayed in a manner different from that in the first information game, whereby the second information game is displayed. It is possible to make the player understand in various modes that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the information game and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information is resumed after the second information game is finished. At the same time, it is possible for the player to understand the performance and the variable display of the symbols executed in the second information game without obstructing the visual recognition.

[Appendix I5]
Supplementary note I1 characterized in that the suggestive information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the predetermined suggestive information without changing the display position of the predetermined suggestive information when continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information. to the gaming machine according to appendix I4.

In the gaming machine according to appendix I5, when the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed without changing the display position. Thus, when the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed, the display position of the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed without changing, so that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed before the start of the second information game. The player can easily grasp that the information has been displayed and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will be resumed after the second information game is finished. As a result, it is possible to further prevent the user from forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second information game, and to restart the display of the predetermined suggestive information after the end of the second information game. can be known in advance. As a result, due to forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second information game, the display of the predetermined suggestive information is restarted after the second information game ends. Since the player is further prevented from feeling a sense of discomfort, it is possible to further prevent a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix I6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is reported by stopping and displaying the symbols displayed in a variable manner,
The suggested information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the predetermined suggested information (displayed as a captured image 78) at a position that does not hinder the visual recognition of the pattern in the second information game. The game machine according to any one of appendices I1 to I5.

In the gaming machine according to appendix I6, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed at a position that does not hinder the visual recognition of the symbols in the second information game. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggested information at a position that does not hinder the visual recognition of the symbols in the second information game, the predetermined suggested information was displayed before the start of the second information game. And, the player can grasp that the display of the predetermined suggestive information is restarted after the second information game is finished without hindering the visual recognition of the variable display of the symbols executed in the second information game.

[Appendix I7]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed (displayed as a captured image 78) at a position adjacent to the pattern variable display area in the second information game. The game machine according to appendix I6.

In the gaming machine according to appendix I7, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed at a position adjacent to the symbol variation display area in the second information game. Thus, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information at a position adjacent to the pattern variation display area in the second information game, the predetermined It is possible to make the user more easily aware that the suggestive information of is continuously displayed. As a result, the player can easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggested information was displayed before the start of the second information game and that the display of the predetermined suggested information is resumed after the second information game is finished. can be made

[Appendix I8]
It is possible to reserve the right to execute the first information game (first special game) triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole (314) up to the first upper limit number (for example, four) a first holding means (41),
The suggested information continuous display means (51) displays the predetermined suggested information when the right to execute the first information game (first special figure game) is reserved by the first reservation means (41). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices I1 to I7, characterized in that the display is continued.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I8, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed when the right to execute the first information game executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole is reserved. be done. In this way, when the right to execute the first information game executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole is reserved, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed. When the right to execute the first information game is reserved while the second information game is being executed in the specific game state, the display of the predetermined suggestive information for the first information game is prevented. be done. Thus, after the end of the specific game state, the predetermined suggested information is displayed for the first information game of the number of times exceeding the number of consecutive times of the predetermined suggested information set before shifting to the specific game state. is prevented. As a result, when a privilege is granted to the player by displaying predetermined suggestive information continuously in the first information game for a specific number of times or more, the predetermined Since it is avoided that the suggestion information is displayed continuously in the first information game more than a certain number of times, the player It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a privilege is not given to

[Appendix I9]
A first frequency state in which the frequency in which the second winning opening (315) is in the allowable state is the first frequency, and a frequency in which the second winning opening (315) is in the allowable state is higher than the first frequency. an allowable frequency control means for switching between a second frequency state that is a second frequency that is higher than the
with
The specific game state generating means (41) is characterized in that it generates the specific game state in at least one of the first frequency state and the second frequency state. game machine.

[Appendix I10]
The gaming machine according to appendix I9, wherein the specific game state generating means (41) generates the specific game state in the first frequency state.

[Appendix I11]
The gaming machine according to appendix I9 or appendix I10, wherein the specific game state generating means (41) generates the specific game state in the second frequency state.

In the gaming machine according to notes I9 to I11, the first frequency state, which is the first frequency in which the second winning hole is in the allowable state, is low, and the second winning hole, in which the frequency in which the second winning hole is in the allowable state is high. A specific game state is generated in at least one of the second frequency states. In the first frequency state, the frequency at which the second winning opening is in the allowable state is low. Therefore, in the first frequency state, the specific game state is generated less frequently, and the specific game state is generated as a special state. On the other hand, in the second frequency state, the frequency at which the second winning opening is in the allowable state is high. Therefore, in the second frequency state, the frequency of occurrence of the specific game state increases, and the specific game state is generated as a non-special state. In this way, the first frequency state and the second frequency state differ in the frequency of occurrence of the specific game state, and the positioning thereof is also different. Different game characteristics between the case where the specific game state is generated in the first frequency state and the case where the specific game state is generated in the second frequency state, which is the second frequency in which the second winning hole is allowed to be in the allowable state. is given. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention and interest in the game, thereby improving the interest in the game.

[Appendix I12]
a first display means (341) for displaying the specific effect image by the specific effect image display means (51);
a second display means (39 or the like) different from the first display means (341) on which the predetermined suggested information is displayed by the suggested information continuous display means (51);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices I1 to I11, characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I12, the first display means for displaying the specific effect image corresponding to the second information game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state, and the second display for displaying the predetermined suggestive information. different from the means. Thus, the first display means for displaying the specific effect image corresponding to the second information game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state is different from the second display means for displaying the predetermined suggestive information. Thus, it is possible to display the predetermined suggestive information on the second display means without obstructing the display of the specific effect image on the first display means. As a result, both the specific effect image and the predetermined suggestive information can be reliably and appropriately displayed without obstructing each other's visual recognition.

[Appendix I13]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) reduces the image displayed on the display means (341) as the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game, and displays the second information game (second special figure The game machine according to any one of appendices I1 to I12, wherein the information is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in a game).

In the gaming machine according to Addendum I13, an image obtained by reducing the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second information game. In this way, an image obtained by reducing the image displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, so that the effect executed in the second information game Predetermined suggestive information can be easily and surely displayed without impeding visual recognition of the variable display of patterns, and the player is informed that the display of the predetermined suggested information is resumed after the second notification is completed. It becomes possible to comprehend. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

In addition, when an image obtained by reducing the image displayed as the predetermined suggested information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggested information in the second information game, the display of the predetermined suggested information is displayed after the second information is finished. It is possible not only to let the player know that the game will be restarted, but also to let the player know the display mode (type) of the predetermined suggestive information to be restarted in the first information game. As a result, it is possible to more appropriately prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and to further prevent the decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Properly prevented.

[Appendix I14]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) reduces the density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game, and displays the image in the second information game. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices I1 to I13, characterized in that it is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the (second special game).

In the gaming machine pertaining to Addendum I14, an image obtained by lowering the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game. In this way, an image obtained by lowering the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, and is executed in the second information game. Predetermined suggestive information can be easily and surely displayed without impeding visual recognition of the variable display of effects and patterns, and the display of the predetermined suggestive information can be restarted after the second notification is finished. It is possible to make people understand. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix I15]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) displays an image showing the contour of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game, in the second information game (second special figure game), the predetermined The gaming machine according to any one of appendices I1 to I14, characterized in that the information is displayed as suggestive information.

In the gaming machine pertaining to Addendum I15, an image showing the contour of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game. In this way, the image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, so that the effect executed in the second information game It is possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without obstructing the visual recognition of the variable display of the pattern and the pattern, and the player can understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information is resumed after the second notification is finished. It is possible to grasp the As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix I16]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping display of the symbols displayed in a variable manner,
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that, in the second information game, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed on the front side or the back side of the symbols displayed in a variable manner. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices I1 to I15.

In the gaming machine pertaining to Addendum I16, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed on the front side or the back side of the symbols displayed in the second information game. In this way, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed on the front side or the back side of the symbols that are variably displayed in the second information game, so that the player who pays attention to the variation of the symbols in the second information game. , the user can easily notice that the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed. As a result, the player can easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggested information was displayed before the start of the second information game and that the display of the predetermined suggested information is resumed after the second information game is finished. can be made

[Appendix I17]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second information game (second special game). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices I1 to I16, characterized in that

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I17, the specific image associated with the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second information game. In this way, the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, so that the effects and patterns executed in the second information game are changed. To easily and surely display predetermined suggestive information without obstructing visual recognition of the display, and to make a player understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information is resumed after the end of the second notification. becomes possible. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix I18]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping display of the symbols displayed in a variable manner,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices I1 to I17, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed.

In the gaming machine pertaining to Addendum I18, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed in the information game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the information game, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. . As a result, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game while anticipating the event, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix I19]
Supplementary notes I1 to Supplementary notes characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will cause the transition to the special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of I18.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I19, the predetermined suggestion information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of transition determination by the transition determination means will cause the transition to the special game state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will cause the transition to the special game state, so that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed. The progress of the game can be enjoyed while expecting that the game progresses, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the progress of the game is focused on whether the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state. Since it can be enjoyed, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix J1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
A predetermined prize winning port (314, 315) that satisfies the determination condition with the entry of a game ball as a trigger;
An information game executing means (41) for executing an information game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
with
The transition determination means (41) is a first determination state (normal game state) in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state is a first probability, or the probability of being determined to be shifted to the special game state. performs the transition determination in the second determination state (variable probability gaming state), which is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between the first winning opening (314) and the allowable state in which entry of game balls is permitted, and the restricted state in which entry of game balls is restricted. including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314),
The information game (first special game or second special game) is the first information game (first special game) that is executed with the entry of the game ball into the first winning port (314) And a second information game (second special game) that is executed with the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315),
Predetermined suggestive information (information on jackpot expectation by first special drawing reservation continuous effect on jackpot expectation) in the predetermined first information game (first special drawing game in which the first special drawing reservation continuous effect is executed) Suggestion information display means (341) to display;
Reservation that can hold the right to execute the second information game (second special game) up to the upper limit number (for example, 4) that is executed when the game ball enters the second winning hole (315) means (41);
A specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning hole (315) is in the predetermined allowable state (long open);
with
The specific game state is based on the second winning port (315) being in the predetermined allowable state (long open), and the second information game is continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number. is in a state where it is possible to
Specification to display a specific effect image (image displayed by a second special figure special effect) corresponding to the second information game executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41) Effect image display means (51);
When the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second information game (second special game), the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed (for example, as a capture image 78 suggestive information continuation display means (51) for displaying);
with
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the predetermined suggested information without changing it when the predetermined suggested information is continuously displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J1, when the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed without being changed. Thus, when the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously without being changed, so that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed before the start of the second information game. The player can easily grasp that the display of the predetermined suggestive information is resumed after the end of the second information game. As a result, it is possible to further prevent the user from forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second information game, and to restart the display of the predetermined suggestive information after the end of the second information game. can be known in advance. As a result, due to forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second information game, the display of the predetermined suggestive information is restarted after the second information game ends. Since the player is further prevented from feeling a sense of discomfort, it is possible to further prevent a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix J2]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping display of the symbols displayed in a variable manner,
The suggested information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the predetermined suggested information (displayed as a captured image 78) at a position that does not hinder the visual recognition of the pattern in the second information game. The gaming machine described in J1.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J2, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed at a position that does not hinder the visual recognition of the symbols in the second information game. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggested information at a position that does not hinder the visual recognition of the symbols in the second information game, the predetermined suggested information was displayed before the start of the second information game. And, the player can grasp that the display of the predetermined suggestive information is restarted after the second information game is finished without hindering the visual recognition of the variable display of the symbols executed in the second information game.

[Appendix J3]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed (displayed as a captured image 78) at a position adjacent to the pattern variable display area in the second information game. The gaming machine according to appendix J1 or appendix J2.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J3, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed at a position adjacent to the symbol variation display area in the second information game. Thus, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information at a position adjacent to the symbol variation display area in the second information game, the predetermined It becomes possible to make the user more easily aware that the suggestive information of is continuously displayed. As a result, the player can easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggested information was displayed before the start of the second information game and that the display of the predetermined suggested information is resumed after the second information game is finished. can be made

[Appendix J4]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping display of the symbols displayed in a variable manner,
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that, in the second information game, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed on the front side or the back side of the symbols displayed in a variable manner. The gaming machine described in appendix J1.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J4, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed on the front side or the back side of the symbols displayed in the second information game. In this way, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed on the front side or the back side of the symbols that are variably displayed in the second information game, so that the player who pays attention to the variation of the symbols in the second information game. , the user can easily notice that the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed. As a result, the player can easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggested information was displayed before the start of the second information game and that the display of the predetermined suggested information is resumed after the second information game is finished. can be made

[Appendix J5]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is reported by stopping and displaying the symbols displayed in a variable manner,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J1 to J4, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J5, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed in the information game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the information game, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. . As a result, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game while anticipating the event, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix J6]
Supplementary notes J1 to Supplementary notes characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will cause the transition to the special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of J5.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J6, the predetermined suggestion information indicates the degree of expectation that the transition determination result by the transition determination means will cause the transition to the special game state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will cause the transition to the special game state, so that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed. The progress of the game can be enjoyed while expecting that the game progresses, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the progress of the game is focused on whether the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state. Since it can be enjoyed, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix K1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
Predetermined prize winning openings (314, 315) that establish the determination condition with the entry of a game ball as a trigger;
An information game executing means (41) for executing an information game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
with
The transition determination means (41) is a first determination state (normal game state) in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state is a first probability, or the probability of being determined to be shifted to the special game state. performs the transition determination in the second determination state (variable probability gaming state), which is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between the first winning opening (314) and the allowable state in which entry of game balls is permitted, and the restricted state in which entry of game balls is restricted. including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314),
The information game (first special game or second special game) is the first information game (first special game) that is executed with the entry of the game ball into the first winning port (314) And a second information game (second special game) that is executed with the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315),
Suggestion information display means (341) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (information about the degree of expectation of a big hit by the pending continuous performance of the degree of expectation of a big win) in the predetermined first information game (the first special game in which the continuous performance of the reservation is executed) )and,
Reservation that can hold the right to execute the second information game (second special game) up to the upper limit number (for example, 4) that is executed when the game ball enters the second winning hole (315) means (41);
A specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning hole (315) is in the predetermined allowable state (long open);
with
The specific game state is based on the fact that the second winning port (315) is in the predetermined allowable state (long open), and the second information game is continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number. is in a state where it is possible to
Specification to display a specific effect image (image displayed by a second special figure special effect) corresponding to the second information game executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41) Effect image display means (51);
When the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second information game (second special game), the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed (for example, as a capture image 78 suggestive information continuation display means (51) for displaying);
with
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) is the second informal game (second special symbol game) executed next to the first informal game (first special symbol game) in which the predetermined suggested information is displayed. , wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed while maintaining the mode displayed in the first information game (first special game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix K1, in the second information game executed subsequent to the first information game in which the predetermined suggestion information is displayed, the predetermined suggestion is displayed while maintaining the mode displayed in the first information game. By displaying the information, the player can more easily and reliably grasp that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed in the first information game before execution of the second information game. As a result, it is possible to more appropriately prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information after the end of the second information game. Further deterioration of interest in games caused by this is prevented.

[Appendix K2]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is reported by stopping and displaying the symbols displayed in a variable manner,
The suggested information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the predetermined suggested information (displayed as a captured image 78) at a position that does not hinder the visual recognition of the pattern in the second information game. The gaming machine described in K1.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K2, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed at a position that does not hinder the visual recognition of the symbols in the second information game. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggested information at a position that does not hinder the visual recognition of the symbols in the second information game, the predetermined suggested information was displayed before the start of the second information game. And, the player can grasp that the display of the predetermined suggestive information is restarted after the second information game is finished without hindering the visual recognition of the variable display of the symbols executed in the second information game.

[Appendix K3]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed (displayed as a captured image 78) at a position adjacent to the pattern variable display area in the second information game. The gaming machine according to supplementary note K2.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K3, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed at a position adjacent to the symbol variation display area in the second information game. Thus, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information at a position adjacent to the pattern variation display area in the second information game, the predetermined It becomes possible to make the user more easily aware that the suggestive information of is continuously displayed. As a result, the player can easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggested information was displayed before the start of the second information game and that the display of the predetermined suggested information is resumed after the second information game is finished. can be made

[Appendix K4]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is reported by stopping and displaying the symbols displayed in a variable manner,
The suggestive information continuation display means (51) is characterized by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information on the front side or the back side of the symbols displayed in a variable manner in the second information game. The game machine described in appendix K1.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K4, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed on the front side or the back side of the symbols displayed in the second information game. In this way, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed on the front side or the back side of the symbols that are variably displayed in the second information game, so that the player who pays attention to the variation of the symbols in the second information game. , the user can easily notice that the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed. As a result, the player can easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggested information was displayed before the start of the second information game and that the display of the predetermined suggested information is resumed after the second information game is finished. can be made

[Appendix K5]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping display of the symbols displayed in a variable manner,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices K1 to K4, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K5, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed in the information game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the information game, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. . As a result, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game while anticipating the event, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix K6]
Supplementary notes K1 to Supplementary notes characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will cause the transition to the special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of K5.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K6, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of transition determination by the transition determination means will cause the transition to the special game state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will cause the transition to the special game state, so that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed. The progress of the game can be enjoyed while expecting that the game progresses, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the progress of the game is focused on whether the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state. Since it can be enjoyed, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix L1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
A predetermined prize winning port (314, 315) that satisfies the determination condition with the entry of a game ball as a trigger;
An information game executing means (41) for executing an information game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
with
The transition determination means (41) is a first determination state (normal game state) in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state is a first probability, or the probability of being determined to be shifted to the special game state. performs the transition determination in the second determination state (variable probability gaming state), which is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between the first winning opening (314) and the allowable state in which entry of game balls is permitted, and the restricted state in which entry of game balls is restricted. including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314),
The information game (first special game or second special game) is the first information game (first special game) that is executed with the entry of the game ball into the first winning port (314) And a second information game (second special game) that is executed with the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315),
Predetermined suggestive information (information on jackpot expectation by first special drawing reservation continuous effect on jackpot expectation) in the predetermined first information game (first special drawing game in which the first special drawing reservation continuous effect is executed) Suggestion information display means (341) to display;
Reservation that can hold the right to execute the second information game (second special game) up to the upper limit number (for example, 4) that is executed when the game ball enters the second winning hole (315) means (41);
A specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning hole (315) is in the predetermined allowable state (long open);
with
The specific game state is based on the second winning port (315) being in the predetermined allowable state (long open), and the second information game is continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number. is in a state where it is possible to
Specification to display a specific effect image (image displayed by a second special figure special effect) corresponding to the second information game executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41) Effect image display means (51);
When the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second information game (second special game), the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed (for example, as a capture image 78 suggestive information continuation display means (51) for displaying);
with
The suggestive information continuous display means (51), when continuously displaying the predetermined suggested information, continuously displays the predetermined suggested information without changing the display position of the predetermined suggested information. .

In the gaming machine according to appendix L1, when the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed without changing the display position. Thus, when the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed, the display position of the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed without changing, so that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed before the start of the second information game. The player can easily grasp that the information has been displayed and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information will be resumed after the second information game is finished. As a result, it is possible to further prevent the user from forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second information game, and to restart the display of the predetermined suggestive information after the end of the second information game. can be known in advance. As a result, due to forgetting that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the second information game, the display of the predetermined suggestive information is restarted after the second information game ends. Since the player is further prevented from feeling a sense of discomfort, it is possible to further prevent a decrease in interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information.

[Appendix L2]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping display of the symbols displayed in a variable manner,
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that, in the second information game, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed on the front side or the back side of the symbols displayed in a variable manner. The gaming machine according to appendix I1.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix L2, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed on the front side or the back side of the symbols displayed in the second information game. In this way, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed on the front side or the back side of the symbols that are variably displayed in the second information game, so that the player who pays attention to the variation of the symbols in the second information game. , the user can easily notice that the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed. As a result, the player can easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggested information was displayed before the start of the second information game and that the display of the predetermined suggested information is resumed after the second information game is finished. can be made

[Appendix L3]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) reduces the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first informal game, and displays the predetermined suggestive image in the second informal game (second special figure game). The gaming machine according to appendix L1 or appendix L2, characterized in that the information is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L3, an image obtained by reducing the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second information game. In this way, an image obtained by reducing the image displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, so that the effect executed in the second information game Predetermined suggestive information can be easily and surely displayed without impeding visual recognition of the variable display of patterns, and the player is informed that the display of the predetermined suggested information is resumed after the second notification is completed. It becomes possible to comprehend. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

In addition, when an image obtained by reducing the image displayed as the predetermined suggested information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggested information in the second information game, the display of the predetermined suggested information is displayed after the second information is finished. It is possible not only to let the player know that the game will be restarted, but also to let the player know the display mode (type) of the predetermined suggestive information to be restarted in the first information game. As a result, it is possible to more appropriately prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and to further prevent the decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Properly prevented.

[Appendix L4]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) reduces the density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game, and displays the image in the second information game. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices L1 to L3, characterized in that it is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the (second special game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix L4, an image obtained by lowering the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game. In this way, an image obtained by lowering the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, and is executed in the second information game. Predetermined suggestive information can be easily and surely displayed without impeding visual recognition of the variable display of effects and patterns, and the display of the predetermined suggestive information can be restarted after the second notification is finished. It is possible to make people understand. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix L5]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) displays an image showing the contour of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game, in the second information game (second special figure game), the predetermined The gaming machine according to any one of appendices L1 to L4, characterized in that the information is displayed as suggestive information.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix L5, an image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game. In this way, the image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, so that the effect executed in the second information game It is possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without obstructing the visual recognition of the variable display of the pattern and the pattern, and the player can understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information is resumed after the second notification is completed. It is possible to grasp the As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix L6]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second information game (second special game). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices L1 to L5, characterized in that

In the gaming machine according to appendix L6, the specific image associated with the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second information game. In this way, the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, so that the effects and patterns executed in the second information game are changed. To easily and surely display predetermined suggestive information without obstructing visual recognition of the display, and to make a player understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information is resumed after the end of the second notification. becomes possible. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix L7]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices L1 to L6, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix L7, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed in the information game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the information game, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. . As a result, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game while anticipating the event, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix L8]
Supplementary notes L1 to Supplementary notes characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will cause the transition to the special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of L7.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix L8, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of transition determination by the transition determination means will cause the transition to the special game state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will cause the transition to the special game state, so that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed. The progress of the game can be enjoyed while expecting that the game progresses, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the progress of the game is focused on whether the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state. Since it can be enjoyed, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix M1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
A predetermined prize winning port (314, 315) that satisfies the determination condition with the entry of a game ball as a trigger;
An information game executing means (41) for executing an information game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
with
The transition determination means (41) is a first determination state (normal game state) in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state is a first probability, or the probability of being determined to be shifted to the special game state. performs the transition determination in the second determination state (variable probability gaming state), which is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between the first winning opening (314) and the allowable state in which entry of game balls is permitted, and the restricted state in which entry of game balls is restricted. including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314),
The information game (first special game or second special game) is the first information game (first special game) that is executed with the entry of the game ball into the first winning port (314) And a second information game (second special game) that is executed with the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315),
Suggestion information display means (341) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (information about the degree of expectation of a big hit by the pending continuous performance of the degree of expectation of a big win) in the predetermined first information game (the first special game in which the continuous performance of the reservation is executed) )and,
Reservation that can hold the right to execute the second information game (second special game) up to the upper limit number (for example, 4) that is executed when the game ball enters the second winning hole (315) means (41);
A specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning hole (315) is in the predetermined allowable state (long open);
with
The specific game state is based on the second winning port (315) being in the predetermined allowable state (long open), and the second information game is continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number. is in a state where it is possible to
Specification to display a specific effect image (image displayed by a second special figure special effect) corresponding to the second information game executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41) Effect image display means (51);
When the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second information game (second special game), the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed (for example, as a capture image 78 suggestive information continuation display means (51) for displaying);
with
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping display of the symbols displayed in a variable manner,
The suggested information continuous display means (51) continuously displays the predetermined suggested information (displayed as a captured image 78) at a position that does not hinder the visual recognition of the pattern in the second information game. machine.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note M1, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed at a position that does not hinder the visual recognition of the symbols in the second information game. In this way, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggested information at a position that does not hinder the visual recognition of the symbols in the second information game, the predetermined suggested information was displayed before the start of the second information game. And, the player can grasp that the display of the predetermined suggestive information is restarted after the second information game is finished without hindering the visual recognition of the variable display of the symbols executed in the second information game.

[Appendix M2]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed (displayed as a captured image 78) at a position adjacent to the pattern variable display area in the second information game. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note M1.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note M2, predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed at a position adjacent to the symbol variation display area in the second information game. Thus, by continuously displaying the predetermined suggestive information at a position adjacent to the pattern variation display area in the second information game, the predetermined It becomes possible to make the user more easily aware that the suggestive information of is continuously displayed. As a result, the player can easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggested information was displayed before the start of the second information game and that the display of the predetermined suggested information is resumed after the second information game is finished. can be made

[Appendix M3]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) reduces the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first informal game, and displays the predetermined suggestive image in the second informal game (second special figure game). The gaming machine according to appendix M1 or appendix M2, wherein the information is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix M3, an image obtained by reducing the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game. In this way, an image obtained by reducing the image displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, so that the effect executed in the second information game Predetermined suggestive information can be easily and surely displayed without impeding visual recognition of the variable display of patterns, and the player is informed that the display of the predetermined suggested information is resumed after the second notification is completed. It becomes possible to comprehend. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

In addition, when an image obtained by reducing the image displayed as the predetermined suggested information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggested information in the second information game, the display of the predetermined suggested information is displayed after the second information is finished. It is possible not only to let the player know that the game will be restarted, but also to let the player know the display mode (type) of the predetermined suggestive information to be restarted in the first information game. As a result, it is possible to more appropriately prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and further reduce the loss of interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Properly prevented.

[Appendix M4]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) reduces the density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game, and displays the image in the second information game. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices M1 to M3, characterized in that it is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the (second special game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix M4, an image obtained by lowering the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game. In this way, an image obtained by lowering the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, and is executed in the second information game. Predetermined suggestive information can be easily and surely displayed without impeding visual recognition of the variable display of effects and patterns, and the display of the predetermined suggestive information can be restarted after the second notification is finished. It is possible to make people understand. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix M5]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) displays an image showing the contour of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game, in the second information game (second special figure game), the predetermined The gaming machine according to any one of appendices M1 to M4, characterized in that the information is displayed as suggestive information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix M5, an image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game. In this way, the image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, so that the effect executed in the second information game It is possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without obstructing the visual recognition of the variable display of the pattern and the pattern, and the player can understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information is resumed after the second notification is completed. It is possible to grasp the As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix M6]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second information game (second special game). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices M1 to M5, characterized in that

In the gaming machine according to appendix M6, the specific image associated with the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second information game. In this way, the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, so that the effects and patterns executed in the second information game are changed. To easily and surely display predetermined suggestive information without obstructing visual recognition of the display, and to make a player understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information is resumed after the end of the second notification. becomes possible. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix M7]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices M1 to M6, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix M7, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed in the information game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the information game, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. . As a result, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game while anticipating the event, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix M8]
Supplementary notes M1 to Supplementary notes characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will cause the transition to the special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of M7.

In the gaming machine according to appendix M8, the predetermined suggestion information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of transition determination by the transition determination means will cause the transition to the special game state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will cause the transition to the special game state, so that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed. The progress of the game can be enjoyed while expecting that the game progresses, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the progress of the game is focused on whether the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state. Since it can be enjoyed, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix N1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
Predetermined prize winning openings (314, 315) that establish the determination condition with the entry of a game ball as a trigger;
An information game executing means (41) for executing an information game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
with
The transition determination means (41) is a first determination state (normal game state) in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state is a first probability, or the probability of being determined to be shifted to the special game state. performs the transition determination in the second determination state (variable probability gaming state), which is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between the first winning opening (314) and the allowable state in which entry of game balls is permitted, and the restricted state in which entry of game balls is restricted. including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314),
The information game (first special game or second special game) is the first information game (first special game) that is executed with the entry of the game ball into the first winning port (314) And a second information game (second special game) that is executed with the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315),
Predetermined suggestive information (information on jackpot expectation by first special drawing reservation continuous effect on jackpot expectation) in the predetermined first information game (first special drawing game in which the first special drawing reservation continuous effect is executed) Suggestion information display means (341) to display;
It is possible to reserve the right to execute the first information game (first special game) triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole (314) up to the first upper limit number (for example, 4) a first holding means (41);
It is possible to reserve the right to execute the second information game (second special game) triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole (315) up to the second upper limit number (for example, 4) a second holding means (41);
A specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning hole (315) is in the predetermined allowable state (long open);
with
The specific game state is based on the fact that the second winning port (315) is set to the predetermined allowable state (long open), and the second information game is continued for a specific number of times equal to or more than the second upper limit number. is a state that can be generated by
Specification to display a specific effect image (image displayed by a second special figure special effect) corresponding to the second information game executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41) Effect image display means (51);
When the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second information game (second special game), the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed (for example, as a capture image 78 suggestive information continuation display means (51) for displaying);
with
The suggested information continuous display means (51) displays the predetermined suggested information when the right to execute the first information game (first special figure game) is reserved by the first reservation means (41). A gaming machine characterized by continuous display.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note N1, when the right to execute the first information game executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole is reserved, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed. be done. In this way, when the right to execute the first information game executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning hole is reserved, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed. When the right to execute the first information game is reserved while the second information game is being executed in the specific game state, the display of the predetermined suggestive information for the first information game is prevented. be done. Thus, after the end of the specific game state, the predetermined suggested information is displayed for the first information game of the number of times exceeding the number of consecutive times of the predetermined suggested information set before shifting to the specific game state. is prevented. As a result, when a privilege is granted to the player by displaying predetermined suggestive information continuously in the first information game for a specific number of times or more, the predetermined Since it is avoided that the suggested information is displayed continuously in the first information game more than a certain number of times, the player It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a privilege is not given to

[Appendix N2]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) reduces the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game, and displays the predetermined suggested information in the second informal game (second special game). The gaming machine according to appendix N1, wherein the information is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note N2, an image obtained by reducing the image displayed as the predetermined suggested information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggested information in the second information game. In this way, an image obtained by reducing the image displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, so that the effect executed in the second information game Predetermined suggestive information can be easily and surely displayed without impeding visual recognition of the variable display of patterns, and the player is informed that the display of the predetermined suggested information is resumed after the second notification is completed. It becomes possible to comprehend. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

In addition, when an image obtained by reducing the image displayed as the predetermined suggested information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggested information in the second information game, the display of the predetermined suggested information is displayed after the second information is finished. It is possible not only to let the player know that the game will be restarted, but also to let the player know the display mode (type) of the predetermined suggestive information to be restarted in the first information game. As a result, it is possible to more appropriately prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and to further prevent the decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Properly prevented.

[Appendix N3]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) reduces the density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game, and displays the image in the second information game. The gaming machine according to appendix N1 or appendix N2, characterized in that it is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in (second special game).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note N3, an image obtained by lowering the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game. In this way, an image obtained by lowering the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, and is executed in the second information game. Predetermined suggestive information can be easily and surely displayed without impeding visual recognition of the variable display of effects and patterns, and the display of the predetermined suggestive information can be restarted after the second notification is finished. It is possible to make people understand. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix N4]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) displays an image showing the contour of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game, in the second information game (second special figure game), the predetermined The gaming machine according to any one of appendices N1 to N3, characterized in that the information is displayed as suggestive information.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note N4, an image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game. In this way, the image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, so that the effect executed in the second information game It is possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without obstructing the visual recognition of the variable display of the pattern and the pattern, and the player can understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information is resumed after the second notification is completed. It is possible to grasp the As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix N5]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second information game (second special game). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices N1 to N4, characterized in that

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note N5, the specific image associated with the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second information game. In this way, the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, so that the effects and patterns executed in the second information game are changed. To easily and surely display predetermined suggestive information without obstructing visual recognition of the display, and to make a player understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information is resumed after the end of the second notification. becomes possible. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix N6]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices N1 to N5, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix N6, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed in the information game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the information game, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. . As a result, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game while anticipating the event, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix N7]
Supplementary notes N1 to Supplementary notes, wherein the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will cause the transition to the special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of N6.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note N7, the predetermined suggestion information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of transition determination by the transition determination means will cause the transition to the special game state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will cause the transition to the special game state, so that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed. The progress of the game can be enjoyed while expecting that the game progresses, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the progress of the game is focused on whether the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state. Since it can be enjoyed, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix O1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
Predetermined prize winning openings (314, 315) that establish the determination condition with the entry of a game ball as a trigger;
An information game executing means (41) for executing an information game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
with
The transition determination means (41) is a first determination state (normal game state) in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state is a first probability, or the probability of being determined to be shifted to the special game state. performs the transition determination in the second determination state (variable probability gaming state), which is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between the first winning opening (314) and the allowable state in which entry of game balls is permitted, and the restricted state in which entry of game balls is restricted. including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314),
The information game (first special game or second special game) is the first information game (first special game) that is executed with the entry of the game ball into the first winning port (314) And a second information game (second special game) that is executed with the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315),
Predetermined suggestive information (information on jackpot expectation by first special drawing reservation continuous effect on jackpot expectation) in the predetermined first information game (first special drawing game in which the first special drawing reservation continuous effect is executed) Suggestion information display means (341) to display;
Reservation that can hold the right to execute the second information game (second special game) up to the upper limit number (for example, 4) that is executed when the game ball enters the second winning hole (315) means (41);
A specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning hole (315) is in the predetermined allowable state (long open);
with
The specific game state is based on the second winning port (315) being in the predetermined allowable state (long open), and the second information game is continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number. is in a state where it is possible to
Specification to display a specific effect image (image displayed by a second special figure special effect) corresponding to the second information game executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41) Effect image display means (51);
When the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second information game (second special game), the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed (for example, as a capture image 78 suggestive information continuation display means (51) for displaying);
A first frequency state in which the frequency in which the second winning opening (315) is in the allowable state is the first frequency, and a frequency in which the second winning opening (315) is in the allowable state is higher than the first frequency. an allowable frequency control means for switching between a second frequency state that is a second frequency that is higher than the
with
A gaming machine, wherein the specific game state generating means (41) generates the specific game state in at least one of the first frequency state and the second frequency state.

[Appendix O2]
The gaming machine according to appendix O1, wherein the specific game state generating means (41) generates the specific game state in the first frequency state.

[Appendix O3]
The gaming machine according to appendix O1 or appendix O2, wherein the specific game state generating means (41) generates the specific game state in the second frequency state.

In the gaming machine according to notes O1 to O3, a first frequency state, which is a first frequency in which the second winning hole is in the allowable state, and a second frequency state, in which the frequency in which the second winning hole is in the allowable state, is high. A specific game state is generated in at least one of the second frequency states. In the first frequency state, the frequency at which the second winning opening is in the allowable state is low. Therefore, in the first frequency state, the specific game state is generated less frequently, and the specific game state is generated as a special state. On the other hand, in the second frequency state, the frequency at which the second winning opening is in the allowable state is high. Therefore, in the second frequency state, the frequency of occurrence of the specific game state increases, and the specific game state is generated as a non-special state. In this way, the first frequency state and the second frequency state differ in the frequency of occurrence of the specific game state, and the positioning thereof is also different. Different game characteristics between the case where the specific game state is generated in the first frequency state and the case where the specific game state is generated in the second frequency state, which is the second frequency in which the second winning hole is allowed to be in the allowable state. is given. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention and interest in the game, thereby improving the interest in the game.

[Appendix O4]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) reduces the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game, and displays the predetermined suggested information in the second informal game (second special game). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices O1 to O3, wherein the information is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix O4, an image obtained by reducing the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game. In this way, an image obtained by reducing the image displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, so that the effect executed in the second information game Predetermined suggestive information can be easily and surely displayed without impeding visual recognition of the variable display of patterns, and the player is informed that the display of the predetermined suggested information is resumed after the second notification is completed. It becomes possible to comprehend. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

In addition, when an image obtained by reducing the image displayed as the predetermined suggested information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggested information in the second information game, the display of the predetermined suggested information is displayed after the second information is finished. It is possible not only to let the player know that the game will be restarted, but also to let the player know the display mode (type) of the predetermined suggestive information to be restarted in the first information game. As a result, it is possible to more appropriately prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and to further prevent the decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Properly prevented.

[Appendix O5]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) reduces the density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game, and displays the image in the second information game. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices O1 to O4, characterized in that it is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the (second special game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix O5, an image obtained by lowering the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game. In this way, an image obtained by lowering the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, and is executed in the second information game. Predetermined suggestive information can be easily and surely displayed without impeding visual recognition of the variable display of effects and patterns, and the display of the predetermined suggestive information can be restarted after the second notification is finished. It is possible to make people understand. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix O6]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) displays an image showing the contour of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game, in the second information game (second special figure game), the predetermined The gaming machine according to any one of appendices O1 to O5, characterized in that the information is displayed as suggestive information.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix O6, an image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game. In this way, the image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, so that the effect executed in the second information game It is possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without obstructing the visual recognition of the variable display of the pattern and the pattern, and the player can understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information is resumed after the second notification is finished. It is possible to grasp the As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix O7]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second information game (second special game). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices O1 to O6, characterized in that

In the gaming machine according to appendix O7, the specific image associated with the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second information game. In this way, the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, so that the effects and patterns executed in the second information game are changed. To easily and surely display predetermined suggestive information without obstructing visual recognition of the display, and to make a player understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information is resumed after the end of the second notification. becomes possible. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix O8]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices O1 to O7, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix O8, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed in the information game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the information game, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. . As a result, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game while anticipating the event, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix O9]
Supplementary notes O1 to Supplementary notes characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will cause the transition to the special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of O8.

In the gaming machine according to appendix O9, the predetermined suggestion information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of transition determination by the transition determination means will cause the transition to the special game state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will cause the transition to the special game state, so that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed. The progress of the game can be enjoyed while expecting that the game progresses, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the progress of the game is focused on whether the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state. Since it can be enjoyed, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix P1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
Predetermined prize winning openings (314, 315) that establish the determination condition with the entry of a game ball as a trigger;
An information game executing means (41) for executing an information game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
with
The transition determination means (41) is a first determination state (normal game state) in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state is a first probability, or the probability of being determined to be shifted to the special game state. performs the transition determination in the second determination state (variable probability gaming state), which is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between the first winning opening (314) and the allowable state in which entry of game balls is permitted, and the restricted state in which entry of game balls is restricted. including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314),
The information game (first special game or second special game) is the first information game (first special game) that is executed with the entry of the game ball into the first winning port (314) And a second information game (second special game) that is executed with the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315),
Predetermined suggestive information (information on jackpot expectation by first special drawing reservation continuous effect on jackpot expectation) in the predetermined first information game (first special drawing game in which the first special drawing reservation continuous effect is executed) Suggestion information display means (341) to display;
Reservation that can hold the right to execute the second information game (second special game) up to the upper limit number (for example, 4) that is executed when the game ball enters the second winning hole (315) means (41);
A specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning hole (315) is in the predetermined allowable state (long open);
with
The specific game state is based on the second winning port (315) being in the predetermined allowable state (long open), and the second information game is continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number. is in a state where it is possible to
Specification to display a specific effect image (image displayed by a second special figure special effect) corresponding to the second information game executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41) Effect image display means (51);
When the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second information game (second special game), the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed (for example, as a capture image 78 suggestive information continuation display means (51) for displaying);
a first display means (341) for displaying the specific effect image by the specific effect image display means (51);
a second display means (39 or the like) different from the first display means (341) on which the predetermined suggested information is displayed by the suggested information continuous display means (51);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note P1, the first display means for displaying the specific effect image corresponding to the second information game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state, and the second display for displaying the predetermined suggestive information. different from the means. Thus, the first display means for displaying the specific effect image corresponding to the second information game executed based on the occurrence of the specific game state is different from the second display means for displaying the predetermined suggestive information. Thus, it is possible to display the predetermined suggestive information on the second display means without obstructing the display of the specific effect image on the first display means. As a result, both the specific effect image and the predetermined suggestive information can be reliably and appropriately displayed without obstructing each other's visual recognition.

[Appendix P2]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) reduces the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game, and displays the predetermined suggested information in the second informal game (second special game). The gaming machine according to appendix P1, characterized in that it is displayed as information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix P2, an image obtained by reducing the image displayed as the predetermined suggested information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggested information in the second information game. In this way, an image obtained by reducing the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, so that the effect executed in the second information game Predetermined suggestive information can be easily and surely displayed without obstructing visual recognition of the variable display of patterns, and the player is informed that the display of the predetermined suggested information is resumed after the second notification is finished. It becomes possible to comprehend. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

In addition, when an image obtained by reducing the image displayed as the predetermined suggested information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggested information in the second information game, the display of the predetermined suggested information is displayed after the second information is finished. It is possible not only to let the player know that the game will be restarted, but also to let the player know the display mode (type) of the predetermined suggestive information to be restarted in the first information game. As a result, it is possible to more appropriately prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and further reduce the loss of interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Properly prevented.

[Appendix P3]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) reduces the density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game, and displays the image in the second information game. The gaming machine according to appendix P1 or appendix P2, characterized in that it is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in (second special game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix P3, an image obtained by lowering the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game. In this way, an image obtained by lowering the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, and is executed in the second information game. Predetermined suggestive information can be easily and surely displayed without impeding visual recognition of the variable display of effects and patterns, and the display of the predetermined suggestive information can be restarted after the second notification is finished. It is possible to make people understand. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix P4]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) displays an image showing the contour of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game, in the second information game (second special figure game), the predetermined The gaming machine according to any one of appendices P1 to P3, characterized in that the information is displayed as suggestive information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix P4, an image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game. In this way, the image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, so that the effect executed in the second information game It is possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without obstructing the visual recognition of the variable display of the pattern and the pattern, and the player can understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information is resumed after the second notification is finished. It is possible to grasp the As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix P5]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second information game (second special game). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices P1 to P4, characterized in that

In the gaming machine according to appendix P5, the specific image associated with the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second information game. In this way, the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, so that the effects and patterns executed in the second information game are changed. To easily and surely display predetermined suggestive information without obstructing visual recognition of the display, and to make a player understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information is resumed after the end of the second notification. becomes possible. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix P6]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices P1 to P5, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix P6, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed in the information game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the information game, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. . As a result, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game while anticipating the event, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix P7]
Supplementary notes P1 to Supplementary notes characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will cause the transition to the special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of P6.

In the gaming machine according to appendix P7, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of transition determination by the transition determination means will cause the transition to the special game state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will cause the transition to the special game state, so that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed. The progress of the game can be enjoyed while expecting that the game progresses, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the progress of the game is focused on whether the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state. Since it can be enjoyed, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix Q1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
Predetermined prize winning openings (314, 315) that establish the determination condition with the entry of a game ball as a trigger;
An information game executing means (41) for executing an information game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
with
The transition determination means (41) is a first determination state (normal game state) in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state is a first probability, or the probability of being determined to be shifted to the special game state. performs the transition determination in the second determination state (variable probability gaming state), which is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between the first winning opening (314) and the allowable state in which entry of game balls is permitted, and the restricted state in which entry of game balls is restricted. including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314),
The information game (first special game or second special game) is the first information game (first special game) that is executed with the entry of the game ball into the first winning port (314) And a second information game (second special game) that is executed with the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315),
Suggestion information display means (341) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (information about the degree of expectation of a big hit by the pending continuous performance of the degree of expectation of a big win) in the predetermined first information game (the first special game in which the continuous performance of the reservation is executed) )and,
Reservation that can hold the right to execute the second information game (second special game) up to the upper limit number (for example, 4) that is executed when the game ball enters the second winning hole (315) means (41);
A specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning hole (315) is in the predetermined allowable state (long open);
with
The specific game state is based on the second winning port (315) being in the predetermined allowable state (long open), and the second information game is continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number. is in a state where it is possible to
Specification to display a specific effect image (image displayed by a second special figure special effect) corresponding to the second information game executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41) Effect image display means (51);
When the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second information game (second special game), the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed (for example, as a capture image 78 suggestive information continuation display means (51) for displaying);
with
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) is the second informal game (second special symbol game) executed next to the first informal game (first special symbol game) in which the predetermined suggested information is displayed. , wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed in a manner different from that of the first information game (first special game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix Q1, in the second information game executed after the first information game in which the predetermined suggestion information is displayed, the predetermined suggestion information is displayed in a manner different from that of the first information game. Thus, in the second information game executed next to the first information game in which the predetermined suggestion information is displayed, the predetermined suggestion information is displayed in a manner different from that in the first information game, whereby the second information game is displayed. It is possible to make the player understand in various modes that the predetermined suggestive information was displayed before the start of the information game and that the display of the predetermined suggestive information is resumed after the second information game is finished. At the same time, it is possible for the player to understand the performance and the variable display of the symbols executed in the second information game without obstructing the visual recognition.

[Appendix Q2]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) reduces the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game, and displays the predetermined suggested information in the second informal game (second special game). The gaming machine according to appendix Q1, wherein the information is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix Q2, an image obtained by reducing the image displayed as the predetermined suggested information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggested information in the second information game. In this way, an image obtained by reducing the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, so that the effect executed in the second information game Predetermined suggestive information can be easily and surely displayed without obstructing visual recognition of the variable display of patterns, and the player is informed that the display of the predetermined suggested information is resumed after the second notification is finished. It becomes possible to comprehend. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

In addition, when an image obtained by reducing the image displayed as the predetermined suggested information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggested information in the second information game, the display of the predetermined suggested information is displayed after the second information is finished. It is possible not only to let the player know that the game will be restarted, but also to let the player know the display mode (type) of the predetermined suggestive information to be restarted in the first information game. As a result, it is possible to more appropriately prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and to further prevent the decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Properly prevented.

[Appendix Q3]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) reduces the density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game, and displays the image in the second information game. The gaming machine according to appendix Q1 or appendix Q2, characterized in that it is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in (second special game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix Q3, an image obtained by lowering the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game. In this way, an image obtained by lowering the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, and is executed in the second information game. Predetermined suggestive information can be easily and surely displayed without impeding visual recognition of the variable display of effects and patterns, and the display of the predetermined suggestive information can be restarted after the second notification is finished. It is possible to make people understand. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix Q4]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) displays an image showing the contour of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game, in the second information game (second special figure game), the predetermined The gaming machine according to any one of additional notes Q1 to Q3, characterized in that the information is displayed as suggestive information.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix Q4, an image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game. In this way, the image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, so that the effect executed in the second information game It is possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without obstructing the visual recognition of the variable display of the pattern and the pattern, and the player can understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information is resumed after the second notification is completed. It is possible to grasp the As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix Q5]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second information game (second special game). The game machine according to any one of appendices Q1 to Q4, characterized in that

In the gaming machine according to appendix Q5, the specific image associated with the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second information game. In this way, the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, so that the effects and patterns executed in the second information game are changed. To easily and surely display predetermined suggestive information without obstructing visual recognition of the display, and to make a player understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information is resumed after the end of the second notification. becomes possible. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix Q6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is reported by stopping and displaying the symbols displayed in a variable manner,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices Q1 to Q5, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix Q6, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed in the information game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the information game, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. . As a result, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game while anticipating the event, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix Q7]
Supplementary notes Q1 to Supplementary notes characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will cause the transition to the special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of Q6.

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note Q7, the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of transition determination by the transition determination means will cause the transition to the special game state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will cause the transition to the special game state, so that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed. The progress of the game can be enjoyed while expecting that the game progresses, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the progress of the game is focused on whether the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state. Since it can be enjoyed, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix R1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
A predetermined prize winning port (314, 315) that satisfies the determination condition with the entry of a game ball as a trigger;
An information game executing means (41) for executing an information game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
with
The transition determination means (41) is a first determination state (normal game state) in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state is a first probability, or the probability of being determined to be shifted to the special game state. performs the transition determination in the second determination state (variable probability gaming state), which is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between the first winning opening (314) and the allowable state in which entry of game balls is permitted, and the restricted state in which entry of game balls is restricted. including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314),
The information game (first special game or second special game) is the first information game (first special game) that is executed with the entry of the game ball into the first winning port (314) And a second information game (second special game) that is executed with the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315),
Suggestion information display means (341) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (information about the degree of expectation of a big hit by the pending continuous performance of the degree of expectation of a big win) in the predetermined first information game (the first special game in which the continuous performance of the reservation is executed) )and,
Reservation that can hold the right to execute the second information game (second special game) up to the upper limit number (for example, 4) that is executed when the game ball enters the second winning hole (315) means (41);
A specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning hole (315) is in the predetermined allowable state (long open);
with
The specific game state is based on the second winning port (315) being in the predetermined allowable state (long open), and the second information game is continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number. is in a state where it is possible to
Specification to display a specific effect image (image displayed by a second special figure special effect) corresponding to the second information game executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41) Effect image display means (51);
When the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second information game (second special game), the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed (for example, as a capture image 78 suggestive information continuation display means (51) for displaying);
with
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified by stopping display of the symbols displayed in a variable manner,
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) is characterized in that, in the second information game, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed on the front side or the back side of the symbols displayed in a variable manner. game machine.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note R1, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed on the front side or the back side of the symbols that are variably displayed in the second information game. In this way, the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed on the front side or the back side of the symbols that are variably displayed in the second information game, so that the player who pays attention to the variation of the symbols in the second information game. , the user can easily notice that the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed. As a result, the player can easily and reliably understand that the predetermined suggested information was displayed before the start of the second information game and that the display of the predetermined suggested information is resumed after the second information game is finished. can be made

[Appendix R2]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) reduces the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game, and displays the predetermined suggested information in the second informal game (second special game). The gaming machine according to appendix R1, wherein the information is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix R2, an image obtained by reducing the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second information game. In this way, an image obtained by reducing the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, so that the effect executed in the second information game Predetermined suggestive information can be easily and surely displayed without obstructing visual recognition of the variable display of patterns, and the player is informed that the display of the predetermined suggested information is resumed after the second notification is finished. It becomes possible to comprehend. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

In addition, when an image obtained by reducing the image displayed as the predetermined suggested information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggested information in the second information game, the display of the predetermined suggested information is displayed after the second information is finished. It is possible not only to let the player know that the game will be restarted, but also to let the player know the display mode (type) of the predetermined suggestive information to be restarted in the first information game. As a result, it is possible to more appropriately prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and to further prevent the decrease in interest in the game due to the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Properly prevented.

[Appendix R3]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) reduces the density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game, and displays the image in the second information game. The gaming machine according to appendix R1 or appendix R2, characterized in that it is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in (second special game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix R3, an image obtained by lowering the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game. In this way, an image obtained by lowering the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, and is executed in the second information game. Predetermined suggestive information can be easily and surely displayed without impeding visual recognition of the variable display of effects and patterns, and the display of the predetermined suggestive information can be restarted after the second notification is finished. It is possible to make people understand. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix R4]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) displays an image showing the contour of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game, in the second information game (second special figure game), the predetermined The gaming machine according to any one of appendices R1 to R3, characterized in that the information is displayed as suggestive information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix R4, an image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second information game. In this way, the image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, so that the effect executed in the second information game It is possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without obstructing the visual recognition of the variable display of the pattern and the pattern, and the player can understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information is resumed after the second notification is finished. It is possible to grasp the As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix R5]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second information game (second special game). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices R1 to R4, characterized in that

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note R5, the specific image associated with the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second information game. In this way, the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, so that the effects and patterns executed in the second information game are changed. To easily and surely display predetermined suggestive information without obstructing visual recognition of the display, and to make a player understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information is resumed after the end of the second notification. becomes possible. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix R6]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices R1 to R5, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix R6, the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed in the information game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestive information is an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the information game, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. . As a result, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game while anticipating the event, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix R7]
Supplementary notes R1 to Supplementary notes characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will cause the transition to the special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of R6.

In the gaming machine according to appendix R7, the predetermined suggestion information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of transition determination by the transition determination means will cause the transition to the special game state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will cause the transition to the special game state, so that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed. The progress of the game can be enjoyed while expecting that the game progresses, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the progress of the game is focused on whether the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state. Since it can be enjoyed, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix S1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
Predetermined prize winning openings (314, 315) that establish the determination condition with the entry of a game ball as a trigger;
An information game executing means (41) for executing an information game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
with
The transition determination means (41) is a first determination state (normal game state) in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state is a first probability, or the probability of being determined to be shifted to the special game state. performs the transition determination in the second determination state (variable probability gaming state), which is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between the first winning opening (314) and the allowable state in which entry of game balls is permitted, and the restricted state in which entry of game balls is restricted. including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314),
The information game (first special game or second special game) is the first information game (first special game) that is executed with the entry of the game ball into the first winning port (314) And a second information game (second special game) that is executed with the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315),
Suggestion information display means (341) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (information about the degree of expectation of a big hit by the pending continuous performance of the degree of expectation of a big win) in the predetermined first information game (the first special game in which the continuous performance of the reservation is executed) )and,
Reservation that can hold the right to execute the second information game (second special game) up to the upper limit number (for example, 4) that is executed when the game ball enters the second winning hole (315) means (41);
A specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning hole (315) is in the predetermined allowable state (long open);
with
The specific game state is based on the second winning port (315) being in the predetermined allowable state (long open), and the second information game is continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number. is in a state where it is possible to
Specification to display a specific effect image (image displayed by a second special figure special effect) corresponding to the second information game executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41) Effect image display means (51);
When the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second information game (second special game), the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed (for example, as a capture image 78 suggestive information continuation display means (51) for displaying);
with
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is reported by stopping and displaying the symbols displayed in a variable manner,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed.

In the gaming machine according to S1, the result of transition determination by the transition determination means is notified by statically displaying symbols that are variably displayed, and predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of a combination of symbols that are statically displayed. As a result, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. As a result, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game while anticipating the event, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix S2]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) reduces the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game, and displays the predetermined suggested information in the second informal game (second special game). The gaming machine according to appendix S1, wherein the information is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to S2, an image obtained by reducing the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second information game. In this way, an image obtained by reducing the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, so that the effect executed in the second information game Predetermined suggestive information can be easily and surely displayed without obstructing visual recognition of the variable display of patterns, and the player is informed that the display of the predetermined suggested information is resumed after the second notification is finished. It becomes possible to comprehend. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

In addition, when an image obtained by reducing the image displayed as the predetermined suggested information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggested information in the second information game, the display of the predetermined suggested information is displayed after the second information is finished. It is possible not only to let the player know that the game will be restarted, but also to let the player know the display mode (type) of the predetermined suggestive information to be restarted in the first information game. As a result, it is possible to more appropriately prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and further reduce the loss of interest in the game caused by the resumption of the display of the predetermined suggestive information. Properly prevented.

[Appendix S3]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) reduces the density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game, and displays the image in the second information game. The gaming machine according to appendix S1 or appendix S2, characterized in that it is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in (second special game).

In the gaming machine according to S3, an image obtained by lowering the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second information game. In this way, an image obtained by lowering the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, and is executed in the second information game. Predetermined suggestive information can be easily and surely displayed without impeding visual recognition of the variable display of effects and patterns, and the display of the predetermined suggestive information can be restarted after the second notification is finished. It is possible to make people understand. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix S4]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) displays an image showing the contour of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game, in the second information game (second special figure game), the predetermined The gaming machine according to any one of appendices S1 to S3, characterized in that the information is displayed as suggestive information.

In the gaming machine according to S4, an image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game. In this way, the image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, so that the effect executed in the second information game It is possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without obstructing the visual recognition of the variable display of the pattern and the pattern, and the player can understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information is resumed after the second notification is completed. It is possible to grasp the As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix S5]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) displays a specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game as the predetermined suggestive information in the second information game (second special game). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices S1 to S4, characterized in that

In the gaming machine according to S5, the specific image associated with the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the second information game. In this way, the specific image corresponding to the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, so that the effects and patterns executed in the second information game are changed. To easily and surely display predetermined suggestive information without obstructing visual recognition of the display, and to make a player understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information is resumed after the end of the second notification. becomes possible. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix S6]
Supplementary note S1 to Supplementary note characterized in that the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will cause the transition to the special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of S5.

In the gaming machine pertaining to supplementary note S6, the predetermined suggestion information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of transition determination by the transition determination means will cause the transition to the special game state. In this way, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will cause the transition to the special game state, so that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed. The progress of the game can be enjoyed while expecting that the game progresses, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the progress of the game is focused on whether the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game state. Since it can be enjoyed, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix T1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination means (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed 41) and
A predetermined prize winning port (314, 315) that satisfies the determination condition with the entry of a game ball as a trigger;
An information game executing means (41) for executing an information game (first special symbol game or second special symbol game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41);
with
The transition determination means (41) is a first determination state (normal game state) in which the probability of being determined to shift to the special game state is a first probability, or the probability of being determined to be shifted to the special game state. performs the transition determination in the second determination state (variable probability gaming state), which is a second probability higher than the first probability,
The predetermined winning openings (314, 315) can be switched between the first winning opening (314) and the allowable state in which entry of game balls is permitted, and the restricted state in which entry of game balls is restricted. including a second winning opening (315) different from the first winning opening (314),
The information game (first special game or second special game) is the first information game (first special game) that is executed with the entry of the game ball into the first winning port (314) And a second information game (second special game) that is executed with the entry of a game ball into the second winning hole (315),
Suggestion information display means (341) for displaying predetermined suggestion information (information about the degree of expectation of a big hit by the pending continuous performance of the degree of expectation of a big win) in the predetermined first information game (the first special game in which the continuous performance of the reservation is executed) )and,
Reservation that can hold the right to execute the second information game (second special game) up to the upper limit number (for example, 4) that is executed when the game ball enters the second winning hole (315) means (41);
A specific game state generating means (41) capable of generating a specific game state in which the second winning hole (315) is in the predetermined allowable state (long open);
with
The specific game state is based on the second winning port (315) being in the predetermined allowable state (long open), and the second information game is continuously generated a specific number of times equal to or greater than the upper limit number. is in a state where it is possible to
Specification to display a specific effect image (image displayed by a second special figure special effect) corresponding to the second information game executed based on the generation of the specific game state by the specific game state generating means (41) Effect image display means (51);
When the specific effect image is displayed by the specific effect image display means (51) in the second information game (second special game), the predetermined suggestive information is continuously displayed (for example, as a capture image 78 suggestive information continuation display means (51) for displaying);
with
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined suggestive information indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) will cause the transition to the special game state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T1, the specific effect image and the predetermined effect image indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means will cause the transition to the special game state, thereby providing the predetermined suggestion. It is possible to enjoy the progress of the game while expecting the information to be displayed, and when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, attention is paid to whether the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game state. Since the progress of the game can be enjoyed, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix T2]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) reduces the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first informal game, and displays the predetermined suggestive image in the second informal game (second special figure game). The game machine according to appendix T1, characterized in that it is displayed as information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T2, an image obtained by reducing the image displayed as the predetermined suggested information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggested information in the second information game. In this way, an image obtained by reducing the image displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, so that the effect executed in the second information game Predetermined suggestive information can be easily and surely displayed without impeding visual recognition of the variable display of patterns, and the player is informed that the display of the predetermined suggested information is resumed after the second notification is completed. It becomes possible to comprehend. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix T3]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) reduces the density (for example, at least one of brightness and saturation) of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game, and displays the image in the second information game. The gaming machine according to appendix T1 or appendix T2, characterized in that it is displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in (second special game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix T3, an image obtained by lowering the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game. In this way, an image obtained by lowering the density of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, and is executed in the second information game. Predetermined suggestive information can be easily and surely displayed without impeding visual recognition of the variable display of effects and patterns, and the display of the predetermined suggestive information can be restarted after the second notification is finished. It is possible to make people understand. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix T4]
The suggestive information continuous display means (51) displays an image showing the contour of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestive information in the first information game, in the second information game (second special figure game), the predetermined The gaming machine according to any one of appendices T1 to T3, characterized in that the information is displayed as suggestive information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T4, an image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game. In this way, the image showing the outline of the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, so that the effect executed in the second information game It is possible to easily and reliably display the predetermined suggestive information without obstructing the visual recognition of the variable display of the pattern and the pattern, and the player can understand that the display of the predetermined suggestive information is resumed after the second notification is completed. It is possible to grasp the As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix T5]
The suggested information continuous display means (51) displays a character image corresponding to the image displayed as the predetermined suggested information in the first information game, in the second information game (second special figure game), the predetermined The gaming machine according to any one of appendices T1 to T4, characterized in that the information is displayed as suggestive information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T5, a character image corresponding to the image displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the first information game is displayed as predetermined suggestive information in the second information game. In this way, the character image corresponding to the image displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the first information game is displayed as the predetermined suggestion information in the second information game, and is executed in the second information game. Predetermined suggestive information can be easily and surely displayed without impeding visual recognition of the variable display of effects and patterns, and the display of the predetermined suggestive information can be restarted after the second notification is finished. It is possible to make people understand. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information, and the loss of interest in the game due to the restart of the display of the predetermined suggestive information is prevented.

[Appendix T6]
The result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is reported by stopping and displaying the symbols displayed in a variable manner,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices T1 to T5, wherein the predetermined suggestive information is displayed by an image including an image of the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix T6, the predetermined suggestive information is an image of a combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed on the display means in the information game. In this way, since the predetermined suggestive information is an image of a combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the display means in the information game, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined suggestive information has been displayed. . As a result, the player can easily understand that the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously, so that when the predetermined suggestive information is displayed, the predetermined suggestive information is displayed continuously. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game while anticipating the event, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix A1]
Predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (second time-saving game state) in which a predetermined profit can be granted in a predetermined period based on establishment of a first opportunity (a jackpot lottery result in a normal game state is a jackpot) )and,
The first state (the setting of the number of time-saving games is invalidated (maintenance state of the second time-saving game state)) or the second state that is more profitable than the first state (the setting of the number of time-saving games is enabled) A state execution means (41) capable of executing the state (third time-saving game state);
with
The state execution means (41)
A specific value determining means for determining a specific value (number of times of time-saving games) when a second opportunity different from the first opportunity (a jackpot lottery result in a second time-saving game state is out of time-saving symbol stoppage) is established in the predetermined state. and,
means capable of executing the second state when a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state;
means capable of executing the first state when the specific state is not established when the second trigger is established;
with
The specific state is a state in which there is a predetermined period or more of the execution period that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established (the second The number of time-saving games set for the fact that the jackpot lottery result in the two-time-saving game state is out of stoppage of the time-saving pattern is larger than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state). game machine.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A1, when the second opportunity different from the first opportunity is established in the predetermined state executed by the establishment of the first opportunity, the profit is higher than the first state when the specific state is established. While two states are executed, the first state is executed if the specified condition is not satisfied. In this way, when a second trigger different from the first trigger is established in a predetermined state that is executed when the first trigger is established, the second state that is more profitable than the first state is executed when the specific state is established. On the other hand, in order to execute the second state with high profit by executing the first state when the specific state is not established, execution of the predetermined state by the establishment of the first trigger, A new game feature is imparted on the condition that the second opportunity is established, and that a specific state is established when the second opportunity is established. As a result, the player enjoys the progress of the game while expecting the first opportunity to be established, and pays attention to whether or not the second opportunity is established in a predetermined state executed after the first opportunity is established. , and further, when the second opportunity is established, the user can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether the specific condition is satisfied or not, so that the amusement of the game is improved.

Further, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A1, an execution period that can be executed is set based on a predetermined specific value that is determined when the second opportunity is established. In this way, by setting the execution period that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value determined when the second trigger is established, the period of the second state is set as a value dependent on the predetermined specific value. be done. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the predetermined specific value when the second opportunity is established, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, the period during which the specific state can be executed after the predetermined state ends, out of the execution period during which the specific state can be executed based on the predetermined specific value at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established, is It is in a state where there is more than a predetermined amount. In this way, the specific state is a state in which there is a predetermined period or more of the execution period that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established, and the period that can be executed after the predetermined state ends. As a result, the stage at which the specific state can be established and the criteria for success or failure of the specific state are clarified, making it easier to grasp the stage at which the specific state can be established and the success or failure of the specific state. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the predetermined specific value at the stage when the predetermined second opportunity is established, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

[Appendix B1]
Predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (second time-saving game state) in which a predetermined profit can be granted in a predetermined period based on establishment of a first opportunity (a jackpot lottery result in a normal game state is a jackpot) )and,
The first state (the setting of the number of time-saving games is invalidated (maintenance state of the second time-saving game state)) or the second state that is more profitable than the first state (the setting of the number of time-saving games is enabled) A state execution means (41) capable of executing the state (third time-saving game state);
with
The state execution means (41)
A specific value determining means for determining a specific value (number of times of time-saving games) when a second opportunity different from the first opportunity (a jackpot lottery result in a second time-saving game state is out of time-saving symbol stoppage) is established in the predetermined state. and,
means capable of executing the second state when a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state;
means capable of executing the first state when the specific state is not established when the second trigger is established;
with
The specific state is a state in which there is a predetermined period or more of the execution period that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established (the second The number of time-saving games set for the fact that the jackpot lottery result in the two-time-saving game state is out of stoppage of time-saving symbols is greater than the remaining number of times of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state),
The probability that the second opportunity (the jackpot lottery result in the second time-saving game state is out of time-saving symbol stoppage) is established in the predetermined state (second time-saving game state) is the same in the entire period of the predetermined period Characteristic game machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B1, the probability that the second opportunity is established in the predetermined state is the same throughout the predetermined period. In this way, since the probability that the second trigger is established in the predetermined period of the predetermined state is the same for the entire period of the predetermined period, the timing of the establishment of the second trigger in the predetermined period becomes random. The second opportunity can be established during the entire period of the predetermined period. As a result, since the second opportunity can be expected to be established during the entire period of the predetermined period of the predetermined state, the player may suffer the disadvantage that the second opportunity is not established during a part of the predetermined period of the predetermined state. Instead, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game during the entire period of the predetermined period of the predetermined state.

[Appendix B2]
When the second opportunity is established in the predetermined period of the predetermined state (second time saving game state) (remaining time saving pattern stop off), the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state (remaining time saving number of times), the specific state The game machine according to appendix B1, characterized in that it is easy to establish.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B2, when the second opportunity is established in the predetermined state, the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state, the easier it is for the specific condition to be established. In this way, when the second trigger is established in a predetermined state, the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state, the easier it is for the specific condition to be satisfied. , the probability that the specific condition will be satisfied is increased, and the possibility that the second state will be executed is increased, and the expectation that the expectation is increased is provided. As a result, while feeling anxiety due to the approaching end of the predetermined period, the progress of the game can be enjoyed with expectation that the second opportunity will be established when the end of the predetermined period is approaching. be improved.

[Appendix B3]
When the specific condition is satisfied when the second opportunity is established (time saving pattern stop off) in the predetermined state (second time saving game state), the remaining period of the predetermined state (remaining time saving number of times) Depending on the second The gaming machine according to appendix B1 or appendix B2, characterized in that the magnitudes of profits (number of times of time-saving games) are different in the two states (third time-saving game state).

In the gaming machine according to appendix B3, if the specific condition is satisfied when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state, the amount of profit in the second state differs depending on the remaining period of the predetermined state. In this way, when the specific condition is satisfied when the second trigger is satisfied in the predetermined state, the magnitude of the profit in the second state differs depending on the remaining period of the predetermined state. Since the progress of the game can be enjoyed while paying attention to the timing when the opportunity is established, the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix B4]
If the specific condition is satisfied when the second opportunity is established (time saving pattern stop off) in the predetermined state (second time saving game state), the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state (remaining time saving number of times), The gaming machine according to appendix B3, wherein a profit (number of times of time-saving games) is large in the second state (third time-saving game state).

In the gaming machine according to appendix B4, if the specific condition is satisfied when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state, the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state, the greater the profit in the second state. In this way, when the specific condition is satisfied when the second trigger is satisfied in the predetermined state, the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state, the greater the profit in the second state. The closer the end of the predetermined period is, the more likely it is to receive a high profit in the second state. As a result, the game progresses while feeling anxiety due to the approach of the end of the predetermined period, but with expectation that a high profit can be received in the second state due to the establishment of the second opportunity when the end of the predetermined period approaches. can be enjoyed, the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix C1]
Predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (second time-saving game state) in which a predetermined profit can be granted in a predetermined period based on establishment of a first opportunity (a jackpot lottery result in a normal game state is a jackpot) )and,
The first state (the setting of the number of time-saving games is invalidated (maintenance state of the second time-saving game state)) or the second state that is more profitable than the first state (the setting of the number of time-saving games is enabled) A state execution means (41) capable of executing the state (third time-saving game state);
with
The state execution means (41)
A specific value determining means for determining a specific value (number of times of time-saving games) when a second opportunity different from the first opportunity (a jackpot lottery result in a second time-saving game state is out of time-saving symbol stoppage) is established in the predetermined state. and,
means capable of executing the second state when a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state;
means capable of executing the first state when the specific state is not established when the second trigger is established;
with
The specific state is a state in which there is a predetermined period or more of the execution period that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established (the second The number of time-saving games set for the fact that the jackpot lottery result in the two-time-saving game state is out of stoppage of time-saving symbols is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state),
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined period is set longer than the execution period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C1, the predetermined period is set longer than the execution period. By setting the predetermined period to be longer than the execution period in this manner, there may occur a situation in which the specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state, and a situation in which the specific state is not established. Therefore, whether or not the specific state is established in the predetermined state depends on the timing at which the second opportunity is established during the predetermined period from the start to the end of the predetermined state. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the timing of the establishment of the second opportunity while expecting the second opportunity to be established in the predetermined state, thereby improving the interest of the game. .

[Appendix C2]
A plurality of types of the specific value are set including the predetermined specific value,
A plurality of types of execution periods are set corresponding to the specific values,
The gaming machine according to appendix C1, wherein the specific value determining means sets the predetermined specific value from the plurality of specific values when the second trigger is established.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C2, the execution period is set from a plurality of execution periods based on a predetermined specific value set from a plurality of specific values when the second opportunity is established. In this way, by setting the execution period from a plurality of execution periods based on a predetermined specific value set from a plurality of specific values when the second trigger is established, the execution period is set to the predetermined specific value. Since it differs depending on the type, success or failure of the specific state depends on the type of the predetermined characteristic value. As a result, when the second trigger is established, it becomes difficult to grasp the success or failure of the specific state from the predetermined specific value. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game in anticipation that the specific state will be established while paying attention to the type of the predetermined characteristic value when the second opportunity is established, thereby improving the interest of the game. be done.

[Appendix C3]
The gaming machine according to appendix C2, wherein the plurality of types of execution periods include two or more types of execution periods with different benefits when the second state is executed by the state execution means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C3, the plurality of types of execution periods include two or more types of execution periods with different benefits when the second state is executed. In this way, the plurality of types of execution periods include two or more types of execution periods with different benefits when the second state is executed, so that the benefits when the second state is executed vary according to the execution periods. set. Therefore, by paying attention to the execution period set at the stage when the second opportunity is established, the player can grasp the level of profit when the second state is executed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the level of attention and interest in the execution period set at the stage when the second opportunity is established, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix C4]
Appendix C3, wherein, in the two or more types of execution periods, the higher the profit when the second state is executed by the state execution means (41), the higher the probability that the specific state is established. game machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C4, the higher the profit when the second state is executed in the two or more types of execution periods, the higher the probability that the specific state is established. In this way, in two or more types of execution periods, the higher the profit when the second state is executed, the higher the probability that the specific state is established. It is possible to enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that an execution period with a high profit is set, and enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that a specific state will be established when the execution period with a high profit is set. Therefore, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix C5]
The gaming machine according to appendix C1, wherein the execution period is of one type.

The gaming machine according to appendix C5 has one type of execution period. In this way, since there is one type of execution period, the execution period when the second trigger is established is set as a fixed period. This makes it easier to grasp the success or failure of the specific state based on the timing at which the second trigger is established in the predetermined state. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game in anticipation of the establishment of the specific state while paying attention to the timing of the establishment of the second trigger in the predetermined state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix D1]
Predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (second time-saving game state) in which a predetermined profit can be granted in a predetermined period based on establishment of a first opportunity (a jackpot lottery result in a normal game state is a jackpot) )and,
The first state (the setting of the number of time-saving games is invalidated (maintenance state of the second time-saving game state)) or the second state that is more profitable than the first state (the setting of the number of time-saving games is enabled) A state execution means (41) capable of executing the state (third time-saving game state);
with
The state execution means (41)
A specific value determining means for determining a specific value (number of times of time-saving games) when a second opportunity different from the first opportunity (a jackpot lottery result in a second time-saving game state is out of time-saving symbol stoppage) is established in the predetermined state. and,
means capable of executing the second state when a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state;
means capable of executing the first state when the specific state is not established when the second trigger is established;
with
The specific state is a state in which there is a predetermined period or more of the execution period that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established (the second The number of time-saving games set for the fact that the jackpot lottery result in the two-time-saving game state is out of stoppage of time-saving symbols is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state),
specific timing determination means (41) for determining whether or not it is a specific timing in the predetermined period in which the predetermined state is executed;
Effect executing means (51) for executing a predetermined effect in the predetermined state;
with
The effect executing means (51)
After the execution of the predetermined state is started by the predetermined state execution means (41), the first effect is executed as the predetermined effect until the specific timing determination means (41) determines that the specific timing has come. means and
means for executing a second effect different from the first effect as the predetermined effect in the predetermined period after the specific timing determination means (41) determines that it is the specific timing;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix D1, the first effect is executed until a specific timing in a predetermined period after execution of the predetermined state is started, and the second effect different from the first effect is executed after the specific timing. In this way, the first effect is executed until the specific timing in the predetermined period after the execution of the predetermined state is started, and the second effect different from the first effect is executed after the specific timing. Also, it is possible to suppress a feeling of boredom and a decrease in interest in the game during a predetermined period in which the predetermined state is executed, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

[Appendix D2]
The gaming machine according to appendix D1, wherein in the predetermined period during which the predetermined state is executed, a profit state given to the player is different between before the specific timing and after the specific timing.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D2, in the predetermined period in which the predetermined state is executed, the profit state provided to the player is different between before the specific timing and after the specific timing. Further, in the predetermined period, the first effect is executed until the specific timing, and the second effect different from the first effect is executed after the specific timing. Therefore, the player can grasp that the specific timing has come by switching the predetermined effect executed in the predetermined period from the first effect to the second effect. In other words, the player can grasp that the state of profit given has changed by switching from the first effect to the second effect. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the change in the profit state while paying attention to the switching from the first effect to the second effect in the predetermined period during which the predetermined state is executed. interest is further improved.

[Appendix D3]
The gaming machine according to appendix D2, wherein in the predetermined period during which the predetermined state is executed, the profit state is higher after the specific timing than before the specific timing.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D3, in the predetermined period in which the predetermined state is executed, the profit state is higher after the specific timing than before the specific timing. That is, when switching from the first effect to the second effect in a predetermined period, the profit status is higher when the second effect is executed than when the first effect is executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game in anticipation of switching to the second effect executed when the profit condition is high compared to the case where the first effect is executed in the predetermined period. Therefore, the amusement of the game is further improved.

[Appendix D4]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D3, wherein the specific timing is a timing at which the specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D4, the specific timing is the timing at which the specific state is established when the second opportunity is established in the predetermined state. Thus, the specific timing is the timing at which the specific state is established, so that the player is in the first state when the first effect is executed during the predetermined period, and the second effect is executed during the predetermined period. If there is, it can be grasped based on the type of predetermined effect that the second state is more profitable than the first state. That is, the player can understand that the first state has been changed to the second state, which is more profitable, by switching from the first effect to the second effect in a predetermined period. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that the first effect will be switched to the second effect in the predetermined period, so that the game is more interesting.

[Appendix E1]
Predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (second time-saving game state) in which a predetermined profit can be granted in a predetermined period based on establishment of a first opportunity (a jackpot lottery result in a normal game state is a jackpot) )and,
The first state (the setting of the number of time-saving games is invalidated (maintenance state of the second time-saving game state)) or the second state that is more profitable than the first state (the setting of the number of time-saving games is enabled) A state execution means (41) capable of executing the state (third time-saving game state);
with
The state execution means (41)
A specific value determining means for determining a specific value (number of times of time-saving games) when a second opportunity different from the first opportunity (a jackpot lottery result in a second time-saving game state is out of time-saving symbol stoppage) is established in the predetermined state. and,
means capable of executing the second state when a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state;
means capable of executing the first state when the specific state is not established when the second trigger is established;
with
The specific state is
A state in which a period that can be executed after the predetermined state ends out of the execution period that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value at the stage when the predetermined second opportunity is established (in the second time-saving game state The number of time-saving games set for the jackpot lottery result being out of stoppage of the time-saving symbols is greater than the number of remaining time-saving games in the second time-saving game state),
A gaming machine characterized in that, even if the predetermined second opportunity is established, it is not established until a predetermined timing after execution of the predetermined state by the predetermined state execution means (41) is started.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E1, the specific state is not established until the predetermined timing after the execution of the predetermined state is started, even if the predetermined second opportunity is established. In this way, even if the second trigger is established, it does not occur from the start of execution of the prescribed state until the prescribed timing. is established and a situation where the specific state is not established can occur. Therefore, whether or not the specific state is established in the predetermined state depends on the timing at which the second opportunity is established during the predetermined period from the start to the end of the predetermined state. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the timing of the establishment of the second opportunity while expecting the second opportunity to be established in the predetermined state, thereby improving the interest of the game. .

[Appendix E2]
A plurality of types of the specific value are set including the predetermined specific value,
A plurality of types of execution periods are set corresponding to the specific values,
The gaming machine according to appendix E1, wherein the specific value determining means sets the predetermined specific value from the plurality of specific values when the second trigger is established.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E2, the execution period is set from a plurality of execution periods based on a predetermined specific value set from a plurality of specific values when the second opportunity is established. In this way, by setting the execution period from a plurality of execution periods based on a predetermined specific value set from a plurality of specific values when the second trigger is established, the execution period is set to the predetermined specific value. Since it differs depending on the type, success or failure of the specific state depends on the type of the predetermined characteristic value. As a result, when the second trigger is established, it becomes difficult to grasp the success or failure of the specific state from the predetermined specific value. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game in anticipation that the specific state will be established while paying attention to the type of the predetermined characteristic value when the second opportunity is established, thereby improving the interest of the game. be done.

[Appendix E3]
The gaming machine according to appendix E2, wherein the plurality of types of execution periods include two or more types of execution periods with different benefits when the second state is executed by the state execution means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix E3, the plurality of types of execution periods include two or more types of execution periods with different benefits when the second state is executed. In this way, the plurality of types of execution periods include two or more types of execution periods with different benefits when the second state is executed, so that the benefits when the second state is executed vary according to the execution periods. set. Therefore, by paying attention to the execution period set at the stage when the second opportunity is established, the player can grasp the level of profit when the second state is executed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the level of attention and interest in the execution period set at the stage when the second opportunity is established, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix E4]
Appendix E3, characterized in that the two or more types of execution periods have a higher probability that the specific state is established as the profit when the second state is executed by the state execution means (41) increases. game machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E4, the higher the profit when the second state is executed in the two or more types of execution periods, the higher the probability that the specific state is established. In this way, in two or more types of execution periods, the higher the profit when the second state is executed, the higher the probability that the specific state is established. It is possible to enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that an execution period with a high profit is set, and enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that a specific state will be established when the execution period with a high profit is set. Therefore, the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix E5]
The gaming machine according to appendix E1, wherein the execution period is of one type.

The gaming machine according to appendix E5 has one type of execution period. In this way, since there is one type of execution period, the execution period when the second trigger is established is set as a fixed period. This makes it easier to grasp the success or failure of the specific state based on the timing at which the second trigger is established in the predetermined state. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game in anticipation of the establishment of the specific state while paying attention to the timing of the establishment of the second trigger in the predetermined state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix F1]
Predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (second time-saving game state) in which a predetermined profit can be granted in a predetermined period based on establishment of a first opportunity (a jackpot lottery result in a normal game state is a jackpot) )and,
The first state (the setting of the number of time-saving games is invalidated (maintenance state of the second time-saving game state)) or the second state that is more profitable than the first state (the setting of the number of time-saving games is enabled) A state execution means (41) capable of executing the state (third time-saving game state);
with
The state execution means (41)
A specific value determining means for determining a specific value (number of times of time-saving games) when a second opportunity different from the first opportunity (a jackpot lottery result in a second time-saving game state is out of time-saving symbol stoppage) is established in the predetermined state. and,
means capable of executing the second state when a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state;
means capable of executing the first state when the specific state is not established when the second trigger is established;
with
The specific state is
A state in which a period that can be executed after the predetermined state ends out of the execution period that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value at the stage when the predetermined second opportunity is established (in the second time-saving game state The number of time-saving games set for the fact that the jackpot lottery result is out of stoppage of the time-saving pattern is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state),
A plurality of types of the specific value are set including the predetermined specific value,
A plurality of types of execution periods are set corresponding to the specific values,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific value determining means sets the predetermined specific value from the plurality of specific values when the second trigger is established.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F1, the execution period is set from a plurality of execution periods based on a predetermined specific value set from a plurality of specific values when the second opportunity is established. In this way, by setting the execution period from a plurality of execution periods based on a predetermined specific value set from a plurality of specific values when the second trigger is established, the execution period is set to the predetermined specific value. Since it differs depending on the type, success or failure of the specific state depends on the type of the predetermined characteristic value. As a result, when the second trigger is established, it becomes difficult to grasp the success or failure of the specific state from the predetermined specific value. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game in anticipation that the specific state will be established while paying attention to the type of the predetermined characteristic value when the second opportunity is established, thereby improving the interest of the game. be done.

[Appendix F2]
The gaming machine according to appendix F1, wherein the plurality of types of execution periods include two or more types of execution periods with different benefits when the second state is executed by the state execution means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F2, the plurality of types of execution periods include two or more types of execution periods with different benefits when the second state is executed. In this way, the plurality of types of execution periods include two or more types of execution periods with different benefits when the second state is executed, so that the benefits when the second state is executed vary according to the execution periods. set. Therefore, by paying attention to the execution period set at the stage when the second opportunity is established, the player can grasp the level of profit when the second state is executed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the level of attention and interest in the execution period set at the stage when the second opportunity is established, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

[Appendix F3]
Supplementary note F2, wherein the two or more types of execution periods have a higher probability that the specific state is established as the profit when the second state is executed by the state execution means (41) increases. game machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F3, the higher the profit when the second state is executed in the two or more types of execution periods, the higher the probability that the specific state is established. In this way, in two or more types of execution periods, the higher the profit when the second state is executed, the higher the probability that the specific state is established. It is possible to enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that an execution period with a high profit is set, and enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that a specific state will be established when the execution period with a high profit is set. Therefore, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix G1]
Predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (second time-saving game state) in which a predetermined profit can be granted in a predetermined period based on establishment of a first opportunity (a jackpot lottery result in a normal game state is a jackpot) )and,
The first state (the setting of the number of time-saving games is invalidated (maintenance state of the second time-saving game state)) or the second state that is more profitable than the first state (the setting of the number of time-saving games is enabled) A state execution means (41) capable of executing the state (third time-saving game state);
with
The state execution means (41)
A specific value determining means for determining a specific value (number of times of time-saving games) when a second opportunity different from the first opportunity (a jackpot lottery result in a second time-saving game state is out of time-saving symbol stoppage) is established in the predetermined state. and,
means capable of executing the second state when a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state;
means capable of executing the first state when the specific state is not established when the second trigger is established;
with
The specific state is a state in which there is a predetermined period or more of the execution period that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established (the second The number of time-saving games set for the fact that the jackpot lottery result in the two-time-saving game state is out of stoppage of time-saving symbols is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state),
The second opportunity (the jackpot lottery result in the second time-saving game state is out of the time-saving symbol stop) is a game characterized in that it can be established during the entire period of the predetermined period in the predetermined state (second time-saving game state). machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G1, the second opportunity can be established during the entire period of the predetermined period in the predetermined state. In this way, since the second trigger can be established during the entire predetermined period in the predetermined state, the timing at which the second trigger is established in the predetermined period becomes random, and the second trigger is established during the entire predetermined period in the predetermined state. Opportunity can occur. As a result, since the second opportunity can be expected to be established during the entire period of the predetermined period of the predetermined state, the player may suffer the disadvantage that the second opportunity is not established during a part of the predetermined period of the predetermined state. Instead, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game during the entire period of the predetermined period of the predetermined state.

[Appendix G2]
When the second opportunity is established in the predetermined period of the predetermined state (second time saving game state) (time saving symbol stop off), the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state (remaining time saving number of times), the more the specific state The game machine according to appendix G1, characterized by being easily established.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G2, when the second opportunity is established in the predetermined state, the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state, the easier it is for the specific condition to be satisfied. In this way, when the second trigger is established in a predetermined state, the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state, the easier it is for the specific condition to be satisfied. , the probability that the specific condition will be satisfied is increased, and the possibility that the second state will be executed is increased, and the expectation that the expectation is increased is provided. As a result, while feeling anxiety due to the approaching end of the predetermined period, the progress of the game can be enjoyed with expectation that the second opportunity will be established when the end of the predetermined period is approaching. be improved.

[Appendix G3]
When the specific condition is satisfied when the second opportunity is established (time saving pattern stop off) in the predetermined state (second time saving game state), the remaining period of the predetermined state (remaining time saving number of times) Depending on the second The gaming machine according to appendix G1 or appendix G2, characterized in that the magnitudes of profits (number of times of time-saving games) are different in the two states (third time-saving game state).

In the gaming machine according to appendix G3, if the specific condition is satisfied when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state, the amount of profit in the second state differs depending on the remaining period of the predetermined state. In this way, when the specific condition is satisfied when the second trigger is satisfied in the predetermined state, the magnitude of the profit in the second state differs depending on the remaining period of the predetermined state. Since the progress of the game can be enjoyed while paying attention to the timing when the opportunity is established, the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix G4]
If the specific condition is satisfied when the second opportunity is established (time saving pattern stop off) in the predetermined state (second time saving game state), the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state (remaining time saving number of times), The gaming machine according to appendix G3, wherein a profit (number of time-saving games played) is large in the second state (third time-saving game state).

In the gaming machine according to appendix G4, if the specific condition is satisfied when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state, the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state, the greater the profit in the second state. In this way, when the specific condition is satisfied when the second trigger is satisfied in the predetermined state, the shorter the remaining period of the predetermined state, the greater the profit in the second state. The closer the end of the predetermined period is, the more likely it is to receive a high profit in the second state. As a result, the game progresses while feeling anxiety due to the approach of the end of the predetermined period, but with expectation that a high profit can be received in the second state due to the establishment of the second opportunity when the end of the predetermined period approaches. can be enjoyed, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix H1]
Predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (second time-saving game state) in which a predetermined profit can be granted in a predetermined period based on establishment of a first opportunity (a jackpot lottery result in a normal game state is a jackpot) )and,
The first state (the setting of the number of time-saving games is invalidated (maintenance state of the second time-saving game state)) or the second state that is more profitable than the first state (the setting of the number of time-saving games is enabled) A state execution means (41) capable of executing the state (third time-saving game state);
with
The state execution means (41)
A specific value determining means for determining a specific value (number of times of time-saving games) when a second opportunity different from the first opportunity (a jackpot lottery result in a second time-saving game state is out of time-saving symbol stoppage) is established in the predetermined state. and,
means capable of executing the second state when a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state;
means capable of executing the first state when the specific state is not established when the second trigger is established;
with
The specific state is a state in which there is a predetermined period or more of the execution period that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established (the second The number of time-saving games set for the fact that the jackpot lottery result in the two-time-saving game state is out of stoppage of time-saving symbols is greater than the remaining number of times of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state),
The predetermined state executing means (41) executes the predetermined state until the predetermined predetermined period expires, regardless of whether the specific state succeeds or fails during the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H1, the predetermined state is executed until the preset predetermined period expires regardless of whether the specific state succeeds or fails during the predetermined period. In this way, regardless of the success or failure of the specific state during the predetermined period, the predetermined state is executed until the predetermined period expires. It becomes possible to enjoy the benefits of the state.

In addition, regardless of whether the specific state succeeds or fails during the predetermined period, the predetermined state is executed until the predetermined period expires, so that, for example, the establishment of the specific state is notified to the player at the expiration of the predetermined period. can be given. In this case, the player can grasp the success or failure of the specific state during the predetermined period when the predetermined period expires. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that the specific state has been established during the predetermined period and looking forward to the expiration of the predetermined period, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix H2]
The state executing means (41) executes the second state after the predetermined period expires when the second trigger is satisfied in the predetermined state and the specific state is established. The game machine described.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H2, when the specific state is established when the second opportunity is established in the predetermined state, the second state is executed after the predetermined period expires. In this way, when the specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state, the second state is executed after the predetermined period expires, so that the profit of the predetermined state is obtained during the entire period of the predetermined period. While enjoying the benefit of the second state, it is possible to enjoy the benefit of the second state again after the expiration of the predetermined period.

[Appendix I1]
Predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (second time-saving game state) in which a predetermined profit can be granted in a predetermined period based on establishment of a first opportunity (a jackpot lottery result in a normal game state is a jackpot) )and,
The first state (the setting of the number of time-saving games is invalidated (maintenance state of the second time-saving game state)) or the second state that is more profitable than the first state (the setting of the number of time-saving games is enabled) A state execution means (41) capable of executing the state (third time-saving game state);
with
The state execution means (41)
A specific value determining means for determining a specific value (number of times of time-saving games) when a second opportunity different from the first opportunity (a jackpot lottery result in a second time-saving game state is out of time-saving symbol stoppage) is established in the predetermined state. and,
means capable of executing the second state when a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state;
means capable of executing the first state when the specific state is not established when the second trigger is established;
with
The specific state is a state in which there is a predetermined period or more of the execution period that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established (the second The number of time-saving games set for the fact that the jackpot lottery result in the two-time-saving game state is out of stoppage of time-saving symbols is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state),
A gaming machine comprising resetting means capable of resetting a profit in the second state when the second opportunity is established in the second state (third time-saving gaming state).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I1, when the second opportunity is established in the second state, the profit in the second state can be reset. In this way, when the second opportunity is established in the second state, the profit in the second state can be reset, so that no profit is given when the second opportunity is established in the second state. On the other hand, the player is prevented from feeling a sense of incongruity, and the loss of interest in the game is prevented.

[Appendix I2]
Profit determination means for determining a predetermined profit for establishment of the second opportunity when the second opportunity is established in the second state (third time-saving gaming state);
The resetting means determines that the predetermined profit determined by the profit determining means when the second opportunity is established in the second state (the third time-saving gaming state) is the The gaming machine according to Appendix I1, wherein the profit in the second state is reset to the predetermined profit when the profit in the second state is larger than the profit in the second state.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I2, when the second opportunity is established in the second state, the predetermined profit determined for the establishment of the second opportunity is the profit in the second state when the second opportunity is established. , then the profit in the second state is reset to the predetermined profit. In this way, when the predetermined profit determined for the establishment of the second opportunity when the second opportunity is established in the second state is greater than the profit in the second state when the second opportunity is established Furthermore, by resetting the profit in the second state to the predetermined profit, the profit in the second state is always increased when the profit in the second state is reset due to the establishment of the second trigger. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting the second opportunity to be established even in the second state, and pays attention to the profit resulting from the establishment of the second opportunity when the second profit is established. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game with the help of the player, the interest in the game is improved. Further, when the predetermined profit determined when the second opportunity is established in the second state is greater than the profit when the second opportunity is established in the second state, the profit in the second state is reset to the predetermined profit. This prevents the profit in the second state from decreasing when the profit in the second state is reset. As a result, the player is prevented from being disadvantaged by the resetting of the profit in the second state, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game.

[Appendix I3]
The profit determining means determines the predetermined profit as a profit period of the second state (third time-saving gaming state);
If the profit period determined by the profit determining means is longer than the remaining period of the second state when the second opportunity is established, the resetting means resets the remaining period of the second state to the The gaming machine according to attachment I2, wherein the profit period determined by profit determination means is reset.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I3, if the profit period of the second state determined when the second opportunity is established in the second state is longer than the remaining period of the second state when the second opportunity is established , the remaining period of the second state is reset to the profit period. In this way, if the profit period of the second state determined when the second opportunity is established in the second state is longer than the remaining period of the second state when the second opportunity is established, the second state is reset to the profit period, the profit period is always lengthened when the profit period in the second state is reset. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting the second opportunity to be established even in the second state, and pay attention to the profit period due to the establishment of the second opportunity when the second profit is established. Since the progress of the game can be enjoyed by doing so, the amusement of the game is improved. In addition, if the profit period of the second state determined when the second opportunity is established in the second state is longer than the remaining period of the second state when the second opportunity is established, the remaining period of the second state By resetting the period to the profit period, the profit period in the second state is prevented from being shortened when the profit period in the second state is reset. As a result, the player is prevented from being disadvantaged by resetting the profit period in the second state, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game.

[Appendix I4]
Profit determination means for determining a predetermined profit for establishment of the second opportunity when the second opportunity is established in the second state (third time-saving gaming state);
The resetting means resets the predetermined profit determined by the profit determining means when the second opportunity is established in the second state (third time-saving gaming state) to the predetermined profit when the second opportunity is established. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices I1 to I3, wherein the profit in the second state is reset regardless of the profit in the second state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix I4, the predetermined profit determined when the second opportunity is established in the second state is the profit in the second state, regardless of the profit in the second state when the second opportunity is established. Reconfigured as profit. In this way, the predetermined profit determined when the second opportunity is established in the second state is reset as the profit in the second state, regardless of the profit in the second state when the second opportunity is established. By doing so, the profit in the second state fluctuates when the second opportunity is established in the second state. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the predetermined profit when the second opportunity is established and also by paying attention to the level of the profit in the second state, thereby improving the interest of the game. .

[Appendix I5]
The profit determination means determines the predetermined profit as the profit period of the second state (third time-saving gaming state);
The resetting means resets the profit period determined by the profit determining means when the second opportunity is established in the second state (third time-saving gaming state) to the profit period when the second opportunity is established. The gaming machine according to appendix I4, wherein the remaining period in the second state is reset regardless of the remaining period in the second state.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I5, the profit period determined when the second opportunity is established in the second state is the profit period in the second state, regardless of the profit period in the second state when the second opportunity is established. is reset as the profit period in In this way, the profit period determined when the second opportunity is established in the second state is regarded as the profit period in the second state, regardless of the profit period in the second state when the second opportunity is established. By resetting, the profit period in the second state is lengthened when the second opportunity is established in the second state. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the profit period when the second opportunity is established and also by paying attention to the length of the profit period in the second state, thereby improving the interest of the game. be.

[Appendix J1]
Predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (second time-saving game state) in which a predetermined profit can be granted in a predetermined period based on establishment of a first opportunity (a jackpot lottery result in a normal game state is a jackpot) )and,
The first state (the setting of the number of time-saving games is invalidated (maintenance state of the second time-saving game state)) or the second state that is more profitable than the first state (the setting of the number of time-saving games is enabled) A state execution means (41) capable of executing the state (third time-saving game state);
with
The state execution means (41)
A specific value determining means for determining a specific value (number of times of time-saving games) when a second opportunity different from the first opportunity (a jackpot lottery result in a second time-saving game state is out of time-saving symbol stoppage) is established in the predetermined state. and,
means capable of executing the second state when a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state;
means capable of executing the first state when the specific state is not established when the second trigger is established;
with
The specific state is a state in which there is a predetermined period or more of the execution period that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established (the second The number of time-saving games set for the fact that the jackpot lottery result in the two-time-saving game state is out of stoppage of time-saving symbols is greater than the remaining number of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state),
Predetermined ball entry means (315) that allows game balls to enter by being opened in a predetermined open mode selected from a plurality of open modes (short open, long open),
Said first state (second time-saving gaming state) and said second state (third time-saving gaming state) are different in said predetermined opening mode of said predetermined ball-entering means (315). .

In the gaming machine according to appendix J1, the opening mode of the predetermined ball-entering means differs between the first state and the second state. In this way, the opening mode of the predetermined ball-entering means is different between the first state and the second state, so that when the second trigger is established, the opening mode of the ball-entering means differs depending on whether the specific condition is met or not. That is, the ease with which a game ball enters a predetermined ball entering means varies depending on whether the specific condition is met or not. As a result, the benefits in the first state and the second state are the easiness of the game ball to the predetermined ball entry means, that is, the direct benefit for the player obtained by the game ball to the predetermined ball entry means ( For example, the number of jackpot lotteries, prize balls, etc.), the degree of attention and interest in the game is improved, and the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix J2]
The plurality of types of open modes include a first open mode (short open) and a second open mode (long open) in which a game ball is easier to enter than the first open mode,
In the first state (second time-saving game state), the predetermined ball entering means (315) is opened in the first open mode,
The gaming machine according to appendix J1, wherein in the second state (third time-saving gaming state), the predetermined ball-entering means (315) is opened in the second opening mode.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J2, it is easier for the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entering means in the second state than in the first state. In this way, since the game ball is more likely to enter the predetermined ball entry means in the second state than in the first state, in the second state executed by the establishment of the specific condition when the second opportunity is established, A game ball is likely to enter a predetermined ball entering means, and a game ball is less likely to enter the prescribed ball entering means in a first state executed by non-satisfaction of a specific condition when a second opportunity is established. Thus, in the second state, as compared with the first state, the player is provided with a game property in which the player can easily enjoy the benefits obtained from the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means, thereby improving the degree of attention and interest in the game, The amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix K1]
Predetermined state execution means (41) for executing a predetermined state (second time-saving game state) in which a predetermined profit can be granted in a predetermined period based on establishment of a first opportunity (a jackpot lottery result in a normal game state is a jackpot) )and,
The first state (the setting of the number of time-saving games is invalidated (maintenance state of the second time-saving game state)) or the second state that is more profitable than the first state (the setting of the number of time-saving games is enabled) A state execution means (41) capable of executing the state (third time-saving game state);
with
The state execution means (41)
A specific value determining means for determining a specific value (number of times of time-saving games) when a second opportunity different from the first opportunity (a jackpot lottery result in a second time-saving game state is out of time-saving symbol stoppage) is established in the predetermined state. and,
means capable of executing the second state when a specific state is established when the second trigger is established in the predetermined state;
means capable of executing the first state when the specific state is not established when the second trigger is established;
with
The specific state is a state in which there is a predetermined period or more of the execution period that can be executed based on the predetermined specific value at the stage when the predetermined second trigger is established (the second The number of time-saving games set for the fact that the jackpot lottery result in the two-time-saving game state is out of stoppage of time-saving symbols is greater than the remaining number of times of time-saving games in the second time-saving game state),
Provided with predetermined ball entry means (315) that allows game balls to enter by being opened in a predetermined open mode,
In the first state (second time-saving gaming state) and the second state (third time-saving gaming state), a predetermined success judgment (jackpot) is triggered by the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering means (315) A gaming machine characterized by executing a lottery.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K1, a predetermined win/fail determination is executed when a game ball enters predetermined ball-entering means in the first state and the second state. In this way, the execution of the predetermined success/failure determination by the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means in the first state and the second state makes it possible to establish the establishment of the specific condition when the second opportunity is established. Depending on the presence or absence, that is, between the first state and the second state, the frequency (probability) of execution of the predetermined win-or-fail judgment and the winning probability in the predetermined win-or-fail judgment can be different. As a result, the degree of attention and interest in the game is improved, and the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix K2]
The second opportunity, the result of the predetermined right or wrong determination by the right or wrong determination means (41) can be established on the condition that it is a predetermined result (time saving pattern stop off). game machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K2, the second trigger can be established on the condition that the result of the predetermined win-or-fail judgment executed upon the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball-entering means is a predetermined result. . In this way, the second opportunity can be established on the condition that the result of the predetermined success/failure determination executed with the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means as a trigger is a predetermined result. Presence or absence of establishment of the second opportunity and profit in the first state and the second state are defined by a predetermined ball-entering means. Therefore, in the gaming machine, it is possible to determine the success or failure of the second opportunity by using the existing ball entry means (for example, the second winning hole) that performs the winning/failing determination, and the first state and the second state Since the profit can be given in the game machine, it is possible to give a new playability without adding a new means to the game machine.

[Appendix A1]
First game means (41) for performing a first game rotation operation (first special figure game) based on establishment of a first starting condition (entry of a game ball into a first winning hole 314);
A second game that performs a second game rotation operation (second special figure game) based on establishment of a second starting condition different from the first starting condition (entrance of the game ball to the second winning hole 315) means (41);
with
When a variable display is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition, and when the game result of the variable display is notified for a predetermined period at the end of the variable display, one game rotation operation is performed. 2 game means is a game machine capable of simultaneously executing the variable display on a predetermined display means,
When the first starting condition is satisfied during a predetermined game state (a time-saving game state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state and a specific lottery result (time-saving pattern stoppage is lost), a variable display time of a predetermined time ( a setting means for setting a long-term fluctuation),
During the variable display time of the predetermined time set by the setting means, a predetermined number of the second game rotation operations can be completed,
The predetermined game state ends when the second game rotation operation is executed at least a predetermined upper limit number of times (200 times),
a predetermined game state executing means (41) capable of continuing to execute the predetermined game state when the first game rotation operation corresponding to the specific lottery result ends during the predetermined game state;
means capable of providing a predetermined game value (execution of a jackpot game) when a predetermined lottery result (jackpot) is obtained at the end of the second game rotation operation during the variable display time of the predetermined time;
When the predetermined second game rotation operation (second special figure game for ending the time-saving game state) executed during the variable display time of the predetermined time ends, the predetermined game state is terminated and the normal game state means (41) for performing
When the variable display time of the predetermined time period ends after the predetermined second game rotation operation ends and the normal game state is entered, a specific game value (c time-saving game state) different from the predetermined game value a means (41) capable of imparting a transition to
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A1, the predetermined game state is maintained when the first game rotation operation corresponding to the specific lottery result ends during the predetermined game state, and the first game rotation operation corresponding to the specific lottery result is performed. When the game ends after the predetermined second game rotation operation is completed and the normal game state is entered, a specific game value different from the predetermined game value provided when a predetermined lottery result is obtained is awarded. be. In this way, when the first game rotation motion corresponding to the specific lottery result is completed during the predetermined game state, the predetermined game state is maintained, and the first game rotation motion corresponding to the specific lottery result is the predetermined second game rotation motion. When the game rotation operation ends and the normal game state ends, a specific game value different from the predetermined game value given when a predetermined lottery result is obtained is given, A game feature is provided in which whether or not a specific game value is provided is determined by the end timing of the first game rotation operation corresponding to a specific lottery result. As a result, the player expects that the predetermined number of second game-rotating motions will end early in a gaming machine that can simultaneously perform the variable display of the first game-rotating motion and the variable display of the second game-rotating motion. Each second game rotation motion can be enjoyed while playing, and the first game rotation motion can be enjoyed by paying attention to the timing at which the first game rotation motion corresponding to a specific lottery result ends. interest is enhanced.

[Appendix B1]
First game means (41) for performing a first game rotation operation (first special figure game) based on establishment of a first starting condition (entry of a game ball into a first winning hole 314);
A second game that performs a second game rotation operation (second special figure game) based on establishment of a second starting condition different from the first starting condition (entrance of the game ball to the second winning hole 315) means (41);
with
When a variable display is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition, and when the game result of the variable display is notified for a predetermined period at the end of the variable display, one game rotation operation is performed. 2 game means is a game machine capable of simultaneously executing the variable display on a predetermined display means,
When the first starting condition is satisfied during a predetermined game state (a time-saving game state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state and a specific lottery result (time-saving pattern stoppage is lost), a variable display time of a predetermined time ( a setting means for setting a long-term fluctuation),
During the variable display time of the predetermined time set by the setting means, a predetermined number of the second game rotation operations can be completed,
The predetermined game state ends when the second game rotation operation is executed at least a predetermined upper limit number of times (200 times),
a predetermined game state executing means (41) capable of continuing to execute the predetermined game state when the first game rotation operation corresponding to the specific lottery result ends during the predetermined game state;
means capable of providing a predetermined game value (execution of a jackpot game) when a predetermined lottery result (jackpot) is obtained at the end of the second game rotation operation during the variable display time of the predetermined time;
When the predetermined second game rotation operation (second special figure game for ending the time-saving game state) executed during the variable display time of the predetermined time ends, the predetermined game state is terminated and the normal game state means (41) for performing
When the variable display time of the predetermined time period ends after the predetermined second game rotation operation ends and the normal game state is entered, a specific game value (c time-saving game state) different from the predetermined game value a means (41) capable of imparting a transition to
with
A plurality of specific variable display times are set for the second game rotation operation (second special figure game) started by the second game means (41) in the predetermined game state (a time saving game state), The longer the specific fluctuation display time, the higher the expectation (big win expectation) of the predetermined lottery result (big win) to which the predetermined game value (execution of the big win game) is awarded. A gaming machine characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix B1, a plurality of specific variable display times are set for the second game rotation operation in a predetermined game state, and a predetermined lottery in which the longer the specific variable display time is, the more predetermined game value is given. Expectations are set high for the results. By the way, the longer the specific variable display time is, the more disadvantageous it is in order to enter the normal game state in which the specific game value can be awarded upon the completion of the predetermined number of second game rotation motions. On the other hand, the longer the specific variable display time is, the higher the expectation of the predetermined lottery result in which the predetermined game value is awarded is set. Therefore, in a situation where the specific variable display time is long and disadvantageous to the player and the interest in the game may decrease, the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given is increased to prevent the decrease in the interest in the game. Rather, the player can enjoy the progress of the game in anticipation of a predetermined lottery result, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

[Appendix C1]
First game means (41) for performing a first game rotation operation (first special figure game) based on establishment of a first starting condition (entry of a game ball into a first winning hole 314);
A second game that performs a second game rotation operation (second special figure game) based on establishment of a second starting condition different from the first starting condition (entrance of the game ball to the second winning hole 315) means (41);
with
When a variable display is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition, and when the game result of the variable display is notified for a predetermined period at the end of the variable display, one game rotation operation is performed. 2 game means is a game machine capable of simultaneously executing the variable display on a predetermined display means,
When the first starting condition is satisfied during a predetermined game state (a time-saving game state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state and a specific lottery result (time-saving pattern stoppage is lost), a variable display time of a predetermined time ( a setting means for setting a long-term fluctuation),
During the variable display time of the predetermined time set by the setting means, a predetermined number of the second game rotation operations can be completed,
The predetermined game state ends when the second game rotation operation is executed at least a predetermined upper limit number of times (200 times),
a predetermined game state executing means (41) capable of continuing to execute the predetermined game state when the first game rotation operation corresponding to the specific lottery result ends during the predetermined game state;
means capable of providing a predetermined game value (execution of a jackpot game) when a predetermined lottery result (jackpot) is obtained at the end of the second game rotation operation during the variable display time of the predetermined time;
When the predetermined second game rotation operation (second special figure game for ending the time-saving game state) executed during the variable display time of the predetermined time ends, the predetermined game state is terminated and the normal game state means (41) for performing
When the variable display time of the predetermined time period ends after the predetermined second game rotation operation ends and the normal game state is entered, a specific game value (c time-saving game state) different from the predetermined game value a means (41) capable of imparting a transition to
with
Whether or not to give the specific game value (transition to c time-saving gaming state) as the game result for the first game rotation operation (first special figure game) depends on the first game rotation operation (first special A game machine characterized in that it is determined with reference to predetermined game state information (for example, high-probability mode, low-probability mode) at the end of a game).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C1, whether or not to give a specific game value as a game result for the first game rotation motion is determined by referring to predetermined game state information at the end of the first game rotation motion. . By the way, when the predetermined game state is terminated and the normal game state is executed by the end of the second game rotation operation of the predetermined number of times, and when the first game rotation operation corresponding to the specific lottery result ends in the predetermined game state. In some cases, the game ends in a normal game state. That is, the game state in which the first game-rotation motion starts and the game state in which the first game-rotation motion ends may or may not be the same. Therefore, whether or not to give a specific game value as a game result for the first game rotation motion is determined by referring to the predetermined game state information at the end of the first game rotation motion, whereby the first game Regardless of whether the game state in which the spinning motion starts and the game state in which the first game spinning motion ends are the same or different, it is determined at uniform timing whether or not to give a specific game value. be. As a result, it is possible to easily execute the determination process as to whether or not to give a specific game value as the game result for the first game rotation motion, and to improve the certainty of the determination process.

[Appendix D1]
First game means (41) for performing a first game rotation operation (first special figure game) based on establishment of a first starting condition (entry of a game ball into a first winning hole 314);
A second game that performs a second game rotation operation (second special figure game) based on establishment of a second starting condition different from the first starting condition (entrance of the game ball to the second winning hole 315) means (41);
with
When a variable display is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition, and when the game result of the variable display is notified for a predetermined period at the end of the variable display, one game rotation operation is performed. 2 game means is a game machine capable of simultaneously executing the variable display on a predetermined display means,
When the first starting condition is satisfied during a predetermined game state (a time-saving game state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state and a specific lottery result (time-saving pattern stoppage is lost), a variable display time of a predetermined time ( a setting means for setting a long-term fluctuation),
During the variable display time of the predetermined time set by the setting means, a predetermined number of the second game rotation operations can be completed,
The predetermined game state ends when the second game rotation operation is executed at least a predetermined upper limit number of times (200 times),
a predetermined game state executing means (41) capable of continuing to execute the predetermined game state when the first game rotation operation corresponding to the specific lottery result ends during the predetermined game state;
means capable of providing a predetermined game value (execution of a jackpot game) when a predetermined lottery result (jackpot) is obtained at the end of the second game rotation operation during the variable display time of the predetermined time;
When the predetermined second game rotation operation (second special figure game for ending the time-saving game state) executed during the variable display time of the predetermined time ends, the predetermined game state is terminated and the normal game state means (41) for performing
When the variable display time of the predetermined time period ends after the predetermined second game rotation operation ends and the normal game state is entered, a specific game value (c time-saving game state) different from the predetermined game value a means (41) capable of imparting a transition to
with
The game machine, wherein the predetermined game value is higher than the specific game value.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D1, the predetermined game value is higher than the specific game value. In this way, since the predetermined game value is higher than the specific game value, the normal game due to the end of the predetermined number of second game rotation operations is completed before the predetermined number of second game rotation operations are completed. A predetermined playing value may be awarded that is higher than the specific playing value that the state may be awarded by execution. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of each of the second game-turn motions while expecting a predetermined lottery result until the predetermined times of the second game-turn motions are completed. Also, even if the second game rotation motion does not correspond to a predetermined lottery result, the execution of the second game rotation motion increases the possibility of executing a normal game state in which a specific game value can be awarded. Therefore, in the second game rotation operation, the progress of the game can be enjoyed while expecting a predetermined lottery result, and even if the predetermined lottery result is not obtained, no game value can be obtained. Although it is lower than a predetermined game value, it is repeated a predetermined number of times to obtain a specific game value. is reduced.

[Appendix D2]
The predetermined game value is that a special game (jackpot game) with a higher expected value for the number of acquired game balls than the normal game state and the predetermined game state (a time-saving game state) is executed,
The gaming machine according to appendix D1, wherein the specific game value is to increase the opportunity for the second starting condition to be satisfied (entering the game ball into the second winning hole 315).

In the gaming machine according to appendix D2, the predetermined game value is execution of a special game with a higher expected value for the number of acquired game balls than the normal game state and the predetermined game state, and the specific game value is The purpose is to increase the opportunities for the establishment of the second starting condition. In this way, the predetermined game value is that a special game with a higher expected value for the number of acquired game balls than the normal game state and the predetermined game state is executed, and the specific game value is the second starting game. By increasing the number of occasions when the condition is established, a special game with a high expected value for the number of acquired game balls can be executed before the second game rotation operation of a predetermined number of times is completed. As a result, the player expects that the special game will be executed based on the predetermined lottery results until the predetermined times of the second game rotation are completed, and the progress of each of the second game rotations. can enjoy Also, even if the second game rotation motion does not correspond to the predetermined lottery result, the execution of the second game rotation motion may increase the opportunity for the second starting condition to be established, thereby obtaining a game value. is enhanced. Therefore, in the second game rotation operation, the progress of the game can be enjoyed while expecting a predetermined lottery result, and even if the predetermined lottery result is not obtained, no game value can be obtained. However, by repeating the second game rotation operation a predetermined number of times, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while anticipating the possibility of obtaining a game value that will increase the opportunity to satisfy the second start condition. A decrease in interest in the game is reduced when the second game rotation motion corresponding to the predetermined lottery result is not performed.

[Appendix E1]
First game means (41) for performing a first game rotation operation (first special figure game) based on establishment of a first starting condition (entry of a game ball into a first winning hole 314);
A second game that performs a second game rotation operation (second special figure game) based on establishment of a second starting condition different from the first starting condition (entrance of the game ball to the second winning hole 315) means (41);
with
When a variable display is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition, and when the game result of the variable display is notified for a predetermined period at the end of the variable display, one game rotation operation is performed. 2 game means is a game machine capable of simultaneously executing the variable display on a predetermined display means,
When the first starting condition is satisfied during a predetermined game state (a time-saving game state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state and a specific lottery result (time-saving pattern stoppage is lost), a variable display time of a predetermined time ( a setting means for setting a long-term fluctuation),
During the variable display time of the predetermined time set by the setting means, a predetermined number of the second game rotation operations can be completed,
The predetermined game state ends when the second game rotation operation is executed at least a predetermined upper limit number of times (200 times),
a predetermined game state executing means (41) capable of continuing to execute the predetermined game state when the first game rotation operation corresponding to the specific lottery result ends during the predetermined game state;
means capable of providing a predetermined game value (execution of a jackpot game) when a predetermined lottery result (jackpot) is obtained at the end of the second game rotation operation during the variable display time of the predetermined time;
When the predetermined second game rotation operation (second special figure game for ending the time-saving game state) executed during the variable display time of the predetermined time ends, the predetermined game state is terminated and the normal game state means (41) for performing
When the variable display time of the predetermined time period ends after the predetermined second game rotation operation ends and the normal game state is entered, a specific game value (c time-saving game state) different from the predetermined game value a means (41) capable of imparting a transition to
Means (51) for notifying the remaining period (number of time-saving games) of the predetermined game state (a time-saving game state) in a predetermined manner (number);
During the predetermined game state (a time-saving game state), emphasize (for example, color, size, pattern, effect, combination thereof) than the predetermined mode of the second game rotation operation (second special figure game) means (51) for informing the remaining period;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix E1, the remaining period of the predetermined game state is notified in a predetermined manner, and the remaining period of the second game rotation operation is notified more emphasized than the predetermined manner during the predetermined game state. In this way, the remaining period of the predetermined game state is notified in a predetermined manner, and the remaining period of the second game rotation operation is notified in a more emphasized manner than the predetermined manner during the predetermined game state. It becomes easy to grasp the numerical value of the remaining period of the rotation operation. As a result, the player can, based on the information obtained from the numerical value of the remaining period of the first game rotation, end the first game rotation corresponding to the specific lottery result after the predetermined number of second game rotations. It becomes easy to predict whether or not to play (whether or not a predetermined number of second game round motions can be completed during execution of a first game round motion corresponding to a specific lottery result). Therefore, by paying attention to the remaining period of the second game-rotation motion in which the emphasis is notified rather than the predetermined mode, the end timing of the first game-rotation motion and the end timing of the predetermined number of second game-rotation motions are predicted. Since the progress can be enjoyed, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix F1]
First game means (41) for performing a first game rotation operation (first special figure game) based on establishment of a first starting condition (entry of a game ball into a first winning hole 314);
A second game that performs a second game rotation operation (second special figure game) based on establishment of a second starting condition different from the first starting condition (entrance of the game ball to the second winning hole 315) means (41);
with
When a variable display is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition, and when the game result of the variable display is notified for a predetermined period at the end of the variable display, one game rotation operation is performed. 2 game means is a game machine capable of simultaneously executing the variable display on a predetermined display means,
When the first starting condition is satisfied during a predetermined game state (a time-saving game state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state and a specific lottery result (time-saving pattern stoppage is lost), a variable display time of a predetermined time ( a setting means for setting a long-term fluctuation),
During the variable display time of the predetermined time set by the setting means, a predetermined number of the second game rotation operations can be completed,
The predetermined game state ends when the second game rotation operation is executed at least a predetermined upper limit number of times (200 times),
a predetermined game state executing means (41) capable of continuing to execute the predetermined game state when the first game rotation operation corresponding to the specific lottery result ends during the predetermined game state;
means capable of providing a predetermined game value (execution of a jackpot game) when a predetermined lottery result (jackpot) is obtained at the end of the second game rotation operation during the variable display time of the predetermined time;
When the predetermined second game rotation operation (second special figure game for ending the time-saving game state) executed during the variable display time of the predetermined time ends, the predetermined game state is terminated and the normal game state means (41) for performing
When the variable display time of the predetermined time period ends after the predetermined second game rotation operation ends and the normal game state is entered, a specific game value (c time-saving game state) different from the predetermined game value a means (41) capable of imparting a transition to
with
The variable display time of the second game rotation operation (second special figure game) started during the predetermined game state (a time saving game state) is the said start during the predetermined game state (a time saving game state) Including a predetermined variable display time longer than the longest variable display time set for the first game rotation operation (first special figure game),
The second game rotation operation in which the predetermined fluctuation display time is set is the degree of expectation (big win expectation) that the predetermined lottery result (big win) to which the predetermined game value (execution of the big win game) is given. degree) is set high.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F1, the variation display time of the second game rotation operation started during the predetermined game state is the longest variation display set for the first game rotation operation started during the predetermined game state. A second game rotation operation including a predetermined variable display time longer than the time and in which the predetermined variable display time is set is highly expected to be a predetermined lottery result in which a predetermined game value is awarded. It is By the way, the longer the specific variable display time is, the more disadvantageous it is to enter the normal game state in which the specific game value can be awarded upon completion of the predetermined number of second game rotation motions. On the other hand, the second game rotation motion in which a predetermined variable display time is set longer than the longest variation display time set for the first game rotation motion started during the predetermined game state is a predetermined A high degree of expectation is set for a predetermined lottery result in which a game value is awarded. Therefore, in a situation where the specific variable display time is long and disadvantageous to the player, and the interest in the game may decrease, the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given is increased to prevent the decrease in the interest in the game. Rather, the player can enjoy the progress of the game in anticipation of a predetermined lottery result, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game.

[Appendix G1]
First game means (41) for performing a first game rotation operation (first special figure game) based on establishment of a first starting condition (entry of a game ball into a first winning hole 314);
A second game that performs a second game rotation operation (second special figure game) based on establishment of a second starting condition different from the first starting condition (entrance of the game ball to the second winning hole 315) means (41);
with
When a variable display is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition, and when the game result of the variable display is notified for a predetermined period at the end of the variable display, one game rotation operation is performed. 2 game means is a game machine capable of simultaneously executing the variable display on a predetermined display means,
When the first starting condition is satisfied during a predetermined game state (a time-saving game state) that is more advantageous than the normal game state and a specific lottery result (time-saving pattern stoppage is lost), a variable display time of a predetermined time ( a setting means for setting a long-term fluctuation),
During the variable display time of the predetermined time set by the setting means, a predetermined number of the second game rotation operations can be completed,
The predetermined game state ends when the second game rotation operation is executed at least a predetermined upper limit number of times (200 times),
a predetermined game state executing means (41) capable of continuing to execute the predetermined game state when the first game rotation operation corresponding to the specific lottery result ends during the predetermined game state;
means capable of providing a predetermined game value (execution of a jackpot game) when a predetermined lottery result (jackpot) is obtained at the end of the second game rotation operation during the variable display time of the predetermined time;
When the predetermined second game rotation operation (second special figure game for ending the time-saving game state) executed during the variable display time of the predetermined time ends, the predetermined game state is terminated and the normal game state means (41) for performing
When the variable display time of the predetermined time period ends after the predetermined second game rotation operation ends and the normal game state is entered, a specific game value (c time-saving game state) different from the predetermined game value a means (41) capable of imparting a transition to
with
The predetermined game state execution means (41), when executing the predetermined game state continuously when the first game rotation operation corresponding to the specific lottery result is completed during the predetermined game state, a predetermined game A game machine characterized by giving value (for example, execution of a small winning game, opening of the second prize winning port 315 by operating the electric accessory 315b, display of a premium image, execution of a premium effect, opening of a specific song, etc.) .

In the gaming machine according to appendix G1, when the predetermined game state is continued after the first game rotation motion corresponding to the specific lottery result is completed during the predetermined game state, the predetermined game value and the specific game value are A different third game value is awarded. In this way, when the predetermined game state is executed continuously after the first game rotation operation corresponding to the specific lottery result is completed during the predetermined game state, the predetermined game value and the third game value different from the specific game value are displayed. Even if the end timing of the first game rotation operation corresponding to a specific lottery result is unfavorable to the player by giving the game value, the player loses interest in the game due to the unfavorable result. can be reduced by giving the third game value.

[Appendix A1]
a light-emitting means (341) visible in front view of the game board (31);
Information acquiring means (41) for acquiring special information (random numbers for jackpots) when acquisition conditions are satisfied (entering game balls into winning openings 314 and 315);
Determination means (41) for determining whether or not the acquired special information (random number for a jackpot) satisfies a predetermined condition (whether or not it is a random number for executing a jackpot game);
a first rotating means (37);
second rotating means (38L, 38R);
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (37) comprises a rotating plate portion (370) rotatable around a rotating shaft (372),
The rotating plate portion (370) is configured so that the light from the light emitting means (341) located on the back side can be visually recognized, and is configured to be switchable between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (38L, 38R) are rotatable, and when the game board (31) is viewed from the front, the first position is visible without passing through the rotating plate portion (370). , a second position visible through said rotating plate portion (370), and
This game machine is
A first state in which the light emitted from the light emitting means (341) at a specific position can be seen through the rotating rotating plate (370) in a predetermined game state;
By moving the second rotating means (38L, 38R) to the rear surface side of the rotating rotating plate portion (370), the second rotating means (38L, 38R) rotates the light emission at the specific position. a second state in which the light from the means (341) is blocked and the second rotating means (38L, 38R) are visible through the rotating plate portion (370);
A game machine characterized by having

In the gaming machine according to appendix A1, the first state in which the light from the light emitting means can be seen through the rotating plate portion of the rotating first rotating means, and the second rotating means moves to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion. and a second state in which the second rotating means blocks the light from the light emitting means and the second rotating means is visible through the rotating plate portion. As a result, two states, the first state and the second state, can be obtained by the operations of the first rotating means and the second rotating means. Effects executed by actions are diversified. For example, in the first state in which the light of the light emitting means can be visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the rotating first rotating means, it is possible to perform an effect according to the visual recognition mode of the light of the light emitting means that is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Become. Specifically, an effect of giving information about the game to the player, for example, an effect of indicating or suggesting the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, depending on the visual recognition mode of the light of the light emitting means visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. can be executed, and it is possible to execute an effect that indicates or suggests the game value to be given to the player when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and furthermore, an effect to be executed later It becomes possible to execute an effect that indicates or suggests the type. In addition, when the second rotating means moves to the rear side of the rotating rotating plate portion, the second rotating means blocks the light from the light emitting means and the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion. In the second state, it is possible to perform an effect according to the visual recognition mode of the second rotating means visually recognized through the rotating plate portion. Specifically, depending on the visual appearance of the light visually recognized through the rotating plate portion of the first rotating means, an effect that gives information about the game to the player, for example, the degree of expectation that special information will satisfy a predetermined condition It is possible to execute a suggesting effect, and it is possible to execute an effect that indicates or suggests the game value to be given to the player when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and further, it is executed later. It is possible to execute an effect that specifies or suggests the type of effect to be performed. Thus, having the first state and the second state diversifies the effects executed by the operations of the first rotating means and the second rotating means, thereby improving the interest of the game. be done.

[Appendix A2]
The game machine according to appendix A1, wherein at least a part of the rotating plate portion (370) is translucent.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A2, at least a portion of the rotating plate portion has translucency. In this way, since at least a part of the rotating plate portion is translucent, it is possible to achieve the first state in which the light from the light emitting means is visible through the portion having translucency, while at the same time having translucency. A second state in which the first rotating means is visible through the portion can be realized.

[Appendix A3]
The game machine according to appendix A2, wherein the rotating plate portion (370) is entirely translucent.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A3, the entire rotating plate portion has translucency. Since the entire rotating plate portion is translucent, the rotating plate portion can be formed more easily than when only a portion of the rotating plate portion is translucent. becomes possible.

[Appendix A4]
The game machine according to appendix A2, wherein the rotating plate part (370) has a translucent area having higher translucency than other areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A4, the rotating plate portion has a translucent area having higher translucency than other areas. In this way, the rotating plate portion has a translucent region having a higher translucency than other regions, so that the light from the light emitting means is visible in the first state, and the light from the light emitting means is visible in the second state. It becomes possible to set a translucent area as an area in which the second rotating means can be visually recognized. This makes it possible to clarify that the area that the player should pay attention to in the effects executed in the first state and the second state is the translucent area. Thereby, when the effects are executed in the first state and the second state, it becomes possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to the translucent area. Further, when a part of the rotating plate portion is used as a light-transmitting region, it is possible to set a portion other than the light-transmitting region as a non-light-transmitting region, so that the decorativeness of the rotating plate portion can be improved. be possible.

[Appendix A5]
The gaming machine according to appendix A4, wherein the translucent area is a magnifying lens.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A5, the translucent area is a magnifying lens. Since the light-transmitting region is a magnifying lens, it is possible to emphasize and display the light of the light-emitting means visually recognized through the rotating plate portion and the game information imparted by the second rotating means. Become. This makes it easier for the player to grasp the information about the game given in the first state and the second state, so that the player can more easily enjoy the effects executed in the first state and the second state.

[Appendix A6]
The gaming machine according to appendix A4, wherein the translucent area is a through hole.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A6, the translucent area is the through hole. Since the light-transmitting region is a through-hole in this manner, the light-transmitting region can be easily formed. For example, when the rotating plate portion is formed by resin molding, the light-transmitting region can be formed without complicating the shape of the mold for molding, and the light-transmitting region can be formed without adopting a method such as insert molding. can be formed.

[Appendix B1]
a light-emitting means (341) visible in front view of the game board (31);
Information acquiring means (41) for acquiring special information (random numbers for jackpots) when acquisition conditions are satisfied (entering game balls into winning openings 314 and 315);
Determination means (41) for determining whether or not the acquired special information (random number for a jackpot) satisfies a predetermined condition (whether or not it is a random number for executing a jackpot game);
a first rotating means (37);
second rotating means (38L, 38R);
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (37) comprises a rotating plate portion (370) rotatable around a rotating shaft (372),
The rotating plate portion (370) is configured so that the light from the light emitting means (341) located on the back side can be visually recognized, and is configured to be switchable between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (38L, 38R) are rotatable, and when the game board (31) is viewed from the front, the first position is visible without passing through the rotating plate portion (370). , a second position visible through said rotating plate portion (370), and
This game machine is
A first state in which the light emitted from the light emitting means (341) at a specific position can be seen through the rotating rotating plate (370) in a predetermined game state;
By moving the second rotating means (38L, 38R) to the rear surface side of the rotating rotating plate portion (370), the second rotating means (38L, 38R) rotates the light emission at the specific position. a second state in which the light from the means (341) is blocked and the second rotating means (38L, 38R) are visible through the rotating plate portion (370);
has
The first rotating means (37) is rotatable at a predetermined position,
The second rotating means (38L, 38R) are capable of approaching and separating from the first rotating means (37) rotating at the predetermined position,
The first state is achievable when the second rotating means (38L, 38R) moves away from the predetermined position, and
The gaming machine according to appendix B1, wherein the second state can be realized when the second rotating means (38L, 38R) approaches the predetermined position.

In the game machine according to Appendix B1, the first state can be realized by separating the second rotating means from the first rotating means rotating at the predetermined position, and the first rotation rotating at the predetermined position A second state can be achieved by the proximity of the second rotating means to the means. In this manner, the first state can be realized by separating the second rotating means from the first rotating means rotating at a predetermined position, and the first rotating means rotating at a predetermined position moves the second rotating means away from the second rotating means. Since the second state can be realized by the approach of the rotating means, the first rotating means can be rotated at a predetermined position by a simple control of moving the second rotating means closer to and away from the first rotating means. and a second state can be realized.

Further, in the gaming machine according to appendix B1, when the first rotating means rotates at a predetermined position, the player can focus on the second rotating means to determine the timing of the first state and the second rotating means. It is possible to grasp the timing of the state of Thereby, the player can grasp the timing at which the effect is executed in the first state and the timing at which the effect is executed in the second state. That is, by clarifying the timing to which attention should be paid in the game, the effect executed in the first state and the second state can be easily and surely enjoyed.

[Appendix C1]
a light-emitting means (341) visible in front view of the game board (31);
Information acquiring means (41) for acquiring special information (random numbers for jackpots) when acquisition conditions are satisfied (entering game balls into winning openings 314 and 315);
Determination means (41) for determining whether or not the acquired special information (random number for a jackpot) satisfies a predetermined condition (whether or not it is a random number for executing a jackpot game);
a first rotating means (37);
second rotating means (38L, 38R);
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (37) comprises a rotating plate portion (370) rotatable around a rotating shaft (372),
The rotating plate portion (370) is configured so that the light from the light emitting means (341) located on the back side can be visually recognized, and is configured to be switchable between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (38L, 38R) are rotatable, and when the game board (31) is viewed from the front, the first position is visible without passing through the rotating plate portion (370). , a second position visible through said rotating plate portion (370), and
This game machine is
A first state in which the light emitted from the light emitting means (341) at a specific position can be seen through the rotating rotating plate (370) in a predetermined game state;
By moving the second rotating means (38L, 38R) to the rear surface side of the rotating rotating plate portion (370), the second rotating means (38L, 38R) rotates the light emission at the specific position. a second state in which the light from the means (341) is blocked and the second rotating means (38L, 38R) are visible through the rotating plate portion (370);
has
A gaming machine comprising a plurality of said second rotating means (38L, 38R) capable of realizing said second state.

The gaming machine according to appendix C1 includes a plurality of second rotating means capable of realizing the second state. Thus, by providing a plurality of second rotating means capable of realizing the second state, it is possible to achieve the second state by each of the plurality of second rotating means. As a result, it is possible to execute various effects based on the viewing mode of the second state realized by each of the plurality of second rotating means.

[Appendix C2]
The plurality of second rotating means (38L, 38R) includes a specific second rotating means (38L) and a predetermined second rotating means (38R) different from the specific second rotating means (38L). ) and
Visible through the rotating plate portion (370) when the second state is established by moving the specific second rotating means (38L) to the back side of the rotating rotating plate portion (370). and the predetermined second rotating means (38R) moving to the back side of the rotating plate portion (370) rotating. Supplementary note C1, wherein the second viewing mode of the predetermined second rotating means (38R) viewed through the rotating plate portion (370) when the second state is set by game machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C2, the first visual mode of the specific second rotating means visually recognized through the rotating plate portion when the second state is set by the specific second rotating means, and the predetermined second is different from the second visual recognition mode of the predetermined second rotating means that is visually recognized through the rotating plate portion when the second state is set by the rotating means. In this way, when the second state is set by the specific second rotating means, the first visual recognition mode of the specific second rotating means visually recognized through the rotating plate portion, and the predetermined second rotating means When the second state is set, the second viewing mode of the predetermined second rotating means visually recognized through the rotating plate portion differs from the second viewing mode of the specific second rotating means in the second state. It is possible to execute an effect according to the viewing mode and the second viewing mode of the predetermined second rotating means. As a result, various effects can be executed in the second state based on the first visual recognition mode and the second visual recognition mode, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix C3]
The gaming machine according to appendix C1, wherein first information related to a game is provided in the first viewing mode, and second information different from the first information related to the game is provided in the second viewing mode.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C3, the first information about the game is provided in the first viewing mode, and the second information different from the first information about the game is provided in the second viewing mode. In this way, the first information about the game is given in the first viewing mode, and the second information different from the first information about the game is given in the second viewing mode. Visually recognizable information can be obtained according to the type of the second rotating means. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game based on the information regarding the game given from the visual recognition mode of the second rotating means while paying attention to the type of the second rotating means that is in the second state.

[Appendix D1]
Light-emitting means (341) visible in a front view of the game board (31);
Information acquiring means (41) for acquiring special information (random numbers for jackpots) when acquisition conditions are satisfied (entering game balls into winning openings 314 and 315);
Determination means (41) for determining whether or not the acquired special information (random number for a jackpot) satisfies a predetermined condition (whether or not it is a random number for executing a jackpot game);
a first rotating means (37);
second rotating means (38L, 38R);
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (37) comprises a rotating plate portion (370) rotatable around a rotating shaft (372),
The rotating plate portion (370) is configured so that the light from the light emitting means (341) located on the back side can be visually recognized, and is configured to be switchable between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (38L, 38R) are rotatable, and when the game board (31) is viewed from the front, the first position is visible without passing through the rotating plate portion (370). , a second position visible through said rotating plate portion (370), and
This game machine is
A first state in which the light emitted from the light emitting means (341) at a specific position can be seen through the rotating rotating plate (370) in a predetermined game state;
By moving the second rotating means (38L, 38R) to the rear surface side of the rotating rotating plate portion (370), the second rotating means (38L, 38R) rotates the light emission at the specific position. a second state in which the light from the means (341) is blocked and the second rotating means (38L, 38R) are visible through the rotating plate portion (370);
has
A gaming machine characterized in that the second rotating means (38L, 38R) can move along a plurality of different paths.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D1, the second rotating means can move along a plurality of different paths. In this way, since the second rotation means can move along a plurality of different paths, it is possible to execute an effect according to the type of movement path of the second rotation means, so that the effect can be diversified. be possible.

[Appendix E1]
a light-emitting means (341) visible in front view of the game board (31);
Information acquiring means (41) for acquiring special information (random numbers for jackpots) when acquisition conditions are satisfied (entering game balls into winning openings 314 and 315);
Determination means (41) for determining whether or not the acquired special information (random number for a jackpot) satisfies a predetermined condition (whether or not it is a random number for executing a jackpot game);
a first rotating means (37);
second rotating means (38L, 38R);
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (37) comprises a rotating plate portion (370) rotatable around a rotating shaft (372),
The rotating plate portion (370) is configured so that the light from the light emitting means (341) located on the back side can be visually recognized, and is configured to be switchable between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (38L, 38R) are rotatable, and when the game board (31) is viewed from the front, the first position is visible without passing through the rotating plate portion (370). , a second position visible through said rotating plate portion (370), and
This game machine is
A first state in which the light emitted from the light emitting means (341) at a specific position can be seen through the rotating rotating plate (370) in a predetermined game state;
By moving the second rotating means (38L, 38R) to the rear surface side of the rotating rotating plate portion (370), the second rotating means (38L, 38R) rotates the light emission at the specific position. a second state in which the light from the means (341) is blocked and the second rotating means (38L, 38R) are visible through the rotating plate portion (370);
has
means (41) for executing an information game (special figure game) for notifying the determination result of whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied by the determination means;
In the information game, a first switching means (51) capable of switching the rotary plate portion (370) between the predetermined rotation state and the predetermined stop state when a predetermined opportunity (a jackpot lottery result is a jackpot) is established. and,
In the information game, the second rotating means (38L, 38R) is moved to the back surface side of the rotating plate portion (370) when a specific opportunity (a jackpot lottery result is a jackpot) is established, and the first state is reached. a second switching means (51) capable of switching from to the second state;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix E1, in the notification game for notifying the determination result of whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied by the determination means, the rotating plate portion is changed into a predetermined rotation state and a predetermined stop state when a predetermined trigger is established. It is possible to switch from the first state to the second state by moving the second rotating means to the back side of the rotating plate portion when a specific trigger is established. As described above, in the information game in which the determining means notifies the result of determination as to whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied, the rotating plate portion can be switched between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state when a predetermined opportunity is established. , when the specific trigger is established, the second rotating means is moved to the back surface side of the rotating plate portion so that the first rotating means and the second rotating means can be switched from the first state to the second state. By the operation with the second rotating means, it can be in two states of the first state and the second state, so the effect executed in the information game by the operation of the first rotating means and the second rotating means are diversified. For example, in an information game, in at least one of the first state and the second state, an effect that gives information about the game to the player, for example, expresses or suggests the degree of expectation that the special information will satisfy a predetermined condition. It is possible to execute an effect, and it is possible to execute an effect that expresses or suggests a game value to be given to a player when special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and is executed later. It becomes possible to execute an effect that indicates or suggests the type of effect. Thus, by realizing the first state and the second state in the information game, the effects executed by the operations of the first rotating means and the second rotating means are diversified. The amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix F1]
a light-emitting means (341) visible in front view of the game board (31);
Information acquiring means (41) for acquiring special information (random numbers for jackpots) when acquisition conditions are satisfied (entering game balls into winning openings 314 and 315);
Determination means (41) for determining whether or not the acquired special information (random number for a jackpot) satisfies a predetermined condition (whether or not it is a random number for executing a jackpot game);
a first rotating means (37);
second rotating means (38L, 38R);
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (37) comprises a rotating plate portion (370) rotatable around a rotating shaft (372),
The rotating plate portion (370) is configured so that the light from the light emitting means (341) located on the back side can be visually recognized, and is configured to be switchable between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (38L, 38R) are rotatable, and when the game board (31) is viewed from the front, the first position is visible without passing through the rotating plate portion (370). , a second position visible through said rotating plate portion (370), and
This game machine is
A first state in which the light emitted from the light emitting means (341) at a specific position can be seen through the rotating rotating plate (370) in a predetermined game state;
By moving the second rotating means (38L, 38R) to the rear surface side of the rotating rotating plate portion (370), the second rotating means (38L, 38R) rotates the light emission at the specific position. a second state in which the light from the means (341) is blocked and the second rotating means (38L, 38R) are visible through the rotating plate portion (370);
has
means (41) for executing a special game advantageous to the player when the determination means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied;
In the special game, a first switching means (51) capable of switching the rotating plate portion (370) between the predetermined rotation state and the predetermined stop state when a predetermined opportunity (a jackpot lottery result is a jackpot) is established. and,
In the special game, the second rotating means (38L, 38R) is moved to the back surface side of the rotating plate portion (370) when a specific opportunity (a jackpot lottery result is a jackpot) is established, and the first state is achieved. a second switching means (51) capable of switching from to the second state;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F1, in a special game advantageous to the player that is executed when it is determined by the determining means that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the rotating plate portion is in a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined state when a predetermined trigger is established. When a specific trigger is established, the second rotating means is moved to the back side of the rotating plate portion, thereby switching from the first state to the second state. . In this way, in a special game advantageous to the player, which is executed when the determination means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied in the special game, when the predetermined opportunity is established, the rotating plate portion is in a predetermined rotation state and a predetermined state. When a specific trigger is established, the second rotating means is moved to the back side of the rotating plate portion, thereby switching from the first state to the second state. Therefore, the operation of the first rotating means and the second rotating means can result in two states, the first state and the second state. The effects executed in the special game are diversified by the action. For example, in a special game, in at least one of the first state and the second state, an effect that gives information about the game to the player, for example, expresses or suggests the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition. It is possible to execute an effect, and it is possible to execute an effect that expresses or suggests a game value to be given to a player when special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and is executed later. It becomes possible to execute an effect that indicates or suggests the type of effect. Thus, by realizing the first state and the second state in the special game, the effects executed by the actions of the first rotating means and the second rotating means are diversified. The amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix G1]
a light-emitting means (341) visible in front view of the game board (31);
Information acquiring means (41) for acquiring special information (random numbers for jackpots) when acquisition conditions are satisfied (entering game balls into winning openings 314 and 315);
Determination means (41) for determining whether or not the acquired special information (random number for a jackpot) satisfies a predetermined condition (whether or not it is a random number for executing a jackpot game);
a first rotating means (37);
second rotating means (38L, 38R);
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (37) comprises a rotating plate portion (370) rotatable around a rotating shaft (372),
The rotating plate portion (370) is configured so that the light from the light emitting means (341) located on the back side can be visually recognized, and is configured to be switchable between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (38L, 38R) are rotatable, and when the game board (31) is viewed from the front, the first position is visible without passing through the rotating plate portion (370). , a second position visible through said rotating plate portion (370), and
This game machine is
A first state in which the light emitted from the light emitting means (341) at a specific position can be seen through the rotating rotating plate (370) in a predetermined game state;
By moving the second rotating means (38L, 38R) to the rear surface side of the rotating rotating plate portion (370), the second rotating means (38L, 38R) rotates the light emission at the specific position. a second state in which the light from the means (341) is blocked and the second rotating means (38L, 38R) are visible through the rotating plate portion (370);
has
The rotating plate portion (370) is configured to start rotating when members (38L, 38R) other than the first rotating means (37) interfere with the first rotating means (37). Characteristic game machine.

In the game machine according to Appendix G1, the rotation of the rotating plate portion is started when a member other than the first rotating means interferes with the first rotating means. In this way, the rotation of the rotating plate portion is started with the interference of a member other than the first rotating means with the first rotating means. It is possible to grasp the timing of As a result, the player, by paying attention to the movement of the first rotating means and the member that can interfere with the first rotating means, can reach the second state through the rotating plate portion. It becomes possible to grasp the timing at which the rotating means becomes visible. Therefore, since the progress of the game can be enjoyed by paying attention to the first rotating means and the members that can interfere with the first rotating means, the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix G2]
The gaming machine according to appendix G1, wherein the member that can interfere with the first rotating means (37) is the second rotating means (38L, 38R).

In the gaming machine according to appendix G2, the member that can interfere with the first rotating means is the second rotating means. In this way, the member that can interfere with the first rotating means is the second rotating means. It is possible to grasp the timing at which the second state can occur, that is, the timing at which the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion. Therefore, since the progress of the game can be enjoyed while paying attention to the first rotating means and the second rotating means, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix G3]
The gaming machine according to appendix G1 or appendix G2, wherein the member that can interfere with the first rotating means (37) is a game ball.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G3, the member that can interfere with the first rotating means is the game ball. Thus, since the member that can interfere with the first rotating means is the game ball, the player can enter the second state by paying attention to the movement between the first rotating means and the game ball. It is possible to grasp the timing, that is, the timing at which the second rotating means becomes visible through the rotating plate portion. Therefore, since the progress of the game can be enjoyed while paying attention to the first rotating means and the game ball, the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix H1]
a light-emitting means (341) visible in front view of the game board (31);
Information acquiring means (41) for acquiring special information (random numbers for jackpots) when acquisition conditions are satisfied (entering game balls into winning openings 314 and 315);
Determination means (41) for determining whether or not the acquired special information (random number for a jackpot) satisfies a predetermined condition (whether or not it is a random number for executing a jackpot game);
a first rotating means (37);
second rotating means (38L, 38R);
A gaming machine comprising
The first rotating means (37) comprises a rotating plate portion (370) rotatable around a rotating shaft (372),
The rotating plate portion (370) is configured so that the light from the light emitting means (341) located on the back side can be visually recognized, and is configured to be switchable between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state,
The second rotating means (38L, 38R) are rotatable, and when the game board (31) is viewed from the front, the first position is visible without passing through the rotating plate portion (370). , a second position visible through said rotating plate portion (370), and
This game machine is
A first state in which the light emitted from the light emitting means (341) at a specific position can be seen through the rotating rotating plate (370) in a predetermined game state;
By moving the second rotating means (38L, 38R) to the rear surface side of the rotating rotating plate portion (370), the second rotating means (38L, 38R) rotates the light emission at the specific position. a second state in which the light from the means (341) is blocked and the second rotating means (38L, 38R) are visible through the rotating plate portion (370);
has
Depending on the positional relationship between the first rotating means (37) and the second rotating means (38L, 38R), the first mode (e.g., notification mode A) is advantageous and more disadvantageous than the first mode. a second mode (for example, notification mode D).

In the gaming machine according to appendix H1, it is possible to generate an advantageous first mode and a second mode more disadvantageous than the first mode, depending on the positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means. be. In this way, the positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means can generate an advantageous first mode and a second mode that is more disadvantageous than the first mode. The player pays attention to the positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means when the first rotating means and the second rotating means are actuated to enjoy the game. You can enjoy progress. That is, when the first rotating means and the second rotating means are operated, the player assumes a positional relationship in which the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in an advantageous first mode. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game while anticipating the event, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix H2]
The gaming machine according to appendix H1, wherein the first mode and the second mode can occur in the second state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H2, the first mode and the second mode can occur in the second state. In this way, the first mode and the second mode can occur in the second state. Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting the positional relationship of the first rotating means and the second rotating means to be in the advantageous first mode, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix A1]
A predetermined special game (5R normal jackpot game, 5R probability variable jackpot game or 16R probability variable jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed with the entry of the game ball to the predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315) as a trigger. Determination means (41) for determining whether to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state);
When the determination means (41) determines whether or not to shift to the special game state, a variation that executes a variation display of a predetermined symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative symbol) display means (41, 51);
Reserving means (41, 51) for reserving the right to execute the variable display of the predetermined symbols executed by the variable display means (41, 51);
with
The predetermined start ball entry means (314, 315) includes a first start ball entry means (314), a disadvantageous state (normal game state) in which game ball entry is restricted, and a game ball entry in the disadvantageous state (normal game state). a second start-up ball entry means (315) different from the first start-up ball entry means (314) that switches between an advantageous state (variable probability game state, time-saving game state) that is easier than the state,
After the end of the predetermined special game, a gaming machine in which the advantageous state is executed until a predetermined condition is established (start of a jackpot game, execution of a specified number of special game games),
a first output means (41) for continuously outputting predetermined identification information (basic signal of the jackpot signal 2) capable of identifying the state to the outside in the predetermined special game state and the advantageous state;
output stop means (41) for stopping the output of the predetermined identification information by the first output means (41) at the end of the advantageous state;
Storage means (41) for storing the number of reserved rights to execute the variable display of the predetermined symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means (315) at the end of the advantageous state. and,
A specific identification capable of identifying a period in which a predetermined variable display of the predetermined symbol corresponding to the reserved right stored at least in the storage means (41) can be performed after the end of the advantageous state. A second output means (41) for continuously outputting information (an extension signal of the jackpot signal 2) for a predetermined period;
with
The second output means (41) outputs the specific identification information (jackpot signal 2) in an output mode different from the output mode of the predetermined identification information (basic signal of the jackpot signal 2) by the first output means (41). A gaming machine characterized by continuously outputting an extension signal).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A1, in a predetermined special game state and an advantageous state, the first output means continuously outputs predetermined identification information that can identify the state to the outside. The hall computer can grasp the predetermined special game state and advantageous state based on the predetermined identification information. As a result, the hall computer can grasp the number of consecutive special games from the start of the first special game to the end of the advantageous state. On the other hand, on the data display installed in the gaming machine, based on the information generated based on the predetermined identification information output from the hall computer, the special game from the start of the first special game to the end of the advantageous state is displayed. It is possible to display the number of consecutive times.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, after the end of the advantageous state, the second output means can perform a predetermined variable display of predetermined symbols corresponding to the reserved rights stored in at least the storage means. Specific identification information that can be identified is continuously output for a predetermined period in an output mode different from the predetermined identification information. It can be understood that the predetermined variable display based on the suspension at the end of the advantageous state is being executed. Thereby, in the hall computer, when the predetermined variable display is to shift to the special game state based on the determination result by the determination means, the predetermined variable display by suspension at the end of the advantageous state is based on the specific identification information. It can be understood that Therefore, in the hall computer, the special game executed based on the predetermined fluctuation display by holding at the end of the advantageous state is grasped based on the predetermined identification information. It becomes possible to include it in the number of times and count it. As a result, it is possible to display a special game that is executed based on a predetermined variable display due to suspension at the end of an advantageous state, including the number of consecutive special games, on a data display device attached to the gaming machine. Become.

Thus, in the gaming machine according to appendix A1, it is possible to grasp the predetermined special game state and advantageous state based on the predetermined identification information output by the first output means, and output by the second output means. Since it is possible to grasp that it is a predetermined variable display due to suspension at the end of an advantageous state based on specific identification information, a data display installed in a game machine can display a predetermined variable display due to suspension at the end of an advantageous state. It is possible to display the special game executed based on the number of consecutive special games. Therefore, when the transition to a predetermined special game state is triggered by the suspension at the end of the advantageous state, the number of consecutive games of the special game displayed on the data display and the number of consecutive games of the special game recognized by the player are different. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of divergence between As a result, the player's motivation to increase the number of consecutive games displayed on the data display device is prevented from being lowered, thereby preventing the player's interest in the game from being lowered.

[Appendix A2]
The first output means (41) outputs the predetermined identification information (basic signal of the jackpot signal 2) as a level signal,
The gaming machine according to appendix A1, wherein the second output means (41) continuously outputs the specific identification information (an extension signal of the jackpot signal 2) as a pulse signal or an on/off signal.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A2, predetermined identification information is output as a level signal, and specific identification information is output as a pulse signal or an on/off signal. In this way, predetermined identification information is output as a level signal, and specific identification information is output as a pulse signal or an on/off signal. An external device such as the computer 102 can easily and reliably discriminate between predetermined identification information and specific identification information.

[Appendix A3]
Entry of a game ball into the second start ball entry means (315) rather than the variation display of the predetermined symbol executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry means (314) The gaming machine according to appendix A1 or appendix A2, which preferentially executes the variable display of the predetermined symbols that is executed as a trigger.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A3, the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry means is more likely than the variation display of the predetermined symbol executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry means. A variable display of a predetermined pattern executed as a trigger is preferentially executed. Therefore, if there is a reservation of the right to execute the variable display of the predetermined symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry means at the end of the advantageous state, the second start even after the end of the advantageous state A variable display of a predetermined pattern executed with the entry of a game ball into the entry means as a trigger is preferentially executed. As a result, the specific identification information is the advantageous state when there is a reservation of the right to execute the variable display of the predetermined symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry means at the end of the advantageous state. After the completion of , output is performed during a period during which the variable display of the predetermined symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means in an advantageous state is executable. As a result, the gaming machine displays the specific identification information, which is the period during which the variable display of the predetermined symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry means in the advantageous state, is displayed only in the advantageous state. Instead, the output can be continued for a predetermined period after the output of the predetermined identification state is stopped after the end of the advantageous state. Therefore, in the gaming machine, the right to variably display a predetermined pattern triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second start ball entry means in an advantageous state, that is, the profit state obtained by the advantageous state is also available at the store. It can be output to an external device such as a hall computer on the side. As a result, an external device such as a hall computer on the store side can grasp the profit state obtained by the advantageous state even after the advantageous state ends, so that the special game started in the profit state is reduced to the number of consecutive games. It becomes easy to include and count.

[Appendix B1]
A predetermined special game (5R normal jackpot game, 5R probability variable jackpot game or 16R probability variable jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed with the entry of the game ball to the predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315) as a trigger. Determination means (41) for determining whether to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state);
When the determination means (41) determines whether or not to shift to the special game state, a variation that executes a variation display of a predetermined symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative symbol) display means (41, 51);
Reserving means (41, 51) for reserving the right to execute the variable display of the predetermined symbols executed by the variable display means (41, 51);
with
The predetermined start ball entry means (314, 315) includes a first start ball entry means (314), a disadvantageous state (normal game state) in which game ball entry is restricted, and a game ball entry in the disadvantageous state (normal game state). a second start-up ball entry means (315) different from the first start-up ball entry means (314) that switches between an advantageous state (variable probability game state, time-saving game state) that is easier than the state,
Entry of a game ball into the second start ball entry means (315) rather than the variation display of the predetermined symbol executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry means (314) preferentially execute the variable display of the predetermined symbol executed with the
After the end of the predetermined special game, a gaming machine in which the advantageous state is executed until a predetermined condition is established (start of a jackpot game, execution of a specified number of special game games),
a first output means (41) for continuously outputting predetermined identification information (basic signal of the jackpot signal 2) capable of identifying the state to the outside in the predetermined special game state and the advantageous state;
output stop means (41) for stopping the output of the predetermined identification information by the first output means (41) at the end of the advantageous state;
Storage means (41) for storing the number of reserved rights to execute the variable display of the predetermined symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means (315) at the end of the advantageous state. and,
After the end of the advantageous state, a period during which the predetermined variable display of the predetermined symbols can be performed a predetermined number of times corresponding to at least the number of reservations stored in the storage means (41), and the period can be identified. A second output means (41) for continuously outputting the identification information (extended signal of the jackpot signal 2) for a predetermined period;
with
The second output means (41) outputs the specific identification information (the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2) in a manner different from the output mode of the predetermined identification information (the basic signal of the jackpot signal 2) by the first output means (41). A game machine characterized by continuously outputting an extension signal).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B1, in a predetermined special game state and an advantageous state, the first output means continuously outputs predetermined identification information that can identify the state to the outside. The hall computer can grasp the predetermined special game state and advantageous state based on the predetermined identification information. As a result, the hall computer can grasp the number of consecutive special games from the start of the first special game to the end of the advantageous state. On the other hand, on the data display installed in the gaming machine, based on the information generated based on the predetermined identification information output from the hall computer, the special game from the start of the first special game to the end of the advantageous state is displayed. It is possible to display the number of consecutive times.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, after the end of the advantageous state, the second output means can execute a predetermined variable display of a predetermined symbol corresponding to at least the reserved right stored in the storage means. Specific identification information that can be identified is continuously output for a predetermined period in an output mode different from the predetermined identification information. It can be understood that the predetermined variable display based on the suspension at the end of the advantageous state is being executed. Thereby, in the hall computer, when the predetermined variable display is to shift to the special game state based on the determination result by the determination means, the predetermined variable display by suspension at the end of the advantageous state is based on the specific identification information. It can be understood that Therefore, in the hall computer, the special game executed based on the predetermined fluctuation display by holding at the end of the advantageous state is grasped based on the predetermined identification information. It becomes possible to include it in the number of times and count it. As a result, it is possible to display a special game that is executed based on a predetermined variable display due to suspension at the end of an advantageous state, including the number of consecutive special games, on a data display device attached to the gaming machine. Become.

Thus, in the gaming machine according to appendix B1, it is possible to grasp the predetermined special game state and advantageous state based on the predetermined identification information output by the first output means, and output by the second output means. Since it is possible to grasp that it is a predetermined variable display due to suspension at the end of an advantageous state based on specific identification information, a data display installed in a game machine can display a predetermined variable display due to suspension at the end of an advantageous state. It is possible to display the special game executed based on the number of consecutive special games. Therefore, when the transition to a predetermined special game state is triggered by the suspension at the end of the advantageous state, the number of consecutive games of the special game displayed on the data display and the number of consecutive games of the special game recognized by the player are different. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of divergence between As a result, the player's motivation to increase the number of consecutive games displayed on the data display device is prevented from declining, and thus the player's interest in the game is prevented from declining.

[Appendix B2]
The first output means (41) outputs the predetermined identification information (basic signal of the jackpot signal 2) as a level signal,
The gaming machine according to appendix B1, wherein the second output means (41) continuously outputs the specific identification information (an extension signal of the jackpot signal 2) as a pulse signal.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B2, predetermined identification information is output as a level signal, and specific identification information is output as a pulse signal or an on/off signal. In this way, predetermined identification information is output as a level signal, and specific identification information is output as a pulse signal or an on/off signal. An external device such as the computer 102 can easily and reliably discriminate between predetermined identification information and specific identification information.

[Appendix B3]
Entry of a game ball into the second start ball entry means (315) rather than the variation display of the predetermined symbol executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry means (314) The gaming machine according to appendix B1 or appendix B2, which preferentially executes the variable display of the predetermined symbols that is executed as a trigger.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B3, the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry means is more likely than the variation display of the predetermined symbol executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry means. A variable display of a predetermined pattern executed as a trigger is preferentially executed. Therefore, if there is a reservation of the right to execute the variable display of the predetermined symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry means at the end of the advantageous state, the second start even after the end of the advantageous state A variable display of a predetermined pattern executed with the entry of a game ball into the entry means as a trigger is preferentially executed. As a result, the specific identification information is the advantageous state when there is a reservation of the right to execute the variable display of the predetermined symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry means at the end of the advantageous state. After the completion of , output is performed during a period during which the variable display of the predetermined symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means in an advantageous state is executable. As a result, the gaming machine displays the specific identification information, which is the period during which the variable display of the predetermined symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry means in the advantageous state, is displayed only in the advantageous state. Instead, the output can be continued for a predetermined period after the output of the predetermined identification state is stopped after the end of the advantageous state. Therefore, in the gaming machine, the right to variably display a predetermined pattern triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second start ball entry means in an advantageous state, that is, the profit state obtained by the advantageous state is also available at the store. It can be output to an external device such as a hall computer on the side. As a result, an external device such as a hall computer on the store side can grasp the profit state obtained by the advantageous state even after the advantageous state ends, so that the special game started in the profit state is reduced to the number of consecutive games. It becomes easy to include and count.

[Appendix C1]
A predetermined special game (5R normal jackpot game, 5R probability variable jackpot game or 16R probability variable jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed with the entry of the game ball to the predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315) as a trigger. Determination means (41) for determining whether to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state);
When the determination means (41) determines whether or not to shift to the special game state, a variation that executes a variation display of a predetermined symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative symbol) display means (41, 51);
Reserving means (41, 51) for reserving the right to execute the variable display of the predetermined symbols executed by the variable display means (41);
with
The predetermined start ball entry means (314, 315) includes a first start ball entry means (314), a disadvantageous state (normal game state) in which game ball entry is restricted, and a game ball entry in the disadvantageous state (normal game state). a second start-up ball entry means (315) different from the first start-up ball entry means (314) that switches between an advantageous state (variable probability game state, time-saving game state) that is easier than the state,
Entry of a game ball into the second start ball entry means (315) rather than the variation display of the predetermined symbol executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry means (314) preferentially execute the variable display of the predetermined symbol executed with the
After the end of the predetermined special game, a gaming machine in which the advantageous state is executed until a predetermined condition is established (start of a jackpot game, execution of a specified number of special game games),
a first output means (41) for continuously outputting predetermined identification information (basic signal of the jackpot signal 2) capable of identifying the state to the outside in the predetermined special game state and the advantageous state;
output stop means (41) for stopping the output of the predetermined identification information by the first output means (41) at the end of the advantageous state;
Storage means (41) for storing the number of reserved rights to execute the variable display of the predetermined symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means (315) at the end of the advantageous state. and,
A specific identification capable of identifying a period in which a predetermined variable display of the predetermined symbol corresponding to the reserved right stored at least in the storage means (41) can be performed after the end of the advantageous state. A second output means (41) for continuously outputting information (an extension signal of the jackpot signal 2) for a predetermined period;
with
The second output means (41)
The specific identification information (extension signal of the jackpot signal 2) is continuously output in an output mode different from the output mode of the predetermined identification information (basic signal of the jackpot signal 2) by the first output means (41). ,
until a specific period elapses after the predetermined variable display executed last among the predetermined variable displays executed corresponding to the number of reservations stored in the storage means is stopped. A gaming machine characterized in that it can continuously output the identification information of the.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C1, in a predetermined special game state and an advantageous state, the first output means continuously outputs predetermined identification information that can identify the state to the outside, so that, for example, a game hall The hall computer can grasp the predetermined special game state and advantageous state based on the predetermined identification information. As a result, the hall computer can grasp the number of consecutive special games from the start of the first special game to the end of the advantageous state. On the other hand, on the data display installed in the gaming machine, based on the information generated based on the predetermined identification information output from the hall computer, the special game from the start of the first special game to the end of the advantageous state is displayed. It is possible to display the number of consecutive times.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to appendix C1, after the end of the advantageous state, the second output means can execute a predetermined variable display of a predetermined symbol corresponding to at least the reserved right stored in the storage means. Specific identification information that can be identified is continuously output for a predetermined period in an output mode different from the predetermined identification information. It can be understood that the predetermined variable display based on the suspension at the end of the advantageous state is being executed. Thereby, in the hall computer, when the predetermined variable display is to shift to the special game state based on the determination result by the determination means, the predetermined variable display by suspension at the end of the advantageous state is based on the specific identification information. It can be understood that Therefore, in the hall computer, the special game executed based on the predetermined fluctuation display by holding at the end of the advantageous state is grasped based on the predetermined identification information. It becomes possible to include it in the number of times and count it. As a result, it is possible to display a special game that is executed based on a predetermined variable display due to suspension at the end of an advantageous state, including the number of consecutive special games, on a data display device attached to the gaming machine. Become.

Further, in the gaming machine according to appendix C1, the specific identification information is executed at the end of the predetermined variable display of the predetermined symbol corresponding to the reserved right stored in the storage means at the end of the advantageous state. output until a specific period elapses after the predetermined variable display is stopped. As a result, an external device such as a hall computer on the store side can discriminate whether or not the specific identification information has been temporarily unable to be received due to, for example, the occurrence of noise, or whether the output of the specific identification information has been stopped. be able to. Therefore, even if an external device such as a hall computer on the store side cannot receive the specific identification information temporarily due to the occurrence of noise, etc., It can be understood that it is a period during which a predetermined variable display of a predetermined pattern corresponding to the right can be executed.

As described above, in the gaming machine according to appendix C1, it is possible to grasp the predetermined special game state and advantageous state based on the predetermined identification information output by the first output means, and output by the second output means. Since it is possible to grasp that it is a predetermined variable display due to suspension at the end of an advantageous state based on specific identification information, a data display installed in a game machine can display a predetermined variable display due to suspension at the end of an advantageous state. It is possible to display the special game executed based on the number of consecutive special games. Therefore, when the transition to a predetermined special game state is triggered by the suspension at the end of the advantageous state, the number of consecutive games of the special game displayed on the data display and the number of consecutive games of the special game recognized by the player are different. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of divergence between As a result, the player's motivation to increase the number of consecutive games displayed on the data display device is prevented from declining, and thus the player's interest in the game is prevented from declining.

[Appendix C2]
Entry of a game ball into the second start ball entry means (315) than the variation display of the predetermined symbol executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry means (314) The gaming machine according to appendix C1, which preferentially executes the variable display of the predetermined symbols that is executed as a trigger.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C2, the game ball entering the second starting ball entering means is more likely to be displayed than the predetermined pattern variation display that is executed when the game ball enters the first starting ball entering means. A variable display of a predetermined pattern executed as a trigger is preferentially executed. Therefore, if there is a reservation of the right to execute the variable display of the predetermined symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry means at the end of the advantageous state, the second start even after the end of the advantageous state A variable display of a predetermined pattern executed with the entry of a game ball into the entry means as a trigger is preferentially executed. As a result, the specific identification information is the advantageous state when there is a reservation of the right to execute the variable display of the predetermined symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry means at the end of the advantageous state. After the completion of , output is performed during a period during which the variable display of the predetermined symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means in an advantageous state is executable. As a result, the gaming machine displays the specific identification information, which is the period during which the variable display of the predetermined symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry means in the advantageous state, is displayed only in the advantageous state. Instead, the output can be continued for a predetermined period after the output of the predetermined identification state is stopped after the end of the advantageous state. Therefore, in the gaming machine, the right to variably display a predetermined pattern triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second start ball entry means in an advantageous state, that is, the profit state obtained by the advantageous state is also available at the store. It can be output to an external device such as a hall computer on the side. As a result, an external device such as a hall computer on the store side can grasp the profit state obtained by the advantageous state even after the advantageous state ends, so that the special game started in the profit state is reduced to the number of consecutive games. It becomes easy to include and count.

[Appendix D1]
A predetermined special game (5R normal jackpot game, 5R probability variable jackpot game or 16R probability variable jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed with the entry of the game ball to the predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315) as a trigger. Determination means (41) for determining whether to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state);
When the determination means (41) determines whether or not to shift to the special game state, a variation that executes a variation display of a predetermined symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative symbol) display means (41, 51);
Reserving means (41, 51) for reserving the right to execute the variable display of the predetermined symbols executed by the variable display means (41);
with
The predetermined start ball entry means (314, 315) includes a first start ball entry means (314), a disadvantageous state (normal game state) in which game ball entry is restricted, and a game ball entry in the disadvantageous state (normal game state). a second start-up ball entry means (315) different from the first start-up ball entry means (314) that switches between an advantageous state (variable probability game state, time-saving game state) that is easier than the state,
Entry of a game ball into the second start ball entry means (315) rather than the variation display of the predetermined symbol executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry means (314) preferentially execute the variable display of the predetermined symbol executed with the
After the end of the predetermined special game, a gaming machine in which the advantageous state is executed until a predetermined condition is established (start of a jackpot game, execution of a specified number of special game games),
a first output means (41) for continuously outputting predetermined identification information (basic signal of the jackpot signal 2) capable of identifying the state to the outside in the predetermined special game state and the advantageous state;
output stop means (41) for stopping the output of the predetermined identification information by the first output means (41) at the end of the advantageous state;
Storage means (41) for storing the number of reserved rights to execute the variable display of the predetermined symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means (315) at the end of the advantageous state. and,
A specific identification capable of identifying a period in which a predetermined variable display of the predetermined symbol corresponding to the reserved right stored at least in the storage means (41) can be performed after the end of the advantageous state. A second output means (41) for continuously outputting information (an extension signal of the jackpot signal 2) for a predetermined period;
image display means (341) for displaying an image during execution of the variable display when the predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative symbol) are variably displayed;
A predetermined background effect is executed to display a predetermined background image on the image display means (341) in the disadvantageous state, and a specific background different from the predetermined background image is displayed on the image display means (341) in the advantageous state. Effect executing means (51) for executing a specific background effect for displaying an image;
with
The second output means (41) outputs the specific identification information (jackpot signal 2) in an output mode different from the output mode of the predetermined identification information (basic signal of the jackpot signal 2) by the first output means (41). A gaming machine characterized by continuously outputting an extension signal).

In the gaming machine according to appendix D1, a predetermined background effect is executed in which a predetermined background image is displayed on the image display means in a disadvantageous state, and a specific background image different from the predetermined background image is displayed on the image display means in an advantageous state. A specific background effect is executed. In this way, a predetermined background effect is executed in which a predetermined background image is displayed on the image display means in a disadvantageous state, and a specific background image different from the predetermined background image is displayed in the image display means in an advantageous state. By executing the effect, the player can easily visually determine whether the situation is disadvantageous or advantageous based on the background image displayed on the image display means.

[Appendix D2]
The predetermined conditions include a first predetermined condition for shifting from the advantageous state to the disadvantageous state and a second predetermined condition for shifting from the advantageous state to the special game state,
When the advantageous state is shifted to the disadvantageous state due to the establishment of the first predetermined condition, the effect executing means (51) performs the predetermined The gaming machine according to appendix D1, wherein a predetermined initial background effect is executed as the background effect of the.

[Appendix D3]
The gaming machine according to appendix D2, wherein the specified condition is that the predetermined symbols are displayed a specified number of times after the transition from the advantageous state to the disadvantageous state.

[Appendix D4]
The gaming machine according to appendix D2 or appendix D3, wherein the specified condition is winning in an end lottery to decide whether or not execution of the specific background effect is to be ended.

In the gaming machines according to appendices D2 to D4, a predetermined initial background effect is executed as a predetermined background effect from the transition from the advantageous state to the disadvantageous state until a prescribed condition is satisfied. In this way, a predetermined initial background effect is executed as a predetermined background effect from the transition from the advantageous state to the disadvantageous state until the prescribed conditions are satisfied, so that the player can move from the advantageous state to the disadvantageous state. It is possible to easily visually grasp that it has been transferred to .

[Appendix D5]
Supplementary notes D2 to Supplementary notes characterized in that the specific background effect is a unique background effect that is executed only during the period from the transition from the advantageous state to the disadvantageous state to the establishment of the prescribed condition. The gaming machine according to any one of D4.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D5, the specific background effect is a unique background effect that is executed only from the transition from the advantageous state to the disadvantageous state until the prescribed condition is established. In this way, since the specific background effect is a unique background effect that is executed only during the period from when the advantageous state is shifted to the disadvantageous state until the specified conditions are satisfied, the player is at an unfavorable disadvantage. Even in a situation where the player's interest in the game may decrease due to the transition to the state, the decrease in the interest in the game is prevented by making the player visually recognize the unique background presentation.

[Appendix D6]
Entry of a game ball into the second start ball entry means (315) rather than the variation display of the predetermined symbol executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry means (314) The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D5, wherein the variable display of the predetermined symbols is executed with priority.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D6, the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry means is more likely than the variation display of the predetermined symbols executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry means. A variable display of a predetermined pattern executed as a trigger is preferentially executed. Therefore, if there is a reservation of the right to execute the variable display of the predetermined symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry means at the end of the advantageous state, the second start even after the end of the advantageous state A variable display of a predetermined pattern executed with the entry of a game ball into the entry means as a trigger is preferentially executed. As a result, the specific identification information is the advantageous state when there is a reservation of the right to execute the variable display of the predetermined symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry means at the end of the advantageous state. After the completion of , output is performed during a period during which the variable display of the predetermined symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means in an advantageous state is executable. As a result, the gaming machine displays the specific identification information, which is the period during which the variable display of the predetermined symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry means in the advantageous state, is displayed only in the advantageous state. Instead, the output can be continued for a predetermined period after the output of the predetermined identification state is stopped after the end of the advantageous state. Therefore, in the gaming machine, the right to variably display a predetermined pattern triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second start ball entry means in an advantageous state, that is, the profit state obtained by the advantageous state is also available at the store. It can be output to an external device such as a hall computer on the side. As a result, an external device such as a hall computer on the store side can grasp the profit state obtained by the advantageous state even after the advantageous state ends, so that the special game started in the profit state is reduced to the number of consecutive games. It becomes easy to include and count.

[Appendix E1]
A predetermined special game (5R normal jackpot game, 5R probability variable jackpot game or 16R probability variable jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed with the entry of the game ball to the predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315) as a trigger. Determination means (41) for determining whether to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state);
When the determination means (41) determines whether or not to shift to the special game state, a variation that executes a variation display of a predetermined symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative symbol) display means (41, 51);
Reserving means (41, 51) for reserving the right to execute the variable display of the predetermined symbols executed by the variable display means (41, 51);
with
The predetermined start ball entry means (314, 315) includes a first start ball entry means (314), a disadvantageous state (normal game state) in which game ball entry is restricted, and a game ball entry in the disadvantageous state (normal game state). a second start-up ball entry means (315) different from the first start-up ball entry means (314) that switches between an advantageous state (variable probability game state, time-saving game state) that is easier than the state,
Entry of a game ball into the second start ball entry means (315) rather than the variation display of the predetermined symbol executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry means (314) preferentially execute the variable display of the predetermined symbol executed with the
After the end of the predetermined special game, a gaming machine in which the advantageous state is executed until a predetermined condition is established (start of a jackpot game, execution of a specified number of special game games),
a first output means (41) for continuously outputting predetermined identification information (basic signal of the jackpot signal 2) capable of identifying the state to the outside in the predetermined special game state and the advantageous state;
output stop means (41) for stopping the output of the predetermined identification information by the first output means (41) at the end of the advantageous state;
Storage means (41) for storing the number of reserved rights to execute the variable display of the predetermined symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means (315) at the end of the advantageous state. and,
A specific identification capable of identifying a period in which a predetermined variable display of the predetermined symbol corresponding to the reserved right stored at least in the storage means (41) can be performed after the end of the advantageous state. A second output means (41) for continuously outputting information (an extension signal of the jackpot signal 2) for a predetermined period;
Third identification information different from predetermined identification information (basic signal of jackpot signal 2) and specific identification information (extension signal of jackpot signal 2) capable of externally identifying the state in the predetermined special game state Third output means (41) for continuously outputting (jackpot signal 1);
with
The second output means (41) outputs the specific identification information (jackpot signal 2) in an output mode different from the output mode of the predetermined identification information (basic signal of the jackpot signal 2) by the first output means (41). A gaming machine characterized by continuously outputting an extension signal).

In the gaming machine according to appendix E1, in addition to predetermined identification information capable of identifying a predetermined special game state and an advantageous state, third identification information capable of identifying a predetermined special game state is output. be done. In this way, by outputting the third identification information that can identify the predetermined special game state, an external device such as a hall computer on the store side can determine the predetermined game based on the third identification information. It can be grasped that it is in a special game state. As a result, an external device such as a hall computer on the store side can grasp the number of transitions to a predetermined special game state (the number of times a special game is executed), and the number of transitions to a predetermined special game state ( number of executions of the special game) can be displayed.

Further, in the gaming machine according to appendix E1, depending on whether or not predetermined identification information is received when receiving the third identification information, transition from an advantageous state to a predetermined special game state or transition from a disadvantageous state to a predetermined It can be determined whether the transition to the special game state. Specifically, when the predetermined identification information is received when the third identification information is received, it can be determined that the transition from the advantageous state to the predetermined special game state has occurred, and the third identification information is received. When the predetermined identification information is not received at times, it is possible to determine whether the transition from the disadvantageous state to the predetermined special game state occurs. As a result, an external device such as a hall computer on the store side can grasp the number of times the special game state has been shifted from the advantageous state and the number of consecutive transitions to a predetermined special game state (the number of consecutive executions of the special game). The number of consecutive transitions to a predetermined special game state (the number of consecutive executions of special games) can be displayed on a data display or the like.

[Appendix E2]
Entry of a game ball into the second start ball entry means (315) than the variation display of the predetermined symbol executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry means (314) The gaming machine according to appendix E1, which preferentially executes the variable display of the predetermined symbols that is executed as a trigger.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E2, the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry means is more likely than the variation display of the predetermined symbol executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry means. A variable display of a predetermined pattern executed as a trigger is preferentially executed. Therefore, if there is a reservation of the right to execute the variable display of the predetermined symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry means at the end of the advantageous state, the second start even after the end of the advantageous state A variable display of a predetermined pattern executed with the entry of a game ball into the entry means as a trigger is preferentially executed. As a result, the specific identification information is the advantageous state when there is a reservation of the right to execute the variable display of the predetermined symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry means at the end of the advantageous state. After the completion of , output is performed during a period during which the variable display of the predetermined symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means in an advantageous state is executable. As a result, the gaming machine displays the specific identification information, which is the period during which the variable display of the predetermined symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry means in the advantageous state, is displayed only in the advantageous state. Instead, the output can be continued for a predetermined period after the output of the predetermined identification state is stopped after the end of the advantageous state. Therefore, in the gaming machine, the right to variably display a predetermined pattern triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second start ball entry means in an advantageous state, that is, the profit state obtained by the advantageous state is also available at the store. It can be output to an external device such as a hall computer on the side. As a result, an external device such as a hall computer on the store side can grasp the profit state obtained by the advantageous state even after the advantageous state ends, so that the special game started in the profit state is reduced to the number of consecutive games. It becomes easy to include and count.

[Appendix A1]
Determination of whether or not to generate a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player triggered by the entry of a game ball into a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315) (jackpot lottery). means (41);
Triggered by execution of the determination of whether or not to generate the special game state by the determination means (41), a game rotation operation in which predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are variably displayed is performed. A game rotation operation execution means (41) to be executed;
Reserving means (41) for reserving the right to execute the game-rotating motion executed by the game-rotating motion executing means (41);
with
The predetermined start ball entry means (314, 315) includes a first start ball entry means (314), a disadvantageous state in which game ball entry is restricted, and a game ball entry easier than the disadvantageous state. a second start-up entry means (315) different from the first start-up entry means (314) switched to an advantageous state;
The predetermined symbols are a first symbol (first special symbol) that is variably displayed when a gaming ball enters the first start ball entry means (314), and the second start ball entry means (315). ) and a second symbol (second special symbol) that is variably displayed triggered by the entry of the game ball into
Said game rotation motion includes a first game rotation motion (first special symbol game) in which said first symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed, and said second symbol (second special symbol) is variably displayed. including a second game rotation operation (second special game),
The reservation of the right to execute the game rotation operation by the reservation means (41) is the first reservation (first special figure reservation) which is the reservation of the right to execute the first game rotation operation, and the second game rotation A gaming machine including a second reservation (second special reservation) that is a reservation of the right to execute an action,
The second suspension in a predetermined game state (a state in which continuous effects such as RUSH effects can be executed, a state in which a second special figure game can be executed based on the game ball to the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving game state) 1st numerical information to the first counting means (second special figure reservation number storage area NAB, second special figure reservation number storage area corresponding area) capable of counting corresponding to the number of (second special figure reservation number M) first numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting;
Subtraction means (41, 51) for subtracting the first numerical information set in the first counting means by establishment of a subtraction condition (start of the second special game);
Effect display means (51) for executing a corresponding specific effect (RUSH effect, one-shot notification effect, battle effect) during execution of the variable display of the second symbol in the predetermined game state;
A second counting means (c time-saving game) capable of counting corresponding to the specific game when a specific condition (time-saving pattern stoppage failure) capable of generating a specific game state (c time-saving game state) capable of executing a specific game is established Second numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting second numerical information (the number of special figure games that can be executed in the c time saving game state) different from the first numerical information in the number counter);
updating means (41, 51) for updating the second numerical information set in the second counting means by establishment of an update condition (start of a special game);
In the second game rotation during execution of the specific effect, when the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game rotation during execution of the specific effect, at least the first counting means is set to Means for continuously executing the specific effect during the predetermined game state until the first numerical information obtained becomes a specific value (for example, 0) by being subtracted by the subtracting means when the subtraction condition is established. (41, 51) and
When the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific performance, specific numerical information (remaining number of time-reduction games in c time-reduction game state) is set in the second counting means. is set, the specific response display corresponding to the specific numerical information of the second counting means (remaining c time reduction game count display (effect) in c time reduction game state) is not executed, and the specific effect is being executed The specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated when the update condition is established during execution of the second game rotation operation, and the specific numerical information corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means is specified. means (51) for executing the specific correspondence display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific effect without executing the correspondence display;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A1, even when the specific condition is established during the execution of the second game rotation during execution of the specific effect, the specific correspondence display is not started. Further, in the present invention, even if the update condition is satisfied during execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect, the post-update specific correspondence display is not started. In this way, when the specific condition or the update condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game rotation during execution of the specific effect, the specific correspondence display is not started, so that the second game rotation during execution of the specific effect is performed. Even if a specific condition or an update condition is established during execution, the specific correspondence display prevents the specific effect from being terminated in the middle, so that the game caused by the specific effect being terminated in the middle is prevented. A decrease in interest is prevented.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix A1, based on the end of the specific effect, the specific corresponding display corresponding to the second numerical information of the second counting means at the time of the end of the specific effect is started. In this way, by starting the display corresponding to the second numerical information of the second counting means at the end of the specific performance, the display corresponding to the specific performance can be started without ending the specific performance in the middle. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the specific correspondence display not being started.

[Appendix B1]
Determination of whether or not to generate a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player triggered by the entry of a game ball into a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315) (jackpot lottery). means (41);
Triggered by execution of the determination of whether or not to generate the special game state by the determination means (41), a game rotation operation in which predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are variably displayed is performed. A game rotation operation execution means (41) to be executed;
Reserving means (41) for reserving the right to execute the game-rotating motion executed by the game-rotating motion executing means (41);
with
The predetermined start ball entry means (314, 315) includes a first start ball entry means (314), a disadvantageous state in which game ball entry is restricted, and a game ball entry easier than the disadvantageous state. a second start-up entry means (315) different from the first start-up entry means (314) switched to an advantageous state;
The predetermined symbols are a first symbol (first special symbol) that is variably displayed when a gaming ball enters the first start ball entry means (314), and the second start ball entry means (315). ) and a second symbol (second special symbol) that is variably displayed triggered by the entry of the game ball into
Said game rotation motion includes a first game rotation motion (first special symbol game) in which said first symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed, and said second symbol (second special symbol) is variably displayed. including a second game rotation operation (second special game),
The reservation of the right to execute the game rotation operation by the reservation means (41) is the first reservation (first special figure reservation) which is the reservation of the right to execute the first game rotation operation, and the second game rotation A gaming machine including a second reservation (second special reservation) that is a reservation of the right to execute an action,
The second suspension in a predetermined game state (a state in which continuous effects such as RUSH effects can be executed, a state in which a second special figure game can be executed based on the game ball to the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving game state) 1st numerical information to the first counting means (second special figure reservation number storage area NAB, second special figure reservation number storage area corresponding area) capable of counting corresponding to the number of (second special figure reservation number M) first numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting;
Subtraction means (41, 51) for subtracting the first numerical information set in the first counting means by establishment of a subtraction condition (start of the second special game);
Effect display means (51) for executing a corresponding specific effect (RUSH effect, one-shot notification effect, battle effect) during execution of the variable display of the second symbol in the predetermined game state;
A second counting means (c time-saving game) capable of counting corresponding to the specific game when a specific condition (time-saving pattern stoppage failure) capable of generating a specific game state (c time-saving game state) capable of executing a specific game is established Second numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting second numerical information (the number of special figure games that can be executed in the c time saving game state) different from the first numerical information in the number counter);
updating means (41, 51) for updating the second numerical information set in the second counting means by establishment of an update condition (start of a special game);
In the second game rotation during execution of the specific effect, when the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game rotation during execution of the specific effect, at least the first counting means is set to Means for continuously executing the specific effect during the predetermined game state until the first numerical information obtained becomes a specific value (for example, 0) by being subtracted by the subtracting means when the subtraction condition is established. (41, 51) and
When the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific performance, specific numerical information (remaining number of time-reduction games in c time-reduction game state) is set in the second counting means. is set, the specific response display corresponding to the specific numerical information of the second counting means (remaining c time reduction game count display (effect) in c time reduction game state) is not executed, and the specific effect is being executed The specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated when the update condition is established during execution of the second game rotation operation, and the specific numerical information corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means is specified. means (51) for executing the specific correspondence display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific effect without executing the correspondence display;
means (51) for executing an effect (branching effect, left-handed display, etc.) indicating or suggesting a game state after the end of the specific effect when the specific effect ends;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note B1, when the specific effect ends, an effect is executed that indicates or suggests the gaming state after the specific effect ends. In this way, when the specific effect ends, an effect that indicates or suggests the game state after the specific effect ends is executed. It is possible to grasp the state. As a result, the player can determine what kind of effect will be executed even in a situation where the player's interest in the game decreases due to the fact that the end of the specific effect clearly indicates or suggests the end of a state advantageous to the player. The player can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that the game state after the end of the specific effect will be advantageous to the player.

[Appendix B2]
The game machine according to appendix B1, wherein the effect specifying or suggesting the game state after the end of the specific effect includes an effect specifying or suggesting a launching area of the game ball on the game board (31).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B2, the effect specifying or suggesting the game state after the end of the specific effect includes the effect specifying or suggesting the launch area of the game ball on the game board. In this way, the effect that specifies or suggests the game state after the end of the specific effect includes the effect that specifies or suggests the launch area of the game ball on the game board, so that the player can It is possible to grasp the launching area of the game ball on the game board after the performance is finished. As a result, the player can launch the appropriate game ball after the specific effect is completed, thereby preventing the loss of unnecessary game balls due to inappropriate launch of the game ball (so-called wasted hitting). It will be possible to properly secure the profits of

[Appendix C1]
Determination of whether or not to generate a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player triggered by the entry of a game ball into a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315) (jackpot lottery). means (41);
Triggered by execution of the determination of whether or not to generate the special game state by the determination means (41), a game rotation operation in which predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are variably displayed is performed. A game rotation operation execution means (41) to be executed;
Reserving means (41) for reserving the right to execute the game-rotating motion executed by the game-rotating motion executing means (41);
with
The predetermined start ball entry means (314, 315) includes a first start ball entry means (314), a disadvantageous state in which game ball entry is restricted, and a game ball entry easier than the disadvantageous state. a second start-up entry means (315) different from the first start-up entry means (314) switched to an advantageous state;
The predetermined symbols are a first symbol (first special symbol) that is variably displayed when a gaming ball enters the first start ball entry means (314), and the second start ball entry means (315). ) and a second symbol (second special symbol) that is variably displayed triggered by the entry of the game ball into
Said game rotation motion includes a first game rotation motion (first special symbol game) in which said first symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed, and said second symbol (second special symbol) is variably displayed. including a second game rotation operation (second special game),
The reservation of the right to execute the game rotation operation by the reservation means (41) is the first reservation (first special figure reservation) which is the reservation of the right to execute the first game rotation operation, and the second game rotation A gaming machine including a second reservation (second special reservation) that is a reservation of the right to execute an action,
The second suspension in a predetermined game state (a state in which continuous effects such as RUSH effects can be executed, a state in which a second special figure game can be executed based on the game ball to the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving game state) 1st numerical information to the first counting means (second special figure reservation number storage area NAB, second special figure reservation number storage area corresponding area) capable of counting corresponding to the number of (second special figure reservation number M) first numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting;
Subtraction means (41, 51) for subtracting the first numerical information set in the first counting means by establishment of a subtraction condition (start of the second special game);
Effect display means (51) for executing a corresponding specific effect (RUSH effect, one-shot notification effect, battle effect) during execution of the variable display of the second symbol in the predetermined game state;
A second counting means (c time-saving game) capable of counting corresponding to the specific game when a specific condition (time-saving pattern stoppage failure) capable of generating a specific game state (c time-saving game state) capable of executing a specific game is established Second numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting second numerical information (the number of special figure games that can be executed in the c time saving game state) different from the first numerical information in the number counter);
updating means (41, 51) for updating the second numerical information set in the second counting means by establishment of an update condition (start of a special game);
In the second game rotation during execution of the specific effect, when the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game rotation during execution of the specific effect, at least the first counting means is set to Means for continuously executing the specific effect during the predetermined game state until the first numerical information obtained becomes a specific value (for example, 0) by being subtracted by the subtracting means when the subtraction condition is established. (41, 51) and
When the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific performance, specific numerical information (remaining number of time-reduction games in c time-reduction game state) is set in the second counting means. is set, the specific response display corresponding to the specific numerical information of the second counting means (remaining c time reduction game count display (effect) in c time reduction game state) is not executed, and the specific effect is being executed The specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated when the update condition is established during execution of the second game rotation operation, and the specific numerical information corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means is specified. means (51) for executing the specific correspondence display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific effect without executing the correspondence display;
with
When the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the specific effect, and when the specific condition is not satisfied during execution of the specific effect, the game method after the specific effect (encouraged game ball A game machine characterized in that the launches of are the same.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C1, the game method after the end of the specific effect is the same regardless of whether the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the specific effect or when the specific condition is not satisfied during execution of the specific effect. be. In this way, the game method after the end of the specific effect is the same regardless of whether the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect or when the specific condition is not satisfied during the execution of the specific effect. The player can proceed with the game by the same game method regardless of whether or not the specific condition is established during execution of the specific effect. This prevents the game method from becoming complicated after the end of the specific effect and prevents the player from being disadvantaged.

[Appendix C2]
The game machine according to appendix C1, wherein the game method relates to a method of launching a game ball onto a game board that is advantageous to the player.

The gaming machine according to appendix C2 relates to a method of launching a game ball onto a game board that is advantageous for the player. In this way, since it relates to a method of launching a game ball onto a game board that is advantageous to the player, regardless of whether or not a specific condition is established during the execution of the specific effect, the player can The method of launching game balls that is advantageous to the game is standardized. As a result, the method of launching game balls that is advantageous to the player is prevented from becoming complicated after the end of the specific effect, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged.

[Appendix C3]
The game method includes a first game method in which it is encouraged to enter a game ball into the first starting ball entering means (314), and a game ball entering the second starting ball entering means (315). a second game method encouraged to
The gaming machine according to appendix C2, wherein the gaming method after the end of the specific effect is the first gaming method.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C3, the gaming method includes a first gaming method in which it is encouraged to enter a game ball into the first starting ball entering means, and a second gaming method to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering means. and a second game method in which is encouraged, and the game method after the end of the specific effect is the first game method. In this way, the game method includes the first game method in which it is encouraged to enter the game ball into the first starting ball entering means, and the second game method in which it is encouraged to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering means. and a second game method, wherein the game method after the end of the specific effect is the first game method, regardless of whether or not the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific effect, after the specific effect is completed. , the first game method in which it is recommended to enter the game ball into the first starting ball entering means. This simplifies the method of launching a game ball that is advantageous to the player after the end of the specific effect, and prevents the player from being disadvantaged.

[Appendix D1]
Determination of whether or not to generate a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player triggered by the entry of a game ball into a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315) (jackpot lottery). means (41);
Triggered by execution of the determination of whether or not to generate the special game state by the determination means (41), a game rotation operation in which predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are variably displayed is performed. A game rotation operation execution means (41) to be executed;
Reserving means (41) for reserving the right to execute the game-rotating motion executed by the game-rotating motion executing means (41);
with
The predetermined start ball entry means (314, 315) includes a first start ball entry means (314), a disadvantageous state in which game ball entry is restricted, and a game ball entry easier than the disadvantageous state. a second start-up entry means (315) different from the first start-up entry means (314) switched to an advantageous state;
The predetermined symbols are a first symbol (first special symbol) that is variably displayed when a gaming ball enters the first start ball entry means (314), and the second start ball entry means (315). ) and a second symbol (second special symbol) that is variably displayed triggered by the entry of the game ball into
Said game rotation motion includes a first game rotation motion (first special symbol game) in which said first symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed, and said second symbol (second special symbol) is variably displayed. including a second game rotation operation (second special game),
The reservation of the right to execute the game rotation operation by the reservation means (41) is the first reservation (first special figure reservation) which is the reservation of the right to execute the first game rotation operation, and the second game rotation A gaming machine including a second reservation (second special reservation) that is a reservation of the right to execute an action,
The second suspension in a predetermined game state (a state in which continuous effects such as RUSH effects can be executed, a state in which a second special figure game can be executed based on the game ball to the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving game state) 1st numerical information to the first counting means (second special figure reservation number storage area NAB, second special figure reservation number storage area corresponding area) capable of counting corresponding to the number of (second special figure reservation number M) first numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting;
Subtraction means (41, 51) for subtracting the first numerical information set in the first counting means by establishment of a subtraction condition (start of the second special game);
Effect display means (51) for executing a corresponding specific effect (RUSH effect, one-shot notification effect, battle effect) during execution of the variable display of the second symbol in the predetermined game state;
A second counting means (c time-saving game) capable of counting corresponding to the specific game when a specific condition (time-saving pattern stoppage failure) capable of generating a specific game state (c time-saving game state) capable of executing a specific game is established Second numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting second numerical information (the number of special figure games that can be executed in the c time saving game state) different from the first numerical information in the number counter);
updating means (41, 51) for updating the second numerical information set in the second counting means by establishment of an update condition (start of a special game);
In the second game rotation during execution of the specific effect, when the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game rotation during execution of the specific effect, at least the first counting means is set to Means for continuously executing the specific effect during the predetermined game state until the first numerical information obtained becomes a specific value (for example, 0) by being subtracted by the subtracting means when the subtraction condition is established. (41, 51) and
When the specific condition is established during execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific performance, specific numerical information (remaining number of time-reduction games in c time-reduction game state) is set in the second counting means. The specific correspondence display corresponding to the specific numerical information of the second counting means set (the remaining c time reduction game number display (effect) in the c time reduction game state) is not executed, and the specific effect is being executed The specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated when the update condition is established during the execution of the second game rotation operation, and the specific numerical information corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means is specified. means (51) for executing the specific correspondence display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific effect without executing the correspondence display;
with
A game characterized in that the specific correspondence display is a display capable of identifying the second game rotation motion in which the specific condition is established among the second game rotation motions executed during execution of the specific effect. machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D1, the specific correspondence display is a display that enables identification of the second game rotation motion in which the specific condition is established among the second game rotation motions executed during execution of the specific effect. In this way, the specific correspondence display is a display that enables identification of the second game rotation motion that satisfies the specific condition among the second game rotation motions executed during execution of the specific effect, so that the player can: It can be determined whether or not the specific condition is established in which of the second game round motions among the second game round motions executed during execution of the specific effect. As a result, when the specific response display is displayed after the specific effect is completed, the player guesses whether or not the specific condition is established in which second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect, and the specific effect is executed. You can enjoy the game after finishing.

[Appendix E1]
Determination of whether or not to generate a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player triggered by the entry of a game ball into a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315) (jackpot lottery). means (41);
Triggered by execution of the determination of whether or not to generate the special game state by the determination means (41), a game rotation operation in which predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are variably displayed is performed. A game rotation operation execution means (41) to be executed;
Reserving means (41) for reserving the right to execute the game-rotating motion executed by the game-rotating motion executing means (41);
with
The predetermined start ball entry means (314, 315) includes a first start ball entry means (314), a disadvantageous state in which game ball entry is restricted, and a game ball entry easier than the disadvantageous state. a second start-up entry means (315) different from the first start-up entry means (314) switched to an advantageous state;
The predetermined symbols are a first symbol (first special symbol) that is variably displayed when a gaming ball enters the first start ball entry means (314), and the second start ball entry means (315). ) and a second symbol (second special symbol) that is variably displayed triggered by the entry of the game ball into
Said game rotation motion includes a first game rotation motion (first special symbol game) in which said first symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed, and said second symbol (second special symbol) is variably displayed. including a second game rotation operation (second special game),
The reservation of the right to execute the game rotation operation by the reservation means (41) is the first reservation (first special figure reservation) which is the reservation of the right to execute the first game rotation operation, and the second game rotation A gaming machine including a second reservation (second special reservation) that is a reservation of the right to execute an action,
The second suspension in a predetermined game state (a state in which continuous effects such as RUSH effects can be executed, a state in which a second special figure game can be executed based on the game ball to the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving game state) 1st numerical information to the first counting means (second special figure reservation number storage area NAB, second special figure reservation number storage area corresponding area) capable of counting corresponding to the number of (second special figure reservation number M) first numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting;
Subtraction means (41, 51) for subtracting the first numerical information set in the first counting means by establishment of a subtraction condition (start of the second special game);
Effect display means (51) for executing a corresponding specific effect (RUSH effect, one-shot notification effect, battle effect) during execution of the variable display of the second symbol in the predetermined game state;
A second counting means (c time-saving game) capable of counting corresponding to the specific game when a specific condition (time-saving pattern stoppage failure) capable of generating a specific game state (c time-saving game state) capable of executing a specific game is established Second numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting second numerical information (the number of special figure games that can be executed in the c time saving game state) different from the first numerical information in the number counter);
updating means (41, 51) for updating the second numerical information set in the second counting means by establishment of an update condition (start of a special game);
In the second game rotation during execution of the specific effect, when the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game rotation during execution of the specific effect, at least the first counting means is set to Means for continuously executing the specific effect during the predetermined game state until the first numerical information obtained becomes a specific value (for example, 0) by being subtracted by the subtracting means when the subtraction condition is established. (41, 51) and
When the specific condition is established during execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific performance, specific numerical information (remaining number of time-reduction games in c time-reduction game state) is set in the second counting means. The specific correspondence display corresponding to the specific numerical information of the second counting means set (the remaining c time reduction game number display (effect) in the c time reduction game state) is not executed, and the specific effect is being executed The specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated when the update condition is established during the execution of the second game rotation operation, and the specific numerical information corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means is specified. means (51) for executing the specific correspondence display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific effect without executing the correspondence display;
When the specific performance ends, different performances are executed depending on whether the specific condition is established during execution of the specific performance or when the specific condition is not established during execution of the specific performance. possible means and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix E1, when the specific effect is completed, the case where the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the specific effect differs from the case where the specific condition is not satisfied during execution of the specific effect. A performance is performed. In this way, when the specific effect ends, different effects are executed depending on whether the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the specific effect or not when the specific condition is not satisfied during execution of the specific effect. By doing so, the player can grasp whether or not the specific condition is established during execution of the specific effect based on the effect executed when the specific effect ends. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while anticipating that an effect will be executed that enables the player to grasp that the specific condition for displaying the specific response display is established when the specific effect is completed. can.

[Appendix E2]
The gaming machine according to appendix E1, wherein the effect that can be executed when the specific effect ends includes an effect that indicates or suggests a profit state at the time the specific effect ends.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E2, the effect that can be executed when the specific effect ends includes an effect that indicates or suggests the profit state at the time the specific effect ends. In this way, the effect that can be executed when the specific effect ends includes an effect that indicates or suggests the profit state at the time the specific effect ends, so that the player can enjoy the specific effect based on the effect It is possible to grasp the profit state after the end of As a result, even in a situation where the player's interest in the game decreases due to the explicit or suggested end of the state advantageous to the player due to the end of the specific effect, it is possible to enjoy what kind of effect will be executed. The progress of the game can be enjoyed while expecting that the profit state after the end of the specific presentation is advantageous to the player.

[Appendix F1]
Determination of whether or not to generate a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player triggered by the entry of a game ball into a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315) (jackpot lottery). means (41);
Triggered by execution of the determination of whether or not to generate the special game state by the determination means (41), a game rotation operation in which predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are variably displayed is performed. A game rotation operation execution means (41) to be executed;
Reserving means (41) for reserving the right to execute the game-rotating motion executed by the game-rotating motion executing means (41);
with
The predetermined start ball entry means (314, 315) includes a first start ball entry means (314), a disadvantageous state in which game ball entry is restricted, and a game ball entry easier than the disadvantageous state. a second start-up entry means (315) different from the first start-up entry means (314) switched to an advantageous state;
The predetermined symbols are a first symbol (first special symbol) that is variably displayed when a gaming ball enters the first start ball entry means (314), and the second start ball entry means (315). ) and a second symbol (second special symbol) that is variably displayed triggered by the entry of the game ball into
Said game rotation motion includes a first game rotation motion (first special symbol game) in which said first symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed, and said second symbol (second special symbol) is variably displayed. including a second game rotation operation (second special game),
The reservation of the right to execute the game rotation operation by the reservation means (41) is the first reservation (first special figure reservation) which is the reservation of the right to execute the first game rotation operation, and the second game rotation A gaming machine including a second reservation (second special reservation) that is a reservation of the right to execute an action,
The second suspension in a predetermined game state (a state in which continuous effects such as RUSH effects can be executed, a state in which a second special figure game can be executed based on the game ball to the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving game state) 1st numerical information to the first counting means (second special figure reservation number storage area NAB, second special figure reservation number storage area corresponding area) capable of counting corresponding to the number of (second special figure reservation number M) first numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting;
Subtraction means (41, 51) for subtracting the first numerical information set in the first counting means by establishment of a subtraction condition (start of the second special game);
Effect display means (51) for executing a corresponding specific effect (RUSH effect, one-shot notification effect, battle effect) during execution of the variable display of the second symbol in the predetermined game state;
A second counting means (c time-saving game) capable of counting corresponding to the specific game when a specific condition (time-saving pattern stoppage failure) capable of generating a specific game state (c time-saving game state) capable of executing a specific game is established Second numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting second numerical information (the number of special figure games that can be executed in the c time saving game state) different from the first numerical information in the number counter);
updating means (41, 51) for updating the second numerical information set in the second counting means by establishment of an update condition (start of a special game);
In the second game rotation during execution of the specific effect, when the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game rotation during execution of the specific effect, at least the first counting means is set to Means for continuously executing the specific effect during the predetermined game state until the first numerical information obtained becomes a specific value (for example, 0) by being subtracted by the subtracting means when the subtraction condition is established. (41, 51) and
When the specific condition is established during execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific performance, specific numerical information (remaining number of time-reduction games in c time-reduction game state) is set in the second counting means. The specific correspondence display corresponding to the specific numerical information of the second counting means set (the remaining c time reduction game number display (effect) in the c time reduction game state) is not executed, and the specific effect is being executed The specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated when the update condition is established during the execution of the second game rotation operation, and the specific numerical information corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means is specified. means (51) for executing the specific correspondence display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific effect without executing the correspondence display;
with
The predetermined game state is a state in which the special game state (jackpot game state) is likely to occur (the second special game is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the c time reduction game state). A gaming machine characterized in that it is in a state of being played.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F1, the predetermined game state is a state in which the special game state is likely to occur. Here, in a predetermined game state, even if a specific condition is established, the specific effect is continuously executed until the first numerical information becomes a specific value. Therefore, the predetermined game state is a state that easily causes the special game state, so that the player is made to recognize that the special game state is likely to occur while the specific performance is continuously executed. becomes possible. As a result, the player can grasp whether or not the special game state is likely to occur by paying attention to whether or not the specific effect continues, so that the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix G1]
Determination of whether or not to generate a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player triggered by the entry of a game ball into a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315) (jackpot lottery). means (41);
Triggered by execution of the determination of whether or not to generate the special game state by the determination means (41), a game rotation operation in which predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are variably displayed is performed. A game rotation operation execution means (41) to be executed;
Reserving means (41) for reserving the right to execute the game-rotating motion executed by the game-rotating motion executing means (41);
with
The predetermined start ball entry means (314, 315) includes a first start ball entry means (314), a disadvantageous state in which game ball entry is restricted, and a game ball entry easier than the disadvantageous state. a second start-up entry means (315) different from the first start-up entry means (314) switched to an advantageous state;
The predetermined symbols are a first symbol (first special symbol) that is variably displayed when a gaming ball enters the first start ball entry means (314), and the second start ball entry means (315). ) and a second symbol (second special symbol) that is variably displayed triggered by the entry of the game ball into
Said game rotation motion includes a first game rotation motion (first special symbol game) in which said first symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed, and said second symbol (second special symbol) is variably displayed. including a second game rotation operation (second special game),
The reservation of the right to execute the game rotation operation by the reservation means (41) is the first reservation (first special figure reservation) which is the reservation of the right to execute the first game rotation operation, and the second game rotation A gaming machine including a second reservation (second special reservation) that is a reservation of the right to execute an action,
The second suspension in a predetermined game state (a state in which continuous effects such as RUSH effects can be executed, a state in which a second special figure game can be executed based on the game ball to the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving game state) 1st numerical information to the first counting means (second special figure reservation number storage area NAB, second special figure reservation number storage area corresponding area) capable of counting corresponding to the number of (second special figure reservation number M) first numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting;
Subtraction means (41, 51) for subtracting the first numerical information set in the first counting means by establishment of a subtraction condition (start of the second special game);
Effect display means (51) for executing a corresponding specific effect (RUSH effect, one-shot notification effect, battle effect) during execution of the variable display of the second symbol in the predetermined game state;
A second counting means (c time-saving game) capable of counting corresponding to the specific game when a specific condition (time-saving pattern stoppage failure) capable of generating a specific game state (c time-saving game state) capable of executing a specific game is established Second numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting second numerical information (the number of special figure games that can be executed in the c time saving game state) different from the first numerical information in the number counter);
updating means (41, 51) for updating the second numerical information set in the second counting means by establishment of an update condition (start of a special game);
In the second game rotation during execution of the specific effect, when the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game rotation during execution of the specific effect, at least the first counting means is set to Means for continuously executing the specific effect during the predetermined game state until the first numerical information obtained becomes a specific value (for example, 0) by being subtracted by the subtracting means when the subtraction condition is established. (41, 51) and
When the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific performance, specific numerical information (remaining number of time-reduction games in c time-reduction game state) is set in the second counting means. is set, the specific response display corresponding to the specific numerical information of the second counting means (remaining c time reduction game count display (effect) in c time reduction game state) is not executed, and the specific effect is being executed The specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated when the update condition is established during execution of the second game rotation operation, and the specific numerical information corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means is specified. means (51) for executing the specific correspondence display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific effect without executing the correspondence display;
with
The specific effect is a state in which the special game state (jackpot game state) is likely to occur (a second special game is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the short time game state) A gaming machine characterized by a presentation that clearly indicates or suggests that the player is in a state).

In the gaming machine according to appendix G1, the specific effect is an effect that indicates or suggests that the special game state is likely to occur. In this way, the specific performance is a performance that indicates or suggests that the special game state is likely to occur, so that the player is likely to cause the special game state while the specific performance is being executed. It becomes possible to grasp the state. As a result, the player can grasp whether or not the special game state is likely to occur by paying attention to whether or not the specific effect continues, so that the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix H1]
Determination of whether or not to generate a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player triggered by the entry of a game ball into a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315) (jackpot lottery). means (41);
Triggered by execution of the determination of whether or not to generate the special game state by the determination means (41), a game rotation operation in which predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are variably displayed is performed. A game rotation operation execution means (41) to be executed;
Reserving means (41) for reserving the right to execute the game-rotating motion executed by the game-rotating motion executing means (41);
with
The predetermined start ball entry means (314, 315) includes a first start ball entry means (314), a disadvantageous state in which game ball entry is restricted, and a game ball entry easier than the disadvantageous state. a second start-up entry means (315) different from the first start-up entry means (314) switched to an advantageous state;
The predetermined symbols are a first symbol (first special symbol) that is variably displayed when a gaming ball enters the first start ball entry means (314), and the second start ball entry means (315). ) and a second symbol (second special symbol) that is variably displayed triggered by the entry of the game ball into
Said game rotation motion includes a first game rotation motion (first special symbol game) in which said first symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed, and said second symbol (second special symbol) is variably displayed. including a second game rotation operation (second special game),
The reservation of the right to execute the game rotation operation by the reservation means (41) is the first reservation (first special figure reservation) which is the reservation of the right to execute the first game rotation operation, and the second game rotation A gaming machine including a second reservation (second special reservation) that is a reservation of the right to execute an action,
The second suspension in a predetermined game state (a state in which continuous effects such as RUSH effects can be executed, a state in which a second special figure game can be executed based on the game ball to the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving game state) 1st numerical information to the first counting means (second special figure reservation number storage area NAB, second special figure reservation number storage area corresponding area) capable of counting corresponding to the number of (second special figure reservation number M) first numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting;
Subtraction means (41, 51) for subtracting the first numerical information set in the first counting means by establishment of a subtraction condition (start of the second special game);
Effect display means (51) for executing a corresponding specific effect (RUSH effect, one-shot notification effect, battle effect) during execution of the variable display of the second symbol in the predetermined game state;
A second counting means (c time-saving game) capable of counting corresponding to the specific game when a specific condition (time-saving pattern stoppage failure) capable of generating a specific game state (c time-saving game state) capable of executing a specific game is established Second numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting second numerical information (the number of special figure games that can be executed in the c time saving game state) different from the first numerical information in the number counter);
updating means (41, 51) for updating the second numerical information set in the second counting means by establishment of an update condition (start of a special game);
In the second game rotation during execution of the specific effect, when the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game rotation during execution of the specific effect, at least the first counting means is set to Means for continuously executing the specific effect during the predetermined game state until the first numerical information obtained becomes a specific value (for example, 0) by being subtracted by the subtracting means when the subtraction condition is established. (41, 51) and
When the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific performance, specific numerical information (remaining number of time-reduction games in c time-reduction game state) is set in the second counting means. is set, the specific response display corresponding to the specific numerical information of the second counting means (remaining c time reduction game count display (effect) in c time reduction game state) is not executed, and the specific effect is being executed The specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated when the update condition is established during execution of the second game rotation operation, and the specific numerical information corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means is specified. means (51) for executing the specific correspondence display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific effect without executing the correspondence display;
In the predetermined game state (state in which the second special figure game is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 315 in the c time saving game state), the second reservation (second special figure reservation ) means for displaying an image (second special figure pending image) that can recognize the number of
Means for displaying an image (first special figure reservation image) recognizable in the number of the first reservations (first special figure reservations) in a specific game state that can be shifted after the predetermined game state is completed;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix H1, in a predetermined game state, an image enabling recognition of the number of second reservations is displayed, and in a specific game state that can be transitioned to after the predetermined game state is completed, the number of first reservations is displayed. A recognizable image is displayed. In this way, it is preferable to cause the second starting ball entry means to enter the game ball and execute the second game round by displaying an image that allows the number of second reservations to be recognized in a predetermined game state. While it is possible for the player to grasp that, by displaying an image that allows the player to recognize the number of first suspensions in a specific game state that can be transitioned to after the predetermined game state is completed, the first start input is displayed. It is possible for the player to understand that it is preferable to enter the game ball into the ball means and execute the first game round. Therefore, when shifting from a predetermined game state to a specific game state, the game ball is allowed to enter the first start ball entry means from a state in which it is preferable to enter the game ball into the second start ball entry means. Based on the display type of the number of pending, it is possible for the player to grasp that has been shifted to a preferable state. As a result, the player can determine, based on the display type of the number of reservations, that the method of launching the game ball that is advantageous to the player is the method of launching the game ball that facilitates entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry means, or the second start entry means. It becomes possible to grasp whether it is a hitting method that makes it easy to enter the game ball into the ball means. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game without being disadvantageous to himself by paying attention to the display type of the number of holds.

[Appendix I1]
Determination of whether or not to generate a special game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player triggered by the entry of a game ball into a predetermined starting ball entry means (314, 315) (jackpot lottery). means (41);
Triggered by execution of the determination of whether or not to generate the special game state by the determination means (41), a game rotation operation in which predetermined symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are variably displayed is performed. A game rotation operation execution means (41) to be executed;
Reserving means (41) for reserving the right to execute the game-rotating motion executed by the game-rotating motion executing means (41);
with
The predetermined start ball entry means (314, 315) includes a first start ball entry means (314), a disadvantageous state in which game ball entry is restricted, and a game ball entry easier than the disadvantageous state. a second start-up entry means (315) different from the first start-up entry means (314) switched to an advantageous state;
The predetermined symbols are a first symbol (first special symbol) that is variably displayed when a gaming ball enters the first start ball entry means (314), and the second start ball entry means (315). ) and a second symbol (second special symbol) that is variably displayed triggered by the entry of the game ball into
Said game rotation motion includes a first game rotation motion (first special symbol game) in which said first symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed, and said second symbol (second special symbol) is variably displayed. including a second game rotation operation (second special game),
The reservation of the right to execute the game rotation operation by the reservation means (41) is the first reservation (first special figure reservation) which is the reservation of the right to execute the first game rotation operation, and the second game rotation A gaming machine including a second reservation (second special reservation) that is a reservation of the right to execute an action,
The second suspension in a predetermined game state (a state in which continuous effects such as RUSH effects can be executed, a state in which a second special figure game can be executed based on the game ball to the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving game state) 1st numerical information to the first counting means (second special figure reservation number storage area NAB, second special figure reservation number storage area corresponding area) capable of counting corresponding to the number of (second special figure reservation number M) first numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting;
Subtraction means (41, 51) for subtracting the first numerical information set in the first counting means by establishment of a subtraction condition (start of the second special game);
Effect display means (51) for executing a corresponding specific effect (RUSH effect, one-shot notification effect, battle effect) during execution of the variable display of the second symbol in the predetermined game state;
A second counting means (c time-saving game) capable of counting corresponding to the specific game when a specific condition (time-saving pattern stoppage failure) capable of generating a specific game state (c time-saving game state) capable of executing a specific game is established Second numerical information setting means (41, 51) for setting second numerical information (the number of special figure games that can be executed in the c time saving game state) different from the first numerical information in the number counter);
updating means (41, 51) for updating the second numerical information set in the second counting means by establishment of an update condition (start of a special game);
In the second game rotation during execution of the specific effect, when the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game rotation during execution of the specific effect, at least the first counting means is set to Means for continuously executing the specific effect during the predetermined game state until the first numerical information obtained becomes a specific value (for example, 0) by being subtracted by the subtracting means when the subtraction condition is established. (41, 51) and
When the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific performance, specific numerical information (remaining number of time-reduction games in c time-reduction game state) is set in the second counting means. is set, the specific response display corresponding to the specific numerical information of the second counting means (remaining c time reduction game count display (effect) in c time reduction game state) is not executed, and the specific effect is being executed The specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated when the update condition is established during execution of the second game rotation operation, and the specific numerical information corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means is specified. means (51) for executing the specific correspondence display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific effect without executing the correspondence display;
A first state (normal game state) in which the probability that the second starting ball entry means (315) is in the advantageous state is the first probability, and the second start ball entry means (315) is in the advantageous state. a means for switching between a second state (a time-saving gaming state including a time-saving gaming state) in which the probability of winning is a second probability higher than the first probability;
with
At least a part of the period in the predetermined game state is characterized in that it is in the second state (a time-saving game state).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I1, the probability that the second start ball-entering means is in an advantageous state is high during at least a part of the predetermined gaming state. Here, in a predetermined game state, even if a specific condition is established, the specific effect is continuously executed until the first numerical information becomes a specific value. Therefore, since the predetermined game state is a state in which the probability that the second start ball-entering means is in an advantageous state is high for at least a part of the period in the predetermined game state, the specific effect is continuously executed. It is possible for the player to recognize that the probability that the second starting ball-entering means is in an advantageous state is high while the second starting ball-entering means is in an advantageous state. As a result, the player can grasp whether or not there is a high probability that the second starting ball-entering means is in an advantageous state by paying attention to whether or not the specific effect continues, so that the interest in the game increases. be improved.

[Appendix A1]
A plurality of starting ball entry means (314, 315) provided in the game area;
Win/fail lottery means (41) for performing a win/fail lottery (jackpot lottery) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means;
According to the lottery result of the winning lottery means (41), one specific performance to be executed by the display means (341) provided in the game area is determined from among a plurality of performance display modes (performance patterns) and executed. display control means (51);
One movable mode (movable modes A to D) of the movable means (37) provided in the game area and operating during the display of the one specific effect on the display means (341) is determined from a plurality of a movable control means (51) for executing
A gaming machine comprising
The movable control means (51) is determined from among the plurality based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (SP development, SP non-development, SPSP development, SPSP non-development, 16R probability variable promotion, 16R probability variable non-promotion) Based on the specific information (driving data 1 to 5) set corresponding to the one movable mode (movable modes A to D), the movable means (37) is caused to perform a series of specific actions (for example, vertical movement, reciprocating action). and
The movable means (37) is positioned between a first position (standby position, intermediate operating position 1), which is the initial position side in the series of specific operations, and a second position (operating position), which is the most movable position. The movement is controlled by
The series of specific actions is configured to perform a predetermined action of positioning the movable means at or near the first position (intermediate action position 1) a plurality of times,
The movable control means (51)
When the predetermined action is executed during the movement control of the series of specific actions based on the specific information, the conditions for ending the series of specific actions are met (end of all processes based on drive data 1, button operation). Determination means (51) for determining whether or not
When the determination means (51) determines that the end condition is satisfied, the movable means (37) positioned at or near the first position is stopped to move the terminating means (51) for terminating a series of specific actions;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, while the display control means is displaying one specific effect, the movable control means executes a series of specific actions for the movable means based on specific information set corresponding to one movable mode. In this case, when the movable means is positioned at or near the first position, which is the initial position side, the determination means determines whether or not the conditions for ending the series of specific actions are satisfied. In this way, when the display control means is displaying one specific effect, the movable control means executes a series of specific actions for the movable means based on the specific information set corresponding to one movable mode, When the movable means is positioned at or near the first position, which is the initial position side, the determination means determines whether or not the conditions for ending the series of specific actions are satisfied, thereby controlling the movement based on the specific information. In a series of specific operations of the movable means by the means, each time the movable means is positioned at or near the first position on the initial position side by the movable control means, the judging means judges whether or not the termination condition is established. be done. Further, in the game machine, when the determination means determines that the end condition is satisfied in a series of specific actions of the movable means by the movable control means based on the specific information, the ending means causes the motion to move to or near the first position. The movement of the positioned movable means is stopped, and the series of specific operations is terminated. That is, in the game machine, in a series of specific actions of the movable means by the movable control means based on the specific information, the first position or the vicinity thereof is set even before all the movable controls for the movable means based on the specific information are finished. Each time the movable means is positioned at , the terminating means can stop the movement of the movable means and terminate the series of specific operations on the condition that the terminating condition is satisfied. Thereby, when the end condition is satisfied during execution of a series of specific actions of the movable means, the movable means can be moved based on the specific information at the stage when the movable means is positioned at or near the first position after the end condition is satisfied. You can stop to end a series of specific actions. As a result, when it is determined that the conditions for terminating the series of specific actions are met, the series of specific actions of the movable means can be immediately terminated, so that the end control of the movable means can be performed smoothly. can. Therefore, in the game machine, since it is possible to smoothly shift from a series of specific actions of the movable means to the next action, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable after it is determined that the condition for ending the series of specific actions is established. A series of specific operations of the movable means can be terminated without the Therefore, when another individual motion is subsequently executed after the series of specific motions of the movable means is completed, the series of specific motions can be smoothly transitioned to another individual motion. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity at the time of transition to action. Thus, even when the movable means is operated for the purpose of performance while one specific performance is being displayed by the display control means, the movable means can be operated without impairing the performance effect.

[Appendix B1]
A plurality of starting ball entry means (314, 315) provided in the game area;
Win/fail lottery means (41) for performing a win/fail lottery (jackpot lottery) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means;
According to the lottery result of the winning lottery means (41), one specific performance to be executed by the display means (341) provided in the game area is determined from among a plurality of performance display modes (performance patterns) and executed. display control means (51);
One movable mode (movable modes A to D) of the movable means (37) provided in the game area and operating during the display of the one specific effect on the display means (341) is determined from a plurality of a movable control means (51) for executing
A gaming machine comprising
The movable control means (51) is determined from among the plurality based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (SP development, SP non-development, SPSP development, SPSP non-development, 16R probability variable promotion, 16R probability variable non-promotion) Based on the specific information (driving data 1 to 5) set corresponding to the one movable mode (movable modes A to D), the movable means (37) is caused to perform a series of specific actions (for example, vertical movement, reciprocating action). and
The movable means (37) is positioned between a first position (standby position, intermediate operating position 1), which is the initial position side in the series of specific operations, and a second position (operating position), which is the most movable position. The movement is controlled by
The series of specific actions is configured to perform a predetermined action of positioning the movable means at or near the first position (intermediate action position 1) a plurality of times,
The movable control means (51)
When the predetermined action is executed during the movement control of the series of specific actions based on the specific information, the conditions for ending the series of specific actions are met (end of all processes based on drive data 1, button operation). Determination means (51) for determining whether or not
When the determination means (51) determines that the end condition is satisfied, the movable means (37) positioned at or near the first position is stopped to move the terminating means (51) for terminating a series of specific actions;
with
As the period for executing the series of specific actions, there is a first period (for example, the action based on drive data 1 is terminated by button operation) and a second period longer than the first period (for example, execution of all processes). The operation by the drive data 1 ends by ).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, the period during which the movable means executes a series of specific actions includes a first period and a second period longer than the first period. That is, in the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, at least two modes with different operation times are set as a series of specific actions by the movable means. In this way, by setting at least two modes with different action times as a series of specific actions by the movable means, various information can be provided to the player according to the action times of the series of specific actions by the movable means. (for example, display effects) can be provided. For example, by executing a series of specific actions from the first period, the player is provided with information advantageous to the player (for example, a premium display effect), and by executing the series of specific actions from the second period, the player It becomes possible to provide disadvantageous information (for example, default display effects). As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while paying attention to the period in which the series of specific actions are performed and expecting that advantageous information will be provided, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix C1]
A plurality of starting ball entry means (314, 315) provided in the game area;
Win/fail lottery means (41) for performing a win/fail lottery (jackpot lottery) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means;
According to the lottery result of the winning lottery means (41), one specific performance to be executed by the display means (341) provided in the game area is determined from among a plurality of performance display modes (performance patterns) and executed. display control means (51);
One movable mode (movable modes A to D) of the movable means (37) provided in the game area and operating during the display of the one specific effect on the display means (341) is determined from a plurality of a movable control means (51) for executing
A gaming machine comprising
The movable control means (51) is determined from among the plurality based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (SP development, SP non-development, SPSP development, SPSP non-development, 16R probability variable promotion, 16R probability variable non-promotion) Based on the specific information (driving data 1 to 5) set corresponding to the one movable mode (movable modes A to D), the movable means (37) is caused to perform a series of specific actions (for example, vertical movement, reciprocating action). and
The movable means (37) is positioned between a first position (standby position, intermediate operating position 1), which is the initial position side in the series of specific operations, and a second position (operating position), which is the most movable position. The movement is controlled by
The series of specific actions is configured to perform a predetermined action of positioning the movable means at or near the first position (intermediate action position 1) a plurality of times,
The movable control means (51)
When the predetermined action is executed during the movement control of the series of specific actions based on the specific information, the conditions for ending the series of specific actions are met (end of all processes based on drive data 1, button operation). Determination means (51) for determining whether or not
When the determination means (51) determines that the end condition is satisfied, the movable means (37) positioned at or near the first position is stopped to move the terminating means (51) for terminating a series of specific actions;
with
As the period during which the movable means (37) is moved toward the second position, a first period (processing No. 03 and No. 06 of drive data 1) and a second period longer than the first period. 2 (process No. 11, No. 15 of drive data 1).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C1, the period during which the movable means is moved toward the second position includes the first period and the second period longer than the first period. That is, in the gaming machine according to appendix C1, at least two modes are set in which the period during which the movable means is positioned on the second position side differs as the series of specific actions by the movable means. In this way, by setting at least two modes in which the period during which the movable means is positioned at the second position side is different as a series of specific actions by the movable means, the movable means is moved to the second position side. The movable means can be moved in different modes depending on the period of time. This makes it possible to diversify the motion of the movable means in a series of specific motions. Then, when the movable means is moved for the purpose of performance, the performance can be enhanced, so that the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix D1]
A plurality of starting ball entry means (314, 315) provided in the game area;
Win/fail lottery means (41) for performing a win/fail lottery (jackpot lottery) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means;
According to the lottery result of the winning lottery means (41), one specific performance to be executed by the display means (341) provided in the game area is determined from among a plurality of performance display modes (performance patterns) and executed. display control means (51);
One movable mode (movable modes A to D) of the movable means (37) provided in the game area and operating during the display of the one specific effect on the display means (341) is determined from a plurality of a movable control means (51) for executing
A gaming machine comprising
The movable control means (51) is determined from among the plurality based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (SP development, SP non-development, SPSP development, SPSP non-development, 16R probability variable promotion, 16R probability variable non-promotion) Based on the specific information (driving data 1 to 5) set corresponding to the one movable mode (movable modes A to D), the movable means (37) is caused to perform a series of specific actions (for example, vertical movement, reciprocating action). and
The movable means (37) is positioned between a first position (standby position, intermediate operating position 1), which is the initial position side in the series of specific operations, and a second position (operating position), which is the most movable position. The movement is controlled by
The series of specific actions is configured to perform a predetermined action of positioning the movable means at or near the first position (intermediate action position 1) a plurality of times,
The movable control means (51)
When the predetermined action is executed during the movement control of the series of specific actions based on the specific information, the conditions for ending the series of specific actions are met (end of all processes based on drive data 1, button operation). Determination means (51) for determining whether or not
When the determination means (51) determines that the end condition is satisfied, the movable means (37) positioned at or near the first position is stopped to move the terminating means (51) for terminating a series of specific actions;
with
As the control executed after the series of specific actions is completed, the first control (SP development, SPSP development, 16R probability variable promotion) and the second control different from the first control (SP non-development, SPSP non-development, 16R variable non-elevation), and
Regardless of whether the control executed after completing the series of specific actions is the first control or the second control, the movable means (37) is positioned on the first position side. A gaming machine characterized in that it is started in a state of

In the gaming machine according to appendix D1, regardless of whether the control executed after completing the series of specific actions is the first control or the second control different from the first control, the movable means is positioned on the first position side. On the other hand, when the condition for ending the series of specific actions is satisfied, the movable means positioned at or near the first position is stopped to terminate the series of specific actions. In other words, the position of the movable means when the series of specific actions ends, and the start positions of the first control and the second control executed after the series of specific actions are finished are both on the first position side. Therefore, when the series of specific actions is completed, the subsequent control of the movable means can be started smoothly without discomfort regardless of whether the subsequent control of the movable means is the first control or the second control. can be made As a result, when it is determined that the end condition of the series of specific actions is satisfied, the first control or the second control is performed from the series of specific actions even if the timing of the end determination is undefined. to the next action performed by

[Appendix E1]
A plurality of starting ball entry means (314, 315) provided in the game area;
Win/fail lottery means (41) for performing a win/fail lottery (jackpot lottery) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means;
According to the lottery result of the winning lottery means (41), one specific performance to be executed by the display means (341) provided in the game area is determined from among a plurality of performance display modes (performance patterns) and executed. display control means (51);
One movable mode (movable modes A to D) of the movable means (37) provided in the game area and operating during the display of the one specific effect on the display means (341) is determined from a plurality of a movable control means (51) for executing
A gaming machine comprising
The movable control means (51) is determined from among the plurality based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (SP development, SP non-development, SPSP development, SPSP non-development, 16R probability variable promotion, 16R probability variable non-promotion) Based on the specific information (driving data 1 to 5) set corresponding to the one movable mode (movable modes A to D), the movable means (37) is caused to perform a series of specific actions (for example, vertical movement, reciprocating action). and
The movable means (37) is positioned between a first position (standby position, intermediate operating position 1), which is the initial position side in the series of specific operations, and a second position (operating position), which is the most movable position. The movement is controlled by
The series of specific actions is configured to perform a predetermined action of positioning the movable means at or near the first position (intermediate action position 1) a plurality of times,
The movable control means (51)
When the predetermined action is executed during the movement control of the series of specific actions based on the specific information, the conditions for ending the series of specific actions are met (end of all processes based on drive data 1, button operation). Determination means (51) for determining whether or not
When the determination means (51) determines that the end condition is satisfied, the movable means (37) positioned at or near the first position is stopped to move the terminating means (51) for terminating a series of specific actions;
with
A gaming machine, wherein at least one of the termination conditions for the series of specific actions is established based on a predetermined game operation (operation of an operation button) by the player.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E1, at least one condition for ending a series of specific actions of the movable means is established based on a predetermined game operation of the player. In this way, at least one of the termination conditions for the series of specific actions of the movable means is satisfied based on the predetermined game operation of the player, so that the predetermined game operation of the player causes the series of specific actions of the movable means to be completed. Determination means when the movable means is positioned at or near the first position, which is the initial position side, even if the end condition for the series of specific actions is satisfied before all control processing for the specific action is completed. determines whether or not conditions for ending a series of specific actions are satisfied. Therefore, if the conditions for ending the series of specific actions are satisfied before all the control processes for the series of specific actions of the movable means are completed by a predetermined game operation of the player, the movable means is moved to the first position after the completion conditions are met. Alternatively, a series of specific operations can be terminated at a stage positioned near it. As a result, when the condition for ending the series of specific actions is satisfied, the series of specific actions of the movable means can be terminated immediately. A series of specific motions of the movable means can be terminated without reminding the operator. Therefore, when another action is continuously executed after the series of specific actions of the movable means is completed, the series of specific actions can be smoothly transitioned to another action. It is possible to prevent a person from feeling a sense of discomfort. Thus, even when the movable means is operated for the purpose of performance while one specific performance is being displayed by the display control means, the movable means can be operated without impairing the performance effect.

[Appendix F1]
A plurality of starting ball entry means (314, 315) provided in the game area;
Win/fail lottery means (41) for performing a win/fail lottery (jackpot lottery) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means;
According to the lottery result of the winning lottery means (41), one specific performance to be executed by the display means (341) provided in the game area is determined from among a plurality of performance display modes (performance patterns) and executed. display control means (51);
One movable mode (movable modes A to D) of the movable means (37) provided in the game area and operating during the display of the one specific effect on the display means (341) is determined from a plurality of a movable control means (51) for executing
A gaming machine comprising
The movable control means (51) is determined from among the plurality based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (SP development, SP non-development, SPSP development, SPSP non-development, 16R probability variable promotion, 16R probability variable non-promotion) Based on the specific information (driving data 1 to 5) set corresponding to the one movable mode (movable modes A to D), the movable means (37) is caused to perform a series of specific actions (for example, vertical movement, reciprocating action). and
The movable means (37) is positioned between a first position (standby position, intermediate operating position 1), which is the initial position side in the series of specific operations, and a second position (operating position), which is the most movable position. The movement is controlled by
The series of specific actions is configured to perform a predetermined action of positioning the movable means at or near the first position (intermediate action position 1) a plurality of times,
The movable control means (51)
When the predetermined action is executed during the movement control of the series of specific actions based on the specific information, the conditions for ending the series of specific actions are met (end of all processes based on drive data 1, button operation). Determination means (51) for determining whether or not
When the determination means (51) determines that the end condition is satisfied, the movable means (37) positioned at or near the first position is stopped to move the terminating means (51) for terminating a series of specific actions;
with
A game machine characterized in that the control executed after the series of specific actions is completed includes a control object (symbol display section 341, display effect) different from the movable means (37).

In the gaming machine according to appendix F1, the control executed after the series of specific actions of the movable means is completed includes a controlled object different from the movable means. In this way, since the control executed after the series of specific actions of the movable means is completed includes a control target different from that of the movable means, control different from that of the movable means can be performed after the series of specific actions of the movable means is finished. It becomes possible to give the information given by the movable means to the object again. As a result, even if the player misses the operation of the movable means or does not understand the content given by the operation of the movable means, the information is provided to the player again for the control object different from the movable means. can be given. Further, in the gaming machine according to appendix F1, the control that is executed after the series of specific actions of the movable means is completed includes a control target different from the movable means, so that it is executed later according to the operation of the movable means. It is also possible to specify or suggest a production that As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while paying attention to the operation of the movable means and expecting that an effect advantageous to the player will be executed or suggested. is improved.

[Appendix G1]
A plurality of starting ball entry means (314, 315) provided in the game area;
Win/fail lottery means (41) for performing a win/fail lottery (jackpot lottery) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means;
According to the lottery result of the winning lottery means (41), one specific performance to be executed by the display means (341) provided in the game area is determined from among a plurality of performance display modes (performance patterns) and executed. display control means (51);
One movable mode (movable modes A to D) of the movable means (37) provided in the game area and operating during the display of the one specific effect on the display means (341) is determined from a plurality of a movable control means (51) for executing
A gaming machine comprising
The movable control means (51) is determined from among the plurality based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (SP development, SP non-development, SPSP development, SPSP non-development, 16R probability variable promotion, 16R probability variable non-promotion) Based on the specific information (driving data 1 to 5) set corresponding to the one movable mode (movable modes A to D), the movable means (37) is caused to perform a series of specific actions (for example, vertical movement, reciprocating action). and
The movable means (37) is positioned between a first position (standby position, intermediate operating position 1), which is the initial position side in the series of specific operations, and a second position (operating position), which is the most movable position. The movement is controlled by
The series of specific actions is configured to perform a predetermined action of positioning the movable means at or near the first position (intermediate action position 1) a plurality of times,
The movable control means (51)
When the predetermined action is executed during the movement control of the series of specific actions based on the specific information, the conditions for ending the series of specific actions are met (end of all processes based on drive data 1, button operation). Determination means (51) for determining whether or not
When the determination means (51) determines that the end condition is satisfied, the movable means (37) positioned at or near the first position is stopped to move the terminating means (51) for terminating a series of specific actions;
with
When the movable control means (51) executes control to move the movable means (37) to the second position side in the series of specific actions, whether the end condition of the series of specific actions is satisfied. A game machine characterized by not determining whether or not.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G1, when control is executed to move the movable means to the second position side in a series of specific actions of the movable means, it is determined whether or not a condition for ending the series of specific actions is satisfied. do not. In this way, when control is executed to move the movable means to the second position side in a series of specific actions of the movable means, by not determining whether or not the condition for ending the series of specific actions is satisfied, It is prevented that the end condition is judged to be satisfied when the movable means is moved to the second position side. Therefore, when the movable means is moved to the second position side, the series of specific actions of the movable means is prevented from ending. A sense of discomfort is prevented. Thus, even when the movable means is operated for the purpose of performance while one specific performance is being displayed by the display control means, the movable means can be operated without impairing the performance effect.

[Appendix A1]
A shooting means (32) capable of shooting game balls into the game area by adjusting the shooting force by the player,
A first game performed by shooting game balls in a first direction (left-handed game), and a second game performed by shooting game balls in a second direction different from the first direction (right-handed game) game) and is executable,
Display means (362, 363, 341) capable of executing a variation game (special figure game) of patterns (special figure, decoration pattern),
a plurality of starting means (314, 315) capable of generating starting conditions for executing the variable game;
an auxiliary means (315b) for assisting establishment of the starting condition;
special game execution means (41) for executing a special game (special figure jackpot game) as a profit game when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result (jackpot);
When the number of executions of the predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 times) without executing the special game, the control state for the auxiliary means can be switched to generate a specific game state (b time-saving game state). A game machine that
A first ball entry means (37) provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific flow path (392);
a second ball entry means (38) comprising an opening/closing means (382) capable of switching between an open state and a closed state, and a specific ball entry area (383);
opening executing means (41) for opening the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means for a predetermined period based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means;
A specific period game (V winning jackpot game) of a specific period different from the special game is performed as the profit game based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period. Specific period game execution means (41) to be executed;
with
In a predetermined game state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific game state (for example, the normal game state after the end of the b time saving game state), the predetermined specific period game ends A game machine characterized by changing the control state from the first control state to a second control state (b time-saving game state) corresponding to the specific game state when the game is played.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A1, the control state of the auxiliary means for assisting establishment of the start condition of the symbol variation game is the first control state that does not correspond to the specific game state, and the opening and closing means for a predetermined period in the predetermined game state. Corresponds to the specific game state from the first control state when the game for a specific period different from the special game as a profit game is completed based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry area during the opening of the The control state is changed to the second control state. That is, in the present invention, even if the control state of the auxiliary means is in the predetermined game state which is the first control state that does not correspond to the specific game state, the game ball is entered into the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open. It is possible to generate a specific game state in which the control state with respect to the auxiliary means is the second control state by making a ball and executing the game for a predetermined specific period. As a result, even if the specific game state ends, it is possible to generate the specific game state again, so the gaming machine is left alone because the specific game state ends and the specific game state does not occur. is prevented, and a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine is suppressed.

[Appendix B1]
A shooting means (32) capable of shooting game balls into the game area by adjusting the shooting force by the player,
A first game performed by shooting game balls in a first direction (left-handed game), and a second game performed by shooting game balls in a second direction different from the first direction (right-handed game) game) and is executable,
Display means (362, 363, 341) capable of executing a variation game (special figure game) of patterns (special figure, decoration pattern),
a plurality of starting means (314, 315) capable of generating starting conditions for executing the variable game;
an auxiliary means (315b) for assisting establishment of the starting condition;
special game execution means (41) for executing a special game (special figure jackpot game) as a profit game when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result (jackpot);
When the number of executions of the predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 times) without executing the special game, the control state for the auxiliary means can be switched to generate a specific game state (b time-saving game state). A game machine that
A first ball entry means (37) provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific flow path (392);
a second ball entry means (38) comprising an opening/closing means (382) capable of switching between an open state and a closed state, and a specific ball entry area (383);
opening executing means (41) for opening the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means for a predetermined period based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means;
A specific period game (V winning jackpot game) of a specific period different from the special game is performed as the profit game based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry area during the opening of the opening and closing means for the predetermined period. Specific period game execution means (41) to be executed;
with
The game machine is
In a predetermined game state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific game state (for example, the normal game state after the end of the b time-reduction game state), the game ends for a predetermined specific period When doing so, change the control state from the first control state to a second control state (b time-saving game state) corresponding to the specific game state,
A signal output means (101) capable of outputting a signal corresponding to the game state to the outside of the game machine,
The signal output means outputs a special signal (jackpot signal 1) when the special game is executed as the profit game, and does not output the special signal when the specific period game is executed as the profit game. Characteristic game machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B1, the signal output means capable of outputting a signal corresponding to the gaming state to the outside of the gaming machine outputs a special signal when executing a special game as a profit game, and executes a game for a specific period as a profit game. No special signal is output when executing. Thus, the signal output means capable of outputting a signal corresponding to the game state to the outside of the gaming machine outputs a special signal when executing a special game as a profit game, and outputs a special signal when executing a game for a specific period as a profit game. By not outputting the special signal, the hall computer of the game hall can grasp that the special game is being executed and the number of times the special game is executed based on the special signal, and the specific period When the game is executed, the special signal is not output, thereby preventing the addition of the specific period game to the number of times the special game is executed. As a result, it is possible to display the exact number of executions of the special game, which does not reflect the number of executions of the game during the specific period, on a so-called data display installed on the top of the gaming machine or the like.

[Appendix C1]
A shooting means (32) capable of shooting game balls into the game area by adjusting the shooting force by the player,
A first game performed by shooting game balls in a first direction (left-handed game), and a second game performed by shooting game balls in a second direction different from the first direction (right-handed game) game) and is executable,
Display means (362, 363, 341) capable of executing a variation game (special figure game) of patterns (special figure, decoration pattern),
a plurality of starting means (314, 315) capable of generating starting conditions for executing the variable game;
an auxiliary means (315b) for assisting establishment of the starting condition;
special game execution means (41) for executing a special game (special figure jackpot game) as a profit game when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result (jackpot);
When the number of executions of the predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 times) without executing the special game, the control state for the auxiliary means can be switched to generate a specific game state (b time-saving game state). A game machine that
A first ball entry means (37) provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific flow path (392);
a second ball entry means (38) comprising an opening/closing means (382) capable of switching between an open state and a closed state, and a specific ball entry area (383);
opening executing means (41) for opening the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means for a predetermined period based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means;
A specific period game (V winning jackpot game) of a specific period different from the special game is performed as the profit game based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period. Specific period game execution means (41) to be executed;
with
In a predetermined game state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific game state (for example, the normal game state after the end of the b time saving game state), the predetermined specific period game ends When doing so, change the control state from the first control state to a second control state (b time-saving game state) corresponding to the specific game state,
A gaming machine comprising means for displaying game state information for a game state corresponding to the end of execution of the game for the specific period on the display means when execution of the game for the specific period is finished.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C1, when the execution of the game for the specific period executed based on the game ball entering the specific ball entering area while the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means is open, the The game state information for the game state corresponding to the end of execution of the specific period game is displayed by the display means capable of executing the symbol variation game. That is, in the gaming machine according to appendix C1, when the execution of the game for the specific period ends, the control state of the auxiliary means for assisting establishment of the start condition of the symbol variation game is the second control state corresponding to the specific game state. The game state information indicating that is displayed by the display means capable of executing the symbol variation game. As a result, the player is in the second control state corresponding to the specific game state, that is, when the number of executions of the predetermined variable game reaches the predetermined number of times without executing the special game, the specific game state is reached. It is possible to grasp that it is a state that can occur.

[Appendix D1]
A shooting means (32) capable of shooting game balls into the game area by adjusting the shooting force by the player,
A first game performed by shooting game balls in a first direction (left-handed game), and a second game performed by shooting game balls in a second direction different from the first direction (right-handed game) game) and is executable,
Display means (362, 363, 341) capable of executing a variation game (special figure game) of patterns (special figure, decoration pattern),
a plurality of starting means (314, 315) capable of generating starting conditions for executing the variable game;
an auxiliary means (315b) for assisting establishment of the starting condition;
special game execution means (41) for executing a special game (special figure jackpot game) as a profit game when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result (jackpot);
When the number of executions of the predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 times) without executing the special game, the control state for the auxiliary means can be switched to generate a specific game state (b time-saving game state). A game machine that
A first ball entry means (37) provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific flow path (392);
a second ball entry means (38) comprising an opening/closing means (382) capable of switching between an open state and a closed state, and a specific ball entry area (383);
opening executing means (41) for opening the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means for a predetermined period based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means;
A specific period game (V winning jackpot game) of a specific period different from the special game is performed as the profit game based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period. Specific period game execution means (41) to be executed;
with
The game machine is
In a predetermined game state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific game state (for example, the normal game state after the end of the b time saving game state), the predetermined specific period game ends When doing so, change the control state from the first control state to a second control state (b time-saving game state) corresponding to the specific game state,
A signal output means (101) capable of outputting a signal corresponding to the game state to the outside of the game machine,
The gaming machine, wherein the signal output means outputs an identifiable identification signal when the game for the specific period is executed as the profit game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D1, the signal output means capable of outputting a signal corresponding to the gaming state to the outside of the gaming machine outputs an identifiable identification signal when the game is executed for a specific period as a profit game. In this way, the signal output means capable of outputting a signal corresponding to the gaming state to the outside of the gaming machine outputs an identifiable identification signal (V winning jackpot game signal) when the game is executed for a specific period of time. Based on the identification signal, the hall computer of the amusement arcade can grasp that the game will be played during the specified period and the number of times the game is played during the specified period.

[Appendix E1]
A shooting means (32) capable of shooting game balls into the game area by adjusting the shooting force by the player,
A first game performed by shooting game balls in a first direction (left-handed game), and a second game performed by shooting game balls in a second direction different from the first direction (right-handed game) game) and is executable,
Display means (362, 363, 341) capable of executing a variation game (special figure game) of patterns (special figure, decoration pattern),
a plurality of starting means (314, 315) capable of generating starting conditions for executing the variable game;
an auxiliary means (315b) for assisting establishment of the starting condition;
special game execution means (41) for executing a special game (special figure jackpot game) as a profit game when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result (jackpot);
When the number of executions of the predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 times) without executing the special game, the control state for the auxiliary means can be switched to generate a specific game state (b time-saving game state). A game machine that
A first ball entry means (37) provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific flow path (392);
a second ball entry means (38) comprising an opening/closing means (382) capable of switching between an open state and a closed state, and a specific ball entry area (383);
opening executing means (41) for opening the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means for a predetermined period based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means;
A specific period game (V winning jackpot game) of a specific period different from the special game is performed as the profit game based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period. Specific period game execution means (41) to be executed;
with
In a predetermined game state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific game state (for example, the normal game state after the end of the b time saving game state), the predetermined specific period game ends When doing so, change the control state from the first control state to a second control state (b time-saving game state) corresponding to the specific game state,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a third ball entering means (316) different from the second ball entering means as a ball entering means to be in a specific open/closed state in the special game.

The gaming machine according to appendix E1 is provided with a third ball entering means different from the second ball entering means as a ball entering means that is in a specific open/closed state in a special game as a profit game. Here, the second ball-entering means has a specific ball-entering area, and provides an opportunity for execution of a game for a specific period of time as a profitable game based on the entry of a game ball into the specific ball-entering area. . That is, in the gaming machine according to appendix E1, the third ball-entering means that is opened and closed in the special game is provided as something different from the second ball-entering means that gives the opportunity to execute the game for the specific period. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a game profit different from the specific period game by the special game. Further, since the third ball-entering means is different from the second ball-entering means, the special game and the specific period game can be executed independently, so that the special game and the specific period game can be executed at the same time. Conversely, it is possible to realize a game property in which the special game and the specific period game are not executed at the same time. For example, execution of a special game during execution of a game for a specific period of time is allowed, while execution of a game for a specific period of time during execution of a special game can be disabled.

[Appendix F1]
A shooting means (32) capable of shooting game balls into the game area by adjusting the shooting force by the player,
A first game performed by shooting game balls in a first direction (left-handed game), and a second game performed by shooting game balls in a second direction different from the first direction (right-handed game) game) and is executable,
Display means (362, 363, 341) capable of executing a variation game (special figure game) of patterns (special figure, decoration pattern),
a plurality of starting means (314, 315) capable of generating starting conditions for executing the variable game;
an auxiliary means (315b) for assisting establishment of the starting condition;
special game execution means (41) for executing a special game (special figure jackpot game) as a profit game when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result (jackpot);
When the number of executions of the predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 times) without executing the special game, the control state for the auxiliary means can be switched to generate a specific game state (b time-saving game state). A game machine that
A first ball entry means (37) provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific flow path (392);
a second ball entry means (38) comprising an opening/closing means (382) capable of switching between an open state and a closed state, and a specific ball entry area (383);
opening executing means (41) for opening the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means for a predetermined period based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means;
A specific period game (V winning jackpot game) of a specific period different from the special game is performed as the profit game based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period. Specific period game execution means (41) to be executed;
with
In a predetermined game state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific game state (for example, the normal game state after the end of the b time saving game state), the predetermined specific period game ends When doing so, change the control state from the first control state to a second control state (b time-saving game state) corresponding to the specific game state,
In the predetermined game state, when a specific number of game balls are shot toward the specific flow path, the number of profitable game balls that the player can obtain is less than the specific number of balls. A gaming machine characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix F1, in a predetermined gaming state, when a specific number of game balls are shot toward a specific flow path in which game balls can enter the first ball entering means, the player obtains The number of possible profitable game balls is configured to be less than the specific number of balls. Here, the control state of the auxiliary means is changed from the first control state that does not correspond to the specific game state to the second control state that corresponds to the specific game state when the specific period game as profit game ends. In this specific period game, the opening and closing means of the second ball entering means is opened based on the game ball flowing down the specific flow path entering the first ball entering means, It is executed based on the game ball entering the specific ball entering area of the second ball entering means while the opening/closing means is open. Therefore, in order to execute the game for a specific period in order to change the control state of the auxiliary means from the first control state to the second control state, the game ball is shot toward the specific flow path and the first ball entering means However, when the control state of the auxiliary means is changed from the first control state to the second control state due to the convenience of the player, the number of game balls that can be obtained is greater than the number of game balls shot. When the number increases, the number of balls held by the player increases by shooting the game balls toward a specific flow path, which induces so-called strategy shots. Therefore, as in the gaming machine according to appendix F1, in a predetermined game state, when a specific number of game balls are shot toward a specific flow path in which game balls can enter the first ball entry means, the game Since the number of profitable game balls that can be obtained by the player is configured to be less than the specific number of balls, it is fired when the control state of the auxiliary means is changed from the first control state to the second control state. Since the number of game balls that can be acquired can be made smaller than the number of game balls, the induction of so-called strategy shots is prevented.

[Appendix G1]
A shooting means (32) capable of shooting game balls into the game area by adjusting the shooting force by the player,
A first game performed by shooting game balls in a first direction (left-handed game), and a second game performed by shooting game balls in a second direction different from the first direction (right-handed game) game) and is executable,
Display means (362, 363, 341) capable of executing a variation game (special figure game) of patterns (special figure, decoration pattern),
a plurality of starting means (314, 315) capable of generating starting conditions for executing the variable game;
an auxiliary means (315b) for assisting establishment of the starting condition;
special game execution means (41) for executing a special game (special figure jackpot game) as a profit game when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result (jackpot);
When the number of executions of the predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 times) without executing the special game, the control state for the auxiliary means can be switched to generate a specific game state (b time-saving game state). A game machine that
A first ball entry means (37) provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific flow path (392);
a second ball entry means (38) comprising an opening/closing means (382) capable of switching between an open state and a closed state, and a specific ball entry area (383);
opening executing means (41) for opening the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means for a predetermined period based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means;
A specific period game (V winning jackpot game) of a specific period different from the special game is performed as the profit game based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry area during the opening of the opening and closing means for the predetermined period. Specific period game execution means (41) to be executed;
with
In a predetermined game state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific game state (for example, the normal game state after the end of the b time-reduction game state), the game ends for a predetermined specific period When doing so, change the control state from the first control state to a second control state (b time-saving game state) corresponding to the specific game state,
When a predetermined game ball enters the first ball entering means during execution of the special game as the profit game, the opening and closing means of the second ball entering means for the entering ball is operated for the predetermined period of time. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for setting so as not to open the game machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G1, when a predetermined game ball enters the first ball entering means during execution of a special game as a profit game, the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means is opened for the entered ball. It is set so as not to be opened for a predetermined period. In this way, when a predetermined game ball enters the first ball entering means during execution of a special game as a profit game, the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means is opened for a predetermined period of time with respect to the entering ball. Since the game ball is not entered into the specific ball entry area of the second ball entry means during the execution of the special game, the game ball is not entered as a profit game during the execution of the special game. A game is not executed for a specific period. As a result, since the game does not end during the execution of the special game, the control state of the auxiliary means is prevented from being changed from the first control state to the second control state during execution of the special game. .

[Appendix H1]
A shooting means (32) capable of shooting game balls into the game area by adjusting the shooting force by the player,
A first game performed by shooting game balls in a first direction (left-handed game), and a second game performed by shooting game balls in a second direction different from the first direction (right-handed game) game) and is executable,
Display means (362, 363, 341) capable of executing a variation game (special figure game) of patterns (special figure, decoration pattern),
a plurality of starting means (314, 315) capable of generating starting conditions for executing the variable game;
an auxiliary means (315b) for assisting establishment of the starting condition;
special game execution means (41) for executing a special game (special figure jackpot game) as a profit game when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result (jackpot);
When the number of executions of the predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 times) without executing the special game, the control state for the auxiliary means can be switched to generate a specific game state (b time-saving game state). A game machine that
A first ball entry means (37) provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific flow path (392);
a second ball entry means (38) comprising an opening/closing means (382) capable of switching between an open state and a closed state, and a specific ball entry area (383);
opening executing means (41) for opening the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means for a predetermined period based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means;
A specific period game (V winning jackpot game) of a specific period different from the special game is performed as the profit game based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period. Specific period game execution means (41) to be executed;
with
In a predetermined game state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific game state (for example, the normal game state after the end of the b time saving game state), the predetermined specific period game ends When doing so, change the control state from the first control state to a second control state (b time-saving game state) corresponding to the specific game state,
The opening executing means opens and closes the second ball entering means based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means while the variation game is being executed based on the establishment of the starting condition. A gaming machine characterized in that the means can be opened for the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H1, the opening and closing means of the second ball entering means is set to a predetermined value based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entering means while the variable game is being executed based on the establishment of the starting condition. It can be opened for a period of time. In this way, the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means is opened for a predetermined period based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entering means while the variable game is being executed based on the establishment of the starting condition. Since the game ball can be entered into the specific ball entry area of the second ball entry means during execution of the variable game, a specific period game can be executed as a profit game during the execution of the variable game. . As a result, since the game may end during the execution of the variable game, the control state of the auxiliary means can be changed from the first control state to the second control state during the execution of the variable game.

[Appendix I1]
A shooting means (32) capable of shooting game balls into the game area by adjusting the shooting force by the player,
A first game performed by shooting game balls in a first direction (left-handed game), and a second game performed by shooting game balls in a second direction different from the first direction (right-handed game) game) and is executable,
Display means (362, 363, 341) capable of executing a variation game (special figure game) of patterns (special figure, decoration pattern),
a plurality of starting means (314, 315) capable of generating starting conditions for executing the variable game;
an auxiliary means (315b) for assisting establishment of the starting condition;
special game execution means (41) for executing a special game (special figure jackpot game) as a profit game when the result of the variable game is a predetermined result (jackpot);
When the number of executions of the predetermined variable game reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 times) without executing the special game, the control state for the auxiliary means can be switched to generate a specific game state (b time-saving game state). A game machine that
A first ball entry means (37) provided in a game area that can be reached when a game ball launched in the second direction with a predetermined launch force flows down a specific flow path (392);
a second ball entry means (38) comprising an opening/closing means (382) capable of switching between an open state and a closed state, and a specific ball entry area (383);
opening executing means (41) for opening the opening/closing means of the second ball entering means for a predetermined period based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means;
A specific period game (V winning jackpot game) of a specific period different from the special game is performed as the profit game based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry area while the opening/closing means is open for the predetermined period. Specific period game execution means (41) to be executed;
with
The game machine is
In a predetermined game state in which the control state of the auxiliary means is a first control state that does not correspond to the specific game state (for example, the normal game state after the end of the b time saving game state), the predetermined specific period game ends When doing so, change the control state from the first control state to a second control state (b time-saving game state) corresponding to the specific game state,
As the probability that the result of the variable game becomes the predetermined result and the special game as the profit game is executed, a first probability and a second probability higher than the first probability are provided. ,
When the probability is one of the first probability and the second probability before execution of the game for the specific period, the probability is changed from the one probability based on the execution of the game for the specific period , a game machine characterized in that it is constructed such that the one of the first probability and the second probability is not changed to the other probability different from the other.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I1, the probability that the result of the variable game before the execution of the specific period game becomes the predetermined result and the special game as the profit game is executed is the first probability and is higher than the first probability. If the probability is one of the second probabilities, the other probability that is different from the one of the first probability and the second probability is obtained from the one probability based on the execution of the game for a specific period. It is configured so that the probability is not changed. That is, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I1, the probability that the result of the variation game will be the predetermined result is the same before and after the specific period game is executed. Thus, the probability that the result of the variable game will be the predetermined result is the same before and after the game for the specific period is executed, so that the probability is the second value that is advantageous to the player after the game for the specific period is finished. is prevented from being changed to the low probability first probability disadvantageous to the player, the player is prevented from being disadvantaged by the execution of the game for the specific period.

[Appendix A1]
A shooting means (32) capable of shooting a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (314, 315) provided in a game area where a game ball can flow down;
Display means (362, 363, 341) for variably displaying a predetermined pattern (normal pattern, special pattern) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry area;
variable ball entry means (316) provided in the game area and performing opening and closing operations a plurality of times;
A gaming machine comprising
Update means (41) for updating specific information (ceiling activation remaining counter) based on establishment of a predetermined update condition (execution of a special game) in the variable display;
In a specific game state (low-probability mode), a predetermined profit state (b time-saving game state) at a predetermined timing after the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (ceiling activation remaining counter = 0) Profit state generating means (41) to generate;
Notification control means (51) for performing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (gain display) or in a second notification mode (loss display) different from the first notification mode;
Determination means (41) for executing a predetermined determination (special figure jackpot lottery) based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry area;
When a predetermined game condition (V winning in a small winning game) is established based on a predetermined game operation by a player when the result of the predetermined determination executed by the determination means is a specific determination result. profit generation means (41) for generating a specific profit (jackpot game) in
with
The notification control means, when the result of the predetermined determination performed by the determination means is the result of the specific determination, is configured to perform the predetermined timing ( A switching means (51) for notifying that the specific determination result has been obtained in the first notification mode until the break-even point), and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing. A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A1, when the result of the predetermined determination is the specific determination result, the specific information updated by the updating means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined update condition in the variable display is the predetermined update. A specific determination result is notified in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing before a predetermined period of time before the state is reached, and the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing. In this way, the fact that the result of the predetermined determination becomes the specific determination result is notified in the first notification mode until the predetermined timing before the predetermined update state occurs, and the specific determination result is notified after the predetermined timing. By switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at the timing, whether the timing at which the predetermined determination result becomes the specific determination result is before reaching the predetermined timing or after reaching the specific timing. can be judged. As a result, the player can determine whether or not it is advantageous to receive a specific benefit based on the specific determination result, based on the type of notification mode in which the timing of the specific determination result can be determined. It can be determined whether or not a predetermined game condition is established. As a result, based on the type of notification mode in which the timing of the specific determination result can be determined, the player can establish a predetermined game condition for the current specific determination result to receive a specific profit, or receive a specific profit. For the specific judgment result after the specified game condition is not established and the specified profit is not received for the specified determination result, and the specified information is updated to the specified state later and the specified profit state occurs Since it is possible to select whether or not to receive a specific profit by establishing a predetermined game condition by pressing, it is possible to receive a specific profit at a timing judged to be advantageous by the player himself/herself. Therefore, since the player can avoid receiving a specific profit when it is judged that receiving a specific profit is disadvantageous, the player can receive a specific profit at the timing when it is judged to be disadvantageous to him/herself. A decrease in interest and amusement in a game due to putting away is prevented.

[Appendix B1]
A shooting means (32) capable of shooting a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (314, 315) provided in a game area where a game ball can flow down;
Display means (362, 363, 341) for variably displaying a predetermined pattern (normal pattern, special pattern) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry area;
variable ball entry means (316) provided in the game area and performing opening and closing operations a plurality of times;
A gaming machine comprising
Update means (41) for updating specific information (ceiling activation remaining counter) based on establishment of a predetermined update condition (execution of a special game) in the variable display;
In a specific game state (low-probability mode), a predetermined profit state (b time-saving game state) at a predetermined timing after the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (ceiling activation remaining counter = 0) Profit state generating means (41) to generate;
Notification control means (51) for performing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (gain display) or in a second notification mode (loss display) different from the first notification mode;
Determination means (41) for executing a predetermined determination (special figure jackpot lottery) based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry area;
When a predetermined game condition (V winning in a small winning game) is established based on a predetermined game operation by a player when the result of the predetermined determination executed by the determination means is a specific determination result. profit generation means (41) for generating a specific profit (jackpot game) in
with
The notification control means, when the result of the predetermined determination performed by the determination means is the result of the specific determination, is configured to perform the predetermined timing ( A switching means (51) for notifying that the specific determination result has been obtained in the first notification mode until the break-even point), and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing. prepared,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for informing in a third informing mode between the predetermined timing and the specific timing.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B1, when the result of the predetermined determination is the specific determination result, the specific information updated by the updating means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined update condition in the variable display is the predetermined update. Until a predetermined timing, which is a predetermined period before the state, the specific determination result is notified in the first notification mode, and the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode at the specific timing after the predetermined timing, and It is notified by the third notification mode between the timing and the specific timing. In this way, the first notification mode is displayed until a predetermined timing, and the third notification mode is displayed between the predetermined timing and the specific timing. It is possible to determine whether or not to receive a specific profit by establishing a predetermined game condition with respect to the result, in three types of periods. Specifically, the notification timing of the first notification mode (period until the predetermined timing), the notification timing of the third notification mode (period between the predetermined timing and the specific timing), the notification timing of the second notification mode (specific timing during the following period), based on the type of notification mode in which the timing of the specific judgment result can be determined, establish a predetermined game condition for this specific judgment result to receive a specific profit, or For the specific judgment result after the specified profit is not received due to the fact that the specified game condition is not established for the specified determination result, and the specified information is updated in a specified state later, and the specified profit condition is generated. It is possible to judge whether or not to receive a specific profit by establishing a predetermined game condition.

Here, a case where a predetermined game condition is satisfied for a specific determination result and a specific profit is received, and a case where a specific profit is not received because the predetermined game condition is not satisfied for a specific determination result and a specific profit is not received and a specified profit is obtained later. It is advantageous for the player to obtain a specific profit by establishing a predetermined game condition for a specific judgment result after the information has reached a predetermined update state and a predetermined profit state has occurred. Whether or not depends on the timing of the specific determination result, but the borderline of which is advantageous is not uniformly determined, and may change depending on the game situation. For example, the difference in the ball entry rate to the start ball entry area based on the difference in the launch intensity of the game ball in the game area, the stability of the launch intensity of the game ball derived from the game machine, the number of game nails driven into the game area It can change depending on various factors such as the degree of deterioration over time and the presence or absence of so-called stopping shots aimed at shooting useless game balls. Therefore, by notifying that the result of the predetermined determination has become the specific determination result in the third notification mode before switching from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, variations in the borderline can be prevented. Corresponding players can be selected. As a result, when the result of the predetermined determination becomes the specific determination result at the timing near the assumed borderline, the player can enter the starting ball entry area until the result of the predetermined determination becomes the specific determination result. It is possible to determine whether or not it is advantageous to receive a specific profit by establishing a predetermined game condition in consideration of the game situation such as the ball entry rate.

Further, when the notification is made in the first notification mode by notifying in the third notification mode between the predetermined timing and the specific timing near the borderline, the specific determination is made because the vicinity of the borderline has not been reached. While it is clarified that it is advantageous to establish a predetermined game condition for the result and receive a specific profit, when notified in the second notification mode, a predetermined After the specified profit is not received without establishing the game condition, and the specified game condition is established with respect to the specified determination result after the specified information becomes a specified update state and the specified profit state occurs later. to receive a particular benefit. As a result, the player can easily determine whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player to satisfy the predetermined game condition when notified by the first notification mode or the second notification mode. You will definitely be able to receive benefits that are advantageous to you.

[Appendix C1]
A shooting means (32) capable of shooting a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (314, 315) provided in a game area where a game ball can flow down;
Display means (362, 363, 341) for variably displaying a predetermined pattern (normal pattern, special pattern) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry area;
variable ball entry means (316) provided in the game area and performing opening and closing operations a plurality of times;
A gaming machine comprising
Update means (41) for updating specific information (ceiling activation remaining counter) based on establishment of a predetermined update condition (execution of a special game) in the variable display;
In a specific game state (low-probability mode), a predetermined profit state (b time-saving game state) at a predetermined timing after the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (ceiling activation remaining counter = 0) Profit state generating means (41) to generate;
Notification control means (51) for performing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (gain display) or in a second notification mode (loss display) different from the first notification mode;
Determination means (41) for executing a predetermined determination (special figure jackpot lottery) based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry area;
When a predetermined game condition (V winning in a small winning game) is established based on a predetermined game operation by a player when the result of the predetermined determination executed by the determination means is a specific determination result. profit generation means (41) for generating a specific profit (jackpot game) in
with
The notification control means, when the result of the predetermined determination performed by the determination means is the result of the specific determination, is configured to perform the predetermined timing ( A switching means (51) for notifying that the specific determination result has been obtained in the first notification mode until the break-even point), and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing. prepared,
A means for notifying in a third notification mode between the predetermined timing and the specific timing,
A gaming machine, wherein the third notification mode is a mode in which the display is switched between the first notification mode and the second notification mode.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C1, when the result of the predetermined determination is the specific determination result, the specific information updated by the updating means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined update condition in the variable display is the predetermined update. Until a predetermined timing, which is a predetermined period before the state, the specific determination result is notified in the first notification mode, and the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode at the specific timing after the predetermined timing, and It is notified by the third notification mode between the timing and the specific timing. In this way, the first notification mode is displayed until a predetermined timing, and the third notification mode is displayed between the predetermined timing and the specific timing. It is possible to determine whether or not to receive a specific profit by establishing a predetermined game condition with respect to the result, in three types of periods. Specifically, the notification timing of the first notification mode (period until the predetermined timing), the notification timing of the third notification mode (period between the predetermined timing and the specific timing), the notification timing of the second notification mode (specific timing during the following period), based on the type of notification mode in which the timing of the specific judgment result can be determined, establish a predetermined game condition for this specific judgment result to receive a specific profit, or For the specific judgment result after the specified profit is not received due to the fact that the specified game condition is not established for the specified determination result, and the specified information is updated in a specified state later, and the specified profit condition is generated. It is possible to judge whether or not to receive a specific profit by establishing a predetermined game condition.

Here, a case where a predetermined game condition is satisfied for a specific determination result and a specific profit is received, and a case where a specific profit is not received because the predetermined game condition is not satisfied for a specific determination result and a specific profit is not received and a specified profit is obtained later. It is advantageous for the player to obtain a specific profit by establishing a predetermined game condition for a specific judgment result after the information has reached a predetermined update state and a predetermined profit state has occurred. Whether or not depends on the timing of the specific determination result, but the borderline of which is advantageous is not uniformly determined, and may change depending on the game situation. For example, the difference in the ball entry rate to the start ball entry area based on the difference in the launch intensity of the game ball in the game area, the stability of the launch intensity of the game ball derived from the game machine, the number of game nails driven into the game area It can change depending on various factors such as the degree of deterioration over time and the presence or absence of so-called stopping shots aimed at shooting useless game balls. Therefore, by notifying that the result of the predetermined determination has become the specific determination result in the third notification mode before switching from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, variations in the borderline can be prevented. Corresponding players can be selected. As a result, when the result of the predetermined determination becomes the specific determination result at the timing near the assumed borderline, the player can enter the starting ball entry area until the result of the predetermined determination becomes the specific determination result. It is possible to determine whether or not it is advantageous to receive a specific profit by establishing a predetermined game condition in consideration of the game situation such as the ball entry rate.

In particular, when the timing at which the predetermined determination result becomes the specific determination result is between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, the first notification mode and the second notification mode are switched and notified as the third notification mode. This makes it possible to clarify that there is a benefit situation corresponding to the first notification mode and a benefit situation corresponding to the second notification mode. Therefore, it is possible to receive the benefit based on the specific determination result, or to receive the benefit based on the specific information being in a predetermined update state without receiving the benefit based on the specific determination result. It becomes possible for the player to grasp more reliably that the situation is such that it is difficult to determine whether it is advantageous.

Further, when the notification is made in the first notification mode by notifying in the third notification mode between the predetermined timing and the specific timing near the borderline, the specific determination is made because the vicinity of the borderline has not been reached. While it is clarified that it is advantageous to establish a predetermined game condition for the result and receive a specific profit, when notified in the second notification mode, a predetermined After the specified profit is not received without establishing the game condition, and the specified game condition is established with respect to the specified determination result after the specified information becomes a specified update state and the specified profit state occurs later. to receive a particular benefit. As a result, the player can easily determine whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player to satisfy the predetermined game condition when notified by the first notification mode or the second notification mode. You will definitely be able to receive benefits that are advantageous to you.

[Appendix D1]
A shooting means (32) capable of shooting a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (314, 315) provided in a game area where a game ball can flow down;
Display means (362, 363, 341) for variably displaying a predetermined pattern (normal pattern, special pattern) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry area;
variable ball entry means (316) provided in the game area and performing opening and closing operations a plurality of times;
A gaming machine comprising
Update means (41) for updating specific information (ceiling activation remaining counter) based on establishment of a predetermined update condition (execution of a special game) in the variable display;
In a specific game state (low-probability mode), a predetermined profit state (b time-saving game state) at a predetermined timing after the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (ceiling activation remaining counter = 0) Profit state generating means (41) to generate;
Notification control means (51) for performing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (gain display) or in a second notification mode (loss display) different from the first notification mode;
Determination means (41) for executing a predetermined determination (special figure jackpot lottery) based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry area;
When a predetermined game condition (V winning in a small winning game) is established based on a predetermined game operation by a player when the result of the predetermined determination executed by the determination means is a specific determination result. profit generation means (41) for generating a specific profit (jackpot game) in
with
The notification control means, when the result of the predetermined determination performed by the determination means is the result of the specific determination, is configured to perform the predetermined timing ( A switching means (51) for notifying that the specific determination result has been obtained in the first notification mode until the break-even point), and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing. prepared,
A means for notifying in a third notification mode between the predetermined timing and the specific timing,
A game machine characterized in that the third notification mode is a mode in which a specific movable object (39) is moved so as to overlap the display surface of the display means.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D1, when the result of the predetermined determination is the specific determination result, the specific information updated by the updating means based on the establishment of the predetermined update condition in the variable display is the predetermined update. Until a predetermined timing, which is a predetermined period before the state, the specific determination result is notified in the first notification mode, and the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode at the specific timing after the predetermined timing, and It is notified by the third notification mode between the timing and the specific timing. In this way, the first notification mode is displayed until a predetermined timing, and the third notification mode is displayed between the predetermined timing and the specific timing. It is possible to determine whether or not to receive a specific profit by establishing a predetermined game condition with respect to the result, in three types of periods. Specifically, the notification timing of the first notification mode (period until the predetermined timing), the notification timing of the third notification mode (period between the predetermined timing and the specific timing), the notification timing of the second notification mode (specific timing during the following period), based on the type of notification mode in which the timing of the specific judgment result can be determined, establish a predetermined game condition for this specific judgment result to receive a specific profit, or For the specific judgment result after the specified profit is not received due to the fact that the specified game condition is not established for the specified determination result, and the specified information is updated in a specified state later, and the specified profit condition is generated. It is possible to judge whether or not to receive a specific profit by establishing a predetermined game condition.

Here, a case where a predetermined game condition is satisfied for a specific determination result and a specific profit is received, and a case where a specific profit is not received because the predetermined game condition is not satisfied for a specific determination result and a specific profit is not received and a specified profit is obtained later. It is advantageous for the player to obtain a specific profit by establishing a predetermined game condition for a specific judgment result after the information has reached a predetermined update state and a predetermined profit state has occurred. Whether or not depends on the timing of the specific determination result, but the borderline of which is advantageous is not uniformly determined, and may change depending on the game situation. For example, the difference in the ball entry rate to the start ball entry area based on the difference in the launch intensity of the game ball in the game area, the stability of the launch intensity of the game ball derived from the game machine, the number of game nails driven into the game area It can change depending on various factors such as the degree of deterioration over time and the presence or absence of so-called stopping shots aimed at shooting useless game balls. Therefore, by notifying that the result of the predetermined determination has become the specific determination result in the third notification mode before switching from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, variations in the borderline can be prevented. Corresponding players can be selected. As a result, when the result of the predetermined determination becomes the specific determination result at the timing near the assumed borderline, the player can enter the starting ball entry area until the result of the predetermined determination becomes the specific determination result. It is possible to determine whether or not it is advantageous to receive a specific profit by establishing a predetermined game condition in consideration of the game situation such as the ball entry rate.

In particular, when the timing at which the predetermined determination result becomes the specific determination result is between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, the specific movable object can be moved so as to overlap the display surface of the display means as the third notification mode. By doing so, it becomes possible to clarify that it is between the benefit situation corresponding to the first notification mode and the benefit situation corresponding to the second notification mode by the movement of the movable object. Therefore, it is possible to receive the benefit based on the specific determination result, or to receive the benefit based on the specific information being in a predetermined update state without receiving the benefit based on the specific determination result. It becomes possible for the player to grasp more reliably that the situation is such that it is difficult to determine whether it is advantageous.

Further, when the notification is made in the first notification mode by notifying in the third notification mode between the predetermined timing and the specific timing near the borderline, the specific determination is made because the vicinity of the borderline has not been reached. While it is clarified that it is advantageous to establish a predetermined game condition for the result and receive a specific profit, when notified in the second notification mode, a predetermined After the specified profit is not received without establishing the game condition, and the specified game condition is established with respect to the specified determination result after the specified information becomes a specified update state and the specified profit state occurs later. to receive a particular benefit. As a result, the player can easily determine whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player to satisfy the predetermined game condition when notified by the first notification mode or the second notification mode. You will definitely be able to receive benefits that are advantageous to you.

[Appendix E1]
A shooting means (32) capable of shooting a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (314, 315) provided in a game area where a game ball can flow down;
Display means (362, 363, 341) for variably displaying a predetermined pattern (normal pattern, special pattern) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry area;
variable ball entry means (316) provided in the game area and performing opening and closing operations a plurality of times;
A gaming machine comprising
Update means (41) for updating specific information (ceiling activation remaining counter) based on establishment of a predetermined update condition (execution of a special game) in the variable display;
In a specific game state (low-probability mode), a predetermined profit state (b time-saving game state) at a predetermined timing after the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (ceiling activation remaining counter = 0) Profit state generating means (41) to generate;
Notification control means (51) for performing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (gain display) or in a second notification mode (loss display) different from the first notification mode;
Determination means (41) for executing a predetermined determination (special figure jackpot lottery) based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry area;
When a predetermined game condition (V winning in a small winning game) is established based on a predetermined game operation by a player when the result of the predetermined determination executed by the determination means is a specific determination result. profit generation means (41) for generating a specific profit (jackpot game) in
with
The notification control means, when the result of the predetermined determination performed by the determination means is the result of the specific determination, is configured to perform the predetermined timing ( A switching means (51) for notifying that the specific determination result has been obtained in the first notification mode until the break-even point), and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing. prepared,
When the second notification mode is displayed when the result of the predetermined determination executed by the determination means is the specific determination result, the predetermined symbol is newly displayed without generating the specific benefit. A game machine capable of executing a variable display.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E1, when the result of the predetermined determination is the specific determination result and the display is performed in the second notification mode, a new variable display of the predetermined symbols is executed without generating a specific profit. It is possible. In this way, when the result of the predetermined determination is the specific determination result, and the display is performed in the second notification mode, it is possible to execute a new variable display of the predetermined symbols without generating a specific profit. When the result of the predetermined determination is the result of the specific determination, if the predetermined game condition is not established, the specific information can be updated based on the establishment of the update condition in the variable display. . As a result, by not establishing a predetermined game condition when a predetermined determination result is a specific determination result, it is possible to continue updating the specific information and bring the specific information into a predetermined update state. As a result, the predetermined game condition is not established for the specific determination result, and the specific profit is not received. Since it is possible to receive a specific profit by establishing a predetermined game condition for , the player intentionally avoids receiving a specific profit at a timing that is judged to be disadvantageous to the player, To prevent a decrease in interest and amusement in a game caused by receiving a specific profit at an unintended timing.

[Appendix F1]
A shooting means (32) capable of shooting a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (314, 315) provided in a game area where a game ball can flow down;
Display means (362, 363, 341) for variably displaying a predetermined pattern (normal pattern, special pattern) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry area;
variable ball entry means (316) provided in the game area and performing opening and closing operations a plurality of times;
A gaming machine comprising
Update means (41) for updating specific information (ceiling activation remaining counter) based on establishment of a predetermined update condition (execution of a special game) in the variable display;
In a specific game state (low-probability mode), a predetermined profit state (b time-saving game state) at a predetermined timing after the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (ceiling activation remaining counter = 0) Profit state generating means (41) to generate;
Notification control means (51) for performing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (gain display) or in a second notification mode (loss display) different from the first notification mode;
Determination means (41) for executing a predetermined determination (special figure jackpot lottery) based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry area;
When a predetermined game condition (V winning in a small winning game) is established based on a predetermined game operation by a player when the result of the predetermined determination executed by the determination means is a specific determination result. profit generation means (41) for generating a specific profit (jackpot game) in
with
The notification control means, when the result of the predetermined determination performed by the determination means is the result of the specific determination, is configured to perform the predetermined timing ( A switching means (51) for notifying that the specific determination result has been obtained in the first notification mode until the break-even point), and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing. prepared,
The gaming machine is characterized in that a special effect is executed during the variable display of the predetermined symbols between the predetermined timing and the specific timing.

Here, as described above, when the result of a predetermined determination is a specific determination result, when a predetermined game condition is established for the specific determination result to receive a specific profit, and when the specific determination result is received A specified profit is not received without establishing a prescribed game condition, and a prescribed game condition is established with respect to a specific determination result after a prescribed profit state occurs after the specified information is in a prescribed updated state. Whether it is advantageous for the player to receive a specific benefit from the player's ability depends on the timing of the specific determination result, but the borderline of which is advantageous is uniformly determined. Instead, it can change depending on the game situation. On the other hand, if the result of the predetermined determination is a specific determination result, the period during which the predetermined gaming conditions for generating the specific profit can be established is restricted due to the timing of generating the specific profit. is imposed. Therefore, when the predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode or the second notification mode when the result of the predetermined determination is the specific determination result, the notification time is also restricted. As a result, the player has no choice but to determine whether or not the predetermined game condition is satisfied in a relatively short time after the predetermined notification is started in the first notification mode or the second notification mode. Mistakes are likely to occur, and you may end up in a disadvantageous situation against your will.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix F1, when the result of the predetermined determination is the specific determination result, the specific information updated by the updating means based on the satisfaction of the update condition in the variable display is updated by the predetermined update. A special performance is executed during the variable display of a predetermined pattern between a predetermined timing before a predetermined period of time and a specific timing after the predetermined timing. That is, between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, even if the result of the predetermined determination is not the specific determination result, the special effect is executed during the variable display of the predetermined symbols. Therefore, during the variable display of the predetermined pattern, which is the timing when the result of the predetermined determination does not become the result of the specific determination, it is possible to execute the predetermined notification by a special effect instead of the first notification mode or the second notification mode. be possible. In other words, by performing a predetermined notification by executing a special effect during the variable display of the predetermined symbols, the player can grasp the current situation before the result of the predetermined determination becomes the specific determination result. . Therefore, the player can determine whether or not to establish a predetermined game condition when the result of a predetermined determination is a specific determination result based on the special effect during the variable display of the predetermined symbols, that is, the specific determination result. On the other hand, if a predetermined game condition is satisfied and a specific profit is received, or if the predetermined game condition is not satisfied in response to a specific determination result, the specific profit is not received, and the specific information is later updated in a predetermined state. It is possible to determine in advance whether to establish a predetermined game condition and receive a specific profit with respect to a specific determination result after a predetermined profit state is generated. As a result, when the result of the predetermined determination becomes the specific determination result, it becomes difficult for the user to make an error in determination, and it is possible to prevent the user from being put in a disadvantageous situation against his/her will.

[Appendix G1]
A shooting means (32) capable of shooting a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (314, 315) provided in a game area where a game ball can flow down;
Display means (362, 363, 341) for variably displaying a predetermined pattern (normal pattern, special pattern) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry area;
variable ball entry means (316) provided in the game area and performing opening and closing operations a plurality of times;
A gaming machine comprising
Update means (41) for updating specific information (ceiling activation remaining counter) based on establishment of a predetermined update condition (execution of a special game) in the variable display;
In a specific game state (low-probability mode), a predetermined profit state (b time-saving game state) at a predetermined timing after the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (ceiling activation remaining counter = 0) Profit state generating means (41) to generate;
Notification control means (51) for performing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (gain display) or in a second notification mode (loss display) different from the first notification mode;
Determination means (41) for executing a predetermined determination (special figure jackpot lottery) based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry area;
When a predetermined game condition (V winning in a small winning game) is established based on a predetermined game operation by a player when the result of the predetermined determination executed by the determination means is a specific determination result. profit generation means (41) for generating a specific profit (jackpot game) in
with
The notification control means, when the result of the predetermined determination performed by the determination means is the result of the specific determination, is configured to perform the predetermined timing ( A switching means (51) for notifying that the specific determination result has been obtained in the first notification mode until the break-even point), and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing. prepared,
A gaming machine characterized in that after the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode by the switching means (51), the switching to the first notification mode is not performed at least until the specific profit is generated.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G1, after the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode at a specific timing later than a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the specific information enters a predetermined update state, at least a specific profit is obtained. is not switched to the first notification mode until is generated. Here, for example, if a specific profit is not received without establishing a predetermined game condition, and later the specific information is in a predetermined update state and a predetermined profit state occurs, a predetermined When it is advantageous for the player to receive a specific profit by establishing a game condition, a predetermined notification is made in a first notification mode, and a specific profit is obtained by establishing a predetermined game condition for a specific determination result. When performing predetermined notification in the second notification mode when it is advantageous for the player to receive it, when the predetermined notification is performed in the first notification mode after the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode at a specific timing That is, if a notification mode that is advantageous to the player is switched to a notification mode that is disadvantageous to the player, the player may be confused. Since it may induce the player to make a mistake in judgment that the above is not established, the player's profit cannot be secured sufficiently. On the other hand, after the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode at the specific timing, the player is advantageous in that the switching to the first notification mode does not occur until at least a specific profit is generated. Since the fact can be continuously grasped until a specific profit is received, the player is not confused and is prevented from receiving an unexpected disadvantage.

[Appendix H1]
A shooting means (32) capable of shooting a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (314, 315) provided in a game area where a game ball can flow down;
Display means (362, 363, 341) for variably displaying a predetermined pattern (normal pattern, special pattern) when a game ball enters the starting ball entry area;
variable ball entry means (316) provided in the game area and performing opening and closing operations a plurality of times;
A gaming machine comprising
Update means (41) for updating specific information (ceiling activation remaining counter) based on establishment of a predetermined update condition (execution of a special game) in the variable display;
In a specific game state (low-probability mode), a predetermined profit state (b time-saving game state) at a predetermined timing after the specific information has reached a predetermined update state (ceiling activation remaining counter = 0) Profit state generating means (41) to generate;
Notification control means (51) for performing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (gain display) or in a second notification mode (loss display) different from the first notification mode;
Determination means (41) for executing a predetermined determination (special figure jackpot lottery) based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry area;
When a predetermined game condition (V winning in a small winning game) is established based on a predetermined game operation by a player when the result of the predetermined determination executed by the determination means is a specific determination result. profit generation means (41) for generating a specific profit (jackpot game) in
with
The notification control means, when the result of the predetermined determination performed by the determination means is the result of the specific determination, is configured to perform the predetermined timing ( A switching means (51) for notifying that the specific determination result has been obtained in the first notification mode until the break-even point), and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing. prepared,
The number of updates (initial value of the ceiling activation remaining number counter) until the specific information reaches the predetermined update state is determined by lottery from a plurality of number of updates. game machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H1, the update count until the specific information reaches a predetermined update state is determined by lottery from a plurality of update counts. In this way, the number of updates until the specific information reaches a predetermined update state is determined by lottery from among a plurality of update counts, and the timing at which a predetermined profit state is generated is determined. cease to be uniform. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the number of updates until the specific information reaches a predetermined update state. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the number of times the specific information has been updated has been cleared, for example, whether or not the gaming hall side has cleared the RAM of the gaming machine or changed the setting value that defines the probability of a big win. It is possible to prevent the operation rate of the game machine from being lowered due to the player's grasp of whether or not the RAM has been cleared or the setting value has been changed. In addition, by making it difficult for the player to grasp the number of updates until the specific information reaches a predetermined update state, it is aimed at a gaming machine with a small number of times that predetermined symbols are displayed variably in order to generate a predetermined profit state. In addition, it is suppressed from becoming a target of so-called hyena behavior. In addition, since it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the number of updates until the specific information reaches the predetermined update state, the predetermined notification when the result of the predetermined determination becomes the specific determination result is changed to the second notification mode. It becomes difficult to know when to switch. Therefore, when the result of the predetermined determination becomes the specific determination result, the progress of the game can be enjoyed while expecting that the predetermined notification will be switched to the second notification mode, so that the interest and interest in the game can be enhanced. be improved.

10: Gaming Machine 31: Game Board 314: First Winning Port 315: Second Winning Port 316: Variable Winning Ports 317L, 317R: Through Gate 341: Symbol Display Unit 4: Main Control Unit 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: RAM
5: Audio lamp controller 51: MPU
511: ROM
512: RAM

Claims (1)

a launching means capable of launching a game ball;
A starting ball entry area provided in a game area where game balls can flow down;
display means for variably displaying a predetermined pattern when a game ball enters the starting ball entry area;
variable ball entry means provided in the game area and performing opening and closing operations a plurality of times;
A gaming machine comprising
updating means for updating specific information based on establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display;
profit state generation means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information has reached a predetermined update state in a specific game state;
Notification control means for performing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or in a second notification mode different from the first notification mode;
Determination means for executing a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
Profit generating to generate a specific profit when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by a player when the result of the predetermined determination executed by the determination means is a specific determination result. means and
with
The notification control means, when the result of the predetermined determination executed by the determination means is the result of the specific determination, until a predetermined timing before a predetermined period of time before the specific information enters the predetermined update state. is provided with switching means for notifying that the specific determination result has been obtained in the first notification mode, and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing. machine.

Images